(1) The CIA, Fort Knox, and the poisoning of America

(2) How the Rockefeller brothers are preparing to sacrifice New York City to trigger general economic collapse

(3) The continuing buildup to a new United States constitution and war in Asia

(1) The Ford depression, Asian war, and the impending doom of the OPEC nations

(2) Fort Knox plutonium and our sellout by Congress

(3) Gerald Ford's last days as president

(1) How political control produces cover-ups and paralysis instead of truth and action

(2) How economic control produces deepening artificial depression and monetary chaos instead of real prosperity

(3) How the alliance between Rockefeller corporate socialism and Soviet state socialism is taking us into nuclear war

(1) Our charges for a citizen's indictment on the Fort Knox twin scandal/cover-up

(2) Rockefeller progress and problems in their drive to drag our economy down to the Soviet level

(3) So-called detente, and the ignored prophetic warnings of George Washington

(1) How you are a target in the secret Rockefeller takeover of the United States Postal Service

(2) How the coming wars will affect you and your family

(3) How you are to be a pawn in the game to make Nelson Rockefeller our first dictator

10

(1) World government and the destruction of family life

(2) World monetary chaos and the coming crash here in America

(3) World War III and the planned declaration of national emergency

11

(1) How individuals are being reduced to sacrificial pawns in the Rockefeller program to protect and advance their own interests

(2) How nations are being maneuvered into war and destruction as part of the Rockefeller scheme of progress

(3) How we are being pushed and tricked into discarding our heritage of freedom to accept Rockefeller dictatorship

12

(1) Enslavement through monopoly and the destruction of competitive free enterprise

(2) Enslavement through inflation and the destruction of an economy

(3) The commitment to enslavement through one-world government and nuclear destruction

13

(1) Conspiracy for economic destruction

(2) Conspiracy for political destruction

(3) Conspiracy to achieve destruction of human lives

14

(1) The Soviet Missile Crisis of 1976

(2) Hitler's pattern for America's bicentennial era

(3) The plans for America's future under occupation and dictatorship

15

(1) The Rockefeller sellout of America to the Soviet Union

(2) The Soviet strategy for surprise naval attack in Nuclear War I

(3) The world-wide locations of Soviet underwater missiles and bombs

16

(1) The August Missile Crisis of 1976

(2) The United States intelligence gap and a new round of Soviet underwater missiles

(3) The undeclared submarine war now underway

1

2 3

Red Friday and the campaign to destroy General George S. Brown The swine flu cover-up for chemical warfare now underway The phantom election of 1976

32

(1

Cosmospheres, cosmostrategy, and the ignored warnings of General

Thomas Power

Soviet preparations to invade the United States How events are converging toward nuclear holocaust

Inflation, gold, and the stock market bear trap Korean Airlines Flight 902: the flying Lusitania The twilight of the United States republic

The Battle of Midway repeated in space

Earthquakes, weather control, and hunger in America

The public confession of Dr. Beter

The breakdown and disintegration of Western Civilization

The kamikaze plans of America's secret rulers

The Kremlin plans for the Interplanetary Russian Empire

The legacy of the late John D. Rockefeller III The new American strategy for a first strike The aftermath of Nuclear War I

The Middle East road to an American first strike Russian-Asian counter-strategy for a first strike The era of the American refugee

Russia's holy war to wipe out Bolshevism Russia's blueprint for domination of the earth Russia's program to launch mankind into space

Russia's hot pursuit of her Bolshevik enemies America's panic rearmament leading to national suicide The public signs of war to come

The military purpose of the Jonestown tragedy The Battle of Guyana—Thanksgiving Day, 1978 The opening scenes of Nuclear War I

The economic countdown toward Nuclear War I Spiritual warfare and the collapse of trust Bolshevik maneuvering to buy time to rearm

The decline of the House of Rockefeller The Bolshevik plot for a Pope's Revolution UFOs, IFOs, and Russia's master secret weapon

The mysterious disappearance of Dr. Henry Kissinger The plundering of the Rockefeller family empire Our last chance to save Western Civilization

The hoax reappearance of Dr. Henry Kissinger

The impending collapse of the Chase Manhattan Bank

The Egyptian-Israeli Treaty for nuclear war

The domestic Guyana at Three Mile Island The secret intelligence war of doubles Last call for a Pilgrimage for Peace

Nelson Rockefeller's revenge from the grave The cosmosphere shuttles to prevent nuclear war The modern rebirth of the Holy Alliance

The scientific background of the Russian robotoids The Russian strategy to dismantle Bolshevik power The shifting currents between war and peace

The final chapter in The Great Skylab Cover-Up The secret war of the walking dead

(3

How America will relearn the fear of God

(1) Russia's transformation of America's Middle East policy

(2) The domestic fallout of the Andrew Young affair

(3) Russia's two-front war against Rothschild world power

(1) Runaway inflation and the collapsing American economy

(2) The Cuban Crisis to destroy SALT II

(3) The thousand-year war between Russia and the Khazars

(1) The crash of the United States dollar

(2) The Russian program to sell SALT II

(3) The surprise Bolshevik deployment of synthetic automatons

(1) Strategic Iran and the Islamic Khomeini Revolution

(2) The Bolshevik Iran strategy for thermonuclear war

(3) American hostages and the Battle of Tehran

(1) War tensions and the late Shah of Iran

(2) The surprise takeover by the Kremlin hardliners

(3) The nuclear strike operations now in progress

(1) The secret American defeat of January, 1980

(2) Weather modification as a weapon of retaliation

(3) Russia's accelerating preparations to survive nuclear war

(1) The public signs of nuclear war fever

(2) Multiplying disasters in the expanding secret war

(3) Battle to the death in the Kremlin

(1) Ian Fleming and the Fort Knox Gold Scandal

(2) Narrowing options in the Bolshevik plan for nuclear war

(3) Step One in what you can do

(1) America's nuclear first strike plans in the news

(2) Hurricane Allen and Russia's expanding weather warfare

(3) Step Two in what you can do

(1) American gold and the Iraq-Iran War

(2) Russia's first strike against a Titan II missile

(3) Step Three in what you can do

(1) The Iran hostage-release plan for war

(2) Senator William Proxmire and Action Step Four

(3) Action Step Five on a new battle front

(1) The Great Election Surprise of 1980

(2) The planned collapse of America's banking system

(3) The new age of warfare by stealth

(1) The legal sabotage of the Reagan transition

(2) The forfeited opportunity of Senator William Proxmire

(3) The golden swindle of the Federal Reserve Banks

(1) The secret military mission of the Space Shuttle Columbia

(2) The new ferment of growing war tensions

(3) Gold swindles by the modern-day moneychangers

(1) First-strike planning by America and Russia

(2) The economic road to dictatorship in America

(3) Your decision to flee or to fight

[1) The advance preparations for the Space Shuttle mission

[2) The aborted flight of the Space Shuttle Columbia

[3) The NASA cover-up of the Columbia disaster

!1) The Pope, the President, and assassination politics

(2) The aftermath of the Shuttle Columbia disaster

[3) Mounting world crises and accidental nuclear war

66

67

68

[1) The Israeli practice raid for nuclear Armageddon

[2) America's launch-on-warning plan for nuclear suicide

[3) What you can do during America's final days

[1) The unexpected rebirth of an American gold standard

[2) The emergence of the Jewish Question in America

[3) The Libyan dogfight and hidden naval war games

[1) The Reagan-Begin Axis and expanding world crises

[2) Deliberate delays in the Space Shuttle launch

[3) The Reagan Budget and corrupt economic plans

69

[1) The Sadat assassination for Nuclear War I

[2) The Reagan Administration program to Polandize America

[3) The MX decision and America's first-strike posture

70

71

72

73

[1) The Christmas Crises for Nuclear War I

[2) The American Space Shuttle Failure Number Two

[3) A new scandal over America's disappearing gold

!1) The Siberian Express and renewed Russian geophysical warfare

(2) Russia's secret economic coup in dollar assets

[3) The shifting alliances for Nuclear War I

!1) Nuclear war fever and expanding secret warfare

(2) The third Space Shuttle challenge to Russia

;3) The shortening timetable for Nuclear War I

!1) The new Phantom war planes of the United States

(2) Project Z—the three-phase strategy for Nuclear War I

[3) The first military success of the Space Shuttle

74

75

[1) The military secret of South Georgia Island

[2) The secret naval war of the Southern Hemisphere

[3) The Rockefeller fear campaign against nuclear war

[1) The Pentagon countdown toward Nuclear War I

[2) The economic attack on the United States Constitution

[3) Billy Graham vs. the Bolshevik war lobby

76

77

78

79

80

[1) The collapse of the Haig anti-war coup de etat

[2) The final crises to ignite nuclear war

[3) The final Space Shuttle mission for war

[1) The growing momentum toward Nuclear War I

[2) America's domestic shift onto a war footing

[3) The rising pitch of Russian anti-war warnings

;i) The surprise halt to the Beirut holocaust

(2) Final Pentagon plans for surprise nuclear war

[3) The Russian surprise weapon for nuclear defense

(1) The aborted plan for surprise nuclear war

(2) The Beirut Massacre for war to come

(3) The return of the Siberian Express weather war

[1) America's economic decline into a new Dark Ages

[2) War countdown toward the Israeli Year of Doom

[3) Changing of the guard in the new Kremlin

Introduction

The AUDIO LETTER cassette tape reports were recorded over a period from June, 1975, to November, 1982, by Dr. Peter Beter. Each AUDIO LETTER tape report is approximately one hour in length. The basic schedule of release was once a month, but the exact date of release each month was flexible to accommodate events. There were also two periods during which the AUDIO LETTER reports were suspended temporarily. The first, which extended from May to August 1977, separated AUDIO LETTER issues #24 and #25, and took place due to an action campaign by Dr. Beter with his listeners. The second suspension extended from February to June 1980, and separated issues #54 and #55. It was brought about by a major heart attack which Dr. Beter suffered while in the midst of recording AUDIO LETTER #54.

Dr. Beter terminated his AUDIO LETTER cassette tape report series in November, 1982, after recording AUDIO LETTER #80. Having fought heart-related ailments for years, his health was declining. After conferring with doctors, he decided that the time had come to discontinue recording the tapes.

The Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER series grew out of Dr. Beter's collaboration with supporters who first learned about Dr. Beter by way of radio talk shows in 1974. At that time Dr. Beter was in great demand to appear on talk shows nationwide, which he did in most cases by long-distance telephone hookup from his residence in suburban Washington, D.C. After many years as a highly successful Washington attorney, government official and international legal and financial consultant, Dr. Beter had become famous in 1973 as the author of a best-selling book, The Conspiracy Against the Dollar.

In his talk shows Dr. Beter had a habit of saying things which sounded preposterous at the time, but which were proven correct later on. Early in 1973 he declared that Vice President Spiro Agnew would be swept up in a sudden scandal beginning in late summer that would lead quickly to his resignation. At the time Agnew was flying high, and it sounded like an unlikely turn of events. But it happened, right on schedule. In the spring of 1974, Dr. Beter described a sequence of events by which the Watergate Scandal would make Richard Nixon the first U.S. President in history to resign. At the time, Watergate seemed to be running out of steam, and Nixon appeared to be "toughing it out." Even less believably, Dr. Beter described a secret agreement which he said existed by which then-Vice President Gerald Ford would nominate Nelson Rockefeller to be his new Vice President after Nixon resigned. In the spring of 1974 those things sounded hard to believe indeed. But they took place.

Dr. Beter claimed that events like these, while shocking to the public, were planned far in advance. He said that they were known within certain intelligence and even business circles here in America and abroad. Drawing upon his extensive contacts with these circles, Dr. Beter was making public what the privileged few already knew.

Having begun as skeptical listeners to Dr. Beter's radio appearances, a small group of private citizens became increasingly concerned as they saw Dr. Beter's revelations proven correct, time after time. They decided to investigate further, and finally contacted him. In September, 1974, Audio Books, Inc., was founded by these supporters of Dr. Beter to provide an avenue by which Dr. Beter could make his reports public without censorship or cutoff by those who controlled the radio waves. After several individual AUDIO BOOK(R) tapes, the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER series began in 1975.

About Dr. Beter [Note: born June 21, 1921; died March 14, 1987 (J.V.)]

Dr. Peter Beter (yes, it rhymes) first came to widespread popular attention in 1973, through his best-selling nonfiction book, The Conspiracy Against the Dollar (George Braziller, Inc., N.Y.). It was a gripping tale of international economic intrigue and monetary manipulation, carried out by the coordinated action of multinational corporations grown more powerful than many of their host countries. The objective: to deliberately undermine and ultimately destroy the

United States dollar, as a major tool of political and economic conquest under the banner of a "new imperialism." A crescendo of unhappy consequences were to be expected: an accelerating economic "stagflation" (a now-popular word coined years ago by Dr. Beter), deteriorating financial status of municipal and state governments, deepening social unrest, increasing tensions over the Panama Canal, and more. Events during the past decade have followed to an astonishing degree the blueprint which Dr. Beter revealed in his book.

In September 1974 Dr. Beter acquired a new distinction as "the man who opened Fort Knox." The previous April Dr. Beter had charged in congressional testimony that the legendary U.S. Bullion Depository at Fort Knox had been looted of America's monetary gold hoard allegedly stored there. He stood ready to present evidence and witnesses to substantiate his charges. But neither a grand jury nor a congressional inquiry into the matter materialized...so Dr. Beter then took his case directly to the public. Through lectures, radio talk shows, and publication of his charges in a tabloid newspaper (National Tattler), he was able to put such intense pressure on the federal government that a completely unprecedented step was taken in order to still the public outcry. The U.S. Treasury Department arranged a so-called "gold inspection" visit for a few Congressmen and 100 invited newsmen on September 23, 1974. Significantly, however, Dr. Beter himself was not among those invited... nor was any other outside expert on gold. The celebrated Fort Knox visit and the so-called "gold audit" which followed contained many irregularities which the Treasury Department has never explained.

In AUDIO LETTER tapes #14 and #15 (July and August 1976), Dr. Beter made public intelligence he had been given that the Soviet Union was planting short-range underwater missiles in U.S. territorial waters in preparation for a surprise nuclear attack. In issue #15 he listed navigational coordinates for 64 missiles which he said had been planted worldwide so far...urged his listeners to pressure the Joint Chiefs of Staff to take counteractive measures ... and in effect dared the government to prove him wrong. The resulting hue and cry from Dr. Beter's listeners nationwide created shock waves within the U.S. Government which were never reported by the major news media.

In mid-September 1976, Dr. Beter and an associate met for over an hour with General George S. Brown, Chairman of the U.S. Joint Chiefs of Staff, in Gen. Brown's Pentagon office. Only two weeks earlier, a letter over Gen. Brown's signature had been sent to Dr. Beter (with photocopies to concerned citizens nationwide), seeming to say that Dr. Beter's charges about Soviet underwater missiles had been investigated and found untrue. Yet when Dr. Beter then requested a meeting with Gen. Brown to relay to him the locations of a second round of 48 newly-planted missiles, the meeting was granted without delay. The Pentagon confirmed to the press that the meeting had taken place*, but never explained this curious sequence of events.

*See, e.g., Norfolk (Va.) Ledger-Star, Sept. 27, 1976, p. E8, article by G. Bradshaw and J. Kestner. Or see Chicago Tribune, Dec. 4, 1977, Section 2, "Special Report: Undersea Warfare."

Professional credentials: The things made public by Dr. Beter are extraordinary—but so is the professional background which preceded his public visibility. He practiced general law in Washington, D.C., from 1951 to 1961, becoming a member of the U.S. Court of Military Appeals in 1952 and the U.S. Supreme Court in 1964. Many of his cases were against the federal government, all of which he won—including one case in which he caught none other than the U.S. Department of Justice burning records in an attempt to defeat him. The resulting decision—Farley vs. U.S., 131 C. Cls. 776 (1955), 127 F Supp. 562—made new law.

In 1961 President John F. Kennedy appointed Dr. Beter Counsel to the U.S. Export-Import Bank, the largest government-owned bank in the Western world, where he served until 1967. After leaving the Ex-Im Bank, Dr. Beter became an international financial and legal consultant, as well as one of the chief developers of private international business in the Republic of Zaire. He is a member of the Judicature Society, the Bankers' Club of America, the Royal

Commonwealth Society of London, and the United States Naval Institute. He is listed in biographical reference works such as Who's Who in the East, the Blue Book of London, and 2000 Men of Achievement (London).

A Bird's-Eye View of the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER(R)

Excerpted from the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER(R) REFERENCE DIGEST

Copyright (C) Audio Books Inc., 1983

Some General Remarks

The 80 cassette tapes which make up the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER series contain an enormous amount of information. It would take the equivalent of two 40-hour work weeks just to listen to the entire 80-tape set once through.

In those two weeks the listener would see over seven years of major current events come to life in a unique way. He would see the unseen forces at work which make sense out of what otherwise seem to be chaotic, irrational news events. And he would learn many eye-opening historical background lessons which are little known, yet which are vital to understanding how we got where we are today.

Unfortunately, though, it would be like taking a drink from a fire hose. The listener would absorb a lot in a hurry—but also, a lot more would get by him.

At the opposite extreme, those who subscribed to the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER tapes had the advantage of absorbing each tape, one at a time, in context with then-current news events. But the tapes were released over a period of over seven years—from June 1975 through November 1982. It would be a rare intellect that could keep all the salient details of all the tapes in mind, meshing them together with each new tape, over all that time. Dr. Beter tried to alleviate this problem by summarizing past developments from time to time, but the basic problem remains. And when it comes to a review, even the long-time listener is faced with somewhat the same drink-from-a-fire-hose problem posed by the 80-tape collection.

For both the long-time subscriber and the newly acquainted listener, a roadmap is needed. That is the purpose of the Audio Letter REFERENCE DIGEST.

In this "Bird's-Eye View" section, we will try to boil down the broad insights of the 80-tape AUDIO LETTER report series as concisely as possible. We will keep details to a minimum, aside from examples to illustrate particular points. Given the broad outlines of this section, we believe that all the details in Section 2 and Section 3—not to mention in the tapes themselves—will be easier to grasp and far more meaningful than they would be if viewed in isolation.

In the long term, it is this broader picture of the basic forces behind current events which is the most important of all to understand. Even though some of the developments discussed in the tapes have run their course, the forces which brought them about continue to operate today. Comprehending how those forces led to yesterday's events is the key to seeing through countless new events today and tomorrow.

Politics: The Three Rival Factions for World Power

Decades ago Franklin D. Roosevelt said: "Nothing in politics ever happens by accident. If it happens, you can bet it was planned that way."

Decades earlier Benjamin Disraeli, famed as the Victorian-era Prime Minister

of Britain, wrote: "The world is governed by people far different from those imagined by the public."

Taken together, these two statements illustrate the basic premise which underlies all of the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER tape reports. This premise is that major events in politics, economics and international relations are the products of deliberate moves by largely unseen power factions in the world. All of these factions seek to increase their influence over us, the general population of the world. Each one also wishes to increase its own power at the expense of the other power factions.

Thus there is an ongoing power struggle of titanic dimensions which constantly shapes the news, yet which is little understood—indeed unsuspected—by most people. If these forces are not recognized or understood, current events are inherently baffling, no matter how diligently one may follow the news. This leaves even the best-educated and most intelligent of persons vulnerable to manipulation to suit the purposes of those who pull the strings behind the scenes. By contrast, if the largely unseen forces are known and understood, major events become far more understandable and even, to some extent, predictable. Those informed about these things become far less vulnerable and more difficult to fool by manipulated news and news events.

To choose just one of the many dramatic examples from the AUDIO LETTER series, consider the Guyana Massacre at Jonestown in November, 1978. From start to finish, the Guyana story was filled with anomalies, unanswered questions, conflicting government statements, and news reports that did not quite add up. It began with the slaughter of a U.S. Congressman and accompanying newsmen, yet there was never a subsequent congressional investigation. The victims died of cyanide poisoning, an excruciating death which leaves the face contorted in agony, yet the victims were found arranged in neat, peaceful-looking rows ... face-down. A few days after the massive infusion of American military teams supposedly for clean-up operations, there were sudden huge jumps in body-bag counts. Hurried explanations by Pentagon spokesmen were so incredible that they were withdrawn and replaced by different stories. These and many more oddities about the Guyana episode were never resolved, but simply left to fade away from the public memory with time. For those unaware of the behind-the-scenes forces at work in the world, Guyana will remain forever unexplained... as if events so bizarre, major and chilling can happen for no reason at all.

The key missing ingredient in all the news reports about Guyana was the existence of a secret Soviet intermediate-range missile base, not far from Jonestown. Dr. Beter had reported publicly about the base on many occasions for over four years prior to the sudden headlines from Guyana. He had also reported on the collapse of a cooperative arrangement formerly in effect between the true rulers of the United States and those of the Soviet Union. These were the factors which led directly to the Jonestown tragedy—a mass murder, staged as a cover to enable covert military action against the Russian missile base. Within days after the Jonestown tragedies, Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER #40 made public exactly what had taken place and why. In that tape Dr. Beter answered in detail questions which otherwise remain unanswered to this day.

Over the course of the 80 AUDIO LETTER tape reports, Dr. Beter reveals that three primary power factions are at work in the world today:

1. The Rockefeller Cartel

2. The Bolshevik-Zionist Axis

3. The New Kremlin Rulers

These factions as such have existed for the past century or so, and their relationships with one another have been in a constant state of flux. Their roots, however, are much older and can be traced backward in time for many centuries.

The Rockefeller Cartel

The Rockefeller Cartel is the first of the three great power factions to be dealt with extensively in the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER reports, for at least two reasons. First, while its scope is worldwide, it is headquartered in the United States. Second, it was indisputably the most powerful of the three factions when Dr. Beter began recording his AUDIO LETTER reports in 1975. This situation changed dramatically later on.

The Rockefeller Cartel today embraces several hundred of the world's largest multinational corporations—big oil, big banking and big business. It is a new kind of empire, with economic assets so great as to be beyond effective control by mere governments. Its headquarters are American, but its perspective is global, with allegiance neither to the United States nor to any other country. It is an empire unto itself.

What is today the Rockefeller Cartel was started over a century ago by John D. Rockefeller, Sr. By his well-known cutthroat business tactics Rockefeller created the Standard Oil trust and made himself America's first billionaire by the turn of the century.

Such blatantly unethical practices led to public opposition which culminated in the Supreme Court decree of 1911 dissolving the Standard Oil trust. By then, however, Rockefeller was becoming more sophisticated, finding ways to hide the true extent of his wealth and power while continuing to expand it. The "trust-busting" era had little lasting effect: by the use of nominees and other devices it was possible to retain effective control and coordination of the superficially dismantled Standard Oil empire.

Throughout the Twentieth Century, from World War I onward, Rockefeller economic power has translated increasingly into Rockefeller political power. This, in turn, has been used to increase Rockefeller economic power still further. For example, oil has played a key role in all of America's major wars of this century, with the Rockefeller oil interests profiting handsomely. Yet this role has been generally obscured both in current news accounts during each war and in historical accounts written later on. The obscuring of key information of this type is a symptom of Rockefeller power expansion into the realms of journalism and teaching. Power is always most secure when it is not recognized, so every effort is made to keep information about it from becoming public.

In a related vein, Rockefeller-style "public relations" has been developed and refined since the turn of the century for similarly deceptive purposes. It began when John D. Rockefeller, Sr., famous primarily for his greed, started changing his image by handing out dimes to people he chanced to meet on the street. At the same time he also began making donations to charitable causes, always with great fanfare and publicity, to curry public favor as an alleged philanthropist. This led to the creation of tax-exempt foundations: these enabled Rockefeller money to be invested in organizations which looked philanthropic, yet which were actually avenues for further expanding Rockefeller power. The Rockefeller-controlled major foundations have been used to transform American life and values in directions which make America more susceptible to Rockefeller control. At the same time, the foundations serve an invaluable purpose as a disguised means for interlocking the various business interests which constitute the Rockefeller Cartel.

John D. Rockefeller, Sr., founded a true dynasty, passing on his plans and programs to be carried on by succeeding generations. John D. Rockefeller, Jr., carried forward the Rockefeller program of ever-expanding power with particular emphasis upon subverting the Christian faith which, historically, is the foundation of basic American ideals. But it was the Rockefeller "Third Generation" who expanded and developed the Rockefeller Cartel to its zenith of power. Of the six members of the Third Generation, sister Abby and brother Winthrop did not much care for the grand plan (although Winthrop did become Governor of Arkansas). But the other four brothers—John D. 3rd, Nelson, Laurance and David—threw themselves with crafty zest into the project of

expanding the Rockefeller empire. They carved up the world into spheres of influence, each concentrating upon his own areas but coordinating his actions with the others. They worked together as a unit, and throughout his AUDIO LETTER tapes Dr. Beter often refers to them simply as "the four Rockefeller brothers."

From about World War II onward, it was the four Rockefeller brothers who held the reins of what had become the worldwide Rockefeller Empire. It was they who created the modern multinational corporation, and used American taxpayer money under the guise of "foreign aid" after World War II to build up their corporate empire worldwide. World War II had been fought over Saudi Arabian oil, and it gave them an unprecedented financial windfall. The Rockefeller oil companies obtained Saudi oil at a net cost (after charge-backs and various devices) of about 5 cents per barrel for nearly 30 years, until the Arab oil embargo of 1973 finally put a halt to it. The awesome profits generated by Saudi Arabian oil enabled the Rockefeller brothers to buy up much of the industrial base of the United States, Europe and Japan. At the same time Rockefeller power throughout Latin America, which had been established by Nelson Rockefeller during World War II, was expanded and deepened during the postwar years. John D. Rockefeller, 3rd, masterminded the Rockefeller Cartel economic takeover of much of black Africa: revolutions created black governments which, lacking expertise, had to turn to Rockefeller multinational corporations to "manage" their resources. Laurance Rockefeller busied himself with control of America's aerospace and defense industry, major airlines, and massaging the stock market. David, the youngest but most powerful, became the kingpin of the Rockefeller banking empire whose tentacles reach into business circles the world over. He also specialized in intelligence matters, although Nelson also was involved in this area.

For decades the four Rockefeller brothers had things pretty much their own way. They made plans, set up timetables, and generally carried them out without a hitch. But by the time Dr. Beter launched his AUDIO LETTER tape report series, the Rockefeller brothers were beginning to show signs of slippage in their power. They had made mistakes, and some of their timetables were starting to slide. During 1974-75 they were tripped up in certain plans by partial public exposure of massive irregularities surrounding America's monetary gold supply. Next during 1976-77 their long-standing secret alliance with the Kremlin fell apart, as their former allies—the Bolsheviks—were overthrown by a new ruling group in Russia. The four Rockefeller brothers made the mistake of welcoming expelled Bolsheviks from Russia into positions of power here in the United States. This led by early 1979 to the overthrow of the four Rockefeller brothers by the Bolsheviks here. First John D. Rockefeller, 3rd, died in an alleged auto "accident" in July 1978. Then in late January 1979, Nelson Rockefeller was murdered in the beginning of a full-fledged Bolshevik coup d'etat behind the scenes.

Today the Rockefeller Cartel is no longer under the direct control of the Rockefeller family as it was under the four Rockefeller brothers, but it remains a formidable force. As Dr. Beter ended his AUDIO LETTER report series in November 1982, the regrouped Rockefeller Cartel was gradually regaining some of its lost power in a bitter struggle against the Bolsheviks here.

The Bolshevik-Zionist Axis

In 1917, during the height of World War I, two events took place which were destined to shape much of the history of the Twentieth Century. One was the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia. The other was the Balfour Declaration, by which the government of Britain threw its support behind the concept of creating a Jewish homeland in Palestine.

Both Bolshevism and the political force known as Zionism have common roots which are not widely known. Both were created by the Rothschild interests, whose support was also responsible for the meteoric rise to riches of John D. Rockefeller, Sr., a century ago. Bolshevism and Zionism also have common

historical roots in the so-called "Kingdom of the Jews" of a thousand years ago. This kingdom was situated in what is now southern Russia, between the Black and Caspian Seas. It consisted of a people known as the Khazars of a Mongol-Turkic origin whose leader officially adopted Judaism as the state religion. This was done as a political ploy to enable Khazaria to maintain its political independence of two powerful neighbors. These were the super-powers of that day: the Moslem empire of the Caliphs to the South and the Christian empire of Byzantium to the west.

Prior to the official adoption of Judaism, the Khazars were a brutal and warlike people. This did not change when they took upon themselves the politically inspired title of "Jews." The Khazar empire extended far northward into what, under Christian Prince Vladimir, became known as Russia. The Khazar empire even included the ancient Russian city of Kiev, where Vladimir ruled.

Khazar rule was brutal and oppressive, without any of the compensating advantages offered by other empires, such as protection against outside powers or improved civilization. Finally the Christian forces of Prince Vladimir's Russia and Byzantium combined to attack the Khazar "Kingdom of the Jews", so-called, and utterly destroy it. The Khazar "Jews" were driven out of their homeland between the seas, many of them into eastern Europe. There they mingled to some extent with Jews of the diaspora from Palestine, but they carried with them a peculiar heritage. It was a heritage of bitter hatred for Christianity in general and for Russian Christians in particular.

Down through the centuries, the "Khazar Jew" dream of regaining their lost empire has been passed down from generation to generation. This dream has developed into two branches. One branch emphasizes restoration of power over Russia, and crystallized into Bolshevism. The other branch, emphasizing the old, falsely religious "Kingdom of the Jews" concept, emerged as the political force known as Zionism. Both are aimed at world power. Both are equally ruthless, devoid of regard for human life. They differ only in geographic emphasis and in some tactics. With their common roots and common basic objectives, the Bolsheviks and Zionists work together hand in glove.

When Bolshevism was injected into Christian Russia in 1917, it was done with the help of the Rockefeller Cartel. From that time onward there was a covert alliance between those who controlled American policies behind the scenes (the Rockefeller Cartel) and those who ran the Soviet Union (the Bolsheviks). The Rockefeller Standard Oil interests were given control over marketing of the oil from the giant Russian Baku oil fields in 1926. Over the years, the Rockefeller Cartel saw to it that the Bolshevik regime in Russia was propped up in every way necessary to keep it in power.

While the United States and the Soviet Union pretended to be at odds, they actually were involved in a pincers movement to gobble up the entire world. The falsified animosity between Washington and Moscow was staged in order to polarize the world and cause nations to form up into two camps dominated by the two super-powers. Those who chose to remain independent of both the United States and the Soviet Union—the so-called "Third World"—were targeted for brushfire wars and revolutions to bring them to heel, one by one. Meanwhile the long-term goal was—in the words of a secret White House directive—"to so alter life in the United States that it can be comfortably merged with life in the Soviet Union." In this way, an all-powerful "one world" government would ultimately be achieved. That was to be the fulfillment of a "commitment" established early in the Twentieth Century by the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace and allied foundations in the Rockefeller orbit.

In order to "merge" American life into the pattern of Soviet life under the Bolsheviks, it was clear that the quality of American life would have to be lowered a great deal. It required subtle movement of the American political system in the direction of dictatorship. It required weakening of America's financial and monetary system. And to bring about the radical changes desired, it meant wars with the United States carefully maneuvered into a losing position. America's first no-win war was the Korean War. A decade later, America became embroiled in the losing Vietnam War, which was artificially

dragged out with all possibilities for military victory vetoed by the White House.

The final war was to be a carefully programmed "Nuclear War I", fought primarily on American soil, between the United States and the Soviet Union. Plans called for it to erupt in the late 1970's, but developments in Russia changed that. The Bolsheviks who had run the Kremlin since 1917 were the targets of a decades-long overthrow campaign by a tough sect of native Russian Christians. Their power had begun to outweigh that of the Bolsheviks in certain areas starting in 1953, when Stalin died. This was the reason for Nikita Khruschev's famous "de-Stalinization" campaign afterward. In the mid-1970's this anti-Bolshevik sect finally reached such a level of power that they completely overthrew and expelled the remaining Bolsheviks in the Kremlin. There followed a heavy wave of expulsions of Bolsheviks from positions of power in Russia, which was depicted in the Western press as emigration.

As the Bolsheviks were losing their grip on Russia, so-called detente fell on hard times. The Rockefeller-Soviet alliance had been based on Bolshevik control on the Soviet side, and when that was terminated, so was the secret alliance. The alliance was fractured by the still-secret Underwater Missile Crisis of 1976; a year later it was broken completely by the equally secret Battle of the Harvest Moon in space.

At that point the four Rockefeller brothers made a fatal mistake. Since their former secret allies in the Soviet Union had been the Bolsheviks, they welcomed the expelled Bolsheviks from Russia into positions of power here in the United States. They reasoned that the expelled Bolsheviks would know the weak spots of the upstart new group who had taken over the Kremlin and could help the Rockefeller Cartel deal with them.

What the Rockefeller brothers forgot is that the Bolsheviks are incapable of sharing power with anyone. Worse yet, the Bolsheviks are state socialists, who seek to concentrate all power into the hands of a few (themselves) by way of government. The Rockefeller Cartel, by contrast, represents corporate socialism—the concentration of power into the hands of a few by way of corporations, with minimum governmental interference. Both seek the same goal, but by means which are diametrically opposed. They cannot coexist within the same society.

The Bolsheviks no sooner acquired positions of power here in the United States than they began using it to topple the four Rockefeller brothers. By mid-1978, Bolshevik influence within the Pentagon was causing a radical shift of American strategic policy onto a first-strike nuclear posture. Meanwhile in July 1978, the death of John D. Rockefeller, 3rd, took place, weakening what had been the four-brother unit. In November 1978 the Guyana Massacre took place, as part of a military operation masterminded by the Pentagon Bolsheviks and with crucial participation by Israeli commandoes. Then in January 1979, the all-out Bolshevik grab for power began with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller.

During the first few months of 1979, Rockefeller power over the United States Government was shattered by the Bolsheviks here. However, the Bolsheviks were stopped short of complete success in their takeover bid by the intervention of Russia's KGB. The new Kremlin rulers knew that a complete takeover by the Bolsheviks here would lead quickly to nuclear war, and they acted to prevent it. Even so, Bolshevik control over the Pentagon has been strong ever since early 1979, onward through the end of the AUDIO LETTER series in late 1982.

A fierce power struggle is underway within the United States Government between the now entrenched Bolsheviks and the Rockefeller Cartel, which is trying to take back its former power. In addition, a limited new quid pro quo against the Bolsheviks was established by the Rockefeller Cartel and the New Kremlin early in 1982. The Cartel and the Kremlin still have some accounts to settle with each other, but both are deadly enemies of the Bolsheviks. To destroy them, they have agreed to work together in certain ways.

The Bolsheviks here in the United States have as a major goal a deliberate

nuclear war by which to smash the Russia which overthrew them. As an avenue toward that war, the Middle East is critical. In that area, the Bolsheviks here are relying upon their close allies, the Zionists, to pave the way for war.

Just as most Americans are unaware of the Bolshevized nature of their government, most Israeli citizens are unaware of the true goals of their Zionist government. Americans and Israelis alike scratch their heads with worry and puzzlement over actions of their respective governments. While constantly talking peace, both are systematically increasing the dangers of war.

The radical Zionist regime in power in Israel from 1977 onward is headed by men who were terrorists in the 1940's. Today, as heads of the world's third most powerful military power, they continue to practice terrorism but on a grander scale. Theirs is a doctrine of military terrorism, designed to lead deliberately to new and wider conflicts as the map of Israel grows steadily. The country which calls itself "Israel" today bears little resemblance to the promises of the small but vocal Zionist minority who brought about the Balfour Declaration in 1917. The peaceful, tranquil haven for oppressed Jews does not exist. Instead, the dire warnings published in 1919 by a galaxy of prominent anti-Zionist American Jews have been fulfilled in the bloody history of Zionist Israel.

The New Kremlin Rulers

Dr. Beter first revealed in late 1977 that a new, non-Bolshevik ruling group had taken the reins of top power in the Soviet Union. In the autumn of 1978, he devoted a complete AUDIO LETTER tape (#38) to a special report on Russia and her new rulers.

To those who depend upon pronouncements of the United States Government for their image of Russia, Dr. Beter's reports about the New Kremlin tend to come as a distinct shock. Unlike the atheistic, Satanic Bolsheviks recently overthrown, Russia's new top rulers are members of a sect of native Russian Christians. This sect is at least two centuries old, and at times had considerable influence with the Czars.

Dr. Beter cautions his listeners not to assume that the New Kremlin rulers look at everything in the same way as Western Christians might. For one thing, he points out that it required a patient, arduous campaign of six decades for them to oust the Bolsheviks from top power in Russia. That experience has left them with very definite, vivid opinions about what does and does not work when dealing with people like the Bolsheviks and Zionists. They also know that rapid, radical change of any type opens the door for revolution—and where there is revolution, Bolshevik-Zionist agents will be there to exploit it. They are introducing liberalizing changes in Russia gradually, one step at a time. Having come this far, they are trying not to move too fast and thereby risk allowing it all to be undone.

Even so, visible changes are occurring. Early in 1979 the first legal shipment of Bibles into Russia since the Bolshevik Revolution took place. That Easter, Handel's Messiah was performed in Russia for the first time since the Bolshevik Revolution—and not in some out-of-the-way place, but at the Moscow Conservatory. Churches are reopening, one by one, all over the Soviet Union—and they are packed, as Dr. Billy Graham told the world upon returning from a Moscow religious conference in May 1982.

For saying what he did about what he had seen of religion in Russia, Dr. Graham ran into a hostile reception here in the United States. The Satanic Bolsheviks who now dominate the United States Government are doing everything in their power to paint Russia as an enemy worthy of hate. Anything which interferes with that image is suppressed. Because someday, the Bolsheviks here want America to go to war against Russia.

Economics: The Manmade Causes of Worldwide Economic Disaster

Centuries ago Mayer Amschel Rothschild, founder of the Rothschild Dynasty, said: "Give me the power to issue a nation's money, and I care not who writes the laws."

Money is a necessary ingredient in the advancement of civilization itself. As a store of value and a medium of exchange, money is vastly more convenient and flexible than any system of barter, which is the only alternative. Money facilitates division of labor, specialization by individuals according to their talents, and organization of human activity into complex patterns necessary for advancement in virtually all realms of endeavor. It even helps to make possible economies of scale and other efficiencies which raise human productivity far beyond the levels required for mere survival. This makes it possible for a society to support artistic and other cultural advancements by which a civilization becomes more refined and rich.

In short, money is the economic glue which holds a society together. If it is honest, stable and unmanipulated, money plays a neutral role which is equally beneficial to all members of society. By working hard, for example, a person may earn more than is needed immediately to pay for whatever he buys from others. The excess can be saved, then spent whenever desired to meet an extraordinary expense, buy something special, or retire from work and live off the fruits of past labor. Money earned reflects work which is valued by society and for which one is paid.

It is this role of money as the economic common denominator of society that makes it such a tool of immense power—Satanic power—in the wrong hands. He who issues a nation's money can create out of thin air what all the rest of us have to earn by honest labor. The issuer of money thus acquires unparalleled power over other individuals, since at the stroke of a pen he can make others wealthy who cooperate in advancing his fraudulent schemes. In any society there are always more than enough individuals available who are eager to be comfortably corrupted in this way, and it is they who are helped into positions of governmental power. That is what Rothschild meant when he said, "I care not who writes the laws." The power to issue money is the power to shape government to one's own ends.

If one has the power to issue a nation's money, then he also has the power to change its value. This changes the yardstick by which every single economic transaction in a society is measured, and is a way to steal from an entire society at once. He who sets aside the excess fruits of his labor in the form of money is robbed if, when he is ready to use it later, it is no longer worth the same amount. That is happening today in the United States, of course; it is called inflation.

By the time of the American Revolution, Rothschild financial power in Europe, and especially in Britain, was great. The Stamp Tax and other oppressive measures which helped trigger the Revolution bore the signature of King George, but they originated in the House of Rothschild. The Revolution broke the former colonies free of Rothschild money control.

The framers of the United States Constitution well understood the evils of corrupt, privately issued money. Therefore they refused to countenance the creation of any type of privately owned central bank. Instead, they gave the United States Congress the constitutional duty to issue and regulate the nation's money. The theory was that since Congress represents all the people, congressional control of our money should be the fairest and most equitable system possible.

From then until the early Twentieth Century, there were repeated attempts by the Rothschild interests to re-establish their lost money power here, either directly or indirectly. One example was the Bank of the United States, whose charter was cancelled by President Andrew Jackson in 1832. Likewise the Civil War involved, not just questions of slavery and states' rights, but also a

strong component of struggle over the issuance of money. But once again the attempt failed, thanks partly to intervention by the Russian Navy at a critical tide in the war to prevent Britain and France from dismembering the war-torn United States .

For doing that, Russia was slated for destruction by the Rothschild interests. It was also decided that the best way to regain control over America's money was from within. To that end the Rothschilds lent support to several promising groups within the United States, spawning the era of the "robber barons." Out of that group, the Rockefellers soon rose to the top. In 1913 the Rothschilds finally saw the creation of what they had sought here in the United States: a privately owned central banking system, called the Federal Reserve System. It was a joint venture involving very heavy participation—in fact a lead role—by the increasingly powerful Rockefeller interests. But at least the Rothschilds at last had their foot back in the door for control of America's currency. In 1917 the Rothschilds accomplished their other goal, the destruction of Christian Russia, by way of the Bolshevik Revolution. As in the case of the Federal Reserve System, the basic concept was Rothschild-inspired... but it was Rockefeller muscle that made the plan a success. Having started out as Rothschild proteges, the Rockefeller Cartel had risen already to the status of partners. And during the decades that followed—especially after World War II—the Rockefellers pulled ahead and eclipsed Rothschild power on the world stage. That situation continued until the end of the 1970's. Now, with the collapse of the family Rockefeller Dynasty, the balance between the Rockefeller and Rothschild factions is in a state of flux, with both struggling for renewed supremacy.

The Federal Reserve System was sold to the public as a prescription for improved economic stability. But the record shows that the stock market crash of 192 9 and the ensuing Great Depression were brought about in large part by deliberate Federal Reserve actions. The Great Bull Market of the 1920's was set in motion and sustained for most of a decade by means of easy credit. By 1929 the towering stock market was resting upon a huge, wobbly foundation of credit—that is, debt. The Federal Reserve Board then destroyed that foundation over a matter of mere months by severely contracting credit. The excuse given was designed to sound good, namely a crackdown on harmful speculation. But the real and predictable effect was to cause masses of investors to be suddenly unable to cover their "margin" stock-market purchases, forcing them to sell stock to raise cash. The sell-off thus triggered fed upon itself, while the Federal Reserve Board did nothing to halt the plunge. The stock market crashed.

Having set economic disaster in motion, the Federal Reserve Board soon thereafter made sure that it would mushroom into an all-out depression. This was brought about, not by the stock market crash itself, but by the failure of the American banking system afterward. A key purpose of the Federal Reserve System is supposed to be the preservation of banking stability, by stepping in as the lender of last resort (among other things) to prevent a localized banking problem from spreading. But in the early 1930's, a then-major bank—the United States Bank of New York—collapsed while the Federal Reserve System steadfastly refused to lift a finger to stop it. This created a chain reaction which pulled down additional banks, which dragged down still others, and so on. The Federal Reserve System, far from stopping this process, had set it in motion and did not intervene as it progressed. This plunged America and then the entire world into the Great Depression of the 1930's.

To most people a depression is an unmitigated disaster. It is hard to imagine that anyone could benefit from it, much less bring it about deliberately. But for the money controllers and their wealthy allies, the Great Depression provided enormous opportunities for increased wealth and power. Knowing what was coming, they were able to avoid the crushing financial losses which befell everyone else. Then during the depths of the Depression, they were in a position to buy up companies, real estate and other assets at a penny on the dollar. When the economy revived later on, these assets regained their value, producing vast profits for their new owners.

Ironically, by using their money control to plunge the American economy into disaster, the moneychangers set the stage for still greater expansion of their authority over America's monetary system. When President Franklin D. Roosevelt took office in 1933, he launched a series of sweeping moves that began with the declaration of a bank holiday. The United States was taken off the gold standard. Americans were required to turn in all of their gold coins. Title to America's gold was then handed over—as a gift!—to the Federal Reserve System. However, the Federal Reserve System was relieved of any need to spend time and money to take care of the gold which it now owned, as the U.S. Treasury Department was made physical custodian of the gold.

The Federal Reserve System became freer than ever to tinker with America's economy by printing paper and controlling credit. The freedom grew steadily over the years as gold backing for the dollar was decreased. In 1968 President Johnson signed into law an act removing the final 25% gold backing requirement from the dollar. In 1971 President Nixon closed the international gold window, discontinuing settlement of international debts in gold. This left the United States dollar purely a piece of paper, totally divorced from gold or anything else of intrinsic value. This is an ideal situation for the money controllers, made to order for manipulation to enrich themselves at everyone else's expense. Since the dollar has been a worldwide reserve currency since 1944, this means that everyone on earth is victimized by the dollar manipulation now underway in the U.S.

From 1971 onward, inflation has been an ever-increasing problem in the United States and therefore worldwide. Each time it is damped down temporarily, it is slowed at the expense of rising unemployment and slumping economic activity. When the economy revives, inflation soon takes off again to new and higher levels. The Federal Reserve Board, claiming (as in 1929) to be looking out for our best interests, responds with crushing new interest rates that reach new historical highs. Again unemployment shoots up, without ever having quite recovered from the previous cycle. Cycle after cycle, inflation and economic stagnation both keep getting worse. The balance between the two conditions keeps shifting back and forth, but both inflation and stagnation are with us continually and simultaneously. We are caught in the "stagflation" era foreseen by Dr. Beter in his 1973 book, The Conspiracy Against the Dollar.

The crumbling of the once powerful United States economy is a direct consequence, and an intended one, of the destruction of the dollar itself which is underway. The time will come when the dollar will collapse altogether, and with it the economy of the United States and much of the world as we know it. At that point the same thing will have to be done that has always been done when other currencies have collapsed. There will have to be a new currency—a new dollar—with something behind it to restore confidence. The one commodity which has been a reliable, universally accepted basis for monetary confidence for thousands of years is gold. And so, gold will have to be used in setting up a new system of stable international currencies, including a new dollar.

Meanwhile there will come a period of international monetary turbulence during which only gold or strongly gold-backed currencies will be trusted. During that period of time, assets measured in dollars will shrivel—as they are already doing now, at a less frantic pace. Those who have cornered the world's gold supply will be in a perfect position to vastly expand their own holdings and power. And so, contrary to the official books of the U.S. Treasury Department and the Federal Reserve System, America's monetary gold hoard has been largely spirited away. It began in 1961 under the London Gold Pool Agreement: for seven years enormous loads of American monetary gold were hemorrhaged out of Fort Knox and other depositories and sent overseas. In addition there have been secret shipments of gold which are not reflected in official records at all.

Through their control and manipulation of money—specifically the United States dollar—the moneychangers are stealing vast amounts of what countless millions have worked hard to produce. And just as they did in 1929 and afterward, they are again positioning themselves to set off economic disaster worldwide.

Military: The Secret Plans and Weapons for Armageddon

To most people war is a supreme evil among human events, to be avoided if at all possible... and yet, we go right on having wars. To those who rule nations, war is a tool of power which is used deliberately. War can be used for external reasons, such as to increase the geographical extent of a nation's power. More importantly, war provides the perfect excuse for a government to impose increased controls on its own people. By citing "national security" the government can persuade the people that even highly dictatorial controls are for their own good.

These principles are among those laid out centuries ago by Machiavelli, who recommended to all rulers that they use wars regularly as a tool of power. But early in the Twentieth Century, the Carnegie, Rockefeller and allied interests of the day dreamed of a world in which their power would be absolute, and permanently assured. It would be a world at "peace"—the peace of a world inescapably within their grip. They formed a "commitment" to establish an eventual "one world" government.

A leading institution which was created to coordinate this one-world "commitment" was a tax-exempt foundation: the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. In order to bring about the envisioned "peace" of a one-world government, it was clear that vast changes would have to be wrought in the lives of Americans, as well as of the other peoples of the world. Several years before World War I the trustees spent an entire year debating the question: "Is there any means known to man that is more effective than war in changing the life of an entire nation?" They concluded that the answer was: "No. "

And so, to start bringing about the changes needed under the long-range commitment for a one-world government, somehow America had to be gotten into war. The trustees debated how this could be done and concluded that it would be necessary to control the foreign policy machinery of the United States. That implied, in turn, that control had to be established over the State Department.

Within a few years the fruits of these deliberations began to be seen in U.S. actions. President Woodrow Wilson won re-election in 1916 on the theme, "He kept us out of war", and then promptly took the United States into World War I. On at least one occasion the trustees of the Carnegie Endowment sent a telegram to Wilson urging him not to let American involvement in the war end too soon. The changes in American life which they desired were beginning to take place.

World War II, the Korean War, and the Vietnam War all were orchestrated in ways designed to serve the purposes of the long-range one-world commitment. But during the decades beginning with World War II, a factor unforeseen by the initiators of the one-world commitment grew steadily in importance. This factor was the ever-accelerating advancement of weapons technology. Starting with the atomic bomb, weaponry has advanced in ways not dreamed of in the early years of the Twentieth Century. And these new technological capabilities have played a role in the progressive collapse of the one-world commitment as originally envisioned.

In 1960 American scientists invented the laser—a device which produces an intense, narrow beam of light. Early lasers were crude and not very powerful, yet it was clear from theoretical studies that someday laser beam weapons would be possible. Other types of beam weapons were also foreseen which were potentially even more devastating than lasers.

Suddenly there was a fatal flaw in the "one world" commitment. The flaw was that it envisioned only one world—the Earth—as the entire arena of human activity. That was beginning to change... because mankind was beginning the conquest of space. In 1957, three years before the invention of the laser, the

world's first manmade earth satellite had been orbited by the Soviet Union—Sputnik I. The honor of being the first nation in history to do this had been handed to the Soviet Union, even though the United States had been technically capable of doing it first. The Soviet space program was far ahead of that of the United States when, in 1960, the invention of the laser suddenly added an urgent new dimension to the space race. The beam from a laser or other beam weapon can travel through space at the speed of light to strike a target a million miles away within a matter of seconds. Suddenly the moon had become a prize piece of military real estate: whoever controlled the moon could someday use it as a base for beam weapons to control the Earth.

In 1961 the four Rockefeller brothers inaugurated an elaborate, two-pronged program for world domination, with seizure of the moon as its centerpiece. On one hand, the United States would embark on a program of supposed disarmament, whittling back the power of America's visible military forces. But on the other hand, there would be increased emphasis upon development of advanced new secret weapons, unknown to the public and largely unknown even to Congress. And under the guise of a great adventure, the moon would be seized for unadmitted military purposes by way of the Apollo Project.

The four Rockefeller brothers had in mind an eventual double-cross of their secret ally, the Soviet Union, in the programmed nuclear war to come. By seizing control of the moon and installing devastating beam weapons there, they expected to emerge as the final, absolute rulers of the entire world.

In May 1961, President John F. Kennedy announced that the United States would land a man on the moon and return him safely to Earth before the end of the decade. Thus began a crash program ten times bigger than the Manhattan Project to develop the atomic bomb during World War II. It was too big to hide, so instead its military nature was disguised by a constant glare of publicity to portray it all as a lark to pick up some moon rocks. And it succeeded.

When Neil Armstrong planted man's first footprints on the moon in July 1969, it was a sensational event the world over. Little more than three years later, however, it was becoming routine enough in the public eye for America's manned moon program to be removed from public view. The final publicly admitted moon flight was Apollo 17 in December 1972. Thereafter, as the American public became increasingly absorbed in the Watergate Scandal and other matters, the U.S. moon program continued secretly from a new base: the island of Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean. Different launch techniques were used there, involving the Skylab space station as a way station to the moon.

While all of this was going on, unexpected developments were brewing in the Soviet Union: a progressive overthrow of the Bolsheviks was steadily accelerating. By the mid-1960's the emerging new Kremlin rulers had learned about the planned Rockefeller double-cross in a programmed nuclear war to come. They redoubled their efforts to complete their overthrow of the Bolsheviks. They also began preparing to beat the Rockefeller brothers to the punch with their own double-cross.

By the mid-1970's, present-day trustees of the major Rockefeller tax-exempt foundations were growing increasingly worried. Signs were multiplying that the one-world commitment formed two generations earlier had jumped the tracks. They were right.

In the summer of 1976 Dr. Beter reported on a major crisis which, to this day, has never been made public officially. This was the Underwater Missile Crisis, in which the Soviet Navy was planting small underwater-launch, short-range missiles with nuclear warheads inside American territorial waters. These were planted close to their targets, able to be fired at a moment's notice by satellite command. If fired, they would destroy coastal target areas with essentially zero warning time—the perfect "first strike." They were planted by means of small sonar-absorbing, super-quiet minisubmarines, designed to move in and out of American territorial waters without being detected by coastal sonar defense nets.

The limited exposure of this crisis by way of the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER reports enabled the late General George S. Brown, then Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, to take action. Over protests by then-Secretary of State Henry Kissinger, General Brown persuaded then-President Gerald Ford to give him the go-ahead to order the U.S. Navy to remove the missiles. In September 197 6 Dr. Beter and an associate met with General Brown in his Pentagon office to discuss the crisis. In that meeting, Dr. Beter provided General Brown with the locations of a second round of Soviet underwater missiles. This was information General Brown did not have, thanks to an "intelligence gap" created by Kissinger in context with the former Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.

Exposure of the Soviet missile-planting program took away the crucial element of surprise and helped to avert war at that time. Even so, General Brown was soon neutralized as part of a hopeless Rockefeller attempt to restore the former Rockefeller-Soviet alliance, and many Soviet missiles were never removed from American waters.

As the immediate crisis over the Soviet underwater missiles died down, Dr. Beter learned that other missiles also were planted under the sea. These had been planted earlier and were not Soviet, but American. In violation of international treaties, the United States had planted mammoth multi-warhead missiles on the ocean floor in the Atlantic and Pacific, targeted on the Soviet Union.

The new Kremlin rulers bided their time, allowing the four Rockefeller brothers to convince themselves that they were succeeding in patching up the former alliance. But they were routing the Bolsheviks out of the Kremlin and out of many other high-level positions of power in Russia. At the same time they were finalizing preparations for a surprise many times more decisive than that of the Underwater Missile Crisis.

As the autumn of 1977 approached, American beam weapons were nearing operational status at a secret military base nestled in Copernicus Crater on the. But on the night of the Harvest Moon, September 27, 1977, the base was

attacked and put out of action by the Soviet Union. For ten years the Russians had been involved in a crash program to develop a family of particle beam weapons, which fire subatomic particles at a target at virtually the speed of light. A neutron beam weapon, fired from an orbiting, manned satellite, killed all the astronauts at the American moon base. (The Russian satellite was partially disabled during the encounter. This was the nuclear-powered satellite, Cosmos 954, which four months later created a worldwide sensation by coming to earth in northern Canada. It was not a crash, but an emergency landing.)

The silencing of the secret U.S. moon base was the beginning of a lightning military takeover of space by the Soviet Union. During the final months of 1977, the Soviet Union deployed a "space triad" of manned strategic weapons, to which the United States has no counterpart. First came the "cosmos interceptor" killer satellites, which use particle beam weapons to blast other satellites out of existence. These started hunting down and destroying American spy and early-warning satellites, one by one. Within about six months—by tbe spring of 1978—they completed the job. Meanwhile Russia's new rulers were demanding that the United States begin laying down its arms by way of SALT II or risk unspecified dire consequences. These circumstances led to a desperate intelligence mission in April 1978, in which a Korean airliner flew into the most sensitive military airspace in the Soviet Union. Russian jet fighters forced the airliner down, but only after special equipment mounted in the plane radioed vital data on the Soviet military alert status to CIA receivers.

In addition to spy satellites, a Russian cosmos interceptor also destroyed the Skylab space station in mid-October, 1977, in order to block any American attempt to return to the moon. Skylab died in a giant fireball seen over much of the United States on October 18, 1977. NASA waited a week or so for all the puzzled questions over the mystery giant fireball to die away and then began a lengthy coverup project, saying Skylab was sinking unexpectedly from orbit.

This hoax was followed from start to finish in the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER report series.

The second leg of the Russian space triad was deployed and initially tested during October and November of 1977. It is a network of high-power particle beam weapons on the moon, aimed at Earth. The first test of these in November 1977 was carried out under cover of a cyclone in the Bay of Bengal. The beam weapons produced a gigantic double flash. Due apparently to an aiming error in this first test shot, they also created a huge tidal wave which came racing out of the cyclone without warning to inundate large areas of the southeastern Indian coastline. Since that time, the lunar beam weapons have been fired only at target areas well out to sea, for weather modification purposes.

Dr. Beter first reported on the characteristic brilliant double flash produced by the Russian lunar beam weapons in late 1977. Nearly two years later, an aging American Vela satellite happened to detect one of these double flash episodes in the South Atlantic. This led to dramatic rumors for awhile that Israel had tested an atomic bomb in that area with the help of South Africa, since nuclear weapons produce a somewhat similar double flash. But nuclear weapons also produce several additional kinds of radiation along with the double flash, none of which were present in the South Atlantic episode. What the satellite accidentally detected was a test of a new technique for generating artificial storms, which Dr. Beter described in detail in February 1980. Since then such artificial storms have been used repeatedly as a weapon of weather warfare.

The third leg of the Russian "space triad" is a fleet of electrogravitic hovering platforms called "cosmospheres." These could have been developed by the United States, and in the early 1960's the late General Thomas Power (then commander of the Strategic Air Command) and others urged that this be done. But instead, all of America's secret space eggs were put into the basket of the Project Apollo moon program. Meanwhile the Soviet Union went ahead with development of these platforms, and in December 1977 their operational deployment began. For several months they announced their presence in hair-raising fashion along the U.S. East Coast and elsewhere by creating mysterious giant air booms. They did this by firing their powerful charged particle beam weapons into the atmosphere in a de-focused mode, in effect causing the air itself to explode. The air booms were an attempt at intimidation of the U.S. Government, but did not accomplish much in that regard. After a few months, the air booms were halted.

Today Russian cosmospheres routinely patrol high above all kinds of American strategic targets. They stand guard especially over American ICBM bases, ready to use their beam weapons to blast the missiles at the moment of launch in the event of war.

The strategic weapons programs of the United States today are designed, first and foremost, to try to counter the secret "space triad" weapons of the Soviet Union. These weapons have yet to be made public by Russia's new rulers, who are well aware that it would precipitate a propaganda disaster for them if they did so. Likewise, America's rulers dare not publicly admit the existence of these weapons which Russia has but America does not. They are afraid that the American public would react with everything from panic, to anger over America's "space gap", to rage at having been lied to up to now. Congress too, having been largely manipulated and kept uninformed, could become unruly in the extreme.

And so, while crash secret weapons programs have been underway in the United States since early 1978, they are kept hidden or their true nature is disguised. A wide range of weapons are involved, from high-power laser weapons with new infrared targeting, to retrofitting of Titan II ICBM's for fractional orbital bombardment with super-yield "doomsday" cobalt-bomb warheads.

It is not practical to review all of these developments reported by Dr. Beter in this "Bird's-Eye View" section. Instead, the basic situation can be illustrated by considering just two weapons programs: the MX missile and the

"stealth" aircraft program. The official justifications for these programs are always couched in terms of Russian weapons which everyone knows about—primarily Russia's large missiles. These explanations never quite add up, because they are not the truth. As a result controversy and questions keep swirling around these programs. As old rationales fray and fall apart, new ones are devised which also don't quite add up. Only when the truth about Russia's "space triad" is known do the American weapons programs make sense. Not pleasant sense, but sense.

In June, 1980, Dr. Beter described in detail what the MX program is all about. The big MX missile itself is actually of little importance—but the MX program is being used as an umbrella under which another, completely secret, missile system is being financed and deployed. Dr. Beter reported that the controversy then raging over proposals for a "racetrack" mobile basing system for the MX was only a lightning rod to draw attention away from deployment of America's real mobile missile. This is a much smaller missile, called the Minuteman TX. It was developed virtually from off-the-shelf hardware, and is deployed on America's railroads aboard special rail cars. Dr. Beter described these unique rail cars, and later several listeners spotted them and took photographs which were published in a special bulletin for AUDIO LETTER listeners.

In October, 1981, President Reagan shocked a lot of people by announcing that the MX missile would not be made mobile after all. The ridiculous "racetrack" scheme had served its purpose, which was deception, and was dropped. The controversy has continued, but the MX program has remained alive through it all. Early in 1983, after the termination of the AUDIO LETTER report series, the concept of a smaller mobile missile was the key new ingredient in the public recommendations of the Scowcroft Commission on strategic nuclear forces. Supposedly such a small mobile missile, nicknamed "Midgetman", could not be deployed until the early 1990's. But in actuality, that type of missile is deployed already... the Minuteman TX. Its biggest advantage has nothing to do with the alleged first-strike threat of Russian ICBM's. Instead, the deployment of large numbers of small Minuteman TX missiles is intended to make it impossible for Russia's cosmosphere fleet to keep tabs on them all. And as Dr. Beter detailed over the course of several AUDIO LETTER reports, the mobile fleet of Minuteman TX missiles are not designed merely to survive a Soviet nuclear first strike. Instead, the Pentagon Bolsheviks intend to use them as the key to an eventual U.S. first strike against Russia.

The other example to consider is the "stealth" program. This is a multi-faceted program, which actually involves not only aircraft but also a highly secret category of naval warships with their own special bases. Shortly after Dr. Beter reported on the existence of these special bases in the spring of 1982, they spawned naval warfare in the Southern Hemisphere. The visible portion of that conflict was the Falklands War.

Restricting attention to the stealth aircraft program, the most radical and promising development is that of the "phantom warplane." First revealed by Dr. Beter in the spring of 1982, the phantom warplane is as radical an advance in this computer age as the atomic bomb was in an age of adding machines and slide rules. By using powerful computer techniques, Einstein's semi-finished Unified Field Theory has been used to design superconducting electromagnetic field equipment which can bend light waves. Built into an aircraft, this equipment creates a zone around the aircraft which light cannot penetrate: instead, it flows around and onward, like water around a boulder in a stream. The result is that at a distance the airplane is invisible, not only to radar, but even to the eye.

Public comments about the stealth program refer only to radar evasion, not to the far more startling capability of optical invisibility. Once again, this is done in order to limit discussion to a range of weaponry capabilities which will not raise too many public eyebrows. If the full capabilities of the phantom warplane were known, it would raise the question: why is something so radical needed?

The answer lies with Russia's still-secret beam weapons. The most important fact about the invisibility field of a phantom warplane is not the invisibility itself, but the protection which the same field provides against all types of beam weapons.

The Bolsheviks who now control the United States Pentagon want to use all these weapons to crush the Soviet Union from which they have been overthrown and expelled. They have devised elaborate plans, detailed in the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER reports, to set off a nuclear first strike by the United States against Russia. Nuclear "false alarms", so-called, have been staged in order to test their ability to trigger what will look afterward like accidental nuclear war. American nuclear forces will be led to believe that they are retaliating, instead of striking first.

The United States remains locked out of any large-scale, sustained military presence in space. Even so, a few key reconnaissance and other military tasks must be carried out in space in order to prepare for war. For that purpose the Space Shuttle is being used in ways hidden from public view. The NASA Space Shuttle program is nominally civilian, but after the first Space Shuttle launch the civilian director of the program was eased out. Today the Shuttle director is Air Force General James Abrahamson.

It is often said that the world today lives under the threat of a Battle of Armageddon which, for the first time in history, could conceivably live up its apocalyptic description in the Bible. What is less well known is that certain Satanic forces are actively planning for such a conflict and trying to bring it about. And they are harnessing the ingenuity of man to create Armageddon-style weapons about which the public is never informed.

Summary

In surveying the 80 cassette tapes of the AUDIO LETTER report series, a single gigantic picture emerges. The most striking thing about this picture is that countless seemingly unrelated, chaotic-appearing news events turn out not to be chaotic after all. Instead they are all tied together by a limited number of forces at work behind the scenes. Once one knows these forces, one becomes far better able to sort out the true meaning of events.

Three major power groups are struggling today for worldwide influence and power. Like icebergs, they are partially visible but mostly hidden. These groups are the Rockefeller Cartel of big oil, big banking and big business; the Bolshevik-Zionist Axis; and the New Kremlin rulers of Russia.

The relationships among these groups have shifted radically over the past decade or so. The Bolsheviks used to control the Soviet Union, and while they did there was a secret alliance between them and the Rockefeller Cartel. But they have been overthrown and expelled from top levels of power in Russia by the New Kremlin rulers, who are anti-Bolshevik and are, in fact, a secret sect of native Russian Christians. During 1976 and 1977 Russia's new rulers unilaterally terminated the long-time Rockefeller-Soviet alliance, together with its plans for programmed nuclear war on the way to a "one world" government. The four Rockefeller brothers, then in control of the Rockefeller Cartel, welcomed the expelled Bolsheviks from Russia into positions of power here in the United States. That was a fatal mistake, which led to the overthrow of the four Rockefeller brothers at Bolshevik hands from mid-1978 to early 1979. Since that time there has been a steadily intensifying power struggle between the Bolsheviks here and the regrouped Rockefeller Cartel for control over the U.S. Government. Generally speaking, the Bolsheviks have been getting their way in military affairs, while the Rockefeller Cartel has greater power in the economic realm. Since early 1982, there has been a limited quid pro quo between the Rockefeller Cartel and the New Kremlin against their common bitter enemy, the Bolsheviks. Meanwhile the strong links between the American Bolsheviks and the Zionist rulers of Israel have been forged into a secret joint military junta—the Bolshevik-Zionist Axis—bent on war.

Politics, economics, and international relations (including war) are constantly used by these world power factions as they struggle with one another. Economic manipulations, covert intelligence maneuvers and a proliferating array of secret weapons are features of this struggle. But as made clear in many of Dr. Beter's tapes, the basic struggle is a spiritual one.

Dr. Beter terminated his AUDIO LETTER report series in November 1982 due to declining health. Events which have taken place since then are beyond the scope of this REFERENCE DIGEST. Even so, peppered throughout the tapes are many discussions of plans and events still in gestation, and knowing those plans can help provide many clues to the meaning of events still to come. Beyond that, the past is always prologue to the future. By studying the many events which ran their course during the seven-odd years of the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER series, one can learn a great deal about the underlying forces still at work in our world.

Audio Letter #1

This is the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER(R) , Box 16428, Ft. Worth, Texas 76133

Hello my friends, this is Dr. Beter speaking. Today is June 21, 1975, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 1.

A lot of things have been happening lately that probably have you concerned and puzzled—things like the Mayaguez affair, the prospect of financial collapse of New York City with domino effects throughout the economy, and so on. And all of these things are important, but what I hope to do in my monthly reports to you is to try to focus your attention squarely on the most basic developments. Understanding these most basic matters will, I believe, enable you increasingly to grasp the significance of details in the news yourself; and once the American public can see through the daily diet of clever, subtle propaganda which is served up by the major media as news when it really is not news at all, then the jig will be up for those who are trying to take our country and our freedom away from us. In this AUDIO LETTER I therefore want to discuss just three topics:

No. 1—An important matter concerning evidence in the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL

No. 2—Recent indications from President Ford that the plans for ECONOMIC DEPRESSION AND DICTATORSHIP in America are still on track, and

No. 3—An introduction to our next President and would-be-Dictator, NELSON ALDRICH ROCKEFELLER.

First, about Fort Knox. You know, the Fort Knox Gold Scandal is just like the Watergate Scandal in one respect: There is a desperate cover-up going on right now just as happened with Watergate. The Fort Knox Gold Scandal cover-up really passed the point of no return last September when the United States Treasury perpetrated the Fort Knox gold inspection hoax in an attempt to discredit my charges that there's no gold in Fort Knox because it had all been illegally removed.

Since that time the Government has been getting in deeper and deeper and deeper, involving more and more people in all sorts of maneuvers to try to keep the lid on. For example, when the Congressmen and newsmen visited Fort Knox last September, news

stories promised everybody that the visit would be followed up by an audit of the Fort Knox gold by the General Accounting Office, but what they actually did was just a very superficial exercise just to make the record look good, and the group of 15 men that did it had only two (2) General Accounting Office representatives on it. All the rest were from the Treasury itself—in other words, the fox went into the henhouse to count our chickens for us .

And then there was the fraudulent Gold Auction on January 6 of this year in which the Treasury sold some gold obtained illegally a month earlier from the small Exchange Stabilization Fund. Only a fraction of the Fund's gold was sold in January; now they're about to follow that up with a second fraudulent gold sale on June 30, 1975, using part of what is still left over barring unforseen developments to prevent the sale, and so on.

But to me one of the most disturbing things we have unearthed lately came as a complete surprise to me, since it involves none other than Senator Barry Goldwater of all people! Senator Goldwater has in his possession some very sensitive and important papers which explain in detail how the Nation's gold could be easily removed from Fort Knox and spirited away, which I charge has been done! These papers consist of the manuscript of an unpublished book about Fort Knox which was being written by the late Mr. Stanley Tatom. Tatom was a mechanical engineer and was stationed at Fort Knox as an Army Major in the 1942 to 1943 time period. Major Tatom was in charge of some secret but major modifications of the Fort Knox Gold Depository at that time—modifications whose purpose was to make gold retrieval easier. On April 28, 1943, President Franklin D. Roosevelt visited Fort Knox to view the progress of this work.

After the war, Tatom returned to civilian life as a mechanical engineer and businessman. Now, Tatom probably knew more than any other man on earth about the Fort Knox Gold Retrieval System, and years later he decided to write a book about it; but he never got to finish polishing it up for publication because in October 1973 he died on an operating table under some very strange, mysterious circumstances! One story is that he bled to death for lack of availability of blood of his type, even though the operation was not an emergency one. And it was only the following month, November 1973, that the final huge shipment of gold out of Fort Knox began, taking until early March 1974 before the shipment was completed. Now Tatom had become friendly with Senator Goldwater some years prior to his death, and Goldwater knew all about the book and obtained the manuscript to read it. In particular, Senator Goldwater has the crucial Chapter 12 which gives the details on the Retrieval System—but he seems to be sitting on it and I just can't understand what he is waiting for. So far he won't even answer the letters and telegrams that have been sent to him on this subject. Why?? Where is Chapter 12 on Fort Knox, Senator Goldwater?

Mind you now, I'm not accusing Senator Goldwater of being a part of this gold thievery in any way, not at all. The Fort Knox gold theft is a project of the four Rockefeller Brothers and their accomplices from start to finish! But my question is: Why isn't Goldwater doing anything with this vital information he has in his possession? Doesn't he know how significant it is? Doesn't he still care what happens to America? Has he become afraid of the Rockefellers like so many other Senators and Congressmen? Or has he decided to join the false opposition, working secretly with the Rockefellers behind the scenes? Does he think he sees the handwriting on the wall for America as written by the Rockefeller Dynasty?

I would like to have the answers to these questions from Senator Goldwater himself.

I turn now to the second topic: Recent Developments Involving President Gerald Ford.

Early this month President Ford strangely fell three times in one day on a state visit to Europe. The next day he was seen stepping cautiously down an aircraft ramp holding on to both hand rails, while Mrs. Ford walked down ahead of him with the greatest of ease. The news media quickly explained it all away with a big fury of items about his football knees as the source of the problem. What you may not know, however, is that a week or so later after public interest had been deflected to other matters, a quiet and little-noticed announcement was carried in Washington papers in which President Ford's doctor stated flatly that the falls had nothing to do with his knees after all. No other medical explanation was offered, but I am informed that President Ford's health does seem to be deteriorating for reasons which are not yet made clear.

On June 16, 1975, President Ford did something completely unprecedented in American politics. He endorsed his presumed running mate, Nelson Rockefeller, for 1976 even though he himself still has not announced his own candidacy. A year ago I was told by one of my informants, the late Mrs. Louise Boyer who was Nelson Rockefeller's private secretary and confidante for over thirty years, that Ford would leave office well before the end of his term to be replaced by Nelson Rockefeller. She furthermore expected that this would occur by June 1975, this month.

It may well be that Ford's oddly premature endorsement of Rockefeller and the appearance of health problems on Ford's part are signs that the planned elevation of Rockefeller to the presidency is in fact near at hand. In any case, the next day, June 17, 1975, the third anniversary of the Watergate break-in, President Ford made a rousing speech to small businessmen meeting at a national convention here in Washington. He said a lot of things that were exactly what the audience wanted to hear. For example, he said he was certain "We are now at the bottom of the recession, and that an upturn lies just ahead." That remark and a few others like it were picked up by the press and are probably all you heard by way of the major media; but woven deftly through his speech were a sequence of key phrases which paint a very different picture—a picture which coincides exactly with the chilling plan for an American dictatorship about which I have been trying to warn for two years.

Briefly, this plan is for the United States to be manipulated into terrible economic straits by election day 1976 so as to complete the collapse of confidence in our free way of life that has been fostered increasingly through educational and other means for decades. On election day 197 6 we are to vote among other things in a referendum—not a customary procedure at all here in America—to scrap our present Constitution and accept a new one in its stead.

The "NEW CONSTITUTION", which is to be the subject of an "Audio Book" I plan to tape soon, has already been written and would totally reorganize our government along totalitarian lines and abolish free enterprise in favor of total governmental control and regulation. With this plan in mind, listen now to a sampling of phrases from President Ford's speech that were not part of the crowd-pleasing rhetoric which the press reported to the nation:

"In the months ahead we face a very critical choice: preservation of free enterprise or a headlong plunge into governmental regulation."

The words "critical choice" harken back to Nelson Rockefeller's "Commission on Critical Choices for Americans" on which Gerald Ford served after becoming President. In turn, Rockefeller got the Commission's name from a book published in 1930 with Rockefeller financing: "THE AMERICAN RICH" by Hoffman Nickerson, an associate of Nelson Rockefeller's. The book argued that we would one day have to make a, quote: "critical choice for Americans"—namely, replacement of our Republic with a hereditary dictatorship. This is, in effect, what President Ford said we face within a matter of months now regardless of the pabulum about an upturn fed to you through the major media.

Next, quote: "From my travels, Americans have not arrived at a consensus for collectivism."

Also, quote: "We have not held a referendum" to repudiate our present system.

President Ford merely said, 'We have not done these things', but his implication was that 'we have not yet done these things'—things which should be unthinkable. Why in the world would he mention a referendum? Just take a glance of Great Britain which is further down the road we are now traveling. For the first time the referendum has made its appearance just this month there, and it has been identified as a symptom of failure of representative democracy and a harbinger of basic political change. The consensus for "collectivism" mentioned by President Ford is exactly what the deliberate economic disaster lying just ahead is supposed to bring about. In the ensuing panic it is by referendum that the planned scrapping of our CONSTITUTION is to be accomplished.

In another passage President Ford said we are now seeking, quote: "a new balance between the public and private sectors." But what new balance? A mixed economy enroute to total collectivism? He didn't say.

In a final example, Ford objected in his speech to, quote: "those who criticize free enterprise and propose nothing in its stead." But Nelson Rockefeller is all ready to propose something instead of free enterprise in the NEW CONSTITUTION—his Constitution!

Thus everything continues to point to the fact that the Rockefeller dynasty controlled by Nelson and his three brothers is still moving forward steadily with the game plan to terminate our free Republic and install Nelson Rockefeller as our first DICTATOR. It therefore behooves us to stop and consider carefully the nature and background of our next president, Nelson Rockefeller.

On August 20, 1974, when President Ford introduced Nelson Rockefeller as his choice for Vice-President, he failed to give Rockefeller full credit for his extensive experience in the Roosevelt and succeeding administrations. The same was true of Senator Hugh Scott later during the confirmation hearings when, for public consumption, he condescendingly told Rockefeller that now he was getting a taste of how things operate in Washington. Imagine!

On his return from a year-long honeymoon trip around the world,

25-year-old Nelson Rockefeller was put in charge of the completion and renting of Rockefeller Center and also helping to direct the Roosevelt Administration by his father John D. Rockefeller, Jr. He immediately organized with two former college classmates a company to collect monies on everything that went into the Rockefeller Center construction—contracts, material, labor, etc. This proved so profitable that he ousted his partners and merged it into the so-called philanthropy, "Rockefeller Brothers Fund", where it still remains and which was reported to me recently.

Nelson Rockefeller earned the enduring support of George Meany by providing employment to his plumbers as well as other construction workers at Rockefeller Center at the princely price of $15 for a 48-hour work week. However, when the workers decided they needed more pay to live on, Rockefeller gave one Joe Adonis the job of convincing the workers that they didn't really need that extra money after all. Adonis did his job, but instead of paying him off, Nelson Rockefeller then had him deported.

The Rockefellers played a key role in the nomination and election of President Franklin D. Roosevelt. Nelson Rockefeller was then installed as Roosevelt's closest advisor—as related, for example, in a New York Times article on May 22, 1960. In Rockefeller language, "closest advisor" means "boss"; and the "New Deal" which is generally attributed to F.D.R. was actually designed to start carrying out the transformation from Republic to totalitarian government prescribed in the Rockefeller-financed book, THE AMERICAN RICH, which as I have mentioned was published in 1930.

Nelson Rockefeller induced Roosevelt to proclaim the so-called Bank Holiday, closing all the banks. All banks controlled by the Rockefellers were permitted to re-open, re-financed at taxpayer expense. Many other banks, however, were permanently closed. This maneuver greatly enhanced the Rockefeller dynasty's control over our banking and credit system which was already strong by way of their Federal Reserve System, which helped create the "Crash of 1929."

Using Roosevelt as his mouthpiece, Nelson Rockefeller next ordered all United States citizens to turn over all our gold to the private central banking system of the Rockefellers, the Federal Reserve System, in violation of the Constitution. The fact that authorities all agreed that this could in no way alleviate the prevailing depression, was beside the point. A handsome profit was made by shipping the gold abroad while the price was $20 an ounce and bringing it back to the United States soon afterward to collect $35 an ounce for it. The present Fort Knox Gold Scandal is a replay of this same game plan, but this time for vastly higher stakes.

Nelson Rockefeller also stepped into active planning for World War II. The war was to be used both to take over the Saudi Arabian oil interests of Great Britain and also to crush Japan, which was trying to open up vast Chinese oil fields that the Rockefeller interests had suppressed for years for monopolistic purposes. In his very first Cabinet meeting in 1933, Roosevelt reportedly startled everyone by declaring that he wanted to be a wartime president and wondered if a war with Japan could somehow be arranged. But he had to be patient. It took eight years for the Rockefeller-financed "Institute of Pacific Relations" to give him his wish.

The matter of Saudi Arabia was a holdover from World War I which the Rockefellers had used to their own ends. Rockefeller

support behind the scenes made Germany such a threat to Britain that the British concluded the Allies could not win World War I without American help. As the price for an American intervention, the Rockefellers extracted a deal from the British turning over the Saudi Arabian oil concessions to them to exploit. In return, the Rockefellers withdrew support from the Kaiser and quickly arranged through Woodrow Wilson, the first president to be a complete puppet of the Rockefellers, to have American soldiers sent to fight "The War to End All Wars." The Saudi Arabian oil concessions thus cost the Rockefeller Standard Oil interests nothing—but they cost America a quarter of a million lives and a huge national debt!

But not satisfied with merely the Saudi Arabian oil concessions, the Rockefellers also proceeded after the first World War to wrestle control of the German chemical, dye, drug, and dope companies away from the British, merging them in 1926 into the world-wide cartel known as the I.G. Farben Industry, AG. This so infuriated Churchill and the British that they used boycott tactics to block the Rockefellers from actually developing the Saudi Arabian oil, refusing to grant visas to Standard Oil employees, turning down clearances to ships trying to carry needed supplies and the like. The Rockefellers concluded that a second World War would be just the right medicine to cure Great Britain's embargo on Saudi Arabia. The German war machine which they had supported in World War I had produced a cooperative British attitude before, and it would presumably do so again. A man by the name of Adolf Hitler, who at the time was a minor factor in Germany, was selected for this purpose and was brought to power through the support of the Rockefeller-controlled I.G. Farben industries and other German-controlled industries of the Rockefeller family. Nelson Rockefeller observed Hitler closely during his world-wide honeymoon trip mentioned earlier and participated in Hitler's rise to power and the strengthening of Nazi Germany, whose rise to power has always been a puzzling phenomenon to most observers.

In 1929 the Rockefeller Standard Oil of New Jersey, now known as Exxon, made a cartel agreement with the Rockefellers' I.G. Farben Industry to avoid destructive competition in one another's markets. The Rockefellers supplied Hitler with great reserves of petroleum products without which war could not have been waged. Their I.G. Farben Industry also assured Hitler of reliable supplies of glycerine for munitions from a source which is seldom mentioned in this connection—the rendering of fat from Concentration Camp victims who died in the infamous ovens! The cartel arrangement operated completely to the benefit of Germany—and completely to the detriment of the United States, as was brought out in devastating detail by the hearings held by Senator Harry S. Truman during the first half of 1942. As documented in those hearings, the Rockefeller Standard Oil treated its agreements with the Rockefellers' I.G. Farben Industry as taking precedence over any considerations of patriotism or duty to America; and continued to block all efforts to make synthetic rubber and other critical war supplies available even after we were at war. Thus the Nazi war machine of Adolf Hitler was built up to provide the menace to Britain which the Rockefellers desired as a means of opening up the Saudi Arabian oil concessions permanently to themselves.

The strategy would be as in World War I—to get Britain on the ropes, extract the desired concessions, and then engineer America's entry into the war to save Britain. But if there was one thing Americans did not want to do, it was to go to war again. Isolationist sentiment was strong, therefore an attack on America would have to be arranged. Nelson Rockefeller made sure

that President Roosevelt's preparations for the war were coordinated precisely with the Rockefeller machinations overseas, including Hitler's build-up on the one hand and the plotting of the Pearl Harbor attack on the other.

The Pearl Harbor attack was the crowning achievement of the "Institute of Pacific Relations" (or IPR) which was heavily financed by the Rockefellers and their tax-exempt foundations and which was dominated by Nelson's brother John D. Rockefeller III. As brought out later in the Congressional investigation of the IPR, John D. Rockefeller III participated in the activities of Edward C. Carter, IPR secretary, in a hideaway disguised as a barn at Lee, Massachusetts. It was there that the groundwork was laid for engineering the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor. The existence of the Germany-Italy-Japan Axis meant that we would automatically be at war with Germany, which was menacing Britain as soon as we were attacked by Japan.

Once Churchill and the British saw after Dunkirk that they were doomed without American help, a deal was made to open up the Saudi Arabian oil concessions to the Rockefellers. The Pearl Harbor disaster was then arranged in order to galvanize Americans into support for going into war. Needed defenses were denied to the Naval Commanders at Pearl Harbor. The American warships at Pearl Harbor were all brought in and bottled up within the harbor like sitting ducks in spite of growing tensions with Japan and even rumors of imminent attack. Finally when the attack itself came, advanced warnings from several sources were all ignored—suppressed in Washington! The actual day and hour of the attack was known to President Roosevelt and his boss Nelson Rockefeller one week ahead of time, and nothing was done but to sit tight and make sure that the Pearl Harbor attack occurred as planned.

As World War II came on, Nelson Rockefeller maneuvered Roosevelt through war preparations at home. He dictated the passage of a Universal Military Training Bill and the drafting of our youth to serve the Rockefeller cause at taxpayer expense in the forthcoming war. This done, he himself promptly evaded the draft, ordering that he be appointed "Coordinator of Hemispheric Defense" as far away as possible from the war front, in Latin America. He also arranged to have Roosevelt demand and obtain an appropriation of six-billion dollars from Congress to use for his so-called coordination. With this money, he began to flood Latin America and Cuba with Communist agents to drive out proprietors and property owners, leaving the Rockefeller dynasty in virtually complete control of Latin America.

Saudi Arabian oil fields were brought into production at no cost to the Rockefeller/Exxon crowd, entirely at taxpayer expense and a cost of more than a half a million GI's lives. Saudi Arabian oil cost the Rockefeller interests only five cents (5) a barrel for a period of 30 years preceding the Arab oil boycott recently. Since domestic oil cost them in the range of from $1.00 to several dollars per barrel, they steadily cut down on production and purchase of oil in the United States despite its actual abundance. This forced many independent oil companies out of business, garnered fantastic profits for themselves which they used to rapidly take over additional major industries here and abroad, and made us increasingly dependent on foreign oil. Thus they laid the basis for our present so-called "energy crisis", which they have also taken advantage of to raise fuel and other prices with and without Government help.

After the deal with Churchill was arranged by the Rockefellers to drag the United States into World War II, Nelson Rockefeller's

activities at the top of the federal government steadily accelerated. He personally lobbied through Congress an endless array of Programs which were sold as "necessary for national defense and security" and the like, but which were actually for the purpose of draining off our national wealth into Rockefeller coffers as rapidly as possible. "Lend-Lease", for example, was used among other things to help build up the military and economic strength of the Soviet Union as part of the price for the Rockefellers to retain their control of the vast Baku oil fields in Russia. The concessions to these had been obtained by the Rockefellers in 1926, granted to them by Stalin as repayment for the Rockefeller role in the Russian Revolution in 1917. You probably remember from your high school history book that the Russian Revolution was financed from outside Russia. What is not usually mentioned, however, is that the Rockefeller dynasty was the source of that financing. Thus an alliance between the Russian Communists and the Rockefeller empire was forged which has persisted down to the present day.

Foreign aid, beginning with the so-called "Marshall Plan" and continued with the "Point Four" program, etc. was the object of particular enthusiasm on the part of Nelson Rockefeller, who championed them in every possible form throughout the country—and no wonder. As early as December 1948, only months after the Marshall Plan got under way, the Chicago Tribune published an editorial based on Marshall Plan records which proved that the majority of foreign aid funds were cleverly channeled into the pockets of the Rockefellers through accounting devices of their multinational oil companies. But the various bills lobbied through their Congress by Nelson Rockefeller and his aides to require most foreign aid monies to go to certain Americans for overseas development purposes remained intact, and looting of foreign aid funds by the Rockefellers has never been stopped. Over the years foreign aid has extracted mountains of money from American pockets, and it is no coincidence that the rise of American-based multinational corporations has coincided with the era of ever expanding foreign aid. These multinationals with their unique tax advantages, multiple citizenship, and access to foreign aid funds among other things, were initially a product of the growing world-wide power of the Rockefeller dynasty but have long since become a primary means by which that very power is growing by leaps and bounds.

In my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR", I have explained in detail how the huge multinationals controlled by the Rockefellers were used in 1971 and 1972 to start the United States dollar on the road toward complete destruction—a process that is now entering the final critical stages. Yes, it's Nelson Rockefeller playing the role of the "inside man" within our Government who has been able in concert with his powerful brothers to bring the United States economy, and with it Freedom, to the brink of destruction; and it is he who will offer himself as our national savior as he pushes us off the edge.

A "NEW CONSTITUTION", so called, has been written over a 10-year period with Rockefeller backing and now stands ready for introduction as soon as Nelson Rockefeller is in a position to do so. The people who have written it have done so as usual under the aegis of a tax-exempt Rockefeller philanthropy with the misleading name "CENTER FOR STUDY OF DEMOCRATIC INSTITUTIONS." The people most central to the writing of this document, which is an elaborate prescription for dictatorship, were also associated with Rockefeller in the writing of a proposed "WORLD CONSTITUTION" and setting up the United Nations.

The United Nations was organized in its present form at the

"United Nations Organizations Conference" in San Francisco in 1945 where Nelson Rockefeller represented President Roosevelt as advisor to the US delegation. The completeness of Nelson Rockefeller's grip on this proceeding was expressed by Senator Vandenberg, a member of the delegation, who frankly declared to the press, quote: "Anything Rockefeller wants is OK." What he wanted is clear from what he did! First he arranged with the Soviets to have his most intimate and trusted associate, Alger Hiss, appointed as Secretary General of the Conference. Next he arranged to have the WORLD CONSTITUTION, drawn up to embody his ideas, presented as the United Nations Charter. This was gleefully accepted by the Soviets, who were particularly delighted by two of its facets.

First, it in effect replaced the United States Constitution, since provisions of the United Nations Charter are always to be followed wherever there is any conflict. Because of this, treason against the United States of America, which is clearly defined in our Constitution, has ceased to be considered a crime or therefore punishable.

This is why Nelson's brother John D. Ill, for example, was immune from punishment even though his treason in connection with Pearl Harbor was established in Congressional investigations. This is why Ramsey Clark, Jane Fonda, and other Americans who went to Hanoi in the midst of the Vietnam War and gave aid and comfort to the enemy, were immune from punishment. Even Alger Hiss, caught in his treasonous activities on behalf of Nelson Rockefeller by Richard Nixon, could not be convicted of treason. Hiss was convicted merely of perjury in connection with treason—which is equivalent to saying that treason is OK but lying about it is the only crime!

The second provision of the United Nations Charter offered by Nelson Rockefeller and adopted by the Conference was the establishment of the "United Nations Military Affairs Committee", to which all member nations must report in advance, any contemplated military action in full detail. The Soviets of course were overjoyed with this because of a collateral agreement which was also made—namely, that the Chairman of the United Nations Military Affairs Committee must always be a Soviet General. This agreement has been carried out to the letter now for 30 years.

Thus Nelson Rockefeller guaranteed that the United States would never again win an armed conflict! The outcomes of Korea and Vietnam were thus foregone conclusions as soon as they started. Tens of thousands of American GI's would be killed; hundreds of thousands would be wounded, many of them maimed for life. Billions of dollars would be siphoned out of American pockets and into those of the Rockefeller interests and allies, and the self-confidence of the American people would be undermined. The Rockefellers were so pleased with the United Nations that they donated the property for it—its permanent headquarters in New York City.

During the Eisenhower regime, Nelson Rockefeller blossomed out in all his glory. Eisenhower was grateful to the Rockefellers for giving him the presidency—particularly Nelson Rockefeller's uncle, Winthrop Aldrich, who made it very attractive for a large proportion of Senator Robert Taft's delegation at the Republican Convention in 1952 to switch to Eisenhower.

Ike's first act after inauguration was to give Nelson Rockefeller a free hand in reorganizing the Executive Branch of the government. Rockefeller moved with his entourage to his

estate at 2500 Foxhole Road in Washington, from which he ran the government while Ike went around the country building his reputation as a golfer. The only portion of the Executive Branch that really aroused Nelson Rockefeller's enthusiasm, however, was the Military, which he promptly recycled under one roof. Having made sure through the U.N. and other means that America's ability to truly defend itself was at an end, he named the reorganized military complex the "Defense Department." He made its prime function the sale of munitions and military hardware around the world, and put at the head of each division the top salesman in his field. Their job is to sell ever more of the dynasty's war materiel, using field demonstrations, minor conflicts, and even wars to help sell them. It is a competitive effort among the several military branches with rewards going to the most successful.

And so it is, my friends, that you have probably noticed a major shift in the way our weapons systems are developed and marketed over the past 25 years. It used to be that America developed the best possible weapons for America, and for the most part sold them off to other nations only as they were replaced by newer and better ones for our own use. But nowadays the first consideration for a new warplane, for example, is to beat the bushes around the world to see how many other countries we can sell them to, even while the warplane itself is still on the drawing board. Needless to say, this leaves us without any real secrets in many areas of our so-called defense; but it does make a lot of money for Nelson Rockefeller and the rest of his dynasty, which controls the major manufacturers of armaments in America and abroad.

In the late 1950's, Nelson Rockefeller decided the time had come at last to run for elective office. His decision essentially coincided with the adoption in New York State of mechanical voting machines made by the Automatic Voting Machine Company of Jamestown, New York. This company had been purchased and merged into the Rockefeller-dominated Rockwell Manufacturing Company. Rumors were widespread that they were fixable and facilitated the stealing of elections, but these suggestions were ridiculed by some who proclaimed themselves to be authorities. In any case, Nelson Rockefeller, New Deal Democrat, resolved to enter the race for Governor of New York State as a Republican since the Democrats were committed to nominating someone else—Averill Harriman. He was welcomed into the Republican Party without difficulty and easily became the nominee. After winning the election, handsomely I may say, he promptly took full control of the Automatic Voting Machine Company by buying up stock from minority stockholders at $20 per share, five times the market price of $4.00 a share. Of course there was no suggestion that this reflected his evaluation of the role the machines played in his election.

Several years later in the early 1960's a great hue and cry arose in Louisiana about the stealing of elections by means of a different machine in use there, the Shoup Voting Machine. Finally the legislature was forced to act. On the basis of a concurrent resolution, the legislature staged a demonstration of the various voting machines used in the United States. Former employees of the companies demonstrated the ease with which such machines could be fixed to steal elections. In the course of the demonstration, it was shown that the Shoup machine could be more easily fixed, and in more ways than any other for the purpose of election stealing. Very shortly thereafter, New York State, whose Governor was now Nelson Rockefeller, ordered the disposal of their automatic voting machines at sacrifice prices; and their replacement was Shoup machines. Control of the Shoup Voting

Machine Company was also purchased, passed through a number of obscure transfers which Dun & Bradstreet had difficulty in following, and reportedly ended up when last checked in an obscure subsidiary of what is now known as Exxon. The Rockefeller-control of Exxon is, of course, well known. Thereafter Nelson Rockefeller had no difficulty in being re-elected time and again despite his growing unpopularity in New York State.

While Governor, he increased New York State taxes more than 500%; he increased the State debt more than 300%. He launched massive spending projects, such as the mammoth Albany Mall project to house government offices by devious financial schemes put together by clever advisors such as John Mitchell so as to circumvent voter desires, and refused to be disturbed by minor matters like 3 to 1 "cost overruns" and functional unsuitability of some of these projects. He drove numerous industries out of New York State by confiscatory taxation as he catered to soaring union and welfare demands. Indeed the Rockefellers themselves all but shut down their Exxon offices in New York about four years ago, transferring 3000 employees to Houston, Texas, and 1000 of them to Hong Kong. Altogether Nelson Rockefeller succeeded during his years as Governor in vastly increasing the number of unemployed and those on welfare rolls.

Now, having honed his abilities in every possible form, Nelson Rockefeller is at last nearing success in the goal he has sought for decades: to become the openly acknowledged Ruler of the United States and to use our country as the springboard for a final conquest of the entire world for the Rockefeller dynasty.

He created the 25th Amendment by which he and Gerald Ford have come to office without submitting themselves to a vote of the people. He had his agent, Senator Birch Bayh, propose this scheme only three weeks after the assassination of President John F. Kennedy, and had Senator Bayh push it successfully through the Congress. He then had Herbert Brownell move the 25th Amendment through the States to ratification in unusually short time (in two months time, by the way) by 1967. The stage was then set for the downfall of President Nixon when the time was ripe several years later. The Watergate Scandal was masterminded by Nelson Rockefeller and carried out by his private detective agency, the CIA, including the breaking of the story in the Washington Post by CIA agents posing as reporters!

My friends, the things I have just told you about are shocking, brutal, and frankly unbelievable at first hearing; but I warn you, please do not dismiss them out of hand simply because of their awesome nature. These things are the truth and they merely give you an idea of what is coming soon if Nelson Rockefeller, working in concert with his brothers David, Laurance, and John D. Ill, is allowed to succeed in his dictatorial plans.

The first step in stopping this madness is for you, the American citizen, to realize what is happening. Hitler achieved his post by legal means as set up in the Constitution of the Weimar Republic. He was appointed Chancellor of the Reich by aging President von Hindenburg January 30, 1933. And remember, President Ford on August 20, 1974, appointed Nelson Rockefeller as his Vice-President! The German citizens who watched Adolf Hitler maneuver his way to power, in many cases simply could not believe their eyes and preferred to hope out of blind optimism that things would not deteriorate completely. They suffered horribly for failing to observe, to grasp the truth, and TO ACT!

Please, my friends, let us not allow this to happen in America.

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #2

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is July 15, 1975, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 2.

As I say these words, the United States of America stands on the threshold of troubled and turbulent events. The scheming plans of the Rockefeller dynasty to seize total control of America are about to enter the critical period of economic disaster which they have deliberately planned and brought about, and they intend to turn the resultant political turmoil to their own advantage. The political and economic chaos which David Rockefeller confidently predicted a year ago, will soon be upon us .

The incredibly powerful Rockefeller dynasty—controlled by David Rockefeller and his brothers Nelson, John D. Ill, and Laurance—is still on track with the plan to take over America completely and replace our Constitution with a dictatorial new one, which has quietly been written for their use. I revealed this basic design in my AUDIO BOOK tape of October 1974 about the coming depression and war, and explained it in detail in my AUDIO BOOK of March 1975 about the Fort Knox Gold Scandal.

But, my friends, there is a hopeful new wild card in the deck which has just recently started gaining momentum. I refer to the fact that opposition is beginning to arise where there was no effective opposition before—and for the very first time. The Four Rockefeller Brothers are beginning to lose their grip here and there on important parts of their fantastically complicated program of conquest. Their vast pyramid of power is still basically intact, and they remain very much at the top of it, but little cracks and seams have begun to show up caused by the pressure of exposure of their plans. This is only the beginning, my friends, and we dare not leap to conclusions or relax and become complacent. Even if their dangerous monopolistic power should be broken and our beloved Republic saved, we the American people must take care that we do not go back to sleep and let someone else do the same thing all over again.

In light of what I have just said, I would like to discuss the following three topics today:

Topic #1—FIRST SIGNS THAT THE FOUR ROCKEFELLER BROTHERS ARE BEGINNING TO LOSE THEIR GRIP ON EVENTS

Topic #2—SUPER-SECRET DOMESTIC MILITARY PREPARATIONS FOR MASSIVE UNEMPLOYMENT RIOTS

Topic #3—THE SECRET "CENTRAL CORE GOLD VAULT" THAT THE FORT KNOX VISITORS DID NOT SEE IN SEPTEMBER 1974, AND HOW IT WAS USED IN THE THEFT OF AMERICA'S GOLD

In recording this today, July 15, 1975, I am making this crucial information public for the first time anywhere.

Topic #1—Indications that the Rockefeller Brothers have begun losing their grip on things, began some months ago in connection with their efforts to suppress the Fort Knox Gold Scandal, and I mentioned this in my AUDIO BOOK on that subject. But only very recently, within the past several weeks, this situation has started spreading dramatically. Even their own grip on the major media has begun to loosen, and things are starting to leak out now that would have been unthinkable only a year ago.

A prominent example is the New York Times. Columnist Seymour Hersh recently dared to write a stinging attack on the Rockefellers' private detective agency, the CIA, and the Times dared to print it. In another instance, the Times has recently focused attention on the fact that the White House refused to accept Russian dissident exile Alexander Solzhenitsyn because it might not square well with the official policy of detente—that is, appeasement of the Soviet Union. Furthermore, the Times published at length from a speech in which Solzhenitsyn attacked Russian Communism in blistering terms. As another example: just a few days ago the New York Times ran an article on the front page which not long ago would have been lucky to show up as an abbreviated filler on about page 67. The item dealt with testimony before the United States Senate in which Exxon, the most visibly under Rockefeller control of all the hundreds of huge companies they own, admitted making political gifts to the Italian Communists, whose recent big gains in Italy you have no doubt noticed.

The New York Times is only one example. There are stirrings of independence among some of the other major media as well. It is a hopeful sign. Another recent symptom of the developing turning of the tide was a non-event: the abject failure of Nelson Rockefeller to make good on his plan to oust Gerald Ford and replace him as President by June 1975, which was last month. As of the date of this recording, in fact, he has been pointedly omitted from the now official presidential campaign of Gerald Ford. What is more, President Ford now appears hale and hardy, and I can now inform you that he has been successfully cured of a powerful virus of unknown origin which caused his widely publicized difficulties last month abroad.

Rockefeller's failure up till now to grab the presidency does not guarantee that it won't still happen, but it does reflect some important reversals, and time is now beginning to run against him. The plan is still essentially on track, but it is beginning to fall behind schedule.

One of the recent reversals was precipitated by Nelson Rockefeller himself several months ago during Senate debate over the filibuster rule. Presiding over the Senate, Rockefeller flaunted time-honored procedures—steamrollered right over everyone who got in his way, and caused a near revolt on the floor of the Senate. In the melee, one of the Senators shouted, "You do not own this Body." He should have added "not yet", because that is exactly what Nelson Rockefeller has been expecting to do soon through his "New Constitution", under which he would be in power to abolish Congress and then reconstruct it with his own appointees and others manipulated into office.

The filibuster flap has caused at least some of those in the Senate to start gradually coming to their senses—not so much out of their great dedication to representing the wishes of the people, which they ignored when they voted overwhelmingly to confirm him as Vice-President in December 1974—but out of fear of what he might do. Even former Senator Sam Ervin, who seems to see now that he was used as a pawn in the Watergate affair, has

had second thoughts. He recently said in a radio interview that had he known last fall what he knows now, he would never have voted to confirm Nelson Rockefeller as Vice-President.

Another fact which is throwing off the dynasty's timing is the Fort Knox Gold Scandal. Even though it is still under wraps so far as the American mass media are concerned, it dealt the Rockefeller interests a staggering blow last month, June 1975. Speaking through the United States Treasury, David Rockefeller expected to persuade the IMF (International Monetary Fund) to sell its gold hoard, and the Rockefeller interests were poised to buy it secretly, thereby completing their world-wide corner on gold. To depress gold prices so that they could then buy the IMF gold at bargain basement rates, arrangements were made for the United States Treasury to sell off another pittance of gold on June 30, 1975, in a so-called Dutch auction. Under this arrangement all successful bidders buy at the same price as the lowest successful bid. Many financial articles have pointed out that this curious set-up was a prescription for pushing down gold prices, and that the Treasury has for some time been campaigning to do just that. Now you know why.

The June 30 gold auction was held as scheduled, but it did the Rockefellers no good. The reason: at the IMF meeting in June they failed to get the IMF agreement to sell its gold—and for only one reason. The French Government, through its own Intelligence sources, has now been able to confirm my charges that America is gold poor. They know that the United States does not have the huge gold hoard which is officially claimed, and therefore that the Treasury threat to use it to hold gold prices down is a gigantic bluff. Therefore they refused to play ball—that is, the French—and now the Rockefellers are feverishly seeking a way through accommodation or pressure, to remove the French obstacle to their gold corner. In the meantime, they will try to hold the price of gold down and the dollar up. All of this is also helping to delay Nelson Rockefeller's seizure of the presidency of the United States.

Still another factor has to do with Nelson Rockefeller's recent sudden trip to England. You probably heard about it in news reports that claimed it was merely a vacation but was not announced up to the last minute for security reasons. That, my friends, is not the truth. Nelson Rockefeller was summoned to England in no uncertain terms by the British Government. They are now becoming increasingly aware of the role the Rockefeller empire has played in Britain's economic strangulation since World War II, and was invited to come there for discussions and negotiations that were less than cordial. It involved economic and financial matters.

As a final example of the way in which Rockefeller plans are beginning to go awry, there is the matter of President Ford's visit to Spain during his overseas trip six weeks ago. If you listen to the news closely, you may have noticed that while Ford and Kissinger were mentioned as visiting other leaders, they only mentioned that Ford went to see President Franco of Spain. It was not generally emphasized, but Secretary of State Henry Kissinger did not accompany Ford to see the Generalissimo. The reason is that Franco sent a very blunt message forbidding Kissinger from coming with President Ford. Franco is well aware that the coup a year ago in neighboring Portugal was engineered by the CIA on behalf of the Rockefellers, who are greedy for control of the resource-rich Portuguese colonies in Africa and the gold which the Portuguese Government held in its national treasury. And he also knows Henry Kissinger's central role in the Rockefeller CIA apparatus. What Franco had to say was,

therefore, only for Ford to hear.

Franco's message to President Ford was clear and blunt. First, the United States must immediately withdraw the CIA operatives, who are now trying to destroy Spain as they did Portugal, or the United States will be expelled from all of our military bases on Spanish soil. Furthermore, Franco said that if the United States does not put a stop to the internal subversion which is making America an unreliable ally, Franco would soon be required to make America leave the bases anyway.

Thus Nelson Rockefeller and his brothers can no doubt sense that in a number of areas they are indeed beginning to lose their grip. Even the Portuguese coup d'etat, which the CIA and others worked 10 years to bring about, has not yet produced all the planned results in that the prize African colonies apparently have gotten out of their control. And the kingpin of their economic war to take over America, the theft of our gold as part of a world-wide gold corner, threatens increasingly to erupt in their own faces as a scandal of mind-boggling proportions.

Yes, a hopeful new eleventh-hour trend is now beginning in opposition to the dictatorial plans of the Rockefeller Brothers. But, if anything, we must increase our vigilance now in at least one respect. The danger is always present that seeing the walls beginning to close in around them, Nelson Rockefeller and his brothers may at some point, quote: "Hit the panic button" and try to hurry things up before they can be stopped by an increasingly aroused American public.

In this connection, I now turn to Topic #2.

Topic #2—In recent days I have received very reliable information from certain confidential sources that a highly secret domestic military operation is now underway within the United States with the code name "OPERATION GARDEN PLOT."

About six months ago large shipments of so-called "riot control equipment" suddenly began being funneled to key American cities. Among the cities included are San Francisco, Chicago, Houston, Dallas, Philadelphia, Detroit, and St. Louis among other cities. As of now, however, Boston, New York City, and Washington, D.C., are not involved.

These shipments are reportedly in preparation for "Unemployment Riots" which are anticipated, possibly by early autumn. Apparently these will be no ordinary riots though. All kinds of up-to-date heavy riot-control gear are included—such as sawed-off shotguns, face shields, helmets, gas masks, flak jackets, night-sticks, and gas dispensers.

But in addition, the shipments include "war materiel" such as M-60 machine-guns, 50-caliber machine-guns, M-16 automatic rifles, jeeps, trucks, and five kinds of army tanks—M-48, M-110, M-109, PC-113, and PC-577. You may well have seen tanks and other equipment being shipped by rail recently without knowing its possible purpose.

Should unemployment riots in fact erupt—whether naturally or at the instigation of paid troublemakers—and if they can be escalated to such a level as to call for the declaration of a "state of emergency" by the President, it could prove to be a domestic Pearl Harbor attack on the American people by the Rockefeller dynasty. Executive Order 11490 signed by President Nixon in 1969 could be invoked, martial law declared, and virtually dictatorial powers seized overnight.

Whether or not this is the meaning of OPERATION GARDEN PLOT, I frankly do not yet know, but the dangers are sufficiently real that I want you, the American people, to realize what could be the outcome if the threatened unemployment riots do materialize.

"But wait a minute", you may be saying. "Unemployment went down in June, didn't it?—9.2% in May, 8.6% in June, and everyone says an upturn has begun. Just look at the stock market."

No, my friends, unemployment is not getting better—it is getting worse. You may recall that the Bureau of Labor Statistics commented that the seeming drop in unemployment was caused by a, quote, "statistical quirk." The real story is not being told at all—but it is hinted at by some other numbers you may not have paid much attention to. For example: The number of jobless persons jumped by one-million in June. It was 7.6-million in May, 8.6-million in June based on published figures, and the number of people who are so discouraged that they have given up on finding a job set a new record of 1.2-million in June—again based just on the published figures.

As for the stock market, the manipulation of which is one of Laurance Rockefeller's specialties, the present upward trend is strictly artificial. Even the Rockefellers themselves are now rapidly bailing out. Many of their controlled companies are now soaking up cash in return for stocks, bonds, and debentures that will become practically worthless after they let the stock market crash. They can, and do, change their plans whenever they are spotlighted; but as of now, their schedule calls for America to be stunned by a devastating stock market crash in the very near future.

As in 1929, its effects will reverberate through the entire world. Even if they should decide to put it off, the crash is now only a matter of time. If you choose to remain in the stock market any longer without the benefit of extremely well-informed advice, you must realize that you will be gambling—not investing!

On top of all these things, INFLATION is now being rekindled with a vengeance, as will become all too apparent in the months ahead.

The stage is also being set for major, deliberate SHORTAGES. The new wheat deal with Russia, which could amount to nearly 100 pounds of wheat for every man, woman, and child in America is one harbinger of this, but centralized control of all major marketing and distribution systems for food and other necessities, is the real key. And so, my friends, unemployment riots are possible no matter how unlikely they may seem to you now. "America, the land of plenty" will soon see loss of jobs, rising prices, and shortages—all artificial and deliberate—and the result will be HUNGER. And hunger, my friends, is the most powerful and destructive political tool of all!

And now, Topic #3.

Topic #3—In a moment, my friends, I intend to lay bare part of the story of the way in which our gold was stolen from Fort Knox. But before I do, I want to remind you of why I am doing it. As I explained in my AUDIO BOOK on the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL, the theft of the nation's gold was an economic Pearl Harbor perpetrated on the American people by the Rockefeller dynasty in their drive to seize total control of America. As Lenin said, "The only way to destroy Capitalism is to debauch their

currency"—that is, to reduce it to worthless paper. And that is exactly what has been done to the United States dollar by the theft of our gold supplies.

Even though the average citizen might never know about it, this disappearance of a nation's gold reserve does become known in the powerful world financial circles where national economies are shaped, and the result is always economic disaster for the gold-poor country where money ceases to be trusted.

All we have now is fiat money—pieces of paper that are only playing the role of money because the Rockefeller-owned Federal Reserve System says it is money. They can have more printed at will since it is no longer tied in any way to gold or anything else of generally accepted value. Over a period of several thousand years, my friends, people have from time to time tried fiat money over and over again. The propaganda you hear today from the Treasury and elsewhere that would lead you to believe otherwise, is pure hogwash; and every single time the result has been economic disaster and disintegration for the very people who tried it. This is why I keep hammering away at the Fort Knox Gold Scandal. It is not only the most stupendous theft in all of history, though it is that too.

David Rockefeller and his brothers expect to make a half-trillion-dollar profit on their gold corner by the time gold reaches $2,000 an ounce less than two years from now. What is more important is that if we do not get the gold back now and restore a sound footing for our dollar, we will go the way of every other nation. And history has shown that anyone who has relied on fiat money will lose, and the Rockefellers intend to pick up the pieces.

With that background, I just want to read you an affidavit which was obtained by one of my associates from former Congressman Frank Chelf of Kentucky. We have distributed this affidavit to many influential people as part of our effort to pry the lid off the Scandal, and recently it was published in part by various financial Newsletter writers which penetrate financial circles world-wide. This affidavit is as follows:

AFFIDAVIT State of Kentucky, County of Marion

I, Frank Chelf, of 216 East Main St., Lebanon, Kentucky 40033, being first duly sworn on oath, hereby depose and say:

(1) That I was a United States Congressman from the 4th Congressional District of Kentucky for 22 years, ending January 3, 1967.

(2) I have always felt that the gold supporting our currency is a vital component of our economy and should not have been sent abroad nor anywhere else. We are giving money we do not have to people we do not know in order to please people who hate our guts .

(3) In August 1963 I charged that the United States Government was moving gold quietly as a church mouse out of Fort Knox, and that the gold was constantly and surreptitiously on the move.

(4) I learned of the Fort Knox gold shipments from my civilian friends in my native County of Hardin.

(5) In January 1965 I made a new request for information regarding gold shipments out of the Government's storage vaults

at Fort Knox. I sent this request to President Johnson in a telegram. Fort Knox is located in my 4th Congressional District.

In response to my previous requests for gold removal information, Treasury officials had been courteous and most friendly, but always noncommittal or evasive. As a member who had entered into his 11th term in Congress, I felt I had the right to question those Treasury appointees who have to do with our gold in Fort Knox in order to ascertain the figures of the gold supply of the United States. I believe the press and all American citizens are entitled to know the facts pertaining to our gold shipments.

(6) I retired from Congress after 22 years of uninterrupted service, but I was interested in the United States gold supply because most of it was stored in my Congressional District.

The Government was taking gold out by twilight in trucks, and I accused them of it and proved it on them because I had people who were posted who are friends of mine. They were telling me in the Treasury that they were not taking the gold out, but I had friends who told me the hour and the minute when they'll come out for another load. Oh yes, they've taken a lot of gold out of there they won't admit. It's terrible.

(Signed) FRANK CHELF

Subscribed and sworn to before me this 7th day of April 1975."

And there follows the seal and the signature of the Notary Public, Dessie Kessler, the Notary Public in and for that County of Marion.

The recent final emptying of Fort Knox, you see, was not an isolated GOLD FINGER-style heist, nor was it remotely similar to any of the other ridiculous gold theft movies you may have seen lately. It was simply the final phase of a very long-term project culminating nearly 15 years of gold removal from America. The hemorrhage of America's gold was begun in 1961 with the initiation of the so-called "London Gold Pool Agreement", but the stage was set for all of this over 30 years ago during World War II.

What I am about to tell you is more of the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL than has ever been revealed before. Every bit of it is backed up by solid evidence and information from reliable confidential sources. I stand ready to present all of my evidence, including authoritative witnesses who will testify under oath.

Over a year ago I publicly challenged the Government to test my charges in court, and offered to go to jail as a rabble rouser if I could not back up my charges. Their only public response was to stage the so-called "Fort Knox Gold Inspection Visit" on September 23, 1974—and that, too, was a total fraud as you are about to hear. The time has come to make these things public because we have now exhausted our administrative remedies. If you are not a lawyer, you may not realize that you cannot simply walk into court and sue someone at will, especially if that someone is the United States Government. You must establish that you at least have a valid basis for going to court, or the court will not hear the case. The purpose of this is to prevent abuse of the courts through frivolous lawsuits, suits for harassment, etc.

In the case of the federal government, suit cannot be brought

until you have exhausted your administrative remedies. This is the general rule—that is, until you have given the appropriate agencies of the federal government an opportunity to redress your grievances. This we have now done. We have now gone to Congress, we have gone to the Treasury, we have gone to the Justice Department, we have gone to the General Accounting Office (GAO), and we have gone to the top of this Administrative Accounting Office, the Comptroller General of the United States. We have corresponded and we have held meetings, we have petitioned, we have pressured, we have asked for answers—and we have received silence, evasions, and half truths. We have given information, and it has not been used. We have explored every avenue available to us for more than a year; and, my friends, the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL has not been cleared up in any way—just the opposite.

To give just one example. There is an official document obtained by us from the United States Mint with great difficulty some time ago entitled: "GOLD SHIPMENTS FROM THE UNITED STATES BULLION DEPOSITORY, FT. KNOX, KENTUCKY, January 1, 1961, to June 30, 1974."

Based on our own strictly confidential information, and with pictures, we were able recently to ask the following question of the United States Mint under circumstances in which they were under great pressure to give us a reply. Our question was, quote:

"What was shipped in the four tractor-trailer loads on January 20, 1965, from Fort Knox to railroad yards across the river to Jeffersonville, Indiana?"

This shipment does not show, my friends, on the official listing I named a moment ago, yet here is the astonishing answer contained in the letter from Mrs. Mary Brooks, the Director of the United States Mint, dated June 19, 1975, and I quote:

"On January 20, 1965, 1,762,381.353-fine ounces of gold from the Fort Knox Bullion Depository was shipped by way of rail from Jeffersonville, Indiana, to the United States Assay Office, New York, New York."

There is no explanation as to why this nearly 2-million-ounce shipment does not appear on the official listing, but this violent conflict among their own statements is only typical of the entire Fort Knox fiasco.

A year ago, the Chairman of the privately-owned Federal Reserve System, Dr. Arthur Burns, admitted in a letter to Congressman John Rarick that the assets of the Federal Reserve do not include gold; and yet, at the same time, official statements of the Federal Reserve did list gold as a prime asset, and they still do today. This discrepancy has never been cleared up, Congress taking a ho-hum attitude about it all. The only concrete result so far is that Congressman Rarick, who had been very popular with his constituents, was washed out of office last November with a sea of Rockefeller campaign funds which went to all of his opponents! It so happens that the aforementioned private owners of the Federal Reserve System are the Rockefeller interests, and they react very vigorously whenever anyone dares to poke around at this keystone of their economic empire.

Yes, the time has come to go to court, and while I must still save my actual evidence for court, the time has come to let you—the American people, the jury—on exactly what has been done, and how.

The foundations were laid for the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL during World War II when extensive hush-hush modifications were made to the Fort Knox Gold Depository. Originally the Fort Knox Gold Depository building was designed around a huge vault with two levels, the ground floor and the basement. One entered the building through the front entrance you have probably seen often in pictures, passed through a vestibule, and found himself in a corridor running to left and right. This same corridor went all the way around the building on all four sides of the huge vault. To reach the vault door, one would enter the building at the front entrance, follow the corridor to the right, and then continue on around the corner and along the right side of the building. Part way down this corridor one would come to the vault door, which was on the left or inner side of the corridor. On entering through the vault door, one found himself in another corridor inside the vault. Fronting on this corridor were a series of storage compartments about the size of jail cells (I call them bird cages) but with solid metal doors with individual locks on them. These cells or compartments were arranged in a sort of cellblock with the vault corridor passing all the way around it. That is, one could head off down this corridor inside the vault, walk around a center cellblock with compartment doors facing onto the corridor on all four sides, and finally wind up where he started. There were 20 of these jail-cell-like storage compartments inside the vault on the first floor of the vault. There were also stairs with which one could walk down to the basement level of the vault; and the arrangement at the basement level was the same—a square cellblock of 20 compartments fronting on a corridor which went all the way around.

What I have tried to describe so far was the main or Outer Vault, however it was not where the gold was kept. These small compartments, 40 in all, were for the storage of all sorts of other things—secret documents, precious metals other than gold, and a variety of other things.

But these were not where the gold was kept—instead, there was a sort of vault-within-a-vault known as the "Central Core Vault", which was reserved strictly for the storage of gold. Access to the Central Core Vault, which was located centrally and below ground, could only be obtained from a point at the basement level inside the Outer Vault structure I have described. Moving gold in and out of the Central Core Vault was, therefore, a relatively slow and tedious process.

But in the 1942-43 time period, major modifications were made to the Fort Knox vault structure under the direction of a mechanical engineer named Stanley Tatom, who was serving as an Army Major at that time. A rapid retrieval system for the gold was built in the rear of the Depository building where there are a pair of huge doors into which trucks can back for loading and unloading.

First, the six bird-cage compartments running along the rear of the Outer Vault on each floor were deleted. The vault corridors, which had formerly gone all the way around the cellblock on each floor, were then walled off where the row of compartments along the rear had been deleted. Thus the vault corridors no longer went all the way around, but now formed a "U" configuration with the base of the "U" turned toward the front of the Depository building. By lopping off the rear portion of the Outer Vault in this manner, space was created in the rear to accommodate the rapid retrieval system. In this space, in the center adjacent to the truck doors, was installed a powerful screw-type elevator passing from the ground floor down and to the

level of the Central Core Vault into which the elevator gave access. At the top of the elevator—that is, at the ground level in the rear of the Depository building, a massive vault door was installed. In effect, this vault door serves as nothing but a very elaborate elevator door since the only thing you can enter in, when you open it, is the elevator which then takes you down to the Central Core Vault where all gold is supposed to be stored.

Finally, the original access to the Central Core Vault from a location in the two-level main vault where the compartments are, was deleted. The building's interior walls and decor were then restored to something like their original appearance.

But now, thanks to the secret modifications, there is no longer a vault-within-a-vault arrangement. Instead, there are now two separate and independent vaults. One is a vault with all the jail-cell-like compartments in it, which was shown to the visitors last September. The other vault, which cannot be reached from within the vault the visitors saw, is the gold vault, the Central Core Vault, which can be reached only by the elevator in the rear of the building.

The compartments in the vault shown to the visitors were never intended for storage of gold; and, my friends, what the visitors saw last September were not gold bars—not even junk gold! It has now been confirmed to my satisfaction that what was seen by the visitors is a commodity known as "show gold"—lead bars covered with a layer of gold that is just thick enough to stand up under handling. This even helps explain the high alloy content responsible for the strange redness which many of the visitors last September noticed. Pure gold is extremely soft, and a thin layer over lead could all too easily be damaged and reveal the lead underneath. Highly alloyed gold—that is, impure gold—was therefore used that it would withstand handling. Thus they saw "junk gold" all right, but it wasn't even junk gold all the way through!

The visitors of Fort Knox last September of course had no way of knowing that there are two vaults, and no one told them. They were led to believe that the vault they entered with all the compartments was The Vault, and the Treasury had seen to it that none of the invited visitors were experts on gold, much less on the mysterious legendary place known as "Fort Knox."

The closest brush that the visitors had with stumbling onto the truth came when a reporter asked Mrs. Mary Brooks, the Director of the Mint, why the compartments were numbered in such a curious fashion—1 to 14 on one floor, and 21 to 34 on the other. Mrs. Brooks helpfully replied that she didn't know. Well, Mary, if you haven't figured it out by now, I'll tell you. The missing numbers—15 to 20 and 35 to 40—are those of the cells that were deleted in the secret modifications during the 1942-43 time period.

After the wartime modifications to Fort Knox were made, over 10 years were allowed to pass before the next major step in 1954. At that time a super-secret complete inventory was taken of the Fort Knox gold. This was not the same as a relatively cursory audit, so-called, of the gold which was done in 1953. The project in 1954 involved a complete count with weighing and assay sampling of all the gold there—about three-quarters of a million 400-ounce bars worth a total of 12-billion dollars ($12,000,000,000) at that time, and that was at the old price of $35 per ounce. That's twice as much as the Treasury ever claims to have now, and even these claims are complete lies. In

addition to all the weighing, counting, and checking against records, the 1954 inventory included the extraction of a plug of gold from every one-hundredth bar for assaying, and these samples were sent to Assay Offices all around the country to minimize the chance of any collusion to falsify the results. This seemingly enormous job was kept completely secret, and was completed in only nine weeks. All of the gold was, of course, in the Central Core Vault at that time—none was in the bird-cage compartments.

The contrast with the so-called GAO audit of the Fort Knox gold last fall can hardly be overstated. The alleged gold stock in 1974 was only half as large, and they can only claim to have examined about 20% of that. Assay samples were only taken from only about every thousandth bar—they were not plugged but merely small chips were taken which could be taken from a corner, say, without cutting through into the lead underneath. All the 99 samples were sent to a single location, the New York Assay Office, and only 54 of these have ever been stated to have been returned—with undefined results.

Finally, the results of the alleged 1974 GAO audit—which was performed, by the way, by 13 Treasury employees and only two GAO representatives—have never been published. The closest thing to it is a ridiculous little document printed in February 1975, which presents no findings of fact concerning the gold and timidly says only "We believe" the gold is there!

But returning to the 1954 gold inventory, the question arises:

"Why was it a secret? After all, the law requires an annual physical inventory of the nation's gold reserves."

This law has been generally circumvented and ignored; but one would think that when its requirements were satisfied for once, in 1954, the fact would have been made public. The reason for the secrecy of the comprehensive 1954 inventory, my friends, is that its purpose was not that defined by law. Instead, the Rockefeller interests were simply taking stock of the American gold reserves which they intended to start spiriting away a few years later.

In about 1960 after those who had worked on the secret 1954 inventory were safely gone from Fort Knox, the next step was taken. A system of record-keeping was set up to allegedly keep track of the gold by means of special ribbon-like metal seals on the doors of the compartments in the main vault—not where gold is supposed to be stored at all.

These seals had been in use on these compartments ever since 1937 when the gold was initially stored at Fort Knox. But gold was never in those compartments, just other things as I mentioned earlier. Nevertheless, attention was cleverly shifted to the old Outer Vault with the compartments, as if that was where the gold was. Seals were put on doors of compartments with gold alleged to be inside, and these seals were thereafter checked by the so-called "Annual Settlement Committees" in lieu of actually opening the locked compartments and checking the contents. Of course for all any Settlement Committee thereafter really knew, the compartments could have been empty since there was no way to see in through the solid door of each compartment. United States Mint personnel have recently stated, for the record, that the peephole through which the 1974 Fort Knox visitors peeped into, an unopened cell was drilled especially for that occasion. Thus they were at last ready for the looting of America's gold. The record-keeping system of the United States Mint now reflected only the status of the compartments in what remained of the

original Outer Vault!

Meanwhile the gold was actually still stored in the completely independent Central Core Vault, reachable only by means of the elevator in the rear. And in 1961 the looting began under the cloak of the London Gold Pool Agreement initiated that year.

Gold began flowing like water out of Fort Knox and the other Depositories, arousing the concern of Congressman Frank Chelf and others, but all attempts to stem the tide were brusquely waved aside by Rockefeller agents within our government. By 1968 this gold hemorrhage was used as an excuse to set up the two-tier Gold Market in place of the London Gold Pool. Further details of the recent events surrounding gold have been given already in my AUDIO BOOK tapes on "THE COMING DEPRESSION" and the "FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL."

So here we are—our economy mortally wounded by a scandal bigger than "Teapot Dome" and "Watergate" combined, and our government is sitting on it with all the power in its command!

Our great Justice Department refuses even to examine our evidence about this biggest theft in history—an act of treason and economic war on the American people. They have more important things to do, it seems, like finding ways to disarm the people in violation of the CONSTITUTION they are supposed to defend. The Treasury Department continues to defraud, mislead, and lie about their criminal activities. The General Accounting Office generally refuses to account for anything about our gold in any meaningful terms. And our elected representatives, with very few exceptions, have so far found every excuse in the book to look the other way about the whole thing. Meanwhile Fort Knox has been completely emptied of its gold, and the American dollar is about to die, according to Lenin's words.

Therefore, my friends, I continue to appeal to you to make your collective voices heard and your will felt. I have believed all along in this fight that the madness that now grips our government can still be rooted out and our freedom saved; but I am also convinced that only if you and I do our parts, as citizens, will this happen. As the toolmaker philosopher Tom Wilson says:

"We, the people, need to collectively shake our elected representatives like disobedient children and get them representing us again, instead of the powerful special interests dominated by the Rockefellers."

Until next month, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. May God bless each and every one of you. Thank you.

Audio Letter #3

Hello everybody. This is Dr. Beter speaking. Today is August 21, 1975 and this is my monthly Audio Letter #3. Today I want to discuss three major topics. The first two are in response to some things people have asked me about and the third topic has to do with some major shifts which are now in the works in the plans of the Rockefeller brothers. These topics are:

1. The Truth about the Assassination of President John F. Kennedy.

2. Some little known examples of economic power held by the

Rockefellers and how they hold that power.

3. How the Rockefeller Plans for World War III are being altered by Indira Gandhi's crackdown on the CIA in India.

Before I launch into these three topics, however, I want to respond to numerous inquiries I have received in a different vein. There are a number of specialized newsletters which deal with various aspects of political economics and I am often asked if I can recommend any of them. I believe I have a responsibility to direct you toward reliable information sources, which in general do not include the Rockefeller-dominated major news media. One dealing with general news is the Daily News Digest, published by

Research Publications

P.O. Box 27496

Phoenix, Arizona 85061

The other, which focuses primarily on financial affairs, is

International Moneyline

16 East Trail

Derian, Connecticut 06820

These complement rather than duplicate one another, and I suggest that you write to them both and decide for yourself. And now,

TOPIC #1

On November 22, 1963 the Nation and the World were shocked and stunned by a horrible news bulletin from Dallas, Texas. If you heard that bulletin, you probably remember exactly what you were doing when you first heard the impossible news. President John F. Kennedy, riding in a motorcade past thousands of friendly onlookers, had been shot.

All too soon our worst fears were realized as we were told that our President had been assassinated.

In remarkably short order, attention focused on a single suspect named Lee Harvey Oswald, who was promptly rounded up and jailed. Oswald's background was thoroughly documented in government files and was the type that would normally have subjected him to intense surveillance by the Secret Service during the President's visit to Dallas.

And yet, the fact that Oswald was an employee of the Texas Schoolbook Depository, right on the parade route, seemingly escaped attention ahead of time.

But immediately after the shooting he was immediately traced, cornered, and arrested. He was very nearly killed in a shoot-out in a movie theater, but instead shot and killed a police officer there and wound up being taken alive. Oswald's survival, however, was quickly remedied and on nation-wide television, no less. Arrangements were made for Oswald to be transferred from the Dallas jail to another location and TV crews were on hand to cover it.

As he was enroute from his jail cell to a waiting police car, a man named Jack Ruby, well known to the Dallas police and instantly recognized by them, was permitted to make his way to Oswald's side while still inside the police station.

Millions of people watched in utter disbelief as Ruby proceeded to shoot and kill Oswald before their very eyes.

Oswald had been protesting over and over that he had been made a patsy but now he would never get to explain what he meant.

Then Ruby himself was the next to go. Tough, rugged, healthy Jack Ruby strangely became ill and soon died while in jail. But Dorothy Kilgallen, the syndicated columnist, who was also famous as a panelist on the TV Show "What's My Line" announced that she was about to blow the case wide open. She said that she had talked with Ruby and was about to publish explosive material he had given her in her next column. By odd coincidence she never wrote the column, or at least, it was never published. Instead, she allegedly died from a mixed dosage of drugs and alcohol even though she reportedly had no history of using either to any significant extent. Thus began a nightmare of confusion, doubt, frustration, and fear for the American people.

Key people with information bearing on President Kennedy's murder died or vanished left and right in the months that followed, defying all laws of chance. The government's official investigation of the assassination was carried out, of course, by the Warren Commission appointed by our new President, Lyndon Johnson. The Commission was chaired by the then Chief Justice Earl Warren, who was actually guided to a considerable extent by a senior member of the Commission—then Congressman Gerald Ford.

Ford's political star rose continuously from then on and, of course, he is now our first appointed President.

The basic proposal for the 25th Amendment to the United States Constitution, under which both Ford and Nelson Rockefeller acquired their present offices by appointment, was introduced in the Senate only three weeks to the day after President Kennedy was killed—almost as if it was ready and waiting. This proposal was introduced on December 13, 1963, by Senator Birch Bayh, who had been put into office by none other than Nelson Rockefeller.

After the Warren Commission completed its work, Ford wrote a book strongly defending it. There is now a growing hue and cry to reopen the case. But if you think President Ford will ever do it, at least voluntarily, you had better think again.

All of this is no doubt familiar to you, thanks to the efforts of numerous others who have uncovered and publicized various matters relating to the assassination. But my friends, firm and clear answers still have not been given you by anyone, to my knowledge, on two absolutely central questions:

1. Why was John Kennedy killed?

2. And How?

Over the years we've been inundated with facts, allegations and theories through articles, books, radio and television programs and what have you. Yet, these most central questions remain unanswered. I think this is why I am being bombarded with questions about the JFK assassination and I think the time has come for me to tell you what I can about it.

First, the question of why President Kennedy was killed.

During the summer and early fall of 1962, Senator Kenneth Keating of New York embarked on a campaign to alert Americans to the presence of nuclear warhead missiles in Cuba aimed at the defenseless underbelly of the United States. For months he was ignored, scoffed at and ridiculed by appointed officials in the government. He might just as well have said "the gold is gone from Ft. Knox." Obviously such a thing was too mind-boggling to

be true. But after a while President Kennedy became concerned personally—that there might really be something to Senator Keating's charges. He decided that in any case they should, at least, be seriously investigated so that the country's fears could be put to rest if they proved untrue.

Such a course of action is nothing more than common sense and once the President took a personal interest in the matter it was quickly discovered that Senator Keating's patently ridiculous charges were true. We all know that within a matter of days, with the United States on a world-wide military alert, President Kennedy went on nationwide television to tell Americans about the missiles and to demand that Russia remove them immediately. The Cuban missile crisis was upon us!

A lot of Monday morning quarterbacking has been done in the years since. Many things have been debated such as whether or not he was wise in not demanding on-site inspections of Cuba afterwards to guarantee that all the missiles were really gone.

But regardless of any of these arguments, John Kennedy's courage in doing what he did was even greater than most Americans realize. For, he was not only confronting the Soviet Union in a deadly showdown, but he was also doublecrossing the Rockefeller interests, who had enabled him to become President in the first instance.

By exposing the Cuban missile build-up and stopping it just short of fully operational status, John Kennedy threw a massive monkey wrench into an attempt to speed-up the schedule of nuclear blackmail, which is part of the Rockefeller plan for complete control of America, in cooperation with their ancestral home—Mother Russia.

Thanks to Kennedy's action, an entirely new missile base in the Caribbean would now have to be found and developed to replace Cuba. As I say these words this job has been accomplished. The Republic of Guyana, a neighbor of Venezuela, has been turned into a complete police state by Forbes Burnham, who was put in office for that purpose by David Rockefeller. The Temehri Airfield in Guyana, 25 miles outside of Georgetown, bigger than JFK Airport in New York, was prematurely turned back to Guyana in 1965 by President Johnson in obedience to Rockefeller orders and it is now ringed by offensive nuclear missiles targeted on the Panama Canal and on cities in the United States. I have been warning about this situation for more than a year, but to no avail.

The removal of the Cuban missiles also meant that Russian military superiority over the United States would have to be achieved by a slower and harder way over a period of years. American military research and development would have to be stalled while Russia went all out to catch up and surpass us.

The Vietnamese conflict into which we were already being dragged for other purposes, could prove the ideal tool for this, causing us to waste our military resources by grinding up massive quantities in war without focusing much on improving military technology.

But here too, Jack Kennedy was getting in the way. Before he was killed he had already initiated a sequence of events which were to reverse an increasing Vietnamese involvement and extract us from the Indo-China combat scene relatively quickly. All of this meant that Jack Kennedy would have to go. He had launched his New Frontier with an idealistic view of an ambitious governmental program, which had been put together for him by

Rockefeller agents for purposes quite different from those he himself envisioned.

But, he was beginning to see the light about what was really going on, even stating in a broadcast that "Castro was a tool of an international conspiracy." Had he been given the chance he might in time have added up too many things correctly.

For his great act of brave patriotism in the Cuban Missile Crisis, President John F. Kennedy thus became a marked man. Agents of the CIA, which has been strictly a tool of the Rockefellers ever since it was started in 1947, arranged a series of possible assassination setups in 1963. As it happened, the one which was actually carried out was the one in Dallas. This brings us to how the assassination was actually carried out. Unfortunately, I know of no delicate way to discuss this aspect of the case which is critically important. But contrary to the Rockefeller agents who dominate the United States government today, I remain convinced that the American people are not children, that we all want the truth, can handle it if it is given to us straight and can sense when it is not being given to us.

As you know the Warren Commission concluded that Lee Harvey Oswald acted alone in killing President Kennedy. But this conclusion, which has been elaborately and vigorously defended by Gerald Ford, Walter Cronkite, and many other camp followers of the Rockefellers, rests on a premise that is a complete insult to the intelligence of every American. This premise is the so-called single bullet theory.

According to this theory, my friends, which was the official judgment of the Warren Commission, a single bullet fired from a barely operable 20-year-old rifle by a poor—repeat, poor—marksman named Oswald, passed through President Kennedy, changed course, went through a car seat, struck Governor John Connally, smashed a rib or two, then smashed his wrist, then injured his leg, leaving behind fragments which Connally still carries in his body today, and then ended up in perfect laboratory specimen condition, completely undamaged except for the ballistic marks used to trace Oswald's gun.

This single bullet theory is such nonsense that we would probably throw a mystery novel in the trash in disgust, if it contained an episode so silly and amateurish. But this fairy-tale was the only way that the Warren Commission could end up with their predetermined conclusion that Oswald acted alone and that we should therefore put the idea of a conspiracy out of our minds. Of course, Oswald was not around to tell his side of the story, but never mind. A note was conveniently found which we were assured Oswald had written explaining that he planned to kill President Kennedy.

Well my friends, that single bullet did not kill President Kennedy, nor did any other sniper's bullet. In fact, technical analysis of the famous Zapruder and associated films done secretly for me reveals the President was murdered by means that were far more reliable than even the best sharpshooters.

Before I tell you what did happen, based on my own information, let me review several facts which to my knowledge have until now never been explained satisfactorily. These facts are gruesome, but they have to be observed and analyzed objectively if the truth is to be known:

Fact: Before the fatal shot, President Kennedy had already been

hit from behind by a shot which had caused him to lean slightly forward and face downward.

Fact: He was then killed by a shot that literally blew the upper rear portion of his head off. Several square inches of skull were blown away.

Fact: This fatal shot snapped his head and body violently backward and somewhat upward in his seat.

Fact: Debris from President Kennedy's head exploded to the rear, landing all over the left rear deck of the open top limousine. Kennedy was sitting in the right rear seat.

Fact: At the instant of the fatal shot the Zapruder film shows what appears to be a rush of something—a blast of some sort into Kennedy's face from downward and in front of him from a position within the car. This has never been commented upon, to my knowledge, by TV commentators when the Zapruder film has been telecast. But watch for this blast from within the car. It's there.

Fact: The Presidential limousine in which the assassination occurred was dismantled and destroyed within 48 hours. This was a grossly illegal destruction of material evidence.

Fact: Pathologists and researchers, who have recently been admitted to the National Archives, report that the remains of President Kennedy's brain, another crucial piece of evidence, is strangely missing, misplaced, gone!

Here now is my conclusion based on these facts, plus technical opinions which have been provided to me confidentially. I challenge the United States government to prove me wrong.

The Conspirators left nothing to chance or the vagaries of marksmanship. President Kennedy was killed by device—mounted inside the limousine and fired at him from point blank range. The murder weapon was, of course, hidden, mounted inside the seat upholstery in front of the President.

Based on the appearance of the blast in the Zapruder film, it's possible that the murder weapon was essentially an extremely sawed off shotgun, hidden in the seat upholstery ahead of him. But it appears much more likely that the blast was produced by what is known as a shaped charge in a special mounting. A shaped charge is a specially configurated explosive device which essentially produces a focused explosion—that is, an explosion that mostly aims in one direction instead of going in all directions like a stick of dynamite. A shaped charge is what enables a bazooka to blast a Sherman Tank out of action and shaped charges come in many sizes including some small enough to have been hidden easily in the Kennedy limousine.

An advantage of the shaped charge, from the Conspirators' view point, is that contrary to a gun or shotgun it would not produce a bullet or buckshot which might be found by someone in the vicinity and cause undesirable questions to be asked. The only problem with the shaped charge would be its noise. Such a bang would tend to attract the attention of others in the car. However, the Conspirators knew that Jackie Kennedy would be too distraught and preoccupied with Jack himself after the blast to have such details register, and the driver of the car would also be preoccupied with the urge of business of trying to maneuver out of the ambush. But that still left Governor John Connally, riding in the front seat ahead of the President. The sound of

the shaped charge could be expected to attract his attention, even if it was muffled and partially lost in the confusion of gunshots from snipers.

The possibility existed that Connally alone might be able to detect that some sort of device had been fired just behind him inside the car. Therefore John Connally was a specific target in the ambush along with Kennedy. He was not, as has often been supposed, merely the victim of a stray bullet, much less the victim of a bullet that had first struck Kennedy as alleged by the Warren Commission. Connally was potentially the single most dangerous witness to the assassination. So, it was imperative that he be incapacitated or killed outright. It did not really matter whether Connally was killed or just seriously injured, so long as his ability to observe events clearly was ruined. This they, of course, accomplished.

Thus multiple sharpshooters were firing at the motorcade for several purposes as it passed through Dealey Plaza. First they were to create an ambush environment—a distraction so that the murder blast from within the car would not be recognized for what it was. Second they were to shoot Governor Connally. Merely as a third priority they were also to hit the President with a shot or two just as insurance against any possible malfunction of the murder device mounted in the car. Vice President Lyndon Johnson was not a target at all.

Once it is recognized that the murder blast came from within the car from a position of firing slightly upward into Kennedy's face, all the contorted and forced explanations you have heard up to now about a lot of things cease to be necessary. The bazooka-like blast very naturally threw him violently backward, inflicted the incredibly massive head wounds that killed him and threw debris all over the rear deck of the car. Furthermore, it is now all too clear why the Conspirators would have wanted such an elaborately rigged car destroyed quickly afterwards—something which could scarcely have been done, by the way, without orders or at least approval from the new President Lyndon Johnson. It is also obvious why Kennedy's preserved brain has been spirited away from the National Archives. One look at the wounds inflicted by the murder weapon in the car would cause all of the conclusions of the Warren Commission to be thrown in the garbage bin—exactly where they belong.

With their new puppet Lyndon Johnson in the White House, the Rockefeller plans were once again safe. Indeed the Rockefellers squeezed every bit of mileage they could out of JFK's death.

As already mentioned, the basic outline of the 25th Amendment cooked up by Nelson Rockefeller years before was proposed to Congress only three weeks after Kennedy died. Also, seizing on the complete lie that he had been killed by a lonely loony with a cheap gun, a powerful campaign was launched to disarm the American people under the euphemistic banner of gun control. LBJ was used to ramrod massive chunks of the disastrous Rockefeller governmental program through Congress—all the time saying "Let's do it for Jack."

And the Vietnam War spigot, which Kennedy was preparing to turn off, was now opened wide by Johnson. The Rockefeller interests were thus served admirably. American technological creativeness was siphoned off to the benefit of Russia.

Deep involvement in Indo-China helped the Rockefellers to eventually attain control they desired over vast high quality oil reserves in that region which rival those of the Middle East and

South China Sea. And the Rockefellers, who are the biggest munition makers in the World—the merchants of death—reap tremendous profits at the expense of taxpayers money and GI's lives and injuries.

But some important questions still remain to be answered concerning the murder of President Kennedy: 1. Was the device which was the approximate cause of Kennedy's death triggered by someone in the limousine or on the limousine, or outside it? 2. Who prepared this device for the execution of President Kennedy? 3. Who had control over the limousine immediately prior to its use in Dallas? To generalize is to omit. It is in the details of things where the truth lies. There is no doubt in my mind that a number of persons were involved in the conspiracy to kill President Kennedy—no doubt at all.

It took a group of experts to install the death device. It took another group to cause distraction and it took only one person to trigger the death device—the shaped charge outside the limousine by remote control through a radio signal. President Nixon once said that only 3 persons in the United States understood power—one was himself, another was Nelson Rockefeller, the other was John Connally, who was almost eliminated in the Kennedy ambush. We all know that power corrupts and that thieves eventually fall out among themselves.

Nixon has been eliminated and now only Rockefeller and Connally remain. Which will win the power play to rule us all? Are we reduced to these two power blocs? Are there no other alternatives? Who will remain to use the CIA as his own personal tool? Why not abolish this CIA, this private super Gestapo agency, now controlled by the Rockefeller brothers themselves? Why not have a Congressional investigation and a grand jury investigation by opening the Kennedy Assassination to answer these and other questions? I leave it to you dear listeners.

TO BE AWARE IS TO CARE AND TO CARE IS TO ACT!

I turn now to Topic #2.

Topic #2—A generation ago the so-called "Third Generation of the Rockefellers" began rapidly taking over the reins of one of the world's biggest economic empires from their father, John D. Rockefeller, Jr. Of the six members of the Third Generation (five brothers and a sister), two proved to be relatively easygoing and content, by Rockefeller standards, with their immense inherited wealth. These two were the sister Abby and the late Winthrop Rockefeller, who served as Governor of Arkansas for a time. But the other four brothers were incredibly ambitious, more so than even their grandfather, John D, Sr., and more ruthless as well. They considered the immense empire they had inherited to be merely a convenient springboard from which to launch really big things.

Their father, John D., Jr., had been in the forefront of those who sought to dismantle the Christian faith and remake it into a humanistic man-made philosophy; and in this connection he had brought up his children to believe that they were uniquely endowed and chosen to rule the world. In the case of the Four Brothers—John D. Ill, Nelson, Laurance, and David—this training "took", and for several decades these four brothers have worked tirelessly as a unit in a relentless conquest for control of America and domination of the world for their own Mother Russia. In this connection they were simply carrying forward some of the things that their father and grandfather had already started, but they did so with greater diligence and vastly greater resources

than their forebearers had had at their disposal.

The Four Brothers long ago divided up the world into spheres of influence for each to concentrate on. John D. Ill carved out Asia and Africa for his special attentions and also emerged in the forefront of many so-called philanthropic activities, although the philanthropic image or halo is one cultivated by all of the Rockefellers. As I mentioned in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 1 for June 1975, John was personally involved in the spy-nest plotting at Lee, Massachusetts, which laid the groundwork for the Pearl Harbor attack which dragged an unwilling America into World War II. His participation in this plotting was done under the cloak of a supposedly philanthropic international activity called the "Institute of Pacific Relations", or IPR. After the war the IPR was abolished after Congressional investigations exposed its infamous role against America.

It's interesting that John is taking a more visible stance than usual these days, heading the propaganda drive that is intended to pave the way for the secret "NEW CONSTITUTION" I've described in my latest AUDIO BOOK on that subject. For example, the Rockefeller-controlled "Hertz Rent-A-Car Company" has just launched a new magazine for customers called "NUMBER ONE", and the inaugural issue contains a cover article titled, quote: "JOHN D. ROCKEFELLER III - SOME STRONG IDEAS AMERICANS CAN USE IN THE SECOND REVOLUTION." In that article John's involvement in the IPR is paraded as if it were something to be proud of; but it doesn't mention that after Japan was defeated in the War (that the IPR helped bring about), John D. Rockefeller III swooped down with his entourage and proceeded to take over the Japanese economy lock, stock, and barrel, consolidating great chunks of it into a huge cartel called the Zaibatsu.

The so-called economic miracle of Japan is in fact no more

surprising than the remarkably American appearance of this Asian

giant since the War. Since World War II both America and Japan

have been under Rockefeller control. After all, even SONY stands

for nothing more than the former Standard Oil Company of New York!

Turning now to Nelson, I have said much elsewhere, particularly in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 1; and suffice it to say that he carved out the United States and Latin America for his special focus, and has played the role of "inside man" in our Government ever since the days when he was the so-called "closest advisor" of Franklin D. Roosevelt, who was a complete puppet of the Rockefellers. To enhance his Latin American image, Nelson has for many years pretended great enthusiasm over Latin American art of all kinds; but in Latin America itself his rapacious economic activities in the past helped create the image which has been termed "The Ugly American", and he was long ago labeled "Public Enemy No. 1" by certain Latin American newspapers.

Then there is Laurance Rockefeller, who received some unfavorable publicity during the confirmation hearings for Nelson's Vice-Presidency. It was Laurance, of course, who financed the celebrated anti-Goldberg book to help brother Nelson in his gubernatorial reelection campaign in 1970; and judging from the testimony, shelling out $60,000 for this purpose apparently took about as much deliberation as buying a box of paper clips would for you or me. Moral scruples don't appear to have been a problem but appearances were, since the $60,000 was carefully laundered through a roundabout legal route so that the source of the book's financing would not be readily apparent.

Lest anyone should consider such shenanigans suspicious

though, the testimony contains a beautiful example of the kind of logic the Rockefeller Brothers use, regulated to befuddle their critics. It was stated that this circuitous routing and disguising of funds for the book wasn't laundering at all but merely a very common practice in Rockefeller dealings. In other words, they hide what they do all the time, so therefore it must be OK. Here, my friends, is just one hint of the fact that Rockefeller control is extremely pervasive throughout our society, but it is hidden from our view more often than not. At any rate, Laurance's domain includes the airlines, aerospace, and arms industries of the Rockefellers who are the world's biggest and most aggressive "merchants of death." It also includes the Stock Market and its manipulation. As you see the stock market crash I have been warning about developing before our eyes, you can send your Thank You notes to Laurance Rockefeller.

Finally we come to David Rockefeller, the youngest of the four brothers and the most powerful of them all. David is Chairman of the mammoth Chase Manhattan Bank, one of the two or three largest bank networks in the world with over 2000 branches in some 98 countries throughout the entire world. Chase Manhattan is a prime source of loan funds to the largest companies in America and abroad, and its Trust Department owns huge amounts of stock in companies that constitute the backbone of the American economy. By granting or denying loans, by hiring ex-CIA agents, by applying pressure on companies that are in debt to Chase Manhattan (including pressure to change the make-up of Boards and Directors of corporations, banks, insurance companies, etc. by selectively buying and selling stocks and by other means), David Rockefeller is in a position to pull some very powerful strings just through Chase Manhattan alone.

But even Chase Manhattan Bank is the only tiny visible tip of David Rockefeller's iceberg. David Rockefeller is no ordinary banker—he is the key custodian of the incredible world-wide Rockefeller financial empire and through it he is the most powerful international banker in the world. The Rockefellers control not only Chase Manhattan Bank but many of the other key money houses both in America and abroad. They control the First National City Bank of New York, the largest in New York City, plus a number of the other major New York banks. They also control many banks where their Cartel is not widely recognized—such as the Bank of America which is the largest bank in the United States, and also the multinational banks abroad including many investment banking houses here and abroad.

The fact that the Rockefellers have succeeded in taking over the huge Morgan interests, which used to be the biggest competitors of the Rockefellers in America, comes as a distinct shock to many people. After all, Morgan Guaranty Trust reportedly maintains a stock portfolio worth 23-1/2 billion dollars at the present time, the biggest in America.

Well, my friends, no less than 16 of the 24 Directors of Morgan Guaranty Trust are now Rockefeller agents; and since some have found it unbelievable that Morgan Guaranty is now Rockefeller dominated, I am now going to name these 16 Directors and Rockefeller-controlled organizations in which they are kingpins. They are:

J. Paul Austin—of Coca Cola.

R. Manning Brown, Jr.—of the N. Y. Life.

Frank T. Cary—of IBM, one of the five multi-nationals which the Rockefellers used in 1971 to 1972 to launch STAGFLATION through

monetary manipulations in Europe.

W. Graham Clayton, Jr.—of the Southern Railway.

Emilio G. Collado—of Exxon, the largest corporation in the world and the apple of the Rockefellers' eye.

Chas. D. Dickey, Jr.—of Scott Paper.

John T. Dorrance, Jr.—of Campbell Soup.

Louis W. Foyle—of Bethlehem Steel.

Thomas S. Gates—formerly of the Defense Department.

Howard W. Johnson—of M.I.T.

Donald P. Kircher—of the Singer Co.

Donald E. Procknow—of Western Electric.

Warren M. Chaflee—of Ralston Purina.

Geo. P. Shultz—one of the Ft. Knox gold conspirators, who has been paid off with the presidency of the Rockefellers' Bechtel Corporation and as a consultant to many of David Rockefeller's corporations.

Olcott D. Smith—of Aetna Life & Casualty.

Henry S. Wingate—of International Nickel Company of Canada.

Their financial empire also includes many of the largest life insurance companies. It also includes control of the privately owned central bank system that causes our money to be printed—the Federal Reserve System.

Through control, direct and indirect, of both the Federal Reserve and the top officials of the United States Treasury, David Rockefeller was able to remove America's gold, as I have discussed elsewhere. For details on that, I refer you to my AUDIO BOOK on the "FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL" and to the update in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975. David Rockefeller himself is a Director of the New York Federal Reserve Bank Board of Directors. Paul Volcker is now President of the New York Federal Reserve Bank, and he was a former Assistant Secretary for International Monetary Affairs, and he helped David to take the gold from Fort Knox with the other people involved.

The Fort Knox Gold Scandal cover-up conspiracy keeps right on spreading as they try to cover their tracks. The Chairmen of the Senate and House Banking Committees—Senator Proxmire and Congressman Henry Reuss, respectively—are trying to keep the lid on the Fort Knox gold controversy long enough to let the Treasury devise some sort of publicity gimmick to trick the public once again, as they did with the so-called Gold Inspection visit in September 1974. And to this end I have just been informed that an attempt is now being made to put some borrowed gold bars into the "Central Core Vault" at Fort Knox, whose existence I revealed for the first time last month, and which has been empty up to this point; but it is going to be very, very difficult to return over 753,000 bars of gold to that Central Core Vault.

All of these things and much more, my friends, lie within David Rockefellers' bailiwick. It was David Rockefeller who single-handedly turned our Middle East policy around in February

1974 in order to prevent his Middle East oil empire from being wrenched out of Rockefeller control in connection with the Arab oil embargo. King Faisal of Saudi Arabia was, as you will recall, a key to the success of that unified Arab action; and in doing what he did, he was placing what he judged to be the Arabs' best interests above those of the Rockefellers. For 30 years since acquiring the Saudi oil fields by means of World War II and developing them initially with free G.I. labor at taxpayers' expense, the Rockefellers had had their own way. The net price of Arab oil to the Rockefellers during that 30 years—thanks to charge-backs and various devices—was only five (5) cents a barrel. Imagine! Crude oil at 5 cents a barrel for over 30 years! What immense profit inured to the Rockefellers. But King Faisal had now decided to put his own peoples' interest first—just as John Kennedy had done for America in 1963. Both actions amounted to a double-crossing of the Rockefellers, and both resulted in assassination little more than a year afterward.

It is not possible to discuss the dimensions of Rockefeller control more than superficially in so short a time, but perhaps you can begin to grasp some idea how it works. They own controlling interests in over 300 multinational banks and corporations, hiding the bulk of this ownership through the use of many thousands of nominees and so-called street names. Through their control of banks and foundations they are able to create well-disguised director interlocks through which they are able to run their entire giant economic empire as one huge cartel. The monopolistic practices of John D. Rockefeller, Sr. pale by comparison with the runaway international monster that has been put together by the Four Rockefeller Brothers; and this economic empire built around multinational corporations, which yield allegiance to no country but to the Rockefellers instead, is increasingly a political empire as well. As time goes on, their control over what remains outside their grasp is spreading even more rapidly.

On July 30, 1975, the Rockefeller interests took a decisive step toward consolidation of their control over still another major power base in America—the Teamsters Union. On that day, according to information which has just reached me, the abduction of former Teamster President James R. Hoffa was accomplished on behalf of the Rockefellers. The reason: Frank Fitzsimmons, the current Teamster president, is being drawn into the web of Rockefeller control. Hoffa, embarking on a concerted drive to regain control of the Teamsters, constituted a distinct threat to Rockefeller progress in this area, and the Rockefellers seek every bit of control that they can possibly achieve over the distribution systems of our nation as a critical tool in producing massive supply disruptions and shortages in the near future. These, in turn, are to form part of the economic breakdown by which they plan to make us accept their dictatorial "NEW CONSTITUTION." The stakes are very high, and Jimmy Hoffa got in the way, possibly without ever realizing it.

I turn now to Topic #3.

Topic #3—In October 1974 I recorded my first AUDIO BOOK entitled: "HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THIRD WORLD WAR." In that tape I reported that World War III was being planned to begin in a few short years—that it would be NUCLEAR war with America as the main battleground, and that it would drag for over a year. Then in March 1975 in my AUDIO BOOK on the "FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU", I reported that the war plans were still on track, and explained their purpose to you more fully.

As I mentioned in that second tape, the Rockefellers were beginning to be thrown off balance by their difficulties in keeping the lid on the Ft. Knox Gold Scandal which, if it ever breaks into the open, could blow them out of the water in so far as their dictatorship plans are concerned. And as I say these words, these and other problems have so far prevented Nelson Rockefeller from making good his plan to expel Gerald Ford from the presidency and confer that office upon himself. There are ominous signs lately that he is now gearing up to do this as soon as the time is ripe. It hasn't happened yet. Yes, Nelson Rockefeller has probably made me look foolish in the eyes of some people because he failed to become President on his schedule of June 1975. I began publicly spotlighting Rockefeller's plan to do this over a year ago before Gerald Ford became President and before he surprised everybody by selecting Rockefeller, from an initial field of fifteen, to nominate him as Vice-President. But, my friends, my very purpose in revealing the confidential information I receive about these things is to prevent them from happening if I can.

I am not one of those who by psychic or other means go around predicting doom and gloom, and then gleefully saying, "See, I told you so" if it comes true. The things I am trying to warn you about are terrible things—not just for you but for me too. I don't want them to happen. This is a beautiful, wonderful land that God has given to us to live in, and I want my three small children as well as yours to have the blessings of freedom with which to enjoy it when they grow up. In this spirit, I am glad to be able to tell you of changes in the Rockefeller plans whenever these reflect failures or slippages in their diabolical scheming. And I can report to you that alterations in the war plans are now in the works, not because of anything I have done but because of what Indira Gandhi of India has done.

You probably have heard some short-lived news reports in connection with recent events in India suggesting that the CIA might have been involved in some way. These suggestions were quickly brushed aside and hushed up by our own Government, but they happen to be true. If you share the image that most Americans have of India, you probably think of teeming over-populated cities filled with underfed people, sacred cows wandering through the streets, vast bureaucrats problems, and much else—and not much else at that. But India is much more than that, possessing a very considerable industrial base and relatively unexploited natural resources, such as always attract the greedy attention of the Rockefellers.

For five years now the CIA has been working its way into position to stage a take-over of India, just as has been done elsewhere repeatedly. Just as Portugal was thrown into revolution over a year ago under a ten-year Rockefeller plan; and just as the Union of South Africa is scheduled for extinction by the Rockefellers three years from now, India was under attack. And Indira Gandhi, the only really strong leader in India today, was being systematically undermined by an Indian-style Watergate staged there, as here, by the CIA in behalf of the Rockefellers.

But Indira Gandhi has confounded everybody. She confounded everyone with her ferocious counterattack. It's tragic that at this point at least she has gone so far with this counterattack that she appears to have destroyed the very foundations of freedom she intended to defend. But what triggered the recent events in India was the meddling of the CIA in her internal affairs. As a result, the war plans I have warned you about up to now are being put on a back burner. They could come to the fore again; but India is such a huge prize that the war plans are

now being revised on India's account.

The new plan that is rapidly emerging now calls for war to begin in March 1977 with Red China and Japan attacking India. The alliance under which this would occur is already forming now. While our eyes were focused recently on the Helsinki Summit Conference to ratify Soviet conquests in Europe, the real action was going on in Asia. The Sino-Japanese Treaty of Peace and Friendship is now being negotiated as the first step toward a military alliance. As things are progressing now, these two will attack India in 1977 and Russia will come to the so-called aid of India. The United States will then be sucked into the fray, serving as a factory to supply Russia and India, and the purpose of all would be to take over India in a different way.

All of this reflects a rapid and major change away from the trend that existed prior to the recent events in India. This war is planned sooner than the original schedule for World War III since the new plans no longer call for Russia to join the new Far East Axis but instead to be on the other side. And, of course, the new plans do not involve hostilities on American soil as they stand right now. Keep in mind though that further changes can and probably will occur. In particular, should Indira Gandhi be toppled from power again soon, it may well enable the CIA to put the original take-over plans back on track, and that would probably restore the original plan for war on the United States by way of an attack on the Panama Canal by atomic missiles fired from Guyana. The Helsinki Summit Conference now frees Soviet Russia to turn her attention to the East—that is, to China and try to encircle China.

Let's all pray that the ugly plans for conquest by the Rockefeller Brothers will yet be stopped, and let's all do our part as citizens to cause these plans to be stopped! Let's bring them to justice for stealing our gold, and from there let's start restoring sanity, integrity, and true representation in our government.

The CONSTITUTION, my friends, protects all of us, and we should vote out all of those people who are now in the control of the Rockefellers. We should break up their large socialist corporations and re-establish free enterprise. We should eliminate the large corporate and subsidized farms and return the land they own to individuals for small farms. And we should eliminate the Personal Income Tax with its resultant enslavement of the middle class and the poor, while the Rockefellers go relatively free of tax by their use of tax-free foundations and devices .

Thank you. Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #4

Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is September 12, 1975, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 4.

As usual, there is a great deal more going on right now than meets the eye. The major media mislead the American people daily simply by presenting only those portions of the truth about events that add up to produce a desired impression. Thus you

can't hope to grasp the true significance of news events unless and until you learn to analyze the scanty facts in the news for yourself. Learn to separate fact from opinion. You are not given enough real facts to come to your own clear-cut, logical decisions except perhaps in the area of sports. Instead, the gaps are filled in for you by commentary designed to lead you to conclusions that are not really your own. This is why I am trying to open your eyes to the way things really work and to give you key information that you need to have.

To this end, I want to discuss the following three topics today:

Topic #1—THE INTERNATIONAL MONETARY FUND "GOLD SALE AGREEMENT" AND THE DETHRONING OF THE UNITED STATES DOLLAR

Topic #2—ASSASSINATION POLITICS AND SUBTLE MANEUVERINGS IN THE COUNTDOWN TOWARD DICTATORSHIP

Topic #3—THE RAPIDLY MERGING OUTLINES OF THE PLANNED 1977 WAR IN ASIA.

At the end I also hope to mention some brief hints about what you, the individual concerned American, can do to help stem the tide and save our beloved land.

Topic #1—In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975 I discussed the setback which David Rockefeller experienced at the June meeting of the "International Monetary Fund", or IMF. Speaking through his agents in the United States Treasury, he had expected to succeed in persuading the member nations of the IMF to sell all of the IMF gold, and was ready to buy the IMF gold as soon as it was sold. Much to David's surprise and chagrin he failed in June 1975 because of French opposition based on their own awareness of the true status of Fort Knox and America's gold reserves. As I mentioned in that AUDIO LETTER, the Rockefeller interests went to work in a feverish search for a means of achieving their objective—that is, a decision to sell IMF gold at the next IMF meeting in September, this month. And if you paid any attention to the news early this month, you know that this time the Rockefellers did achieve a hasty compromise agreement. In a moment I will explain exactly what was decided about potential gold sales at the early September meeting of the IMF, but first I want you to notice the startling quid pro quo which the Treasury accepted on behalf of David Rockefeller as the price of selling the IMF gold.

For years now the United States Treasury has been debunking the monetary role of gold as obsolete, barbaric, and no longer needed. In this connection, the Treasury has been fighting for years to bar Central Banks from buying gold on the free market. The reason for this is to allow the interests controlled by David Rockefeller to corner the gold for themselves while their deliberately-produced runaway inflation ruins the rest of us stuck with paper money that has no backing. But at the September 1975 IMF meeting this position which the United States has stuck to uncompromisingly for years was suddenly abandoned. Why? What was it that made the United States agree to let Central Banks buy gold? They already had the right to sell it. What caused such a total defeat for David Rockefeller and such a dramatic reversal of a fundamental policy built up now for years?

My friends, what caused the result is the spreading effect of our exposure of the Fort Knox Gold Scandal. The general American public still doesn't know about it, thanks to the news blackout imposed by CBS, ABC, the New York Times, the Washington Post, the

Los Angeles Times, and other major media which are controlled and intimidated by the Rockefeller Brothers themselves. But the most knowledgeable people in the financial community here and abroad increasingly do know that something is very fishy indeed about the United States Treasury Department. In short, the heat is on!

Since we revealed the existence of the Central Core Vault in July and explained its role in the gold theft and fraud at Fort Knox, the Treasury knows that we know exactly what they have been doing, and how. The Conspirators know that if my associates and I ever are allowed to present our evidence in a court of law before a grand jury or in a Congressional investigation, their fate is sealed. Their game, therefore, is to try to keep that from happening by keeping the public fooled and unaware of the truth. To this end, the Rockefellers made their big concession at the September IMF meeting in order to get some IMF gold returned to the Treasury.

Under the terms of the Agreement, five-million ounces of IMF gold is to be returned to the United States, from whence it came. This gold was originally promised for sale to the "insiders" within the Rockefeller circle, but now they wanted instead to display or use it in gold auctions to keep the public fooled. In this connection, on August 21, 1975, shortly before the latest IMF meeting, the Treasury even held a well-publicized meeting with private gold dealers to discuss the question of holding auctions. This was pure propaganda and bluff, and intended to lend weight to any future auctions of gold obtained from the IMF. The frantic maneuverings to snatch some IMF gold for propaganda auctions is simply a replay of what they did last December to have a little gold to auction off. On December 9, 1974, the Treasury illegally emptied the tiny "Exchange Stabilization Fund" of its two-million ounces of gold, as I have mentioned in previous tapes. That was done simply to have something for the Treasury to sell in small propaganda auctions, since the rest of our gold reserves were long gone.

With this important perspective in mind, listen please to what the IMF did on August 31, 1975, at the beginning of their so-called September meeting:

No. 1—The widely publicized "Gold Sale Agreement" of the IMF is an agreement in principle, a conditional agreement. The IMF is to meet again in January 1976 in Jamaica to discuss the Exchange Rate question. If, and only if IMF members agree on that in January, then the conditional Gold Sale Agreement, which has just been announced, will take effect. The stakes are so high for David Rockefeller and his partners in crime that I predict agreement will be reached at the January meeting in Jamaica. The political will is there. The IMF gold will then be officially released, although I am informed that steps are already being taken now behind the scenes, illegally and prematurely, to take possession of the five-million ounces of gold and put it back in Fort Knox.

By the way, there have been rumors lately that Mrs. Mary Brooks, the Director of the United States Mint, has tendered her resignation, but that it has not yet been accepted because it would look so bad. There are indications that her superior said, in effect, quote: "Just hang on for a few more months, Mary, while we get this whole thing about Fort Knox out of the way. Then you can go, if you like." Be that as it may, we had one of our sources contact Mrs. Brooks, and here is what she said, quote: "There is nothing amiss at Fort Knox. I was there recently. I have never tendered my resignation, and I don't intend to do so. I don't know why these rumors keep coming up."

Asked if she knew about the rapid retrieval elevator system to the Central Core Vault, she did not deny it but just replied, quote: "Those kind of rumors come along all the time." Our source suggested to Mrs. Brooks that it would be a simple matter to open Fort Knox wide open to prove Dr. Beter wrong and, quote: "put an end to this matter once and for all." Her reply—and this is her exact reply—and I quote: "Oh, no! It would take weeks." All I can say to that, my friends, is: "Yes, Mary, it will take weeks to get the five-million ounces of gold back in Fort Knox." That is why I am informed there is some activity going on right now in Fort Knox. Meanwhile Mary Brooks is trying to brazen it out.

Returning to the IMF Gold Sale Agreement though, I should point out one other thing: Should there fail to be an agreement about Exchange Rates by the IMF in January in Jamaica, an unlikely event, than we will be back to Square One on IMF gold sales. Should that happen, David Rockefeller and his fellow "insiders" will have used the IMF gold sales decision as a scare tactic throughout this fall of 1975 to run down gold prices and take all the gold they can out of weak hands. Also, they made billions of dollars going "short." When the public becomes aware of this, gold prices will start up again.

No. 2—The interim or conditional Gold Sale Agreement specifies the following:

Of the approximately 150-million ounces of gold now owned by the IMF, one-sixth or 25-million ounces is to be sold on the open market or to member Central Banks. The latter is what will actually occur. True to Rockefeller tradition, by the way, this IMF gold sale to suit their own purposes has been painted as a philanthropic move to raise money to aid poor and developing nations.

Another one-sixth or 25-million ounces is to be returned to member nations of the IMF in proportion to the amounts of gold each nation originally contributed. Each nation may then keep or sell this returned gold, but you can bet they will keep it. Their own citizens will hang their Central Bankers if they don't.

Under this clause the United States is to receive about five-million ounces worth about $700,000,000 at current market prices. This amount, I am informed, has already been promised to the "insiders", but events may undo this when the Fort Knox Gold Scandal breaks nationally and world-wide. It is this five-million ounces of gold, equal to only about two percent (2%) of what the United States Treasury officially claims to have, that the Conspirators want desperately to get their hands on in case they need it for propaganda auctions or even another carefully-staged "peep show" at Fort Knox.

The remaining two-thirds of the IMF gold, or about 100,000,000 ounces, is to "stay put" in the IMF for the time being. There it will remain as backing for the so-called "Special Drawing Rights", or SDR's, of the IMF. The SDR is to become the new international monetary unit or standard of measure, the yardstick; and then the other strong currencies that now make up part of the basket of the 16 currencies which constitute the SDR's, will be the reserve currencies of the future, at least for the next two years. The dollar, therefore, is giving up its sovereignty as a sole reserve currency. The joker in this deck is that over half of an SDR is made up of the American dollar and British pound sterling, both of which lack gold backing. In the tremendous inflation ahead, the SDR will therefore be hobbling around on one leg with its only real support consisting of the

strong gold-backed currencies which comprise less than half its face value.

No. 3—and very important. Beginning January 197 6 the IMF members have agreed not, repeat NOT, to affix an official gold price for a period of two years, provided the January 1976 agreement on Exchange Rates takes place. This is exactly the development I have been warning about for over a year, based on information from my own confidential sources. They are behind schedule in obtaining this agreement, but the agreement itself is precisely on track. Once it is in place, they can easily make up for lost time in their plan to visit economic catastrophe on the United States and the world.

What the IMF agreed to in principle is to allow its members, including the United States, to ask their respective governments to abolish the official price of gold, which is now $42.22 an ounce, once the Exchange Rate agreement is reached in January 1976. This means that for the following two years there will be only a "market price" for gold, subject only to supply and demand plus massive massages by the Rockefeller interests to cause the price of gold to skyrocket. In other words, gold will be going private for two years starting in January 1976. The gold zoom signal of $180 an ounce, which I explained in my AUDIO BOOK recorded in October 1974, will be penetrated and cataclysmic inflation and economic chaos will erupt. After two years of this, with the economy of the world and especially of the United States in smoking ruins, David Rockefeller—the man who orchestrated the whole thing in the first place—presently plans to call an "International Monetary Conference" to at last restore gold to its traditional monetary role. David's plan is to officially repeg gold then at $2,000 an ounce—twenty times the current official price of $42.22 an ounce!

No. 4—After the two-year period just mentioned, according to the Gold Sale Agreement just reached by the IMF, Central Banks will be allowed to buy all the gold they want. As I have already pointed out, this complete reversal of a key feature of the Treasury's long standing gold-debunking campaign is directly traceable to the steadily building pressure of the Fort Knox Gold Scandal and the desperate need of the Conspirators to keep it covered up.

No. 5—Until January 1976 no sales of gold will be made by the IMF to world gold markets or to Central Banks at market prices. It would not yet be legal to do so, but I fully expect that agreement will be reached at Jamaica in January, and that IMF gold sales will then take place according to plans. Thus the United States dollar is now way over-valued.

The United States Treasury is most anxious to get its house back in order, in appearance at least, to prevent the public from becoming aware that Fort Knox is truly empty of its gold. The Treasury now holds less than 800,000 ounces of gold—a mere pittance left over from the 2,000,000 ounces it illegally took from the Exchange Stabilization Fund on December 9, 1974. The rest was used for the propaganda auctions by the Treasury in January and June of this year.

Gold fever will spread across the land in the near future as soon as the full significance of the IMF action is widely understood, and then the only questions will be not the price but the availability of gold. The gold market today is very thin as it is, and the "insiders" had to scare the weak sisters in order to make them disgorge their holdings.

As of now, David Rockefeller still plans for gold to be pegged at $2,000 an ounce, and for the new SDR's to be the standard unit of measure. The United States dollar will lose its status as a world currency reserve. Even now David Rockefeller's Chase Manhattan Bank is already linking some of its loans to SDR's. After all, who should know better than David that dollars are to be avoided?

For the next two years after January 1976, those countries having gold in their Central Banks will be able to enjoy a fast markup in the value of their gold reserves of 20 to 1. Can you imagine!—20 to 1. Therefore during that period, Central Banks will buy up at market prices the 25,000,000 ounces that will be for sale by the IMF. That gold will never reach the private gold market at all. But the United States has been deliberately made gold poor by the Rockefeller Brothers.

Having no gold left of any significance, we are now in the same leaky boat as Britain. And look what is happening to Britain, which is already on the road to advanced socialism! Cataclysmic inflation, deepening unemployment, and social and economic upheaval on the way to dictatorship are in store for all of us soon if the gold situation is not rectified. And so, my friends, we are in a race against time. David Rockefeller and his collaborators in and out of the Treasury seek delay, delay, delay. They want to use the IMF gold and other tricks to keep the American people fooled until it is too late. Time, unfortunately, is on their side. Those of us who would like to see our nation saved, on the other hand, are pressing with every means at our disposal for a full, open, honest INVESTIGATION of the whole thing without further delay.

In this connection, I want to read some telling words from the front page of the Daily News Digest for the week of September 1, 1975. (Their address, by the way, is: P. 0. Box 27496, Phoenix, Arizona 85061.) The headline is just one word: "WHY?" I now quote:

"The Fort Knox gold story is far from dead. There is something rotten, and the stink has spread across the land like a fog. Thousands of readers have followed our series closely. Like them, we have waited in vain for satisfactory answers to questions raised by Dr. Peter David Beter and his associate, Ed Durell. An exchange of letters with the United States Bureau of the Mint has produced nothing but double talk.

The key question regarding the Central Core Vault still remains a mystery. Is the gold there or isn't it?

Why is it so difficult to send a delegation to Fort Knox, open the Vault and reveal its content—or lack of content? Why have no members of Congress taken it upon themselves to settle this matter? Is courage such a missing virtue in Washington that this can't be or won't be done?!

Why has the nation's press avoided the story with an intensity that is amazing? Is this not perhaps the biggest news story in the civilized history of the world? It certainly has that possibility. An evil group of individuals that can loot a nation's Treasury, as has been charged, to the tune of $11,000,000,000 certainly deserves some attention, doesn't it?

And the radio and TV industry didn't even mention the initial charges, and covered only the "peep show" staged at Fort Knox last September.

But the newspapers, where are they? Why the blackout on the Fort Knox story? Is there some powerful force that scares them into submission? Or would they lose so much advertising that they can't run the story? Or do the major editors think the story is so outrageous as to merit no attention? Outrageousness certainly didn't prevent Jane Fonda and others from getting front-page coverage!

Yes, something stinks. IS THE GOLD THERE OR ISN'T IT? Which of our Congressmen has the guts to find out?"

Finally, here is an item for you to think about if you are tempted to swallow the Rockefeller propaganda about the swaggering economic power of the Arabs and oil-producing states:

On September 5, 1975, a reporter posed the following question to Dr. Abdul-Rahman Al-Atteqi, Minister of Finance of Kuwait, at the National Press Club, quote: "None of the oil-producing states spoke during the World Bank and IMF meetings. Why not?"

Dr. Al-Atteqi answered, quote:

"Addressing people seems to be of no meaning. If the United Nations or World Bank meetings had a time to listen exactly as good listeners should, everyone would speak, but most of the speeches just go into the air. Nobody hears it—whispering, most of the delegates out of the room—and then it is a text in a book. If it happens, sometimes somebody reads it. This is why. And secondly, it is known who runs the policy of the Monetary System of the world, and we cannot for the time being compete with them. We are in their hands. So this is a fact. We have to live with it unless we break through—and we are looking for that time."

His answer met with knowing applause. It expresses not only the predicament of the oil-producing nations: it expresses yours and mine as well.

Topic #2—On September 5, 1975, in Sacramento, California, a dress rehearsal was held for the assassination of our figurehead president, Gerald Ford. A young woman named Lynette Fromme got to within two feet of the President before being stopped by a Secret Service agent. As she was bundled off by the Secret Service with a look of horrified surprise on her face, she reportedly shouted: "It didn't go off!"

The very next day the news media were filled with the entirely predictable conclusion of officials connected with the case. Miss Fromme, they assured us, had acted alone. The possibility of a conspiracy—that "dirty word"—was quickly pooh-poohed and discounted. True, she had been given the gun by someone else, but that couldn't mean anything. And, yes, her landlady did reportedly say that just lately Miss Fromme had suddenly started paying her rent with $100 bills, but that can't be anything but coincidence. To give due credit to the officials involved though, it should be mentioned that some of them did become predictably excited about one thing—namely, the often-stated need to disarm the populace under the banner of "gun control." One official even ranted that this is so acute and so immediate as to call for, quote: "wartime measures."

Well, everybody, it so happens that the incident on September 5 was not intended to injure President Ford. On July 17 and 18, 1975, I said in a speech at the Santa Monica Civic Center in California, and I quote: "By September 1975 we will know if Rockefeller is to be stopped. Some very important developments

are in the making." By this I was referring to the all-out power struggle that is now going on out of the public view, and the potentially decisive importance of this month, September 1975, in the Rockefeller timetable for Dictatorship in America. This power struggle, though it is well hidden from the general public, is escalating to the vicious level of assassination politics which burst onto the American scene twelve years ago with the murder of President John F. Kennedy. Assassinations have been a recurring part of the American scene ever since, including those of Dr. Martin Luther King, Robert F. Kennedy, and recently Jimmy Hoffa, among others. And this volcano of violence threatens to erupt yet again, now, as rival factions within and close to the Rockefeller camp jockey for position in the Dictatorship now forming.

Last month, by the way, in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 3 I revealed for the first time the truth about how and why President Kennedy was killed. The response to my comments on that subject has been so overwhelming that I believe the following footnote is worth mentioning here.

As you will recall, I revealed last month that President Kennedy was riding in an elaborately-rigged limousine—the murder car. He was killed not by a sniper but by a well-aimed blast from inside the car. That blast was in all probability set off by a radio signal from outside the car by someone in a position to tell just when to do it. My confidential technical sources now believe they know where the radio signal came from.

If you have followed the various accounts that have come out about the J.F.K. assassination over the years, you have probably heard of the mysterious man with the umbrella. This was an onlooker who was right on the scene of the shooting in Dallas. Reportedly he abruptly raised his umbrella and opened it just as the President's car went by, and at that moment the several snipers all began firing. After a few seconds, he is said to have closed the umbrella and put it back down, and the firing stopped. He then melted into the crowd and quickly vanished. Others have theorized that the man with the umbrella was the signal man who used the umbrella to coordinate the firing of the snipers for maximum confusion and effect. I believe this is correct, but based on my own confidential information, I believe he also had the additional role of sending the radio signal to set off the fatal blast inside the murder car at the height of the din from the snipers. The upraised umbrella would have made a perfect radio antenna to transmit the signal, and the signal itself could have been triggered with a button on the umbrella handle. It was important though to avoid focusing suspicion on the murder car itself, which was destroyed within 48 hours. Therefore an ordinary umbrella looking like the one used by the mysterious onlooker, was no doubt left somewhere nearby for people to find, while the real umbrella equipped by the CIA with a tiny radio transmitter, was spirited away. When the ordinary look-alike umbrella was found discarded on the scene, the natural reaction would be to say, "Look here. I guess the guy with the umbrella got rid of it so it wouldn't hamper his get away." And that would be that.

At any rate, we stand on a threshold of a possible new era of assassination, intimidation, and misinformation of the public even worse than that which followed the Kennedy assassination. The September 5 dress rehearsal for Ford's assassination was for two purposes. First, it was to give him a not-so-subtle hint that he had better fulfill his deal with Nelson Rockefeller and vacate the White House soon - or else. Second, it was staged on camera, you will notice, for the benefit of you and me—the

public.

This incident is a part of a multi-faceted campaign to condition your mind to accept the departure of the Fords from the public scene one way or another. Witness, for example, how CBS, which is thoroughly under the thumb of the Rockefellers, set up Betty Ford as a clay pigeon on the August 10, 1975, CBS television show "60 MINUTES." There Betty Ford bared her private life and thoughts in public in a way which has brought down ridicule and shame on her head. In this and many other ways, the Fords are being belittled in the public mind, so that our first appointed President won't be missed when he is replaced by our second.

Yes, the behind-the-scenes power struggle which has so far kept Nelson Rockefeller from seizing the presidency which he had planned to do by June, three months ago, is beginning to erupt into the open. What we are witnessing is the latest phase of an elaborate multistepped coup d'etat with its major milestones spaced roughly a year apart so that public apprehensions will largely die out between steps.

Just over three years ago the coup d'etat began with the Watergate break-in. Two years ago Vice-President Spiro Agnew was eliminated from the scene. This activated the 25th Amendment, which Nelson Rockefeller had manipulated into the Constitution several years before to be used in the planned coup. Just over one year ago Richard Nixon became the first President in American history to resign—the victim of Watergate, which was conceived by Nelson Rockefeller, engineered by his CIA, and given a final assist in the form of blackmail by Nelson Rockefeller's long-time agent, Henry Kissinger. Now it has been another year and it is time for the next step—namely the ousting of figurehead Gerald Ford from the White House so that our president-in-fact, Nelson Rockefeller, can make himself President in name also. And Rockefeller must do this soon because he is becoming more and more unpopular by the day. If this is accomplished according to plan, the coup d'etat itself will be complete.

After that, there will only be one step left to go—our ratification of Nelson Rockefeller's status as our DICTATOR on election day November 1976, just over one year from now. On that day we are to return our then incumbent president, Nelson Rockefeller, to the White House and at the same time we are to accept, by national referendum, the new Rockefeller Constitution—which has already been written and which will give him a nine-year term as our first Dictator. Every possible avenue is being pursued in order to pave the way for this bicentennial death of our Republic! Not the least of these preparations involve the conditioning of your mind through the massive controls over the mass media exercised by the Rockefellers. For example, various component provisions embodied in the secret "NEW CONSTITUTION" keep popping up here and there, seemingly at random but actually as parts of a well coordinated master public relations war being waged on the unsuspecting American public by the Rockefellers.

To cite just one example—and they are everywhere these days if your eyes are open—there is the article in a recent issue of Business Week entitled, quote: "The big new push for federal chartering of corporations." Business Week, it should be mentioned, is published by McGraw-Hill, one of the hundreds of major companies under Rockefeller control. McGraw-Hill is a particularly useful voice for the Rockefellers, since it publishes a series of special industry magazines which established high prestige long ago and are therefore very

influential now. Anyway, the article says that there is a rapidly emerging push to replace State chartering of corporations in America by federal chartering, and that surprisingly some of the most powerful backing for this move is coming from leaders of major corporations themselves, such as General Electric. The article fails to point out though that all of these big corporations cited are Rockefeller outfits, and federal chartering is one of the keystones of the corporate-socialist economic structure spelled out in the new Rockefeller Constitution. The impetus for this big new federal chartering campaign is stated to be a couple of Supreme Court decisions which may look (quote) "conservative" on their face since they effectively removed the federal influence over corporations that had long been exerted through Rule 10-B (5) of the Securities Exchange Commission. This ruling looks, at first glance, to be a move away from federal meddling, but its actual purpose is to whip up sentiment in Congress to pass legislation which will go much further than the old SEC rule.

This is a perfect example in which the real purposes of political actions are the exact opposite of the surface appearance. And if anyone doubts that the Supreme Court is knowingly being guided to do the Rockefeller will, just consider, for example, our Chief Justice Warren Earl Burger. One of the ways in which he established the credentials which led to his Supreme Court appointment, was through his contribution as a so-called "outside expert" to the writing of the secret new Rockefeller Constitution. The idea to eliminate the right of trial by jury, which the "NEW CONSTITUTION" does, came from Burger.

The art of politics, as it is practiced at the national level today in America, has been reduced to continual deception and trickery. A perfect example is the plan which has been concocted by Nelson Rockefeller and his long-time friend and supporter, George Meany, to recast Rockefeller's image in a conservative mold. Imagine! This has become necessary because it is now the Conservatives who hold the balance of political power in America. No doubt you've noticed the wide publicity which has been given lately to the supposedly conservative views which are preached by Nelson Rockefeller these days in his speeches. Never mind that his entire public career for more than 40 years is a sordid history of well-documented but little-known piracy against the American ship of state. Never mind that he has always espoused, quote "fiscal integrity", and that without exception this has been translated into higher taxes, increasing public debt, swelling unemployment, and mushrooming welfare rolls. And, never mind that his public career is littered with broken promises and double crosses. He now says things which the

Rockefeller-controlled news media label "conservative" so we are to take them at face value.

But many Americans will not be taken in by Rockefeller's own statements alone, so going along now on a parallel road as a fellow traveler is one George Meany. Meany has lately made a great show of not letting the longshoremen in his AFL-CIO load wheat bound for Russia supposedly until the American consumer is protected against inflation and whatnot. This stand has been painted in the news media as evidence of Conservatism on his part; but now that this political harvest has been reaped, the grain is being loaded once again and sent on its way to Rockefeller's Mother Russia.

Just to enhance this conservative image, Meany is also throwing snide remarks at Henry Kissinger. Kissinger has now done his job for Rockefeller and is about to be thrown to the

wolves so as to appease the Conservatives and to fool them into thinking they are gaining ground. Thus Meany is building a conservative, anti-Communist image as fast as possible; and since he is not a self-serving politician, this apparent development of a conservative streak will be taken by many as genuine. He will therefore be in a perfect position, when the time is ripe, to throw his arm around Nelson Rockefeller and give him his full political support. Rockefeller will thus be transformed into an instant Conservative, anti-Communist, anti-Soviet in the eyes of many trusting Americans.

One of the most diabolically clever and cruel twists in this plan has been the way in which Nelson Rockefeller through his agent George Meany, used exiled Russian author Alexander Solzhenitsyn to further his own political plans. Very few Americans grasped what happened, and Solzhenitsyn himself has no inkling at all of the treachery that surrounded his recent visit to the United States. Solzhenitsyn is a true and great Russian patriot who has suffered terrible things at the hands of the imperialist, Communist regime that now enslaves his people. He would never have knowingly permitted himself to be used by the very people who perpetually finance and sustain the Russian Communist police state, but he did not reckon with the craftiness of the Rockefeller Brothers. Meany said in his introduction to one of Solzhenitsyn's speeches under AFL-CIO sponsorship that Solzhenitsyn is, quote: "a voice that demands to be heard; a voice that will not be denied."

The Rockefeller approach to anything they cannot suppress is to harness it, and that is what they did to Solzhenitsyn. They harnessed him. First, the United States Government agreed with Russia not to accord him any official recognition before he was released. Hence the widely-publicized snub by President Ford. Next, George Meany latched on to him even before he came out of Russia and sewed up a commitment from the famous Russian exile to speak under AFL-CIO auspices in the United States. Then when he reached America, his great AFL-CIO speaking tour consisted of only two speeches—one in Washington, D.C., and the other in New York City. As a result, Solzhenitsyn's actual words, which I believe every American should hear, were heard by very few people. But the fact that he had spoken under George Meany's sponsorship was publicized nation-wide in the Rockefeller news media, and this explains why the New York Times gave it broad coverage. The net result: A few people heard the truth from Solzhenitsyn, but vast numbers of people were deceived by all this into thinking: George Meany deserves the Conservative label now being stuck to him by the Rockefeller public relations machine. A more convincing lie would be difficult to imagine.

I now turn briefly to Topic #3.

In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 3, last month, I revealed that major revisions are in the works for up-coming war plans. These changes stemmed from the actions of Indira Gandhi to stop the Rockefeller take-over of India by way of their CIA. The Rockefellers want to absorb India into their empire before proceeding to World War III, and are therefore modifying their foreign intrigues accordingly. Their plans I revealed some time ago for World War III—which is really to be half a world war with America as the main battleground—have not been abandoned altogether. They have simply been put on a back burner while the focus shifts to India, which is the last remaining chunk of the old British Empire that is not yet in Rockefeller hands. The emerging build-up to war in Asia, which is now targeted to start about March 1977 according to the Rockefeller plans, is a complex thing and is being largely ignored by most observers right now.

I plan to speak more about it in up-coming AUDIO LETTERS, but I feel you should have at least a thumbnail sketch now.

To begin with, the Helsinki Accord signed recently by Ford, Brezhnev, and leaders of more than 30 other nations had only one real effect. It formally ratified Russian conquests in Eastern Europe regardless of all the official protestations to the contrary. That's why Soviet Party boss Brezhnev had tears of joy in his eyes after all had signed it. It gave Russia a secure border in Western Europe, and the ink was hardly dry when Russian attention turned eastward to China. Well-orchestrated attacks on Peking and the foreign policy of Chairman Mao have appeared not only in high-level organs of the Soviet Press but also in Soviet satellites such as East Germany, Bulgaria, and others.

Russia fears that China might become the leader of the Third World of developing nations, therefore Russia is trying to encircle China and has been greatly helped in recent years by the Kissinger foreign policy which has handed over Southeast Asia to Russia—not to China, as some people think—and which has effectively neutralized American influence elsewhere along the Chinese encirclement perimeter. The encirclement threat to China, in turn, is giving impetus to the forging of a Sino-Japanese Axis, which is forming right now.

Finally, this whole situation and its tensions are such that the Rockefellers hope and expect to turn it to their own purposes. Through their thorough control of Japan, an avenue is readily available to guide events toward precipitation of the planned war against India on schedule. This is especially so since John D. Rockefeller III, the real ruler of Japan today, learned all about such things long ago when he helped maneuver the Japanese into attacking Pearl Harbor. Finally, once India is attacked, Russia will enter on India's side and America will be used as a factory to supply Russia. The Rockefellers stand to make lots of money through their involvement on both sides as usual; and they expect to pick up the pieces in India after the smoke clears.

And so, my friends, on and on it goes unless we stop it! More and more people are now asking: What can I do? I plan to say more about this in the future, but let me just give you these brief hints for now, if I may:

First—you must inform yourself. Know what is going on so you will know what needs to be corrected.

Second—Inform others, and never think anything is too small to do. Talk to a friend, a neighbor, write a letter to the Editor.

Third—Put pressure on your elected officials—locally and at the State level, as well as Congress. Call or write—again, and again, and again, and again until they learn you mean business and cannot be shrugged off with routine, polite, meaningless replies.

Finally—Be specific about what you want your elected officials to do to straighten things out.

In this regard I strongly recommend that you focus your energies on the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. Those who have perpetrated this fantastic crime and cover-up are now running scared behind the scenes. The Fort Knox affair is the one most dangerous issue for the Conspirators, who are trying to trap us all in a DICTATORSHIP, so do all you can to help us break it into the open

so that the truth can be proven.

Until next month, then, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #5

Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is October 15, 1975, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 5. One year ago this month I made my first cassette tape recording for AUDIO BOOKS INC. It was entitled: "HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THIRD WORLD WAR", and was released as AUDIO BOOK No. 1.

Stop and think what has happened since then. It may startle you. In October 1974 our government was still assuring us there was no recession; but the very next month the government announced that there was a recession under way; and today, a year later, we have already endured what is officially the worst recession since the late 1930's. But we haven't seen anything yet!

As I say these words, we are again being fed optimistic lies by Rockefeller agents in our government from President Ford on down when we are actually poised on the brink of a far worse economic cliff than the one we fell over a year ago. In this regard I want to talk to you today about the following three topics:

#1—THE CIA, FORT KNOX, AND THE POISONING OF AMERICA

#2—HOW THE ROCKEFELLER BROTHERS ARE PREPARING TO SACRIFICE NEW YORK CITY TO TRIGGER GENERAL ECONOMIC COLLAPSE

#3—THE CONTINUING BUILD-UP TO A NEW U.S. CONSTITUTION AND WAR IN ASIA.

Topic #1—On September 19, just a few weeks ago, a mini scandal involving the United States Bureau of the Mint broke nation-wide—"THE GREAT PENNY CAPER" in the words of the Wall Street Journal. Two years ago the Treasury had 1-1/2 million experimental aluminum pennies minted supposedly at the suggestion of Mrs. Mary Brooks, the Director of the United States Mint. Samples went to Senate and House Banking Committee members, and a few went to Mrs. Brooks' own office. In the end, the aluminum penny idea was scrapped, and all those million-plus experimental coins were melted down—all, that is, except a dozen or so that seemed to have disappeared in the Senate, the House, and the Bureau of the Mint offices. Since they are potentially worth thousands of dollars as collectors' items, the Government professes great concern about the situation, and may even be forced to mint the low quality aluminum pennies after all, if they can't be recovered. An Assistant United States Attorney said, quote:

"This may just turn out to be the world's worst blunder by the Bureau of the Mint, an egregious case of negligence."

Well, my friends, here is a perfect example of the look-over-there distraction tactics that the Rockefellers always use. They make a big to-do about a few pennies while they cover up the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. They're playing games with you and me.

We have also heard a lot lately about the United States Intelligence Community—the CIA, the FBI, and so on—and a lot of pro and cons about it. First there was the CIA whitewash by CIA boss Nelson Rockefeller with the able assistance of his good friend and Trojan horse, Ronald Reagan—who, by the way, is presently in line to be Nelson's Vice-President once Gerald Ford is out of the way.

More recently there have been the lurid revelations by the Senate Intelligence Committee chaired by one Senator Frank Church: assassination plots against Castro, poison dart guns to stun guarddogs at enemy installations, all manner of James Bond-style murder weapons, and even deadly shellfish toxins kept by the CIA despite presidential orders to destroy them. "Strong stuff", you say. Wrong. The Church committee, like the Treasury with its pennies, is playing games with you and me again. The United States Senate hearings on shellfish toxins last month did not reveal anything except the tip of the iceberg. The same applies to what they have not told you about assassinations, psychological programming, and other things. As usual, the Government is telling you just enough to make you think you have been told the truth, while keeping you in the dark about what really matters. So I'm going to tell you a thing or two about what really goes on in the Rockefeller Brothers espionage network.

I believe what I am about to reveal, my friends, is actually mind boggling. It's tragic, it's frightening, and frankly, it borders on the unbelievable. But my information, which I have carefully double-checked, comes from sources which have been proven absolutely reliable in the past, therefore the absolute truth to the very best of my knowledge; and I believe you have a right to know the truth about the things that affect your life, your health, and your destiny.

Senator Church's committee made a big publicity splash over the 11 grams, less than half an ounce, of the shellfish toxin kept by the CIA in defiance of presidential orders. But they have known for over a month now about something far worse than those shellfish toxins—something that is a direct, immediate threat to unsuspecting citizens right now—and they are not telling you about it.

CIA operatives have stolen from 40 to 60 pounds—pounds, not ounces or grams—of deadly radioactive Plutonium-239 from various stations in the United ed States. Plutonium-239 is the deadliest substance imaginable, and is the material used for nuclear weapons; and these 40 to 60 pounds of stolen plutonium have been processed into an incredibly dangerous radioactive superpoison so lethal that one (1) gram—l/28th of an ounce—is enough to kill over 60,000 people; and this insane illegal poison is now stored in the "Central Core Vault" at Fort Knox!

The Central Core Vault, which was originally designed to house the nation's gold, has been emptied of that gold and turned by the Rockefellers' spy establishment into a chamber of death, containing enough radioactive superpoison to kill over one-third of the world's population! Shellfish toxins, my eye! But, my friends, you still haven't heard the worst of it.

The clandestine operation involving the plutonium poison was not only insane but it has been botched as well. This radioactive liquid poison in the Central Core Vault is stored in a number of lead-lined casks to somewhat resemble large milk cans in outer appearance. Most of these were put there as long ago as

1968, even before the last of the gold left Fort Knox. They have not been subject to the safety precautions spelled out for radioactive materials by the former Atomic Energy Commission, and the containers began corroding long ago. Leakage began occurring several years ago as a result, and it's steadily accelerating now. The entire United States Bullion Depository at Fort Knox and its environs are already contaminated with radioactivity, and it is increasing daily!

"But", you may ask, "how can these things have happened? How could the gold have been taken out from under the Army's nose? And how could the CIA, or anyone else, have sneaked this plutonium poison into Fort Knox? Everyone knows Fort Knox is impregnable."

My friends, the answer is so simple it may amaze you.

First, I must correct one erroneous item contained in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975. It is true that it takes two keys and two people to open the vaults in the Bullion Depository, but the Commanding General of Fort Knox is not one of them! The two people with the keys are the Treasury agent in charge and his deputy, both Treasury officials. Furthermore, control and authority over the depository building and the immediate grounds within the fence surrounding it, lies exclusively with the Treasury Department. The United States Army has no authority whatsoever over the Bullion Depository. The Army never becomes involved in any way with the activities at the Depository except when the Treasury requests Army Guard duty for major shipments of gold.

What you probably think of as Fort Knox, the famous Bullion Depository with small grounds and a fence around it, is properly called the "United States Bullion Depository at Fort Knox, Kentucky." It is a little Treasury island located geographically within a huge Army Reservation that is called Fort Knox. Access to the Bullion Depository is possible without passing through any Army Guard stations, and without the Army even having to pay any attention. There is a controlled access divided public highway, US 31-W, that runs from Louisville north of Fort Knox south to Elizabethtown, and it runs smack through the middle of the huge Fort Knox Military Reservation. If you stay on that highway, you can drive all the way through Fort Knox without stopping or being interfered with in any way. But if you take any of the exits onto a crossroad within the Fort Knox Reservation, then you will come to a Guardhouse within a few hundred feet. Driving north or south along Highway 31-W through Fort Knox, you come to a point at which you get a good view of the imposing Bullion Depository, which sits on a hill perhaps a quarter mile east of the Highway. If you take the nearest exit from Highway 31-W, you find yourself on a crossroad that goes right past the Depository, right up to an Army Guardhouse where you will, of course, be stopped. But about 50 feet before you reach the Army guard, there's a wide driveway that leads into the Bullion Depository itself. If you turn into that driveway, the Army guard 50 feet down the road will certainly see you, but he need not take any action. Instead, it's up to the Treasury guards to either admit you or keep you out of the Depository grounds itself. Thus the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox is virtually impregnable for any potential thieves from the outside. The Treasury people at the Depository need only squawk once for help, and the Army will be swarming all over the area in moments.

But for an "inside job" through the Treasury itself, the Bullion Depository is a sitting duck. Access to the Depository is exactly the same as it would be if the Depository were located

clear outside the Fort Knox Military Reservation, since no Army checkpoints have to be passed; and inside the fence that surrounds the Depository building, everything is strictly up to the Treasury—unless they call upon the Army for assistance. So the Treasury Department had to come to terms at some level with the Intelligence people responsible for the radioactive plutonium poison. The United States Treasury is now acting as a nuclear banker for the United States Intelligence Community, which works for the Rockefeller Brothers. They wanted to put their deadly valuables in a great big safety deposit box—the Central Core Vault—and the Treasury allowed them to do so.

The people who went to Fort Knox last year on September 23, 1974—six Congressmen, one Senator, and over 100 news media people—were all exposed to this radiation without their knowledge. Far from being warned of this hazard, the very existence of the Central Core Vault was deliberately hidden from the unsuspecting visitors. As a result, every one of those visitors has grounds for a lawsuit against the federal government and against the Treasury officials personally responsible for this terrible trick, under the Federal Tort Claims Act. Had I known about the radioactive plutonium poison at that time, I would have publicly warned everyone to stay away. As it is now, all I can do is to suggest that those who visited Fort Knox last year be checked up medically. It is even more urgent that those who work at the Depository be checked. I am informed that those who have worked there for a sufficient period of time may already have the beginnings of cancer. Most doctors are unfamiliar with the effects of radiation poisoning, and it can easily be misdiagnosed. Elevated blood sugar, irritability, dizziness, itching, elevated temperature, and a number of other symptoms can result from radiation poisoning. For further information I refer you to that wonderful book, "ARE YOU RADIOACTIVE?" by Linda Clark.

Knowing what we know now, it is obvious why the man who invited the visitors to Fort Knox last year, United States Treasury Secretary William Simon, knew better than to go there himself. It also explains why the Government has so steadfastly refused to admit the existence of the Central Core Vault. They dare not open it now, even for a peep show. And on October 9 just last week if you will recall, President Ford abruptly canceled—yes, canceled—a scheduled trip to Louisville, Kentucky, near Fort Knox; and just 16 hours earlier I had publicly broken the plutonium poison story in Los Angeles. Before that, our puppet President probably knew nothing about it.

But why has the Church committee of the Senate, which has had information about all of this for over a month, kept it so carefully covered up? Has Senator Frank Church, whose presidential ambitions are well known, found what he considers a better use for this life-and-death information than to tell the American people about it?

Up to now, the main effects of the radioactive contamination seeping out of the Central Core Vault have been confined mostly to the immediate vicinity of the Bullion Depository itself. But the Central Core Vault was never intended to house radioactive substances. Its walls, ceiling, and floors are made of reinforced concrete several feet thick, but any such concrete structures form thousands of cracks all through it over a period of time—some visible, some microscopic. That makes no difference for gold storage; but for radioactive materials, the concrete structure of the Central Core Vault is like a giant sieve with tiny holes on all sides. Once the radioactive poison gets out of those lead-lined storage-tank cans, as it already is

doing, a good fraction of it will eventually find its way outside. A major catastrophe—radioactive poisoning of the entire southeast portion of the United States—is now a real possibility unless steps are taken to prevent it. But I am informed that there is no way to neutralize this radioactive poison. All that can be done is to seal it off from the environment. Even if there were some other safe place to take the leaking cans of poison for storage, which there is not, it would not be safe to open the Central Core Vault now, much less enter it. This means that the United States Bullion Depository at Fort Knox must be abandoned forthwith, and a massive tomb of lead and rock built around it to contain the radiation. The contents of the Depository—any left-over dregs of gold still there, the stores of curare poison and other drugs and poisons for the Intelligence Community, Bureau of Engraving plates, important documents, everything—has already been subjected to radioactive contamination, and are unsafe so that they might just as well be entombed with the Depository itself. Needless to say, a project like this—the abandonment of the Bullion Depository and the construction of a radiation shielding mound over it—could scarcely be done and kept secret. Thousands of people drive by the Depository every day on the public highway, US 31-W; and even if that highway were closed, the fate of the Bullion Depository would necessarily become known if these corrective steps were taken.

But that would lead back to the source of the trouble—the Rockefeller Brothers themselves through their intrigues with the CIA, FBI, and the rest of the United States Intelligence establishment! The only way the Rockefellers can protect themselves in this hideous thing they have caused, is not to do anything so that no questions will be asked. By the time the spreading effects of the radioactive leakage from Fort Knox can no longer be hidden, they expect to have their dictatorship in place. Then they can do whatever is necessary without worrying about you or I or anybody else. Think about it. Therefore nothing will be done about the hideous, invisible killer fog slowly creeping outward from Fort Knox unless the public knows about it and demands action. Yet Senator Frank Church contents himself with the public posture of shock at a mere half ounce of shellfish toxin; and even those are not being destroyed! If you will notice, the Church committee merely voted to suggest to the CIA that its stockpile of shellfish toxin be turned over to scientific agencies for research. That's like saying: "If you'd like to, why don't you take the poison flask out of your left hand and put it in your right hand instead?!"

Senator Church has his publicity. The CIA, FBI, and the rest of the Rockefeller spy network still have easy access to their beloved poisons. The public has been given an exciting show, and made to think everything is being straightened out; and the real secrets of the Rockefeller Brothers end up more secure than ever. If our Republic is to survive, this kind of thing has got to stop. In other ways, too, the CIA and its brothers in the United States Intelligence industry, are knee-deep in things about which you are not being given the slightest hint.

The Rockefeller spy and espionage establishment specializes in poisoning minds, as well as bodies. I refer especially to the many techniques of psychological programming which they have at their disposal. Even President Nixon, after all, was Watergated out of office through an elaborate CIA plot on Nelson Rockefeller's behalf that pivoted around psychological profiling of Nixon and many of those who surrounded him in the White House. An artificial environment was created at the White House during the Watergate siege with predictable results based on the

psychological profiles of Nixon and his aides. After it was all over, you may recall, some of the Nixon people expressed confusion and amazement at what had happened. They could not understand how they had lost their way and become totally divorced from reality.

But this is only one aspect of the psychological control exercised on selected individuals by the Rockefellers through their Intelligence web. They also have a variety of brainwashing techniques including highly advanced secret electronic devices. All that is necessary to use certain of these techniques is to get a victim into a hospital. Once he or she is there, it's all over. In this controlled environment, a millivolt system with small electrodes is used to alter the brain wave pattern and inject thoughts and tendencies. As a result, a person can actually be programmed to do things they normally would not—say, to leak information from a Congressional committee doing special investigative work; or a world leader can be programmed to change his policies; or the wife of a diplomat can be turned into a spy; or a world leader can be assassinated by a close relative programmed to do so; or a true patriot can be programmed to assassinate a political leader or a potential presidential candidate.

In all of these cases, the brainwashing techniques permanently damage a person's mind. It is terrible, alien to our way of life, but it is going on right now on behalf of those self-proclaimed philanthropists, the Four Rockefeller Brothers. I know of specific instances of every one of the programming situations I just gave you, but suffice it to mention only one:

Sara Jane Moore who took a shot at President Ford in San Francisco on September 22, 1975. Unlike the incident 17 days earlier with "Squeaky" Fromme, the attempt by Mrs. Moore was real. Had President Ford gone across the street as planned to mingle with the crowd, he would have gone exactly where she stood patiently waiting with her gun, which she had picked out for purchase the previous day with a United States Treasury agent by her side. You may have been baffled by all the accounts of her attempts to get arrested ahead of time and her unsuccessful efforts to stop herself. But she truly could not help herself, because she was electronically brainwashed and programmed as an assassin by Rockefeller Intelligence agents.

Only last night, October 14, 1975, still another odd occurrence happened to President Ford. He was involved in a traffic accident, so-called, as his motorcade drove through downtown Hartford, Connecticut. And for the third time in a row, an apparent brush with possible death by the President was caught beautifully by the TV news cameras which just happened to be riding in the motorcade this time, three cars behind the President. The limousine President Ford was riding in was supposedly the same one J.F.K. rode in when he was killed, but 90% rebuilt. Due to the accident last night, it will, of course, have to go into the Ford Motor Company shops for repair in Detroit. Will it return to service, outfitted once again as a murder car as it was that day of November 22, 1963, in Dallas? After all, the Rockefeller Brothers have a habit of using any trick that proves successful over and over again.

Now I turn to Topic #2:

On October 2, 1975, while cheery promises of economic recovery were emanating from Washington, the largest financial collapse in retailing history occurred. The huge W. T. Grant Department Stores chain with over 1000 stores in 40 states filed for

protection under Chapter 11 of the Bankruptcy Act. Tempted by the booming years of the late 1960's and early 1970's, the chain had expanded at breakneck speed and was caught high and dry when our economy began to crumble two years ago. Suddenly, in the changed economic environment, Grant simply could not find enough buyers for its goods to cover its liabilities. Bankruptcy came with the chain owing over one-billion dollars, more than all of its assets put together.

But companies are not the only things that can go bankrupt. On October 2, 1975, a major firm that rates government bonds suddenly and completely suspended all ratings on New York City bonds. It had become apparent that the City's finances were in bad, bad trouble. New York City, like W. T. Grant, was in over its head. Frantic maneuverings ensued in order to try to keep New York City afloat, including creation of the Municipal Assistance Corporation, or "Big Mac" as it is often called. With that, New York State was drawn into the City's tangle of financial woes, and now the State's bond ratings are on the way down too.

Experts confirm what is all too obvious to everyone. It is now only a matter of time until New York State and City default on their crushing debts as they come due. The result will be legal and financial panic and confusion as creditors, city employees, welfare recipients, bondholders, and others are thrown into a battle to try to get their money. City services will be cut back, unemployment in New York will skyrocket due to layoffs, people who have put their life savings into so-called safe New York City bonds will be in danger of seeing it all go up in smoke.

This is the exact situation that I warned disbelieving Wall Street bond traders about in a seminar in January of this year 1975. All of this is likely to happen within just a few weeks, just in time for Christmas, unless federal or quasi-federal authorities step into the picture with some sort of temporary bail-out scheme. But will this happen?

One of the main contingent plans of the Rockefeller Brothers is to let New York go down the drain. They themselves bailed out months ago, so that they will not personally suffer if New York goes bankrupt. Therefore they are in a perfect position to use the State and City's financial collapse for three purposes:

First—to trigger the general economic collapse for which they have worked so long;

Second—to be able to label our coming crash "The Ford Depression", so that Nelson Rockefeller can then ride out on his white horse like F.D.R. did 42 years ago, proclaiming himself our savior; and

Third—to convince the American people that the United States Congress has become a totally worthless institution so that the Congress can be abolished in the course of setting up their new Constitution and dictatorship.

The plight of New York City and State after all is not unique, as you may think. The deteriorating financial condition of all of the government bodies, with local governments least able to fight back, is a deliberate and predictable product of the economic forces unleashed by the Rockefeller Brothers four years ago.

The era of STAGFLATION and monetary instability entered its

current phase in the spring of 1971 through Rockefeller manipulation of their multinational corporations. In my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR" published in 1973, I called it "Campaign May." I now quote, starting on page 32:

"It happened on signal. It was May 1971. The affiliates of the multinationals, armed with dollars, opened their Spring offensive. They dropped bombs of dollars on Europe. The Europeans, as they had attempted in 1967/1968, tried again to rescue the American dollar. The multinationals sent waves and waves of dollars against the central bankers until these bankers were compelled to stop supporting the dollar by giving out high fixed-price currencies. The time had come to think of their own currencies and what they were doing to their own economies.

The dollar began to 'float'. It had become free from a fixed-rate in relation to other European currencies. It had, in effect become devalued, 'softer'."

Then came August 15, 1971—mark it well, my friends—the date when our current inflation really began. August 15, 1971, the Rockefellers, through their government lackeys, persuaded President Nixon to repudiate the 1944 Bretton Woods Monetary Agreement by suspending settlement of international transactions in GOLD, since the Rockefeller Brothers had already stolen almost all of America's gold by then. This action, severing the dollar from gold, set in motion an inflationary force greater than America had ever experienced in the 20th Century.

Continuing on page 81 of my book, the predictable effect on governmental bodies such as New York City was pointed out as follows, and I quote:

"The waves of Campaign May had reached the shores of America. The war against the dollar in Europe was coming home to Americans in the form of high prices and social unrest.

The impact of the econostrategic and econopolitic measures of the New Imperialism of the Rockefeller Brothers will be felt for many years in the United States. The legislative bodies of the local, state, and federal government will be incapable of coping with the situation we call stagflation; that is, the problem previously referred to of high inflation combined with a lack of real growth in the economy."

Still quoting:

"After two official devaluations followed by 'unofficial' devaluations as a result of the floating dollar, the value of the dollar, in terms of goods and services bought is going down and down, buying less and less.

Devaluation of the dollar is a presage of increased inflation. The burden of devaluation ultimately falls on the average working man, the pensioner, and those on fixed incomes. It erodes savings accounts, bonds, and other fixed income instruments.

It also takes more dollars for local, state, and federal programs."

Thus, thanks to the stagflation era, launched deliberately by the Rockefeller Brothers several years ago, mounting deficits by New York City were inevitable as they simply tried to maintain programs and services which had begun under a non-stagflation era economy. The same applies to the federal government itself, which is now running a record deficit half again as large as that

experienced at the height of World War II.

If the point is reached when New York cannot pay its massive obligations to creditors, then at least some of those creditors will in turn have trouble paying off their obligations and loans. This process can, therefore, ripple through our general economy; but in normal non-stagflation times, it would die out and be absorbed after some point. But the American economy is now dangerously top-heavy with debt, and much of it is owed, by the way, to the huge major banks, insurance companies and the Federal Reserve System—all controlled by the Rockefellers who, therefore, stand to pick up an awful lot of property through foreclosures .

Recent figures indicate that corporations, taken all together, have twice as much debt as liquid assets. Worse yet, two years ago we passed the point at which the total debt of the United States—governmental, business, and personal—exceeded our total assets. In other words, our whole country is now like a great big W. T. Grant operating with a negative net worth.

Should our nation's debt structure collapse badly in one spot, say New York City, the whole thing can start falling down progressively like a house of cards. There is no solid debt-free financial underpinning left to absorb this process and make it fizzle out. One way or another, therefore, it is only now a question of time whether the Government and/or the Federal Reserve will leap into our collapsing economic situation, and their so-called 'solution' for our problems will come down ultimately to printing more dollars. Inflation will then skyrocket even faster than now. Any remaining confidence in the dollar will be shattered, and all of this will come along just in time to send gold prices streaking upward under the conditions which David Rockefeller has labored so hard to finally achieve. I discussed this last month in connection with the IMF gold sale decision, and everything is still very much on track there.

On the weekend of October 5, 1975, just 10 days ago, a secret meeting was held in New York City by delegates of the United States, Britain, Japan, France, and West Germany to lay the groundwork for a Western economic summit to be held later this year. David Rockefeller is trying to make sure that the January 1976 meeting of the IMF in Jamaica will reach a compromise agreement acceptable to France on the matter of exchange rates so that the conditional Gold Agreement reached last month will then take effect. My current information is, that to satisfy France, stable yet flexible exchange rates between currencies will be defined in terms of gold. Gold will be officially fixed at or about $195.00 an ounce for this purpose, this being the first of several successive stages within a period of 2-1/2 years from today, with gold ultimately targeted to reach $2,000.00 per ounce.

So bankruptcy of New York City, if it comes, will serve the Rockefeller Brothers well in their scheme to bring America to submission economically. And after spending months telling President Ford, both directly and through advisors, not to help New York City, Nelson Rockefeller has suddenly hopped on the other side of the fence and now says, for public consumption, that federal authorities should help New York. But this is only lip service, my friends, for behind the scenes he is still making sure that ultimately nothing is done. Now when the ultimate collapse comes, it will be President Ford—not Nelson Rockefeller, the real culprit—who is blamed for not effecting a rescue. Along with Ford, Congress will also be the loser in all of this.

On October 11, 1975, when Rockefeller went public with his statements in support of New York, he said in a speech which, please note, he did not bother to clear with his puppet Ford, and I quote:

"After the Control Board in New York City have acted to restore fiscal integrity, it will be a true test of the responsiveness of our Congressional system as to whether the Congress can act in time to avoid catastrophe."

This is the very same Nelson Rockefeller who, as Governor of New York State, increased New York State taxes by over 500% and its debt by over 300%, and drove numerous industries, including some of his own, out of the state by confiscatory taxation. But you can rest assured that Congress will now be watched very closely by the Rockefeller mass media to see what they do about all of this. Thus the Rockefellers are trying to make us think of New York City's fate as a criterion for the continued usefulness, or lack thereof, of Congress. And regardless of what Congress does, they intend to make sure that Congress does not pass the public opinion test.

So, my friends, don't be too mystified by the strange things going on around us. Keep your eyes focused on causes, not effects, because what man makes, he can unmake.

In the 1920's, the Rockefellers brought a very sophisticated German economist to America from Berlin to work out a plan to massage the Stock Market in order, so they said, to try to deflate inflation. But once they had his plan, they promptly twisted it and used it to bring about the Stock Market Crash of 1929. He resigned in disgust and went into a religious retreat, but later became a university professor. It was my privilege to have studied under this man, and we became good and close friends. It was he, my wise German professor, who taught me finance, banking, and economics and who confidentially taught me to forget all about the effects that economists had written about in their books, even including his; and to focus instead on causes and the way these effects can be brought about. He died with shame in his heart because of the cruel way in which the Rockefellers had warped and misused what he had taught them in good faith. His identity must remain a secret, but he left with me a heavy responsibility to use what he had taught me for good, and that is what I am trying to do now—for you and for him.

THE CONTINUING BUILD-UP TO A NEW UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION AND WAR IN ASIA

Topic #3—Perhaps you are wondering why I have chosen to talk today about preparations for our new American Constitution and maneuverings for a new Asian war all as one topic. The reason is that both are parts of the larger Rockefeller plan for world conquest and one Rockefeller-world-government, as outlined in Hoffman Nickerson's Rockefeller-authorized book "THE AMERICAN RICH" published in 1930.

On previous occasions I have alluded to the fact that Japan, since World War II, has been substantially under the thumb of the four Rockefeller Brothers, and in particular of John D. Rockefeller III. It was John, as I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 3, who helped pave the way for the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor through his spy ring activities under the cloak of the "Institute of Pacific Relations."

If you had any doubts about what I have told you of the

Rockefeller control over Japan, I hope you paid close attention to the recent visit by Emperor Hirohito to our country. From start to finish with scarcely a break, he was in Rockefeller company on Rockefeller turf, from the Colonial Williamsburg, Virginia tourist attraction owned by the Rockefellers, to Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller's Japanese-style house at Pocantico Hills. Our figurehead President Ford and other officials hardly even counted!

Nelson's brother John, who is heading the publicity campaign for their own new Constitution under the banner of a Second American Revolution, is still up to his old tricks in the Pacific too. On September 15, 1975, a significant article appeared in the Vancouver Province newspaper describing a hush-hush meeting that was not even reported in the United States. The article was entitled, quote: "ROCKEFELLER'S BRAINTRUST MEETING ENDS" and reads in part as follows, and I quote:

"An informal conference of some of the Pacific Rim's most influential political and economic thinkers convened by financier John D. Rockefeller III ended here Saturday; and only then was the list of participants released. The 43 guests invited to the 'Williamsburg Five Conference' from southeast Asia, Australia, and North America met for four days in off-the-record sessions representing only themselves, not their organizations."

Still quoting:

"Participants included George Ball, former United States Undersecretary of State; Derek Davies, editor of the authoritative Far Eastern Economic Review; Newsweek editor Osborn Elliott; Exxon chairman C. C. Garvin; United States Senate Minority Leader Hugh Scott; Mitsubishi Research Director Morihisa Emori; and Khoman Thanat, former Thai Foreign Minister. Other guests included top-level experts from Asian and United States companies, publications, banks, universities, various ministries, and presidential circles."

In a news conference after the meeting, Robert Barnett, director of the Washington center of the Asian Society, was asked what effect the discussions would have on the foreign policy of various countries, and he answered, quote:

"I would say the probability of direct influences, very small; and the probability of indirect influence is very considerable."

It is mentioned that the conferences began in Williamsburg, Virginia five years ago to discuss, quote, "the then-new breakthrough in United States-Chinese relations."

The Rockefeller Brothers are maneuvering rapidly to bring on the Asian war, which they plan to ignite in March 1977 as their target date. Their goal is to take over India, the former crown jewel of the British Empire, which is rich in iron ore, precious metals, and various other natural resources as well as cheap labor. Already 1000 or so inhabitants of a small island in the Indian Ocean, Diego Garcia, are being involuntarily relocated elsewhere to make room for the rapid build-up of a U.S. Naval Base in preparation for the coming war in that area.

Henry Kissinger's new controversial Sinai Accord, involving 200 so-called civilian technicians to be placed in no-man's land between Israel and Egypt, is also a part of the global preparations for Asian war by the Rockefellers.

The primary focus right now is not the Middle East itself, but

Asia. Israel is, in effect, to become our advanced base for American military operations when we are drawn into the Asian conflict on the side of Russia and India and against the Sino-Japanese Axis which, through Japan, will also be under Rockefeller influence. Huge amounts of arms are being pumped into Israel, with much smaller token amounts promised to Egypt. Israel is being used, while the Arabs are being placated for now to keep the region's oil supplies secure for the planned war.

Those so-called civilian technicians will be civilian in name only. They are actually the advance command nuclei of the American military build-up in the Sinai that is already going on in secret. The whole purpose of this is not fundamentally to protect the Israelis and Egyptians from one another, but to keep open the American supply line to the East for war in India. Should India fall through subversion before 1977, the war now brewing will no longer be necessary. In that event, the Rockefeller plans will revert to those described in my AUDIO BOOK No. 1 released a year ago: WORLD WAR III, with America the primary nuclear battlefield, beginning just a little later than the war now planned. For that purpose, the Rockefeller Brothers have as their ace in the hole the Panama Canal. It is already targeted by atomic missiles in the Republic of Guyana in Latin America; and while negotiations proceed to return partial sovereignty over the Canal Zone to Panama, the United States is negotiating to retain the right to defend the Canal indefinitely in case of attack. The Panama Canal will thus be the new Pearl Harbor, and we are to be dragged into nuclear war in its defense under that contingent war plan of the Rockefeller Brothers.

Meanwhile here at home the Rockefellers are already making war—propaganda war, economic war, and political war—on us, the peasants as they call us. As I explained in my AUDIO BOOK, "THE SECRET NEW CONSTITUTION FOR AMERICA", the Rockefellers have several contingency plans through which their new Constitution may potentially be put into effect, and they are keeping all of them alive. The primary plan is still for us to accept it by the national referendum in the midst of economic chaos a year from now; but earlier this year, for example, House Concurrent Resolution No. 28 was introduced calling for a Constitutional Convention to be called and complete its work before July 4, 1976! Under this resolution, one of the co-chairmen would be the Senate president pro tern—that is, Nelson Rockefeller.

Meanwhile the piecemeal dismantling of our Constitutional Rights is continuing. One of the more notorious examples lately has been Senate Bill No. 1 sponsored by a whole flock of Senate stars when it was introduced, ranging from Senator John McClellan, who ought to have known better, all the way down to Nelson Rockefeller's waterboy, Birch Bayh.

Senate Bill No. 1 is a two-inch-thick complete revision of the Federal Criminal Code with some hair-raising provisions carefully buried all through it. One of these would amount to an official secrets act, imposing criminal penalties on anyone who might dare to publicly expose errors or misdeeds by government officials. Another provision which ties in with the increasingly shrill cries for gun control to disarm us prior to our enslavement, would effectively remove your right to defend yourself in your own home! But these are only proposals so far.

Other things are taking effect now. For example: another portent of Rockefeller's proposed Electoral Branch of government is present in the Justice Department which is usurping local authority over the conduct of elections all over America through tools provided by the Voting Rights Act of 1965. For a sobering

account about this, I refer you to the front page of the September 29, 1975 issue of the Daily News Digest, P.O. Box 27496, Phoenix, Arizona 85061.

And speaking of the Justice Department, Attorney General Edward Levi recently took the unprecedented step of placing the FBI under his direct, immediate control. There exists no more dangerous Rockefeller agent in our entire government than Levi!

All of these things are very clearly spelled out in the secret new Rockefeller Constitution; but they are only the beginning, my friends. The 10-year multimillion-dollar study that produced their horrendous new document was funded by the Rockefeller Brothers through their controlled Foundations, and no clearer statement of the evil philosophy that motivates the new Constitution is possible than the one given by McGeorge Bundy, the Rockefeller insider who is president of their controlled Ford Foundation. He has been quoted as saying:

"It is better for man to build his own heaven on earth than to seek heaven in Heaven through blood on a cross."

This, my friends, is the true philosophy of the Four Rockefeller Brothers. They strive for their brand of a heaven on earth for themselves, even if that means hell on earth for all the rest of us .

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #6

Hello everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is November 14, 1975, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 6.

As I speak to you today, the four Rockefeller Brothers—David, Nelson, John D. Ill, and Laurance—operating as a unit, are nearing the goal line in their merciless drive to enslave America. Even so, as I discussed in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975, they have been partially tripped up recently by unexpected obstacles, both here and abroad—obstacles caused by your increasing awareness of what is going on. Their grip on the ball has been loosened a trifle, and they are beginning to lose their balance. They can be stopped; but this will only happen if each of us keeps doing our part, spreading the word by all possible means about what is happening. Otherwise they still can, and will, reach their goal line of DICTATORSHIP.

One thing we should always keep in mind is that you and I are not alone in this fight. There are many, many members of the United States Intelligence Service who do not agree with the horrendous perversion of their activities that is going on under the control of the Rockefeller Brothers, so they give me information and I pass it on to you. I'm fighting on their behalf, among other things, especially for over 500 ex-CIA and ex-FBI officers and agents who are now "dead" on file, agents who were part of "OPERATION DEEP FREEZE."

Last month I mentioned the electronic techniques of psychological programming which are now in use. Similar techniques are used on agents themselves in Operation DEEP FREEZE, enabling them to assume false identities so completely

that they can even pass lie detector tests. They are programmed this way for an assignment and are supposed to be deprogrammed afterward, releasing their minds from this artificial state. But some of these agents have been double-crossed by the CIA and FBI for certain reasons—pronounced "dead" on file and dumped out on the street without being de-programmed. They are left without access to jobs, welfare, or in most cases even their families. Many of those in this situation are the very men who most want what is right for America—not for the international conquests of the Rockefellers; and, therefore, I'm fighting their fight as best I can.

The three topics I want to discuss today parallel the three AUDIO BOOKS that I have recorded so far for Audio Books, Inc. In those I have tried to give you essential background information. In my monthly AUDIO LETTERS, on the other hand, I am trying to keep you continually informed of the latest plans and developments on a current events basis.

My first AUDIO BOOK released October 1974 warned of the coming depression and war, and today my Topic #1 is:

THE FORD DEPRESSION, ASIAN WAR, AND THE IMPENDING DOOM OF THE OPEC NATIONS.

My second AUDIO BOOK released March 1975 explained the "Fort Knox Gold Scandal" and its crucial role in destroying our economy and our Republic. And today my Topic #2 is:

FORT KNOX PLUTONIUM AND OUR SELLOUT BY CONGRESS.

My third AUDIO BOOK released July 1975 tells you all about the "NEW CONSTITUTION" which has already been written secretly for America's conversion into a dictatorship, and today my Topic #3 is :

GERALD FORD'S LAST DAYS AS PRESIDENT.

Topic #1—Last month in my AUDIO LETTER No. 5 I explained how the four Rockefeller Brothers are preparing to sacrifice New York City as one way of triggering what will be called "The Ford Depression", and on October 17, 1975, a dress rehearsal was held for the default of New York City. Sudden news bulletins the previous day said that New York City was on the brink of default; and for 24 hours the TV and radio news was filled with dire speculations about what might happen. The cliffhanger ended with a default being avoided only by a matter of minutes, and in the process the financial term "default" was transformed into a household word—and a frightening one at that.

For weeks President Ford and his spokesmen have been opposing any federal aid to prevent default, and so had Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller—that is, until October 11, 1975, just a week before the near-default in New York. On that date, October 11, Rockefeller suddenly launched a public campaign of speaking in favor of aid to New York, even while still working behind the scenes in Congress and the banking community to prevent it. Thus began the carefully-orchestrated public split between Ford and Rockefeller that is to leave Ford holding the bag when our financial catastrophe arrives very shortly. Twelve days later, on October 29, Ford crawled out still further on the limb that Rockefeller is sawing off by announcing that he would absolutely veto any kind of legislation Congress might send him to bail out New York City; and only four days after that, Rockefeller put further distance between himself and his lackey Ford by removing himself from the Vice-Presidential ticket for next year. Many

people are falling right into Nelson Rockefeller's trap as a result, discounting Rockefeller in their thinking and leaving Ford 100% in the spotlight.

Because of considerations such as those I discussed last month, the effects of a default by New York City, or State, would not merely ripple through our economy—a tidal wave would be a better term. Even if the federal government or Federal Reserve does step in to apply financial band-aid, the Rockefeller Brothers, through their control of the Federal Reserve System as well as the Government, have it within their own power either to intensify this process or to soften it. But as of now, they are preparing to pull out all the stops. Meanwhile, Government economic spokesmen are lying when they say our economy is recovering. The United States dollar is sinking overseas, and our domestic economy is on the ropes ready for a knock out punch from a New York default, stock market crash, or other such blow.

A lot of attention is being paid especially to the effect a New York default would have on the nation's banks. Well, there are quite a few banks around the country that would be in trouble, but the big New York City banks owned by the Rockefellers are not among them! They hold vast amounts of New York City bonds but that's in trust for other investors—the banks themselves do not own them. The Rockefellers, as I said before, bailed out months ago; and, after the crash, they will be thoroughly liquid ready to buy up everything in sight for a penny on the dollar. Of course they could force one of their own banks to fail for the sake of appearances; but if they do, it will be strictly voluntarily on their part.

A more telling warning of the impact of default came from the Bank of America, the largest bank in the world and also controlled by the Rockefellers. They revealed that over two-thirds of New York City bonds are held by individuals, not banks. The life savings of many people are, therefore, directly at stake. The economic calamity now brewing in the United States is, as I have explained before, to beat us into such a submissive condition that we will accept a dictatorship under the new Rockefeller Constitution a year from now.

Already the building attack on the Food Stamp Program is leading into something called the Federal Work Job Program. It will seem to offer food and benefits to those in need as the depression deepens—but at the expense of signing away your present CONSTITUTIONAL rights in the fine print. Its actual purpose is the conscription of people into slave labor—which may not be immediately apparent since no barbed wire compounds will be involved at first; but when the time comes, they are scheduled to be packed up and sent to the Middle East to help reconstruct that area after the coming war—never to be heard from again!

To get Americans to accept such schemes, the food shortages I have been warning about for over a year now are being engineered. One factor in this has to do with shutting off the flow of natural gas used to make fertilizer in California, which supplies up to 40% of some of the food supplies used in the United States. Another factor is the continuing shipments of grain to Soviet Russia on so-called "sale terms" which are only 10% down, the rest guaranteed by YOU, the American taxpayer!!

Official estimates of the Soviet grain crop keep being revised downward as an excuse and cover for additional shipments, but no evidence of Soviet crop failures has ever been given to the United States Agriculture Department—and it never will be, because the alleged Soviet "drought" is fictitious. Instead, the

Soviet Union is stockpiling for the coming Asian war!

As it now stands, my friends, the war in Asia could come as much as one year earlier than was indicated by my information just a few short months ago. As of now, the Rockefeller Brothers and their Soviet partners have set a target date of February 1976, just a few short months from now for initiation of hostilities, which are planned to begin in the Middle East. Such a shift in timing is unnerving, but so far the information I have been able to give you has been more accurate than that which Secretary of State Henry Kissinger sometimes provides in confidential briefings of top businessmen. For example, in the early fall of last year Kissinger briefed a group of about 100 American businessmen who do business in the Middle East, and told them that by late spring of 1975 there would be war in the Middle East. The war he was talking about is a war that is now set to begin in February 1976. What Kissinger was really talking about was his diplomatic objectives. My own information, however, indicated that conditions would not be ripe yet for a Middle East war at least through the summer of 1975, and that information turned out to be correct.

But the war preparations are indeed moving quietly now, and very quickly. First, David Rockefeller must obtain an international monetary agreement on exchange rates at the January meeting of the International Monetary Fund, since a floating currency during wartime would be unmanageable. Meanwhile in the diplomatic ring, Kissinger's Sinai Accord is the key feature. You may have been left with the impression by our kept press that the Sinai Accord is between Egypt and Israel with 200 American technicians being sent there just as a sort of glue to make it stick. But, my friends, this is just not the case. It is in reality two (2) separate treaties—one between the United States and Israel, the other between the United States and Egypt. They are executive agreements in effect considered as being treaties.

By ratifying these so-called treaties comprising the Sinai Accord, the United States Congress has sold the American people right down the road to war! They have now set the stage for America to be involved in something we have not had for 30 years—a declared official war.

The 200 American advisors, or technicians so called, are already in the Sinai, as President Ford admitted in a slip of the tongue on "Meet the Press", November 9, 1975. And they have two (2) purposes. They are the vanguard of a secret American limited nuclear strike force, and they are also to be the deliberate targets for a provocation that will be used to ignite the war. Now that we are officially at peace with Egypt by way of the Sinai Accord treaty, we will have to officially breach that peace—that is, declare war, in order to retaliate against this rigged attack on the Americans.

The Anti-Zionism Resolution which has just been passed in the United Nations is also part of this plan. The Arabs have fallen into a terrible trap by pushing through this Resolution which will be used to whip up fears that Israel is being surrounded and will be snuffed out if America does not respond militarily to the provocative actions mentioned a moment ago.

The fighting between Moslems and Christians in Lebanon has been fomented by Libya, which is controlled by the Rockefellers, for two (2) reasons. For one thing the excitement there distracts attention away from the true, larger picture of war preparations in the Middle East; but even more importantly, the fighting in Lebanon has given the Rockefellers the excuse they

wanted for pulling their own companies out of that area prior to the coming war. As of now, all of the big United States multinational corporations formerly based in Lebanon have pulled up stakes and headed for London, out of the war zone.

The American foreign policy known as detente with Soviet Russia has, in reality, hardened into an alliance, in spite of recent remarks by Secretary of State Kissinger for domestic consumption. While the United States bargains away its defense capabilities at the so-called SALT talks and receives nothing in return, Russia goes right on doubling and redoubling their military build-up with Kissinger and the President Ford and Rockefeller consent.

Meanwhile the United States is being turned into a factory to supply the Soviet Union. The Rockefeller Brothers think that they and the U.S.S.R. will thus end up as partners ruling the world; but the horrible risk, my friends, that they are taking is that after the coming Asian war is out of the way, Russia will double-cross the Rockefeller Brothers and take over the whole world for itself.

Secretary of Defense James Schlesinger was fired by Nelson Rockefeller through his puppet President, Gerald Ford because he was getting in the way of this alliance. Schlesinger insisted, very properly, that true detente must be balanced with a strong defense, and he refused to knuckle under. So he had to go, but as he went he said some words that should be burned indelibly into the mind of every American, and I want to quote here:

"Some years from now someone will raise the question, 'Why weren't we warned?' and I wanted to be able to say, 'Indeed you were.'"

The Red Chinese can see what is developing, that is why they accorded Secretary of State Henry Kissinger such a frosty treatment during his recent visit. Red China is being encircled by the Soviet Union with the help of the Rockefellers through their manipulation of the wealth of the United States. Indo-China has been delivered into Soviet hands in return for turning over the rich offshore oil leases of North Vietnam to the Rockefellers.

The coming war is intended to suck up India, Red China, and all of Africa into complete domination by the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance. In the process, it is also to slap down Europe and Japan, which are trying to squirm free of the Rockefeller bonds that already grip them.

Here now is the grand strategy for the war which I can reveal to you for the very first time; and, as always, I reveal it in the hope that doing so will throw a monkey wrench into these plans and cause them to fail.

World War II was used by the Rockefellers to bring Britain down to her knees, as explained in my first AUDIO BOOK last year, and also to make great inroads into Western Europe. Since World War II, Britain has been generally subservient to the Rockefellers, but lately both Europe, and Japan, which has been the special domain of John D. Ill since the War, are showing signs of struggling to break free. However, 99% of Japan's oil needs are supplied by the Middle Eastern Arab members of OPEC, and 67% of the oil needs of the European Economic Community come from there also.

On top of that, India, one of the prime targets of conquest in

the planned war, is also heavily dependent upon OPEC oil. And Africa, another target, leans heavily upon Europe for all kinds of support and will be easy picking if Europe is neutralized. The OPEC nations of the Middle East, therefore, hold many of the keys for accomplishment of the Rockefeller-Soviet joint objectives in the Asian war.

Plans now exist for the Americans in the Sinai to be attacked and for over 100 of them to be killed, enraging Congress and public opinion in the United States. On top of that, the drum beat which has begun with the United Nations "Anti-Zionism Resolution" will by then make it appear that Israel is in danger of extinction. War will thus be declared by then-President Rockefeller's rubber-stamp Congress. Cobra helicopter gunships have already been delivered secretly to the Sinai, and these will be equipped with air-to-ground tactical atomic missiles which have been in the Sinai secretly for two (2) years under strict American control.

After hostilities break out, this limited nuclear strike force is to put the OPEC oil wells out of action with atomic blasts. No nation in the Middle East, including Israel and Lebanon, will escape radioactive fallout from this limited nuclear strike. And the oil wells themselves, due to radiation, will remain unusable and capped off for a period of approximately 10 years.

The United States, which currently gets about 19% of its oil from the Middle East, will experience manipulated shortages far worse than those during the Arab oil embargo two years ago, and this will help further rip our domestic economy to shreds.

But the effect on Europe and Japan will be far more drastic. At one stroke the heart of Europe will be crippled and completely at the mercy of the merciless Rockefeller Brothers; and Japan, which is being rudely rebuffed by the Soviet Union and wooed by China these days, will be thrown fully into the arms of China. China has begun developing its own vast oil deposits and could provide some to Japan in return for an alliance against China's mortal enemy, the Soviet Union. Thus will the Sino-Japanese alliance be cemented. The already bitter clashes between China and Russia on the one hand, plus lesser skirmishes between China and Russia's client state, India, on the other hand, will set the stage for the larger Asian war, which is planned to follow very quickly.

Africa, cut off from its ties to Europe, will be like a ripe plum, ready for the plucking by the Rockefellers, and this includes Rhodesia and South Africa.

I turn now to Topic #2 .

Topic #2—The French have a saying that "The more things change, the more they remain the same." How true that is, and how tragic.

It's been over a year and a half now since I first exposed the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL during Congressional testimony. Long ago I offered publicly to go to jail as a rabble rouser if I could not prove my charges in an appropriate legal forum. And has Congress acted? NO!

And now the gold manipulations have entered a new phase. Gold, my friends, is now coming back into the United States along with huge amounts of illegal drugs—in return for American-made guns and weapons which are being sent abroad for use in wars, revolutions, and terrorism! The gold now coming in is not

reflected in Treasury records. Instead, it is being hidden around the country by the CIA for the Rockefellers. The Rockefeller interests want to have it handy for sale to the Government for war purposes or for other purposes at the elevated prices that will soon prevail.

Meanwhile, as I revealed last month, the Fort Knox Gold story has taken a deadly new turn; and, as before, Congress is doing absolutely nothing about it. The Central Core Vault of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox contains canisters of liquid radioactive superpoison processed from Plutonium 239, the deadliest substance imaginable. These canisters are leaking due to corrosion, and the radioactive leakage is escaping through the porous concrete walls of the Vault and through the dehumidifying system and getting out into the countryside to be carried away on the winds, contrary to what officials tell you. The prevailing winds in that area for the past several years have been very unusual—from essentially due west rather than from the northwest, as is more common. As a result, the thin invisible fog of radioactive poison from Fort Knox is being carried from the Depository (which is located south of Louisville) eastward in the general direction of Lexington and West Virginia, and onward approximately toward Washington, D.C.; and this leakage has already been going on for several years in sufficient quantity to be having an initial impact on health statistics now.

My own investigators have reported to me that many doctors in the region east of Fort Knox are baffled lately by a large increase in the incidence of cancers of all types; and on November 7, 1975, just a week ago, the Government itself released statistics that show the same thing. The National Cancer Institute announced that so far this year the cancer death rate nation-wide is up by 5.2%. This is five times the rate of increase that has prevailed over a period of many years, and they frankly admit that they are at a loss to explain it. But buried in those same official Government statistics is a regional breakdown, and that east-central states containing Fort Knox and the area east of it shows an astronomical 17 to 18% increase!

Now, before I go on, there is something I feel I must make clear; and I am not just sitting back and saying, "Well here's something sensational to talk about." Any such callous attitude on my part would be impossible. It so happens that my beloved father and other members of my family are in my childhood home of Huntington, West Virginia, smack in the path of the Fort Knox radioactive killer fog. They are among the millions of people who have already been exposed to the first whiffs of plutonium poison, and I fear for their lives if nothing is done to stop this leakage, which is steadily accelerating; and the feeling I have for them carries over to millions of others—men, women, and innocent little children who are in the same boat all because of the insane efforts of the Rockefeller Brothers to seize power at any cost and by any means.

Some will also say, no doubt, that I shouldn't tell you things like this because it will cause alarm; but, my friends, this is something to be alarmed about. It's no joke. If I did not tell you, I would be just like a Civil Defense official who, warned of an imminent attack by enemy bombing aircraft, would say: "I'm not going to turn on the air raid sirens because that might frighten people." But, you may say, wouldn't the Government warn us and take the necessary measures to correct such a situation at Fort Knox? My answer is: NO. The Government is stonewalling it; and up 'till now major newspapers, news magazines, and the TV and radio networks are also sitting on this life-and-death story with one exception.

Two days ago, on November 12, 1975, the Louisville Courier-Journal broke the Fort Knox plutonium story on its front page, in the best traditions of newspaper reporting. Their courageous exercise of free speech guaranteed by the First Amendment to our CONSTITUTION may make it impossible even for the Rockefeller-controlled major media to ignore the situation indefinitely. In any case, top business and financial people here and abroad are being kept aware of the Fort Knox fiasco, thanks to specialized newsletters of all kinds. While the major media try to brainwash you with slanted news and distract you with all kinds of entertainment, these newsletters tell what is really going on. One of the best of these, which began informing its readers about the strange goings-on at Fort Knox over a year ago, is: Myers Finance and Energy, edited at P.O. Box 5531, Station A, Calgary, Alberta, Canada.

In his Oct. 31, 1975 issue Mr. Myers caps off a story on Fort Knox by quoting the following letter of my able associate, Mr. Ed Durell, to the Acting Director of the Mint, quote:

"I now ask you for the record, please, to confirm or deny the existence of the Central Core Vault at the U.S. Bullion Depository at Fort Knox, Ky. I refer to the single, large, centrally located underground chamber serviced by elevator."

As Mr. Myers asks in his Newsletter, quote:

"Why can't the Acting Director of the Mint answer simply YES or NO? The whole nation is asking a question. Why won't they answer?"

For two months now we have received a dead silence from the Government. Every one of their past evasions has confirmed and deepened their guilt—and they know it, so they are stonewalling it.

What then is Congress doing? Is it, too, just writing off 9,000,000 people rather than sound the alarm and get the deadly situation at Fort Knox corrected? YES.

Listen. As just pointed out, the United States Government has to this day never admitted the existence of the Central Core Vault, which was not mentioned to the 100-odd visitors of Fort Knox last year on September 23, 1974. To admit its existence would all by itself prove that the so-called "Gold Inspection Visit" by Congressmen and newsmen was a total fraud, and also the so-called "Audit" done by the GAO and the Treasury together. And since the Central Core Vault is where the leaking plutonium poison is, they want desperately to keep you from knowing that the Vault exists.

I am now going to reveal previously confidential discussions which have been held between Congressman Otis Pike, Chairman of the House Intelligence Investigating Committee, and myself and associates. I'm making it public now because Congressman Pike himself has breached this confidentiality in the worst possible way by turning over our information, without our consent, to the Church Committee in the Senate. As I explained last month, Senator Church is already sitting on the plutonium poison story while he plays games with you and me; and now, for whatever reasons, Congressman Otis Pike, too, has let America down.

In mid September I held private discussions with Congressman Pike about the situation at Fort Knox. At that time I did not yet know about the plutonium poison stored there, but I did know

that the CIA and FBI were tied in with the theft of America's gold from Fort Knox on behalf of the Rockefeller Brothers. He appeared to be generally interested and courageous as well—a quality which has virtually disappeared from the United States Congress today; but his major sticking point which he came back to time and time again was the Central Core Vault at Fort Knox. Its existence had never been admitted by the Government, so Congressman Pike could not believe that it did exist. The No. 1 requirement that he placed on us was, therefore, that we prove that the Central Core Vault does exist.

So on September 26, 1975, we met again with Congressman Pike and two of his top staffers in his office, and this time we had with us no less than a former Commanding General of Fort Knox, Lieut. General John L. Ryan, Jr., U.S. Army (retired). General Ryan commanded Fort Knox from 1956 to 1959. He had also served two earlier tours at Fort Knox, the first being in the late 1930's when he was placed in charge of the Army contingent that was assigned to help store the nation's gold in the Bullion Depository for the very first time. All of the gold was put in the Central Core Vault at that time, having been constructed specifically for that purpose. The many small jail-cell-like storage compartments seen by the Fort Knox visitors last year were also in existence at that time but were not intended for the storage of gold but for other valuables. General Ryan stated that for the entire duration of his long experience with Fort Knox, the gold was always kept in the Central Core Vault. He also said he was mystified as to why the gold would ever have been removed from the Central Core Vault and placed in the small jail-cell compartments on the levels above, which offer a much lower degree of security.

Congressman Pike then asked us for certain further information, including specific connections between the Fort Knox affair and the Intelligence community which is within the jurisdiction of Congressman Pike's Committee. We agreed to provide what he asked, and it was in following up the connection between Fort Knox and the Intelligence industry that my sources informed me of the hideous plutonium poison in the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox.

But when we returned to Congressman Pike ready to provide witnesses and other evidence about the plutonium and other things, Mr. Pike's response had changed. It is now the classical position that is always used to say 'good-bye' on Capitol Hill, quote: "We're too busy to work on this." Our information given to him in confidence has been unceremoniously dumped on that dead-letter office, the Church Committee; and Congressman Pike's opportunity to stand head, shoulders, and waist above everyone else in Washington by simply doing his duty, has been forfeited. Only an informed, aroused public can now move Congress in the right direction.

One of the unanswered questions when I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 5 last month was why this insane radioactive plutonium poison was ever made at all. Now I can tell you. During the early and mid 1960's over 200 pounds of this superpoison was made for the CIA and FBI Intelligence communities. It was processed in four plants—two in Louisville, Kentucky, one in North Dakota, and one in southern California. One thing it is handy for, in very small doses, is putting troublesome individuals out of the way. But why so much plutonium poison? For political blackmail, my friends!

In 1966 the CIA divided up this poison and sent about 60 pounds to each of four Latin American countries—Peru, Panama,

Bolivia, and Argentina. There threats were made that it would be used to contaminate United States planned and built water aqueduct systems—can you imagine?—unless certain political and economic actions were taken. In Argentina this successfully laid the foundation for the return to power of the Peron group; and then the poison was no longer needed there, and so it was returned to the United States in 1968.

But a problem arose: where to store this illegal nuclear poison. CIA agents within the Treasury, however, knew that the Central Core Vault at the Fort Knox Bullion Depository was being emptied of gold and suggested that it be stored there. This was done with all but 12 grams (less than half an ounce), which the CIA extracted from one canister to experiment with. This 12-gram sample of the plutonium poison, whose full effects still were not fully understood at that time, was taken to the White Sands Proving Grounds in New Mexico for evaluation purposes.

During the experiment there, about 3 grams 'accidentally' leaked into an underground water supply which was being used by 12 families in that sparsely settled area. All of them died quickly from the poison; and the CIA mounted an elaborate cover-up, burying those innocent victims secretly. Perhaps you will recall, in fact, some strange news items several years ago about the sudden disappearance of some ranch folk out West, a disappearance that never was explained. Well, now you know what happened.

At about the same point in time, by the way, IT&T was involved in the so-called "Mole Hole Project" to drill deep into the earth's crust, for reasons which were never made clear publicly. Its purpose, I can reveal, was to reach a hypothetical underground 'world river', so-called, and contaminate it with the plutonium poison to deny its use to everyone. After spending vast amounts of taxpayers' money, it was abandoned as an impractical project. Insane? YES. Fiction? NO.

The CIA agent who was put in charge of getting the poison to the Latin American countries under cover of his multinational company, was named Harold Leroy White. Once he became fully aware of the details of the project, however, he became disgusted and sick at heart and decided to go to—guess who?—Senator Barry Goldwater with the story. He arranged to see Goldwater but died on the way, apparently because his intentions became known to the wrong people.

Whether Goldwater knew what White wanted to see him about is not clear from my information so far, but it does seem strange that we keep running into Senator Goldwater in all of this. First there was the crucial Chapter 12 of the unpublished Tatom manuscript on Fort Knox, which Goldwater obtained from Tatom's widow after Tatom's death under suspicious circumstances. Goldwater has never released the manuscript, even though I challenged him to do so in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 1 for June 1975. Now, there's the Harold Leroy White case. Did Goldwater know what was afoot or not? And now he has come out in strong public opposition to any further investigation of the CIA and other United States Intelligence agencies. What's going on here, Senator Goldwater??

Since I first revealed the presence and leakage of the radioactive Plutonium 239 superpoison in the Central Core Vault at Fort Knox, I have been astonished by the failure of some people to stop and realize what it means. My associates and I were hoping to obtain a court injunction to open the Vault and prove that the gold is gone—but now, God forbid. The whole

Depository should be abandoned immediately and covered up with a pyramid of lead, cement, and stone—whatever it takes to shut off its deadly contents from the environment before its effects become a runaway disaster. It would be a pyramid with a poison core for thousands of years, but that is apparently the best that can be done now.

Topic #3—If the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox is indeed abandoned and entombed under a giant pyramid to shut it off from the world, it would be an ironic symbol of the miscarriage of Rockefeller power and ultimately a symbol of the self-destruction which the four Rockefeller Brothers are bringing upon themselves.

If you will take out a $1.00 bill and look at the back as I talk, you will see what I mean by this irony. On the left side you will see the pyramid and eye symbol that today signifies the power of the Rockefellers. They did not invent this symbol, but in 1933 they appropriated it as their own property. In that year their puppet President, Franklin D. Roosevelt came to power, and this symbol appeared on our money for the very first time, and it's been there ever since.

Many people attach patriotic and religious meanings to the various parts of this symbol, but that is not what it means to the Rockefellers who put it there. The 1776 (MDCCLXXVI) inscribed at the base of the pyramid refers not to the founding of our Republic but to "May Day" 1776, the day celebrated today by the Communists and radical Socialists the world over.

The pyramid itself symbolizes the pyramid of power. At the bottom are you and I, the general public; and its successively smaller layers above us are fewer and fewer people with more and more power. Floating above the pyramid, seemingly unattached to it, is the very hub of power, the essence of which is secrecy—no visible connection with the rest of the pyramid—and spying, symbolized by the mysterious eye with a view in all directions. The words "NOVUS ORDO SECLORUM" on the banner underneath mean "New Order of the Ages"—or freely translated, "New Deal."

Little understood symbols like this are one way our secret Rulers have of signaling to one another the progress of their grab for power. They are all around us today, even on postage stamps, and you should watch for them. The same pyramid symbol often appears over Walter Cronkite's shoulder these days when he discusses the economy on CBS TV news. It is also embodied as a triangle at the top of the headboard and footboard of Nelson Rockefeller's celebrated $35,000 bed, which was designed by an artist of Satanic symbols, Max Ernst.

Another symbol to watch for on Walter Cronkite's TV News is the Rockefeller Road to the Bicentennial emblem, showing a road heading into the center of a circle of stars. Count the stars—there are not 13, but 10 stars in the circle standing for the 10 'new states' which are to replace the 50 we now have, under the new Rockefeller Constitution.

The shake-up of the Ford Cabinet over the weekend of November 2 coinciding with Rockefeller's announcement that he will not run with Ford, or as Vice-President, in 1976, is a clear signal that Ford's remaining days in office are distinctly numbered. CIA Director Colby and Defense Secretary Schlesinger were fired at Nelson Rockefeller's behest, but these unpopular moves were hung like an albatross around President Ford's neck by having him say, "I wanted my guys."

At the same time Henry Kissinger was ostensibly taken down a

peg. I have always warned that Kissinger would have to go as soon as Nelson, his long-time boss, made his takeover move, because their egos will not permit them to actually work together without terrible friction. Kissinger knows this too, and is a Little Hitler waiting in the wings under the illusion that he may be able to displace Nelson Rockefeller and become our Dictator himself under the provisions of the new Rockefeller Constitution. But he has already begun to find out otherwise, and in all likelihood will be successfully removed from the scene regardless of what moves he may make against Nelson.

What is already being called the "Sunday Night Massacre" by some of the barking dogs of the Rockefeller media, is only a prelude to bigger shake-ups ahead. Once the onus of the coming crash is firmly stuck to President Ford, the stage will have been set for him to retire from the scene, voluntarily or otherwise, to be replaced by Nelson Rockefeller riding out on his "white horse" to save the nation—just like F.D.R. did in 1933.

As it stands now—and please remember that they often change their plans when they are spotlighted—the timetable is as follows:

On or about November 20, 1975, New York enters another crisis on the way to default, which will probably come while Ford is off drinking tea in China.

Also on November 20, Ronald Reagan, the consummate actor who is Nelson Rockefeller's good friend and America's most two-faced Trojan horse, will make an announcement about his own candidacy.

On or about December 20, 1975, Nelson Rockefeller now plans to publicly take the reins of the presidency from the floundering President Ford, the new Herbert Hoover. Ford's image is already in the process of being torn to shreds in a systematic campaign now under way.

On January 20, 1976, President Nelson Rockefeller expects to deliver his first "State of the Union" message, which is now being written secretly, and electrify Congress and the nation as he proposes the writing of a New Constitution for America. He will speak of the moment as a solemn one in the nation's experience, a time when the past is being conditioned to the future, and when a law fundamental to all other laws must again be created as it was by our Founders in another time of national trial.

For the remainder of the Rockefeller scenario, ending with our acceptance of the New Constitution by National Referendum on rigged voting machines, I refer you to my AUDIO BOOK No. 2 entitled: "THE FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU."

Finally, around February 1976, war is supposed to break out in the Middle East, to be followed by the greater Asian War.

Yes, my friends, this is what is going on.

Meanwhile our United States Congress is doing nothing whatever except playing games with you and me. Both the House and the Senate are packed with members who are totally ignorant of the big picture, intimidated by Rockefeller power, and weakened by skeletons in their own closets. Interspersed among them are the Hugh Scotts, the William Proxmires, the Henry Reusses, and the Hubert Humphreys—on both sides of the aisle and in both houses of Congress—who provide the active leadership to lead Congress and the nation down the primrose path being laid out for us by

the Rockefeller Brothers.

My friends, only public opinion—massive, powerful, focused public opinion—will move Congress in the right direction. It is therefore up to us—you and me, our neighbors, our friends—to save our CONSTITUTIONAL REPUBLIC for ourselves and our children by becoming aware of the truth, spreading awareness of the facts to others, and focusing that awareness into such pressure on Congress that they will realize they must stop catering to the special interests dominated by the Rockefeller Brothers. I hope to have more to say in this vein soon, but for now, use your own imagination, your own resources, and DO WHAT YOU CAN. The hour is late!!

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #7

Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is December 21, 1975, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 7.

As I celebrate Christmas with my family a few days from now, I will be thanking God for the precious gift He has given to all of us this year—the gift of time; because, my friend, the year 1975, even as difficult and trying as it has been, was a year of reprieve due to delays in the timetable of the Four Rockefeller Brothers. At this very moment, some important parts of their plan are as much as one year behind schedule; and in the meantime, more and more Americans have been awakening to the truth of what is going on. Yes, we have been granted a little more time than we might have had to respond to the menace we all face, but we dare not relax and waste whatever time we have left. The Four Rockefeller Brothers are working feverishly to make up for lost time.

Overseas, the way is being paved for war, including that nightmare the world has feared for 30 years—NUCLEAR WAR. Here at home, our economic woes are getting worse while a corrupt government, controlled by the Rockefeller Brothers, tells us 'Prosperity is just around the corner.'

Preparations for the dictatorial new Rockefeller Constitution keep marching on; and the man who has conspired for 20 years to become our first Dictator, Nelson Aldrich Rockefeller, stands poised at the threshold ready to seize the presidency. That is why it is so important that more and more alert Americans are now asking just one question: "What can I do?"

I am convinced that now, at last, there are enough of us to launch a successful rescue of our great, free Republic. Therefore I have just unveiled a strategy for action which I truly believe can and will save our country. It is a strategy which you, as an individual, can undertake starting right where you are. It uses the powers you are granted by the most basic law of the land—our present United States CONSTITUTION; and if you will faithfully do your part, you can rest assured others all over America will be doing theirs too. The result, IF WE WILL EACH DO OUR OWN PART, is a plan of action which, in my opinion, cannot be stopped. This entire plan of action is presented in a new AUDIO BOOK recorded December 15, 1975, and it's entitled: "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE AMERICA", and it is my answer to the

question, "What can I do?"

The challenge before us, my friend, is to regain control of the government that belongs to us, and we must act quickly before that control, which is already in the hands of the Rockefeller Brothers, slips forever beyond our reach.

CONTROL—that is the word, more than any other, that sums up the actions of the Four Rockefeller Brothers. Control is both the end toward which they work and the means by which they extend their reach still further—control of money and of government, control of industry and of Big Labor, control of natural resources and of human resources.

The incredible financial wealth of the Rockefellers is actually nothing more than a result of this insatiable drive for control; and it grows continuously due to their control over your money, your resources, your labor, and your government. They believe they have a right to do all these things because they are convinced that they have been divinely ordained to rule the world. So, for example, using the CIA for their own private purposes is right and proper, according to their concept of themselves as America's royal family. It matters not what you and I think, only they know best. All of this and much more is made clear in the book that was written for them as their Mein Kampf in 1930, "THE AMERICAN RICH" by Hoffman Nickerson.

Today I want to discuss three topics that point out some of the fruits of such control by the Rockefeller Brothers:

Topic #1—HOW POLITICAL CONTROL PRODUCES COVER-UPS AND PARALYSIS, INSTEAD OF TRUTH AND ACTION.

Topic #2—HOW ECONOMIC CONTROL PRODUCES DEEPENING ARTIFICIAL DEPRESSION AND MONETARY CHAOS, INSTEAD OF REAL PROSPERITY, and

Topic #3—HOW THE ALLIANCE BETWEEN ROCKEFELLER CORPORATE SOCIALISM AND SOVIET STATE SOCIALISM IS TAKING US INTO NUCLEAR WAR.

Topic #1—In their drive for control, the Rockefellers are trying to snare us all in their giant trap, catch us so that we cannot wrestle free or fight back; but they know that if they move too quickly we may notice what they are up to, and react to protect ourselves. So they have been moving with great patience and determination over a period of several decades to get their trap assembled and in place ready to spring it on all of us. To understand what is really happening, therefore, you should do as they do: look at long spans of time, compress them in your mind, and see where things are really headed.

Gradualism is the tactic now being used—while TV, Sports, and other distractions are being used to focus people's attention away from what is really happening. Thus, even while many people find the idea of a new Constitution for America preposterous, many of its provisions are already being put in place, ready for ratification by a National Referendum in the near future. The federal government already regards the United States as divided up into 10 REGIONS, the forerunners of the 10 so-called "New States." The Federal Election Commission, along with some other activities, is the forerunner of the Electoral branch, and so on. So keep your eye on their objective—that is, the direction in which they are moving events, so that you won't be fooled by their shifts in timing to meet their various contingency plans.

The secret new Constitution, which was developed over a

10-year period to fit the outline laid down personally by Nelson Rockefeller himself, just as he did our present 25th Amendment—this secret new Constitution is coming sooner or later, unless we stop it once and for all! As former Senator Sam Ervin said so emphatically just a few days ago, and I quote:

"We don't need a new Constitution. Ours has weathered many storms in the past 200 years. It was written to last for the ages . "

But, my friend, if we leave the Rockefeller machine in control of our government, our communications media, and our economy, we will have a dictatorial new Constitution!

Senator Ervin is quoted as saying something else too, and it is supremely ironic. Concerning Richard Nixon he said, quote:

"He had the most pronounced, aggravated notion about the powers of the presidency. He envisioned the President as being something of an absolute monarch."

However well these words may have applied to Nixon, they apply far better to the man who made, used, and then unmade Nixon—that is, Nelson Rockefeller.

Perhaps Senator Ervin himself now realizes how cleverly he was used in the Watergate coup d'etat, since he said last spring, and I quote:

"If I had known then what I know now, I would never have voted to confirm Nelson Rockefeller."

Whenever possible the Rockefeller Brothers maneuver people into doing what they want done without their puppets even being aware of it—not, at least, until later. But the Rockefeller style also includes more solid avenues of control over all sides, if possible, in every arena including that of politics. Thus, for example, the Rockefellers have their hooks equally deep into both the Democratic and Republican Parties as well as fringe political fronts, both left and right. And while they have often found it advantageous to maintain a so-called Liberal image with their public relations they are not true Liberals, any more than certain of their lackeys who wear the Conservative label are true Conservatives. As Nelson Rockefeller himself said in Dallas on September 12, 1975, and I quote:

"Conservative and Liberal to me are misleading as labels."

These and other similar labels have completely lost any utility they may once have had, thanks to their control by the Rockefeller Brothers. Their only true loyalty is to themselves, and that transcends all of the conventional boundaries of political affiliation.

A perfect example of Rockefeller control of all sides of a political situation is before us right now in the alleged Presidential campaign. I say "alleged" because there is no doubt at all as to the outcome under the Rockefeller scenario. Instead, the game is being played for other reasons. For the moment the most prominent players on the stage are four: Humphrey, Reagan, Ford, and his ventriloquist Rockefeller.

Hubert Humphrey wears a big label that reads "Liberal Democrat", while the equally large label on Ronald Reagan reads "Conservative Republican." President Ford's label is a large question mark.

Nelson Rockefeller's label which, by the way, is made of solid gold, is rather large. It reads: "Liberal New Deal Democrat turned instant Conservative Republican."

It looks like quite a field, doesn't it? But it so happens that Nelson Rockefeller has the other three in the palm of his hand and his own label is only for show.

Hubert Humphrey is currently the beneficiary of the so-called 'Humphrey phenomenon'—an undeclared candidacy that is being made to look impressive by the Rockefeller major media and by polls which can easily be manipulated. Humphrey's well concealed control of a huge major multinational oil company for over 20 years has been very helpful to his Rockefeller supporters behind the scenes. Partly for this reason, a possible

multimillion-dollar tax case against him by the Internal Revenue Service has been covered up under Presidential seal, and the IRS-FBI agents who worked on the case are no longer around!

Ronald Reagan, of course, is the polished actor who has been rehearsing so-called Conservative lines ever since 1950. That was the year when, during Congressional hearings, he officially admitted his previously ultra-Liberal activities but claimed that he had seen the light and was turning over a new leaf. Yet his actions, as sharply distinguished from his words, have never really changed. He has maintained many active ties with Rockefeller-dominated organizations, such as their complex of governmental-controlled groups known collectively as "1313" in Chicago. The Reagan administration in California was heavily populated with people from the Rockefeller stables and the Reagan record in California parallels that of Rockefeller in New York in many ways, but Reagan has consistently spoken as if his views and policies were totally opposite to those of Rockefeller. Reagan's service on Rockefeller's CIA cover-up commission earlier this year, therefore, helped to quiet the cover-up fears of some who are not aware of Reagan's strong Rockefeller ties.

President Ford is where he is because then-President Nixon double-crossed his boss Nelson Rockefeller. When Agnew was forced to resign, Nixon was supposed to nominate Rockefeller; but Nixon could see where that would lead, so instead he selected Gerald Ford, whose political star had risen considerably after his participation in the work and defense of the Warren Commission. Good old 'Jerry' was well known and well liked by his colleagues, yet his confirmation hearings bogged down unexpectedly. Behind the scenes Nelson Rockefeller applied the brakes until Ford agreed to nominate him (Rockefeller) upon Nixon's departure from the presidency. Once the agreement was reached, Ford's confirmation hearings rapidly concluded favorably. And Nelson Rockefeller immediately resigned as Governor of New York, surreptitiously moved into his Washington, D.C. residence, and personally finished Watergating Nixon out of the White House. Nelson was so proud of his success in this project that he wrote to a banker friend in Mexico afterward to tell him all about it. Can you imagine?

Thus Rockefeller control denies us any real choice in national politics. Ultimately the Rockefellers choose all the presidential candidates that count—and have ever since Woodrow Wilson's time. We, the voters, are then given the useless privilege of choosing which of their hand-picked puppets we want, just like they do in Soviet Russia. Even in the election itself, the deck is stacked in favor of their preferred choice. But, just in case, they control the other side too. If this isn't "TAXATION WITHOUT REPRESENTATION", I don't know what it is.

In Congress, too, most of our politicians end up in the Rockefeller pocket one way or another. Some deliberately throw in their lot with the Rockefellers and become active Rockefeller agents. Others become compromised by skeletons in their closets, and are pawns in the Rockefeller game of blackmail and double-cross here in Washington. And still others just go along to get along, not rocking the boat. And so when government abuses become so flagrant that they are detected, we are still left without recourse because the Rockefellers control the investigations in almost every case.

As I speak to you, the ante has gone up due to the leakage of radioactive plutonium-239 super poison from the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox, and the government is doing nothing whatsoever to stop it! My previous information was that the region which has been primarily affected by the leakage over the past several years consists of a swath through Kentucky, my home state of West Virginia, and Virginia with a combined population of over 9-million people. But on November 8, 1975, a secret meeting was held in the White House to discuss alternative means of disposing of the deadly poison. The discussion included some ideas that would be as insane as the poison itself—such as dumping all 60 pounds of it into the underground streams that lie under Fort Knox. Not only might this allow the poison to spread uncontrollably from there, but it could possibly also cause contamination of any of the huge underground caverns under Fort Knox which are used for natural gas storage. Now if this were to happen, natural gas could carry traces of the radioactive plutonium poison straight into the industrial plants and homes of thousands of people in that area. The deadly plutonium radiation would be unaffected by passing through gas flames, after which it could be inhaled or set on to food.

I received no further information concerning the action, if any, taken at the November 8 White House meeting; but I have received updated information to the effect that the poison is now spreading throughout the entire Southeast of the United States and even beginning to enter the Gulf of Mexico. Thirty-six million Americans are now at stake. And what is our government doing about it? Nothing. The White House meeting had only one purpose: to save face for the wrongdoers, not to save 36-million lives !

And what about Congress? And all those investigations we keep hearing about? Consider Senator Frank Church who is our newest presidential candidate. On November 20, 1975, he explained the release of his Committee's report about assassination plots on foreign leaders with the words, and I quote: "The people were entitled to know what went wrong, and why." But when it comes to an immediate deadly danger to all of us caused by the same elements of the Intelligence community, apparently Senator Church believes we are not entitled to know, since he has been covering up this vital information now for four months while the situation grows steadily worse. And for over two months the same has been true of his counterpart in the House—Congressman Otis Pike.

Meanwhile what else is happening in the Executive Branch, specifically the Treasury Department? My friend, I believe it is time to let you in on an example of the evasions, half truths, and distortions which Rockefeller bureaucrats use to cover their tracks. I call it a lesson in bureaucratic gobbledygook, the slippery language that some people also call double talk.

For over three months now, all of our attempts even to communicate directly with the government about the twin disasters

at Fort Knox have met with nothing but a very loud silence. Having deepened and confirmed their own guilt time and again through various slips in the past, they apparently no longer have the courage or the courtesy even to answer us! Through an indirect channel, however, we were able to extract a letter from Mrs. Mary Brooks, the Director of the Mint, dated November 21, 1975. This indirect channel is Congressman Kenneth Robinson of Virginia who, while he does not choose to pursue the Fort Knox matter on his own, has at least cooperated with us in ways such as this. In this regard, he is exceptional. No one else in the entire United States Congress has done even this much.

As I read the letter try, if you can, to find any clear-cut YES or NO type answer to anything. You will only find one to the effect that a certain statement, and I quote: "is simply not true." But the statement referred to is not our statement but a carefully selected misstatement of our charges by someone else. Now here's the letter:

"Dear Mr. Robinson:

Thank you for your letter of November 10, 1975, concerning allegations that plutonium-239 was stored in the so-called Central Core Vault at the United States Bullion Depository, Fort Knox, Kentucky.

We do not store plutonium-239 or any other radioactive substance at the Depository, and have no reason to believe that it is stored there by other government agencies. We authorized the Military at Fort Knox to make radiation tests in the Depository last week. We were informed that the tests did not disclose any evidence of radioactive material.

The allegations relating to the so-called Central Core Vault are carried in a Swiss Newsletter entitled 'Myers Finance and Energy' that is currently being circulated by those who have persisted with all the wild allegations about the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox. The Newsletter discusses Dr. Peter D. Beter's allegations and states (and the letter quotes as follows):

'In 1942-43 Major Stanley Tatom designed and oversaw the construction of a Central Core Vault below the Main Vault. To get to this ultrasafe vault, an elevator had to be installed and it used up the space occupied by 12 of the former Vault compartments. This explains why the numbering in the Vault compartments upstairs had a 12-digit gap.'"

And Mrs. Brooks' letter continues, and I quote:

"This statement is simply not true. There were no major alterations to the Vault after construction of the Depository was completed in 1936. The elevator was installed at the time the Depository was constructed. We have no record of Major Stanley Tatom designing or overseeing the construction of a Central Core Vault. In fact we do not, and find no record that we ever did, refer to any part of the Depository by that name.

The Visitors Log at the Depository does show the name of Major Daniel F. Tatum as calling on the officer in charge on July 29, 1942. We also have records which show that a steel door was erected by the Champion Wire & Iron Works, Louisville, Kentucky, at the entrance to the corridor that leads to Compartments numbered 1 through 14 in the basement level of the Depository. This work was completed on January 7, 1942, and the No. 15 was assigned to the door. After this work was completed, gold was

stored in the corridor for a time during which the door was locked and sealed."

Still quoting from her letter:

"The allegation that there is a 12-digit gap in the numbering of compartments is also inaccurate. Our records show that the Depository had 28 compartments, 14 on the lower level and 14 on the upper level at the time of construction. The compartments on the lower level were numbered 1 through 14, and the corridor door was numbered 15 when it was added in 1942. The compartments on the upper level were numbered 21 through 34. There is no record of the numbers 16 through 20 ever being used on Vault compartments of the Depository.

If I could be of further assistance in this matter, please let me know.

Sincerely,"

and there follows the signature of

"Mary Brooks, Director of the Mint."

My friend, letters like this one are the product of a year and a half of continuous effort on their part to refine their story and put their very best foot forward. They are written with great care, with careful choice of every word. The letter I have just read to you, in fact, was not even written by Mary Brooks alone. Much of it was written by an official in the General Accounting Office who has ties to the Intelligence industry. The GAO itself is implicated in the Fort Knox cover-up through the falsified Gold Audit done in the fall of 1974, so this letter is important, and it deserves closer examination.

First: Why does the Government deliberately go so far out of its way, to Switzerland no less, to find someone else's misstatement of the Bullion Depository modifications so that they can attack that instead of refuting our own statements? If they can refute our actual charges, why don't they do it? I invite the Government to listen to my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975 and respond to that, not someone else's secondhand statements. As I clearly stated then, the Central Core Vault was built into the Depository at the start. Major Tatom's job later on was to build a rapid retrieval system into the Gold Vault, not to build the Vault itself. I also explained that there is a gap of six digits, not 12, on each floor of Vault compartments.

My friend, the Government is acutely aware of my real charges, so why don't they answer them? What do you think?

Notice also, in trying to wave aside references to Major Stanley Tatom, how cleverly it is done! We can prove that he was there and did oversee the work on the rapid retrieval system, and apparently the Government knows we can. Therefore the following sentence is used to mislead without actually lying, and I quote:

"We have no record of Major Stanley Tatom designing or overseeing the construction of a Central Core Vault."

Of course they don't, because that is just not what he did. He built a rapid retrieval system to give access to the Central Core Vault. The writers of the letter included one other item which was intended to help throw everyone off the track, but actually does just the opposite. According to our own sources, during the

work on the rapid retrieval system in 1942-43, the disruption was so great that the gold was taken out of the Central Core Vault and, quote: "piled around in the corridors." Now we are told in this letter about the strange corridor door, which was installed for unstated reasons. Listen again to these astonishing words from Mrs. Brooks' letter, and I quote:

"This work was completed on January 7, 1942, and the No. 15 was assigned to the door. After this work was completed, gold was stored in the corridor for a time during which the door was locked and sealed."

Mrs. Brooks does not tell us for how long a time, much less why! But thanks to our own information, she doesn't have to tell us.

I suggest that you replay Mrs. Brooks' letter all the way through and see for yourself what you will pick up. For example, listen to all the assertions and denials that are all couched in the words, quote: "Our records show ..." or "We have no record..."—this coming from the same office whose records are so suspect in other ways.

Records of the quality of gold stored in Fort Knox and elsewhere, as I have revealed on other occasions, have disagreed with one another in glaring ways. The official Mint records omit shipments we can prove from Fort Knox. Even the case of the missing experimental aluminum pennies that has erupted lately is another example of the 'dependability' of United States Mint records.

But notice also that the letter spends the least time on the most important matter of all—the radioactive plutonium poison stored in the Central Core Vault. It is stated that the radiation tests by the Military, quote: "...did not disclose any evidence of radioactive material." In much the same vein, and with similar bureaucratic phrases like, quote: "We have no evidence...", the Kentucky Department of Human Resources claims that there is nothing to worry about. But, my friend, plutonium radiation is very hard to detect, yet very deadly if it gets inside your body. Experts sum it up with the phrase:

"If there is enough plutonium to detect, it is already too much. "

Therefore nothing less than a serious, comprehensive, honest check by top experts with the best equipment available can be considered satisfactory. The stakes for over 36-million Americans in the Southeast United States are too high to settle for less. The United States Government expects you to just take their word for it regardless of what they may tell you. No proof, no criteria, just believe what they say.

CHALLENGE TO THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT

Well, my friend, I do not ask you to do that. I am now going to issue a challenge to the federal government either to confirm or refute my charges about the plutonium poison leaking from the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox—openly, fairly, and conclusively. Furthermore, I am going to state clearly what my criteria are for a test of my charges that I believe the American people could accept and believe in.

Here specifically is what I propose:

First, formation of a truly blue-ribbon committee to test for plutonium poison leakage from the Bullion Depository at Fort

Knox, this committee to consist of scientists, recognized authorities fully qualified for such a task. If my challenge is accepted, the committee must include certain individuals whose names I will reveal at that time. The Government may nominate an equal number of scientists to the committee. However, my nominees will be men who are not my employees or associates; and likewise any members of the committee nominated by the Government must not be federal employees unless my own information indicates that they can be trusted. In other words, the committee must be independent and totally unbiased.

Second, this committee is to be given complete authority and discretion over the conduct of the plutonium poison investigation. They are to be provided at federal government expense with any and all technical assistance they may request as well as the most up-to-date and effective instrumentation. This must include the 1026 multichannel analyzer and any other devices they may specify. They must also have the right by majority vote of the committee to add other experts to their investigating committee if they deem it necessary. They are not to be interfered with or limited in any way. Should federal or other authorities choose to impose limitations, the investigating committee shall be empowered to immediately state any objections they may have to these limitations over live nation-wide television and radio so that their message cannot be edited out or reinterpreted by anyone else.

Third: Upon completion of their investigation, the investigating committee shall be granted up to one hour of live broadcast time on nation-wide radio and television to present their findings, and also their recommendations if my charges are confirmed. I am willing to accept their conclusion as final if it is unanimous, and the federal government must agree to do the same.

There is no time to be lost. If you agree that my proposal is reasonable, start passing the word and applying public opinion pressure to make it happen. Otherwise the ever-expanding control exercised by the Rockefeller Brothers will prevent it. It is UP TO YOU, because the once free, once great major media in America are being gobbled up ever more completely by the Rockefellers.

Their latest victim is the mighty Hearst publishing empire, whose publications reach a total audience of nearly 86-million adults. This take-over is the bottom line in the tragic Patty Hearst case involving the CIA-financed SLA. A stock transfer to a tax-free Foundation controlled by the Rockefellers was the objective, and it has now been accomplished.

It's sad that we have to look overseas to see any meaningful reporting about the Fort Knox plutonium disaster. In the Financial Times of London for Thursday December 11, 1975, the story was broken by C. Gordon Tether whose financial column is read the world over. In his article titled "A NEW TWIST OF FORT KNOX SAGA", he reviews the Fort Knox Gold Scandal cover-up and then informs his readers of the latest charges concerning plutonium. He ends the article with words that no columnist of his stature in America has yet dared to write, and I quote:

"But whatever the cost in terms of loss of face, might not the United States authorities be well advised to do whatever is necessary to demonstrate that there is no Ft. Knox cover-up? In the light of what is happening in the United States during the past few years, deeds inevitably now speak louder than words; and the refusal to prove that they have nothing to hide is inevitably

destined to go on fostering precisely the opposite impression."

Topic #2—On December 11, 1975, New York City went into default. Hundreds of millions of dollars in City notes came due on that day, and the City did not pay as promised. A DEFAULT is nothing more or less than a failure to pay, and that's exactly what happened. "But wait a minute", you may say. "President Ford announced that he would ask Congress to give New York City 2.3-billion dollars in loans because New York bailed itself out. What's going on here?"

What is going on, my friend, is just another Rockefeller shell game. New York City has declared a three-year moratorium, so called, on payment of 1.6-billion dollars of City notes. Anyone holding one of those notes cannot cash it in for three years, and will also receive a lowered rate of interest during that time.

New York noteholders do have another choice though. Until December 29, a few days from now, these noteholders may, if they wish, trade their notes for bonds issued by the "Municipal Assistance Corporation", or otherwise known as "MAC", on behalf of New York City. These bonds cannot be cashed in for 10 years or more, but they carry a higher rate of interest. And, oh yes, there's one other little uncertainty: MAC is a so-called "moral obligation agency", an idea given birth by Nelson Rockefeller and his own lawyer John Mitchell, and its bonds are "moral obligation bonds." Its promise to pay the bonds when they come due is not backed up by a legal obligation on the part of New York City, New York State, or anyone else. Either way, the person who simply wants to cash in his City note as it comes due is now out of luck, he can't do it; so New York City is in default.

Don't be misled by the fact that the major media under Rockefeller control are not using that word "default" for the time being. As I pointed out last month in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6, the dress rehearsal for default in New York some weeks ago was used to give that word "default" a very apocalyptic meaning. The word is therefore being saved for the right moment.

Meanwhile, the effect of this New York failure to pay is already spreading through our economy. Municipalities all over America, and even abroad, are suddenly finding it hard to sell the bonds. As the municipal bond market dries up, so will funds for public employees, projects, etc. The domino effect has already started, but our advance revelations have made it dangerous for them to highlight this just yet. But you can be sure that the word "default" has not been so carefully given its present frightening connotations without a purpose—and it may be that we will all see that purpose within a matter of a few days. A court ruling is due soon concerning the Constitutionality of the so-called moratorium imposed by New York. Should it be ruled unconstitutional, financial chaos will be the result in New York, and that chaos will quickly be labeled "default."

There are a whole string of other time bombs like that too, all ticking away. When the time is just right, the Rockefeller Brothers can set off whichever one is the handiest. When they do, the results will be the same, regardless of the exact timing. Armed with this knowledge, I hope you have taken the necessary steps to protect yourself, such as I described in my AUDIO BOOK No. 1, on "HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THIRD WORLD WAR."

Meanwhile, gradualism continues to be the word for the step by step actions of the Rockefeller Brothers; so if you watch the Stock Market, for example, don't fall into the trap of reading

great significance into the daily up-and-down wiggles. What counts is the month-to-month trend—and that is down. The Stock Market crash actually began in July 1975, as I said it would, but it does not yet suit the purposes of the Rockefeller Brothers for this to be obvious to all. Instead, the overall market is sinking downward in gradual, almost imperceptible phases. It is crashing in slow motion like a bad dream.

Meanwhile most people—that is, those who do not specialize in the Stock Market and financial matters—generally keep track of little more than the Dow Jones industrial average. There are nearly 2,000 stocks traded on the New York Stock Exchange but the Dow index is an average of just 30 of them. They were chosen to be representative of the whole Market, assuming no manipulation, but that assumption is no longer correct. Very special attention is paid to the manipulation of prices of these 30 stocks. As a result, the real behavior of the Market can be completely hidden from the general public. Whenever man is involved, races will be fixed.

Turning to the monetary picture, a development I first revealed in April of this year has just happened. At the 1975 "International Gold and Monetary Conference" here in Washington, D.C., I revealed confidential information to the effect that the Soviet Union would soon be issuing an international gold ruble, and just a few days ago it happened. The Soviet Union has introduced their "chervonetz", or 10-ruble gold piece. It bears the date 1975, and only 250,000 have been minted, 50,000 of which are already here in the United States out of 125,000 to be consigned to the United States. Under a 1923 Soviet law it is legal tender, making it convertible. This new gold coin is an attempt by the Russians for the first time in 52 years to penetrate the world gold-coin market and to compete directly with the "krugerrand" issued by South Africa. The chervonetz is about one-quarter of the size and value of the krugerrand, which means that South Africa will have to take measures to compete with it.

The other major event, supposedly in the monetary sphere, is the Monetary Conference, so called, at Rambouillet Castle near Paris late last month. It was a summit meeting of the Big Six—the United States, France, Britain, West Germany, Italy, and Japan, but please note that Canada was not there, and for very good reasons.

First, here's what happened, then I will explain why it happened, which is far more important.

Treasury Secretary Simon said on his way back from the meeting which took place over the week-end of November 16, 1975, that a compromise had been reached on exchange rates, among other things. France wanted fixed rates, while the United States had been campaigning for a "free" float to continue. The compromise that was reached is just what I had told you it would be: stable yet flexible rates of exchange, which they chose to call a "managed float." Simon also said he hoped that, quote: "the agreement will be approved at an international meeting in January, and that Congress will readily approve necessary changes in the Articles governing the operation of the International Monetary Fund."

Now a "managed float" from a legal point of view does not require any change in the Articles that govern the IMF unless it changes the par value of gold. So what is brewing now is a system of so-called "stable yet flexible rates of exchange" indirectly tied to a par value of gold. I revealed in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 5 for October 1975 that the plan is to repeg

gold at or about $195.00 per ounce, and this is still on track. This, in effect, will amount to still another devaluation of the dollar, and the official price of gold ($42.22) will be abolished beginning early next year. Keep in mind that the private gold markets will not be closed; and after this action, private gold prices will go past the $195 mark. A leapfrog condition will have been set in motion that will jack the price of gold higher and higher, and the process will be intensified by the coming war and world-wide economic problems. David Rockefeller's gold skyrocket will be launched at last; but the 50-million ounces of gold to be sold by the IMF will never reach the private market, going instead to the central bankers by way of sale, auction, or restitution. Five-million ounces of this, returned to the United States under the restitution provision, will be used in an attempt to continue to cover up the Fort Knox Gold Scandal along with gold now being smuggled into the United States by the CIA for the private coffers of the Rockefeller Brothers.

The biggest question about Rambouillet is: Why did the United States compromise? The answer is that a "free-floating" system would be too uncontrollable during the upcoming limited nuclear war against the Arab OPEC nations which is targeted to begin late in February 1976, just two months from now. So the United States had to compromise to complete its preparations for this war.

What I am telling you, my friend, is a military secret, or was until I revealed it in detail in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 last month. The code name for this military attack, by the way, is "OPERATION COBRA", and preparations for it are moving rapidly. Already the first detachment of crack United States Marines are now in Germany ready for swift deployment into the Sinai, where war will break out; and the build-up toward the staged provocation to ignite the conflict—namely, an attack on the so-called American advisers in the Sinai—is progressing steadily. Only today, December 21, 1975, the latest step was taken in this plan when a CIA-supported group made a provocative attack on OPEC Oil Ministers at their headquarters in Vienna, Austria. This is intended to lead, by stages, to reprisal actions against the Americans stationed in the Sinai.

HOW THE ALLIANCE BETWEEN ROCKEFELLER CORPORATE SOCIALISM AND SOVIET STATE SOCIALISM IS TAKING US INTO NUCLEAR WAR

Now I turn briefly to Topic #3.

Topic #3—As I explained last month, the limited nuclear war which is scheduled to begin soon in the Middle East is only a part of a much larger picture. The Rockefeller Brothers have designs on India, while the Soviet Union has its eyes on China. In resource-rich Africa, both the Rockefellers and their Soviet allies have an interest. So the real theater in the war now brewing is Asia. After the OPEC oil wells are capped by the nuclear strike, Russia's western flank (Europe) will be crippled and Africa will be more easily finished off by the guerrilla warfare already going on there. Oil-hungry Japan will be thrown into the arms of Red China which, by the way, has just announced it can now export oil; and the stage will be set for the big Asian war that is to be the next round in the bloody game of global monopoly. The strategy of all this was spelled out in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 last month. My purpose now, however, is simply to point out the basic nature of all this.

It is, my friend, a DRIVE FOR CONTROL—control of people, of resources, of the entire world. Furthermore, it is a product of unholy alliance between the State Socialists in the Soviet Union and the Corporate Socialists in the United States, the

Rockefeller Brothers and their client followers.

Many people mistake the Rockefeller Brothers for capitalists, but that is not at all what they are. David Rockefeller, for example, has been quoted as saying, "I believe in the enterprise system", but he does not say "free", much less "competitive enterprise." The entire Rockefeller empire is built on the exact opposite of that—monopolies and trusts. Their major multinational corporations are an ingenious device for casting off loyalties to any country, and they are already more powerful, collectively, than most nations. The Rockefellers, you see, are Corporate Socialists. Corporate Socialism and State Socialism are nothing more than two sides of the same coin. Both boil down to the same thing—dictatorships or near-dictatorships—enabling a very few people to control everyone else. Once you grasp this fact, the alliance between the Rockefellers and the Soviets will no longer surprise you, nor will the fact that the Russian Revolution in 1917 was financed by the Rockefeller interests.

The State Socialism of Nazi Germany also falls into place since it, too, was just another version of the same pattern. In all of these cases, as well as many others we see today, the Corporate Socialist empire of the Rockefeller Brothers gains handsomely—mineral riches, oil, and other rewards—in return for cooperation with State Socialism.

Thus it is that Secretary of State Henry Kissinger, a Rockefeller agent for 20 years and more, defends the Soviet Union against charges of cheating on the so-called SALT Arms Limitation agreement, but allows his out-going Ambassador to Canada to publicly accuse our closest neighbor of being "no longer reliable or to be trusted." Kissinger speaks not for you or me, but for the Rockefeller Brothers; and to them, Russia is the ally, the friend, while our close friends in Canada are the 'enemy', the people not to be trusted, because Canada's government now knows what is in the wind and they are taking all the necessary steps to weather the storm. The Canadian government wants no part of the coming war, monetary chaos, and all the rest of it, and has privately said so to Kissinger in no uncertain terms. So Canada has become 'unreliable', which means outside the circle of firm Rockefeller control. Bravo for Canada! Long may she continue on her independent course.

Ultimately the greedy misdeeds of the Rockefeller Brothers and their allies will be their eventual undoing. Even now both Nelson Rockefeller and Henry Kissinger have doomed themselves by handling some of the gold that was taken out of Fort Knox. That gold was contaminated by the radioactive plutonium-239 super poison, and now their bodies are contaminated with it. Even though they and the rest of the Rockefeller organization may well succeed in destroying our Republic IF WE DO NOT ACT, they will not live long to enjoy it. What poetic justice! Their dose is even stronger than that received by the Congressmen and newsmen who visited the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox in September 1974. Yes, eventually, the huge empire of the Rockefeller Brothers and their allies will tear itself apart, and perhaps destroy the world in the process. But meanwhile, IF WE DO NOT ACT NOW, there will be untold suffering for millions—ourselves, our children, and probably our children's children. Can we possibly sit by and let that happen? Or do we act NOW, while we still can, and take back our rightful control over our own destinies? For me, there can be only one choice, and I hope for YOU as well.

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. I wish all of you a blessed Christmas and a healthy, happy, holy New Year. May God

bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #8

Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is January 21, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8.

As we begin to celebrate the Bicentennial of our Independence, let us reflect for a moment on our past. Out of a vast wilderness our people created a nation with astonishing speed. Our Forefathers brought forth a nation with the highest and most stable form of self-government ever conceived by man. It was unique in the entire world, a prescription for freedom simple enough for everyone to understand, yet truly a work of genius. It's no wonder that from our earliest days as an independent nation the eyes of the entire world have been riveted on the UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.

What was initially called our noble experiment was spectacular in its success, and America's banner of freedom became a symbol of hope for oppressed peoples everywhere.

Would any of this have happened without the clear patriotic vision of our Founding Fathers? Could it have come to pass without the courage of George Washington who in 1776 led the famous surprise attack on the far stronger British forces in Trenton? Would we have had our inspired and inspirational CONSTITUTION if Benjamin Franklin's call for prayer had not broken the impasse over representation at the Constitutional Convention in Philadelphia in 1787? Could we ever have had a government sensitive to the wishes of the people if the humility of our early leaders had been replaced with the arrogant boasting practiced by our corrupt rulers of today? And, would we have had a nation such as ours if our Founding Fathers had believed in the internationalism promoted today by the Rockefeller Brothers?

What would our Founding Fathers say today if they could see us meddling in the affairs of other countries? How would they feel about the tremendous sacrifices they endured if they could see our rulers of today building up another nation to become our slave master at our own expense?

We would all do well to look back once again at the patriotic words of George Washington in his Farewell Address as President. He advised his countrymen to extend commercial relations to foreign nations with as little political connection as possible. He did not advise against such commercial relations in themselves, nor did he object to temporary alliances with foreign nations when needed in an emergency; but he did give us a clear, strong warning that has an urgent relevance to us today, and I quote:

"to steer clear of permanent alliances with any portion of the foreign world."

Is this rule being followed today by our Rockefeller Rulers and their client followers?

Since 1917 the Rockefeller empire has been allied with the Soviet Union, with which we are to be merged against our will and with the Soviets ultimately in the driver's seat!! As I explained last month, and have often discussed on other

occasions, we, the people are the victims of an alliance between State Socialism in Russia and Corporate Socialism here under the Rockefeller Brothers. And, my friends, this is not an informal arrangement. Since at least the early days of the Eisenhower Administration, which was actually run behind the scenes by Nelson Rockefeller, there has been a White House Directive which I am about to reveal to you for the very first time. It is short, but not sweet. It establishes as a prime goal of federal policy, and I quote here:

"to so alter life in the United States that it can be comfortably merged with life in the Soviet Union."

My friends, I do not merely challenge, I dare President Ford or anyone else in the White House to deny the existence of this Directive under oath. They won't do so unless they have become so desperate that they are willing to gamble on any bluff, because I have access to documentary evidence on this matter that could immediately convict them for perjury and lead to impeachment and/or prison.

Yes, this short White House Directive, my friends, quote: "to so alter life in the United States that it can be comfortably merged with life in the Soviet Union"—that's the key to all of our domestic and foreign policy today. It explains why we have become the factory for the Soviet Union. It explains why so many multinational corporations are being used to build up the Soviet economy while depressing our own. It explains why the many huge Rockefeller-controlled, tax-exempt Foundations, which are all working in this direction, are immune to prosecution for their flagrant violation of their charters. It explains why the Rockefeller-controlled banks and financial institutions are so single-mindedly financing the Soviet Juggernaut at American taxpayer expense.

It is little wonder that Nobel Prize-winning biologist George Wald in an article a year ago about the runaway power of the multinational corporations said, and I quote: "hence no nation so closely resembles the United States as the Soviet Union."

My fellow citizens, it is essential that we halt this horrible slippage backward into tyranny. If we are to survive as a free people beyond this our Bicentennial Year, we, the people, must rise up and make the Government that belongs to us turn its face forward once again to the still new, still fresh ideals and principles that launched our great nation. I am absolutely convinced that we can still do it IF WE WILL.

Last month I recorded AUDIO BOOK No. 6 entitled "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE AMERICA" to explain the strategy which I believe can and will do the job. And already alert citizens all over America are listening to this message, getting to work, and making suggestions. If YOU will join in the task, we can do it. Meanwhile I intend to keep informing you about what we are up against, how events are progressing, and what plans are being formed behind the scenes. To this end, I want to talk to you today about three topics that all reflect the drive to merge life in America with that in the Soviet Union.

Topic #1—OUR CHARGES FOR A CITIZENS' INDICTMENT ON THE FORT KNOX TWIN SCANDAL COVER-UP

Topic #2—ROCKEFELLER PROGRESS AND PROBLEMS IN THEIR DRIVE TO DRAG OUR ECONOMY DOWN TO THE SOVIET LEVEL

Topic #3—SO-CALLED "DETENTE" AND THE IGNORED PROPHETIC WARNINGS

OF GEORGE WASHINGTON

Topic #1—It is essential that I give special attention to the first topic today, but I will deal with the remaining two topics as fully as I can in the time that remains for them.

Almost two years ago in April 1974 during Congressional testimony before a subcommittee of the "House Banking and Currency Committee" I first revealed that the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox had been looted of its gold. I stood ready to present evidence to substantiate my charges, but nothing whatever was done! Having been failed by Congress, I then took my story to the public through lectures, radio Talk Shows, and publication of my charges in a national weekly newspaper. Faced by this public pressure, the Government responded by setting in motion a well orchestrated cover-up, a cover-up far more massive and more serious than that of the Watergate scandal which removed our last elected President from office.

The actual cover-up began on September 23, 1974, with the carefully staged visit of Congressmen and newsmen to Fort Knox. I have detailed the ensuing cover-up, among other things, in my AUDIO BOOK No. 2 on the "FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU." I have also given you continuing updates since June 1975 by means of my monthly AUDIO LETTER. In October 1975 I revealed what I had just learned at that time that makes a "twin" super scandal of the Fort Knox situation—namely, the presence of about 60 pounds of radioactive liquid super poison processed from deadly plutonium-239 in the Central Core Vault of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox. The canisters of poison put there in 1968 by the CIA are corroding and leaking faster and faster, endangering the health and even the lives of millions of Americans in the southeastern United States.

The Government's response to this second, far more serious half of the Fort Knox Scandal, has been the same as to the first—COVER UP. I've explained in recent months how first Senator Frank Church and then Congressman Otis Pike, Chairmen respectively of the Senate and House Intelligence Committees, have become parties to the Fort Knox plutonium scandal cover-up; and how bureaucratic gobbledygook is being used by Government officials to avoid giving straight, honest answers about the situation.

But now, the Fort Knox Scandal cover-up is getting even worse. It has recently entered a new phase of outright lying and of masking the evidence concerning my charges. They are going for broke, and they have long since passed the point of no return. The same tactics of lying and cheating by the Government that are standard practice in the Soviet Union, into which we are to be merged, are now being used here in the United States, and these tactics are far more effective here than in Russia because Americans, unlike Soviet citizens, have not yet learned to expect their government to lie to them continuously. Up 'till now the main cover-up approach has been one of evasion, but now an atmosphere of desperation on the part of the wrongdoers is becoming increasingly apparent. For the very first time Treasury Secretary William Simon has made the fatal mistake of actually lying, in writing no less, about a crucial matter—the existence of the Central Core Vault of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox. We have challenged the Government to either confirm or deny its existence in the past; and we have identified it not only by this name, "Central Core Vault", but also by describing it to avoid any possibility of misunderstanding due to terminology.

In a letter to a friend of mine dated December 10, 1975, Simon

said the following, and I quote:

"The allegation that plutonium 239 is, or ever has been stored at Fort Knox in a central core vault is false, and the Army has just conducted an extensive test of the Bullion Depository and has found no evidence of radioactivity. I should add that there is no such thing as the Central Core Vault."

Notice that Simon's denial of the presence of plutonium-239 at the Depository is tied right in with his denial of the existence of the Central Core Vault. Obviously if there is no Central Core Vault then it cannot contain plutonium-239! But on the other hand, to have any faith that his denial about the plutonium is truthful, you must also believe his assertion that there exists no Central Core Vault at the Depository. If he would lie about one, he would lie about the other.

With that in mind, please listen now to an excerpt from another letter—this one written to one of my associates by a retired Lieutenant General, John L. Ryan, Jr., a former Commanding General of Fort Knox. General Ryan probably knows more about the Depository than anyone else who ever commanded Fort Knox. He spent two tours of duty there before he returned a third time as the Commanding General; and when the gold was moved to Fort Knox to be stored there for the very first time in 1937, it was he who was placed in charge of the actual physical movement of the incoming gold into the Depository. With regard to the disputed Central Core Vault, he says, quote:

"When I use the word 'vault' I am referring to the central core of the Depository where the bullion was stored. This vault was below ground level and could be entered only through a specially constructed bank-type door that opened onto a screw lift. This door was in the Receiving-Shipping area of the Depository. The Receiving-Shipping room was above ground level. The vault was below ground level. Around the vault proper, or central core, below ground level was a passageway. On this passageway were a number of cell-like compartments. There was no means of entering the vault from this passageway."

My friends, the passageway with its compartments are all that the visitors saw in September 1974. The existence of the Central Core Vault, which is where the gold, if any, should have been, is absolutely confirmed by General Ryan; and as his letter makes clear, the 1974 visitors had no chance of finding out about it while wandering around in the passageway and looking at the small compartments you heard and read about in the news.

Such bald-faced lying is bad enough, but the mounting desperation of the Rockefeller Brothers and their lackeys over Fort Knox now goes even beyond mere lying. It is standard practice whenever an extremely damaging secret is in danger of exposure, to distract attention from it and confuse the issue by deliberately exposing something else—something far less serious and dangerous than the secret being hidden yet shocking enough to satisfy the public's appetite for the truth.

With our totally manipulated government of today, a good rule of thumb is whenever something that looks really damaging is revealed, ask yourself: "Why are they letting this out of the bag? What is it that is worse that they are trying to distract my attention from?" Thus, for example, Sen. Church's sensational revelations last summer about deadly shellfish toxins and the like fooled many into believing they had been given the whole ugly truth about CIA misdeeds, but actually he was covering up what he knew about the insane nuclear super poison at Fort

Knox—something a thousand times worse than anything he revealed.

Now in the same way a cover-up campaign has been launched in regard to the leakage of the plutonium-239 super poison from Fort Knox, and it's horrible. A few days ago on January 12, 1976, a truck carrying radioactive waste just "happened" to have an accident in eastern Kentucky, smack in the heart of the area now most heavily affected by radioactive poison leakage from Fort Knox. Fourteen of the 32 drums of waste on the truck fell off, and 8 of them broke open and leaked. The newspaper stories around there about it contained the usual assurances that there was no danger, that it had been cleaned up, etc., but leakage had occurred.

Just six days later on January 18 newspapers contained big articles about still another alleged radioactive waste leakage problem in Kentucky.

The truck I mentioned a moment ago had been on its way to a nuclear waste dumping ground at Maxey Flats, Kentucky, which had been in use since 1963, and now we are suddenly told that the leakage is occurring there too. Federal investigators, those wonderful watchdogs we are supposed to trust and admire, claimed that radioactive waste in steel, wooden, and even cardboard drums has been just dropped into trenches and covered up with dirt; and after 12 years they have just now abruptly discovered that some of it has gotten loose and is spreading through the ground, through the water, and through the air. And a study by the General Accounting Office, while it gives the standard assurance that there is no immediate danger, recommends a crash program to correct the situation and develop systematic standards for safe disposal of radioactive waste.

Now, why all of this sudden concern about leakage of radioactive contamination? And why does the spotlight on actual leakage cases just happen to be on Kentucky? After all, there are vastly more serious problems of this sort elsewhere in the United States, for example, in New York State—but so why Kentucky? Two reasons, my friends. For one thing, they are using the opportunity to continue the nuclear "con game" that has been pulled on you for years by assuring you even when there are nuclear waste leakages that you don't really have to worry about it. But, more importantly, in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 7 last month I posed a direct challenge to the federal government to either prove or disprove my charges; and I spelled out a fair, objective way to do it. What is going on now is their answer to my challenge by spreading stories about other kinds of radioactive waste leakage in the general vicinity of Fort Knox, and possibly by deliberately causing such releases—such as occurred in the truck accident—they are feverishly tampering with the evidence.

The program I suggested to use offsite measurements to detect leakage from the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox would, as they can now argue, no longer prove anything conclusively about my charges because of these other radioactive leakages which allegedly have also suddenly been discovered in the same region. I, for one, would like to see the whole business about Fort Knox laid to rest once and for all, and I know you would too. I know that my charges about the gold and about the plutonium poison are true; but for the sake of argument IF I were wrong, I would rather be honestly proven wrong about any or all of them and be made a laughingstock than to have the American people's worry over this matter dragged out endlessly like this.

Whatever the truth is, I want you to know; but the Rockefeller

lackeys in the Government know only too well that the truth is exactly what I have told you, and they don't want you to know. They will do anything and everything to try to save themselves regardless of how many other human beings they may doom in the process. And so, my friends, this is the vicious reality behind the smooth mask that our Rockefeller-controlled federal government wears. We, the people, must bring the pressure to bear that will cause these things to be honestly investigated and corrected.

The United States is under the thumb of modern outlaws; and if we do not bring them to justice, they will bring us and our children to total ruin. So far the United States Congress has not seen fit even to consider my charges about the gold, about the plutonium, about anything! The problem is not that I don't have the evidence, but that I have too much of it. The same applies to the Justice Department, the General Accounting Office, the White House, and so on, so on.

But recently a Congressman who heard my testimony in Congress about the missing Fort Knox gold in April 1974 and who went to Fort Knox in September 1974, gave us a tiny opening, whether wittingly or unwittingly. His constituents have been pressing him continuously for some answers about Fort Knox; and in recent replies which were forwarded to me, he in effect challenged us to do exactly what we have wanted to do for nearly two years—to present our charges and evidence in a proper legal forum. Our response is a six-page "Open Letter" by my able co-patriot, Mr. Edward Durell of Berryville, Virginia. The letter is addressed to Congressman John B. Conlan of Arizona—but it is open, because based on past performance we have little reason for optimism that he will take any constructive action unless he is forced to do so by public pressure.

The letter presents charges which parallel completely, even in legal form, the impeachment charges leveled at President Nixon by the House of Representatives. It is a legal document, and YOU are the nation-wide Grand Jury. Under our CONSTITUTION, it is ultimately we, the people, who constitute the highest human authority in our land, and it is UP TO YOU to decide. Do our charges deserve an open, complete, honest investigation in a proper legal forum or not? If so, it is UP TO YOU to return a "Citizens Indictment" by demanding that your elected representatives provide a legal forum through Congressional investigation or formal Grand Jury proceedings.

Here now is Mr. Durell's letter to Congressman Conlan of Arizona. I will be quoting from the letter from here on all the way to Mr. Durell's signature. Mr. Durell's letter is dated January 7, 1976:

"Dear Mr. Conlan,

Your letters of December 5, 1975, to Mrs. Mary Barrow and Mr. Art Bentley both of Lake Havasu City, Arizona, have been sent to me for comment. To that end I write direct to you, with copies to them and other interested parties.

In your letter to Mrs. Barrow you state among other things that, quote: 'Grand Juries are empaneled to investigate criminal wrongdoing', and that if, quote: 'you personally have evidence of crimes committed in connection with our nation's gold holdings, please let me know so that I can put you directly in touch with appropriate officials of the United States Justice Department who would have jurisdiction in this matter.'

In your letter to Mr. Bentley you state among other things that while you have, quote: 'some misgivings' about the gold situation, quote: 'I can assure you that exposure to any radioactive poison would have caused me serious illness. Neither I nor anyone else who went to Fort Knox has suffered any such illness.'

Please allow us firstly to answer your letter to Mr. Bentley. It is common knowledge in nuclear medicine that if one is exposed to alpha particle radiation of plutonium, death due to cancer can come in a matter of months or years. It all depends upon dosage level and duration of exposure. In this respect we would suggest that you contact Dr. John Gofman, former professor of Medical Physics emeritus, University of California at Berkeley; or listen to him by way of a one-hour tape cassette obtainable from AUDIO BOOKS, INC., P. 0. Box 16428, Fort Worth, Texas, 76133; special tape No. 2 for $6.00 postpaid.

(Editor's note—1981 address is:

The Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER Suite 5092, 1629 K Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006.

Current price is: $7.50 postpaid.)

In this tape Dr. Gofman speaks on the effects of radioactive poison, among other things.

In addition, over 18% increase in cancer deaths in the first seven (7) months this year over last year has taken place in the central-eastern states, which has left medical authorities in the dark as to the cause. They felt they had made such tremendous cancer advancements in the last few years, and then to have such a high upsurge in the first seven months this year over last year in that area alone, is baffling.

One more thing about this radioactive poison in the United States Bullion Depository at Fort Knox—hereinafter called 'Fort Knox.' We know from sources in the Intelligence industry that this plutonium poison was part of the plutonium-239 stolen by members of the Intelligence community in 1966 and that this most deadly substance was processed in four plants—two in Kentucky, one in North Dakota, and one in California—into radioactive liquid poison. It was then taken—60 pounds each—to Peru, Panama, Bolivia, and Argentina under cover of a multinational cement corporation by a CIA officer, Harold Leroy White, for the sole purpose of threatening to contaminate the United States-planned and built water aqueduct systems in those countries for political and economic pressure. Sixty pounds, however, intended for use in Argentina, was brought back by Mr. White and placed in the Central Core Vault at Fort Knox where it has been stored ever since late 1968. The casks are now corroding, causing leakage and contamination over the entire areas east and southeast of Kentucky, and as far away as Cuba. This contamination is endangering the lives of over 40-million people in this country. Can we afford to allow these people to be expendable?

The federal government has now publicly admitted our charges that opium and morphine—150,000 pounds and 24,000 pounds respectively-are stored at Fort Knox. Why will it not admit the existence of the plutonium?

It is suggested that to do so might subject the Government to thousands of legal actions involving hundreds of millions of

dollars under the Federal Tort Claims Act and/or the Price Anderson Act, the 1954 Atomic Energy Act as amended, Title 42 Section 2011 and following for, quote: 'extraordinary nuclear occurrence'—that is, quote: 'any event causing a discharge or dispersal of source, special nuclear or by-product material from its intended place of confinement in amounts off site or causing radiation levels off site and which has resulted or will probably result in substantial damages to persons off site or property off site.'

And why will it not admit the loss of our gold reserves? For the same reasons—legal actions including those criminal in nature. And in the latter connection, we would like here to pursue your suggestion to Mrs. Barrow and list the charges of the high crimes committed relative to disappearance of the people's gold reserves.

On behalf of the American people it is herein charged that the United States Treasury Department—hereinafter called 'Treasury'—in violation of its Constitutional duty to protect the people's gold and in violation of its Constitutional duty to take care that the laws relative to the safeguarding and custody of said gold be faithfully executed, has failed so to do in that between January 1, 1961, and January 1, 1974, prior and subsequent thereto, Treasury engaged itself through its officers/agents and in concert with others in America's corridors of financial power in a course of conduct or plan designed to convert unto themselves the people's gold entrusted to it for safekeeping for the avowed purpose of profiting unjust enrichment; and in a course of conduct or plan designed to cover up, conceal and protect those responsible and to conceal the existence and scope of other unlawful covert activities.

The means used to implement this conduct or plan have included one or more of the following:

1. Treasury has failed to render a true account of the amount of gold shipped out from the United States Bullion Depositories from 1961 to 1968 under color of the 'London Gold Pool Agreement';

2. Treasury has failed to reveal the true prices, if any, received for the sale of said gold or reveal the names of the ultimate purchasers of said gold;

3. Treasury has failed to give a true account of the amount of gold shipped out of the United States Bullion Depositories from 1968 to 1974 under color of an ad hoc committee composed of the Chairman of the Federal Reserve Board, the Chairman of the Council of Economic Advisers, the Chairman of the White House Council on International Economic Policy, the Secretary of State, and the Secretary of Treasury, among others;

4. Treasury has issued a statement dated August 31, 1974, purporting to list 24-million ounces of good delivery gold at Fort Knox when in actual fact the Secretary of the Treasury admitted December 3, 1974, that such listing is false or misleading;

5. Treasury has taken, December 9, 1974, without lawful authority, two-million ounces of gold from the Exchange Stabilization Fund by a simple bookkeeping device and four days later announced by way of the General Services Administration that there would be an auction of two-million ounces of gold on an 'as is' basis January 6, 1975. In addition, a Dutch auction was held June 30, 1975, with the remainder of said gold based on a price not considered best for the taxpayers of America;

6. Treasury has caused a statement to be issued April 11, 1975, which is false or misleading in that it purports to list all of the gold shipments out of Fort Knox when in actual fact such list omitted among other things a shipment of gold consisting of four (4) tractor-trailer loads on January 20, 1965, which shipment consisted of 1.762-million ounces valued over sixty-one million dollars ($61,000,000) at $35.00 per troy ounce—the par value for official gold at that time;

7. Treasury has in its immediate possession and control the necessary keys, combination numbers, and time-control data for the vaults, depositories, and their mechanisms. It thus has the highest duty to take care that its trust be faithfully executed, but it has acted in a manner contrary to its trust and subversive of responsible government to the great prejudice and to the manifest injury of the people of the United States by acting in concert with others to aid and abet, to surreptitiously remove the gold under the cover of legal right;

8. Treasury has made false or misleading statements for the purpose of deceiving the people of the United States into believing that a thorough and complete inspection and audit have been conducted with respect to allegations that Fort Knox contains no significant amounts of gold and not accounted for, in that an inspection trip to Fort Knox September 23, 1974, revealed one (1) cell-like compartment, No. 33, to contain only copper-hued bars. Mrs. Mary Brooks, the Director of the Mint, Treasury, said, quote: 'It's all here.' Her statement is analogous to the so-called Audit of October 1974 of only three

(3) of the cell-like compartments at Fort Knox, which Audit calls the Report to be submitted to Congress February 10, 1975—also based on a belief that, quote: 'It's all here.'

Further, the inference given by the inspection trip and the Audit was that the gold at Fort Knox was of good delivery form and the remaining ten (10) cell-like compartments were full of good delivery gold;

9. Treasury is withholding relevant and material evidence or information from the American people in total disregard or violation of the Constitutional right of the people to know what has happened to its gold reserves and to its right of freedom of information for purposes unrelated to national security, the enforcement of laws, or any other lawful functions of Treasury in that the Central Core Vault at Fort Knox was concealed from the inspection group of over 100 news media people, six (6) Representatives, and one (1) Senator of the United States Congress ;

10. Treasury has unlawfully utilized its authority to cause the General Accounting Office to fail to take care that the laws be faithfully executed in that the General Accounting Office, a legislative entity, was forced to have only two (2) of its own people on a settlement committee to audit the alleged gold at Fort Knox, whereas Treasury had thirteen (13) of its own people on said committee;

11. Treasury has not caused to be made an annual physical inventory of the people's gold since 1953. Thus Treasury has failed to take care that Title 31 USC be faithfully executed by failing to make the required annual physical inventories.

In all of this and more, Treasury has acted in a manner contrary to its trust and subversive of Constitutional government to the great prejudice of law and justice and to the manifest

injury of the people of the United States; wherefore, Treasury through its officers, agents and others in concert with it, by such conduct or plan, warrant such parties be brought before appropriate legal authorities to answer these charges; and, further, for the restitution of the people's gold except that portion which is contaminated by radioactive poison in which case said parties shall be ordered to pay the current market gold price and for such other appropriate action as may be deemed just and proper in the premises.

In support of the charges, please be informed that former Congressman Frank Chelf's AFFIDAVIT dated April 7, 1975, in which he deposes and says among other things, and I quote: 'that the United States government was moving quietly as a church mouse out of Fort Knox' and that the gold was, quote: 'constantly and surreptitiously on the move.'

Fort Knox is located in former Congressman Chelf's Congressional District. He further deposes and says that, quote: 'In response to my previous requests for gold removal information, Treasury officials had been courteous and most friendly but always non-committal or evasive.' Mr. Chelf had earlier made the same charges on the floor of the House of Representatives, but to no avail. (See Congressional Record page 15522 - August 21, 1963.)

Further, Lt. General John L. Ryan, Jr., US Army (Ret.), in his statement of September 26, 1975 before Congressman Otis G. Pike in his office, has proved the existence of the Central Core Vault and in fact has drawn sketches of it. In view of this, there is no valid reason for the Secretary of Treasury to continue to deny the existence of the Central Core Vault at Fort Knox unless there is something deeply secret stored therein. There admittedly may have been the necessity for some secrecy in the 1960's when all of the gold at Fort Knox was stored in the Central Core Vault. Why the secrecy now, since the Comptroller General has stated on February 10, 1975, quote: 'As of June 30, 1974 about 55% of the gold claimed by the Treasury was stored in thirteen (13) sealed compartments at the United States Bullion Depository at Fort Knox, Kentucky'?

As further evidence, we call your attention to the balance sheets of the 12 Federal Reserve Banks, which carry Gold Certificate accounts as an asset to reflect a stated amount of gold which, in turn, is reflected as a liability on Treasury balance sheets; however it is submitted these Gold Certificate accounts reflect assets—gold—which do not in fact exist in Treasury vaults. This same situation prevailed in 1943 relative to silver when, quote: '14,000 tons of silver from the Treasury reserve backing American paper money was secretly taken from Treasury vaults although carried publicly on the Treasury balance sheets', cited in "Tragedy and Hope" by Professor Carroll Quigley, page 855, 1966/1974.

We could go on, but suffice it to say that Treasury during our 18 months investigations has not moved to refute by evidence the basic charges outlined above. Meanwhile our economy is suffering by those twin disasters, inflation and deflation—high prices with high unemployment—initially caused by the disposing of our gold reserves in secret and its attendant game plan.

Mr. C. Gordon Tether in his December 11, 1975, article, quote: 'A NEW TWIST OF FORT KNOX SAGA' in the Financial Times of London stated, quote:

'But whatever the cost in terms of loss of face, might not the

United States authorities be well advised to do whatever is necessary to demonstrate that there is no Fort Knox cover-up? In the light of what has happened in the United States during the past few years, deeds inevitably now speak louder than words; and the refusal to prove that they have nothing to hide, is inevitably destined to go on fostering precisely the opposite impression.'

Considering all of the above, would you please be so kind as to put the undersigned and Dr. Peter Beter, as you offered to do for Mrs. Barrow, quote: 'directly in touch with appropriate officials of the United States Justice Department who would have jurisdiction in this matter'? I am authorized to state that Dr. Beter concurs with the contents of this letter and is fully prepared to give further evidence before a United States Grand Jury and any Congressional investigating committee in confirmation of the charges herein cited, among others.

Further, I would suggest you personally bring this letter to the attention of the Chairman of the House Banking Committee of which you are a member, for appropriate action. Failure on your part to do so will lend credence to the fact you, yourself, have become part and parcel of the cover-up on this vital matter; and failure on the part of the Chairman of said Committee to take such action will further lend credence to the fact that he himself is in league with those underlying forces at work in America's corridors of financial power.

Most respectfully, EDWARD DURELL."

Topic #2—In my AUDIO BOOK No. 2 on "THE FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU", I warned you to watch for the Stock Market crash signal, meaning general unemployment in the range of 20 to 25%. This was originally targeted by the Rockefeller Brothers for the fall of 1975, but their schedules have been increasingly upset by their preoccupation with the Fort Knox Scandal "cover-up" and by the anti-CIA actions of Indira Gandhi last summer. Even so, they are working frantically to get the pieces of their plan together again.

Here in America, the Government officially says that unemployment in November 1975 was 8.3%; but my own confidential information, direct from sources within the Bureau of Labor Statistics, is that the true figure for November was over 15%—and still increasing! Therefore the real unemployment levels are now moving closer and closer to the Stock Market crash signal levels I revealed nearly a year ago.

Meanwhile the Dow Jones averages lately are streaking upward artificially in a dream world of their own, totally divorced from reality. The stage is being set for a dramatic visible plunge downward if the Rockefeller Brothers cut the cable on the Stock Market elevator.

And New York City, supposedly safe from outright bankruptcy by federal loans, is already far behind in its schedule for raising funds to stay afloat under that loan program. At the same time, the Nation's banks are again the subject of widespread concern, and no wonder. Recently front page stories have deliberately been planted in major Rockefeller-controlled newspapers about the alleged shakiness of the mammoth Chase Manhattan Bank and in even larger First National City Bank of New York, both of them Rockefeller controlled. This is partly an attempt to lower the Rockefeller profile by saying: "See, we have problems too." But more importantly, it is a deliberate effort to undermine

confidence in our whole banking system. Banks and their customers should therefore watch for trouble. A publication which is doing an outstanding job of keeping on top of the banking situation as well as many other matters is the Daily News Digest, Box 27496, Phoenix, Ariz. 85061

This month's meeting of the International Monetary Fund in Jamaica produced no communique, no general agreement, only reflecting continued confusion there.

Pressed by the smoldering Fort Knox Scandal on one hand and the imminent war in the Middle East on the other, the primary goal of the Rockefeller Brothers has now shifted to just one thing—to abolish the official price of gold in America so that the non-existent American gold hoard can be quietly dropped from Treasury and Federal Reserve balance sheets. Most of the IMF gold is beyond their grasp for the time being.

SO-CALLED "DETENTE" AND THE IGNORED PROPHETIC WARNINGS OF GEORGE WASHINGTON

Topic #3

Last summer Indira Gandhi cracked down on the CIA to stop the Rockefeller take-over of her country, India. Existing war preparations were immediately diverted to a new direction, and since that time a major new Asian war has been brewing. In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 two months ago, I spelled out the basic strategy for this war, including the role to be played by the Middle East conflict in paving the way for the Asian War. Plans are proceeding rapidly.

A few days ago Japanese Prime Minister Miki fell into a Soviet trap. Reacting to brusk and uncooperative Soviet treatment, he announced that Japan will sign a treaty with Red China that includes the anti-Soviet hegemony clause desired by China. At the same time, as you may have noticed in news reports, American business men are rapidly packing up and leaving Japan, supposedly because their Japanese understudies are now ready to manage things themselves—but actually because the Rockefeller Brother interests are bailing out in advance of war, just as happened a few months ago in Lebanon.

To set the stage for the big Asian War, hostilities are first to break out in the Middle East to provide an excuse for a limited American nuclear strike to cap off Arab OPEC oil wells. This will result in cementing the Sino-Japanese alliance for war, neutralizing Europe and producing real suffering there, and causing gas rationing in a major body blow to our wobbly economy here in the United States.

The terrorist attack on OPEC oil ministers in Vienna last month, engineered by our own CIA, was supposed to get the ball rolling in all of this. Two key oil ministers were supposed to be killed, leading to escalating reprisals and war—but the job was botched. For bungling this top priority operation, the man in charge, Richard Welch, the CIA station chief in Athens, was judged unreliable and executed by the CIA itself.

And now Lebanon, which was primarily a distraction earlier, has now become the new springboard by which the broader Middle East conflict is to be enlarged. All of this, my friends, is part and parcel of so-called "detente" with Soviet Russia on the way to a world collectivist dictatorship. Rockefeller Brothers internationalism, which is always portrayed by them as the path to peace, is actually a prescription for war, destruction, and

enslavement. To them it is "progress."

On December 31, 1975, President Ford said on the eve of our Bicentennial Year, and I quote: "Liberty is the most precious possession of our past." But, fellow citizens, it is up to us to restore liberty to our future as well. Had we simply been heeding George Washington's wise warning to avoid permanent foreign alliances, the horrors I have been discussing would not exist. In his Farewell Address, he also left us with many other equally wise observations that have direct application today. Washington's words and example helped launch the greatest nation on earth, and they can help get it moving forward again IF WE WILL ALLOW THEM TO. In this, our Bicentennial Year, I plan to return frequently to the forward-looking sage advice left to us by our great first President.

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #9

Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is February 16, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 9.

According to federal government decree, this is the day that we are to observe the birthday of George Washington, although, of course, he was born on February 22. This is just a tiny example of the elaborate psychological warfare being waged on us by the Four Rockefeller Brothers to subtly pry us loose from every tradition, great and small, that tends to make us resistant to their take-over plans. Their goal, after all, is to twist the Bicentennial celebration of our nation's independence and use it to silence the Liberty Bell forever. It is up to you and me, my friends, to repair the crack in our Liberty Bell so that it can once again ring out loud and strong.

Our beautiful DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE was signed 200 years ago on July 4, and ever since as a reminder of our nation's birthday each year the federal fiscal year has always begun in July—every year, that is, until now.

Last fall on October 24, 1975, a chilling parody of our nation's Founding Document was signed in Philadelphia, no less, to enhance its historical image. It is called the "Declaration of Interdependence" for which our puppet President Ford served as the advance publicity man in speeches last spring. It calls on all Americans to turn our backs on our precious independence and, quote, "narrow notions of national sovereignty" in favor of what is expressly called "a new world order."

And, my friends, you may be shocked to know that when our current fiscal year runs out on June 30, 1976, it will not be followed as it always has in the past by a new fiscal year beginning in July. Instead, there is to be a nameless transition period of three months, and all fiscal years thereafter are to begin in October! Why? To commemorate the signing last October of the new Rockefeller Declaration of Interdependence. Thus July 4, like Washington's birthday, is to become just another date on a calendar slipping quietly into oblivion, a relic of what our Unelected Rulers tell us is our obsolete, outmoded past.

As we say Good-bye to our Declaration of Independence and

everything it has stood for during the past 200 years, we ought to ask at least:

"What is it that our Rulers are so anxious to have us throw away? What kind of things does it remind us of that the Rockefeller Brothers want so desperately to have us forget?"

The DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE starts with the assumption that all men are endowed by their Creator with certain inalienable rights, including life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness, and that the preservation of these is the entire purpose of legitimate government—quote: "To secure these rights, Governments are instituted among men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed." And this is so basic that, quote: "...when a long train of abuses and usurpations, pursuing invariably the same Object evinces a design to reduce them under absolute Despotism, it is their right, it is their duty, to throw off such Government, and to provide new Guards for their future security."

My friends, our real government today is not the one defined in our CONSTITUTION which belongs to us. We are ruled today by the Rockefeller Brothers and their empire of modern outlaws pulling the strings and manipulating the actions of the visible governmental apparatus .

So, what were some of the elements of that "design to reduce them under Despotism" that led to the Declaration of Independence? Why do the Rockefellers fear to have us reminded of it? Just listen to a few examples of the grievances listed in the DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE and think of any parallels you can see today, and the answer will be obvious to you. Quote:

"He (the King) has erected multitudes of New Offices, and sent swarms of Officers to harass our people, and eat out their substance."

What about our mushrooming federal bureaucracy? Another quote:

"He has combined with others to subject us to a jurisdiction foreign to our constitutions, and unacknowledged by our laws; giving his consent to their Acts of pretended Legislation:"

What about the super secret White House Merge Policy Directive to Sovietize America which I made public for the very first time last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8?

What about the growing mountain of unconstitutional "Executive Orders" and oppressive regulations which today constitute pretended legislation?

Another complaint, quote:

"...depriving us in many cases, of the benefits of Trial by Jury:"

Our forefathers fought and died in a bloody revolution over this, yet it is only one of the many safeguards which are specifically eliminated as a right in the secret new Rockefeller Constitution which we are expected to accept this coming November!

Perhaps most telling of all, quote:

"He has abdicated Government here, by declaring us out of his

Protection and waging War on us."

My friends, you and I have been declared out of the protection of our own Government by the Rockefeller agents who control it! As I have documented for you in previous tapes, every remedy provided by law for the redress of such grievances as the terrible Fort Knox Twin Scandal and other such serious matters, has been blocked by Rockefeller agents and fellow travelers contrary to law.

Most recently, for example, my associates and I took up a Congressional challenge to state our specific charges about Fort Knox so that a Grand Jury might be empaneled to investigate them. The challenge was leveled by Congressman John B. Conlan of Arizona at certain of his constituents who dared to press him for action, and was an act of gross hypocrisy because Congressman Conlan knew full well that those individuals were in no position to present such charges and evidence themselves. But in an Open Letter to Congressman Conlan dated December 7, 1976, my colleague Edward Durell did exactly what had been asked, as reviewed in complete detail in my AUDIO LETTER of last month. The result? The same studious silence and inaction from Congressman Conlan that has characterized his attitude toward Fort Knox for over a year.

Whoever knows what is right to do and fails to do it, for him it is a sin.

The Rockefeller Brothers are truly waging undeclared war on us. Your survival may depend on your understanding this fact. My three topics today are, therefore:

Topic #1—HOW YOU ARE A TARGET IN THE SECRET ROCKEFELLER TAKE-OVER OF THE UNITED STATES POSTAL SERVICE;

Topic #2—HOW THE COMING WARS WILL AFFECT YOU AND YOUR FAMILY; and

Topic #3—HOW YOU ARE TO BE A PAWN IN THE GAME TO MAKE NELSON ROCKEFELLER OUR FIRST DICTATOR.

Topic #1—Two days ago on February 14, 1976, Ford declared in a Florida campaign speech that he has had it with terrorism, and he proposed the death penalty for a range of terrorist offenses. Not long ago full-fledged terrorism was something most Americans tended to associate only with other countries. "That couldn't happen here." But lately it is happening here, more and more. First there was the spectacular SLA case involving Patty Hearst. More recently, hundreds of grocery stores, banks and whatnot have been bombed. On December 29, 1975, 11 people were killed and 75 injured when a bomb exploded in the passenger terminal at New York City's La Guardia Airport; and you can rest assured that this is only the beginning.

On January 13, 1976, FBI Chief Clarence Kelly helped get our Bicentennial Year rolling by predicting growing terrorism in America and assuring us all that the FBI is bracing itself for the worst.

What you are not being told is that this new frightening problem is a carefully orchestrated part of the undeclared war being waged on you by the Rockefeller Brothers. The terrorism itself is flaring up, courtesy of your friendly CIA, which was behind the SLA and La Guardia episodes as well as many others of lesser note. Of course after they have given enough examples for people to copy, they fully expect a few unstable individuals here

and there to decide to do the same thing, and those amateurs will be the ones who will be caught from time to time and prosecuted with great fanfare. As usual, the Rockefellers first create a problem on one hand—in this case terrorism—and then stand ready to solve this problem for us on the other hand—in this case by way of a nation-wide law enforcement apparatus, which they are subtly bringing under federal control.

POLICE SITUATIONS

This same technique is being applied in the related area of "civil disturbances." Lodged within the so-called United States Department of Justice is a relatively new and little known agency called the "Law Enforcement Assistance Administration" or LEAA for short. In the few years of its existence, LEAA has turned into very big business indeed, and is busily converting segments of your local police all around the country into Regional branches of our as yet unadmitted "Federal Police Force"—in other words, our GESTAPO. Of course "Gestapo" has an unpleasant ring to it so don't expect them to name it that. These "special duty law enforcement teams" are for the most part not yet well known by local citizens in each area. Lately, though, a few of them have received some unwanted publicity in scattered locations around the country, so keep your eyes open.

One favorite type of unit is often called a Metropolitan or Metro Police Unit. These are typically formed as a cooperative arrangement among a group of communities. Each community contributes a few of its officers to the Metro Unit, which is given jurisdiction throughout all the communities involved.

The LEAA assists in getting these going by footing the bill, or most of it, with your federal tax dollars for the first few years. Sounds nice, doesn't it? But it is the first step toward replacing your local policemen with Regional cops who may feel much less attachment to you or your town. Worse yet, LEAA takes deliberate advantage of the natural tendency of most local Police Chiefs not to give up their best men but to instead pawn off any troublemakers or less reliable men onto the Metro Unit.

It's no wonder that in one area I was recently told about, such a Regional police unit has already acquired the nickname of "The Storm Troopers." The residents in that area have no idea how appropriate that nickname really is.

Most of this is tied in directly or indirectly with the secret domestic "OPERATION GARDEN PLOT" about which I warned you seven months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 2. Most of this huge program, which has even involved domestic war games and maneuvers for several years, is still well hidden. One exception, although its connection with "Operation Garden Plot" is not generally known, is the new breed of police usually known as "Special Weapon Attack Teams" or SWAT. They are the Green Berets of the police, and there is even a popular TV program to make them appear as heroes rather than the menace that they really are. True, they are frequently used right now in situations where their services may be beneficial, but this is little more than "combat readiness training" to insure that they can be used for more serious purposes when the time comes.

But you may say: "These policemen are good Americans themselves. Surely they would not allow themselves to be used as tools in setting up a Dictatorship!" Of course they wouldn't IF they saw the situation that way, but "Operation Garden Plot" started nearly 10 years ago in the wake of riots which were deliberately ignited in the mid-60's. All the indoctrination

given to these Special Police Units is given the slant that serious civil disturbances might rise again and that at all costs they would have to be put down to save our country! This is the diabolically clever trap being laid for us by the Rockefeller Brothers. We must stop the secret new Rockefeller Constitution before it is adopted, otherwise the streets of America will run red as frantic Americans try too late to reverse the so-called "Second Revolution" of the Rockefeller Brothers.

UNITED STATES POSTAL SERVICE

Of course there may not yet be a Regional police set-up where you live, but something else is bound to be closer to home, the Post Office. If there is one thing Americans probably don't fear it is the Post Office. We have been brought up to take for granted the safety, dependability, and convenience of the United States mails, and that is exactly what makes it such a valuable tool for the Rockefeller Brothers now that it has fallen into their clutches.

On May 28, 1969, the "Postal Service Act of 1969" was introduced in the House of Representatives by Congressman Morris Udall of Arizona on behalf of the Rockefeller interests who had been paving the way for it for two years. More recently, by the way, Udall has been leading the campaign to destroy your property rights by means of national "LAND USE" legislation, and he has also rendered other useful services to the Rockefellers. Perhaps you have wondered how good old "Mo Udall" has been able to come from nowhere and receive such favorable publicity in his presidential campaign. Now you know.

After an appropriate delay to suggest due deliberation, the "Postal Service Act" was passed overwhelmingly by both houses of Congress and signed into law by President Nixon late in 1970. At the stroke of a pen, the "United States Post Office Department" was abolished and replaced by the quasi-private "U.S. Postal Service."

Just as the "Federal Reserve Act" in 1913 handed over control of our money to the Rockefeller interests, the "Postal Service Act" handed them the control of our most basic communication system, the Mails.

Like the Federal Reserve System, the Postal Service is now privately owned, yet it retains the powers and privileges of the federal government. And not only was it obtained at no cost to the present owners aside from lobbying and propaganda expenses but their investment bankers have already reaped over $50,000,000 in brokerage fees for placing Postal Service Bonds in the private market.

When the Act was passed, there was lots of hoopla telling us that the new Postal Service would hold costs down by improving service; but postal rates have almost doubled already under the Postal Service, and just today the news was filled with statements that the Postal Service will just have to raise rates again due to its huge deficit—a billion dollars this year alone!

And as for service, the real plans of the new Postal Service Corporation when it was created were the exact opposite of the Public Relations promises. Plans contained in documents that are virtually unknown to the American people spell out a well defined process by which postal service is to be progressively cut to the bone, not improved; and this process of Sovietization of our mail service is even laid out in the favorite Soviet style—a Five-Year Plan from July 1, 1971, to June 30, 1976.

The mail service reduction plan involves nine separate measures. Briefly they are:

1. Elimination of a six-day mail delivery and manned window service;

2. Consolidation of mail processing centers;

3. Individual and group production standards;

4. New techniques for carrier office work;

5. Limiting mail delivery by requiring such things as "cluster boxes" at trailer courts, and making only one attempt to deliver a Parcel Post;

6. Cutting back on basic services such as smaller Post Offices and the number of Mail Collection boxes, and no longer delivering Parcel Post and Certified Mail to your home;

7. Requiring you, the customer, to do more and more of the Postal Service's work, such as coding and sorting the mail;

8. Eliminating the use of Air Transportation for first-class mail within 750 miles; and

9. Establishment of so-called Standardized Postal Facilities.

So far these measures sound pretty harmless, don't they? Aside from a little inconvenience, they probably don't arouse much concern on your part. That is because they were deliberately written to avoid arousing such concerns and suspicions. Each of these nine measures is described by the Postal Service itself as a, quote "stratagem." The word "stratagem", my friend, means a trick in war for deceiving the enemy. We, you and I, are the enemy whom the Rockefeller Brothers intend to deceive with these bland descriptions of very important things.

For example, consider Stratagem 2—Consolidation of Mail Processing Centers. This implies centralization of mail processing which will help render the "Search and Seizure" provisions I will tell you about in a moment more powerful. It is also tied in with Stratagem 6 under which more than 3000 Post Offices have already been shut down, and more will be lopped off soon.

Most, if not all of the nine Stratagems for downgrading postal service, imply severe cutbacks in Postal Service personnel. The dwindling personnel and lengthening lines in Post Offices these days are only a foretaste of things to come. Last year alone over 15,000 Postal Service jobs were eliminated, and it is going to get worse as postal jobs disappear right and left. One might have expected appropriate Labor spokesmen to put up a howl at such a plan, but not so George Meany, the AFL-CIO president who really works for the Rockefeller Brothers, not his Union members. He supported this so-called "Postal Reform", thanks to a virtual yellow-dog contract which gave the AFL-CIO exclusive rights to represent Postal Service employees without their consent.

But the mere downgrading of postal service, swindling of Postal Service employees, and the financial milking of Postal Service assets and public cash by the Rockefeller Brothers take a back seat to far more dangerous and little known provisions quietly written into the "Postal Service Act."

For example: Suppose you were to write a note or a letter to a friend and then decide for some reason to take it to him yourself or have another friend who is going that way drop it off for you. That, my friends, is a violation of federal law—the Postal Service Act of 1969. The Rockefeller Brothers will brook no such competition with their postal monopoly. The only way you can legally take or send a letter by any means outside the Postal Service is to treat it as if you had mailed it—seal it in an envelope, address it for mailing, put the amount of postage on that would have been required to mail it, then cancel the stamps in ink and write the date on the envelope. If you are willing to go through all that, then you may send or take the letter by some other means other than the Post Office—that is, unless and until paragraph 1401-B of the Postal Service Act is invoked which allows even this privilege to be suspended.

The parallels between this situation and the "Stamp Act" which helped bring on the American Revolution are interesting, aren't they? This virtual prohibition on carrying letters out of the mail sounds petty and greedy, but it is far more than that. It's the key to a whole range of the Gestapo-style controls for search, seizure, and censorship which can now be activated at any moment. The law already exists. All that need be done is to suddenly start enforcing it.

Under paragraph 1403 of the Postal Service Act, Postal Service officers can make searches for any such illegally transported mailable items. They can stop your car and completely search it, or if they find your car parked anywhere they can search it. If you have any package with you—for example, a birthday gift for a friend all wrapped up with a fancy bow—they can open that up to see if you are smuggling a forbidden letter inside. Should an illegally transported letter be found in such a search, it may be seized; and if it was concealed in the package or parcel, the package is simply forfeited outright. Within six months after such a seizure, the Postal Service has the option of bringing suit or other proceedings against you. It need not return your letter to you in event of a favorable ruling until two months after those proceedings are completed. In other words, that seemingly petty little provision about not sending a letter outside the mails, along with the other provisions dependent on it, open the door for wholesale detainment and searching of anyone and everyone traveling anywhere off his own property. They constitute an extremely dangerous trap ready to be used when the occasion calls for it to restrict and control your movements and activities. Any time you may be suspected of engaging in any activity the Government does not want, a postal inspection may be imposed on you to look for damaging evidence. It is only one short step further, of course, for such evidence to be planted during the search itself. "Unconstitutional", you say? Of course it is. After all, it is the product of the same people who brought you Adolf Hitler and who now seek to destroy our CONSTITUTION.

And what I've said is not all, there's more. For instance, there are the provisions against what is called "Non-mailable Matter." Right now public acceptance of this concept is being promoted by applying it only to pornographic material; but later it's application can be expanded to include anything our Rulers find objectionable, such as criticism of their policies!

Furthermore, sanctions can now be imposed on anyone who uses a fictitious name or address, and advanced fingerprint techniques can be used by the Postal Service to track down those who have handled an anonymous letter. Should the President declare a

"National Emergency", such as he may do soon on account of the war that's planned in the Middle East and as is mentioned 13 times in the secret new Rockefeller Constitution, everyone will be required by Executive Orders now in effect to register at their Post Office just as aliens do now. You would then be on a very short leash.

The Postal Service also is given other dangerous powers, such as the power of "eminent domain" by which this huge private corporation can acquire your property if it so desires. So the Rockefeller Brothers are weaving their Postal Service web larger and larger out of the public eye until the day they decide to put it to use to entrap us all as a part of their "undeclared war" against you and me.

Topic #2—When World War I ended, the Treaty of Versailles required the defeated Germany to pay huge war reparations to the victorious Allies.

After World War II, Europe was again forced to pay reparations, but you won't find them in any history book because this time the reparations were paid not to any nation or group of nations but to the Real Rulers of the Western world—the Four Rockefeller Brothers. And, as always, it was done at your expense.

Here is what happened. As I explained in AUDIO BOOK No. 1 about the "...COMING DEPRESSION AND WAR...", World War II was brought about by the international Rockefeller interests and succeeded in its purpose—to smash the British Empire in order to break the British boycott against the Rockefeller Standard Oil Company in the immense Saudi Arabian oil concessions. Europe was devastated in the process, however; and after the war the Rockefeller Brothers set about rebuilding Europe and Japan, and their own major holdings there, using American taxpayer's money as usual. It was called Foreign Aid, The Marshall Plan, and the Point Four Program among others, the Rockefellers themselves profiting handsomely from all the so-called foreign aid programs—and still do today through their multinational corporations. But, for the fraction of these programs that did benefit Europe and Japan, they also laid plans to exact reparations from Europe and Japan to go into their own coffers.

Three years ago in my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR", I showed how the Rockefeller Brothers caused the United States dollar to be divorced from its gold backing so that gold could be phased out of the international monetary system and into their own private pockets.

Over two decades the Rockefeller Brothers had expanded their multinational corporations into a formidable economic force using proceeds from foreign aid as well as the tremendous profits from Saudi Arabian oil, which they obtained at a net cost of only five cents (5) a barrel for over 30 years!

In the late 1960's foreign affiliates of the Rockefeller multinationals, armed with $200-billion, started dumping these dollars on the London Gold Market, forcing gold prices up there. European central bankers lost billions of dollars worth of gold in an attempt to keep the gold price and their own currencies stable, but to no avail. The forces against them were just too great, and by March 1968 they were forced to give up, causing the establishment of the "two-tier" gold system.

In mid-1971 these same multinationals launched another such offensive dubbed "Campaign May" bombarding the same central

bankers of Europe with wave after wave of billions of dollars until finally on March 1973 the central banks of Europe were forced to purchase the stolen gold reserves of the United States in Switzerland at $90 an ounce—2-1/2 times the then current official price of $35.00 per ounce. The Rockefeller interests received $45-billion for their trouble. What thus appeared to be a soft dollar devaluation in early 1973 was actually reflecting a huge behind-the-scenes reparation payment extorted from Europe by the Rockefeller interests for their role in rebuilding Europe and Japan after World War II—a war which the Rockefeller interests themselves had caused.

Since that initial sale of America's gold, the Rockefeller Brothers have made windfall profits on that same gold several times over by massaging the gold market up and down—buying low and selling high. Such international economic warfare, as well as the undeclared domestic warfare being waged on you and me, lies behind the theft of America's gold from Fort Knox and elsewhere; and there have been hints, at least, about the Fort Knox rip-off in the past. In 1968, for example, one William Ruckelshaus was running for the Senate from Indiana on the Republican ticket and he took a poke at then President Johnson by saying, and I quote:

"I would that every one of our 200-million American citizens could embark on a sacred pilgrimage to Fort Knox and walk the silent passageways and view the empty vaults which were once stacked with gold."

But Ruckelshaus is now one of the Rockefeller "inner circle" and we hear no more from him about irregularities at Fort Knox! Nor do we hear about it through the major news media. Most are silent because they are under control one way or another. The remaining few who are aware of the Fort Knox situation have so far knuckled under to pressure and a completely wrong public interest argument—namely, that if the truth about Fort Knox comes out, it could bring down the world's monetary system. But, my friends, the Rockefeller Brothers have already done that—it is on the road to total collapse right now to suit their purposes.

What exposure of the Fort Knox Scandal would do is to wrestle it free from their control so that it could be rebuilt for the benefit of everyone.

The news has recently included big stories about other alleged irregularities and corrupt practices within the United States Treasury. For example, Internal Revenue Service Commissioner Donald Alexander is presently under a Grand Jury investigation here in Washington, D.C. on corruption charges.

But the biggest story of them all is Fort Knox; and though it has been 22 months since I have made my initial charges in Congressional testimony, there still is no Grand Jury and no Congressional investigation about Fort Knox, and the story itself remains blackballed and embargoed by the Rockefeller-controlled major media!

But the strain of covering up is taking its relentless toll. As I related last month, Treasury Secretary Simon has now resorted to outright lies, saying the Central Core Vault at Fort Knox does not exist—despite our evidence to the contrary from a former Commanding General of Fort Knox and other sources.

The Simon lie is now the new official line at the Treasury and is being repeated verbatim by one official after another. And

poor Mary Brooks! Mrs. Brooks, of course, is the Director of the United States Mint, ostensibly so. In September 1974 she capped off the Boy Scout picnic for visitors at Fort Knox with those famous words: "See, its all here", but she later found out that my charges are true and that she had been made a "fall guy" by her bosses. She tried months ago to resign as I mentioned in one of my monthly AUDIO LETTERS, but was refused supposedly until all blows over. But the strain is becoming unbearable, and reports have just surfaced to the effect that she has been under hospital care since last November for nervous exhaustion caused by worry and strain. Officially what she is said to be worried about is the ridiculous case of several missing experimental aluminum pennies. If you want to believe that one, go right ahead. Poor Mary Brooks is now in a very precarious situation. She has become unreliable for the conspirators and they now have her right where they want her—in a hospital! If she is lucky she may be allowed to resign for "reasons of health", or she may be about to follow the last footsteps of Mrs. Louise Boyer for knowing too much. The successful mass media blackout on the Fort Knox Gold Scandal has now guaranteed that you will face very hard economic times shortly.

But still worse is the Fort Knox Plutonium Poison Scandal, which is being covered up even more brutally. It has now been four months since I first revealed that a CIA super poison processed from deadly radioactive plutonium-239 was stored in and leaking from the Central Core Vault of the Fort Knox Bullion Depository. Cancer figures released shortly thereafter by the Government revealed an appalling 18% upsurge in cancer downwind of Fort Knox, but now the press is filled with efforts by the Government to discredit its own figures as a fluke due to their connection with the Fort Knox situation.

A month ago they also began beating the drum about other radioactive leakages allegedly discovered 'suddenly' in the vicinity of Fort Knox, thereby camouflaging Fort Knox as a radiation source itself. Meanwhile an invisible deadly atomic plague is seeping outward from Fort Knox. The insane, inhuman plans discussed in the White House on November 8, 1975 were carried out. The contents of the leaking casks of CIA super poison stored in the Central Core Vault were dumped into the underground streams beneath Fort Knox, and now the possibility of containment of the poison is gone.

It's no longer a question now, my friends, of doing what I suggested four months ago. That was to abandon the Fort Knox Bullion Depository and seal it up in a tomb of rock and lead so that its deadly contents could no longer escape. But now, over 40-million people in the southeastern United States are living in what should be declared a "National Disaster Area" by President Ford.

The atomic plague now spreading throughout the southeast has some similarities to the bubonic plague or Black Death that decimated Europe hundreds of years ago. Like bubonic plague germs, the CIA super poison is invisible, tasteless, and odorless. When the bubonic plague struck Europe it advanced relentlessly and largely out of control because modern medicine had not yet come along to educate people to the nature of the unseen danger. And today the atomic plague from Fort Knox is also advancing relentlessly and without warning, because this time the plague is man-made; and the men who made it refuse to issue the life-and-death warning that is needed.

In the relatively low concentrations now building up in places throughout the southeast, the time lag between exposure to the

plutonium poison and its deadly cancerous effect may be considerable—months or even years, varying from one place to another depending on local conditions. So if nothing is done, 40-million Americans seeing nothing wrong, unable to taste or smell the atomic plague and not being warned by the Government, will be taking more and more poison into their bodies—men, women, and children. By the time people start dying in alarming numbers from the cancerous effects of the poison, the Rockefeller Brothers expect to have their dictatorship in place. After all, it is down to a matter of months for them now after decades of work. If we accept their diabolical new Constitution in 1976, they will be home free and they won't let anything get in their way if they can help it.

Forty-million people? Don't be silly, they've already caused the sacrifice of many times that number of lives in the 20th Century in order to advance their drive for world domination. And looked at from their perspective, 40-million people are scarcely more than one per cent (1%) of the world's population—hardly even a visible dip on their planning charts.

President Ford knows about the hideous death threat to 40-million Americans and it has him petrified; but in his belated efforts to break free of Nelson Rockefeller's iron grip, he is afraid his own life would be in danger if he went too far. Perhaps when he realizes that the atomic plague is also being carried toward Washington, D.C., he will conclude that he has no choice but to act.

Meanwhile the grim joke is on the Rockefeller Brothers and their henchmen. Contaminated gold from Fort Knox is now stored in their hideaways in New York State and elsewhere in banks, estates, and certain mountain caverns used as depositories by major multinational corporations controlled by the Rockefeller Brothers. As I revealed two months ago in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 7, both Nelson Rockefeller and Henry Kissinger among others have inadvertently poisoned themselves by handling some of this stolen gold. That is why Nelson was described in a Westchester newspaper two weeks ago as, and I quote: "hoarse, somewhat pale and, according to persons who have known him for years, lacking the old fire"; but we shall see.

I should warn you that deteriorating health on the part of these men is not likely to save us from their plans in the slightest—just the opposite. Any sense of desperation Rockefeller may feel could cause him to try to speed up his own timetable, especially since it is now considerably delayed.

Meanwhile, war is imminent overseas; and there, too, you will be the one to pay for it according to present Rockefeller plans. The overall strategy is still as I explained in detail three months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6. It is also still targeted to begin this month or next, but two factors may cause them a slight further delay. One is the bungled CIA attack on Arab OPEC oil ministers in December, which was linked to the crisis in Lebanon. The multinationals have left Lebanon and have not returned, please note that. The other factor is that when I was in Europe early December 1975 I alerted European and OPEC governments to these war plans hoping to throw a monkey wrench into them. Whether I succeeded at all remains to be seen, but at least I am informed that Henry Kissinger is boiling mad at me now.

The situation in Angola is only a small part of the overall Rockefeller-Soviet plans for conquest in Asia and Africa, but the Rockefeller media are putting a heavy spotlight on it to keep

your eyes off the bigger picture. It doesn't matter whether the CIA or the Soviet-backed forces win in Angola since they are both in the Rockefeller orbit. Angola is primarily a stepping-stone toward the take-over of rich South Africa, which has about a year to go on a three-year timetable that the Rockefeller Brothers have been following. Meanwhile the Cuban forces in Angola will shortly be shifted over to Mozambique to put pressure on Rhodesia. And very soon Congress is to be forced to take action tantamount to a declaration of war, and all sorts of emergency measures will come into force including sedition laws which the Rockefeller Brothers may try to use to silence people like myself. Now should that happen, I beg of you: Please don't forget my warnings which are for your benefit. Play this and any of my other tapes you have over and over so that you will learn all you can from them to protect yourself and your family. The more completely you know and understand the truth, the less vulnerable you will be to lies and propaganda.

After the war is so declared, anyone who has signed up for the highly publicized Food Stamp Program may be in for a nasty shock. This program is now controlled by Laurance Rockefeller and has ties to the less well known Federal Job Program which is to provide masses of people to be sent to the Middle East to rebuild the capped-off oil wells even while there is still residual radioactivity there! But perhaps you won't be among those tricked into literally signing your life away like that, and maybe you don't have to drive much so won't be very disturbed by gas rationing. Possibly you are even among the few who have sufficient liquid assets to weather a severe depression and come out on top. And, of course, the odds are 4 out of 5 that you don't live in the path of the atomic plague in the southeast United States, so why should you worry. Here's why: Once the Arab OPEC oil wells are capped off by nuclear strikes, the next step is the huge Asian war with the United States pressed into all-out service as the factory for the Soviet Union.

But that, my friends, will only be the first stage of World War III. The second stage will consist of a double-cross of the Rockefeller Brothers by the Soviet Union itself. As I warned in AUDIO BOOK No. 1, an attack on the Panama Canal will set off that war, and an attack on the Alaskan Oil Pipe Line, which will be vital by then, will leave the United States virtually helpless to defend itself against a vastly superior Soviet armed might, which has been built up at your expense by the Rockefellers themselves. This is the final, catastrophic bottom line toward which so-called detente is leading—nuclear war, ultimately on American soil and Soviet domination of our land IF WE ALLOW IT TO HAPPEN. Only if you and I do our part—passing the word and waking up the sleeping American people, can this unthinkable disaster be avoided.

HOW YOU ARE TO BE A PAWN IN THE GAME TO MAKE NELSON ROCKEFELLER OUR FIRST DICTATOR

Topic #3—Early last November Nelson Rockefeller publicly announced that he was bowing out as a candidate for the Vice-Presidency in 1976. I warned then that his

Vice-Presidential withdrawal was only a trap for the unwary; and on February 4, 1976, he himself said practically the same thing I told you last November. Rockefeller's words were, and I quote:

"I withdrew as Vice-President. My statement includes the Vice-Presidency only."

And in just a few days, on February 19, 1976, Nelson Rockefeller plans to burst into the presidential campaign arena, stealing the

spotlight from everyone else in coming weeks and focusing it on himself.

Since becoming Vice-President under the 25th Amendment, which he himself engineered into the Constitution, Rockefeller has been thwarted several times in his efforts to replace Gerald Ford in the Oval Office. Most recently, Ford was supposed to get out of the way in time for Rockefeller to give the "State of the Union" speech as president; but for some time now Richard Nixon has been calling Ford almost daily to say "Hang in there, Jerry", while Rockefeller keeps pressuring him to get out. It is a question right now of who has the worst blackmail material on Ford: Nixon or Rockefeller. So far, Nixon has been able to keep the upper hand in this tug of war. So it was back to the drawing boards again for Nelson Rockefeller, and he is determined not to be thwarted again. Ford stammered and fumbled his way through an insignificant "State of the Union" address as if reading it for the first time, which he may have been since it was worked up practically at the last minute.

Meanwhile the electrifying State of the Union message Rockefeller had planned to deliver will now be delivered a chunk at a time in a little over 10 speeches. He will be speaking about things no other candidate does—fundamental matters that look far beyond mere current issues. Just as a Rockefeller puppet named Franklin Delano Roosevelt called for a "New Deal" in a time of national trial, Nelson Rockefeller will try to convince us of the pressing need for a new balance between the public and private sectors. Rockefeller's ideas and proposals will be controversial; but in the coming months you will be battered and buffeted by escalating problems that are intended to make Rockefeller's ideas look more and more attractive to you. And to help calm any residual fears you may have that Rockefeller's proposals are too radical or dangerous, the instant Conservative strategy which began last summer will be brought into play.

Several months ago I explained the role that AFL-CIO president George Meany is to play in this, and he can hardly wait for the go-ahead to publicly endorse Rockefeller. Just today, February 16, Meany announced that the AFL-CIO will not endorse a Democrat prior to Convention time.

A few days ago Rockefeller's instant Conservative strategy shifted into high gear. Senator Barry Goldwater, who is perhaps the biggest Rockefeller Trojan horse of all, has now endorsed Rockefeller for President saying he has 'changed' his liberal ways. Since last May I have tried first privately, then through public appeals, to get Goldwater to release crucial Fort Knox evidence in his possession which was obtained from the widow of a man who died suddenly under very strange circumstances; but Mr. Conservative refuses to cooperate, and is still sitting on that evidence to this very day! Now we have the public proof of the reason, which I have known privately for some time. Goldwater's evidence would tend to implicate the Four Rockefeller Brothers; and Goldwater, who has sometimes been called 'the conscience of the Senate' by the increasingly generous Rockefeller media of late, is himself a keystone of Nelson Rockefeller's instant Conservative strategy to deceive you. By the time Ronald Reagan becomes Rockefeller's Vice-Presidential running mate, the plan is for Rockefeller's magical transformation in the public eye to be complete.

Meanwhile, things will be going from bad to worse, crisis heaped upon crisis. On Jefferson's birthday April 13, 1976, the new $2.00 bill is to be introduced, highlighting the inflation that is sending the dollar into oblivion, or a moratorium.

Simon's so-called "red-back dollars", described in my AUDIO BOOK No. 1, are getting closer and closer.

The risk of losing your job is also going up and up. My latest confidential information direct from within the Bureau of Labor Statistics, is an unemployment level of 18.3%, up 3% in only a month's time! Meanwhile the papered-over financial collapse of New York City and State is still progressing and will shortly surface again in dramatic fashion. The Stock Market hangs high but it hangs by a thread; and confidence in the nation's banks is being whittled away steadily because only today another large bank failed, the Hamilton National Bank of Chattanooga, Tennessee, with assets of half a billion dollars.

With the Mideast war is to come gas rationing, and with it a whole new ere of shortages. The deep drought in the Great Plains that is now developing was predicted for me two years ago by oil experts who told me that deliberately excessive rates of domestic oil production were gradually lowering the water table in that part of the country and would soon bring back the dust-bowl conditions of the 1930's. Our huge grain surpluses of recent years, of course, are now stored in the Soviet Union so you and your family will be the ones affected by shortages.

Nelson Rockefeller is determined to run as our incumbent president next November. After conspiring for over 20 years, spending $25-million to get himself confirmed, and forcing Congress to seal damaging testimony for 50 years, he does not intend to be stopped again. When the time is ripe this time, Gerald Ford will depart from the scene one way or another.

If our beloved land is to be saved, it is UP TO US, you and me, to do it. The only weapon we have is the TRUTH, made known to everyone; and in AUDIO BOOK No. 6 on "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE AMERICA", I have tried to explain exactly how we can do it. If you have some better ideas, fine; please go to it, but we must, each of us, do what we can whether it seems great or small, and we must DO IT NOW. We are in the last lap of a long, long race; and the prize is our own FREEDOM. Like an Olympic runner, we must get our "second wind" now and run as if our lives were at stake because, dear friends, they are!

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #10

Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is March 19, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 10.

In his Farewell Speech as our nation's outgoing first president, George Washington warned us with the words:

"Let there be no change by usurpation, for though this in one instance may be the instrument of good, it is the customary weapon by which free governments are destroyed."

He would, no doubt be shocked to know that today, nearly two centuries later, his words are more truthful, more urgent, and more up-to-date than all the oceans of meaningless words being poured into the ears of the American public by current presidential hopefuls.

"Change by usurpation" has become the order of the day as the rights of the people are usurped by our Unseen Rulers in order to change our way of life; and if the Rockefeller Brothers succeed in their accelerating plan to destroy our Republic right before our very eyes, their New World Dis-order in alliance with the Soviet Union will engulf us soon with blinding speed.

But my friends, WE MUST NOT GIVE UP; because in the decisive days we are now entering, the Rockefeller Brothers will in many ways be more vulnerable than ever before because their complex program of conquest is now behind schedule, some parts of it as much as one year behind, and they now have to play a deadly game of catch-up ball. They are being forced now to speed up and compress the timing of very major events in the very next few months in an attempt to get back onto schedule and the hour is now very late for them, as well as for you and me!

They are behind because they have stumbled repeatedly in the past two years. First they stubbed their toe by leaving a trail in the Fort Knox Gold theft, which has profoundly disrupted and now ruined some of the planned final stages of David Rockefeller's world gold corner. Then, for that and other reasons, Nelson Rockefeller failed to seize the presidency according to plan between March and June 1975; and beyond that, he has stubbed his toes two more times in the early fall and around Christmas 1975. John D. Rockefeller III, for his part, is being forced to close up shop at the New York office which published the huge "Bicentennial Declaration" ads one year ago calling for a "Second American Revolution—the reason being our success in exposing its connection with the secret new Rockefeller Constitution. The work is continuing but it is concentrated now in the "American Revolution Bicentennial Administration", a federal agency here in Washington headed by John Warner, who is on John D. Rockefeller Ill's committee of the "Second American Revolution"—the name given to a book written by John D. Rockefeller published in early 1973. As for brother Laurance, he is occupying himself with the Food Stamp Program and other preparations for war.

The Stock Market, while it is extremely sick now generally, is being kept healthy looking to the general public by means of the Dow Jones industrial average, which is made up almost totally of Rockefeller companies. Until the other elements of their game plan can be put back on the track, the dramatic crash of the Dow is being held in abeyance.

The biggest of these other elements, of course, is the coming war; and it, too, is over a year late now having been delayed first by Egyptian President Sadat and then thrown into a cocked hat last summer by Indira Gandhi's crack-down on the CIA.

Because of these things among others, the Rockefeller Brothers are faced with a complex juggling act that must orchestrate our economic collapse here in America, world-wide monetary chaos, foreign intrigues, political maneuvering here at home, and igniting the first stage of World War III in the Middle East.

They planned all along to do all of these things but not on such a tight schedule as they now face. Now they almost have to do these things all at once, or at least in very rapid sequence. If they succeed, the effect will be devastating; but if they trip again now, as they can be made to do by awakening public awareness and reaction, they will be in serious trouble. What's more, they can't turn back. They have opened Pandora's box and unleashed forces that are slipping out of their control. Should

they be further delayed long enough, their whole house of cards will begin to fall apart as they are overtaken by the Fort Knox Plutonium Poison Scandal, the rapidly spreading exposure of their dictatorial new Constitution among other things.

More than ever now the one thing that can and will stop them short of their dictatorship goal is the POWER OF THE TRUTH, spread far and wide. So it is crucial now that we keep our eyes on the international scene as well as that here at home, because the two are inseparably linked together in the Rockefeller plan to enslave us all. If they pull it off, it can happen at a time you least expect it, so don't be caught off base.

If the worst does happen, you have been warned; and if you have been doing whatever you can to do to warn others, whether it seems a lot or only a little to you, you will know you did your part.

To point out the connection between developments here in America and those around the world, I want to discuss the following three topics today:

Topic #1—WORLD GOVERNMENT AND THE DESTRUCTION OF FAMILY LIFE;

Topic #2—WORLD MONETARY CHAOS AND THE COMING CRASH HERE IN AMERICA;

Topic #3—WORLD WAR III AND THE PLANNED DECLARATION OF NATIONAL EMERGENCY.

Topic #1—To the uninformed, the words "world government" or "one-world order" often bring to mind the Utopian picture of a world at peace—relaxed, free, with an abundant life for all. This, after all, is exactly the image that Rockefeller propaganda is designed to plant in our minds.

Then, there are others who may vaguely realize that any "world order" or "government" on the horizon today would be rather authoritarian in nature but who do not feel personally threatened by such a thing. People in this category reason that since, after all, they have no political ambitions anyway, all they would need to do would be to keep their nose clean, do the work they are assigned to do without kicking up a fuss, and things could not be too bad. They are the ones who sometimes say: "Better red than dead." But those who harbor such comforting notions are wrong, dead wrong. They are not acquainted with the psychology of those who seek World Government or One-World Order—a psychology that drives for control, control, CONTROL! Control on the grandest scale possible—the entire world, and, control all the way down to the smallest scale—YOUR HOME!

In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8 for January 1976, I revealed that since at least 1954 there has been an official but super-secret White House policy, quote:

"...to so alter life in the United States so that it can be comfortably merged with life in the Soviet Union."

This is why we see an unending stream of apparent mistakes, concessions, and blunders by the modern outlaw band that masquerades as "our Government." These are not errors at all but deliberate steps in the Rockefeller march toward dictatorial world domination with their Soviet allies; and this includes the Sovietization of family life, the last great bulwark against total world domination.

It is not hard to see, of course, that American family life is under great pressure because the evidence is everywhere; it's common knowledge. The divorce rate is rising, the birth rate is falling, and the Census Bureau claims that the average family size is now at a record low level, and still dropping. Individuals are becoming more and more isolated. But few people know that we are seeing the fruits of a deliberate war on the American family; and fewer still know that this is an integral part of the Rockefeller drive for dictatorship.

This attack on family life is well-organized, heavily funded, and multifaceted; but the most important, most diabolical part of it all is an intense but sugar-coated campaign now underway to gain control of your children. The objective: to break down your control over your children and place them instead under the supervision and control of the community—that is, the government. In other words, they are to be Sovietized.

One aspect of this attack on your children is the subtle use of familiar, already available avenues of communication in EDUCATION. Take, for example, that famous children's program "Sesame Street." Have you watched it lately? Financed primarily by Rockefeller-controlled foundations and the federal government, Sesame Street has followed the standard Rockefeller philanthropic formula that emerged over 70 years ago. It established its halo in the public eye by early programming, but has progressively turned its efforts in more sinister directions under the protection of that halo. Arguments, bad temper, hurt feelings, and even cartoons with an air of unreality are prominent today on Sesame Street—and you will look in vain for any trace of an identifiable family image. Meanwhile the impressionable young Sesame Street audience is treated with such things as a recent episode showing all about how easy, painless, and perhaps even fun, it is to use a tourniquet and syringe—all of it more explicitly than you will see on nighttime adult programming! Harried young mothers trusting in the 'spotless reputation of Sesame Street' often allow their children to watch with little or no supervision, not realizing that concepts like this which pave the way for early and easy drug addiction are being burned into their children's minds. Sesame Street is a product of the "Children's Television Workshop", whose president is Joan Ganz Cooney. She is a Rockefeller insider who a year ago signed the "Bicentennial Declaration" which I mentioned earlier, launching the Rockefeller "Second American Revolution" to bring in their secret new Constitution.

Another example is seen in the big textbook controversy which has made headlines because of the efforts of parents to prevent their introduction into public schools. Their objections, based on the degrading and immoral material they see in the books, have not succeeded in stopping these books, although the books have been slowed down.

The purpose of these books is to utilize the system of compulsory education for a captive audience, supported by your taxes but largely removed from your control nowadays, to shove down your children's throats whatever the Rockefellers decide they should learn. The goal of these books is to make your child think in terms of questioning your motives and challenging your authority against a background of crumbling values. The idea is to subtly rob your child of everything he subconsciously clings to for strength and security until suddenly he will find himself totally lost, at sea and alone, and utterly dependent upon the all-knowing, all-powerful federal government.

But programs such as these, which use existing channels to brainwash your child, are only half of the story.

The other half is a gigantic effort to construct an entire new apparatus nation-wide through which to take a giant leap toward formalized and ultimately complete control of your child. This is the drive for what is euphemistically called "Comprehensive Child Care." This goes far, far beyond the mere establishment of some handy Day Care Centers to help out working mothers, as you may have been led to believe.

Currently before Congress are two essentially identical bills—Senate Bill 626 in the Senate, House Resolution 2966 in the House of Representatives—called the "Child and Family Services Act of 1975" in the Senate version. It resurrects a measure which would have become law late in 1971 except that America's last elected President, Richard Nixon, vetoed it. He did so with a warning that it would commit the vast power of the federal government, quote:

"...to the side of communal approaches to child-rearing over against the family-centered approach..."

adding that it would be, quote:

"...truly a long leap into the dark for the United States Government and the American people."

My friends, he was absolutely right. I believe in giving credit where credit is due, and Richard Nixon deserves nothing but credit for that veto, which truly served the interest of the American people in defiance of his Rockefeller bosses behind the scenes .

Now the One-World-Order Rockefeller forces are trying once again to push the same thing through with the aid of a new name and a little face-lifting. The connection between this so-called Child Care Bill and the campaign for World Government is obvious in many ways, right down to the personalities involved.

For example, last month I mentioned that the Rockefeller-sponsored "Declaration of Interdependence" was introduced last October in Philadelphia exhorting us all to turn our backs on America's right to continue as a free and independent nation. This was followed up in January 197 6 with a ceremonial signing of this Declaration by 126 United States Senators and Congressmen, every one of whom thereby violated his oath to preserve and defend our present United States Constitution! And if you examine the list of 27 sponsors of the Senate "Child Care Bill", you will find that no fewer than 19 of them also signed the treasonous "Declaration of Interdependence." These are the same forces at work!

Today we no longer have an elected president to stand in the way of the child-controllers in Congress—only alert, angry citizens who so far have stymied the bill's progress through sheer intimidation of both houses of Congress. Those who are focusing specifically on this bill have accurately identified its key dangers.

To begin with, the whole bill is built around the concept of a, quote: "partnership" between the parent and government in rearing and training the child. But partners, my friends, are co-owners of any enterprise for which the partnership is formed. Thus if you allow the federal government to become your partner under this bill, you will be giving away a part interest in your

own child! The ramifications of this partnership concept ricochet all through the Child Control bill, and can hardly be missed.

But the real joker in this deck consists of just 14 brief words buried clear back on page 56 of the Senate version, and page 64 of the House version. Title V, Section 501, Part 8 gives the following important definition for the purposes of the bill, and I quote:

"Parent means any person who has primary day-to-day responsibility for any child."

With this one key definition, which does not limit itself to normal usage, the writers of the Child Control bill have thrown the door wide open for ever expanding government control over your child through endless interpretation, re-interpretation, expansion, and elaboration under bureaucratic regulation. It is open-ended; it is an open invitation for the federal government to maneuver into position to declare itself the parent of your child, leaving you with no parental rights or powers at all!

When and if that is allowed to happen, the FAMILY as we know it will have been destroyed and the Rockefeller-Soviet world empire will reign supreme for a brief moment over a broken and ruined society before it crumbles and collapses into a repetition of the "Dark Ages."

Right now, as I said, this bill to pave the way for dictatorial child control is temporarily stalled by citizen alertness and protest; but if you think that is the end of the matter, listen.

The planned strategy of the child controllers is to lull the bill's citizen opponents to sleep, if possible, by soft-pedaling it. Their plan is to put it in the closet and keep it there until the very end of the current session of Congress if need be and then, when the citizen protestors have evaporated in the belief that they have won, the Child Control bill will suddenly be whisked out of the closet and passed before we know what hit us. If this happens, the Rockefeller Brothers will be very close to final success in achieving the objectives spelled out over 70 years ago for the Rockefeller program to take over education under the guise of philanthropy.

When John D. Rockefeller, Sr. set up the powerful "General Education Board" in 1904, its purpose was spelled out clearly in its very first publication called "Occasional Letter No. 1." It says, and I quote:

"In our dreams we have limitless resources, and the people yield themselves with perfect docility to our molding hands. The present educational conventions fade from our mind; and unhampered by tradition, we work our own good will upon a grateful and responsive rural folk."

And the punch line, my friends, a few sentences later is:

"...so we will organize our children into a community, and teach them to do in a perfect way the things their fathers and mothers are doing in an imperfect way in the homes, in the shop, and on the farm."

Topic #2—I have often commented that to get a glimpse of where the United States economy is heading, one need only look at Great Britain. She is careening along down the road to disaster, and

we are not far behind.

Early this month the British pound sterling crashed downward through the $2.00 level of parity for the first time in history, and it is still unstable. Meanwhile, the United States dollar also is in trouble in international currency markets, which are becoming more jittery and unstable by the day.

A full-blown international currency crisis is now erupting exactly as planned by the Rockefeller Brothers when they forced Europe to agree to a "floating" dollar with no fixed value on March 16, 1973. At a stroke, the Bretton Woods system of fixed-exchange rates established in 1944 was wiped out, and now we are back to the monetary anarchy and nationalism of the 1930's—pushed there by the Rockefellers. This invites trade wars, speculation, and rapid devaluations; and all of these dangerous developments are beginning to materialize. The shocking 20% devaluation of the Italian lira a few days ago is only a harbinger of things to come, and the key target in all of this is still our own United States dollar.

Soon the crescendo of events in Southern Africa will throw more gasoline onto the fires of the world monetary instability as the big prize, the Union of South Africa, faces a life-and-death struggle after Rhodesia is disposed of by the

Rockefeller-Soviet-Cuban mercenaries fighting in that area. Even now, though you are hearing nothing about this through the kept Rockefeller news media, panicky citizens of Rhodesia and South Africa are trying to find some way to pull up their financial stakes and leave, but they are trapped because of currency controls in those countries.

Soon, according to Rockefeller plans which I revealed as long ago as February 1974, the gold mines of South Africa are to be hit by strife, sabotage, civil war, warfare; and as the gold supply from that source is substantially curtailed, gold prices will be forced upward while our "floating" dollar sinks. The Rockefeller Brothers are bent on controlling the vast mineral riches of South Africa, including especially the very large uranium deposits there and the secret uranium enrichment process South Africa has developed that is the most economical in the world.

World Wars I and II were fought over oil. World War III again involves oil; but the emphasis this time is shifting to uranium, since the Rockefellers are determined to make nuclear power the energy wave of the future under their monopolistic control.

The international monetary crisis will have its consequences here at home in re-kindled inflation, credit crunch, and all the other economic ills that it spawns. The manipulated Dow Jones industrial average hit 1000 a few days ago on March 11, 1976, at a time when true unemployment, according to my own sources within the Department of Labor, has now reached 19.1% nation-wide! Meanwhile the specter of threatened defaults—Lockheed in May, New York in June, and others—is again coming into view.

You also have been hearing about all kinds of banking problems through the courtesy of the Rockefeller propaganda machine which wants you to be aware of them in order to help undermine your confidence. But there are some aspects to the banking picture right now that are far more major than anything you are being told about through the Rockefeller media which involve real mistakes and difficulties faced by the Rockefellers themselves.

I am not referring here to those nerve-jangling front-page

stories about Chase Manhattan and First National City Bank which were planted by the Rockefellers themselves for reasons I have explained in another monthly Audio Letter recently. I refer instead to the situation which recently sent Henry Kissinger packing off to Latin America.

If you did not quite understand what our Secretary of State was doing there, don't feel bad. You weren't supposed to. Kissinger was sent there as a bill collector for David Rockefeller who had suddenly discovered that his banking interests, including the United States Export-Import Bank, have about $25-billion in outstanding credits in Latin America that are very shaky indeed. The Four Brothers have been so busy prying into everyone else's business that they have not been minding their own store. As presently scheduled, Kissinger's trip is to be followed up in May by a trip by Secretary of the Treasury William Simon before he resigns to continue working for David Rockefeller in some other slot, perhaps at Chase Manhattan Bank. Simon can hardly wait to get out of the Treasury hot-seat he has been ever since December 1975 when we caught him in an outright lie in writing, no less, about the existence of the Central Core Vault of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox.

The Rockefeller banking picture is in additional hot water because for various reasons Arab-OPEC interests began pulling out their funds in this country starting early this month, March 1976. Around $20-billion in Arab money may be withdrawn; but because of our dishonest fractional reserve banking system which normally works to the advantage of the Rockefellers, the Arab withdrawals could translate into a drop of over $100-billion in total bank deposits. That is enough to trigger some serious economic repercussions prematurely before the Rockefellers are ready to mesh them into their complex program, and that is why the Federal Reserve Board surprised a lot of people last week by starting to pump funds into the banking system. And so it goes as the Four Rockefeller Brothers continue to husband their own cash resources to take advantage of cheap bargains while walking the tight rope to Dictatorship.

Meanwhile what is Congress doing for us? Last month there was a brief ray of hope when Congressman Wright Patman uncovered a hornet's nest by exposing a network of interlocks between the Federal Reserve System and the powerful Business Round Table which helped defeat Patman's latest attempt to audit the Federal Reserve. This could have spelled real trouble for the Rockefeller Brothers because both the Business Round Table and the Federal Reserve are 24-karat Rockefeller. But fortunately for the Rockefellers, Patman just 'happened' to become seriously ill before he could carry the matter any further, and he passed away early this month! And with him, died any hope that the matter will be pursued an inch further.

Now we are left with the likes of Congressman Otis Pike, who made the terrible mistake of pointing his punches at the Rockefeller CIA. Had he followed through on the Fort Knox matter after our discussions with him last September, he would be in the driver's seat now; but as it is, the CIA has now vowed to finish Otis Pike politically—and you can be sure they will try.

And then there's Congressman John Conlan who several months ago hurled a challenge at his constituents who dared to press him for action about Fort Knox, saying that if they had evidence of any wrongdoing he would put them in contact with the appropriate authorities to carry out an investigation. But when my colleague Ed Durell who, with myself, does have access to such evidence took up the Conlan challenge forwarded to us by those

constituents, Congressman Conlan apparently forgot all about his pledge to help establish the proper contacts to get a true investigation rolling.

In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8 for January 1976, I read Ed Durell's "Open Letter" to Congressman Conlan of January 7, 1976, in its entirety.

Here, now, is Congressman Conlan's reply in its entirety, dated February 26, 1976—seven weeks after the date of Mr. Ed Durell's certified letter, and I quote:

"Dear Mr. Durell,

Following up receipt of your certified Open Letter to me, I wanted to bring you up-to-date on my actions. I have written to the Chairman of the House Banking, Currency, and Housing Committee Henry Reuss; Chairman of the House Domestic Monetary Policy Committee Wright Patman; and Chairman of the House Government Operations Committee, Jack Brooks. I will let you know when I receive their replies.

Also, I am enclosing a copy of my letter to Secretary Simon in which I request a complete inventory of United States gold holdings. I have asked him to let me know what action he plans to take in this regard.

It is unfortunate that there are not more Congressmen and people in the Administration and the Attorney General's office who are more interested in clarifying this matter. I am just one sincere Congressman, Mr. Durell; and much as you and I would like to think, I cannot order official Washington to do yours and my bidding. If I could, Henry Kissinger and others would have been replaced a long time ago.

Cordially, John B. Conlan Member of Congress"

And that, my friends, is apparently that as far as John Conlan is concerned. He continually professes to be concerned about Fort Knox, yet here is not even the token of an attempt to open any doors for a good investigation into the matter—no speeches on the House floor, no press conference, no real follow-up to Mr. Durell's letter in any way—just a very intimate letter to William Simon, Treasury Secretary, who himself is party to the cover-up. Why doesn't John Conlan tell us what Bill Simon told him on the night of January 5, 1975, in private?

Conlan did not even bother to dignify his reply to Mr. Durell with a personal signature, as he did to Simon—instead, a signature duplicating machine was used. Yes, this is the same Congressman John B. Conlan you may have read about recently leading the White House Prayer Breakfast. This is the same Congressman John B. Conlan whose name you will see as the author of a religious tract exhorting citizens to 'get involved'; and this is the same Congressman John B. Conlan who, as the member of the House Banking Committee, has accepted money for his re-election campaign from the Banking Lobby! Apparently this is Congressman Conlan's concept of what it means to be a Representative—and in one respect at least he is completely representative. He may not represent you or me, but he does accurately represent what the United States Congress stands for today. His behavior is a perfect example of why our Republic is so close to extinction today. This being the case, I for myself shall now leave him alone with his own conscience.

WORLD WAR III AND THE PLANNED DECLARATION OF NATIONAL EMERGENCY

Topic #3—Recently a CBS reporter asked Nelson Rockefeller if he would still like to be President. He shot back:

"What do you think I've been doing for the past 16 years?"

He has actually been at it longer than that, my friends, and now the prize he has kept his eyes focused on for so long is almost within his grasp. But because of the foreshortened time schedule now remaining to him, we are now entering a period of tactical maneuvering that is likely to be bewildering in its dodges and reversals of apparent direction.

This final phase has already begun, in fact, since I spoke with you just last month; and already one major tactical shift has occurred. When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 9 last month, my information was that the plan was to make President Ford stumble in the Primaries and force him to bow out before the onslaught of Ronald Reagan. The goal of forcing Ford out soon has not changed one iota, but the tactics to achieve this have been revised drastically for reasons directly related to former President Nixon's trip to China late last month. In other words, to understand our domestic politics now, you also must look at the international scene!

Last November 1975 you will recall that Ford went to China. While he was there the Chinese leaders confronted him about the huge Asian war that is now brewing, and I am told that Ford turned pale and wobbly as he learned about these things for the first time from the Red Chinese. What they told him about the grand strategy for the war was the same thing I told you that same month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6; about the Middle East being the opening gun, about the role of the Helsinki Accord last summer, about the strategy of the encirclement of Red China by means of the Rockefeller-Soviet conquest of southeast Asia. Even now as I say these words, the domino theory is being dusted off and revived to explain the planned toppling soon of the last important domino in that area, Thailand. The 5000 or so Americans there include a Fifth Column contingent that is to pave the way for Thailand to be handed over to the Communists under Soviet control!

When Ford returned, he began working as closely as possible with Richard Nixon; and now the team of Nixon, Ford, and Connally are engaged in a power struggle against Nelson Rockefeller and his lackeys—Ronald Reagan and Hubert Humphrey. As I have revealed in previous AUDIO LETTERS, Richard Nixon is on the phone just about daily to tell Ford to "hang in there", and so far Ford has done so.

Nixon's trip to China last month was not at the request of the State Department but instead at the request of President Ford himself. Nixon's trip to China was an errand of peace in that he is trying to maintain a link between the United States and China to offset as much as possible the hard alliance between the Rockefeller Brothers and the Soviets. Nixon knows very well that Nelson Rockefeller is still out to get him if possible. That is why Nixon was unwilling to make the trip on anything but a Red Chinese airplane sent here for that purpose.

Faced with this Nixon-Ford-Connally axis, Nelson Rockefeller decided several weeks ago on tactics designed to give his opponents a political judo throw—that is, to send them sprawling by using their own strength and momentum. First he re-programmed

his kept media to help, instead of hurt, Ford in the Primaries, thus lulling Ford into false confidence over his own seemingly growing strength. Reagan is to be beaten for now, but not so badly that he would look bad later on when Rockefeller is ready to tap him as his Vice-President. To make sure Reagan gets the message not to drop out of the campaign, Rockefeller told Reagan to remain a candidate against Ford, quote: "as long as the money holds out." And just to make sure, Rockefeller's comments in this vein were echoed by his lackey, Barry Goldwater, who ironically ran for President 12 years ago on the slogan: "A choice, not an echo."

To further build up the self-confidence of the Nixon-Ford-Connally axis, and also to fool the Red Chinese if possible into thinking that a favorable shift in American policy is being achieved, other things are also being done. For example, Ford has now officially deleted the word "detente" from his vocabulary and some harsher than usual words have been permitted to emanate from Washington in the direction of the Soviet Union. After all, words are cheap for domestic consumption.

Meanwhile the final touches are being put on the preparations for war; and at the same time, several options are being prepared to enable Ford to be suddenly and surprisingly cut down and swept out of office. One option would involve the exposure of a fast-breaking financial scandal whose possible speed can be guessed at by the devastating experience undergone by Vice-President Spiro Agnew in 1973. Other options, however, are also being prepared because Nelson Rockefeller intends to take no chances at this late date. When war, shortages, and economic catastrophe arrive, Nelson Rockefeller fully intends to be the beneficiary of it all, easing himself into power as our President and then Dictator. The eagerness with which he awaits this turn of events stands in stark contrast to the horrified reaction of other world figures who have learned recently about the imminent war.

For example, early last December, when I was in Europe and England, I gave a copy of my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 detailing the war plans to a person who played it for Prime Minister Harold Wilson. The result: On December 15 he secretly gave the Queen three months notice of the fact that he intended to resign, and three days ago he stunned England and the world by doing just that.

It is sad indeed that Richard Nixon, who is now doing what he can to fight for peace, was nonetheless used successfully by the Rockefellers to do our nation grave injury in many areas while he was President, just as they have done with every president since Woodrow Wilson; and it is ironic that Nelson Rockefeller's plan to declare an iron-fisted "National Emergency" soon will make use of a tool left to him by none other than his present bitter enemy—Richard Nixon.

I refer to presidential Executive Order 11490 dealing with emergency preparedness signed by Nixon October 28, 1969. It is 33 pages long; it spells out vast powers and functions to be exercised by 28 federal departments and agencies in the event of a declared national emergency. Under the terms of this Executive Order, these emergency powers can be activated either by Congress or by proclamation of the President.

To the unwary, the idea may come across that this Executive Order would only be used in time of war due to the frequent references to, quote: "emergency, including an attack on the

United States." But note well that "war" is actually just given as an example of an emergency situation. At the outset it is stated to be applicable, quote:

"in any national-emergency type situation that might conceivably confront the nation."

No other criteria are given to govern the declaration of such an emergency; therefore all that Nelson Rockefeller or another president or Congress needs to do is to conceive of a situation as fitting their concept of an "emergency", and Executive Order 11490 can be invoked! It is to be done in the, quote: "national interest", but that is never defined; but one section makes the purpose of the Order explicitly clear in the words, and I quote:

"assuring the continuity of the federal government in any national-emergency type situation that might confront the nation."

The "federal government" is the focus here—not the nation, not the people, not the Republic, but the federal government. In other words, it is designed for the benefit of our Rulers just as in the secret new Rockefeller Constitution.

Once invoked, Executive Order 11490 authorizes unconstitutional and so illegal powers to be wielded by the federal government. Under the guise of bland-sounding words like "emergency", "management", and "operation", the federal government is authorized to completely take over business and industry, or any parts thereof, without compensation. Border closing and control, censorship, and the registration and continual monitoring of all citizens and their movements are also provided for under Executive Order 11490 with the quasi private United States Postal Service playing an important role in this, as I revealed in my AUDIO LETTER last month. Full powers over transportation and communication are also granted, along with all forms of energy right down to flashlight batteries. Even your pocket radio would be included because of the authority given to control any device capable of emitting electromagnetic radiation, which your radio and TV do in small amounts.

The clandestine federal police structure now in place in the United States, which I warned you about last month, would also be activated under this Executive Order; so would special emergency measures for custody and protection of prisoners. These are worded in such a way as to make their true meaning anything but obvious unless the phrase, quote: "mass feeding and housing" is noticed. This refers, my friends, to the hush-hush CONCENTRATION CAMPS which are now in a condition of operational readiness in remote areas all around the United States!!

Executive Order 11490 even places at the disposal of the federal government that most cruel and most powerful of all tools for mass political control—HUNGER. Various provisions for stockpiling of survival items, food and water included, are worded in such a way that they could be initiated after the "Declaration of Emergency" rather than being prepared ahead of time to meet that emergency. Thus the federal government could artificially create terrible shortages at will under the guise of "stockpiling."

And if you think such a thing is too farfetched, just remember back to the early days of World War II if you are old enough. Do you recall, for example, that you were required after war broke out to turn in any extra tires you may have had, and thereafter had a hard time getting any new ones? The excuse given was the

rubber had to be stockpiled and recycled into the war effort—but that was an outright lie. I have been given eye-witness accounts by people who saw these tires piled up, slashed, and burned after they were turned in; and the CONGRESSIONAL RECORD in 1942 contains a great deal of material brought out by then Senator Harry Truman showing that there was a deliberate larger plan to deny many critical war materials both to the American public and our military forces in the early days of the war. And guess who was implicated in all of this—you're right, the Rockefeller Standard Oil interests.

Given all of this, the possibility must not be overlooked that

there will be no election next November if Nelson Rockefeller and

his Brothers successfully orchestrate the various elements of their do-or-die plan of conquest.

Executive Order 11490 in the hands of a man who has shown himself to be unhampered by scruples or conscience could be used, in effect, to suspend our present UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION; and next November we may be given no choice at the polls except a "Yes" or "No" vote in a National Referendum on the proposed new Rockefeller Constitution. Voting on fixable voting machines under the watchful eyes of the federal police, the outcome—if that is permitted to happen—would be in very little doubt. Just as Cuba did last month on February 15, 1976, we could be counted upon to ratify a new Constitution to replace our suspended older one!

These things do not have to happen, my friends. The Rockefeller Brothers can be made to trip by the spreading awareness of, and reaction to, the Truth, the absolute TRUTH. But in case there are any "doubting Thomases" listening to my voice, I say to you now: If you sit back and watch as all this comes to pass before your very eyes, do not look back a year from now and say: "Why weren't we warned?"—because, my dear friend, you were.

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #11

Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is April 24, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 11.

This year of 1976 is of course our Bicentennial, the 200th anniversary of the founding of our beloved country. It should be a time for reflection on our hard-won unique heritage and for thankful celebration of it. At the same time, it is only fitting that we also look ahead and give some thought to our future destiny and that of our trusting children. But on all sides we Americans are being bombarded with propaganda enticing us to focus only on the future without bearing in mind the lessons of the past. Bicentennial programs and articles dealing with our nation's early days keep the spotlight narrowly focused on the Revolution itself most of the time instead of on the wonderful free Republic that was the product of that Revolution. This is no accident. It is intended to gradually make us more revolution minded in order to make the so-called "Second American Revolution" being promoted by John D. Rockefeller III seem more and more acceptable to us.

The wise first President of our Republic, George Washington, left us with advice in his "Farewell Address" that was so forward-looking that it is still valuable today, and time after time he referred to experience as, quote: "the surest standard" by which to judge existing and planned governmental measures. This stands in stark contrast to the approach that is preached regularly by the man who wants to preside over the end of our free Republic, Nelson Rockefeller. He keeps saying, quote: "Forget the past and let's look to the future."

To what sort of future does Nelson Rockefeller ask us to look if it has nothing to do with our past? It is the future that was spelled out as early as 1924 by the father of Nelson and his brothers, John D. Rockefeller, Jr., in a talk to a group of students. John Jr. was quoted by his attorney, agent, and biographer Raymond B. Fosdick as saying on that occasion, and I quote:

"We are standing tonight on the mountain top with the world spread out at our feet—your country, your country, my country, all of us—so it may come to pass that some day, some day the people of all nations will stand on the mountain top together and no one will speak of 'my country' but we will speak of 'our world'."

So, my friends, the real question of America's destiny that now confronts us is one which has been forced upon us by the Four Rockefeller Brothers—David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D. Ill—pursuing this objective spelled out by their father. It is essentially the same question that faced President Abraham Lincoln just over a century ago: whether or not the United States of America was to be destroyed. The threat then was one of destruction by dismemberment and fragmentation, and it was met by the use of federal powers to maintain the Union. The threat today lies at the opposite extreme of overcentralization of power, and it can be met only by reasserting individual and State powers and rights under the CONSTITUTION.

To explore the radical change of direction in America's destiny that is being plotted and manipulated by the Four Rockefeller Brothers and their allies, I want to talk about the following three topics today:

Topic #1—HOW INDIVIDUALS ARE BEING REDUCED TO SACRIFICIAL PAWNS IN THE ROCKEFELLER PROGRAM TO PROTECT AND ADVANCE THEIR OWN INTERESTS

Topic #2—HOW NATIONS ARE BEING MANEUVERED INTO WAR AND DESTRUCTION AS PART OF THE ROCKEFELLER SCHEME OF PROGRESS

Topic #3—HOW WE ARE BEING PUSHED AND TRICKED INTO DISCARDING OUR HERITAGE OF FREEDOM TO ACCEPT ROCKEFELLER DICTATORSHIP.

Topic #1—One of the strangest and most sensational kidnap episodes in history began on February 4, 1974, when a young lady named Patricia Hearst was kidnapped from her apartment in Berkeley, California. Her kidnappers soon identified themselves as a radical group called the Symbionese Liberation Army, or SLA. Thus began a nightmare of impossible demands, tape recordings, merciless publicity, shoot-outs and unrelenting pressure behind the scenes for Mr. and Mrs. Randolph Hearst.

On April 3, 1974, a tape recording announced a "new twist" that Patty Hearst had joined the SLA under the new name Tania, and a few days later Tania helped rob a bank as if to prove what she said. Just for good measure, a few days after that Tania was

seen spraying bullets from an automatic rifle to cover SLA member William Harris as he left a store where he had allegedly been shoplifting.

Soon the SLA was all but wiped out in the spectacular shoot-out in Los Angeles, but somehow Tania just happened to be elsewhere watching it all on television. Tania had escaped, and for more than 16 months in spite of an alleged manhunt nation-wide by the FBI, she and her SLA companions William and Emily Harris reportedly continued to evade capture. But finally on September 18, 1975, the manhunt suddenly ended as abruptly as it began. Tania and the Harrises were found right in San Francisco, no less, where it all began, and the trio were quickly rounded up without much fuss.

I mentioned briefly in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 7 that the SLA was a CIA operation, and that its purpose, in which it was successful, was to bring about a Rockefeller take-over of the huge Hearst empire. But now I believe the time has come to tell you more, for two reasons: First, I fear for the life of Tania, the impersonator of Patty Hearst who is currently in custody; and second, I am now convinced that Mr. and Mrs. Hearst, Patty's parents, do not know that the girl captured last September is an impostor.

Until very recently there were indications that they knew this but were keeping their silence about it to protect the rest of their family. For that reason I have refrained from discussing the details of the Patty Hearst case other than to tell you about the Rockefeller take-over of their holdings. The Hearsts of all people have good reason to fear additional CIA-engineered reprisals against them and I would never want to usurp their personal prerogatives; but I have at last obtained evidence which convinces me beyond question that Mr. and Mrs. Hearst are still in the dark. And it is for their sake and for the sake of the life of the girl whoever she is, that I am about to reveal the truth in the Patty Hearst case, for I truly believe that the truth even when it is unpleasant, is always to be preferred over lies no matter how pleasant or convenient; and only the truth can provide the basis for justice to be done.

The Hearst newspaper chain first incurred the wrath of the Rockefeller Brothers three decades ago when they led the campaign to expose major abuses spawned by the Rockefellers. For example, it was the Hearst chain that publicized secret Congressional testimony showing that America's atomic secrets were handed over to the Soviets—not stolen by them—even before our first atomic bomb was finished; and that the Rockefellers were directly involved in this. This was very easy for the Rockefellers, by the way. The world's first controlled nuclear reaction was achieved at their own University of Chicago late in 1942; and the Manhattan Project worked outward from there. Even this name "Manhattan" for the atomic bomb project was chosen as a subtle acknowledgment of the real bosses of both atomic energy and the nation's power centers in Manhattan, the Rockefellers.

The Rockefeller interests launched savage counterattacks on the Hearst empire, using financial and other means to force many of the Hearst newspapers out of business, just as they are presently strangling the Star here in Washington by means of an advertising boycott. But the Rockefeller Brothers never forget, and their ultimate goal was to eventually take over complete control of those portions of the Hearst business complex that managed to survive the initial Rockefeller counterattacks. Patty Hearst was the pawn they used in order to do so.

The first tapes after Patty was captured were full of fear and urgency, and relayed crushing demands to her parents as conditions for her release. Mr. Hearst was coerced into incredible outpouring of his resources in a giveaway program only to have the demands from the SLA keep rising until they became unreachable. Then, after a period of silence, came the first Tania tape claiming that Patty was disgusted with her parents and was joining her captors. But, my friends, the real Patty Hearst was no longer alive by that time. On February 28, 1974, just 24 days after her abduction, Patty was drowned in a bathtub by three SLA men against whom I am told Patty put up a tremendous fight. Afterward cremation was used to prevent any chance that her body might be discovered and identified. This is common practice in covert CIA executions, by the way and I am reliably informed that this was also Jimmy Hoffa's fate after his abduction late in July 1975, which I discussed in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 3.

The rest of the charade up until the capture last September of Tania, the impostor who is alleged to be Patty Hearst, had just one purpose—to maintain unmerciful pressures on the Hearsts in order to crack their control of the Hearst interests. And the prime pressure point in this campaign was Tania herself who was used in order to convince the Hearsts that their daughter Patty was still alive.

Any loving parents in the position of Mr. and Mrs. Hearst would cling desperately to the hope of having their child returned to them, and the Hearsts are no exception. So long as she was not captured there would be no chance for the Hearsts to discover Tania was an impostor; and by allegedly being spotted from time to time, the assurance was maintained that she was still alive. Thus in the best Rockefeller-CIA traditions, Mr. and Mrs. Hearst were tricked into believing that they were bargaining for the life and for the return of their daughter Patty even after she had actually been murdered.

This deception continued for nearly a year and a half until at last the CIA achieved by way of the SLA what the Rockefellers had sought all along—a transfer of the control of the far-flung Hearst interests to the Rockefeller Brothers. As soon as the arrangements were made for this transfer of control, the bargain was for Tania (alias Patty) to surface, and surface she did. This was a simple matter since the FBI had known even before Patty's kidnapping that her abduction was planned, and was aware of her whereabouts and that of Tania, Patty's impersonator throughout the so-called manhunt of 19 months duration.

The Hearsts gave up practically everything in a deal to get their Patty back; and the last most critical part of the SLA operation was to convince them that they had gotten what they had bargained for—namely, their daughter Patty. Tania, therefore, had to be captured and convince the Hearsts that she is their daughter Patty; and the psychological profiling techniques which were so useful in Watergating Richard Nixon and his aides out of the White House were also used on the Hearsts in order to minimize the risk that they would see Tania as a fraud.

The Patty Hearst-Tania manhunt was dragged out over 19 months, and during that entire time the Hearsts were subjected to cruel psychological pressures of all kinds for the purpose of damaging their capacity to perceive anything from a normal perspective. During most of that time the Tania charade was utilized to get them gradually accustomed to the idea that if they ever did see Patty again she would be drastically changed by her ordeal and therefore not like they remembered her. And Tania, for her part, was herself schooled and psychologically programmed in order to

be as convincing as possible in brief encounters with the Hearsts after her alleged capture.

Even in spite of all this, the whole elaborate trick almost broke down when Mr. and Mrs. Hearst first got to see their alleged daughter after her capture. She was even more different than they had imagined, and afterward Mrs. Hearst sadly said to the press, quote: "That girl just isn't our Patty." She apparently meant it in a figurative sense, but her words unconsciously expressed the literal truth. But the natural deep-seated wish to believe that Tania is Patty apparently won out, reinforced by all the inhuman pressures which even now still rest heavily on the Hearsts. For the moment the Rockefeller Brothers have won their gamble, they have fooled the Hearsts.

Now there remains just one more detail to be attended to—the girl herself, Tania, the girl who is alleged to be Patty. She has now completely served her purpose and it is her turn to be double-crossed. The one thing the Rockefeller-CIA agents cannot permit to happen is for Tania to be released and have extended contact with Mr. and Mrs. Hearst. It is one thing for Tania to hoodwink the Hearsts into believing she is Patty during brief encounters under tense unnatural conditions in unfamiliar surroundings and against a two-year backdrop of nightmarish events. But it would be quite another matter for Tania to return home with the Hearsts and continue to convince them she is their daughter during the course of an ongoing relationship in what should be familiar surroundings. The Hearsts would without any doubt soon see that something was terribly wrong about the girl who is supposed to be Patty Hearst, and that, my friends, is why I fear for the life of this girl who has called herself Tania in the past. She cannot be allowed to go free; and now that her job is finished as far as the Rockefeller Brothers and the CIA are concerned, she has become a liability for them. If she is very fortunate she may just be locked up out of sight and the key thrown away; but I fear for her life because if she is silenced, the deception of the Hearsts will have been sealed permanently and any chance that she herself might some day blurt out the truth will be ended as well. If this happens, Tania will have gone the way of Lee Harvey Oswald, Jack Ruby, and many others before her.

The Patty Hearst case is a tragic example of the way in which individuals are seen as nothing more than pawns to be pushed around on the chessboard of power by the Rockefeller Brothers and their helpers. But you do not have to be a Hearst, or a Nixon, or a Hoffa to become a Rockefeller CIA pawn.

I revealed in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 5 for October 1975 that electronic psychological programming techniques are being used by the CIA to program people like human robots to do all kinds of things they normally would not do. There is now a rising demand by the CIA for people who can be made to run involuntary errands for them this way, busy as they are with bombings, terrorism and other projects to warp America's Bicentennial to Rockefeller purposes. But people vary considerably in their receptiveness to such programming, and a catalog of highly receptive individuals is therefore of great interest to the CIA. Therefore the CIA has secretly aided in the establishment of a chain of centers which offer to help you quit smoking, lose weight, or stop drinking almost overnight.

What they use are psychological conditioning techniques which are related to the very much more advanced techniques used by the CIA; and if you go to such a center and your therapy reveals a very high susceptibility rating, your name, with or without the

knowledge of the particular center you visit, will end up in a special CIA file for possible future use. If you contemplate using such therapy, you should be warned of this hidden liability. If you have already used it, I can only suggest that you exercise due caution whenever you must receive medical care, especially if hospitalization is involved. If possible, stick with your family doctor or others you know you can trust.

On March 24, 1976, President Ford announced still another effort to treat us as pawns, and this time every man, woman, and child in the United States is intended to be involved. I refer, of course, to the trumped up Swine Influenza threat, and the proposal to inoculate everyone against it.

The stated medical reasons for this totally unprecedented project are so patently flimsy that everyone from the World Health Organization to individual doctors all around the country have sharply questioned what is proposed. Many doctors have gone so far as to openly ask what the real political reason for it is, so unconvincing is the medical basis for it. Meanwhile the Rockefeller-controlled major media are beating the drums in favor of it. Some groups have questioned whether perhaps something sinister is to be added to the vaccine; but while this could be done, it is not the underlying reason for the Swine Flu program. The whole Swine Flu swindle is an elaborate cover-up, the most diabolical so far of the truth about the horrible CIA radioactive plutonium super poison which is now contaminating the entire southeastern portion of the United States and is even beginning to show up now in traces nation-wide. This is the poison which was stored in the Central Core Vault of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox, as I first revealed in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 5, October 1975.

As part of the federal government's cover-up, they made matters a thousand times worse when they deliberately dumped it into underground streams under Fort Knox during January, as I have previously reported. Now they are beginning to realize the hideous extent of their folly; but instead of honest remedial action, their response is still cover-up.

First, the Swine Flu campaign began by alarming everyone with its alleged threat. Then it was pointed out that even those who do get the vaccine run a considerable risk of getting sick anyway due to side effects. And to cap it off, officials expressed public doubt by the end of March that it would be possible to produce and administer enough vaccine to inoculate everyone by late this year, when the Government allegedly fears a Swine Flu epidemic.

The whole thing is intended to condition us all to the idea that this will be the cause if and when Americans start dying like flies in some area soon due to poisoning from the spreading CIA plutonium poison from Fort Knox. And just for good measure, preposterous stories have also found their way into print recently, alleging in effect that plutonium is practically harmless based on records which have 'suddenly' been discovered recently about people who were injected experimentally with plutonium years ago. It's all big game of "look over there"; and you, your children, and your loved ones are the pawns in this cold-blooded game.

Topic #2—Down through the centuries, war has always been an evil which the vast majority of individuals have feared and wanted to avoid, yet we all know they keep right on happening. And why? Because there also have always been small groups of men who have viewed war from a very different perspective. To them, war is

just one more tool to use in both the exercise and the expansion of their own political and economic power.

In the 20th Century, wars have become bigger, more frequent, and more savage than ever before. For nearly three generations, one place or another around our planet has been aflame with the fires of war and revolution; and now, having already suffered two World Wars, we are stepping across the threshold of a third!

What's wrong? It's said that "From a little acorn, a mighty oak will grow"; and where war is concerned, a very important acorn was planted shortly before World War I. The Trustees of a tax-exempt foundation, known at that time as the "CARNEGIE ENDOWMENT FOR INTERNATIONAL PEACE" which involved an alliance with the Rockefeller and Carnegie interests, spent a full year debating just one question: Is war the best way by which to alter the life of a nation? And incredibly, my friends, the conclusion they decided upon was: Yes.

Shortly thereafter World War I began. President Woodrow Wilson, a Rockefeller puppet, was enthusiastically supported by the Trustees of the Carnegie Endowment when he got America into the war; and on at least one occasion, they even sent Wilson a telegram urging him not to let America's involvement in the war end too soon! They did not want to cut short all those desirable changes in America that were to be expected as a result of our involvement in that war—"desirable" according to their criteria, of course, not yours or mine.

By the time World War II was brought about by the Rockefeller interests and their allies, this philosophy was even more entrenched and more powerful. The United States was deliberately dragged into World War II by means of Pearl Harbor with the active help of President Franklin D. Roosevelt; and as in World War I, World War II was also deliberately dragged out longer than necessary, in order once again to bring about major changes in national life—not only in the United States but in other countries as well. For details on this subject I refer you to the recent two-volume AUDIO BOOK talking tape No. 7 entitled "THE TRAGIC TRUTH ABOUT THE FDR ERA" recorded in February 197 6 by Colonel Curtis Dall and myself. FDR was Colonel Dall's father-in-law, and Colonel Dall speaks from personal knowledge about many very important things.

Three years ago in my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR", I pointed out the very intimate connections that linked politics, economics, and matters of war and peace. And in this regard I tried to call attention to the very powerful, important new economic and political forces now emerging in Asia, and I ended my book in these words, and I quote:

"If the new Asian forces are not understood, but are met with ignorance and arrogance, then the world will indeed be headed not for a 'generation of peace' of which President Nixon has so proudly boasted, but for World War III."

In the same context, I referred to the crucial importance of the Panama Canal, and on June 1974 on a radio program in Dallas, Texas, I relayed Intelligence information I had just received confirming that the Temehri Airfield in the Republic of Guyana, next to Venezuela, is now ringed with atomic missiles aimed at the Gatun Locks of the Panama Canal and at cities in the United States. But, as usual, the federal government still refuses to this very day to permit an honest investigation of this life-and-death situation. And, by the way, Temehri Airfield is being used by Cuba nowadays to ferry its mercenaries and supplies

to southern Africa for more wars miles outside Georgetown, Guyana, Airport in New York!

there. Temehri is larger than

Airfield, 25 our Kennedy

In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 last November, I was able at last to reveal the whole grand strategy of the coming war, including the opening rounds in the Middle East and the succeeding stages by which it is presently intended to mushroom into a full-fledged world war. And on April 19, 1976, just five days ago, the United States Government gave the official green light for the Middle East war to begin. On that day, April 19, the White House quietly dropped its previous opposition to all outside military intervention in war-torn Lebanon.

All of the blocks in the Middle East war plan are now falling rapidly into place. On March 13, 1976, Saudi Arabia sealed its own doom when the negotiations with American top oil people in Panama City, Florida ended in an agreement for Saudi Arabia to buy the remaining 40% of the assets of ARAMCO, the four-company Rockefeller oil combine that operates in Saudi Arabia. Oil minister Sheik Yamani revealed that the take-over transaction will be carried out all at once within four to six weeks. What they do not realize is that after the Rockefellers get their money, the oil wells will be bombed out of existence by an American limited nuclear strike emanating from the Sinai. The White House go-ahead signal April 19th to get the ball rolling in this war, came exactly five weeks after Sheik Yamani's announcement.

Meanwhile Prime Minister Vorster of South Africa injected his country into the Middle Eastern fray by making a secret visit to Israel two weeks ago for the sole purpose of obtaining military hardware in exchange for raw materials. By doing so, he also left his country open to infiltration by a client state of the Rockefeller-controlled CIA. On top of that, he inflamed the Arabs and most all of Black Africans. So, South Africa has jumped from "the frying pan into the fire." And Henry Kissinger on his African trip will be handing out millions of American dollars to the so-called Liberation Fronts who are bent on liberating Rhodesia and South Africa for the Rockefellers. And so the Black leaders here and abroad will be used by the Rockefellers in their attempt to help their ally, Soviet Russia, do the dirty work for them in southern Africa for the rich mineral resources there.

The war situation we face, my friends, is increasingly dangerous; and as far as the first stages of it are concerned, imminent. But before I leave this subject, I should add that we must now not allow ourselves to lose our resolve to halt this trend into disaster. I believe we can still do it, and WE MUST DO IT!

Until recently, Rockefeller propaganda sought to create false optimism about our foreign policy, military posture, and other factors in our national strength. But now people are waking up. They know something is wrong. So now we are entering a new phase of defeatism propaganda designed to ruin our morale so that we will just lie down conveniently to be conquered.

An example of this on the domestic scene was the statement by Senator Frank Church last summer to the effect that Americans would have no way to resist in the event of a take-over by a dictator, so vast are the spying abilities of the federal government. This alleged warning, greatly exaggerated for effect, came from one of the earliest accomplices in the cover-up now in progress about the hideous CIA plutonium poison!

Other voices are also lending their weight to the defeatism campaign but on an international scale. One voice stands out above all others—that of the allegedly exiled Soviet author Alexander Solzhenitsyn. A recent quotation from Solzhenitsyn, which is a condensation of practically everything he publicly says today, is and I quote: "I wouldn't be surprised at the sudden and imminent fall of the West." Then he goes on regularly and at great length to build up an image of Soviet power, supposedly matchless in its propaganda and quickly becoming invincible militarily. He speaks of all this in disapproving terms, thereby sounding as if he is on our side; but the image he paints, my friends, is still one of defeatism for us and imminent victory for our real enemies. He spreads seeds of hopelessness—not of hope as some would have you believe. Such hopelessness could cause the West to be defeated from within, just as France was in the 30's and early 40's. Even when he admits for a moment that the West could still save itself from complete take-over—which it still can, my friends—he follows that up by putting down any notion that he actually expects that to happen. But Solzhenitsyn is very powerful in his use of words, and he has become a Pied Piper with patriotic, freedom-loving individuals and organizations following in his train.

What will be the effect, my friends, if a year or two from now with war and economic and political chaos on all sides, Solzhenitsyn should dramatically announce: "The West is doomed, I'm going back home to the home of Communism, the wave of the future"? Might not this be the crowning stroke the Soviets need to collapse remaining patriotic morale in the West? Apparently the Rockefellers and their Soviet allies think so.

That's why their controlled media are now giving Solzhenitsyn tremendous publicity; and according to highly reliable intelligence information I have received recently, this is the real purpose for which Solzhenitsyn was sent to the West, while other Soviet dissidents remain unable to follow his path.

Whether Solzhenitsyn himself is consciously involved in this, or whether he is simply the victim of psychological profiling and programming, the defeatism he is spreading could prove to be one of our most mortal enemies. Remember, it was Lenin who also was in exile in Zurich and who longed for the collapse of Russia! So why could not Solzhenitsyn, who also is supposed to be in exile in Zurich, long for the collapse of the West?

Topic #3—If you have one of the newly-issued $2.00 bills in your pocket, please take it out and look at the back, which depicts the signing of the DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE in 177 6.

The seated gentleman that is No. 7 as you count from the left is supposed to be Robert Morris according to the original painting of this scene by John Trumbull. Morris was then a wealthy financier who gave his all for the cause of freedom and independence, and ended up penniless as a result. In his original painting, Trumbull honored Morris for his sacrifices in the cause of freedom by depicting him prominently in a shining light with a proud look of determination on his face. After all, if it had not been for Morris, the rag-tag Army of the United States might have collapsed for lack of funds.

On the new $2.00 bill, Morris' important role is also symbolically acknowledged—but by people who want to undo the freedom which his sacrifices helped bring about. On the bill, Morris is darkened into obscurity, just as our Unseen Rulers want

to obscure and blot out our freedom. As I have mentioned before, such subliminal propaganda messages and signals are all around us—such as the State flag postage stamps which say "Bicentennial Era", code words which refer specifically to the so-called "Second American Revolution" program of John D. Rockefeller III.

In more direct ways, too, Rockefeller propaganda is designed to advance their program toward dictatorship. On April 18, 1976, the Rockefeller-controlled Atlantic Richfield Oil Co., known as ARCO, began taking out full-page ads nation-wide for something they called a "Tricentennial." It pictures a mock American flag consisting of 300 white stars on a field of blue with the number 2076 in computer-style numerals against a field of red, and below that it encourages you to write and tell what changes you want to see in America—without even a passing nod to the fact that you might like some things to remain as they are. The crux of the whole ad is contained in the words, and I quote:

"In about six months we plan to gather your responses, analyze them, and make a full report of what we found out." And, quote: "We'll make sure it reaches the people who are in positions to consider and act on it."

What people do they mean? The Rockefeller Brothers and their helpers, that's who! The new ARCO Tricentennial campaign is nothing more or less than a replacement for John D. Rockefeller Ill's National Committee for the Bicentennial Era, which was forced to shut down a while back after its Bicentennial Declaration ad of a year ago was exposed as the kickoff for the secret new Rockefeller Constitution.

Meanwhile, Rockefeller progress toward implementing their secret and dictatorial "New States of America Constitution" is proceeding as fast as they are able. During the first week of this month, April, a so-called "critical appraisal" of the UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION was held in Philadelphia with over 100 attendees representing universities, business, labor, civil rights groups, the judiciary, Congress, and others.

Prominent names from the WATERGATE investigation were on the list, including Henry Ruth, Jr., who served as the Watergate Special Prosecutor in the final phases. Can you imagine?

Labor was represented by Victor Gotbaum of the AFL-CIO; and Stephen Schlossberg, General Counsel of the United Auto Workers.

On the business side were Board Chairmen of three corporations: J. Irwin Miller of Cummings Engine Co.; John DiBold of the DiBold group; and Fletcher L. Gramm of Coppers Company, an especially outspoken proponent of ideas which appear in the Rockefeller "New States Constitution."

The Presidents of the Council on Foreign Relations, the League of Women Voters, and Common Cause were there; as well as the Executive Director of the American Civil Liberties Union; and the Co-Director of the admittedly radical, anti-capitalist Peoples Bicentennial Commission, Jeremy Rifkin.

Top representatives were present from Time Magazine, the Federal Reserve System, and the American Bar Association. Nearly a dozen federal judges were in attendance; plus a retired Supreme Court Justice; and the head of the General Accounting Office himself, Elmer Staats.

It's hardly any wonder that Professor Marvin E. Wolfgang, President of the sponsoring American Academy of Political and

Social Science, confidentially declared at the meeting, and I quote:

"Neither the Congress nor the White House can ignore what we say here."

And this is no idle academic comment, my friends, because on May 12, 1976, the Philadelphia World Affairs Council, a unit of the Council on Foreign Relations, plans to come to Washington to begin seriously pressuring Congress in preparation for formal adoption of both the dictatorial Rockefeller "New States of America Constitution" and the treasonous "Declaration of Interdependence" first introduced last October in Philadelphia.

Meanwhile the four Rockefeller Brothers continue working to position themselves to take full command of the dictatorship they hope to create soon. Front man Nelson is rapidly emerging now with the publicity campaign I mentioned he was planning in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 9 two months ago, and he is pulling out all the stops. On one hand to one audience he says: "Forget the past, and let's look to the future"; but to another audience he professes to be an unabashed believer in, quote: "the old-fashioned virtues." Can you imagine? He says living by example is his key religious precept; but, of course, he doesn't mention any of the examples of his past record that I revealed for you in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 1. Most recently he has even begun lashing out at old friends and allies, even close family friends of long standing—such as Dr. Dorothy Fosdick of Senator Henry Jackson's staff—in his consuming ambition to harness for himself the so-called "Conservative sentiment" that is now sweeping across America.

Nelson Rockefeller and his brothers are still playing their deadly end game of tactical maneuvering to meet contingencies, trying to time political and economic events here in the United States to mesh with fast-breaking events overseas in the build-up for war. To this end, my latest information is that two prime options have now been developed for Rockefeller's take-over of the presidency; and, as usual, I reveal them in the hope that by doing so such actions as may be necessary may be taken to prevent their happening.

Option 1 may be exercise of the forces for Middle East war that have now been unleashed to progress very rapidly leading to war there and a "Declaration of Emergency" here before the conventions this summer. In that event, President Ford may be removed from office one way or another before the Convention, in which case Rockefeller will become President and serve out Ford's term until January 20, 1977.

But, my friends, Option 2 is now at the top of the Rockefeller preference list. I can now reveal that Nelson Rockefeller plans to use his infamous 25th Amendment to the Constitution again—but in a different way. He has already made Ford to agree that he be his Vice-Presidential candidate. Rockefeller now plans for Ford to be nominated for President and himself for Vice-President regardless of what happens in the Primaries! Then, after the Convention, the plan is for President Ford to be incapacitated for one reason or another, thereby activating Clause 4 of the 25th Amendment of the United States Constitution.

Under this Clause, and I quote: "...a majority of the principal officers of the executive departments"—who are now 99% Rockefeller client followers—will send a written declaration to the President pro tern of the Senate and the Speaker of the House of Representatives that, and I quote: "...the President is unable

to discharge the powers and duties of his office..." Thereupon Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller, who himself is the President pro tem of the Senate, quote: "...shall immediately assume the powers and duties of the office as Acting President."

Now get that, Acting President! Rockefeller plans to achieve this on or about September 19, 1976; and in this capacity under the provisions of the 20th Amendment he will serve, quote: "...until a President shall have qualified..." But that could be indefinitely, because part of the plan is also to call off the elections because of the very abnormal circumstances and attendant confusion—all of this paving the way for acceptance of their dictatorial "New States of America Constitution" by a National Referendum!

And if you think such a thing just couldn't happen, just remember: The banks were closed and the people's gold was confiscated by FDR in 1933—and the people accepted it because of the abnormal circumstances.

And World War II—Japanese Americans were rounded up and herded into Concentration Camps. An unthinkable act, yet it was accepted due to the abnormal circumstances.

And would you have believed, just four years ago that both a Vice-President and a President could be hounded out of office and be replaced by two appointees?!!

My friends, our Founding Fathers realized that the day might come when our governments, both federal and state, would fail us and their Constitutional duties to represent the people. It was for that reason that they included ARTICLE X of the Bill of Rights. Often it is called the States' Rights Amendment, but it should be called the Peoples' Rights Amendment. It reads, and I quote:

"The powers not delegated to the United States by the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the states, are reserved to the states respectively, or to the people."

I repeat: "reserved to the people." So we have to look to ourselves, and it has now come down to that—to you, to me, to all the people of the United States! It is time for us to highly resolve, as did Abraham Lincoln:

"...that this nation, under God, shall have a new birth of freedom; and that government of the people, by the people, for the people, shall not perish from the earth."

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #12

Hello everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is May 26, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 12.

This issue completes the first year of the monthly AUDIO LETTER series, and what a year it's been!

In his Farewell speech as the first President of the United States of America, George Washington warned:

"In proportion as the structure of government gives force to public opinion, it is essential that public opinion be enlightened."

That is what my monthly AUDIO LETTER is all about. Public opinion is always wrong when it's based on false and incomplete information, and that is exactly what is served up daily by the Rockefeller-dominated major media under the guise of "news." Every month I try to help you cut through the exhausting flood of Rockefeller propaganda in order to focus on more basic underlying matters.

This month I want to pull together some of the most basic threads that run through everything I've been telling you about. After hearing this issue, I strongly urge you to go back and review what I have passed on to you in previous tapes—both my monthly AUDIO LETTERS and the AUDIO BOOK talking tapes I have recorded; and always keep in mind that it is physically impossible to repeat everything from one month to the next to remind you of everything that's going on. Instead, every issue is devoted to matters which I believe will remain relevant for a long period of time. Whenever plans are later changed in any drastic way, I try to alert you to those changes. Otherwise you may assume that what I've told you in the past continues to have a bearing on what is happening today.

What I want to do today is to try to give you a peek into the minds of the Four Rockefeller Brothers and their allies—in other words, to show you what makes them tick. By this, of course, I do not mean a peep show or prying into their personal behavior even though they themselves have launched such gutter level peep shows lately without total regard for truth or good taste to debunk the late President Kennedy, former President Nixon, former Vice-President Agnew, among others; but I do think you have a legitimate and pressing need to understand in the clearest terms possible what they are trying to achieve, why they are trying to achieve it, and how they exercise vast power to suit their own purposes. As an old saying goes,

"Know your enemy."

The entire program of the Four Rockefeller Brothers boils down to one of conquest and enslavement by any and all means! Wherever possible, resistance to their schemes is reduced by using techniques which are not understood by the general public, and control of the major media through various "fronts" is used to help guarantee this lack of public understanding. But all of their most powerful techniques involve a common denominator, DESTRUCTION—economic destruction, physical destruction, destruction of individual choice; and whenever it suits their purposes, destruction of human life world-wide!

My three topics today are:

Topic #1—ENSLAVEMENT THROUGH MONOPOLY AND THE DESTRUCTION OF COMPETITIVE FREE ENTERPRISE

Topic #2—ENSLAVEMENT THROUGH INFLATION AND THE DESTRUCTION OF AN ECONOMY

Topic #3—THE COMMITMENT TO ENSLAVEMENT THROUGH ONE-WORLD GOVERNMENT AND NUCLEAR DESTRUCTION.

Topic #1—In my home state of West Virginia, John D. Rockefeller IV, also known as Jay Rockefeller, is breaking all records there

for campaign spending in his bid for the governorship. He's campaigning openly on the theme that he's too rich to steal, and he won the Democratic Gubernatorial Primary by a landslide. He spent over $4,000,000 just to win the Primary! Can you imagine? This is not to say that Jay would steal, but the fact that he can actually campaign on the "Too rich to steal" theme is a vivid illustration of what has been accomplished by three generations of Rockefeller public relations aided and abetted by ever-expanding Rockefeller domination of the major media.

Jay's great-grandfather, John D. Rockefeller, Sr., was America's first billionaire by the dawn of the 20th Century, but he most emphatically was not viewed as too rich to steal. Rather, he was widely regarded as "too rich to trust" because the source of his immense wealth lay in ruthless grasping and destruction of competitors. Through these methods, the huge Rockefeller Standard Oil Trust had been built into a monster that was depicted in political cartoons of that time as devouring everything in sight. No wonder.

An honest United States Supreme Court not yet packed by the Corporate Socialists, ruled in its 1911 Standard Oil Company dissolution decree, and I quote:

"For the safety of the Republic, we now decree that this dangerous conspiracy must be ended by November 15, 1911."

The Rockefellers, of course, paid no real heed to this legal order to dissolve their monopoly. For the sake of appearances only, their infamous Standard Oil Trust was carved up into several allegedly separate companies—but behind the scenes, Rockefeller control was retained over all of them through the use of nominees, banks, and tax-exempt Foundations which hold the controlling interest in these companies for the benefit of the Rockefellers.

The Standard Oil decree of 1911 exemplified one very basic fact—the incredible fortune amassed by John D. Rockefeller, Sr., was acquired by unjust, corrupt means. It was, therefore, susceptible to being erased if justice were allowed to take its course. This posed an ever present danger to the Rockefeller fortune, to which the Rockefellers responded in two ways:

On one hand they launched the most elaborate sustained public relations program the world has ever seen in order to create a more favorable image in the public eye. The centerpiece of this campaign was, and still is, so-called "philanthropy" through an ever-growing complex of tax-exempt Foundations. These were sold to the public as "something for nothing" devices, thoughtfully set up by the Rockefellers to help them 'give away' their money for the 'public good' without the slightest thought of benefit to themselves.

The other side to the Rockefeller program was to continue the actual expansion of their monopolistic empire to ever grander proportions, using these very Foundations to cover and hide their control and to escape taxation; monopoly in business with the same motivation as before, greed. Soon this expanded into monopoly in labor by bringing into their camp more and more of the most important Labor leaders—they were housebroken. And monopolistic control of money itself through their unconstitutional private central banking system—the Federal Reserve System!

To protect their economic monopolism from being tripped up by law and justice, Rockefeller efforts spilled over more and more

into control of politics, of our Judicial system, and of Education.

Soon after the troublesome Supreme Court decree of 1911, Woodrow Wilson became President—the first president to be a complete Rockefeller puppet! And in 1930, the Supreme Court acquired a new Chief Justice, direct from the Rockefeller Standard Oil stables—Charles Evans Hughes. This began the gradual packing of the Supreme Court, which later reached scandalous proportions under Rockefeller puppet President Franklin D. Roosevelt.

Key factors in the successful advancement of Rockefeller monopolism and the resulting destructive effects on American life were none other than the very Foundations which were hailed in Rockefeller public relations propaganda as "philanthropies."

In 1917 Senator Chamberlain of Oregon warned on the floor of Congress:

"The Carnegie-Rockefeller influence is bad. In two generations they can change the minds of the people to make them conform to the cult of Rockefeller or the cult of Carnegie, rather than the fundamental principles of American democracy."

Truer words were never spoken; and even as Senator Chamberlain made these remarks, Rockefeller termites were busily at work on Congress too, eating away the true representation of the people and leaving nothing but the weak, hollow shell we have today!

By means of World War II the Rockefellers acquired an economic weapon which enabled them to make a giant leap forward, outdistancing all of their rivals both here in America and around the world. That weapon was their control of Saudi Arabian oil, whose surrender by Britain to the Rockefellers was the price of America's entry into World War II.

The Saudi fields were then developed by G.I. labor at practically no expense to the Rockefellers, who then obtained the oil for 30 years, up until two years ago, at just five cents (5) a barrel! Using the tremendous windfall profits that resulted—hundreds of billions of dollars—the Four Rockefeller Brothers, operating through various fronts here and abroad, were able to buy up the industrial base not only of America but of Europe, Japan, Latin America, and elsewhere. Soon thereafter, global corporations under Rockefeller control posed an unprecedented economic challenge to the very sovereignty of nation after nation.

Today, after three generations of relentless striving, the Rockefeller empire controlled by the Four Rockefeller Brothers—David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D. Ill—is on the threshold of total monopoly here in America if they can implement their dictatorial "NEW STATES OF AMERICA CONSTITUTION." But you may ask: "What does total monopoly really mean? How would it affect me?" In a total monopoly, my friend, you would be surrounded, boxed in. You would be a complete slave! And to the extent that partial monopoly already exists, you are a half-slave already.

This brings me back full circle to West Virginia once again. There on a localized scale, you could have seen total monopoly in action not long ago. I've seen it with my own eyes; and I have to tell you, my friends, it was not a pretty sight. I have seen it over and over again all around my home state—miners working long, hard days in dangerous mines for low wages which were not

even paid to them in currency but in tokens called "scrip." The miners and their families lived in houses owned by the coal company, paying their rent in scrip—houses which often would not have been accepted as meeting minimum standards anywhere else! For all the necessities of life, the miner and his family had to go to the company's store, the only place where scrip could be redeemed.

Years ago I knew a high official of a large railroad which owned coal fields in West Virginia. One day he tried to bring to the attention of the Directors of a large financial institution in Cleveland, Ohio, which controlled the railroad, that prices in the coal company stores were inhumanly high and kept the miners perpetually in debt to the company store. He said: "Why not pay the miners a living wage and reduce prices to a fair level in the company stores?" At this, the Directors shouted: "Socialism, Communism"; and within a few months they forced him into early retirement. Far from being a Communist or a Socialist, my friend was simply a Christian with a sincere concern about the working and living conditions of the miners. But the bank itself was controlled at the top by the Rockefeller interests, who are in league with the Soviet Union, which is run by nothing but a bunch of Communists. What irony!

The same sort of thing is all around us today. The Rockefeller Brothers always make sure that they have plenty of spokesmen giving a lie that they 'support the free enterprise system'—when actually they are monopolists through and through. They are Corporate Socialists, just as their counterparts under the Soviet system are State Socialists.

The goal of the Rockefeller Brothers for the United States is that our entire nation be brought under their total monopoly so that we can all be exploited, as were the coal miners. Living in company-owned housing, buying the necessities of life at outlandish prices from the company store, paid in scrip which could not be redeemed elsewhere, and deprived of educational or other opportunities to break the vicious cycle they were in, the miners were economic slaves!

Living a life of hard, dangerous work, they fought an ever-losing battle against mounting debts to their slave masters—the coal companies. They were not merely employed, they were consumed! They were disabled by occupational hazards like Black Lung and on-the-job injuries. They left destitute widows and children without pensions. A miner did not last indefinitely, but the company didn't worry too much when he fell by the wayside. Generally he would be replaced without any difficulty by his or another miner's son growing up, caught in the same economic spider web. And if the Rockefeller Brothers get their way, we will all end up as their slaves, just like those miners in the coal fields then.

Topic #2—We Americans today are becoming more and more like the enslaved coal miners of yesterday. We carry out our financial transactions in scrip instead of in real money. The scrip we use called "Federal Reserve Notes" is denominated in dollars but it's not redeemable by your Government for gold, silver, or anything else; nor is it backed up by gold, silver, or anything else except the assurance of a corrupt government that we should think of it as if it were money. As I know from personal experience, even the Blacks in the bush in Africa know that if the government is corrupt, the money is corrupt; but most Americans have been educated out of understanding that and are therefore learning the hard way now.

The scrip that used to be paid to the West Virginia miners was not issued by the Government but by their private, employers, the coal companies; and in America today our scrip is not issued by the Government but by the Federal Reserve System owned and controlled privately by the very same Rockefeller-dominated corporations and financial institutions which increasingly control your job, directly or indirectly, and from whom you must buy most of what you need. So our monetary situation in America today increasingly resembles that of the coal-mining districts of yesterday.

We hear a lot about the money supply and the "balance of international payments"; but as I explained three years ago in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, these things no longer really matter under the monopolistic control of the Rockefellers. Inflation is produced now not by money supply but as a result of the combined impact of Big Business, Big Labor, and Big Government compared with the real ability of the economy to produce now that our gold reserves have been stolen! And the "balance of payments" has been rendered obsolete by the Rockefeller multinational corporations which can make the figures look any way they want simply by trading back and forth among themselves across national boundaries.

As I also pointed out in my book, the alleged "Balance of Payments Deficit" was used throughout the 1960's as a smoke screen, a cover, to justify the hemorrhaging of America's gold reserves out of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox and our other Depositories and sending it overseas. Now that this has been completed, however, and the Rockefeller Brothers have cornered our nation's gold, the Government has just announced that now it considers overall balance of payments figures to be obsolete and will stop publishing them.

The United States dollar has been reduced to the status of pseudo money, scrip—and it's going "for broke." We're coming closer and closer to the day when the Federal Reserve scrip we use today, which is disguised for psychological reasons to resemble our real money of the past, will be replaced in a reverse split of perhaps 100 to 1 by the "red-backs" now stored in the mountain vault at Culpeper, Virginia, and other underground vaults.

Like the coal miners' scrip, the red-backed dollars will not be convertible to other currency—they will serve only for domestic transactions as we work as slaves for the Rockefeller Corporate State and spend our red-backed scrip at various branches of the nation-wide Rockefeller company store embracing everything from housing to groceries. The Rockefeller brothers want to eliminate your independence and to make you dependent upon them as a slave. That is why they want to control money itself as well as the means of production, distribution, and supply of everything that money can buy.

I can now reveal that if you have gold their plan now does not call for it to be confiscated, but that it is because unlike the situation in 1933, so very few people now have any gold that the Rockefeller Brothers do not plan to bother with it since they have already cornered the United States' monetary gold supply.

We are to be left holding worthless paper money as the fruit of our labors, while the Rockefeller Brothers themselves hold our gold as the fruit of their crimes. They plan to make another great leap forward in their own wealth and power by turning our entire nation into one big slave-labor camp for them to exploit at will by destroying the economy we presently have, which does

not yet give them total control.

Topic #3—In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 7 December 1975 I revealed that the Canadian Government has decided to strike out alone, instead of being led down the road to Rockefeller domination; and now Canada is trying to defend itself against political and economic war being waged against it by the Rockefeller Brothers. It may come as a surprise to some people but the Canadian Government, unlike that of the United States, is currently trying to act in the best interests of its own citizens. For that reason I seldom go into much detail about what the Canadian Government is doing because I do not want to upset its efforts to save itself.

In a television interview in Ottawa on May 11, 1976, David Rockefeller said to his Canadian audience, quote: "You face a dilemma. Are you more anxious to be completely independent? OR do you want to see your resources developed faster with the aid of others?" He added that Canadians must choose between greater economic independence or increased prosperity. His statements reflect the intensifying economic pressure being applied to Canada by the Rockefeller interests. For example, they are now backing out of major commitments to develop Canadian oil reserves. This led a few weeks ago to a bombshell announcement by the Canadian Government that contrary to all past projections, Canada will not be energy self-sufficient in the coming years after all. Meanwhile, the Canadian Government has struck back by turning down for the moment at least a fleet of Orion military aircraft built by the Rockefellers' Lockheed Aircraft Company.

Whether it be individuals, companies, or nations, competitors are always regarded by the Four Rockefeller Brothers as a threat to be absorbed or eliminated. Where there is competition and diversity, there is always the chance no matter how small that they might somehow lose their position of supremacy. Losing that, they reason, they might some day be exposed and brought to justice—and that could mean losing everything because their entire mode of operation is one of corruption, hidden manipulation, and flaunting of the laws that they impose on us peasants, as they call us privately. So through a combination of greed and an ever-haunting concern for security, there arises an insatiable lust for power. And because evil practices confer vast worldly power, this leads to a conscious embrace of these practices that amounts to the worship of evil.

Early in the 20th Century the Rockefellers of that day joined certain others who shared an identity of interest in such things to form a commitment to create a ONE-WORLD GOVERNMENT. This is what Nelson Rockefeller means today when he refers to "an open world"—no borders, no North and South Vietnam, no East and West Germany, no Virginia and West Virginia, and no taxes for his global corporations—just one stupendous world government, the most awesome dictatorship of all time with himself as World President. To direct and coordinate the entire program under the One-World commitment established two generations ago, the Rockefellers set up powerful tax-exempt Foundations and used public relations to give them the halo of philanthropy!

The first stage in this commitment, as I reported to you last month, was to embark on the deliberate use of war to so alter national life in the directions they desired.

The second stage, which followed very quickly, was the forging of a covert partnership between the Rulers of the United States and those of the Soviet Union whose Communist system was put into power by the same group of people. The wealth and know-how of

the Western world, especially the United States of America, would be drained off to strengthen their ally, the Soviet Union, leading to the forced collapse of the United States!

This would mark the dawning of the third stage—One-World Government under a partnership between the Soviet Union and an America reorganized on the pattern of the Soviet system.

To bring these things to pass, powerful forces were unleashed over 50 years ago—corrupt, dishonest forces. In 1920, for example, the Rockefeller and Carnegie Foundations arranged through the Guggenheim Foundation to establish scholarships to begin the re-writing of American history to create doubt about the principles laid down by our Founding Fathers. Carefully selected candidates were sent to certain universities in England for indoctrination, after which they were brought back and placed in strategic educational positions at the University of Chicago and sprinkled through other important institutions of higher learning. Through their positions of leadership, they would ultimately influence United States history teaching throughout America. The objective of this commitment was to bring on "collectivism" through the downgrading of the individual and the upgrading of the elitist group that planned to rule the collectivist world. At the same time propaganda through entertainment, educational, and news media was to be designed to render people incapable of believing the truth about what was happening by making conspiracy theories of all types look ridiculous, too silly to be taken seriously.

In the more than half century since this One World commitment was formed, the Trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled Foundations have moved the One-World Program very far indeed; but the forces they unleashed are now running out of control! They have opened Pandora's box and now they are beginning to see that they, too, are being swept along by the very same forces that they themselves have set in motion. More and more of the Trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled Foundations now believe that the commitment for a One-World Government, as originally conceived, has jumped the tracks; and now they see the specter of a horrible end coming into sight just a little further down the road—a double cross by the artificially strong Soviet Union with the Soviets picking up all the chips for themselves.

But the mounting fear of the Trustees still is not shared by the Rockefeller Brothers themselves. Loyal, patriotic members of the United States Intelligence Community inform me they are grinding their teeth in frustration because the efforts of the Joint Chiefs of Staff to upgrade American defenses against the very real Soviet threat are being vetoed at every turn by Nelson Rockefeller through Henry Kissinger!

The Rockefeller Brothers firmly believe that war is coming, and soon; but even now they still believe the Soviets will abide by their secret agreement for a completely programmed war when that phase of World War III, or NUCLEAR WAR ONE, is reached which calls for nuclear warfare on American soil! David Rockefeller and his affluent intimates still think they hold the upper hand with the Kremlin bosses through various devices. For example, there are several casks of radioactive Plutonium-239 superpoison stored by the CIA on the fourth floor of the central building of the United States Embassy in Moscow. These were taken there in 1971 from the Fort Knox Bullion Depository by the CIA to be maintained as a blackmail threat against any tricks by the Soviets. Like those which remained in the Fort Knox Bullion Depository, they began leaking long ago and are responsible for the leukemia now suffered by Ambassador Stophil and others in the

Embassy. This is the truth behind the cover stories you saw recently alleging that health problems in the American Embassy in Moscow were being caused by Soviet microwave radiation.

But why expect the Government to worry about a few mere employees at our Embassy in Moscow? Exactly the same kind of radioactive superpoison has for months been spreading through underground streams from Fort Knox into the southeastern United States! One of the most immediate threats from the CIA superpoison is an underground concentration centering on Chattanooga, Tennessee. This hot spot extends 23 miles west, 25 miles south, 42 miles east and northward toward the source, which is Fort Knox, Kentucky. The water supply for over a quarter of a million Americans is threatened, yet the federal government still refuses to tell the truth about this deadly threat.

David and his brothers still believe also that the Soviet need for trade with their global corporations will keep the Soviets in line, adhering to their secret commitments—but how wrong they are!

To get ready for the war, David Rockefeller has just built a new fortified family hideaway on Bartlett Island, adjacent to Mt. Desert Island off the coast of Maine where other Rockefeller strongholds are now in existence complete with bombproof shelters. The latitude of Bartlett Island is 44 degrees 22 minutes North, almost the exact center of the supersecret NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE which has been established for the Rockefellers and their affluent intimates in America during the coming war. This zone is a band across roughly the upper half of the United States and including the lowest portions of Canada. It extends from 40 degrees to the South to 50 degrees on the North, and the center is 45 degrees—almost the exact latitude of the Rockefeller compounds off the coast of Maine. That, in fact, is why 45 degrees was chosen as the center of the Nuclear Safe Zone. Members of the Rockefeller inner circle who are "in the know" about all this, have been buying real estate in Oregon, Idaho, Montana, Wyoming, and the Dakotas, as some of you may have noticed who live in those states. Now you know why. Now you also know the real reason why our anti-ballistic missile installations which were located within the Nuclear Safe Zone were dismantled last year. The upper half of the United States is to be a virtual de-militarized zone except for some military installations which have been around too long to deactivate without arousing suspicion, but they would not be used against the Soviet Union in NUCLEAR WAR ONE by the United States.

Just look at a map of the United States, my friends. Look at the enormous nuclear disaster that is in store for us if the Rockefeller Brothers and their Soviet allies are allowed to carry out their insane plans for total conquest. Alaska, which lies above the Nuclear Safe Zone, is scheduled to have its now uncompleted oil pipeline blasted out of existence. Hawaii, below the Nuclear Safe Zone, is scheduled to be hit to knock out the naval installations there. But our real Pearl Harbor this time is to be the Panama Canal, as I revealed 19 months ago in my AUDIO BOOK talking tape No. 1, "HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THIRD WORLD WAR."

As for the continental United States—California, Nevada, Utah, Colorado, Kansas, Missouri, Illinois, Indiana, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Delaware, New Jersey, and all states south of them are immediate candidates for nuclear attack even if there is no Soviet double cross of the Rockefeller Brothers. As I first warned on radio in June 1974, not only the Panama Canal but American cities are already targeted by nuclear missiles in the

Republic of Guyana next to Venezuela, ready to strike from the south where we are weakest.

Americans really cannot believe the terrifying possibility of nuclear war, feeling that neither the Soviet Union nor the United States would risk its own destruction; but the Soviet Union, spending over a billion dollars a year on massive Civil Defense preparations, is ready to survive NUCLEAR WAR ONE, unlike ourselves; and the Rockefeller Brothers and their intimates are ready to survive it, too, with their fortified hideaways in the Nuclear Safe Zone. But for the rest of us, my friends, the only war preparations are the mass burial sites which are now being quietly set aside without explanation, such as the 80-acre site in Wood County, Wisconsin!

My friends, this IS WAR; and you, your loved ones, and everything you hold dear are the targets. We are being attacked without mercy, and the weapons being used against us are the weapons of evil. WE MUST FIGHT BACK NOW WHILE WE HAVE THE CHANCE—not with the power of evil, however, but with the power of truth, which I still believe is more powerful than the most evil plans men can devise.

Here is what we must do now:

First: We must stop the insane plans for America's destruction in NUCLEAR WAR ONE, which I am convinced will be even worse if it is allowed to take place than the Rockefeller Brothers planned because of certain Soviet double cross.

All aid and trade with the Soviet Union must be cut off, and the Joint Chiefs of Staff must be freed to take the proper measures to protect our country against the Soviet Union. There's no time to be lost.

Every Governor, every Senator, every Congressman, every State Legislator, and every Mayor in the states including or below the 40th Parallel plus Alaska and Hawaii, has an immediate duty and responsibility for the lives of the citizens they represent. That duty is to demand that Secretary of State Henry Kissinger publicly reveal the secret war plan agreements with the Soviet Union which established the Nuclear Safe Zone I have described. These agreements are now in the possession of the Four Rockefeller Brothers in their hideaways on Mt. Desert Island and adjacent Bartlett Island off the coast of Maine. Every single one of the officials I have described must be alerted to this plan and, if need be, forced by public pressure to demand this public accounting from Kissinger. Any official who refuses to pursue this life-and-death duty once alerted and pursue it vigorously will be knowingly jeopardizing the very life of every man, woman, and child he has taken an oath to protect.

Second: We must block the program of the Four Rockefeller Brothers to eliminate our beloved free CONSTITUTION and replace it with their own dictatorial "New States of America Constitution."

The same officials I have just mentioned, but for all 50 States, must be alerted to this plan and must be pushed by public pressure into action. Have no illusions, my friends, neither Congress nor most of the other officials I have mentioned will do anything whatsoever about either of these things on their own. With rare exceptions, they respond only to pressure and usually that pressure comes only from powerful special interests—which these days usually means the Four Rockefeller Brothers and their total lackeys. But, if they are alerted to these terrible

dangers and are kept under constant unrelenting public scrutiny and pressure, I believe Congress as well as the other officials can be mobilized on both of these particular matters—the WAR and the CONSTITUTION—to do what must be done to save our country, because this time their own survival is at stake as well as ours!

What you must do in this terrible situation is something that does not come easily to most of us. You must get off the sidelines and into the fight. You must speak out about what you know even though many may not yet believe you. You must search out others who share your concerns once alerted to our common danger and who will join with you to take action under our Constitution to prevent disaster; and you must get your priorities straight.

This situation is not a Liberal, Conservative, Black, White, Jew or Gentile, Democrat or Republican issue. It's a matter of survival, literally life and death; and survival as well as of the system which allows all these individual differences among us to continue to coexist. You must join with others in your area even if it is only one or two at first, and figure out what your particular group can do to bring the pressure for action I have just described.

Do you have an independent newspaper in your area whose editor will listen to the truth and perhaps follow up on it with his own investigation and editorials? Is one or more of you a member of a lodge where you could bring up these matters and generate support for action? Can you rent or borrow space in a church or school to hold public meetings where more people can be informed through tapes or other means?

Take stock of your own resources whatever they are and use them, and don't ignore your financial resources be they large or small. Would you rather use a portion of your worldly goods in order to preserve an entire way of life? Or would you rather sit back and let it evaporate uselessly through Rockefeller-induced inflation and the searing heat of nuclear warfare?

Remember: YOU count.

The Rockefeller Brothers and their affluent intimates are powerful, but their power is exercised through the willing minds and hands of millions of others who for the most part do not even know that is what they are doing.

You and I are not confronted by a whole nation of enemies but just a very few individuals who have learned how to push and maneuver others into doing their bidding; so if you feel outnumbered, don't. As far as our real enemies are concerned (those at the top), we now outnumber them, so what in the world is the sense in letting them enslave us?

My friends, I have told you what I think we must focus on, and fast! In December 1975 I also recorded AUDIO BOOK No. 6, "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE AMERICA", to give you some thought-starters; and I know that some of you are pursuing suggestions I made then. But beyond that, I believe you must use your own initiative to see how to put things together to work your way, working with others in your area.

Under the First Amendment to the United States Constitution, you are guaranteed the right of peaceable assembly for a reason. Use it. You are also guaranteed the right to petition government for the redress of grievances. Use it. And keep in mind always that under the Ninth and Tenth Amendments it is to us, the people

of the United States of America, that the ultimate power of our government is reserved. USE it, or very soon you will LOSE it!

My friends, the time has come in your life when your future depends on your willingness to face up to reality, and to act. I understand your attachment to things you have worked so long and so hard to acquire and achieve. And, yes, there is a risk involved in doing as I am urging you to do—a risk of being ridiculed by some, a risk of losing money, and even a risk of failure; but the element of risk is now reversed from what we usually think. The real risk now lies in NOT taking action because if you don't take whatever action you can, you risk letting the Rockefeller Brothers succeed in their insane plans—and thereby losing everything!

As I begin the second year of the monthly AUDIO LETTER series next month, God willing, I plan to keep on providing you with the information you need in order to do your part to save yourself, your loved ones, and our NATION.

Will those who have exercised vast power through covert means on behalf of the Rockefeller Brothers continue now to throw in their lot with their masters now that they see at last where this is leading? Or will they choose to begin making amends for the evil forces they have unleashed against us, the people who are the United States of America?

Never before in the history of our United States has this phenomenon occurred that one family controls the destiny of this country, and whatever happens I consider myself honored to be placed in the position that I am now in to join with you in the fight to move our great country forward once again on the path laid out by our Founding Fathers.

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #13

Hello everybody, this is Dr. Beter. Today is June 26, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 13.

Just a few days from now, on July 4, 1976, the United States of America will observe its 200th birthday, our BICENTENNIAL. This is a special milestone in our history which will be here only once and then gone, never to return again.

What it should be is a time of thankful reflection on our past, of joyous appreciation of our present, and of eager anticipation of our future. That is what it should be, but it is being ruined deliberately for us by a handful of very powerful people who want to take it all away from you and me. Instead of peacefully celebrating the freedom won for us in the American Revolution two centuries ago, we are being plunged into a so-called "Second American Revolution" to end that freedom.

As Patrick Henry declared in his Liberty or Death speech of March 1775:

"Gentlemen say, peace, peace; but there is no peace. The war is actually begun! The next gale that sweeps from the north will bring to our ears the clash of resounding arms!..."

Economically, politically, and militarily the war to undo our independence and destroy our way of life is raging all around us today. It is therefore up to us, the American people, to reaffirm our treasured DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE whose signing we celebrate on July 4, and to enforce it against those who seek to enslave us—the Four Rockefeller Brothers along with their client followers.

At the conclusion of monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last month I challenged those who wield great power on behalf of the Four Rockefeller Brothers to declare their own independence and begin immediately to work for good, instead of evil.

The top layer in the vast pyramid of power under Rockefeller control are the innermost circle of Foundation Trustees. My associates and I know who they are. There are about a hundred of them—the Trustees of a mere dozen Foundations—controlling the financial and industrial base of America not only through the Foundations themselves but through their interlocking directorates of banks, multinational corporations, insurance companies, educational institutions, and legal firms all for the benefit of their Rockefeller bosses, NOT for yours!

These inner circle Trustees—and they know who they are—have breached a fiduciary trusteeship because the Foundations are public supported, being almost totally exempt from United States taxation. I charge these Trustees with subversion of schools, churches, government, and the very liberty intended by our Founding Fathers. Their day is coming, they will be unmasked, and they will do well to be found hard at work to undo the evil they have set in motion; otherwise their power, like that of their masters the Four Rockefeller Brothers, can and I believe will be taken away and given to more faithful custodians by an increasingly informed, aroused America.

Last month I explained the most important key to the maintenance and expansion of power—deliberate destruction. Today I want to point out how CONSPIRACY (they call it commitment) is always involved in such deliberate destruction in order to expand their power.

My three topics today are:

Topic #1—CONSPIRACY FOR ECONOMIC DESTRUCTION

Topic #2—CONSPIRACY FOR POLITICAL DESTRUCTION

Topic #3—CONSPIRACY TO ACHIEVE DESTRUCTION OF HUMAN LIVES.

Topic #1—Suppose a pair of thugs were to confront you in a parking lot, steal your brand new $5,000 car, sell the unidentifiable parts at a junk yard for $50, and push the rest over a cliff. The thugs would be $50 richer at the expense of your losing 100 times that much, and the value built into the destroyed car would be permanently lost and irretrievable. If this happened to you, you would be the victim of economic destruction which benefits only the destroyers to the detriment of everyone else.

Most thieves, of course, would know better than to just walk up and confront you this way, face to face; instead they would work out a plan together whereby they could make off with your car without your knowing who did it, coordinating their actions so that they would not be caught.

The legal term for such planning of an illegal act by two or more individuals is called "conspiracy", and in this case it would be a conspiracy for the purpose of economic destruction.

If a ring of thieves were to make a continuing business of stealing cars, selling their parts and junking the remains, they would no doubt make sure that they maintained a convincing image as legitimate business men so that no one would suspect anything. If they didn't get caught, the members of the auto theft ring might get wealthier and wealthier, appearing to be pillars of the community in the process. But meanwhile their predatory activities behind the scenes would be a serious drain on the community's economy, perhaps heightened by the inability after a certain point for residents to buy Auto Theft Insurance. Eventually the unsuspecting townspeople might turn to the little group of citizens who appear to be wisest because they had become the wealthiest, the well disguised thieves themselves, to tell them how to solve the community's deepening problems; and the thieves, if they foresaw this opportunity to steal everything at once, might well have a new town charter ready to propose that would put them in charge of everything.

This, basically is what the Four Rockefeller Brothers and their close associates are up to economically—economic destruction for their own benefit but on a vast complex scale. I described the economic aspects of this three years ago in my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR"; but instead of a new town charter, the Rockefellers have their secret "NEW STATES OF AMERICA CONSTITUTION" ready to enslave us all!

The Rockefeller conspiracy for economic destruction is all around us, and far advanced! Consider, for example, the gold situation. I have stated before and repeat again now, that David Rockefeller plans for gold to go past $2,000 an ounce and the economic chaos that is being brought on by David and his brothers; and yet since about the time of the first Gold Auction by the United States Treasury on January 6, 1975, gold has been defying all natural market influences and slowly dropped in price without regard to anything else that is going on! The situation has gotten so worrisome that at least one newsletter specializing in this area has suspended publication, and other analysts express bewilderment also.

The question is: What's wrong with gold prices? The answer has two parts—Fort Knox and South Africa. A year ago the cover-up for the Fort Knox Gold Scandal was a prime influence in artificially holding down gold prices, as I have explained in earlier tapes; but now the main factor in the gold price is economic warfare against South Africa.

The Rockefeller Brothers and their allies, the Rothschilds, have formed a conspiracy to double-cross their associates in South Africa, such as the Guggenheims and others. Through joint action on the London Gold Market, the Rockefeller-Rothschild team are manipulating gold prices downward to reduce South Africa's income from gold sales—income that is needed in order to resist the Rockefeller-Soviet take-over of southern Africa that is now far advanced.

This tactic against South Africa and all of southern Africa is having side effects elsewhere as well, such as the suspension of some gold-mining operations here and abroad due to the inability of current low gold prices to pay for extraction costs.

Early this month, on June 2, 1976, the International Monetary Fund held its first gold auction in what will allegedly be a

four-year series of gold sales. When the IMF announced the beginning of its gold auction series, the United States Treasury announced that there would be no competing sales of United States gold during that four-year period—a clever move since there is no United States gold left to sell except for a small amount left over from the two Treasury auctions of 1975 which utilized the illegally-obtained gold from the Exchange Stabilization Fund. This tiny leftover amount of United States gold was about 780,000 ounces, and by odd coincidence this was the exact amount sold under the IMF banner in Washington, D.C., on June 2! Was that really IMF gold? Or was it actually the very last of America's gold, disposed of in yet another illegal maneuver?

Many questions have been asked about the reason for the International Economic Conference being held in Puerto Rico this weekend which was caused by the United States; but I can reveal to you that one of the main secret topics to be discussed at this conference is whether to continue with further gold auctions by the IMF even though the IMF has announced a general time schedule for future gold auctions. Should the IMF gold supply be shut off, and once the current turmoil in southern Africa succeeds in shutting down the gold mines there, the stage will be set at last for gold prices to take off. It will then be just a matter of selecting the proper moment politically, then the Rockefeller-Rothschild team will take the lid off the gold pressure cooker. Gold will climb ever higher; paper currencies like the United States dollar, the pound sterling, and others will be thrown into the fires of inflation; the Stock Market will collapse; and the generalized economic destruction sought by the Rockefeller Brothers for their own benefit will begin its final, catastrophic phase.

The United States economy has been bled dry of its normal resilience and stands on the edge of instability. Banks continue to fail here and there, and just a few days ago more than one-third of Mississippi's Savings & Loan Associations were put under a ban on withdrawals to stop a spreading run on deposits that was bordering on panic. More than 120,000 accounts and nearly half a billion dollars in depositors' money are now tied up, out of reach. Much has happened nation-wide in the Bank Holiday declared by President Franklin D. Roosevelt in 1933. The specific trigger of this situation in Mississippi was localized; but the underlying conditions that allowed it to spread, now exist throughout the United States brought about by faulty, poor banking practices fostered by David Rockefeller who still thinks of himself as an OSS spy.

Those who depend on our Social Security System are also being swindled without mercy. It has now been revealed that the currently foreseeable obligations for Social Security are at least four thousand billion dollars more than the total projected income into the fund to cover them—half again as large as the estimate just one year ago! The true situation is even worse. An accelerating inflation, feeding on itself now, will either destroy the System or create an unbearable burden for current workers.

And as I spelled out in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 9, February 1976, the conspiracy to destroy our postal service, with all the destructive effects that it will have economically and otherwise, is continuing. The recent trial balloons about terminating Saturday mail service are just a pale shadow of things to come. I strongly urge everyone who can do so to get a Post Office box now while you can. The day is coming when this may well be the only mail service left to us under the destructive control of the Rockefeller Brothers and their Corporate Socialist associates!

Topic #2—Conspiracy for political destruction is an ever present aspect of the Rockefeller program to bring about the revolutionary changes they desire. In this area of maximum intrigue and deception the unexpected can happen.

The Capitol Hill sex scandals which broke several weeks ago starting with Congressman Wayne Hays are a part of the conspiracy for political destruction in the United States. It was Hays, acting on behalf of the Rockefeller Brothers who stopped the Reece Committee investigations into tax-free Foundations in 1954—an honest investigation which, had it been allowed to run its course, might well have prevented the national disaster that threatens us today. It was also Hays, ironically, who nine years ago fought the establishment of the House Ethics Committee which is now investigating him even though he triggered the downfall of Congressman Adam Clayton Powell on ethical grounds. Now Hays' own turn has come and his political destruction is being turned toward the advancement of the Rockefeller political program. After the Hays scandal broke it was quickly joined by similar allegations about other members of Congress, and the whole thing is turning into an American rerun of the Profumo Affair that shook up the British Parliament several years ago.

This destruction of some political careers breaking at this particular time has two purposes. The first purpose is aimed at the presidential campaign, while the second longer-range purpose has to do with the ultimate fate of Congress itself!

The first major impact is supposed to come at the Democratic National Convention. The sex scandals so far seem to afflict primarily Democrats, and this is no accident—not because the Republicans in Congress are the least bit more moral than the Democrats but because this is a political ploy aimed at the Democratic Party; and already the frightened Democrats are scrambling to introduce so-called reforms in Congressional privileges to try to prop up their image.

The next step is to be the downgrading of Jimmy Carter, who at this moment is being proclaimed a sure thing for the nomination. This is planned even though Jimmy Carter is a puppet of David Rockefeller and has been for over three years.

Carter was initially chosen as a tool to destroy the George Wallace presidential threat and this, of course, was successful. Then the Rockefeller major media turned Carter into a steam roller to flatten all the other Democratic contenders as well except for Rockefeller ally Hubert Humphrey, who knows the score and entered no Primaries; California Governor Brown, who also has Rockefeller backing; and Senator Henry Jackson whom Nelson Rockefeller himself had to blow out of the water by alleging that Jackson's staff harbored Communist sympathizers such as Rockefeller's own long-time close associate Dr. Dorothy Fosdick. Right now they are still getting their mileage out of Carter by giving him tremendous publicity as he delivers foreign policy speeches written for him by Professor Brzezinski, who is the Director of the powerful Tri-Lateral Commission on behalf of David Rockefeller. And especially Carter is being used to inject an explicit moral leadership theme into the presidential campaign. But Carter is scheduled to run into trouble. The Rockefeller-controlled major media made him and they will unmake him.

For example, it will be said that he has no true capacity to survive a campaign, that he is a nobody who has come up from nowhere too fast and that he lacks humor, that he takes himself

too seriously, that he is overconfident in the Dewey style, that it is difficult for him to make personal contact, that he does not have the ability to compromise, that he arouses widespread misgivings, that he cannot cope with stress situations, and that he leaves himself open for attack on slip-of-the-tongue personal opinions. These are hardly leadership characteristics. He is, therefore, the captain of a political Titanic minutes before it sinks to the bottom along with everyone who is clutching his coattails .

By the time the Democratic Convention begins next month the Rockefeller scenario now is for Carter's supposedly unbeatable delegate line-up to be shaky and vulnerable, and for moral leadership to be a nagging concern thanks to the sex scandals. A deadlock on the first ballot will set the stage for an electrifying upset with moral leadership assuming a key role. The deadlocked Convention is programmed to turn at last to H.H.—not Hubert Humphrey but former Senator Harold Hughes of Iowa.

Hughes received heavy publicity in the Rockefeller controlled major media several years ago when he quit the Senate, reportedly to pursue religious activities. His credibility as a moral leader will be unsurpassed, but 15 months ago in my AUDIO BOOK talking tape No. 2 on the "FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU" I revealed this plan concocted by Nelson Rockefeller for Hughes to be nominated as a dark horse. In that tape I described him and the way he is to be used but did not name him, hoping that he would wake up and not go along with this plan; but at the present time everything is still lined up for Hughes to be nominated in this way.

Last December 1, 1975, Hughes was even installed as chairman of the "Commission on the Operation of the Senate", a one-year operation set up by the Rockefeller Brothers to be a vehicle for Hughes. This Commission, virtually unknown to the public, makes Hughes highly visible on Capitol Hill yet practically invisible to the rest of the country—that is, until he receives his cue to walk into the spotlight.

In revealing this plan I must remind you that even as long standing as it is, and even though it is still on course at this moment, it could still change. The Rockefeller Brothers, as I explained several months ago, are continuing to juggle a lot of factors in their do-or-die catch-up plan, and they always have contingency backup plans. The important thing to know is that you should not be deceived if the Hughes plan is carried out and what looks like a stunning upset takes place. Remember the words of that old "political animal" F.D.R.:

"Nothing ever happens in politics by accident. If it happens, you can bet it was planned that way."

The second and longer-range purpose of the Congressional sex scandals is to begin the final downfall of Congress as an institution, paving the way for Nelson Rockefeller as our President and Dictator to abolish it under his "NEW STATES OF AMERICA CONSTITUTION." Momentum in this direction is supposed to pick up steam soon with a startling echo of the Watergate Scandal—the trial of Gulf Oil lobbyist Claude C. Wild, Jr. for illegal campaign contributions.

At this time two years ago the Watergate Scandal had reached the stage of impeachment proceedings for the political destruction of our last elected President, Richard M. Nixon. This served its purpose of placing Nelson Rockefeller in the

Vice-Presidency by way of his 25th Amendment to the UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION; but now some of the very legislators who basked in the glory of Nixon's destruction are about to be destroyed themselves in the wake of testimony that they, too, were guilty of illegal fund raising like that for which they condemned Nixon. Erupting between the two national conventions, the trial of the Gulf lobbyist is calculated to have destructive political effects on both Parties and both Houses of Congress.

This same trial, after the Republican Convention nominates a Ford-Rockefeller ticket, is also supposed to ensnare President Ford in scandal. This is the option of several that are ready by which Nelson Rockefeller plans to become Acting President on or about September 19, 1976, after Ford is declared "unable to discharge his duties as President" under Section 4 of Rockefeller's 25th Amendment. Once he is in position as Acting President, Rockefeller plans to move as rapidly as circumstances allow in dismantling what remains of our free Republic. At the cost of destroying everything the rest of us hold dear about our land, Nelson Aldrich Rockefeller hopes ultimately to realize his own lifelong dream when under his secret new Constitution he begins a nine-year term as our Dictator-President. And, my friend, only you and I can stop it!

Topic #3—The idea that any group of people could be both powerful enough and ruthless enough to deliberately conspire to destroy human life by means of war, to suit their own purposes, is a very hard thing to accept. To most of us, human life is a sacred and precious thing, not only our own lives but those of others as well. But to those who are consumed by an insatiable lust for power, the most important thing is CONTROL—control of people and of their lives. If this means that some people have to be destroyed in order to make those who remain more controllable, that is regarded as an acceptable cost by these power-hungry people.

For example, the Communist regime that rules mainland China today was brought into power at an estimated cost of 64-million lives; but three years ago, while Rockefeller agent Chou En-Lai was still alive, David Rockefeller said, quote:

"Whatever the price of the Chinese Revolution, it has obviously succeeded in producing a more efficient and dedicated administration."

And he went on to add, quote:

"The social experiment in China under Chairman Mao's leadership is one of the most important and successful in human history."

Since David wrote these words, however, Chou En-Lai has passed from the scene and China for all intents and purposes has slipped free of Rockefeller control. This removes China from the success category, by Rockefeller definition, and China therefore now has to be whipped back into line by means of war.

Japan, too, is straining at the bonds of Rockefeller control, and is therefore being forced by the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance into the Red Chinese orbit so that both nations can be crushed into submission together with one shot. As I explained in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 of November 1975, the war now building in the Middle East is engineered to set the stage for the far larger war in Asia which in turn is to be the prelude to NUCLEAR WAR ONE waged primarily on American soil!

To see that "control" matters more to the Rockefeller Brothers

than does human life, one need only to compare our foreign policies toward Canada and the Soviet Union. Canada, our friendly neighbor who in no way threatens our lives, is guilty of wanting to be independent of Rockefeller control—an unpardonable sin in the eyes of the Rockefeller Brothers—so the Rockefellers have declared economic and political war on Canada with explanations such as that given earlier this month in an interview by the United States Ambassador to Canada. He said, quote:

"Canada can't simply unilaterally cut back on its relations with the United States and expect there won't be a reaction from us . "

So now Canada has on its hands the hot issue of the Air Traffic Controllers' dispute.

If the Canadian government would investigate the real reason why the Premier of Quebec, Mr. Bourassa, pushed through the Quebec Legislature his extreme bill No. 22 about 19 months ago making the French language the official working language within the Quebec Province, the investigators may well find that the bottom line in this bilingual issue is to restore Rockefeller control over all Canadian affairs by engineering their own John Turner, former Finance Minister of Canada, into the office of Premiership.

By contrast, the Soviet Union does now pose a grave threat to millions of American lives; but the Rockefeller Brothers still think they do control their Soviet allies so they keep right on aiding Russia financially, technically, and militarily. For just one recent extremely serious example of how Russia is thus being equipped by the Rockefeller Brothers to be our mass executioner, I refer you to the lead article in the June 7, 1976 issue of the Daily News Digest, Box 27496, Phoenix, Arizona 85061. This article, suppressed by the Rockefeller major media in the United States, details the way in which an 8 to 10-year jump in Soviet missile technology has been handed to them on a platter within the past year with disastrous implications for us!

But developments like these are simply climaxing a process that has been going on out of public eye for a very long time. For example, when I was in private law practice in Washington during the 50's, I once had a case involving an oceanographic physicist who was being railroaded out of his naval job by some Admirals on the false ground that he had associated with Communists in 1933 while working his way through college. The truth behind these charges turned out to be that the Admirals simply wanted to get rid of him because they wanted to spend their appropriations on ships of all kinds, while my client was pressing hard for high priority to be given also to research on obtaining hydrogen energy from the seas—a field in which the Soviet Union was 15 years ahead of us.

Because of legal work I had done in connection with the Federal Prison System, it happened that I knew Senator William Langer, who was chairman of the powerful Senate Judiciary Committee. I told him about the predicament of my client, the Navy physicist; whereupon he suggested that I send my client to see Secretary of State John Foster Dulles. He said it was really Dulles, not President Eisenhower, who was running the government; and that if I wanted to get my client reinstated in his Navy job, Dulles was the man to see. I said "Okay"; and Senator Langer got an appointment for my client to see Dulles. Neither my client nor I was prepared for what happened next.

John Foster Dulles was the former head of the Rockefeller Foundation, but I had yet to learn the true significance of that, nor did I know at that time that President Eisenhower was merely a figurehead—just one more in a succession of Rockefeller puppet presidents!

Eisenhower's nomination in 1952 had been engineered by Winthrop Aldrich, the uncle of Nelson Rockefeller and his brothers, by handing out literally baskets of cash to Republican Convention delegates at his suite in the Blackstone Hotel; nor for that matter, did I at that time have the slightest inkling about what the Rockefeller Brothers were really up to.

Senator Langer advised me not to accompany my client to his appointment with Dulles, explaining that for some reason Dulles was very wary of any lawyer-client presence in private conversations. So off my client went to see Dulles, alone. A short while later he reappeared at my office white as a sheet, looking as if he had seen a ghost. When I asked him what had happened, he said he had gone and told his story to the Secretary of State Dulles, whereupon Dulles answered, and I quote:

"Since they say you have associated with Communists, whether true or not, why don't you go to Russia. They need people like you. "

My client could hardly believe his ears. Here was our own Secretary of State, proclaimed by the media to be staunchly anti-Soviet, anti-Communist, telling my client to go to a Communist country and help them! He recovered from his shock to hear the following advice from Dulles, and I quote:

"Go to the Soviet Embassy on 16th Street here in Washington and they will receive you."

My client thanked him for his time, and left to report to me immediately. I was appalled, too, by what had transpired with Dulles. After some further discussion, my client said he would have to talk things over with his wife and would be back in touch.

Two days later he decided to visit the Soviet Embassy, and sure enough they had been expecting him. They told him he would be well taken care of in the Soviet Union. He would be given an automobile, a fine apartment, and other special privileges, and would be flown to Moscow with his wife and small children in first-class accommodations. My client told me it was an offer he could hardly afford to refuse since he was now cut off from money and jobs here in the United States by the big lie about his having consorted with Communists in his college days. And so two weeks after his astonishing private talk with Secretary of State John Foster Dulles, he and his family flew off to the Soviet Union, where he is now doing research on hydrogen energy in the oceanographic laboratories of the Soviet government.

It's no wonder that our present Secretary of State, Henry Kissinger, who is the John Foster Dulles of today, privately says that America's time is past and the future belongs to the Soviets. Like his predecessors and his masters the Rockefeller Brothers, Kissinger is doing everything in his power to make this bleak forecast come true.

The story of ever-expanding joint Rockefeller-Soviet domination of nation after nation, is a story of

DESTRUCTION—destruction of economies, destruction of political institutions, destruction of freedom and individual choice, and

in every case destruction of human life—all done in secrecy so that you won't know about it.

Right now the Rockefellers and their Soviet partners are in the process of destroying southern Africa, just as they have destroyed other parts of Africa in order to obtain control over it and its immense richness in natural resources. According to the Rockefeller-CIA timetable I first revealed in February 1974, the Union of South Africa now has less than a year to go before it is utterly destroyed.

Africa's troubles really began when John D. Rockefeller III took a two-month trip there in 1948 as a Trustee of the Rockefeller Foundation, ostensibly out of concern over the health and welfare of the natives but actually to survey the commercial and industrial potentialities, just as he had once done in Japan years before. When he came back from Africa he was so excited over the vast natural resources there that he could hardly keep himself on the subject of his professed interest, the natives, in an interview with the New York Times; and within a few years a crescendo of Black upheaval, death, and destruction began in Africa that still has not ended. This has been brought about by the combined efforts of the Rockefeller-controlled foundations, the International Labor Organization of the AFL-CIO, the CIA, and the Soviet KGB working together abroad.

It is a fact of life that the Blacks in Africa are not yet capable of carrying on business, commerce, and industry all by themselves and they know it, as I know from my own personal experience of five years in Africa. So although the basic industries are always nationalized by the new Black governments as they take over as a face-saving gesture, they then have to turn right around and give the management contracts to the white Corporate Socialists, who thereby earn income in the form of fees larger than if they owned the assets outright themselves. On top of that, double sets of books are then kept by the Corporate Socialist managers so as to pay low taxes and royalties while actually exploiting cheap local labor to produce huge amounts of low-cost raw materials for use by Rockefeller multinational corporations in the industrialized countries.

The whole thing is immensely profitable to the Corporate Socialists, and that is why destructive revolutions and massacres are stirred up in order to bring about this kind of arrangement. This is what Rockefeller agent Henry Kissinger is actually working for in southern Africa today, handing out millions of American tax dollars to revolutionary Blacks while he publicly expresses pious satisfaction over the progress being made there toward "majority rule." In the same vein, Joseph Stalin used to say that everything in the Soviet Union belonged to the people; but then he would add, quote: "We are only managing it for you."

The Trustees of the "Carnegie Endowment for International Peace" were right about one thing they decided in 1908 and 1909: War does completely transform the life of a nation.

Close your eyes and try for a moment to see beautiful quiet villages nestled on the sides of hills and mountains, with the smell of cedars in the air, and snowcaps on the mountain tops most of the year. Visualize gentle, kind, happy working-people, prosperous and contented in their peaceful country—people with a song in their hearts and love for their neighbors, people who pray each according to his own faith, people who are tolerant, who practice the golden rule and who say, "To each his own"; a country with a strong banking, business, and industrial base, a country uninterested in conflict and intrigue with little more

than a militia as its military establishment.

Would I be speaking of Switzerland? No, I would be describing Lebanon, the Switzerland of the Middle East, the Lebanon that I knew and loved, and the Lebanon that has now been destroyed in a nightmare of senseless terror, destruction, and mayhem. What has happened would never have happened spontaneously, the people simply are not like that; but little Lebanon just by being there, has been caught up in a bigger picture—the deliberate triggering of general war in the Middle East which is to culminate in NUCLEAR WAR ONE in the United States! Just as Jamaica is now being destabilized by the CIA causing death, destruction, and a state of emergency, the agony of Lebanon has been brought about deliberately by the Rockefeller-controlled CIA under direction of the CIA station in Athens, Greece, using agents infiltrated into Lebanon from Libya, which is totally controlled by the CIA.

Nearly one out of every 100 persons in Lebanon has now died in the violence there, and no one in that country now remains untouched by the horrible tragedy there. Yet as terrible as they are, the death throes of Lebanon are intended by the Rockefeller Brothers to be nothing more than the match that ignites the forest fire of NUCLEAR WAR ONE. Lebanon is only a convenience for them; it is YOU and I who are the ultimate targets.

If the crescendo of war that has been planned by the Rockefeller-Soviet conspiracy is allowed to run its course, the final phase will be the nuclear destruction of the southern half of the United States in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. As I first revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last month, a supersecret "Nuclear Safe Zone" has been set up by secret agreement between the four Rockefeller Brothers and their Soviet allies consisting of a swath across the northern United States and southern Canada between the 40th and 50th parallels of latitude. All of the states to the south of this zone, plus Alaska and Hawaii, have been condemned by the Rockefeller Brothers to have the ultimate in human destruction rain down on their heads—THERMONUCLEAR WAR!

To the Rockefeller Brothers there is such a thing as excess population and excess people whose unwanted numbers make it difficult to maintain the rigid control over people that they desire; so the war they have planned for America will, to them, amount to nothing more than a very fast, efficient form of population control, which all four of them—John, Nelson, David, and Laurance—publicly promote in every possible way.

The industrial heartland and much of the bread basket of America are to be preserved within the Nuclear Safe Zone because these will be needed after the war both to keep supporting the Soviet Union, an artificial state which cannot support itself, and as the base for reorganized industry in the planned "NEW STATES OF AMERICA" under complete totalitarian Corporate Socialism. These resources they want to protect; it is only excess human lives that they mainly want to get rid of in order to strengthen their control over those who are left.

In this nuclear attack, according to Intelligence sources, the Soviet Union now has the option of using what are called "clean" hydrogen warheads. Most hydrogen bombs are triggered by atomic bombs, and this atom bomb trigger is where most of the radioactive fallout comes from. But the Soviets, with huge amounts of aid, have now perfected the technology to set up a hydrogen warhead in another way; and by setting off such a warhead above a city, instead of right on the ground, it is possible to destroy all life in the attack zone and yet produce very little radioactive fallout to drift downward. Such warfare

can therefore be used to cut the population of the United States in half yet leave the vast natural resources of America largely intact, ready for further exploitation.

The lives of many of those living in the southern half of the United States are scheduled to be sacrificed on the altar of Rockefeller control if these hideous, inhuman plans are allowed to be carried out. Tens of millions of our lives are considered by them to be expendable. There are no Civil Defense preparations for us like those in the Soviet Union; but where our Rulers own lives are concerned, that is another matter. A network of 96 underground cities known as the Federal Relocation Arc has been built to house thousands of key federal officials when war arrives, keeping them safe and comfortable, immune to the nuclear holocaust taking place all around them.

And as I revealed last month, the four Rockefeller Brothers and their intimate client followers have quietly prepared their own hideaways inside the Nuclear Safe Zone in order to ride out the coming war unharmed. The middle of the Nuclear Safe Zone is the 45th parallel, and almost at that exact latitude the Rockefeller Brothers have their fortified hideaways all ready on Mount Desert Island and Bartlett Island off the coast of Maine. What the Rockefeller Brothers do not realize is that they have already been marked for a selective double cross by their Soviet allies in the coming NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The Rockefeller Brothers have an instinct for conspiracy and especially for the double-cross; but they are not the only ones who can play the game and, according to Intelligence sources, the arrangements that have been made for their double cross involve a kind of poetic justice, gruesome though it is.

There exists today a large and growing black market in plutonium, which is the raw material for atomic bombs as well as for the incredibly dangerous next generation of nuclear power plants now on the drawing boards. The Rockefeller Brothers themselves, convinced that a plutonium energy economy is the wave of the future, are the leaders in this growing plutonium black market, just as they are in the rest of the nuclear field. It is therefore ironic that they themselves are now in a position to be destroyed by means of plutonium. At least one powerful atomic bomb, made with plutonium, now has been planted at the small cove known as Seal Harbor, Maine, strategically located to blast the summer homes of both Nelson and David Rockefeller which are located on opposite sides of Seal Harbor. I have not been informed as yet of any similar arrangements at David's new fortifications on nearby Bartlett Island, but time may change that because the Soviets intend to leave nothing to chance in their double cross of the Rockefeller Brothers.

For example, the Brothers may think they can escape anyway by fleeing to their remote mountain-top fortress in Venezuela, which is accessible only by air. Rockefeller private aircraft are kept on 24-hour call for just such an escape; but there, too, they are in for a surprise. It so happens that the Marxist Prime Minister of neighboring Guyana, Forbes Burnham, who was put into power a decade ago by David Rockefeller's CIA, is already double-crossing David.

The gold produced by Guyana, which is what attracted David's interest in the first place, is for the most part being stashed away in caves, unreported to David. For once the Rockefellers are on the receiving end of a swindle through double-bookkeeping process, and the nuclear missiles which ring the huge Temehri Airfield in Guyana now include one target not planned by the Rockefeller Brothers. Not only are they targeted on the Panama

Canal, which is our new Pearl Harbor, and not only are they aimed at cities in the southern half of the United States in readiness for the planned war to come, but the Venezuelan retreat of the Rockefellers is also targeted.

The Soviets, who have yet to live up to any agreement they have ever made, intend to break free of the Rockefeller grip on them when the time is ripe. After eliminating the Rockefeller Brothers from the scene, the Soviets expect to step into full control themselves using the Corporate Socialist managers, who now work with the Rockefellers, to do their own bidding—just as they found managers in Eastern Europe to do their bidding after it was conquered.

This, my friend, is where the Rockefeller conspiracy to destroy economies, societies, and human lives is leading—to the destruction of the Rockefeller Brothers themselves and the destruction of our nation and our way of life in the process—that is, my friend, if we sit idly by and allow it to happen.

Listen again to the things I urged you to do at the end of monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last month. It is essential that as many Americans as possible be informed of the disaster now threatening us and get behind the drive to stop it; but it will take the actions of individuals like you, acting on your own initiative, to make it happen.

Our situation today is once again expressed by the words of Thomas Paine who in December 1776 wrote in the crisis:

"These are the times that try men's souls. The summer soldier and the sunshine patriot will, in this crisis, shrink from the service of his country; but he that stands it NOW, deserves the love and thanks of man and woman. Tyranny, like hell, is not easily conquered; yet we have this consolation with us, that the harder the conflict, the more glorious the triumph..."

Until next month, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #14

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is July 19, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14.

What I am forced to tell you about today is grave and urgent beyond description. I believe you have a right and a need to know about it, and yet I already know that in all likelihood you will not believe me when I tell you because it is something no one wants to believe. I've wrestled with this thing wondering how best to tell you what you must be told, but all I can say is that it is absolutely true beyond any shadow of a doubt. I stake my entire life and my reputation on this fact. If there were any doubt at all about what I am about to reveal, I would not reveal it.

At this very moment the United States of America is teetering on the precipice of a devastating nuclear surprise attack the likes of which the world has never seen. If the detailed plans for war that I have already told you about are carried out as discussed especially in my monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 6, 12, and

13, this attack might not come for as much as another year or even more; but that is a very big IF because the capability for this attack is now in place, and it includes provisions for a Soviet double-cross of their allies—the four Rockefeller Brothers, who now rule America behind the scenes.

Today I want to alert you to the terrible threat we face by means of these topics:

Topic #1—THE SOVIET MISSILE CRISIS OF 1976

Topic #2—HITLER'S PATTERN FOR AMERICA'S BICENTENNIAL ERA

Topic #3—THE PLANS FOR AMERICA'S FUTURE UNDER OCCUPATION AND DICTATORSHIP

Topic #1—It was a sleepy Sunday morning in Hawaii nearly 35 years ago when WORLD WAR II came to America. Much of the Pacific fleet of the United States Navy was peacefully at anchor suspecting nothing, while President Franklin D. Roosevelt and his closest advisors far away in Washington, D.C. waited anxiously for the attack to occur as planned. At 7:55 A.M. on that peaceful Sunday morning, December 7, 1941, more than 100 Japanese aircraft suddenly appeared in the skies over the Island of Oahu, Hawaii. All attempts to warn the Navy of the impending attack had been thwarted or delayed, and the bottled up American fleet was torn to shreds as a result of the complete surprise that resulted. F.D.R. and his closest advisors had made sure that no aircraft carriers were caught in the raid because these would be indispensable in the retaliation to come against Japan. Instead, the sacrifice was limited to battleships, destroyers, cruisers, and several thousand American Servicemen's lives.

Soon the news of the crushing disaster that had befallen the United States Navy flashed across a stunned and unbelieving America, and the words "Pearl Harbor" from that day have been a synonym for surprise attack of the most catastrophic variety. It should also bring to mind high treason and intrigue, because while most Americans were trying to recover from the shock and horror of the Pearl Harbor attack, F.D.R. and his Rockefeller bosses were congratulating themselves on the success of the operation. The United States would now be drawn into the war against Hitler, enabling a Rockefeller take-over of the formerly British oil concessions in Saudi Arabia; yet President Roosevelt would be making good on his campaign promises not to send American boys away to die in a foreign war. Instead, he had arranged to get us into war by allowing several thousand American boys to die in a rigged attack on American territory—Pearl Harbor! His renowned "Day of Infamy" speech then galvanized the nation overnight into a fighting mood. The obstacle of American isolationist sentiment had been flattened, and the United States was AT WAR.

Today we are once again at the mercy of an imminent Pearl Harbor-type attack. As before, we are being given no warning whatever that this is the case aside from the general level of tensions here and abroad. But this time it has been planned to be far worse because this time the plan is not for America to win the war but to lose it.

Two months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 I first revealed the existence of the supersecret "Nuclear Safe Zone"—a swath across roughly the upper half of the continental United States between the latitudes of 40 and 50 degrees north. According to secret agreements between the Rockefeller Brothers and their Soviet allies, this Zone is supposed to be spared from the

all-out thermonuclear war that is planned to engulf the southern half of the United States in NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

This arrangement has three (3) purposes:

First, as I revealed two months ago, it provides a zone within which the Rockefeller Brothers and their closest collaborators expect to ride out the coming NUCLEAR WAR ONE in safety and comfort ;

Second, much of the industrial base and agricultural breadbasket of America will be preserved for exploitation after the war.

A third factor, which I did not mention before, has to do with the high altitude jet stream which goes clear around the earth. Should the Soviets find it necessary to back up their so-called "clean bombs", which I revealed last month, with the older dirty bombs, they don't want radioactive fallout from America to drift around the earth and land on the Soviet Union. More than 95% of the Soviet Union lies north of the 40th parallel of latitude; so by agreeing with the Rockefeller Brothers to strike America only below that latitude except for a small strike against Alaska, the Soviets have avoided the danger of having much radioactive dust from America circle the globe to land on their own country. But the Soviets are very eager to break free of the Rockefeller control under which they have functioned for so long, and they are preparing a double-cross.

As I reported last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13, the Safe Zone agreement has been violated by the placement of an atomic bomb at Seal Harbor, Maine, to blast the summer homes of Nelson and David Rockefeller off the map. But that, I am sorry to report, is only the beginning of the "Pearl Harbor" the Soviets have prepared for us. The Soviet double-cross of the Rockefeller Brothers is to be thorough and complete, and it will include several more violations of the Nuclear Safe Zone—an acceptable price in Soviet eyes for breaking free of the Rockefellers and into the position of absolute world supremacy themselves.

While the United States has focused its missile development on long-range intercontinental ballistic missiles, the Soviet Union has never forgotten the potentialities of shorter range missiles, which are easier to design and build. That's what the Cuban Missile Crisis of October 1962 was all about. The Soviets, not wishing to depend on their long-range missiles, had installed much shorter-range missiles in Cuba able to reach many American cities from the vulnerable south; and when President John F. Kennedy spoiled the Rockefeller-Soviet plans by forcing Nikita Khrushchev to remove them, they did not abandon this idea. Instead, J.F.K. was removed from the scene himself; and his replacement, Rockefeller puppet President Lyndon B. Johnson, handed the Soviets a new site for the implacement of medium-range missiles to threaten the United States from the south. This was done by turning over the huge United States-built MacKenzie Airfield to the newly independent Marxist republic of Guyana. The Americans pulled out, MacKenzie Airfield was re-named the Temehri Airfield, and this new air base, the largest in Central and South America, was then fortified by ringing it with nuclear missiles aimed at the Panama Canal and cities in the southern half of the United States. And as 1 have been reporting for over two years—without any Government investigation of my charges whatsoever—the missiles in Guyana are at operational readiness today, threatening the United States and the Panama Canal.

But that's not all, my friends. Five years ago, in 1971,

there was another Soviet missile crisis, this time involving both Canada and the United States; and I am here revealing it for the very first time. The Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971 began with an accidental discovery by some divers off Vancouver Island, Canada. A Vancouver fishing trawler had sunk in the area and divers were sent down to locate it. While they were looking, they came across something unbelievable—a missile anchored to the bottom. It was attached by heavy chains to four concrete blocks, each estimated to weigh five tons. The blocks in turn were anchored to the bottom by extra heavy anchors of Soviet design. The divers reported their unexpected find immediately, and the North American Air Defense Command (NORAD) went into action. The Canadian ship H.C.M.S. Resogoushe plus two mine-layers and a torpedo boat were dispatched and immediately covered the area.

By coincidence, this chance discovery occurred just as the Soviet Navy was launching its own operation to recover that very missile. Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko had just arrived to visit Vancouver for a hush-hush Foreign Ministers Conference ostensibly. Strangely, he arrived aboard the Soviet ship SUROV, a heavy cruiser of the Cresta class. But Gromyko explained that away by saying that he had just been inspecting the Soviet fleet which was on maneuvers—but that was just a cover story.

A Soviet oceanographic research ship doing underwater experiments on guided missiles near Sakhalin had reached the conclusion that six guided missiles, which had been placed strategically on the seabed around the North American continent years before would now have to be recovered and removed at once. These had been planted on the orders of Khrushchev after his defeat by President Kennedy in the Cuban Missile Crisis, and for years they had been lurking undetected. But now they would have to be removed because the Soviet experiments at Sakhalin had revealed that the metals used in the missiles were proving unstable and had started disintegrating rapidly in the salt water. The situation was very serious, not only because the missiles were no longer dependable as weapons but also because corrosion of the warheads could have led to leakage of radioactive materials or even under certain conditions, uncontrolled explosions. This was the real reason for Gromyko's strange visit to Vancouver aboard the heavy cruiser SUROV in 1971 .

The Soviet Navy in reality was invading the territorial waters of Canada to recover a malfunctioning weapon, the Underwater Missile; but due to the accidental discovery of the missile by the Canadian divers, Gromyko's mission was foiled. He stayed there for three days aboard the ship and then was aghast to see the Soviet missile go past him on a barge on the way to dockside. Gromyko immediately canceled his appearance in Vancouver and sailed for home without delay. The missile itself was rushed by special airplane immediately to a secret location in the United States for study and analysis.

The Vancouver discovery also triggered an intensive search of all the American and Canadian coasts by specially equipped surface and underwater vessels. This search turned up three more such missiles—one off the coast of California and Oregon; another just south of San Rosario, Baja, California; and the third one off the coast of Maine just east of a rocky island there. Two additional underwater missiles were known to exist as well. One was believed to be somewhere in the arc from Cuba to Pensacola, Florida; the other was thought to be in the Caribbean Islands aimed at the Panama Canal. These last two were never found by the United States Navy, but the pattern of activity of the Soviet Navy indicated that they were successfully recovered

by the Soviets. The Soviets had been poised to mount a recovery operation for all six missiles, but were prevented from making any such attempt because of the intensive United States Navy search.

Each of the four missiles which were recovered by the joint Canadian-American effort was examined and its targets determined. It turned out that each missile was fitted with multiple warheads. The one discovered by the divers off Vancouver had six targets—the Royal Canadian Naval Base on Vancouver Island, the Port of Vancouver, the Port of Seattle, and three Boeing aircraft plants in Seattle, Everett, and Blaine. The missile found off the coast of Oregon and California had its multiple warheads targeted on five centers in the San Francisco Bay area. The San Rosario missile was targeted on the United States Naval Base at San Diego and on the City of Los Angeles. As for the missile found in the waters off the coast of Maine, its targets were Boston, the Submarine Base in Connecticut, the Brooklyn Navy Yard, and the New York Harbor. The missile which was apparently retrieved by the Soviets in the Cuba-Pensacola area was assumed to have been aimed at strategic coastal targets in the Southeast.

And so ended the Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971. In some respects it was even more dangerous than the Cuban Missile Crisis nine years earlier because the underwater missiles off our shores were already operational, whereas those in Cuba were stopped just short of operational status. But you've never heard a word about the Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971. This is because that would not have squared well with our official policy of so-called detente with the Soviet Union. The Rockefeller agents in our government knew all about the missiles, and had a ticklish job keeping the lid on after the accidental discovery by the Vancouver divers brought NORAD and the United States Navy into the picture.

All's well that ends well, or so it seems; but this just wasn't the end of the Soviet Missile Crisis. On February 11, 1971, the same year in which the Soviet Missile Crisis occurred, 63 nations signed a treaty prohibiting installation of nuclear weapons on the seabed beyond any nation's 12-mile Coastal Zone. On top of that, the United States over the past dozen years has laid down a grid of electronic sensing wires and cables on the ocean floor all along both our Pacific and Atlantic coasts making the seabed look like a giant spider web. These detection nets called "Sosus" for the Atlantic and "Caesar" for the Pacific are tied into computers which enable any submarine passing over them, American or foreign, to be detected, located, and even identified in a very short time. So, what could happen?

My friends, the Maginot line did not protect the French from invasion in World War II—the Germans went right over it. In the same way, the Rockefeller Brothers have enabled the Soviets to go over our underwater detection nets as if they did not exist! When President Richard M. Nixon arrived in Moscow on May 22, 1972 for summer talks with the Kremlin, he had more to discuss than the highly publicized SALT talks. A key agreement arrived at then established joint oceanographic projects with the Soviets, and since that time Soviet oceanographic vessels have been in and out of our territorial waters continuously! For approximately two years these vessels operate in a totally innocent-appearing fashion while actually gathering information on optimum placement sites for a new fleet of underwater missiles along our shores. By the time the joint Army-Navy teams monitoring the underwater nets had become accustomed to the Soviet oceanographic ships as a routine non-threatening presence in our waters, the Soviets were ready to act. Under cover of oceanographic operations, the

Soviets began planting underwater missiles along our shores once again, plus several strategically located atomic bombs. And as if they needed it, the Soviets have also slipped in through a loophole in the 1971 treaty, which superficially seems to ban such weaponry in our coastal waters. Most if not all of these weapons have been planted inside our 12-mile territorial limit, whereas the treaty only forbids such things beyond that limit.

This is a chilling echo of President Franklin D. Roosevelt's promises to avoid a foreign war before World War II, only to help rig an attack on our own territory. But the Soviets, having been given the oceanographic cover they needed in order to get the bombs and missiles into our coastal waters, have already double-crossed their Rockefeller allies. Not only have the Rockefeller Brothers themselves been marked for destruction, as signaled by the bomb at Seal Harbor, Maine, but their precious Nuclear Safe Zone has already been breached by the Soviets in at least three other places where missiles have been placed contrary to their agreement with the Rockefellers. The Soviets, like the Rockefeller Brothers themselves, are now going "for broke"—they are trying to arrange in every way they can to break the back of any conceivable retaliational resistance by the United States in the coming war. It is still in the Soviet interest to minimize warfare within the Nuclear Safe Zone, but specific targets will be attacked within this Zone whenever the Soviets consider it necessary to achieve their goal of total victory and total world domination over the United States.

I can now reveal that the coastal waters of the United States—including Alaska, Hawaii, and the Panama Canal Zone—now contain at least ten (10) multiple warhead, short-range, underwater-launch missiles of a new advanced design. In addition, at least four (4) atomic bombs have been strategically placed in harbor areas. Here is the situation as it now stands according to my own latest Intelligence sources:

First, the four bombs. One is the bomb I was able to reveal last month which is placed at Seal Harbor, Maine, to destroy the summer homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller. The second is planted in the Potomac River near the United States Naval Ordnance Station at Indian Head, Maryland. The third is in the Mississippi River upstream from New Orleans in the vicinity of Bonnet Carre Spillway and Floodway. And the fourth atomic bomb has been planted in the Port of Valdez, Alaska, which is the southern terminus of the Trans-Alaska Oil Pipeline. By rendering the port of Valdez useless, of course, the Pipeline will be put out of action, since oil tankers are supposed to carry the oil from the Pipeline delivery point at Valdez to destinations in the lower United States .

As for the short-range multiple warhead Soviet missiles which once again infest our coastal waters, three violate the Nuclear Safe Zone. One is in Boston Harbor; the second is in Long Island Sound about midway between New York City and the Submarine Base at New London, Connecticut; and the third is in the Seattle-Vancouver area situated between Victoria, British Columbia, on the north and the Port Angeles or Sequim, Washington, area on the south.

Outside the Nuclear Safe Zone, missile No. 4 is in Chesapeake Bay east of Washington, D.C. No. 5 is located just off shore from Pensacola, Florida. A 6th missile has been planted in Galveston Bay, Texas. A 7th lies just off shore of San Diego, California; while missile No. 8 is deep inside San Pablo Bay near San Francisco. The 9th missile is located in the Atlantic Ocean near the north entrance to the Panama Canal. And finally, missile No.

10 with tragic irony is poised in the Pacific Ocean near the entrance to Pearl Harbor, Hawaii. The exact location of the Pearl Harbor missile is: Longitude 157 degrees, 58 minutes, 58 seconds; latitude 21 degrees, 18 minutes, 28 seconds. All the Navy needs to do is to look and do it now before the Soviets have time to sneak in and move it, and they'll find this missile.

I respectfully urge—no, I demand—that the Joint Chiefs of Staff immediately take such actions as are required to remove the deadly missiles which now menace the United States and Vancouver, Canada from our own territorial waters. The things I have just revealed are true, my friends, and I urge you to add your challenge to mine. I stand ready to cooperate fully with the Joint Chiefs of Staff in the new larger Soviet missile crisis we are now in.

Will the Joint Chiefs act? If they do not do so and soon, then they themselves will have violated their oath to protect and safeguard our Constitution, our Nation, our lives, and the lives of generations to come.

Topic #2—I comment often about the covert alliance that exists between the Corporate Socialists headed by the four Rockefeller Brothers in America, and the Communist bosses of the Soviet Union. It is essential that this relationship be understood even though the day is fast approaching when the Soviets plan to end it by means of a double-cross. But it is also important to grasp the fact that the Rockefellers are not themselves Communists. To them, Communism is just a very convenient and powerful tool, a stepping stone to power. They don't themselves subscribe to any rigid ideology, Communist or otherwise. Their only real doctrine is that of domination and control along with destruction of everything and anyone they cannot control. In this they bear a striking resemblance to just one man, Adolf Hitler.

What we have today is a blend of emerging fascism, which is a combination of State Control with Monopolistic Capitalism and Socialism of the Marxist variety all wrapped up in American packaging and sold to us by means of Rockefeller public relations propaganda. Our would-be Dictators realize full well that if they were to dress up in combat fatigues, get up on a high balcony and rant and rave about the need for the state to control our lives totally, we would all recognize them right away for what they are—and their schemes would fail. Instead, they wear nice business suits, use cleverly worded phrases that seem to say exactly what we want to hear, and make sure that they smile a great deal. And instead of swaying great crowds in a public square from a high balcony, they can now cajole and mislead whole nations from the matchless high balcony of television.

In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 1, June 1975, I mentioned the role played by the Rockefeller empire in providing the support Adolf Hitler needed in order to rise to power in Germany. They supported him, watched him, and learned from him. In the late 1920's the Rockefellers had succeeded in wrestling control of the German dye and drug cartel, I. G. Farben Industry, AG, away from the British. This, plus an ongoing rivalry between Britain and the Rockefellers over oil, led the British to institute boycott tactics preventing the Rockefeller Standard Oil interests from exploiting the vast Saudi Arabian oil concessions which the Rockefellers had pried loose from the British during World War I. The Rockefeller solution: Confront Britain with a threat great enough to break Britain's Saudi Arabian oil boycott.

When 22-year-old Nelson Rockefeller returned from his around-the-world honeymoon trip in 1930, he convinced his father,

John D. Rockefeller, Jr., that the solution to their problems lay in one Adolf Hitler. Not many Germans really took Hitler seriously in 1930, but the Rockefellers did. Having observed Hitler at close range, they were convinced that Hitler could serve the Rockefeller purpose well. Hitler was obviously bent on conquest and war; so providing the support he needed to achieve power would produce a very real menace to Britain in due course—just the right medicine to cure Britain of her Saudi Arabian boycott against the Rockefeller oil interests.

Hitler was especially attractive for Rockefeller purposes for one additional reason beyond his sheer aggressiveness. His earlier failure and imprisonment had taught Hitler a very important lesson which the Rockefellers themselves had also learned decades before; namely, that successful revolutions are best carried out with, and not against, the full power of a nation's government. In other words, Hitler had concluded that the best way to achieve his goals would be to first acquire control of the government through means which were legal, at least in appearance, and then to carry out the revolutionary changes he desired. Therefore, by supporting Hitler and watching to see how he went about the details of his take-over and revolution, the Rockefellers stood to learn valuable lessons for their own use later on. This was a very nice bonus for the Rockefellers, so support for Hitler through covert channels began immediately; and from 1930 onward, Hitler's star rose rapidly.

The same time, the Rockefellers had to make sure that they would be in a position to check Hitler's advance when he had served his purpose—which was to frighten the British government into surrendering control over Saudi Arabia. In other words, a balance of power had to be maintained so that Hitler would not get out of control. For this reason and as well as others, Rockefeller support for Hitler was counterbalanced by support also for the man who, as president, would have the job of getting America into the war to stop Hitler—Franklin Delano Roosevelt! FDR had staged a political comeback from his crippling attack of polio several years before, but it was about from 1930 onward that FDR's political star rose rapidly on the national scene paralleling the rise of Hitler in Germany. Throughout their period on the world stage, the careers of Hitler and FDR paralleled one another. Both came to power early in 1933, and both proposed sweeping changes in rapid fashion that differed widely from their campaign pledges. Both exercised unprecedented power during their terms in office, and both died in April 1945 less than three weeks apart as the war in Europe was ending.

The dual role of the Rockefellers throughout can be illustrated, for example, by the actions of Nelson Rockefeller. In 1935 he became a Director of the Creole Petroleum Company in Venezuela, a subsidiary of Rockefeller-owned Standard Oil of New Jersey. Creole was the principal avenue through which the Nazi war machine was provided with the essential fuel without which war could not have been waged; and for seven years, 1937 through 1943, Creole Petroleum shipped 90% of its Venezuelan oil production to Germany in Nazi tankers, only a token 10% going to the United States. In this way the Rockefeller

empire—increasingly dominated by Nelson, David, Laurance, and John D. Ill—provided Hitler with over 65-million barrels of oil each year from the Venezuelan oil fields alone well into the World War II.

In 1940, Nelson resigned his directorship of Creole Petroleum to become Coordinator of InterAmerican affairs by appointment of Rockefeller puppet president FDR. As Coordinator, Nelson was supposedly feverishly at work to combat the Nazi menace in this

hemisphere, the very menace that was being sustained by oil provided by his Creole Petroleum Company! Through Hitler, the Rockefellers did at last bring Great Britain to her knees, and a great deal was learned from the plan Hitler followed that is being followed again today by the four Rockefeller Brothers.

Hitler had two very important rules for exercising power. One was to use the masses by means of effective propaganda, leading them to accept and do things which they normally would not. The other rule was to make sure that any lies were big lies, so big that no one could believe they were lies, coming from their leader.

Those same principles are being used today in updated and very smooth ways by the Rockefeller Brothers and their agents. Hitler's rise to power was made possible by an era of inflation, shortages, and then depression. The same conditions are being brought about deliberately here in America in order to help achieve the same end result—revolution and dictatorship!

While Hitler was in prison, he began writing "Mein Kampf", which means "my struggle." In it and in his speeches, Hitler made it clear what he would do if he ever acquired the power to do it. In a similar vein, we can read "The American Rich" published in 1930 by Rockefeller advisor Hoffman Nickerson; "The New Federalism" by Nelson Rockefeller; "The Emerging Constitution" published in 1974 by Rexford Tugwell quietly revealing a dictatorial new Constitution, which was written to match a secret outline provided by Nelson Rockefeller himself; or the Bicentennial Declaration advertisements published nation-wide in 1975 by John D. Rockefeller Ill's National Committee for the Bicentennial Era. The last item could have been titled: A Bicentennial Manifesto, since a manifesto is nothing more than a public declaration of intentions, motives, or views; but everyone now knows that the Communist Manifesto of a century ago was no joke, so that word was avoided.

But keep in mind what Hitler said in January 1941, quote:

"It is nonsense for the rest of the world to pretend today that I did not reveal this program until 1933, or 1935, or 1937. Instead of listening to foolish chatter, these gentlemen would have been wiser to read what I have written and re-written thousands of times. No human being has declared or recorded what he wanted more often than I."

If the four Rockefeller Brothers are allowed to succeed in their diabolical plans, they, too, will be in a position to indict us in practically the same words.

Hitler directed much of his appeal to the new generation. Young people had grown up in an abnormal time, lacking normal roots and values, and who were therefore more vulnerable to being misled and used. Introduction of the 18-year old vote, regardless of its actual effect, was intended for a similar purpose here in America. Hitler pursued a 'policy of legality' strictly as a tactic in his campaign to take control of the German government. In every respect Hitler was challenging the authority of the State under the Weimar Constitution, yet he camouflaged this challenge by using fair-sounding words.

The same thing is happening once again here today. The words we hear in the presidential campaign—for example, such as: "A new world framework for peace", "governmental reorganization", "interdependence." But the meaning of these words involve World government, surrender of United States sovereignty, and

suspension or replacement of the United States CONSTITUTION! "But why", you may ask, "do they bother to leave any clues at all like this if they're trying to be devious? Why don't they just lie outright?" The answer is simply that it is harder to lie convincingly than to tell the truth; and if one starts telling actual lies, it becomes harder and harder over a period of time to keep track of what has been said before, and eventually one makes mistakes which can be detected. So instead they tell a little bit of truth but always in such a way that you won't understand it unless you are very alert.

Hitler realized that his 'policy of legality' could only lead to success in one way; that was to gain access to the position of Chancellor and use the emergency powers of the president under the Weimar Constitution. This was true because try as he might, Hitler was never able to achieve majority popular support for himself or his Nazi Party. And today, our would-be Dictator, Nelson Rockefeller, who has also been frustrated in his attempts to gain majority popular support nationally, is also trying to position himself to seize control by means of emergency presidential powers. David Rockefeller's agent Jimmy Carter meanwhile, whose build-up has been used to impress Ford with Rockefeller power, also stands ready in case Nelson's illness should overcome him.

In 1936 Hitler said, quote:

"It is not enough to overthrow the old State, but that the new State must previously have been built up and be practically ready to one's hand. In 1933 it was no longer a question of overthrowing a state by an act of violence; meanwhile the new state had been built up, and all that there remained to do was to destroy the last remnants of the old state—and that took but a few hours."

So it is that the Rockefeller Brothers are rapidly getting the governmental machinery into place which is to go into full operation under their dictatorial new Constitution for the, quote: "NEW" STATES OF AMERICA."

Shortly before Hitler became Chancellor in 1933, he said to then Chancellor Bruning, quote: "Herr Chancellor, if the German nation once empowers the National Socialist movement to introduce a constitution other than that which we have today, then you cannot stop it." On September 12, 1975, Nelson Rockefeller displayed exactly the same thinking, during a news conference in Dallas, Texas, in response to criticisms leveled at him as our appointed Vice-President by a columnist; Rockefeller's answer was, quote: "Well, he's got one, so there's nothing he can do about it." On August 9, 1974, our last elected president, Richard Nixon, became the first in American history to resign, hounded out of office by means of the Watergate scandal.

Listen now to the following words taken from a conspirator's diary, and I quote:

"For him alone, winter seems to have arrived. He is being secretly undermined and is already completely isolated. He is anxiously looking for collaborators. Our mice are busily at work gnawing through the last supports of his position."

Those words could have been written about Watergate with complete accuracy, but they were not. They were written by Hitler's propaganda chief, Paul Joseph Goebbels, 12 days before Chancellor Bruning was forced to resign on May 30, 1932. Bruning was succeeded by an interim chancellor more to Hitler's liking, Franz

von Papen; and Hitler himself replaced von Papen on January 30, 1933, when Hitler was appointed Chancellor by aging President von Hindenburg under the provisions of the Weimar Constitution. It was this weakness in the Weimar Constitution—the fact that the Chancellor was appointed, not elected, that enabled Hitler to succeed in his plan to take control of Germany by 'legal' means despite his lack of majority popular support!

This lesson was not lost on Nelson Rockefeller, who introduced exactly the same weakness into the United States Constitution for his own benefit by means of the 25th Amendment! The 25th Amendment was proposed a scant three weeks after the assassination of President John F. Kennedy by Nelson Rockefeller's water boy, Birch Bayh, almost as if it had been ready and waiting!

Immediately after becoming Chancellor, Hitler forced new elections. His election campaign promised nothing at all, but instead simply ran down the failures of the past. Hitler said simply, "Give us four years." Meanwhile he assured his supporters that these would actually be the last elections to be expected for 10, perhaps even a hundred years.

Terrorism and lawlessness mushroomed during the campaign, culminating in the Reichstag fire just a few days before the elections. This pretext was used to suspend individual liberties as guaranteed by the Weimar Constitution, enabling the Nazis to take any actions they pleased against their political opponents. Following the election and the suppression of all effective opposition, Hitler forced the passage of the infamous enabling law, the foundation of Hitler's dictatorship. This gave the Chancellor the right to make laws without the cooperation of the Reichstag for a period of four years. Now, after it was too late, it became clear what Hitler had meant in his campaign theme, "Just give us four years."

Hitler's enabling law gave him the power to rule by fiat, which is the power of dictatorship. To enact a law as Dictator without the concurrence of the Reichstag, the Chancellor had only to write a law and publish it, and in exactly the same way the President of the United States can, and does, make law without any action by Congress in the form of "EXECUTIVE ORDERS." These 'laws' signed by the President himself, become law simply by being published in the "FEDERAL REGISTER."

Since March 1933, we have been technically in a continuous condition of 'National Emergency', and many governmental powers have been usurped by American presidents under this condition over the past 43 years. But every time a major new phase is entered, there is a fresh declaration of National Emergency.

In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 10 four months ago, I alerted you to the fact that plans are now progressing rapidly toward implementing Executive Order 11490 signed by President Nixon nearly seven years ago to provide in detail for a total government take-over of all activities in a 'declared Emergency'. And on June 11, 1976, just last month, President Ford signed a new Executive Order 11921 very quietly, which updates the older Executive Order and shifts the emphasis heavily in the direction of post-attack conditions as we near the outbreak of war! It places heavy emphasis on procedures relating to nuclear, biological, and chemical hazards of the sort introduced into our environment by the planned war. It provides for the establishment, not the preservation, of an economy for the nation. It provides for sweeping controls on that all important resource, WATER, which is to be controlled and allocated by the

federal government. This is the outcome of the little noticed "National Commission on Water Quality" which was started by Nelson Rockefeller at the same time as his better known "Commission on Critical Choices."

My friends, write to your Congressman and demand that he send you a copy of the FEDERAL REGISTER for June 15, 1976, and read for yourself the 44 pages of detailed provisions for the "National Emergency" which is planned for all of us. If possible, this will be brought into play in the wake of oil shortages and other disruptions generated in the wake of a Mid East war! But the thrust of Executive Order 11921 just signed by Ford has to do with the aftermath of nuclear attack.

The pattern, my friends, is unmistakable. After Hitler achieved power, he progressively consolidated it by eliminating opposition political parties, ending independent local government and replacing it with agents of his federal government, enforcing his will by means of a Secret Police and spies, disposing of troublesome elements by means of Concentration Camps, and using Germany as a springboard for war to conquer other nations as well.

If the Rockefeller Brothers succeed in their plans, the United States of America will soon witness a replay of Hitlerism, brought up to date and made more repressive and horrible than ever by those who used Hitler for their own purposes.

Topic #3—If NUCLEAR WAR ONE is permitted to take place as planned on American soil, perhaps you will survive it. Many will not, but some will; but if you do survive, what sort of future do you and your trusting children have to look forward to?

My friends, whether or not the Rockefellers are double-crossed by their Soviet allies, the aftermath of NUCLEAR WAR ONE promises to be slavery for you and all your loved ones. If the Rockefeller Brothers somehow find a way to prevent a double-cross by the Soviets, then the war will proceed as planned for the benefit of the Rockefellers. Half of America's population will be consumed in nuclear blasts a thousand times hotter than the ovens of Hitler. Those who are left will be given the task of rebuilding America along the patterns dictated by the Rockefeller Brothers—a once free people reduced to slave labor, shipped like cattle to one area to rebuild a bombed-out power dam, to another area to work in uranium mines, to still another area to work the agricultural lands owned by the huge agri-businesses owned by the Rockefellers and their collaborators.

If the Rockefellers are double-crossed, the death toll during the war itself may be even higher but the results afterward will be no different. Instead of living under a Rockefeller dictatorship, we will exist under Soviet occupation whose characteristics will be practically the same. And so, my friends, the choice between the Rockefeller Brothers and their Soviet allies is no choice at all.

If these things are allowed to come to pass and the final link in the chain reaction that is to begin with general war in the Middle East, then the life that will be left to us and our little ones will not be worth living. That is why for my part I would rather speak the truth now in the hope that we may yet turn to a third choice, the saving of our free country from war and dictatorship while it can still be done. The lesson of history is that this cannot be done; that like countless peoples before us, we will refuse to see the truth, believe it, and act on it in time to save ourselves. That is how most Germans reacted to

Adolf Hitler in the early 1930's, and that is how most Americans are still behaving today.

But 200 years ago a small band of very wise men defied the rules of history and created a government that freed men as no government had done in 5000 years, the UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. And you and I can redeem this priceless heritage. We, too, can and must defy history in the same way by saving the unique heritage that is ours.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #15

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is August 2, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 15.

Normally I record each issue of my monthly AUDIO LETTER around mid-month or later, but this month I must make an exception, because of the urgency of what I have to tell you.

In monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 12, three months ago, I revealed the joint Rockefeller-Soviet plan for NUCLEAR WAR ONE to be waged primarily on American soil. In that tape I also revealed the existence of the super secret "Nuclear Safe Zone"—a swath across the upper half of the continental United States and lower Canada between the latitudes of 40 and 50 degrees North within which nuclear attack had been agreed not to take place under secret agreements between the four Rockefeller Brothers and their Soviet allies. The fact that the four Brothers themselves take this agreement very seriously is reflected by the fact that they have virtually abandoned the famous Rockefeller estates at Pocantico Hills, New York, moving their secret documents and other assets to their other homes on Mt. Desert Island and Bartlett Island just off the coast of Maine, right in the middle of the Nuclear Safe Zone. Only today, in fact, Nelson Rockefeller entertained reporters at Seal Harbor, which is on Mt. Desert Island; but in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 I also reported that more and more of the Trustees of the major

Rockefeller-controlled Foundations, through whom the Rockefellers exercise their control over our economy and our government, are increasingly fearful that the ONE WORLD program of the Rockefellers has jumped the tracks.

Over a period of 50 years and more the wealth and power of the western world, especially the United States, has been bled off in a continuous transfusion to strengthen the Soviet Union artificially. But now they see increasingly that they have opened Pandora's box and that a terrible double-cross by the Soviet Union is looming closer and closer as the hideous dead end of their behind-the-scenes control of our nation.

The very next month, in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13 I was able to reveal the existence of a Soviet-planted nuclear weapon in the waters near the entrance to Seal Harbor, Maine, ready to destroy the summer homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller upon Soviet command. And just two weeks ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14 for July 1976, I revealed the presence in American territorial waters not only of three more bombs but of 10 short-range, underwater-launch, multiple-warhead missiles with nuclear warheads.

We are now in the grip of a grotesque rerun of the deadly Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971 which I revealed and described in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14. Now, as then, our leaders are not telling you one word about it, but this time the Soviet threat is vastly greater and more imminent than it was in 1971. What the Soviet Union is hatching, my friends, is a devastating naval surprise attack of world-wide dimensions which goes far beyond even the huge dimensions of the threat I revealed to you last month. No less than 25 countries around the world are now threatened with surprise attack by the Soviet Union at any moment the Soviets may choose by means of underwater-launched missiles and bombs planted by the Soviet Navy.

It has now been two weeks since I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14 in which I challenged the United States Joint Chiefs of Staff to take appropriate action about the deadly Soviet nuclear offensive weapons in our territorial waters and in which I pledged my readiness to cooperate fully with the Joint Chiefs. My challenge and offer of cooperation were also transmitted directly to the appropriate officials; but, my friends, as of this moment I have not received one word of official reply to my charges, my challenge, or my offer to help!

The Joint Chiefs of Staff have been given notice of specific aggressive acts by the Soviet Union that imperil the peace and security of the United States, the placement of offensive nuclear weapons at strategic locations within American territorial waters; but to my knowledge up to this moment they have not taken any action whatever to seek out, much less to destroy, any of the bombs or missiles I revealed last month including even the missile near Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, whose location I spelled out in navigational coordinates. So long as this inaction continues, they are failing to protect our shipping, to protect our vital sea lanes of communication, to maintain general naval supremacy in our own waters, and to protect crucial naval bases and property among other things. The Joint Chiefs of Staff are in flagrant and continuing violation of Title 10 of the United States Code and of the Department of Defense Directive 5100.1 which spells out the functions and responsibilities of the Armed Forces of the United States. What is the meaning of this? Does this mean that the Joint Chiefs are so completely trapped and insulated by Rockefeller agent Henry Kissinger that they are no longer free to do their duty?

My friends, what hope can there be for us when our most trusted and respected leaders, civilian and military, fail us through treason and fear? The answer is that ours is not the only government facing this terrible Soviet threat, so I have turned this information over to them too; and while the United States Government sits paralyzed through fear and Rockefeller treason, other governments are taking action. Meanwhile my own efforts are to rob the Soviets of the crucial element of surprise which they are counting on to make their world-wide naval attack successful.

Today I want to discuss these three topics:

Topic #1—THE ROCKEFELLER SELL-OUT OF AMERICA TO THE SOVIET UNION

Topic #2—THE SOVIET STRATEGY FOR SURPRISE NAVAL ATTACK IN NUCLEAR WAR I

Topic #3—THE WORLD-WIDE LOCATIONS OF SOVIET UNDERWATER MISSILES AND BOMBS

Topic #1—In the early fall of 1938 an International Conference was held to consider Adolf Hitler's demand that the Sudetenland with its heavy German population be ceded to Germany by Czechoslovakia. For years the Third Reich had been rearming itself to the teeth in open defiance of the "Treaty of Versailles" but the Western Allies, afraid of offending Hitler, had done nothing about it. Prior to Czechoslovakia, Austria had been annexed under the pretext of racial ties like those in the Sudetenland that demanded such an organic relationship to Germany. The Allies had done nothing about Austria, and now Britain and France agreed as well to Hitler's annexation of the Sudetenland. On September 30, 1938, the fate of the Sudeten residents of Czechoslovakia was decided without their own participation when the infamous Munich Agreement was signed. Amid widespread relief, "peace in our time" was proclaimed; but less than a year later, on September 1, 1939, World War II began with Hitler's invasion of Poland. Just over a year ago, on July 30, 1975, a new Munich agreement was signed, 35 signatories were involved as the Helsinki Accord was signed sealing the fate of the Soviet satellites of eastern Europe as a stable relationship referred to as "organic and permanent" by high officials of the United States Department of State. Widespread praise for the so-called "Spirit of Helsinki" assured us all that detente was doing fine and all was well.

Meanwhile the steadily accelerating Soviet military build-up has redoubled its pace in clear violation of the "Strategic Arms Limitation Treaties" (SALT) which forbid such major new weapons as the huge Soviet SS-19 ICBM now being deployed. In the past 10 years the military superiority once enjoyed by the United States has been systematically and deliberately eroded, always with the excuse that our failure to unilaterally disarm in stages might seem provocative to Russia.

Meanwhile the Soviet build-up has doubled and redoubled to the point where nations around the world are expressing increasing alarm at such military preparations which now go far beyond anything that could conceivably be limited to self-defense. The situation is becoming so ominous that more and more nations which have formerly kept their silence rather than to risk offending the Soviet Union are now crying out in alarm. In May 1976, the same month in which I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 telling you of the mounting fears of a Soviet double-cross by certain Trustees of the major Rockefeller-controlled Foundations, the clamor of concern over Soviet military intentions began building up.

For example, on May 9, 1976, Denmark's Foreign Minister, K. B. Andersen, was quoted as saying about neighboring Soviet and Warsaw Pact exercises, quote:

"The military activity in the last few years has been more than is necessary for defensive purposes. It is more than is reasonable in the spirit of Helsinki."

The Danes are especially worried about amphibious landing maneuvers which are being carried out on the Baltic coast and which are moving ever closer to Denmark, which controls the straits which lead from the Baltic into the North Sea.

A week later, on May 16, 1976, Denmark's growing concern was echoed by West Germany's Foreign Minister, Herr Genscher, who said that the Soviet Union is arming itself beyond its defense needs, creating a danger for European security.

About the same time half a world away, the Japanese were

increasingly voicing serious concern over Soviet military escalation. Since the beginning of 1976 there has been a dramatic increase in Soviet naval and air activity in the vicinity of Japan including frequent scrambling of aircraft, numerous violations of Japanese air space by Soviet aircraft, and submarine exercises just off Japan.

By late May the same theme had been taken up by Great Britain. On May 26, 1976, British Foreign Secretary Crosland told the Central Treaty Organization of Foreign Ministers, quote:

"We cannot ignore the evidence of our eyes. It has been precisely during the years when the Soviet Union has advocated detente that we have witnessed the steady build-up of the Soviet armed forces."

Nor have the warnings by leaders of other countries abated. Australia's Prime Minister Malcolm Fraser has rightly criticized detente as an illusion used by the Soviet Union to veil its imperialist designs.

Red China, which is badly weakened at the moment by the devastating earthquakes, has expressed worry over the recent strengthening of Russian land and air forces along her northern frontier.

And only three days ago on the first anniversary of the Helsinki Agreement, Mrs. Margaret Thatcher, leader of the Conservative Party in Britain, reinforced her warnings voiced earlier this year concerning the very real and growing threat posed by the Soviet Union.

Meanwhile here in our own United States all attempts to voice similar warnings are suppressed, muted, and diffused. Recently the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, General George S. Brown, revealed that while the American Pacific Fleet should be able to keep sea lanes open to Hawaii and thereabouts, quote:

"Because of a shortage of warships the fleet will not be able to protect the sea lanes into the western Pacific."

Admiral James L. Holloway, Chief of the Naval Operations, has gone even farther, declaring that American warships now operate in the Sea of Japan only at the tolerance of the Soviet Pacific Fleet. No wonder the Japanese are worried; but perhaps the most dismal estimate of the situation comes from retired Admiral Elmo Zumwalt who flatly says that the United States could not win a war against the Soviet Union today. Well, he ought to know. It was while he himself was Chief of Naval Operations that the Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971 occurred involving underwater missiles in American and Canadian waters, as I revealed last month.

Meanwhile Rockefeller Soviet agent Henry Kissinger speaks comforting lies for American public consumption about the military inferiority of the Soviet Union; and our interim president Ford, speaking words put in his mouth like a ventriloquist by Nelson Rockefeller and Kissinger, solemnly lies to us that there have been no violations of the SALT agreements by the Soviets, and that they have refrained from using any loopholes in the SALT agreements. The Rockefeller major media drum lies like these into our heads, creating a false sense of security. We, the people of the United States as well as of the other countries now under the threat of the Soviet surprise attack, have been sold out by the four Rockefeller Brothers and their agents in and out of Government. Our trust of those in

positions of leadership has been used against us at the very highest levels. We have all been double-crossed for the private gain of a handful of greedy, callous men; and yet, even they too are about to lose everything in the same way—double-cross by the Soviet Union.

Topic #2—In this age of Intercontinental Ballistic Missiles, Viking space craft landing on Mars, and B-l Bombers, it is easy to forget the indispensable roles played by land and sea forces. The vast tonnages of commodities that travel around the world in international trade travel not by air in most cases but by land and especially by sea. For reasons of simple economics, the sea is still the unrivaled highway of the world's commerce, spelling prosperity for many and survival for some; and as long as this is true, navies will always play a major role in a nation's military power. If some Americans have forgotten this, the Soviet Union has not. For over two decades just one man has been continuously in command of the Soviet Navy, Admiral Sergei Gorshkov. The Soviet Union has less need of a navy for defensive purposes than many other nations, but for 21 years Admiral Gorshkov has worked relentlessly to build the Russian fleet into a formidable striking force world-wide, and he has succeeded.

Starting as a minor defensive military arm when Stalin died in 1953, the Soviet Navy has been built into a modern armada in astonishingly short time, and it is still expanding rapidly.

While the United States has been shutting down shipyards at home and losing bases abroad, the Soviet Union has been building new shipyards and stretching its reach by opening more and more bases far from its own shores. Even now, before the new American naval base is built on Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean, the Russians are angling for a new base in the South Pacific on the Island of Tonga north of Australia. Gorshkov has said, quote:

"Establishing the conditions for gaining sea control has always required prolonged periods of time and the execution of a series of measures while still at peace."

He also emphasizes the importance of the Soviet Fleet for exercising, quote: "influence on coastal countries." Gorshkov claims that his navy is now capable of fighting anywhere as a political tool in furthering the Kremlin's aims, including not only the wartime role of severing sea lanes but even possible peacetime harassment and interference with shipping. He now considers the Soviet Navy to be, quote: "a long-ranged armed force which could exert decisive influence on the course of an armed struggle in theaters of military operation of vast extent." In other words, the Soviet Navy is now a global striking force, and Gorshkov recently signaled his fleet that it will be the Navy which will bear the brunt of any armed conflict to come.

Western military analysts have been puzzled by recent indications that the Soviet General Staff is preparing, quote: "new methods of repelling aggression and waging war." Well, anti-tank guided missiles, which many analysts are concentrating on, are just a side show in these so-called new methods. The real focus in current Soviet military planning is the Navy, and prominent among these new methods are the underwater-launched missiles and bombs which the Soviet Navy has now planted in coastal waters all around the world.

Topic #3—In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14 which I recorded just two weeks ago on July 19, 1976, I reported the presence of 4 bombs and 10 short-range underwater-launch missiles with multiple nuclear warheads in the territorial waters of the United States,

all of them planted there by the Soviet Union. I can now confirm that all of these bombs and nuclear warheads are of the thermonuclear variety—that is, hydrogen bombs as opposed to smaller atomic bombs. What is more, the list for North America now includes two more missiles—one at the south end of Chesapeake Bay near Norfolk, Virginia, and the other in Canadian waters near Vancouver, Canada. Of these two, the Norfolk missile has been planted just within the past few weeks.

UNITED STATES/CANADIAN LOCATIONS

Here now are the navigational coordinates for the locations of the 16 nuclear weapons in United States and Canadian territorial waters. Most all the locations are firm but some could be off one or two miles:

(1) Near the entrance to Seal Harbor, Maine. Hydrogen bomb. Latitude 44 17' 0" North Longitude 68 14' 0" West

(2) In a cove off Boston Bay near Quincy and Weymouth, Mass. Missile.

Latitude 42 14' 30" North Longitude 70 59' 0" West

(3) Long Island Sound near Bridgeport, Connecticut. Missile. Latitude 41 9' 40" North Longitude 73 5' 0" West

(4) Chesapeake Bay near Deale, Maryland, east of Washington, DC. Missile.

Latitude 38 46' 0" North Longitude 7 6 33' 0" West

(5) Potomac River near Indian Head, Maryland, south of Washington, D.C. Hydrogen bomb.

Latitude 38 33' 40" North Longitude 77 12' 0" West

(6) South end of Chesapeake Bay near Norfolk, Virginia. Missile. Latitude 36 58' 30" North Longitude 76 16' 0" West

(7) Inside Pensacola Bay, Fla. Missile.

Latitude 30 23' 30" North Longitude 87 11' 30" West

(8) In the Mississippi River near New Orleans. Hydrogen bomb.

(A correction here from monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14. The bomb is down river near Port Sulphur, La., rather than up river.)

Latitude 29 35' 30" North Longitude 89 50' 30" West

(9) In Galveston Bay, Texas. Missile.

Latitude 29 22' 10" North Longitude 94 49' 10" West

(10) Inside San Diego Bay near Chula Vista, California. Missile. Latitude 32 38' 0" North Longitude 117 7' 0" West

(11) Inside San Pablo Bay near San Francisco, California. Missile.

Latitude 37 59' 0" North Longitude 122 23' 0" West

(12) In American waters between northwest Washington State and Vancouver Island, British Columbia. Missile.

Latitude 48 13' 0" North Longitude 123 8' 0" West

(13) In Canadian waters southwest of Crescent Beach near Vancouver, British Columbia. Missile.

Latitude 48 58' 9" North Estimated Longitude 122 57' West.

(14) In Prince William Sound, Alaska, near the entrance to the Port of Valdez. Hydrogen bomb.

Latitude 60 57' 40" North Longitude 146 44' 15" West

(15) In the waters just north of Colon, Panama Canal Zone. Missile.

Latitude 9 25' 30" North Longitude 79 54' 45" West

(16) And finally, in the coastal waters just outside Pearl Harbor, Hawaii. Missile.

Latitude 21 18' 30" North Longitude 157 58' 58" West.

My friends, get out a map and mark these locations on it. See for yourself just how complete the surprise attack is that is being readied for the United States Navy. Then after you have absorbed that, listen on because, my friends, there is more, much more .

The principal target of the Soviet Union in the surprise attack now planned is the United States of America. If we fall, the world falls; but that does not make us the only target. American Naval Forces are deployed world-wide. In addition, the Soviet Union has designs on Western Europe, the Mediterranean area, southern Africa, China, Japan, Australia, India, the Persian Gulf—in short, the whole world! Large chunks of the world are already under direct Soviet control, while others are primarily within the direct influence of their Rockefeller partners whose chips they plan to pick up by means of the double-cross. But all the areas of the world which remain to be conquered or stand in the way of overwhelming Soviet victory are also targeted with bombs and underwater-launched missiles planted in coastal waters.

I can now report that coastal waters in at least 64 locations world-wide now contain nuclear offensive weapons planted by the Soviet Union. A few are bombs, but the vast majority are underwater-launch multiple-warhead missiles armed with hydrogen warheads!

The Soviet Navy, true to the claims of its Commander in Chief, Admiral Gorshkov, that it is now a global striking force, is now poised for the most ambitious, most devastating surprise attack of all time—a world-wide Pearl Harbor-type attack designed to bring all the navies of the world to ruin at a single blow. If this naval attack succeeds, the sea lanes that are the life blood not only of defense but of trade and even survival for many nations, will be severed and destroyed.

Regardless of any reprisals by means of Intercontinental Ballistic Missiles, bombers, and all the rest, the Soviet Union is prepared to survive the minimum casualties, no more than perhaps 10-million—which the Kremlin is willing to accept, thanks to the all-out Civil Defense preparations which have been underway in Russia for years. Eventually, they reason, even if—and that is a very big "if"—if we do strike back we will run out of ICBM Missiles and will consume all of our remaining defenses without any hope of ultimate success, robbed as we will be of any significant naval power. Thus, whether their initial surprise attack persuades us all to just lay down our arms and surrender, or whether we first retaliate with such forces as we can muster after the destruction of our Navy, the Kremlin expects to emerge inevitably as the victor, as the unchallenged ruler of the entire world. That is what this world-wide Pearl Harbor attack is all about, and that is what I am trying to prevent by taking away the advantage of surprise that the Soviets are counting on.

EUROPEAN/BRITISH ISLES LOCATIONS

I will now give you the other locations world-wide. The same time, I will just give each Latitude or Longitude as three numbers—meaning degrees, minutes, and seconds respectively.

Northern Europe, Scandinavia, and the British Isles are heavily targeted with underwater missiles and bombs. This is intended to free a considerable part of the Soviet Baltic Fleet for service elsewhere and also to neutralize or eliminate the NATO air power, which is presently a weak spot for the Soviet Navy.

Denmark is the key to Soviet access to the Baltic Sea, and two missiles are now planted in Danish waters: One north of Copenhagen at

Latitude 56 - 10 - 37 North Longitude 12 - 25 - 56 East

The other to the south at

Latitude 54 - 55 - 30 North Longitude 10- 27 - 51 East

Far to the north a missile is also located at the north end of the Gulf of Bothnia near the border between Finland and Sweden at Latitude 65 - 42 - 25 North Longitude 24-34-0 East

On the Baltic coast of West Germany just south of Denmark a missile is located at

Latitude 54 - 27 - 27 North Longitude 13-4-14 East

while the North Sea coast of West Germany is the site of another missile near Bremerhaven at

Latitude 53 - 39 - 50 North Longitude 8-20-41 East.

Moving on down the North Sea coast to the Netherlands, a hydrogen bomb has been planted by the Soviets just outside the mid section of the huge dike about 50 miles north of Amsterdam. The bomb is at

Latitude 53-2-4 North Longitude 5-10-55 East

If it were detonated, the North Sea would rush in like a tidal wave to crush and drown the inhabitants of Amsterdam and more than 1000 square miles of Dutch low-country formerly reclaimed from the sea. This is horrible to imagine, my friends, but it would be far more horrible if we allowed the Soviet Union to do it.

As if that were not enough, the Netherlands coast is also threatened by a missile at

Latitude 51-36-7 North Longitude 3-55-43 East

in a cove southwest of Rotterdam.

The French coast, too, is targeted. One missile is southwest of Brest at

Latitude 48 - 10 - 23 North Longitude 4-50-12 West

The other missile, further south, is about midway between Nantes and Bordeaux at

Latitude 46-15-9 North Longitude 1-30-51 West.

As I have explained in earlier monthly AUDIO LETTERS, such as No. 6 for November 1975, the Rockefeller plans for war did not include hostilities in Europe or Great Britain; but remember, the Soviet surprise attack plan is all part of the massive Soviet double-cross of their Rockefeller masters, and nowhere does the magnitude of this great double-cross create a greater shock than in looking at the current Soviet threat against the British Isles .

Under the Rockefeller scenario the United Kingdom was not to be involved in hostilities; but under the surprise attack double-cross being readied by the Soviets, the British Isles are now the most heavily targeted area on earth in terms of the geographic concentration of missiles and bombs now planted in their territorial waters. Not only naval targets, but American and Royal Air Force targets are crucial to the Soviet goal of liberating their own Northern Naval Fleet to help conquer and patrol the rest of the world. The Soviets view England as a huge enemy aircraft carrier that must be sunk.

Beginning on the northeast coast of Scotland, a missile is located in Moray Firth northeast of Inverness at

Latitude 57-36-0 North Longitude 4-2-49 West.

Next, near the entrance to the Firth of Forth and northeast of Edinburgh, Scotland, a missile is planted at

Latitude 56-7-0 North Longitude 2-31-46 West.

Next, an atomic bomb (not a hydrogen bomb) is at the narrow entrance to the cove at Middlesborough, England, at

Latitude 54 - 38 - 30 North Longitude 1-7-43 West.

Continuing down the coast, a missile is roughly centered in the entrance to the bay known as "The Wash", east of Nottingham: Latitude 53-7-30 North Longitude 0-30-48 East

And on the north flank of the entrance to the Thames River east of London, still another missile now sits at

Latitude 51-37-0 North Longitude 1-2-26 East.

Moving over to the west coast, a missile is located in the water about 30 miles north of Liverpool at

Latitude 53-49-0 North Longitude 3-6-40 West.

Further north at

Latitude 54 - 55 -0 North Longitude 3-30-50 West

a missile is planted in Solway Firth at the border between England and Scotland.

North of that a missile now lurks in the Firth of Clyde southwest of Glasgow, Scotland at

Latitude 55-39-0 North Longitude 5-7-4 West.

And the last missile in the waters along the west coast is in the channel known as "Little Minch" off the northwest coast of Scotland at

Latitude 57-21-0 North Longitude 6-52-37 West.

Ireland, too, has been targeted. The entrance at Dublin Harbor contains a hydrogen bomb at

Latitude 53-20-0 North Longitude 6-5-0 West.

Likewise the entrance to the harbor at Cork on the south coast also contains a hydrogen bomb at

Latitude 51-48-0 North Longitude 8-14 -24 West

And in the waters of the west coast of Ireland there is a missile in Blacksod Bay at

Latitude 54-1-30 North Longitude 9-56-34 West.

ICELAND LOCATIONS

To round out the Soviet preparation for total elimination of

resistance to movements of its Northern Naval Fleet, Iceland also has two missiles in its coastal waters. One is near the entrance to the port at Reykjavik at

Latitude 64 - 10 - 2 4 North Longitude 21 - 56 - 15 West.

The other is near the northwest side of the island at

Latitude 66-9-2 North Longitude 22 - 58 - 18 West.

So much for any obstacles to the Soviet Northern and Baltic Fleets if the surprise attack by underwater missiles and bombs is carried out.

MEDITERRANEAN LOCATIONS

The next major area of concern to the Soviet Navy is the Mediterranean; and there, too, preparations have been made. The main American Naval Base now left in the Mediterranean is at Naples, Italy, and in the northwest side of the Bay of Naples a Soviet underwater-launched missile is now located at

Latitude 40-47-4 North Longitude 14-6-0 East

In addition, four more underwater missile sites have been set up by the Soviets in the west end of the Mediterranean so that the American Sixth Fleet can be completely cornered, trapped, and ultimately destroyed, leaving the Mediterranean as a Soviet lake.

Missiles are located just inside the Strait of Gibraltar on the north side at:

Latitude 36-8-29 North Longitude 5-24-17 West.

and on the south side at

Latitude 35 - 54 - 45 North Longitude 5-18-13 West.

The other two missile sites are about 140 to 150 miles east of Gibraltar, one on the north in the Gulf of Almeria at

Latitude 36-43-7 North Longitude 2-15-0 West.

The other on the south near a point of land jutting out from Melilla, Morocco, at

Latitude 35 - 26 - 13 North Longitude 2-52-35 West.

SOUTHERN AFRICA LOCATIONS

The waters around southern Africa contain three missiles. One is southwest of Capetown, South Africa, at

Latitude 34-12-4 South Longitude 18 - 10 - 18 East.

Another is on the Transkei Coast roughly midway between Durban and Port Elizabeth, South Africa, at

Latitude 32-2-32 South Longitude 29-8-7 East.

The third is in the bay near Lourenco Marques, Mozambique, at Latitude 25 - 54 - 56 South Longitude 32 - 57 - 11 East

about 300 miles east of Johannesburg, South Africa.

The rest of Black Africa is already under joint Rockefeller-Soviet domination which the Soviets plan to transform into pure Soviet domination by means of their massive double-cross of the four Rockefeller Brothers.

LATIN AMERICA/SOUTHERN U.S. LOCATIONS

A similar situation prevails throughout Latin America, and aside from the Panama Canal missile, the Soviets have not planted anything in Latin American territorial waters. The only nuclear

missiles in Latin America are those in Guyana targeted on the Panama Canal, the southern United States, and other places.

I can now reveal that these have been removed from the vicinity of Temehri Airfield near Georgetown and moved to a site about 100 miles south of Georgetown, Guyana, at

Latitude 5-20-0 North Longitude 58-7-54 West

southeast of the town of Ituni. This remote site is now in use in order to separate the missiles from the Temehri Airfield which has been under heavy use for movement of Cuban troops to southern Africa and which is also planned to be the landing point for the new Soviet Backfire Bomber and other aircraft in an attack on the United States.

PERSIAN GULF / OTHER COUNTRIES

Another area of strategic importance to the Soviet Union is the Persian Gulf with Saudi Arabia to the southwest and Iran to the northeast. Under a secret deal made in 1972 by the Rockefeller Brothers through their agents Henry Kissinger and then president Richard Nixon, a huge arsenal of sophisticated weaponry has been built up in Iran with a current value of over 10-billion dollars. This includes 80 brand new F-14 Jet Fighters, Hawk anti-aircraft batteries totaling 1800 missiles, and an ultramodern naval fleet that includes six (6) Guided-Missile Destroyers more advanced than anything owned or on order by our own United States Navy! Can you imagine? And yet the tremendous arms build-up in Iran has far outpaced the ability of Iran to use these arms due to lack of adequate training. What is actually happening is that Iran is secretly being used by the Rockefeller Brothers to funnel weaponry into the Soviet Union itself and to an area which can be taken over by the Soviets in the coming war. The real shah of Iran is United States Ambassador Richard Helms, the former head of the CIA who now controls Iran for the Rockefeller Brothers!

Just as we left 5- to 10-billion dollars worth of weaponry behind for the North Vietnamese to pick up when we pulled out very hastily last year, the same thing is planned to happen in Iran. In both cases, these deals between the Rockefeller Brothers and the Soviet Union were made in return for secret agreements guaranteeing Rockefeller control of oil and other mineral interests in that region. But this arrangement is now about to blow up in the Rockefeller Brothers' faces, as well as yours and mine, in the world-wide surprise attack planned by the Soviets.

There is now a Soviet underwater missile site in the Persian Gulf about 60 miles southwest of Bushehr, Iran, at

Latitude 28 - 33 - 40 North Longitude 48 - 55 - 29 East.

As I explained in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6, November 1975, the joint war plan between the Rockefeller Brothers and their Soviet allies involved the outbreak of war in the Middle East as the trigger with the disabling of Arab OPEC oil fields by means of an American limited nuclear strike. This would cripple Europe, rendering southern Africa vulnerable in turn to final conquest. Meanwhile an Asian war was to be building up as a follow-on with a joint Rockefeller-Soviet take-over of India and Red China, with Japan being whipped back into submission for the Rockefellers in the process.

But now, under the audacious double-cross and world-wide Pearl Harbor-type surprise attack that has been plotted by the Soviet Union, the Soviets plan to make all of these dominoes tumble at

once and into their own laps with the Rockefeller empire eliminated as a factor. To this end, many more underwater-launch missiles are planted in coastal waters around the world.

PACIFIC OCEAN/FAR EAST LOCATIONS

India is targeted with two such missiles. One is on the west side northwest of Bombay at

Latitude 20 - 52 - 56 North Longitude 71 - 48 - 39 East.

The other is on the east side in a cove south of Calcutta at Latitude 21-45-7 North Longitude 88 - 17 - 32 East.

The waters east of Singapore contain a missile at

Latitude 1-28-52 North Longitude 105 - 8 - 51 East.

Japan is threatened by Soviet missiles in its waters in two locations. One is in a bay at the south end of the Island of Hokkaido at

Latitude 42 - 17 - 26 North Longitude 140 - 30 - 42 East.

The other is in the coastal waters southeast of Hiroshima at Latitude 34-7-15 North Longitude 132 - 46 - 32 East.

Seoul, South Korea, is threatened by a Soviet missile in the waters about 25 miles to the southwest at

Latitude 37 - 21 - 47 North Longitude 126 - 30 - 47 East.

Red China is menaced by three Soviet underwater missiles in its territorial waters. One is in the Gulf of Chihli about 260 miles southeast of Peking at

Latitude 38 - 31 - 34 North Longitude 120 - 45 - 43 East.

The second is about 75 miles south of Shanghai at

Latitude 30 - 17 - 55 North Longitude 121 - 35 - 44 East.

And the third is about midway between Canton and Hong Kong at Latitude 22-42-2 North Longitude 113 - 39 - 56 East.

In addition, there is a missile in the north end of the Gulf of Tonkin about 50 miles east of Haiphong, Vietnam, at

Latitude 21-4-30 North Longitude 107 - 30 - 14 East.

And about 25 miles north of Taipei off the northern tip of Taiwan still another missile sits waiting at

Latitude 25 - 24 - 11 North Longitude 121 - 30 - 41 East.

PHILIPPINES/AUSTRALIA LOCATIONS

To round out the Soviet plan for crushing all the rival navies of the world with one blow, underwater missiles are also planted in the waters of the Philippines and Australia.

One of the Philippine missiles is in the water southwest of the Batan Peninsula within striking range of the United States Naval Bases at Subic Bay and south of Manila. The Latitude is

14-33-8 North Longitude 120 - 15 - 55 East.

The other Soviet missile in the Philippines is northwest of Panay Island at

Latitude 11 - 51 - 57 North Longitude 122 - 5 - 0 East.

As for Australia, four underwater missiles have been planted by the Soviet Navy around the heavily populated southwest quadrant of coast line. One is just south of Kangaroo Island, southwest of Adelaide at

Latitude 36-3-43 South Longitude 137 - 34 - 7 East.

Another is near the entrance to Port Phillip Bay, south of Melbourne at

Latitude 38-19-3 South Longitude 144 - 44 - 44 East.

The third missile is near the entrance to Port Jackson near Sydney at

Latitude 33 - 50 - 46 South Longitude 151 - 16 - 0 East.

And missile no. 4 is in the water northeast of Brisbane at

Latitude 27 - 22 - 14 South Longitude 153 - 12 - 24 East.

My friends, the world-wide surprise attack that has been prepared by the Soviet Navy makes the Soviet Union the aggressive, all-out enemy of every other nation on earth. The sheer audacity of such a plan is one of its greatest strengths. No one would expect such an attempt to bring the whole world to its knees all at once! This is especially important as it regards the double-cross of the Rockefeller Brothers. The Rockefellers themselves had the audacity to spirit away the monetary gold supply of the United States, realizing full well that most people would find such a huge crime unbelievable and would therefore never suspect anything. But the world-wide surprise attack that has been devised by the Soviets is designed to take even the Rockefeller Brothers themselves off guard. They have held sway over the Kremlin for so long that they literally cannot imagine losing that power. And so the Soviets believe no one will believe such a thing is possible until the day they push a button, signals flash world-wide by satellite, missiles erupt from coastal waters around the world, and the biggest surprise attack in history takes place. Then everyone will believe, but then it will be too late. This is the long and the short of the fantastic Soviet gamble that is now ready to be played out at the moment they choose.

My friends, what I have told you is the truth; and while you may be tempted to try to argue a thousand ways to convince yourself not to believe what I have said, just keep one cold, simple fact in mind. THE TRUTH DOES NOT CHANGE JUST BECAUSE WE DO NOT BELIEVE IT.

On the evening of December 6, 1941, the American Fleet was peacefully at anchor in Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, and Christmas parties were in progress. Suppose you had been at one of those parties and I had walked in and started trying to tell people that the Japanese were going to attack the following morning. Your reaction would probably have been, quote: "But we haven't heard anything about that. There's nothing on the news about it, and the Government hasn't sent us any warnings, and the Fleet certainly would not be in the harbor like this if there were any danger. I just don't believe it." I might have then produced all kinds of evidence about the Japanese build-up, little-known information about the efforts of the Rockefeller-sponsored "Institute of Pacific Relations" to bring on such an attack, and so on; yet you might still have refused to believe me. But I would have been telling the truth, and the truth would still have been the same. At 7:55 A.M. the following morning a sky full of Japanese planes raining death on your head would have been proving my warnings, but then it would have been too late.

Don't let it be too late this time. My charges are true, and they will be proven to be true one way or the other. They can be proven now by forcing those officials, military and civilian, who have the responsibility of protecting our lives to do their duty, to find and neutralize these missiles and bombs; OR we can sit

back and listen to more lies, more comforting arguments, more distractions until the unearthly flashes of burning light from hydrogen bombs drive the truth home horribly, conclusively, and irreversibly.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #16

Hello my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is September 25, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 16.

Last month I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 much earlier than normal, on August 2, because of its extreme urgency. In that tape I revealed the locations of multiple warhead missiles and hydrogen bombs which had been planted by the Soviet Union in the coastal waters of 25 countries around the world—especially the United States, Canada, the British Isles, and Western Europe. We were on the threshold of a world-wide Pearl Harbor-type surprise nuclear attack, and yet no one in the federal government had taken any official action whatsoever to respond to my warnings about this terrible war threat. It was obvious that nothing would be done in time unless public opinion forced it to be done, and so I appealed to YOU.

I told you the truth about our desperate situation, and I asked you to bring about the rescue of our beloved country by applying the kind of pressure on the Government that only aroused, informed citizens can bring to bear. Your overwhelming response was a major shock to the United States Government; and as a direct result of your efforts, action has been and is being taken. Thanks to you, the missiles and bombs in American waters which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 have been removed by the United States Navy. Likewise, those around the British Isles and a number of other locations world-wide have also been removed; but the grim fact is, my friends, that we are still in very grave danger because the Soviet Union is not giving up. That means you and I must not give up either.

The Soviet Navy is now struggling and maneuvering around the clock trying to re-establish a commanding, strategic position for attack, because an imminent nuclear attack on our country is still planned by the Soviets. If this attack is to be prevented, two things must be done:

First, they must be prevented from achieving the decisive edge in battlefield position which they are now trying very hard to accomplish at sea by means of submarines; and

Second, the fact that the Soviet Union is preparing to plunge the world into thermonuclear war must be completely exposed, not only here in America but world-wide. As I pointed out last month, in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15, the audacious world-wide naval surprise attack which is almost ready to be triggered makes the Soviet Union the all-out enemy of every other nation on earth. Once this becomes known, Russia's military posture will be very awkward indeed.

In order to bring you up to date on the events of recent weeks, my three topics today are:

Topic #1—THE AUGUST MISSILE CRISIS OF 1976

Topic #2—THE UNITED STATES INTELLIGENCE GAP AND A NEW ROUND OF SOVIET UNDERWATER MISSILES

Topic #3—THE UNDECLARED SUBMARINE WAR NOW UNDERWAY

Topic #1—An increasing number of public figures in our country know about the Soviet underwater missiles ringing our country, but so far only one has come close to warning you about it.

At the Republican National Convention on August 19, 1976, Ronald Reagan was invited to the speakers platform to say a few words following the nomination acceptance speech by President Ford. After some opening words of a personal nature and brief comments about the Party Platform he had helped to forge, he turned to what was really on his mind. He began, and I quote:

"If I could just take a moment, I had an assignment the other day. Someone asked me to write a letter for a time capsule that is going to be opened in Los Angeles a hundred years from now on our Tricentennial. It sounded like an easy assignment. They suggested I write something about the problems and issues of the day, and I set out to do so riding down the coast in an automobile looking at the blue Pacific on one side and the mountains on the other; and I couldn't help but wonder if it was going to be as beautiful a hundred years from now as it was on that summer day."

With a few words about various challenges we face, he then continued, quote:

"We live in a world in which the great powers have poised and aimed at each other horrible missiles of destruction—nuclear weapons that can in a matter of minutes arrive in each other's country and destroy virtually the civilized world we live in. And suddenly it dawned on me: Those who would read this letter a hundred years from now will know whether those missiles were fired. They will know whether we met our challenge. Whether they have the freedom that we have known up to now will depend upon what we do here. Will they look back with appreciation and say, 'Thank God for those people in 1976 who headed off that loss of freedom, who kept us, now a hundred years later, free; who kept our world from nuclear destruction'? And if we failed, they probably won't get to read the letter at all because it spoke of individual freedom, and they won't be allowed to talk of that or read of it. This is our challenge."

It is no coincidence that nuclear missiles came to Ronald Reagan's mind as he looked at the waters off the California coast. We had been in telephone contact with one another since August 11, and he knew all about the Soviet underwater missiles when he said those words of warning I just quoted. But most of his audience never realized what he was driving at, thanks to the total absence of any other clues about the Soviet threat from the Government or the major media. So the fate of our beloved nation, and therefore of the whole world, rested during the month of August 197 6 in the hands of those who heard my charges and acted on them.

Here is what happened: During August the United States Government came under steadily mounting pressure from people like yourself all over the world who sent copies of my tapes, relayed my charges, and demanded action. The first sign that this was beginning to take effect came on August 14, 1976. On that date I learned that a secret code name had been assigned to the Soviet

Underwater Missile program. However, action to remove the missiles still had not been approved, and was not going to be approved unless such action was forced by public opinion. Meanwhile the first concrete action in the August Missile Crisis of 1976 was taken—not by the United States, but by Canada.

On August 17, 197 6 the Canadian Navy had found the Crescent Beach missile near Vancouver, B.C., but lacked the capability to retrieve it. Prime Minister Trudeau, receiving no cooperation from the United States Government at that time, called Soviet Charge d' Affaires Nikolai Makarov in Ottawa and demanded that the Soviet Union itself come and remove the missile. And remove it they did. On August 25 the Vancouver area was visited by three Soviet ships—two destroyers, the Sposobny and the Gnevny; and a tanker called the Ilim. Rear Admiral Vladimir Varganov arrived aboard one of the ships, using this 'good will' visit as a cover. By the following afternoon, Canadian divers confirmed that the missile was gone.

Meanwhile Great Britain had also begun taking serious action in order to rid herself of the 12 underwater missiles and bombs ringing the British Isles. On August 18, 1976, Prime Minister Callaghan called a special Cabinet meeting at 11:00 A.M. London time. Present were the First Lord of the Admiralty, the First Sea Lord of the Admiralty, and several Fleet Commanders. The purpose of the meeting was to listen to my monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 which had gone to England by diplomatic pouch. They already knew that my information was accurate because of the Soviet missile discovered the previous day in the waters near Vancouver, so the Royal Navy wasted no time in taking action. By August 27, 1976, all but one of the missiles had been removed; and that one, too, was retrieved shortly thereafter.

By late August the United States was at last taking action too, prodded into it by still-building public pressure. For once President Gerald Ford acted on his own, over-ruled Rockefeller agent Henry Kissinger and gave the go-ahead for the Soviet bombs and missiles surrounding the United States to be removed.

Having been unleashed at last, the United States Navy worked fast, acting on the information in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15. By the evening of August 26, 1976, seven of the Soviet weapons in our waters—six missiles and one hydrogen bomb—had been removed; and by August 31, 1976, the waters along the American coastline had all been cleared. At this point the threat to the United States that I had spelled out last month had been eliminated at last, using the very information I had made public. But the Government in general, and the Military in particular, were still under heavy public pressure; and under the assumption that the Soviet threat was now over and done with, they chose a technique which has become standard practice in Washington today. It's called "plausible denial"—a particular type of bureaucratic double talk. The Joint Chiefs of Staff and the United States Navy had just completed an operation to remove the missiles around our country, a job potentially so hazardous as to defy imagination. In short, they had done their duty; and the Navy especially deserves our thanks for accomplishing their task without anyone being hurt.

They should be acclaimed as heroes, and our whole nation should be rallying behind them with justified pride. But, my friends, in the nightmare world of step-by-step surrender to the Soviets called "Detente", it doesn't work that way. Even our Military leaders are so thoroughly hemmed in by the "One-World" web that the only way that they can do their duty in the face of such a Soviet threat is to hide the fact that they are doing it.

And so, as soon as the missile removal operation had been completed around our shores, "plausible denials" of my charges began being issued by the United States Military. This began on August 31, 1976, when Vice Admiral B. R. Inman, Acting Director of the Defense Intelligence Agency, answered an inquiry sent to the Secretary of Defense Rumsfeld weeks before by Senator Harry F. Byrd, Jr. of Virginia. Admiral Inman's letter gives a number of arguments as to why any prudent government, including the U.S.S.R., would presumably refrain from planting such missiles and bombs in our waters. But the real crux of his plausible denial letter is the following sentence, quote:

"There is currently no evidence indicating the Soviets have placed underwater nuclear devices, including missiles with multiple warheads, within the territorial waters of the United States."

Technically, Admiral Inman was telling the truth, because as of August 31, 1976, when he wrote this letter, all of the evidence—the missiles and bombs—had been removed from our waters; but the impact of his letter, if read casually, would seem to be that my charges never had been true!

By the same token, General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, wrote me the following day on September 1, 1976. His letter has been photocopied and sent all over the world by the Pentagon. I will now read it in its entirety:

"Dear Dr. Beter:

Your recent tape report alleging that Soviet nuclear warheads and hydrogen bombs have been planted in the coastal waters of the United States has been brought to my attention. I have investigated these assertions and find not a shred of truth to any of your statements in this regard. Let me assure you of this country's capability to detect any such aggressive actions by the Soviet Union or any other world power.

We stand ready to evaluate and comment in advance on any such information you may acquire in the future which impinges upon the vital issue of our national security.

Sincerely, George S. Brown General, U.S.A.F."

The seeming impact of General Brown's letter, read casually, is that my whole story about the missiles was a fake. But the real key, once again, is the word "find" (present tense). Furthermore, in the last sentence, General Brown actually signaled me that the door would be open if I acquired more such information; and by the time his letter reached me, I had more such information because as I said before, the Soviet Union is not giving up.

Topic #2—On the afternoon of September 7, 1976, I received General Brown's letter of September 1, which I just read you. Ironically, I also learned on the same day, September 7, that "round two" of the Soviet Underwater Missile Crisis was just beginning. Three underwater missiles were now threatening Los Angeles, and San Diego was once again targeted by an underwater missile close by. Accordingly I answered General Brown's letter as follows:

"Dear General Brown:

Today I received your letter of September 1. I fully understand the position you are taking at this time; however other governments have not taken your position. They know the truth, I know the truth, and so does President Ford; and the truth is that during the month of August 197 6 a surprise Soviet nuclear attack of world-wide proportions has been partially averted.

Make no mistake, the huge build-up of Soviet nuclear missiles on land and in the sea world-wide, continues to be a clear and present signal for an imminent surprise attack of immense proportions. In 1962 we had a Soviet Missile Crisis in Cuba; in 1971 we had the Soviet Missile Crisis in Canadian and United States territorial waters which was kept from the American people; and now once again, in 1976, the world is experiencing yet another Soviet missile crisis. The world must know of the courage of President Ford as Commander in Chief in moving aside unbelievable obstacles in order to begin to meet the Soviet challenge last month.

In your letter you state that, quote:

'We stand ready to evaluate and comment in advance on any such information you may acquire in the future which impinges upon the vital issue of our national security.'

In view of this and the urgency of the situation, I respectfully request to meet with you privately in your offices within the next ten (10) days. At that time I will present evidence of the validity of all my charges, and under specific conditions I will advise you of other strategic locations of Soviet nuclear missiles planted in our coastal waters and elsewhere of which you may not be aware and which constitute a clear and present danger to our national security.

Sincerely yours, Peter Beter"

Shortly after my registered letter reached the Pentagon, Navy Captain Sidney V. Wright, Jr. called on behalf of General Brown to arrange a meeting with the General. We agreed on meeting in General Brown's offices at 3:00 P.M., Thursday September 16. An associate accompanied me to the meeting as a witness; and promptly at 3:00 P.M. the meeting began with General Brown and Captain Wright, who tape-recorded the meeting with my consent. In spite of the public posture which he has so far had to maintain, General Brown told me that he had overruled his staff in order to meet with me; and although he couched many of his comments with considerable care, our discussion lasted for well over an hour without interruptions, without telephone calls, and without any cutoff because of time.

I gave General Brown a special tape for his ears only, revealing the locations of 48 new missiles threatening the United States, and within two days the United States Navy was already at work removing them. In addition, General Brown made three commitments to me, and I made one to him.

To fulfill my own commitment, I sent the following registered letter to him on September 17, 1976:

"Dear General Brown:

Thank you for affording me the opportunity to meet with you in your offices yesterday for over an hour. During our conversation I mentioned that the Soviet nuclear device which was removed from

Seal Harbor, Maine, had been taken to a location near Otis Air Force Base on Cape Cod, Massachusetts, and that it was still there as of the time of my meeting with you yesterday afternoon. You requested that I provide you with details about its location.

The facts are that the Seal Harbor nuclear device was in the process of being retrieved by the United States Navy late Saturday, 28 August 1976, and was on the beach at Seal Harbor waiting transportation by the afternoon of 29 August. That evening it left Seal Harbor by truck, which took it to an airport at Augusta, Maine. On the afternoon of 30 August the nuclear device was flown from Augusta, Maine, to Otis Air Force Base, Cape Cod, where the airplane touched down at 17:13 EDT, 30 August 1976. From Otis Air Force Base this nuclear device was transported to a remote location on the west side of Buzzards Bay. For over two weeks the device stayed in that location, which is between one and two miles east of the small town of Marion, Massachusetts, on a small peninsula, the tip of which is known as Butler's Point. The coordinates are: 41 42' 0" North, 70 43' 30" West.

The Seal Harbor weapon remained there until about 2200 EDT last night, 16 September 1976; but then less than six (6) hours after my meeting with you yesterday afternoon, it left this location. As of today, this weapon is in a new location about 24 miles west of New London, Connecticut, with the approximate coordinates: 41 19' 0" North, 72 31' 0" West.

If I had not known about this latest move, the result would have been an echo of your letter to me of 1 September 1976, in which you state that you, quote 'find' no evidence to support my charges. Your letter of 1 September 1976, of course, was written 43 days after I first made my charges and only hours after the Soviet missiles had all been removed by the United States Navy.

Sincerely, Peter Beter"

My friends, General Brown is laboring under the handicap of an Intelligence gap created by none other than Secretary of State Henry Kissinger. Allied Intelligence sources inform me that they have become gun-shy in sharing some of the information they give me with the official Intelligence community of the United States because invariably Kissinger betrays it immediately into the hands of the Soviet Union. Large segments of the United States Intelligence establishment are so independent that they do not consider themselves accountable even to the President. Instead they work under the direction of Henry Kissinger, who owes his power to the four Rockefeller Brothers and who also works in the interest of the Soviet Union.

Of course many of our Intelligence people are still patriotic and loyal to our country and they are doing everything they possibly can to protect our nation. Through their efforts the Joint Chiefs of Staff first learned about 90 days ago that missiles and bombs had been planted in American waters by the Soviet Union; but due to the Intelligence gap, they were unable to obtain complete information about them. Only when I publicly revealed this information last month, did they obtain it; and even then had I related to them privately instead of making it a public issue, Kissinger would still have been able to block any action to remove them.

The signs of our growing Intelligence gap are all around us. A few years ago the United States was believed to be far, far ahead in multiple warhead technology for missiles; yet as far

back as 1971, as I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14, short-range Soviet missiles with multiple nuclear warheads were found in our own waters.

A few years ago no real threat in naval aviation was anticipated from Russia, but two months ago, July 1976, the first Soviet Aircraft Carrier Kiev entered the Mediterranean through the Bosporus Straits boldly violating the 1936 Montreux Convention as it did so; and instead of the stubby little aircraft the Pentagon had expected, the Kiev carries sleek advanced aircraft comparable to the American F-4 Phantom with the additional capability of vertical take-off! And the Soviets are building at least four more carriers like the Kiev. It is now in the North Sea to bolster Soviet air power, which is a weak spot in that area for them.

The military philosophy of detente as expressed to me by a very high military official is, and I quote: "We watch what they're doing, and they watch what we're doing, and that's good. It prevents miscalculations." But, my friends, this means we are in a perpetual war game with all of our lives at stake; and because of the Intelligence gap that now exists, a miscalculation cannot be prevented. Instead, it becomes inevitable; and with it THERMONUCLEAR WAR.

Topic #3—Yesterday, September 24, 1976, Secretary of the Navy, J. William Middendorf II, delivered a very important briefing at the News Media luncheon of the American Security Council held at the Army-Navy Club here in Washington. He spoke of things that every American should be alerted about, but the major news media treated it as a non-event. The Baltimore Sun and the Washington Star carried stories which dealt with splinters from Secretary Middendorf's speech but missed the basic thrust of his comments. The Washington Post and the New York Times and the rest of our major media said nothing at all. Here at home another attempt to warn the American people has so far been muffled and silenced!

But half a world away, Radio Australia did give Secretary Middendorf's speech the attention it deserves—and they did not miss the point. Here is what Radio Australia had to say at 8:00 o'clock this morning EDT, quote:

"A warning that the growing strength of the Soviet Navy has created an emergency situation for the United States has been sounded in Washington by the Secretary of the Navy, Mr. William Middendorf. He also said that the emphasis being placed by the Soviet Union on Civil Defense has another ominous trend.

Mr. Middendorf said the Soviet Union now has 345 submarines, many of them nuclear-powered and armed with missiles capable of hitting every city in the United States. In contrast, the United States has only 169 submarines. Mr. Middendorf said that it is evidence by the Soviet Union that the 40,000-ton Kiev-class Aircraft Carriers, with four more believed to be under construction, was another ominous change for the near future. Mr. Middendorf said that while the Soviet Union was producing submarines and warships by leaps and bounds, the United States Navy had been almost cut in half to 474 ships over the past six years."

Is the Secretary of the Navy crying "Wolf"? I submit he is not, knowing what we know. In International Law, mining the harbors of another country is an act of war. The Soviet Union has already invaded our territorial waters, not merely with mines but with hydrogen bombs and multiple-warhead nuclear missiles. By contrast, we have placed no such weapons around the Soviet

Union—so the actions already taken by the Soviets are acts of war and pure aggression.

As I say these words, an undeclared submarine war is going on between the Soviet Union and the United States in the waters surrounding our country. So far it is still at the stage of maneuvering for attack on the part of the Soviets, who now have nearly half of their submarine force surrounding the United States. The challenge before us now is to prevent this from escalating into all-out war, as planned by the Soviet Union. To do this, we must all understand what we are up against.

As I explained several months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13, WAR DOES NOT JUST HAPPEN! It is planned and triggered deliberately by those whose lust for power is more important to them than the lives of their fellow men. Conspiracy and double-cross are standard practice in such things. The threat of nuclear attack by the Soviet Union that hangs over us right now is tied directly to a three-way power struggle involving the Rockefellers on one side, the Soviet Union on the other, and in the middle Henry Kissinger who serves both sides!

The four Rockefeller Brothers, of course, have been double-crossing and using the American people for decades—economically, politically, and in wars for their own enrichment and expansion of power. These things I've revealed in my previous tapes, but in particular they have been working hand in hand with the Soviet Union. Now, the Soviet Union is double-crossing them, trying to use their immense military might, which has been built up with Rockefeller aid, in order to seize complete world domination in a flash.

For 20 years Henry Kissinger has been a key Rockefeller agent in the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance, and in recent years has been the exclusive—I repeat, the exclusive—negotiator with the Soviets in many sensitive areas behind closed doors. But Kissinger sees the handwriting on the wall. He knows Nelson Rockefeller is trying to push President Gerald Ford aside to take over. Now if that happens, Rockefeller will be within reach of the Dictatorship he has craved for so long, and Kissinger will have outlived his usefulness to the Rockefeller Brothers, becoming instead a dangerous liability because of what he knows.

Kissinger has now tilted towards the Soviet Union, whom he thinks will be the winner in this struggle. Not only has he created the Intelligence gap I told you about earlier, but he has also used his unique position to withhold certain critical information even from the four Rockefeller Brothers! Not only did he negotiate the agreements between the Rockefellers and the Soviets concerning the "NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE" for the benefit of the Rockefeller Brothers in the planned war to come; but it is he, Henry Kissinger, who also conspired with the Kremlin for the Soviet double-cross that is now under way! The military threat we now face is tied very closely to political maneuverings here in the United States. Nelson Rockefeller at this late date still wants to get Ford out of the way as quickly as possible in the hope that he can turn even this dangerous situation we now face to his own benefit.

The financial scandal against President Ford that Rockefeller has had ready to spring for many months is now under way in the form of the investigation of Ford by the Watergate Special Prosecutor's office. But the Soviet threat is real, the time is short; and, therefore, as Nelson Rockefeller himself keeps saying, "Anything can happen."

Once he seizes the power of the presidency, Nelson Rockefeller will have the option of declaring a "National Emergency" to help meet this missile threat, thereby activating all of the dictatorial controls that are provided for in Executive Order 11921, which I discussed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14. This is not affected by the bill signed by President Ford on September 14, 1976, which has been falsely represented in some quarters as eliminating the emergency powers of the president.

Meanwhile Soviet military forces are now being deployed in offensive positions. In Europe over 4000 Soviet tanks have now been deployed along the borders next to West Germany and Austria. Soviet naval and amphibious forces are ready for action in the area of the Baltic and North Seas, but most ominous of all is the deployment of Soviet submarines around the shores of the United States. In recent days, Soviet submarines have been swarming into position at battle stations along our East, West, and Gulf Coasts. As of today, September 25, 1976, there are at least 142 Soviet submarines in position, lined up at precise intervals up and down the East and West Coasts of the United States and concentrated especially in the Gulf of Mexico. The number of Soviet submarines now in position around us is almost equal to the entire submarine force of the United States—which are scattered world-wide.

One major advantage the Soviet Union has in this situation is the ability of the Soviet Naval Command to maintain continuous contact with any or all of its submarines. This is a capability which the United States Navy has been trying to obtain for over a decade by means of "PROJECT SEAFARER" which has been thwarted time and time again. But the Soviet system of communication with its submarines is far more advanced even than our Project Seafarer would be, and enables the Soviet submarine force to operate in close coordination, reacting quickly to any changes in plans .

Most of the Soviet submarines now at battle stations around the United States are in readiness for direct participation in warfare. However, certain subs are also still at work planting underwater missiles along our shores. For this purpose, the Soviets have a special type of missile-laying sub that is small, highly maneuverable, and able to operate in shallow waters and relatively tight quarters. The missiles themselves are also relatively small due to their short range and their use of satellite guidance. And these special submarines are very difficult for our Undersea Sonar Detection Nets to pick up because the hull is treated in such a way that it absorbs sonar signals instead of reflecting them. By moving slowly, these submarines also avoid making sound that might be picked up by passive sonar sensors. Thus they move in and out of our waters at will, planting missiles and bombs wherever they choose. Thanks to the detailed information handed over by Henry Kissinger, the Soviet Union has been able to turn our undersea sonar nets into another Maginot line.

Since I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 last month, additional missiles and bombs have been planted around the world in certain locations besides the United States. In particular, the British Isles were ringed by 23 new underwater missiles as of September 21, 1976. On that date, I relayed complete information to British Intelligence so that the Royal Navy can once again take action to remove them.

Elsewhere around the world the situation has not changed drastically except in the case of Latin America. As of last month, the Soviet Union still had not planted underwater missiles

in positions to threaten Latin America; but now they, too, are targeted. Mexico has six missiles in its coastal waters. British Honduras, Honduras, and Guatemala have one each, while three missiles now infest the waters off Costa Rica.

The underwater missile which originally threatened the Panama Canal from the north end has been removed by the United States Navy, but now the Soviet Union has planted three new missiles to the south of the Canal in the Gulf of Panama.

One is at

Latitude 7 52' 20" North Longitude 79-35-22 West

The second Panama missile is at

18-19-24 North 78-58-12 West

and the third is at

7-57-17 North 78-37-54 West.

One missile lies off the coast of Surinam, two missiles lie off Ecuador, and Peru is also targeted by two missiles. Chile has three missiles in the waters nearby. Argentina and Brazil are targeted by two missiles each.

Last month I mentioned that the nuclear missiles in Guyana which were formerly located around the huge Atkinson Airfield near Georgetown had been moved south to a new location. As of now, they have been moved again, slightly north and west to the new position:

5- 29-33 North 58-55-53 West.

In addition, there is now a Missile Resupply Base for Soviet subs northwest of Georgetown, Guyana, at

6- 56-24 North 58-25-27 West.

At present the Soviet submarines are also being resupplied with nuclear missiles at stations in Cuba and Nicaragua where Castro has been working very quietly. In Cuba there is a Nuclear Depot near the north coast northwest of Camaguey at:

Latitude 22-7-37 North Longitude 78-21-32 West.

Until recently, offensive missiles were also installed in undersea concrete silos along the north and south coasts of Cuba, ready to fire at the southern United States and the Panama Canal, but these have now been taken up.

In Nicaragua the Nuclear Depot is on the east coast at: Latitude 12-49-42 North Longitude 83-50-45 West.

These resupply depots are making it possible for the Soviet submarine fleet to give the United States Navy a very difficult time .

On September 16 I gave General Brown a list of 48 new sites around the United States where missiles and bombs have been planted during the first two weeks of September. Two days later the United States Navy was fast at work picking them up, and by now has removed practically all of them; but we pick up one and the Soviets lay down another.

Using their missile-laying submarines, the Soviets have planted seven more missiles in new locations around the United States since my meeting with General Brown. As of yesterday afternoon, the United States Navy had already found and removed two of these new ones—one northeast of Vero Beach, Florida; the other southeast of Jacksonville, Florida.

As of today, four of the other five are still in place in the following locations:

Near Miami, Florida at:

25-19-0 North 80-12-50 West

In the southwest end of Pamlico Sound, North Carolina, at: 35-4-20 North 76-30-20 West.

In the northeast end of Pamlico Sound about 20 miles south of Kitty Hawk, North Carolina at:

35-40-0 North 75-38-50 West.

And near Valdez, Alaska, at:

60-51-50 North 147-5-0 West.

The other new missile was planted Sunday night, September 20, 1976, near Bloodsworth Island in Chesapeake Bay at: 38-12-25 North 76-11-55 West but is now being removed.

The Bloodsworth Island missile is a special case, and I will have more to say about it in a moment. Before I do that though, it is important to mention a diabolical new trick the Soviet Union is now trying in an effort to confuse the United States Navy long enough to replant enough missiles in our waters for an attack. Some sites which have been cleared by the United States Navy are now being used to replant new underwater missiles very close to the exact location used before. The Soviets anticipate that when these locations are given to the United States Navy they will be entered on the Master Plot in use by our Navy, and at that point it will of course be noticed that the new report corresponds to a location where a missile has been removed. The natural assumption would be, therefore, that such a new report was simply a repetition of an earlier report and was now out-of-date. If this happens, the new missile will be overlooked and will not be removed. Just to make sure, however, the Soviet Union is placing the new missiles just far enough from the previous location to prevent our Navy from discovering them by anything less than a complete new search of the area.

As of approximately noon yesterday, I can confirm two new missiles which have been newly planted at old locations this way.

One is near Gulfport, Mississippi, at

Latitude 30-17-20 North Longitude 89-18-25 West.

The other is near Mobile, Alabama, at

Latitude 30-38-40 North Longitude 87-59-0 West.

Both of these sites are almost identical to the ones which I gave to General Brown on September 16 and which had been cleared by September 21.

A moment ago I mentioned a new underwater missile that was planted last Sunday night, September 20, in Chesapeake Bay near Bloodsworth Island, which is about midway between Baltimore, Maryland, and Norfolk, Virginia. The small missile-laying submarine installed the Bloodsworth Island missile at 10:30 PM EDT, and then headed back south toward Norfolk, Virginia. As of 10:00 AM the following morning, Monday September 21, this small submarine with at least one more thermonuclear weapon on board, was close to the mouth of Chesapeake Bay, but had stopped and was playing possum on the bottom. Its location was about 10 miles northeast of Norfolk, Virginia, at:

Latitude 37-6-20 North Longitude 76-7-10 West.

Upon receiving this information, I immediately called General Brown's office and relayed this information to Captain Sidney V. Wright, Jr.

Here was a chance for the United States Navy to catch one of the Soviet missile-laying submarines red-handed. By the time you hear this, the Bloodsworth Island missile planted last Sunday night by this submarine will be gone, thanks to the action now in progress by the United States Navy; but as of now, the submarine is still there. This Soviet missile-laying submarine will stay there complete with its cargo of mass destruction until our Navy pulls it up and takes it away because, my friends, the small Soviet submarine now resting on the bottom of the Chesapeake Bay has become a tomb for its crew. Something went wrong with its power plant, and now the Soviet crew is dead. The sub itself, still loaded with nuclear weapons, has now become a gigantic mine in the waters near the biggest naval concentration in the United States, and so it will remain unless and until it is removed by the United States Navy.

My friends, the threat of war from the Soviet Union has never before been as great nor as imminent as it is now. But I remain firmly convinced that, even now, a shooting war can still be prevented. Our fate remains in YOUR hands; but now I believe more than ever that the American people, when told the truth, are equal to the task. Congressmen and Senators write letters to President Ford or Henry Kissinger and get no satisfactory response; but YOU, you opened the door for communication between General George S. Brown, who heads our country's military establishment, and myself, and I thank you from the very bottom of my heart.

Now I ask you to get behind General Brown in the same way. This is more important than I can express because General Brown, handicapped by the Intelligence gap created by Henry Kissinger, is confronted by many opposing forces within the federal government who, unlike General Brown, are not loyal to the United States.

As soon as you finish listening to this tape, I ask you, PLEASE, to send a letter, telegram, or Mailgram to General Brown expressing your support. It took great courage from the standpoint of his own career for General Brown to see me at all, yet he overruled his staff in insisting upon doing so. And under General Brown's command, with the approval of President Ford as Commander in Chief, the United States Navy has acted and has so far been able to fend off the intended surprise nuclear attack by the Soviet Navy.

Send your letters and telegrams to:

General George S. Brown

Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff

Washington, D.C. 20301.

Thank him for seeing me, thank him for taking action, and tell him you are behind him. By doing this, my friends, YOU can help strengthen Gen. Brown's hand against those who would rather see inaction or outright surrender to the Soviet Union. Remember: YOUR VOICE COUNTS.

If God will grant us the time and the wisdom to do so, I believe the war which is now so close can still be averted; but I would not be honest if I did not urge you to take such precautions as you can for your own protection in the event war

does come. The Soviet Union has a massive Civil Defense program to enable it to survive nuclear war. No such preparations have been made in the United States except for the so-called "Federal Relocation Arc", a network of 96 virtually bomb-proof underground cities in which many of the Government officials, who have betrayed us into war, will be able to ride it out in safety and comfort. So the rest of us, who are considered expendable, are left to fend for ourselves.

Almost two years ago, looking ahead to this situation, I recorded my first tape for AUDIO BOOKS. INC. entitled: "HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THE THIRD WORLD WAR." The exact timetable and some other details have changed since then due to unexpected obstacles and failures which the four Rockefeller Brothers have encountered, including now their double-cross by the Soviet Union; but the measures I suggested then are still the ones I would suggest now in order to protect yourself and your family. Highly informed individuals who know from their own sources that my present warnings are correct, are actively preparing their own bomb shelters right now just in case the worst should happen. But as I said in conclusion to that first tape two years ago, what we could accomplish to protect ourselves individually was one thing, and what we can accomplish working together was quite another. Now, as then, that is where my real hopes lie; and now, my friends, we are working together to save our beloved country. If we will continue without losing heart, and if we will all show our overwhelming support for General Brown, then I have the feeling that we're going to do it. It may sound too good to be true—but then, so did the concept of FREEDOM that became the United States of America 200 years ago!

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #17

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is October 26, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 17.

Four months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13 I reported the presence of a Soviet nuclear weapon at Seal Harbor, Maine, placed where it could destroy the summer homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller. The rulers of the Soviet Union were embarking on an all-out double-cross of their long time allies, the four Rockefeller Brothers; and for the past four months we have been in the grip of the "Soviet Missile Crisis of 1976"—a fact of which most Americans are still unaware. The month before this crisis began, in May 1976, I had revealed the rapidly mounting fears of certain Trustees of the key Rockefeller-controlled foundations that such a Soviet double-cross was imminent.

More than half a century ago a commitment was formed for the creation of a One-World collectivist government to be ruled by a mere handful of wealthy, immensely powerful individuals. This drive, which long ago crystallized into the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance, had been aided and abetted by the Trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled group of foundations; but they have opened Pandora's box, unleashing forces they can no longer control. Certain of the Trustees realized this even before the actual Soviet double-cross began. But the Gang of Four, the four Rockefeller Brothers, could not bring themselves to believe it until the Seal Harbor H-bomb was found by the United States Navy.

Now they know beyond any doubt that a Soviet double-cross has been in progress against them—as well as against the rest of us. But still the Rockefeller Brothers have not learned their lesson. They still think that they can get back to business as usual with their Soviet allies in their joint program for world domination. And for the moment, the Soviet Union is doing everything possible to encourage this false impression strictly as a tactic. The Soviet Union was robbed of the element of surprise by my disclosures in monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15, and they are trying to lull the Rockefeller Brothers back to sleep so that they can be successfully disposed of a little later on.

Beyond that, the Soviets did not expect to be caught in their program of planting underwater missiles for a surprise attack; and because they were caught and their missiles were removed during August and September, they are proceeding with extra caution right now. And so for the moment the alliance between the four Rockefeller Brothers and the Soviet Union is functioning, but it is now a false alliance. The Soviet rulers are just biding their time, watching and preparing for another chance to eliminate the Rockefellers and seize the whole world for themselves.

Meanwhile you and I are again under attack jointly by the Rockefellers and the Soviet Union. In a vain attempt to save their own lives, the Brothers are bargaining away millions of ours. At this moment the United States and Canada are once again encircled by Soviet underwater missiles and prowling submarines; but now, since Friday, October 1, 1976, the missiles are no longer being removed!

Here are my topics for today:

Topic #1—RED FRIDAY AND THE CAMPAIGN TO DESTROY GENERAL GEORGE S. BROWN

Topic #2—THE SWINE FLU COVER-UP FOR CHEMICAL WARFARE NOW UNDER WAY

Topic #3—THE PHANTOM ELECTION OF 1976.

Topic #1—Last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 16 I reviewed for you the events that had taken place in the Soviet Underwater Missile Crisis since recording AUDIO LETTER No. 15 in early August. As I pointed out, Air Force General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, had so far played a crucial role in preventing a Soviet surprise attack on the United States, thanks to the actions taken by American Armed Forces under his command. In August he had obtained the go-ahead from President Ford, as Commander in Chief, to seek out and remove the Soviet underwater missiles in our coastal waters. A remarkable achievement, because Ford had to overrule Rockefeller agent Henry Kissinger in giving this order!

Using the navigational coordinates I revealed in my August tape, the United States Navy was able to remove all the Soviet missiles in our territorial waters during the latter part of August. On September 1, 1976, with the threat presumed to be over, General Brown wrote me a letter, which was widely publicized, seemingly dismissing my charges, but actually opening the door for communication between us.

On September 7 I had information about a new round of missiles that were being planted by the Soviets. I wrote General Brown to request a meeting, and on September 16, 1976, I met with him at

the Pentagon in his office for well over an hour. During that meeting I gave him the navigational coordinates for 48 new Soviet missiles threatening the United States and Canada from locations in our territorial waters—and again he ordered prompt action by the United States Navy to start removing them. But as I warned last month, the Soviet Union is not giving up; and on top of that, General Brown confronts terrible opposition WITHIN the federal government! So I asked you to express your support for General Brown to strengthen his hand for our country's benefit.

Now you can begin to see why. On October 17, 1976, selected excerpts from an interview with General Brown were leaked to the press a week prior to publication. These comments, taken out of context, made it appear that General Brown was disparaging certain of our allies; and instantly General Brown was at the center of a storm of controversy. General Brown is being criticized now for remarks in a six-month-old interview which was rejected for publication then, yet has magically surfaced now! Certain individuals have arranged for the story to be made public at this time as an indirect means of attack that obscures the facts. The real reason for efforts to get rid of him is his dedication to our country's defense.

What is happening now to General Brown is standard practice in Washington today. The idea is to get something on someone, anything, that can be made to look bad by the media, and put it in his dossier for future use. Thus a dark cloud is always handy later on in case it is needed to blackmail, or destroy, or intimidate someone.

In General Brown's case, he was set up with this particular cloud by none other than his boss, Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, who was the CIA contact man in the White House and is still a CIA operative now.

Last spring a political writer and cartoonist drew a cartoon of Rumsfeld, and Rumsfeld called him to ask if he could have the original. The political writer agreed, and it was also agreed between them that Rumsfeld would get Brown to give the political writer an interview. The interview was not used at that time, six months ago. Even when General Brown was questioned intensively by the Senate two months later when his confirmation for a second two-year term as Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff was being decided upon, the interview still did not emerge. But now, after helping prevent thermonuclear war for over two months, by doing his duty Brown is in hot water.

The Rockefeller Brothers are making a desperate effort to put things right back on track with the Soviet Union, and they have decided that Brown must go as part of the price of reinstating so-called detente. The controversy now surrounding Brown is intended to build up until he resigns, is dismissed, or loses his influence and credibility. This is totally unrelated to the election, contrary to appearances.

In this situation, it is more important than ever that you show your support for General Brown. His enemies are trying to bring him down by means of a battle he must fight with both hands tied behind his back. If he were to publicly reveal one word about the Soviet missile crisis and his role in combatting it—in other words, the real reasons for his present troubles—General Brown could be instantly dismissed, court-martialed, and imprisoned! And speaking out, he would be rewarded with personal disaster; and the major media, under the thumb of the gang of the Four Brothers, would then pull out all the stops in a campaign to discredit whatever he said so that no one would believe it. By

the same token, if Senate Bill No. 1 promoted by Attorney General Levi had passed earlier this year, I, too, could be imprisoned for telling you the truth about the Soviet missiles aimed at you because, my friends, this information is classified "Top Secret", not because the Government wants to keep anything from the Soviets, they know all about their own offensive weapons planted in our waters—it is YOU that the Government wants to keep in the dark for their own protection, not yours!

Even if you have already written to General Brown to express your support, I urge you to do so again by letter, telegram, or Mailgram. My good friend Mr. Edward Durell, an industrialist who lives in Berryville, Virginia, is urging his associates to write their Congressmen showing their support for General Brown, and to send a copy of each letter to:

General George S. Brown Chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff Grant Avenue, Fort Myer Arlington, Virginia 22211.

I think this is an exc same. You may want to send copies to General to:

ellent suggestion, an write to both of you Brown as well. Just

d I urge you to do the r Senators too, and address your letter

Congressman (or Senator) so-and-so House (or Senate) Office Building Washington, D.C. ... The zip is:

20515 for the House Office Bldg.

20510 for the Senate Office Bldg.

The controversy over General Brown, my friends, is only the most visible part of a terrible reversal in our country's fortunes that has occurred this month. The turning point came on October 1, 1976, a "RED Friday" for the United States of America. That was the day that President Gerald Ford caved in to pressure from the Rockefeller-Soviet-Kissinger team.

Two closely related events took place on October 1, 1976:

One was the appearance in the Washington Post of a story by Woodward and Bernstein, no less, that the Watergate Special Prosecutor's investigation of President Ford was (quote) "serious." The story, complete with big headlines, shook the Stock Market where rumors circulated that Ford was about to step down. But, most importantly, Ford himself was given a clear signal that swift political destruction awaited him if he did not play ball with the Rockefellers. Originally, Nelson Rockefeller had arranged for the Watergate-related investigation of Ford as a means of forcing Ford from office and in putting himself in position as "Acting President" under the 25th Amendment to the Constitution; but due to the Soviet Missile Crisis, that scenario has been scrapped because the Watergate Prosecutor's investigation was used instead to apply pressure for a different purpose.

That different purpose had to do with the second major event that took place on Red Friday, October 1—the visit to the White House by Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko! It was reported that Gromyko's reception at the White House was the coolest it had ever been since Ford became President—and no wonder. When Gromyko told reporters afterward that he and Ford, quote: "spoke of the most cardinal issues" he was deadly serious. He was referring not to SALT talks or the Middle East but to the threat of war between the Soviet Union and the United States.

When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 16 last month on September 25, the second round of Soviet underwater missiles, whose locations I had given to General Brown during our meeting on September 16, had practically all been removed by our Navy. But the Soviets were already beginning to plant a third round of these missiles, using the missile-laying mini-subs I described last month, which are specially designed to elude detection by our coastal sonar defenses.

As of September 25, one of these Soviet mini-subs was resting on the bottom of Chesapeake Bay near Norfolk, Virginia. A mishap had killed the crew, so the mini-sub was resting there like a giant nuclear mine in American waters waiting for the Navy to recover it. Meanwhile over 142 Soviet submarines were deployed in attack positions along the East, West, and Gulf coasts of the United States. During those last few days of September there were growing indications that the Soviet missile crisis might actually break out into the open for all to see, just as it must do if the Soviet plans for nuclear attack world-wide are to be stopped.

For example, a speech which I mentioned last month delivered on September 24 by Navy Secretary William Middendorf used the word "emergency" three times to describe our present naval plight, and concluded his speech in the words, and I quote:

"Our concern today is the future. The ominous words of Admiral Gorshkov and the cold steel of his ships tell us that we are in an emergency situation right now. Something must be done. The threat is real, and the choice is ours. We must make the right decisions now while we have these few precious moments of freedom left, or be willing to suffer the consequences."

Then on September 27, 1976, the Norfolk, Virginia Ledger-Star newspaper published an article by reporters Garland Bradshaw and Jack Kestner who had flown to Washington on September 23 to interview me about my charges of Soviet underwater missiles. The article did exactly what honest journalism is supposed to do. It exposed the readers of the Ledger-Star to the fact that I have charged the Soviet Union with planting offensive nuclear weapons in our territorial waters, and did so in a fair, objective way. They did not try to convince their readers either to believe or disbelieve my charges, but included background information on both sides as available from their own sources. The important thing is that the Ledger-Star reported fairly about my charges to a readership that can be considered an expert audience about such things, since the Norfolk area is the biggest naval concentration in the United States.

Yes, things were beginning to break into the open—but then came Red Friday October 1. President Ford and White House aide William Hyland met with Gromyko, Henry Kissinger, and Kissinger's State Department Counselor, Helmut Sonnenfeldt. Gromyko demanded that the Soviet Union be permitted to sneak into Chesapeake Bay to recover their dead missile-laying mini-sub near Norfolk. In return for that, Gromyko said the Soviet submarines deployed at battle stations along our coasts would disperse. Kissinger and Sonnenfeldt counseled Ford to agree to this offer by Gromyko as a reasonable and sound compromise. As always, Ford was confronted with the standard Kissinger option: "Do you want peace? Or war?" And on top of that, Ford knew that the Watergate-related political time bomb was all set to go off if he resisted, and so he caved in and agreed. Blackmail and threats won the day for the Soviet Union!

The same day, Henry Kissinger pressed his advantage and also induced Ford to issue a secret Presidential Order to the Military from that day onward to flatly deny all my charges when asked about them. In other words, they are now under presidential orders to lie in order to keep the truth about the Soviet missiles from the public. This blackout on the Soviet missile story is not for the purpose of avoiding a confrontation with the Soviets, because that has already occurred; and it is not for the purpose of buying time while we get into a better military posture. Since Red Friday, October 1, the third round of Soviet missiles, which have been newly planted around our country, are still there! The blackout, my friends, is only to keep YOU in the dark.

This situation here stands out even more boldly when compared with the behavior of some of our allies who are now alerted to Soviet plans. Ironically October 1, 1976, the day President Ford caved in to the Soviet Union, was the same day that the Irish Navy successfully concluded a naval confrontation with the Soviets on the high seas. A huge Soviet fishing trawler, so called, was caught operating illegally inside the Irish 12-mile limit near Cork Harbor the previous day, and the Irish fishery protection vessel, L. E. Grenay, went after the trawler to make an arrest. The trawler fled into international waters, but the Irish vessel gave chase, brought the trawler to a halt by firing warning shots across her bow, and sent a boarding party aboard. The Soviet Captain was totally uncooperative, but the Irish sent reinforcements, and ultimately had more than 50 men aboard the Soviet ship. The Soviet trawler entered Cork Harbor under arrest with the Irish boarding party still aboard and accompanied by two Irish naval vessels. It was correctly reported by the Cork Examiner newspaper for Friday October 1, 1976, that, quote:

"The confrontation was regarded as the biggest and potentially most dangerous that the naval service has faced in its history of fishery protection."

The Irish were prepared to apply whatever force proved to be necessary to arrest the intruding Soviet ship. And why? Because Cork Harbor itself is one of the locations from which a Soviet underwater nuclear weapon was removed by the Royal Navy in August, using information in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15. The Irish now know quite simply that no intruding Soviet ship is to be trusted.

But here in the United States the Soviet Navy was allowed to intrude into our waters Monday night, October 4, under the RED FRIDAY AGREEMENT reached between Ford and Gromyko in the White House. At approximately 10:00 PM local time the Soviets retrieved the dead mini-sub from its position on the bottom of Chesapeake Bay outside Norfolk, operating under cover of darkness. The missile-laying mini-sub left the Norfolk area that night in Soviet hands—and with it went what may have been our only chance to learn the details of the technology of the mini-subs and their sonar-defeating system so that we could begin defending ourselves against them. At the same time we lost a golden opportunity to galvanize the whole world into standing with us against an all-out common foe, the Soviet Union, by announcing the capture of the mini-sub, displaying it on television, and revealing what the Soviets had been doing with these subs.

If our country were run today by civilians of integrity, honor, and courage who were trying to serve the people of the United States of America instead of trying to merge our lives with that of the Soviet Union, such a thing could have been done.

Swift action could have been taken to do this after I first notified the Pentagon of the presence of the mini-sub near Norfolk on Monday, September 20; but NO, that's not the way it works today. All opportunities for the United States to act sensibly for the good of its people must be suppressed, sabotaged, thrown away. Only in this way can we be ground down to such a low level of life that the goal of the White House Merge Directive can finally be achieved. That Directive, in existence for decades, is to the effect that our lives are to be so altered that they can be comfortably merged with life in the Soviet Union.

By the following day, the Soviet submarines at battle stations along our shores had dispersed, as agreed; but within a few more days they were back again—and they are there now. They are not at this time deployed in the precise patterns that they were in a month ago, which indicated readiness for an immediate attack, but they are present in international waters just off our shores in great numbers. As of October 11, 1976, 164 Soviet submarines were on station in the waters near Canada and the United States, including Hawaii; and the situation has not changed significantly since then.

Since Red Friday, October 1, I have been cut off from contact with General Brown, and none of the Soviet underwater missiles in Canadian and American waters have been removed since that day. As of now, 50 Soviet nuclear missiles and bombs are planted in American territorial waters plus the three (3) missiles in the Gulf of Panama whose coordinates I gave last month. In addition, seven (7) missiles are now planted in Canadian waters, whose coordinates I have already given to Canadian Intelligence.

My friends, there will be no effort by the United States Navy to remove the nuclear missiles in our waters unless it is forced by a new surge of public awareness and demand for action, because Nelson Rockefeller's wife arrived in Moscow and on October 12 delivered a personal letter from Nelson Rockefeller to the Kremlin. In this hand-delivered letter Nelson Rockefeller made the following pledges to the Kremlin on behalf of the "Gang of Four", quote:

"There will be no further harassment of your submarines, nor will your underwater missiles and bombs be taken up. The credit squeeze by banking circles will be lifted. You will not be required to sell gold. We will send gold for products delivered. American know-how, grains, and food stuffs will continue to be provided. You must reinstate the 'NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE' agreement."

The coordinates of all the Soviet weapons now in American territorial waters have been transmitted to a number of reliable men in the United States Intelligence Community, except for the newest missile, which was planted three days ago in Delaware Bay at:

39 39' 35" North 75 32' 20" West.

Action will therefore be possible if the Military can once again be free to do its job.

At least Great Britain, which had 29 new Soviet nuclear weapons in her waters as of October 11, 1976, is taking action once again to get rid of them. By October 22, four days ago, the Royal Navy had removed all but 10 of them, and is still fast at work. As for Latin America, all the missiles I revealed last month are still there with two exceptions—British Honduras and Guatemala were targeted by one missile each, but these have now been removed.

Our controlled major media tell us nothing at all about the Soviet missile threat that is ready to engulf us in thermonuclear war, but instead divert our attention to the case of the Navy F-14 fighter that plunged off a carrier deck into the North Sea six weeks ago on September 14, 1976. Great attention is being given to the F-14, and we are being fed all sorts of lies that the Soviet MiG-25 Foxbat flown to Japan by a defecting pilot is hopelessly inferior to the F-14. But the Soviet Navy hasn't even bothered to try to retrieve the plane. They already know all about the F-14, and it doesn't worry them.

As for the Phoenix Missile which separated from the F-14 when it hit the water, the Soviets know where it is too, but have not yet picked it up. The Phoenix Missile is resting on an underwater plateau far to the south-southeast of the point where the F-14 was found. The coordinates of the Phoenix Missile are:

61-26-6 North, 1-23-16 West.

And so, my friends, the great war game continues. Our Armed Services are allowed to participate in NATO and other training exercises, but are forbidden by Rockefeller hired hands from doing anything about the real life-and-death threat now lurking within our own territorial waters. We are being made sitting ducks for attack; and, in fact, we have already been attacked by the Soviet Navy because on October 3, two days after Red Friday, the Soviet submarines along our East, West, and Gulf coast performed an experiment in radioactive chemical warfare with all of us as the guinea pigs.

Topic #2—On October 5, 1976, just as the so-called "SWINE FLU" inoculation program was getting under way, news reports suddenly told us that we were experiencing fallout from an alleged Chinese atmospheric nuclear blast on September 26. Oddly enough, the initial reports about this came from the East Coast, especially Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Connecticut; but certain areas of the Pacific Northwest were soon mentioned as being affected too. We were told that radioactive iodine-131 was showing up in milk at various locations; but we were also assured, as we invariably are whenever any radioactive hazard appears, that there was really no danger.

In the days that followed we continued to hear about the supposed Chinese fallout, but other things probably seemed even more worrisome. For example, elderly people began dying of heart attacks shortly after taking swine flu shots, causing widespread alarm at first. But the Government quickly assured us that their deaths didn't really matter at all, that they would have died anyway; and the swine flu inoculation program went right back into high gear.

And then there were the strange outbreaks of an unknown "mystery illness" at electronics plants in western Pennsylvania, Ohio, and Oregon. The employees, most of them women, experienced headaches, nausea, stomach pains, difficulty in breathing, a feeling of being intoxicated in some cases, and even fainting spells. This time the swine flu vaccine could not be the culprit because the victims had not received it. Instead, some were worried that the swine flu itself had struck. Others remembered, with a shiver, the equally mysterious "Legionnaires Disease" that had sickened nearly 200 people in Philadelphia and killed more than two dozen of them two months earlier.

My friends, there is actually no mystery at all behind these developments and more like them that you can expect to see. All of these cases I have mentioned are man-made and deliberate, but

those who are responsible for them are neither telling you about them nor leaving clues that will be found in normal medical investigations of these episodes. We in the United States are now under attack in a campaign of experimental testing of chemical warfare weapons so that they can be employed later on with precision and devastating effect against us in full scale war—that is, if we let it happen.

For years all the major countries of the world have been in a continuing race against time to discover ever more sophisticated forms of bacterial and chemical weapons, some of them amounting to doomsday weapons capable of destroying all life on this planet. Only mad men would even consider using such weapons, but only mad men deliberately cause wars for their own greedy purposes, too—and war is very near at hand right now.

A few years ago a nerve gas called sarin was perfected in a facility in Colorado. A tiny amount escaped, and two shepherds and their 7000 sheep were killed. In response to the public outcry that resulted, a statement was issued that the Chemical Warfare Service had destroyed the sarin gas and was no longer doing such research—but that was a lie. Experimentation still continues today on all kinds of such poisons, and at a furious pace.

As of right now, many hideous lethal ailments can be inflicted on whole populations as operational weapons. These include black plague, smallpox, meningitis, dysentery, gangrene, yellow fever, tetanus, botulism, typhus, hepatitis, Bang's disease, and Q fever. Thirty grams of Q fever is sufficient to infect over 150-million people, and it is considered especially convenient since any individuals who are to be saved in such an attack can first be immunized against it! Such selective immunization could easily be done, for example, under the cover of a mass inoculation program like the swine flu program.

Q fever, though, is mild by comparison to a nuclear gas called AP-7 which is being manufactured in Uruguay and Argentina by American and European subsidiaries of Rockefeller-controlled conglomerate corporations. Two thimblefuls properly distributed could kill 180-million people; and one pound, all life on the face of the earth. Unless and until these hideous weapons are unleashed on the earth, they remain in a condition in which they can be destroyed and neutralized; and it is essential that they be destroyed instead of just being handed around from one agency to another, as Senator Frank Church permitted last year in his shellfish toxin shell game. But other types of chemical and biological weapons are also of great interest to weapons researchers which can be used in more selective ways or to produce lower-order effects than the poisons I have just described.

The Soviet KGB, which works hand in hand with the Rockefeller-controlled CIA, now has access to whole families of such chemical weapons which can be adjusted in exact dosage and formula to produce a variety of effects on victims. These were and are intended for use as part of the program to eliminate effective opposition by the people of the United States to the planned Rockefeller dictatorship here in America and our conversion into the most valuable of all slave nations for the Soviet Union.

Before these new weapons can be used with confidence though, they must be tested, and that testing is going on now. As a cover for the periodic episodes of strange illnesses that will occur here and there around the United States while this testing

is going on, the trumped-up swine flu threat was developed.

On March 24, 1976, President Ford announced his proposal for the unprecedented nation-wide inoculation program supposedly to fend off the strange swine flu virus. To this very day not a single case of swine flu has been confirmed anywhere in the United States since President Ford's announcement.

Last February in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 9 I revealed that the Government had panicked because of my disclosure that the Fort Knox Bullion Depository contained leaking canisters of deadly plutonium superpoison, and in January 197 6 dumped part of the poison into underground streams beneath Fort Knox. Later when the swine flu charade was announced, I was able to tell you of the Government's plan to use this device to cover up the real cause when and if the poison from Fort Knox began surfacing at various points in the southeastern United States and causing sickness and death. But it wasn't until July of this year 1976 that I received information about the rest of the swine flu story, and at that time the far more imminent threat of the Soviet missile crisis involving a Soviet double-cross of the four Rockefeller Brothers had to take precedence.

The reason that the Government concluded last January 197 6 that they could get away with dumping the plutonium poison from Fort Knox into underground streams, which would surely carry the poison elsewhere, was that the swine flu campaign had already been planned for another purpose. That purpose was to serve as a cover to explain the effects that would be caused when chemical warfare experimentation began, as planned, in July 1976 in our country. So when I revealed the presence of the leaking plutonium superpoison in the Central Core Vault of the Fort Knox Bullion Depository, they concluded that they could just dump some of it underground and cover up that, too, with the swine flu swindle.

In late July 1976 the joint KGB-CIA chemical warfare experimentation program began in Philadelphia at the American Legion Convention. A convenient test group was assembled, and it was exploited. Data was desired for the effects of a formulation of the new family of poisons on older men in particular, and the American Legion Convention was chosen as the perfect target. Aerosol spray cans containing poisoned room freshener were used to selectively saturate the atmosphere of the Legionnaires. Afterwards the special spray cans were taken from the hotel, leaving the city by airplane from a small airport on the northwest side of Philadelphia. Two of the active ingredients in the poison that produced the Legionnaires Disease were plutonium and zirconium.

The next experiment occurred late in August 197 6 about a month after the Legionnaire episode, and had quite a different purpose; and so a different poison formula was used. Plutonium was again an ingredient, as it is in the entire line of chemical warfare agents now being tested; but this time the formula was designed for very rapid effect with the victims receiving a massive dose. On a day late in August two Air Force C-141 Starlifter transport aircraft that were preparing to leave McGuire Air Force Base in New Jersey on flights over the Atlantic were sabotaged by the placement in their cockpits of concealed canisters of poison gas, rigged so that the gas would be released in flights without being detected. The two planes left McGuire at nearly the same time, and crashed within hours of one another when approaching separate destinations in Greenland and England. The very next day, with the wreckage of the aircraft hardly cooled, a Pentagon spokesman said, quote:

"Sabotage does not appear to be a factor. It's not even being considered as a factor."

Officials also said there was no apparent connection between the crashes. Apparently leaving the same Air Base at practically the same time and then crashing almost simultaneously without warning is not supposed to suggest the possibility of anything but coincidence. No doubt it is also coincidence that McGuire Air Force Base, the origin of these two strange fatal flights, is right next door to Fort Dix where the whole swine flu cover-up scare originated!

The successful experimental sabotage of the two C-141s provided valuable data to the Soviets, since it gave them some measure of the operational reliability of the formula used for that purpose. Now, when they are ready to wage war, they have another weapon tested and proven—the placement of canisters of poison gas in the cockpits of numerous Allied aircraft to make a shambles of our air power just when we need it most.

Next came the mystery disease in the electronics factories. This time more data on women was wanted, especially since the Legionnaires Disease did not kill many women. The ideal target would be some assembly plants containing a high proportion of female employees. To avoid too strong a public uproar, sublethal doses were used; but again a key active ingredient was plutonium, and many of the classic symptoms of radiation sickness were produced.

Finally in early October, this month, the first chemical warfare experiment was performed against the entire population of the United States. On October 3, while the huge fleet of Soviet submarines I told you about last month were still deployed at precise intervals very close to our shores, the submarines released a very fine dispersion of plutonium into the atmosphere along the Atlantic, Pacific, and Gulf coasts of the United States. Unlike normal fallout produced by nuclear weapons, the invisible clouds of plutonium from the Soviet submarines were released at relatively low altitudes. The theory was that the plutonium clouds released in this way would diffuse inward over land from all of our shorelines and ultimately settle mainly on North America with very little of it reaching high enough altitudes to be swept around the globe to the Soviet Union. But, my friends, this time they miscalculated and the nation-wide plutonium cloud experiment backfired.

Here is what happened: The early progress of the plutonium cloud was just as planned. The invisible clouds of plutonium diffused inward onto the East Coast and onto the Gulf Coast, and along the West Coast moved inland much more rapidly due to the assistance of prevailing westerly winds. By October 5 the expanding plutonium cloud had penetrated a hundred miles or so inland from the East and Gulf coasts and as far as the Rockies, where it entered from the Pacific Northwest. That was the day that the cover story about Chinese nuclear fallout suddenly appeared, pinpointing areas along the East coast and Pacific Northwest as being most heavily affected so far. Thus in case the Soviet plutonium cloud turned out to have unexpectedly strong effects, Red China had already been identified as the scapegoat. Over the next two days, the plutonium cloud gradually grew together over the midwestern United States, forming finally a continuous blanket over practically all of our land area. At the same time, the plutonium cloud had also been expanding outward as well as inward from our coastlines, and by October 8 large areas of Canada and Mexico were also affected. Prevailing winds were

also tending to move the expanding plutonium cloud eastward out over the Atlantic; and at this point things began departing from Soviet calculations.

In recent days there has been an extremely unusual shift in the position of the high altitude jet stream to a position much further south than normal. The jet stream has a lot to do with our weather; and in the case of the Soviet experimental plutonium cloud, it did enough by causing the plutonium cloud released by the Soviet subs to drift away from the United States sooner than expected and to settle all over the Soviet Union itself—definitely not according to plan. As of now, it has largely dissipated and does not continue to be a threat. The main problem that is left is that practically everyone in the United States plus much of Mexico, Canada, the British Isles, and Europe have suffered some exposure to this plutonium, though fortunately it was at a relatively low experimental level this time.

The best protective measure against radioactivity is, of course, to avoid it; and that is exactly what Nelson Rockefeller did, forewarned about the plutonium cloud to be released by the Soviet subs. When the plutonium drifted inward from our shores, Nelson and Happy Rockefeller just happened to be elsewhere, in London. After all, Nelson wants to stay as healthy as possible so that he can relish his planned elevation to the position he has craved for decades—President of the United States and of the World.

THE PHANTOM ELECTION OF 197 6

Topic #3—Nelson Rockefeller keeps saying, "I'm relaxed. I haven't got a worry", and seems from the generous media coverage he is now receiving to be almost a wistful, nostalgic figure fading from the public scene before our own eyes. Meanwhile, he is made to appear a refreshing point of interest against the background of a presidential campaign that has turned off millions of voters. But what is not being reported in the national press is the strenuous campaign Nelson Rockefeller is carrying on right now all over the country, currying the favor of members of Congress. What is actually going on now is that Nelson Rockefeller is down to his ninth and final scenario to become President. Barring some unforeseen development, he is now counting on his final backup plan to make him Chief Executive of the United States. All of his previous scenarios have been disrupted, one after another, and this is his last hurrah; and yet when he says "I'm relaxed", he means it because this time he is confident that he has it "in the bag."

The Rockefeller-controlled major media have from the start turned the presidential election 1976 into a media event, disfranchising the American electorate in the process. Now the media are making both Carter and Ford look unappetizing to vast numbers of voters, trying to insure both a low turn-out and a very close election. In addition, the Rockefellers have a spoiler in the race, Eugene McCarthy, for the young voters. Everything possible is being done to make sure that the outcome of the election on November 2 is very close and that no one gets a mandate. The plan is to create doubt as to the outcome, possibly even triggering demands for recounts. This situation will be used to focus public attention on the electoral college.

As you know, when you vote on Election Day you don't vote directly for a presidential candidate but for his elector; but unknown to the American people, certain key electors have already been reached by Rockefeller agents. On December 13, 1976, the

electors will do their voting. The results will then be sent for safekeeping to the president of the Senate, who just happens to be Nelson Rockefeller, and they will remain in his possession for over three weeks until January 6, 1977. On that day, acting in his official capacity, Rockefeller will open the envelopes containing the votes of the electors, and the votes will be tallied; and if all goes according to Nelson Rockefeller's plan, he will announce that no candidate has received the required 270 electoral votes and therefore that no one has been elected. Therefore, under the Constitution, Congress will then be required to select a President and Vice-President from among the leading candidates in the election. But things not being normal, Congress may not be able within the short space of two weeks to choose either a President or a Vice-President, so that as of noon, January 20, 1977, the United States of America will no longer have either a President or a Vice-President.

This plan, my friends, is the real reason why the usual elaborate preparation of inaugural facilities is not taking place this year. Instead, we are told folding chairs will be used—folding chairs for a folding election.

Nelson Rockefeller spent over 25-million dollars to get himself confirmed almost two years ago as Vice-President, so he still has a residue of good will in Congress. In addition, he is quietly courting Congressmen all over the country because he plans to be the likely choice of Congress to become Acting President with an open-ended term that carries no specific time limit. This will be according to Section 3 of the 20th Amendment of the United States Constitution. Once in that position, Nelson Rockefeller will begin consolidating his power with all possible speed. His goal: The declaration of a "National Emergency" invoking Executive Order 11921 signed very quietly by President Ford on June 11, 1976.

As I have explained in earlier tapes, our freedoms under the Constitution will be suspended if this Executive Order is used, and Nelson Rockefeller may well be on his way to making his dictatorship permanent. But should any candidate win by a landslide on Election Day, Rockefeller's plan will be rendered unworkable.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #18

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is November 20, 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 18.

As I speak with you today, we are drawing ever closer to being swallowed up by the evils unleashed two generations ago by a tight network of Foundation Trustees. Operating under a false cloak of philanthropy, supposedly for the benefit of others, they actually launched long-range programs designed to grab everything for themselves.

Claiming to improve education in the cause of freedom, they actually began replacing education with indoctrination in the cause of collectivism. And while painting themselves as champions of peace, they have led the world into war after war on the road to their version of "peace"—that is, an all-powerful

WORLD GOVERNMENT with themselves in control.

Blinded by the insatiable greed for power, they could not see that they were opening Pandora's box, setting forces in motion that would ultimately prove impossible to control. Only recently, with disaster looming up fast, have the present-day successors to those original Trustees begun awakening to this fact, too late to regain control. Now only the truth spread far and wide can avert total catastrophe.

Two years ago the United States of America plunged over the brink of a devastating economic collapse as the result of deliberate measures to create "stagflation", as I described in my 1973 book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR. But the process was arrested part way down because other aspects of the Master Plan for world domination were slipping behind schedule.

As I have related in detail in previous tapes, factors such as the still concealed Fort Knox Gold and Plutonium Scandals, reverses in the Middle East, Indira Gandhi's upset of the CIA in India, and other things have caused our Unseen Rulers enormous difficulties for over 18 months. But time is running out, and it is do-or-die for those who seek to enslave us. So now the United States has at last been pried loose from its temporary economic foothold and we are falling slowly but helplessly like a dreamer in a nightmare toward the dreaded economic depression far below.

Politically, the phantom election plan I revealed last month by which Nelson Rockefeller still plans to become America's chief executive is proceeding so far exactly as planned. Sixty-eight per cent of the voting precincts nation-wide had voting machines on November 2, 1976, and where they jammed all across the country there was no provision for paper ballots! Thousands of ballots were lost in certain areas, the legality of thousands of others is being challenged, and re-counts are under way in some places. The net result, exactly as planned, was an extremely close popular vote and no landslide for anyone. President Gerald Ford thought he had the election "in the bag", having been promised by Nelson Rockefeller that he would carry New York State, but the pained expression on Ford's face as his wife delivered his concession statement on November 3 was nothing compared to the shock that awaits Jimmy Carter if the plan now under way succeeds. Meanwhile, as the stage is being set for economic and political shocks in America, we drift ever closer to war and a "Declaration of National Emergency" that could spell the end of our freedoms, and the dangerous Intelligence gap created by Henry Kissinger continues.

When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17 on October 26, last month, I mentioned that the Soviet Union already knew where our lost Phoenix Missile was in the North Sea but had not retrieved it. I had just learned of the missile's location and revealed it in that tape. On October 27, the following day, as soon as the tape was released, I also relayed it to Military Intelligence. That same day Navy spokesmen told the press that they still had not located the Phoenix; but using the information I relayed to them, the Navy found and retrieved the Phoenix Missile on October 31. The United States Government would have you believe it is mere coincidence that they suddenly found the Phoenix after I revealed its location, even though the Navy had spent six weeks in a fruitless search prior to that!

There are also those who would have you believe that General George S. Brown, the top military officer in the United States, met with me for more than an hour on September 16, 1976 in his Pentagon office out of idle curiosity. And especially there are

many who want you to believe there will be no reason for the Soviet Union to do as I have charged, planting

underwater-launched nuclear missiles within our own territorial waters; but nothing, my friends, could be further from the truth. What the Soviet Union has done and is doing is completely logical and to be expected if we look at it from their point of view. As Mrs. Margaret Thatcher, leader of the Conservative Party in England, recently said, and I quote:

"The danger is our Western tendency to assume that other people will apply our own standards and values. When considering international matters, the important thing is not to look at other nations as if we were standing in their shoes but as if they were standing in their shoes."

If you depend, as most Americans do, on the controlled major media for your understanding of the world, you will never learn to think this way nor can you hope to grasp the real issues that govern military survival; yet such understanding is essential if we are to see how to correct our dangerous situation.

One organization which in my opinion does do an excellent job of clarifying matters of defense and national security is the American Security Council located at Boston, Virginia. Their zip is 22713. I recommend the Council as an excellent source of information for every concerned American.

To help in understanding the threat we now face and how we got into such a position, I will discuss the following three topics today:

Topic #1—THE MUSHROOMING DEBATE OVER SOVIET MILITARY POWER Topic #2—WHY THE SOVIET UNION WANTS NUCLEAR WAR

Topic #3—HOW GOVERNMENTAL AND PRESS SECRECY ARE DESTROYING OUR CHANCES FOR PEACE.

Topic #1—Secretary of State Henry Kissinger has said over and over again for nearly a decade, quote:

"Detente, or nuclear holocaust; there is no third way."

With this in mind, public discussion of American-Soviet relations has focused for years on the alleged happy fruits of detente—the growing thaw between East and West, etc.—but lately there has been an ominous change. President Ford dropped the word "detente" from his active vocabulary, and mounting of concern over the ragged condition of NATO forces has been expressed increasingly by European and American leaders.

Just last week two so-called prestigious groups burst upon the public scene to churn up controversy over the issues of mounting Soviet military power. First, on November 11 came the "Committee for the Present Danger" urging presumed President-elect Carter to increase military spending, instead of decreasing it as promised during the election campaign. Then three days later a study group financed by the Rockefeller Foundation proposed the opposite—that we undertake joint military reductions with the Soviet Union, perhaps initiating the process with selected unilateral reductions of our own. And the warnings continue!

Just three days ago a representative of Boeing Aerospace Company testified before Congress that in case of nuclear war, 98% of the Soviet population would survive because of the elaborate Civil Defense precautions being taken there. By

contrast, of course, the United States has no Civil Defense program worthy of the name. Obviously detente is fading from the official scene rapidly. According to the Kissinger formula, that means nuclear holocaust is on its way. But where did he get that formula?

The word "detente" is just another word for what was termed "peaceful coexistence" in the early 60's, and the Kissinger formula first emerged in October 1959 in the form, quote:

"Peaceful coexistence or nuclear holocaust—there is no third way. "

But the speaker then was not Henry Kissinger; it was Nikita Khrushchev.

The peaceful coexistence idea which later became so-called "detente" began 20 years ago when Khrushchev announced a major new Soviet policy line—namely, that war with the West was not inevitable after all, contrary to the teachings of Lenin. Instead, the nuclear age had made peaceful coexistence necessary. To most Westerners, this sounded like "live and yet live"; but to the Soviet Union it meant only the avoidance of a war which could destroy the Soviet Union. It was all right to continue to break off chunks of the free world by intrigue, subversion, and so-called "wars of national liberation", such as those which have occurred in Vietnam, Angola, and elsewhere. The Soviet Union concentrated on selling the idea of peaceful coexistence for five years from 1956 to 1961, ably assisted by their allies here in the United States.

Then in 1961 a major new phase began as John F. Kennedy became president of the United States. For decades the State Socialists, who run the Soviet Union, had been in alliance with and supported by the Corporate Socialists whose control over the United States was drawing ever more complete. Now at long last the time was ripe to launch their well-orchestrated joint program that was to lead to complete dictatorial control of the United States by the Corporate Socialists, Soviet conquest of vast areas of the world, piecemeal, with Corporate Socialist assistance, and finally joint domination of the entire world by the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.

The basic idea of the program was for the strength and resolve of the United States to be undermined and sapped while the Soviet Union would be enabled to forge ahead into unprecedented world power. Communism would be made to appear to be the wave of the future, while American morale and faith in our free system of government would be steadily eroded. Finally according to plan, the United States would be in the process of increasing encirclement and vulnerability, more and more countries becoming Soviet satellites with the unseen help of American Corporate Socialists who would share in the spoils. Economic disaster, military vulnerability, and the collapse of our own self-confidence would, according to plan, open the door for dictatorship here in America.

The single, most critical step in this long-range plan began to be taken in 1961—the progressive shut-off of critical research and development programs for future military technology.

If research uncovers a basic new concept at a given point in time, it will ordinarily be 5 to 15 years before it can be translated into a new operational technology. In between there must be development, experimentation, evaluation, and full-scale production programs. By the same token, if research and

development are cut off, at some point 5 to 15 years later you will not have the new technology available that would otherwise have come into being.

Early justifications for the dwindling R&D program were based on fond new hopes for disarmament in connection with the new Soviet stance in favor of peaceful coexistence. Later, as the conflict in Vietnam grew into a major war, it became easier to leave important R&D items out of the already swollen Defense budget.

Another key ingredient in the overall plan was to be the use of Cuban troops as proxies in Soviet so-called "wars of national liberation" in Latin America and elsewhere. The Bay of Pigs invasion in 1961, a few short months after Kennedy took office, could have produced a serious setback for the Rockefeller-Soviet plans for overthrow of numerous governments, so Kennedy's advisers carefully steered him away from making the invasion a success.

Meanwhile the Soviet Union constructed long-range plans to take advantage of the American disadvantage in military technology that was being arranged to occur in the mid-1970's. While our R&D began to decline, theirs accelerated. By knowing exactly what to expect, the Soviet Union was able to target its military development toward achievement of a dominant position 15 years later; and that time has now arrived.

In 1962, however, a gamble by Nikita Khrushchev almost caused the whole plan to come apart. For more than a year a prominent United States Senator, Kenneth Keating, had been sounding warnings that offensive nuclear missiles were being placed in Cuba by the Soviet Union; but his charges were denied by the Administration, just as my charges about Soviet underwater missiles are being plausibly denied now. But President Kennedy finally decided to look into it himself personally, instead of accepting blind assurances that there was nothing to it from his advisers. He found out that the charges were true and the Cuban Missile Crisis was upon us.

The Cuban Missile Crisis led to the elimination from the scene of both Kennedy and Khrushchev. First, as I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 3 for August 1975, President Kennedy was murdered because he was becoming increasingly dangerous to the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance. He had come into office lacking any real grasp of the realities of international politics—but he was learning, and learning fast. It was clearly only a matter of time before he would get around to reversing the cutoff of our critical R&D programs. Already he was initiating steps intended to turn off our involvement in Vietnam. Khrushchev, for his part, took longer to oust since his power had to be chipped away carefully by his enemies in the Kremlin; but finally he was removed for jeopardizing the long-range plan of conquest with a dangerous gamble that failed.

Looking ahead toward the increasing opportunities that would present themselves for the Soviet Union to benefit at America's expense, the "Institute of the United States of America" was founded early in the 1960's in Moscow. This Institute, whose purpose is to study the vulnerabilities of the United States, was founded with the help of financing from the Rockefeller Foundation.

Once the Oval Office was inhabited by Lyndon Johnson, the grand plan proceeded onward without further difficulty! Secretary of Defense Robert McNamara played an especially

important role in several ways. The period during which he served, from 1961 to 1968, was one in which research and development carried out prior to the R&D cutoff would potentially be continuing to bear fruit; but McNamara, doing the bidding of those who had placed him in that position, succeeded in causing the cancellation of important advanced weapons programs, decommissioning of many Defense installations, physical scrapping of huge quantities of Defense materiel, and costly concentration of effort on ill-fated programs, such as the F-lll multipurpose Air Force Navy fighter. He also championed the

impressive-sounding theory of warfare called "Measured Response" which guaranteed the escalation of Vietnam into a major war by preventing clear-cut, decisive wins in battle. As his reward for such 'valuable' service, McNamara was made president of the World Bank. Can you imagine?

With the inauguration of President Richard M. Nixon of January 20, 1969, the Kissinger era of foreign policy emerged in full bloom. Kissinger had been an influential voice in Government since the early 60's, thanks to his association with Nelson Rockefeller that began in 1955. Now he became one of the most important Rockefeller-Soviet agents in the United States Government! Following the outlines of the long-range plan, he became known as the architect of so-called detente, repeating Khrushchev's old formula—"peaceful coexistence or nuclear holocaust"—almost verbatim.

In 1972 detente entered a new phase. The SALT I Agreement was signed in Moscow by President Nixon in May of that year.

Meanwhile, the same year, the Soviet Union launched the massivein Civil Defense that has lately started attracting

attention. The Soviet Union could see that the long awaited opportunity to pull ahead of the United States was fast approaching. That same year, 1972, saw the expansion of so-called detente to Red China. Kissinger also played a central role in this development; but far from promoting real peace, Kissinger was undoing a golden opportunity for freedom for a quarter of the world's people—and possibly peace for the entire world.

What I am about to tell you is top secret, and I am revealing it for the very first time.

Some years ago an international entrepreneur (whom I will call "Smith") was in the act of selling a large European bank when he was approached by a Chinese on a business venture involving a retired Chinese general (whom I will call "Lee"). Lee had known both Chiang Kai-shek and Mao Tse-tung very well during earlier revolutionary days, and was still closely associated with six regional military chieftains in Red China who were all genuinely anti-Soviet in every way. Moreover, after the turmoil that took place in Red China in 1957 and later, these Chinese military chieftains became completely disenchanted and disgusted with Mao's program of using young hoodlums to terrorize and murder all suspected opposition to his dictatorial and oppressive programs. Mao's euphemistic term, cultural revolution, for these cutthroat methods of bending the people to his will, did not impress them. They contacted Lee and queried him as to the possibility of getting American support in case they should decide to overthrow Mao and establish a republic using the customary parliamentary form of government. Those who preferred the security of Socialism would be allowed to live in communes, but the government would foster a free-market system for the country as a whole.

General Lee arranged through the United States Department of

State to send envoys through the Bamboo Curtain to make the necessary arrangements; but someone in the State Department leaked the information to Red Chinese officials, and all of the envoys were quickly apprehended and put to death. Nevertheless General Lee persisted. He asked Mr. Smith if he could arrange for broadcasting equipment to inform all of Red China what was taking place, why the military deemed it necessary to overturn Mao, and what form of government would be established. Smith agreed to contact certain top officials in the United States Government close to the President, however General Lee emphasized that he must circumvent Henry Kissinger and get the ear of Mr. Nixon only, since Lee did not trust Kissinger nor anyone else in the State Department. The contacts were made, but unfortunately a member of another agency heard of the plan and briefed President Nixon about it in front of Kissinger. Almost immediately arrangements were made for Kissinger to visit China to meet secretly with Mao.

This meeting took place, and at the meeting Kissinger informed Mao that he would be overthrown by a military coup unless Mao's regime chose to cooperate with those who held the real power in the United States. To sweeten the deal for Mao, certain secret agreements were made concerning the future course of American relationships with the Republic of China on Taiwan. The outgrowth of the meeting was ping-pong diplomacy—the Nixon summit trip to Peking in February 1972, and so-called detente between Red China and the United States. In return, Mao Tse-tung's ironhanded dictatorship over Red China was rendered secure once again. Red China would thus continue to be a controllable threat to the Soviet Union. With any real threat to the Soviet Union from the direction of Red China taken care of, the Rockefeller-Soviet plan continued.

Last year the Helsinki Accord gave the Soviet Union essentially what she had wanted for 20 years—a ratification of her conquests in Eastern Europe. By thus signaling to the imprisoned countries behind the Iron Curtain that we consider them to be within the Soviet sphere, we reduce any tendency they might have to revolt in case of war. The Soviet western flank is thus made far more secure than before.

In the past several years, countries have been falling into the Soviet orbit at a quickening pace with their domination shared secretly by their Corporate Socialist allies here in America. At the same time, the declining military might of the United States and the fast increasing threat from the Soviet Union has finally become too obvious to hide any longer. This stage, too, was foreseen and planned.

All of the economic, political, and military factors are intended to lead to a "Declaration of National Emergency" here in America, dictatorship, and war!

But, as it turned out, there is a terrible joker in the deck that has been dealt by the Rockefeller empire in its hidden collaboration with the Soviet Union. The war to come, NUCLEAR WAR ONE waged primarily on American soil, was supposed to be neatly limited and controlled with a "Nuclear Safe Zone" set aside for the Soviet allies here in America, as I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last May; but the Soviet Union has for months been maneuvering to carry out a double cross at this critical stage in America's increasing vulnerability. They want to seize all the marbles for themselves.

Topic #2—For many years American strategic defense strategy has been based on a concept called "Mutual Assured Destruction", or

MAD. The idea here is that should either the Soviet Union or the United States launch a nuclear attack on the other, the victim of the attack would be able to destroy the attacker in return. In this concept, furthermore, the targets are cities, not military targets such as enemy missile installations. An ICBM attack under these conditions would have only one basic purpose—to kill tens of millions of innocent civilians. This is the so-called "balance of terror" we often hear about.

In World War II, Hitler used V-l buzz bombs and V-2 missiles in exactly this way against the civilian population of England instead of against military targets, thinking to terrorize England into submission. But as we all know, it didn't work. The British learned to dig into bomb shelters, absorb the civilian deaths and damage, and meanwhile redoubled their efforts at military installations to strike back at Hitler in more important ways.

The MAD mutual terror defense strategy is nothing more than a nuclear age version of the very technique that was proven to be useless over 30 years ago. We've all heard countless times, quote: "The last thing the Soviet Union would ever want is a nuclear exchange with the United States." This comforting statement tends to make one accept the foolish MAD defense doctrine, if it is to be believed; but it is wrong. The announcement by Nikita Khrushchev in 1956 that all-out war was not inevitable with the West after all, appeared to be a renunciation of a basic Leninist principle, but it was not. It was simply the beginning of an elaborate 20-year ploy to make us lower our guard so that when the inevitable all-out conflict did come, the Soviet Union would be in a position to win.

History is repeating itself. In the late 1930's many people made the mistake of believing that Hitler did not actually want war but was willing to risk it in order to obtain concessions, so the concessions were made with the idea that this would prevent war. Only too late was it realized that Hitler was determined to have a war one way or another.

In the past, the Soviet Union has been notably cautious when skirting the fringes of a possible nuclear war, but that was while she was still at a disadvantage militarily. Now for the first time the Soviets are emerging into a totally new situation in which their military power is second to none. With the rapid collapse of free governments now occurring around the globe, the

over-all correlation of forces, as they call it, is shiftingin favor of the Soviet Union. The Soviet Union is now

No. 1 in military power, while the United States is No. 2—a situation that has never existed before.

The time is now ripe for the Soviets to press their advantage in an effort to seize control of the world. The standing threat from Red China is often mentioned hopefully as a major factor tending to offset any Soviet ideas of waging major war against us; but this, too, is in error. The Soviet fear of Red China, far from acting as a brake, is spurring them on. Right now Red China is leaning on the United States; but should the United States be knocked out of action by a Soviet hammer blow before China could take advantage of the situation, China would then be isolated. Red China would then have no choice but to patch things up with the Soviet Union and cooperate, at least on pragmatic matters. Of course with the United States defeated, and the two Communist superpowers joining forces once again, the fate of the rest of the world would no longer be in question. Thus, as I stated in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15, if we fall, the world falls; and that is the basis of Soviet strategy.

Thus the Soviet Union does want nuclear war with the United States provided the Soviet Union is prepared to survive with losses limited to acceptable levels, and provided the United States can be destroyed as a military rival in the process. The Soviet rulers emphatically do not think of nuclear war as something that could only happen as the unwanted result of a confrontation, even though this is how we tend to think of it. To them war, including nuclear war, is a tool of conquest to be used whenever it is advantageous to do so.

People have asked the question: Why would the Soviet Union plant underwater missiles in our waters when they already have ICBMs, missile-launching submarines, and so forth? Even some officials who know about the Soviet missiles raise this question in various forms as a smoke screen to create doubt. For once you understand the basic Soviet viewpoint I have described, the reasons for the planting of underwater missiles become far easier to grasp.

To begin with, the underwater missiles constitute a first-strike capability for the Soviet Union—that is, they are concentrated on military targets. Specifically, they are intended to wipe out our naval bases, major ports, and a good fraction of our naval fleet in one sudden, surprise blow without advance warning. This type of first strike is quite different from those usually discussed, but would be extremely effective. Consider the choice faced by an American president immediately after such a sudden strike by the Soviet Union by means of its underwater missiles followed by a Soviet ultimatum to surrender! True, the American naval forces at sea around the world at the time of the attack would be unaffected and our missile subs could give the Soviet Union an unpleasant pasting. Even our ICBMs might still be available to fire, but what then?

First, the damage we could now inflict on the Soviet Union would be minimized by the mammoth Civil Defense preparations that have been under way in the Soviet Union for five years and more. If the president did choose to counterattack, several million Soviet citizens would possibly die and a small portion of the military and industrial facilities of the Soviet Union not underground would be destroyed. But the vast majority of the Soviet population would survive our counterattack as would a large part of their military-industrial complex. Now it would be their turn again.

The price we would pay for disobeying the Soviet ultimatum would be awesome. A salvo of ICBMs, not the whole Soviet ICBM force, perhaps but a few hundred nonetheless, would rain down on the United States, hitting both military targets and big cities. Thanks to the well named MAD defense strategy we have followed, we have no Civil Defense and the carnage would be beyond imagination, especially since Soviet nuclear warheads are many times more powerful than ours.

As for our naval forces, attacks by Soviet antiship cruise missiles would rapidly take their toll; and the inability of returning to port for fuel and more weapons would cause our navy to wither away as a fighting force. It would only be a matter of time until our vital sea lanes of commerce were totally destroyed. The process might continue perhaps for some time, but the outcome would not be in doubt. The Soviet Union would be able to outlast us and outblast us once the initial crucial strike against our navy was made with the underwater missiles.

The secret of success of the Soviet plan is their use of a

weapon system that would enable the first strike against our navy to be a complete surprise with extremely reliable results. The greatest possible surprise, of course, would have been achieved if our navy had never even known the missiles were there off our shores until the moment they were fired. That was the surprise element that my monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 were intended to remove last summer.

Another element of surprise has to do with the warning time if a missile is actually launched. With ICBMs, satellite surveillance can provide a warning time of 20 minutes or so—plenty of time to launch our own missiles in retaliation if the decision is made to do so. Submarine-launched ballistic missiles may cut the warning time to a few minutes. But in the case of the short-range underwater-launch missiles, there is virtually no warning at all since they must travel only a short distance and the time of flight is brief. By the time they are detected and our defenses alerted, they will be exploding over their targets.

There is only one other kind of warning, which is probably the most important of all—advance warning of impending attack through Intelligence channels and through reading the meaning of political tensions. Up to now, for example, NATO defense planning has assumed that any attack on Western Europe by the Soviet Union would be preceded by a warning of at least three weeks. And 35 years ago there were several advance warnings before the attack on Pearl Harbor beginning a week or so ahead of time, but at that time these warnings were deliberately blocked at high levels of the United States Government because certain individuals wanted to insure that the attack did occur! And now the chance of obtaining advance warning of impending attack is once again reduced, thanks to the Intelligence gap created by Secretary of State Henry Kissinger!

When the Soviet Union decides the time is ripe to attack, they do not intend to telegraph their intentions in advance. In this regard, the underwater missiles lurking along our shores can be invaluable to them. Their ICBMs have too long a warning time and insufficient accuracy and reliability for the Soviet rulers to employ them with full confidence in a world-wide naval Pearl Harbor attack, such as I described in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15. And if they chose to use their missile-launching submarines for that purpose closing in to short range to produce short flight times for their missiles, they would risk alerting our navy that something was up because of the peculiar deployment of their submarines.

On top of that, a world-wide surprise attack of the kind contemplated by the Soviets depends for its success on a simultaneous strike everywhere. Not an easy thing to achieve with missiles launched by numerous submarines all over the world; but the underwater missiles are made to order for a surprise attack. They lurk unseen for days, weeks, or months until they are needed; then when they are to be fired, the preparations for the attack can be made without any outward sign at all, deep inside a Command Post in the Soviet Union. To launch the attack itself, a signal need only be flashed world-wide from the Command Post, while the observable activities of the Soviet Union, military and otherwise, proceed in normal patterns giving no hint of the impending attack!

When the surprise attack plan of the Soviet Union is known, the question is no longer: Why would they plant those underwater missiles? The question becomes: Why wouldn't they do it?

The Soviet Union is prepared to wage war with several times our own nuclear firepower. At the same time, they are prepared to survive such a war as a viable society with population losses of perhaps no more than 2%. That's around five-million lives, and it is indeed very hard for you and me to imagine deliberately accepting such losses for a political purpose. But remember, the Soviet bosses think their way, not our way; and if they were to suffer losses that large, our own losses could be 50- to 100-million!

Provided they have the ability to disable the United States Navy at the outset with the surprise attack they have planned, the Soviets believe they have little to lose and everything to gain now by their standards in a nuclear war; and that is why the Soviet Union wants nuclear war now.

Topic #3—Since early July 1976 short-wave radio communications world-wide have been disrupted by what one ham radio operator describes as, quote: "A super-enormous strong signal that sounds like a buzz saw." Not only hams have been affected but maritime, aeronautical, and telecommunications channels have been rendered practically useless in some cases. The signal is a rasping sound that pulses 10 times per second, originating from Soviet transmitters.

The monitoring branch of the Federal Communications Commission has received a flood of complaints and has written four complaints to Moscow about it, without any reply whatsoever. According to Robert Kutz, chief of the FCC's International Operations Division, this silence from the Soviet Union is very unusual, quote: "Usually they have been very cooperative, unless there's something particularly unique about this situation."

Indeed there is something unique about these Soviet radio signals, my friends. They are transmissions between Moscow and Soviet submarines world-wide by means of the Advanced Communications System I mentioned in a recent monthly AUDIO LETTER. It is no accident that these signals first began early in July 1976. That was the month when I first revealed the existence of underwater missiles in American and Canadian territorial waters planted by the Soviets. It is also no accident that transmissions like this were first heard in 1962 during the Cuban Missile Crisis.

The Government professes not to have any idea what these signals are all about, but they know better. These signals are being used to maintain tight coordination of Soviet naval activities, especially submarine movements, in preparation for war. But one lie leads to another; and just as you are not being told about the Soviet underwater missiles that threaten your life and your freedom, you are not being told the true meaning of the Soviet buzz saw signals.

There are at least 13 transmitters broadcasting these powerful signals located mostly in Soviet or Soviet-occupied territory. Transmitters are operating at Archangel, Leningrad, Moscow, Kiev, Odessa, Gdansk, the Bosporus Straits, Rostov, Minsk, Warsaw, Prague, East Berlin, and of all places Loch Ness in Scotland. The Loch Ness transmitter is aboard a small submarine that entered the northeast end of Loch Ness by means of the canal that connects Loch Ness to Moray Firth. If there wasn't one before, there certainly is a Loch Ness monster now, compliments of the Soviet Union.

These Soviet transmissions make use of a technique known as "pulse modulation." Each of the 10 pulses per second sounds like

nothing more than a meaningless rasp to the ear, but in fact each pulse contains a superimposed signal in code. The possible codes are endless, and a computer is required both to create the coded pulses for transmissions and to decode them where they are received. Therefore unless and until Intelligence information becomes available on the details of the exact code, it is practically impossible to intercept and understand the Soviet messages to their subs.

But matters even more blatant than the Soviet mysterious signals are being hidden from you. For example: Do you know about the joint Soviet and Cuban naval and aviation maneuvers that took place from September 15 to September 23, 1976, in the Caribbean and the Gulf of Mexico? These war games utilized not only the new Soviet submarine base at Cienfuegos Harbor not far from the United States naval station at Guantanamo Bay but also Marianao and Havana, right across from Florida! These war exercises carried a clear threat for the Panama Canal, Puerto Rico, and our base at Guantanamo Bay; and, in addition, ranged all along our Gulf coast as far west as Galveston, Texas. Yet our so-called Defense Department said not one word about it, and our sleeping press, following the non-existent lead of our controlled major media, said nothing about it either.

Since "Red Friday", October 1, 1976, our Military from General George S. Brown on down have been muzzled, ordered to flatly deny charges about Soviet missiles in our waters, if pressed to comment on them. Meanwhile, top secret Civil Defense exercises are now under way here in Washington, D.C. and other sensitive areas for top Government officials only, while the rest of our people are left in the dark not only without protection but without even any official warning that war could be imminent!

But the last straw came in just the past several days, my friends. Last month I reported that immediately after the "Red Friday" capitulation by President Ford to the Soviet demands advanced by Andrei Gromyko, Soviet submarines along our east and west coasts performed a chemical warfare experiment. Clouds of radioactive plutonium were released into our atmosphere to drift inward and contaminate the United States while the United States Government cooperated by claiming that we were being plastered with radioactive fallout from a Chinese nuclear test 10 days earlier. As I reported last month, we were spared major effects from that experimental plutonium release due to weather conditions that did not behave as predicted by the Soviets. But now they are poised to do it again!

On Wednesday November 17 a large Chinese atmospheric hydrogen bomb test was announced, and immediately we were inundated with announcements that the radioactive cloud would reach our west coast only three short days later—today, November 20, 1976. Last time they claimed that the Chinese cloud took 10 days to cover the same distance, but that was because the Soviet subs were not ready at that time to use the Chinese blast as a cover for their chemical attack against us. This time they can hardly wait.

As of noon yesterday, November 19, 18 Soviet submarines were deployed at even intervals along our west coast within about 35 miles of our shore line. They are not missile launchers but are equipped specifically for the injection of plutonium into our air today. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) is telling us not to fear the Chinese nuclear cloud alleged to be passing over our country, but is cooperating completely with the Soviet Union in providing a totally false cover for the Soviet radioactive plutonium attack on our country! In actual fact, the

radioactivity created by the Chinese test itself has not yet gone beyond Red China's own borders.

The media are reminding us how terrible Swine Flu might be, and we are also being told of the disappointingly low number of eligible Americans who are taking the free Government Swine Flu shots. We are told that Swine Flu, if it breaks out, could spread like wildfire; and now certain persons in the United States Government are cooperating with the Soviet Union in an attack on our nation by means of radioactive plutonium, the effects of which can be mistaken for severe "flu" if intended dosages are achieved.

My friends, the so-called mysterious signals from the Soviet Union stopped temporarily on November 2, but then on November 10 they started up again because Soviet war preparations were resuming. Since I talked with you last, 36 new missiles have been planted in our waters in addition to those I referred to last month.

I have not given the locations of these to anyone, and for now I do not intend to do so. Now let me tell you why. On one hand there are those factions within the shell of a Government left here in Washington who are actively cooperating with the Soviet Union. Some of these are outright Soviet agents; others are part of the Corporate Socialist network that cooperates with the Soviets for mutual advantage at the expense of the rest of us. Some in this second group still do not believe that a Soviet double cross has been under way for months in the form of the underwater missiles in our waters. On the other hand, there are many who are honestly trying to counter the Soviet underwater missile threat acting within constraints imposed on them.

Prior to October 1, missiles were being removed as they were planted by the Soviet Union, acting on information I was providing to General George S. Brown and to Military Intelligence. In this capacity, I have been acting as an information channel to go around the Intelligence gap created by Henry Kissinger.

But where is all this leading? What will happen if traitors in our midst continue to cover up the truth about the Soviet underwater missiles, and if patriots in our Government cannot summon the courage to tell the truth, regardless of the consequences? What is going to happen if that situation continues, my friends, is THERMONUCLEAR WAR and DICTATORSHIP here in America!

Even if the United States Navy were to continue removing Soviet missiles as they are planted—which they have been ordered NOT to do since October 1—this would not prevent disaster. The Soviet Union is able to plant missiles far faster than we can remove them. So the information I have been relaying is really being used now for just one purpose—to enable our leaders to keep abreast of the chances of attack, and to minimize those chances until they are ready to run and hide in the 96 underground cities of the "Federal Relocation Arc" to ride out the war—then war can come, scorching the land and consuming our people.

The top-secret information provided me by my sources, often at the risk of their own lives, is not intended for the private use of cold-blooded traitors and spineless leaders in the American Government. It is intended to bring about exposure of the truth as the one and only thing that can prevent a war.

If war comes, it will be a devastating surprise to most Americans. The perverse behavior of our public officials in misusing my information threatens to condemn millions of us to a nuclear holocaust. Therefore it is only right that they condemn themselves at the same time. Without the missile locations I am now withholding they, too, will be caught in the lightning surprise attack by the Soviet Union that threatens to engulf the rest of us. Millions of our lives apparently mean nothing at all to them compared to their service to the Soviet Union, and their jobs, and their pensions. But now their lives are at stake along with the rest of us. Only if the truth about the Soviet underwater missiles is exposed will I turn over the new information I have on which not only our lives but theirs, too, now depend.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #19

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is December IS 1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 19.

As our Bicentennial Year of 1976 draws to a close, the United States of America is in grave danger. Our economy is ravaged by the twin plagues of high inflation and high unemployment, a condition which I named STAGFLATION some years ago. Our Republic is under attack in a far-advanced plan to bring our country under dictatorship. Our very lives are under the threat of extinction in a surprise nuclear attack which would be the beginning of NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and all of these terrible things have been brought about deliberately by a handful of ruthless, powerful men here and abroad, bent on world domination.

"But how can this be?", you ask. "How can so few people control the destinies of all the rest of us?"

After all, it is easy to imagine how far our Secret Rulers and their henchmen would get if they tried to take over even one city, much less all of America, with their own bare fists and brute force. They would be stopped in their tracks in no time flat because everyone understands that kind of threat and there are far more of us than there are of them. But those who want to enslave us understand this all too well; they know better than to try any kind of frontal attack on us that would be widely understood. Instead, they have perfected the art of harnessing our own energies so that gradually, step by step, we are enslaving ourselves under their control.

The Hegelian principle of thesis, antithesis, synthesis is being applied so as to gradually merge our life with that of the Soviet Union at every level! The average working man and woman in America would never knowingly allow this to happen, and yet it is happening—gradually, year after year.

1. The first step, called Thesis, is to create and publicize a problem in education, economics, or otherwise in our daily lives. In other words, where there is peace, create discord and trouble.

2. Step 2, Antithesis, is to create opposition to the problem.

3. The final step, Synthesis, is to offer a so-called solution to

the problem.

This diabolical, roundabout approach psychologically conditions people to accept things which they would otherwise oppose vigorously. Just a look around with this in mind, and you will see that this technique is being used all around you in a thousand ways; but the real key to the success or failure of this method of manipulating the public lies in something Abraham Lincoln said over 100 years ago, quote:

"With public sentiment, nothing will fail; without it, nothing can succeed."

So long as we, the people, are simply told the truth about things, public sentiment reflects the truth. Under those conditions, real solutions can be found for real problems to everyone's benefit; but when we are not told the truth, public sentiment reflects only what we believe and we can be manipulated into supporting all kinds of things that are not in our best interest.

Here in the United States a subtle, long-range propaganda technique—known simply as MISINFORMATION—has been used to build up an artificial and false picture of the world and our own nation. In the areas of foreign policy, national security, politics, and economics, the truth has been suppressed and replaced with an elaborate structure of lies, distortions, and half-truths. This false picture has come to be accepted as the truth with the result that the truth itself has been rendered unbelievable. I don't think anyone in his right mind could do what has been done to us. Our education, our CONSTITUTION, our free enterprise system, everything possible has been perverted in order to confer ever more power on our Secret Rulers.

Now, WAR IS COMING. The wars of this century have been fought far from our shores, but this time it is coming here—to our land, to our homes, to our people! It will not be a conventional war but NUCLEAR WAR ONE. As in all modern wars, it will begin with a surprise attack. Thanks to the silence of the United States Government and of the controlled major media, most Americans will be caught completely by surprise, believing in a lie called detente until thermonuclear fireballs erupt all around our nation.

To show how different the truth is from what we are led to believe by our Secret Rulers, I will discuss these three topics today:

Topic #1—WHY THE UNITED STATES WAS NOT FIRST TO LAUNCH AN EARTH SATELLITE

Topic #2—WHY MOST AMERICANS CANNOT BELIEVE NUCLEAR WAR IS IMMINENT

Topic #3—HOW THE MAJOR TAX-EXEMPT FOUNDATIONS HAVE CLEARED THE WAY FOR SOVIET NUCLEAR ATTACK.

Topic #1—On the evening of October 4, 1957, Americans were stunned by the announcement that the Soviet Union had become the first nation in history to place a man-made satellite in orbit. Sputnik I, weighing 184 pounds, was circling the Earth every hour and a half sending out beeps that became famous overnight. The world was thrilled, and the world press heaped great praise on the Soviet Union. They inferred from this accomplishment that the Soviet socialist system was superior to our own in scientific and technical progress. It was a historical first that can never

be undone—the Soviet Union had beaten the United States into space.

Less than a month later Sputnik II was launched. It weighed over half a ton and carried the first live passenger into space, a dog. The dog died within a week but it was another startling achievement nonetheless.

Meanwhile poor old America was struggling along trying to put a tiny 16-pound satellite into orbit by means of the Navy's Vanguard rocket. Two launches were attempted, but both failed. In one case the rocket lifted a few feet off the pad only to settle back into a tremendous fireball as it exploded. It made exciting footage for the television news that evening. Finally on January 31, 1958, almost four months after Sputnik I, America launched its first space satellite from Cape Canaveral, Florida. It was called Explorer I, and it was launched not by the Navy but by the Army. We were in space at last, but only after being thoroughly humiliated before the entire world.

After the Sputnik shock, space flight and rockets were suddenly the "in" thing to be interested in. Even then Senator Lyndon B. Johnson arranged for a new "Aeronautics and Space Committee" to be set up, with himself as its Chairman. He was thereafter as visible as possible in connection with space matters, and today the manned space flight center in Houston bears his name. At the time, I could hardly imagine anything more hypocritical for Johnson to do. Even though I was a lawyer, I had been a member of the then named "American Rocket Society" for a number of years and had vivid memories of Johnson's attitude toward space in the early 50's. At that time, four or five years before Sputnik, I was a member of a group headed by Dr. Wernher Von Braun who approached Johnson in hopes of obtaining support for a space program. I'll never forget Lyndon Johnson's reaction to the whole idea. He did not merely say "No", but jeered at the whole concept as ridiculous and worthless!

A few years later the United States was deprived of the chance to be first in space, but not by Lyndon Johnson. What I am going to tell you does not affect our national security now, but it does provide a typical example of what has been happening to America for many years. And as Wernher Von Braun lies on his death bed in a hospital near Washington, D.C., I believe the time has come for the truth to be told about why we were not the first to put a satellite into space.

In late 1955 or early 1956, the Joint Chiefs of Staff began the first act of planning for an American space program. Their goal: To have the United States initiate the world's first successful space flight at the beginning of the International Geophysical Year that was to begin on July 1, 1957. After some controversy as to which Service should sponsor the space project, it was concluded that the Army was most capable of doing the job. This was agreed to and approved by the Joint Chiefs and by then Secretary of Defense Charles Wilson.

The Army's Redstone Arsenal in Huntsville, Alabama was fortunate in having the services of the world's foremost rocket expert, Dr. Wernher Von Braun. From a very early age Von Braun had been fascinated with the idea of space flight, and he had spent his life working with rockets. During World War II Von Braun was pressed into service by Hitler, and the German rocket program was far ahead of other countries by the end of the war. When the war ended, many of Von Braun's subordinates at the German rocket base were taken prisoner by the Soviet Union and it

was they who were forced to develop and direct the Soviet missile and space programs; but Von Braun himself had resolved well before hostilities ended that he would surrender to the United States, and he succeeded in doing so. Our Government then prevailed upon him to enter governmental research where he would have the money and resources to pursue rocketry in earnest.

When the Earth Satellite project came under consideration years later in the mid-50's, the Joint Staff project officers interviewed the Redstone Arsenal officials along with Von Braun himself to ascertain their capability. Von Braun stated that his group could engineer a space vehicle and have it ready for orbit in only a few months. The Joint Staff pushed for the Von Braun project; and after it was approved by the Joint Chiefs and Secretary of Defense, it went to President Eisenhower for final approval and allocation of Defense Department funds—but there it stopped! Strangely there was a long delay in getting the expected presidential approval. Finally the word came down to the Joint Staff from the President. Incredibly, they were to disregard the Army's capability and give the Space project to the Navy instead. Such a decision was all but unbelievable. The Navy did not even have a blueprint for such a space vehicle! They would be starting almost from scratch; but the decision stood, so several large aircraft companies and Navy scientists gathered to initiate a program called "PROJECT VANGUARD."

As a direct result of this decision, the Soviet Union was able to put Sputnik into orbit while the United States was still struggling unsuccessfully with Vanguard. Joint Staff project officers were most perplexed about the American political decision to allow the Soviet Union to beat us in this endeavor when we had the capability to be far ahead of them. It appeared to follow a pattern of withholding American capabilities and allowing the Soviet Union the advantage. Later, an aide to President Eisenhower explained confidentially what had transpired.

A select group of scientists and financial leaders got wind of the American space satellite plans at an early stage. The group, headed by a man who was later awarded the Lenin Peace Prize by the Soviet Union, went to the President and pressed him to sponsor a purely American space project with only native Americans working on it. They didn't want by any means for a former German, such as Wernher Von Braun, to give the world and future historians the impression that the Germans of all people were superior in the field of space science. This group, who were actually doing the bidding of the Rockefellers on behalf of their Soviet allies, were instrumental in forcing America to take a back seat in the early years of the Space Age when we were fully capable of being supreme!

Finally, after two Soviet Sputniks and two humiliating Navy Vanguard failures, Eisenhower became exasperated and told the Defense Department to get Von Braun into action. Just six weeks after he received the go-ahead, Von Braun's Army team launched Explorer I. He did exactly what he had said he could do two years earlier—and the very first time he tried it; but the special place in history he so richly deserved had been denied him forever, just as it had been denied to the new homeland of his choice, the United States of America. The anti-German argument that had been used on President Eisenhower was, of course, a total fraud.

When Sputnik I was launched a short dozen years after World War II, the Soviet rocket program was even more dependent on the efforts of captured German scientists than was true in the United

States. Thus only one thing was really accomplished by delaying the Army satellite effort under Wernher Von Braun: A tremendous propaganda coup for the Soviet Union and a setback to American prestige and self-confidence that persisted for years. It is a grim fact that accolades go to the spoilers and traitors among us, but no acclaim to our true heroes and men dedicated to American principles.

Under the enthusiastic leadership of Wernher Von Braun the United States was able to come from behind to win the race to the Moon, but soon the world press will have relegated him to the footnotes of modern history. Like General Douglas MacArthur, Wernher Von Braun will "just fade away."

Topic #2—When Secretary of Defense James Schlesinger was fired by President Ford just over a year ago in November 1975, he said, quote:

"Some years from now someone will say, 'Why weren't we warned?' and I wanted to be able to say: 'Indeed you were.'"

But most Americans when reminded of this parting statement by Schlesinger tend to be surprised. It is as if his words have gone out into thin air, leaving no lasting impression at all. This is a perfect illustration of the way in which the American public have been left comfortably asleep by the controlled major media of our country, oblivious to the steadily mounting threat of war.

Around the world the alarms of impending nuclear disaster are jangling louder and louder; but these alarms are muted, muffled, and silenced by the time they reach you. When isolated facts about American or Soviet military developments are reported, it is done in such a way that it has little lasting impact on most people. Thus, for example, you may hear a news item concerning the debate over the new B-l Bomber which the United States Air Force is developing. Taken in isolation you may well wonder what all the shouting is about and, for that matter, why such a new bomber is even being considered in this age of missiles. Or you may hear a brief news item mentioning that the Air Force wants to buy some F-15 Fighters to augment our air defense system.

Perhaps these things would make a little more sense to you if you knew that the Soviet Backfire Bomber began to be deployed operationally over three years ago! The Backfire is a supersonic long-range bomber capable of delivering nuclear weapons to targets here in the United States—and that, my friends, is precisely its purpose, not the so-called peripheral missions mentioned by some. Knowing this, perhaps it would have struck you as a little strange that in 1974 after the Soviet Backfire Bomber began being deployed, the United States virtually dismantled its air defense system. At the very time that a renewed Soviet bomber threat was developing, our network of interceptors was reduced to just six active Air Force Squadrons plus six more in the Air National Guard! The extensive network of Nike Hercules Antiaircraft Missiles under Army command was shut down completely. But now, with war threatening to break out, the Defense Department is reversing its position on air defense without telling you why.

The mounting controversy over the relative military strength of the Soviet Union and the United States has taken many people by surprise. Almost 3-1/2 years ago the warning was sounded that the Soviet Navy had become stronger than the United States Navy. That's what the world's foremost naval authority, Jane's Fighting Ships, said in July 1973; but if you saw this reported at all by

the major media, did it make any impression? Or consider the matter of long-range ballistic missiles. Over four years ago on November 27, 1972, the Soviet Union successfully test-fired a submarine-launched ballistic missile with a range of 4,500 miles! By comparison, the most advanced American sub-launched missiles have a range of less than 3,000 miles. In addition, the development of a whole new series of Soviet missiles was underway.

Early this month the Soviet Union began a 20-day period of tests of the new submarine-launched SSNX-18 Ballistic Missile, firing them into a circular zone 100 miles in radius in the North Pacific southeast of the Aleutian Islands. The SSNX-18 now has a multiple warhead capability; and these tests, which are full-operational tests, extend over the full range of the missile which is now more than 5,000 miles! Particular attention is being given to warhead performance in these test-proving flights. If all goes as planned, the SSNX-18 will be committed to full production and operational status within a year's time. The SSNX-18 will give the Soviet Union a commanding lead over the United States in the realm of submarine-launched ballistic missiles. But what have you learned from network news reports or other major media about this missile? Practically nothing.

But the most tortured reasoning I have seen yet appeared on December 6, 1976, in the New York Times. An editorial on that date entitled: MOSCOW'S SUBMARINE MIRV begins with the incredible words, and I quote:

"The Soviet Union's first successful test of a submarine-launched ballistic missile armed with MIRV multiple nuclear warheads is good news paradoxically for the United States and the world."

The editorial then argues, in effect, that since this will eliminate the one remaining missile advantage held by the United States, it opens the door for the Soviet Union to make concessions in SALT negotiations that could prevent either side from acquiring a first-strike capability.

Such Alice-in-Wonderland reasoning may still serve the purpose of lulling millions of Americans back to sleep, but it would not sit well these days with most NATO Defense Ministers. For the first time many officials of NATO are generally alarmed by the continuing relentless build-up of Soviet power in Europe where the best Soviet troops are concentrated.

For example, consider Denmark which sits astride the channels which lead from the Baltic Sea to the North Sea. Soviet activity in the Baltic has grown more and more ominous of late. Early in September a Soviet task force suddenly materialized off the southeast coast of Denmark, then left, then reappeared. All kinds of Soviet naval war games are now being carried out practically on Denmark's doorsteps so close that they could suddenly turn into attack that would give practically no warning. Danish Foreign Minister K. B. Andersen said recently,

"I'm astonished at what is going on. This is completely contrary to the expectations created by the Helsinki agreement."

And yet our kept press would have you believe that the new Soviet SSNX-18 missile I just told you about is unimportant or even good news, because of possible agreements the Soviet Union might make about it.

At the NATO Defense Ministers' meeting in Brussels earlier

this month, Admiral Sir Peter Hill-Norton of Britain warned that the trend of the military balance between East and West is continuing to move in favor of the Soviet bloc. He declared that more money and better planning are needed if NATO is to match what he called the "relentless determination" of the Warsaw Pact countries to achieve military superiority. He warned that NATO can no longer rely indefinitely upon the superiority of Western technology because massive Soviet spending on research and development have resulted in vast improvements in Soviet weapons.

As Dutch Defense Minister Vredeling said on December 8, the day after Sir Peter's speech, quote:

"The situation as far as the balance of forces world-wide is more serious than many people think."

And there are many other examples of genuine alarm at the vulnerability of Western Europe to a devastating surprise attack.

What did Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, who was and is a CIA operative, have to say to the NATO ministers? He gave a brief nod to the wide-spread concern over the Soviet build-up, but what you heard reported in the news emphasized the following, and I quote:

"I think the alliance is healthy. I leave my post as Secretary of Defense next month with a good deal of optimism about the Atlantic alliance—the fact that it survived some 26 years; the fact that it's working, I think reasonably smoothly at the present time; frankly reassured by the fact that there is an Atlantic alliance, that it's on watch and doing its job."

And so, my friends, we can all go back to sleep, comfortably reassured.

Topic #3—One week from today will be Christmas 1976. On that day most Americans will be celebrating the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ by giving gifts to one another. The joy of giving is something most everyone understands to a greater or lesser extent. When presents are opened on Christmas Day, for example, parents of small children usually get their greatest fun out of watching their children open presents, not from opening their own gifts .

In the same vein, people usually feel good about it when they give a portion of what they have to help others or to support a worthy cause. This is the foundation of what is known as charity—but unfortunately there are always a very few among us who are motivated not by a spirit of sharing but by runaway greed. Their only pleasure in life comes from amassing more and more of this world's wealth for their own coffers and extending their power to control the wealth of others as well. Ultimately those who are motivated this way reach the point where they have so much wealth and so much power that it is no longer enough just to add to it just still further. The only thing left in life for those who have acquired wealth and power through greed is to use that power and that wealth to play with the lives and destinies of people. In short, they try to play 'God'.

You may ask: Why would the Soviet Union go to war? Would the super-wealthy of America want to create a dictatorship here with themselves in control? You might as well ask: Why does the mountain climber want to climb the highest mountain? Common answer is: Because it's there—just like the United States, the richest country in the world, is there. What a prize.

Early in this century a systematic long-range program was begun by a small group of immensely powerful people. The goal of this program was to acquire ever greater control over American society. This was to lead ultimately to America's merging into a One-World Government with themselves and their heirs in control.

The method by which this would be accomplished was the dismantling of the basic structure of American society and its reconstruction in the image desired by those who had decided to play 'God'. And to carry out this long-range program, powerful tax-free Foundations were established and given the halo of philanthropy. They were explained to the public as simply a special means the wealthy had devised for giving to the public at large. Each Foundation was thus given the image of an institutional Santa Claus.

Instead of questioning what they did, the American people were led to accept their activities in the confident belief that they were just showering wonderful gifts on our society day in and day out. This is the picture that is still accepted as the truth by most Americans. They believe it just as fervently as millions of small children believe in Santa Claus. The raw truth about this network of Foundations may therefore sound unbelievable—just as it sounds unbelievable to a small child if he is told there is no Santa Claus.

For months now I've been referring to the role that has been played by these Foundations in undermining American society and placing us in the extreme peril we now face. Now I have been given permission to reveal one of my primary sources of information about these Foundations, and to repeat for you his own words about them. He is my friend Mr. Norman Dodd. Mr. Dodd was Director of Research of the special committee of the United States House of Representatives to investigate tax-exempt Foundations in 1953 and 1954. The late Congressman Carroll Reece of Tennessee was chairman of this very important committee.

Recently Mr. Dodd gave a rare speech here in Washington, D.C., and he has given permission to repeat it here for you. I will now be quoting him.

"This is not going to be a speech. This is a sharing of ideas born of experience, and I'd like to begin by qualifying myself in your minds.

I am a product of a strange type of education and schooling. The education of which I am a product featured the importance of the question 'WHY?' and then went on to try to instill in us the importance of the question plus our responsibility as individuals to find the answers. I happen to have taken this education and schooling seriously and I have lived accordingly.

In this schooling to which I was subjected, great stress was laid upon the history of this country to illustrate the feature I have just mentioned. As a result I participated in and was witness to something in the nature of a discovery—which was that in the 200 years of our history many more truths made themselves self-evident than motivated our Founding Fathers. One of these truths bears heavily upon the experiences that I shall recite to you.

The truth, were it to be put in words, would read something like this. I'll repeat it slowly because it is quite significant and deserving of considerable thought:

The condition or state of the members of any nation at any given time reflects the use to which the wealth they have produced is being put by others than the ones who played a part in its production.

That brings me to two experiences which I will describe to you.

The first was my response to an invitation from the president of the FORD FOUNDATION in his offices in New York. His name: Rowan Gaither. Upon arriving there I was greeted with the following:

'Mr. Dodd, we invited you to come because we thought that perhaps, off the record, you would be kind enough to tell us why the Congress is interested in the operations of Foundations such as ourselves.'

Before I could think how best to reply, he volunteered this:

'Mr. Dodd, we operate here under directives which emanate from the White House. Would you like to know what the substance of these directives is?'

My answer was: 'Yes, Mr. Gaither, I would like very much to know.' Whereupon he said:

'The substance of the directives under which we operate is that we shall use our grant-making power so to alter life in the United States that we can be comfortably merged with the Soviet Union. '

Needless to say, I nearly fell off the chair. As soon as I could recover myself to reply, I said:

'Mr. Gaither, legally you are entitled to use your grant-making power for this purpose, but I don't think you are entitled to withhold this information from the American people to whom you are beholden for your tax exemption. So why do you not tell the American people what you have just told me?'

His answer was:

'Mr. Dodd, we would not think of doing that.'

That was one experience that was very informative. It was incredible; nevertheless, it is the truth.

The next experience involved the acceptance of an invitation from the CARNEGIE ENDOWMENT FOR INTERNATIONAL PEACE. This invitation came in response to a letter which I had written the Endowment asking a few pertinent questions. By 'pertinent' I mean that they related to the effort of the Congress to determine if Foundations were engaged in what the Congress said could be

'un-American activities', without defining 'un-American.' I arrived at the office of Dr. Joseph Johnson, who was then president of the Endowment. He was the successor to Alger Hiss. Present were two vice-presidents, relatively new men, and counsel

(a partner in the law firm of Sullivan and Cromwell). After amenities, Dr. Johnson opened the conversation this way:

'Mr. Dodd, we have received your letter. We can answer the questions but it will be a great deal of trouble. The reason for its being a great deal of trouble is that with the ratification by the Senate of the United Nations treaty, our task was done; and so we bundled up everything in the way of records and sent

them to the warehouse, and adopted a policy of constructing a building across the street from the United Nations which will serve as a facility for the benefit of those many organizations which from this point on will be bound to follow the activities of the United Nations. So we have a counter suggestion which is as follows:

If you can spare a member of your staff and send him to New York for two weeks, we'll provide a room in our library and also make available to him the Minute Books of this corporation from its inception.'

My first reaction was that he had lost his mind. I had some suspicion of what these Minute Books might well contain; but here was counsel and there seemed to be no disagreement on the part of the vice-presidents—and all of them were relatively young, so my guess was that none of them had ever read the Minutes themselves. As a result, I accepted the invitation and did send a member of my staff to New York. That member brought back to me on dictaphone belts the following:

We are now back to roughly 1908 when the Trustees raised the question, asking themselves:

(1) Is there any way known to man more effective than war, assuming they wish to alter the life of an entire people?

They discussed this question academically and in a scholarly fashion for almost a year, and came up with the conclusion that WAR is the most effective means known to man, assuming that objective.

Then they raised question No. 2:

(2) How to involve the United States in a war?

This was in 1909. I doubt if there was any subject more removed from the minds of the people in this country at that time than the possibility of involvement in war. There were intermittent shows, you will remember, in the Balkans; and my guess is that not many people in the country even knew where the Balkans were. They answered the question this way:

'We must control the diplomatic machinery of the United States.'

That brings up question no. 3, which is:

(3) How do we secure control of the diplomatic machinery of the United States?

and the answer comes up:

'We must control the State Department.'

That fits in with prior findings which we had uncovered; namely, that the hand of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace inside the State Department was a fact.

Finally, we are in a war. These Trustees have the brashness to congratulate themselves on the wisdom and validity of their original decision because already the impact of our participation in World War I has indicated its capacity to alter our national life. They even go so far as to word and dispatch a telegram to President Wilson, pressuring him to see to it that the war does not end too quickly!

Finally, the war is over. The Trustees then take up the problem which they face: namely, of preventing, as they put it, a reversion of life in the United States to what it was prior to 1914. They came up with the conclusion that:

To gain that end, we must control education in the United States.

They realize this is a prodigious piece of work so they seek and obtain the assistance of the ROCKEFELLER FOUNDATION. They then divide the task into parts, giving to the Rockefeller Foundation the responsibility of altering education as it pertains to domestic subjects. They retain for themselves the task of altering our education as it pertains to subjects bearing on our international relationships. Then they decide together that the key to this is an alteration in the teaching of American history, so they approach three of the then existing prominent historians with the proposition that they alter the manner in which, up to then, they had presented the subject. They are all turned down flat.

They then decide that it is necessary for them to build their own stable of historians. They approach the GUGGENHEIM FOUNDATION, which specializes in the awarding of fellowships, and suggest: When we discover a likely young person who is studying and looking forward to becoming a teacher of history, we will take him to London to pursue his studies. So they take 20 to London, and these 20 are briefed in what is expected of them. These 20 return and eventually become the most active influence in the American Historical Society.

This coincides with the appearance which perhaps you will remember of book after book the contents of which cast aspersion on the Founders of this country, cast aspersion on the ideas which prompted the founding of this country, and relegates them to the realm of myth!

Finally toward the end of the 1920's the Endowment grants the American Historical Society $400,000 for the sole purpose of rendering a report as to what the future of this country promises to be and should be! This appears in seven volumes. The seventh volume, of course, summarizes the contents of the other six, and it ends on this note:

'The future belongs to collectivism administered with characteristic American humanitarianism and efficiency.'

Well, in essence this was the whole story written down; and Mr. Reece who was chairman of the investigation—the last investigation of Foundations—hoped to be able to accomplish this. He was not able to do this owing to the disinterest on the part of the committee's counsel and the violent activities of one of its members. I might mention that that member whose activities barred the way was none other than Wayne Hays—who has come to the end of his career, although this marked the start of it. "

Mr. Dodd concluded his talk with some additional comments which I want to save for another discussion, since they go beyond the subject of Foundations alone. But you may want to replay what I have just recited from his speech, noting carefully how different the truth is from appearances. And remember, the truth has many enemies!

And so it is that the 20th Century has been an unparalleled era of increasingly destructive warfare, violence, and terror on a world-wide scale. By pursuing with relentless determination the goal of merging the United States into ONE WORLD GOVERNMENT, the Trustees of the key group of major Foundations have brought us to the threshold of NUCLEAR WAR ONE—to be waged primarily on American soil.

As I first revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 for May 1976, some of the present-day Trustees of these Foundations have been awakening to the threat of a Soviet double cross in the grand plan for world domination—and last summer this double cross got underway with the planting of short-range underwater-launch nuclear missiles within the territorial waters of the United States, as well as of many other countries. But the world-wide economic and political empire that is today presided over by the Four Rockefeller Brothers is so huge that it includes many individuals who still do not believe that any Soviet double cross will take place, much less that it is already underway.

CHEMICAL WARFARE ALREADY UNDERWAY

For example, last month I reported that 18 Soviet submarines were deployed along our west coast preparing to inject plutonium particles into the air on November 20, 1976. And our own EPA—the Environmental Protection Agency—was cooperating by telling us that on that date a radioactive cloud from a Chinese atomic test would begin passing over our west coast, when actually the radioactive cloud from China had not yet left China's own borders! By interesting coincidence, Russell Trane, the head of the EPA, arrived in a presumably safe location, Moscow, on November 19—the day before the plutonium was to be released by the Soviet subs. With appropriate irony, he arrived there as head of the United States delegation to the "Soviet-American Commission for Cooperation in Environmental Protection." Can you imagine?

The plutonium was released by the subs as scheduled on November 2 0; but just as happened when this was done the first time in early October, unusual weather conditions kept the United States from being badly contaminated. The plutonium cloud drifted across the upper part of the United States and had little effect at ground level. But, my friends, the Soviets never give up.

Five days ago on December 13 I learned that Soviet submarines were lining up along the northwest coast of the United States for the third time for this purpose. This time there are 21 submarines loaded with plutonium poison to inject into our atmosphere. According to my latest Intelligence sources, 16 are deployed along the coast from Seattle, Washington to Eugene, Oregon, while five (5) more lie between Eugene and Eureka, California. All of these are within 20 miles of the shoreline.

I've already explained in detail the connection between this radioactive chemical warfare and the Swine Flu hoax being perpetrated by the United States Government, particularly in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17. Therefore it is significant that the so-called Swine Flu inoculation program was halted with great publicity two days ago owing to death and paralysis suffered by many who have taken the vaccine. This serves to focus the nation's attention once again on the terrible threat Swine Flu is said to be just at a time when the Soviet submarines are once again prepared to inject a poison into our atmosphere that can

produce severe flu-like symptoms. It may be that, as was done the past two times, the Soviet submarines will wait for another announcement from the United States Government that it will serve as a cover story, such as a Chinese nuclear test, before releasing the plutonium into our air. But now they have acquired some experience and it is possible that they will release the plutonium at any time.

Meanwhile the build-up for war continues. While the mounting Soviet threat to Europe is fraying the nerves of NATO Defense Ministers, the most immediate threat to Europe is once again emerging in the Middle East. In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 over a year ago I revealed the over-all plan that existed at that time for war to begin in the Middle East. I ask you now to listen to that AUDIO LETTER No. 6 again. All is nearly ready once again for the long planned war in the Middle East to be ignited. The Rockefeller oil interests now have gotten most of their money out of the Arab region. Now the title to all the oil fields have been sold to the Arabs themselves.

The Middle East war will also leave the United States in an even more defenseless position that we are now in if the Soviet surprise attack on our country is allowed to take place.

CONTINUING THREAT OF SOVIET UNDERWATER MISSILES PLANTED WITHIN AND NEAR UNITED STATES BORDERS

Last month I explained in detail why the underwater missiles that are being planted along our shores by the Soviet Union are so crucial to them in their plan to defeat the United States in NUCLEAR WAR ONE, but I also explained that they are no longer being removed by the United States Navy.

Since I recorded that tape, 57 more nuclear missiles have been planted in our own territorial waters. Added to the 36 I mentioned last month, this brings the total to 93 Soviet missiles in the waters of the United States including Alaska and Hawaii. In addition, four (4) missiles still threaten the Panama Canal, and five (5) more missiles now threaten Canada.

I declared last month that I would no longer reveal the locations of these missiles unless and until responsible arrangements are made to inform the public of the deadly threat we are under. Our Secret Rulers had been using my information from October 1st onward only for their own benefit—and that is not what it is for.

I intend to continue to hold my silence until action is taken for everyone's benefit. Nevertheless I am going to make one exception at this time—it involves Hawaii. World War II began with a devastating surprise attack on Pearl Harbor, and now no less than nine (9) Soviet underwater missiles now threaten Pearl Harbor and the Island of Oahu with the same fate a second time.

I will now give the coordinates for these nine missiles only, in hopes that this time action will be taken to protect the United States Pacific Fleet from the attack that could come at any moment. These coordinates are:

Missile #1:

21 degrees/13 minutes/47 seconds North 157 degrees/46 minutes/28 seconds West

Missile #2:

21-18-37 North, 157-57-21 West

Missile #3:

21-17-31 North, 158- 4-17 West

Missile #4:

21-21-19 North, 158- 9- 7 West

Missile #5:

21-36-12 North, 158-12-48 West

Missile #6:

21-36-33 North, 158-11- 6 West

Missile #7:

21-26-54 North, 157-47-17 West

Missile #8:

21-19-27 North, 157-38-36 West

Missile #9: About 25 miles east of Oahu and 8 miles north of Molokai at

21-21-13 North, 157-15-26 West.

I continue to hope, my friends, that a war can still be prevented. To find out what you can do in the event war does come, I suggest you read issue 135 of McKeever's Multinational Investment and Survival Letter, 1012 Russell St., Baltimore, MD 21230, but my prayer is that you will never need that kind of information.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #20

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is January 24, 1977, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 20.

Just four days ago, on January 20, 1977, our nation witnessed the crowning achievement of Rockefeller public relations propaganda, the so-called People's Inaugural of Jimmy Carter. Through emotional appeals to the American Dream, millions of Americans are being enticed to let their hopes soar based on nothing but blind trust. But the most crushing disappointments are always those which follow the brightest hopes; and the false hopes that are being raised by Jimmy Carter will come crashing to the ground all too soon.

Even so, there is something to be thankful for that deserves a moment's reflection. Nelson Rockefeller still has been denied the goal he has sought for so long—seizure of the Presidency and his establishment as America's first openly visible Dictator. Never before has a bright light been focused on the real plans and actions of Nelson Rockefeller and his brothers; but now, after developing a total of nine scenarios and back-up plans for placing himself in the Oval Office through the back door of his 25th Amendment, he has run through them all, and for the moment he has failed.

Major factors that have upset and delayed the plans of the Four Rockefeller Brothers for total control have included such things as: the twin Gold and Plutonium Scandal at Fort Knox which is still being covered up, Indira Gandhi's crackdown on the CIA

in the summer of 1975, and of course their double-cross by the Soviet Union that began last summer with the planting of underwater nuclear missiles along our shores. And according to my own Intelligence sources, the glare of the truth has played an important role in keeping Nelson Rockefeller out of the presidency, so far. In recent weeks, support for the leadership of the Four Rockefeller Brothers among their corporate socialist allies has been weakened by the shock of the Soviet double-cross. Nelson finally abandoned his ninth take-over scenario involving the Electoral College scheme under pressure from brother David. Thus, David Rockefeller, the most powerful of the Four Brothers, is now playing the role that their late uncle, Winthrop Aldrich, always used to play in seeing to it that Nelson never became President.

What Nelson Rockefeller may do from this point onward remains to be seen. Only one thing is for sure: Like the Soviets, he never gives up; and he has not given up on his dream of becoming the President and Dictator of the United States—and ultimately of the world.

But for the time being it is his brother David who is now President-by-proxy through his control of Jimmy Carter. What we are witnessing in the transition from the Ford to the Carter Administration is nothing more than a changing of shifts in the one real political party that runs America—the Rockefeller Party. The Soviet Union is run decade after decade by fewer than one percent (1%), who belong to the ruling Communist Party; and the United States of America is now run decade after decade by fewer than 1%, who belong to the ruling Rockefeller Party—whether they call themselves Republicans, Democrats, Liberals, or Conservatives.

Jimmy Carter, who campaigned as a Washington outsider, owes his come-from-nowhere election to the fact that David Rockefeller selected him some years ago as the ideal puppet for his purposes. Carter was invited to join David's TRILATERAL COMMISSION and was then steeped in Trilateralist thinking—in other words, the Rockefeller line. With such powerful support, Carter has no idea how dangerous a position he is now in. Already a "Carter Watergate" is brewing to cut him down; and, worst of all, the threat of war hangs over everything he does.

In his Inaugural Address, Carter expressed a preoccupation with war; and for the past several weeks the American public has been under an avalanche of warnings about the Soviet military threat, including statements that the Soviets are now preparing for war. This is a complete turnabout from the virtual ban on anti-Soviet news that was in force in the controlled major media until very recently; and the excuse that has been provided for all these new warnings is a new study of Intelligence information that was launched last summer as soon as it was learned that the Soviet Union was planting offensive missiles in our waters. The threat of war, my friends, is very real; but the intent of the controlled major media in relaying these warnings to you now is another matter. We are now being psychologically conditioned to accept a "Declaration of National Emergency" when the time is ripe, and to submit to the dictatorial controls it will impose.

The drive to merge the United States with the Soviet Union to form an all-powerful World Government has already cost us two World Wars plus Korea and Vietnam. Now, we are once again in a pre-war situation, on the brink of NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and for reasons I can now reveal, the Four Rockefeller Brothers still believe they can succeed in bending the coming nuclear war to their own purposes.

My three special topics for today are:

Topic #1—HENRY FORD'S PARTING CRITICISM OF THE LARGEST FOUNDATION IN THE WORLD

Topic #2—THE CURRENT PRE-WAR HOSTILITIES THAT ARE LEADING UP TO NUCLEAR WAR ONE

Topic #3—THE GREAT SECRET RACE IN SUPER WEAPONS.

Topic #1—One year ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8, I publicly revealed for the very first time the supersecret White House merge directive. Under this directive our lives in America are to be so altered that we can be comfortably merged with the Soviet Union. And since last spring I have also been drawing your attention to the little known but central role that the major tax-free Foundations have played for two generations and more to push our nation in the same direction.

Last month I was able to reveal one of my sources of information about the Foundations—my friend, Mr. Norman Dodd, and to repeat for you his own words about the clandestine role they have played in progressively destroying the America that was created by our Founding Fathers. Mr. Dodd's story is incredible, but it is also based upon painstaking, carefully documented research which he directed with the Congress of the United States. As one of America's foremost authorities on Foundations, Norman Dodd is a man whose words carry a great deal of weight. But since last April I have also been informed anew that there is a contingent among the present-day Trustees of these Foundations who are becoming increasingly worried about the direction in which they are taking us. Even before the Soviet underwater missile crisis materialized last summer, their fears of a Soviet double-cross were mounting rapidly. And now, no less than Henry Ford II has resigned in dissatisfaction as a Trustee of the biggest Foundation in the world—the Ford Foundation; and he has warned in a criticizing letter that a change in direction would be wise to consider.

In his resignation letter of January 11, 1977, he said in part, and I quote:

"The Foundation exists and thrives on the fruits of our economic system. The dividends of competitive enterprise make it all possible. A significant portion of the abundance created by United States business enables the Foundation and like institutions to carry on their work. In effect, the Foundation is a creature of capitalism—a statement that I am sure would be shocking to many professional staff people in the field of philanthropy. It is hard to discern recognition of this fact in anything the Foundation does. It is even more difficult to find an understanding of this in many of the institutions, particularly the universities, that are the beneficiaries of the Foundation's grant programs."

Shortly thereafter he continues, and I quote:

"I am just suggesting to the Trustees and the staff that the system that makes the Foundation possible very probably is worth preserving. Perhaps it's time for the Trustees and staff to examine the question of our obligations to our economic system; and to consider how the Foundation, as one of the system's most prominent offspring, might act most wisely to strengthen and improve its progenitor."

If you are not aware of the concerted drive toward collectivism that has been promoted for decades by the major Foundations, these words of Henry Ford II may surprise you. Even so, you may be even more surprised at the reactions of the major Foundations to his criticisms. Almost universally their bitterest reactions had to do with Ford's defense of free competitive enterprise.

For example, consider the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. In AUDIO LETTER No. 19 last month you heard of the chilling role the Carnegie Endowment has played since 1909 in altering America's national life through warfare and twisting our education. When a high official of the Carnegie Endowment was asked for his comments on Henry Ford's letter of resignation, he reacted in the scornful words, "Is that what the Ford Foundation is set up for—to promote free enterprise?" He was very upset at the mention of free enterprise—the indispensable foundation of Freedom itself.

Henry Ford II is not alone. Those Foundation trustees who insist upon continuing the suicidal drive toward collectivism under the long-time commitment for a One World Government are trying to put down all dissent within their ranks. But Henry Ford II has courageously shown the way, and we can hope for others to follow.

Topic #2—In all the major wars of this century involving the United States, undeclared warfare has been a consistent pattern. In the cases of Korea and Vietnam, in fact, the entire wars were undeclared. In the cases of World Wars I and II, undeclared warfare and provocations preceded the formal outbreak of war and marked the time period in each case that has since been called "pre-war."

In that sense, we are now living in the pre-war days that are leading up to NUCLEAR WAR ONE here in America! But as we are living out the days of the pre-NUCLEAR WAR ONE period, undeclared hostilities have reached a level unparalleled in the past.

Consider first the repeated plutonium cloud attacks which have been mounted on the United States by Soviet submarines in recent months. As I have related in previous monthly AUDIO LETTERS, the first such attack was mounted in early October 1976 by Soviet submarines deployed along the Atlantic, Pacific, and Gulf coasts of the United States. Based on the results from that first full-scale experiment on our country, Soviet chemical warfare specialists concluded that subsequent plutonium cloud attacks could be mounted most efficiently from stations along the Northwest Coast.

In late November 1976, a second experimental attack was mounted to test this out; and while it was not completely successful from the Soviet viewpoint, it provided all the additional data they needed.

Both of these experimental plutonium cloud attacks by the Soviet Union were accompanied by convenient cover announcements by the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the EPA, to the effect that radioactive clouds from Chinese nuclear blasts would be passing over us. Thus an explanation was readily available should something unexpectedly severe happen—but it did not.

And on December 13, 1976, as I reported last month, 21 Soviet submarines loaded with plutonium poison to inject into our atmosphere arrived on station along the Northwest Coast of the

United States. This time, my friends, experimentation was no longer the goal. Certain individuals in the United States Government knew they were there, and knew why, but did nothing whatsoever to interfere with their mission.

As of December 31, 1976, 13 of the 21 subs had emptied their load into our atmosphere and headed out to sea, having timed their attack to make optimum use of severe winter storm conditions across the United States. The other 8 subs remained behind to reinforce the main plutonium cloud by continuing to feed it periodically over a period of days. Finally on January 3, 1977, these 8 Soviet subs also departed out to sea, having emptied their loads into our atmosphere.

According to my own Intelligence sources, this third and latest plutonium cloud attack by the Soviet Union was very effective. The Soviets did achieve a very broad dispersal of the plutonium poison throughout the continental United States. This, on top of the record cold weather blanketing most of the United States lately, may well lead to an outbreak of flu-like sicknesses in the near future, to which the Government has been conditioning us now for nearly a year.

Undeclared warfare by the Soviet Union is also continuing by means of the short-range underwater-launch missiles which have been planted in our waters by the Soviet Union ready for use in a surprise attack. Last month I revealed that 93 such missiles were in place in American waters, and I gave the navigational coordinates for nine of them which were surrounding the Island of Oahu, where Pearl Harbor is located.

I can now report that the United States Navy did remove all nine of these missiles, completing the operation on December 31, 1976. But four Soviet submarines were on hand to observe the complete missile removal operation by our Navy; and as of January 17, just one week ago, two new Soviet missiles were already in place, threatening Pearl Harbor again. In addition, four other Soviet missiles have been planted since I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 19 last month—two in Alaskan waters, the other two on the West Coast. This brings the total back up to 90 as of now.

My disclosures last month demonstrated to certain persons that I am not bluffing, that the United States is indeed targeted by a massive new round of Soviet underwater nuclear missiles. But for the reasons I gave two months ago in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 18 for November, 1976, I do not intend to reveal the rest of the missile locations merely to have them wasted in the deadly cat-and-mouse game now under way. Instead, my own Intelligence sources have made it crystal clear that only public exposure of the truth about this whole deadly matter has any hope of stopping the coming war. For that reason I have already launched efforts through a number of indirect channels which lie outside the Rockefeller sphere of control in an attempt to bring about this public exposure.

If full-fledged war does come, my friends, America is in for a wide range of nasty military surprises. In certain areas Soviet approaches to military technology are far different from our own—such as in the field of anti-submarine warfare.

One field in which they are literally decades ahead of the United States is in the area of microwaves as they affect human beings. Since early December the Soviet Union has been conducting a major experimental test program on a new satellite-based system that uses microwaves to directly affect the behavior of humans. The test victims: the crews of selected

tankers and freighters in and near American waters.

Soviet researchers discovered long ago that prolonged exposure to microwaves, even at intensities considered "safe" in the United States, can produce a long list of effects on people. These range from dizziness and irritability to emotional instability and alteration of brain wave patterns, as well as other effects. Starting from these findings, Soviet scientists have developed microwave bombardment techniques which have the basic effect of greatly reducing a person's capacity for exercising judgment and fully comprehending facts at his disposal. A person under such bombardment, in other words, is very prone to make mistakes, serious mistakes.

On December 15, 1976, the Liberian tanker Argo Merchant went aground on the Nantucket shoals off Cape Cod, and the resulting oil spill of 7-1/2 million gallons was the worst to date in American history. Many things were strange about the incident—such as the fact that the Nantucket shoals are a very well known navigational hazard, and the Argo Merchant was many miles off course. Hearings later revealed that the ship's navigational gear was not in proper condition, but strange behavior by the crew itself went unexplained.

The Argo Merchant was then followed by a rash of tanker incidents in and near American waters; and in almost every case, errors of judgment were either primary or contributing factors.

It was a bad month for the Coast Guard; but it was worst of all for the 38 nationalist Chinese crewmen of the tanker Grand Zenith, which was lost at sea off the New England coast with over 8-million gallons of heavy fuel oil aboard. On December 30, 1976, the Zenith reported its position as about 60 miles south of Yarmouth, Nova Scotia. It was never heard from again. Several days later, after the ship failed to arrive at its destination, the Coast Guard began a search for the missing ship. However it was noticed that the last position reported by the Zenith was so far north of its planned course that it did not seem to make sense. As a result, the search was shifted to a seemingly more likely area far to the south of that location.

The story of the Grand Zenith is a tragic one, my friends. But it might have been less tragic had the Coast Guard taken the last position report by the Captain of the Grand Zenith more seriously and anchored search operations on that position, because on January 7, 1977, I received Intelligence information to the effect that the location of the sunken Grand Zenith was approximately 43 degrees 5 minutes North, 67 degrees 52 minutes West. Furthermore, my information indicated that as of that time there were still survivors in the immediate vicinity of the sinking.

It was urgent that this be brought to the attention of the Coast Guard without delay. The search had already been narrowed down to the wrong area—over 200 miles to the southeast of the correct position—based on the finding of two life jackets bearing the name Grand Zenith. I immediately contacted the J. F. Moran Company in Providence, Rhode Island (the ship's agent in New England), and gave them the information. They passed it on to the Coast Guard—but there it stopped!

For days I tried directly and indirectly to get someone to check out the location I had been given. On January 10 I contacted the Coast Guard directly to see what had been done. I was informed that no attempt whatever had been made to check out my report, and that no attempt was going to be made!! Instead

the same fruitless area 300 miles east of Cape Cod was searched day after day for a week with no hope whatsoever of finding the survivors. Meanwhile I could not persuade the Coast Guard even to make a single flight over the actual site of the sinking in order to check out my report.

The same information was also given to the Navy after the Coast Guard refused to investigate; and the Navy, too, refused to check it out. Had either the Navy or the Coast Guard checked the information I gave them about the Grand Zenith, they would have found it to be true, and that would have demonstrated to the public at large that my Intelligence sources about matters like this are extremely accurate.

My Intelligence sources had hoped that this would be exactly the outcome of my relaying the life-saving information about the Grand Zenith. But, my friends, the TRUTH has many enemies.

Topic #3—The brain-scrambling microwave weapons which are now entering operational status in the Soviet arsenal are just one example of a whole new generation of superweapons which are now under development in a secret arms race. The participants in this race are none other than the Corporate Socialist Rockefeller cartel on the one hand, and the State Socialists of the Soviet Union on the other. Thus, while they are allies in the drive to take over the rest of the world, there remains a tension of rivalry between the two. Each would like to achieve clear supremacy over the other, and each is trying to prevent the other from achieving such supremacy. Caught in the middle as both pawn and prize is the United States of America with her people, her resources, and her industrial and military establishment. We continually hear about the military relationship between the Soviet Union and the United States, but the real arms struggle is between the Soviet Union and the Rockefeller empire—and it is a well kept secret.

Weapons which are under normal official Defense Department control in this country are always compared with weapons which enjoy a similar officially acknowledged status in the Soviet Union. Thus military planners think in terms of Soviet Backfire Bombers versus the American B-l Bomber; Soviet missiles and missile-firing submarines versus their counterparts; and new developments such as Cruise Missiles which, by the way, are not actually a basic new concept at all. All of these things are real and important factors in the military equation. But there is another layer of weaponry that you have never heard about, yet which is crucial to the real power balance between the Rockefeller and Soviet empires. This is the realm of the secret arms race in highly advanced super weapons. This realm is completely unaffected by SALT treaties or other treaties, and involves a continual jockeying for pure raw power!

Thus, for example, timid reports are just beginning to be made public about the possibilities that lasers might be used to blind military satellites, and that some day far in the future they might even be developed into death rays like those of Science Fiction. As for operational weapons in the supersecret category, the Soviet underwater nuclear missiles that now infest our waters and the sonar-absorbing mini-submarines which are used to plant them are good examples.

One of the puzzling things to me until recently was the incredible "Red Friday Agreement" of October 1, 1976, whereby the Rockefeller Brothers pledged, through President Ford, not to harass the Soviet submarines planting missiles in our waters. Even more puzzling has been the absence of a Soviet ultimatum or

surprise attack so far, given our heavy coastal targeting with these missiles. But now, I can give you the answers.

When I first revealed the locations of Soviet underwater missiles around the world in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 last August, I did so with the knowledge that a planned world-wide Soviet surprise attack was imminent, and that public exposure was the only thing that could prevent it. Now I know more fully why the surprise element was so crucial to the double-cross embarked upon by the Soviet Union. The Soviets were trying to prepare and launch the attack before an awesome weapons system that is under direct Rockefeller control could be activated; but ever since that surprise was ruined, they have been forced to bide their time while they watch for another opportunity to catch the Rockefeller empire in a vulnerable moment.

Meanwhile a standoff is being maintained between the Soviet underwater missiles and the Rockefeller superweapons system I am about to tell you about. At the same time, Rockefeller propaganda is being used to rapidly wash away the idea of East-West detente in a flood of warnings about the Soviet threat and possible war. The purpose of it all is to lead up to a "Declaration of National Emergency", as I have already warned. Finally, NUCLEAR WAR ONE is programmed to come. The purpose of the Rockefeller superweapons is not to prevent this war. These superweapons are only a club over the head of the Soviets to insure that the war goes according to plan. This includes Soviet adherence to the "Nuclear Safe Zone" which was established by secret agreement to protect the Rockefeller Brothers and their intimates.

I was first alerted to the existence of the Rockefeller superweapons system as the result of my press release which was sent out to nearly 11,000 newspapers in the United States late in October in connection with the release of monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17. The press release called attention to the pivotal role General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, had played in preventing a surprise attack by means of Soviet underwater missiles.

On November 17, 1976, one of my associates received a call from a Mr. Tony Hodges, a prominent environmentalist who lives in Honolulu. Mr. Hodges had been given a copy of the press release, and called to find out more about it. He had good reason to be interested because nearly a year earlier, unbenoticed to my associates or myself, he had delivered a 47-page warning document to the ambassadors of more than 50 countries who had signed the 1971 Seabeds Arms Control Treaty. In this warning document Mr. Hodges alerted the reader to, quote:

"Probable violations by the USA and the USSR of the 1971 Seabeds Arms Control Treaty."

He was careful to make clear that the material contained in the document did not prove his suspicions that undersea weapons of the sort banned by the treaty had been deployed by either the United States or the Soviet Union. Nevertheless he did explain in considerable detail why such weapons, such as missiles and undersea silos, would be militarily desirable; and he also presented the statements of several extremely highly qualified experts in this field of technology contending that such undersea missile systems are feasible.

One of these authorities is Dr. John P. Craven, who is presently (Jan. 1977) the dean of Marine Programs for the University of Hawaii as well as Marine Affairs Coordinator for

the State of Hawaii. Formerly he was Chief Scientist on United States Navy projects which involved both the development of this nation's submarine-launched ballistic missile system and deep submersibles. He is also an attorney specializing in Marine Law, and at last report continued to be a high-level consultant to the Department of Defense.

In his warning document, Mr. Hodges lists the impressive credentials of Dr. Craven in more detail, and also presents voluminous notes on a conversation he had with Dr. Craven in November 1975 about the subject of undersea missiles. The entire Craven interview as reported in the Hodges warning document provides a great deal of insight into the whole subject of undersea missiles, which are discussed throughout as being sealed inside a protective capsule while they dwell in their hiding places beneath the sea. At no point did Dr. Craven admit to knowing of the actual existence of any such system; but according to the report of Mr. Hodges, the feasibility of such undersea missiles was strongly confirmed by Dr. Craven.

To illustrate this, I will now quote from page 26 of the Hodges warning document—Notes C-2 9 through C-31, quote:

"Craven said he could develop a total weapons system to do what I suggested in a maximum of four (4) years, longer if it needed to be clandestine.

The above is an enormously important statement by Craven, since the author believes that Craven was intimately involved in the development of the systems noted in this warning document. The figure Craven gave for carrying out the system development in total secrecy, such as has been done, was seven (7) years. This is significant because it is believed that the program to place nuclear weapons on and within the seabed was begun in 1968 while Craven was still chief scientist of the Navy's Strategic Systems project and its Deep Submergence Systems project. The seabed silos and the tidal wave and earthquake-generating systems would certainly fall in those two areas of responsibility of his.

It should be noted that whenever during the conversation we got away from whether or not the weapons system had actually been implanted, Craven quickly warmed up to the subject as the 'can do' technologist he is known to be. When he said he could develop such a program—a 'total weapons system' he called it—in only (4) years, he did so with considerable gusto.

It was in this vein that Craven offered the next remark. Craven said that the individual missile capsules did not have to be placed in silos on the seabed, but could be dumped off the rear of a fast-moving destroyer. Craven said that there would be some problem for the missile to know its precise location, but that this could be worked out."

The Hodges warning document also reports the assessment of feasibility of underwater missiles by two other experts. One who is identified as having worked for 16 years on American submarine-launched ballistic missile projects is Robert C. Aldrich. He is quoted as saying, quote:

"Quite feasible, though I was skeptical at first."

Another person quoted is Costa Tpsis of MIT Center for International Studies, a well known analyst of strategic missile systems. His assessment of the feasibility of undersea missile systems, as described by Hodges, is reported to be quote:

"'Absolutely possible.' Tpsis said that such silos could be placed on the continental shelf in water as shallow as 100 meters and still achieve the same protective purpose."

(End of quote from the Hodges warning document.)

My friends, Tony Hodges deserves a great deal of credit, both for the importance of the material he uncovered and summarized in his warning document, and for the way in which he has handled it. First, he tried unsuccessfully to get the Government to take proper corrective measures without having to resort to embarrassing publicity about it. Then, he turned to the press in the person of a syndicated columnist, whom I will simply call "Mr. X." Mr. X took great interest in the Hodges warning document material and in the plan to have it delivered to the governments of the signatories to the Seabed Arms Control Treaty on December 17, 1975. According to Hodges, a big news story was written ready to break on the same day the documents were delivered—December 17, 1975. But suddenly Mr. X decided to kill the story because CIA Director William Colby, National Security Council Staff Director Brent Scowcroft, and Richard Chaney of the White House Staff all asked him to kill it! Nevertheless the warning document was delivered to the ambassadors of the Seabed Treaty signatories in Washington and at the United Nations in New York City. According to Mr. Hodges this, too, apparently fell on deaf ears. Nor have attempts to bring it to the attention of the United States Congress apparently been of any use!

But, my friends, Tony Hodges was on to something very big indeed. Having been alerted for the first time by his warning document that the United States might be involved in some way with undersea missiles or other nuclear weapons, I began checking my own Intelligence sources to find out whether it was actually so or not. And, my friends, the answer is "Yes." The Hodges warning document provides a great deal of very informative background material for what I am about to tell you; and I am informed that as long as he has copies of it left, you can obtain a copy for $10.00 by writing to him directly. The name and address:

Mr. Anthony Hodges, 3238 Paty Drive, Honolulu, Hawaii 96822 His telephone number now is: Area Code 808-988-2557.

What I have to tell you now, my friends, is not the responsibility of Tony Hodges in any way. It is what I have learned from my own Intelligence sources over the past two months, and I accept full responsibility for making it public.

When I revealed the presence of Soviet short-range nuclear missiles in our waters last August, I mentioned that the United States had not placed similar missiles in the waters around the Soviet Union. I can confirm once again that this is the case. But now, I have learned that an entirely different kind of underwater-launch offensive nuclear missiles are targeted on the Soviet Union from resting places deep in the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans.

According to my own Intelligence information, only 14 of these undersea supermissiles have been deployed—5 in the Pacific, 9 in the Atlantic—but that's enough. Each of these encapsulated supermissiles is more akin to the Saturn moon rocket than to any ordinary ICBM. Each carries several dozen independently targetable hydrogen warheads. Several of these on each missile are superyield warheads, with the rest being similar to the normal Minuteman or Polaris warhead. The superyield warheads are designed to devastate all the major ports and key portions of the

industrial heartland of the Soviet Union, in spite of the Civil Defense measures that the Soviets have taken in recent years. The huge number of lower-yield warheads are targeted on relatively soft targets throughout the Soviet Union with the sole purpose of raising the Soviet casualty toll as high as possible.

The whole purpose of these undersea supermissiles is to confront the Soviet Union with a threat of massive counterattack which cannot be neutralized in a Soviet first strike, and which would ruin the Soviet Union as a functioning society. According to plan, these missiles would virtually destroy the Soviet Union as a modern civilization, killing over 100-million people in the process. But, my friends, the purpose of these undersea supermissiles aimed at the Soviet Union is not to protect you and me, nor to prevent war! They are under the direct control of the Rockefeller Brothers by way of their controlled CIA—not the normal chain of command through the Department of Defense; and their purpose is to serve as an awesome club over the heads of the Soviet rulers to make sure that NUCLEAR WAR ONE goes as planned.

The world-wide Pearl Harbor attack that was imminent last August when I publicly revealed the world-wide locations of Soviet underwater missiles was a daring Soviet gamble. Its purpose was to eliminate the Four Rockefeller Brothers from the scene and simultaneously prevent the CIA undersea missiles from being launched by making such counterattacks seem pointless. But the key ingredient of that plan was secrecy and total surprise. My intelligence sources made it abundantly clear last July and August that the only way to prevent immediate nuclear disaster was public exposure of the truth. And now we know why. Now we also know why the Four Rockefeller Brothers felt that they could get away with the seemingly suicidal policy instituted on Red Friday, October 1, 1976, agreeing to allow the Soviet Union to keep planting short-range nuclear missiles in our territorial waters without harassment. It's all part of a nuclear standoff involving weapons the public does not even know about and in which the Rockefellers believe they hold the upper hand.

There are now strong indications that the Four Rockefeller Brothers, believing they still hold the upper hand with their undersea supermissiles, plan to turn the presence of the Soviet missiles in our waters to their own advantage. During the fall of 1976 they re-established the strained alliance between themselves and the Soviet Union for the time being; and now we are being built up rapidly to accept a Declaration of National Emergency. The announcement by the Government that there are Soviet missiles in our waters is now being arranged to be done with the advanced knowledge of the Soviet Union. Just as Franklin D. Roosevelt declared an "unlimited national emergency" on May 27, 1941 as part of the build-up for war, a similar scenario is being worked out now to trap us all!

But the cruel joke may be on the Rockefeller Brothers themselves, who may yet be buried by the Soviet Union along with millions of us. Something is going wrong with the CIA supermissiles deep in the ocean; and as of now, one is completely disabled and five more are deteriorating rapidly and probably are not usable. That leaves only eight undersea supermissiles at the disposal of the Rockefeller Brothers; and their reliability, too, is now open to serious question. In addition, the Soviet fears about their corroding underwater missiles in the secret Soviet missile crisis of 1971, which I described in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14 last July, apply again now. Several of the undersea supermissiles are now leaking plutonium from their disabled warheads into the surrounding water, and the possibility of an

uncontrolled explosion cannot be ruled out. Should this happen, tidal waves or earthquakes could be created that could affect Hawaii, the Bahamas, or any place along the east coast from Nova Scotia to Florida.

Just as my Intelligence sources emphasized last summer that public exposure of the truth was the key to avoiding disaster, the same situation exists again now. The CIA undersea supermissiles in the Atlantic and Pacific cannot protect us from war, and in fact are not even intended for that purpose. Yet they sit there as a present hazard to all of our lives, directly and indirectly. Therefore I am going to reveal the locations of all 14 of the CIA undersea supermissiles in navigational coordinates. At a minimum I hope to strip the Rockefeller cartel of their ace in the hole that makes our survival irrelevant to them; but even more, I hope to undo their continued cooperation with the Soviet Union in a plan to sacrifice millions of our lives. This may well be our last chance to prevent the present "pre-war period" from erupting as planned into NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

The missiles are located in water depths ranging from a few hundred feet at several Atlantic sites to more than 15,000 feet at one Pacific site.

The following five locations are in the Pacific Ocean. Incidentally, these are in the vicinity of locations which are shown on a map in the Hodges warning document as probable locations of undersea weapons. As explained in the warning document, Mr. Hodges believes that these locations were the subject of seabed weapons installations or tests by the CIA-financed Howard Hughes mystery ship, the Glomar Explorer.

Pacific Missile No. 1—About 25 miles north of the Hawaiian Island Kauai at 22-37-14 North, 159-21-55 West. Plutonium leakage from this missile is badly contaminating the surrounding water.

Pacific Missile No. 2—About 10 miles north of Kauai at 22-21-59 North, 159-36-19 West. Leaking, but not as badly.

Pacific Missile No. 3—About 650 miles northwest of Christmas Island at 9-20-0 North, 165-18-41 West.

Pacific Missile No. 4—About 550 miles northwest of Christmas Island at 8-0-0 North, 163-34-38 West. This missile is totally disabled.

Pacific Missile No. 5—About 420 miles west-northwest of Christmas Island at 3-2-0 North, 164-35-25 West.

Now for the Atlantic missiles:

Atlantic Missile No. 1—In Canadian waters near Sable Island at 43-52-0 North, 59-10-54 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 2—In Canadian waters about 140 miles south-southeast of Halifax, Nova Scotia, at 42-30-24 North, 63-1-5 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 3—About 225 miles due east of Cape Cod at 41-46-23 North, 65-54-33 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 4—About 120 miles southeast of Cape Cod at 40-20-0 North, 68-18-32 West. Leaking.

Atlantic Missile No. 5—About 50 miles to the southwest of

Atlantic Missile No. 4 at 40-4-0 North, 69-17-27 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 6—Only about 30 miles southeast of Cape Hatteras, North Carolina at 34-49-1 North, 75-17-27 West. Leaking.

Atlantic Missile No. 7—About 240 miles east-northeast of Charleston, So. Car. at 33-5-40 North, 75-43-38 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 8—About 290 miles east-southeast of Jacksonville, Fla. at 30-9-9 North, 77-8-44 West. Leaking.

And finally:

Atlantic Missile No. 9—In British waters about 100 miles east-northeast of Nassau in the Bahamas at 25-19-21 North, 75-54-33 West.

In 1947 the Rockefeller Brothers arranged for the CIA to be created for their own private purposes, and today it is the CIA—not the normal military chain of command—that exercises control for the Rockefellers over the undersea supermissiles as part of its expanding encroachment into military affairs. This is helping to bring our beloved country to agony and ruin, unless, my friends, WE stop it!

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #21

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is February 27, 1977, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 21.

For some time now I have been warning you of the dangers facing America. Now, time is fast running out. When Jimmy Carter was inaugurated President on January 20, 1977, a contingency plan concocted in 1963 was set in motion, and it is progressing very rapidly. The key to this particular plan was to be the placement of a completely puppetized president in office at a time of rapidly-mounting war threats. Under this plan, inadequate performance by the puppet presidents in the face of these dire threats is intended to enable a take-over of the country by Rockefeller-controlled military and CIA inner circles. In this manner the total dictatorship sought by the four Rockefeller Brothers is to be brought into being.

We are now faced with the planned threat of NUCLEAR WAR ONE with the puppet president now on the scene in the person of Jimmy Carter. Carter continually spouts the Rockefeller line as he learned it from his participation in their TRILATERAL COMMISSION, but he has no real grasp at all of what he is involved in.

Meanwhile, the CIA is also being readied for its appointed role. Nelson Rockefeller has been busy packing key positions in the CIA with his "new men"; and to facilitate the enlistment of required military support for the coming Dictatorship, a military man who is a member of the Rockefeller inner circle, Admiral Stansfield Turner, has been selected to head the CIA. That's why the earlier nomination of Ted Sorenson ran into a brick wall—he ran afoul of a game plan he didn't even know about.

The plan calls for pre-war crisis measures to be used to condition Americans to accept the elaborate transformation of America into a total dictatorship, and this pre-war build-up is going on right now. Ultimately many millions of Americans are to be annihilated in a Soviet nuclear attack, which is to be carried out according to rules laid down in secret agreements negotiated by former Secretary of State Henry Kissinger.

As I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 for May 1976, this joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan includes a super-secret "NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE" across the upper portion of the continental United States within which the Rockefellers and their intimates plan to ride out the war on Mount Desert and Bartlett Islands off the coast of Maine, right in the heart of the Nuclear Safe Zone. This Nuclear Safe Zone is merely the nuclear-age equivalent of the orders which were given to Allied Bombing Commands during World War II not to damage Rockefeller-owned strategic targets in Germany. These orders caused such huge important installations as the I. G. Farben Chemical plants to survive unscathed all the way through World War II, while other targets and even whole cities nearby were completely leveled.

Last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 20 I was able to reveal the club the Rockefeller Brothers believe they hold over the heads of the Soviets to make sure the Soviet nuclear attack on America goes as planned. In this way the Rockefellers will have used the Soviets to do their dirty work for them. In any event, this club consists of an undersea fleet of 14 super-missiles targeted on the Soviet Union—five in the Pacific, 9 in the Atlantic. These missiles are not under the control of our Defense Department, and have nothing whatever to do with the defense of our country as a whole. They're under the direct control of the Rockefeller Brothers through their controlled CIA, and their only purpose is to make sure that the Rockefeller inner circles in America are not included in the holocaust that is being arranged for the rest of us. If all goes as planned, the CIA super-missiles deep in the ocean will never be fired at all. Only if there should be a Soviet double-cross would there be an attempt to fire them, and under those circumstances they would act only as vengeance weapons.

Yet as awesome as these CIA super-missiles are, they cannot prevent a Soviet double-cross. In fact, they have already provoked one double-cross. Last summer the Soviet Union sneaked in under the CIA missile umbrella and began planting short-range underwater-launch nuclear missiles in our own territorial waters, hoping to achieve such total surprise that the CIA undersea super-missiles would never be fired. The limited exposure of this threat, which I was able to achieve by means of AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 for July and August 1976, was sufficient to ruin the Soviet surprise, so an attack at that time was averted. The joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan is back on track for the time being, but now both sides are watching for a chance to double-cross each other. Meanwhile, as I reported last month, the presence of the Soviet missiles in our waters are now being incorporated into the joint war plan.

For the first time in many years, Civil Defense, of which we have none, has again become the subject of wide concern. We are again hearing radio test alerts on the Emergency Broadcasting System which will be used in the event of war. It has even been hinted that we may soon experience unannounced air-raid drills, a practice that could be especially effective in conditioning us all to the idea that war is imminent.

Only a few days ago, on February 11, 1977, President Carter

became the first president to fly with great publicity in a special airplane now fitted as a flying Command Post to be used in nuclear war. The article above this in the New York Daily News carried the headline, quote: "CARTER GETS A PREVIEW OF WORLD WAR III." Just a year ago such headlines would have been unthinkable. Now they are all around us.

Because the plan now under way requires that military support be arranged for the new Dictatorship, it was essential that General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, be neutralized as I said he would be in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17. General Brown played a pivotal role in preventing a Soviet nuclear surprise attack on the United States during August and September 1976; but that will not happen again, my friends. The campaign which began in October 197 6 to render General Brown ineffective in his efforts to protect America has now succeeded. He is no longer able to influence events to any significant extent. That is why when Carter demanded on January 12, 1977, that studies be performed toward eliminating 75% to 80% of our Intercontinental Missiles, General Brown simply agreed to have the studies done. Can you imagine?

My friends, now that we have lost General Brown, there is no one left in the entire United States Government to help us. There are still many patriotic individuals in the Government, of course, but they are not the ones in positions of power. Only massive public pressure—informed, angry, and determined—now has any chance of stopping the carefully-planned war to kill millions of us and enslave the rest. Every one of us must work to bring about public awareness and pressure in whatever time we have left. But suppose we do not succeed—then what?! I believe the time has come to face that question squarely and honestly.

It may well be that we have already failed in our efforts to help prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE. Only God can know, but we dare not give up because the victory may yet be ours. But the fact is that many Americans do not want to listen. They are not ready, and some will not be ready to listen until catastrophe comes upon their heads.

If NUCLEAR WAR ONE does come here, my friends, millions will die, but there will also be some survivors. You owe it to yourself, to your family, and to our whole society to do whatever you can to be among the survivors. The godless dictatorship being fashioned by our unelected Rulers will collapse in the end; and when it does, there must be people left who know what America was all about, and what went wrong. Because you are willing to hear the truth now before disaster arrives, YOU are that people. And if we are all forced to pass through the dark tunnel of war and bungling dictatorship, it will fall your lot to help lead our people out of darkness and into the sunlight once again on the other side.

My three special topics for today are:

Topic #1—HOW OUR NATIONAL SECURITY WAS REALLY LOST Topic #2—PRE-WAR AMERICA, 1977 Topic #3—THE END OF AN ERA.

Topic #1—For more than a generation, since the outbreak of World War II in fact, Americans have been preoccupied with the idea of national security. But what is National Security? One concept of national security is the familiar one promoted day in and day out by the federal government. According to the Government, national security is a matter that is just too complex for most of us to understand and must always be wrapped in secrecy,

intrigue, and more secrecy. When we see diplomatic maneuvers which seem to help our enemies while harming our friends or even ourselves, we're always told we simply don't understand the so-called National Security considerations that are involved. The map of the free world shrinks ever smaller, our country grows visibly weaker and weaker, yet the federal bureaucracy knows best, we are assured, and will take care of it all for us. But while you and I are both forced to pay the bill for it all, we are never, never let in on what it is really all about.

What is called "National Security" today by the Government would be better described as security for our Secret Rulers. They see themselves as the embodiment of our nation, just as royalty did in times past. Thus to them, so-called National Security is nothing more than a king's "X" to prevent the public, you and me, from learning things about governmental doings that could endanger our Rulers' security. Vital secrets that are routinely betrayed to our deadliest enemies are kept hidden from our view.

The Government's version of National Security involves ever greater centralization of all power and all decision-making into just a few hands. Increasingly it involves spying on the citizens of our own nation, and now it even includes diplomatic manipulations that have betrayed us straight down the road to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. This is what the words National Security really mean to those who secretly control the United States Government—a government that used to be ours, but is no more. What is called National Security obviously is not what most of us naturally think of when we hear these words. The Government's version of National Security, in other words, is an illusion and a fraud. Real national security has to be rooted in the people, who are the nation.

When we think of national security we usually think of the ability of the nation as a whole to protect itself from damage by other nations—politically, economically, and if need be militarily. But there's another side to national security that is actually more basic, yet we in America have been led to gradually neglect it and finally lose it altogether over the past 100 years or so. I refer to the internal stability that has been destroyed by over-centralization.

Gone are the days when America consisted of thousands of communities which could, if need be, survive for indefinite periods without supplies from distant sources. And gone are the days when consumers could choose from among a wide variety of products produced by true competitors. Instead, most of the things we now have to have for life come from somewhere else, often we know not where; and there is little competition or real choice left. The flow of essential commodities can now be turned off at will by the corporate socialists and a few central spigots in order to bring America to a grinding halt. Most Americans today never give this state of affairs a second thought. The young cannot imagine things being any different; and most of those who are old enough to remember a different way of life are willing to settle for what we have today with the comforts and luxuries that have become commonplace.

What has happened, my friends, is that we have all become addicts. There is an addiction that underlies our entire way of life today, and this same addiction has made it possible for us to be brought to the threshold of Totalitarian World Government and nuclear holocaust. My friends, we are addicts—addicts to energy. There's no precedent in history for the magnitude of the suffering man can now bring about, because there is no precedent

in history for the energy addiction that now grips America and the world.

For thousands of years mankind got by on the ancient and renewable forms of energy such as animal power, water power, wind power, and the burning of wood. Then came coal, and the industrial revolution was spawned. But it was petroleum, thanks to its great convenience and high energy output, that was destined to make true energy addicts of us all.

It is typical of addictions that they take time to develop, and that is true of our energy addiction of today. It began very gradually over 100 years ago, and has built up over several generations. During the early years after petroleum first made its appearance, we were still in the take-it-or-leave-it stage; but gradually it found more and more uses, and then whole technologies were spawned which depend specifically on petroleum energy, such as the automobile and the airplane. These technologies gradually took on the character of necessities, rather than optional luxuries, and from that point onward we were true addicts.

The same way, our energy addiction expanded to include dependence on natural gas and electricity. Even our food production became increasingly dependent upon uninterrupted supplies of non-renewable energy. The American farmer, blessed already with a rich land, began to retire his ox-drawn plow in favor of a gasoline-powered tractor, and soon expanded his productivity still further with other farm machinery—all of it run by petroleum energy. It became possible for fewer farmers to feed us all; and farmers who failed to keep up with these new trends, whether for financial reasons or otherwise, gradually disappeared from the scene.

Then came high-yield hybrid crops, petroleum-derivative insecticides and fungicides to protect these delicate hybrids from damage, and fertilizers made with natural gas as a raw material in order to make them grow better. Farms became bigger, fewer, and more expensive; huge agribusinesses, energy-intensive and geared for high productivity, began to dominate American agriculture, making it still harder for the small family farm to compete.

Meanwhile, petroleum energy made possible fast freight transportation over long distances. High-volume food distributors have exploited this in such a way that nearby small suppliers of many foods are by-passed in favor of a few centralized huge supply sources far away. This, of course, has caused many of the nearby supplies that used to exist in many areas to dry up and disappear. For example, every town of any size used to have access to one or more local dairies which processed the milk produced by cows in that area. But today many of the familiar, dependable local dairies of the past are gone; and if you can find anyone who can tell you where the milk you buy comes from, you may well discover that it comes from a central processing plant in another state.

We have now reached the point where practically all the necessities of life, including food and water, reach us only by means of non-renewable, centrally-controlled energy. The energy pushers have done their job well, making it appear that nothing more than natural trends were at work. They have fed our addiction beyond the point of no return, taking care not to allow competing sources of energy to develop that could get out of their control and ruin their grip on us.

Our energy addiction is now own purposes. When we're told means that we must knuckle unde gradually ground under the heel rising costs.

to be used against us for their now that we must conserve, it r to sacrifices as we are of artificial shortages and

My friends, the role of energy in our society is so all-pervasive today that it is hard to describe, and it is the Rockefellers who first realized how powerful a tool it could be for their own ends. John D. Rockefeller, Sr. built the giant Standard Oil monopoly with ruthless determination to corner the market on petroleum. The trust-busting era merely caused him to devise better ways to hide his control while his program proceeded without letup, and soon the Rockefeller Standard Oil empire became involved in international intrigue and wars to overcome foreign competitors as well. The process has continued down to the present with wars, skirmishes, coups, and so forth, enabling the Rockefeller empire to maintain a strangle hold on most of the world's oil. In recent years this has been made virtually airtight through control of most of the free world's refining capacity. So today it is the four Rockefeller Brothers who are in a position to turn off the vital energy supplies to which we have become addicted for our very lives. We have all become so accustomed to the steady supply of electricity, natural gas, and petroleum products that the illusion of reliability has been created.

Alternative means of surviving by means of local resources have gradually fallen into the disuse and have disappeared, while we all have been lulled into a life or death dependence on centralized energy sources controlled by the Rockefeller Brothers. And they're not interested in your security or mine. Their horizon is the world and how to control it—not the mere survival of America. Therefore when they turn the energy spigots off, as they are beginning to do now, they will be turning off our national security with it—in other words, we have NO national security. So long as the necessities of life remain under the centralized control of men who are determined to murder our beloved country, we will never again have true national security. Only if we, the people, will rise up and take back the government that has been stolen from us, will the many things be done that are necessary to restore true national security to our land.

Topic #2—When I recorded my AUDIO BOOK tape on the coming depression and war in October, 1974, I explained the real purpose that caused World Wars I and II. In both cases, Germany was nothing more than a huge pawn in an ever bigger game of international conquest. Instead, as I said then, through two World Wars America's Secret Rulers brought Great Britain to her knees .

The American people as a whole feel strong kinship to the British, so it seems incredible that our Secret Rulers would have deliberately smashed Britain through war. But listen to what former Prime Minister Sir Harold Wilson said last month on January 22, 1977 on a television talk show. When he was asked to explain the economic crisis Britain is in, he said, quote:

"Two world wars took all our Agreement with the Americans no was justified as we didn't want but we had to give them all our

nvestments; and the Lend-Lease

only took all our markets, which shipping going to Latin America, inventions."

Thus the three decades from the beginning of World War I to the end of World War II were used to concentrate the bulk of the

world's economic might into the hands of those who ruled America secretly, behind the scenes—namely the ROCKEFELLERS.

The technologies and markets of friend and foe alike were stolen and poured into the coffers of the Corporate Socialist empire controlled by the four Rockefeller Brothers. But this emergence of America into sudden world dominance was never intended to be more than a temporary phenomenon by those who had secretly caused it to happen.

A dominant share of the economic and technological might of the world had been centralized under American control so that we could then serve as an immense reservoir for transfusions to the Soviet Union! The godless dictatorship set up by the Bolsheviks in Russia in 1917 with the help of Rockefeller financing was to be the real wave of the future. It represented the ultimate in monopoly—total control over every aspect of peoples' lives. But the Soviet System which is intended as the pattern for TOTAL WORLD DOMINATION is artificial and unnatural, and that is why the Soviet Union had to be built up by massive transfusions from outside—transfusions of money, food, economic and technological know-how, everything. Now the transfusions are virtually complete.

It took three decades to drain Britain and Europe to build up America as a reservoir for the Soviet Union, and it has taken three more decades to drain the American reservoir and make the Soviet Union the world's most powerful nation in material terms. The United States is now following Great Britain down the road to ruin, and for the same reasons. The Rockefeller Brothers and their intimates now arrogantly believe they can no longer be stopped in their plan of world conquest. They are convinced there is no power greater than themselves, and they are becoming more brazen by the day.

Jimmy Carter has been programmed to proceed with all possible speed in dismembering what remains of our nation's defenses while at the same time promoting public awareness of war tensions here and abroad. He is making the terrible mistake of thinking he is actually President.

Meanwhile long-time Rockefeller agent, Walter Mondale, stands ready and waiting for the moment IF and WHEN Jimmy Carter is erased from the scene. Mondale is by far the most powerful Vice-President in history next to Nelson Rockefeller, and he's in a position to pick up the reins of presidential power at a moment's notice.

As for Nelson Rockefeller, he hasn't given up either. After a recent White House ceremony at which he was given an award, Rockefeller whispered to reporters as he left: "I'll be back."

Jimmy Carter is functioning with a skeleton government at the present time here in Washington. Huge gaps remain deliberately unfilled in the Carter Administration—such as the Chairmanship of the United States Export-Import Bank. Normally positions at Eximbank are among the most coveted plums in all of Washington, and yet up to now they remain unfilled. Why? Because, my friends, the Export-Import Bank is a peacetime operation, and it will be shut down when war comes as it is planned to do.

The Carter Cabinet is a war cabinet, and the unprecedented measure was taken of rushing their confirmation hearings through Congress even before Carter took office. On hand to preside over America's final destruction in NUCLEAR WAR ONE are men of unchallenged qualifications for that task—such as Secretary of

State Vance, Secretary of Defense Brown, and National Security Advisor Brzezinski, among others. These men were in the forefront of those who argued in favor of America's involvement in the disaster called Vietnam, and helped guide the conduct of the war in such a way as to guarantee our defeat! Now all they have to say about Vietnam is, quote: "We made a mistake." And with that, our country has been placed in their hands once again.

We hear continually about "government reorganization", but what does this really mean? For one hint, consider the fact that Brzezinski is on record as saying, quote:

"The reality of our times is such that a modern society, such as the United States, needs a central, coordinating, and renovating organ which cannot be made up of 600 people."

In other words, the United States Congress in its present form is obsolete and should be replaced by something else!! Brzezinski, by the way, is a close neighbor and associate of David and Nelson Rockefeller's at Seal Harbor, Maine.

And then there are the words of Andrew Young, appointed United States Ambassador to the U.N. by Carter. In that position, Young is charged with speaking for everyone in the United States, yet he has said, quote: "Communism has never been a threat to me." Do words like that speak for you, my friends? Or for your neighbors? Or for any real American? But those words have been allowed to stand, and the man who said them is still the United Nations Ambassador.

We are moving rapidly toward the introduction of the secret new Rockefeller Constitution for America which I revealed and described in AUDIO BOOK tape released in July 1975. The plan is now to accomplish this as part of the scenario now under way to take over the country under threat of war. Even Carter's new CIA Director, Admiral Turner, has been in contact with Carter for over five years—not about military matters but governmental reorganization.

And so our unelected Rulers continue to plan and scheme to take full advantage of the threat of war and even NUCLEAR WAR ONE itself to destroy our way of life for their own purposes. The orchestrated pre-war build-up of tensions continues. In recent weeks, western Europe has suddenly been highlighted as our nuclear-age Dunkirk because doubts are now being expressed that NATO forces there could withstand a surprise attack by the Warsaw Pact forces .

And here at home it is now officially acknowledged that the Soviet Union is shooting for military superiority over the West. Unofficially, some say they already have it. Worse yet, the Rockefeller-controlled CIA just 'happens' to have been grossly underestimating the Soviet military build-up for a decade or more. Can you imagine? Suddenly now we are told that the Soviet Union has been spending four times the previous CIA estimates for new weapons and military installations. The deliberate underestimates, which were arranged for years by Rockefeller insiders in the CIA, had just one purpose: To undermine any arguments about a serious Soviet threat and thereby to insure a decline in American military might.

But now that NUCLEAR WAR ONE is imminent, the CIA estimates can no longer make any difference in our preparedness, so now the estimates have suddenly been raised in order to demoralize us and convince us that defeat at Soviet hands is all but inevitable. Having arranged for our Constitutional military forces to be

weakened as much as possible, the CIA itself has become the most powerful military organization in the United States—a fact symbolized by the fact that the CIA will now be headed by Four Star Admiral Turner, a Rockefeller insider who will retain his military rank.

The CIA has been transformed into a combined super-Military and Secret Police controlled by persons loyal only to the Rockefeller Brothers instead of the country as a whole. This is in complete violation of the original charter of the CIA and of the CONSTITUTION of the United States.

Sixteen years after the establishment of the CIA at the instigation of David Rockefeller, former President Harry S. Truman expressed public regrets over having done so. On December 21, 1963, he wrote for the Washington Post, quote:

"For some time I've been disturbed by the way the CIA has been diverted from its original assignment. It has become an operational and at times a policy-making arm of the government."

Saying that he had never visualized, quote, "peacetime cloak and dagger operations" for the CIA, he added, and I quote:

"This quiet Intelligence arm of the President has been so removed from its intended role that it is being interpreted as a symbol of sinister and mysterious foreign intrigue, and a subject for cold war enemy propaganda."

These words of President Truman were published just a month after an American president, John F. Kennedy, had been brutally removed from office by a successful CIA operation, as I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 3 for August 1975. Already the CIA had broken free of presidential control, and a decade later a CIA operation called "WATERGATE" replaced an elected President and Vice-President with appointees for the very first time in American history!

Today the United States is surrounded by 90 short-range underwater-launch nuclear missiles planted by the Soviet Union within our own territorial waters. Our Constitutional military services have been under presidential orders since October 1, 197 6 NOT to remove them; and now that General Brown has been neutralized, no effort whatever is being made to do so. And the only real counter-threat to these Soviet underwater missiles is the fleet of 14 awesome super-missiles targeted on the Soviet Union from resting places deep in the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. These undersea super-missiles, as I revealed last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 20, are not under normal military control but are under direct Rockefeller command through their controlled CIA. Their purpose, as I have already explained, is not to prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE or even to retaliate when it comes. Their purpose is only to insure that the Soviet Union abides by the joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan to spare the Rockefeller Brothers and their intimates while incinerating the rest of us.

But as I revealed last month, the super-secret CIA missiles have begun deteriorating and leaking. One missile in the Pacific is totally disabled, and several others are leaking plutonium from their warheads into the surrounding waters, and probably are useless also.

One of the leaking missiles which I mentioned last month is Atlantic Missile No. 8, which is located in the ocean about 290 miles east-southeast of Jacksonville, Florida. On February 7, 1977, just two weeks after I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No.

20, the beach near Jacksonville, Florida became the scene of a mystifying phenomenon. For no apparent reason, whales suddenly began beaching themselves in large numbers. Within a short time over 120 whales beached themselves only to die there. That evening NBC News reported that no autopsies were being performed on the whales, that this was to be left to the Smithsonian here in Washington. The next day that story was retracted, but meanwhile I know from my own sources that a high-ranking Smithsonian official who is a covert CIA agent went to Florida immediately to investigate and to make sure that the real cause of the whales beaching themselves did not become publicly known.

One story the Smithsonian circulated as a possible explanation for the strange behavior of the whales was that some sort of parasites, caused perhaps by pollution, had caused the whales to lose their senses of depth and direction. But that, of course, does not explain why they would all have come ashore out of their natural habitat, rather than wandering aimlessly at sea. And it explains even less what happened when some of the whales were towed off the beach and into the sea. In most cases they unerringly headed straight for shore and beached themselves again. Even though death awaited them on the beach, they preferred that to their natural habitat of the sea.

What you have not been told, my friends, is that a number of the whales were dissected, and in practically every case their stomachs were completely empty—they were sick. But the real problem was not in their stomachs but in their lungs, which were heavily contaminated with plutonium. A few days after the whales began beaching themselves, I was informed by my Intelligence sources that the plutonium leakage from Atlantic Missile No. 8 had accelerated so rapidly that plutonium was now contaminating the Atlantic in a fan that touches the east coast all the way from about half way between Savannah and Brunswick, Georgia, southward almost to Daytona Beach, Florida. It was strongest in the middle, right where the whales came ashore near Jacksonville.

My friends, I am not a marine biologist, and I don't know exactly how the whales got water-borne plutonium into their lungs, but the facts speak for themselves, somehow it happened; and once there, the plutonium produced a fungus-like infection that interfered with their breathing. Finally in desperation, the whales (which are mammals like you and me) began casting themselves onto the beach, gasping for air.

By now the whales have been collected and buried in the Gerwin Road landfill in Jacksonville, Florida, and forgotten by most as yesterday's news. But we would do well not to ignore the lesson of the beached whales; because now, like the whales, our drinking water in the United States now contains plutonium too. The Soviet injections of plutonium into our atmosphere which began last October 1976 have continued and, in fact, are now accelerating; and now fallout of this material has contaminated our own drinking water nationwide. It is invisible, it is tasteless, but it is there.

As I reported last month, a dramatic increase in flu-like illness was to be expected all across America, thanks to the Soviet plutonium attack No. 3 which took place in late December and early January; and now it's happening. Outbreaks of (quote) "flu and flu-like illnesses" have been reported this month in at least 23 states. Perhaps you yourself have had a round of something lately that seems like the flu, yet may have seemed somehow different from flu you have had in the past, or perhaps you have just noticed that something is "going around." Even this recording was delayed one week by flu-like illnesses which

hit myself and some of my associates very hard.

I wish I could tell you that the flu-like illness season were about over, but unfortunately the opposite is true. A fourth Soviet plutonium attack began this month on February 3 involving 25 Soviet submarines. This time they were deployed along the entire West coast from Seattle to San Diego, and they injected plutonium into our atmosphere over a period of approximately two weeks. And now just three days ago on February 24 a fifth Soviet plutonium attack on the United States has begun. This time there are 30 Soviet submarines, again deployed all the way from Seattle to San Diego. Furthermore, I am now able to confirm that there is a weather-modification aspect to the Soviet plutonium attacks.

In the past year or so the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the EPA, has issued warnings, so-called, that fluorocarbon propellants from household aerosol cans are damaging the ozone layer far up into the atmosphere. We have been warned that this could have very dangerous effects on our environment; and as a result, a trend away from aerosol spray cans is now under way. There may be some merit to that argument, but as usual the EPA is merely seizing on a minor danger in order to cover up a far more real immediate and major threat.

The means by which the plutonium is being dispersed into our atmosphere by the Soviet submarines is none other than by fluorocarbon propellants discharging upward into the air at a steep angle. Each submarine in each attack exhausts huge quantities of fluorocarbon propellant in such a way that it is far more effective in damaging our ozone layer than millions of ordinary household aerosol cans in normal use. Even before the plutonium attacks began last October, my Intelligence sources believe that fluorocarbon injections like this into our atmosphere were under way for some time. The introduction of the plutonium to these attacks last October was therefore an easy matter.

But by other means, also, weather-modification activities by both the CIA and the Soviet KGB have been in progress for some time now for use in warfare. Because of these facts, I believe I should warn you about one thing which, at this time, I must label as conjecture. Normally, as you know, my policy is to tell you only those things which I have been able to confirm as established fact; but this time I believe an exception is warranted. The timing, severity, and pattern of the huge winter storm that struck the north and east portions of the United States may well have been a massive pre-war weather-modification experiment as a rehearsal for similar measures in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. Had war broken out while those weather patterns persisted, large portions of the upper United States within the "Nuclear Safe Zone" would have been immobilized by weather and therefore could have been spared from attack—seemingly for natural reasons.

It may be that weather control is the key to the riddle of the "Nuclear Safe Zone", enabling it to escape attack while the southern two-thirds of the United States along with Alaska and Hawaii endure a nuclear holocaust. If this is the case, then a future storm pattern that immobilizes the part of the United States above the 40th Parallel could be the signal that a Soviet nuclear attack is imminent. I emphasize again that, as of now, this is conjecture on my part. I have not been able to confirm it, but there are so many facts that point in this direction that I believe you should be warned of this possibility. The Rockefeller Brothers, in any case, are doing everything in their power to hurry up NUCLEAR WAR ONE, so anything can happen. They

are in a hurry because they want to make sure that the war takes place while enough of their super CIA missiles are still operational to provide an effective blackmail threat against the Soviets. But as for America's officially acknowledged fleet of Intercontinental Missiles, that is another matter.

I have never revealed what went on when I saw General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, in his Pentagon offices last September 16, 1976, but I think I should now mention just one item which has now acquired urgent new significance.

One of the things I discussed with General Brown was the horrendous Intelligence gap created by then Secretary of State Henry Kissinger. Because of this deliberate Intelligence gap, General Brown and the Joint Chiefs have been denied crucial information needed to protect our country. In this connection, General Brown did not know about the super-secret "Nuclear Safe Zone" negotiated for the private benefit of the Rockefeller Brothers and their intimates by Kissinger. In fact, it seemed unbelievable because he pointed out the presence of several prime targets—namely, ICBM installations inside the "Nuclear Safe Zone." But now Jimmy Carter is pushing for those very ICBM sites to be shut down. That is the meaning of Carter's incredible order to General Brown at the Blair House meeting of January 12, 1977, and by that means the Rockefellers plan to make the "Nuclear Safe Zone" off limits to NUCLEAR WAR ONE attack.

Topic #3—Whatever the future holds for us, my friends, one thing is for sure. We are witnessing the end of an era. Politically, economically, socially, and spiritually we are entering a time of tumultuous change, but the question still remains: Change in what direction?

Will this be the end of the era of destructive Rockefeller control over our lives? Or will we just sit back wringing our hands and let them succeed in their plans to snuff out the era of human freedom? Might we look forward to the new era of renewed respect for nature as God in His wisdom created it? Or will we condemn ourselves by inaction to a suicidal era of ever increasing destruction of our beautiful world under the greedy exploitation of the Rockefeller cartel and their Soviet allies? Will the struggle that is being forced upon us lead us at last to a new dawning of the day of the individual? Or will we submit without struggle to the perfect equality of slaves in the Rockefeller-Soviet world empire?

My friends, it will take organized, dedicated, selfless action to sound the alarm and bring pressure to bear in time to turn away from total disaster for our land. But the hour is now so late; where can we hope for this action to come from? If history is any guide, my friends, there is only one institution left.

I have pointed out on previous occasions that what is happening in America today is a ghastly replay of what happened to Germany before World War II—with one difference. Those who brought Hitler to power as a pawn are themselves coming to power here in America.

With this in mind, I will now read a very rare letter to you. For reasons which will become apparent, it will be safely stored away again under lock and key by the time you hear this recording. The letter, written by a distinguished churchman, is dated October 16, 1945, and is addressed to Dr. Albert Einstein. I will now read directly from the letter:

"My dear Dr. Einstein:

I have seen you reported as having said, quote: 'Being a lover of freedom, when the revolution came in Germany I looked to the Universities to defend it, knowing that they had always boasted of their devotion to the cause of truth; but NO, the Universities immediately were silenced. Then I looked to the great editors of the newspapers whose flaming editorials in days gone by had proclaimed their love of freedom; but they, like the Universities, were silenced in a few short weeks. Only the Church stood squarely across the path of Hitler's campaign for suppressing the truth. I never had any special interest in the church before, but now I feel a great affection and admiration, because the church alone has had the courage and persistence to stand for intellectual truth and moral freedom. I am forced thus to confess that what I once despised, I now praise unreservedly.'"

Still continuing with the letter:

"Would you be kind enough to let me know whether this represents your feeling now that hostilities have ceased? I should be very grateful to know how you feel about this now.

With great admiration and every good wish, I am

Yours faithfully,"

and there follows the signature of the writer. Below there is a postscript as follows, and I quote:

"P.S. - The statement is reported to have been made by you before the United States entered the war, and I thought possibly you might have had some occasion to change your opinion in the light of later developments. I naturally hope that you haven't."

The writer of this letter received it back with the following answer in longhand along the right-hand margin, and I quote:

"The reproduction of my verbally given statement is essentially correct, and I have not changed my opinion concerning this point. "

There follows the signature: "A. Einstein."

My friends, the churches in Nazi Germany recognized the onslaught of evil and stood up against it. Today America faces the same evil, multiplied a thousand times over. But where? oh where are the churches today?

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #22

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is March 27, 1977, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 22.

Few things are certain in life, but one thing we can depend upon is that things are always changing. Today a flower blooms in all its glory; tomorrow it will be withered and forgotten, leaving behind only a beautiful memory. Today a child at play

scrapes a knee, and the whole world revolves around a mother's tender care. Tomorrow the knee will be healed, leaving behind only a lesson of caution and comfort. Today you and I pass through this world for a little while; tomorrow we will not be seen, leaving behind only the legacy of our choices for good or evil.

Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 21 I alerted you to the possibility that we may have already failed in our efforts to prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE, which is drawing closer by the day. My question is not "Can the war be stopped?" but "Will it be stopped?" There is nothing in this whole world that would please me so much as to be able to tell you: "Good news. We have prevented the war. We have won." And when I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 16 on September 25, 1976, it seemed as though I might soon be able to give you such good news. Public reaction to my AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 for July and August 197 6 had thwarted an attempted Soviet double-cross of the Rockefellers by means of underwater missiles along our coast lines, and it had produced a direct meeting between General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and myself. But then came the terrible reversals for America that I revealed the following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 17; and far too many of those who had pressed the government for action during August 197 6 failed to follow through and support General Brown in his efforts to continue to protect our beloved country. Now, as a result, we have lost General Brown as an effective force for good.

Now the job of stopping NUCLEAR WAR I is even harder. It can still be done, but WILL WE DO IT? My deep hope is still that the answer is YES, otherwise I would not be speaking these words. I am doing all in my power to bring the truth to you. So long as I continue to have access to vital information that bears on your life and your well-being, I will feel a deep responsibility to communicate it to you, but then it becomes your responsibility to choose what you will do about it.

I have made many suggestions of things you might do to help save our country. In December 1975 I even recorded an entire tape devoted to nothing else, entitled "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE AMERICA"; but all I can hope to do is open your mind as to what you, as an individual, can do. In this great nation of some 215,000,000 individuals, every person is different. No two of us have the same set of abilities, the same opportunities, or the same avenues for possible action. There is no way that I, just one person, even with the help of my associates and information sources, can provide a simple, cut-and-dried prescription for what to do; but I am convinced that scattered throughout America is all of the knowledge, all of the ability to organize, and all the resources necessary to save our beloved land IF WE WILL BUT DO IT.

My three topics for today are:

Topic #1—HOW CIRCUMSTANCES ARE PROVING THE ROCKEFELLER-SOVIET PLANS TO DESTROY AMERICA

Topic #2—PRESIDENT CARTER'S EFFORTS TO HURRY UP NUCLEAR WAR ONE Topic #3—HOW THE CHURCH IS BEING USED.

Topic #1—For over four years now I have been trying by every means at my disposal to alert the American people to the progress of far-advanced plans to destroy our beloved country as we know it. We are seeing the final stages of a plan to create a world-wide dictatorship acted out before our very eyes with

ourselves ensnared as the victims. This commitment for a ONE-WORLD GOVERNMENT under the control of a super wealthy elite was set in motion in the early years of the 20th Century, using a small group of powerful tax-exempt Foundations to coordinate and direct the program. This program of conquest long ago became so massive, so powerful, and so complex that the average citizen had no hope of grasping what was really going on. And the ONE WORLD plans were and are so evil that the normal person simply cannot believe they are real without overwhelming proof.

But how are things like this proven? Such a long-range commitment is a sophisticated form of conspiracy; so, how are conspiracies exposed and proven? Well known in legal circles, and especially in the United States Department of Justice, are the words of Special Judge Advocate John A. Bingham during the trial of the conspirators involved in Abraham Lincoln's assassination. This trial took place in Washington, D.C. in 1865. Listen to Judge Bingham's words, and I quote:

"A conspiracy is rarely if ever proven by positive testimony. When a crime of high magnitude is about to be perpetrated by a combination of individuals, they do not act openly, but covertly and secretly. The purpose formed is known only to those who enter into it. Unless one of the conspirators betrays his companions and gives evidence against them, their guilt can be proved only by circumstantial evidence. It is said by some writers on evidence that circumstances are stronger than positive proof. A witness swearing positively, it is said, may misapprehend the facts or swear falsely, but that circumstances cannot lie."

Judge Bingham's words may come as a surprise to you if you're not a lawyer. Contrary to the impression you may have received from fictional detective stories, circumstantial evidence can be very powerful indeed and has decided the outcome of vast numbers of court cases .

Furthermore, it is the incriminating power of circumstances that makes any conspiracy most vulnerable to just one thing—exposure. If the plans of even the most powerful of conspirators are made public and put on record before the plans are executed, often the plans have to be abandoned; because even if the conspirators succeed in carrying out their plans without being caught in the act, the circumstances that result from their criminal actions cannot be hidden, and the advance exposure of their plan then causes the finger of guilt to point straight at the conspirators.

This is the principle I invoke every time I publicly reveal anything about the plans or actions of those who are conspiring to destroy America. As I have always tried to make clear, my purpose in exposing these criminal plans is to prevent them from being carried out. In this way I share a common goal with my associates and the many sources who provide me with vital confidential information. The best achievements of Intelligence gathering, like diplomacy, often lie in what did not happen—the crisis quietly deflected. And our efforts up to now have been partially successful in that regard.

But the commitment for world domination that was forged over two generations ago has grown into an incredible monster with countless tentacles and tremendous momentum. As a result, the four Rockefeller Brothers and their co-conspirators have found it impossible to completely cover their tracks even though many modifications in their detailed plans have been made. So a brief review of the circumstances that have been developing around us

over the past years is very, very revealing.

First: Consider Nelson Rockefeller's unsuccessful attempt so far to become our unelected President and Dictator by way of his 25th Amendment to the United States Constitution. On October 11, 1974, I recorded my first AUDIO BOOK talking tape entitled: "HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THIRD WORLD WAR." At that time Rockefeller still had two months to go being confirmed as Vice-President; but I revealed that if confirmed, Rockefeller intended to become President by June 1975. In June 1975 during a trip to Europe, President Ford suddenly began taking serious falls—once down an aircraft ramp, and persons close to him said he also looked pale and unsteady. The public was quickly fed stories about the trouble being an old knee injury from football, even though Ford's doctor stated flatly that his falls had nothing to do with his knees.

The following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 I relayed information that I had been given to the effect that Ford's troubles had been caused by a powerful virus of unknown origin which had been arrested successfully.

The next month I revealed in lectures and also in AUDIO BOOK Special Tape No. 1 that by September or thereabouts we should know whether Nelson Rockefeller was to be stopped in his drive to seize the presidency. And on September 5, 1975, an alleged attempt on Ford's life was made by Lynette Fromme; but as I warned in AUDIO LETTER No. 4 that month, this was only a dress rehearsal intended to frighten Ford into resigning. But Ford refused to resign, and on September 22, 1975, a real attempt on Ford's life took place. During a visit to San Francisco, Ford became the target of Sara Jane Moore, and it truly was only by the grace of God that he escaped injury. It had been planned for Ford when he came out of the St. Francis Hotel to cross the street and shake hands with people in the crowd. And there waited Sara Jane Moore, standing exactly where Ford was supposed to enter the crowd, armed with a pistol she had bought with a Treasury agent by her side the previous day, and with her mind programmed for assassination by electronic programming techniques! But at the last moment the assassination plan fell apart. A Secret Service agent told the President not to cross the street, so he headed straight for his limousine. At that, Sara Jane Moore raised her gun to fire across the street at Ford, but her shot was deflected by another onlooker—a Vietnam veteran in a wheel chair.

As it turned out, this was indeed the real turning point in Nelson Rockefeller's hopes for succeeding Jerry Ford as President. He ran through a series of additional back-up plans, all of which my sources enabled me to reveal in advance in my monthly AUDIO LETTERS—and he failed for the time being. But he recently whispered to reporters as he left a White House Award ceremony, "I'll be back."

And then there is Fort Knox. I recorded my first AUDIO BOOK tape in October 1974 less than three weeks after the so-called Gold Inspection Visit to Fort Knox by 6 Congressmen, a Senator, and about a hundred newsmen. Here was a perfect example of a case in which the true circumstances alone—namely, the absence of the huge hoard of gold shown on Treasury and Federal Reserve books—would have been sufficient all by themselves to prove the existence of a tremendous financial conspiracy. Therefore great care was taken by the Treasury Department to prevent these circumstances from being detected. Instead of an objective, honest inspection of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox by independent gold experts, the Treasury substituted a public

relations peep show involving people who had no way of knowing what they should look for. And while the public was loudly promised an independent audit by the General Accounting Office of Congress, the actual so-called Audit Committee consisted almost entirely of Treasury personnel; and the tiny Audit Report that was finally issued several months late presented no findings of fact, concluding only, quote: "We believe" the gold is there!

My associates and I have amassed mountains of evidence in connection with the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. This twin scandal involves not only the theft of America's monetary gold supply but also the storage of leaking canisters of CIA super poison processed from radioactive Plutonium 239. From time to time I have made portions of this evidence public, such as in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975. In that tape I was able to reveal the sworn statement of former Congressman Frank Chelf attesting to the constant flow of gold out of Fort Knox during the mid 60's and the unsatisfactory answers he received from the Treasury and the White House about what was going on. I also revealed that the official listing of gold shipments from Fort Knox omits major shipments. One example of which we had photographs took place on January 20, 1965; and in response to such a specific challenge, the Mint admitted the shipment had taken place.

But the most important item about Fort Knox that was revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 was the secret "Central Core Vault"—a huge central gold storage vault whose existence was not revealed to the September 1974 visitors and was later denied in writing by then Treasury Secretary William Simon—another interesting circumstance because the Central Core Vault was described and confirmed for us and for Congressman Otis Pike by a former Commanding Officer of Fort Knox, General John L. Ryan, Jr. Both Simon's lie and General Ryan's confirmation are quoted in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8, January 1976. The Central Core Vault is the key to the whole Fort Knox Scandal.

The joint Rockefeller-Soviet program to conquer the world is so all-encompassing that many other aspects of it have been discussed too in the monthly AUDIO LETTER. But the most overriding issue of all now is the rapid approach of NUCLEAR WAR ONE on American soil. In my very first tape recorded in October 1974 I explained the basic purposes for which the Rockefeller Brothers were betraying America into nuclear war. I also revealed the target schedule for the war to begin—mid 1977 to mid 1978. Today some of the details of the war plan have changed, and the economic and political scenarios being planned by the Rockefellers at that time, while still on track, are behind schedule. But of all Rockefeller plans, the one for nuclear war on America is most crucial and, as of now, the time schedule for war is still practically unchanged. For reasons I will explain in Topic #2, the Rockefeller Brothers are straining all their resources to prevent a slippage in the timing of the war.

In July 1975, Indira Gandhi clamped down on her own India in a manner that stunned the world. She was condemned most bitterly of all by the Government of the United States!! The following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 3 I told you what had actually happened in India. Despite all appearances, Indira Gandhi was trying to save India's freedom—not destroy it. What she had done was to smash a CIA project that had been under way for five years to take over India. In the same tape I went on to reveal that the joint Rockefeller plans for war were being revised on India's account. The plan for nuclear war on American soil was put back on a back burner until India could be taken over by war in Asia.

The target date for India to be attacked under the revised war plan was March 1977, this month.

I also told you, quote:

"The new plans do not involve hostilities on American soil as they stand right now. Keep in mind though that further changes can and probably will occur. In particular, should Indira Gandhi be toppled from power any time soon, it may well enable the CIA to put the original takeover plans back on track, and that would restore the original plan for war on the United States."

When I revealed these things 19 months ago, they probably seemed remote and improbable to you; but by relaxing the Emergency control she had imposed and holding election on March 21, six days ago, she lost—tragically for not only India but America as well. Once again things are not what they seem to be. The CIA succeeded in toppling Indira Gandhi by subverting the free election she wanted for her people—and did so this very month, March 1977. This was the original target date for war on India in the plans I revealed 19 months ago.

With India taken care of, neutralized for the moment, NUCLEAR WAR ONE on American soil no longer faces any delay on India's account. In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 for November 1975, I revealed the grand strategy for the huge Asian war that was to precede nuclear war on America. It called for hostilities to begin in the Middle East with a severe provocation arranged to justify a limited nuclear strike from the Sinai Desert at Arab-OPEC oil wells. This cut-off of oil supplies would cripple the heart of Europe and Africa, disable Japan, and force dictatorial measures such as gas rationing and other measures on the American people by Executive Orders with all of these being brought about more completely under the domination of the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.

But now, India has been rendered easy prey for a complete takeover and has therefore dropped in priority. The war in the Middle East has been delayed several times. The most decisive failure in this regard occurred late in December 1975 when OPEC oil ministers were kidnapped in Vienna by terrorists in the pay of the CIA. Several were supposed to be killed, inflaming passions and leading to war, but the job was botched and they all escaped with their lives. This caused a tremendous slippage in the plans for war and conquest; and for bungling this top priority assignment, the CIA station Chief in Athens, Richard Welch, was executed by the CIA itself, as I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8 for January 1976.

In that same tape I publicly revealed the super secret White House Merge Directive. This Directive requires that life in the United States be so altered that it can be comfortably merged with life in the Soviet Union, and it has been in existence since the days of Stalin! Such a way of life is totally alien to America; but today, under the puppetized administration of Jimmy Carter, the federal government is now openly run by aliens with alien philosophies. Our life is being merged with that of the Soviet Union. Even so, the greed and lust for power that motivates both the Rulers of the Soviet Union and the real Rulers of America today knows no bounds. And as early as November 1975 in AUDIO LETTER No. 6, I began warning of the threat of a Soviet double-cross of the Rockefellers and their Corporate Socialist intimates here in America. By the spring of 1976 I reported that certain Trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled major Foundations were increasingly concerned that such a double-cross was brewing. But not so the Rockefeller Brothers and their closest

collaborators, because they have more faith in the Soviet Union than they do in America.

Last summer, of course, the Soviet double-cross actually began. First, as I reported in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13 for June 1976, I received Intelligence information that a nuclear weapon had been planted at Seal Harbor, Maine, between the summer homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller. Soon afterwards I was notified that the Soviet Union was planting short-range nuclear missiles within our own territorial waters ready for launch from undersea resting places upon remote control. We were in danger of an immediate Soviet nuclear surprise attack, not only here but world-wide, that would destroy all effective naval opposition to the Soviet Union and thereby guarantee Soviet victory. Thanks to the Intelligence gap created by Henry Kissinger as Secretary of State, the information reaching me about the missiles was not reaching the Joint Chiefs of Staff. Intelligence sources informed me that the only way action could be brought about to save the situation was by making it a public issue, so that is what I did by means of AUDIO LETTERS 14 and 15 last summer—and it worked as I recounted for you in AUDIO LETTER No. 16 for September 1976.

But the four Rockefeller Brothers long ago passed the point of No Return. In spite of what has happened last summer, they are continuing with the joint program of conquest with the Soviet Union, trying to convince themselves that their long-time alliance is back on track. But at the same time they are trying to hurry up NUCLEAR WAR ONE because in the Soviet-Rockefeller rivalry, time is now on the side of the Soviets.

My friends, we are now surrounded by circumstances that prove the existence of a grand conspiracy to rob us of our freedom and even our very lives. It is up to each one of us to open our eyes and see these circumstances for what they really are before it is too late.

Topic #2—Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 21 I explained what the words "NATIONAL SECURITY" really mean to those who control America's government today. To them National Security begins and ends with the protection and the advancement of our unelected Rulers themselves—not you and me. Nowhere is this more vividly proven than in the realm of war. We are taxed to the breaking point in order to support so-called National Security. But when in this Century has all of this prevented a war? And for all our vaunted Intelligence gathering and Early Warning Systems, when have you and I ever benefitted by being warned in advance of an imminent conflict by the Government?

It has been proven beyond question, not only by circumstantial evidence but by documentary evidence as well, that every single major conflict in the 20th Century involving America has been known about, in advance, by our Rulers. But this advance knowledge has never been communicated to us, the nation at large, except once. In 1962 President John F. Kennedy did notify America of the warnings he had obtained of the imminent Cuban missile threat. It was a frightening experience for us all, but the result was that a successful Soviet surprise attack was rendered impossible. Barely a year later, Jack Kennedy died at the hands of the CIA for ruining this Rockefeller-Soviet gamble by acting in the interest of true national security—our security. But in the cases of two World Wars, Korea, and Vietnam, a different pattern has consistently applied.

In 1916 Woodrow Wilson, the first American president to be a total puppet of the Rockefeller empire, narrowly achieved

re-election with the peace-oriented slogan, "He kept us out of war." Meanwhile he was rapidly maneuvering America into war. Five months after his re-election on April 6, 1917, America declared war on Germany, and soon American doughboys were off to fight "The War to End All Wars." There thousands died in trenches while Trustees of the "Carnegie Endowment for International Peace" encouraged Wilson to extend the war because of the desirable changes it was producing in American lives!

In 1940 with Europe once again aflame with war, President Franklin D. Roosevelt, like Wilson before him, appealed to peace sentiment in order to be re-elected. Even now, my friends, I can still hear those campaign words of F.D.R. ringing in my ears, and I quote:

"And while I am talking to you mothers and fathers, I give you one more assurance. I have said this before but I shall say it again, and again, and again: 'Your boys are not going to be sent into any foreign wars.'"

But even as he won an unprecedented third term in this way, F.D.R. was moving the United States rapidly toward war. On May 27, 1941, only six months after his re-election and with Pearl Harbor still six months in the future, F.D.R. proclaimed an "UNLIMITED NATIONAL EMERGENCY" to get ready for war! In the ensuing months everything possible was done to provoke a Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor; and when this attack was known to be imminent, most of the United States Pacific fleet was conveniently bottled up in Pearl Harbor as a tempting target. Only our Aircraft Carriers were kept far away from danger, since they would be indispensable for retaliation against Japan.

Certain officials in the American government knew well in advance that war with Japan was coming. Proof of this can be found in many places today, some of them quite unexpected. One example is the autobiography of the Rt. Reverend Edward Randolph Welles II published by Learning, Inc., Manset, Maine 04656. The book entitled "THE HAPPY DISCIPLE" is not basically about politics or economics at all but about the career and life of an Episcopal minister. But it so happens that in the fall of 1941, Bishop Welles was the rector of Christ Church in Alexandria, Virginia, the church of George Washington. And on page 62 one reads the following, and I quote:

"Another of my friends was Norman H. Davis, President of the American Red Cross, who was elected to our parish vestry. He was very close to President Franklin D. Roosevelt and saw him frequently. On November 6, 1941, I had lunch with Mr. Davis in Washington and learned of the approaching war with Japan which would begin within five weeks. I was shaken, and asked Mr. Davis to urge the President to appoint a national day of prayer, and handed Mr. Davis a letter I had written to President Roosevelt on the subject. Mr. Davis did hand my letter to the President, who did appoint the following New Year's Day as a 'National Day of Prayer. '

I was so moved by the luncheon revelations that later that very day I sent our mimeographed postal cards to the congregation stating:

'The rector is preaching a sermon at 11:00 A.M. service on Sunday, November 9, which he feels is sufficiently important to call to your attention. The sermon will assess the desperate situation that confronts America this Armistice Day, and suggests basic Christian attitudes and actions.'

On Sunday in the course of that sermon I said:

'Few people realize how great is the possibility that we shall actually be at war with Japan within thirty days.'

The congregation was deeply shocked; and in response to many requests, my booklet of sermons was reprinted with this sermon added. Twenty-eight days after that sermon came, December 7, the Japanese attacked Pearl Harbor and the war was on."

(End of quotation from Bishop Welles' autobiography.)

Bishop Welles, of course, had no way of knowing that President Roosevelt's advance knowledge of the impending Japanese attack was due to conspiracy to bring about that attack, but he did know that people should be warned about it—and he did just that. The federal government, of course, could have warned all of America of the impending Japanese attack, but then the attack would never have taken place. And F.D.R., doing the bidding of the Rockefellers and their allies, wanted the attack to take place so that America would go to war!

In the two-volume AUDIO BOOK talking tape I recorded a year ago with Colonel Curtis B. Dall, the detailed story of Pearl Harbor is told by Colonel Dall—and Colonel Dall, who was the son-in-law and close friend of F.D.R., knows what he is talking about.

Next came Korea. On June 21, 1950, Assistant Secretary of State Dean Rusk testified before Congress to the effect that there was no indication of any impending North Korean attack on South Korea. Several days later John Foster Dulles went to Seoul, South Korea, to give reassurances that there was no danger of invasion from the north. Then he left quickly because the North Korean invasion was already being launched!

As for us, the American people, another nasty surprise. Vietnam, too, followed the old pattern. The last thing the American people wanted was yet another bloody war. And during the election campaign of 1964, Lyndon Johnson knocked down straw man Barry Goldwater by playing on the Peace theme. Goldwater was portrayed as the dangerous man who would get America into a big war; Johnson, as the 'great compromiser' who would keep us away from any such danger. But Johnson had already obtained the Tonkin Gulf Resolution as the tool he needed, and within 3 months after his landslide election, Johnson started turning Vietnam into another big disastrous war. By June 1965, the commitment of American combat troops to the nightmare of Vietnam had begun under the orders of one more president who had promised America Peace and Prosperity.

Today it is all happening again. Jimmy Carter, the puppetized president who works for David Rockefeller, is raising many Americans' hope that this time it will be different. This time we have a president who wears sweaters and blue jeans and must therefore be a man of the people. He must be determined to have peace since he is so aggressively seeking disarmament; and he has promised us all that he will never lie. Yet in a short space of only two months, President Carter has succeeded in alienating and angering governments the world over. Under the guise of folksiness, he is systematically insulting visiting ambassadors with undignified receptions and by refusing to attend luncheons given by the ambassadors. He is preaching to the world about "human rights", while doing nothing whatever about the violation of our own human right to breathe clean air free of contamination by Soviet plutonium attacks, among other things.

In the case of the Soviet Union with whom he says he wants to negotiate arms reduction to prevent war, he is breaching an agreement not to interfere in one another's internal affairs that was signed by President Nixon back in 1972. He says he wants peace; but the circumstances he is bringing about with great speed are exactly those that could well lead to war.

The fact is, my friends, that Jimmy Carter is sweeping us along swiftly toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE—and the sooner the better, according to his Rockefeller bosses. Does he himself know where he is taking America by following orders? Bear in mind that he is conspicuously trying to emulate F.D.R. in every respect right down to launching his campaign last summer where F.D.R. did in 1932—Warm Springs, Georgia, and reviving the Fireside Chat as president. And listen to Carter's own words from a recent Fireside Chat, and I quote:

"I remember another difficult time in our nation's history when we felt a different spirit. During World War II we faced a terrible crisis, but the challenge of fighting against Fascism drew us together. I believe we are ready for that same spirit again. "

The Rockefeller Brothers want very badly to have NUCLEAR WAR ONE begin as soon as possible, for several reasons. The military balance is shifting ever more rapidly in favor of the Soviet Union and away from the Rockefellers even in the realm of secret super weapons. As of now, according to all the information I have been able to obtain, the CIA undersea super missiles in the Atlantic and Pacific, which I revealed two months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 20, are still the most awesome nuclear missiles in the world. But as I revealed then, these CIA missiles which are to protect the Rockefellers—not you and me—have become inoperative in several cases, and there is no way to predict how long those that remain will last before they, too, fail and start leaking.

But there is another even more basic worry the Rockefellers must think about. As of now, the United States has no anti-missile weapons at all, and the Soviet Union has only the Galosh ABM, whose effectiveness against ICBMs is questionable; but that situation is on the verge of changing drastically very soon. Major General George Keegan Jr., who retired on January 1, 1977 as head of Air Force Intelligence, is a man who has repeatedly been first to detect major new developments bearing on the military balance. He has said recently, quote: "A global conflict is in gestation." And, my friends, he is right. Furthermore, he has been sounding the warning that the Soviet Union is already testing a death ray type weapon called a "Particle Beam." Once this weapon is operationally deployed in the very near future, it could destroy incoming missiles and render the Soviet Union invulnerable to any ICBM attack, including an attack by means of the Rockefeller CIA undersea super missiles.

Meanwhile the Soviet Union is continuing right now in a relentless program of planting underwater missiles along the coastlines of the United States and other countries around the world. And in spite of the "Red Friday Agreement" of October 1, 1976, which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17, the Soviet Union is not honoring the "Nuclear Safe Zone" in planting these missiles. The Rockefellers believe that the threat of their CIA undersea missiles will prevent the Soviet missiles inside the Nuclear Safe Zone from actually being launched in NUCLEAR WAR ONE, but that is strictly a gamble on their part because the threat is there.

During the latter part of this month, I have been receiving reports from my own Intelligence sources about the current status of the world-wide Soviet program of planting short-range underwater nuclear missiles. When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 last August, I gave the coordinates for 64 missiles and bombs around the world, including 16 in American and Canadian waters. That was sufficient to give the Soviet Union the capability of a surprise knockout punch against all the naval power in the world opposing the Soviet Union; but now, thanks to the insane Red Friday policy of the Rockefellers, the situation has been allowed to become far worse. Now redundant targeting insures that any such Soviet attack has a very high probability of success. And in addition to naval and other military targets close to the sea, Soviet underwater missiles are now being aimed as well at increasing numbers of non-military strategic targets.

As of my latest tally, the Soviet Union has so far planted a total of 372 nuclear weapons, mostly missiles but a few bombs, in coastal waters of the world. Of these nearly half, 158, are planted in American waters. This includes 130 around the mainland 48 States, 9 more around Alaska, 15 in Hawaiian waters, and 1 each at Midway Island, Guam, Christmas Island, and the north approach to the Panama Canal. The Soviet Union is also preparing to be able to strike with additional plutonium cloud attacks against America. On March 1 America extended its territorial limits to 200 miles, and Soviet submarines have moved out beyond this new limit; but now remote control canisters are being planted along our west coast within 3 to 5 miles of the coastline. So far 16 of these have been planted, and more are on the way.

There are 29 missiles around the British Isles and 11 in Canadian waters. Europe and the Mediterranean are currently surrounded by 46 Soviet underwater missiles. Ten of these are in the Mediterranean. Along the Atlantic and North Sea coasts, Spain is targeted by one, France by 3, the Netherlands by 5, and West Germany by 6. Three Soviet missiles have been planted in Danish waters, 7 near Norway, 6 near Sweden, and 5 near Finland. In addition, 7 Soviet underwater missiles surround Iceland. These are ready to decimate NATO Air Bases there, enabling the new Soviet supersonic long-range Backfire Bomber in its naval version to interdict all our vital sea lanes across the North Atlantic.

The rest of the pattern world-wide is: First on the Pacific and Indian Oceans—Australia 7, New Zealand 6, New Guinea 4, Philippines 6, Indonesia 6, Malay Peninsula 2, Thailand 1, Burma 1, India 1, Taiwan 3, Red China 7, border between Red China and Vietnam 1, Japan heavily targeted 19, South Korea 8.

Around southwest Asia, Africa, and the Middle East—Caspian Sea coast of Iran 3, Persian Gulf coast of Iran and Saudi Arabia 5, in the Oman Gulf 1 (target Iran), Red Sea coast of Saudi Arabia 2, Black Sea coast of Turkey 1, southern Africa 8.

And along the coast of Latin America—Mexico 11, Guatemala 1, British Honduras 1, Honduras 1, Nicaragua 1 even though Nicaragua itself is being used for certain naval purposes by the Soviet Union, Costa Rica 3, Venezuela 4 including one in the Orinoco River, Chile 5, Argentina 1. The British possession of West Falkland near southern Argentina is also targeted by 1 Soviet missile as is the Island of Bermuda.

The government of any country I have named may obtain the navigational coordinates of the threatening Soviet underwater

missiles from me upon official request. Up to now only one government, that of Great Britain, has requested these latest coordinates and I have gladly supplied them. Great Britain is quietly living up to her majestic name, because alone of all the nations on earth, the British Government is fending off the Soviet naval threat with grim determination. I do not think it would be in the best interest of the British people for me to tell you all of the measures being taken in this regard beyond the fact that the Soviet missiles are being removed from British waters. But I will tell you that the British are proving one very important fact up to now. Given the will to do so, the Soviet war threat can be staved off. For all their modern weaponry, the Soviets are not supermen except in comparison to the treasonous jellyfish who control America's government today. What is necessary is to recognize circumstances for what they really are, and then to summon the spirit and determination to do what must be done; and that, my friends, is exactly what the British are doing right now.

Topic #3—A few days ago the Reverend Billy Graham was quoted in newspapers as saying he likes, quote: "symbolic gestures made to the American people" by President Carter. He expressed particular pleasure at the fact that Carter not only plans to go to Sunday School but even to teach there. But as for the substance of the new administration, Dr. Graham said it is just too early to assess that.

Millions of Americans are placing their trust in Jimmy Carter, an untried newcomer to national politics, mainly because of his Sunday School teacher image. In the rush, rush world of today, Jimmy Carter's highly visible piety almost seems like something out of the past. A hundred years ago the following words might have been written about him, and I quote:

"He became a regular attendant at the Erie Street Baptist Church, and vigorously did Jimmy give himself to his work. Jimmy was publicly baptized in the fall of 1854. Not long after, Jimmy was made Clerk of the church, an unusual responsibility for a mere youth, and indicative of the impression of maturity and responsibility that he gave to others. Before many years passed, he was teaching one of the largest classes in the Sunday School. As a bright High School graduate, a faithful attendant, a most staid and responsible young man, Jimmy soon took a prominent part in all church activities. He threw himself into them with characteristic single-mindedness. As we have said, the church offered this unemotional youth an outlet; but it also offered his mother, brothers and sisters the best part of what social life they enjoyed."

My friends, I did not just make up these words to fit Jimmy Carter. I have simply substituted the name "Jimmy" for the name "John" in excerpts from the biography of John D. Rockefeller, Sr. by Allan Nevins. The striking thing about John D. Rockefeller was that his vigorous church activities never throughout his entire career translated into fair, honest, or ethical dealings in business! And in a similar vein today, Jimmy Carter, whether he realizes it or not, is preaching good but doing evil. How far might some dictators, past and present, have gotten if they had eliminated church opposition by themselves going to church? It may be that Jimmy Carter is being misled and is not knowingly doing that which is evil; but either way, my friends, that is no excuse for the rest of us to blindly follow along like sheep to the slaughter. If we do so, history shows clearly what will happen.

The end of the world came for the organized church in Russia

after the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917. Within a few short years more than 20,000,000 Russians met death at the hands of the Soviet government. And while a struggling underground of believers has persisted to the present day, the church as an organization that can influence events directly no longer exists. And it will not exist so long as Communism remains the official religion of the Soviet Union.

In mainland China, too, the same thing happened when Mao Tse-tung took over. The church in China was much smaller as a percentage of the population than it had been in Russia, but its fate was the same—the end of the world aside from a struggling remnant of believers forced under ground. After killing more than 60,000,000 of his own people, Mao succeeded in turning Communist China into perhaps the most rigidly regimented society on earth. And David Rockefeller, who made Jimmy Carter president and calls the shots now, has expressed strong approval of this state of affairs. For example, several years ago he said, and I quote:

"The social experiment in China under Chairman Mao's leadership is one of the most important and successful in human history."

Now, my friends, if we allow it to happen, we are next—America and the whole western world. The elaborate plan which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 for November 1975, is being revised and updated for application in the present circumstances. Certain of my sources have expressed great concern to me recently that a provocation for war in the Middle East is now being established that will be unlike anything we have ever seen before. I repeat, the Rockefellers are increasingly desperate to get NUCLEAR WAR ONE under way before they lose what control they still have over events. To achieve that purpose, plans are being seriously considered which, if carried out, could instantly throw all three major religions of the western world into turmoil in the course of igniting a Middle East conflict. My hope is that by warning you of the existence of such plans, I am making them too dangerous for the conspirators to carry out. But in case they are carried out, I hope that you will now be able to recognize it immediately when it happens. We must not allow ourselves to be tricked, stampeded, or neutralized, my friends. We have important work to do.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #23

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is April 24, 1977, and this is my monthly Audioletter No. 23.

Two months ago in Audioletter No. 21 for February 1977, I explained how America had been turned into a nation-wide energy addict over the course of two generations and more, and how this energy addiction is to be used against us by the four Rockefeller brothers in turning off our national security; and just four days ago, on April 20, 1977, this process got under way in earnest by way of David Rockefeller's revolutionary energy program announced to the world by his employee, Jimmy Carter. To the casual observer it must seem incredible—a new administration under a new President, with no previous experience in Washington, has in

only three short months done what no previous administration has ever succeeded in doing: developed a comprehensive, detailed energy program for the most complex economy on earth. Furthermore, Mr. Carter tells us that we must do as he tells us in order to avoid "a national catastrophe"; and he says we must act now. Why the rush? Why this sudden urgency? And why does he go out of his way to call his energy program "the moral equivalent of war"? The answer lies in what I warned you about at the end of monthly Audioletter No. 22 just last month.

The CIA is hard at work arranging what is to be the CIA's crowning achievement—the staging of a horrendous act of terrorism that is intended to cause war to erupt in the whole of the Middle East. This is to set in motion a modified, up-dated version of the detailed war plan I revealed in monthly Audioletter No. 6 for November 1975. This plan includes a limited nuclear strike from the Sinai to cap off Arab OPEC oil wells except those in Libya, which is controlled by the CIA. This will lead immediately to very harsh energy rationing in the United States, and the Federal government will at last get to issue those precious gas rationing coupons that have been awaiting use now for over three years. So the Carter energy plan with its underlying warlike atmosphere is actually the first step in a gradual shift unto a war footing for the United States. It has the same purpose as the declaration of national emergency which President Franklin D. Roosevelt proclaimed in May 1941, six months before Pearl Harbor, to start getting America ready for war he was helping to bring about. The second major step in our progressive shift onto war footing is intended to occur the time of the cut-off of Middle East oil, by war. This will provide a perfect excuse for an actual Declaration of National Emergency, and that in turn will activate all the dictatorial presidential powers spelled out in Executive Order 11921 signed by President Ford very quietly in June 1976, and described in my Audioletter No. 14 for July 1976.

Audioletter No. 14, of course, is also the issue in which I first revealed the presence of Soviet underwater missiles and bombs in our own territorial waters. The terrible Middle East incident now brewing, which I fervently hope and pray will somehow be sidetracked by its advanced exposure, is to cause a limited nuclear war in the Middle East. That in turn is supposed to initiate a chain of events, culminating in Nuclear War One between the Soviet Union and the United States of America. Originally this was to have been a carefully programmed war for the mutual benefit of the Rockefeller cartel and their Soviet allies, with the Rockefellers and their intimates riding out the war safely in the nuclear-safe zone across the northern United States; but ever since the Soviet Union began its double cross of the Rockefellers last summer 1976, the plans for war have been undergoing frantic revisions. Even the insane Rockefeller concessions to the Soviets, embodied in the Red Friday agreement of October 1, 1976 (which I revealed that month in Audioletter No. 17) have failed to fully reinstate the Rockefeller/Soviet alliance—so now anything can happen. The Rockefeller brothers, who for so long have tried to play God with their immense power, are now finding out that they too are fallible and human, even if they still refuse to consciously admit it. Today, my friends, the power of the Rockefeller empire is in the process of destroying itself; but just as Samson pulled down the temple around him, the Rockefeller brothers threaten to pull down modern civilization around their heads as their power runs out of control and collapses into the inferno of nuclear war.

Earlier this month, on April 7, 1977, Prime Minister Rabin of Israel resigned. The press has played up his resignation as if

it were another Watergate, but actually it was only a technicality having to do with a modest bank account held here in Washington, D.C. by Rabin against government regulations. Overnight Rabin was out of office, and his public career has been described as ruined; but the real reason for Rabin's lightning exit from Israeli politics was that he learned of the CIA plot to ignite war in the Middle East, and he wanted no part of it. It's almost a replay of Sir Harold Wilson's sudden unexplained resignation as Prime Minister of Great Britain on March 16, 1976, just over a year ago; and as I explained then in monthly Audioletter No. 10, Wilson resigned because he had learned of the coming war plan and wanted nothing to do with it. And so the build-up toward war continues, and our rulers know it. But what of the American public in general? How many know what danger we are in? And especially, how many believe it enough to do something about it? My friends, most Americans today are on vacation from reality, but reality will have to be faced one day in the not too distant future.

My three special topics for today are: Topic #1—THE PRE-WAR SABOTAGE OF AMERICA, Topic #2—THE COMING NAVAL BATTLE FOR THE UNITED STATES AND THE WORLD, and Topic #3—THE UNTOLD PERSONAL SACRIFICE OF GENERAL GEORGE S. BROWN.

Topic #1—In the early days of the 20th century the Rockefeller/Standard Oil monopoly had already become supreme in the United States, but abroad it faced two powerful competitors in oil. One was the British Empire, whose destruction by means of two World Wars I've discussed in a number of my past talking tapes. The other foreign competitor was even bigger than the British Empire in oil, and it was attacked and destroyed first. That competitor was Czarist Russia. After the Bolshevik Revolution took place in 1917, property owners and businessmen of all kinds were dispossessed and liquidated in great numbers. And included in this, by design, was the utter destruction of the oil fields, refineries, oil tankers, everything having to do with oil. The small band of revolutionaries under Lenin and Trotsky who had been sent into Russia with the help of Rockefeller financing had done their job well; and within a few years the new Communist regime of the Soviet Union welcomed the Rockefeller/Standard Oil interests with open arms to re-develop the huge Russian oil reserves. Ever since that day, right down to the present, practically all of the oil leaving the Soviet Union has been carried in oil tankers of the Rockefeller/Standard Oil empire under various names, nominees, and national flags. For a thorough and most unusual expose of the oil competition presented to the Rockefellers by Czarist Russia, I highly recommend a new book by Robert V. Tolf, entitled THE RUSSIAN ROCKEFELLERS—THE SAGA OF THE NOBEL FAMILY AND THE RUSSIAN OIL INDUSTRY published by the Hoover Institution Press, Stanford University, Stanford, Calif. 94305—the price is $15.95 postpaid.

For decades following the Bolshevik Revolution, the Soviet rulers were absolutely dependent upon an uninterrupted flow of transfusions from the West of money, technical know-how, food, and arms. The Kremlin ruled a huge nation with an iron fist, and the Rockefellers shared this rule with the Kremlin. The Soviet Union, therefore, appeared to be the perfect vehicle for bringing the entire world under the control of the super-rich Rockefellers and their intimates. All that was necessary, or so they thought, was to gradually build up the Soviet system while bleeding to death the harder to control United States and the western world. This was the situation the four Rockefeller brothers inherited long ago-they literally grew up with it, and could hardly imagine things being any different. But now things are different. The

Soviet Union can now survive without continued outside help, and now they have been double-crossing the Rockefellers and we the people will have to suffer for it. Now, both the Rockefellers and the Soviets are maneuvering, playing a tricky game, and all the while trying to emerge supreme from the conflict to come. But, just as it was planned before the Rockefeller/Soviet alliance began coming apart, the main and prime battleground is to be the United States of America. The Soviet Union is busy at work trying to weaken America here and abroad so that we can be defeated in Nuclear War One; and the Rockefellers are trying to turn our nation into a complete dictatorship under their domination. Both are trying to bend the weakening of America's freedom to their own special advantage.

The centerpiece of the Rockefeller program to completely take over America right now is the so-called CARTER ENERGY PROGRAM. Recently the CIA s-u-d-d-e-n-l-y upgraded its estimates of Soviet spending for new military equipment and installations to four times the previous figure so as to alarm us. In a similar vein, the CIA has also provided Jimmy Carter with grist for his energy mill to grind us into submission by issuing a report saying world oil reserves are much lower than previously thought. Both CIA reports are rubbish, issued purely for propaganda purposes; so the CIA under Admiral Turner, who is a Rockefeller man, is continuing with the preparations for the limited nuclear strike from the Sinai in order to get the war started. American F-15 fighter bombers are now available in the Sinai and would hit all of the five or more Arab target areas with ease; and the special low-yield nuclear weapons for the job are already on the scene, currently stored underground at the so-called American Monitoring Station in the Sinai. The bombs themselves are atomic, not hydrogen, very clean, with primary blast effects confined to a radius of only 300 to 400 yards—just right for a so-called surgical attack to wipe out the oil wells in the target areas.

As for America, even though the Alaskan oil is supposed to start flowing through the pipeline this summer, it will not come into the lower United States. It happens to be high sulphur oil of a type which west-coast refineries cannot handle even though there have been ten years to get ready for Alaskan oil. Instead, the Rockefeller plan is to ship this oil to Japan at a handsome profit, of course, and make up the difference with more imports of, guess what—Arab oil. When the Arab oil is cut off, there will be some attempts to ship some of the otherwise useless Alaskan oil to the Gulf Coast by small, inefficient tankers through the Panama Canal, which is targeted both by underwater missiles and by missiles in Guyana. The sharp drop in our oil supplies will also help to intensify the reduction in food supplies, which is already resulting from drought here in America. Many factors are contributing to the drought situation, including not only the Soviet weather modification activities I've mentioned in the past, but also activities under Rockefeller control. For example, I mentioned in Audioletter No. 9 for February 1976 that for years the Rockefeller oil companies have been knowingly lowering the underground water table in many areas of the Midwest and Great Plains by means of excessive pumping from their oil wells; and now, in many of these very areas, the problem of low ground water is adding to the drought crisis.

Meanwhile, the Rockefellers never lose sight of their objectives, no matter how much they are forced to change their tactics along the way. Their objective for America is DICTATORSHIP, according to the pattern spelled out in their secret New Constitution, which I revealed in my Audio Book Talking Tape No. 4 released in July 1975. Under the guise of "governmental reorganization", the provisions of their

dictatorial new constitution are being imposed on the United States piecemeal, gradually, while our real Constitution is increasingly "interpreted" out of existence.

But of all the things that determine whether a nation will survive or succumb in time of crisis, the human spirit is still the most important. A strong spirit and deep resolve can overcome seemingly insurmountable obstacles, and it can make a people impossible to conquer; but a weak spirit, without convictions or values, leaves a people defenseless—defenseless no matter how much armor they may wear or what weapons they may command. This is why the human spirit has been the most consistent target of all, both of the Rockefeller "One World" group and of the rulers of the Soviet Union.

Last month in Audioletter No. 22 I pointed out one of the extremes in church philosophy that has been promoted wherever possible for generations by the Rockefellers and their collaborators. This extreme is to divorce the moral and spiritual lessons of religions from daily decisions and actions, as if the two had no relationship to one another except for lip service. For whatever reasons, this extreme is personified today by one Jimmy Carter. The opposite extreme is equally deadly, if not more so. This is to dilute the spiritual teaching for which churches originally existed and replace it with preaching about economic, political, and social issues. To do this is to play with fire; but this is exactly what the National Council of Churches and its sister organization the World Council of Churches have been doing for decades. Prior to November 28, 1950, the National Council was known as the Federal Council of Churches. For many years the Federal Council had been dominated at the national level by the Rockefellers and their agent John Foster Dulles, and was the recipient of several grants from the Rockefeller Foundation. But the Federal Council became so totally identified with political activism in support of socialist causes that it became an object of increasing distrust. Accordingly, the name was changed to the National Council of Churches, and its tarnished halo was polished up with public assurances that this was a new organization which would devote itself to the real business of the church. There were many influential laymen in the churches under the umbrella of the National Council who wanted to help insure that the supposedly new organization would truly devote itself to proper areas of church concern. As a result, a National Lay Committee was brought into being under the chairmanship of the late J. Howard Pugh, a truly great American, who was the director and president of the Sun Oil Co. when it was still free of the grasping clutches of the Rockefellers. The National Lay Committee existed from March 28, 1951, until June 30, 1955.

The whole story of what happened to the National Lay Committee of the National Council of Churches is told in the "Chairman's Final Report" by J. Howard Pugh. Unfortunately this important report has long been suppressed and buried. I have in my possession one of the very few copies still known to be in existence; therefore I will read a few brief passages from the Chairman's Explanatory Letter, which serves as a Foreword to the Report as a whole. These quotations are taken in sequence; and although they do not do justice to Mr. Pugh's complete explanatory letter, much less the entire 316-page Report, I believe you will find them revealing:

"In the failure of this most important effort to bring about an enduring partnership between the clergy and laity, I feel a very real responsibility to provide a comprehensive and factual account of those steps which led to the Board's

action—discontinuing lay participation."

"We lay people found ourselves not only deeply in the minority but often poles apart from the clergy who invariably out-voted us 10 to 1 in these sessions."

"The members of the Lay Committee were often misunderstood in their urgency to keep the churches out of politics and their insistence on the promisee evangelism. Our premise was that instead of appealing to government, the church should devote its energies to the work of promoting the attributes of Christianity—truth, honesty, fairness, generosity, justice, and charity in the hearts and minds of men. We attempted to emphasize that Christ stressed not the expanded State, but the dignity and responsibility of the individual."

"Their philosophy, it seemed to the Lay Committee, looked to an ever-expanding government."

"With few exceptions, the members of the Lay Committee had agreed to serve only because they had been assured that the new National Council would avoid the political involvements and controversies of the old Federal Council of Churches, which was now superseded."

"Most of the members of the Lay Committee came finally to the realization that a wide chasm existed between the thinking of the laity and the clergy and executives of the denominational bodies which comprise the National Council."

"Thus, on June 30, 1955, the Lay Committee ceased to exist as a committee of the General Board."

"The members of the Lay Committee believed, and so stated, that the political adventures of the National Council in the fields of economic and political controversy would seriously hinder and not further Christian leadership in the pressing fields of evangelism, fellowship, and education."

"It appears from the record that the National Council could find no room for opposition to the philosophies and practices carried over from the old Federal Council. Lacking the patience to resolve the basic problem, it has sought to bury it."

Thus ended, my friends, more than 20 years ago the last major effort to deflect the Rockefeller-dominated National Council of Churches away from its political programs and toward concern for spiritual matters. After more than four years of frustrating effort, the National Lay Committee was dissolved. This signaled the end of any influence of the general church population of America on the policies of the National Council of Churches. The National Council proceeded on its way, proclaiming to the public that it represented 34,000,000 Protestants, while using this power base to help undermine our free Republic. The National Council has done much to help dull and weaken the spirit of millions of Americans, softening our approach in opposition to Communism. Let us hope and pray that in these dangerous days they will at last see the light and begin to work at last to build up the American spirit, instead of destroying it.

Topic #2—In monthly Audioletter No. 15 for August 1976, I explained that the planting of short-range underwater-launch nuclear missiles in our territorial waters was part of the Soviet naval strategy for the United States and world conquest. The same continues to be the case now. Admiral Gorshkoff, who has commanded the Soviet navy for more than 20 years, has built it

into a fighting force that is radically different from any other navy the world has ever seen; and as we near the very threshold of war, it is no accident that the Rockefeller insider who now heads the CIA is also an Admiral—4-star Admiral Stansfield Turner. The CIA has become the most powerful military organization in the United States, and Nuclear War One will revolve around naval strategy. Both the importance of the Soviet Navy and its great difference from our own United States Navy can be illustrated by just one fact: When the supersonic Backfire long-range bomber entered operational service in the Soviet Union late in 1974, it did so simultaneously with the Soviet Navy as well as with the Soviet Air Force. This is like giving our own new supersonic bomber, the B-l, to our Navy to fly—or, since we still do not have the B-l to counter the Soviet Backfire, having our navy fly B-52s. Of course our own navy does not fly strategic bombers. The United States Navy, like the British Navy and most of the other great navies of history, has as one of its primary missions the protection of our sea lanes of commerce—a war which is basically defensive in nature. Since World War II our navy has also acquired offensive missions which have gradually assumed greater importance, including the ability to attack an enemy from the sea with the submarine-launched ballistic missiles. But the traditional defensive mission of protecting our sea lanes can never be neglected. Admiral Gorshkoff, however, has been able to concentrate on building a navy which is almost totally offensive in character. Soviet fishing trawlers, some of them genuine, roam the world; but the Soviet Union does not depend for its survival on the sea nearly as much as the United States. So the Soviet Navy is designed first and foremost for offensive operations; and this not only includes the ability to interdict enemy sea lanes and attack enemy naval forces at sea, it also includes an unprecedented emphasis on projecting naval power ashore. This in turn means not only the ability to carry out amphibious assaults and tactical bombardment, but strategic attack—a role we usually tend to think of only in terms of the Soviet Air Force with its ICBMs and bombers.

The new Soviet Navy of Admiral Gorshkoff also differs from ours in another way. Aside from missile submarines, the American Navy is structured around the aircraft carrier; whereas the Soviet Navy is built around the submarine. American task forces include all kinds of ships designed to coordinate with the needs and capabilities of the aircraft carrier. By the same token, Soviet surface ships of all kinds are intended to support the huge submarine force in various ways. This applies even to the new Soviet aircraft carriers which are now beginning to appear on the scene since Soviet naval aviation is heavily oriented toward anti-submarine warfare, although it has other capabilities as well. The relative naval capabilities of the Soviet Union and the United States have never been considered in the Strategic Arms Limitations Talks, the SALT talks, except with regard to sea-launch ballistic missiles; and yet it is the coming naval confrontation that could all by itself determine the outcome of Nuclear War One. It is often forgotten, for example, that the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) is primarily a naval alliance. We hear frequently about NATO in the controlled major media of the United States as though the only problems were Army problems—such as rusty tanks and lack of spare parts; and when the Supreme Allied Commander, Europe, who is presently General Alexander Haig, is mentioned in the news, he is often called the head of NATO, or some such, but actually he's only one of three co-equal Commanders in NATO. The other two are Naval Commanders—they are the Commander-in-Chief, Channel Command; and the Supreme Allied Commander, Atlantic, the latter based at Norfolk, Va. NATO depends for its very life on its naval

strength, including the ability to keep open the vital North Atlantic sea lanes. But now, Soviet naval Backfire bombers with air-to-surface, anti-ship missiles threaten to cut those North Atlantic sea lanes in time of war; and the Mediterranean, which was once dominated by the United States Navy, is now heavily populated by the Soviet Navy as well. While the Soviet Navy has undergone explosive growth over the past decade to the formidable armed force that it is today, the United States Navy has been allowed to shrink to half its former size with more and more ships aging and obsolescent. When the Arab oil is cut off by war soon, Europe will have to fall back on its meager reserves, which will run out within 60 to 90 days. Interdiction of NATO sea lanes at that point by the Soviet Union could cause all of Europe to fall like a plum into Soviet hands. This is especially true in light of the short-range Soviet underwater missiles in European territorial waters, which I mentioned in Audioletter No. 22 last month. So far only Great Britain shows signs of being able to withstand such a course of events. As I mentioned last month, the British government had requested the latest missile coordinates from me, and I had supplied them. Of the 29 Soviet missiles around the British Isles at that time, all but one had been removed by the Royal Navy as of April 18—6 days ago. However, I have been informed of 3 newly planted missiles there, and I have relayed these to the British for action. Great Britain also may have the benefit of her new North Sea oil fields which, barring sabotage or the like, should make Britain independent of foreign oil producers in the near future.

Since I spoke to you last, action has been taken in another area also. Acting on information which I relayed, of the 8 missiles around southern Africa, seven have now been taken up. At last report, however, the missile lying off Mozambique targeted on Rhodesia was still in place. Such removals of missiles are better than no action at all, but they are still no more than holding actions. What is needed, if war is to be prevented, is for this deadly cat-and-mouse game to be stopped altogether by revealing to the whole world what the Soviet Navy is up to. Late last September, as I revealed in monthly Audioletter No. 16, the United States had a golden opportunity to do just that, and to do so while the Soviet underwater missile threat was only a small fraction of what it is now. At that time, a Soviet missile-laying mini-sub equipped with sonar-defeating design features entered Chesapeake Bay and became trapped there, due to a malfunction that ultimately killed the crew. It was a perfect opportunity for the United States to pick up the sub, display it on television world-wide by satellite, and tell the Soviet Union that the jig was up; but instead, as I revealed in Audioletter No. 17 the following month, the Red Friday agreement on October 1, 1976 reinstated a strained alliance between the Rockefellers and the Soviets, and the Soviet Navy was allowed to enter Chesapeake Bay under cover of darkness and recover the mini-sub. But now, a similar opportunity exists once again—not in American waters but in those of Norway. In March 1977 a Soviet submarine entered the fjord of Folda on the north coast of Norway. The Norwegians detected its presence and sealed off the exit to wait for the sub to surface. On April 4, 1977, the story was broken in European press, although the location was not mentioned. To my knowledge, however, it has received no mention anywhere in the United States. I strongly suggest to the Norwegian government that before the Soviet submarine be allowed to escape, a search be made at the navigational coordinates 64 35' 23" north, 10 23' 14" east. This location is not far from where the Soviet submarine is trapped and is the site of one of the seven Soviet underwater missiles that have been planted recently in Norwegian waters. Should the government of Norway so request, I will naturally provide the

other locations as well, through proper channels.

As for the United States, there continues to be no effort at all to clear our waters of the Soviet nuclear weapons which threaten our country. As of my latest report a few days ago, not one of the 158 Soviet missiles and hydrogen bombs lurking in our territorial waters has been removed, and I have not been approached in any way by the United States government with requests for their locations. Meanwhile the Soviet plutonium cloud attacks on the United States are still continuing by means of the new canisters which are being deployed close to shore along the West Coast, which I mentioned last month. Of the 16 canisters which were deployed at the time I recorded Audioletter No. 22 last month, 11 had been discharged as of April 15, but by then there were 17 new ones. At last report, these canisters are being deployed along the entire West Coast from San Diego to Seattle. These are extremely easy and simple to deploy—for example, they are dropped from aircraft flying under our radar like the Soviet Bear bombers that we were told about by news reports the other day. They are also planted by Soviet trawlers, since they are allowed to enter our new 200-mile fishing zone to catch certain fish there. The fact that this is being done was proven by the arrested Soviet trawler Taras Shevchenko which was carrying plutonium canisters in a compartment near the stern of the ship.

Thus the maneuvering in preparation for Nuclear War One continues with a strong naval emphasis. At one level, Rockefeller agents in America appear to continue to cooperate in the joint plan of conquest with the Soviets; but on the real level the Soviets and the Rockefellers are both jockeying for a decisive knock-out blow. In this, time is on the side of the Soviet Union, so they're trying to delay war slightly while the Rockefeller brothers are trying to hurry it up; and to condition us all for it, the Carter Administration is flexing its muscles to show us how strong it is when it comes to the Soviets. In short order it has forcefully espoused Human Rights, handed the Soviets an ultimatum on SALT talks, seized Soviet fishing trawlers, chased Soviet Bear long-range turbo-prop bombers away from the southeast coast of our country—and what's next? A photo of a Soviet submarine in our waters? Already the Rockefeller position has decayed further in the past several months because of the further deterioration of their CIA undersea super-missiles in the Atlantic and Pacific. Of the fleet of 14 such missiles which I described in Audioletter No. 20, January 1977, all 5 in the Pacific have now sprung leaks and are no longer usable. Of the 9 in the Atlantic, 4 have now failed—missiles #4, 6, 7, and 8. That leaves only 5 of the original fleet of 14 CIA missiles still available for Rockefeller threats against their Soviet partners. Meanwhile the Soviet short-range missiles in our waters in the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans and the Gulf of Mexico are now being used by the Soviets to further weaken our position as a nation.

But, my friends, that's not all. For the very first time Soviet missiles have now been planted in the Great Lakes. From there they now threaten Chicago, Racine, Milwaukee, Cleveland, Bay City, Erie, Buffalo, Rochester, and other cities of our industrial heartland. At present there are exactly 50 such missiles in the Great Lakes. These, however, are single warhead, short-range missiles, and are even smaller in size than the multiple warhead missiles that have been planted along our East, West, and Gulf Coasts. As if this were not enough, I have just been alerted that Soviet agents are now fanning out across America planting small hydrogen bombs in selected inland lakes. The primary targets here are major dams, but some other targets

are also involved. Since the Federal government refuses to take action, it's imperative that State governments—especially those in the West—take action now to protect their citizens. Security patrols around major dams and lakes should be beefed up immediately and placed on full alert. In addition, search operations must be performed to locate those bombs that have already been planted so that they can be removed. Already, Soviet underwater nuclear devices have been planted in 21 places within the United States, and more are being planted. Nineteen (19) of the targets are dams, the other 2 are cities. CALIFORNIA has 4—Oroville Dam north of Sacramento, Castaic Dam north of Los Angeles, Shasta Dam in north California, and Otay Reservoir Dam near San Diego. ARIZONA also has 4 bombs—Glen Canyon Dam, Coolidge Dam, Theodore Roosevelt Dam, and Lake Pleasant Dam near Phoenix. NEW MEXICO has 3—the Navajo Dam, Blue Mesa Dam, and Alfa Butte Dam. MONTANA has 3—Fort Peck Dam, Yellow Tail Dam, and Hungry Horse Dam. NORTH DAKOTA, SOUTH DAKOTA, NEBRASKA, NEVADA, and WASHINGTON STATE so far have 1 bomb each, threatening dams which are among the world's largest—these are respectively Garrison Dam, Oahe Dam, Fort Randall Dam, Hoover Dam, and Grand Coulee Dam. IDAHO has 2 bombs, both threatening towns—one is in the north end of Cour d'Alene Lake, threatening the town of that name; the other is in the north end of Lake Pend Oreille near the town of Sandpoint. My friends, this would not have been possible had it not been for the destruction of the FBI beginning with the murder of J. Edgar Hoover. God help us all.

Topic #3—With our military situation so serious, one would naturally expect someone to come forward to take action against the Soviet underwater missiles. For example, General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, brought about the removal of many of these ocean and gulf missiles during August and September 1976. But where is he now?!! My friends, here is what has happened to General Brown. No matter how much the tactics of public manipulation change and shift, some things never change. I mentioned several months ago in connection with the disgraceful Sputnik One episode that nowadays accolades and awards go to the spoilers and traitors in our midst, while the true heroes who dare to raise their heads are beaten down, suppressed, and forgotten. Today there is no more grim testimony to this fact than the current predicament of General George S. Brown.

As Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, General Brown is the top military officer in the United States, and therefore in some respects in the entire free world. As I revealed in detail in monthly Audioletter No. 16 for September 1976, it was he, General Brown, who more than any other person in the United States government, prevented a surprise Soviet nuclear attack on America during August and September 1976. Under extremely adverse conditions, he obtained the go-ahead to remove Soviet underwater missiles and hydrogen bombs then planted in our own territorial waters and then ordered the United States Navy to do the job, which it did quickly. And on September 16, 1976, I met for over an hour with General Brown in his office at the Pentagon to discuss the continuing Soviet underwater missile crisis and to relay new information to him which had been prevented from reaching him through normal channels. In meeting with me, General Brown was accepting terrible personal risks, and he knew it. He had overruled his entire staff in order to meet with me, and the meeting itself was completely free of interruptions of any kind. Nor was there any cut-off due to time; the meeting simply continued without pressure until we finished the business at hand. Then I left, along with an associate who had accompanied me to the meeting as a witness. We drove away from the Pentagon that day in a driving rainstorm; but the brave

patriot whose office we had just left now faced a far worse personal storm—thanks to his efforts on our nation's behalf. I warned my listeners about this in monthly Audioletter No. 16 last September, and asked that everyone strengthen his hand by expressing their support for him.

General Brown, alone among the top echelons of the United States government, had stood by us and had saved millions of our lives in the process. Now he was depending on us to stand by him in his continuing efforts to carry out his Constitutional duties to the letter. Some of us did so, my friends, but far too many of us did not. During August and early September 1976, the Joint Chiefs of Staff were flooded with demands for action against the Soviet underwater missiles; but after that action was taken, there was no such massive outpouring of thanks for General Brown's crucial leadership or support for the continued positive efforts needed to save our country. Far too many of us forget that it is not enough just to complain about what is wrong; we must also actively support that which is right, or it will wither and die. After the crucial actions taken under General Brown's leadership late last summer, far too many of us just relaxed and went back to sleep, leaving General Brown to fend for himself.

Now I must tell you what has happened to General Brown as a result. For many months now I have been cut off from direct contact with General Brown; and in recent months General Brown has seemed like a completely different person than in the past whenever he appears in public. In place of the outgoing personality which has been General Brown's trademark in the past, there is nothing but resignation and acceptance of the dictates of his civilian superiors. The change has been so dramatic that it has even been commented upon by syndicated columnists, who are mystified. What has happened to General Brown, my friends, is known to very few. I myself have been able to confirm it only within the past few days. General George S. Brown, the nation's top military officer, is now virtually under house arrest. This is exactly the same kind of confinement that was meted out, for example, to Army Lieutenant William Calley during his court martial for the My Lai massacre in Vietnam. But there are two differences in General Brown's case. First, there has been no court martial. Instead, he is living under the threat of a court martial, for its twisted evidence and perjuring witnesses have already been assembled. Second, General Brown's isolation at the Pentagon and confinement to his Fort Myer residence are not absolute. Instead, they are interspersed with very carefully controlled appearances at official functions, since his absence from these would quickly arouse suspicions that something was terribly wrong. Now, should General Brown attempt again to step out of line and defy those in high places by giving orders to remove the missiles, doing his Constitutional duty, the suspended threat of court martial would instantly come crashing down upon him. By means of the elaborately doctored and falsified evidence I've already mentioned, General Brown would be railroaded into certain conviction for treason for doing his duty. Already alleged statements by General Brown have been published recently to make him appear to be a dangerous man. Were General Brown to be courtmartialed with falsified evidence, it would destroy him personally. It would also prevent his efforts from producing any benefits to America—such as a resumption of the removal of Soviet nuclear missiles from our waters. Any such orders of his would be rescinded; and his courtmartial would be used to make any attempts by him to warn America useless, by destroying his credibility.

As long ago as October, 1976, just a month after my meeting with him, General Brown was given a powerful demonstration of the

ability of his enemies to crucify him publicly. As I discussed that month in Audioletter No. 17, a six-month old interview of General Brown was dredged up and used to subject him to intense public embarrassment and criticism. A few alleged statements of his from the interview were made public and played up by the controlled major media to such an extent that he was forced to make a public apology on nationwide television. Can you imagine? All of that for a few relatively insignificant comments which, if he really made them at all, had attracted no attention six months earlier. This episode had just one purpose—to prove to General Brown that if the falsified charges of treason should ever be leveled at him, he would have no chance at all either to defend himself or to do a service to America. His only recourse now would be to himself publicly demand a court-martial, but even that would not be successful without a massive outpouring of public support for him ahead of time—and that, my friends, has so far been denied him to the everlasting shame of our entire nation. Should General Brown come to any physical harm, the responsibility for it will rest squarely on the shoulders of David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D. Rockefeller III; but meanwhile, he's a secret captive, keeping millions of Americans reassured that all is well merely by his presence on the scene. Whenever a public or official appearance or statement by General Brown is called for, it's arranged and carried out under the watchful eyes of a heavy escort, although this is not always apparent. Otherwise the openness, the accessibility, and warmth that has always distinguished General Brown among newspaper reporters is now gone. He's a virtual prisoner at the Pentagon, held practically incommunicado except for the carefully controlled communications and appearances I have already mentioned. As soon as this Audioletter is released, you can expect to see things happen that may seem to disprove what I am telling you—for example, General Brown may become more visible publicly for a while. It is even conceivable, though highly unlikely, that this might even be carried to the point of having General Brown publicly deny that he has come under any new restrictions in recent months as the result, say, of the unfavorable publicity he received some months ago. Should that happen, keep in mind that General Brown is now a prisoner of war, imprisoned by the enemies within our own midst; and we've already seen many examples of the kinds of things American prisoners of war are forced to say for propaganda purposes.

Yes, my friends, General Brown stood up for all of us only to have too many of us let him down by failing to follow through with our thanks and our overwhelming support; but there is one way that we can still keep General Brown's great personal sacrifice on our behalf from being in vain, and that is for us, each and every one of us as individuals, to begin right now to do whatever we can to save our beloved country. My friends, there's no vacation from reality. It's up to you to do what you can—there's no one else; and even though you may not be able to do more than write a letter or two, do it. You never know how far your few words may spread. They may pass from one person to another, finally reaching the ear of someone you don't even know, someone with far more resources than you have who may play a vital role in saving our nation, yet who may never hear and never act if you fail to do your part. If all you have to offer is 5 loaves and 2 fishes, offer it; you just might be amazed at the results.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #24

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is May 28, 1977 and this is my monthly Audioletter No. 24. This issue concludes the second year of the Audio-letter. But only if we are blessed by a true miracle, will the third year ever be completed, because as I speak to you today a tragedy has already been set in motion that is beyond human comprehension. Not since last July and August, 1976 when the Soviet Union began planting underwater bombs and missiles in our own territorial waters has the situation been so grave and urgent as it is now. For that reason I will dispense with any further introduction today in order to discuss these three topics: Topic #1—The Fall of Babylon Revisited; Topic #2—The Handwriting On The Wall For America; and Topic #3—WATER, THE ULTIMATE WEAPON.

Topic #1—We live today in a world that grows more complex and more confusing with each passing day, but in spite of that we Americans are fond of praising ourselves for the great man-made wonders of our age. And whenever the obvious dangers to our continued existence as a nation prey on our minds, we are always reminded that we, the great United States, have already survived fully two centuries since our Republic was founded. And scarcely a day goes by that we are not reassured by our rulers, elected and otherwise, that we are the mightiest nation on earth. Our technology, we are told day in and day out, is so wonderful that it is impossible that any other nation on earth, especially the poor, backward Soviet Union, might surpass us in any important way. In other words, we are technologically impregnable. And lest we become prematurely concerned over the impact of the recent radical changes in our weather, certain news reports recently have told incredible lies to the effect that the United States has a two-year surplus of grains in our storage bins. In all of this, the behavior of the United States today is like that of countless civilizations before us—just before they perished. And in some respects the greatest similarity of all is with that of ancient Babylon just before its abrupt fall from power. The origins of the United States, unlike Babylon, were strongly moral and spiritual in content, and the system of government set forth in the United States Constitution, which freed men in a way unparalleled in human history, was conceived by men who understood man's place within God's creation. This heritage still lives today in the hearts of many Americans, but it's rapidly being snuffed out under the bondage of rulers who are superimposing the pattern of ancient Babylon on our beloved land. The Babylonian pattern is totally evil, and those who choose to bow down to such Satanic rule thereby make themselves part of it. The origins of ancient Babylon are lost in the midst of time, perhaps 5,000 years ago, but it reached its peak around 600 B.C., at which time it was undisputed as the most powerful empire the world had ever seen. The City of Babylon was the Rome of its day, the most important trading center, the most powerful military force, the greatest cultural influence, and even a center of tourism because of its remarkable hanging gardens and other man-made wonders. The huge city of Babylon was surrounded by city walls so high and so thick that they were impregnable by any military technology of that day; and inside the city there was a two-year supply of food, making any attempted siege against Babylon unattractive. And there was no lack of water either, because no less than the mighty river Euphrates ran through the city. Yes, Babylon was powerful, wealthy, and so secure in material terms that potential adversaries were hardly even taken seriously. Even when it became clear that the increasingly powerful joint empire of the Medes and the Persians had designs

on Babylon, there was no real concern. With all their means of protection against invasion and their unrivaled prosperity, the Babylonian attitude was simply "It couldn't happen here." And so when the Medo-Persian army of Cyrus and Darius laid siege to Babylon, the only response of the ruler of Babylon was debauchery, feasting, drunkenness, and mocking any real power greater than himself. At this point, we're told, the Babylonian feast was interrupted by the appearance of a hand in midair writing words on the wall that said Babylon's rule was at an end, that its ruler had been weighed in the balances and found wanting, and that the kingdom would be divided and given to the Medes and Persians. The handwriting on the wall said the impossible was about to happen—Babylon, the impregnable city, was about to fall—How could this be? No one in Babylon had ever had experience with invasion and so could not imagine such a thing; and yet, within a few short hours, before the drunken feast even ended, the impossible happened. First, the water level in the mighty Euphrates river, flowing through the middle of Babylon, started dropping rapidly. It dwindled to a trickle, and soon stopped altogether. Cyrus, the Persian, had worked out of sight of Babylon and had diverted the Euphrates out of its normal channel. Now the great impregnable walls of Babylon were left with huge openings—namely, the river bed no longer filled with water, and in marched the Medo-Persian army, conquering Babylon without resistance. And today, the United States is under siege by the Soviet Union with the cooperation from within of quislings. We are threatened by the joint Rockefeller/ Soviet empire just as Babylon was besieged by the joint Medo-Persian empire. And now, as then, we are told there is nothing to worry about, "It just couldn't happen here." But, my friends, just as happened in ancient Babylon, the handwriting is now on the wall for America. The America we know today is a perversion of the pattern originally laid down for our beloved land, and America as we know it is about to come to an end. And as with ancient Babylon, WATER is our Achilles heel and the means by which we are to be reduced to surrender without a fight.

Topic #2—Not long ago the Carter administration's Ambassador to the United Nations, Andy Young, made the remarkable statement that: "Communism has never been a threat to me." He also has a habit of patting Cuba on the back for the so-called 'stabilizing influence' of Cuban troops in Africa, and otherwise has repeatedly shown a very amiable attitude toward World Communism. Many Americans have wondered why Andy Young is allowed to go on saying such things without being restrained in any way by Jimmy Carter. But Carter has now answered that, in a major foreign policy speech given at the University of Notre Dame on May 22, 1977. This speech is as important as the famous Iron Curtain Speech of Sir Winston Churchill a generation ago at Fulton, Missouri. White House aides stated that the Carter speech at Notre Dame was specifically intended to "send some messages to foreign governments"—and it did. The foreign press is filled with headlines about the major turn that has just been taken in American foreign policy. Yet, here at home, many Americans have not grasped what has happened. The most basic theme of that Carter speech is an elaborate echo of Andy Young's statement, that is: "We are no longer afraid of Communism." Is this because Communism is withering and dying? One need only look at a map to see how fast Communism is eating up the world. What Jimmy Carter is telling us and the world, is 'We can get along with Communism'; and just to prove it, one of America's most important, efficient intelligence operations to keep an eye on Soviet naval movements and other important matters is being closed down. This intelligence unit, known as Task Force 157 and run by the United States Navy, has a budget of well under 1/10 of 1% of that of the CIA, and yet it is being shut down—supposedly

for budgetary reason. Meanwhile the signs of war to come are all around us. So great are the dangers facing us that military men are speaking up in increasing numbers in an effort to warn America before disaster arrives. Since they are subject to military law and subordinate to civilians who do not want them to speak up, it's no small thing to speak out in this way. So, consider what Major General John K. Singlaub said in an interview on May 19, 1977. General Singlaub, the third-ranking U.S. Army General in Korea said: "If we withdraw our ground forces on the schedule suggested, it will lead to war." And why did General Singlaub speak up? His answer was: "The question asked after United States setbacks in Korea and Vietnam was: 'Did the military people in the know express themselves loudly and clearly enough that the decision-makers understood?' We want to make sure." In speaking this way, General Singlaub was doing no more than expressing the consensus of practically every knowledgeable military man about the Korean situation. For example, the same Washington Post article that quoted General Singlaub also quoted another headquarters Army officer in Korea as saying about the Carter plan to withdraw our troops: "I don't know anybody who is not staggered by it. There's no military or strategic logic for withdrawal." The plan to withdraw from South Korea, in other words, is strictly political—in line with the newly-announced American foreign policy that it is no longer afraid of Communism. The reason General Singlaub's words had such an impact in this country is that his name was attached to his warnings. The words I just quoted from the other anonymous Army Officer are just as startling as what General Singlaub said. But people will just read those words once, frown, and then forget about it. But everyone knows about General Singlaub's warnings because, deliberately or otherwise, he allowed himself to be identified as the source of the warnings; and, for daring to warn us, he was promptly relieved of his Korean command by Jimmy Carter. The situation in Korea illustrates the direction in which events are now moving, but other events are due to occur long before the pullout of our troops from South Korea. The real threat to our security is no longer in Korea or in Europe but right here in our own backyard.

Another military man who is actively trying to warn America is Major General George Keegan, who retired at the beginning of this year as Chief of Air Force Intelligence. General Keegan is one of the West's greatest intelligence analysts, and the story he has to tell should be continuous headline news throughout our nation. General Keegan has been speaking on radio and television talk shows, giving speeches, accepting interviews—in short, using every channel open to him in an effort to wake up America before it is too late. One of his most comprehensive and important speeches was the one delivered on March 11, 1977, at a press conference sponsored by the American Security Council here in Washington, D.C. To find out in more detail what General Keegan had to say, I would urge every American to obtain a copy of that speech. Write to the American Security Council, Boston, Va., 22713 for information. It was published as the April 1977 Washington Report of the American Security Council.

We're frequently told by syndicated columnists that the CIA is our first line of defense, but General Keegan said in his speech: "The ultimate function of a nation's intelligence is to render carefully assessed judgments and forecasts regarding the threat. When I look back upon my experience with this nation's highest estimating body, I have the impression of having taken part in a Charles Dickens novel. The sense of make-believe and unreality has to be experienced to be believed." Further on he says: "The intelligence estimators, heavily dominated by the CIA and the State Department, have been wrong about Soviet purposes in

pursuing detente. They have been shockingly deficient in their estimates of the risks and the advantages to the United States and the free world of the so-called technology exchange with the Soviet Union." And he adds: "If there has been a Watergate in this country, and there has been, but ignored, it has been in the monumentally incompetent judgmental processes of this government regarding the nature, character, and growth of the Soviet threat as it has evolved from year to year." General Keegan goes on to make crystal clear that the deficiencies in our intelligence estimates are not due to any lack of our ability to collect information or to analyze it technically. The problem, instead, has to do with what is done with that information. To begin with, the intelligence estimation process at the highest levels in America today is not objective, but is manipulated to fit political purposes. In General Keegan's words, and I quote: "The United States intelligence estimative process cannot be understood unless it is first appreciated that national intelligence estimates must perform three functions. First, they must support the decisions of the President, both for the record of history and for the avoidance of impeachment. Second, they must substantiate or help to justify the decisions of the White House 'Office of Management and Budget.' Finally, the intelligence estimates must, whatever other purpose they may serve, rationalize the foreign security policy initiatives of the Secretary of State." Continuing, General Keegan says: "I appreciate that those are extremely important allegations to make, but I submit to you today that it is not possible to understand the workings of the United States intelligence community unless one is willing to open his mind to the influence of those three factors." This situation is illustrated vividly by General Keegan's discussion of the controversy over the Soviet Back-Fire Bomber. As I've told you for many months, the Supersonic Back-Fire is an inter-continental strategic bomber, capable of striking the United States with nuclear weapons. General Keegan says: "The central issue all along has been whether this bomber posed a threat to the United States. The Soviets argued that it did not, and the CIA and State Department rather consistently accepted the Soviet point of view." General Keegan proceeded to acquire analysis of the Back-Fire's capability from "the most competent analysts in the free world." The available intelligence information was provided to three American aircraft companies with experience building strategic bombers—plus, for good measure, the Royal Air Force and the Royal Aircraft establishment in England—and the results: "every single one of these organizations independently agreed that the Back-Fire had an intercontinental capability. Yet my word was not good enough, nor was that of the American and British heavy-bomber designers and builders. CIA and State chose to believe the Soviets." General Keegan is not in a position to express it this way, my friends, but his description of the Back-Fire controversy illustrates what I've been trying to tell you over the months—that the Rockefeller cartel has more faith in the Soviet Union than in our own United States. Finally, General Keegan explains, the sheer weight of analysis made it more and more apparent that the Back-Fire was truly intercontinental: "however, CIA and State now judged that the Soviet Union had no intention of using the Back-Fire as an intercontinental bomber"—this in spite of the fact that the second model of the Back-Fire has been given even greater range. The history of the Back-Fire controversy up to this point is very disgraceful, and still generally unknown to the American people. But listen now to the final chapter in General Keegan's words, and I quote: "Seemingly undaunted by the most extensive analysis of a foreign bomber ever performed in the United States, the CIA, in one final, super-secret, uncoordinated effort, proceeded over a period of 18 months to undertake an analysis designed to prove

that the Back-Fire Bomber could not reach the United States. This effort, in which small bits and pieces of controlled information were provided to McDonnell-Douglas Aircraft, designer and builder of fighters, represents one of the most artful contrivances I have ever observed. It is one which I suspect may have been designed to salvage a SALT accord. Finally, when the CIA surprised everyone by surfacing its new analysis, months of painful and extensive analysis were required to show that the books had been rigged. Artificially high G-loadings had been assigned to the design of the Back-Fire along with excessive engine-drag and other factors which were designed to reduce range." And this, my friends, is how our so-called first line of defense, the CIA, looks after America's national security to the tune of over twenty billion dollars a year.

Elsewhere in his talk General Keegan also spells out the dangerous manner in which our military intelligence capabilities have been progressively over-centralized, compartmentalized, and taken over by civilians "who understand little about the horrors of war—and these are people who understand even less about military doctrine, strategy, and weapons." The product of all these trends described by General Keegan is the very intelligence gap that I discussed with General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, when I met with him last September (1976). For years General Keegan has tried in vain to obtain a series of post-mortem audits on the predictive and estimative record of the United States intelligence community. The audit would be performed by qualified but disinterested outsiders with no links to the intelligence community so that their work would be unbiased. Quoting General Keegan again: "Such audits would record scrupulously where we had been wrong, where we had been right, where we had fallen short of the mark or where we had exaggerated. Yet, every such suggestion had been met with disdain and has been resisted in the most resounding vocal and emotional way." He might as well have asked for an honest audit of Fort Knox.

General Keegan's speech contains many more things than there is time to discuss in this tape, and they're all important. He reveals many things about the military capabilities of both the Soviet Union and the United States that you will never hear through the usual news channels, but they all boil down to just two major conclusions, backed up by many, many facts. One conclusion is that Soviet military capabilities vastly exceed what we are being led to believe, both in terms of quantity and quality. The other conclusion is that the Soviet Union is firmly convinced that a nation can fight a nuclear war and continue afterward as a functioning society; and based on that conclusion from a Soviet study undertaken after World War II, the Soviet Union has for more than 20 years been preparing militarily to fight and win a nuclear war. The American approach, on the other hand, is only to deter such a war, even though General Keegan says: "I am unaware of a single definitive effort ever conducted by the United States to determine precisely and in great detail what it would take to deter."

General Keegan also explains another very important principle—it has to do with official judgments of the strategic balance and carries over into public pronouncements by the Pentagon. This is the tacit rule requiring the use of so-called 'agreed national intelligence.' Says General Keegan: "Agreed national intelligence is derived by committee, contains little that is controversial except in some footnote or dissent; and it rarely contains meaningful reference to the dynamics of strategic competition in terms of the new weapons, new forces, and new capabilities being evolved by the Soviet Union." Thus, whatever

new threats are involved, whether it be the awesome particle beam weapon warned about by General Keegan or the Soviet underwater missiles I've been warning about for nearly a year, Pentagon disclaimers dare not be accepted at face value today without challenge. Those who accept these denials are playing straight into the hands of our nation's deadliest enemies.

Meanwhile the build-up toward the start of Nuclear War One is gaining momentum. Two months ago Nelson Rockefeller visited Israel to help speed up the preparations for a Middle East war. By mid April, Israeli troops had begun massive maneuvers in the Sinai with live ammunition, Reserves had been called up, and Egyptian maneuvers were soon underway as well in the western Sinai. These maneuvers, headline news in Europe and Britain, have gone unmentioned in the United States except for the crash in the Sinai of a huge helicopter killing 56 Israeli soldiers. Then just a few days ago the extremists came to power by way of the recent Israeli elections. The Middle East is now a powder keg as a result, and the Carter administration is rapidly disengaging and disassociating itself from Israel. So, when the nuclear strike from the Sinai against Arab oil wells takes place, it will not be recognized by the world or by most Americans for what it really is. Perhaps General Keegan was also right about one other thing he said in his speech: "We have reached a point in America where I believe we are almost incapable, culturally, of being warned." If so, my friends, it is we, the United States of America, who will have been weighed in the balances and found wanting, like ancient Babylon.

Topic #3—When the sun came up on southeastern Idaho one day almost a year ago, it looked like the start of just another beautiful late spring day. It was Saturday, and two fishermen were looking forward to a relaxing day in the shadow of the new Teton Dam. The Dam, over 300 feet high, had been completed the previous fall except for a few finishing touches that remained, and had been gradually filling up with water during the winter. Now, due to the run-off of melting snow in the mountains, it was almost full. Further down stream from the dam, tens of thousands of people were going about their business. Some puttered around their houses doing weekend chores, while others were at work at businesses or on farms; but for the construction crew who arrived for work on the Teton Dam site that morning of June 5, 1976, it was a different story. At about 7:30 A.M. it was discovered that a sizeable leak had sprung, not through the dam itself but through the section of mountain on one side where the dam was anchored. This was reported immediately to the proper authorities, who directed that steps be taken immediately to start lowering the water level behind the Dam. Why the leak had appeared so suddenly was a puzzle, since inspection of the Dam by personnel around nine o'clock the previous evening had turned up nothing wrong. But there was no time to solve this puzzle, because soon a second leak developed. Like the first, this second leak also appeared to break through the anchoring mountain side rather than the Dam itself. Now the situation began to deteriorate at an alarming rate. Soon a leak found its way through the earthen dam itself, and a growing torrent of water gushed from it. Two bulldozers raced to that location to try to stop the flow by moving more earth into position, but the leak grew so fast that the bulldozers were lost, the operators leaping and scrambling to safety barely in time to save themselves. Like a nightmare come true, the Teton Dam crumbled, collapsed, and released tons of water into the valley below. The day ended abruptly in tragedy for the two fishermen, and others who lost their lives as well. For two days, flood waters from that ruined dam continued to spread, ultimately covering an area of 300 square miles including several towns and 50,000 acres of farm

land. One of the major purposes of the Teton Dam, like many others around our country, had been flood control. Now the man-made flood unleashed by the collapsed dam had caused damage estimated to be in the range of $350- to $500,000,000 in addition to the loss of life. The bursting of the Teton Dam provided America with a preview, on a very small scale, of what the Soviet Union plans to do to our entire country.

Last month in Audioletter No. 23 I reported hard intelligence I had received to the effect that 21 major lakes and dams in 10 western states have hydrogen Soviet bombs planted in them. But the information I gave you then, my friends, was only the beginning. Since recording Audioletter No. 23, I have been under an avalanche of ongoing intelligence reports concerning the ongoing Soviet program of planting nuclear weapons in our inland lakes and reservoirs. I can now reveal that this Soviet program began at a relatively slow, careful pace as much as 18 months ago. For example, a Soviet nuclear device was planted over a year ago at a dam known as the Dalles on the Columbia River east of Portland, Oregon, and it is still there now. The Teton Dam disaster appeared to be just a great big accident, but it brought to everyone's attention the fact that dams can be made to collapse under certain conditions and that the consequences are devastating. Meanwhile the border of Idaho with Canada has become an important entry point for Soviet agents who are bringing nuclear bombs into this country. On Monday May 16, I received an alert from my intelligence sources that Soviet agents were at that time in the process of transporting nuclear weapons into the northern United States by truck through several entry portals along the Canadian border. The greatest focus of that activity was at the Idaho entry points of Porthill and Eastport. For the next several days I was in frequent contact with my intelligence contacts in Canada who were taking very definite action to find and stop these Soviet intruders; but here in the United States our attention is being focused on our border with Mexico by the manufactured distraction of illegal immigrants. At the same time, we are undergoing a wholesale invasion along our border with Canada by the Soviet Union and not one thing is being done about it by the United States. By late that first day, May 16, at least 16 Soviet vehicles carrying nuclear weapons were known to have crossed into the United States from Canada through entry portals into Idaho and Montana; meanwhile 7 more were on Canadian Highway 3 from Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada, heading toward Porthill and Eastport, Idaho, to enter the United States. By that time the origination point in the Vancouver area had been narrowed down to a barge in Horseshoe Bay. The Canadians took care of the situation on their side of the border by stopping and inspecting trucks in the appropriate area, and by early May 18 all seven trucks driven by Soviet agents had been stopped and rounded up just short of the border. At that point, however, their next step was to wait for further instructions from Ottawa, and I have not yet been informed as to what further action was taken. Meanwhile the only public hint of what was going on was contained in a short item printed in Vancouver newspapers on May 19. It stated that trucks were being stopped and searched along Route 3, but did not give the reason. For my Canadian friends, now you know! But it was a different and sad story here in the United States.

The Federal government is taking no action whatsoever, proving that there is a continuing collusion between the Rockefeller empire and the Soviet empire. At the State level, one would hope that the chances of obtaining action would be a little better, but so far that has not been the case. Concerned citizens who have tried to bring my warnings to the attention of their Governors and other high State officials have encountered

basically two reactions—one is that "This is something for the Federal government, so we'll refer it to them"; and of course there it ends. The other main response is to the effect: "Naturally even if we did find a bomb in the lake next to the dam, we would not make it public—after all, we don't want to excite the people." But, my friends, that is like an air raid warden refusing to turn on the siren during an attack because it might frighten people. At the local level though, one would hope that some action could still be expected, but No; during the period of May 16 I tried in every possible way to get local and state police in northern Idaho to simply check out some very specific reports I had been given, but to no avail. Several Soviet trucks were known to be heading southward in northern Idaho toward the town of Sandpoint, and I was informed of the approximate positions where it should have been possible to intercept them on the highway; but when I relayed these reports to State and local police in the area, both directly and through a brave local citizen in that area, it turned out to be impossible to persuade them to take action. As one police sergeant told me, "We're wondering why the Federal government hasn't stepped in on this." And since they had not, even after being notified, the assumption was that there must not be anything to it, therefore it was not even going to be investigated. And so there, my friends, is a part of the handwriting on the wall for America.

Most all Americans have been tricked into accepting the idea that only the Federal government counts or is able to do anything, even though this idea is totally alien to our Republic as originally founded. All the Federal government has to do is not act or to remain silent about a matter, such as Soviet missiles in our waters, and people conveniently leap to the conclusion that there must not be any missiles. As General Keegan says, we're becoming incapable of being warned; and, my friends, if we don't snap out of it, we will suffer horribly. The fact that something was afoot in the area of our nation's water supplies should have been realized four years ago when Nelson Rockefeller started his "National Commission on Water Quality." This he started at the same time as his much better known "Commission on Critical Choices for Americans." And just as the Commission on Critical Choices was absorbed into the Federal government in everything but name, the same was done with Rockefeller's Commission on Water Quality. But even if it was clear that water was to become a political tool in some way, I doubt that anyone in his worst nightmares imagined what was actually afoot. Over the past several years, Federal and State water quality control boards have built up a comprehensive and up-to-date picture of our nation's water resources and requirements—and all this data has been turned over to the Soviet Union! So now, the Soviets know exactly where and how to strike at us through our Achilles' heel of water, just as the Medes and Persians were able to calculate how to attack ancient Babylon through its water source.

In the alliance between the Rockefeller and the Soviet Union empires, the Rockefeller brothers still want to rule the American continent under complete dictatorship; and the Soviets still want America to become their complete satellite—a nation of slaves. But the Rockefellers realized long ago that this country could not be brought under the total control they desire without the benefit of crushing disasters to force us into that mold. And the Soviets for their part realize that to extract the benefit from America that they seek, it is not enough simply to conquer us in war. Afterward there must be a core of turncoat managers, quislings, to run America for them. Soon, the Rockefellers expect to obtain the "Declaration of National Emergency" that

they want in response to events which can be triggered by the Soviets. The Declaration of National Emergency, they believe, will make their dictatorship all but complete. At the present time the Soviet Union has at least 158 underwater missiles in our territorial waters along our coastlines. In addition, the Great Lakes now bristle with smaller, single warhead Soviet underwater missiles—a total of 53 as of my latest information. The fact that the Soviet Union has been able to invade the Great Lakes and place missiles there is shocking; and it is even more shocking to know that Soviet agents are fanning out all over the United States, unhampered, to sow seeds of nuclear disaster throughout our land. It's hard for most people to imagine how such things are possible; but as I know from my own sources, they are being facilitated from within our country. For example, one of the key steps which has been taken by the Carter administration to permit these things recently was publicly confirmed by former Congressman John Rarick of Louisiana. Congressman Rarick publishes a very informative monthly newsletter entitled "You've a Right to Know", about which you might write to him at: Drawer E, Saint Francisville, La. 70775. Quoting from his March 1977 issue, "The Soviets are hauling United States cargo in intra-coastal shipping illegally against the provisions of the Jones Act. Russian vessels can be seen in the river loading from barges, and also unloading on two barges, as if they constitute an integral arm of the United States Maritime Service. Barges loaded by Soviets have been followed up the river through inland waterways and small canals to where their cargoes have even reached the Chicago market." Congressman Rarick further reports that the Soviets are able to get away with this because Secretary of the Treasury Blumenthal waived the provisions of the Jones Act as applied to Soviet vessels. Thanks to such generous help from within the United States has been thrown wide open to offensive Soviet actions. As a result the planting of nuclear devices in our inland waters—rivers as well as lakes and reservoirs—is mushrooming at a tremendous pace. To begin with, additional bombs have been planted in some of the huge dammed-up lakes that I named last month. For example, Hoover Dam had one bomb when I recorded Audioletter No. 23, but now it has 3—one next to each end of the Dam itself, the third upstream some distance from the Dam. Another example is Oroville Reservoir in California. Last month it had one bomb, now it has 4. But more serious than this overkill of a few dams is the vast number of targets throughout America where Soviet bombs have been and are being planted. City water reservoirs of any significance throughout America are targeted. Many already contain bombs, while others are scheduled to receive bombs from the many trucks fanning out across America with Soviet agents at the wheel. Flood control, irrigation, and hydroelectric dams of all kinds are targets as well; and major rivers are also being seeded with bombs at strategic points.

To indicate the magnitude of the Soviet attack plan, I will report the current status of just one state—Texas, which is a major target. As of my latest intelligence, over 100 bombs have already been planted in Texas; and I have been provided so far with a partial list that specifies 33 of the lakes involved. These are: Toledo Bend Reservoir, Sam Rayburn Reservoir, Steinhillyers Reservoir, Lake Vernon, two lakes northeast of Houston which provide water for the city, Conroe Lake, Somerville Reservoir, Lake Waco, Lake Whitney, Malakoff Lake, Frankston Lake, Lake Livingston, Millwood Reservoir, Lake Texarkana, Lake 0' the Pines, Cedar Lake, Lake Tawakoni, four water reservoirs for Dallas and Fort Worth, Lake Texoma, Arbuckle Reservoir, Lake Bridgeport, Hubbard Creek Reservoir, Lake Kemp, Lake Arrowhead, 0'Folia Reservoir, San Angelo Reservoir, Twin Buttes Reservoir, Lake Thomas, and White River Reservoir.

A number of rivers around the country are also known to be involved already. These include the Mississippi, the Missouri, the Illinois, the Ohio, the Columbia, the Potomac, and the Susquehanna. In the Mississippi alone there are already 31 bombs located near dams, and locks, and other strategic points. The farthest to the north is a bomb about 5 miles downstream of Little Falls, Minnesota. From there, they have all been planted all the way down to New Orleans of Louisiana, where 2 bombs are in the river. There are also two other bombs near New Orleans at the east end of Lake Pontchartrain.

My friends, the Soviet Union is striving to be in a position to suddenly, decisively rob America of our water resources. While we are distracted with arguments over weapons delivery systems, such as bombers and missiles, the Soviet Union is striving for the reliability of weapons that are already on site at the target. When war comes, the Soviet Union plans to be able to just push a button, detonate nuclear weapons all over America, devastate our country with floods and the pestilence that they bring, and still have all their missiles and bombers still in reserve. But before war comes, the Rockefeller/ Soviet alliance plan to lay the groundwork for a Declaration of National Emergency in the United States.

One option still available to them is war in the Middle East causing a cutoff of Arab OPEC oil supplies. But a horrendous new capability is now in place as an alternate means for creating our national emergency; and, my friends, there are ominous signs that this capability is going to be used, very soon. Lurking deep in the waters around the Philippine Islands there are now 7 fission-fusion-fission bombs planted there by the Soviet Union. Such a bomb is essentially a hydrogen bomb with a jacket of uranium 238. When it's set off, the nuclear reaction converts much of the jacket material to plutonium 239, which in turn explodes as well. The Soviet Union is the only nation that has ever set off such a bomb—16 years ago on October 30, 1961. In doing so, they set an ugly record that still stands—the biggest nuclear weapon ever fired in the atmosphere. Its yield was something over 50 megatons—that is 50 million tons of TNT, 2500 times as large as the atomic bomb dropped on Hiroshima. Theoretically, there's no limit to the yield of such a bomb, but for 16 years it has been thought of in the West as unusable because it produces such vast quantities of fall-out that it would endanger the country that used it. But the Soviet Union has found a way to use it—deep under the ocean for geophysical warfare in an environment where the radio-active products are relatively confined, producing little fall-out. The Philippines sit like a keystone among a long arch of sub-sea trenches and faults that comprise the most earthquake-prone areas on earth. Starting just north of New Zealand, a band of geological instability runs northwestward toward the Philippines, then northeastward past Japan to the Kamchatka Peninsula, eastward along the Aleutians to Alaska, and then southward along the west coast of the United States, Mexico, Central America, and onward all the way to Chile. This long, irregular zone around the Pacific rim is often called the "Ring of Fire." The 7 Soviet bombs planted in Philippine waters are there for the purpose of triggering major earthquakes, which, thanks to the peculiar convergence of faults and trenches in that area, are intended to work their way by chain reaction all around the Pacific rim, devastating Washington State, Oregon, and California in the process. The 7 bombs in the Philippines are in the so-called gigaton range—that is, each one is equivalent to a billion tons of TNT—50,000 times more powerful than the Hiroshima bomb and therefore big enough to trigger massive earthquakes. And the Soviets believe they can safely use such warfare, treaties or no

treaties, because most of the Soviet Union has no history of earthquakes. The Soviet gigaton bombs in the Philippines are located at navigational coordinates which I will now reveal. No. 1 is at 17-23-23 north, 117-7-23 east; No. 2 is at 14-48-48 north, 119-2-18 east; No. 3 is at 14-0-40 north, 118-23-53 east; No. 4 is at 13-0-0 north, 117-42-8 east; No. 5 is at 12-0-54 north, 126-4-55 east; No. 6 is at 13-50-36 north, 125-21-45 east; No. 7 is at 19-48-3 north, 123-51-57 east. But to make sure that our west coast is devastated by the effects of a seeming natural disaster erupting in the Philippines, a series of 7 conventional but large hydrogen bombs have been planted off our west coast by the Soviet Union. These can be set off in conjunction with those in the Philippines, and at the right moment to produce tidal waves which would sweep in from the Pacific with devastating effect along our west coast. Bomb No. 1 west of Seattle is at 48-0-0 north, 127-50-0 west; No. 2 west of Eugene, Oregon is at 43-29-18 north, 127-55-5 west; No. 3 west of San Francisco is at 37-8-45 north, 125-42-30 west; No. 4 west of Monterey is at 36-31-0 north, 125-26-30 west; No. 5, also west of Monterey, is at 36-26-30 north, 124-56-0 west; No. 6 west of Los Angeles is at 33-25-15 north, 122-23-50 west; and No. 7 southwest of San Diego is at 31-45-35 north, 120-36-0 west. In my Audioletter No. 20 for January 1977, I referred to a warning document issued in December 1975 by Mr. Tony Hodges of Hawaii. In that document Mr. Hodges presented evidence of the feasibility of underwater missiles. He also warned of the dangers of bombs on or in the seabed designed to generate earthquakes or tidal waves. Unfortunately, it turns out that Mr. Hodges warnings were all valid.

The dictatorship and war plans are being speeded up now; the world will be stunned by what will look like a massive, natural disaster in the Philippines that also spreads around the Ring of Fire to decimate our west coast. And when it happens, Jimmy Carter will have the excuse David Rockefeller wants him to have to declare a National Emergency and in effect suspend the United States Constitution. The President's dictatorial emergency powers spelled out in Executive Orders 11490 and 11921 will be activated, and the complete bureaucracy of dictatorship set in motion under circumstances designed to stifle all dissent; and the elaborate prescriptions for complete governmental control of all of our water resources spelled out in Executive Order 11921 will be activated under conditions which enable this to be sold to the people as necessary for our best interest. Soon thereafter, with the Rockefeller dictatorship in place, Nuclear War One itself is planned to come. Dams and reservoirs all over America are to be destroyed at one blow by the Soviet Union; and the quislings from the Trilateral Commission, who now control the Federal government, will use their control over what little remains of our water supplies to make their domination of us total. The saddest thing about all of this is that only when it happens will people believe. By total exposure there is a chance to prevent the West Coast disaster; but without exposure, there is no chance whatsoever.

My friends, it's only by the grace and power of our Lord Jesus Christ that I've received the information I revealed over the recent past; and it's my solemn duty to pass on this information to you—it's not meant for me alone. And in the same way, it's not meant for you alone—it needs to be known by every one. And so, my friends, this completes two years of my monthly Audioletters. I want to thank you for all your words of encouragement, your support, and especially your prayers. Again, thank you; and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #25

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is August 26, 1977, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 25.

It is now almost three months since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 24 on May 28, 1977; and as I warned you then, the plans for Dictatorship and War are now being speeded up. At that time, about three months ago, the Soviet program of planting nuclear weapons in the inland lakes and rivers of the United States had turned into an all-out, silent attack on our country. Soviet agents in vans, campers, and trucks were fanning out unhampered throughout our land turning our peaceful countryside into an unsuspected battlefield strewn with nuclear mines capable of destroying our water resources; and at no level of government—local, state, or federal—was anything being done to stop it. Local and state authorities when alerted to Soviet activities in their areas of jurisdiction were shrugging it off in absolute disbelief. They were saying in effect, "Relax. Just trust the Federal Government to take care of everything."

With this attitude as an excuse, they were and still are shirking their sworn duty to at least investigate conclusively some very specific leads they have been given. But as for the Federal Government, actions such as the waiving of the Jones Act by Treasury Secretary Blumenthal to allow Soviet vessels to ply our inland waterways speak for themselves. And just as in the case of the Fort Knox Gold Scandal three years ago, there's no effort whatever now to disprove my charges about the Soviet nuclear sabotage of America—but only to discredit them.

I think this parallel makes the current status of the Gold Scandal worthy of comment. After three years of tireless effort by my friend Edward Durell, the Fort Knox Gold Scandal now shows renewed signs of breaking into the open in spite of all the lies and tricks the Rockefeller-controlled Federal Government can do. The international financial community is now more concerned about the massive evidence of fraud surrounding America's alleged monetary gold supply than ever before, because the sheer weight of evidence now makes it impossible for anyone except the Rockefeller-dominated major media to ignore it. The Carter Administration has become so concerned about this that on July 28, 1977, just last month, Treasury Secretary Blumenthal took the extreme step of going to the Fort Knox Bullion Depository himself. Can you imagine? He had himself photographed by TIME magazine sitting on the same stack of warmed-over junk gold bars viewed at Fort Knox in Compartment No. 33 in September 1974. Then he went to Louisville to deliver his speech prepared before he left Washington, saying how impressed he was with the wonderful hoard of gold he had just inspected at Fort Knox. Former Treasury Secretary William Simon knew better than to go there personally, even at the height of the public controversy over Fort Knox three years ago. Instead he sent poor Mrs. Mary Brooks, the unsuspecting head of the Bureau of the Mint, to tell the world, "It's all here." But now extreme measures are called for in the name of "cover-up" because, while the public sleeps, the powerful financial community shows signs of awakening with a roar. If you would like a very hard-hitting, fully-documented summary of the mountain of evidence that now has the Treasury Department so worried, send a business-sized, self-addressed envelope bearing first-class United States postage for two (2) ounces (24 cents—at the time of this recording) to:

Mr. Edward Durell, P.O. Box 586, Berryville, Virginia Zip 22611.

Only time will tell whether in fact the Fort Knox Gold Scandal will at last be revealed truthfully to the American people at large; but even if it breaks today, it's already more than three years overdue. The United States Congress chose to ignore my charges and my evidence when I testified about it in April 1974; and, my friends, we don't have three years to wait for the truth to come out about the Soviet nuclear mining of the United States. We are on borrowed time!

That is why, after recording AUDIO LETTER No. 24 three months ago, I suspended the AUDIO LETTER to concentrate all my efforts on a campaign to prove conclusively the presence of Soviet nuclear weapons inside our country for all to see. I knew that it was a long shot because none of the citizen groups with whom I was in contact had access to sophisticated equipment of any kind, or much money to spend on it or even much free time. But I believed it was still worth the try, because as I warned in AUDIO LETTER No. 24, only total exposure of the Soviet threat to our nation has any chance of turning aside NUCLEAR WAS ONE. It is therefore painful to have to tell you, my friends, that my efforts and those with whom I have been working around the United States have so far been unsuccessful in achieving their primary goal—the physical recovery and public display in a safe manner of a Soviet nuclear bomb from a lake or river. There has been some partial success in spreading the alarm more widely than before, but the total exposure, which is so vital to our survival as a nation, still has not been accomplished.

Since recording AUDIO LETTER No. 24 in May, I have responded to requests from concerned citizens throughout America asking for the locations of any Soviet nuclear weapons in their areas. In many cases upon receiving this information, people have tried to get local or state authorities to investigate, usually without even a token of success, although in two or three cases there does seem to be some genuine interest at the local level. Other people have gone to their local newspapers, but these in general have not bothered even to contact me to find out more about the story. Finally, scattered attempts have been made by groups of citizens in a number of states to send scuba divers down to search the bottom of reservoirs in an attempt to actually find a bomb. These private citizens, who by their own choice have donned diving equipment and spent their own time and their own money to at least try, deserve all of our thanks. I am not aware of a single case in which these private searches were able to be done with the aid of anything more than a hand-carried underwater light, or in rare cases a commercial underwater metal detector, and some divers did not even have this much; and yet they have tried to do that which the Federal Government, spending over 80-billion dollars yearly on so-called Defense, refuses to do. In one case which has been confirmed, two bombs were found and retrieved, not from a reservoir or river but from a salt water cove in a resort area on the east coast; but these two bombs, instead of being made public, were turned over to the Federal Government by the individuals involved for their own reasons. Otherwise I cannot confirm that any other bombs have been found or retrieved up to now.

Two months ago what may turn out to have been our one best opportunity to catch some Soviet agents red-handed occurred in Texas. An individual was driving along a country road after midnight when he noticed an old-style green-and-white delivery van with Florida license plates parked for the night on the roadside. It looked like a hippie van, yet was parked with legal

precision complete with regulation high-visibility warning markers set out along the edge of the road. Something just didn't look right about it, and on a hunch my friend found a pay phone and called to ask whether by chance any Soviet vans were scheduled to be on that road at that time. One of my Intelligence contacts quickly checked the available information and reported back that two Soviet trucks should be parked for the night on that road—one of them in the exact location where my friend had seen the green-and-white van. Furthermore, the vans were still enroute to their targets and still had nuclear weapons aboard. My friend then spent the next four hours trying in vain to bring about some decisive action concerning the van. He called a friend who was acquainted with my warnings about the bombs, getting him out of bed at 1:30 A.M., and together they tried in vain to get the appropriate law enforcement authorities in that area to go with them and investigate the van. Finally, they drove back out to the van at around 3:30 A.M., stopped behind it with their car lights illuminating the van, and took two photographs—one a close-up of the Florida license plate. The next day they went to the local police headquarters and asked them for identification information about the van, giving them the Florida license number. The police used their teletype to check with Florida, and the State of Florida wired back that the license number given them was non-existent and the van unidentifiable.

And so it has gone, my friends. Those who are ready and willing to take action on behalf of our beloved country are hampered by limited resources; and those who do have the necessary resources and authority to take decisive action refuse to do so for an endless variety of reasons. Many simply do not believe, others cannot bring themselves to part with a portion of their own personal wealth, time, and effort but cast about forever looking for someone else to do it. And virtually everyone in a position of authority to act, whether great or small, is not strengthened by that authority but imprisoned by it, afraid to run any risk of a wrong decision that might hurt their career. Meanwhile time has slipped by waiting for no man, and now the Soviet Union has completed their project of planting nuclear mines in the inland lakes and rivers of the United States. Furthermore, since they still have not been impeded in any way, they are now placing additional bombs at other kinds of targets which will rank lower in priority than our water resources .

My basic task of warning you in advance about the plans of our Hidden Rulers for events to come was completed with AUDIO LETTER No. 24, three months ago. Now, unfortunately, a new phase is beginning for the AUDIO LETTER, because increasingly it will be my duty now to chronicle the step by step fulfillment of these terrible plans as they are carried out. Time and again these plans have been delayed, tripped up, and brought to nothing by our merciful God who wanted us to use our heads to see the truth around us for what it is, and turn to Him; but, my friends, you know as well as I do that America as a nation has not done this; so now by our own choice we are going to suffer and the suffering will get worse and worse until and unless we as a people open our eyes. I realize, my friends, that these are hard words. Many will hear them and reject them outright, but this I know: events themselves are going to put man in his place in no uncertain terms.

My three special topics for today are: Topic #1—THE PANAMA CANAL TRAP FOR WAR

Topic #2—THE SECOND BATTLE OF BRITAIN

Topic #3—MAN-MADE EARTHQUAKES TO SET THE STAGE FOR NUCLEAR WAR ONE

Topic #1—Four and a half years ago in early 1973 I wrote my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR." I ended the book with the following words of warning about the Panama Canal:

"The United States presence in the Panama Canal Zone area is a geostrategic necessity to insure shipping through the canal. It will also become a geostrategic necessity for the new Asian aristocracy, just as Europe became for the New Imperialism.

If the new Asian forces are not understood, but are met with ignorance and arrogance, then the world will indeed be headed not for a 'generation of peace' of which President Nixon has so proudly boasted, but for World War III."

(End of quotation from my book.)

By June 1974 I had received hard evidence to the effect that the Republic of Guyana, Venezuela's neighbor, had become the new Cuba with nuclear medium-range missiles targeted on the Panama Canal as well as targets in the extreme southern United States. I reported this on radio talk shows all around the United States at that time, together with additional Intelligence to the effect that the Panama Canal was being planned for use in triggering nuclear war on America three to four years later on—that is mid 1977 to mid 1978. In October 1974 I recorded my first talking tape entitled "HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THIRD WORLD WAR"; and in that tape recorded nearly three years ago, I repeated my warnings about the plans of powerful men to deliberately involve America in nuclear war and the plans to use the Panama Canal to help trigger this war.

Three and four years ago my warnings about nuclear war to come fell on deaf ears. So-called "detente" with the Soviet Union was in full bloom, after all; and besides, wasn't the United States the most powerful nation on earth? And as for the Panama Canal, most Americans then were not even thinking about the Canal, much less excited about it. But now it is three years later. In the short space of a year what was called detente has been shredded and dumped in the trash basket.

Frightening new estimates of fantastic military spending by the Soviet Union have been disclosed by the CIA, after playing down such spending for 10 years. Well known Rockefeller associates have formed a group called "The Committee for the Present Danger" to publicize the Soviet drive for military dominance, and the Panama Canal has become an issue that grows hotter by the day.

The so-called "surprise attack" on Pearl Harbor nearly 36 years ago disarmed all political opposition to America's entry into the war in Europe. In one stroke the Pearl Harbor attack created a wave of emotion to go to war. In the same way, the Real Rulers of America are now setting up the American people for another such wave of emotion—this time over the Panama Canal.

The conspirators do not really want any new treaties with Panama despite the lip service in favor of them by their hired hands, such as Carter and Kissinger. Their actual goal is the exact opposite. They want people like Senator Strom Thurmond and Jesse Helms, not to mention Ronald Reagan, to fight the pair of new treaties and defeat them; thus giving Panama an excuse to go

to Moscow for help. This is why conservative leaders and organizations are suddenly getting all the publicity they can handle on the Panama Canal issue—courtesy of none other than the Rockefeller-dominated major media.

Since the defeat of the two new Panama Canal treaties will be blamed on the conservatives, they will also be blamed for the consequent events in the mindless march toward nuclear war. The self-styled conservative leaders in Congress, therefore, are falling into a dangerous trap and taking millions of good and patriotic people with them. They look the other way about such things as the Fort Knox Gold Scandal, and they run the other way rather than investigate the Soviet nuclear sabotage of our own country; but the emotional appeal and great publicity surrounding the Panama Canal issue have made it too juicy to resist, and they have swallowed it hook, line, and sinker. Whether the Canal is used as the final trigger for NUCLEAR WAR ONE itself, or whether it plays only a supporting role in bringing on the war is still at the option of the conspirators; but either way the conservatives lose. Even so this is not to say that Jimmy Carter will win on this issue.

Four days after Carter's inauguration as President seven months ago, in AUDIO LETTER No. 20, I alerted you that a Carter Watergate was already in the works; and now, my friends, it has already begun. In the three months since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 24, the controversy over the personal finances of Bert Lance, Carter's Budget Director and former banker, has turned into daily headline news. Because of the closeness of the ties between Carter and Lance, Carter's image has already begun to suffer, but this is only the beginning. Not only is Carter's moral leadership image being tarnished by his defense of questionable practices by Lance, but more and more questions are being raised in the major media about Carter's judgment; and once a leader's judgment ceases to be trusted, he is finished.

Confusion in NATO over what to expect from the Carter Administration is causing nervousness, and recently this boiled over into bitter German protests when a secret White House contingency plan came to light. The plan calls for one-third of West Germany to be conceded in the event of a Soviet invasion. Can you imagine? As of now, only one major factor is preventing a complete rift between the United States and the European members of NATO. That single factor is the hope that Carter will proceed with production of the neutron bomb, a tactical weapon. Without this bomb the increasingly outnumbered and out-gunned NATO forces will face hopeless odds in any Warsaw Pact attack; but the American neutron bomb has one weakness that may prevent it from doing NATO any good. It would not be deployed for operational use until at least a year and a half from now, in 1979. Meanwhile the Soviet Union already has operational neutron bombs.

A neutron bomb is a special version of a hydrogen bomb, so designed that a shower of deadly neutron radiation covers an area much larger than the area affected by the explosive blast. In nuclear weapons terminology, it is a "clean bomb" because it produces very little fallout or residual radioactivity in comparison to conventional nuclear weapons. If exploded above a city, for example, it can destroy all life over a wide area and yet do relatively little blast damage to buildings and structures in the area.

Fourteen months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 13 I revealed that the Soviet Union already has such so-called clean hydrogen bombs; and three months ago when I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 24, I reported

that seven (7) trucks bearing nuclear weapons and driven by Soviet agents had been stopped by Canadian authorities on May 18 just before they attempted to cross over the border from Canada into northern Idaho. As of the recording date, I had not yet received any further word about any action taken, but now I can tell you more.

The seven trucks were driven by a total of 14 Canadian and American Communists, two per truck. They were apprehended by a special joint unit of the Royal Canadian Mounted Police and Army Security, and placed under arrest after the nature of their cargo was confirmed. They were all charged with acts of treason and incarcerated initially at Wainwright, Alberta, but they have since been transferred to one or more other unspecified locations.

Each truck was loaded with two fourteen-foot-long crates three feet square. Each crate contained a small single-warhead missile, and it was learned by Canadian Intelligence that the trucks were all bound for Lake Superior. All 14 of these missiles were the same type as the 53 previously planted in the Great Lakes, and the warheads were all neutron bombs. Thus the Soviet Union can still satisfy all of the considerations which originally led them to agree to the super-secret "Nuclear Safe Zone" across the upper portion of the United States which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 12 for May 1976.

Since neutron bombs kill people but preserve most real estate, the great industrial and agricultural heartland of America will still be usable for Soviet benefit after NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and the explosion of clean neutron bombs over our northern cities will not produce significant fallout to drift around the globe and land on Russia.

After the 14 neutron-bomb missiles were disarmed, they were divided up—several were sent to Great Britain and several to the United States while several remained in Canada. Within two weeks the neutron bombs suddenly became big news in the United States with Jimmy Carter in the spotlight as the man to decide whether such a thing would be produced or not. By early July, news reports said that the United States had already tested a neutron bomb at the underground test site in Nevada; but what was not mentioned is that this was a test of a Soviet warhead like those now lurking in the Great Lakes—not an American device! Canadian officials are completely baffled at this point by the conduct of the United States Government in keeping all of these things under wraps, but the Canadians are abiding by their obligations under mutual defense treaties not to break the story publicly on a unilateral basis because certain key officials apparently still do not believe that top American officials are deliberately betraying us all into nuclear disaster. And now, my friends, the nuclear mining of strategic points in Canada too has begun, beginning around Montreal—while continued secrecy allows the Soviet Union to build their war trap all around us!

Topic #2—On September 30, 1938, the famous agreement at Munich was reached which was then hailed by British Prime Minister Neville Chamberlain as assuring "Peace in our time." For years the British and French had watched Hitler's Germany as it re-armed to the teeth, and the only response had been a policy of appeasement. As a result, at Munich they were negotiating from a position of weakness. And to further appease Hitler, they agreed to the partition of a country that was not even party to the negotiations—Czechoslovakia. But as we all know, the Munich agreement did not bring "peace in our time." Less than two years after Munich, on July 10, 1940, the skies over Britain suddenly

filled with Hitler's bombers, and the Battle of Britain had begun.

The lightning warfare that had paralyzed and crushed other victims was now to smash Britain as well—or so it seemed. Through the summer and autumn of 1940 the world watched for the invasion of Britain to be launched across the English Channel, but the invasion never came. The world watched with growing astonishment as the Spitfires of the Royal Air Force ruined attack after attack by Goering's air armada; for the British, in spite of public pronouncements about "Peace in our time", had learned the lesson of Munich well, and during the short breathing space that followed, the British Government had secretly launched a crash program to prepare for the fight for survival that was looming ahead.

We in America who had not yet experienced the horrors of war on our own soil have had our survival instinct lulled to sleep by propaganda and distractions of all kinds—but not so Great Britain. Some months ago I revealed that of all the nations of the Free World, only Great Britain is engaging in a sustained, determined effort to stave off military attack by the Soviet Union to the best of her ability. And, my friends, this is still true, because the lessons of the past are not lost on the British. On June 18, 1940, Sir Winston Churchill spoke in the House of Commons to declare that the British were determined to fight rather than surrender, whatever the odds; and that same spirit is quietly being rekindled in Britain today. An internal struggle within the British Government is going on between those with this view and others, some of them very powerful who are Rockefeller agents, striving to induce Britain to lie down and die. But so far there are still enough patriots in the British Government to carry the day.

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 15 one year ago in August 1976, I revealed the navigational coordinates of 64 newly planted Soviet underwater-launch nuclear missiles in the territorial waters of the countries around the world. At that time, Soviet missiles were planted more densely around the British Isles than anywhere else on earth, because the Soviet Union views England like a giant aircraft carrier that must be sunk to help free the Soviet Navy to explode into the Atlantic unhampered when war comes. The importance of this to the Soviet Union was illustrated the following month, in late September 1976. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 16 for that month, the Soviet Union carried out a massive, extremely rapid deployment of submarines into attack positions along our east, west, and Gulf coasts late in September involving at least 142 submarines. This took place only a matter of days after I had met for well over an hour at the Pentagon with General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, to discuss the growing Soviet underwater missile crisis with him. The purpose of the massive deployment of Soviet naval power along our shores was a power play to prevent the United States Navy from being allowed to capture a Soviet missile-laying mini-sub that was then trapped in Chesapeake Bay. And as I reported the following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 17, it worked.

The very idea that the Soviet Union is capable of such rapid, massive, and well-coordinated deployments of its huge submarine fleet seems unbelievable to many, and many therefore ignored what I revealed last September about this incident. But just four weeks ago, on July 29, 1977, NATO Intelligence sources in Brussels revealed a recent naval exercise by the Soviet Union that once again exhibited this same capability to fill the oceans with overwhelming numbers of submarines. According to the news

dispatch by the British Reuters News Service, quote:

"Eighty-nine Soviet submarines swarmed into the Atlantic Ocean recently in a massive show of naval strength that stretched NATO surveillance forces to their limits, NATO Intelligence sources revealed yesterday. More Soviet submarines were deployed between North America and Europe than ever before, said one senior Intelligence officer."

And, my friends, this statement is true since the 142 submarines that threatened the United States last September were not all in the Atlantic—many were in the Gulf of Mexico and the Pacific.

Quoting the Reuters dispatch again:

"American and British submarines, which usually trail Soviet submarines, were unable to cope with the rush and NATO had to resort to other less effective means to keep track of many of the boats."

Another quote:

"The submarines were accompanied by a large force of surface warships including the Aircraft Carrier Kiev which bears vertical take-off and landing Jet Fighters. Long-range war planes, including some of the 400 supersonic Backfire Bombers that the Russians now operate, flew over the maneuvering fleet from their bases in the Murmansk area, the sources said."

Another quote:

"NATO views the deployment of the Soviet submarine fleet to sea as one of its most important warning signs that a conflict is about to begin."

That, my friends, is why the stationing of so many Soviet submarines in attack positions around the United States was so ominous last September.

Notice who was responsible for letting the public know about this latest huge Soviet naval exercise. Not anyone in the United States Government, but NATO authorities in Europe. To quote one more line from the Reuters dispatch, which was omitted in the New York Times, quote:

"The United States Defense Department had no comment on the story."

America's Real Rulers do not want us to know even about Soviet practice exercises as huge as the one in April 1977, much less the occurrence of actual confrontations like the one I told you about last September. Great Britain is acutely aware of all these things. She is aware of the increasing handicaps that plague the European part of the NATO alliance, and she's finding out that the United States can no longer be depended upon for help in time of crisis. She is determined not to be sunk by the Soviet Union.

First, the British have been taking an objective new look at the cold, hard facts of their circumstances. A month ago on July 26, 1977, the Defense Committee of Parliament made public a report that spelled out in clear terms a number of important measures needing revision and upgrading in Britain's defense posture, and the report begins by discarding the comforting but unrealistic idea that heightened tensions would always provide an advance warning before any Soviet attack. Instead they're coming

to grips with the need to be prepared for a more likely event of a surprise attack. The Parliament Committee also warned of the threat of Soviet mine-laying in the English Channel and the North Atlantic.

Meanwhile, spurred on by the Soviet underwater missile crisis for a full year now, the British have developed a new mine-detecting sonar equipment to enable underwater missiles and mines to be detected. For several months now the Royal Navy has been using this highly secret new equipment built by the Plessey Company of England to keep British waters cleared of Soviet missiles and bombs without depending any longer on the Intelligence tips I was relaying to them earlier. I would not mention this now except that a recent incident occurred that has already compromised this vital new equipment to Soviet agents.

Recently the West German Navy, eager to begin using this same equipment to start clearing their own coastal waters of Soviet missiles, was to receive a shipment of the highly classified equipment from the Plessey Company, but a Soviet agent in Britain achieved a remarkable feat of espionage by bringing about a misrouting of this equipment on an East German ship. By the time this vital equipment finally arrived, overdue and damaged, it had been thoroughly studied and photographed by Soviet technical experts. As a result, the Soviet Union may now be able to find ways to defeat even the sophisticated new British sonar, just as they are already able to defeat American seabed sonar defenses in order to plant missiles in our waters.

Despite this setback, the British are working quietly but quickly to prepare to go it alone if need be when war comes, even though they realize that they would not be able to hold out indefinitely under those conditions. Unlike the United States, Britain is beefing up its surveillance of spies, defense installations are being hardened and camouflaged, and the RAF is in the process of going underground just as the Soviet Union has already done.

The British Government now knows, privately, that Great Britain has already been deserted by the Outlaw Government of the United States, and in late last month on July 27, 1977, the British deserted the floundering United States dollar. For a generation and more the pound sterling and the dollar have been linked together in an unofficial way, but no more. The Bank of England announced it would no longer be required to support the dollar in an international monetary float, and since that time British reserves of gold and currency have risen substantially, strengthening the pound, while the American dollar has been sinking in international currency markets. It may be that the British "ship of state" will in the end be unable to stay afloat through the storm of all-out nuclear war, but so far the British still prefer to take that risk rather than scuttling their own ship—as the United States Government under Rockefeller control is now doing!

Topic #3—My friends, the nuclear mining of America's inland lakes and rivers has now been completed without incident by Soviet agents, thanks to their protection from harassment by Rockefeller agents in the Federal Government. At least three different models of small hydrogen bombs have been utilized so far by Soviet agents in this project.

One is a design which has been in use for the greater part of a decade, as bombs are planted during construction of certain major dams and water projects.

A second type, oval in shape, 17 inches in diameter and 34 inches in length, has been deployed very widely throughout the United States in recent months. It weighs several hundred pounds, and handling is therefore a problem, with the result that great care is always taken to plant these when the area nearby is deserted. Usually, but not always, this is done at night. These bombs are the pride and joy of Soviet boss Brezhnev because they incorporate technology that originated many years ago in his own rocket programs. In areas where the bottom is soft and silt covered, these bombs are able to embed themselves in the silt. Under ideal test conditions in the Soviet Union it was found that they were able to penetrate to depths as great as 80 feet; and there are a few locations in America, primarily in the lower Mississippi River, where depths that rival this may actually have been achieved operationally. Best of all, from the Soviet point of view, is their reliability. This system, by which the bomb practically blasts its way into the silt by using a powerful jet of steam at temperatures above a thousand degrees Fahrenheit, uses no moving parts. The jet is started before the bomb is dropped in the water and after that it runs until the fuel is exhausted. The fuel itself, according to my own Intelligence sources, is the oldest, most reliable, and cheapest of all rocket fuels—highly concentrated hydrogen peroxide, which leaves no residue to be detected afterward.

A third type of bomb that is now being used is a small general purpose "H" bomb whose primary feature is compactness. A few of these have been planted in water, but these are mostly being used now in the newest phase of the Soviet nuclear mining program. First, Washington, D.C. was mined. All of the bridges into Washington are now mined, as are important buildings throughout the city. These include the Capitol building, Senate and House office buildings, the Executive Office building, the Treasury building, seven bombs at Fort Myer, Virginia, the Pentagon, and even the White House itself plus many other points—a total of 57 in the Nation's capital! In addition, bombs have now been planted in at least 33 of the 50 State capitals. Congress, the President, and State Governments have so far refused to act to protect the people, but now they themselves are being targeted; and symbols of our national pride and heritage in Washington are to be destroyed without a trace!

Time does not permit a complete listing of even the nuclear devices in the Mississippi River, which now contains 158 bombs. As of my latest report on July 7, 1977, every lock in the Mississippi River except No. 2 at Hastings, Minnesota now has a Soviet "H" bomb in or near it. In addition, almost every bridge crossing the Mississippi along its entire length has a bomb planted at one end or the other as of that date; and it was anticipated that by now there would no longer be any exceptions. Thus the Soviet Union plans to be able to cut the country in half, east to west, to anything but air transportation which, under war conditions, will be totally controlled by the Federal Government under the provisions of Executive Orders 11490 and 11921. In addition, the Mississippi is to be ruined as a navigable waterway connecting North and South along the Mississippi Valley. And the master strategy that has been applied to the Mississippi has also been applied to the other great waterways of America, such as the Illinois Waterway and the Ohio River! Now, it remains only to trigger a declaration of "NATIONAL EMERGENCY"—and after that NUCLEAR WAR ONE!

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 24 in May 1977, just three months ago, I warned that, quote: "A horrendous new capability is now in place as an alternate means for creating our 'National Emergency'; and, my friends, there are ominous signs that this

capability is going to be used very soon." I then gave the locations of seven (7) fission fusion fission bombs planted strategically around the undersea trenches east and west of the Philippines where they can trigger massive earthquakes and tidal waves. These seven gigaton bombs are the most powerful weapons ever devised by man, and the disaster that erupts there is planned to work its way around the "Ring of Fire" to produce an artificial West Coast disaster centering on California that will be used to justify a Declaration of National Emergency.

In the three months since I last spoke to you, the Soviet Union has also deployed ten (10) additional super bombs to assist in this diabolical attack on the earth's crust itself. These are less powerful than the seven Doomsday Bombs planted around the Philippines but are extremely powerful nonetheless. These 10 new bombs are known as "cobalt bombs", so called because they are surrounded by a jacket of cobalt.

When the cobalt bomb was first proposed many years ago, it was universally feared and condemned because while it is less powerful than the gigaton bombs in the Philippines, it would be even dirtier in radioactive fallout if exploded in the air. Pound for pound the radioactive cobalt-60 produced by the explosion emits 25 times as much deadly gamma radiation as radium. It decays relatively fast with a half life of just over five years, but if detonated in the air some scientists believe the fallout could destroy all human life before the radiation decayed to harmless levels. But as with the uranium jacket gigaton bomb, the Soviet Union has found a way to use the cobalt bomb, deep under the ocean for geophysical warfare; and having solved the dangerous problems involved in manufacturing and handling such weapons, the Soviet Union now has available an intermediate-yield super bomb that is far cheaper than bombs made from uranium.

Of the 10 Soviet cobalt bombs deployed so far, nine are positioned along boundaries between the slowly shifting crustal plates that cover the surface of the earth, while the tenth is targeted on a prime American naval target—Pearl Harbor. Their purpose is to produce a pattern of increasing earthquake and tidal wave activity as a build-up to the big disaster that awaits the Philippines.

The 10 Soviet cobalt bombs were planted in the following locations:

No. 1: 11 degrees, 8 minutes, 28 seconds South; 118-32-23 East. This is roughly 900 miles southeast of Djakarta, Indonesia, near the east end of the Java Trench, south of the islands of Sumba and Sumbawa.

No. 2: 11-0-0 South, 115-8-34 East. This is around 370 miles west of Location No. 1, deep in the Java Trench, south of the islands of Bali and Sumbawa, Indonesia.

No. 3: 3-13-33 South, 149-0-0 East. This is in the area of the Bismarck Archipelago northeast of New Guinea.

No. 4: 10-57-9 South, 159-30-30 East. This is in a confluence of trenches southwest of Guadalcanal, 1500 miles northeast of Australia.

No. 5: 15-52-23 South, 172-34-50 West. This is in the north end of the Tonga Trench, little more than 100 miles southwest of Pago Pago, Samoa.

No. 6: 12-22-51 North, 145-40-0 East. This is in the Marianas Trench roughly 75 miles southeast of Guam.

No. 7: 37-35-10 North, 144-5-20 East in the Japan Trench, around 350 miles northeast of Tokyo.

No. 8: 23-25-46 North, 108-23-14 West. This is in the deep central portion of the Gulf of California between the southern tip of Baja California and the mainland of Mexico, and lies along the same crustal fault line that is known as the San Andreas Fault where it passes through California.

No. 9: 20-0-0 North, 73-52-16 West. This is in a short but deep trench off the east end of Cuba, and about 80 miles due east of the United States Naval Base at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba. And finally

No. 10: 20-54-28 North, 158-48-17 West. This is about 70 miles west-southwest of Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, the headquarters of the United States Pacific Fleet.

The Soviet plan is to artificially create a seemingly natural but disturbing pattern of increasingly widespread earthquakes, primarily around the Pacific rim. The stars of this preliminary show are to be these cobalt bombs in the oceans, but several artificial earthquakes on land are also to be triggered. One or more of these preliminary earthquakes on land may involve the collapse of a dam in the United States, adding fuel to the fire of publicity over supposedly unsafe Federal dams. Finally this build-up is to culminate in the supposed natural disaster in the Philippines, produced in reality by the triggering in proper sequence of the seven Soviet gigaton bombs. If all goes according to plan, unprecedented earthquakes and awesome tidal waves will cause death and destruction in the Philippines on a scale unparalleled in modern history, and not incidentally our major naval installations and the huge Clark Air Base in the Philippines will be destroyed. When it's all over, our naval and other military installations in Hawaii will also be gone, as will our Guantanamo Naval Base and important naval installations on America's west coast and in Japan. America will have been dealt a staggering military blow, but the only declaration by the United States Government will not be one of war and retaliation but only of "National Emergency"—in effect, suspending the remaining tatters of the United States Constitution! It all sounds too horrible to be true, my friends, but in actual fact it has already begun!

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 24 three months ago there was no unusual earthquake activity going on; but based on Intelligence made available only to me, I warned that this was about to change, and soon; and just one week ago, on August 19, 1977, an undersea earthquake suddenly erupted just south of the Indonesian islands of Sumba and Sumbawa. The reports of damage and casualties are still filtering in today, one week later; but this quake was rated by some seismic readings as possibly the strongest quake ever recorded, registering 8.9 on the Richter scale. A tidal wave 100 feet high swept in from the south and washed away everyone and everything in its path. This quake, my friends, was produced by the detonation of the Soviet cobalt bomb No. 1 in the list I just gave you. And, my friends, the Soviet Union is wasting no time now. Only this morning just before I began the recording of this tape, Soviet cobalt bomb No. 2 was detonated. The result this time was a less spectacular quake, according to first reports, centered south of Sumbawa and Bali but with a reading of only 6.3 on the Richter scale.

My friends, during the past 4-1/2 years I've tried in every way I know to warn America in time for these and other man-made disasters to be prevented; but I am only a messenger, relaying vital information to you for which I myself cannot take the credit. What happens from here on is up to you, your neighbor, our country as a whole. But until and unless my voice is silenced by Federal Emergency regulations, war, or other factors beyond my control, I pledge to you to do all in my power to keep you fully informed about what is happening and where it is leading. Meanwhile I can only urge you to continue to place yourself in the hands of God.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God protect each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #26

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is 9/30/77, and this is my monthly Audioletter No. 26. Last month, after a silence of 3 months, I once again began recording the Audioletter, and I told you that we are now entering a new phase—namely, the fulfillment of the plans for economic collapse, dictatorship, and war about which I have been trying to warn you. I had hoped and prayed that this phase would never happen, that people would listen, would grasp the truth, and would do their duty under our representative form of government to stop our slide into catastrophe. But, my friends, it was not to be.

Many millions of Americans are now familiar with many of the warnings I have relayed to you from my own intelligence sources, yet all but a few are blind to the reality of the danger. Their attitude is just to wait and see, not realizing that when they do see all these things it will be too late to do anything. The entire United States Congress too, is well aware of all my charges; but as usual they merely pass the buck, telling their worried constituents not to worry, that the Carter administration says there is nothing to it, and, of course, they wouldn't lie! Meanwhile the only real response that the government is now making to my charges is to try to silence the Audioletter. At stake is not only the survival of the Audioletter but also the United States.

I receive many letters these days from listeners who are concerned about bitter criticism leveled at me by various organizations and commentators. Invariably my detractors proclaim themselves to be reliable, honest, and a source you can trust. Then they proceed to distort what they tell their readers, ridiculing my warnings, and urging their readers to ignore me.

One of the favorite tricks in this campaign against me is to refer to that old stand by, that famous letter to me from General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, dated 9/1/1976. In this letter General Brown stated in the present tense that he could find no evidence of the Soviet underwater missiles along our shores, whose locations I had given in Audioletters Nos. 14 and 15. And this statement was technically correct, my friends, since the United States Navy had just completed the process of removing all the Soviet missiles of our coastal waters the day before. Then the letter went on to open the door for direct contact between General Brown and myself.

And as a result on 9/16/76, just over 2 weeks after the letter of September 1st, I met with General Brown in his Pentagon office for over an hour, without interruptions, and without any time limitation. The purpose of that meeting was specifically to enable me to personally give General Brown 48 new locations of Soviet missiles in our waters so that General Brown could order them removed. Thus General Brown wrote to me on 9/1/76, and we met in his office over two weeks later on 9/16/76. But those who seek to mislead and betray their readers, usually refer only to the letter. My meeting with General Brown usually is not mentioned, even though the fact we met is a matter of public record. Those who do acknowledge that there was a meeting, neglect to mention when it took place, and thereby leave the reader with a false impression that the letter of September 1st ended the matter. This is only one example of the techniques that are being used to fool and confuse the unwary. I mention it only to alert you not to just swallow what you are told but examine it with care.

My friends, I cannot and I will not be distracted from the real battle by all of these falsehoods. Simply put, there are some who would have more faith in the Soviet Union than in what I am telling you. Only a miracle can save us now, my friends, and we as a nation do not deserve such a miracle. Nearly a year and a half ago in Audioletter No. 11 for April 1976, I revealed the growing fears of the Trustees of the major Rockefeller-controlled Foundations, that the program for world domination had jumped the tracks—and, my friends, they could not have been more right.

This month, September 1977, has witnessed the beginning of the end for the Rockefellers—and also for America as we know it. On the night of the Harvest Moon, September 27, 1977, the most decisive battle of the Twentieth Century ended in a stunning upset. This battle, known only to a handful of individuals in the world, was the culmination of the great secret race in super weapons, which I revealed to you in Audioletter No. 20 for January 1977. And, my friends, the Soviet Union won! Now the Soviet Union is mobilizing for war, confident at last that the Rockefeller cartel can no longer stand in their way as they conquer the entire world. The four Rockefeller brothers, having set the world on its present disastrous course, can no longer do anything about what is about to happen.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—WAR IN SPACE—THE BATTLE OF THE HARVEST MOON, September 27, 1977; Topic #2—THE LAST DAYS OF THE ROCKEFELLER EMPIRE, and Topic #3—THE AMERICAN DREAM, IN MEMORIAM.

Topic #1—Twenty years ago on October 4, 1957, the Space Age began with the launching of Sputnik One by the Soviet Union. Barely 3-1/2 years later on May 25, 1961, President John F. Kennedy made the thrilling announcement that the United States was launching a program to put a man on the moon and return him safely to earth before the end of the decade. Many Americans could hardly believe their ears, the Sputnik shock still had not worn off, and the Soviet space program was far ahead of our own. And for several years after the Kennedy announcement, the idea that we would beat the Russians to the moon looked more and more ridiculous. Americans ground their teeth in frustration as we watched the Soviet Union pile up one record after another in space—the first man in space, the first woman in space, the first space walk, records for time in orbit, and so on and on. But the Kennedy announcement in 1961 had signaled much more than a mere race with the Russians—it was a crash program, ten times bigger than the Manhattan Project to develop the atom bomb in World War II, and gradually it began to pay off. The one-man

space shots of Project Mercury gave way to the two-man missions of Project Gemini, and then at last Project Apollo with its three-man crews was under way. Finally it was the Americans who were setting records in space, while the Russians, seemingly, began to lose heart. They busied themselves with orbital missions, but it became increasingly apparent that they would not soon put a man on the moon after all. On July 20, 1969, the impossible dream came true. After 8 years, and $24,000,000,000, the Apollo XI landing craft made a perfect landing on the moon in the Sea of Tranquillity. Neil Armstrong, as he placed man's first footprint on the moon, said those famous words: "That's one small step for a man, one giant leap for mankind." The Soviet Union sulked at being beaten, Red China called the whole thing a hoax, but the rest of the world cheered. It was a great moment to be an American. For three years America and the world watched as the exploits of the Apollo teams on the moon expanded at an astonishing pace; but then, strangely, the Apollo program was cut short—to save money, we were told. After six successful moon landings, the last three, potentially the most productive and spectacular of all, were unceremoniously lopped off—supposedly to save about one percent of the amount it had cost to reach the moon in the first place. After all, everyone knew we had gone to the moon merely as an exhilarating adventure and to pick up a few moon rocks for scientists to tinker around with. So having done that, we were told that it would be better to save those last few space dollars and put them into Welfare checks or bullets for Vietnam. And so, on December 19, 1972, the Apollo 17 crew lifted off from the Sea of Serenity, and America said farewell to the moon. That is what we were told, my friends, but that is not what happened!

In Audioletter No. 19 for December 1976, I told you why America was not the first nation to orbit a space satellite—and now I can reveal the sequel, the true purpose and outcome of the race to the moon. America's space program has always been portrayed as a purely peaceful, scientific adventure without any ulterior motives. But, my friends, the Rockefellers never spend $24,000,000,000, even if its our own money, on anything that does not promise to reward them very handsomely. And these rewards, in the case of the space program, extend far beyond the great profits reaped by their aerospace companies. It is, or was until three days ago, the very keystone of their secret military machine for the conquest of the world. From the beginning, America's race to put a man on the moon had a military objective. The impetus for this race lay in a seemingly unrelated development—the Laser, which was invented in 1960. The Laser was a predictable outgrowth of an earlier American invention called the Maser invented in 1953; and therefore by the time the laser made its debut, it had been anticipated and military uses for it were under intensive study. The first hint of the things to come was a proposal by laser scientists in 1961, the same year that President Kennedy launched the crash program to put a man on the moon. The scientists suggested that lasers, which produced narrow intense beams of light, could be used for interplanetary communication by flashing coded signals back and forth. What the scientists did not mention was that the destructive, effective, extremely powerful lasers could also be projected for tremendous distances through space for space warfare. Worse yet, theoretical studies had already revealed that an even more awesome energy-beam weapon was possible. This advanced weapon on the horizon was the terrifying Particle Beam, which was first brought to public attention early this year by General George Keegan, the freshly retired Chief of the U.S. Air Force Intelligence. In a Particle Beam weapon, huge quantities of atoms are torn to shreds and fired out of the barrel at the target in a continuous concentrated beam that travels at almost

the speed of light. The process requires fantastic amounts of energy, and the effect on any target is also fantastic. The very atoms that make up the target are torn to pieces by the beam, and the target explodes. With Lasers and the Particle Beams looming as potential new military weapons, the moon suddenly became an inviting military objective. The moon is a quarter million miles from earth, and it takes several days for a space ship to travel that distance; but it only takes about 1-1/2 seconds for radio signals or light to travel that far. Therefore a moon base, equipped with high-power lasers or particle-beam weapons would be able to strike any visible spot on earth within two seconds of pulling the trigger; and during any period of just over 24 hours, all or most of the populated areas of the earth can be seen from the moon. The only exceptions are Arctic and Antarctic regions during parts of each month. And since a Particle Beam will bore right through clouds or storms to hit a target, a moon base would be an all-weather weapon. Finally, once it was in operation, this moon base would be virtually immune to attack by any less sophisticated weapon. For example, if a rocket were fired at the moon from earth with a nuclear warhead to destroy the moon base, it would be useless. Long before it reached the moon, it could be destroyed by a blast of the Particle Beam. When the Rockefellers learned of the great potential of the moon for military purposes, the decision was made to launch a crash program to seize the moon for this purpose.

The Soviet Space Program had been given a head start over that of America by means of the Sputnik One disgrace, and under the hard-driving direction of an engineer named Leonid Brezhnev, the Soviet lead space was widening every day. But the Russian approach to exploiting space for military purposes was heavily oriented toward earth orbital applications. Space stations would come first; after that, moon missions could be launched sometime in the future. For all the propaganda we heard about it at the time, a man mission to the moon was not a top Soviet priority in 1961. But the Sputnik shock still had not worn off, and the Soviet Space Program was undeniably ahead of our own in 1961. So it was not very hard for the Rockefellers to convince America, through their controlled major media, that Russia was on its way to the moon and would beat us there if we did not do something. Having built up this public concern, the Rockefeller public relations machine then provided us with the solution to our worries. The space frontier was sold to us as exemplifying the bold spirit of President John F. Kennedy's so-called "New Frontier." The dormant and suppressed American spirit of free adventure was tapped and channeled into enthusiastic, unquestioning support for the space program, even though we were never given anything more than the vaguest justifications for it. Thus a military project dwarfing the Manhattan Project was set in motion, in full public view; and drawing upon the very best talent and facilities that money could buy, only the purpose of the moon project was kept a secret; and that secret was made secure by bathing the whole space program in the glare of continuous publicity. It was a clever plan, and it worked.

By the time of the Apollo 17 mission in December 1972, the space program had become routine to many Americans, and they were looking around for other circuses to amuse themselves; and plenty of these were provided, including especially the budding Watergate scandal. Now space travel could safely be removed from public view and carried on secretly with far less danger of attracting attention than a decade before. Meanwhile, the Rockefellers, by way of their controlled CIA, had been working feverishly in total secrecy on beam weapons at locations outside the United States—such as a CIA-supported Laser experiment installation in Spain. By 1972, these experiments still were a

long way from a suitable weapon for deployment on the moon. But ominous developments in the Soviet Union led to the decision to cut off the Apollo program prematurely so that the construction of the secret moon base could be rushed ahead.

Starting in 1967, the Soviet Union launched a massive program of its own to develop a Particle Beam weapon. This is what the Russians had started concentrating on instead of an immediate moon flight in the late 60's. Then in 1971, the Soviet Civil Defense Program was stepped up; and on October 4, 1972, Soviet Civil Defense was elevated to a status equal to the Armed Services. Less than three months later, in December, Apollo 17 became the last American moon flight to be acknowledged publicly. The October 4, 1972, upgrading of Soviet civil defense initiated a high-priority Five-Year Plan, which ends four days from now—the day after the expiration of the SALT ONE accord. Under this plan, much of the Soviet Union has literally gone underground, complete with underground silos filled with American grain and thousands of underground shelters able to withstand near-misses of ICBM's. Strategic command centers and communications networks are underground now in the Soviet Union. And this was done not only to render any missile attack survivable, but also to provide some protection against any possible Particle Beam attack from the moon.

Early in 1973, soon after the supposed end of the American moon program, we began hearing about a place called Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean. Supposedly we were merely building a communications installation there, yet the drastic step was taken of relocating all the 20,000 or so natives of this little island to other areas. More recently, we have heard about Diego Garcia as the site of a new American naval base; but, my friends, you still haven't been told the whole story. Diego Garcia, my friends, is the new space-port from which secret missions to the moon have been launched during the building of the moon base. Unlike Cape Canaveral, where Saturn rocket launches are impossible to hide, Diego Garcia is remote and isolated, and even the natives are no longer there to watch what goes on. What's more, Diego Garcia is practically the perfect moon-port, located as it is almost on the earth's equator, and a space vehicle launched eastward into orbit from Diego Garcia passes over a nearly unbroken expanse of water for more than half the circumference of the earth. The only means of monitoring the early flight of a space craft launched from Diego Garcia, therefore, is from ships. If you have been unclear as to why Jimmy Carter has been talking so much about demilitarizing the Indian Ocean—which means 'Russia, stay out'—now you know.

I was first alerted to the existence of a secret base on the moon last November 197 6—but it has been one of the best kept of all Rockefeller secrets, and it was only a few weeks ago that I was able to confirm its existence and learn the complete story; and since that time, events have moved with lightning speed. Throughout this year an unseen but deadly race has been underway to see who would get an operational Particle Beam first: the Rockefellers, at their secret moon base; or the Soviet Union, in earth orbit. By late spring, a Salyut manned space craft was launched that carried out preliminary tests of beam-weapon techniques, using lasers in order to simulate the Particle Beam. Then, on July 17, 1977, a large Soviet satellite, called Cosmos 929, was launched. It has mystified satellite watchers because of its strange behavior in radio signals. Most observers have concluded that it is un-manned, having detected no verbal communications; but, it is manned! It is a twin satellite, consisting of a command module and a separate Particle Beam weapon module. All communications between the crew of Cosmos 92 9

and the Soviet tracking network are carried on by modulated laser beams, which cannot be detected at all by anyone who is not directly in the beam path. A Particle Beam is a fearsome weapon; and nearly two months of painstaking preparation and check-out of all systems preceded the first test. Meanwhile, American astronauts on the moon worked at frenzied pace to try to bring their Particle Beam installation to operational status. By early September, this month, the first Particle Beam unit on the moon was being assembled. A few days later the crew of Cosmos 929 tested their Particle Beam unit by firing it into open space to verify that it would function properly. It did! The next step was to test the beam against a target—the target chosen was an American spy satellite as it passed over the Petrozavodsk Observatory, which lies east of southern Finland. Cosmos 929 was nearly 1000 miles to the south near the Black Sea, the local time was roughly 4:00 AM Tuesday, September 20, 1977, and the moon was on the other side of the earth. The crew of the moon base were therefore unable to observe the test. Aided by computers, Cosmos 929 aimed and fired. The American satellite erupted into an immense fireball of light, which the Soviet news agency Tass described as a huge star which flashed out of a dark sky, sending shafts of light impulses to earth. It took several minutes to dwindle to a red glow and burn out as it drifted eastward, and it was witnessed as far away as Helsinki, Finland, over 300 miles to the west. News reports that day in this country dismissed it all as a curious jellyfish-like UFO. Four days later, September 24, the Soviet Navy, without explanation, expelled all British and French fishing trawlers, among others, from the Barents Sea. At the same time, Soviet trawlers in European community waters were called home. By the 2 6th of September, American personnel at the secret Rockefeller moon base nestled in Copernicus Crater were almost ready. Their Particle Beam was almost operational—but they were too late. By late that day, the Soviet Union began bombarding the moon base with a Neutron Particle Beam. Through the night, and all day on September 27 the moon base was bombarded without mercy with neutron radiation just like that produced by a neutron bomb; and by that evening as Americans looked up at the peaceful full moon overhead known as the Harvest Moon, the last few Americans on the moon were dying of neutron radiation. America had lost the Battle of the Harvest Moon.

My friends, in 1945 America became the first nation on earth to possess an awesome new super-weapon, the Atomic Bomb; but now, it is the Soviet Union that has won the race for a new super-weapon—the Particle Beam, that could be as decisive today as the Atomic Bomb was in 1945. The Rockefellers have disarmed America while betting everything on the moon base, thinking they would win the race; but they made a terrible miscalculation—and now we will all suffer the consequences.

Topic #2—The Rockefeller/Soviet alliance, which has just come apart, was indispensable to the Rockefeller plot to control the world. This was the master stroke that enabled the Rockefellers to follow up their destruction of the British Empire with an active menace that would prevent a revival of Britain and Europe as powerful, independent rivals. The final phase of all this was to be Nuclear War One primarily on American soil. It was to kill tens of millions of Americans; yet, it was to be a programmed limited nuclear war, with the outcome decided ahead of time. In the aftermath, the Rockefellers were to have been enthroned as America's absolute Dictators. Europe and Britain were to be absorbed into the Soviet orbit of control, exhausted from energy and other shortages but virtually unscathed by war itself. That was the deal between the Rockefeller brothers and their Kremlin partners; but true to their tradition, the Rockefellers had a double-cross up their sleeve as the culmination of Nuclear War

To prepare for the War, their plan was to denude America of most of its military power while building up an awesome military machine in the Soviet Union. When the programmed war came, it would be so destructive and America's plight so helpless that despair would seize us all. But then, in our darkest hour with half of America's population gone, the secret Moon Base, bristling with Particle Beam weapons, would come to the rescue. In the space of at most a few days, Soviet military forces worldwide were to be destroyed, and vast numbers of Russians were to die in the Soviet Union. The Soviet Union was not supposed to know about this final act—instead, they were to be caught by surprise and utterly destroyed; and after the fact, the plan was not to tell the world about the Moon Base. Instead, the Rockefellers would emerge as the only organized power on earth, and they would attribute it all to "Divine Intervention." By this stratagem they expected to deceive the world, or most of us, to accept their rule as divinely ordained. In this way, they were to become the final heirs of the secret commitment for a One World Government that was set in motion so long ago.

In 1924 John D. Rockefeller, Jr., the father of the four Rockefeller brothers, talked of his dream of the day when "No one will speak of my country, but we will speak of our world." And on January 31, 1945, before the Protestant Council of New York City, he delivered an address entitled "The Christian Church—What of Its Future?" In this speech he expounded on one of his favorite topics: The need, as he saw it, for the Christian Church as we know it to be replaced with something more suitable as the direct outcome of the very conflicts which the Rockefeller empire itself had secretly spawned. Praising the self-sacrifice and loyalty of millions whose lives were being ruined and snuffed out, Rockefeller painted it all as a wonderful crusade. With growing enthusiasm, he said: "What an opportunity, what a privilege, what a duty." The nightmare of world war, in other words, was merely a necessary prelude to the future status he envisioned for the Christian church—"It would be the Church of the Living God." It would be devoid of all "Ordinance, ritual, creed, all non-essential." Stripped of its camouflage, John D. Rockefeller, Jr., was reviving the ancient concept of the God-King—the ruler who is to be worshipped, and who can do no wrong.

But, unknown to the Rockefellers until very recently, the Soviet Union found out years ago about the final Rockefeller plan to destroy them in a double-cross by means of the Moon Base. That is why the Soviet Union initiated a crash program to develop a Particle Beam of their own ten years ago, and this is why they launched such massive efforts in Civil Defense five years ago. This is why the Soviet Union tried to surprise the Rockefellers over a year ago with their own double-cross during the summer of 1976, beginning with the underwater nuclear missile crisis.

As of a year ago, the Particle Beam weapons race was very close, but it appeared that the Rockefeller Moon Base would win. As an interim blackmail system, the Rockefellers had arranged for the CIA's super-missiles to be planted in the oceans by the Glomar Explorer and other means, as I first revealed in Audioletter No. 20 for January 1977. But as of now, only two of these CIA super-missiles—Atlantic Missiles Nos. 1 and 2—are still operational, all the rest having been ruined by gradual corrosion and leakage. By now the Rockefellers expected to have their secret Moon Base operational, rendering the CIA blackmail missiles obsolete. The Kremlin was afraid that the Rockefellers were going to succeed, dooming the Soviet Union to certain

disaster at the hands of the Moon Base. So they decided to strike first in a surprise attack. The result was the Soviet underwater missile crisis of 1976 described in Audioletters 14 through 16—July through September 1976. As I described in Audioletter 16, a Soviet missile laying mini-sub became trapped in Chesapeake Bay in late September 1976. It was our perfect opportunity to blow the whistle and stop the entire Soviet program of preparation for surprise attack by making it public. But as I detailed in Audioletter 17 for October 1976, this chance was thrown away by President Gerald Ford and Secretary of State Henry Kissinger in their Red Friday agreement arranged at the White House with Andrei Gromyko one year ago tomorrow. At the time such an abject capitulation seemed as incomprehensible as it was treasonous. Later, I learned of the CIA supermissiles which the Rockefellers continued to hold as a club over the head of the Kremlin, and it made more sense. But only now, in the light of the Moon Base and the Rockefeller plan for final double-cross, does it all make sense. The Rockefeller brothers thought that they could assure themselves of surviving the war and expected to have the Moon Base ready to destroy the Soviet Union at will. Under these conditions, the more horrendous the warfare up to the point of their falsified divine intervention, the better—from their point of view. Their objective was total control, including the spiritual deception of millions. The Soviets, meanwhile, were preparing for a doomsday approach, that is, to be in a position to threaten such total destruction world-wide with all their underwater nuclear weapons that the Rockefellers would be afraid to trigger all-out war by using the Moon Base.

But three days ago, on the night of the Harvest Moon, September 27, 1977, it all unraveled—America lost the Battle of the Harvest Moon. That same day, Tuesday, September 27, 1977, Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko delivered an ultimatum to the United States in a speech at the United Nations. A few days earlier, the Soviet Navy had expelled all British and French fishing trawlers from the Barents Sea; and as Gromyko spoke, the Barents Sea was filling up with scores of Soviet

submarines—massing in preparation for deployment into the North Atlantic, and at the same time the huge Pacific Soviet Submarine Fleet was massing in the Sea of Okhotsk off the southwest tip of the Kamchatka Peninsula for deployment into the North Pacific. And on top of that, six more Particle Beam satellites were being readied for launch from four Soviet Cosmodromes—one each at Baikonur and Tyura-Tam, and two each at Kapustin Yar and Plesetsk. Two Particle Beam satellites—Cosmos 929 and another-were already in orbit by that time.

At the United Nations, Gromyko denounced the fact that relations between the United States and the Soviet Union have entered a period of "stagnation, if not a downright slump." Then he demanded that a new agreement limiting nuclear arms be arrived at "without any delay." Most people did not recognize this as a

veiled ultimatum, but the Rockefellers did. Gromyko added thatSoviet Union is now ready to halt underground nuclear tests

for a while, even if others do not. The reason for this statement, which surprised everyone, is that the Particle Beam has now superseded all nuclear weapons as a front line of Soviet armaments. That evening, an unusual nighttime meeting with Jimmy Carter was hastily arranged at the White House at Gromyko's demand. The Rockefeller major media went out of their way to portray this unexpected meeting as a good thing, despite Gromyko's very harsh words at the United Nations, with breathless assurance that a breakthrough had apparently been achieved toward a new SALT accord. But that, my friends, was not Gromyko's message at all. Boiled down to its essentials, here's what Gromyko told Carter and Vance on the night of the Harvest

Moon—September 27, 1977: We, the Soviet Union, have today destroyed the American Moon Base, which your sponsors had planned to use against us in the coming war. Now it is we who are in command; and now, we will oblige you with the war you have been working so hard to bring about. The war will now be fought on our terms, not yours; but you are to give no hint publicly about any of this. If you do, I am instructed to inform you that you and your sponsors will forfeit your status in America as well as your lives.

The following day, the massed Soviet Submarine Fleets began moving out of the Barents Sea and the Sea of Okhotsk, bound respectively for the east and west coasts of the United States. Other Soviet submarines were also ordered to converge on our country from positions world-wide. Yesterday, Jimmy Carter held a news conference in which he did his best to obey Gromyko's instructions. His eyes puffy from sedation and lack of sleep, he talked about anything and everything. But he exposed the glowing CBS and other reports a few days earlier about an alleged SALT breakthrough for what they were, with the words, "An immediate agreement is not in prospect." And in his opening remarks inserted in the context of energy matters, he blurted out: "The reason that we have to act is not because we have crises or emergencies at this present time, but because they are imminent." And today, after a hurried meeting with Secretary of State Vance in New York, Gromyko left for Moscow.

Meanwhile, our space program has suddenly fallen on hard times. Yesterday for the second time in two weeks, after many years of faultless launchings, an American rocket abruptly exploded during launch. This one, an Atlas Centaur, happened to be carrying an important communications satellite to be stationed over the Indian Ocean.

Meanwhile the Soviet Union launched Salyut 6; and there are signs that now at long last, the Soviet Union will decide to go to the moon. After all, there is no longer anyone there to stop them; and the possibility exists that very soon there will once again be a Particle Beam Weapons Base on the moon to menace the earth—this time controlled by the Soviet Union. And just today, the Houston NASA Space Center activities having to do with the American Moon Base were shut down. Meanwhile the Soviet Union has planted a total of at least 60 cobalt bombs in the sea world-wide for the generation of earthquakes by their cumulative effect. Several of these have been set off already—3 near Indonesia, 4 in the Aleutian trench, 3 in mid-Pacific west of California, and 1 in the Mediterranean some distance from Crete. Others are still planted along the Aleutians, in the east-west fracture zones in the Pacific and Atlantic, in the Indian Ocean including several west of Australia, around the Bismarck Archipelago northeast of Australia, near Panama, in the Mediterranean and the Caribbean, and in the Gulf of California.

On Monday the SALT I agreement expires; the next day, October 4, is the twentieth anniversary of Sputnik I, and it also marks the completion of the Five-Year Plan for Civil Defense in the Soviet Union. By October 7, if not before, the United States will be surrounded along our east, west, and gulf coasts by almost the entire Soviet Submarine Fleet. As I say these words, 29 Soviet submarines have already arrived on location in the Gulf of Mexico. These, like the Atlantic and Pacific fleets which are converging on America in a pincers movement, are armed with missiles carrying neutron warheads. There are well over 100 submarines in each of the two Soviet fleets that are heading here from Russia. This is by far the most massive and rapid deployment ever of the Soviet submarine fleet; and I mentioned

last month, NATO considers the deployment to sea of the Soviet fleet as one of its most important signals that a conflict is about to begin. Therefore, my friends, I would not be doing my duty if I did not warn you that a national emergency and possibly war itself may be virtually upon us.

Topic #3—One-hundred eighty-one years ago this month on September 17, 1796, George Washington delivered his farewell address as the first President of the United States of America. Washington truly loved the infant nation he had led to freedom and believed we would become at no distant period a great nation. As that great nation, his dream was that we would give to mankind the magnanimous and too novel example of a people always guided by an exalted justice and benevolence. Washington left us with various warnings about pitfalls to be avoided, such as overgrown military establishments and foreign entanglements; but he went beyond that, to urge upon us a positive pattern of behavior that would be unique in the world. Concerning foreign affairs, he said: "Observe good faith and justice toward all nations, cultivate peace and harmony with all." Regarding the public trust of government officials, he said: "I hold the maxim no less applicable to public than to private affairs that honesty is always the best policy"; and as the bedrock of his other convictions, Washington stated firmly: "Of all the dispositions and habits which lead to political prosperity, religion and morality are indispensable supports."

Washington's ideals to guide America were a revolutionary departure from Machiavelli's rules of power which had been spelled out two centuries earlier. According to Machiavelli, the first rule of any ruler who wants to keep and increase his power must be to ignore all moral laws. False promises, continual deception and lies, betrayal of allies who have served their purpose, and regular deliberate wars are the keys to success—according to Machiavelli. For a century Washington's words generally prevailed over those of Machiavelli in America, and our nation grew and prospered as none before it. The main exception to this was the Civil War which was provoked partly by foreign intrigue into our affairs; and great European powers, primarily Britain and France, were preparing to intervene in our hour of strife and destroy our nation altogether.

In this black hour, President Abraham Lincoln turned to what was then the greatest Christian nation on earth—Russia. Czar Alexander II greatly admired the United States and dreamed of transforming Russia's government into something similar in a step-by-step process. After receiving the sealed message from Lincoln, he said to the American envoy, "Before we open this paper or know its contents we grant any request it may contain. On the day on which your President was inaugurated we, Alexander II of Russia, signed the protocol which liberated 23,000,000 serfs. Abraham Lincoln, President of the United States, has freed 4,000,000 slaves; therefore, whatever he asks of Russia, Russia will grant, for Alexander II will not be a factor in the enslavement of any man." In the autumn of 1863, at a critical tide in the war, the Russian Navy suddenly swarmed into the harbors of New York and San Francisco and anchored there. It was a dramatic, powerful signal to all other powers on earth to stay out of the Civil War—and stay out they did, with the result that despite our horrible self-inflicted wounds, the United States did survive as a free and independent nation. From that time onward, Russia was targeted for total destruction by the secret international powers who had been thwarted in their design to bring the United States under their control. They decided that Christian Russia must die, to be taken over by a godless new governing system called Communism, established by the

international financiers themselves.

Meanwhile financial allies were promoted within the United States also, for conquest from within. Thus little known ties began developing after the Civil War between the Rockefellers, the Morgans, and the Carnegies of America and the Rothschilds and other power brokers of Europe and the world. Shortly before the Spanish-American War, a quiet revolution took place in American foreign policy—thanks to these secret international connections. Washington's dream for America was exchanged for the nightmare of Machiavellian politics. Soon the Spanish-American War was on, brought about by the deliberate sacrificing of American lives in the explosion of the Battleship Maine. The fact that Spain had been genuinely trying to avoid a war, made no difference. To the cries of "Remember the Maine", America went off to war. After the smoke cleared, it eventually came out that the war had been unnecessary, but the American people were puffed up with being suddenly a world power. The former Spanish possessions of Cuba, Puerto Rico, Guam, and the Philippines now lay in American hands. Most Americans were too pleased with America's new prestige to worry about the immorality of what we had done. And with that, 80 years ago the American people began to sell their soul.

By 1904 there was a further shiver of things to come. As part of the secret agreements preventing America's new Pacific possessions from being disturbed by the Japanese, we sat by while Russia—the country that had saved the United States from extinction four decades earlier—suffered a Pearl Harbor-type attack. The Russian fleet, peacefully at anchor at Port Arthur, was attacked without warning by crack Japanese warships and torn to shreds with heavy casualties; but the reaction among most Americans was not horror but a thrill at this great exploit. Thirty-seven years later, a very similar attack on Pearl Harbor would be denounced by all Americans as a day of infamy—but in 1904 it was happening to someone else, so it was all right.

Step by step for 80 years the American people have gradually blinded themselves to the truth by failing to cherish or look for it. And so we have been led to slaughter time and again, never learning from our experiences. In 1898 it was "Remember the Maine"; in 1917 it was "Remember the Lusitania and the Sussex"; in 1941 it was "Remember Pearl Harbor"; and now, in 1977, we are being set up for the cry of "Remember the Panama Canal"—only this time it will be different. In 1917 and afterward we repaid our brothers in Russia by sitting idly by as a Christian nation died. During our Civil War, Russia had saved the United States from destruction by forbidding outside intervention; but in the Bolshevik Revolution of 1917 it was outside intervention by America's financiers that sealed Russia's fate—and we, as a people, sat idly by, acquiescing, as the United States government began propping up the Satanic new government that caused the deaths of over 20,000,000 Christians. Over a period of 60 years a Frankenstein monster has been built before our very eyes—the Soviet Union; and we, as a people, have done nothing whatsoever to stop it. Now, the Soviet Frankenstein is turning on us, and we as a people are left without excuse for whatever may happen.

Those who have refused to use their time and resources for the common good of our nation, need not expect to use their money now to escape to some safe haven. There is none! Even Switzerland, with the best civil defense installations on earth outside the Soviet Union, has already been sabotaged by Soviet nuclear mines in Lakes Geneva, Zurich, Zug, Lucerne, Wallenstadt, Zarndek, Bretz, Thun, Neuchatel, Locarno, and Lugano. My friends, there will be salvation for some in this hour of trial, but it will be on an individual basis. Those who love the truth and who love

our Lord Jesus the Christ and who have tried, will not be deserted; but for those who do survive I can only repeat what I said two and one-half years ago in conclusion to my tape on the Fort Knox gold scandal. It is only those of us who have tried our best who will have peace in our hearts and answers for our enslaved children.

Until next month, if God wills it, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God protect each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #27

Hello my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is Oct. 29, 1977, and this is my Audioletter No. 27. Fifteen years ago yesterday, on Oct. 28, 1962, America breathed a sigh of relief as the Cuban Missile Crisis ended in surrender by the Soviet Union. On that Sunday morning, Radio Moscow announced that all work on the offensive missile sites in Cuba was being stopped and that they would be dismantled under United Nations observation—so ended 6 days in which the world teetered visibly on the brink of nuclear war, thanks to a dangerous Soviet gamble.

The public crisis had begun with a televised speech by President John F. Kennedy on Monday evening, Oct. 22, 1962. Tens of millions of Americans huddled before our TV sets, having been told in news reports all day long that something big was afoot. When President Kennedy told us the Soviet offensive nuclear missiles were almost operational in Cuba, some Americans were taken by surprise, others were not. Those who were not surprised had heard the warnings of the late Senator Kenneth Keating of New York. For more than a year he had been warning about the Cuban missiles in speeches nationwide. But many other Americans were shocked to hear about the missiles from President Kennedy that evening. Some had never heard Senator Keating's earlier warnings, thanks to a major media blackout on the story. Others had heard but they had believed the denials issued by the Government. But what was stunning to everyone, the Kremlin included, was the response by President Kennedy to the Cuban missile threat. Avoiding use of the word "blockade" which in international law is an act of war, President Kennedy announced a so-called quarantine on offensive shipments to Cuba. It would be enforced by what was then the most powerful navy on earth, the United States Navy. Furthermore, the President demanded that the missile sites be dismantled and Soviet forces withdrawn, otherwise stronger action by America was threatened. Then came the bone-chilling words: "Any missile launched from Cuba against any nation shall be regarded as an attack by the Soviet Union on the United States, requiring full retaliation." Refusing to pretend that Cuba was the culprit, Jack Kennedy confronted the Soviet Union head on and in terms of the one thing that commands Soviet respect—military power.

The great historian Carroll Quigley, who passed away early this year, summarized the circumstances in the Cuba crisis very accurately in his monumental work, "TRAGEDY AND HOPE" published by MacMillan in 1966:

"The dominant fact in the whole situation was the overwhelming character of America's power, and the fact that this was known both to the White House and to the Kremlin but was largely unknown and certainly unpublicized to the world. Around the Soviet Union's border were 144 Polaris, 103 Atlas, 159 Thor,

Jupiter, and Titan missiles, 1600 long-range bombers many of them constantly in the air with nuclear bombs. When the President's speech began the public crisis, 5 divisions of the U.S. Army strategic reserve totaling about 100,000 men, plus 100,000 Air Force and an equal number of Naval and Marine personnel had been mobilized or alerted. The First Armored Division had been flown from Texas to the east coast, 90 naval vessels including 8 carriers were on patrol to blockade. A Cuban invasion command had been assembled in Florida and 2700 relatives of military personnel had been evacuated from Guantanamo. Under such pressure Khrushchev wilted—it might almost be said that he panicked—on Friday, October 26."

And two days later Radio Moscow made the announcement giving in to Kennedy's demands. Many critics have pointed out that after the crisis itself, America seemingly left needless loopholes for Soviet cheating in the Cuban withdrawal process. But regardless of that, it was the overwhelming power of America that prevented nuclear war in the Cuban crisis itself.

Two years before the Cuban crisis, Gen. Nathan Twining retiring as the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, warned America: "Forces that cannot win will not deter." These few words of common sense distilled the lessons of several thousand years of military history; and in October 1962 the Cuban missile crisis proved that they are as true in a nuclear age as they ever were before. One would think that such a close brush with nuclear disaster would have alerted the American people to the realities of survival in an enduring way—but it did not. The four to one military advantage over Russia enjoyed by America in 1962 was not brought home to the American public as the critical factor that had prevented a war. It was only later in context with words like "over-kill", "measured response", and "mutual assured destruction" that our previous military preponderance was brought to public attention; and the purpose then was to whittle it down to nothing.

But if the American people failed to learn the lesson of Cuba, the Kremlin did not. The lesson was learned best of all by Leonid Brezhnev, Khrushchev's rocket boss. Khrushchev's failure in the Cuban missile affair was the beginning of the end for him in the Kremlin, yet ironically when Khrushchev was deposed in 1964, it was none other than Brezhnev who had actually masterminded the Cuban missile plan who took Khrushchev's place—and Brezhnev was determined that the Soviet Union would not again suffer such a debacle.

Today the similarities to the Cuban missile crisis are striking. Now, as then, we are again targeted with short-range nuclear missiles, except this time they are lurking within our own territorial waters, ready for underwater launch upon satellite command. Now, as then, the Soviet missile crisis has been underway for more than a year, and the American people are kept ignorant of the facts by the major media blackout of the story and by government denials. And now, as then, the dominant fact is the lopsided military advantage possessed by one side— but this time it isn't just missiles that threaten us, it also includes underwater nuclear mines strewn throughout our own country by Soviet agents. And again, the public is being deceived jointly by the Federal government and the controlled major media—not merely by silence and denial but by propaganda that helps to cover up hostilities that are already being directed against us by our enemy. Worst of all, the lopsided military imbalance now favors not America but the Soviet Union.

During the past month unusually rapid, puzzling, and dramatic

changes have begun sweeping across the international arena. In the Middle East, three years of Soviet eclipse have suddenly been ended by joint Soviet/American declaration; and, in the process, a drastic change in American policy toward Israel has surfaced. Red China, after a decade of bitter struggling with the Soviet Union, suddenly began making concrete moves toward reconciliation with Russia early this month. India's Prime Minister Desai, who used to denounce Communism, traveled to Moscow early this month and now says India's friendship with the Soviet Union is "cemented." News and commentaries suddenly assure us that a thaw is taking place between the Soviet Union and the United States, and on all sides disarmament has all of a sudden become the overriding topic in world affairs.

These developments and many more have all come about since America's disastrous defeat by the Soviet Union last month, on Sept. 27, 1977, in the still-secret Battle of the Harvest Moon. This was history's first full-fledged space battle; and as I told you in detail last month in Audioletter No. 26, the Soviet Union emerged as the only possessor of the decisive new Particle Beam weapon. It is this Soviet military breakthrough that is at the root of what now looks like an avalanche of diplomatic breakthroughs involving the Soviet Union all over the world.

As it stands now, my friends, the cold, hard truth is this: The Soviet Union could attack the United States now and win; but American retaliation could, nevertheless, inflict considerable suffering on Russia as the price of such a Soviet conquest—and they prefer to destroy us without suffering themselves, and that is the direction in which events are now moving.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—THE SOVIET PARTICLE BEAM AND KILLER SATELLITES; Topic #2—THE SPREADING ATOMIC PLAGUE CALLED LEGIONNAIRE'S DISEASE; and Topic #3—THE ENFORCED DISARMING OF AMERICA NOW UNDERWAY.

Topic #1—Last month in Audioletter No. 26 recorded Sept. 30, 1977, I revealed the fact that the Soviet Union has become the first nation on earth to possess a new super-weapon, the Particle Beam, which is now deployed in earth orbit. The first Particle Beam Killer Satellite was launched three months ago on July 17, 1977, and is known as Cosmos 929.

As I told you last month, the first operational test against the target was carried out over the Soviet Union during the early hours of Sept. 20, 1977. An American spy satellite was blasted into a huge fireball that was seen hundreds of miles away. Exactly two weeks later, on October 4, 1977, Secretary of Defense Harold Brown held a news conference in which he shocked everyone with the unexpected words: "There is a fact of Soviet anti-satellite, not only development but operational capability." And he added: "That's something of concern to me because we rely a good deal on our space systems for support of our military capability, which capability, I think, contributes to deterring, preventing war." After Dr. Brown spoke, other Defense officials singled out our low-flying spy satellites as being vulnerable to the Soviet killer satellites, which are also known as Cosmos Interceptors. However, neither Dr. Brown nor the other spokesmen would explain for the record and for the American people how the new Cosmos Interceptors work. After all, the Russians know! Reporters were therefore left with nothing to suggest in their articles except the 10-year-old Soviet anti-satellite concept of an explosive interceptor, which would maneuver close to the target and then blow up. The fact that Particle Beam weapons are involved was not mentioned.

In January of this year the outgoing Pentagon Research Director, Dr. Malcolm Currie, gave Congress a warning. He said that it would be catastrophic to let the Soviets gain an advantage over us in the area of anti-satellite weapons. And no wonder. Satellites today play a central role in the military communications, intelligence gathering, and early warning of any possible attack. Unusual troop movements or other preparations for attack can be detected, and even the firing of ICBMs would be detected only by satellites. Without our spy satellites, we would be blinded to any surprise attack by strategic missiles; and yet the SALT II Accord, which Jimmy Carter is now working so feverishly to promote, includes no provision at all against anti-satellite weapons.

As I reported in Audioletter No. 26 at the end of last month, four days before Dr. Brown's stunning announcement about operational Soviet Killer Satellites, there were two Cosmos 929 class Interceptors in orbit. Now there are 8! And now the Soviet Union is picking off American strategic satellites one by one, creating a tremendous fireball each time like the one I described to you last month.

On October 13, earlier this month, CBS Radio News reported that a number of people have expressed concern about seeing several fireballs over Russia. They inquired what they could be, thinking they might be UFOs from outer space. But a Russian scientist who was interviewed about it said the fireballs were nothing to worry about, that they were merely Cosmos phenomena. And of course he was telling the truth in a tongue-in-cheek way, since the recent astonishing fireball phenomena are caused by Cosmos Particle Beam Interceptors. But the granddaddy of all the fireballs so far was the one which erupted over the United States on the evening of October 18, just eleven days ago. Hundreds of witnesses reported seeing the huge fireball all the way from the McDonald Observatory in extreme southwest Texas to points over several hundred miles away in Arkansas and Missouri, as well as in the neighboring states of Oklahoma and Louisiana. It was so bright that people hundreds of miles apart thought it had hit near them, and so huge that astronomers said it should have reached the ground; but according to radar and military observers, it exploded in mid air with a bright flash. Whether any pieces survived and hit the ground is not known at this time. Thus the 85-ton American space station known as SKYLAB, launched four years ago, came to a spectacular end at the hands of a Soviet Cosmos Interceptor. The Soviet Union wanted to insure that Skylab could not be pressed into service by America in any way to begin to undo the fast-growing Soviet domination of space. And just in case any chunks of the big space station should reach the ground without burning up, thereby possibly doing damage or injury, Skylab was destroyed over the United States instead of over the Soviet Union. Nine days later, the Government released an elaborate cover story about Skylab by way of the CBS Evening News for October 27, 1977. While we were shown official NASA film of Skylab in orbit, we were told that for some strange reason Skylab's orbit is decaying sooner than expected and that it might well come down prematurely. Now, my friends, if someone should find pieces of it lying around, the groundwork has already been laid for a future public explanation.

The Soviet use of their new Particle Beam weapon to blow our strategic satellites out of the sky is bad enough, but this is only the beginning. As I explained in detail last month, America's secret Moon Base in Copernicus Crater was put out of action on Sept. 27, 1977. It was bombarded with a Soviet Neutron Particle Beam which killed all of our astronauts there. The Copernicus base was itself equipped with Particle Beam weaponry,

but was defeated by the Soviet Union just before achieving operational status. Thus America lost the Battle of the Harvest Moon; and though this space battle is still a secret, its consequences are cropping up all around us.

In Topics #2 and #3, I will try to bring you up to date on what has happened militarily and diplomatically as the result of our losing the Battle of the Harvest Moon. Right now, though, let me tell you the latest developments in space itself. On Sept. 29, 1977, just two days after the Battle of the Harvest Moon and the Gromyko ultimatum to Jimmy Carter, the Soviet Union launched Salyut Space Station No. 6. This was the same day that an Atlas Centaur Rocket became the second American rocket in two weeks to explode during launch. The orbiting of Salyut 6, my friends, signaled the beginning of the first Soviet-manned mission to the moon; and the next day as the Soviet moon-era was just dawning, the sun set on America's moon era. The NASA Space Center in Houston radioed remote control commands to the moon to shut down all automated equipment still operating there; and, as usual, the quiet and largely unnoticed news reports about it told us this was being done to save money.

On October 9, Soyuz 25 was launched with a two-man crew to rendezvous with Salyut 6; and just as the crew of Apollo Eleven carried an American flag with them to plant on the moon, the crew of Soyuz 25 took a copy of the newly adopted Soviet Constitution with them. As Mission Commander Kovalyonok climbed aboard the space craft, he gave not the usual friendly wave but a clenched fist salute for the benefit of the television audience. Then Soyuz 25 lifted off from the same pad at the Baikonur Cosmodrome that had been used twenty years ago to launch Sputnik One. Less than two days later, Radio Moscow broke a 24-hour silence about the mission, which had caused many observers to wonder if the cosmonauts might have suffered harm. It was announced that the cosmonauts were in good condition and that their Soyuz 25 capsule had landed safely. Supposedly, the mission had been aborted because of the failure of Soyuz 25 to dock successfully with Salyut 6; but actually, my friends, Soyuz 25 was successful in its rendezvous with Salyut 6. The purpose was not to dock and remain in orbit but rather to link up to a lunar propulsion and equipment module—and this Soyuz 25 did! By the time Radio Moscow broke its silence with a cover story about an aborted mission, Soyuz 25 was on its way to the moon.

On October 16, after achieving lunar orbit, the crew of Soyuz 25 detached a radio relay package and left it in lunar orbit as they descended to the lunar surface. And just as two Americans named Armstrong and Aldrin became the first human beings to set foot on the near side of the moon, two Russians named Kovalyonok and Ryumin have become the first to land on the far side of the moon in Jules Verne Crater. The Soviet Union is now working rapidly to do the same thing that the controlled United States Government had tried to do—to set up a Particle Beam weapons base on the moon from which to menace the earth.

The operation now under way in Jules Verne Crater is strictly an interim step. The back side of the moon is being used purely as a safe haven, and there all preliminary preparations can be made without any chance, they hope, of observation or retaliation by the United States. The plan is to assemble everything that is needed for an initial Particle Beam installation, including equipment, crews of cosmonauts, life-support equipment, &c in a safe back-side location. Then, rockets will be used to transport everything to the intended location on the near side, rapidly and all at once. If all goes according to plan, the Soviet Particle Beam Base will be able to become operational very quickly after

the fast move to the near side. In this way, the Soviet Union expects to have its Particle Beam Moon Base in operation and able to protect itself before any conceivable preemptive strike could knock it out. They have no wish to suffer the same fate they themselves inflicted a month ago on the secret American moon base.

Once it is operational with the charged Particle Beam weapon to protect itself, the Soviet Moon Base will be relatively secure in a military sense. This is especially true since a small fleet of Cosmos Interceptors are now in earth orbit, armed as they are with Particle Beam weapons. Therefore, once the Soviet Moon Base is in operation on the near side of the moon, the Soviet Union may well choose to make it known to the world—neglecting, of course, to explain its true purpose. If so, it will be a startling echo of the early days of the Soviet Space Program when spectacular exploits in space were always announced only after they were successfully under way, never beforehand.

According to my latest intelligence on the Soviet moon mission, the project is progressing very rapidly. As of two days ago, October 27, the crew of Soyuz 25 have already been joined at Jules Verne Crater by additional cosmonauts, and the components for a Particle Beam weapon have also arrived. At this rate, the space lift of crew and equipment to the near side of the moon might come very soon; and if it does, the timing would be perfect for Soviet propaganda purposes. The twentieth anniversary of Sputnik One, which was October 4, was commemorated by launching Soyuz 25 from the same launch pad as was used for Sputnik One. Still ahead, on November 7, is the 60th anniversary of the Bolshevik Revolution. How better to impress the world with the vigor of the Soviet system than by having the brand new Soviet Constitution praised over world-wide television by a Cosmonaut broadcasting from the moon?!

Topic #2—When I recorded Audioletter No. 26 last month on September 30, I alerted you to the fact that Soviet submarines were on their way in great numbers to surround the United States. A military confrontation was definitely underway, and I warned you that the possibility of war itself could not be ignored. Only the previous week-end the Soviet Union had abruptly expelled all Western fishing trawlers from the Barents Sea where the big Murmansk Naval Base is located. On Tuesday, September 27 the secret Space Battle of the Harvest Moon ended the existence of the American Moon Base in Copernicus Crater, and by that day both the Barents Sea and also the Sea of Okhotsk off the Kamchatka Peninsula were swarming with Soviet submarines. While these military developments were going on behind the scenes, Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko delivered a veiled ultimatum to the United States during a very harsh speech at the United Nations; and that evening, at Gromyko's demand, a sudden and unexpected meeting was held at the White House between Gromyko, Jimmy Carter, and Secretary of State Cyrus Vance.

Last month I told you what Gromyko told Carter in very blunt language, and the very next day the two huge Soviet submarine fleets left their staging areas to converge on the United States. Since NATO regards the deployment to sea of the Soviet submarine force as a major warning signal of impending conflict, the situation was potentially very grave indeed. So I warned you, based on information from my own intelligence sources, that by October 7, if not before, the United States would be surrounded along our East, West, and Gulf coasts by the Soviet submarine fleet.

On October 5, early this month, Vice Admiral William Reed,

Commander of our Atlantic Fleet Naval Surface Forces, revealed at the Southeast Sea Power Symposium in Atlanta, Ga., the fact that Soviet submarines together with many surface ships were present in great numbers along our Atlantic and Gulf coasts; and he said they were close enough to destroy American cities in a nuclear war. He added that in any long war with the Soviet Union, America would be at a grave disadvantage because of the size and effectiveness of the Soviet Navy. The next day, October 6, a naval spokesman in San Diego was reported by a local radio station to have said that large numbers of Soviet submarines had been sighted in the Pacific also heading in our direction. On the morning of October 7, 1977, my own reports indicated that the Pacific armada was about 700 miles west of San Francisco at its closest point and was spread out over an area of ocean 1000 miles long north to south and 200 miles deep. The Atlantic armada was some 1600 miles from New York City at its closest point spread out over a similar area of ocean. At that point the Pacific armada was slowing down to enable the Atlantic armada to close in to a similar distance. In the Gulf of Mexico, meanwhile, the fleet of 2 9 submarines which were already on station when I recorded Audioletter No. 26, were simply staying there waiting. By the evening of October 9, the Pacific armada was on station, in battle formation, spread out along our entire west coast at a distance of 400 miles. The Atlantic armada was just over 500 miles from New York City at its closest point but still had the job of spreading out to parallel the east coast line. While this was being done, the fleet west of our shores began injecting a radiochemical poison into our air by means of powerful fluorocarbon dispensers. This technique of radiological warfare is exactly the same as I described one year ago in Audioletter No. 17 in connection with the Soviet submarine confrontation that occurred at that time—but this time the formulation involves both plutonium, which is radioactive, and zirconium. As I revealed in Audioletter No. 17, this combination is what causes so-called Legionnaire's Disease—and I'll have more to say about that in a moment.

Early that day, October 9, British Foreign Minister David Owen left London unexpectedly for a hurried two-day trip to Moscow. The stated cover for the trip was to discuss Rhodesia and trade matters, but Owen was actually going to Moscow to capitulate. In spite of all the things Great Britain has been trying to do to stand up to the Kremlin, the Soviet Particle Beam breakthrough and America's loss in this decisive race, has made the situation untenable.

The evening of the following day, Vice-President Mondale was recalled to Washington out of a Columbus Day parade in San Francisco—the crisis was deepening. By midday October 12 the peak threat from the Soviet submarine fleet was in progress. In the west the fleet had moved to within 250 miles from shore; in the east, the Soviets had moved to within less than 150 miles of New York City; and along our Atlantic, Pacific, and Gulf Coast lines, Soviet submarines were essentially halted in position for attack at any moment. The western fleet continued injecting radiochemical poisons into our air including for a while strontium 90. There were fresh reports of fireballs over Russia that day, and the same day it was announced that Leonid Brezhnev will soon visit Britain due to the progress made during Owen's weekend visit. Secretary of Defense Harold Brown, in Europe for talks with our NATO allies, now headed for Yugoslavia, as had been announced. According to my own information, a high United States Government official conveyed America's capitulation to the Soviet Union on October 14 through intermediary channels. I have not been able to confirm the identity of this official, but the fact that Brown was in Yugoslavia on that day may not be

coincidence.

In any event, the Soviet threat of war served its intended purposes well. It placed the United States in a position in which any attempt to retaliate against the Soviets for destroying our Moon Base would have been suicidal. In particular, it insured that there would be no American attempt to interfere with the Soviet moon mission, which took place during this period. In this respect, it was the Cuban missile crisis all over again but with the roles of America and Russia reversed.

The Kremlin are well aware that the situation now confronting the real rulers of America is totally new to them and they really do not know what to do. For the first time they no longer have an invisible ace up their sleeve to make Russia toe the line, but the Soviet display of military power and readiness to use it made the controlled Carter administration cave in—just as Khrushchev had caved in under the same pressure 15 years ago.

The Russians are well known for their ability to win games of chess, and they were not to be bluffed. As a result, America surrendered to the Soviet Union on October 14, 1977, on terms I will reveal in Topic #3. And the Soviet acceptance of that surrender was indicated on October 15 as the bulk of the Soviet submarine fleets turned away from America's shores and began heading for home. By October 16, all but 2 of the submarines along our Gulf Coast were already heading back into Cuban waters, where they were congregated along the north coast east of Camaguey by October 18. The eastern and western armadas were far out to sea by then except for 5 each that stayed on station near our shores. On October 17, with the Soviet Navy safely out of its threatening posture, NATO began its own two-week naval exercises in the Atlantic; but the 12 Soviet submarines which had stayed behind along our shores continued to spew plutonium-zirconium poisons into our atmosphere to produce Legionnaire's Disease without any interference. Legionnaire's Disease, like so-called Swine Flu, is an artificial disease caused by radiological warfare. My confidential intelligence sources enabled me to warn that the Government's Swine Flu program was a hoax to cover up the effects of radiological warfare in America as early as April 1976 in Audioletter No. 11, just after the program was announced by President Gerald Ford; and in Audioletter No. 17, one year ago this month, I was able to tell the full story of the Swine Flu hoax, Legionnaire's Disease, and additional strange illnesses that were cropping up at that time.

At this time last year the Soviet Union had begun a program of experimental plutonium cloud attacks against America's population, using a formulation that was intended to produce a Swine Flu-like illness, but that project was never as effective as desired, and more recently they began experimenting with a plutonium-zirconium formulation that produces so-called Legionnaire's Disease. This had been tested first at the American Legion Convention in July 1976 where 180 people became ill and 28 died. Recent cloud attacks by Soviet submarines have shown that this is a more effective poison than the earlier one, as Legionnaire's Disease has shown up increasingly nationwide. As I explained in Audioletter No. 17, Legionnaire's Disease is basically a form of radiation sickness caused deliberately at will by secret radiological warfare by the Soviet Union.

Recently it has been announced that a peculiar pneumonia bacterium has been linked with Legionnaire's Disease, but this is only a complication. The basic cause which weakens the body to permit this bacterial complication is the Soviet radiochemical

poison in our air. Not everyone falls ill who is exposed to the poison in the low concentrations currently found in our air. Those who are in good basic health, who get sufficient rest and proper nutrition, have the best chance of avoiding its effects. They are also the ones who are most likely to survive if they do contract Legionnaire's Disease. The mortality rate is about 15%, the same now as it was in the first big outbreak in Philadelphia. Antibiotics can affect the bacterial complication but in no way affect the basic cause, which is radiological. So far, the Center for Disease Control in Atlanta claims that Legionnaire's Disease has been reported by 22 states and the District of Columbia. Some spokesmen are now referring to it as "atypical pneumonia"; but call it what you will, it is spreading. Many doctors still are not familiar with it, so here is a list of the symptoms which accompany Legionnaire's Disease: Typically it begins with a general malaise and headaches; within a day this is followed by a rapidly rising fever, which may reach levels of from 102 to 105 degrees, together with chills. A hacking cough, stomach ache, nausea and diarrhea are common, sometimes including bleeding. Yet, as severe as it is, it is not contagious—that is, passed from one person to another. Everyone contracts it from the same source, namely the air we breathe. Not everyone gets all the symptoms, different people seem to be affected somewhat differently. In small children, I am informed that it can show up as an especially severe form of croup, due to the strong effect of the plutonium-zirconium poison in the air passage of the throat. It may be that this is the reason for the unusually severe outbreaks of croup now occurring in some of our northern states, which State Health officials are at a loss to explain.

My friends, we in the United States together with people in certain parts of Canada and Mexico, are the victims of a spreading atomic plague. It's produced by undeclared warfare, radiological warfare, on the part of the Soviet Union to demoralize and weaken our will to resist the final takeover. Thanks to the surrender to the Kremlin by the Carter administration this month—it's not the Soviet Union that will be laying down its arms, but we, OURSELVES!

Topic #3—In a news conference on September 29, 1977, President Carter told reporters that there was no prospect of any immediate agreement on a second Strategic Arms Limitation Treaty, or SALT II. Two days earlier Soviet Foreign Minister Gromyko had denounced the sorry state of Soviet-American relations in very harsh terms and had demanded that a new SALT accord be agreed upon "without any delay"; and in a hastily called meeting that evening Gromyko made it clear that the Kremlin, having put the secret American Moon Base out of operation that day was now going to start cracking the whip; but Carter's response was more one of shock than one of immediate total capitulation, and therefore the Soviet submarines began moving toward America within hours after Gromyko left the White House.

The surrender by the United States on October 14 involved America's acceptance of Soviet demands for a new SALT II agreement that will effectively disarm America while leaving Soviet armaments free to expand and develop still further. The only concession granted by Brezhnev to Carter is a slight extension of time to allow the Carter administration to prepare the way for America's acceptance of the treaty to strip us militarily. The extent of the radical shift in favor of the Soviet Union concerning disarmament was revealed on October 19 at the United Nations. There, in a committee away from the limelight, but visible to key members of the world's diplomatic community, major statements were made by both the United States

and the Soviet Union. The American statement expressed our willingness to cooperate and declared that an agreement on a whole range of issues may be just around the corner. The Soviet statement spoke of closing the arms race and said Russia is ready to proceed with "drastic disarmament measures"; and the American delegate, Mr. Fisher, expanded on the fact that he now found a new sense of vigor and urgency, stressing that the world is experiencing a fundamental shift in thinking about disarmament.

My friends, world-wide fundamental shifts in thinking about anything do not happen without there being a reason; and that reason, as I have told you, is the end of the American Moon Base and the exclusive possession by the Soviet Union of the new Particle Beam Super Weapon. The following day details began leaking out about the shape of the proposed SALT II accord, and it will continue to be the subject of heavy news coverage and debate.

SALT II contains tremendous concessions by the United States with none of significance by the Soviet Union even on its face. For example, Jimmy Carter canceled the B-l Bomber, much to the Kremlin's delight, with the silly argument that the Cruise Missile would replace it. The Cruise Missile, my friends, is more vulnerable to Soviet air defenses than the B-l would have been. But now, SALT II will even put the Cruise Missile out of business by restricting its range sufficiently to force our old slow B-52s to get so close to Russia in an attack that they can be shot down by the vast Soviet Air Defense system. In addition, the United States will agree not to provide Cruise Missiles or the technology to build them to our NATO allies, to whom the Cruise Missile could be very valuable. In return for this, America is to settle for a Soviet pledge about their supersonic Backfire Bomber, the rough equivalent of our B-l Bomber. According to NATO intelligence, the Soviet Union is already flying more than 400 Backfires; in other words, they already have a larger force of brand new supersonic strategic Backfires than our force of 20-year old subsonic tired out B-52s. And what's more, the newest version has even greater range than our B-52, and Soviet plants are churning out more Backfires every month. But the Carter administration has settled for a promise from the Soviets not to start producing Backfires any faster than they are doing already. What's more, the Kremlin has simply given its word that Backfires will not be deployed in a strategic manner despite their strategic capability. In return for that, we agree not to count their Backfires at all as strategic bombers, thereby exempting them from the limits of weaponry spelled out in SALT II; and we agree to trust them, not requiring verification of any kind. Can you imagine?

But as serious as these matters are, they are overshadowed by the seriousness of what is left out altogether from the SALT II proposals! They say not a word about the radiological warfare weapons which are being used right now on the United States. They say nothing at all about anti-satellite weapons despite their disastrous implications and despite the fact that even the Defense Department admits they are now operational in the Soviet arsenal. SALT II would do nothing to restrict the use of microwave weapons on humans which, as I revealed in Audioletter No. 20 for January 1977, is also being done by the Soviet Union. And Beam weapons, particularly the Particle Beam, which is the exclusive property of Russia now, are ignored altogether. Thus for example, our strategic missile forces are rapidly being neutralized while those of the Soviet Union are preserved. Our early-warning satellites, which we depend upon to warn us of any attack by the Soviet Union, are being destroyed by Cosmos Interceptor satellites; and if we were to launch our missiles,

properly deployed Soviet Particle Beams could be used to destroy the warheads in flight. The rough equivalents in missiles that the Soviet Union now seems ready to write into the SALT II accord, therefore means nothing. What is actually being inaugurated now is the total disarmament of America. Those who are using their influence to have America accept the SALT II agreement, claim that by granting the Soviet Union such horrendous concessions, we will take away any Soviet incentive to go to war. But, my friends, this is the intellectual way to say 'Better Red than dead'—but if the 'Alice in Wonderland' world of unreality that is built into SALT II is accepted, then we as a nation will be both Red and dead. It has taken 200 years to undo the structure for freedom and prosperity that was devised by our founding fathers. And more than once the United States has been all but counted out by those who wanted to destroy us, only to see America rise again, bounce back, and go on. The Kremlin has no intention of taking that risk by ultimately sparing us from war. They intend to destroy the American system once and for all, and our disarmament beforehand is purely for the purpose of making their destruction of our land easy and without suffering on their own part. When ancient Carthage was destroyed, the Romans plowed salt into the ground to ensure that Carthage would never rise again. Now the Soviet Union is using the SALT treaties to ensure that America, once defeated, will never rise again.

My friends, this is the legacy that America is inheriting, thanks to the totally disastrous policies which have been forced on America by the four Rockefeller brothers for decades. I have been accused on occasion of carrying on a personal vendetta against them, and sometimes against the whole family whom I have never accused of being party to what the four brothers are doing. But it is not personal, I do not make public what I know about their personal lives; but I do believe that their policies which affect millions of other lives, should be made public. David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D. Rockefeller III have never done anything to me personally but their policies have brought the land I love, the United States of America, to the brink of utter ruin. Knowing what I know, I have only two possible choices—either speak out, or keep quiet; and I cannot keep quiet. To understand why I say this, you have to go through what I've gone through—you have to suffer, you have to turn over and toss at night asking yourself "What's happened to this great country?" It's always been my hope that the four Rockefeller brothers would see the light and honestly turn aside from policies which are destroying America. As a great religious leader once told their grandfather, John D. Rockefeller, Sr., "Great wealth is a trust and it should be used for the public good."

As of now, none of the things that could be done to save America are being done. It may be too late to save America as we know it, but it is never too late to do what is right and leave the success or failure of our efforts in the hands of our Lord.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless and protect each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #28

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is November 21, 1977, and this is my Audioletter No. 28.

In the closing moments of Audioletter No. 22 for March 1977, I warned you that: "The elaborate war plan which I revealed in monthly Audioletter No. 6 for November 1975 is being revised and updated for application in the present circumstances. Certain of my sources have expressed great concern to me recently that a provocation for war in the Middle East is now being established that will be unlike anything we have ever seen before." And then I added: "To achieve that purpose, plans are being seriously considered which, if carried out, could instantly throw all three major religions of the western world into turmoil in the course of igniting a Middle East conflict. My hope is that by warning you of the existence of such plans, I am making them too dangerous for the conspirators to carry out; but in case they are carried out, I hope that you will now be able to recognize it immediately when it happens." (End of quotation from Audioletter No. 22)

As I speak these words today, eight months later, the eyes of the world are suddenly focused on the Middle East as never before. The stalemate of Middle East peace negotiations has, in a week's time, been shattered in a spectacular way, and something unheard of is unfolding before our very eyes. After 29 years of hostility and wars, President Anwar Sadat of Egypt left Jerusalem today where he talked of peace face to face with Israeli leaders and to address the Israeli parliament. All other diplomatic efforts to bring peace in that region have been thrown aside by Sadat's unexpected mission to Israel. But already Sadat finds himself almost totally isolated in the Arab world, supported only by Tunisia and Morocco.

All of this, my friends, is only the beginning. The plan to plunge the Middle East into war as the first step toward Nuclear War One, has now been set in motion; and Sadat's trip is intended to be nothing more than a major step towards fulfillment of this plan.

It is now almost two months since America's disastrous defeat in the still secret Battle of the Harvest Moon—history's first Space Battle, on September 27, 1977. Since that time, our rulers have been trying for the very first time in their lives to deal with a situation in which they no longer have a hidden whip with which to make the Soviet Union cooperate with them. But they are not doing the one thing which would have at least a chance at preventing nuclear war, and that is total official world-wide exposure of the present Soviet war threat as it affects not only the United States but also many other countries. Instead, they are falling back on the techniques of maneuver, deception, and doublecross. Now that they have lost control of the Soviet Union, the Rockefeller brothers are discovering that their survival is tied to our national survival after all; but instead of letting us in on what we now face, their controlled CIA and other agents are trying to find some way to maneuver out of the Russian bear trap—stalling for time while still keeping us in the dark.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—A HOUSE DIVIDED AGAINST ITSELF OVER SALT; Topic #2—THE EXCHANGE OF SOVIET AND AMERICAN THREATS; and Topic #3—THE SADAT TRIP TO ISRAEL AND NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Topic #1—In 1961 two major programs were started in parallel by the controlled government of the United States. One was America's crash program to go to the moon, announced by President Kennedy in May of that year; the other was the program to disarm America in stages, signaled by the creation of the "Arms Control

and Disarmament Agency" in September of that same year—1961. Neither the moon project nor the disarmament program was what it seemed on the surface; and while they were made to seem unrelated, they were actually two arms of a single military strategy for dictatorship over the United States and finally over the world. It is this diabolical strategy that has finally jumped the tracks, leaving not only the United States but also our hidden rulers in a desperate situation.

The strategy which began to be implemented in 1961 was a very complex one, but its underlying concept is as simple as it is astonishing. Basically our rulers were in effect going underground with all of the most important new military developments while gradually stripping us of our existing better-known military capabilities. In the process, our Constitutional military services—that is, those which are required by law to serve you and me—have been gradually downgraded, weakened, and demoralized. But behind the scenes, unhampered by legal or moral constraints, ever more advanced weapons have been created for the exclusive benefit of our secret rulers without any hint of their existence to the public or to Congress. Thus, as I first revealed ten months ago in Audioletter No. 20, the controlled CIA has secretly become the most powerful military agency in the United States in total violation of its charter and the United States Constitution.

The centerpiece of this 16-year-old program of developing totally secret weapons, was our Moon Program. In Audioletter No. 2 6 two months ago I told you the full story about our Moon project, which from the start had a military purpose and which ended in disaster just two months ago on September 27, 1977. But there were many other aspects to this program as well. For example, in recent years the American public have become accustomed to publicly-acknowledged weapons programs costing vast sums that seem out of all proportion to what the weapons are worth. These cost overruns, my friends, are due not only to mismanagement and waste; they are also a means of financing secret projects by burying their costs in the bloated budgets of publicly-known programs. As for the weapons themselves that we are publicly told about today, it's almost as if innovation and progress had suddenly stopped in 1961 aside from marginal improvements here and there. When we hear about nuclear ballistic missile submarines, for example, how many people stop to think how long it has been since they made their appearance? The first atomic submarine, the USS NAUTILUS, was launched nearly a quarter century ago, in 1954, and was a spectacular advance over the diesel and battery-powered boats of World War II. Only 5 years later, but now nearly 20 years ago, came the next spectacular advance—the ballistic missile submarine, beginning with the GEORGE WASHINGTON in 1959. At about the same time, the public was given a hint of 'things to come' when films were made public showing the periscope of a research submarine outrunning a speeding Coast Guard Cutter with ease. But starting in 1961, public attention to the possibilities of major future advances began to be avoided. In the same way, the 16 years from 1945 to 1961, saw a spectacular steady advancement in military aircraft capabilities. In 1945 our first-line fighters and bombers were propeller-driven, jets were still largely experimental, and most people took it for granted that there was a sound barrier that could not be cracked; but a mere 10 years later, jet bombers and fighters ruled the air and supersonic travel was a reality. In 1956, the F-104 was introduced with a top speed of 2-1/2 times the speed of sound, roughly the same as the newest American fighters today. We hear all about the wonderful Cruise Missile, but we are not supposed to remember another kind of cruise missile of a decade ago, canceled by then Secretary of Defense,

Robert McNamara. Called PLUTO, it was to be nuclear-powered, able to circle the earth several times over, and strike an enemy from any direction at extremely low altitudes and supersonic speeds. And while we content ourselves with fatiguing 20-year-old slow B-52s, we're not supposed to remember that in the early 60's the B-70 was already flying at three times the speed of sound.

By now most Americans have all but forgotten about these fast-moving developments of yesteryear. Many of these lie far beyond any technology which is publicly admitted to be in use today, and they provide a dim hint of the secret weapons developments that have actually taken place without our consent—and not for our good. Only the most spectacular, huge program of them all, the Moon Program, was made public simply because there was no other way to do it. As I explained in Audioletter No. 26, secrecy was maintained by not letting us in on the purpose of the Moon Program, bathing the program otherwise in great publicity. Originally the plan was for the United States to be decimated in Nuclear War One as part of a larger plot for world control; but now, the secret American Moon Base in Copernicus Crater has been put out of action—the Russians are now on the moon, furiously at work. The Soviet Union is the exclusive possessor of the awesome new Particle Beam Weapon, which is being used to blow our Spy Satellites out of the sky; and all but two of the secret CIA undersea super-missiles which were planted by Glomar Explorer and other means, have sprung leaks and become useless. For the very first time the Soviet Union is in the driver's seat militarily, and America's secret rulers are in disarray over what to do.

Last month I exposed the events leading to the Carter administration's surrender to the Soviet Union on October 14, 1977, in the face of a deadly Soviet submarine threat against our country. The terms of the surrender require quick acceptance by us of a SALT II agreement which will begin the final, total disarming of America; but once we are disarmed, the intention of the Kremlin's leaders is to ultimately strike the United States in a devastating military blow anyway. The more fully we can be disarmed beforehand, the less suffering will have to be endured by Russia as the price of destroying America for all time.

To grasp the Soviet thinking about all of this, one must begin by understanding one key but little known fact—the Kremlin is no longer ruled today by the Bolshevik Communists whose November 1917 Revolution was celebrated this month. The Soviet inner circle today are Communists but of a very different breed from Lenin and his Bolsheviks. They were atheistic Communists, whereas the ruling group today would be better described as self-styled Spiritual Communists; and while the Bolsheviks drew upon international support and were dominated by international interests, the Kremlin rulers of today are strongly nationalistic. They are determined that Soviet Russia, not just international Communism for its own sake, shall rule the world.

When Alexander Solzhenitsyn left the Soviet Union in exile, he first had to sign a document in which he indicated that he still believed in Communism, meaning Spiritual Communism, in which the Communist government would be under the control of the church. When he sent this letter to the Kremlin, it was accepted and he was allowed to go. Solzhenitsyn today champions the reformation of the Soviet-Marxist government, but this reformation is not intended to break down the present Soviet power structure. Indeed, Solzhenitsyn has said while predicting the imminent fall of the West, that he expects to be back in Russia within just a few years' time.

The take-over of the new ruling faction from the Bolsheviks began with the death of Joseph Stalin on March 5, 1953. This faction of Marxists, working within Russia had allied themselves with the Bolsheviks in 1917, thereby guaranteeing the success of the Bolshevik Revolution. But even though the Bolsheviks and the self-styled Spiritual Communists agreed on the concept of Communism as the proper form of government, the Spiritual Communists retained their separate identity and worked toward the day when they would be able to seize total control for themselves. That day arrived when Stalin died—March 5, 1953. The following day Georgi Malenkov, the brother-in-law of Nikita Khrushchev, became Soviet Premier. When he was succeeded two years later on February 8, 1955, by Nikolai Bulganin, the transition was peaceful, without bloodshed. A year later, Khrushchev as First Secretary of the Communist Party, launched his famous campaign to de-Stalinize Russia. Khrushchev himself had been an accessory to brutal purges on behalf of the Stalinist state, but when he replaced Bulganin as Premier on March 27, 1958, the transition once again was peaceful. Bulganin had resigned. On October 15, 1964, Leonid Brezhnev replaced Khrushchev as First Secretary of the Communist Party, and Aleksei Kosygin became Premier. Khrushchev was in deep trouble because of his failure in the Cuban Missile Crisis and some other sharp reversals of his policies. But even Khrushchev was not liquidated in the old Bolshevik tradition of bloody power struggles. Instead, he was simply pushed aside and allowed to live in quiet retirement, writing his memoirs and receiving his pension. Power struggles in the Kremlin for the past quarter century have been devoid of the bloody infighting that was typical of the Bolsheviks. The new breed in the Kremlin today can be as brutal as anyone with their enemies or with those who rise up against their rule, as proven in Hungary in 1956 and in Czechoslovakia in 1968; but among themselves there is a degree of tight-knit mutual respect that would have been inconceivable in the old Bolshevik days. They are united in their religion of Spiritual Communism, and in their hatred for the international forces with whom they have been forced to cooperate for so long.

My friends, the international forces which are controlled today by the four Rockefeller brothers is motivated primarily by greed and lust for power, but the self-styled Spiritual Communists who control the Kremlin today look upon their goal of Communizing the world from an added perspective. While they strive for power and total control, they are motivated by the zeal of saving their own souls. Like the Christian Crusaders of centuries ago, who sought to evangelize the world at the point of a sword, the Kremlin of today intends to impose its system on all of us with the dedication, steadfastness, and determination of the true believer. In their view, any amount of suffering and brutality is justified so long as it leads toward the final goal of World Spiritual Communism under Soviet domination. This change in the make-up of the Kremlin has never been fully understood or appreciated by those who dominate our government behind the scenes. And confronted as they are by the unified determined stance of the Kremlin, they are responding with indecision, divisions within their own ranks, and desperate maneuverings. The real divisions that now exist within the ruling circles of this country are being compounded by some of these maneuvers which are intended to stall for time without arousing Soviet suspicions. As a result, as the United States faces the worst threat in its history, we see in our own country a house divided against itself, some saying SALT II is wonderful, others saying it is dangerous, still others daring to tell the public a few words about the agreement that will seal our fate, yet others declaring in total ignorance that SALT II is a good

thing and that its critics should be investigated. Some of the controversy is real, some manipulated, but most of the spokesmen on the political scene, regardless of their SALT viewpoint, are tied to the one Rockefeller international party that rules not only North America but Europe and Japan as well—the TRILATERAL COMMISSION, headed by one David Rockefeller.

Last month I described the growing euphoria over the certainty of a SALT II agreement, but even as I recorded that tape, the multi-prong controversy over SALT II was increasing. On November 1st, news reports suddenly said snags had cropped up in the SALT II talks. A former arms control negotiator was quoted as saying, "I believe we are locked into inferiority and I don't know how to get out of it." The next day, November 2, Leonid Brezhnev proposed in a speech that all nuclear explosions be banned, including peaceful and underwater explosions. His mention of underwater explosions was actually a veiled threat, urging the Carter administration to 'get on with it' in selling the SALT II surrender to Congress and the American public. Secretary of State Cyrus Vance immediately hailed Brezhnev's statement as a great thing, adding: "There has been improvement in the relationship between ourselves and the Soviet Union in the last several weeks." Two days later on November 4, Vance was totally unprepared to back up his answers about SALT details in a closed-door Senate hearing. The reason is that the administration is preparing to go around Congress to conclude a SALT II agreement with Moscow by EXECUTIVE ORDER. The SALT II contract will actually contain United States capitulation terms; meanwhile Congress is being used as much as possible to raise a smoke screen of controversy to provide an excuse to buy time. Three days later, on November 7, a fresh campaign began to reassure the Kremlin that the agreement of October 14 to accept the disarming of America by SALT II is still on track. Political attacks were unleashed against SALT critics for allegedly leaking information to the public that might jeopardize SALT II. Meanwhile the 60th anniversary of the Bolshevik Revolution was being celebrated in Moscow with the biggest military parade through Red Square ever. And while Soviet President Brezhnev talked detente, his Defense Minister delivered a speech so belligerent that it left many western observers shaken and bewildered.

To continue soothing the Russian Bear, Jimmy Carter said on November 11, "My prediction is we will have a SALT agreement. There will be a SALT II. We will immediately continue with a SALT III." In this he was parroting the Kremlin line, echoing Soviet Ambassador Dobrynin who predicted that same day that there will be a SALT agreement before the end of the year. But the divided house of America's government continued to careen along, out of control. Only two days after these reassuring public words to the Kremlin by Carter, officials of his own administration said that it would probably be another three to six months before SALT II became a reality. The same day, Senate Minority Leader Howard Baker told the press that SALT II "is in trouble now."

Soviet exasperation has been building rapidly at the on-again, off-again political game-playing over SALT II. Only last month the Soviet Union backed off from a nuclear strike against the United States in response to a capitulation by the Carter administration on October 14. The Russians can recognize stalling when they see it, and they wasted no time in flexing their own military muscle this month to make the Carter administration knuckle under again.

Topic #2—In Audioletter No. 24 for May 1977, six months ago, I

revealed the beginning of a Soviet program of preparing for geophysical warfare with huge nuclear bombs planted at strategic locations under the sea to produce artificial earthquakes and tidal waves. In Audioletter No. 25 for August I also gave the coordinates of 10 new bombs, cobalt bombs, that had been planted in addition to the 7 super-bombs lurking around the Philippine Islands. Since that time, dozens of additional undersea bombs have been planted worldwide and several have been set off.

The strength of the quake that is triggered by setting off such a bomb can vary somewhat, depending on the stresses that already exist in the earth's crust at that location and other factors. But in many cases the shock strength turns out to be about 6.5 on the Richter Scale, strong enough to do major damage if it were on land. As a result, there have been a considerable number of undersea quakes of strength around 6.5 reported lately, yet the news media never comment on how strange it is that so many quakes are happening with virtually the same strength. The most remarkable case of media silence about the similar strength of so many quakes, took place on September 4, 1977, 2-1/2 months ago. On that day the Soviet Union set off four of their undersea bombs in the Pacific—one at the north end of the New Hebrides trench northeast of Australia, and three in the Aleutian trench thousands of miles to the north. The three main quakes that were produced in the Aleutians had Richter Scale readings of 6.5, 6.6, and 6.5 respectively. The one in the New Hebrides was slightly stronger with a reading of 6.8. These facts were reported in the news, but no one ventured a word about the similar strength of all these major quakes.

On November 2 Leonid Brezhnev mentioned in a speech his hope that all nuclear explosions, including underwater explosions, could be terminated. But the political stalling tactics against SALT II were just getting underway, and two days later the Kremlin set off another undersea bomb in the Aleutians to remind the Carter administration of what they can do. The result was an undersea quake near the Island of Adak and, as usual, the reported strength of the shock was 6.5 on the Richter Scale. Two days later, impatient with Carter administration performance in pushing through acceptance of the SALT II proposals to disarm America, the Kremlin raised the stakes.

Shortly after midnight Sunday November 6, 1977, Jimmy Carter's home state of Georgia became the target for another demonstration of what the Kremlin plans for those who stand in their way. A button was pushed, and a small nuclear mine that had been planted just upstream of the Toccoa Falls Dam in northern Georgia was detonated. Torrential rains in the area were just ending, but as usual the dam showed no sign that anything was wrong. A year earlier the same dam had experienced such heavy rainfall that water spilled over the top. This had caused the creek in the valley 200 feet below to overflow its banks, but the dam itself had suffered no damage. For forty years the Toccoa Dam had served its purpose without incident, and a visual inspection just three days earlier had revealed nothing wrong; but when the Soviet mine was set off, the dam collapsed instantly. The blast from the mine momentarily parted the waters of Kelly Barnes Lake, throwing a wave of water downstream with the dam and momentarily backing up the water upstream of the mine. Then the bulk of the lake rushed out through the huge breach in the dam, hurtled over 200-foot-high Toccoa Falls, and rushed into the valley below. A double wave of water swept through the Bible College campus below—a smaller initial wave, followed by the main body of water. A three-mile long swath was devastated and 38 people died, half of them children.

The Toccoa Dam disaster came in the wake of deepening worry over the continued Soviet Particle Beam attacks on our spy satellites. Within hours Jimmy Carter postponed his planned trip abroad telling us that the reason was to push Congress toward adoption of his so-called Energy Bill. Three days after the Toccoa disaster on November 9, U.S. Ambassador Malcolm Toon met at his request with Soviet President Brezhnev in the Kremlin for over an hour, delivering an urgent letter from Carter. No details were released about the letter, but Carter was making two basic requests: (1) That the Soviet Union cease and desist from destroying American surveillance satellites, and (2) that Brezhnev and Carter meet at the earliest possible moment. But Brezhnev gave Carter no encouragement about a meeting until after a SALT II accord is reached, and he drummed away at the urgency of finalizing the agreement dictated by the Kremlin. In other words, the Soviets do not intend to tolerate stalling by the Carter administration. The same day, November 9, 1977, events were set in motion that are intended to unleash a Middle East War—and in its wake NUCLEAR WAR ONE. I'll tell you more about that in Topic #3.

On November 12, Soviet pressure on the Carter administration was raised a notch higher. In Iri, South Korea, a railroad yard was suddenly laid waste by a tremendous explosion. Scores were killed outright, over a thousand people were injured, nearly 10,000 homes and buildings were destroyed, and over 14,000 people were suddenly homeless. That blast was heard over 10 miles away. Soviet agents had planned for a railroad car full of dynamite to be in the blast area to provide a cover story for public consumption. But South Korean analysts who arrived on the scene knew right away that this was no ordinary dynamite blast. An explosive sitting on the surface, like the carload of dynamite, produces an extremely wide, shallow crater; but in the Iri disaster not one but two distinct craters were produced with an area of overlap between them. Furthermore, each crater was extremely deep compared to its width—one of them 4 9 feet deep, the other 65 feet deep; and although 30 tons of dynamite produces a very violent blast indeed, each crater corresponds to an explosive force perhaps 100 times that powerful. According to high intelligence sources, Soviet agents are known to have buried two (2) clean nuclear mines in the area where the blast occurred. They were placed side by side about 100 feet apart—to do maximum damage to the network of railroad tracks. Each had a yield of several kilotons, a fraction of the yield of the Hiroshima bomb; and on November 12, 1977, they were detonated simultaneously. It was a disaster for South Korea—and another shocking warning to the Carter administration that the Soviet Union is not to be trifled with. And when Brezhnev speaks of the urgency of finalizing the SALT II agreement, he means we are on a short fuse and that he will not be patient for very long. The Carter administration is being backed into a corner so rapidly by the Kremlin that an abortive decision was made earlier this month to pull out all the stops for a pre-emptive war against the Soviet Union. This idea was to let the chips fall where they may while we do still have some military might left; but as of two days ago, November 19, the Soviet Union has already squelched this plan, and the war now brewing is back on track to be, as Gromyko said to Carter on September 27, 1977, 'on Soviet terms.'

The letter from Carter delivered to Brezhnev on November 9 received no immediate reply. Instead, the blast in South Korea signaled that the Kremlin was growing still more impatient for the SALT II approval process to get off dead center, and more of our satellites have been blasted this month by Soviet Cosmos Interceptors wielding Particle Beams. By November 18, three days ago, there still had been no direct answer, and on that day the

"Voice of America" was used to hurl a thinly-veiled threat at Moscow. Every nation uses its national radio as a tool of propaganda and electronic diplomacy, the United States included. Every message that is broadcast by the Voice of America is heavily censored, edited, analyzed and picked apart to make sure that every word says what the United States government wants said. Bearing in mind that our satellite warning systems are now being destroyed by Soviet Killer Satellites, listen carefully to these words from the Voice of America broadcast of November 18, 1977, and I quote: "The White House has warned that the deployment of these so-called Killer Satellites could increase the chances of a first strike in space", and "the obviously destabilizing danger of satellite warfare is that with its observation satellites put out of commission, a nation would lose a major portion of its warning system and might then consider pre-emptive war." In diplomatic language, these words amounted to a very clear threat by the United States to attack the Soviet Union if no satisfaction is received concerning our vanishing spy satellites. On the afternoon of that same day, November 18, Soviet Ambassador Anatoly Dobrynin delivered a message from Brezhnev to Carter at the White House. The message made it clear that Washington is in no position to dictate anything to the Kremlin now, that the SALT approval process in the United States is becoming ever more "urgent", and that the Soviet president would regret being forced to take any measures that might run counter to the recent 'improvement' in relations between the two nations.

The full impact of Brezhnev's last comment reached the White House at roughly that same time as the Brezhnev message itself. The NATO underwater sonar nets around Iceland had picked up the Soviet Atlantic submarine fleet which, as happened six weeks ago, was headed en masse into the Atlantic at great speed. At the same time, the huge Soviet Pacific submarine fleet was also on its way toward the United States, and the Gulf fleet was already moving into position to threaten us from the south. Even before the Voice of America broadcast, the Kremlin knew that the Carter administration response to increasing Soviet pressure over SALT could possibly be some kind of bluff and possibly panic as well, so the Soviet navy had been dispatched in order to ensure that nothing would get out of hand; and when government officials here learned that the Soviet fleet was on its way here again, they promptly wilted. Shades of Kerensky! As of now they are once again concentrating on doing as they are told by the Soviet Union, and both the Pacific and Atlantic fleets have headed back toward port; but the Soviet Gulf Fleet has not left—it is staying on station for the moment ready for attack at a moment's notice from our soft underbelly to the south. This is Moscow's way of discouraging the Carter administration from attempting any more bluffs or hasty actions that might upset America's programmed march into final disaster.

Topic #3—Audioletter No. 22, in which I warned about a horrendous new plan to provoke a Middle East war, was recorded on March 27, 1977. Exactly one week later, on April 3, 1977, President Anwar Sadat of Egypt arrived in Washington for talks with President Carter, and the first phase of the CIA Middle East plot got under way. Sadat had in the past been asked from time to time by reporters whether face-to-face negotiations directly between the Arabs and Israelis might be useful. He had always rejected this out of hand, and when asked the same question on April 6 responded in the same way. He said that after 2 9 years of hatred and 4 wars, the Arabs were not yet ready for such a drastic step. But during his visit here, Sadat was subjected to the psychological programming techniques which I revealed over two years ago in Audioletter No. 5 for October 1975. These

techniques can be used to alter a person's brain-wave pattern and inject thoughts and tendencies that differ from their normal thinking. As I told you then, a world leader can be programmed to change his policies—and that is what happened to Sadat. During his visit here last April, a single thought was planted in Sadat's mind—namely, to go directly to Israel to negotiate. It was a thought totally foreign to Sadat, but ever since his visit here it has been in his mind constantly, and he has been unable to shake it.

While Sadat was here on April 7, Prime Minister Rabin of Israel resigned. Supposedly he was ensnared in a financial scandal, but actually he had learned of the plot to bring on a war and he wanted no part of it. Rabin's departure from the scene slowed down this plan while a new Prime Minister was elected. It was Menachem Begin. He had to form a government and establish himself on the world stage. But now, the fuse had been lit that is intended to make the Middle East explode into war.

On November 9, reacting to the stimulus implanted in his mind, Sadat startled everyone by saying he would be willing to go anywhere, even Jerusalem, to seek peace. Only five days later, television interviews of Sadat and Begin by Walter Cronkite of CBS and others set the stage for Sadat's trip to Israel. Sadat's decision to go to Israel was so abrupt that it produced a sharp contrast between Sadat's actions and those of his own Foreign Minister Fahmy. While Sadat was on television with Walter Cronkite, Fahmy was in Tunisia at a meeting of Arab Foreign Ministers trying to rally all the Arabs to a united front in peace negotiations with Israel. Three days later, Sadat announced his acceptance of the invitation he had solicited from Israel, and Fahmy resigned. For Sadat, the earliest possible moment for the trip was hardly soon enough because he was now under a psychological compulsion to make the trip. Begin invited Sadat to Israel on or after November 21, but Sadat answered that he would arrive on the 19th, which he did. Now, in spite of the best of intentions, Sadat has been used as a tool of the CIA to narrow the focus of Middle East peace negotiations to the outcome of the Sadat-Begin discussions.

It is now a much easier matter than before to torpedo peace in the Middle East—and that is what is planned. The Sadat peace initiative to Israel is supposed to be, unknown to Sadat himself, the first step toward war. Meanwhile the framework for a war to accomplish the objectives described two years ago in my Audioletter No. 6, is being established all around us. The American team in the Sinai, put there supposedly to act as a buffer between Israel and Egypt, is still there, having quietly swollen to a force more than a thousand strong armed with F-15's and nuclear weapons. Cautious Saudi Arabia has been drawn into making statements recently in support of the Arab cause that will serve as a sufficient excuse for Saudi Arabia to be included in the nuclear strike against Arab OPEC oil wells that is planned when war comes. Meanwhile we have been seeing the cover stories in the news about possible acquisition by Israel of large amounts of nuclear materials from America in recent years, planting the idea that Israel has "the bomb."

The triggering of the Sadat trip to Israel and the extremely rapid pace of events must be considered in light of the equally sudden visit to Washington by the Shah of Iran on November 14. This was the same day that Sadat and Begin committed themselves to a face-to-face meeting during interviews on television. On the 16th the Shah left the United States, and on that day Tehran Radio broadcast that there is "total United States commitment to come to Iran's aid in the event of an emergency." Iran is

positioned on the soft underbelly of the Soviet Union and it bristles with advanced American weaponry. Two days later the Voice of America broadcast its war threat against Moscow which I quoted earlier. But the chess players in the Kremlin had already gotten the message and the Soviet fleet was already at sea by then. As a result, any active threat Russia may be facing from Iran on its southern flank is offset by an active threat on our own southern flank in the form of submarines on station in the Gulf of Mexico. Thus, while the remnants of the United States government are maneuvering to try to salvage some benefit for themselves from the coming war, the Kremlin is matching every move with counteractive measures designed to maintain their commanding military position, and every day that is wasted by not revealing the truth of these events, works to the benefit of the Soviet Union in that the Soviet Union is consolidating its newly dominant position still further.

When I recorded Audioletter No. 27 last month, Soviet cosmonauts had established an initial base of operations in Jules Verne Crater on the back side of the moon. However, it was expected at that time that after preliminary preparations they would very shortly be moving both equipment and personnel to the near side, setting up an operational Particle Beam weapon almost immediately when they did so. On October 30, the day after I recorded my tape, I was informed that an initial move to the front side had taken place to Gibbs Crater, which is on the southeast rim of the near side of the moon. Since that time, Soviet activity on the moon has been steadily increasing. As of now there are seven (7) Soviet Particle Beam weapons dotted around the near side of the moon and, surprisingly, there are three separate back-up bases on the far side, including the original site at Jules Verne Crater. As yet, all of these installations are very thinly manned and they are far from being self-sufficient at this point—in order to keep functioning they must periodically receive supplies from earth. But the Particle Beam weapons are operational, and if the normal Soviet pattern is followed, we can expect a test of a moon-based Particle Beam weapon against some earth target in the very near future—and if this is done, it will probably take place under circumstances where its effects can be explained away as having some other cause. Possibly for the sake of secrecy, a target area within the Soviet Union far from populated areas, will be chosen for such testing; but it's also possible that like the first operational test of an orbital Particle Beam weapon, the first test of a Lunar Particle Beam weapon might be against some target that the Soviet Union wishes to destroy.

In any case, here are the lunar navigational coordinates of the seven Particle Beam weapons currently on the near side of the moon: No. 1 east of the Sea of Cold at 55 degrees 54 minutes north, 51 degrees zero minutes east; No. 2 west of the Sea of Crises at 16 - 33 North, 48 - 51 east; No. 3 southeast of the Sea of Fertility at 31 - 53 south, 73-9 east; No. 4 near the south pole on the southwest side at 72 - 26 south, 67 - 30 west; No. 5 near Phocylides Crater in the southwest quadrant at 50 - 53 south, 57 - 49 west; No. 6 southwest of the Ocean of Storms at 9

- 26 south, 66 - 52 west; and No. 7 northeast of the Apollo 14 landing site near the center of the near side of the moon at 1 -23 south, 12 - 27 west. The back-up locations on the far side of the moon are at: No. 1, Jules Verne Crater roughly 36 degrees south, 147 degrees east; No. 2 southeast of Pasture Crater at 13

- 36 south, 108 - 26 east; No. 3 southwest of Compton Crater at 51-3 north, 95-0 east.

The Soviet intentions toward us when Nuclear War One finally erupts are becoming all too clear because as of November 10,

1977, I am informed that Soviet agents are still at work throughout the United States mining additional targets for eventual destruction by remote control. One target area to which I believe I should call specific attention is the Kensico Reservoir just north of White Plains, New York. On September 21, 1977, two months ago, I was called by the FBI to ask for any information I could give them about the situation there. They had been tipped off that the Kensico Reservoir might be in danger in some way and wanted to know what I could tell them. I told them what I am telling you now, that there is a Soviet nuclear mine on the upstream side of the dam toward the east end. I also gave the FBI the locations of other Soviet nuclear devices in the area—such as one each in the south end of Pocantico Lake, another in the east end of Tarrytown Reservoir, and one in the Hudson River near the east end of the Tappan Zee Bridge. Whatever the FBI may have intended to do with this information, nothing has been done—the bombs are still there. It may well be that they were simply overtaken by events and their hands tied before they could do anything, because it was only six days later—September 27, 1977—that America lost the Battle of the Harvest Moon and Andrei Gromyko delivered an ultimatum to Jimmy Carter for America to start towing the Soviet line. But whatever the reason, the FBI's concern over the Kensico Reservoir leads me to believe I should call special attention to it.

Should the Kensico Reservoir be ruptured, the first victims will be the Holy Name School, situated like the Toccoa Bible College in the shadow of the dam. But beyond that, flood waters from Kensico Reservoir would rampage through White Plains and on southward perhaps all the way to the North Bronx, New York City. The devastation and loss of life would almost certainly dwarf anything like had ever been seen in America, yet no one is doing anything about it. A major insurance company learned recently from British intelligence about the situation at Kensico Reservoir and went to the New York City police about it—to no avail. Therefore apparently all I can do is to warn you.

My friends, what I have said in Audioletter No. 24 for May 1977, I repeat again now. Behind the scenes maneuvering and trickery can lead only to disaster for America. Only TOTAL EXPOSURE of what is happening has any hope at all of turning the tide against utter catastrophe. I have pledged to continue doing what I can toward this end, and I ask you to join with me in this very important effort.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless and protect each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #29

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is December 22, 1977, and this is my Audioletter No. 29. Three days from now will be Christmas Sunday, 1977. On that day my family and I will join millions of others around the world in celebrating the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ. Like other proud parents, I look forward especially to watching my three small children as they open their gifts. For them, Christmas is a time of pure joy, and that helps to make it so for us grown-ups as well. Even so this Christmas they will not be receiving the one present I wish they could have most of all, the gift of a future to look forward to—a future of freedom, instead of slavery; a future of plenty, instead of scarcity; a future of real peace, instead of

deliberate war. If I had the power to grant my children an abundant future of freedom and peace all by myself, I'd do it, but that is not possible. They cannot look forward to a future like that unless all of our children can do the same; and, my friends, the future which we as a nation are bequeathing to our trusting children is one for which we deserve to be chastised severely by our Lord. Much has been entrusted to us, and we have not measured up to that trust.

We in America have always looked back at the tragedy Nazi Germany became and said to ourselves: 'How could such a thing have happened? Couldn't the German people see that they were headed toward disaster? Why didn't they do something to stop it?' But apparently we as a nation learned nothing at all from their example or from any of the other lessons in history because, my friends, the United States is headed for a disaster that dwarfs what happened to Germany, or Japan, or Russia, or China. It is about us that future generations will say: 'How could such a thing have happened? Couldn't the American people see that they were headed toward disaster? Why didn't they do something to stop it?'

More and more Americans can sense now that something is definitely wrong. If nothing else, our survival instinct is ringing a muffled alarm inside all of us, warning of imminent danger. But so far, most Americans are still on the side lines, forfeiting all our rights and failing our responsibilities under the United States Constitution. Instead of analyzing the facts that are already before us, most of us choose the false wisdom called Wait and See. Instead of going to the effort to challenge our rulers about matters that are deciding our fate, we deceive ourselves with the notion that at the next election we can discharge our whole duty by casting a vote. Meanwhile we just sit on the fence while we wait and see. Those who are waiting to see do not have much longer to wait.

At the beginning of this year in Audioletter No. 20, I pointed out that we are in the period of undeclared warfare that history will record as Pre-War, leading up to the planned Nuclear War One. Today as 1977 is on the wane, the Pre-War period is also on the wane. The first stages of war itself are intended to erupt soon, beginning in the Middle East. When I resumed recording the Audioletter in August of this year after a silence of three months, I warned you that we are now in a new phase as we watch increasingly the fulfillment of man-made plans for disaster in war. Having squandered and wasted the days of grace God gave us to prevent disaster, we as a nation are going to suffer by our own choice.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—CYCLONES, AIR QUAKES, AND SOVIET INTIMIDATION OF AMERICA; Topic #2—THE DISMANTLING OF THE NATO ALLIANCE; and Topic #3—AMERICA'S BETRAYAL INTO A NEW BOLSHEVIK REVOLUTION.

Topic #1—Last month I told you the locations of the Soviet Particle Beam weapon installations that are now operational on the moon, and I warned you that "...if the normal Soviet pattern is followed, we can expect a test of a moon-based Particle Beam weapon against some earth target in the very near future. If this is done, it will probably take place under circumstances where its effects can be explained away as having some other cause." Events are now moving very fast, my friends. When I recorded those words last month on November 21, the first Soviet test shot at the earth had already taken place, but intelligence about it had not yet reached me. The perfect opportunity for Soviet purposes was provided by a huge cyclone in the Bay of

Bengal as it approached the southeast coast of India. Soviet cosmonauts at two of the Particle Beam installations on the moon readied their weapons and waited for the angry storm to reach the best possible position for the test. This occurred on the evening of November 19, 1977, as the cyclone was lashing the coast line of the Indian State of Andhra Pradesh. As millions of Indians were struggling against the powerful winds and driving rain of the cyclone, two Soviet Particle Beam weapons a quarter million miles away silently swung around to point in their direction. The weapons were aimed at two nearby locations at sea within the storm. To avoid any chance that the beams might interfere with one another on the way to the target, they were not fired simultaneously but in quick succession. Traveling at virtually the speed of light, each beam reached the earth in less than two seconds. As I told you in Audioletter No. 26, a charged Particle Beam rips apart the atoms of anything it strikes, causing it to explode. That's why, as I said then, it's an all-weather weapon—it blasts its way through air, cloud, water, armor plate, and anything else it strikes. When each beam aimed at the cyclone reached its target, it produced a brilliant air flash and a tremendous explosion at the water surface. A portion of the water itself was made to explode by the beam, creating a localized artificial tidal wave. The result, as described by victims who lived through it, was broadcast over the BBC on December 13, earlier this month. A relief worker who had just returned from the scene described what she called complete devastation along the coastal area. Everything, including even strongly-built houses, had been flattened, and the loss of life was staggering; and what had transformed a bad storm into a total disaster, my friends, was a single tidal wave that suddenly swept ashore in the midst of the storm. I now quote the exact words of the British relief worker as she described what eye witnesses had told her: "There were two enormous blinding flashes and the whole sky lighted up as though on fire, then this vast tidal wave about 30 miles in length along the coast and 18 feet high just bore down upon them." My friends, a tidal wave is not a normal part of a cyclone—high waters, yes; flooding, yes; and normal wind-driven waves, yes—but not tidal waves. And yet, if you will study the news reports from all sources, you will discover that a single devastating tidal wave was reported consistently. Eye witnesses describe it as something that came suddenly, sweeping away everything in its path, including loved ones; and it caused devastation inland to unheard-of distances where people have never had reason to fear cyclones before. For example, a ferryboat man in the village of Penumudi is quoted in the NEW YORK TIMES for December 12 as saying, "All my life I have never been frightened so much. We are 20 miles from the sea, and yet the wave came all the way to destroy our boats and our living." With at least 10,000 dead, over 2,500 villages destroyed, and 2,000,000 homeless, it's no wonder that this cyclone is rated as the worst to hit India in more than a century. From the Soviet viewpoint, the test was a complete success. The ability of their lunar-based charged Particle Beams to blast an earth target with devastating force, has been confirmed; and by carrying out their test in the midst of a violent cyclone, they succeeded in camouflaging the man-made disaster by combining it with a natural one. Both the lunar and earth orbital Particle Beam weapons of the Soviet Union must now be regarded as fully operational and tested. But the lunar Particle Beam test was scarcely completed before tests began with yet another secret Soviet weapon!

Last month I reminded you of the lightning pace of weapons advancement that was still publicly visible up until the early 1960's; but at the secret level, military technology was advancing even faster. As early as 1962, top military officers were seriously worried about a future threat to America that was

then already visible on the technical horizon. This threatened future development consisted of space platforms capable of levitating in stationary positions over our major cities or other strategic locations. These platforms would not be in orbit like normal earth satellites; instead, they would actually hover for long periods of time over a single spot. This cannot be done with orbiting satellites except for those stationed over the earth's equator about 22,000 miles out in space. So the United States already had the capability long ago to build these hovering platforms if desired, manning them with forty-man crews who would remain aboard for two months at a time. Therefore it was obvious that some day the Soviet Union would also develop this capability, and our military leaders wanted to be in a position to interdict any Soviet platforms that might some day invade the space over our country. But their urgent pleas for authority and funds to develop a defense against the expected threat of floating platforms, were rudely turned aside—they didn't fit in with the two-pronged program for world military domination that I explained for you last month. On the surface, America was to be gradually stripped of its known weaponry; while in total secrecy, the moon program was to provide America's secret rulers with the unadmitted ability to destroy the Soviet Union in a final double-cross.

Now it's 15 years later, the grand design of our secret rulers lies in ruins—shattered less than three months ago by Russia's upset victory in the Battle of the Harvest Moon on September 27. The men and women of America's secret moon colony in Copernicus Crater lie entombed where they died, bombarded by a Soviet neutron Particle Beam weapon orbiting the earth—and now, the Soviet Union controls the moon and from it the earth. Furthermore, spurred on by the danger of losing the decisive Particle Beam race, the Kremlin has spent fantastic amounts of money to develop a bewildering array of military weapons of every type. Wherever possible they have borrowed and exploited whole technologies developed in the West at our cost. They have bought critical hardware to fill gaps in their own technology, paying for it with United States financed loans guaranteed by American taxpayers. They have contracted for western multi-national corporations to build whole manufacturing facilities in Russia—factories that are unparalleled here at home; and, relieved of the need to develop so many things for themselves, they have been able to concentrate on advanced projects that leapfrog ahead of our own technology in certain areas. And one of these areas is the hovering space platform, which certain of our military leaders were worried about 15 years ago.

For many years the Soviet Union has led the world in the field of high-energy physics and in many areas of advanced mathematics as well. This enabled them to win the race for the Particle Beam weapon, and has also enabled them to develop a hovering space platform design that operates on more advanced principles than those our military anticipated 15 years ago.

The Soviet hovering-platform concept is built around a branch of physics most people have never even heard of called Electrogravitics. At the present time the Soviet Union is using electrogravitic vehicles both on the moon and in space close to earth. Theoretically these vehicles will some day be able to travel directly between earth and the moon and even over inter-planetary distances, but the transition from the gravitational field of the earth to that of the moon, among other things, is potentially hazardous so this is not being done yet. Instead, rockets are being used by Soviet cosmonauts to travel between the earth and the moon, but the electrogravitic levitation is being used on the moon itself. The electrogravitic

vehicles developed so far by the Soviet Union are still very crude—they can lift themselves vertically up or down, using their levitation field they produce, but have to use small rocket motors to move sideways; but crude or not, the Soviet Union now has these hovering space platforms and we do not; nor do we have any means of combating them, since our secret masters have refused ever since 1962 to allow any means of defense to be developed.

I can now reveal that the Kremlin has begun deploying hovering space platforms over the United States, and elsewhere, armed with Particle Beam weapons. AT THIS MOMENT SEVEN (7) SOVIET HOVERING SPACE PLATFORMS ARE ALREADY ON STATION OVER NORTH AMERICA AND THE WATERS NEARBY!

Platform No. 1 is hovering 672 miles above a spot in the Atlantic Ocean about 170 miles east of Charleston, So. Car. No. 2 is 821 miles above a spot in the Pacific 256 miles southwest of Los Angeles, California. No. 3 is floating 784 miles above a spot about 42 miles west of the so-called Four Corners of Utah, Colorado, Arizona, and New Mexico. No. 4 is 821 miles directly above the intersection of the borders of Idaho, Montana, and Canada. No. 5 is hovering 597 miles above a spot that is about 50 miles east-northeast of Denver, Colorado. No. 6 is 560 miles above Illinois over a spot about 80 miles southwest of Chicago and 50 miles east of Peoria. No. 7 is at the same altitude, 560 miles, over a spot about 10 miles northwest of Morgantown, West Virginia, at the border of southwest Pennsylvania.

The first four platforms are manned, the other three, launched more recently, are still being checked out by remote control prior to being manned by crews who will be carried there by electrogravitic shuttle.

Early this month on December 2, 1977, the crew of Soviet Platform No. 1 received the orders they had been waiting for from Moscow. They were to commence de-focused beam tests. A de-focused beam expands out over a broader and broader area as it flashes through space; and as a result, when the broad beam strikes the atmosphere, most of the energy is spent in the air itself. (This is the exact opposite of the situation on November 19 when the lunar Particle Beams created tight shafts of energy that passed through the Indian cyclone to strike the sea with great power.) The crew adjusted their Particle Beam weapon to de-focus the beam to a prescribed amount, then at approximately 10:00 A.M. they aimed their weapon at a spot in the sea about 50 miles off the South Carolina coast and fired. The air itself over the ocean east of South Carolina was made to explode with the force of a hundred tons of TNT. Along the South Carolina coast thousands of people heard the tremendous rumble from the blast at sea, dishes rattled, and some windows broke. At the Lamont-Doherty Geological Laboratory north of New York City, acoustic monitoring instruments jumped off scale. Everyone who heard it wondered what had happened. About 3:45 that afternoon, the crew of Platform No. 1 were ready for a second test shot. The target area this time was the sea off the New Jersey coast—650 miles to the north-northeast of Platform No. 1. The Particle Beam weapon had been re-adjusted to compensate for the greater distance involved, and then it was fired. At points along the coast from Cape May, New Jersey, to Connecticut, thousands heard the powerful blast as more dishes rattled and more windows broke. Again acoustic monitors were driven off scale. On December 15, Platform No. 1 began firing again. At least five blasts were fired into the air over the Atlantic that day. On December 20, just two days ago, still more blasts took place; but the major news media had begun to treat the whole

matter as if it were a joke. Most Americans do not live on the east coast, of course, and have not heard these explosions for themselves. But listen to these words that a housewife in Manhattan used to describe one of the explosions to me: "It was a bright sunny day and my older kids were in school. I was at home when suddenly there was a tremendous, tremendous boom. It sounded like it could have been next door, or it could have been a million miles away—you just couldn't tell. It was a low, thundering, deep, all-encompassing noise. It sounded like a bomb, but I thought it might be an earthquake. I grabbed the kids, my younger kids who were at home, and ran to the wall. I glanced at the clock and it was just after 1:00 o'clock. I waited to see what else would happen, but nothing did. I turned on the radio to find out what had happened, but there was nothing on the radio, nothing about what had happened. The kids in school were all scared. The teacher said: 'It's Con-Edison.' But of course if it had been Con-Edison, the whole neighborhood would have blown up. It just sounded as if something had hit the bottom of the earth."

Soviet acts of intimidation are becoming more frequent and more vicious. Only last night around 7:00 P.M. another series of so-called mystery explosions were heard off the east coast, and only today two grain elevators—one in Louisiana, the other in Mississippi—exploded within hours of one another. The first explosion took place this morning, December 22, at the huge Continental Grain Company elevator on the west bank of the Mississippi River, a few miles upstream from downtown New Orleans. Eye witnesses said: "It went up like an H-bomb." The ground shook for several seconds as though in an earthquake, a huge mushroom cloud stretched perhaps a mile into the air, and debris from the structure kept falling like feathers into the river. The entire facility, storing $100,000,000 worth of grain, was ruined and there were scores injured, perhaps two dozen killed. The portion of the elevator nearest the river was completely blown off.

My friends, when I resumed recording my Audioletter last August with issue No. 25, I warned that there were 158 Soviet nuclear mines—that is, small H-bombs—buried under water along the Mississippi River. The destruction of the grain elevator near New Orleans this morning resulted from the detonation of the first of these bombs, which was located in the River near the south end of the loading dock. Other Soviet nuclear mines are still waiting to be exploded within a few miles of that location. One is just across the river from the site of today's explosion in an area known as Carrolton Bend. Another is about a mile in the upstream direction from the ruined grain elevator under the southeast end of the Huey P. Long Bridge. Looking downstream, another Soviet nuclear mine is lurking in the water beneath the Greater New Orleans bridge. Further down stream there is one at the entrance to Chalmette Ship Wharf No. 2. There are two in the inner harbor navigation canal—one just north of the lock, and another about three-quarters of a mile north of that. And not only is the River mined—for example, there is a nuclear mine in Lake Pontchartrain near the south end of the Pontchartrain causeway. It has now been four months since I revealed the situation in the Mississippi River. Since that time I have never been contacted by a single official having jurisdiction of any kind along the Mississippi River to find out more about the situation. No one has made the slightest effort to take action, and now many have lost their lives and many more are injured. About two hours later, the second grain elevator suddenly exploded in Tupelo, Mississippi. Like the first, it was destroyed by a Soviet nuclear mine; but Tupelo is not on a river, and the mine was buried in the ground nearby.

Having first sabotaged America's water resources, then important governmental and military sites, the Soviet agents are still criss-crossing our land unhampered and far advanced in sabotaging our food-warehousing facilities. Major grain elevators throughout the Midwest, the Great Plains, and other grain-producing areas, have been mined already like the one that exploded today at Tupelo, Miss.

My friends, how long will we continue to just wait and see? How many will die before the rest of us open our eyes to the truth as it really is? Will it go on this way until the day destitute survivors of Nuclear War One are picking their way through the smoking ruins of America with 160,000,000 dead?

Topic #2—Last May in Audioletter No. 24 I quoted at length from the warnings of General George Keegan, who retired at the beginning of this year as the Chief of Air Force Intelligence. Gen. Keegan is as great a patriot as he is an intelligence analyst, and it was he who first warned America that Russia was developing the awesome Particle Beam weapon. Earlier this month, on December 14, General Keegan was interviewed on the Bob Snyder radio show, Station WDCL in Clearwater, Florida. General Keegan described the bleak military picture we now confront in graphic terms. As his final question to General Keegan, Bob Snyder asked General Keegan: "You already said that the Russians could possibly capture Europe in 36 hours. If war broke out between the United States and Russia, I said 'if'—who would win?" General Keegan's answer was: "There is no question in my mind that the Soviet Union would win." (For more information about General Keegan's comments, I strongly suggest that you write to Mr. Snyder directly. He publishes a very timely and informative newsletter, and you can write to him at:

The Bob Snyder Newsletter, Box 15,

Safety Harbor, Florida, zip 33572)

For those who are willing to open their eyes and see, more and more bits of the truth are surfacing here and there that point to our true situation; but so far only one major newspaper, the CHICAGO TRIBUNE, has seen fit to do an in-depth job of alerting its readers to the possible magnitude of the silent war that is already going on. When I revealed the Soviet underwater missile crisis of 1976 during July and August of that year, I alerted you to the major emphasis that the Soviet Union now puts on its navy. And in a Sunday edition earlier this month, the CHICAGO TRIBUNE ran a series of articles in the special report section (Note: Section 2 "Perspective/Business") entitled "UNDERSEA WARFARE." Originally the articles were to have run over a period of days beginning on December 7, the anniversary of Pearl Harbor; but rather than run the risk of being pressured to halt the series after it began, the TRIBUNE had the courage to run them all at once on Sunday, December 4, 1977. I strongly recommend that you

go to your library and read the CHICAGO TRIBUNE articles on"Undersea Warfare" in their entirety, and read them closely, my friends.

To give you some idea of what you will find, I'll now quote some passages from the various articles including both the special report section and the lead article, which appeared on page 1:

"The cold, dark war underseas is an expensive and essential element of allied military planning at all levels. Occasionally its muffled sounds have reached the ears of the public, but not often. The underseas war is rigged for silent running." "The reason the ASW (Anti Submarine Warfare) programs are cloaked in

so much secrecy, officials said, is that defending the sea has become the weakest link in the chain of American preparation for both conventional and nuclear war." Two paragraphs later: "The high stakes involved have also produced a continuing mini-war on and below the high seas as ships, submarines, and planes of the United States and its allies fence with Soviet forces testing each other's systems. One arena for these so-far bloodless encounters is the North Atlantic, where the U.S. has positioned its most effective ASW forces and equipment." Later in the same article: "But it was learned that the system is far from completely effective. Frequently, U.S. hunters lose Soviet submarines after tracking them for a while. As a result, the U.S. command is confident it knows how many Soviet submarines are at sea, but little confidence about their whereabouts."

I might mention, my friends, that 2-1/2 years ago, in May 1975, Admiral Gorshkoff, the head of the Soviet navy, declared that the Soviet Union has solved the problem of tracking and neutralizing our submarines. In September 1976 I revealed that a Soviet missile-planting mini-submarine had become trapped in Chesapeake Bay due to a mechanical malfunction. I urged that it be captured by the United States Navy and the incident used to expose to the whole world the Soviet preparations for surprise nuclear attack. But as I reported the following month in Audioletter No. 17, President Gerald Ford knuckled under to Soviet demands in the Red Friday Agreement of October 1, 1976, and the Soviet Navy was allowed to enter Chesapeake Bay under cover of night to retrieve the mini-sub, whose crew had died by then. The very idea that a Soviet submarine could penetrate so deeply into American territorial waters, struck some of my listeners as incredible at the time; and the idea that we would let them get away with it, may have seemed even more far-fetched to those who do not understand what is really going on behind the scenes .

But listen now to quotations from the CHICAGO TRIBUNE page 1 lead story about undersea warfare by Jim Coates and Jack Fuller. The headline is: "U.S., Soviet subs prowling dangerous waters." "United States spy submarines have been penetrating Soviet territorial waters for the last 30 months despite a widespread belief inside the government that the controversial maneuvers had stopped, sources have told the TRIBUNE." Two paragraphs later, after assigning "Holystone" as the code name for the program: "On one occasion before the 1975 disclosures, the TRIBUNE learned, a U.S. spy submarine was temporarily grounded beneath the busy port of Vladivostok. Holystone critics attempted to demonstrate the seriousness of the penetrations by speculating what American reaction would be if a Soviet submarine were discovered aground in San Diego Harbor. While few details were available about the Vladivostok incident, sources said it apparently occurred when the vessel was running on low power to avoid detection and struck the harbor bottom." Further on: "Intelligence insiders said that the Russians have known about the U.S. missions for years even when they were carried out under tight security. Because the Soviets have never publicly complained about the U.S. undersea forays, some analysts have suggested that a similar Russian probing of American sea space is under way." And one more quotation: "Several former government officials agreed to shed light on the silent battles under the seas. Some said they were willing to speak in an effort to illustrate the dangers of the current situation."

My friends, the undersea bombs and missiles I've told you about now for well over a year multiply these dangers many times over. So do their close relatives, the underwater mines that are now planted all around the United States as well as in other

countries. But what makes them most deadly is the failure to take counteractive measures. It's now been proven that undersea missiles and bombs as well as underwater nuclear mines planted near our dams can be located and removed, given the proper equipment and the will to use it. Last month I warned that the Kensico Reservoir, Tarrytown Reservoir, and Pocantico Lake north of New York City all contain Soviet nuclear mines, as did the Hudson River near the east end of the Tappan Zee Bridge. On December 7, I received an important call from an official of Westchester County. It was only the first call, but for once someone was taking the threat seriously. Within days, action was quietly being taken to find and remove the bombs in the three bodies of water, and by late last week I received word that all three had been successfully located and removed. Meanwhile, the so-called Federal Dam Inspection Program has suddenly shifted into high gear, providing a perfect opportunity for the Army Corps of Engineers to find and remove many more nuclear mines nationwide. So far I can only confirm that Westchester County, the home of the Rockefellers, has benefitted from such quick action.

As for the undersea cobalt bombs that now dot the ocean floor worldwide, the Union of South Africa has become the first nation to take action. In late September, I informed the government through intermediaries of the locations of 10 Soviet cobalt bombs planted off the South African coast. They were planted along the coast from a point about 200 miles northwest of Cape Town, around the Cape of Good Hope, and around to the east to a point about 160 miles east-northeast of Durban. I also relayed the locations of two bombs within South Africa—one near Johannesburg, the other close to Kimberley. The South African government is taking measures to remove these bombs, and so far four bombs from Cape Town to Port Elizabeth have been found and removed. That's the good news, my friends; but the bad news is that nowhere is the public being let in on what is happening. As a result, it's only a matter of time until Soviet agents secretly replace the bombs that have been secretly removed from the two reservoirs and the lake in Westchester County—just as the Soviet Navy has always replaced undersea missiles wherever they were picked up. By the same token, bombs secretly removed by South Africa will eventually be replaced.

The end of all this secret jockeying is demonstrated by the current plight of the United States, and now Great Britain as well. Over a year ago the United States Navy was forced to cease and desist from removing each round of Soviet undersea missiles from our territorial waters as they were planted. Now over 200 short-range Soviet nuclear missiles infest our territorial waters, including over 50 in the Great Lakes. Great Britain held out for a full year longer than the United States, but she too has finally succumbed. For a year and more the Royal Navy kept locating and extracting Soviet undersea missiles from her own waters, but this fact unfortunately was never made public officially. America's disastrous loss of the Space Battle of the Harvest Moon in late September rendered the situation untenable, and in early October British Foreign Minister David Owen went to Moscow to capitulate; and now as a result, the British Isles are surrounded by no fewer than 60 Soviet underwater missiles—52 around England, Wales, and Scotland, and 8 around Ireland. As in August 1976, Great Britain is once again more densely targeted by Soviet undersea missiles than any other spot on earth; and Britain, the only other power to join the United States and the Soviet Union in the so-called SALT talks, is now joining the United States in the process of surrender through disarmament. The badly weakened NATO Alliance is now in the process of being neutralized and dismantled completely. For years the growing

might of the Warsaw Pact nations has been tipping the military balance in Europe ever more heavily against NATO, but the process that is now splitting and destroying NATO is not the Warsaw Pact threat. The coup de grace is being delivered by the controlled Carter administration. Obediently doing as it is told by the Soviet Union, the Carter administration is abandoning NATO, and the Europeans know it.

Very much the same process had been planned anyway under the Rockefeller grand design that I've detailed for you in the past. But now, since the Rockefeller plans unraveled in late September, the Soviet Union is in control; and like a judo throw that enables a person to use his opponent's strength to defeat him, the Soviet Union is now using the Rockefeller brothers' own machinations against them. NATO badly needs the ground-launched Cruise Missile in order to offset the sheer numerical superiority of Warsaw Pact forces. Originally, the Cruise Missile was intended to be what is called a theater weapon, whether used in the air, on the ground, or at sea. For that purpose the Cruise Missile would be very useful; but in order to provide an excuse for the scrapping of the B-l Bomber, a true strategic weapon system, the image of the Cruise Missile was upgraded to that of a fearsome new strategic weapon, which it is not. And now, the range of the Cruise Missile is being restricted in the SALT talks so as to cripple its effectiveness. Our NATO allies are watching helplessly as the Carter administration bargains away their dwindling hopes for continued survival. The same is true of the Neutron Bomb which has been given an image that makes it very hard for European politicians to defend to its public. Yet NATO military planners see it as the only effective way to erase the ability of the Warsaw Pact to roll over their countries and conquer them in a blitzkrieg. The massive armored might of the Warsaw Pact forces would be neutralized by the Neutron Bomb because the radiation it produces would penetrate the armor plate and incapacitate or kill the crews inside, and they would not lay waste their own countries in the process of defending them if the Neutron Bombs were used. But Radio Moscow hammers away every day against the Neutron Bomb, and the Carter administration is now throwing away the right to give NATO the Neutron Bomb in the SALT talks. Meanwhile the security of western Europe grows more precarious by the day. Certain forces within the CIA have already lit the fuse that is intended to make the Middle East explode into war by programming President Sadat of Egypt to seek a separate peace with Israel. At the same time, reports have reached the West of a rare conference in Moscow of the Soviet Union's top military leaders in Europe, the Far East, and around the Soviet frontiers. The entire purpose of the conference was to alert all Soviet forces to be on continuous alert to go to war at a moment's notice.

Events are moving steadily forward to the stage of the horrendous act of terrorism which I warned last March which will throw all three major religions into turmoil while triggering a war. Consider these words of Israeli Prime Minister Begin on Sunday, December 18, just a few days ago. Appearing on the CBS program "Face the Nation" Begin said, "If we reach an agreement, as I hope we shall, then I would suggest that President Carter invites both President Sadat and myself to come to Washington and then we shall be, let me say, a cycle of friendship and faith—a Christian President, a Moslem leader, and the Jewish Prime Minister—and announce to the world 'Peace unto you.'"

When war comes in the Middle East, the Soviet Union now plans to pick up all the pieces yet leave the United States to receive the blame of world opinion for helping bring about the war. The Carter administration is not master of its own house, and has now been drawn into position of being a party to the separate peace

negotiations that are leading to war. Radio Moscow, meanwhile, is speaking out continually against the treachery that has divided the Arab world as never before. When the Middle East war comes, it will cripple the heart of Europe which depends on the Middle East for most of its oil. It will be the final straw for western Europe, which will fall into Russia's hands like a ripe plum, either by military invasion or by going the way of Finland and tacitly joining the Soviet sphere of influence. Southern Africa will be dealt a mortal blow as well, cut off from European supplies and support and 90% of its oil from Iran. And the Middle East itself, thanks to the unceasing Soviet denunciations of what is happening now, will slip back under more complete Soviet domination than ever before. It will be another Vietnam for the United States, only far worse. NATO will be no more; and after expending American lives and losing billions of military hardware, America's only reward will be the fruits of a cut-off of oil from the Middle East. Manipulation of the resulting shortages will make them seem far worse than they really are, and emergency economic controls will be imposed by our outlaw government to grind us all down under ever more complete control.

My friends, the situation is grave. The only significant reservoir of patriotism and loyalty to America that still exists at the top levels of our government is in the ranks of the military. In the Soviet underwater missile crisis of 1976, it was the Joint Chiefs of Staff—not Congress and not the President—who were responsible for preventing a nuclear Pearl Harbor attack on America. General George S. Brown, the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs, took action only within the constraints of law, but it was he who argued mightily and successfully for President Ford to overrule Henry Kissinger and give the order for the Soviet missiles to be removed. The Kremlin can smell the scent of victory and does not intend to be tripped up again, so the Carter administration has been ordered by Russia to dismantle the Joint Chiefs of Staff by making drastic changes that will destroy its effectiveness. Preparations to do this are now underway, and already articles critical of the Joint Chiefs are appearing in order to prepare the public to accept any such change without giving it a second thought. If anything at all is to be done to arrest the headlong tumble of our country into disaster, it will have to include superb strategy and expert coordination of our weakened military forces. Once the Joint Chiefs of Staff structure is gone, that chance will be gone with it. But unless the "Wait and See" attitude of many Americans changes very quickly, the Joint Chiefs of Staff are finished.

Topic #3—AMERICA'S BETRAYAL INTO A NEW BOLSHEVIK REVOLUTION

My friends, recently I have challenged the four Rockefeller brothers, now that their grand plan has been upset by the Soviet Union, to turn over a new leaf. I have urged them to cast their lot with us, the people of the United States of America, and to begin using their wealth and resources for the good of us all. Even at this late date a sincere new beginning might enable their names to go down in history with honor instead of with a curse; but I must tell you now, my friends, that we have their answer. I have told you in the past about the role of the Rockefeller empire in helping to finance the Bolshevik Revolution to take over Russia in 1917, and I have told you about the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance that grew out of that, and since the spring of 1976 I have been chronicling for you the collapse of

this alliance in mutual double-cross. What an earliergeneration spawned has gotten out of control of the

third generation. But having learned nothing from this, the four Rockefeller brothers are now preparing to attempt a repeat performance—that is, a new Bolshevik Revolution right here in

the United States of America.

Last month I let you in on the secret of understanding the Kremlin today. The Kremlin is now run, not by the atheistic Communists known as Bolsheviks but self-proclaimed Spiritual Communists. Unlike the old Bolsheviks, who were always internationally minded and cooperated with the Rockefeller empire, the Spiritual Communists are strong nationalists who want Soviet Russia to rule the world. As the alliance between the Rockefellers and the Soviets has been disintegrating, so too has the internal alliance between the old Bolsheviks and Spiritual Communists in Russia. More and more the old Bolsheviks are being expelled from Russia, only to be welcomed into the United States with open arms; and the key federal regulatory agencies which govern Americans' lives and commerce are rapidly being packed with hundreds and hundreds of these arrivals from the Soviet Union. Just as outsiders sealed Russia's fate in 1917, the stage is being set here and now in the United States for a new Bolshevik Revolution. The old Bolsheviks flooding into our country from the Soviet Union are bitter enemies of the current regime in Russia. The positions of power and control which they once enjoyed there have been lost. The Rockefeller brothers too are now the Kremlin's bitter enemies, so the alliance between them is a natural one, continuing in fact, an alliance that used to link Washington and Moscow. The Rockefellers believe that the flood of Bolsheviks into our government is the fastest way they have of rooting out the large number of Soviet agents whom they placed in our government in the first place and who still take their orders from Moscow. But, my friends, this unholy alliance within our own land, while it is directed against Russia, is also directed against you and me. The freedom we love, our Constitution, our entire way of life is to be destroyed and replaced by the Bolshevik system of total control over our lives.

My friends, this is hardly the kind of message that I enjoy recording just three days before celebrating the birth of our Lord, Jesus the Christ, but it is He who said, "...you shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free." (John 8:32) And my Christmas wish for you and your loved ones is FREEDOM, now and in the future. Without truth, freedom is impossible, but it is easy to be free once you know the Truth.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless and protect each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #30

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is January 28, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 30.

One evening last spring the Beverly Hills Supper Club in Southgate, Kentucky, was packed with customers. They were enjoying a good time, and the troubles of the world outside seemed remote and forgotten for the moment. But in a room away from the crowds, fire broke out. It soon became apparent that the fire would spread to the rest of the Club. Someone went on stage to warn the customers to leave. He called for attention, and warned them in a calm voice that fire had broken out in another part of the Club. He cautioned them against panic but urged everyone to get up immediately and leave in an orderly manner while there was time to do so. A few people listened, took him at his word or at least decided 'Better Safe than Sorry'

and got up and left. But to his astonishment many did not listen at all, and most of those who did listen just laughed and went back to their merrymaking—after all, they could not see any flames nor even any smoke. And so the man redoubled his warnings, pleading with them to leave before the fire arrived—but to no avail. A few who had doubted at first now realized that he was serious, and got out; but many continued to ignore him. No flames, no smoke, so how could there be a fire. But then suddenly there was smoke, and a moment later—fire! The fire spread rapidly, panic broke out as people surged toward the doors. Soon the Beverly Hills Supper Club was a raging inferno, and the loss of life was staggering. Meanwhile the few who had heard and heeded the warnings, stood outside looking in awe at the horrible nightmare before them.

My friends, I feel today like the man who tried in vain to give that warning to the patrons of the Beverly Hills Supper Club. Five years ago when I wrote my book "The Conspiracy Against the Dollar" there was still time for an aroused American public to stave off disaster. Since that time I have tried through Congressional testimony, radio and television Talk Shows, lectures and tape recordings, to wake up America in time. A few have listened and have even taken action in every way they could to help, and that makes the whole effort worthwhile to me personally; but most of us today will never bring ourselves to really believe our nation is threatened by the fires of nuclear war until we begin to be singed by the flames.

As I speak to you today, the flames are already licking at our feet. The forces which were set in motion by our secret rulers decades ago, have suddenly turned against them in recent months. Now they are trying frantically to stop some of the things they have launched, but it is too late. While they have been gambling over the years, the rulers in the Kremlin have been playing a shrewd game of chess, and now checkmate is upon us. What's more, a very important shift in power within the Kremlin ruling circles has taken place in recent weeks, whose effect is to accelerate the possible demise of our once great land.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—THE ONE-WORLD PLAN OF OUR SECRET RULERS GONE AWRY; Topic #2—THE AGGRESSIVE NEW POLICIES OF THE KREMLIN; and Topic #3—THE SOVIET READINESS TO POLICE THE WORLD.

Topic #1—It has now been a year and a half since the Soviet Union launched its all-out military double-cross of our own secret rulers. It all began with the Soviet underwater missile crisis of 1976, which I first made public in Audioletter No. 14 for July of that year. By two months later, I was able to detail for you how public exposure of the Soviet threat, even though that exposure was limited, played a key role in preventing for the moment a surprise nuclear attack by the Soviet Union. But once that attack was averted, our secret rulers tried to patch up their alliance with Moscow, thinking wrongly that they could keep the upper hand with the Russians until they had served their purpose. That alliance was part of the grand design, the long-range commitment to create a dictatorial One-World Government that secretly was forged early in this century. So our un-elected rulers kept right on trying to keep the limping alliance on its feet until disaster struck four months ago. On September 27, 1977, America lost the still secret but historic Space Battle of the Harvest Moon. Our rulers' military trump card, the secret American moon base in Copernicus Crater, was put out of action by the Soviet Union using an orbital neutron Particle Beam weapon. Suddenly, the military upper hand had shifted decisively to the Soviet Union. Now the long-standing

plans and preparations for America to be ravished by depression, dictatorship, and war are coming to fruition, but under circumstances drastically changed from those our rulers foresaw. Our rulers are trying to turn some of the events they have set in motion into new channels, and are trying to stop others altogether; but the momentum is too great and they have waited too long. Blinded by their own greed and lust for power, it is as if the driver of a car traveling 60 miles an hour suddenly saw a cliff 10 feet ahead. He might slam on the brakes and slow down slightly, or he might turn the steering wheel to change the car's direction, but it would make no difference—he would still go over the cliff.

Today the American economy is turning increasingly sour by the day. The slow motion crash of the Stock Market that began three years ago is speeding up. Stagflation is deepening as unemployment remains high while inflation gathers steam. The dollar is sick, sinking almost daily on international currency markets. Meanwhile gold, which United States Treasury propaganda has declared to be obsolete for monetary purpose, is on its tortuous way up. The conspiracy against the dollar by our own rulers, which I described in my book five years ago, is now yielding fruits of international monetary unrest, potential protectionist measures, and economic controls. Angry coal miners are extending their strike so long in the midst of an unusually severe winter that Utilities are beginning to run low on fuel. And now the nation's farmers, caught between high prices for what they buy and low prices for what they sell, are also striking. Originally these and other economic disruptions were to be used to help set the stage for implementation of a corporate socialist new Constitution that has already been written for America; but now there's no time for such niceties, and our rulers are preparing to use these things to help launch a new Bolshevik revolution right here in the United States. And to help do the job, already over 15,000 of the old Bolshevik faction who are now being expelled from the Soviet Union, have flooded into the United States—all in a period of only 3 months since the Battle of the Harvest Moon. Last month I explained why this is being done. Meanwhile the aftermath of America's catastrophic loss of the Battle of the Harvest Moon is creating violent cross currents and confusion, especially in matters of defense and foreign policy. On one hand, the controlled Carter administration is trying to keep Moscow happy by seeming to comply with Soviet orders to dismantle our defense establishment under the banner of the Strategic Arms Limitation Talks (SALT). Yet, on the other hand, our rulers are doing everything possible to stall while trying to hurriedly throw together something of significance to counter the overwhelming Soviet military might. As a result, contradictions are all around us these days. On one hand a government study suddenly emerges announcing the conclusion that nuclear war is un-winnable. Then Jimmy Carter reveals a budget that reflects this thinking with great cuts in critical strategic areas. And on the other hand, the funding of tactical weapons which cannot attack the Soviet Union is increased and the package is sold to the public as the NATO budget. And while Jimmy Carter is busy abandoning NATO, by throwing away things the Europeans would like to have, Secretary of State Vance visits Turkey and Greece in an effort supposedly to shore up and strengthen NATO's eastern flank. And in the Middle East our rulers are now trying to halt the diabolical plan to ignite war which they themselves set in motion; and in this new situation with the alliance with the Soviets gone, a Middle East war would be damaging to them instead of helpful. The State Department is now trying to stop the sequence of events set in motion by certain circles in the CIA which are leading to war. Most of all, they want to deny to the Soviet Union any pretext for a larger conflict that will

destroy the United States. If the Kremlin were still being run by the cautious rules of Leonid Brezhnev, our rulers might buy some time with these efforts; but in recent weeks a dramatic and important change has taken place, and the result may well be to cut short the pathetic behind-the-scenes maneuverings of our secret rulers.

Topic #2—THE AGGRESSIVE NEW POLICIES OF THE KREMLIN

For 13 years and more Leonid Brezhnev headed the Soviet Union. When his own Cuban missile adventure under the authority of Nikita Khrushchev failed and humiliated Russia in 1962, Brezhnev adopted a policy of cautious but determined step-by-step advancement in Soviet power. As the boss of the Kremlin, this is the approach Brezhnev followed patiently and doggedly. The crowning stroke of this approach was so-called Detente—a lie, which our own rulers wrongly thought would ultimately work to their own benefit in the struggle for world domination in secret alliance with the Soviet Union. But as early as 1973, Brezhnev had to defend his patient detente approach to a strong faction in the Politburo, who were becoming increasingly impatient to throw off the charade. They wanted to subdue the hated United States once and for all by swift and sudden military force; but Brezhnev successfully defended his own approach, pointing out that by pretending to be genuinely in league with America's ruling circles, the Soviet Union was being handed money, food, technology, and territory at a tremendous rate at no cost other than continued patience. Most telling of all, he reminded them of the many Soviet programs which were developing advanced military technology to leapfrog past the United States—programs which were unknown to America's ruling circles. In 1973 these were not yet ready but soon they would be deployed, tested, and produced in sufficient numbers to create a decisive shift in the military power balance. Brezhnev got his way but not without a continuing undercurrent of pressure from the KGB and military complex in the Kremlin. They were especially nervous about the secret American Moon Base for the reasons I explained in detail last September. They were afraid that Russia might fail to beat the United States in the crucial Particle Beam weapons race with disastrous results, and they knew that the CIA was planting huge super-ICBM missiles under the sea to threaten the Soviet Union from practically invulnerable resting places in the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. As I revealed in Audioletter No. 26, they knew that ultimately the secret game plan of America's real rulers called for a double-cross and the destruction of the Soviet Union after America had been brought to its knees in a carefully programmed nuclear war. Finally a blend of viewpoints became the guide for Kremlin policy. Brezhnev's program called Detente would be continued to extract maximum benefit from it. Meanwhile preparations would also be set in motion for a first strike, a surprise attack before the secret American Moon Base could possibly be ready with its planned Particle Beam installations. The target date was June 1976. It would not be an ICBM attack but an attack with zero warning time from within the territorial waters of the United States, and the principal targets would be naval targets. It would be a strike from an unexpected direction with an unexpected strategy; and afterward the entire conventional nuclear arsenal of missiles, planes, and submarines would still be in reserve, discouraging any American attempt at retaliation.

The Soviet underwater missile crisis of 1976 is history now, even though the Government still has never told you about it. My Audioletters from No. 14 onward chronicle the details of the crisis and how public exposure ruined the crucial element of surprise, preventing the attack at that time. But I have also

detailed for you the manner in which then President Gerald Ford knuckled under and threw away what turns out to have been America's last chance in a military sense. A combination of public exposure, honesty, and firmness could still have prevented war because the coming decisive shift in the military balance had not yet taken place. That chance is now gone forever. Prompt actions of the right kind by the controlled Carter administration beginning a year ago might still have been able to prevent disaster, but instead the administration has been doing all the wrong things at breakneck speed. Now Soviet underwater missiles infest our territorial waters including even the Great Lakes. Both Soviet land and underwater nuclear mines, about which I first began warning last April, now are planted ready to destroy dams, reservoirs, riverfront facilities, locks, dams and bridges along our waterways, key governmental and military installations, grain elevators, factories, and other targets. Manned Soviet Cosmos Interceptor Satellites are orbiting the earth armed with Particle Beam weapons, having already demonstrated their ability to destroy our spy and early-warning satellites. The moon now belongs to the Soviet Union, and it bristles with Particle Beam weapons aimed at the earth; and Soviet Hovering Platforms, now all manned and armed with Particle Beam weapons, are floating at this very moment over North America and other select locations worldwide.

Against this background of a decisive, catastrophic shift in the military equation in favor of Russia, an important change has taken place in recent weeks within the Kremlin itself. For over six weeks, since December 8, 1977, Leonid Brezhnev has been virtually out of sight, reportedly due to illness. The story is that he has been weakened by complications from Russian Flu and that this is the reason he has not been meeting with visiting foreign ministers or appearing in public for several weeks. Even a letter was sent to West Germany a few days ago canceling a major visit there by Brezhnev—again, supposedly, because he needs rest. But, my friends, Leonid Brezhnev did not merely have complications from the "flu" but also acute leukemia and lung cancer as well! By New Year's Day he was completely incapacitated. So for all intents and purposes, the Kremlin leadership is now in the hands of the hawks.

Intelligence sources have noticed in recent weeks that the Kremlin seems to be suddenly more adventuresome, bolder, and unconcerned about what the United States or anyone else may say about their aggressive moves. For example, a massive Soviet airlift of arms to Ethiopia is underway, and the Russians are flying through the air space of any country they choose as if daring anyone to stop it or complain. The reason, my friends, is that now the military and KGB complex are now in control and they are very eager to flex their muscles. They all belong to that secret new ruling circle that controls the Kremlin today I told you about two months ago; but the change in tactics is as dramatic as the contrast between Brezhnev's detente speech and the violent belligerence of his Defense Minister's speech side by side on November 7, 1977, in Red Square. Also as I told you last month, the Soviet campaign of intimidation of America is already underway—and it's increasing!

When I recorded Audioletter No. 29 last month, seven floating platforms armed with Particle Beam weapons had already been deployed over the United States in locations which I gave you. Today there are twelve (12) over American territory, including one each over Hawaii and the Panama Canal plus one over Canada. More about that later. I reviewed in detail last month how Platform No. 1 hovering over the Atlantic Ocean east of Charleston, So. Carolina, used de-focused Particle Beams to

produce violent air blasts or air quakes off Charleston and also off the New Jersey coast. By January 12, earlier this month, Platform No. 1 had moved inland to hover over a spot about 10 miles west of Raleigh, North Carolina, and from there it again created a series of blasts off Charleston described by some witnesses as "the worst yet." The new adventurers in the Kremlin have also begun setting off more and more of the nuclear mines which have been planted all around our country. There are slightly more than 10,000 grain elevators of all sizes and descriptions in the United States. Of these, however, a much smaller number can be considered major elevators and only 89 are export elevators. They are critical components in our nation's food supply.

The day I recorded Audioletter No. 2 9 last month, on December 22, two grain elevators suddenly exploded—one near New Orleans, the other at Tupelo, Miss. Both were caused by Soviet sabotage; and as I pointed out in my tape, the explosion at New Orleans came four months after I warned publicly of the Soviet nuclear mines along the Mississippi River. In the wake of additional grain elevator explosions, we have heard an avalanche of governmental words about low humidity, sparks, and the explosive nature of grain dust. These hazards are real, my friends, but no government official has tried to explain why these hazards which have always existed have never before produced a continuing rash of explosions like those of recent days. What's more, listen to these words of a high Agriculture Department official concerning the huge Continental Grain Company elevator that blew up near New Orleans: "The New Orleans operation was considered one of the cleanest. We were very surprised by that explosion." And the humidity in New Orleans that day was 67%. A grain dust explosion? Who's fooling whom?

I warned you last month that this was only the beginning due to the extensive Soviet sabotage permitted within our country. And in the past month more grain facilities have been destroyed by Soviet sabotage plus other targets. For example:

December 23, 1977, Tonawanda, New York, near Buffalo—early morning explosion and spectacular fire at the Allied Chemical Company plant on the Niagara River, one man seriously injured -SABOTAGE!

December 27, 1977, Galveston, Texas—grain elevator belonging to Farmers Export Grain Company, violent explosion heard 70 miles away, followed by fire, 18 killed - SABOTAGE!

January 19, 1978, Liberty, Missouri—explosion and fire in the grain processing area, Desert Gold Feed Company, 3 killed, 6 critically injured - SABOTAGE!

January 21, 1978, Duluth, Minnesota—Capital Grain Elevator No. 4 on the waterfront at the west tip of Lake Superior, destroyed by explosion and fire in midafternoon - SABOTAGE!

January 23, 1978, near Stevenson, Wash.—huge gas line ruptures with an explosion so violent some people nearby think a war has started; gas pouring from the main creates a torch a mile high and several hundred feet wide towering into the night sky -SABOTAGE!

That same evening, January 23, Albany, Calif., near San Francisco—Alcan Metal Processing Plant explodes violently, huge mushroom cloud rises into the night sky and many witnesses are convinced at first that a bomb has gone off, one man seriously injured - SABOTAGE!

January 25, 1978, near Sioux Falls, So. Dakota—grain elevator destroyed by fire, no injuries - SABOTAGE!

And my friends, there have been many others.

What is the purpose of these acts of sabotage? Let me give you the answer of an expert—he's General J. H. Rothschild, U.S. Army, retired. Quoting from his famous book "Tomorrow's Weapons" published by McGraw-Hill in 1964, and I quote: "Sabotage operations are planned to achieve specific objectives. It does not seem logical, therefore, that in general they would be used during a continuing cold war situation simply for their nuisance value. Rather, they would be used to break down public confidence immediately preceding the outbreak of hostilities, or otherwise tied into an overall design. A sustained campaign of sabotage acts, irregularly dispersed with regard to time and area of occurrence, can produce a constant build-up of public fear and a complete loss of confidence in authority." Thus, my friends, the signs are all around us that we are on the brink of a Soviet surprise attack.

Topic #3—For generations the Statue of Liberty has stood in New York Harbor, beckoning the poor and the oppressed of other lands to America with the lamp of Freedom. Untold millions have sacrificed, struggled, and courted death for the privilege of sailing past her to the Ellis Island Immigration Depot to begin new lives as Americans. In the past as many as 5,000 immigrants in a single day have entered the United States at Ellis Island in the protective shadow of the Statue of Liberty, and for every single one of them it was an experience never to be forgotten. But today, the Statue of Liberty at Ellis Island silently tells a different story. In September 1972 Ellis Island closed its doors to immigrants, and is today a national monument to what used to be. While visitors absorb the silent echoes of a bygone era, Ellis Island waits for the moment when it will be demolished by a Soviet hydrogen bomb, which has already been planted in the dock area. Likewise, the Statue of Liberty now holds aloft not the lamp of Freedom but a torch of WARNING. Within the statue itself another Soviet H-bomb now waits, ready to erase what for millions is the most precious of all symbols of national heritage—the Statue of Liberty. My friends, Soviet saboteurs have planted scores of nuclear mines in the metropolitan New York area, both in the water and on land—and they are still at it, still virtually unhampered.

It has now been nine months since I first revealed the Soviet program of nuclear sabotage in the United States, beginning with major western dams and reservoirs. By last June 1977, Soviet nuclear saboteurs were overrunning our country, without interference except where Canadian authorities caught them north of our border on information relayed by me. As you know, I temporarily suspended recording the Audioletter in an all-out effort to decisively expose and thereby stop the mushrooming Soviet sabotage before it was too late. After a silence of three months, I resumed the Audioletter with issue No. 25 in August 1977. I told you what I had been trying to do with the cooperation of concerned citizens nationwide. I told you of the official inaction, unwillingness to investigate, and other factors that had defeated these efforts; and I alerted you of the great length to which the Soviet sabotage had already gone by then—such as the 158 nuclear mines lurking in the Mississippi River alone, like the one that destroyed the Continental Grain Company grain elevator near New Orleans four months later on December 22, 1977. Now, thanks to Soviet sabotage preparations, grain elevators and other important installations in the United

States are exploding and burning with unprecedented frequency—so much so, in fact, that many of these occurrences are now being minimized and even embargoed in the major news media in order to keep the public as a whole from realizing what is taking place and losing confidence in authority. Meanwhile, the Soviet sabotage campaign has now been allowed to proceed so far that nuclear mines are no longer being placed exclusively at strategic targets. Many are now being planted also in non-strategic psychological targets with little or no direct military or economic importance. Thus the Soviet Union is now preparing to engage in the world's first nuclear terrorism.

To use New York City again as an example, according to my latest intelligence information, there are over 80 Soviet nuclear mines planted already in and around the five boroughs—26 in the water, the rest upon land. Among the targets are: Rockefeller Center, the Empire State Building, United Nations headquarters, Columbia University, Fordham University, Bellevue Medical Center, Central Park Reservoir, and other public buildings. Mines also threaten the George Washington Bridge; all three legs of the Triborough Bridge; the Queens Borough, Manhattan, and Brooklyn Bridges as well as other bridges. Railroad tracks and yards are mined along with several subway stations and the Rapid Transit Station at Yankee Stadium, the Holland and Brooklyn Battery tunnels are mined, La Guardia Airport is threatened by two land mines and a third nearby in Flushing Bay. There is a mine off Willets Point near the Fort Totten Military Reservation, and one near the Naval dry dock at Bayonne, New Jersey. There is one in Long Island Sound near the United States Merchant Marine Academy, and one near the Police Academy Firing Range on Rodman Neck.

But sabotage is only one small part of the massive Soviet effort to get ready to make war on the world's proudest nation. For example, in a speech earlier this month, General Richard Ellis, the head of the United States Strategic Air Command, said: "We are faced with serious concerns over the development and deployment of arms by the USSR. This momentum of growth over the last decade has not been limited to any one system, any one mission, or any one geographical area." To illustrate what he meant, General Ellis referred to the Supersonic Backfire Bomber, the Soviet Ballistic Missile Submarine fleet, the world's largest ICBM force, the huge Soviet Civil Defense program, the tremendous Soviet Air Defense System, the operational Soviet anti-satellite capability, and the huge and growing Soviet Army with new equipment ready to fight nuclear, chemical, biological, or conventional warfare. General Ellis went on to call attention to the great increase in Soviet war-training military exercises during the past year—quote: "This series is the most extensive ever noted, and such activity is now becoming a routine feature of Soviet Force and Command tests. It reflects the expanse and sophistication of the momentum of Soviet military development."

My friends, we often hear soothing words about how backward the Soviet Union is compared to the United States. This is true in the area of commercial goods, which is where we put most of our money and know-how; but when it comes to military and scientific development, it's a different story. We tend to forget that the Soviet Union began surprising us in military technology soon after World War II. In 1949 the USSR handed America a nasty surprise by exploding an atomic bomb years before they were expected to do so. Espionage and help from high places in government and industry played a major role in that surprise, but it still required technological capabilities that were very considerable indeed. Then came Korea and another surprise—our fliers met it in the air, it was called the MiG-15 Fighter. Over a year ago I told the true story of the Sputnik I surprise. We

could have beaten Russia, but we did not. In 1961 there was still another shocking surprise. At an Air Show in Moscow a brand new supersonic twin-engine bomber of advanced design dumbfounded spectators from the West as it roared over their heads. It was unlike anything in the West, and until it flew over, our Intelligence community did not even know it existed. Today this bomber is still operational, and it's called the "Blinder" by NATO. And so it goes, my friends.

By two decades ago Soviet science and military technology were beginning to rival our own, and in some areas were even ahead; and as long as a decade ago highly knowledgeable Americans who visited the Novosibirsk Science City were shaken by what they saw. Elaborate, up-to-the-minute facilities, prosperous surroundings, and a level of scientific expertise that was "kind of scary" - in the words of one such visitor. I have told you in the past how this all came about. It was built up artificially using massive transfusions of technology and economic aid from the West, primarily the United States; but the fact remains it exists, and the Soviet Union is no longer under the thumb of those who brought about this transformation. The Soviet Union is now a great Frankenstein monster, and it's turning on its former masters, our secret rulers, to destroy them; and already the Kremlin is making preparations to police a conquered world.

Last month I revealed that the Soviet Union had begun operational deployment of Floating Platforms over the United States and selected other areas world-wide. These platforms, which are not in orbit, are able to hover in a stationary position over any location they choose, as I explained last month. They are an advanced version of the hovering platforms some of our highest military leaders could see on the technical horizon over 15 years ago. Just as happened with Sputnik I, the United States could have developed such platforms long before the Soviet Union, but did not. Now the Soviets have them, and we do not! The Soviet Floating Platform, armed as it is with Particle Beam weaponry, is called the "Anti-War Machine" by the Kremlin. By this they are referring to the intended role of the Platforms, after the United States is destroyed by nuclear war, in policing the world under Soviet domination. A small hint of what they can do has been provided recently by the mysterious "air quakes" along the east coast of the United States in the past six weeks. As I told you last month, these have been caused by de-focused Particle Beam blasts at sea by Platform No. 1. In focused operation, these Beams can even destroy American ICBMs in their silos !

When I recorded Audioletter No. 29 last month, there were seven Floating Platforms over our country—four of them manned, the other three waiting for crews to arrive by electrogravitic shuttle. Today, the number over the lower 48 states has increased to ten (10) and they are all manned now, as are all the rest that are deployed world-wide. The two platforms which last month were off the coast of southern California and So. Carolina, moved inland early this month to respective positions roughly over Hoover Dam and over North Carolina half way between Fayetteville and Cape Fear. There also has been some shifting of position among the other platforms. As of tonight, all but one are south of the 40th Parallel, which I revealed in May 1976 is the lower boundary of the super-secret Nuclear Safe Zone. There is also a platform over southern Alaska, another over the ocean just west of Oahu, Hawaii, and a third directly over the Panama Canal. Four platforms are on stations over Latin America—one each over Brazil, Argentina, Chile, and Bolivia. In Europe, NATO countries are wringing their hands over whether or not the Carter administration will let them have Cruise Missiles and Neutron

Bombs for self defense against the Warsaw Pact forces. But floating overhead now are a string of three Soviet platforms—one over France, the second over western Hungary, and a third over Turkey. In the Middle East, on-again off-again peace talks are alternating with accusations and name calling. Meanwhile, hovering silently overhead at the northwest tip of Saudi Arabia is a Soviet platform able to strike Israel, Jordan, Lebanon, Egypt, Saudi Arabia, Iraq, and Syria. In southern Africa, shouting over apartheid and majority rule are going on under the eyes of two floating platforms which can now strike targets in Rhodesia and South Africa at will. A third platform is currently stationed over the northern border of Zaire, capable of knocking out the secret West German Particle Beam development installations in Shaba Province, Zaire. A platform is floating near Lahore, Pakistan. Another is over the west coast of India near Bombay; and when Jimmy Carter was just 800 miles away in Delhi early this month, it blasted an Air India Boeing 747 out of the sky, killing all 213 aboard. There are two platforms over Red China—one in the east, the other in the west near the Lop Nor weapons installation. There is a platform over southern Japan, and lately the Japanese are finding the Soviets unbending in negotiations. There's a platform between Indonesia and New Guinea, and there are three over Australia—one in the north, one in the southeast, and one in the west. Finally, there is a platform over the Arctic Ocean northwest of Alaska, and two more over Russia itself for protective purposes. In the past few days the platforms over the United States have started descending to very low altitudes, ranging from 15 to 60 miles. All the other platforms world-wide are remaining at their normal altitudes of several hundred miles, with one exception. The platform near Israel has descended tonight to an altitude of 50 miles. There has been no attempt to intercept any of these platforms.

One week ago the Soviet Union announced the launching of the first in a new series of spacecraft, called "Progress I." Radio Moscow described it as a cargo craft of a new type, a sort of automatic space truck; but a better term would have been space bus. Far from being unmanned, as claimed, Progress I was launched with nine cosmonauts aboard, and the link-up with Salyut 6 is only temporary. Progress I is to be the first component of a mammoth new space-station to be constructed in space, like those the late Dr. Wernher von Braun foresaw 25 years ago.

Few Americans paid much attention to Progress I, but Americans and the world were rocked back on their heels just four days ago by an unpleasant new Soviet surprise. On that day, January 24, 1978, an early morning announcement in Washington said that a Soviet nuclear-powered satellite had crashed in northern Canada, and there were worries that it might have spread deadly radioactive contamination on the ground, in the air, or both; but over and over again, all day long, news reports assured us in breathless terms that there was nothing to get excited about. Even before United States and Canadian search teams were sent to start looking for the remnants of the satellite, National Security Council chief Brzezinski said during his early morning press briefing: "This is not a horror scenario. The chances of a real hazard are small", and yet he also said "We were planning for the worst."

The crashed Soviet satellite known as Cosmos 954 was described by various reports in the news as a navigation satellite, an observation satellite, or simply a military satellite. Finally the government released the official story that it was a spy satellite. So far only the BBC has come close to the truth, calling it a "raider satellite" on January 25. All reports have described it as unmanned; but, my friends, it is manned.

The story of the Cosmos Killer Satellite 954 began four months ago in September 1977. That month in Audioletter No. 2 6 I revealed that the Soviet Union already had two operational Killer Satellites in orbit, and that they had been used. One, as I mentioned then, was Cosmos 929 launched two months earlier on July 17, 1977; the other was Cosmos 954, the satellite that crashed in Canada a few days ago. (For my newer listeners, I should point out that in Audioletter No. 26 I described in detail the newly operational Soviet Killer Satellites. That tape was recorded on September 30, before the government made its first announcement about Soviet Killer Satellites on October 4, 1977. On that day Secretary of Defense Harold Brown stunned reporters with a totally unexpected announcement during a press conference. He said that the Soviet Union now has an operational Killer Satellite capability which can destroy our spy satellites.) Before Cosmos 954 was launched last September, Cosmos 929, the first of Russia's new fleet of Cosmos Interceptors, was already in orbit, undergoing final check-out. Armed with charged Particle Beam weapons these destroy target satellites by causing them to erupt into enormous fireballs, a rash of which were reported around the world for a while starting in late September. Cosmos 954 was also a Killer Satellite, similar to Cosmos 929 except in one respect: Cosmos 954 was armed with a Neutron Particle Beam, and it was intended for a very special task. In September 1977 Cosmos 954 was launched from the Tyura-Tam Cosmodrome in the Soviet Union. Cosmos 954 had been rushed into orbit on a crash program to put it into operation at the earliest possible moment. KGB agents at Diego Garcia, headquarters of then America's secretly continuing Moon Program, had informed the Kremlin that they would have to act fast.

On September 26, 1977, Cosmos Killer Satellite 954 was ready. It began firing its Neutron Particle Beam weapon at the moon, bombarding the American personnel in Copernicus Crater with deadly neutron radiation, just like that produced by a Neutron Bomb. Through the night and into the next day the bombardment continued, interrupted only when the earth blocked Cosmos 954's line of sight to the moon. By late in the day of September 27, 1977, the last astronauts in Copernicus Crater were dead. In a stunning upset, the United States of America had lost the most decisive battle of the 20th Century—the Battle of the Harvest Moon. Cosmos 954 performed well, and did its job in the Battle of the Harvest Moon! But whenever a Particle Beam weapon is fired, it produces a reaction that disturbs the orbit of the satellite from which it is fired. The Soviet Cosmos Interceptors use auxiliary thrusters to correct for this effect; but those aboard Cosmos 954 did not perform perfectly during the Battle of the Harvest Moon, leaving the orbit still needing correction. When these corrections were attempted later, the thrusters malfunctioned; and despite repeated attempts by the crew of Cosmos 954 to find and correct the problem, they were unsuccessful. By early December, NORAD (the North American Air Defense Command) had detected the orbital troubles of Cosmos 954. A top secret project, Operation Morning Light, was set in motion by the National Security Council to get ready for the crash of Cosmos 954 anywhere in the world—and a possible nuclear disaster as a result of the crash. That is why shortly before Christmas, reporters asking the Pentagon about a rumored new Soviet anti-satellite test, got no answers. The National Security Council had clamped a lid on the story. On the morning of January 24, Cosmos 954 re-entered the atmosphere, streaking over Queen Charlotte Island in northern British Columbia to land in the far north of Canada. The crew capsule of Cosmos 954 with its power-pack was designed to survive re-entry, but other parts of the complex satellite were allowed to disintegrate in the

atmosphere. As a result, eye witnesses saw one main object, followed by a trail of burning pieces. The main object, brighter and faster than the rest, was the crew capsule, its heat shield causing the air to be heated white hot. It landed safely, well to the north of Great Slave Lake at coordinates 64-47-27 north, 115-7-30 west. That's about 160 miles north-northwest of Yellowknife and about 120 miles southeast of Port Radium, in an unpopulated area. Cosmos 954 had lost the ability to restore its orbit, but the crew did still have sufficient re-entry control to select a landing site not very different from one in the Soviet Union. (Unlike American spacecraft, Soviet space ships always return to land rather than splashing down the way we do.) The crew have been in contact with Moscow, awaiting rescue. And just as happened in October 1976, when their missile-planting mini-submarine became trapped in Chesapeake Bay, the Soviet Union has again been allowed to recover their stranded military craft without public exposure. A floating platform previously stationed over Ottawa, Canada, picked up the crew and the space capsule this evening at about 7:15 PM, EST. It is now on its way back toward Ottawa, its battle station.

But while the world's eyes have been riveted on the drama in northern Canada, ominous developments have been taking place in the Atlantic, Pacific and Gulf of Mexico. As I say these words, the Soviet Navy is once again forming a three-prong pincer movement on the continental United States. The Atlantic fleet is lined up over a front nearly 1000 miles long from Connecticut to southern Florida, roughly 200 miles off shore at this very moment. The Pacific fleet is about the same distance off shore, spread out over a distance of 900 miles from roughly the north tip of California southward. The Gulf fleet is stretched out over a 750-mile front between the southern tips of Texas and Florida. This is happening at a time when unprecedented storms are ravaging the United States, especially in our industrial heartland of the Midwest.

Eleven months ago, in Audioletter No. 21, I told you that the strange, extreme storms that had just taken place were believed to be the result of a massive Soviet weather modification experiment. I gave a warning that a repetition of such extreme and unusual weather patterns that paralyzed important areas of our country, might well precede a surprise attack by the Soviet Union; and at this very moment, tonight, our country is in the grip of extreme and totally unexpected winter storms which are paralyzing large areas from the Midwest to the Northeast. Even so, the government isn't about to tell you about the Soviet submarine fleets now deployed around our country. This is especially true now, because the Soviet Navy is deployed in such a way as to strongly suggest to our desperate rulers that the Soviets are going to live up to the super-secret Nuclear Safe Zone agreement, which I revealed long ago in Audioletter No. 12; and that's why, as Jimmy Carter and other top government officials converged on the War Room at the Pentagon just today, the cover story given the public is that it is to view "a simulated crisis situation."

My friends, the Russians are now ready. They are ready to destroy America's military and economic resources at a single coordinated blow. They are ready to survive American retaliation, if any; and they are ready with their floating platforms deployed world-wide, plus their eight (8) Particle Beam installations on the moon, to begin policing a conquered world.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless and protect each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #31

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is February 27, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 31.

Before I discuss anything else today I want to take a moment to thank all of you who have been writing, sending news clippings, and your specially-made tape recordings. My mail has become so overwhelming that it's physically impossible for me to answer most of you personally. But I do want you to know that even those things which I may not acknowledge for some time, are read—the clippings, the tapes, and other personal tips you send me are studied, and it's all very helpful and appreciated; and I thank you again.

The task of sorting out and analyzing the intelligence I receive nowadays from sources world-wide, is a full time job for me. On the other hand, the United States Intelligence Community, which employs more than 100,000 persons to do the analyzing for the government costs the taxpayers billions of dollars a year; and moreover, the United States Intelligence establishment is hamstrung at the top by over-centralization and a politicized analysis process that has produced a disastrous intelligence gap for America. So today, I receive a continuing flood of high-level intelligence from sources who believe you and certain other top officials world-wide should know.

From time to time I refer you to other sources of important information so that you can broaden your perspective or get further details. Sometimes these other sources return the favor by expressing very uncomplimentary opinions about me, personally; and some of you have written to me greatly shocked over this. But, my friends, I ask you not to lose heart at a few ugly words when they appear; instead, look beyond them to the facts that are documented. Compare those to my warnings, and then decide for yourself. There are some who say I should keep quiet about the things I tell you, that I am frightening the people; but, my friends, if I did keep quiet, it would be like an Air Raid Warden who refused to turn on the siren to warn of approaching bombers because that would frighten people. And there are those who say I will ruin my credibility by revealing even hard intelligence about matters that depart so far from popular beliefs. But in the words of General George Keegan, recently retired Chief of Air Force Intelligence: "I'd rather be right than credible."

Five years ago I described in detail how the United States dollar would be destroyed deliberately and lead to monetary chaos. It seemed incredible; or, as David Rockefeller put it: "Interesting science fiction." But today the dollar is following the so-called incredible course I warned about in my book, "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR"; and all the comfortable, credible monetary projections of that day are in the trash bin. Stagflation is confiscating our assets, as it was planned to do. The intelligence I am revealing today is every bit as solid as that which I made public five years ago—and which is proving true today. But because you still are not being told the truth by the Federal government or by the controlled major media, which gives me the silent treatment, the intelligence I make public leaves many people shaking their heads—just as they did five years ago.

There have been many over the years who have warned that some

day, if we didn't watch out, the Soviet Union would outstrip the United States militarily. Now "some day" has arrived, the Soviet Union has achieved dramatic military superiority over the United States, and we are in mortal danger! Now people are asking, "What can we do?" My friends, in December 1975, over two years ago, I recorded an entire one-hour talking tape entitled "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE AMERICA" in order to acquaint you with some of the things every American citizen could do; and periodically in my Audioletter tape series, I have made specific suggestions about things you could do under our Constitution to help bring our outlaw government back under our control. But now, more than ever, the most important thing you can do is to help to bring about total public exposure of the facts of our terrible predicament. Don't expect the controlled major media to do it—they're doing all they can to prevent this exposure because they are being used to control your thinking, not honestly inform you. The time left to us to spread the alarm is very short indeed. For reasons I will explain today, our secret rulers now believe they may have as much as two to three years in which to devise an effective response to the present overwhelming Soviet military might. As I will also explain, they are wrong; but in any case, you and I have very little time left before wartime controls and restrictions start binding and gagging us all.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—THE DAWNING OF SOVIET COSMOSTRATEGY AND COSMOPOLITICS Topic #2—THE ACCELERATING BUILD-UP TO A "NATIONAL EMERGENCY"; and

Topic #3—GROWING CASUALTIES IN THE SECRET WAR OVER "SALT."

Topic #1—In my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR", I described the new imperialism of the international Rockefeller empire. It's an imperialism in which economic power of multinational corporations and banks, monetary manipulation, and big-money politics are used to control entire nations and to reap the profits of East-West trade. The techniques of econo-strategy and econo-politics are the means by which great economic might are translated into the domination of others. These techniques are powerful, but they now face an unprecedented challenge, for in recent months the Soviet Union has suddenly burst into the world arena with its new techniques of cosmo-strategy and cosmo-politics. In these techniques, unlike those of the Rockefeller establishment, money is a very secondary factor—important as a tool but nothing more; and in the newly unveiled Soviet approach to world domination, the earth is viewed basically from the perspective of space—the cosmos.

The new era of Soviet cosmo-strategy and cosmo-politics dawned in earnest five months ago on September 27, 1977, and our secret masters are still reeling from the shock. On that day, with the first two operational Soviet Killer Satellites called Cosmos Interceptors in orbit, America lost the first full-fledged space battle in history. The secret American Moon Base in Copernicus Crater was to have been the ultimate ace in the hole for the Rockefellers in the coming war, armed with powerful beam weapons able to strike the earth; but in the Battle of the Harvest Moon, the Moon Base was put out of action by Cosmos 954, the Soviet Killer Satellite that crashed in Canada last month on January 24. Using a Neutron Beam weapon, Cosmos 954 killed the entire crew of the Copernicus Moon Base with a stream of deadly neutron radiation. Our rulers got their first taste of the new Soviet cosmo-strategy that same day, September 27, 1977. After a very harsh speech against the United States in the United Nations, Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko demanded and got a hastily arranged unusual evening meeting at the White House with Jimmy Carter and Secretary of State Cyrus Vance. Breathless reporters

assured us that there had been a breakthrough in the SALT negotiations, and thereby painted this rush, rush meeting as a good thing. But as I told you in Audioletter No. 26, the only real breakthrough that had occurred was the Soviet breakthrough in the awesome Particle Beam weapon. Gromyko's message at the White House was an ultimatum to begin the process of surrender by disarming America under the guise of SALT II. In Topic #3 I'll bring you up to date on the current status of the struggle over SALT surrender.

The Kremlin is playing a deadly game of chess in its bid for world conquest. In any chess game, moves are planned far in advance, in sequence, according to careful strategy—they're not simply made in isolation. And so it was with the Battle of the Harvest Moon last September. The Particle Beam weapons which are now in orbit on Soviet Cosmos Interceptor Satellites are the product of a 10-year crash program, but other crash programs have been underway as well in the Soviet Union ever since the Soviet humiliation in the Cuban missile crisis 15 years ago. The plan was to develop in total secrecy a spectrum of new superweapons systems which, taken all together, would leapfrog past the capabilities of the United States. They were to be developed, tested, produced in the numbers required for operational deployment and when ready, held in constant readiness for massive deployment when the time came. That time came five months ago.

On September 27, 1977, the Soviet Union dealt the United States a staggering blow, unknown to the public at large because the government refuses to tell you about it; and just two days later the Soviet manned space program began making spectacular headlines after years seemingly in eclipse. On that day the Salyut 6 Space Station was launched, the same space station whose crew are rapidly closing in on America's space endurance record of 84 days. America's Moon Era had just ended, but that of the Soviet Union was about to begin.

Meanwhile Russia was adding rapidly to its fleet of operational Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellites. The two that I mentioned in Audioletter No. 26 were joined by six more in October 1977, and as of now there are over 30 Soviet Cosmos Interceptors orbiting the earth, all of them manned, and all of them armed with Particle Beam weapons. On October 4, 1977, Defense Secretary Harold Brown shocked reporters by confirming part of what I had already revealed in Audioletter No. 2 6—namely, that the Soviet Union had achieved an operational Killer Satellite capability; but by refusing to explain how they worked, Dr. Brown succeeded in misleading the reporters into presuming that the Soviet Killer Satellites worked by gliding up next to their target and then exploding. By now this concept is widely accepted as if it were fact, which it is not; but earlier this month on February 2, 1978, Dr. Brown almost told Congress the truth. He said that the Soviet laser-firing Killer Satellite already operational will be substantially improved by the mid 1980's. My friends, a laser is a beam weapon, so Dr. Brown has now contradicted the assumption that the Soviet Killer Satellites are of the old explosive type. To tell the complete truth, he should have told Congress that they use Particle beams, not lasers; but perhaps that would have been too embarrassing. After all, it was none other than Harold Brown's Livermore Laboratory that failed to develop a Particle Beam weapon—if Livermore Lab couldn't do it, neither could the Russians.

All kinds of cover-up operations are now under way by the United States government to try to hide from the people what is really happening. For example: in Audioletter No. 27 I told you about the destruction of America's 85-ton Space Station known as

SKYLAB. On October 18, 1977, a Soviet Cosmos Interceptor blasted Skylab into a giant fireball that was seen by people along a path all the way from southwest Texas to Arkansas and Missouri. Nine days later the cover-up began with government stories that Skylab "is unexpectedly sinking toward earth", and at the beginning of this month the Skylab cover-up story was revived in such a way as to thoroughly confuse the public. Now we are told it looks as though Skylab may crash too soon for the Space Shuttle to save it. It may crash in late 1979, or then again it may crash by late this year. Pretending that Skylab is still up there, some NASA spokesmen say the engines should be fired to make it tumble slowly to keep it in orbit longer. Others say it should be made to tumble so that it will come down sooner, say over the Indian Ocean. As I explained in Audioletter No. 26, the beauty of the Indian Ocean is that over long areas there are no witnesses to observe such things.

While Soviet Cosmos Interceptors were multiplied in earthin October, the Soviet manned Moon Program also started in

a rush. On October 4, 1977, the 20th anniversary of Sputnik One was celebrated by launching Soyuz 25 from the same launch pad. As a cover story, Soyuz 25 was said to have returned to earth after a few days, having failed to dock with Salyut 6 Space Station; but, in fact, Soyuz 25 went on to make a manned landing on the moon on October 16, 1977, landing on the far side in Jules Verne Crater, for reasons I explained in Audioletter No. 27. In the new Soviet cosmo-strategy, the massive deployment of men and equipment to the moon was just the space-age equivalent of a military deployment by air lift. The men, the space craft, the Particle Beam weapons, everything—had been prepared for this giant military operation in space. And given the Soviet network of several major space ports, which they call Cosmodromes, launch rates unheard of in the United States were and are possible. Over the past five years the Soviet Union has consistently launched satellites six and one-half times as frequently as the United States; and that is based only on those that the Soviet Union has reported so that they can be tracked by the West. There have been hundreds of secret launches of satellites that have never been positively detected or tracked in the West. During October and November, as I have detailed in previous tapes, the moon was quickly converted into a military base of the Soviet Union. Today there are seven (7) separate Particle Beam weapons installations on the near side of the moon plus a back-up and supply base on the far side; and as I revealed in December, the lunar Particle Beam weapons have been test-fired at the earth.

In December I also revealed that Particle Beam weapons were being fired in a de-focused mode of operation off the east coast, causing mysterious air booms called Air Quakes. These Particle Beam weapons are carried by floating platforms which are not satellites in orbit. They can operate all the way from ground zero to altitudes of at least 800 miles. Normally they stay high enough to be outside the atmosphere. These platforms which use a principle known as Electrogravitics, could have been developed long ago by the United States, but were not; and now we have no defense against them. When I say platform, I am speaking in the military sense of a vehicle on which weapons are mounted. A naval ship is sometimes thought of as a gun platform. In the same way, an attack helicopter may be called a platform for the guns it carries. The Soviet floating Particle Beam platforms, according to my latest information, are actually spheres known as Cosmospheres. As with the other aspects of the sudden, decisive Soviet leap into cosmo-strategic weapons, the Federal government is trying to keep a lid on the Cosmosphere story. The White House is trying desperately to come up with some kind of story to

explain those air quakes, which have rattled nerves and broken windows. Within a few days the Naval Research Laboratory is supposed to deliver a preliminary report explaining what the air quakes are. Every effort will be made to focus attention only on the east coast, but air quakes are beginning to be heard elsewhere also as other Cosmospheres announce their presence. For example, at about noon Friday February the 3rd, two air quakes were heard off the Texas gulf coast near Port Lavaca. There were two booms in quick succession heard over an area of four large counties—then, silence. The Coast Guard reported no aircraft on radar at the time and there were no military aircraft in the vicinity. They were typical Air Quakes, my friends. The story was embargoed until four days later, Tuesday; and released only over the Texas wire of the Associated Press. As a result, they received no national publicity; and there have been, and will be, others around the country.

When I recorded Audioletter No. 30 last month, the Cosmospheres over the United States had all descended to relatively low altitudes, ranging from 15 to 60 miles. As of my latest report on February 23, they have climbed back up to more normal altitudes of around 400 miles except for one over the Detroit area. This one, reported on that day to be at a height of 140 miles, was at lower altitude earlier this month; and at that time there were many sightings around the Detroit area of an object that may well have been this Cosmosphere.

As I explain in Topic #3, footdragging by our secret rulers—that agreed to surrender by means of SALT II—is provoking once again an increase in Soviet acts of intimidation. For that reason I think I should alert you to the latest locations of the Soviet Cosmospheres over North America:

The Cosmosphere recently stationed over the Detroit area is the same one that formerly was over the Carolinas and caused many air quakes along the east coast. Another is over the western Pennsylvania-West Virginia area. Another formerly stationed in the vicinity of Quincy, Illinois, is currently over the Minneapolis-St. Paul area. There is a Cosmosphere roughly over the Mississippi River east of Little Rock, Arkansas. Another is over the Red River between Oklahoma City and the Dallas-Fort Worth area. A Cosmosphere is hovering almost directly over NORAD headquarters in Colorado. Another is over Hoover Dam on the Nevada-Arizona border, and another is over the Glen Canyon Dam in northern Arizona. There is another over western Montana, and those over southern Alaska and just west of Hawaii are still on station. There is one new Cosmosphere reported this month located at last report over the waters between the southern tip of Florida and Cuba.

When I recorded Audioletter No. 30 last month on the evening of January 28, I had just received word that the crew in capsule of Cosmos 954—the Killer Satellite that had crashed in Canada—had been picked up by a Soviet Cosmosphere previously stationed over Ottawa. I can now finish the story with the news that just before midnight that same night Eastern time, the Cosmosphere landed in a wilderness area north of Lake Superior at coordinates 48-18 North, 85-42 West. There the crew and capsule were transferred to a truck driven by Soviet agents, after which the Cosmosphere departed. It's presently on station 212 miles north of Ottawa at an altitude of 300 miles. Needless to say, the search by Canadian and American teams for pieces of Cosmos 954 has no hope of ever turning up anything legitimate except auxiliary chunks of the satellite. Cosmos 954 was one of the two Soviet Killer Satellites which were operational when I recorded Audioletter No. 26. The other launched last July was Cosmos 929.

Cosmos 929 was the first operational Cosmos Interceptor Satellite; and as I discussed in Audioletter No. 26, it destroyed an American spy satellite over Russia on September 20. Early this month on February 2, Cosmos 929 fired its retro-fire engines and re-entered the atmosphere over the Soviet Union, contrary to other published reports.

Space operations in support of Soviet cosmo-strategy are continuing on all fronts. Progress I, the Spacebus with nine cosmonauts aboard that was described as a robot supply ship by Moscow, transferred supplies to Salyut 6 and then detached itself. Progress I is still in orbit awaiting the next stage of the project of building a mammoth new space station in space. As I told you last month, Progress I is to become one part of the new space station; and on February 16 the cosmonauts on Salyut 6 accomplished another space first. They had started up an electric blast furnace which had been brought up by Progress I, and the cosmonauts were to begin acquiring experience toward building large stations in space.

A few days ago Moscow correctly announced that the crew of Salyut 6 have also been busy observing from their ringside seat in space various weather phenomena and natural disasters—and no wonder, since geophysical warfare is also an operational part of the new Soviet cosmo-strategy.

Beginning in Audioletter No. 24 last May, I have been warning about Soviet preparations to cause deliberate earthquakes and tidal waves as weapons of undeclared war. That month I gave the navigational coordinates where seven (7) Soviet fission-fusion-fission superbombs had already been planted in strategic undersea locations around the Philippines. And a year ago this month I referred to the fact that major Soviet experiments in weather modification were known to have been carried out on certain occasions. Last August I revealed that cobalt bombs were being planted in the oceans at strategic locations to serve in a build-up of earthquake activity prior to the big catastrophe that awaits the Philippines and America's west coast, and I have revealed since then that some of these have been set off. Only recently I have been informed that some of the cobalt bombs have purposes other than earthquakes. In the north Pacific two large warm-water zones were discovered last fall. These warm-water zones are pumping huge amounts of moisture into the air streams that sweep across America from the Pacific and creating tremendous air turbulence in the process. The result: blizzards, high winds, and floods which could very well affect our food supply in the near future. These hot-water zones have been caused by the deliberate cracking of the sea floor to vent volcanic heat into the ocean. The center of one hot-water zone thus created is located at 50-37-8 North, 170-32-51 East near Attu in the Aleutians; the other is at 25-34-23 North, 151-18-41 West, between Hawaii and California. At both of these locations Soviet cobalt bombs were planted and set off last summer.

Last April I alerted you that Soviet nuclear sabotage of the United States had begun, focusing at first on our dams and reservoirs; and last May before suspending the Audioletter for three months in an all-out effort to expose and stop the mounting Soviet sabotage campaign, I told you the Soviet strategy to use water against us as a weapon. Last month a severe two-year drought in California was broken by unrelenting torrential rainstorms. Now there is a threat of such heavy spring runoff that floods will be a problem instead of drought. And now, thanks to Soviet modification of America's weather, our major dams are being filled up just as they must be to produce maximum

destruction when they are blown apart by Soviet nuclear mines.

Topic #2—In the past I have repeatedly given a warning about the deliberate, crushing shortages which are being arranged to strike America along with the collapse of the United States dollar and vanishing freedoms and property; and beginning in Audioletter No. 10 nearly two years ago, I have made public the Presidential Executive Orders which already exist under which the "Declaration of a National Emergency" can be used to intensify shortages and suspend our Constitution. Today the controlled Carter administration is silently preparing for the intended Declaration of a National Emergency.

Overseas, the Middle East is going faster and faster down the one-way corridor that is leading to war. And as I said last November, the attempted peace initiative to Israel by President Sadat of Egypt, was an unnatural move for which he was programmed without his knowledge by certain elements within the CIA. Its purpose, unknown to Sadat himself, was to alter the situation in the Middle East in such a way that it would lead to war—not peace; and day by day now, Sadat is becoming visibly more dejected and desperate. The controlled Carter adminstration has discovered that it is not possible any longer to turn aside the Middle East war momentum. Thus the Carter administration, flying the banner always of Peace, Peace, is now proposing a huge new sale of combat aircraft to Israel, Egypt, and Saudi Arabia. The real target in all of this is Saudi Arabia, which has made the fatal mistake of allowing itself to be dragged in now as a confrontation state against Israel. These maneuvers are continuing the public relations trickery of our secret rulers that began several months ago, giving the image to the public that we are becoming more aloof from Israel. At the same time, more and more excuses are being set up to make Israel appear to be threatened in a vital manner. Thus the cover story is being established for a pre-emptive limited nuclear strike against Arab OPEC oil wells.

The war plan which I revealed in Audioletter No. 6 for November 1975 is being up-dated and set in motion now, and when it comes the cut-off of Middle East oil will give our secret rulers the excuse to greatly intensify the regulation and limitation of our personal activities. As a prelude to this, America's longest coal strike is still under way. Last Friday evening, February 24, Jimmy Carter had announced that he would reveal drastic measures to end the strike in a speech scheduled for 9:00 PM Eastern time; but instead, two hours before that he announced a negotiated settlement reached at the last minute between the miners' Union and the Rockefeller-controlled coal operators. He presented it to the nation as if there were nothing left to be concerned about, but the whole thing is nothing more than a ploy to waste time and finally provide an excuse for really harsh Federal action. Every possible means is being used to insure that the miners do not ratify the latest settlement, just as they turned down the earlier one several weeks ago. On one hand, the proposed contract is strewn with flaws designed to displease the rank and file miners; and on the other side of the coin, the miners are quietly being provided with many forms of support to deliberately minimize the pressure on them to settle. They are encouraged to pretend to outsiders that they have no money and thereby qualify for food stamps, unemployment and welfare assistance. In addition, credit unions are providing many miners with practically interest-free loans, creditors are placing a moratorium on miners' accounts, and banks are not trying to collect miners' debts. Major creditors, controlled by our secret rulers, are setting the pace and others are following their example. And so, if all goes according to

plan, the early days of March will see the supposed new coal strike settlement break down. Jimmy Carter, as before, will delay and delay; but with utilities running out of coal and the winter still not over, those drastic Federal measures will be imposed at last. The Emergency powers of the President will be invoked, seemingly for limited purposes, but at the same time the bureaucracy for the coming unlimited National Emergency will have been set in motion.

Topic #3—In 1972 Colonel Raymond S. Sleeper, U.S. Air Force (retired), wrote an article for the American Security Council entitled "USSR-FIRST IN SPACE POWER." It was published on March 6, 1972, in the WASHINGTON REPORT No. WR-72-4 of the American Security Council. In his article, Colonel Sleeper describes how Russia's space bomb satellite had already demonstrated its ability to blow up an enemy satellite in space—a concept that has now been superseded by the operational fleet of Cosmos Particle Beam Interceptors. He also describes other facets of the widening lead in Soviet military use of space, and says: "They already have the capability to launch a major military space force to bludgeon the United States to accommodation on a particular request or demand." Illustrating how it could work, he begins with the words: "Assume for the sake of an example that the impasse continues in the negotiations between the United States and the USSR for the limitation of strategic weapons (that is, SALT) and that the Soviet-sponsored European Security Conference is convened to reduce 'tensions' on the continent." Pointing out the vulnerable status of Europe relative to the Warsaw Pact forces, he continues: "The USSR launches several orbital satellites. It tells the world they are orbital bombers. United States space detection systems verify the satellites' presence. The Soviets assert that the satellites are able to destroy any target in Europe or the United States, but that their real purpose is to insure a peaceful Europe." With the West confronted with a dilemma over these satellites, Colonel Sleeper continues: "Then to climax their ploy, the Soviets detonate a nuclear explosion over the eastern Atlantic Ocean 50 or 100 miles out in space. All of Europe would be suitably impressed, and would accept what, in view of this demonstration of Soviet military power, now seem very reasonable proposals for 'peaceful coexistence' between the nations of eastern and western Europe. The United States, powerless, would be excluded." (To obtain more details from Colonel Sleeper's account, I suggest you write to the American Security Council at Boston, Virginia, zip 22713.)

To bring Colonel Sleeper's scenario into virtual reality today, it is only necessary to add the elements of widespread sabotage, replace the hypothetical space bombers with Cosmos Interceptor Satellites and Cosmospheres, and realize that only government leaders are let in on these things today—not the public. Every time new snags develop in the SALT talks in Geneva, new explosions and other acts of Soviet intimidation increase in the United States. In recent weeks the earlier predictions of an early SALT agreement have been replaced once again by stalling by our secret rulers, and once again disasters are striking seemingly at random around the United States.

Last month I told you that the Soviet Union is now ready militarily to destroy the United States in nuclear war and to survive our counter attack, if any; but I also informed you about a drastic new change within the Kremlin itself. With Leonid Brezhnev physically incapacitated, the hawks have taken over in the Kremlin since early December, and as a result Soviet policies have become openly more aggressive lately. The situation, as a result, is highly volatile—anything can happen. There's a major threat, as I warned you last month, that the military KGB Secret

Police faction that now controls the Kremlin may step up the plans for war and strike without warning, which they are well able to do. Soviet nuclear mines now dot the United States, Soviet underwater nuclear missiles infest our territorial waters including the Great Lakes; and as of my latest report, the Soviet submarine armadas I told you about last month are still there along our Pacific, Atlantic, and Gulf coasts. But in spite of this volatile situation, and extreme danger, I should also give you the assessment of our secret rulers themselves so that you can understand their approach to the current situation.

For more than two months following America's loss of the decisive Battle of the Harvest Moon in space last September, the controlled Carter administration was in complete disarray. In mid October, with the American satellites evaporating in fireballs world-wide and the Soviet fleet in a pincers movement threatening imminent attack, the Carter administration sent its capitulation to Moscow. In other words, surrender by means of a lopsided SALT II agreement would proceed. Both Soviet and American declarations indicated that SALT II was moving fast, and agreement by the end of December was the deadline set by Brezhnev; but in November violent cross currents began surfacing over SALT. As I explained then, our rulers were stalling for time, using controversy in Congress as a shield. Immediately Brezhnev tightened the screws with undersea detonation, the destruction of Toccoa Dam in Carter's home state of Georgia, a violent rail blast in Iri, South Korea, and other measures. Soon administration actions and statements appeared to be once again following the dictates of the Kremlin. In early December with the original Brezhnev deadline on SALT II drawing near, Soviet intimidation of America began mounting in rapid fashion. On December 2, 1977, the first of the mysterious air quakes along the east coast began, courtesy of Soviet Cosmosphere No. 1 in the list of seven I made public that month. That same month California experienced unprecedented sand storms with 100-mile per hour winds, as major Soviet weather modification measures began to take effect. And just three days before Christmas Soviet nuclear mines began destroying grain elevators and other important targets in a continuing rash without precedent in our country, but by then Leonid Brezhnev was a very sick man. He sickened rapidly, and I can now reveal that Leonid Brezhnev died in Moscow in early January. Beginning several weeks ago, a ceremonial double for Brezhnev has been making public appearances in order not to let the world know about the turbulence now going on within the Kremlin; but our unelected rulers know, and now they are using whatever time that is left to move desperately in a crash program to ally themselves with Red China and turn China into a credible threat against Russia. And wherever possible, military research and development is being cranked up secretly in a crash program to produce new weapons in time to effectively oppose the awesome military might of the Soviet Union.

The United States tilt toward China is reflected in the foreign policy statements of American officials. As recently as last November 16, Defense Secretary Harold Brown told the Japanese that decreasing American commitments in the area would have to be expected and yet early this month he revealed in a foreign policy speech in California that the United States is giving renewed emphasis to our commitments in Asia. He is hurrying to reassure and bolster South Korea with new fighter aircraft, and privately there is some re-thinking being done about the announced policy of withdrawing American troops there. He is also talking very differently than earlier about the necessity of retaining the major naval and air force facilities in the Philippines.

My friends, our secret rulers and their advisers are telling themselves that they can hold off the Soviet Union for perhaps two to three years before the internal consolidation of the Kremlin bureaucracy takes hold. By then, our secret rulers hope to have Red China firmly in hand ready to throw into the fray with Russia, and in all of this the tremendous financial grip of Japan by our secret rulers—the four Rockefeller brothers—is being used as a major tool. Japan has just signed a historic 8-year $20,000,000,000 trade agreement with China which already is thawing the diplomatic ice between these two Asian giants. Meanwhile Rockefeller doors are being flung wide open for Red China here and abroad, and Red Chinese trade delegations are hustling around the United States, Europe, Asia, and Japan in a rush of activity. All of this may sound as if the mighty Rockefellers are going to pull a rabbit out of that hat once again, as they have done in the past, and still end up on top; but what they are actually doing, my friends, is digging an ever deeper, wider grave for themselves and for America. The Soviet Union saw long ago what is now happening and has already prepared Japan to join in agreements to offset those with China. Japan will in due course sign in principle a draft of a Treaty of Friendship and Cooperation in spite of Japan's demands for the return of four Japanese islands seized by Russia at the end of World War II. The Rockefeller economic power in Japan is formidable, but the Japanese want "out" from under the Rockefeller yoke. Quoting now from my book, page 76: "This situation could continue for a reasonable length of time, culminating in Japan's causing China and the Soviet Union to join with her in agreements, opening huge economic markets stretching from East Germany to the far reaches of east Asia. These agreements would constitute, in effect, a military alliance between the three Asian powers, and thus would be born in this century another Axis, a Moscow-Tokyo-Peking Axis—a new gigantic Asian power block, cemented on Moscow-Tokyo-Peking relations, three Asian giants." (End of quotation from my book.)

The Rockefellers helped Soviet Russia to grow into the world's No. 1 military power only to lose control over their Frankenstein monster, but it seems they never learn. Now the process of building up Red China as fast as possible has begun, and that will end in utter catastrophe. Ultimately the forces tending to join Russia, China, and Japan in a giant new Asian Axis, far outweigh the minor influences the Rockefellers can bring to bear. The Rockefellers are right in believing that a process of settling-in and consolidation lies ahead for the Kremlin; but they are wrong, dead wrong, in believing this will weaken the Kremlin to such a point that the present overwhelming Soviet military advantage will be allowed to slip away. The Soviet Union, increasingly under the influence of Defense Minister Marshal Dmitry Ustinov, is keeping a close eye on the military situation.

The Rockefeller dream of overturning the Soviet advances in military technology in the space of two to three years is unrealistic to the point of arrogance; but just to make sure, Soviet sabotage of key plants and installations nation-wide has already been carried out. For example, consider a small sampling in my own home town of Huntington, West Virginia. The International Nickel plant now contains three Soviet nuclear weapons; the Owens, Illinois plant, two; and the Houdow plant where secret work is underway, two. In addition to sabotage, my friends, there's a campaign of espionage by the Soviet KGB against America.

On February 9, earlier this month, a sensational Soviet spy case broke in Canada. Last April in Audioletter No. 23 I

revealed that Soviet agents were planting nuclear weapons in dams and reservoirs in the United States, and the following month I detailed the role of Canada being used as a staging area into the United States by the KGB. In Audioletter No. 24 I revealed the crucial role played by the RCMP, the Mounties, in attempting to stop the growing sabotage of the United States while American authorities were doing nothing whatever about it. Now we have been told publicly that the Mounties have been involved since at least last April in a counter-intelligence operation against KGB operations in Canada; and the RCMP has received a lot of praise in place of the usual abuse, for their breakup of the celebrated KGB spy ring. Thirteen spies, diplomatic personnel at the Soviet Embassy in Ottawa, have been expelled. In recent years, Soviet espionage cases have been boiling over repeatedly in the West—major cases, involving top military and governmental officials and the compromise of massive amounts of sensational and sensitive material. It has happened in Canada, in Britain, which recently expelled over 100 Soviet spies, in Sweden, in Denmark, in West Germany, and even in Switzerland. But here in the United States, the biggest of all Soviet espionage targets, the KGB has become so powerful that no such exposures happen. A big deal was made recently of spying activities by a single diplomat from a superpower known as Vietnam, but not a word about the thousands of KGB agents which have been crisscrossing our land planting nuclear mines for the coming war. The situation would be different had J. Edgar Hoover not been murdered, but then Nelson Rockefeller always said the FBI was a fascist organization. Can you imagine? But in spite of the good publicity the Mounties received from the big spy case in Canada, the RCMP is not happy because the KGB won rather than losing in that case. The Ottawa spy ring case was deliberately exposed prematurely by a Soviet agent who fed the story to a Canadian reporter. The story was printed, the RCMP's cover was blown, and the massive KGB operations now underway in Canada were rendered safer than ever because in Canada as here, the KGB has friends in very high places.

At the present time big Aleutian air liners of the Soviet air line Aeroflot, together with Cuban, Polish, and Czechoslovakian air liners, can be seen frequently at the Mirabel and Dorval airports in Montreal—this despite the fact that very few commercial air travelers fly between Canada and eastern Europe. In addition, camouflaged Soviet troop transports, each able to carry 50 fully-armed troops with supplies and bearing no identification marks, have also been passing through the Montreal airports in large groups. Operating under the protection of certain very highly-placed agents in the Canadian government, the KGB has established no fewer than twelve (12) guerrilla camps in remote areas of Quebec Province. At the present time over 3,000 KGB trained personnel are in Canada, able to speak fluent English and prepared to infiltrate into the United States at will. Unlike the Canadian and American citizens who have acted as Soviet agents in planting nuclear mines nation-wide, these are trained guerrillas prepared to undertake important insurgency operations against targets either in Canada or in the United States by weather modification, by sabotage, by espionage and by other means. A secret war is now underway between the Kremlin and the United States over SALT II, which is to be America's surrender treaty.

The casualties in this secret war are civilians, and the toll is rising. The men, women, and children killed in the Toccoa Falls Dam collapse are casualties in this secret war; the workers and inspectors killed and injured in the explosion of sabotaged grain elevators are casualties in this secret war; those who have died in artificial killer storms are casualties in this secret

war; and those who were killed and injured recently in the propane explosion at Waverly, Tennessee, are casualties in this secret war. Last time it was Iri, South Korea, back in November—a railroad car full of dynamite was used as the perfect cover for the detonation of two fairly large buried nuclear mines. This time it was brought closer to home. In Waverly two tank cars full of propane were derailed on Wednesday, February 22, but they lay there safely till Friday until just before workmen were about to start emptying them. Then without warning and with no apparent cause, one tank exploded—as some witnesses said "like an atomic bomb." A huge black mushroom cloud billowed into the sky leaving over nine dead, scores injured, and the downtown area flattened and burning. Philip Hooper, Vice-President of the L & N Railroad, said: "It was unusual. These derailed cars were there for 24 hours and did not leak. We had a call from our expert at the car that they were going to begin the transfer in eight minutes—then it blew! It did not follow a normal explosion—it ruptured, then it exploded." Thus another KGB sabotage operation within our own country drew to a close—sabotage brought about the derailment, and the explosion. Sabotage targets also include oil tank farms, oil pipe lines, and other like installations.

In the closing words of my book, I warned five years ago that "If the new Asian forces are not understood but are met with ignorance and arrogance, then the world will indeed be headed not for a generation of peace, of which President Nixon has so proudly boasted, but for World War III." Today our secret rulers are meeting the new Asian forces with the ignorance and arrogance of those who do not recognize any power higher than themselves. By so doing, they are bringing the wrath of God upon themselves and upon all the rest of us. We will be chastised as well as cleansed in the process.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless and protect each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #32

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is March 29, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 32.

Over a century ago, in 1873, an inventor in New York began exhibiting a strange new device which he said would convey the human voice through wires over long distances. Calling his invention a Telephone, he tried to attract financial support, but it was reported in the press that well-informed people knew it was impossible to transmit the human voice by wire—that wires could transmit only dots and dashes, such as the Morse Code. Furthermore, it was said that even if the so-called telephone could do this, it would be of no practical value. And so having been condemned as a fraud by self-styled authorities, the inventor was bundled off to jail. The inventor was discredited, and for three more years the public was denied the opportunity to judge for itself about the merits of the telephone. And as an old Lebanese proverb says: "The error of a scholar is like the wreck of a ship: it sinks and scuttles others with it." But far from being impossible, as claimed by the self-styled scholars of that day, the telephone was inevitable—an idea whose time had come. In 1876 another inventor, Alexander Graham Bell, unveiled a working model of the telephone. Today Bell's name is a household word, and all the false prophets who had said 'It can't

be done', are forgotten forever.

Today there are many self-proclaimed authorities who condemn as nonsense anything they don't understand. It happened with the telephone, the automobile, the airplane, space travel, and so on. Today it is happening in regard to underwater missiles, particle beam weapons, floating Soviet cosmospheres, and other life and death matters. Today our secret rulers are trying to cover up so many things in so many ways that it's becoming increasingly difficult to do so. As always their own secret political and economic plans and maneuvers are kept under wraps until they are ready to spring on the unsuspecting public—only now their plans no longer work smoothly, as they once did. But beyond that, elaborate efforts are being mounted to hide from the public the disastrous military and space setbacks suffered by the United States in recent months.

Soviet sabotage operations about which I have been giving a warning for nearly a year are now taking an increasing toll; and government spokesmen are working overtime to make exploding grain elevators, exploding factories, exploding refineries, exploding railroad tank cars, and explosions in power plants all seem unrelated; and to keep the lid on events related to Russia's total military domination of space, not only government personnel but also selected Congressional, academic, industrial, and scientific spokesmen are being pressed into service. They think that by siding with the Soviet Union, the winning side, they will end up being treated very well; but traitors are traitors and can never be trusted. So collaborators are always the first to be eliminated after a country is conquered. As for our secret rulers themselves, together with their intimates, the precedent they themselves established in the Nuremberg trials after World War II will be applied. In the aftermath of the coming nuclear war, the traitors who have destroyed America from within will be tried for war crimes and duly executed.

Today my three special topics are: Topic #1—COSMOSPHERES, COSMO-STRATEGY, AND THE IGNORED WARNINGS OF GENERAL THOMAS POWER;

Topic #2—SOVIET PREPARATIONS TO INVADE THE UNITED STATES; and

Topic #3—HOW EVENTS ARE CONVERGING TOWARD NUCLEAR HOLOCAUST.

Topic #1—On a sleepy late spring day in June 1957, members of an engineering society gathered in Los Angeles to hear about the efforts of the United States Air Force in space technology. The speaker: General Thomas Power. The following month General Power would become Commander in Chief of the Strategic Air Command (SAC), but on that day in June 1957 he was completing three years as head of the Air Force's Research and Development Command. As such, General Power was then America's leading authority on the overall military potentials of space, so his audience expected to hear about these potentials from General Power; but in General Power's own words published eight years later, he said: "I had to disappoint them. Guided by official policy, I carefully avoided any reference to satellites, space vehicles, and man in space. Instead I talked about the Air Force's high altitude studies, the impact of solar phenomena on communications and related subjects."

Less than four months later on October 4, 1957, mankind was thrust into the Space Age by the beep, beep, beep of Sputnik I launched by the Soviet Union; and thanks to the disgraceful 'official policies' that muzzled General Power and others, the American people were caught totally off guard. Fifteen months

ago, in Audioletter No. 19, I told you the rest of the story about the so-called Sputnik I surprise—a disgrace which need never have happened.

To General Power, the Sputnik shock itself was bad enough, but he drew from that experience even more important lessons for the future. To him, given the other military and technical facts in his possession, Sputnik I was only an omen of far more serious things to come, and he fervently believed that only an informed, aroused American public could prevent eventual disaster for America, so he decided to put his warnings into print. In April 1959 as the Eisenhower era was on the wane, General Power, Commander of the Strategic Air Command, followed required procedures and submitted his book to the Defense Department for approval prior to publication. The book contained no military secrets, yet it was banned instantly by the Secretary of Defense.

Unknown to General Power, America's secret rulers had already decided upon a complete revolution in America's military strategy to begin in 1961 with the new administration. It was to be a two-pronged strategy, half visible and half invisible. The visible part would involve the gradual weakening and disarmament of the United States which our rulers would always sell to us as initiatives for "peace" but which would actually lead to war. The hidden part of the new strategy, however, would involve the continued secret development of new super weapons with which the Soviet Union could be utterly destroyed in the war to come; and the centerpiece of this two-pronged strategy for world domination was to be America's Moon Program, sold to the public as a peaceful venture but actually intended for military purposes. It is this two-pronged secret military scheme of our secret rulers that unraveled just six months ago on September 27, 1977. It is this scheme that led to America's disastrous defeat in the secret Space Battle of the Harvest Moon which knocked out America's secret moon base in Copernicus Crater, and it is this scheme that would have been threatened by publication of General Power's book in 1959.

In 1965, after General Power retired, he finally succeeded in having his book "DESIGN FOR SURVIVAL" published in extensively revised form. The publisher was Coward McCann of New York, but the original banned version was never published. After nearly 20 years, I believe the time is long overdue for the American public to hear some of the things about which the late General Thomas Power tried in vain to give a warning. After considerable effort and expense, I have at last been able to obtain a copy of the original banned manuscript by General Power which will be under lock and key by the time you hear this recording. As I read his words to you, keep in mind please, that they were written two decades ago. Only in that way can you realize just how much is being kept from you by the Federal government.

On page 60 of the banned manuscript, General Power says that: "Deterrence is the sum total of many diverse elements which, in combination, serve to convince our enemies that if they choose to precipitate a nuclear war the United States will survive and they will not." Three years after General Power wrote these words, he was proven right in the Cuban Missile Crisis of 1962, but his book remained banned so this lesson was not driven home in American minds and true deterrence was gradually allowed to disappear.

On page 67 of the banned manuscript, he speaks of a Soviet decision to start a war against the United States: "First, there must be adequate assurance that the war will result in a decisive victory for them and unconditional surrender on our part." A few

lines later he said: "The second condition that must be satisfied before the Soviet rulers would undertake aggression against the United States is the assurance that they can prevent a retaliatory counterattack from inflicting unacceptable damage upon them." My friends, in light of these criteria, judge for yourself about the significance of the runaway Soviet military superiority over the United States. For example, consider just one small part of the picture—the incredibly massive Soviet Civil Defense Program versus non-existent civil defense in the United States. Does it matter that according to government figures the Soviet Union might lose 5,000,000 people while the United States could lose 160,000,000 in a nuclear exchange? Or are government spokesmen right when they assure you this imbalance means nothing?

On page 68 of the banned manuscript, General Power says that: "An added problem is the reaction of the Russian people. There can be no doubt that in a nuclear war they would accept heavy losses without protest so long as they believed that the United States, not Russia, was responsible for the war." In light of this, my friends, where is Jimmy Carter's so-called tough talk against the Soviet Union lately really leading? Does he himself even know what he is saying? Already his words and those of Secretary of Defense Harold Brown have become the basis of an intense propaganda campaign inside Russia about the increasingly threatening posture of the United States, and some diplomats are already saying that Soviet-American relations are now the worst they have been since the Cuban crisis over 15 years ago.

On page 141 of the banned manuscript, General Power says that since the Soviet Union must destroy both our military muscle and our power to rebuild that muscle, "The objective of a Soviet attack would be a thorough destruction of the country." And on page 142 he gives a Soviet military authority's words: "Atomic and hydrogen weapons alone without the decisive operations of the ground forces with their contemporary materiel cannot decide the outcome of war." In other words, after the initial nuclear attack an invasion of the United States will follow.

Describing the true status of the extensive Soviet technological and industrial effort two decades ago, he said we were already in a neck-and-neck race. And on page 212 he warned of: "the danger that the Soviets may pull ahead of us in the technological race if they can maintain their present pace and we fail to accelerate ours. They are matching our military effort although their economy is only about 40% of ours. Because of their ruthless methods and low living standards, they can buy more progress in military technology than we can buy for an equivalent amount. Most importantly, they are getting it a great deal faster than we do." And I continue with this very important quote of General Power: "While we must advance painstakingly step by step, the Soviets use their uncanny technical intelligence to profit from our efforts, saving their own efforts to leapfrog over us to spectacular successes. What we try cautiously on a small scale, the Soviets often will do on a far bigger and more impressive scale."

Looking ahead 20 years ago, General Power could clearly see that space warfare would revolutionize military strategy. Quoting from page 225 of his banned 1959 manuscript, "The old military mandate 'Take to the high ground' is as pertinent in the dawning space age as it ever was to the rifle-bearing soldier. In wars of the past, high ground meant elevations and hills measured in tens or hundreds of feet. Fighting downhill was always easier and more advantageous than fighting uphill. When the airplane became a tool of warfare, high ground meant

thousands and later tens of thousands of feet. Again, the greater height or altitude represented an important advantage in aerial combat. As the struggle for the strategic advantage of the 'high ground' continues, altitude above sea level gradually becomes distance from the earth, and limitless space beckons as the ultimate battlefield."

Continuing on the same page, General Power penned the following prophetic words: "There can be no doubt that the strategic use of space will revolutionize military doctrine again as much, and perhaps even more, than the airplane. Distance on the surface of the earth will lose what little military significance it has left, because the earth itself will become merely the focal point for the space theater of operations: and the continued compression of time for both action and reaction will, in effect, assume the role of a new dimension in military strategy." Two pages later he summed it all up in the phrase, "Whoever will control space will control the earth."

In these crystal clear words of 19 years ago, General Power tried to let the American public in on the coming new era in military strategy based on space. He did not succeed, because our secret rulers did not want you to understand; but today this new military dimension is a reality. Since the Battle of the Harvest Moon six months ago, it has become the exclusive domain of the Soviet Union, and they call it cosmo-strategy.

In his banned manuscript of 1959, and even in the revised version that was finally published six years later, General Power warned in clear terms about the strong prospects for surprise in our technological race with the Soviet Union. He pointed out that a long-range military planner of 1939 could not possibly have foreseen the jet bombers, supersonic fighters, hydrogen bombs, and intercontinental missiles of 1959. And because the pace of technological change is accelerating, he tried to warn that the very best projections possible in 1959 could likewise be rendered obsolete by unexpected, sudden, new military developments. But General Power's warnings were silenced and ignored, because they did not fit the two-pronged strategy of our secret rulers for world control that I mentioned earlier. As a result, America lost the most decisive battle of the twentieth century—the Battle of the Harvest Moon six months ago. And now, the cosmostrategy of the Soviet Union is like the nightmares of General Power come true.

One of the most startling weapons today in the cosmo-strategic arsenal of the Soviet Union is the Electrogravitic Floating Platform, or Cosmosphere as they call it. They are armed with charged Particle Beam Weapons; and as I first revealed in Audioletter No. 29 last December, they are responsible for the violent air quakes along the east coast and elsewhere which the Federal government is trying frantically to explain away. As early as 1962, over fifteen years ago, some of America's top military officers could see the threat of floating platforms on the technical horizon and wanted to start working on a defense against them. Gen. Thomas Power, then Commander of the Strategic Air Command, was one of these men. In the summer of 1962 the Cuban missile crisis was in gestation, but General Power was already looking ahead to a possible space-Cuba of the future that would be even more serious. At a secret meeting at Maxwell Air Force Base, General Power described the floating platform concept that was already within reach of American technology; and he expressed frustration and worry over the refusal of the Kennedy administration to begin developing any defense against a potential Soviet version of these platforms. Already the dismantling of America's military power under the guiding hand of

then Defense Secretary Robert McNamara was underway. In 1964 General Power retired after heading the Strategic Air Command for seven years .

In March 1965, thirteen years ago this month, the revised version of his book "DESIGN FOR SURVIVAL" was published at last, and on pages 243 and 244 you will find a warning by General Power that points specifically to the floating Soviet Cosmospheres that are now hovering over the United States and elsewhere world-wide. Beginning on page 243 General Power gives a warning of the urgent requirement of defense against a military threat from space. He says: "An aggressor would make the fullest use of the element of surprise. This would apply to the timing of the attack as well as to the employment of some radically new weapon or technique for which we are not prepared. It is quite possible that the Soviet surprise weapon would be an offensive space system, but beyond this assumption we can only speculate." Further, on page 244, he says: "For instance, it is conceivable that we may wake up one morning and find a number of Soviet satellites floating in stationary orbits over every part of the United States." And a few words later he emphasizes: "We certainly must anticipate such a contingency which is by no means farfetched or far in the future, and make sure that we have operational defensive systems or measures to cope with it."

There, my friends, you have it! Security restrictions prevented General Power from describing these hovering devices in detail in his published book, so he used the word for them that the public could most easily grasp, and that word is Satellites; but as the former head of Research and Development for the United States Air Force, General Power knew very well that no true satellite can hover over any location in the United States. True satellites can hover only over locations on the earth's equator. What General Power tried to warn us about thirteen years ago are Electrogravitic Floating Platforms, known today as Cosmospheres. General Power's warnings created a temporary sensation in 1965, but in the end they were ignored. One morning in December 1977 America did wake up with Soviet floating Cosmospheres overhead, and airquakes began shaking houses and breaking windows in a mild illustration of what they can do. Today there are 70 Soviet Cosmospheres deployed world-wide, and we have no defense against them!

Topic #2—Last month I gave a warning about the mushrooming activities of the Soviet KGB in Quebec Province, Canada. Soviet bloc aircraft including camouflaged Soviet troop transports, have been passing through the Mirabel and Dorval airports in Montreal in large numbers. As of last month I was able to reveal the existence of at least 12 guerrilla camps in Quebec Province and over 3,000 KGB trained personnel in Canada. Today I can tell you more. The things I was able to tell you about last month are part of a much bigger picture involving France, the United States, Britain, and the Soviet Union in a complex power play; but the bottom line is that the Kremlin is already making preparations for the invasion of the United States that is to follow the initial surprise nuclear attack. As always, the chess players in the Kremlin are planning their moves in sequence and far in advance.

We are hearing a great deal today about the Separatist movement in Quebec Province; but in fact, Quebec is being planned behind the scenes to be no more than a pilot project for all of Canada, which is intended ultimately to go the way of Quebec. In all this, the matter of language—French versus English—is only a superficial ploy or cover for the much more serious issues underneath.

Years ago France saw the handwriting on the wall for Europe given the domination of the NATO Alliance by double-crossing rulers in the United States, so France pulled out of NATO to go her own way while quietly coming to terms with the Soviet Union in certain areas. Today there's a quid pro quo between France and the Soviet Union with respect to Canada. The Soviet Union is desirous of using Canada as a base for military operations against the United States, and has induced France to provide entree to Canada through Quebec Province for this purpose. Even though Quebec is part of Canada and therefore nominally in the British fold, French influence there is very powerful. The inducements held out by the Soviet Union to persuade France to cooperate in this venture include both the carrot and the stick. The carrot is the prospect for France to expand her influence over all of Canada at the expense of her old rival, Great Britain; but the stick over France's head is the threat that if she doesn't play ball, the increasingly powerful French Communist Party will take over and end the existence of the French government as we know it—and so far France is going along, and for that reason Moscow called off her dogs in the recent French election. That's why the French Communists behaved so strangely, wrecking the Socialist/Communist coalition and causing the leftist coalition to lose the election when they looked like sure winners to many. Within Canada itself, all this is cemented by an element at the highest levels of the government. This element is working actively toward the goal of French-speaking Marxist Republique Populaire du Canada—Peoples Republic of Canada. This powerful faction in the Canadian government is not only cooperating with France in permitting Soviet entree through Quebec but has also negotiated secret arrangements directly with the Soviet Union as long as two years ago. As a result, Soviet personnel infiltrated into Canada through Quebec Province are fanning out all across Canada.

There remains another important segment of the Canadian government who are not party to the Soviet-French intrigues now underway who instead are pro-Canadian, pro-Britain, and generally pro-American. It is they who have been responsible for the efforts in Canada to stem the tide of Soviet activities there, ranging from nuclear sabotage operations into the United States last spring and summer, to the recent sensational spy case. But this loyal segment is now losing influence relative to the faction who are party to the Soviet-French intrigues. This is due in large part to the self-destructive, weak behavior of the United States since the summer of 1976. Most of all, the total lack of effort by the United States to defend itself against mounting nuclear sabotage starting last spring, has strengthened the hand of all those who say the United States is "done for" and deserves no further help. So now the Soviet Union is preparing already for the invasion of the United States. A joint operation by the KGB and the Soviet Army is now underway in Canada and in Mexico as well, although my reports there are more fragmentary so far.

In the summer of 197 6 the Soviet Union began planting underwater missiles in our own territorial waters in preparation for a nuclear surprise attack. The strategy was to strike from inside our defenses from short range that would afford us no warning time. Now, the Soviet Army is embarking on a parallel strategy in preparation for attack when the moment comes. The Soviet Army is today the best equipped and best trained in the world, able to fight nuclear, conventional, or chemical warfare day in and day out. We hear about the threat the Soviet Army backing up the other forces of the Warsaw Pact poses to western Europe. But my friends, the Soviet Army is not interested in

western Europe, because Moscow has already become the de facto capital of Europe. NATO is in shreds, and Europeans have had enough of fighting wars, generation after generation. Most of all, they see no hope in the direction of the United States. We have double-crossed, stranded, and sold out other allies too many times; and the controlled Carter administration is confirming that Europe too is expendable.

Instead of Europe, the United States is the prime target now for the Soviet Army. While we have our military forces deployed at presumed front-line positions world-wide, the Soviet Army is now in the process of camping on our own doorstep—in Canada and Mexico. Squads of Soviet troops are fanning out all over Canada to preassigned waiting stations which are separated from one another in most cases by at least five miles. As of my latest report on March 27, two days ago, Soviet squads had begun reaching waiting stations in every Canadian province except the Yukon. By the time you hear this report, squads will be there too .

The heaviest concentrations of the Soviet troop squads are in southern Canada near the United States border, especially in Quebec, British Columbia, New Brunswick, and Alberta. Otherwise they are dispersing thinly throughout Canada.

Right now the task of the Soviet troops is simply to reach their dispersed waiting stations, mostly in rugged or remote areas, establish themselves there in ways that do not attract attention—and just wait. They are to maintain themselves and wait however long is required—weeks, months, or longer until they receive orders to start preparing for an offensive. Only then will the widely dispersed Soviet troops gather up their caches of arms, which include tactical neutron bombs, and start forming up into combat formations. Literally overnight the previously invisible Soviet Army in Canada and in Mexico will suddenly become visible as a massive fighting force that is ready to invade the United States. Just as the Soviet Navy has done with its underwater missiles, the Soviet Army is now in the process of positioning itself inside our main lines of defense. If all goes according to plan and if this operation is allowed to proceed like the other Soviet activities against America, the 140,000 combat-ready American troops now secretly stationed near our border with Canada will be surprised and overwhelmed, and the battle for North America, like the Battle of the Harvest Moon six months ago, will go to the Soviet Union.

Topic #3—I have pointed out in the recent past that nowadays wars are planned—they do not happen by accident. Those who are entrusted with our national security always include an inner circle who, doing the bidding of our Secret Rulers, know when war is coming because they themselves are helping to bring it about. But even as we are being set up for another round of needless suffering, waste, and carnage, we who are intended to be sacrificed are always kept in the dark about what is really going on—always in the name of National Security.

The instinct for cover-up by our Secret Rulers is always powerful, but nowadays it is even more rampant because they are now trying to hide terrible mistakes and failures on their own part. Nowhere is this more true than in the military environment now dominated by Soviet Cosmo-strategy. Take Skylab for example, which is fast becoming the 'Fort Knox Scandal of Space.' Like the alleged tremendous United States gold hoard at Fort Knox, the 85-ton American Space Station known as Skylab no longer exists.

As I reported last October in Audioletter No. 27, Skylab was

blasted out of the sky on October 18, 1977, by a Soviet Cosmos Interceptor—that is, a Killer Satellite! The Cosmos Interceptor fired its charged Particle Beam Weapon at Skylab, and Skylab erupted into an enormous fireball that was seen all the way from southwest Texas to points perhaps 800 miles away in Arkansas and Missouri. Nine days later the cover-up began. Suddenly NASA released a cover story to the effect that for some reason Skylab was sinking out of orbit, years earlier than expected; and since that time, the story has been revived periodically—each time with a little more pessimism about the chances of saving Skylab.

Just as was done in the Fort Knox gold swindle, much ado is being made about something that does not exist, purely to fool the public. At Fort Knox in September 1974, a small single compartment of strangely reddish junk gold was shown a delegation of visitors (no gold experts among them), and the United States Treasury Department then proclaimed: "See, it's all here." And today, stories about Skylab are accompanied on television by file film and in print by photographs of Skylab to reinforce the assumption that Skylab is still up there. Now even the bogus Gold Audit, so called, has its parallel in the Skylab coverup. The Martin-Marietta Co., which is controlled by our Secret Rulers, has been given a nine-month contract to spend $125,000 of American taxpayers' money to study the Skylab situation. Can you imagine? And what next? At Fort Knox, the Treasury argued that it would be too costly to perform a gold inventory that would answer conclusively my charges about deficiencies in the gold supply, even though such an inventory had been carried out 20 years earlier without difficulty in only 9 weeks! So don't be too surprised if one of these days NASA should announce, with deep regret, of course, that budgetary factors will make it impossible to carry out a Skylab rescue mission.

But more serious than the Skylab cover-up is the frantic cover-up efforts by the government of the Soviet Cosmospheres now floating over the United States and elsewhere world-wide. These are the very devices General Thomas Power was concerned about so long ago. They are armed with charged Particle Beam Weapons which can do chores like destroying our ICBM's in their silos. They can also shoot military or other aircraft out of the sky, such as the Air India Boeing 747 that was blasted out of the sky early in January by a Cosmosphere near Bombay. But so far they have been used over the United States primarily in a weather modification role. For this purpose the Cosmospheres fire their Particle Beams in a de-focused mode causing the beam to be absorbed in the atmosphere instead of penetrating all the way to a target on the ground. In this way, the Cosmospheres are able to alter drastically the electrical charges in the upper atmosphere which in turn strongly influence our weather. Many decades ago the electrical wizard Nikola Tesla predicted that weather control would someday be possible by altering these electrical charges. Now, with the aid of their Particle Beam Weapons, the Soviet Union has proven him right—thanks to the tremendous energy release achieved by Particle Beams. This energy is only a tiny fraction of the total energy contained in a large winter storm, for example, but it serves to trigger and guide these storms.

As a by-product of firing their Particle Beam Weapons in this de-focused mode for weather control, the Cosmospheres create tremendous air shocks or airquakes. These first began to be heard up and down the east coast of the United States on December 2, 1977, as Soviet Cosmosphere No. 1 in a list I revealed that month, began firing. Cosmosphere No. 1 was floating at that time off the South Carolina coast. Thousands of people from South Carolina to Connecticut were frightened by the powerful, rumbling

blasts rolling in from the ocean, and windows and dishes were shattered in some areas. More recently, as I pointed out last month, these airquakes have also been heard elsewhere than along the East Coast, but no national publicity has been allowed to leak out about these other airquakes.

Meanwhile, events in the Middle East are careening along ever faster toward war. The long-planned limited nuclear strike from the Sinai against Arab-OPEC oil wells, which I first warned about in Audioletters Nos. 5 and 6 in the fall of 1975, is fast approaching. The principal target in this strike is to be Saudi Arabia, and for that reason the Rockefellers arranged to sell the oil fields back to Saudi Arabia, thereby saving their own money nearly two years ago. Saudi Arabia has never participated directly in any of the past Middle East conflicts, but now a relentless propaganda campaign is underway to paint Saudi Arabia as a major threat to Israel. United States Senators are beginning to spout the line that it is actually Saudi Arabia that is the source of support for Israel's bitter enemy—the Palestine Liberation Organization, the fighting arm of Al Fatah. Meanwhile, for more than a year, Israeli fighter-bombers have been secretly carrying out practice raids against the Saudi fighter base at Tabuk, deep inside the northwest corner of Saudi Arabia. As a result, Saudi Arabia is becoming increasingly eager to obtain American F-15 Fighters, or if not F-15's then Mirage F-l's from France to match the Israeli presence in the air. And in turn, a new Senate Report has emerged which says that if we do sell F-15's to Saudi Arabia as part of the Carter administration's so-called package deal, Israel may well feel so threatened as to mount a pre-emptive strike against Saudi Arabia.

In all of this, both Israel and Saudi Arabia are being treated as expendable pawns by our own Secret Rulers. A cutoff of Middle East oil supplies precipitating a National Emergency and dictatorial controls in the United States, is still part of the objective, just as it was in the original plan two and a half years ago. But now, faced with the catastrophic shift in the military power balance toward the Soviet Union during the past six months, our Rulers view the coming nuclear doom of OPEC as a scorched-earth policy—that is, the oil riches of the Middle East are to be denied to the Soviets by capping off the oil wells with deadly radioactivity. After this is accomplished by an American strike from the Sinai disguised as an Israeli raid, Israel will be abandoned to fend for itself. But regardless of the wishful thinking of our Secret Rulers, these maneuverings and intrigues are not lost on the Kremlin.

Three large Israeli Air Force Bases have been built in the occupied Sinai with United States funds—one at Eytam near Al Arish on the Mediterranean coast, one at Ofira near the southern tip of the Sinai, and one at Etzion fifteen miles southwest of the Israeli port of Elath on the Gulf of Aqaba. Etzion alone cost over $4,000,000,000 and can handle the most advanced aircraft. Seemingly this would provide decisive control of the area. But floating over the Sinai now are 5 Soviet Cosmospheres; and there are 10 more over and around Israel—one over northwest Saudi Arabia between the Etzion Air Base in the Sinai and Tabuk, the Saudi Arabian Air Force Base; four over western Jordan arranged along Israel's east border; one over southwestern Syria near the Sea of Galilee; one over a spot about 10 miles offshore near Eytam Air Base, another about 10 miles off shore midway between Haifa and Tel Aviv; and two over Israel itself, one in the north and one in the south. They are all at an altitude of only 12 miles except the two over the Mediterranean Sea which are only 7 miles high. In addition, 4 undersea cobalt bombs for earthquake and tidal wave generation have been planted at

distances from 40 to 60 miles off shore in an arc from southern Lebanon to north of the Sinai—they threaten Haifa, Tel Aviv, and the entire Israeli coast.

It's clear that the Soviet Union has no intention of allowing any military action to take place in the Middle East that is not to Soviet advantage. For example, the Cosmospheres could stop any Israeli or American strike against Saudi Arabia in its tracks, if desired; or, if that strike will help in the Kremlin campaign to mobilize the Russian people for war, they might sit by, watch the nuclear strike take place, and then destroy the planes on their way back to the Sinai. Anything can happen.

Meanwhile, the erratic behavior of the controlled Carter administration, and of Jimmy Carter himself is being turned to the advantage of the Kremlin. Less than two weeks ago on March 17, 1978, Jimmy Carter gave a major foreign policy speech at Wake Forest University in Winston-Salem, North Carolina. It has been widely described as a tough talk even though his threats had to do with little more than cutting back on economic and scientific cooperation with Russia, but the tone of the speech was perfect for internal Soviet propaganda purposes. Immediately the Carter speech was seized upon to fuel a fast-growing Kremlin campaign to convince the Russian people of an American threat so that they will support nuclear war when it comes.

Then two days ago, on March 27, 1978, the Kremlin unleashed a new ultimatum to the controlled Carter administration to accept a SALT II Surrender Treaty. It was six months to the day after Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko had delivered the first SALT II ultimatum on the basis of America's loss of the Battle of the Harvest Moon. This time the ultimatum was delivered in Pravda, the official organ of the Soviet Communist Party. The Pravda article urged the United States to make up its mind quickly on whether or not it wants a new agreement on strategic arms limitation. American rejection of the new agreement, according to the Pravda ultimatum, would "torpedo international security."

My friends, it's been said by some that Jimmy Carter is the last United States president with the chance to make decisions that will prevent the loss of American freedom, but that's not really true. Jimmy Carter is fast hammering nails in our coffin; but it was Gerald Ford who, as President, failed America at the most crucial point in our history. In Audioletter No. 17 in October 1976, I revealed in detail how President Ford knuckled under to squalid threats of a personal financial scandal and agreed to the treasonous Red Friday Agreement on October 1, 1976. In so doing, he undid the go-ahead he had given General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, to remove and continue removing the Soviet underwater missiles in our territorial waters.

The Soviet rulers reached a profoundly important evaluation of the United States at that point. They had tried to surprise the United States in a double-cross in nuclear attack. They had been caught, tripped up by public exposure through my tapes, limited though that exposure was, and yet they had ended up paying nothing for their failure. Instead, their formal secret allies wanted to reinstate the former secret alliance as if nothing had happened—even to the extent of permitting underwater missiles to be planted along our shores thereafter without interference! And so the Soviet Union concluded that it might as well pull out all the stops in preparing to destroy America once and for all, because those who rule America behind the scenes had become so decadent and weak that they had lost touch with reality. The

Anglo-Saxon West was ready to lie down and die. What a shame! What a tragedy!

My friends, the actions of the controlled Carter administration are leading us ever deeper into quicksand; and by military power alone there is no hope that America can be saved, nor is there any hope that our present leaders, elected and otherwise, will snap out of a lifetime of deception, double-dealing, lies, and blackmail and truly act in the West's best interest. The ONLY HOPE, my friends, is for the American People to turn back to our Lord Jesus Christ, to throw out and punish those who are leading us to slaughter, and to pray that God in His mercy will turn away the plans of the Soviet Union to destroy us together with our evil rulers.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless and protect each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #33

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is April 28, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 33.

On a summer day in 1971, two men in space suits sat aboard an awkward looking four-wheeled vehicle that was making its way across the surface of the moon. American astronauts David Scott and James Irwin, the lunar landing crew of Apollo 15, were on their way to get a close look at the gigantic lunar canyon known as Hadley Rille. They were the first men in history to go for a ride on the lunar surface. As they bumped along, they passed the rim of a crater, which they named Earthlight Crater. Mission Control in Houston radioed back, "Arthur Clarke would be proud of you." Sixteen years earlier, in 1955, the renowned British writer Arthur C. Clarke had published a prophetic book with the title "Earthlight." Published two years before the Space Age dawned with Sputnik One, Earthlight was about man's then future occupation of the moon; and in honor of Clarke's vision, the Apollo 15 astronauts named Earthlight Crater after the book. And very often during television coverage of the American visits to the moon, Walter Cronkite of CBS News had at his elbow none other than Arthur C. Clarke. In his book, Clarke painted a vivid picture of the great value the moon would

acquire—scientifically, economically, and strategically. The climax of this book, honored so uniquely by the Apollo 15 astronauts, is called the "Battle of Pico", a hypothetical space battle centered on the moon; and while the details are quite different, Clarke's fictional Battle of Pico foreshadowed in eerie ways the real space battle that took place more than two decades later in September 1977. The Battle of the Harvest Moon has been kept a secret from the public, both by the victor (the Soviet Union), and by the vanquished (the United States of America); but it is the key to understanding the increasingly headlong retreat of the United States on all fronts under the new boldness of the Kremlin.

Like September 1977, April 1978 has been a watershed month in the needless decline and fall of the United States and of the western world. Now, as last September, crucial developments have taken place under the shroud of secrecy with no official hint of what is actually taking place. Now, as then, the only public clues to the momentous developments going on behind the scenes are obscure diplomatic maneuvers and mysterious occurrences of

all kinds. Last September, for example, there was the mystery of the so-called UFO over Petrozavodsk in the Soviet Union. Then, a scant week later, there was the loudly trumpeted breakthrough in SALT II negotiations. This breakthrough, we were told, accounted for the highly unusual sudden nighttime meeting with Jimmy Carter at the White House demanded by Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko. As I told you that month in Audioletter No. 26, the object over Petrozavodsk was not a UFO, and the major media stories about a SALT breakthrough were lies to mislead the public; and today, seven months later, there still is no SALT II agreement.

This month there is the alleged mystery of the Korean air liner that intruded into Soviet airspace while Secretary of State Vance was in Moscow to discuss arms limitations. The talks took place against a background of clear Soviet threats that this was to be America's last chance to conclude a SALT II treaty. The talks ended as deadlocked as ever; but suddenly the Soviet stance in public is the embodiment of sweet reason and patience. Meanwhile, Secretary Vance refuses to tell the public anything about what went on in Moscow.

Today, the Republic of the United States of America is in the twilight of final decline prior to nuclear war. Our secret rulers behind the scenes are still trying to salvage what they can from their ruined plan for world conquest, and in the process are making our situation even more desperate day by day. They are manipulating our economy and our politics to their own ends. They still believe that their wealth will save them from the nuclear nightmare that they are bringing upon the rest of us, and they are stalling for time hoping to obtain the fruits of crash projects of military development in time to stave off the crushing military might of the Soviet Union.

Since the Battle of the Harvest Moon seven months ago, ideology is rapidly being cast aside as the determining factor for the actions of governments. As the world drifts closer to war, it's increasingly every nation for itself in the arena of world affairs. Historical patterns and alignments are pushing aside ideological arguments, and the survival instinct is taking the place of treaties and even of long-standing friendships between nations. The shabby treatment of America's allies by our secret rulers over the years is now coming home to roost. Even now, as we are being backed into a corner, our rulers are continuing to throw chunks of meat to the advancing Russian Bear to buy a few moments of time. As our rulers throw away a weapon here, an ally there, the Russian Bear pauses for a moment to digest each gain and then presses ever closer. And as we are backed into the position of fortress America, we are increasingly a fortress without weapons and without the spirit to survive. Like France before May 10, 1940, we hear daily assurances of our military strength and the dependability of our untried defenses. But like France in 1940, we are eaten up within by spies, inaction, and apathy.

My friends, there are those who say I should not tell you the whole truth about behind-the-scenes events that are determining your fate because, they say, I am frightening the people. But consider these words of a famous German psychiatrist: "Fear can be disruptive, leading to panic, immobility, and abdication of rationality in favor of blind emotion; it can also be constructive, creative in the search for ways of escape, sharpening the wits in order to avoid or overcome danger. One of the difficulties is that so many of us are too apathetic to be afraid, either trusting to fate to extricate us or shrugging our shoulders that the prospect of what will be, will be." When

nuclear war comes, including geophysical warfare, only those who have been forewarned will have any chance of avoiding the panic that will seize those who are taken by surprise. Only total exposure can prevent nation-wide panic. The American people will bow to a dictatorial government as our Republic collapses in flames, and only total exposure plus a spiritual re-awakening could possibly turn aside the man-made catastrophe that is in store for all of us.

My three special topics for today are: Topic #1—INFLATION, GOLD, AND THE STOCK MARKET BEAR TRAP;

Topic #2—KOREAN AIR LINES FLIGHT 902—THE FLYING LUSITANIA; and

Topic #3—THE TWILIGHT OF THE UNITED STATES REPUBLIC.

Topic #1—For several years now the Stock Market has been following a long term trend downward, crashing in slow motion. But just two weeks ago on April 14, 1978, the Stock Market in New York suddenly jumped out of the doldrums, as if on signal. Without plausible explanation trading volume soared to astronomical levels setting all-time records, while the Dow Jones averages raced upward steadily. Meanwhile, government economic statistics were sold to the public as showing that our economy was picking up, and even the badly slumping United States dollar appeared to be gaining a new lease on life, thanks to rumors that the United States government was about to start auctioning off gold to prop up the dollar. But as every housewife knows, inflation is advancing steadily, eating up the family budget and making it even harder to make ends meet. And while the government drones on and on about inflation a few per cent per year, shoppers find prices on practically everything today leaping upward week by week. It's enough to make one think the government and the Stock Market are in a dream world of their own. And, my friends, they are.

We still hear monthly about America's balance of payments deficit, even though it has become an obsolete measurement. As I explained five years ago in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, the traditional balance of payments measurement has been outmoded by multinational corporations, most of them owned and controlled by our Secret Rulers. Over 200 of the mightiest of these together with their multinational banks form the economic empire of the Rockefeller cartel. Multinationals push money and goods around among themselves however they please, and as these dollars cross national borders they cause the nation's balance of payments to reflect whatever they choose.

For example, foreign affiliates of American multinational corporations send oil from abroad to America and are paid in dollars that contribute to a so-called negative balance of payments for the United States, even though the companies involved are effectively Rockefeller controlled on all sides of the transactions.

Today the greatest single export by American multinational companies is jobs. The economic manipulations that have helped to solidify Rockefeller control over the United States have also forced costs in the United States to soar compared to other countries, so increasingly the multinationals buy labor in cheaper markets overseas that used to account for jobs in America. The result is a steadily rising hard core of unemployed who can no longer find jobs. This process has turned the United States increasingly into a service-oriented economy while our basic industries have declined. There was a time not so long ago when the words "Made in USA" were stamped on many of the products

that dominated world markets, but no more. Today in many cases only the name is American—the product itself is European, or Japanese, or Mexican, or otherwise foreign made. Now this process has gone so far that even the American lead in aerospace is fast disappearing. As major new generations of commercial aircraft are being considered for the world's air line fleets, lately the competition is being won by European manufacturers, not American. Until recently aircraft exports have long been the single major bright spot in America's increasingly dismal export picture. Now that too is slipping from our grasp.

As we Americans look around us today we are unconsciously seeing a hollow shell of what used to be. Like a perfectly painted timber of wood eaten up inside by termites, it still looks impressive but the real strength is gone. Much of the technological and economic power that used to be America's now resides abroad—in Europe, in Japan, and in the Soviet Union. The process of milking the United States economically and technologically strengthened in 1961. It was part of the two-pronged grand plan for world conquest that was set in motion in 1961 by our Secret Rulers, the four Rockefeller brothers and their associates.

As I've explained in detail in earlier tapes, one prong of this plan was visible in its effects, involving the gradual weakening of the United States to the point of military vulnerability. This was to culminate in a carefully programmed nuclear war between the Soviet Union and the United States, primarily on American soil. But then, after the American people had been beaten down to such an extent that we would accept complete dictatorship under Rockefeller control, the second prong of the plan was to be put into effect—that is, a double-cross of the Soviet Union by their secret allies the Rockefellers. Using supersecret weapons developed since 1961, the plan was to utterly destroy the Soviet Union as the climax of the war, and the Rockefellers would have emerged as the undisputed masters of the entire world. This grand plan came to ruin seven months ago in the disastrous Space Battle of the Harvest Moon, but the bitter fruits of this diabolical plan are still with us.

In order to be in a position to profit from nuclear war on the soil of the United States, the Rockefellers transferred the bulk of their assets ahead of time to areas where they would not be touched by Nuclear War One. This included multinational affiliates in Europe, in Latin America, as well as to the tightly controlled Rockefeller corporate empire in Japan. It also included massive transfers of American money, technology, and military secrets to the Soviet Union to cement the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance until the day of double-cross.

The plan also included the spiriting away of the huge monetary gold hoard of the United States. In the magic year of 1961 when the entire grand plan was getting under way, the monetary aspect of the plan got under way in the form of the London Gold Pool Agreement. Under the cloak of this authority, America's gold flowed out of the United States in a continuing hemorrhage from 1961 to 1968, when the Gold Pool was ended. The ending of the London Gold Pool Agreement on March 17, 1968, was followed the very next day by the signing of Public Law 90-269 by President Lyndon Johnson. With the stroke of a pen the requirement that the United States dollar be backed by gold was eliminated; and on August 15, 1971, President Richard Nixon closed the gold window, declaring by Executive Order that the United States would no longer redeem dollars with gold even in international monetary transactions. It was a declaration of war on the dollar, and since then American inflation and sinking dollar values have gone

hand in hand.

According to official United States Treasury figures, the United States still retains the world's largest monetary gold hoard, some 277,000,000 ounces; but four years ago this month in April, 1974, I testified before Congress to the fact that the Treasury figures are falsified and that the United States is in fact gold poor. Based on very solid intelligence information, I described the secret removal of vast quantities of gold from the bullion depository at Fort Knox for transferral to powerful private interests. I stood ready to present my evidence and witnesses under oath before a Federal Grand Jury or Congressional investigation with subpoena power—but there was no investigation, so I made my charges public by every available means, offering to go to jail as a rabble rouser if I could not prove my charges in a proper legal forum. But still no honest investigation of any kind materialized! Instead, worried by mounting public pressure, the Treasury arranged a public relations peep show at Fort Knox. There, invited Congressmen and newsmen were shown stacks of strangely reddish bars of alleged gold in just one small compartment; and this was followed by a so-called Gold Audit, which when it was finally released after months of delay, said only "We believe" that the gold is there.

The United States Treasury Department has been aware for some time that something would have to be done about the resurgence of concern about Fort Knox, so during 1977 about 1.5 million ounces of gold were obtained from Portugal. This, plus other assorted reserves of mostly junk gold that have been scraped together, brings America's true gold stock right now to just over 3-1/2 million ounces. This is a mere pittance compared with the 277,000,000 ounces on official Treasury books, but it does provide something to use for psychological gold sales once again. Earlier this month the Treasury made a big deal of announcing that the United States will hold six monthly auctions of gold amounting to 300,000 ounces each. At this rate, if the United States really had the claimed stocks of gold, auctions could be held monthly for 77 years—yet the Treasury offers to do so only for six months, as a psychological ploy.

Several years ago the Rockefellers and their associates began the process of bailing out in preparation for war. Now, using their control of certain key financial institutions here and abroad, they have suddenly created an artificial Stock Market run-up, known in some circles as a Bear Trap. The idea is to have these controlled holders of large blocks of stock begin trading among themselves in a frenzy back and forth, raising prices and generating tremendous Stock Market trading volume in the process. Soon unsuspecting outside investors, the so-called Bears who have been leery of the sick Stock Market, are drawn into the fray to invest in what looks like a Bull Market. This situation may continue for some time; but when the smoke clears, the big controlled investors who created the artificial Bull Market will have cut their bloated portfolios, and the normally bearish outside investors who have bought their stocks at inflated prices will be left holding the bag. Without the artificial pressures now being applied, the Stock Market will once again begin sinking, and the Bears who have been sucked into the Stock Market whirlpool will be trapped. The Stock Market Bear Trap now in progress is bad enough, but there's a far worse Bear Trap that is now closing around our Secret Rulers as well as the rest of us, and that is the War Trap of the Russian Bear.

Topic #2—On May 7, 1915, the passenger liner LUSITANIA was nearing the end of its journey from the United States to Great Britain. The Great War was under way, and for nearly three

months a German submarine blockade of Britain had been in effect, but the nearly 2,000 passengers aboard the ship were not expecting trouble because, after all, the Lusitania was a passenger vessel. Suddenly, without warning, torpedoes struck the Lusitania. She was under attack from a German submarine. Soon the Lusitania sank, and nearly 1,200 lives were lost. Only later did it come out that the Lusitania had been carrying large quantities of vital war materiel below decks, war materiel that was subject to the announced blockade by Germany. The attempt had been made to sneak this war cargo through the blockade by using nearly 2,000 unsuspecting passengers as a protective shield against attack, but the attempt had failed with tragic consequences .

This month, on April 20, 1978, a modern-day parallel to the Lusitania incident took place when a Korean Air Lines Boeing 707 penetrated Soviet air space and finally was shot down. As with the Lusitania, Korean Air Lines Flight 902 was carrying out a military mission using the lives of unsuspecting passengers as a protective shield against attack. But this time the mission was not the delivery of war materiel but the gathering of intelligence.

Korean Air Lines Flight 902 was 39 minutes late taking off from Paris that day due to an unexplained delay. Then the 707 took off into the afternoon sun, heading northwest over the Norwegian Sea on its Arctic route to Anchorage, Alaska. Periodically the pilot checked in with ground stations, and as long as the 707 was within tracking range of radar he was right on course. After passing over northern Greenland, Flight 902 passed out of the range of ground radar installations. Later the pilot reported that he was approaching Ellesmere Island in extreme northern Canada; but in fact he had put his plane into a slow, sweeping U-turn to the right, flying a course towards an unannounced destination—the Soviet Union, and the final position report to northern Canada given while the jet was still outside radar tracking range served to prevent anyone from guessing what was afoot. The Korean 707 raced into Soviet air space from the north and passed directly over the mammoth submarine base at Murmansk, the headquarters of the Soviet Northern Fleet. There is no naval site in the entire Soviet Union that is more secret or sensitive than Murmansk. As two Sequoy 15 Jet Fighters were scrambled to intercept the 707, it continued southward across the Kola Peninsula, which is dotted with military installations and, like Murmansk, highly sensitive. The 707 forged ahead on its pre-planned flight route without regard for the Fighters—it did not slow down, turn on landing lights, or do anything else to respond to the Soviet Fighters—one of which flew alongside, the other trailing behind the 707. After passing almost completely across the Kola Peninsula, Flight 902 was about to head across the narrow White Sea to pass over the Port of Archangel and not far beyond it the supersecret Plesetsk Cosmodrome. At that point Moscow ordered the Fighters to force the 707 down by damaging it, but not to destroy it. The Fighter that had been alongside dropped back and away and the other opened fire taking care not to destroy control surfaces or ignite the fuel tanks. Gunfire from the Fighter tore holes in the fuselage, killing one passenger outright, fatally wounding another, and injuring perhaps a dozen more. Cabin pressure began dropping fast, and now the 707 was forced to dive to lower altitudes very rapidly. Within five minutes the 707 had dropped to only 3,000 feet where it flew around for another hour and a half before landing finally in a wide, clear area far from any airport. Throughout the time that the Korean 707 was flying through Russian skies, special instruments installed on the plane were generating reconnaissance data. The data together with the cockpit conversation were

transmitted in coded form to CIA receivers just beyond the Soviet border. This is why National Security Adviser Brzezinski was able so quickly to announce that Soviet Fighters had fired on the Korean 707. As an intelligence mission, Korean Air Lines Flight 902 was a success; but when you hear why it was necessary, you will begin to understand just how desperate America's military situation has become.

As I say these words, several days have passed since the Soviet Union allowed a Pan American Jet Liner to fly the crew, passengers, and bodies of the two passengers who were killed from Murmansk to Helsinki, Finland. Everyone was released except the pilot and navigator, who are still detained in Russia for questioning.

We have heard all kinds of stories in the major news media trying to convince us that the flight crew became "disoriented", that the navigation instruments of the 707 somehow misbehaved and misled the crew, and that the United States government is very puzzled about it all. But after the crew and passengers were rescued from the crash-landed Korean 707, it very quickly became obvious to Soviet authorities that the intrusion into Russian air space could not have been accidental. For example, the navigation instruments on a Boeing 707 use what is called Redundant Design so that the failure of even a major component in the system cannot destroy the accuracy of the navigational data available to the crew. As for the effects of magnetic compass variations in Arctic regions, these effects are real; but for many years Jet Transports have been using Polar routes many times daily without difficulty, because there are standard techniques to correct for these magnetic variations. The crew of Korean Air Lines Flight 902 were well experienced in Polar flights and in using these techniques; and yet, for the whole episode to have been accidental, the seasoned pilot, co-pilot, and navigator would have had to miss the most familiar and unmistakable of all navigation clues—the position of the sun. Even some of the passengers said after their ordeal that they had privately become worried when midway through the flight the sun shifted around from a position ahead of them to a point behind the plane. As if that were not enough, Flight 902 just 'happened' to enter Soviet air space with pinpoint accuracy to pass directly over the critical Murmansk area. Then, faced with the menace of a Jet Interceptor alongside the 707 with its red Soviet star clearly visible even to many passengers, Flight 902 just forged ahead deeper and deeper into highly sensitive Russian military territory.

No, my friends, there was nothing accidental about the Korean air liner's flight into the frozen north of Russia. Those who suspect that it was an intelligence mission are correct. But that raises two questions that go to the heart of the matter: What intelligence information could possibly be so urgent that the lives of 110 people were put at risk in order to obtain it? And why was it necessary to resort to such a crude means of intelligence gathering? My friends, you will search the major media news reports in vain in looking for the answers to these two questions; and your sworn public servants, so called, in the Federal government are busy trying to play dumb about it, so they won't tell you. But if you will simply review the progress of events that I have been telling you about over the past seven months, you will be able to understand what happened without any difficulty.

The events leading up to the Korean Air Liner incident began seven months earlier to the day on September 20, 1977. At about 4:00 a.m. local time on that date a newly operational Soviet

Killer Satellite destroyed an American Spy Satellite over the northern Russian town of Petrozavodsk. The Killer Satellite involved was Cosmos 929, the first in a fleet of manned Cosmos Interceptors which destroy targets by means of charged Particle Beam Weapons. The American Spy Satellite erupted into an immense fireball as it exploded in space. The display was so spectacular that it was seen as far away as Helsinki, Finland, and described as a jellyfishlike UFO in news reports here. Last September in Audioletter No. 26 I described this first destruction of an American Spy Satellite in more detail. And on October 4, 1977, just a few days after I revealed the existence of operational Soviet Killer Satellites in Audioletter No. 26, Defense Secretary Harold Brown held a press conference at the Pentagon. He stunned everyone by confirming the newly operational Soviet capability in Killer Satellites; but he refused to say anything about how they worked, so many reporters have speculated incorrectly that they are of an old explosive, unmanned design. During October, as I reported in Audioletter No. 27, the Soviet Union launched six more Cosmos Interceptors into orbit. All around the world they began blasting American Spy Satellites, and during October 1977 strange reports of fireballs in the sky peppered the news. Meanwhile, virtually the entire Soviet Submarine Fleet was deployed in attack positions around the United States to discourage any American effort to retaliate for the destruction of our Spy Satellites. By early November the situation with our Spy Satellites was becoming critical, and Soviet military pressure on the controlled Carter administration was building fast. On November 18, 1977, the Voice of America was used to hurl a war threat at Russia over the Spy Satellite crisis which I quoted in part in Audioletter No. 28. A pre-emptive American attack on the Soviet Union was being seriously considered by the Carter administration, but once again the overwhelming power of the Soviet Navy was used to stop that idea in its tracks.

On January 24, 1978, Cosmos 954, the mysterious Soviet Nuclear Satellite, crash-landed in Canada. As I explained that month in Audioletter No. 30, Cosmos 954 was the very Killer Satellite that had been used four months earlier in the Battle of the Harvest Moon. But few people paid much attention a week later when Cosmos 929, the very first operational Soviet Killer Satellite, returned to earth on February 2, 1978. Meanwhile, as I reported in Audioletter No. 31, more than 30 Soviet Cosmos Interceptors equipped with Particle Beam Weapons were in orbit patrolling the earth by then.

Last month, as I called to your attention in Audioletter No. 32, the Kremlin repeated its SALT II surrender ultimatum to the United States. It was March 27, six months to the day after America lost the Battle of the Harvest Moon and Gromyko delivered the first SALT II ultimatum at the White House. The official Soviet newspaper Pravda delivered the ultimatum using the language of diplomacy, and the jumpy Carter administration once again verged on panic. Only two days later it was announced that Secretary of State Vance would meet with Soviet Foreign Minister Gromyko to talk about SALT II, perhaps in Geneva; but in the end Vance was forced to make his pilgrimage hat in hand to the fountainhead, Moscow. By the time of the initial announcement of a planned Vance-Gromyko meeting, Leonid Brezhnev No. 2 was off to the Soviet far east in company with Defense Minister Marshal Dmitry Ustinov. Brezhnev No. 2 is the ceremonial double who has been taking the place of the real Brezhnev in public functions beginning a few weeks after the real Brezhnev's death in Moscow on January 7, 1978.

It is now Ustinov who is the strongest man in the Kremlin. Ustinov is the new Khrushchev allowing others to present the

image of power while he is consolidating his own leadership behind the scenes. My friends, the use of doubles in politics and diplomacy is scarcely ever suspected by the public. After all, we are the ones who are supposed to be fooled by it; but at the diplomatic level it is not an uncommon practice at all, and when a double is detected a diplomatic tradition is not to comment about it in any way. To do so would be seen as interference in the internal affairs of another

country—something for which the Soviet Union has no tolerance. So even though Secretary of State Cyrus Vance and others know Brezhnev No. 2 is a double, they simply go along with the charade. Can you imagine?

During the far eastern trip by Brezhnev No. 2 and Ustinov, disputed border regions between the Soviet Union and China were visited. Rousing speeches to Soviet troops were used to extract shouted pledges from the troops to protect the motherland, but China was only partially the target of all this. On April 7 Brezhnev No. 2 made a speech aboard a cruiser in the port of Vladivostok dwelling not on China but on the United States. The Carter administration was accused of vacillation and inconsistency in the SALT II negotiations, and the point was made that by stalling the United States was on the verge of losing the chance altogether for a SALT II agreement. When American Intelligence analysts heard that, they shuddered. SALT II is secretly intended to be America's surrender treaty through unilateral disarmament. The only alternative to surrender under an ultimatum is war itself, and Brezhnev No. 2's words had not been chosen lightly. After the Vladivostok speech he turned momentarily toward Ustinov for a nod of approval, and he got it. It was increasingly clear that the Vance trip to Moscow was taking on an either/or significance. Either Vance would find a way to continue stalling without raising excessive Soviet anger or he would have to sign on the dotted line. If possible, delay is wanted by those who are controlling the United States government because Operation Desk Top has been re-activated.

In January 1977 I revealed that the CIA had planted a fleet of Undersea Super Missiles on the floor of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans but that they had begun leaking and becoming disabled one by one. In one instance after I revealed this, the leakage poisoned whales in the ocean east of Florida, and they began beaching themselves to die in great numbers near Jacksonville, Florida. Today the entire original fleet of CIA Undersea Missiles are defunct but Operation Desk Top, which originally planted these missiles in the sea, has been reactivated and a new fleet of Undersea Missiles is being planted. This is being done under cover of drilling off the East Coast for oil. Many of the drilling operations going on there now are genuine; but Exxon, the oldest and most tightly controlled of all Rockefeller corporations, is being used in Operation Desk Top. In August 1976 when the Soviet Underwater Missile Crisis was secretly in progress, Exxon set the whole oil industry abuzz by bidding fantastic amounts in order to control large sections of the Atlantic oil field now being explored. Now, Exxon is using the Glomar Pacific Drilling Ship in connection with Operation Desk Top. The Glomar Pacific is a sister ship to the famous Glomar Explorer—the Howard Hughes mystery ship, so-called, which was used in the original Operation Desk Top. So the American strategy is to keep buying time in hopes that the new fleet of CIA Undersea Missiles and other ad hoc actions can be completed in time to counter the crushing military power of Russia. But remembering the nightmare days of last fall following the Battle of the Harvest Moon, the Soviet words of late suggested that any further delay by Vance in Moscow could be the last straw. It was concluded that for Vance to know how to play it, he would have to

be provided with up-to-the-minute intelligence on the Soviet military-alert status while the talks were under way. If it were found that the Soviet forces were in a posture of readiness to launch an attack, Vance would have no choice but to agree in principle to the secret surrender provisions of SALT II; but if Soviet forces were in a lower alert posture, he was to continue stalling with just enough concessions to avoid a total deadlock.

A year ago there would have been no problem in providing Vance with this crucial "Go" versus "No Go" intelligence information, because a year ago the United States still had a network of Spy Satellites in orbit. Now, we don't. I can now reveal that the orbital fleet of the Soviet Cosmos Interceptors has finished the job of eliminating America's Spy Satellites that can make observations in the Soviet Union. We have not retaliated because we dare not. We no longer have the ability to detect Soviet ICBMs at the moment of launch, so any ICBM missile attack will produce only the much shorter warning provided by our Early Warning radar network; and we can no longer watch troop movements and other military activities continuously through out the Soviet Union. So it was clear that a special reconnaissance flight would have to be flown in order to provide the intelligence Vance needed in Moscow. But the advanced air defenses of the Soviet Union can now shoot down any western reconnaissance aircraft, including even the RS-71 which flies 20 miles high at three times the speed of sound. The only chance was to use an airplane the Russians might refrain from shooting at—that is, a passenger airplane; and to minimize suspicion it could not be an American plane.

As I pointed out two months ago, the disastrous aftermath of the Battle of the Harvest Moon had brought about a major re-thinking of the announced Carter plan to pull troops out of South Korea. Someone suggested that this slowdown, which was already being planned, be offered to South Korea in exchange for a South Korean intelligence flight into Soviet territory. This plan was adopted, and the fate of Korean Air Lines Flight 902 was sealed. On April 20, 1978, Secretary of State Vance was in Moscow. It was the first day of his talks with Gromyko. Seemingly by coincidence, that same day Korean Air Lines Flight 902 strayed into Soviet air space and flew around over a tremendous concentration of Russian military installations. By the time the 707 finally landed, American intelligence officials had their answer—the Soviet Union was not preparing for an immediate attack. The news was flashed to Vance in Moscow, and the stalling proceeded according to plan. The very next day Jimmy Carter announced a delay in the troop pullout plan for South Korea.

The Korean Air Line incident illustrates one very important fact that is often forgotten. Regardless of the weapons involved, strategy is always of paramount importance and can sometimes tip the balance against tremendous odds; and of all strategic factors, surprise is the most powerful. The Korean 707 succeeded in penetrating the most powerful air defense system in the world because the Russians were caught off guard—they were not expecting such a stunt. Just imagine, my friends, what the impact will be when the military might of Russia is combined with surprise in the war to come!!

Topic #3—What I am trying to do in my tapes, my friends, is to help enable you to interpret the present in the light of the future. Once you understand where events are heading, and why, you will no longer be mystified and caught by surprise by the turbulent events of today. But no one can grasp anything about what the future holds unless he has learned the lessons of the

past. Looking at the Republic of the United States today, some of the most vivid lessons we should have learned from the past came out of the collapse of the French Third Republic in 1940. The collapse of France in the face of Hitler's military machine in 1940 was shocking, but it was inevitable. The seeds of defeat had already been sown in France during the preceding years when France refused to recognize the reality of the threat and take action to protect herself. Like America today, France was eaten up from within by spies; yet like America today, France felt safe behind its Maginot line, and for public consumption there were continuous assurances that French military forces were adequate to maintain French security. The ability of France to defend herself turned out to be pure fiction. When the moment of truth arrived, the fine images and self-deception collapsed, and with them the French Third Republic.

Today, the United States is nearing the moment of truth, following a period of decay, self-deception and image making that parallels that of France from 1933 to 1940. Alexander Werth has written a book about that period titled "THE TWILIGHT OF FRANCE" published in New York by Fertig in 1966. In the introduction D. W. Brogan wrote the following words, and I quote: "That France was beaten in 1940 was not surprising, only a miracle could have prevented that; but not only had the world come to expect miracles of France, the world was dazzled by the victory of 1918." And I quote again: "The French defeat was not surprising; what was surprising was the failure to preserve the fruits of victory—those minimum guarantees of French security."

Like France in 1940, the United States today is basking in the afterglow of victory long since dead; and like France in 1940, we have failed to preserve minimum guarantees for our own security. In fact, America has slipped even farther than France because under the guise of Arms Limitation we have shut down air defense systems, military bases and navy installations, and otherwise abandoned the defense of our own homeland. Historians are unable to find any precedent in history for such suicidal action by a great power. The twilight of the United States has now guaranteed that it is humanly impossible for the United States either to turn aside or to win a war with the Soviet Union. Only a miracle could do that, but we as a nation do not deserve a miracle. Instead of the faith in God that built the United States, most Americans now put their faith in the United States itself as if it were a godlike being that could never go wrong and never be defeated.

In the midst of the Moscow meetings this month between Vance and Gromyko, a Soviet spokesman reiterated for the last time in clear terms that this was America's last chance to sign a SALT II treaty; and despite the seeming improvement in the tone of the talks and regardless of the seeming Soviet willingness to keep talking about SALT II, this was America's last chance to surrender by that route. The Russians know that the controlled Carter administration is stalling for time, they know about Operation Desk Top and the other ad hoc efforts to find some military threat of significance to aim at the Soviet Union, and they know about the Rockefeller moves to try to turn China into a credible deterrent—but it is all too little and too late. The Kremlin has no intention of allowing these desperate maneuverings to bear fruit, but plans to cut them short with war on Soviet terms and at a time chosen by the Soviet Union. Since the end of the Moscow talks on April 22, 1978, the Kremlin has committed itself to a step-by-step clearing of the decks for war. There is no rigid timetable but there are definite steps planned. The intention is to complete as many as possible before launching war against the United States so that it will be possible to

concentrate fully on America's conquest when the time comes. Even so, the Soviet Union stands ready for war at any moment.

Very important to the Kremlin is a propaganda campaign which has already started to get the Russian people ready for war. The Soviet Union is going out of its way to seem reasonable and constructive about arms control in particular while the United States is being painted as uncooperative and threatening. Another top priority has to do with Soviet invasion preparations in Canada and Mexico which I described last month. After the initial surprise nuclear attack, the Soviet Union wants to be ready to mobilize its troops, tanks, artillery, and weapon caches quickly for invasion across our northern and southern borders. There is also the major matter of Red China over which a tug of war has erupted between the Soviet Union and the United States. This is so important that two days ago Brezhnev No. 2 sent a Deputy Foreign Minister to Peking for talks about the border dispute. In the days ahead China will be increasingly the focus of attention by both sides, but the sleeping giant should have been left alone, because the pressures and inducements now being showered on China by the Rockefeller interests are tending to make China more revisionist and therefore more similar to Russia in political thinking. So, unwittingly, our Secret Masters are helping to bring Russia and China closer together, not farther apart.

As war approaches, the United States will be plagued increasingly by sabotage and by acts of geophysical warfare—such as floods, storms, and artificial earthquakes, especially in California. But the biggest surprise in store for America in the coming war are the Cosmospheres now hovering over our heads. Unlike the United States in recent years, the Soviet Union has never forgotten that quantity can be just as important as quality in a weapons system; and in preparation for the coming conflict, the number of Cosmospheres deployed world-wide and especially over the United States began mushrooming early this month. Based on my intelligence information as of April 26, two days ago, there are two hundred sixteen—repeat, 216—Soviet Cosmospheres armed with Particle Beam weapons now hovering over locations throughout the United States. There are nine (9) over the Washington, D.C. area alone, three (3) each over New York City, Roanoke, Va., and Phoenix, Arizona. Also there are Cosmospheres located over military installations, dams, state capital cities and other major cities. Presently they are most heavily concentrated in the northeast area of the United States, but there are twelve (12) each over California and Texas, and nine (9) over Kansas. The Carter administration knows all too well how close we are to war; that is why we are hearing more and more about a possible national emergency, gas rationing, etc. Congress knows too but they, like the Executive branch, refuse to tell you the truth.

As citizens of the United States, we are now just like the trusting passengers of Korean Air Lines Flight 902—we are just going along for the ride, trusting our pilots in Washington; and even when we see dramatic and disturbing signs that something is terribly wrong, we as a people refuse to accept the responsibility left to us by the Founders of our Republic. Instead of picking up the Constitutional tools that were left to us to prevent disaster, we react like the passengers on the Korean plane who wondered why the sun was suddenly behind them instead of ahead of them. We think it must be all right, surely they must know what they are doing; but, my friends, our Republic is now in the hands of men who don't know what they are doing. They know all about lies, intrigue and trickery, but they know nothing about honest leadership nor do they care about it. And

so the twilight of the Republic of the United States of America is deepening before our very eyes. We have turned away from the light of Freedom that comes only from God, and we are flying into the darkness of war.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #34

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is May 26, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 34.

The time has now come for me to take pause and to take stock of the desperate situation facing us. I have worked as hard and as faithfully as I know how to do for five years, and I believe I should give you my honest evaluation of the success or failure of what I have been trying to do. I am not making a career of this. EITHER THE PLANS OF OUR SECRET RULERS FOR WAR AND DISASTER WILL BE STOPPED—OR THEY WILL STOP US!

My three special topics for today are:

Topic #1—THE BATTLE OF MIDWAY REPEATED IN SPACE;

Topic #2—EARTHQUAKES, WEATHER CONTROL, AND HUNGER IN AMERICA; and Topic #3—THE PUBLIC CONFESSION OF DR. BETER.

Topic #1—Eight months ago tomorrow, on September 27, 1977, the United States lost the most decisive battle of the 20th Century—the Battle of the Harvest Moon. Not since the early days of World War II has there been anything remotely like it in significance. Ever since the sleepy Sunday morning of December 7, 1941, the words "Pearl Harbor" have meant far more than the geographical location of the headquarters of the Pacific Fleet of the United States Navy. From that day onward, Pearl Harbor has been a synonym for surprise attack of the most devastating variety. To every American who heard the chilling, unbelievable news bulletins on the radio that day, the Pearl Harbor attack still remains as a searing memory. For us, it was the beginning of a nightmare called World War II. The emotional impact of the Pearl Harbor attack still lingers on; but the full meaning of that attack was lost on most of us then and is even less widely understood today, for it was not until six months later that the true significance of the Pearl Harbor attack was revealed in the decisive Battle of Midway, and by then we Americans were too preoccupied with fighting the war to stop and notice the broader meaning of particular battles.

In Audioletter No. 14, nearly two years ago, I referred to the fact that just prior to the Pearl Harbor attack President Franklin D. Roosevelt had taken steps to arrange for our three aircraft carriers based there to be absent when the Japanese attacked; and in Audio Book Talking Tape No. 7-B, which I recorded over two years ago with my friend Colonel Curtis B. Dall, Colonel Dall tells the whole story of the TREASON of America's leaders in conjunction with the Pearl Harbor attack. There's no time to review all of that again here, it's enough to say that Pearl Harbor was held out to the Japanese as an enticing target for attack as a ruse to get America into the war. By virtue of the Tripartite Act between Japan, Germany, and Italy, this automatically involved America in the European war as well. As a result, our Secret Rulers emerged from World War II in control of the formerly British oil concessions in Saudi Arabia.

But returning to the Pacific, the sequence of events from the Pearl Harbor attack in December 1941 to the Battle of Midway six months later, had a profound impact on American military strategy for decades to come. In the realm of naval strategy, the rise to dominance of the aircraft carrier was confirmed during that period in the Pacific over 35 years ago, and today the aircraft carrier is still a dominant factor in most American naval thinking. But far beyond that, those first six months of the Pacific war became the primitive model for an entire grand strategy for world domination that was set in motion two decades later in 1961; only this time, the secret strategy backfired. In June 1942 the Battle of Midway, the turning point of the Pacific war, was won by the United States—but in September 1977 the Battle of the Harvest Moon, another turning point, was lost by the United States.

As World War II began, most Americans still thought of battleships as typifying naval power. We had heard about aircraft carriers, submarines, and other kinds of ships, but it was the battleship with its awesome big guns able to pound landing beaches or other ships twenty miles away that automatically came to mind. If we had been asked, most Americans probably would have answered that the battleship was the key to naval strength—but we, the public, were behind the times. A revolution was taking place in the technology of naval weaponry and top strategists knew that the days of the battleship were already numbered, thanks to the rapid emergence of effective aircraft carriers. In 1941 this turn of events was still so new that even within naval ranks it was a matter of heated debate, but at the highest levels of strategic thinking it was understood in Japan as well as in the United States.

When Admiral Yamamoto, the Japanese naval chief, launched the surprise attack on Pearl Harbor on December 7, 1941, he used a naval force built around six aircraft carriers. Like all military commanders, Yamamoto knew that surprise would be the most powerful of all weapons, and every precaution was taken to insure that it would be achieved. Long before battleships or cruisers would have been close enough to start shelling Pearl Harbor, Yamamoto's aircraft carriers began launching dive bombers, torpedo planes, and fighters into the first rays of dawn; and at 7:55 A.M. Honolulu time, wave after wave of Japanese aircraft swept in to attack Pearl Harbor. Not a single American fighter rose to meet the first waves of Japanese attackers because the surprise was complete. Battleships, cruisers, and destroyers were caught were they lay peacefully at anchor, bottled up in the harbor; and American aircraft grouped together on the airfield as a precaution against sabotage were turned into gigantic towering bonfires even as American pilots tried in vain to start their planes and take off. Yes, tactical surprise had been achieved at Pearl Harbor by Yamamoto, but it was Yamamoto who was surprised in the strategic sense, because just as he had used aircraft carriers for the attack, his principal targets at Pearl Harbor had been our three aircraft carriers based there. Falsified intelligence reports had been used to convince Yamamoto that these prize targets were there, but when Japanese aircraft swarmed over Pearl Harbor that December morning, all three carriers were missing. As a result, the decisive blow that Yamamoto had tried to deliver to the United States Pacific Fleet had not been achieved, but incredible carnage and terror had taken place—just the right medicine our Secret Rulers needed to cure American reluctance to go to war.

Just five months later the seriousness of the failure of the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor began to make itself felt. A

large Japanese task force was preparing to invade some islands in the Solomons using powerful battleships and cruisers to cover the invasion; but the United States Navy intervened, using aircraft carriers to good advantage. The resulting Battle of the Coral Sea ruined the Japanese attack plan by turning the entire engagement into a battle between aircraft carriers. The Japanese were never able to make use of their battleships, cruisers, and landing craft and had to withdraw.

But it was the following month, June 1942, that the decisive Battle of Midway sealed Japan's fate for the rest of the war. Admiral Yamamoto launched an attack against Midway Island, an important American air and naval toe hold in the South Pacific. Yamamoto's force included not only four aircraft carriers but a seemingly overwhelming force of battleships together with cruisers, destroyers, and submarines. But once again the United States Navy turned the whole thing into a battle between aircraft carriers. Under the command of Admiral Chester Nimitz, American forces built around the three carriers that had been deliberately saved from the Pearl Harbor surprise, attacked the Japanese from an unexpected direction. In a single day, June 4, 1942, all four of the attacking Japanese carriers were sunk. Now the vast fleet of Japanese battleships and other vessels were robbed of their air umbrella and became useless. They couldn't get close enough to Midway to attack and had to turn away. Without their carriers they were defeated regardless of all their seeming power otherwise.

The Battle of Midway was the turning point of the Pacific War. It came only six months after Pearl Harbor, and the war continued with great loss of life on both sides for more than three years afterward. But with the Battle of Midway, the ultimate outcome of the war between Japan and the United States became only a matter of time because the loss of the four carriers sunk in the Battle of Midway broke the back of Japanese naval superiority in the Pacific. From then on, American productive capacity enabled the United States to gradually pull ahead and outstrip all Japanese capabilities, and Japan was doomed.

The events from Pearl Harbor to Midway over a generation ago provided lessons that our arrogant Secret Rulers thought they could apply on a far bigger scale once again. By means of Pearl Harbor, they had lured an intended victim, Japan, into an attack that united the American people into support for war. Meanwhile they had held back in reserve the essential weapons of retaliation which were to enable the victim to be defeated—namely, aircraft carriers. At the time, carriers were still so new as a real naval force that their true significance was lost on the public at large. But by banking everything on this new decisive technology of war, they had succeeded in destroying Japan as the planned outcome of the war.

Twenty years later in 1961 a replay of the same basic strategy was set in motion by our Secret Rulers. This was the elaborate two-pronged strategy for world domination about which I have given many details, beginning last September in Audioletter No. 26 and in other Audioletters since then. The intended victim this time was to be Soviet Russia, the only military force on earth rivaling that of the Rockefeller empire. Once again the intention was to lure the victim, Russia, into a Pearl Harbor-type attack under carefully controlled conditions. As before, the terror and carnage would be inhuman with many millions of lives being snuffed out this time since the attack would be nuclear. But as before, our Secret Rulers intended to keep in reserve a decisive ace in the hole in terms of new weapons technology with which to destroy the intended victim when

the time came. In the Pacific war over 35 years ago it was the new aircraft carrier whose umbrella determined the usefulness of almost all other weapons. Today it is space weaponry that plays the same role, and the ace in the hole our Secret Rulers had kept aside was the secret American Moon Base in Copernicus Crater. Armed with Beam Weapons, the Copernicus Base was to be an invulnerable location from which any populated spot on earth could be put to the torch instantly, and at will. But last September 1977 the whole diabolical plan backfired, as I told you in detail that month in Audioletter No. 26.

First, on September 20, 1977, the first operational Russian Killer Satellite, Cosmos 929, manned and armed with charged Particle Beam Weapons, blasted an American Spy Satellite into a giant fireball over the Petrozavodsk Observatory located in northern Russia. It was like the Battle of the Coral Sea in May 1942, for suddenly the rules of battle were undergoing a dramatic change, only this time it was happening in reverse. This time the tables were being turned against us, not by us. Then only a week later the Space Age equivalent of the Battle of Midway took place—out of the public eye, and without any public suspicion of what was taking place. Suddenly, without explanation, the Soviet Union expelled European community fishing vessels from its northern waters where its mammoth Northern Fleet is based. Then on September 27, 1977, the Battle of the Harvest Moon ended in a stunning upset—the Soviet Union had knocked out the secret American weapons base in Copernicus Crater. It was a turning-point battle, no less than the Battle of Midway in World War II.

Since that time, as I have chronicled for you in my tapes month to month, Soviet Russia has turned the tables against the United States militarily just as surely and just as decisively as did the United States against Japan in World War II. All-out war between Russia and America has not yet broken out, but the ultimate outcome appears to have been decided already by the turning-point secret Space Battle of eight months ago. In the same way, the bulk of the fighting between Japan and the United States in World War II took place after the Battle of Midway, but the turning point at Midway set the course for the remainder of the war that Japan could never reverse.

Topic #2—In the wake of the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia in 1918, centralized control of food production and distribution, food rationing, purges and other factors led to the horrendous Russian famine of 1919 to 1921. The vicious new masters of Russia, the Bolsheviks, who are now being expelled from Russia, used hunger as a deliberate tool for political control. The awesome and tragic effects of hunger on people were described as a lesson to all by the late P. A. Sorokin, the great Russian sociologist who fled Bolshevik Russia and founded the Department of Sociology at Harvard University. To all who are wise enough to care about the lessons of the Russian experience in this area, I strongly recommend Sorokin's book titled "HUNGER AS A FACTOR IN HUMAN AFFAIRS." It's available for $12.50 from the University of Florida Press, 15 Northwest Street, Gainesville, Fla., zip 32603.

In my very first tape, Audio Book No. 1, I mentioned the planned role of shortages and even starvation in America as factors in the coming depression and war. Many things have gone awry in our Secret Rulers' time tables since then, but the prospects for hunger in America have, if anything, increased. In recent tapes I have mentioned the weather modification role which can be played by Russian Cosmospheres. Their charged Particle Beam Weapons when fired in a de-focused mode produce not only air

blasts like those that were first heard along our East Coast last December but also electrical charges in the upper atmosphere that alter our weather patterns.

Now, for the very first time, I can confirm that weather control by our own Secret Rulers is also far advanced as it pertains to the United States. On December 12, 1977, an article was planted in a Canadian newspaper which has been circulated very widely throughout the United States. It claimed that an electronic weather barrier had been set up by the Russians to change our weather. The alleged Russian barrier was described as running all the way from Alaska to Chile, and it was blamed for the unusually severe winter that was in progress. Here, my friends, is a perfect example of dis-information—it was designed to mislead the public and many, many people have been taken in by it. There is a weather modification Grid System along our shores, but it's not as described in the article, and it's not Russian. It's controlled by our own Secret Rulers. This Grid System consists of three (3) tremendous underwater cables laid along the Continental Shelf of our East, West, and Gulf Coasts. The West Coast cable runs from Cape Cook on northwest Vancouver Island down the West Coast past Baja California, to a point opposite Tuxpan, Mexico. The East Coast cable runs from the tip of a peninsula at the northeast end of the Bay of Fundy, Nova Scotia, southward to a point near Jacksonville, Florida. The Gulf cable runs from a point northwest of Tampa near Buena Vista, Florida, westward to a point 77 miles due east of Corpus Christi, Texas. Each cable is powered by an underground nuclear power plant. These three underground nuclear power plants are located at Cape Cook, at the peninsula I described in Nova Scotia, and near Buena Vista, Florida.

You may have read articles speculating that very powerful radio waves might be used to alter the weather, but that's not how the Coastal Grid System works. Instead, each grid cable can be made either positive or negative relative to the earth. The nuclear power plant that feeds it acts like a giant battery with one terminal connected to the cable, the other grounded. These three Coastal Grids combined set up electrical fields that span the continental United States, excluding Alaska, with parts of Mexico and Canada affected as well. Electric charges in the upper atmosphere move in response to these fields, producing jet stream shifts which in turn alter our weather. The process absorbs enormous amounts of power, which is provided by the three underground nuclear power plants that feed the Grids.

In the bitter winter just passed, killer storms were created by weather control that was only partly due to Soviet Cosmospheres—for the most part they were caused by the Coastal Grids, which I am able to reveal today for the very first time. At the present time the West Coast Grid is negatively charged, while the East Coast Grid is positive. But I am informed that beginning just six days ago on May 2 0 an experiment got underway involving frequent changes in polarity of the Gulf Grid. Yesterday, for example, the polarity was changed from negative to positive at 4:20 P.M., and then reversed from positive to negative again barely 7 hours later at 11:30 P.M. In light of all this, ponder the words of Merlin Williams, Director of the Federal Government's Weather Modification Office in an interview published just yesterday, May 25, in the New York Times. A sense of urgency about improved storm warning was conveyed as he pointed to communities on the southern Florida coast as being particularly vulnerable. He said it is likely that "the kind of storms that killed only a few people in the past, will kill thousands. The time is ripe for such a killer storm, and I am afraid it could very well come this summer or fall."

These Grids, my friends, are being used by our Secret Rulers to manipulate our weather for their own purposes. Last winter tremendous storms 'just happened' to coincide with efforts of a gas lobby to de-regulate natural gas prices; and now, strange weather conditions have seriously delayed the planting of spring crops in our breadbasket areas, and have caused crops to be washed away in others. What is going on now is weather warfare, involving not only weather modification weapons of the Soviet Union but also of our own Secret Rulers. The era of weather strategy has dawned with America as the battleground. These secret Coastal Grids tend to produce regional and nation-wide weather modification effects, while the Russian Cosmospheres produce more concentrated, localized effects. But now, with even more Cosmospheres overhead than the 216 I reported to you last month, a battle royal is shaping up for control of America's weather. I cannot say who will win, but what I can say for sure is that strange weather will be widespread this summer and perhaps even more so next winter—and the losers will be you and me, the American people.

This disruption of our food supply by weather modification has already begun, reflected in skyrocketing vegetable prices at your local supermarket; but a much more dramatic disruption in those food supplies that come from our West Coast could occur at any moment. I am referring to the effects of man-made earthquake and tidal wave disaster I first warned about a year ago in Audioletter No. 24. In that tape I gave the locations of seven (7) Russian fission-fusion-fission superbombs that had been planted in deep undersea trenches around the Philippines. As I explained then, the Philippines sit like a keystone in the long arc of geological faults that ring the Pacific—the so-called Ring of Fire. A major earthquake erupting in the Philippines could work its way around the Pacific rim and ultimately devastate America's west coast—and that's exactly what is planned!

Since I made that tape, I've also reported the planting of lower-yield undersea weapons around the Pacific and elsewhere by the Soviet Union. Many of these have been detonated, and during the past year strong earthquakes have been very frequent along the Pacific rim—everywhere except the Philippines. What the Soviet Union has been doing, my friends, is to release tensions in the earth's crust everywhere except around the Philippines, where the stresses are building to tremendous levels. When the time is ripe, according to Russian stress-monitoring instruments in that area, the bombs around the Philippines will be set off. Soviet scientists anticipate that earthquakes and tidal waves of unprecedented proportions will be triggered as a result and that, as one result, America's west coast will be laid waste. For further details of the plan, I suggest you listen again to Audioletter No. 24.

A few days ago a volcano in the Philippines began erupting, indicating that the stresses in that area are building up; and in the past few days the Russians have triggered strong earthquakes in the 6.5 Richter range in quick succession near Taiwan, Japan, and the Aleutians. My friends, the first major disaster in the secret geophysical war now underway lies just around the corner.

Topic #3—My friends, it's now been five years since my non-fiction book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR" was published. The book led to appearances on countless talk shows all over America, followed by cassette tapes, and beginning three years ago next month my Audioletter monthly cassette series. All of this has come as an unexpected interruption in my own

professional career as a financial and legal consultant with clients world-wide; and I think it's time to take stock, to evaluate what if anything has been accomplished, and to tell you what I have learned from these five years of effort. But before I do that, let me say that for nearly five years, from 1968 to 1973, I had been helping in the development of private international business in the Republic of Zaire in Africa and had many projects in the works there. For me, Zaire will always be a very special place, for it was there in the bush of Africa that I came to know, to love, and to walk with our Lord Jesus Christ in a way that I cannot describe. It has to be experienced, and from this experience—and a spiritual experience, if I may say—I was forced to take time out.

Over the years I had been learning more and more about the real causes behind the political, economic, social, and military developments of our time. My contacts at high levels of business and government had involved many dealings also with the international intelligence community, which today serves big international business as much or more than it does government or you and me. Putting it all together, I had learned that a handful of incredibly powerful men were bent on wrecking your future for their own private gain, and so I wrote the book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR." I felt you had a right to know, and it's now five years since I last saw Zaire. I am still looking forward to the day when I'll be able to return once again, but today Zaire is under attack by the very forces I have been trying to expose and combat here in America. Zaire, like the United States and ultimately the entire world, is caught in the middle, ensnared in the power struggle between the rising empire of Soviet Russia and the crumbling empire of the Rockefeller cartel.

"THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR" became a best seller, and I found myself on local radio talk shows all around the United States as well as in Canada. Many of the facts, dates, names, events, and plans I revealed in that book were common knowledge in the corridors of real power in America and abroad; but to most members of the public at large, these things were completely new. There appeared to be a thirst for this new knowledge about the true reasons behind the strange, tortured behavior of our world today. Gradually I began to acquire more and more new sources of information in business, in government, and in intelligence both here and abroad. There have been many whose alleged tips I have had to discard since cross-checking has proven them to be inaccurate or even in some cases deliberately fraudulent; but there have been many others whose information has proven reliable and who have increasingly made me their exclusive channel to you. Time and again I have been told of specific instances, which I have checked and found to be true, in which certain of my sources have given crucial information to certain well known commentators and organizations only to be betrayed in various ways. So in one sense it's a great honor, privilege, and heavy responsibility for the Dr. Beter Audioletter to serve increasingly as a source of exclusive information to you; but in a broader sense it's a sad indictment of the many other public information channels who are now denied access to this crucial information.

Is the so-called "almighty dollar" which is collapsing really what's important? Will no one who claims to serve the public really do it? In short, is there no honor left in America? As I'll explain in a few moments, my friends, these are not just rhetorical questions—they go to the very heart of our desperate condition today.

Beginning nearly two years ago in the summer of 1976,

exclusive information in my Audioletter cassettes began mushrooming. The reason for this was the role played by the Audioletter in the Soviet underwater missile crisis of 1976—a crisis which still has never been made public by the United States government nor by any major media commentator. Those of you who are long-time listeners to my Audioletter broadcasts already know the story of the Soviet underwater missile crisis all too well. You were living through it while most of your neighbors slept on, unaware or not caring that we were teetering on the edge of nuclear war; but for my newer listeners especially, I believe a brief review is in order.

This crisis, with its aftermath, was a major turning point for the Audioletter and for the United States. On July 19, 1976, I recorded Audioletter No. 14. For months I had been relaying to my listeners the growing fears of key trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled major Foundations that a double-cross of America's Secret Rulers by its allies the Soviet Russia, was imminent. Those fears were not shared then by our Secret Rulers; but as I revealed in Audioletter No. 14, the Russian double-cross was already underway. Soviet Russia was at that time preparing for a surprise nuclear attack. Like the surprise attack on Pearl Harbor in 1941, the Russian attack plan in the summer of 1976 was based on naval strategy. The purpose of the surprise attack that was in preparation was to be the utter destruction of the United States Navy aside from vessels at sea at the time of the attack. And the key weapons in the impending Russian surprise attack were to be not ICBM's or bombers but short-range missiles with multiple nuclear warheads planted in underwater launch sites in our own territorial waters. They were being planted so close to their targets as to provide zero warning time when launched. If an attack like this were carried out, my friends, there would be no doubt about the outcome of the ensuing war, especially in view of the overwhelming Russian advantage in civil defense. The United States would ultimately lose. And so in July 1976 I made public information I had received from my intelligence sources about the underwater missiles which were then being planted by the Soviet Navy. Only two weeks later, on August 2, 1976, I followed up with the Audioletter No. 15. In that broadcast I explained the naval strategy that was involved, and gave the navigational coordinates of 64 Soviet underwater missiles which then had been planted world-wide. This was necessary because this crucial information was being blocked from reaching the Joint Chiefs of Staff by agents within our own government, and only by making it a public issue was there any hope that action would be taken. By mid August, Canada and Great Britain became the first nations to take action to have the missiles around them removed, and by late August 197 6 the United States Navy was fast at work too, pulling up Soviet missiles in our own waters. General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, had succeeded in urging then President Gerald Ford to overrule Henry Kissinger and give the order for the missiles to be removed. The removal operation was completed on August 31, 1976. The very next day a letter was sent out over General Brown's signature to me and to thousands nation-wide who had pressed the Pentagon for action. The letter said in the present tense that in effect no Russian missiles were in our waters. Many people wrongly concluded from this that there had been nothing to my charges about underwater Soviet missiles in our coastal waters. But a week later I alerted General Brown that I had begun receiving coordinates for a second round of missiles which the Russians had just begun planting. I requested a meeting with him in person to relay these coordinates, and my request was granted without delay. The meeting was arranged for 3:00 P.M. September 16, 1976, in General Brown's office at the Pentagon. By that date I was able to give him 48 new locations around North America

recorded on a cassette tape for his ears only. When my associate who accompanied me to the meeting handed the special tape to General Brown, the General inspected it briefly then put it into the inside jacket pocket of his own Air Force uniform, refusing to turn it over to anyone else at that moment. And a few days later I received word that the United States Navy was again hard at work pulling up Soviet missiles without a word to the public. The Pentagon has publicly confirmed in newspapers such as the Norfolk, Va. Ledger-Star of Sept. 27, 1976, and the Chicago Tribune of Dec. 4, 1977, that my meeting with General Brown for over an hour did take place exactly as I have told you, and in Audioletter No. 16 for September 1976 I told my listeners many more details of those tense days on the edge of nuclear war. I also alerted my listeners that General Brown would need overwhelming public support in order to continue to do his Constitutional duty to the American people. As I said then, General Brown was confronted by powerful forces within the United States government who were bent on stopping him; and sure enough, on October 17, 1976, just a month and a day after my meeting with General Brown, a vicious major media blitz was launched against him.

As I revealed in Audioletter No. 17, a fateful reversal in America's fortunes had taken place on October 1—thanks to squalid blackmail, threats, and intimidation of then President Gerald Ford. Now beginning in mid October, General Brown found himself standing alone. Many of those who had peppered the Pentagon with demands for action two months earlier were somehow just a little too busy to follow up with the praise and support when it was critically needed. General Brown had gambled everything on the American people—and he had lost. In Audioletter 23 over a year ago I revealed just how much General Brown had lost. I also warned of the possibility of personal harm to General Brown, and for months now we have seen no more of Gen. Brown in public as if he had been liquidated in the Russian KGB style. He has long since been replaced to all intents and purposes by General David Jones, a man whose similarity to General Brown begins and ends with his own Air Force uniform. General Jones has far more in common with Jimmy Carter, who broke with all tradition in order to make Jones the new Chairman of the Joint Chiefs. Jimmy Carter wanted his "own kind of man", a "Yes man", and now he has one.

Another turning point for our nation took place a year ago. At that time the Soviet program of nuclear sabotage in the United States in preparation for war began mushrooming. As you know, I suspended the Audioletter for a period of three months, late May to late August 1977, in hopes of assisting in efforts nation-wide to expose and stop the fast growing sabotage campaign; but when I resumed the Audioletter with issue No. 25 in August, I was forced to tell you of the failure of this effort—thanks primarily to official inaction at all levels including disbelief and unwillingness to investigate. Since that time, we have seen more and more of the emerging tip of the iceberg of the unprecedented threat we face. The Russian sabotage campaign that began last spring with major dams and reservoirs has long since spread to other kinds of targets—such as bridges, major public buildings, grain elevators, refineries, and for several months now railroads, especially tank cars. But having allowed our country to fall into this desperate condition, the Federal Government is making no attempt to correct the sabotage itself. Instead, throughout the United States intensive training programs are now secretly underway for state police and selected local law enforcement agencies to cope with a virtual breakdown of society that could be brought about by massive sabotage. It has now become a part of "Operation Garden Plot" about which I first

alerted my listeners nearly three years ago in Audioletter No. 2.

Many other parts of the iceberg of imminent danger are also visible now besides sabotage. For example, there were the unprecedented Air Quakes or mystery air blasts last December through February along the east coast and elsewhere. They were produced by Russian Cosmospheres, as I have detailed in previous broadcasts. But, my friends, regardless of the issue—whether political, economic, or involving our very life and death—the reactions of the American people as a whole to the information I have made public are quite different from what I would have expected when I began five years ago. To me, it can only be described as abnormal and suicidal. Having been made the sovereigns over the United States of America by our Constitution, we the people have forfeited that sovereignty. All we can say is: What can we do? When confronted with massive documentation of fraud by the United States Treasury concerning our gold supplies, we do not as a people respond normally or logically. Instead of forcing our alleged public servants to prove their faithful stewardship, which would be a simple matter if no fraud existed, we simply believe their self-serving lies because they speak 'with authority'. Then we go blissfully on our way wondering why our economy is continuing to fall apart. When confronted with the evidence of our own eyes that something is terribly wrong with our true national security, we do not demand—much less force—our so-called public servants to do anything about it. Instead, we listen to pleasant words that acts of terrorism like those overseas are not a worry here in the United States. Thus reassured, we just scratch our heads as if we had not a clue to the cause when we see grain elevators, railroad tank cars or other targets exploding in rashes without any precedent.

My friends, we the people of the United States of America have defaulted on the most glorious chance that any people in the world ever had. And the time has now come for me to confess to you that my efforts up to now appear to have failed in their original purpose. That purpose was to help enable the American people to save our beloved Republic by making public the information that could have been used to put our Secret Rulers in the docket and to set our government on an honest course once again. My hope was that the final collapse of the United States together with the deaths of millions could be and would be prevented. My hope was that for once an entire people would be able to raise their eyes from the manufactured distractions of the day and to look ahead to see disaster coming and to take actions to prevent it. That is what I had hoped would happen; but as it stands now, my friends, there is no way disaster can be prevented except by divine intervention. To those who have no faith in God, these are the words of total defeat—and total defeat is what lies in store for our Secret Rulers. But what of the rest of us?

I am always asked: What can I do to save my country? For those who want my answer to this question, I have to say in all honesty: You cannot save anyone or anything until and unless your own soul is saved, and that can happen only if you accept our Lord Jesus, the Christ—in your HEART, in your mind, and in your soul. There is no other way except by Jesus' power. Only then will you be able to point yourself in the right direction, only then will you begin to understand what needs doing, and only then will you realize that your Creator comes first—not country, not self, not anybody but your Creator. Then will you begin to do what is right simply because it is right.

In months ahead, God willing, I hope to continue to keep you

informed of events and their significance to you just as I have been doing. But I also will try, God willing, to tell you more about what could be done to replace the evil system that is now collapsing around our ears. The Republic which was created by our Founding Fathers is no more—except for a crumbling shell; but if we like our Founding Fathers will commit our way into the Lord's hands we might yet have an opportunity even greater than theirs. On the ashes of a Republic that stood for 200 years, there might still be built one that would last until the end destined by our Lord, for we have not only the eternal principles that guided our Founding Fathers but also the lessons of what went wrong with what they created. One year ago in Audioletter No. 24 I used the historical precedent of the fall of Babylon to illustrate the total and imminent collapse of the United States. But we can and must pray that instead another historical precedent of long ago will take its place—that of ancient Nineveh. We are told that Nineveh, like Babylon, fell into evil practices of all kinds, and that both the leaders and the people forgot all about God. Then one day a man named Jonah began walking through the streets of Nineveh calling to mind all the evil that was rampant in the city from top to bottom, and he warned that for turning away from God the city would shortly be utterly destroyed. His words struck home, and both the people and the rulers of Nineveh turned aside from their ways and turned back to God—and Nineveh revived, becoming a great city once again for generations.

We now face a trial by fire, my friends; and if at some point we as a people wake up and turn back to our Lord, then and only then might the remnant of our once great nation be spared.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless and protect each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #35

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is June 30, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 35.

The issues that will determine the fate of Western Civilization were laid before the world earlier this month. It happened in two Commencement speeches on the 7th and 8th of June. One speaker diagnosed the decisive challenge now confronting the West. The other speaker dealt with our response to that challenge.

The challenge to the West was set forth on June 8 by Alexander Solzhenitsyn, the exiled Russian author, in his speech at Harvard University in Cambridge, Mass. Pointing to the decline in courage that typifies Western leaders today, he reminded his listeners that "from ancient times decline in courage has been considered the beginning of the end." Considering the cause of our deterioration, he said: "How did the West decline from its triumphal march to its present sickness? The mistake must be at the root, at the very basis of human thinking in the past centuries." And Solzhenitsyn identifies this deadly mistake as the perversion of our governing and social systems away from their original spiritual base. For example, speaking of the birth of the United States, he said: "All individual human rights were granted because man is God's creature. That is, freedom was given to the individual conditionally, in the assumption of his constant religious responsibility. Subsequently, however, all

such limitations were discarded everywhere in the West."

And so, according to Solzhenitsyn, we have put MAN in a position that should be reserved for God alone. Human rights and freedoms have come to be viewed as absolutes in and of themselves, and man and his material needs come first above all else. In other words, my friends, the choice before us is MATERIALISM or SPIRITUALITY. The challenge facing the West is to restore spirituality to our entire way of life, otherwise the end is in sight!

On June 7, the day before Solzhenitsyn spoke at Harvard, Jimmy Carter spoke to the graduating class of the United States Naval Academy at Annapolis, Maryland. The audience in Cambridge had yet to hear of the Challenge to the West from the famous Russian exile. But the audience at Annapolis got a taste of the response to this challenge from the President of the United States. Today it is the United States that is the custodian of Western Civilization; and as the alleged leader of the Western world, Jimmy Carter bears a unique responsibility to speak the truth and do so with wisdom and authority. He is also the only Western leader of today who has deliberately made his religious practices a conspicuous part of his public image. Yet you will search the Carter speech at Annapolis in vain for any trace of recognition of the Spiritual Challenge that Solzhenitsyn highlighted so clearly. Just the opposite, in fact.

Jimmy Carter praised the United States' philosophy as "based on personal freedom, the most powerful of all ideas"; and the underlying theme of the Carter speech was that the Soviet Union must choose "confrontation or cooperation." These words are nothing more than a part of the propaganda barrage now under way to condition the American public for war—a war that Western Civilization is unlikely to survive.

Solzhenitsyn's words had the ring of truth because they are true. But because he dared to speak in spiritual terms, he is being attacked on all sides of the major media. Those who are attacking Solzhenitsyn now are the very same forces of evil who, a quarter-century ago, attacked the late great British historian Arnold Toynbee. Toynbee, of course, wrote the monumental work entitled "A Study of History." Over a period of three decades, Toynbee studied in mind-boggling detail all 23 of the separate full-fledged civilizations that are known to have existed in human history. Through a process of comparative study of these civilizations Toynbee arrived at some very far-reaching and important conclusions about how they form, grow, and finally collapse. Toynbee's "Study of History" was universally acclaimed as an astonishing feat of scholarship—and yet he was attacked viciously through the public media world-wide for just one reason: Toynbee's critics were driven into a frenzy over the religious approach he had applied to his work. In an annex to Volume V of his "Study of History", Toynbee warned of the repudiation of a spiritual principle. He described this phenomenon as "the supreme danger to the spiritual health and even to the material existence of the western body social, a deadlier danger by far than any of our hotly canvassed and loudly advertised political and economic maladies."

Today, my friends, we are witnessing the breakdown of one of the five civilizations that exist in the world today—that of the modern Western Civilization. The growth and development of any civilization is a process of challenges and responses to those challenges; and as Toynbee discovered, it is when a civilization fails to respond to an important challenge, especially a moral challenge, that breakdown occurs. History reveals that there is

no hard and fast pattern that requires breakdown to occur at all; but once it does take place, the civilization starts disintegrating—and from then on, modern history reveals not a single case in which the process of collapse has ever been reversed.

History has another urgent lesson for us as well, and that is that civilizations are never destroyed merely by an overwhelming external attack. Instead, it's always internal decay that sets the stage for collapse. And so it is today.

While Jimmy Carter spouts threats and propaganda according to the dictates of those who control him, the words of Alexander Solzhenitsyn carry the weight of true importance proven by the entire history of human existence.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—THE BREAKDOWN AND DISINTEGRATION OF WESTERN CIVILIZATION;

Topic #2—THE KAMIKAZE PLANS OF AMERICA'S SECRET RULERS; and

Topic #3—THE KREMLIN PLANS FOR THE INTERPLANETARY RUSSIAN EMPIRE.

Topic #1—After comparing the development of all the civilizations known to man, Toynbee concluded that all passed through a series of 5 stages. From beginning to end, a civilization is faced by one challenge after another, and it's the response to these challenges that governs the fate of the civilization. In fact, according to Toynbee, people do not develop civilizations at all, except where they are forced to do so by challenges to their well-being. The challenge may come from living in physically harsh territory where ingenuity and organization afford the only avenue to a more comfortable existence. Or it may come from predatory neighbors and competition for desirable land. But whatever the challenge, it is in overcoming this challenge that a society begins to transform itself into a civilization. The uniformity of tribal custom and activity begins to give way to specialized skills, improved communication and organization—and a civilization is born. At the same time, according to Toynbee, an essential ingredient is also the emergence of a spiritual view of life that welds people together in ways that cannot be achieved in any other way.

After a civilization has begun to develop, it passes into the second stage of growth and refinement. Increasing command over the physical environment is accompanied by the development of more advanced culture, as men become free to devote more attention to the arts and to spiritual studies. In this dynamic stage, the advancement of civilization is led by what Toynbee calls a "creative minority." These creative individuals come to be followed by other members of society, because their leadership brings benefits to society as a whole. This is the age of true and dynamic leaders!

The third stage defined by Toynbee is called BREAKDOWN, and is the turning point that spells eventual doom for the civilization. Having progressed and advanced by meeting successfully one challenge after another, a people may reach the point where they are unable to respond properly to the next great challenge they face. They lose the toughness of body and firmness of spirit that enables one to risk material possessions and even one's life to face up to a crisis. Spiritual exhaustion is translated into paralysis of effective action. Efforts turn not to overcoming

the real challenge at hand but to vain attempts to avoid the challenge. But this decisive challenge refuses to go away, and the failure to meet it properly is the turning point called "Breakdown" by Toynbee. Once this breakdown is allowed to happen to a civilization, it begins to fall apart.

The fourth stage, DISINTEGRATION, has taken place very rapidly for some civilizations, very slowly for others; but in this phase, the former creative minority is replaced by a ruling minority—that is, true leaders vanish from the scene to be replaced by rulers who try to preserve their power through force and intrigue. For a while they may seem to succeed through increasingly violent wars and even physical extension of an empire. But all of this is like the brief, awesome brilliance of a star that explodes into a nova, moments before it fizzles and dies. Because the ruling minority are now ruling a society whose fabric has been torn beyond repair, internal divisions multiply, social disorder increases, standards of style and behavior become confused and jumbled, more and more people seek a way out of the unbearable present, some long for the 'good old days', others seek to leap into the future, and still others turn to religion—not for answers but as a means of escape.

Through it all, the spiritual dimension that has characterized the earlier dynamic days of the civilization fails to re-assert itself; and at the end of the 4th stage of disintegration, the civilization reaches its fifth and final stage—DISSOLUTION. An entire civilization, a culture, a way of life, is no more; and the survivors of the shattered culture gradually are absorbed into one or more new and different civilizations which build upon the ashes of the old.

Of the 23 civilizations known to history, five remain in existence today: the Modern Western, the Eastern Orthodox Christian, the Islamic, the Hindu, and the Far Eastern. Of these, the first two are dominant today—the Modern Western and the Eastern Orthodox Christian—in terms of political and military power, and are arranged against one another. One is the Modern Western civilization with the United States at the nexus of power; the other is the Eastern Orthodox Christian civilization dominated by Russia.

Many people believe that of these two civilizations, the Eastern Orthodox Christian civilization involving Russia and eastern Europe has been largely transformed by the godless religion of Bolshevik Communism into a totally different entity, but there are major surprises in store. It is true that very major transformations have taken place; but as I first revealed last November in Audioletter No. 28, the death of Joseph Stalin in 1953 marked a turning point far more basic and important than is generally understood in the West. The first hint of the new course to be undertaken by the Kremlin was provided in 1953 soon after Stalin's death, by none other than Arnold Toynbee. In the course of a series of radio lectures later published under the title "THE WORLD AND THE WEST", Toynbee remarked on the spiritual initiative between East and West. Toynbee dumbfounded many by saying that this initiative "has now passed, at any rate for the moment, from the Western to the Russian side."

In Audioletter No. 28 I explained that from the time of the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917 until Stalin's death on March 5, 1953, Russia was ruled by a coalition of two kinds of so-called Communists. The dominant faction during that period were the well-known Bolsheviks, who were imposed upon Russia in 1917 with outside financing, much of it emanating from certain sources on Wall Street. But the other faction were the self-styled

Spiritual Communists, an indigenous religious group inside Russia. Unlike the internationally-oriented Bolsheviks, the so-called Spiritual Communists were and are strong nationalists, and in secret they detested the atheism of their Bolshevik partners. For 36 years they worked patiently to prepare for the day when they would be able to achieve dominance over the Bolsheviks and thereafter gradually expel the Bolsheviks from their land. That day came with Stalin's death in 1953, as I revealed in Audioletter No. 28; and since that day there have been no more of the bloody purges within the Kremlin that had been typical under the Bolsheviks. Now the power of the Spiritual Communists in Russia has become great enough that a concerted campaign is under way to rout out all Bolsheviks that remain in positions of power and to expel them from Soviet Russia. Great numbers of these old-line Bolsheviks are now being welcomed with open arms into the United States by our Secret Rulers, because a new Bolshevik Revolution is now being planned to take place here!

In previous Audioletters I've pointed out that Alexander Solzhenitsyn is not a refugee happy to escape from Russia; instead, he is a passionate Russian patriot whose public dream is to return there. After his arrest with great publicity on February 12, 1974, he was exiled to the West, an experience Solzhenitsyn has described as "spiritual castration." Solzhenitsyn believes that America and the West went wrong 60 years ago, and he warns us of imminent disaster if we do not change course.

Sixty years ago Christian Russia was infected with the spiritually fatal disease of Bolshevism, and not only did the West sit idly by and watch, but the Secret Rulers of the Western World were the SOURCE of the Bolshevik cancer in Russia. After saddling Russia with these evil forces, our own Secret Rulers then supported and maintained the artificial Soviet system established by the Bolsheviks. But now 60 years have passed. After three and a half decades of inhuman suffering under the Bolshevik Communists, the turning point came in 1953. Soon the famous de-Stalinization campaign of Nikita Khrushchev started closing the door on Bolshevism in Russia, slowly at first but accelerating year by year. Today, 25 years after it began, the program of the so-called Spiritual Communists in the Kremlin against the Bolsheviks is reaching a climax. The Politburo, which rules the Soviet Union, is totally free of Bolsheviks; and the process of rooting out all Bolsheviks from the Soviet governing system, while not yet completed, is now far advanced. As a result, the open practice of religion is reviving now in Russia and eastern Europe. Churches and monasteries are being quietly re-opened one by one, and even major religious gatherings have been permitted recently in eastern Europe and even religious broadcasts. The people under Soviet domination do not as yet understand why these things are taking place, and it's all being done very cautiously step by step under watchful government eyes to make sure nothing gets out of hand.

The pressure of spiritual beliefs is the greatest of all those of the human make-up, and this is well understood by the new breed in the Kremlin today. So the plan is to release these long-suppressed pressures gradually but surely. A new day of open spiritual life is dawning in Russia after a long nightmare of horrors which we in the West have yet to experience. The scalding warnings of Alexander Solzhenitsyn are true, my friends, and those who are wise will weigh with care what he has to say, for Solzhenitsyn was sent to us by the Kremlin for a purpose. By listening to him, we in the West can begin to grasp the spiritual dimension that is the real key to Kremlin thinking today.

In his Harvard speech Solzhenitsyn said: "Six decades for our people and three decades for the people of eastern Europe. During that time we have been through a spiritual training far in advance of Western experience. Life's complexity and mortal weight have produced stronger, deeper, and more interesting characters than those generated by standardized Western well-being." Toynbee would say that their civilization has been confronted by a tremendous challenge, and in responding through spiritual experience has met that challenge. But what of the West? Solzhenitsyn answers: "Through intense suffering our country has now achieved a spiritual development of such intensity that the Western system in its present state of spiritual exhaustion does not look attractive." And no wonder! As Toynbee discovered, spiritual exhaustion is the sign of a civilization undergoing breakdown. In other passages too, Solzhenitsyn described Western civilization in its present state as a system that has outlived its usefulness. He spoke of the warnings of history to "a threatened or perishing society. Such are, for instance, the decadence of art or a lack of great statesmen." And referring to the tendency in the West to desire an unchanging, comfortable existence above all else, he said: "This debilitating dream of a status quo is the symptom of a society which has come to the end of its development."

But the Solzhenitsyn indictment of the West goes far beyond mere uselessness and spiritual fatigue on our part. The picture he paints is that of a civilization that has, in many ways, become an evil blot on the face of the earth. He draws upon many examples ranging from the eves of triggering looting and rioting in our big cities, to rampant pornography and violence in our entertainment, to the betrayal of 30 million souls in the Far East into torment and suffering. And in his Harvard speech, Solzhenitsyn summarized this ugly picture in the following words: "Very well-known representatives of your society such as George Kennan, say: 'We cannot apply moral criteria to politics.' Thus we mix good and evil, right and wrong, and make space for the absolute triumph of absolute evil in the world. On the contrary, only moral criteria can help the West against Communism's well-planned WORLD STRATEGY. There are no other criteria."

The rulers in the Kremlin today know all too well how it happened that Bolshevism seized Russia 60 years ago. They have spent their entire lives in a tireless campaign not only to build their own power but also to rid Russia of the Bolshevik plague. Had the Bolsheviks been completely successful, all traces of Christian faith would have been obliterated from Russia and today the Soviet Union would be Satan's own empire in alliance with our own Secret Rulers. The concentration camps and ovens of Hitler were but a pale shadow of what the Bolsheviks did to Christian Russia; and yet, by the narrowest of margins, Russia survived the mortal illness of Bolshevism. Having endured it all, a new and higher level of spiritual vigor is emerging in Russia today. But the Russians have learned a bitter lesson from their battle with the Bolsheviks. The Kremlin leaders of today would rather die than allow this cancerous spiritual disease to continue to stalk the earth. Their reasoning is that so long as Bolshevism continues to exist, there will remain the threat that some day, some day it might strike Russia once again and next time the Bolsheviks might succeed, killing and destroying the very soul of their land. So, to save their own souls, the Kremlin is out to eradicate Bolshevism from the face of the earth once and for all. In Audioletter No. 29 last December 1977, I revealed that America's Secret Rulers are now plotting to bring about a new Bolshevik Revolution right here in the United States. To this end, massive numbers of old-line Bolsheviks, who have been and

are being expelled from the Soviet Union, are being brought into the United States. Here they are being given government jobs at all levels in preparation for the Revolution to come. Our Secret Rulers, who belong to the same faction that installed the Bolsheviks in Russia 60 years ago, think this will be their best chance to achieve total control over America in the war to come with the Soviet Union; but by doing this, our Secret Rulers are only multiplying the resolve of the Soviet Union to destroy the United States. To them, we are like a rabid dog. The dog itself is a victim of a disease that makes the dog dangerous, but the only way to eliminate the danger is to destroy the dog. Russia was bitten once with the rabid disease of Bolshevism and nearly died. She is determined never to be bitten again. And so, as the evil forces of Bolshevism are gathering, secret warfare is already under way, as I have revealed for you over the months. As Alexander Solzhenitsyn said in his speech earlier this month, "The fight for our planet, physical and spiritual, a fight of cosmic proportions, is not a vague matter of the future—it has already started. The forces of evil have begun their decisive offensive. You can feel their pressure, and yet your screens and publications are for prescribed smiles and raised glasses. What is the joy about?" And on June 20, 1978, Rosalyn Carter answered Solzhenitsyn by saying: "Alexander Solzhenitsyn says that he can feel the pressure of evil across our land. Well, I do not sense their pressure of evil at all."

My friends, many Americans believe that the Russians are getting everything they want already, so there will be no war. But the Kremlin rulers are motivated by a powerful spiritual drive to see Bolshevism erased from the earth! We in America are not meeting the challenge to root our Bolshevism in our midst, so the result will be NUCLEAR WAR ONE on American soil.

Topic #2—Last month in Audioletter No. 34 I explained the long-term significance of the Battle of the Harvest Moon. This was history's first true space battle, fought in secret late last September. It ended on the day of the Harvest Moon, September 27, 1977, in a crushing defeat for the United States. As I told you last month, the Battle of the Harvest Moon was a turning point battle, like the Battle of Midway between Japan and the United States in World War II. And within hours after the Space Battle ended, Washington, D.C. was jumping with reporters because Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko had arrived at the White House for a rare late night meeting with Jimmy Carter and Secretary of State Cyrus Vance. The meeting, which came as a total surprise, had been demanded by Gromyko—and had been granted instantly. This was the meeting that was described by breathless network reporters as resulting from a "breakthrough" in the SALT II negotiations. But when I recorded Audioletter No. 26 just three days later on September 30, 1977, I told you the truth.

Gromyko had demanded the late night meeting at the White House to deliver a Soviet ultimatum in the wake of the Russian upset victory that had just taken place in the Battle of the Harvest Moon. As I told you then, all the reports at that time of an alleged SALT breakthrough were complete and deliberate lies on the part of the government and the controlled major media. Today, nine months later, there still is no SALT II agreement! We, the public, are supposed to have forgotten the cover story about a breakthrough nine months ago. Instead, now we are hearing about long, deadlocked SALT talks—and early this month about reports of a freeze on the Talks by the Carter administration.

The turning point Space Battle of nine months ago was the

starting gun for Russian military surprises since then. These I have revealed for you month to month, and now America's military predicament in any war to come with Russia will be untenable. Man made catastrophe of unprecedented proportions is descending upon us, ranging from geophysical warfare to the Beam Weapons of Soviet hovering platforms called Cosmospheres. As Alexander Solzhenitsyn put it in his speech earlier this month, "A hundredfold Vietnam now hovers over you."

Without a clear recognition of our true plight, there's no chance that it will be dealt with successfully. But our Secret Rulers got themselves, and us, into the present horrible situation through lies, secrecy, and manipulation; and now they see no way out for themselves by telling us the truth. After all, they have for nearly two decades kept secret the ultimate military purpose of America's Moon Program, so how can they tell us now! How can they tell us that the moon flights did not end in 1972 as advertised? How can they now tell us about the secret American moon Beam Weapon base in Copernicus Crater which was knocked out last September? And how can they tell us of the grave threat we now face? How, indeed!

Having opened Pandora's box, our Secret Rulers long ago unleashed forces which are now beyond their control; and instead of admitting their misdeeds and so giving the United States a chance at survival, they are embarking on an "all or nothing" Kamikaze plan like Japan in World War II. After Japan lost the turning point naval battle of Midway with America, the Japanese military posture started down hill. From that battle onward the eventual defeat of Japan at the hands of the United States was only a matter of time. In the final months of the war, Japan was backed into a desperate corner. The war was exacting a fearful toll by then; and yet Japan's overtures to surrender were not accepted by the West. In sheer desperation, the Japanese turned to an all but unthinkable plan of counterattack, the Kamikaze. The terror of a Kamikaze attack had to be experienced to be believed. Even the most war-hardened sailors and naval officers found them unnerving beyond the actual damage they did, because every Kamikaze plane was piloted by a human being whose ambition was to die in flames while destroying an American ship by crashing into it. Yet as nerve-shattering as they were, the Kamikaze raids were hopeless. They were the suicidal last gasp of a nation that had already been defeated.

Today our Secret Rulers are taking on a Kamikaze mentality. Militarily they can already see the handwriting on the wall in the aftermath of the Battle of the Harvest Moon, but they have backed themselves into a corner through a web of lies and deceit from which there is no escape. They know they have already lost, but they are closing their eyes to this unbearable reality. Instead, they are pulling out all the stops on the political and military machinery now left to them, hoping against hope that they will somehow win the conflict to come.

In the realm of foreign relations, our Secret Rulers are performing spectacular acrobatics brought about by their recent change of course. Four months ago in Audioletter No. 31, I revealed that Rockefeller doors are being flung wide open to Red China in a desperate effort to build up China as a threat against Russia, and now this campaign is coming to the surface. For example, in recent days the Carter administration has given its "approval" to plans of our NATO allies to sell China militarily sensitive equipment that is denied to Russia—as if China is now a part of NATO! And just five days ago Leonid Brezhnev No. 2 (the ceremonial 'double' seen in public since the real Brezhnev died last January) issued a warning about the new China Policy of

the Carter administration. He said efforts are being made "to play the China card against the USSR. This is a shortsighted and dangerous policy", and he added that we "may bitterly regret it." Meanwhile in connection with the so-called China card, Japan is being urged to hurry and cozy-up to Red China and to re-arm. To re-arm is in direct violation of the Constitution that was imposed on Japan by the United States after World War II, and it is provoking intense debate there. At the same time, a complete reversal has taken place in the posture of the United States toward our NATO partners. For many years the policies of the United States toward Europe have been designed to fulfill Henry Kissinger's forecast of a Europe dominated by the Soviet Union, since our Secret Rulers were then in bed with the Soviet rulers. But since the day of the big double-cross last September, the Battle of the Harvest Moon, our Secret Rulers suddenly need Europe so a NATO Summit was held in Washington at the end of last month. Our Secret Rulers tried to extract pledges from our allies to close ranks against Russia, under Washington's leadership, of course. And to sweeten relations with Britain and France, a policy flip flop to ease restrictions on the Anglo-French supersonic transport, the Concorde, was announced just three days ago. And just today, Senate majority leader Robert Byrd of West Virginia is to leave for Europe in an anxious effort to follow up on the NATO Summit. But like everything else our Rulers are doing now, the attempt now under way to patch things up with NATO is just "too little and too late." Turkey, vital to NATO's southern flank, has just signed a Treaty of Friendship and Cooperation with Russia; and West Germany, the linchpin of NATO, is already making its peace with Russia. Early last month, on May 6, Leonid Brezhnev No. 2 was in West Germany on a State visit. On that day, Brezhnev No. 2 and Chancellor Helmut Schmidt signed a 25-year Trade Agreement. AND THIS IS ONLY THE FORERUNNER OF THINGS TO COME.

But the most serious of all the failures of our Secret Rulers concerning NATO is right next door, in Canada. Three months ago I detailed the Soviet-French intrigues through which Canada is being prepared as a base for eventual invasion of the United States by the Russian army. Early this month, on June 2, Canada expelled all United States fishing vessels from her territorial waters. It was just an echo of Russia's action last September just before the Battle of the Harvest Moon. At that time the Soviet Union abruptly expelled all European community fishing vessels from her northern waters. The reason for Russia's action last September was military, as I explained then in Audioletter No. 26. And the reason for Canada's action now is military also, because now the sea-lift of Soviet troops and equipment to isolated landing points on the Canadian coast line is being speeded up.

Prior to the Battle of the Harvest Moon space disaster of last September, the deliberate betrayal of friends and allies was part of the grand design of our Secret Rulers. As a result, their pathetic attempts now to patch everything up will not succeed. But they are in a dream world of their own now and their Kamikaze plans are forging ahead in the military realm as well as in foreign affairs. Late last month, for example, Navy Secretary W. Graham Claytor launched a campaign to convince the American public, if not the Russians, that we are well able to fend off the tremendous fleet of Soviet submarines. Speaking of the critical field of anti-submarine warfare, Claytor boasted: "The qualitative edge that we hold over the Soviets in both equipment and personnel is awesome." And reports have been made public to paint the Navy's Tolderay Sonar Systems as a breakthrough, light years ahead of anything the poor backward Soviet Union might have. And just for good measure—American undersea warfare

specialists have been quoted to the effect that Russian subs are so noisy that they are easy to detect. But, my friends, the sheer numbers of submarines the Soviets can put to sea enables them to overwhelm NATO tracking systems. This they have proven on several occasions, as I've discussed last August in Audioletter No. 25. Beyond that, the Russians are actually well ahead of the West in the silencing of submarines. For example, there are the Russian missile-planting Mini-subs which have crept into our own territorial waters to plant underwater-launched nuclear missiles—which today are still there waiting to be fired! These Mini-subs are invisible to all of our Sonar Systems, both Active and Passive.

In Audioletter No. 16 for September 1976, I described these Mini-subs, one of which had become trapped in Chesapeake Bay by a malfunction that killed the crew. It was a unique opportunity to learn how the Russian sonar-defeating system works; but in Audioletter No. 17 I revealed how then President Gerald Ford threw away this opportunity. As for the full-sized Soviet subs, many of the older ones are relatively noisy, but those built more recently have a surprise in store. Knowing that American submarine detection technology is built almost totally around acoustic techniques, many of the later Russian subs are equipped with what is called an Artificial Acoustic Signature. Each of these newer subs employs the world's most advanced design features for the purpose of minimizing propeller and wake noises, but in normal day-to-day operations they employ devices called Cavitators that greatly increase the noise the submarine makes as it moves through the water. These are the noises that are detected by our Passive Sonar Systems, including the Tolderay Systems that are supposed to be such a decisive breakthrough. These noise patterns, or Signatures as they are called, are being programmed into the computers that are the key to our new Sonar Systems; but on the day that NUCLEAR WAR ONE erupts, all the Russian subs that are equipped with the Artificial Signature System will retract their Cavitators. Then as they streak across the oceans toward the United States, they will do so in near total silence, and the slight noises that they do make in their wartime configuration will be unfamiliar and unrecognizable to our heavily computerized sonar defenses. The result, if the Russian technologists are right, will be the equivalent of a breakdown in our sonar defenses just when we need them most.

Similar observations can be made in other areas of our military situation—such as the Cruise Missile which was demonstrated in public at White Sands, New Mexico, a few days ago. But, you may ask, what about our secret weapons programs? Two months ago I revealed that Operation Desk Top has been reactivated. Under cover of oil and gas drilling operations at sea off the east coast of the United States, efforts are under way to plant a new fleet of Super ICBMs in launching sites beneath the sea. Exxon, which is doing this work off the east coast for the CIA, spent incredible reimbursable sums in order to lock up large areas of the Baltimore Canyon area now being explored. But some of the other companies now drilling in the area are actually interested in oil—and so far they have met with disappointment. Early this month, on June 2nd, Conoco announced that their first test well had turned out to be a failure. A company spokesman said: "I've caught a deep disappointment. We spent four million dollars and drilled out there for 53 days." Meanwhile the revived missile-planting project is speeding up. Soon the Howard Hughes mystery ship, the Glomar Explorer, is scheduled to put to sea to begin planting CIA Super-Missiles in the Pacific. As I have discussed in the past, this was the original mission for which the Glomar Explorer was designed, and now the official explanation has fallen back to the

original cover story as well, and that is that the Explorer will be testing undersea mining hardware and gathering manganese nodules from the ocean floor. Can you imagine?

In Audioletter No. 20 for January 1977, I described the capabilities and gave the exact locations of the original fleet of CIA Undersea Super Missiles. Until their containment vessels sprung leaks and they were ruined one by one, these were by far the most awesome on earth. If more should be successfully planted now, they will share the same dubious distinction. But it will not matter. As long as the missiles remain in their undersea resting places, they will be safe enough, they cannot be reached even with the Particle Beam Weapons; but should they ever be launched, they will be destroyed as they rise from the sea, because hovering over the site of each missile the Kremlin plans to have at least two Cosmospheres. As soon as the CIA missile breaks the surface of the sea, while it is still moving slowly and an easy target, it will be blasted by Particle Beam Weapons. And so, after spending vast taxpayer funds, and tremendous effort to implant the new missiles, our Secret Rulers will achieve nothing more than several mammoth fireballs at sea. Russia itself will not be scratched. Is it any wonder that the Kremlin refers to the Russian Cosmosphere as the anti-war machine?

But the most suicidal aspect of all in our Secret Rulers' actions now is the political aspect. Having decided that they cannot tell us the truth so that we can all work together, they reason that they must instead achieve utter rigid control over us all; and to this end, all of their former plans for emergency and DICTATORSHIP are being re-oriented toward a new end. The so-called Second American Revolution proposed by John D. Rockefeller III fizzled in its original form, but now it is being revived under new colors. Suddenly, as if everyone in America suddenly got the same idea at the same moment, the so-called Taxpayers' Revolt is erupting. The first American Revolution began over taxes, so it is being tried again with the goal of manipulating the American people into our own undoing over grievances which in themselves are valid. Already there is a drumbeat of calls for changes to the Constitution to limit taxes, and ultimately the total dismantling of our Constitution is intended to turn into a new Bolshevik Revolution. Nothing could be concocted that would more surely seal our doom at the hands of the Soviet Union—but that is what is planned! And at the supreme moment of crisis, when all are calling for an experienced hand at the helm, someone will be ready. He is preparing now for that moment—his name: NELSON ALDRICH ROCKEFELLER. Shades of his 2 5th Amendment!

As America sinks toward final destruction, Modern Western Civilization is being dragged along towards its termination. But why is this taking place? The answer was given 600 years ago by the great Arab historian, Ibn Khaldun. It is all explained in his introduction to world history called the Muqaddama recently translated and published by Princeton University Press. Arnold Toynbee said it was "Undoubtedly the greatest work of its kind that has ever yet been created by any mind at any time or place."

In my very first Audio Book Talking Tape nearly four years ago, I chronicled the birth of an incredibly powerful family dynasty in America a century ago—the Rockefeller Dynasty. By the beginning of the 20th Century their power had increased to the point where the original governing system of the United States was being supplanted by their control. Instead of a system capable of continual renewal and regeneration, our country became entangled ever more tightly with the destiny of a single dynasty. Today, this entanglement is complete. As goes the

Rockefeller Cartel, so goes America; but as Ibn Khaldun established over six centuries ago, the natural life span of all true dynasties is approximately 100 years. This happens because in the course of three generations, the original qualities of toughness and group feeling are lost. In place of striving there is luxury, in place of courage there is cowardice, in place of personal strength there are clients and followers—the dynasty becomes senile and breaks down. Today, the four Rockefeller brothers of the third generation are on the decline. They still command great resources, and their client followers are legion, but they are surely losing control. Their policies have already destroyed what our Forefathers created, leaving the destiny of our land tied to the destiny of their dynasty. Now the Rockefeller Dynasty is reaching the end of its natural life; and as it collapses, it is taking with it the hollow shell of what once was known as the United States of America!

Topic #3—When a civilization comes to an end, it does not mean the end of all life for those who made up that civilization. What it does mean is the end of a way of life; and that, my friends, is what lies ahead for those who survive the man-made calamity to come.

Sixty years ago the Eastern Orthodox Christian Civilization centered on Russia was thrown into a desperate battle for its life. Through that battle, it has itself been changed. We in the West do not view life from the perspective of sixty years of mortal combat for spiritual survival, so we would no doubt be shocked by some of the concepts of the new breed in today's Kremlin. The very, very important fact remains—very powerful religious convictions are today a determining factor guiding the policies of Soviet Russia. In what country of the West can the same be said? The old-line Bolsheviks who seized Russia in 1917 were parasites, destructive in every respect. By contrast, the self-styled "Spiritual Communists" in the Kremlin today have a zeal to achieve bigger and better things for the glory of Mother Russia; and as they see it, for the glory of God. And once mankind is rid of the rabid disease of Bolshevism, the vistas they believe they see before them are breath-taking.

Early in this century the Russian discipline called "Cosmonautics" was founded by a man named Tsiolkovsky. At that time space travel was so far in the future as to seem a fantastic dream, but Tsiolkovsky began his studies of Cosmonautics with the dictum: "The planet earth is the cradle of mankind, but man cannot forever remain in the cradle." Today American space men are called "Astronauts", Russian space men "Cosmonauts", and the difference goes far deeper than the name. To the Western mind space travel is mainly a stimulating technical challenge and an adventure, sort of a cosmic sporting event; but the Russians see it very differently. To them, space travel is the beginning of man's expansion outward into his new, larger habitat—the solar system, and some day the stars. Already this change of perspective is reflected in the Soviet Cosmostrategy and Cosmopolitics, which I described four months ago in Audioletter No. 31.

Kremlin planning for the exploration and occupation of space has already gone far beyond the immediate narrowly military applications we see today. And in one respect, Russia's plans for man's first Interplanetary Empire harken back to ancient Rome. In the Roman Empire conquered peoples became citizens of Rome, thereby sharing to some extent in the privileges and benefits the Empire had to offer, and considerable autonomy was allowed in terms of local customs and religious practices so long as they did not threaten or trouble Rome. Under the rule of

those in the Kremlin today, the Soviet Union is beginning to do much the same thing. This is showing itself even in the program to begin expanding the Russian empire into space. Several weeks ago Soyuz 28 was sent into orbit with one Russian and one non-Russian Cosmonaut, a Czech. Four days ago the second non-Russian Cosmonaut, a Pole this time, flew into orbit aboard Soyuz 30. The crew of Soyuz 30 docked with the Salyut 6 Space Station and entered it to join the crew of Soyuz 29, who were already there. The Commander of Soyuz 29, by the way, is the Russian Neil Armstrong, Vladimir Kovalyonok. As I revealed last October in Audioletter No. 27, Kovalyonok was the Commander of the first Soviet manned flight to the moon which landed October 16, 1977, in Jules Verne Crater on the back side of the moon. In the view of Russian Cosmonautics, man will inevitably move outward from Earth to the planets and stars, and it is meant to do so. So the Russian approach to space travel gives very heavy emphasis to philosophical and psychological factors as well as technical and physical training. Cosmonauts are taught to view the new environment of space as one that is a natural extension for man but one requiring humility and caution. Part of the heritage of Russia is that of the seafaring Vikings of ages past.

Today as spiritual rebirth is dawning in Russia, the Russian spirit is being drawn upward and outward to the limitless seas of space. Western civilization will soon perish, but not the human spirit. Lest we forget, our Lord's mercy and justice are meant at least as much for those who have suffered for decades as it is for those of us who have yet to suffer.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #36

This is the Dr. Beter Audioletter—Box 16428, Fort Worth, Texas 76133

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is July 27, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 36.

For three generations the Rockefeller dynasty has been a dominant factor in the economic, political, and social life of America. And for three decades four Rockefeller brothers of the third generation—David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D. Ill—have been the real rulers of the Western world. Long ago they carved up the world into spheres of influence; but by coordinating their activities and working as a unit, the four brothers have held unparalleled sway over the fate of all mankind. But three years ago this month in Audioletter No. 2, I revealed that the brothers were beginning to lose their iron grip on events. For example, Nelson Rockefeller had been planning to replace then President Gerald Ford in the Oval Office no later than June, 1975; but Ford survived the strange illness that sent him crashing downstairs in aircraft ramps during that month—and he has had no more falling spells in the three years since then. A few months later, in September and October, 1975, a rash of assassination attempts almost removed Ford from the scene, but those too were bungled.

Two years ago this month in Audioletter No. 14, I revealed that the Underwater Missile Crisis of 1976 was underway. This crisis, which the government has NEVER made public, was only the beginning of a total military double-cross of the Rockefellers by

their secret ally, the Soviet Union. As I have made public the previous spring in Audioletter No. 12, key trustees of the Rockefeller controlled major Foundations had already concluded that a Russian double-cross was imminent, but the Brothers themselves had not agreed with that conclusion. They had grown up knowing that the Soviet Union was secretly financed and dominated by their own Rockefeller Cartel. They simply could not imagine that Russia might somehow slip from their grasp. Only when a Russian hydrogen bomb was recovered from the waters of Seal Harbor, Maine, did the four brothers really believe that a military double-cross was under way. I had given its exact navigational coordinates in Audioletter No. 15 for August, 1976, and it was removed late that month by the United States Navy. This bomb was one of the topics I discussed with General George S. Brown, then Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, in my meeting with him at the Pentagon on September 16, 1976. Once they knew that Russia truly was preparing for a surprise nuclear attack on America, the Brothers could have taken steps to prevent war altogether; but that would have involved letting the public in on the truth—and as our Lord has said, "The truth shall make you free."

The Rockefeller brothers are not interested in your freedom and mine, but in ever more power, so they tried to reinstate their alliance with the Soviets. And in order to re-establish the carefully controlled joint plan for nuclear war on American soil, the Rockefellers made tremendous concessions to appease the Kremlin. One of these concessions led to the opening of the doors for Soviet nuclear saboteurs to swarm all over the United States planting nuclear mines large and small at dams, reservoirs, public buildings, manufacturing plants, grain elevators, refineries, and many other targets. For that reason, at this time last year my Audioletter was in a state of voluntary suspension. For three months, from late May to late August 1977, I cooperated with concerned citizens nation-wide in an effort to bring about decisive exposure and official action to stop the wholesale nuclear sabotage of America. But those efforts failed, my friends, as I revealed for you last August when I resumed the Audioletter with issue No. 25.

Through all of these events and more, the declining power and resolve of the four brothers was becoming more and more apparent, but all of these setbacks paled into insignificance beside America's disastrous defeat in space last September. In the Battle of the Harvest Moon, the secret American moon base in Copernicus Crater was knocked out. Armed with powerful Beam Weapons able to strike any spot on earth, the Copernicus base had been the Rockefellers' ace in the hole in the war to come—but now it was gone. This decisive Space Battle still has not been admitted publicly by the government, but is the real reason for the many desperate anti-Russian moves now under way by America.

My friends, we are plunging into a period of confrontation diplomacy on the road to war. Nations great and small are lining up and taking sides for the great conflict to come, just as happened before World Wars I and II. At the same time, the bone-chilling winds of Bolshevik revolution are sweeping across the land—in America, in Britain, and parts of Europe. To this end, the manipulated collapse of Western monopolistic capitalism is accelerating, led by the fall of the gold-poor American dollar. The West is being thrown into the most critical period in all its history by the Rockefeller brothers, yet this is happening as the final decline of the Rockefeller dynasty is accelerating.

Last month I pointed out the historical fact that all true

dynasties have a life span of only about 100 years. That point has already been reached by the Rockefeller dynasty, and the Rockefeller brothers are already in the twilight of their power. And earlier this month, on July 10, 1978, the downfall of the Rockefeller brothers took a stunning new turn. John D. Rockefeller III, the eldest of the four brothers, was killed in a head-on collision as he rode in a car near the family estate at Pocantico Hills, New York. The crash was supremely ironic, for reasons I will explain in Topic #1; but more than that, it dealt a crippling blow to the unit comprised by the four brothers, and it is a blow that has further increased the pressure on David, Nelson, and Laurance to hurry up with their plans for revolution and war.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—THE LEGACY OF THE LATE JOHN D. ROCKEFELLER III;

Topic #2—THE NEW AMERICAN STRATEGY FOR A FIRST STRIKE; and

Topic #3—THE AFTERMATH OF NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Topic #1—Normally, my friends, it's in poor taste to speak negatively of those who have departed; but the automobile accident that took the life of John D. Rockefeller III did not alter the truth of what I have told you for years while he was still alive, and it did not undo terrible plans he helped to set in motion that will still affect your life and your future.

John D. Rockefeller III was one of the most powerful men on earth. The controlled major media have covered up the true significance of his life and death, but I believe you have a right to know. Long ago public relations experts outfitted him with the public image he wore for the rest of his life—that of a kindly, shy philanthropist. Even in death this image is being carefully preserved through public relations stories about his funeral in the controlled major media. It was John, we are told, who delighted most in giving away the family fortune and who devoted his life to this task. But, my friends, the fact is that John played an indispensable role in expanding the Rockefeller Empire, coordinating his activities with those of his brothers. Of the four brothers it was John who specialized in several areas that are now of crucial importance to you. One area was that of the Rockefeller-controlled Foundations, whose philanthropic halo has little to do with their true nature. Another area was Asia, especially Japan. A third area was that of Africa, and a fourth focus of John's was his so-called "Second American Revolution", which is now degenerating into a new Bolshevik revolution here in America.

As the 20th Century was dawning nearly eight decades ago, John D. Rockefeller, Sr. was launching the first of his tax-exempt Foundations. It was called the "General Education Board." In 1904 the Board issued its first publication called "Occasional Letter No. 1" by John D. Rockefeller, Sr. and his shrewd assistant Reverend Frederick Taylor Gates. This document, from which I quoted over two years ago in Audioletter No. 10, made clear the true purpose of the Board. This objective was nothing less than to completely re-make society according to Rockefeller blueprints. The same purpose has continued to motivate every Foundation in the Rockefeller orbit since then, but each Foundation specializes on some particular aspect of this overriding goal. In establishing one foundation after another, John D. Rockefeller, Sr. coordinated his actions from the outset with Andrew Carnegie, who was doing the same thing. In this way, they avoided duplication and increased the scope of their joint efforts. In the area of so-called philanthropies, the

Rockefeller and Carnegie interests were intertwined and gradually they all came completely under the Rockefeller umbrella. But on January 26, 1917, Senator Chamberlain of Oregon rose to give a warning on the floor of the United States Senate. He said: "The Carnegie-Rockefeller influence is bad. In two generations they can change the minds of the people to make them conform to the cult of Rockefeller or the cult of Carnegie, rather than to the fundamental principles of American democracy."

Today it is two generations later, and we hear no more warnings like this in Congress. The prophetic warning of Senator Chamberlain has come true. The Rockefeller-Carnegie conglomerate of Foundations long ago unleashed evil forces directed at education, at government, at the very fabric of society; and for nearly four decades beginning in 1931, it was John D. Rockefeller III who, of the four brothers, served as custodian of these evil forces. Starting with his trusteeship of the General Education Board and the Rockefeller Foundation, he extended his influence throughout the dynasty's Foundation network, which he also enlarged. But now the evil forces unleashed so long ago are out of control. John D. Rockefeller Ill's coordination of Foundations on behalf of his three brothers and himself has now led to double-cross and the commitment for a ONE WORLD GOVERNMENT and nuclear war to come.

Another area of attention became a preoccupation of John D. Ill even before the Foundations, and that was Asia. It began in 1929, when as a fresh college graduate he traveled to Kyoto, Japan, under the sponsorship of the Rockefeller-controlled "Institute of Pacific Relations", or IPR. During the 1930's the No. 1 priority of the IPR was to maneuver Japan into attacking the United States under conditions that would serve Rockefeller interests. John D. Ill threw himself eagerly into this work, and greatly expanded Rockefeller activity in Asia through other avenues as well. It was he who supervised the preparations of the Rockefeller Empire to take advantage of coming events in Asia. The IPR spawned the infamous Richard Sorge Spy Ring with headquarters at Lee, Massachusetts. After the war, Congressional investigations proved that it was the Sorge Ring that brought about the Pearl Harbor attack. Guided by information from the IPR Spy Ring, Franklin Delano Roosevelt made all the necessary preparations to insure that the desired Pearl Harbor attack would backfire on the Japanese. Two months ago in Audioletter No. 34 I explained the master strategy behind all this. Most members of the public at large had no idea that war with Japan was imminent, because the government did not want us to know. Perhaps the only clear public warning was that heard on November 9, 1941, by the congregation of Christ Church in Alexandria, Virginia. The rector, Bishop Wells, had heard the news only three days earlier from Norman Davis, then president of the American Red Cross, as I told you in detail in Audioletter No. 22. Davis was very close to FDR and told Bishop Wells that war with Japan would erupt within five weeks! Bishop Wells, shaken by this news, immediately alerted his congregation. Four weeks later the Pearl Harbor attack took place.

When war broke out, John D. Rockefeller III promptly made himself "Assistant" to the same Norman Davis who had told Bishop Wells of the coming war with Japan. From there, John moved from one position to another, setting the stage for a complete Rockefeller take-over of Japan after the war. As soon as World War II ended, John D. Rockefeller III and his entourage swooped down upon the ruins of Japan. To a people destitute in the aftermath of war, financial resources of Rockefeller proportions can buy almost anything and everything—and they did just that. Soon the mammoth Rockefeller Cartel of thousands of Japanese

enterprises, the zaibatsu, began emerging. Much of the early industrial rebirth in Japan under Rockefeller control was in the area of electronics, for which the Japanese have an enormous aptitude. One of the most famous Rockefeller enterprises in Japan in this realm is that of "SONY" whose products have penetrated every nook and cranny of the world. SONY, my friends, is not a Japanese name or word, but an acronym—it stands for the former Standard Oil of New York. Today Japan is making a bid to become the No. 1 power in electronics in the entire world. At the funeral of John D. Rockefeller III this month, more than half of the cables and telegrams came from associates in Japan, but John's expertise in the Far East went far beyond Japan to include all of Asia.

Today as the United States is trying to play the so-called "China card" against Russia, Japan is being pushed into Red Chinese arms to assist in this desperate strategy. But the fact is that Red China has no intention of establishing a real alliance with the United States against Russia. Instead, China is playing the "America card", knowing that Russia is now the foremost military power on earth. The Chinese hope by their current strategy to extract the best possible terms later as the price of a restored alliance with Russia. Japan, too, squeezed between East and West, is trying to follow a course that is not at all what the Rockefeller brothers meant to accomplish. With very active treaty bargaining under way now between Red China and Japan, China has been trying to include a clause against regional domination by a single power, a clause which is considered anti-Russian by the Kremlin. Moscow has singled out this one clause as its only objection to a Sino-Japanese treaty. And now, Japan has decided to insist on including an auxiliary clause that clearly states that the regional domination clause is not directed against any specified third power. In this way, Japan hopes to satisfy both Russia and China. In this way, Japan is becoming the pivot point for the giant new Asian Axis I first warned about five years ago in my book, "The Conspiracy Against the Dollar." And so the legacy of John D. Rockefeller III lives on after him in the Far East.

After five decades of destructive meddling in Asian affairs, he has suddenly left the scene just when his brothers need him most. In Asia, as elsewhere, the brothers are losing control; and with John gone, this trend will start accelerating. Three decades ago the Rockefeller dynasty was only beginning to cash in on the take-over of Japan by means of World War II, but already John D. Ill was looking around hungrily for the next great prize to devour. He found what he was looking for in Africa. In the early fall of 1948, John D. Ill took a two-months trip to Africa under the auspices of the Rockefeller Foundation. He returned bubbling over about the unparalleled natural resources of Africa and the great commercial and industrial potential of the continent. In an interview with the NEW YORK TIMES on November 14, 1948, he explained his trip as having been motivated by great concern over the health and welfare of the natives; but his true preoccupation was economic and was so strong that he almost 'gave it all away' during the interview. Time and again his Public Relations Counselor had to bring him back to the supposed subject of native welfare so that the NEW YORK TIMES would have something to quote on that topic.

As always, the strategy of Rockefeller take-over in Africa was to involve turmoil and bloodshed. Africa's troubles really began after John's trip there 30 years ago. It was not long until he publicly revealed what lay ahead for Africa in a speech on January 18, 1951. He said: "It will not be many years before the same kind of upheaval now appearing in Asia will be witnessed in

Africa." And he was true to his word. Soon words like "Mau Mau" entered the language of a horrified world as incidents of interracial butchery and terrorism began to multiply. European colonial holdings in Africa began to disintegrate, new nations sprung up in their places with nominally black governments; but in every case the new black governments found it necessary to bring back the white man to manage and develop the economic resources! And Rockefeller multi-national corporations swooped down and took over established mining and other activities with virtual freedom from effective local government interference!

Until recently the Rockefeller inroads into Africa were being accomplished in secret alliance with the Soviet Union; but since the Battle of the Harvest Moon ten months ago, all this has changed. Under the former joint Rockefeller-Soviet plans, there was no hope for survival of southern Africa. The Rockefeller brothers and their then Russian allies were bent on complete domination in Africa and elsewhere. But the type of domination sought by the Kremlin today is far different in character. As a result, if southern Africa can hold out against the buffeting that has already been set in motion, there is now a new ray of hope that did not exist before. At the present time, Rhodesia is on the front lines and fighting is under way now near Salisbury, the capital. Two guerrilla forces are involved—one under Robert Mugabe is based primarily in Mozambique, and is Soviet sponsored; the other under Joshua Nkomo is based in Zambia, and is Rockefeller sponsored. And just as the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance has been terminated elsewhere, it is a thing of the past in Africa. This month, fifteen of Mugabe's officers were recruited away from him by Nkomo with large amounts of Rockefeller money. By the same token, Nkomo has just executed a high-ranking officer in his ranks for being pro-Russian. Increasingly the Mugabe/Nkomo factions will be fighting each other as proxies of Russia and the United States. Each will race to beat the other to try to take over Rhodesia. Ultimately the legacy of John D. Rockefeller III in Africa will be a complete failure with Russia picking up what is left of the Rockefeller chips. Africa, like the rest of the world, will be forced to make its peace with Russia, but the domination of Africa by the new breed in the Kremlin today promises to be less drastic and destructive than what would have taken place under the Rockefeller corporate socialist dictatorship. The manner in which John D. Rockefeller III met his death was supremely ironic in view of his role in the ravaging of Africa. The chief Rockefeller agent in Zambia today in the war against southern Africa is U.S. Ambassador Steven Lowe. It was his nephew, 16-year-old David Lowe, who died along with John D. Rockefeller III when their cars crashed head-on July 10, 1978.

There remains one more critical realm in which the legacy of John D. Rockefeller III must be mentioned. I referred to his so-called Second American Revolution, which is now being transformed into a Bolshevik revolution here in America. Three years ago this month in Audio Book Talking Tape No. 4, I exposed the secret new Constitution for America that had been written for the Rockefeller brothers. The product of 10 years, 100 participants, 40 drafts, and many millions of dollars, the secret new Constitution was completed in 1974 by a Rockefeller tax-exempt Foundation. The secret Rockefeller Constitution is a parody of what our Forefathers created in 1787. Using high-sounding phrases, it is a blueprint for a complete corporate Socialist Dictatorship. The propaganda campaign to set the stage for acceptance of the secret New Constitution was the responsibility of John D. Rockefeller III. In 1973 he published a book entitled "THE SECOND AMERICAN REVOLUTION", and articles and interviews on the subject followed. Then on March 31, 1975,

a full-page ad entitled "A BICENTENNIAL DECLARATION" appeared in the New York Times. The ad was sponsored by John's so-called "National Committee for the Bicentennial Era" and paid for by Rockefeller corporations. It was repeated in other publications nation-wide, and was intended to be an echo of the "Communist Manifesto" as a starting gun for change. That campaign fizzled in its original form, but all the machinery of revolution is being cranked up again now—this time the goal is a Bolshevik Revolution here in the United States with the Rockefeller brothers in the driver's seat. In Audioletter No. 14 two years ago this month, I mentioned a very important lesson the four brothers learned from their sponsorship of Adolf Hitler. Explaining the success of the Nazi Revolution from the vantage point of 1936, Hitler said: "It is not enough to overthrow the old State but that the new State must previously have been built up and be practically ready to one's hand." That is why, as I revealed last December 1977 in Audioletter No. 29, governmental positions at all levels in the United States are fast being packed with Bolsheviks, many of them recently expelled from Soviet Russia. When the Revolution takes place soon, they will be in a position to take over, under the leadership of NELSON ROCKEFELLER of course.

Economically, the first winds of Revolution are already stirring across the land. Strikes in key industries and public services are becoming rampant; and as the cutting edge of the Bolshevik revolution, the so-called "Taxpayers' Revolt" is already under way. Americans have forgotten that it was the cry of "Down with Taxes. No Taxes" that the Bolsheviks used in 1917 to help seduce the Russian people. So cleverly is this being done now that it has been portrayed as a conservative cause, and Americans are on the verge of stampeding to their own slaughter.

My friends, earlier this month John D. Rockefeller III was killed in a head-on collision on a highway, but his surviving three brothers are driving our entire nation toward a fatal head-on collision with the Soviet Union. In a harshly-worded article in Pravda only 12 days ago, Russia warned the West that we are now riding "a tide that is carrying those who swim in it toward the cliffs of confrontation."

Topic #2—Earlier this month on July 12 an unusual high-level meeting at the White House made some news. Key members of Congress had been summoned there by Jimmy Carter to discuss public disclosures of top secret information. Present from Congress were ranking members of the Senate and House Committees on Intelligence as well as Democratic and Republican Party leaders. In addition, the meeting included Secretary of State Vance, Secretary of Defense Brown, National Security Chief Brzezinski, and Admiral Turner, the head of the CIA. After the meeting, Senators who were interviewed fumed as usual about damage to "national security" due to disclosures they refused to identify. But the key reason for this strange meeting is reflected in the following line from the New York Times' report about it that day: "Today's meeting reportedly was originally scheduled for May or early June when the administration was concerned about the disclosure of information in connection with the downing of a South Korean air liner in the Soviet Union."

My friends, the disclosures that provoked the White House meeting were those in my Audioletter No. 33 of three months ago. In that broadcast I told you the complete story about the strange case of Korean Air Lines Flight 902. It strayed into militarily sensitive Soviet air space and was shot down while Secretary of State Vance was in Moscow. In my Audioletter for that month I revealed that the Korean air liner episode was not accidental but

was an intelligence mission for the CIA, and I told you in detail why it was necessary. I told you these things, my friends, because you have a legitimate right to know. The Carter administration is boiling mad at me now for telling you and would like nothing better than to silence the Dr. Beter Audioletter. Failing that, the government would like to cut off my sources—that was the underlying motive for the White House meeting of July 12. But, my friends, my most important intelligence sources are far higher than those currently available to any committee on Capitol Hill; and I can assure you that I told you nothing about the Korean 707 incident that was not already known within the walls of the Kremlin. As I told you in Audioletter No. 33, the United States no longer has any Spy Satellites in orbit that can observe the Soviet Union.

A year ago this month, on July 17, 1977, the first in the new generation of Russian Killer Satellites called Cosmos Interceptors was launched. Called Cosmos 929, it was manned and armed with a Charged Particle Beam Weapon—a weapon which the United States tried but failed to develop. After two months of painstaking check-out and testing, it was used for the first time against an American target on September 20, 1977. As an American Spy Satellite passed directly over the Petrozavodsk Observatory in northern Russia, it was blasted into an enormous fireball in space by Cosmos 929. The fireball was witnessed over 300 miles away in Helsinki, Finland, and it made headlines in the United States as a strange jellyfish-like UFO. By that time, Cosmos 929 had been joined in space by Cosmos 954 which was armed with a Neutron Particle Beam for a very special task. In the Battle of the Harvest Moon a week later, the crew of Cosmos 954 bombarded the American Moon Base in Copernicus Crater with neutron radiation that killed all of the male and female British, Canadian, and American astronauts there. Immediately on the evening of September 27, 1977, Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko delivered an ultimatum to the White House. As I revealed that month in Audioletter No. 26, this was the reason for Gromyko's sudden highly unusual nighttime meeting with Jimmy Carter and Secretary of State Vance.

The following month, October 1977, there was an epidemic of fireballs in the sky, especially over Russia. Six more Russian Cosmos Interceptors were orbited that month and they were shooting down America's Spy Satellites. Meanwhile the Soviet Union was on full military alert and the United States was surrounded by almost the entire Russian submarine fleet in attack positions. Not all of the American satellites destroyed in October 1977 by Russia were mere Spy Satellites. As I revealed that month in Audioletter No. 27, the 85-ton Space Station called SKYLAB was shot down on October 18, 1977. This was done over the United States, creating a mammoth fireball that was witnessed in Texas, Oklahoma, Louisiana, Arkansas, and Missouri. Nine days later NASA began the cover-up about Skylab.

The events from late September 1977 onward threw the controlled Carter administration to panicky confusion. By November 18 the situation with our dwindling Spy Satellites was becoming critical. On that day the Voice of America was used to hurl a threat of pre-emptive war against Russia if destruction of our Spy Satellites did not stop, but the Russian Navy ended this desperate bluff by the Carter administration by swarming once again into position for nuclear attack. Pressure on the controlled Carter administration mounted steadily through the end of 1977, but an unexpected stay of execution was brought about by the illness of Leonid Brezhnev, which ended with his death in Moscow on January 7, 1978. A few weeks later, Leonid Brezhnev No. 2, the ceremonial double seen in public these days, made his

appearance. Meanwhile behind the scenes the new top man in the Kremlin was rapidly emerging although so far without public acknowledgement of the fact. His name: Marshal Dmitry Ustinov, the Soviet Defense Minister. After learning of the death of the real Brezhnev, our Secret Rulers began breathing a little easier—but wrongly so. They expected that there would be major power struggles within the Kremlin for two to three years before a clear, strong successor to Brezhnev could emerge. During that period of internal turmoil, Russia would be in a poor position to go to war in spite of her overwhelming military might. Meanwhile the Rockefeller brothers believed it would be possible by means of crash weapons programs to construct a counter to the Russian threat. Even before Brezhnev's death, and even earlier than the disastrous loss of America's secret Moon Base, our Secret Rulers were taking measures to promote internal turmoil in Russia. When Brezhnev died, these measures took on added importance. A cardinal rule that the Rockefeller brothers have always followed is to support not only the faction in power but also their opposition. This applies to their political intrigues everywhere, including the Soviet Union.

In the wake of the Soviet underwater missile crisis of two years ago, the first reaction of the Rockefeller brothers was to try to undo the Russian double-cross and to reinstate the former secret alliance, but they also began preparing to unleash their own controlled opposition inside Russia against the present ruling faction in the Kremlin. A year ago this month, David Rockefeller made a secret trip to Moscow. While there he did more than confer with leaders of the present regime. More importantly, he contacted his opposition leaders and instructed them to go all-out to disrupt and undermine the present Russian regime. And back at home in the United States the controlled major media were soon building up the dissident issue as never before. When Brezhnev died last January, the Rockefeller brothers were elated. It looked as if the old Rockefeller luck was going to see them through once again as it had always done in the past. The protracted Kremlin power struggles that they anticipated were sure to hurt Russia's ability to wage war, and the internal distractions facing the Kremlin would be made worse by fast-building dissident agitation, which was to be highlighted in the Western press. All in all, the prospects for a breather in which to get new weapons in place looked very encouraging. But our Secret Rulers badly underestimated their Kremlin adversaries.

The Rockefeller brothers simply do not understand the self-styled "spiritual Communists" who run Russia today, about whom I first told you in Audioletter No. 28. They have an unprecedented unity of purpose and mutual respect that unites them, and as a result Russian rulers were able to achieve a transition to a workable new structure of relationships within two months after Brezhnev's death. And so six months to the day after Gromyko delivered the Harvest Moon ultimatum at the White House, the new Kremlin leadership renewed that ultimatum. On March 27, 1978, Pravda warned that the United States was about to have its last chance to accept a SALT II accord, which was to be our surrender treaty. The Carter administration and its Rockefeller bosses were stunned. In incredibly short time the Russians were signaling their readiness again to go to war—and here our Rulers sat, stripped by then of all orbital surveillance capabilities over Russia by Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellites. The result, as Secretary of State Vance went to Moscow to discuss SALT II, was the Korean air liner intelligence mission that I explained to you in Audioletter No. 33.

It's now clear to our Secret Rulers that they may have far

less time to prepare for war than they hoped only a few short months ago, for it will not be internal turmoil that will dictate the timetable of Soviet actions but Russian military strategy. This is the real message of the celebrated dissident trials of recent days. Bolshevik dissidents simply will not be tolerated. The Kremlin's concern is different in the case of dissidents like Alexander Ginzburg. Ginzburg is a practicing member of the Russian Orthodox Church. He is a reformer in the same vein as Alexander Solzhenitsyn, who has spoken out publicly in Ginzburg's defense.

As I explained last month, the Kremlin rulers of today are determined to take the lid off and promote spiritual rebirth in Russia, but they intend to do it in a gradual way that does not get out of hand. And so our Secret Rulers, the Rockefeller brothers, are finding themselves checkmated at every turn by the Russians. Crash weapons projects are under way, but there's no guarantee that there will be enough time for any of them to bear fruit, so in desperation our Rulers are now preparing to play the last card in their military deck.

Last September 1977 the Battle of the Harvest Moon brought about a sudden dramatic shift in the East/West military balance in Russia's favor. Time is running out for the Rockefeller brothers, and nothing less than an equally sudden and dramatic shift in the opposite direction offers any hope for survival of the Rockefeller Empire. There's no time now to start from scratch on new military technologies to counter Russia. A few advanced weapons which have already reached readiness for production can be rushed ahead, but even that will be cut short by Soviet sabotage and other events. But there is one very major factor in the military equation which can be changed over night, and that is strategy. As I have pointed out in other Audioletters, the most powerful ingredient in any military strategy is surprise, and experience has shown that an aggressor, attacking by surprise, can often defeat an enemy that is vastly superior in strength. Our Secret Rulers have now concluded that this is the only way left against Russia. As a result, the United States of America has now embarked on a drastic new course that is without precedent in American history. For the vary first time, the master military strategy of our Secret Rulers is for the United States to wage pre-emptive war against another nation. The Carter administration is moving as rapidly as possible now to position itself to launch a massive nuclear surprise attack on the Soviet Union and its Warsaw Pact allies.

Over the past two decades the so-called "doves" among Rockefeller agents both in and out of government have duped the American people into laying down our arms. Always we were told that our military strength might make the Soviets fear a first strike by us; but now that the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance has been dissolved by the new leaders in the Kremlin, we suddenly stand naked because of their treachery. And now it is the United States that is preparing for a first strike—not because of our strength, but because of our weakness. Having decided upon this last-ditch strategy, the Rockefeller brothers are making kamikaze pilots of every man, woman, and child in the United States.

In connection with the new first-strike strategy, the Carter administration is pouring thousands of personnel and equipment, especially air craft, into Great Britain and Europe. Long abandoned air fields in England are being hastily reactivated over citizen protests there. Meanwhile the Carter administration is doing everything it can to distract the Russians while at the same time building up war tensions. If possible, the Rockefellers want their planned nuclear attack on Russia to

appear justified, or even defensive, to the world. To this end, you should keep your eyes open for a major incident, or series of incidents very soon. Just as in the case of the Korean 707 incident, my friends, I'm only relating to you what the new Russian leaders already know. This is why the Kremlin is now adopting such public defiance of the West in the dissident trials and other matters; and this is why, just a few days ago, Pravda did not shrink from saying in so many words that we are heading for "the cliffs of confrontation."

Topic #3—In the aftermath of Nuclear War One, the world as we know it today will have passed into history. Future generations as they survey the century that preceded Nuclear War One will be struck by the needless tragedy of it all, and by the mass blindness that made it inevitable. They will have difficulty even in comprehending the Modern Western Civilization of 1978 because that civilization will be extinct—but they will read, they will study, and they will learn. Historians of the future, of course, will be able to see clearly what is only dimly perceived today in 1978. They will be able to explain to their readers how, in the final month before Nuclear War One, both the United States and the Soviet Union adopted a pre-emptive war stance. They will explain how Russia and America stalked each other like wrestlers preparing to grapple, each looking for a weak opening to begin the contest. And they will tell the sad story of how the West committed suicide by following the United States into a war we could not possibly win. And it is only natural that tomorrow's history books will dwell at length upon the deaths and damage suffered by the Soviet Union in Nuclear War One. In this way the major historians of that day to come will illustrate the heroism of the victorious side, Russia. But great attention will also have to be given to the enormous man-made cataclysm that engulfed the West. By comparison, the war sufferings of Russia will have been a mere scratch on the arm. In speaking of the ruined United States of America, the historians will speak in hushed and somber tones. America's epitaph will include the words "Pre-emptive Nuclear War." It is this final suicidal American strategy that history will blame for the completeness of America's destruction. This suicidal strategy, my friends, has been brought about by the very forces of Bolshevism whose absolute eradication has been vowed by the "spiritual Communists" who rule Russia today. And history will relate that this plan will have removed the last ounce of restraint from Kremlin actions.

Even for Russian historians, America's end will be a painful thing to describe, for Russia will ultimately employ all of her military resources in order to utterly destroy all traces of American military power world-wide. Not only missiles and bombers will be involved but also the secret Soviet weapons I've told you about over the past two years. These include: the short range underwater nuclear missiles launched from our own territorial waters; radio-chemical warfare in clouds dispersed from submarines and canisters at sea to bring on the totally artificial ailment now known as "Legionnaire's Disease"; powerful microwave satellites which can derange the judgment of naval personnel, just as was done to tanker crews over a year and a half ago; geophysical warfare shattering the Philippines and other military targets and laying waste America's west coast; charged particle beam super weapons fired at earth targets from the seven (7) Russian bases that are already operational on the near side of the moon; and, my friends, the Russian cosmospheres about which the late General Thomas Power tried in vain to warn America long ago, as I revealed in Audioletter No. 32, and which are now on battle stations over the United States targeting air force fields, dams, reservoirs, lakes, and other strategic points

world-wide—and, after all that, the invasion and occupation of what remains of America by the Soviet Army from staging points now being established in Canada and Mexico.

Historians of tomorrow will move on to tell their readers how America's final desperate strategy of pre-emptive war led to selected nuclear and Particle Beam attacks on Europe and great devastation in England—because, my friends, the Rockefellers' shift to a "first strike strategy" is transforming all of our forces overseas into offensive invasion forces. For that reason, all American troop concentrations, military installations everywhere on earth will be subjected to attack. In Europe, these attacks will be surgical in nature, sparing areas that do not harbor American forces. England, however, is working hand in hand with the Rockefeller brothers now and will be hit very hard.

Yes, my friends, the final chapter in the history of Modern Western Civilization will have to be written by historians of another civilization which will survive the West. That civilization is the Eastern Orthodox Christian Civilization centered on Russia. But as they close the book on the West as we know it, tomorrow's historians will begin writing a new, brighter chapter for mankind as a whole. The promise, contrary to the expectations of most, is for a rebirth of true human freedom in the age to come. The selfish and self-destructive license of today will be stamped out, but it will give way to real human freedom rooted in eternal spiritual values.

Already the so-called "spiritual Communists" who rule Russia today are making their plans for the future after they have disposed of the curse of Bolshevism world-wide. They have wrestled control of Russia away from the atheistic Bolshevik Communists, and they have dissolved the former secret alliance between the Soviet Union and the Rockefeller rulers of America. They are striking out on their own now, and for years they have been quietly studying all the implications of such a course of action. For the long run, the most fundamental implications of severing Russia's ties with the United States are not military, but economic. For most of the six decades following the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917, the Soviet Union depended for its very existence upon massive and continuing transfusions from the West. In past Audioletters I reviewed all this in detail. But having severed these ties now, Russia must stand on her own two feet, therefore the Kremlin has been actively pursuing economic studies in order to determine what course is the proper one to follow economically. And they are being objective about it, because they know Russia's very survival depends on it. One of the most fundamental results of these Russian economic studies was mentioned last month by Alexander Solzhenitsyn in his speech at Harvard. This item was not quoted in any of the major media reviews to my knowledge, but it was one of the most important points he made. I am referring to the Russian mathematician who, as Solzhenitsyn said, proved two years ago that Socialism in any form is inherently self-destructive—economically and otherwise. The present Kremlin rulers have accepted this verdict, and recently Radio Moscow proudly announced that Russian agriculture, which used to be almost totally collectivized, is now up to one-third private enterprise.

These are indeed turbulent times, my friends, and the day is not far off when the political scene we see today will be no more. But what about the economic scene for now? Many of you have written to ask where one can go to escape the coming war and to help preserve assets. My answer, for now, is that certain parts of Europe will be safe, such as southern France, Spain, and the tiny villages in the mountainous areas there. As you know, I

have recommended several financial newsletters in the past which are written in the United States; but the one which I like best, which is published abroad, is coming out of a tiny country called Andorra which is in the Pyrenees between Spain and France. I consider this newsletter to be the financial voice of Europe—it's called the IMAC COMMODITIES NEWSLETTER. Free information about it is available by writing to: Capa, Mossen Tremosa 1, Andorra, Europe.

To give you an idea what the "Imac Commodities Newsletter" has to offer, I quote from the July 7, 1978, issue of the Professional Investor, which is a watchdog of the investment industry and published at Pompano Beach, Fla. 33061: "Imac has been consistently more accurate than most United States publications over the past two years in analyzing and forecasting the fate of the dollar, Wall Street, U.S. economy, and gold. Perhaps even more interesting is the various new political commentary offered gratis in most issues of Imac. Don't let the word 'Commodities' in the title of the Newsletter throw you off. While there is heavy emphasis on commodities, the Letter covers far more"—end of quotation from the Professional Investor.

My friends, let no one suppose that the days ahead will be easy, for we are about to undergo a trial by fire—economically, politically, militarily, and spiritually. But like the rainbow that follows the storm, beauty and true human freedom will once again shine forth one day on the face of the earth.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #37

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is August 27, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 37.

As the warm, lazy days of August 1978 draw to a close, summer is on the wane for the United States of America. With every passing day now, the sun shines less brightly on our land, and already the signs are all around us pointing to a harsh and early winter. But instead of preparing, most of us are still just trying to squeeze the last bit of pleasure out of the little bit of summer that remains. These things are true, my friends, not only in the literal sense of the weather but also in the figurative, historical sense. On all sides, we in the United States are playing games with ourselves. We prefer to fool ourselves with comfortable lies than to open our eyes to the brilliant light of the truth, and our Secret Rulers are quick to assist us in deluding ourselves through every avenue imaginable. So it is, for example, that as the American dollar is dying enroute to worldwide monetary chaos, luxurious conferences on the situation are springing up in the United States. More and more people are attending these conferences, expecting to hear what is wrong and what to do. But increasingly they see only the same stale establishment faces wherever they go, and they hear about everything except the real reasons for our economic woes; so the attendees leave as they came, ignorant of the facts and unable to protect themselves, but the lure of big-sounding names and posh accommodations is powerful and many of the same people show up at one conference after another to be hoodwinked over and over again. The items that fill the alleged news these days are also a study in distraction and distortion. For example, tremendous

publicity was focused earlier this month on the American balloonists who successfully crossed the Atlantic for the first time; but hovering over battle stations world-wide are the Space Age successors to balloons and dirigibles—the Soviet Cosmospheres, and about these devices, which are a matter of life and death to you, there is a total news blackout.

Yesterday a major event took place on the spiritual battleground between East and West. It dominated the news, and yet you were not told what it really meant. I refer to the lightning fast election of a new Pope, who calls himself John Paul I. In recent years many changes have been introduced in Roman Catholic worship. For example, it used to be that every Mass in the free world ended with a prayer for the conversion of Russia; but today as this prayer is being answered in Russia, it is heard no more in the Catholic Mass. In 1954 the Chase-Manhattan Bank became the custodian of the enormous business holdings of the Vatican through tax-exempt trust accounts. Since that time the Church has been losing its sovereignty and is today highly politicized. Soon millions of Roman Catholics will be overjoyed to see the Church shifting its policies to an active anti-Russian stance under the guise of anti-Communism; but in reality, the Rockefellers want to enlist 700,000,000 Catholics into the war against Russia. As I have explained in my latest two Audioletters, the self-styled "spiritual Communists" who run the Kremlin today regard the atheistic Communism known as Bolshevism as their No. 1 enemy, and now the Pope himself is dominated by Bolshevik influences.

But the most crisis-oriented person in the world now is Jimmy Carter. The only hint of this in the news is his disengagement from day to day non-crisis situations, and his lack of concern over disastrous public opinion polls. Jimmy Carter is a man waiting impatiently for his hour to come—an hour of crisis. He spends large amounts of time away from the White House while medication and other measures are being used to keep him in an artificial, abnormal state of mind—because no man in his right mind could do what Jimmy Carter has promised to do for his Masters. When the time comes, Jimmy Carter will be called upon to push the button to launch a nuclear "first strike" against the Soviet Union. The consequences, my friends, will be unthinkable; but in his present artificial euphoria, Jimmy Carter can hardly wait to do it.

It was only last month that I first made public the American shift to a first-strike strategy, but the preparations to carry out this strategy are progressing at a feverish pace. Many pieces of the military jigsaw puzzle are not yet in place, however, and the Soviet Union has already learned the plan through the efforts of their own KGB. The Russians have their own countdown in progress toward a first strike, as I explained four months ago in Audioletter No. 33. Meanwhile they are working fast to thwart the American plan.

Regardless of which side succeeds in striking first, the American people and to a lesser extent the entire West, will lose. The pathetic Civil Defense television programs which are being rushed into production now to show just before a Nuclear War, will do us very little good, my friends. Only if you know the plan will you have any chance to see what is happening in time to protect yourself. There is no timetable, my friends, but we may well have seen our last summer at peace before Nuclear War One!

My three topics for today are:

Topic #1—THE MIDDLE EAST ROAD TO AN AMERICAN FIRST STRIKE;

Topic #2—RUSSIA'S ASIAN COUNTERSTRATEGY FOR A FIRST STRIKE;

Topic #3—THE ERA OF THE AMERICAN REFUGEE.

Topic #1—For nearly a year now the controlled Carter administration has been in a concealed state of crisis on the road to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. It was eleven months ago to the day, Sept. 27, 1977, that America lost the secret Battle of the Harvest Moon in space. Suddenly America's ace in the hole for the coming war—the secret Beam-Weapons base on the moon—was gone. As I revealed in detail that month in Audioletter No. 26, the most decisive battle of the 20th Century had just taken place. Our Secret Rulers reacted at first with stark fear and near panic. At first they pretended to capitulate to the Russian Harvest Moon ultimatum for surrender by means of SALT II disarmament. Then, as the initial shock wore off, they began stalling tactics to hold off the Russians while they tried to figure out what to do. Meanwhile the Russian Navy swarmed into attack positions around the United States during October 1977.

At the same time, the Soviet Union wasted no time in following up on their Harvest Moon space victory. Manned Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellites using Charged Particle Beam-weapons began clearing the skies of American Spy Satellites. Having evicted America from the moon, the Soviet Union also activated a moon-flight program to seize the moon for its own Particle Beam-weapons installations—of which there are now seven (7) on the near side; and to ruin any chance that the United States might send more men to the moon, our secret Orbital Way Station in the military Moon Program was destroyed. On October 18, 1977, as I reported in Audioletter No. 27, SKYLAB was shot down over the United States by a Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellite—and with it went the five American astronauts who were secretly aboard at the time.

Since that time the pace of events has been very fast, as I've revealed for you month by month. But the first-strike strategy which has now been adopted by the United States first began to surface nine months ago in November 1977. There were three separate developments, and they took place with blinding speed all within a week's time. First there was the so-called Sadat "peace initiative" to Israel. It began on November 14 during television interviews, of all things, in which President Sadat of Egypt and Prime Minister Begin of Israel committed themselves to a face-to-face meeting. Only a week later Sadat was already returning home from his rush, rush trip to Jerusalem which generated euphoria on all sides. But as I told you then, Sadat's actions were destined to lead to war, not peace; and now the Middle East is approaching the boiling point. Like the Sadat trip to Israel, the second major development also began on November 14. On that day the Shah of Iran arrived in Washington on a rush visit, which ended two days later. No reason was given publicly for his hurry-up trip; but as I told you then, it was linked to the startling events in the Middle East. It was a busy week, my friends, because sandwiched in between the Shah's trip to Washington and Sadat's trip to Israel, was the third major event. On November 18 the Voice of America broadcast a threat of pre-emptive war against Russia, from which I quoted that month in Audioletter No. 28. That threat was premature—a bluff brought to nothing by the Soviet Navy, which swarmed into attack positions again, but it was a taste of things to come.

Four months ago in April 1978, Secretary of State Cyrus Vance went to Moscow in response to a renewal of the Harvest Moon SALT

surrender ultimatum of six months earlier. While there he was provided with crucial information by the Korean air liner intelligence mission, which I detailed for you in Audioletter No. 33; and as soon as he returned to Washington, our Secret Rulers decided to implement contingency plans for a first-strike nuclear strategy. Since that time, the United States and the Soviet Union have been in a race against time, each trying to beat the other into position to launch a decisive surprise attack. In this Topic I will outline the American strategy. With that in mind, you will find it much easier to understand the Russian strategy when I outline that in Topic #2.

The strategic goal in the new American first-strike strategy is to undo the total Russian military domination of space which began eleven months ago. We often hear these days about our so-called "triad" of strategic weapons—meaning ICBMs, Missile-launching Submarines, and Bombers. The Russians, of course, possess a similar triad, which in fact is now more powerful than our own; but today the Soviet Union possesses in addition a "space triad" of strategic weapons—and the central objective of the American surprise-attack plan is to bring to ruin the Russian space triad. One leg of the space triad is the moon, which bristles with Russian Particle Beam-weapons. They can blast almost any spot on earth within the course of any 24-hour period. Whenever the moon is above the horizon where you are, you are subject to practically instantaneous attack from the moon. The second leg of the Soviet space triad is the fleet of Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellites in orbit around the earth. These Space-Age sentinels are manned and armed with Charged Particle Beam-weapons with which to blast all non-Soviet military satellites out of existence. Months ago they completed the task of wiping out all of America's early warning and spy satellites, making necessary the Korean air liner intelligence mission of four months ago. Now they remain on patrol ready to nip in the bud any attempt by the United States to re-establish a military toe hold in space. The third leg of the Russian space triad is the fleet of Cosmospheres—electrogravitic Hovering Weapons Platforms called the "anti-war machine" by the Kremlin. As I discussed last March in Audioletter No. 32, the late great General Thomas Power gave a public warning thirteen years ago about the coming threat from these Platforms, but he was ignored. The United States could have developed these Platforms too, but did not; and now the Russians have deployed them over strategic locations world-wide, and in great numbers. Armed with Charged Particle Beam-weapons, they can produce weather-modification effects by means of de-focused blasts into the upper atmosphere. In the process, they also generate violent air blasts, which were heard last winter over the United States. But they can also focus their Particle Beams in order to vaporize targets on the ground, at sea, or in the air.

So long as the Russian space triad remains intact, the West has no hope of victory, or even a draw, in a war with the Soviet Union. But our Secret Rulers cannot shake their dream of world domination; so instead of taking measures that could prevent war, they are trying to position themselves to smash the Russian space triad. Even if they succeed, a furious and massive Russian counterattack is a certainty, and our Secret Rulers know it. But they believe there is a chance that the conflict will finally sputter out into a stalemate IF the Russian space triad can be neutralized; and beginning from the smoking ruins of this stalemate, they think they will be able to start over again about as well off as the Soviet Union. The price of achieving this desired stalemate has already been studied with the aid of think-tank computers. If the American first strike turns out to be a spectacular success, there could be 255,000,000 fatalities

in the United States, the Soviet Union, and Great Britain—plus a few million in selected other target areas. But even in this best case, however, more than half the casualties will take place in the United States, which unlike Russia, is naked in terms of Civil Defense. If things do not go so well though, the computers say that up to 350,000,000 people may die before the stalemate point is reached. The United States has no effective means by which to attack the Soviet space triad directly; but there is one weak point which is shared by all three legs of the Russian space triad, and that weak point is Logistics. The cosmonauts who man the Particle Beam bases on the moon depend for their lives on regular supply missions from earth; likewise the Cosmos Interceptors in earth orbit can remain operational only so long as their crews can be rotated and re-supplied from earth; and the Cosmospheres, too, require periodic servicing and re-supply in order to keep operating.

The centerpiece of the American first strike, my friends, is to be a knock out punch at Russia's space logistics network. The plan is to destroy all four Soviet Cosmodromes, plus the Cosmosphere installations in Central Siberia in a fast, well-coordinated blow. Immediately following this initial blow, there is to follow a full-scale nuclear attack by the American triad of ICBMs, Poseidon missiles, and bombers. The key weapon to be used in the attack on Russia's space bases is a secret weapon which, until now, has never assumed great importance. For a change, it is a weapon which the United States did develop while Russia did not. It is a strange hybrid machine called a Submersible Aircraft, or Subcraft for short. A Subcraft is an airplane which can land on water, change its configuration, dive, and travel under water like a submarine—then, near its destination, it can reverse the process and seem to come from nowhere as it attacks the target from the air. Subcraft development began in the United States in the early 1960's. Those available today do not dive very deep, and they are not very fast, either under water or in the air. Their strength lies in their ability to sneak past enemy defenses. Submerged, they have surprisingly long endurance and range, due to a small nuclear power plant derived from space technology. They can travel through shallow coastal waters where sonar detection is all but impossible, and their relatively small size and quiet operation also help reduce the chances of detection. In the air they duck under radar by flying at treetop height, and they are so quiet that they attract little or no attention enroute to the target.

The critical role of Subcraft in the American first-strike plan is the result of geography. They are not involved in the part of the attack plan directed at the Cosmosphere bases in Central Siberia, but they are the key ingredient in the planned attack on Russia's four Cosmodromes. The real estate of three countries is critical to the first-strike plan. The countries are: Norway, Iran, and China. Staging areas in all three must be used if the first-strike plan is to succeed in knocking out the Russian space triad. From the fiords of northern Norway, American Subcraft are to head eastward under water straight into the jaws of the Russian Bear. They will have to make their way past Murmansk, which teems with Russian submarines; continuing onward they will follow the shoreline of the Kola Peninsula, around and into the White Sea; then they are to penetrate southwest into the White Sea to the vicinity of Onega before surfacing at night. From there it is a short flight of a little more than 100 miles to their target, the Plesetsk Cosmodrome. If the plan works, night will be turned to day as the Cosmodrome is consumed by nuclear fireballs. For the other three Cosmodrome attacks, Iran is to provide the staging areas along the south end

of the Caspian Sea. Two Subcraft contingents are to travel submerged roughly half the length of the Caspian, then fly east across the Ust-Urt Plateau to the Aral Sea. There they are to submerge again and proceed to the northeast side until it is time to attack. The third Subcraft contingent from Iran is to travel northward the entire length of the Caspian and then lie in wait for the moment of attack. In the attack itself, the Subcraft squadron in the north end of the Caspian will surface at night; heading northwest they will fly roughly 250 miles to attack the Kapustin Yar Cosmodrome east of Stalingrad (now called Volgograd). Meanwhile Subcraft will surface in the Aral Sea and fly northeast. The first group will head for the original Baikonur Cosmodrome some 250 to 300 miles away. Shortly afterward the other group will take off to attack the Tyura-Tam Cosmodrome barely 100 miles distant. If all goes according to plan, the Cosmodromes at Kapustin Yar, Baikonur, and Tyura-Tam will erupt into nighttime nuclear fireballs at the same time as the Plesetsk Cosmodrome far to the north meets the same fate. In this manner, the Subcraft attacks from Norway and Iran are intended to cripple two of the three legs of the Russian space triad—the Moon and the orbiting Cosmos Interceptors.

That leaves only the Cosmospheres. The Cosmosphere bases are located in Central Siberia, far from any body of water that would be useful to submersible aircraft. First there is Semipalatinsk where both underground nuclear tests and Particle Beam-weapon tests are carried out. At Semipalatinsk the Cosmospheres are assembled and outfitted with their nuclear power plants and Particle Beam-weapons. Then they are transferred 400 miles northeast to the Novosibirsk Science City, where the operational Cosmosphere base is located.

The key to the American attack plan for the two Cosmosphere installations is northern Sinkiang Province, China. From there to Novosibirsk, the primary target, it is only 400 miles; and the secondary target, Semipalatinsk, is less than 300 miles distant. The Rockefellers are trying to move heaven and earth to persuade China to open up Sinkiang Province to a secret American attack force. The attack from Sinkiang Province is to be built around very high-speed, remotely-piloted airplanes called RPV's, which have been under development for years in both Russia and America. Since the pilot stays behind on the ground and guides the plane by remote control, a RPV is much smaller than an equivalent piloted airplane. It can also perform evasive maneuvers so violent that the pilot would be crushed if he were aboard. Our Secret Rulers believe that enough of these aircraft can penetrate Russian defenses to insure destruction of the Siberian Cosmosphere installations.

My friends, I have now told you about the strategic objectives and techniques which are being planned for the American first strike against Russia; but you must know about one additional key to this suicidal plan. I refer to the Middle East crisis now building up, which is intended to light the fuse for Nuclear War One.

A few days from now the Camp David summit between Sadat of Egypt and Begin of Israel is to get under way. Our Secret Rulers are trying to insure that a new Begin will emerge from these meetings to delight the public. Suddenly the hard-line attitudes of recent days will seem to evaporate on both sides, much to everyone's surprise. Conciliation and mutual concessions will become the order of the day, and the joyful shouts of "Peace! Peace" will ring in our ears. The euphoria surrounding the outcome of the Camp David summit will be like an echo of the high hopes of last November 1977 just after Sadat's trip to Jerusalem.

As a result, most of us will pay little attention to the foundation on which all else will rest. Underlying all the smiles and happy words, there is to be an agreement by which American troops will be sent to the Middle East as supposed guarantors of the "peace." It will all be made to appear logical and honest, and no one will dare to raise a finger to criticize this plan.

But now let me tell you what is really planned, for only if you know the truth will you have any chance to protect yourself in the disastrous days that lie ahead. The arrangements agreed to at the Camp David summit are to set the military stage for a horrendous incident to provoke war in the Middle East.

The overall plan is an up date of the one I described nearly three years ago in Audioletter No. 6 for November 1975. Here now is the full outline of the new American strategy for pre-emptive nuclear war against Russia. This terrible war plan, my friends, has nothing to do with preservation of our so-called "National Security"—it is a last-ditch Rockefeller blueprint for national suicide.

First, the Camp David summit is to set the stage for Middle East war while seeming to do the opposite. Then, as soon as the special American forces are in position for their strikes against the Russian space triad, a major incident will poison the Middle East peace atmosphere over night. One option involves the Sinai, but other options are also being prepared. But regardless of the details of the incident, it will be staged in such a way that the finger of guilt will point toward Saudi Arabia. Tensions will build fast, and with them American public opinion against Saudi Arabia. Meanwhile the Rockefeller propaganda machine will excite fears that somehow the Soviet Union is preparing to move full blast in the Middle East. There will be additional incidents and clashes, and the very existence of Israel will appear to be at stake. At the same time, Americans will be reminded of the key role of Israel as a military ally in the Middle East. American public opinion will be inflamed with fear for Israel, anger at Saudi Arabia, and a desire to get tough with Russia—and then it will happen!

In the world's first limited nuclear strike, Saudi Arabia will be brought to her knees at a single blow. The well heads of Saudi Arabia's mammoth oil fields will vanish in nuclear fireballs, desert sand will fuse into radioactive glass, capping off the oil wells. Radioactivity will prevent reopening the wells for at least 10 years according to CIA estimates. The world will be badly shaken by witnessing this first use of tactical nuclear weapons; but the Rockefeller propaganda machine will paint it in the best possible light, drawing upon the carefully constructed image of Saudi Arabia as a threat to Israel's existence. It will even be said that the short, decisive attack on the oil fields was a relatively humane act, having spared Saudi population centers. In this way nuclear warfare will begin to be domesticated in our minds and unthinkable no longer.

The cut-off of Saudi Arabian oil will trigger gas rationing in the United States and severe dislocations in Europe and Japan. This will provide an excuse for Jimmy Carter to declare a "NATIONAL EMERGENCY" as the United States secretly prepares to go to war. Jimmy Carter's energy crisis—that is, the moral equivalent of war—will be manipulated into reality. Across the Persian Gulf from Saudi Arabia, Iran will react to the oil field raid by going on a full scale nation-wide alert. The Shah will point to the serious rioting of late which has an anti-Western

flavor. He will point to ominous behavior by the Soviet Union, and he will raise the specter of a Russian attack on Iran like the American-Israeli attack on Saudi Arabia. With Saudi Arabia gone, Iran will be America's largest remaining source of Middle East oil. With gas rationing already under way by then, Americans will find the Shah's warnings very frightening. The Shah will publicly remind Washington of the "total United States commitment to come to Iran's aid in an emergency" which was announced last November 16, 1977. The American public will demand that it is time for the United States to stand up to Russia; and with full public support, American troops and weapons will pour into Iran. From that point onward, the outbreak of Nuclear War One will be all but impossible for the public to follow by way of to so-called "news." Incidents and clashes will condition the American public to the increasingly aggressive behavior of Russia. We will hear more and more about Civil Defense, especially about plans to evacuate our cities in the event of war. But when it happens, all who have trusted the United States government and the major media, will be caught completely by surprise. It will begin, according to the American first-strike strategy, with the surprise attacks against the Russian space triad. The attacks against the four Cosmodromes and the two Cosmosphere installations are to be timed so that they all occur simultaneously—then the all-out American nuclear follow-up attack will be launched.

Special preparations are under way now to make this follow-up attack on Russia more effective and to evade the Soviet defense system as much as possible. For example, America's fleet of giant Titan II ICBMs are being modified for fractional orbital bombardment by Martin-Marietta, the Titan's manufacturer. This work is being financed through a number of secret avenues. One example is the $32,000,000 contract from NASA to build a rescue rocket for SKYLAB, which of course no longer exists. Only three days ago a freshly modified Titan II near Rock, Kansas, attracted nation-wide attention due to an accident that occurred just after it was re-installed in its silo. When it was being re-loaded with propellents, a leak sent poisonous, reddish fumes towering into the sky.

Another factor in the follow-up American nuclear attack is to be high-power laser weapons, in two ways. The first way has to do with our ICBMs. Floating over all American ICBM installations today are Soviet Cosmospheres—they are there in order to blast our ICBMs at the moment of launch, using their Charged Particle Beam-weapons. But one of the secret American weapons programs to which I have referred in recent months is the Laser Program. Some time ago laser scientists solved a major technical problem in high-power laser weapons. Called thermoblooming, this problem made lasers relatively ineffective when fired within the atmosphere; but now, high-power lasers are being deployed near our major ICBM bases. Just before the missiles are launched, these lasers will be used, if possible, to shoot down the threatening Cosmospheres. Then the missiles will be launched at Russia. The other role of lasers in the coming war is to involve the moon. Our Secret Rulers know very well that the destruction of Russia's Cosmodromes will trigger a furious counterattack; and in particular, the lunar Particle Beam bases are certain to start blasting American targets on earth in an all-out attack. In order to at least reduce the damage which the moon will be able to inflict, several extremely high-power lasers are now deployed on CIA-controlled ships at sea. Their job is to fire at the seven Russian bases on the near side of the moon, knocking out or damaging as many as possible. Thus, a Beam-weapons battle is shaping up for the early moments of Nuclear War One between the earth and the moon. It will be the earth-bound mobile lasers of

the United States pitted against the Charged Particle Beam-weapons of Soviet Russia on the moon. The American lasers are no match for the Russian Particle Beams, but our Secret Rulers view this as a way to cut their losses. Even if only part of the moon bases are silenced by lasers, they will reduce the damage that can be inflicted by the others while their supplies are running out.

When the American first-strike takes place, these are the things that are planned. But for those of us sitting at home when the air raid sirens begin to blare, none of this will be apparent. All we will know is that suddenly the unthinkable is happening—we are under NUCLEAR ATTACK. At the same time, Russians will be experiencing the same thing, but with one major difference—they have been provided with a network of Civil Defense blast shelters that will save many of their lives. You and I have not!

Topic #2—The American first-strike plan is a last ditch attempt by our Secret Rulers to snatch not victory but mere stalemate from the jaws of defeat. Even at that, the plan will fail if any part of the Russian space triad survives intact; and our Secret Rulers are closing their eyes to fatal flaws in the entire strategy. These flaws are so major that the Kremlin now plans to permit early parts of the plan to be carried out because in this way our Secret Rulers will give Russia the perfect excuse for her own crushing first strike against America.

In Audioletter No. 33 four months ago, I revealed that the Kremlin is clearing the decks to go to war. In this, the Russians want to get several major matters taken care of before Nuclear War One so that America can be smashed at minimum cost to Russia. The Politburo committed Russia to a definite countdown toward war on April 22, 1978, as I revealed in Audioletter No. 33. The major objectives in this countdown are still as I told you then, and progress is being made rapidly on them all. First is the matter of conditioning the Russian people for war—this task has already been carried a long way. The Pravda warning which I quoted last month about the "cliffs of confrontation" is but one example. The second major objective is for the completion of the invasion preparations in Canada and Mexico. I first described these to you five months ago in Audioletter No. 32. Earlier this summer, in June, the process was speeded up in Canada after Canada expelled all United States fishing vessels from her waters. And in Mexico, Russian troops and equipment including tanks and neutron bombs are being funneled in through the Yucatan Peninsula. The third major objective in the Russian war countdown has to do with Red China. Before war comes with America, Russia must neutralize China as a threat, one way or another; and now that China is intended by the Rockefellers to play a role in the American first-strike plan, China has become a top priority item on the Kremlin agenda.

In connection with the American first-strike plan, which has been known within the Kremlin since early June, Russia has also singled out Norway and Iran for special attention. Since June 29, Russian intelligence ships of various types have been repeatedly stopping in Norwegian territorial waters off northern Norway. They are scouting out the staging area from which American Subcraft will be launched to attack the Plesetsk Cosmodrome; and in Iran anti-Western rioting is now seriously threatening the Shah's control over the country. Should he be toppled from power in an anti-Western coup or revolt, Iran will be lost as an asset in the American first-strike plan. The door to attack on three of Russia's four Cosmodromes would be closed.

But Iran and Norway are small potatoes compared to China. For the short term, Russia wants to protect her Cosmosphere installations by denying American access to China's crucial Sinkiang Province. But more than that, the new ASIAN AXIS is in gestation, about which I warned five years ago in my book, "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR." Earlier this month, on August 12, 1978, Japan and China did sign the Treaty of Friendship and Cooperation, about which I reminded you last month; and Japan did succeed in obtaining the auxiliary clause I described last month. It states in effect that the Treaty is not directed against Russia. Japan is becoming the pivot of the new Asian Axis, but the focus is now on China. Right now Russia is holding out both the carrot and the stick to China. The carrot is the promise that if China will align herself with Russia, China will share in the fruits of Russia's still growing power; the stick is the threat that if China does not abandon her anti-Russian politics she will be in deep, deep trouble militarily. To drive home this point, Soviet encirclement of China with Soviet client states is continuing. Recently, for example, Vietnam has been increasingly belligerent toward Red China and even border fighting has taken place in the past several days; and Laos and Afghanistan are both receiving huge stores of arms from Russia. Verbal abuse between Moscow and Peking is going on as usual right now; but Chairman Hua's unprecedented trip this month from China to Romania and Yugoslavia, tells the real story. It all began last May when Premier Ceausescu of Romania went to China and received a tumultuous welcome there. Ceausescu, my friends, has been portrayed in news reports in America as a sort of fence sitter in the Soviet orbit, but that's not correct. He is Russia's ace go-between in sensitive dealings with other countries. In Peking last May, Ceausescu conveyed Russian overtures for reconciliation to Chairman Hua. This led to Hua's follow-up trip this month to Romania, plus Yugoslavia and Iran. Last month, on July 13, China sent a clear signal to the Kremlin indicating interest in Russia's overtures. On that date, China severed her long-standing ties with Albania, which is strongly anti-Russian. Scarcely a month later, on August 16, Hua arrived in Bucharest, Romania, a Russian satellite. Meanwhile Ceausescu had visited Leonid Brezhnev No. 2 in the Crimea in order to find out what to say to Hua. While Hua was in Romania, he was greeted warmly by the Russian Ambassador to Romania at a reception, contrary to news reports in the United States; and Romania agreed to give China a consulate on the Black Sea. From there the Chinese will be able to observe movements of Russia's Black Sea naval fleet. This is intended as a gesture of good faith by Russia to China. When Hua left Romania, he went next to Yugoslavia. The reason for his visit reflects the increasingly similar thinking about some things by the Russian and Chinese ruling circles. I mentioned last month that those who run Russia today have accepted the verdict that Socialism is not workable, and that already collectivized agriculture is being phased out. Hua's interest in Yugoslavia in a parallel vein was to study Yugoslav factory workers' self-management system, free from political Central Committee controls.

My friends, the tug of war between Russia and the United States over China is intensifying, but with every passing day it becomes more certain that Russia will win in this contest. The truth has to be faced. Once Russia and China are teamed up once again, the new Asian Axis will spring into being almost over night, because Japan (the third leg of the Axis) has already been striving for good relations with both of the other powers. The new Asian axis will be cemented by more than racial ties and economic benefits—they all share a unifying drive for revenge against the United States and the West. For untold suffering on their part during the past 80 years, they intend to repay us

double.

With China in hand, Russia will be ready to set her own first-strike plan in motion. First, she will allow our Secret Rulers to begin the war sequence, whether in the Middle East or elsewhere. In this way the Kremlin will be able to rally the Russian people completely for war. Meanwhile, if the Russian overtures to China now under way are successful, Chinese troops will join the primarily Asian-Soviet invasion forces in Canada and Mexico. Without the Asian expertise of their late brother John D. Ill, the three remaining Rockefeller brothers will discover too late that they have lost China to Russia. Without China, the Cosmosphere leg of the Russian space triad will be safe from the American first strike and the plan will fail. In the end, even the attack on the Cosmodromes will be partially thwarted; but our Secret Rulers will go ahead with this final kamikaze plan. But even before the Middle East erupts, the Kremlin plans to start increasing the pressure on America by means of geophysical warfare, including both weather manipulation and artificial earthquakes.

Right now America's weather is being tortured by our own Secret Rulers. They are using the coastal weather control grids I told you about three months ago in Audioletter No. 34. This is being done in order to create deliberate food shortages to help in controlling you and me through the old Bolshevik weapon of hunger. It is also being done in order to ruin thousands of American farmers. In this way their land can be grabbed up in the corporate collectivizing of agriculture now under way here in the United States. At this very moment, in fact, the Rockefeller weather control grids are being used in an attempt to bring on widespread killer weather patterns. If they succeed, great masses of corn, soybeans, and certain feed grains will be wiped out. But the Russian weather modification (by means of their Cosmospheres) plan for this winter will not be economic but military in its objectives.

As for the artificial earthquakes, that has already begun. In Audioletter No. 2 4 for May 1977, I gave the locations of seven (7) Russian Super-bombs planted deep in the ocean trenches around the Philippines. Since then, I have also made public the Russian program of planting and detonating powerful cobalt bombs under sea around the Pacific rim. These have produced numerous earthquakes, increasing the stresses in the earth around the Philippines. When the stresses are high enough, the Super-bombs will be set off to devastate the Philippines and shake the whole Pacific rim—the Ring of Fire. Those stresses are nearing the critical point now. Three months ago the long silent Mayon Volcano in the Philippines began erupting, and late last month the nearby Bulusan Volcano began a spectacular eruption after a silence of 56 years. As I explained in Audioletter No. 24, the earthquake catastrophe to come in the Philippines is intended also to devastate America's west coast, and the Russians are leaving nothing to chance. At least nine (9) cobalt bombs with varying yields have now been planted in the vicinity of the San Andreas Fault. They stretch from the north end of the Gulf of California to a point about 40 miles west of Point Delgada in northern California. Several of these are inland—one in the Salton Sea northeast of San Diego, one in an abandoned mine shaft 3 miles southeast of Palmdale, and one in the San Luis Reservoir southeast of San Jose. There is also a very powerful cobalt bomb now in San Pablo Bay northeast of San Francisco. Should it be set off in such shallow waters, the entire area will be blanketed by deadly radiation for a generation. Two weeks ago today on August 13, one of the other bombs was set off. It was in the ocean 7-1/2 miles south of Santa Barbara. Some people heard what

they described as a powerful explosion, followed shortly after by the earthquake itself. And one eye witness in the mountains who happened to be looking in that direction, described what he saw: "There was a great, huge spout of water. It rose up and then fell back. The quake came right after that." The next day the National Security Council held a crisis meeting. The decision was made to play down the Santa Barbara incident because America is not yet ready to go to war.

Topic #3—My friends, for 200 years and more the shores of America have promised haven to refugees from all over the world, but now the United States has thrown away her unique heritage. The American dream is ending in a nightmare; and for the very first time ever, the era of the American refugee is dawning. We will be refugees from economic oppression, from hunger, from war, and from Bolshevik revolution. For 80 years beginning at the time of the Spanish American War, the United States has been selling her soul step by step. Our Secret Rulers have caused needless suffering, tragedy, and death on a scale that has no precedent in all of human history; and yet, with only scattered exceptions, we the American people have blinded ourselves and accepted all that has happened. In this way, we have made ourselves party to the Satanic actions of the Rockefeller cartel—and we will surely pay the price.

Today, everyone is wondering why the dollar is dying. American tourists overseas are finding that the so-called almighty dollar is becoming a powerless midget. When interviewed by television reporters, they say things like "Is there something going on in the States that I don't know about?" Five years ago when something could still have been done about it, my book, "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR", was published. It told in detail what was coming, why, and who was responsible; but five years ago no one was hurting yet, so the American people relaxed and did nothing. Today, everyone can see it happening; but now it's too late to save our economy, so now American economic refugees are beginning to do the only thing they can do for themselves and their families—they are fleeing from the dollar and even from America itself. By the same token, the advance information I have made public about hunger due to weather control and about the coming Bolshevik revolution, is generally being ignored now. People are not hurting yet so why think about such things; but, when it happens, those who succeed in escaping will be among history's most pathetic refugees. But worst of all, NUCLEAR WAR ONE is looming. Here, too, the chances for preventing disaster have been forfeited; therefore, my friends, my advice to all who will listen is to make serious preparations to leave the United States if you can possibly do so. And before you say "I can't do that", please think very hard. On the day that nuclear fireballs and Asian armies sweep across our land, will you suddenly realize that you could have left if you only had tried?

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #38

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is September 29, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 38.

News reports today are filled with headlines about the surprise death last night of Pope John Paul I, after a

lightning-fast surprise election hardly a month ago. Last month I revealed the plan of Bolshevik influences within the Vatican to maneuver the new Pope into aligning 700,000,000 Catholics against Russia; but already Pope John Paul has left the scene, and the game plan I told you about last month will now be tried again with another new Pope.

Surprises are now all around us as we approach NUCLEAR WAR ONE. On Sunday evening twelve days ago, September 17, ninety to one hundred million Americans were glued to their television sets. Just as programs on all three networks were reaching a climax, they were interrupted for a stunning news special. Suddenly we saw the smiling, jubilant faces of Jimmy Carter, Egypt's President Sadat, and Israel's Prime Minister Begin. For nearly two weeks we have been fed a steady diet of depressing, discouraging news from the Camp David summit; yet, now, here was our President announcing a thrilling breakthrough for "peace." Before our very eyes the heads of state of Egypt, Israel, and the United States were signing a seemingly miraculous Camp David accords. It was a master stroke of public relations propaganda by our Unseen Rulers. Throughout the United States and the rest of the world the news media were caught by surprise. Even TIME and NEWSWEEK had to stop their presses to change their cover stories, and three days later Radio Australia summed up the feelings of the news media world-wide in the words: "No one could have predicted the outcome of Camp David." My friends, the Dr. Beter Audioletter was the only news source in the entire world that correctly forecast the outcome of the Camp David summit. Last month before the summit even began, on September 5, I recorded the following words: "Suddenly the hard line attitudes of recent days will seem to evaporate on both sides, much to everyone's surprise. Conciliation and mutual concessions will become the order of the day, and the joyful shouts of 'PEACE. PEACE' will ring in our ears. The euphoria surrounding the outcome of the Camp David summit will be like an echo of the high hopes of last November 1977 just after Sadat's trip to Jerusalem."

My friends, the so-called surprise outcome at Camp David was planned in advance, and the flimsy Camp David agreements are not intended by our Unseen Rulers to produce peace. Instead, they are to collapse in such a way as to ignite war, as I detailed for you last month. Even now the initial euphoria over Camp David is giving way to concern over signs that the whole thing might come apart. And Saudi Arabia is being drawn into the limelight as the crucial factor—meaning stumbling block—in the proposed Middle East peace framework. In this way, Saudi Arabia is being led into the nuclear trap which I described last month. It's all part of the plan of our Unseen Rulers for an American nuclear first strike against Russia, which I revealed in detail last month—and so far it is right on track.

I also revealed that Jimmy Carter while posing as a man of peace, is actually waiting for his supreme moment—a moment of crisis! He is in an artificial euphoric state, maintained by medication and other means, and is actually looking forward to pulling the trigger to launch America's nuclear first strike against Russia. But, my friends, I must now reveal a gruesome fact, which Jimmy Carter himself may not know. Jimmy Carter will not get to pull the trigger, instead he is being set up to be the trigger for war. At the Camp David summit Anwar Sadat literally begged Carter to put pressure on Begin to make concessions on East Jerusalem especially, that would strengthen the agreements in the Arab world. Carter said in effect, "I cannot at this time, but I give you my word personally that I will work on the Israelis on this." Sadat, desperate for an agreement, accepted

Carter's personal pledge in a tremendous gamble; and this gamble for peace will backfire tragically, my friends, because Jimmy Carter is being medicated for reasons beyond psychological conditioning. Just within the past three weeks Jimmy Carter has suddenly contracted two forms of terminal cancer—one is acute leukemia, or cancer of the blood, whose symptoms include weakness and fatigue. Lately Carter has been displaying these symptoms and they have been noticed by close observers. The other cancerous infection now plaguing Jimmy Carter is a tumor on the left side of his head. In due course this tumor is expected to cause pronounced disabling effects. If the terminal illness of Jimmy Carter progresses as fast as expected, the reins of presidential power will pass from his hands within a matter of months. Whether by disability or death, Jimmy Carter's downfall will pull the rug out from under a shaky Anwar Sadat. Carter's personal pledge to Sadat will become meaningless, and without it the Camp David agreements will disintegrate and the Middle East war build-up I described last month will take place.

Jimmy Carter's death or disability is intended also to play a pivotal role in advancing the Bolshevik revolution in the United States which is already well underway, quietly. Nelson Rockefeller's 25th Amendment to the United States Constitution will come into play and Vice-President Walter Mondale will become Acting President should Carter become disabled. Already a trial run for this situation has been carried out during the Camp David summit. In an unprecedented action, Carter turned over the reins of the presidency to Mondale while he went to Camp David. In this way, Carter was relieved of all responsibilities and Camp David was for him a vacation; but even after conserving his dwindling energies in this way, Carter emerged from Camp David more tired than when he entered.

The downfall of Jimmy Carter will be accompanied by turmoil, both domestically and internationally, and cataclysmic effects in the Middle East. Demands will mount for firm, experienced leadership of a bipartisan nature during these critical days; and when Jimmy Carter either resigns or dies, a new Vice-President will be nominated by Mondale to fill the bill. The appointee, as now planned, will be a Rockefeller Republican; and if his declining health permits, it will be Nelson Rockefeller himself.

My friends, last month it seemed that I shocked many of my listeners by urging them to make serious preparations to leave the United States to avoid the coming nuclear war. Many of my critics when asked to comment on what I have said, are telling their followers: "Stay and fight." But these are the same people who have been stirring the pot without any impact for years—10 years, 20 years, and even longer. They have not prevented a single one of America's reverses from taking place, and when they say "Stay and fight" they don't bother to tell you how to fight Neutron Bombs, Particle Beam-weapons, or anything else. Can you imagine that? And some of them are even telling you to stay and fight while they themselves are financially prepared to leave at a moment's notice.

My friends, for years I've sounded the alarm together with the message that we could stop what was coming if only we would do it. And I made public the information that could have been used to bring about a reversal of our slide into catastrophe. But time does run out when action is not taken, and things do change. They do not remain static decade after decade as some of my critics would lead you to believe. The time has come to think about your own family. It's time to prepare to live to fight another day.

For the many people who have contacted me to ask where to go, I can only say that I have given you my best recommendations two months ago in Audioletter No. 36; and during the past two years or more I have spelled out the target areas world-wide that are targeted by Russian underwater missiles. I have described the Russian preparations for geophysical warfare, I have given details about the Russian patterns of nuclear sabotage of the United States, I've outlined the Russian preparations for invasion of the United States from Canada and Mexico, and I have given you both the American and Russian strategies for Nuclear War One. And from all these things, you are the one to decide how best to use your resources to take care of yourself in preparation for nuclear war. Your life is at stake, so it's up to you to evaluate these things for yourself. I believe that the time has come to give you a thumbnail sketch of what to expect after Nuclear War One based on Kremlin plans. Only a true miracle, my friends, could save the West now, and we are doing nothing to merit a miracle.

My three topics for today are:

Topic #1—RUSSIA'S HOLY WAR TO WIPE OUT BOLSHEVISM;

Topic #2—RUSSIA'S BLUEPRINT FOR DOMINATION OF THE EARTH; and

Topic #3—RUSSIA'S PROGRAM TO LAUNCH MANKIND INTO SPACE.

Topic #1—Later this fall television viewers in a few American cities will be able to watch a documentary series called "The Unknown War." It is a major series consisting of twenty programs showing newsreel films taken during the seige of Leningrad in World War II. Originally "The Unknown War" television series was intended to be shown nation-wide over network television. When the project was proposed over two years ago, network officials verbally encouraged it, but now the networks have turned their backs on "The Unknown War" series. Only nine stations scattered across the United States plan to carry it as of now. The television series contains scenes of unspeakable suffering by the Russians during those 900 days in Leningrad. Most viewers, haunted by the enormous tragedy unfolded before their very eyes, can't help feeling some sympathy and admiration for the Russians who endured all that. When the project began over two years ago, our Unseen Rulers wanted to build up the Soviet Union, their secret ally, in our eyes; but now everything has changed. Russia has terminated the secret Rockefeller/Soviet alliance through military double-cross in preparations for all-out war. So now the networks no longer want programs and news items to build up Russia's image; instead, we are being shown everything possible to paint Russia as the enemy and to make us think increasingly in terms of war.

My friends, the rulers of Russia are waging a holy war. They are out to save their own souls and the soul of Russia; and to do that, they believe they must wipe out what they think of as a cancerous disease—Bolshevism. It's a well known fact that the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia in 1917 was carried out by revolutionaries with outside support and financing; and much of that financing, as I explained in the past, originated with the Rockefeller interests. Thus was born the secret Rockefeller/Soviet alliance which lasted for nearly 60 years. But as I first mentioned last November 1977 in Audioletter No. 28, there was another faction in the 1917 revolution whose role has never been widely recognized in the West. This other faction consisted of the self-styled "spiritual Communists." Unlike the Bolsheviks, the "spiritual Communists" are a native religious sect which began within Russia more than two centuries ago.

Their numbers have never been large, but even in czarist Russia their influence politically was sometimes very great. They are tough, and they are perhaps the most tightly knit religious group on earth. They insist on taking literally many things in the Bible which, in their view, are swept under the rug generally in the West. The breed who rule Russia today take their beliefs very seriously indeed—not for show, but as a guide to action and in setting policies of all kinds. This is the reason for many strange differences which have been noticed in recent years between Russia and the West. For example, in the United States, homosexuality is increasingly being tolerated, encouraged, and even smiled upon legally; whereas in Russia it is a capital offense and punishable as such.

But the "spiritual Communists" of Russia believe that they made one horrible mistake six decades ago. That mistake was to ally themselves with the Bolshevik Communists, thereby guaranteeing the success of the Bolshevik Revolution. The Communism of the "spiritual Communists" had derived originally from Biblical passages that referred basically to sharing and mutual support among believers. This evolved into a political view, which in turn became compatible with Marxism. Finally this led to the alliance between the "spiritual Communists" and the Bolsheviks early in this century. It was only after the Bolshevik Revolution was past the point of no return that the "spiritual Communist" faction began to realize what a serious mistake they had made. Watching as junior partners in the Revolution, they saw the Bolsheviks shed all pretenses of morality and humanity as they acquired power. All the high-sounding promises of equality and justice evaporated to be replaced by terrorism and a Satanic government.

Before the Revolution, millions of Russian Christians had been calmed down in their worries over Bolshevik agitation by priests who assured them of divine intervention to protect them. But when the Revolution came, Russian Orthodox bishops and priests were rounded up by the thousands to be tortured, then executed; and millions of Russian Christians who had sat back and done nothing because of the soothing words of their priests, began dying like flies in the Bolshevik inferno. They did not know that the Bolsheviks had infiltrated the Russian Orthodox Church before the Revolution. But the "spiritual Communists", observing the carnage, investigated and found out what had happened; and today, they see it all happening again in the West, especially in the United States .

The "spiritual Communists", after they realized their blunder, took stock in order to decide what to do. They finally concluded that there was only one way they could hope to atone for their mistakes and save their souls—they must work untiringly to undo the Bolshevik control of Russia they had helped to bring about; and beyond that, they must work to rid the world of Bolshevism itself so that what had happened to Russia could never happen again. And with that, they vowed a holy war against the Bolsheviks. Their holy war was to progress in three (3) phases. Phase #1 was to involve continued alliance with the Bolsheviks but with the "spiritual Communists" increasing their own power at every turn at the expense of the Bolsheviks. Their operating principle during this phase was to be reduction of severity of purges and repression wherever possible but never at the risk of jeopardizing the over-all take over program. Phase #2, to begin as soon as the "spiritual Communists" became more powerful than the Bolsheviks, was to be the actual weeding out of all Bolsheviks in Russia. And finally, Phase #3 was to involve actual warfare by a non-Bolshevik Russia against Bolshevism world-wide.

Phase #1 of the "spiritual Communists'" holy war against Bolshevism lasted for 35 years. The turning point to Phase #2 came on March 5, 1953, with the death of Joseph Stalin. From that point onward the "spiritual Communists" have held the upper hand over their Bolshevik partners although even the Bolsheviks themselves were kept unaware of what was taking place until very recently. The de-Stalinization campaign of Nikita Khrushchev, which stunned the world over 20 years ago, was the first visible sign of this shift. Now Phase #2 is nearing completion. I can reveal that there is not one Bolshevik in the inner circle of the Kremlin. The same holds true for the top military hierarchy of Russia, and even the military personnel who man all three legs of the Russian space triad (the Moon Base, the Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellites, and the hovering Cosmospheres) share the same distinction. They have all been scientifically screened to insure their complete loyalty to Russia. Meanwhile Bolsheviks are being expelled from Russia in ever increasing numbers, and they are being absorbed mainly into the United States. In mid-September, in fact, United States immigration laws were quietly amended to allow them to come in here faster; and once here, they are being planted rapidly in all levels of the United States government, even though they cannot speak good English. Security clearances for them are practically nil. And so the stage is being set for the third and final phase of the Russian holy war against Bolshevism. This final phase, which is imminent, is Russia's all-out war against all pockets of Bolshevism world-wide.

Down through history it has always been true that holy wars are the most uncompromising and bloodiest of all. Many centuries ago the Moslem jihads brought stark terror upon their victims. Likewise the Christian Crusades brought mayhem and destruction on a scale that was unparalleled in those times. But the holy war by Russia against the Bolsheviks is unlike any other holy war in the past several thousand years. The Moslems and their jihads sought to convert the infidels at the point of a sword; likewise the Christians in their Crusades sought to liberate the Holy Land and convert the heathen at the point of a sword. The Russian holy war against the Bolsheviks is different, far different. After 60 years of the most intensive grueling experience, the "spiritual Communists" have concluded that all true Bolsheviks are impossible to convert to a faith in God. Bolshevism, therefore, is evil incarnate, so they have concluded that the only way to eliminate Bolshevism as a force in the world is to eliminate the Bolsheviks themselves throughout the world—and that is what their holy war is intended to do.

Today the center of Bolshevism is the United States of America. The rulers of Russia look at the United States as they would a rabid dog—the dog is dying of rabies and is also a danger to everyone else, so the only thing that can be done is to destroy the dog. Bolsheviks are now infiltrated throughout the United States—in all levels of government, in education, in entertainment, in the news media, and even in all branches of the church—and the Rockefeller/ Bolshevik plan for a nuclear first strike against Russia constitutes a clear and present nuclear threat. So the Kremlin is wasting no time in completing preparations to smash the United States militarily.

The only hope of preventing Russia's devastation of America, my friends, would be our own swift action to rout out the Bolsheviks in our midst. If we did that, Russia would no longer have any need to attack. In the West, Bolshevism has been unleashed full force by the Rockefellers. It is fast becoming a force unto itself, and already Western Bolshevism is breaking

loose from Rockefeller control. Increasingly, it's not the Rockefeller brothers who are using the Bolsheviks, but the other way around. Soon the remaining three Rockefeller brothers will fade from the scene, but that will not undo the cancer of Bolshevism with which they have infected the West. In Russia, it took the "spiritual Communists" 60 years to overcome the Bolsheviks—only now is their final rout of the Bolsheviks taking place.

My friends, we do not have 60 years. The time left to us is measured in months before Russia's holy war against Bolshevism enters its final phase—NUCLEAR WAR ONE with the United States of America as the prime battleground!

Topic #2—Two months ago in July 1978, the wife of Philippine President Marcos visited Moscow. In doing so, she joined a fast growing stream of state visitors who are stepping on the Kremlin's doorstep these days from all over the world. The reason for Moscow's popularity these days were reflected in remarks by Mrs. Marcos as reported by NEWSWEEK in its July 2 4 issue. According to Mrs. Marcos, Prime Minister Kosygin told her that Russia and her allies will control the high seas, space, and most of the world's land mass by the early 1980's. And as Mrs. Marcos put it, "No one wants to be caught on the losing side." My friends, Kosygin's remarks were not a mere boast—they were a sober declaration of what the Kremlin both intends and expects to achieve.

During the past two years and more I have made public enough information about Russia's military power and weaponry to make one thing painfully obvious: if Russia's only concern were to win a war with United States and our allies, Nuclear War One would have erupted as long ago as the summer of 1976. At that time, as I revealed publicly in Audioletters 14 through 16, the Soviet Navy began planting short-range underwater-launched Nuclear Missiles within our own territorial waters. For a while action was taken to stave off this Russian capability for a zero-warning pre-emptive strike under the brave leadership of General George S. Brown, then Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. And on September 16, 1976, I met with General Brown in his Pentagon office for over an hour without interruption to relate crucial information to him that was being blocked from reaching him through normal channels. But then came the heart-rending RED FRIDAY AGREEMENT of October 1, 1976, which I reported that month in Audioletter No. 17. On that day, then President Gerald Ford succumbed to personal blackmail and tied General Brown's hands in a spineless agreement to appease Russia. Barely two weeks later General Brown was attacked viciously in the press and made to apologize over nation-wide television for his alleged misconduct. Meanwhile, Russia was proceeding without interference in ringing America with underwater missiles. From Red Friday 1976 onward, Russia has been increasingly in a position to rain military disaster on the West at will. This ability became complete one year ago with the Battle of the Harvest Moon and its immediate aftermath—and yet, Russia still has not attacked for two (2) reasons. One reason is military, but the larger reason is that Russia is looking beyond Nuclear War One to the conditions under which Russia will dominate a conquered earth.

As I have mentioned before, one very important reason for the delay so far in Russia's attack is that Russia's rulers want to choose their moment for war, based on optimum conditions. They want their defeat of the West to be as decisive as possible, yet be as inexpensive as possible to Russia in casualties and other terms. This is far more important to Russia's rulers of today than any pre-conceived timetable. But Russia's military

supremacy over the West has now become so lopsided that it's no longer the most critical guide to their thinking. As I will explain shortly, the Kremlin has already succeeded this month in secretly crippling one ingredient in America's feverish first strike plan which I revealed in detail last month. Increasingly, the Kremlin is preoccupied with insuring that Russia's domination of the earth after the war will be as trouble free as possible. The inner circle in the Kremlin today never lose sight of their true enemy. That enemy is the world-wide network of Bolsheviks whose main power base today is the United States. In the coming war, Russia wants to concentrate on that enemy while preserving the rest of the world as much as possible for post-war domination. So they are doing all they can to neutralize as much of the world as possible before the war itself. Uncommitted nations are being urged to join the Soviet orbit as allies and friends, or failing that, to at least stay neutral. Westward-leaning nations are being wooed by Russia and by Russian client states with the line that America is a paper tiger, and neutrality between East and West would be enough to satisfy Moscow. And even American allies, such as West Germany, are being lured away from staunch support of America through both carrot and stick methods. In this way, the Russians hope to leave themselves with a minimum of hostilities and resentment to disrupt their domination of the earth after Nuclear War One. And unlike their Bolshevik enemies, Russia's rulers of today do not intend to dominate the world by means of a One-World Government.

To the Russian "spiritual Communists" the One-World Government concept is as diseased as Bolshevism itself. Instead, the Russians intend to dominate the earth in a different manner. It will be an extension of the present satellite system in critical areas such as those bordering the Soviet Union. Other areas judged to be of less importance to Russia will be left to go their own way with relatively independent governments. Every nation on earth, however, will be required to make its peace with Russia as the pre-eminent power on earth. In matters of trade, for example, Russia will have to be put at the top of the priority list by everyone; and to guard against any attempt by any nation or satellite country to upset Russia's power, the anti-war machine network will stand guard world-wide without ceasing. These machines, the Russian hovering Cosmospheres, armed with Charged Particle Beam-weapons, will make short work of any attempted rebellion against Russia's supremacy. This, then, is the Russian plan for post-war domination of the entire earth. If the Kremlin gets its way, the long-standing commitment for a monolithic, all-powerful, One-World Government, is headed for total annihilation like Bolshevism itself.

The quiet rebirth of private enterprise now taking place in Russia and eastern Europe, is a harbinger of things to come on the international scene as well. In politics, in economics, and even in religion no nation and no individual will dare completely ignore the Kremlin; but neither will there be complete, centralized control like that sought by the Rockefeller cartel and their Bolsheviks.

The Russian blueprint for world domination is awesome; but of course it will come to nothing unless Russia is able to achieve a decisive victory in Nuclear War One. And as I revealed last month, our own Unseen Rulers are setting in motion a suicidal nuclear first-strike plan against Russia. At the anticipated cost of several hundred million lives, the combined Rockefeller/Bolshevik forces who control America today are trying to achieve a stalemate with Russia in Nuclear War One. To accomplish this, an American first strike is to cripple Russia's Space Triad of strategic weapons—that is, the Beam-weapons Base

on the moon, the orbiting Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellites, and the floating Cosmospheres.

The United States lacks the capability to attack these weapons systems directly, but last month I detailed the American strategy to cripple them by destroying their bases in Russia. Russia, having learned the American plan some three months ago through the efforts of their own KGB, are working fast to thwart the American first-strike plan, and earlier this month a critical development took place that is destined to cripple the American first-strike plan.

Of the three countries whose real estate is critical to the American plan—namely Norway, Iran, and China—one has now been effectively neutralized, and it is the most important of the three. Last month in Audioletter No. 37, I explained the necessity for American access to China's Sinkiang Province as part of the first-strike plan against the Russian Space Triad. Without that access, the United States will be unable to mount an effective attack against Russia's Cosmosphere installations at Semipalatinsk and Novosibirsk. That alone will be sufficient to doom the United States in the coming war. For this reason among others, the matter of China has for some time been the No. 1 item on the Kremlin pre-war agenda.

Last month Chairman Hua of China visited Romania and Yugoslavia in connection with Russian overtures for a reconciliation with China. Now, I must report to you that these meetings have already borne fruit. When Hua met with Romania's Premier Ceausescu, he was offered certain positive inducements on behalf of the Soviet Union. However, he was also informed that Russia is determined to move fast in its preparations for war against the West. Hua was told if China is to restore ties with Russia on a favorable basis, it must be done quickly. Hua was also told that the Soviet Union would much prefer to offer China the opportunity to restore good relations without loss of face, rather than to have to force the issue militarily in the near future. Accordingly, Hua was informed of some of the current Russian capabilities in advanced warfare techniques; and to allow Hua to assess the situation in a pragmatic way, he was informed that the Soviet Union would shortly provide him with a series of three (3) demonstrations of Russia's operational geophysical warfare arsenal.

The first demonstration was to be an undersea earthquake in the vicinity of Taiwan, scheduled for September 2, 1978. The second, to take place the following day, was to be an earthquake on land in an area of western Europe that is not generally known for earthquake activity. Both of these, Hua was told, would have intensities in a Richter scale range of 6.5 approximately. As I revealed long ago, this is the nominal yield for which most of the Russian earthquake-producing cobalt bombs are designed. The third demonstration, the finale, was to be an earthquake centered on the Caspian Sea coast of Iran, north of Tehran. Hua was told that the Iran quake would occur on or about September 14; however the exact strength of the quake was not predicted other than to say that it would be "strong." The reason given was that the Iran quake would be brought about by remote means whose results are not yet so highly predictable. The point which was then driven home for Hua was that the same remote means used on Iran would be used on China's Sinkiang Province should American personnel be allowed into that area.

On Saturday September 2, an undersea earthquake measuring 6.6 on the Richter scale occurred near Taiwan, right on schedule. In Taipei tall buildings swayed, concrete utility poles waved around

like ships' masts on a heavy sea, blackouts took place briefly, and traffic was snarled; but then everything calmed down again with only a few minor injuries. The next morning, southern Germany was rocked by the most powerful earthquake in 35 years, measuring about 6 on the Richter scale. Eleven days later, on September 14, the grand finale began, and it was intended for a double purpose. For one thing, it was to round out the demonstration series of geophysical warfare in a spectacular manner to properly impress Chairman Hua. But in addition, it was also an attack on the second most important country in the American first-strike plan, Iran.

Last month I explained Iran's intended role in the secret American war plan. Iran's northern border which lies along the southern coast of the Caspian Sea is to be used by American Submersible Aircraft, or "Subcraft", to attack three of Russia's four Cosmodromes. For this reason, Russian agents are trying to bring about a revolt in Iran to overthrow the Shah; and on the morning of September 14, Russia made use of geophysical warfare in an attempt to ruin Iran's Caspian Sea coast naval facilities. Had they been successful, any American Subcraft attack would have been seriously delayed while the damage was being repaired.

The technique employed against Iran that day is called a "Seismic Cannon" by Russian geophysical warfare specialists. A Seismic Cannon consists of a long series of cobalt bombs buried deep underground in intervals along a straight line. The bombs are not detonated all at once; instead, they are fired one after another like a string of gigantic firecrackers. When this is done at the proper rate, the seismic shock generated by the first bomb is reinforced by the explosion of the second bomb as the wave passes, and so on. In this way, artificial ground shocks can be made to travel much more strongly in one direction than in any other; therefore they can be aimed to affect a far distant target—hence the name "Seismic Cannon." The Seismic Cannon fired by Russia on the morning of September 14 was deployed far to the southwest of the Semipalatinsk nuclear test range. A string of cobalt bombs were buried in a line roughly 70 miles long in a sparsely inhabited area of the Kazakh S.S.R. of the Soviet Union. The line was centered at approximately 45 degrees north, 70 degrees east—which is about 200 miles southwest of Lake Balkhash; and it was oriented along a line running from northeast to southwest so that the Seismic Cannon was aimed at Iran's Caspian Sea coast north of Tehran. The north and east borders of Iran, including that part along the Caspian Sea coast, lie along what is called a tectonic plate boundary, or major fault line. The Russians were expecting that when the shocks from their Seismic Cannon struck this huge fault line broadside, it would loosen the fault in the Caspian Sea area—the result shortly thereafter would be a major earthquake. They were right about that, but their Seismic Cannon missed the intended target. It happened because the seismic waves, while they travel most strongly in the desired direction, also spread with lesser force in other directions.

The firing of the Seismic Cannon on September 14 was reported by Sweden's Uppsala Seismological Institute. They estimated the Richter scale reading at 6.9, and declared it to be the most powerful blast ever in that area, which was presumed to be in western Siberia. But as reported by Radio Australia, it was a very mysterious blast, and the epicenter could not be determined with certainty. The next day the ground began shaking in northeastern Iran. The area around Tehran in the Caspian Sea felt some brief shocks, but they were not hit hard as planned. Instead a fantastic earthquake reaching 7.7 on the Richter scale erupted some 400 miles southeast of Tehran. In moments the town

of Tabas ceased to exist, and the devastation was heavy over a wide area. Within a few days the death count had reached 26,000 and was still climbing. Condolences to Iran soon began pouring in, and the first condolences to reach Iran were sent by Leonid Brezhnev No. 2!!

The Seismic Cannon missed its intended Caspian Sea coast target, but the performance was more than adequate for Chairman Hua. Four days after the Iran earthquake disaster, secret meetings began in Peking between top Chinese officials and a high level Russian delegation. An agreement in principle was reached on September 19 between Russia and China; and while verbal camouflage is hiding the fact, a secret alliance between Russia and China is now being forged. As a result, of the 51 Cosmospheres which were over China as recently as last month, only 6 remain; and none of these are now over the Sino-Russian border region.

The three giants of the great new ASIAN AXIS—Russia, China, and Japan—are growing closer by the day, contrary to outward appearances. While all eyes are focused on manipulated events in the Middle East, truly momentous developments are taking place almost unnoticed in Asia. Russia fully intends to be the first among equals in all of this; but she also plans to make it all worthwhile for her partners in dominating the earth. Russia does not feel the need to strive for the last ounce of absolute control over our world, for Russia is looking outward toward other worlds to conquer.

Topic #3—One day in 1962, scientists at a prestigious technical university in the eastern United States attended a seminar given by a visiting Russian scientist. The topic under discussion by the Russian was a difficult problem that was of great interest to scientists in the aerospace field at the time. As the American scientists watched and listened, the Russian went through a tour de force of high-powered mathematics. Finally he ended up with what mathematicians call a "closed form solution", much to everyone's surprise. One of the American professors looked as if someone had kicked him in the stomach as he left after the seminar, and a student asked why. The professor growled, "There went my research project for the next year. I was going to do it by computer, but this blankety blank Russian just wrote down the whole solution in one line."

Many times in recent years Russian science has handed shocks to the West. For one thing, the Russians are stiff competitors in the areas of science where we too are strong; but in addition, they are devoting tremendous amounts of effort to areas of science which are virtually ignored in the West, and they have learned some astonishing things which are not even hinted at by Western science. Russian science is perhaps most spectacular in the field of space. Right now it's space weaponry that is in the forefront of Russian technical progress—such as the hovering Cosmospheres and the Charged Particle Beam-weapon. Both of these are exclusively the property of the Soviet Union.

But looking beyond the immediate needs of their holy war against Bolshevism, the rulers of Russia today are attracted to space by long-term non-military motives. For one thing, they believe that the conquest of space will give mankind all the challenge, all the danger, and all the drama we will ever need without ever again resorting to war among ourselves. But, my friends, Russia's determination to launch mankind into space really springs from just one more basic conviction.

Based upon extensive scientific study, Russia's rulers are

convinced beyond any doubt that we who inhabit the earth are not alone in the universe. They have what they consider to be strong evidence that our galaxy, the Milky Way, harbors not just one but several civilizations more advanced than our own; and they are convinced that we of planet Earth are at the crossroads now. Either mankind will begin to move upward and outward from cradle Earth into space or very soon we will destroy ourselves. If the Russians have their way, mankind will venture into space as the newest member of our galactic community.

This viewpoint of Russia's ruling circles has gradually crystallized only during the past decade or so; but the studies which were destined to lead to this conclusion resulted from an awesome event which took place in Siberia 70 years ago. On June 30, 1908, a huge object streaked across the skies in that part of the world, plummeting toward the earth. In the heavily forested remote Tunguska area of Siberia, it disappeared in a fantastic explosion; and for days afterward, strange glowing clouds and nighttime brightness in the sky were seen as far away as London, England. The Tunguska region of Siberia is so remote and inaccessible that it was not until 1927 that a Russian expedition succeeded in reaching the explosion site; but since that time the Russians, and only the Russians, have studied the area exhaustively. They have employed every scientific tool that could possibly be of use, because the Tunguska blast area is very strange indeed; and they have reached the definite conclusion that the object that shook Siberia seven decades ago was not a meteor, nor was it any other natural phenomenon. More than a decade ago, Russian aerospace experts, some of them famous even in the West, reached a startling conclusion. Their discovery resulted from analyzing widespread eye witness accounts and other evidence. The Tunguska space object of 1908 had slowed down and carried out a major change of course. This final maneuver took it over the totally uninhabited area where it exploded at an altitude of several miles. The explosion itself has been estimated as being equivalent to a huge 30-megaton hydrogen bomb; and even today 70 years later, the entire area remains slightly radioactive. To the Russians, there is only one logical explanation that fits the mountain of facts they have compiled about the Tunguska explosion: it was a disabled spacecraft which tried unsuccessfully to make an emergency landing, exploding in mid-air in the process. The story of the great Siberian explosion is fascinating and is well told in a current book—the title is: "THE FIRE CAME BY" by John Baxter and Thomas Atkins, published by Warner Books, New York (1976 Doubleday & Company, Inc., Garden City, New York).

But the rulers of Russia also have additional reasons for believing mankind is not alone in the cosmos. The Russians have carefully studied UFO reports from around the world. They have restricted their attention very rigidly to those which are solidly documented and backed up by evidence, such as radar; but because of their Tunguska studies, they have also analyzed UFO data with open minds and they are convinced that we are being quietly observed not by one alien civilization but by several. As of now, the Russians have not established where these presumed galactic neighbors are coming from, but they are working on it. Powerful radio telescopes and other techniques are in use by the Soviet Union. They are trying to pick up any clues to the possible identity of our visitors. As for the vast distances involved between these unidentified neighbors in our own solar system, the Russians are unperturbed.

In the course of studying scientific areas that are shunned by the West, they have discovered what they believe to be clues to the secret of interstellar travel. If these clues are correct,

they believe that mankind could well be at work on our first starship within a mere generation from now. These are the motivations that are driving the Russians into space; but first, they reason that we must learn to establish ourselves and live in self-supporting ways under conditions radically different from those on earth, and they have settled upon Venus as the first target beyond the moon for experimental colonization.

During the past year several space probes have been launched at Venus by both Russia and the United States; but only Russia has ever landed probes on Venus, accomplishing this feat some three years ago with two landers. Here now for the very first time, I can reveal what the Russians have found on Venus: hydrogen, helium, lithium, boron, carbon, oxygen, neon, sodium, magnesium, aluminum, silicon, phosphorus, sulfur, chlorine, argon, potassium, calcium, scandium, titanium, vanadium, chromium, manganese, iron, cobalt, nickel, copper, zinc, gallium, germanium, arsenic, selenium, bromine, krypton, rubidium, strontium, yttrium, technetium, ruthenium, rhodium, palladium, silver, tellurium, iodine, xenon, tungsten, platinum in large quantities, gold also in large quantities, mercury, polonium in modest quantities, astatine, radon, and uranium in modest amounts. The other elements are either non-existent on Venus or present only in trace amounts. Over all, the Russians have concluded that it is technically feasible to sustain life permanently on Venus, so Venus is to become the first planet to be colonized by man. According to Russia's plan, Venus will be man's first tiny step to the stars. But of course planet Earth, the cradle of mankind, will remain the only home the vast majority of men will know, or want to know, far into the future.

What will be happening to our own precious world while the saga of space exploration is underway? My friends, the answer to that question lies not in outer space but in inner space, within ourselves. We live today in a world that grows sicker by the day, merely to satisfy the greed of powerful men. Our natural environment is sick, poisoned by pollution; our morals and values are sick, and this sickness is promoted deliberately as a tool of power by the forces of Bolshevism. And we are physically sick with an ever-growing list of dread diseases. Western medicine has become the handmaiden of Western corporate socialist enterprise; and the more we poison ourselves, the more we are told we must spend on medicine to cure ourselves. But medically, as otherwise, it is a losing battle. The more we spend the further behind we end up. The Russian rulers are deadly serious in their conviction that all of this has to be stopped, and soon, or mankind as a whole is doomed. The condition of the entire world today is the legacy of Western civilization as warped and controlled by our Unseen Rulers. We in the West have proven that we are not going to act in time to stop our slide into total self-destruction, and destruction of the world in the process; so very soon, Russia's holy war against Bolshevism will rain calamity upon our heads. If the Russian holy war succeeds, the survivors world-wide will live in an era very different from that of today. It will not be Utopia; but it will be an era of challenge, of spiritual rebirth, and of hope. The new Russian pattern of private enterprise will spread world-wide, including individualized agriculture. Russia herself, the breadbasket of the world a century ago, will become so once again.

My friends, many surprises lie ahead for the Russians as well as for you and me; but the time has come to face facts as we try to plan for the future. America always wins on television and in the movies; but we are living through history, not fiction, and the fact is that the world of the future will be very different from that of today because the history of the United States as we

know it, is in its final pages.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #39

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is October 29, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 39.

It was 21 years ago this month that the Space Age dawned for mankind. On October 4, 1957, millions around the world listened in amazement to the radioed beep, beep, beep of Sputnik I—the world's first artificial satellite was in orbit, put there by Russia. In Audioletter No. 19, nearly two years ago, I revealed how it happened that Russia beat America into space. The United States could have launched an earth satellite more than a year ahead of Sputnik I, but our Unseen Rulers deliberately tied the hands of our space experts for reasons of personal gain and power. As a result, the honor of taking mankind's first step into space will belong to Russia for all the rest of human history. To one who loves America as much as I do, America's default at such a historic moment has always been a very bitter pill to swallow. And today it's even more crushing to see that, after a brief heyday in space, America has defaulted once again to Russia—and this time, as I revealed last year in Audioletter No. 2 6, it's permanent.

But the history of mankind is more than the history of the United States or of Russia alone; and from a broader historical perspective, the shifting fortunes of America and Russia in space are just symptoms of far more basic currents in history. As the late great British historian Arnold Toynbee has shown, the history of man is a story of spiritual development in response to challenge after challenge. When challenges are met, there is growth; when challenges are avoided, there is crisis; and when challenges remain unmet, there is breakdown and disintegration of civilization itself.

The unique challenge of the 20th century is the challenge of space. Given the hind sight of history, it was inevitable that the primary competition to meet this challenge would be between the superpowers of the 20th century—the United States and Russia. Today, this competition has been resolved in favor of Russia, and even this outcome was foreshadowed by historical clues two generations ago. The key that unlocked the door to space, as everyone knows, was the rocket. Invented untold centuries ago in China, it was introduced to the West by an Englishman named Congreve; but it was only as the 20th Century was dawning that the significance of the rocket for space exploration was first recognized. Two men independently conceived of rockets in this way—one a Russian, the other an American. First came the Russian, Konstantin Tsiolkovsky (1857-1935), the father of Russian cosmonautics. As early as 1903, the year the Wright brothers flew their first airplane in America, Tsiolkovsky began publishing his writings on Space Rocketry. By 1913 he had already analyzed the most basic problems of rocketry and space travel, but in addition he had given considerable attention to the psychological and spiritual aspects of putting man in space; and to this day the Russian science of Cosmonautics continues to stress these aspects of space travel far more than is the case in the West.

Tsiolkovsky's speculations and calculations about space travel suffered the same fate as many other developments in Russia after 1917. The Bolshevik Revolution turned life in Russia into an existence marked by terror, hunger, and a struggle for bare survival. But meanwhile, half a world away in the United States, the other father of modern rocketry was at work. His name was Robert H. Goddard (1882-1945). In 1919 Goddard published his first writings on the subject of rockets. Like Tsiolkovsky, Goddard independently analyzed the earliest and most basic problems of rocketry. Meanwhile in Russia, the great Russian famine brought on by the Bolsheviks was getting under way. Within two years over twenty million Russians, the vast majority of them Christians, would die in stark terror, grinding hunger, and cannibalism. Russian rocketry, along with other forms of progress, had been thrown into the ash can by the Bolsheviks. In the United States, Goddard continued his work, which like the American space program decades later, was preoccupied with nuts and bolts more than philosophy.

On March 16, 1926, Goddard made history by launching a liquid-fueled rocket 200 feet into the air from a farm at Auburn, Massachusetts. At that moment more than 50 years ago, the United States was in a position to leave all other countries far behind in exploring the eventual prospects of space exploration. But our Secret Rulers of that day were not interested in anything as frivolous as the vast reaches of outer space. Instead, they were busy consolidating their own gains from World War I and the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia. So Goddard's seeds of space travel fell on rocky ground here in the United States. When they began to bear fruit years later, it was not in America and not for peaceful purposes—it was in the work of German scientists at Panemunde in their development of the V-2, the grandfather of the modern ICBM. In the Soviet Union, however, a discovery took place that was destined to lead one day to a very different perspective on space by the Russians.

In 1927, the year after Goddard's historic rocket experiment here in America, a Russian scientific expedition succeeded in reaching the site of the great Siberian explosion of 1908. They had expected to find a giant meteor crater, but instead they found a mysterious blast area that has absorbed Russian scientists of all types for more than 50 years. As I told you last month, these studies led some time ago to a conclusion that is accepted as fact by Russia's present-day rulers. This conclusion is that the incredible Tunguska blast was caused by the accidental explosion of a crippled alien spacecraft 70 years ago. For this and additional reasons, the Russian leaders are convinced that we are not alone in the cosmos. As a result, the Russian approach to space is motivated by long term factors that go far beyond the narrow economic and military goals typical in the West. Just six days ago on October 23, an announcement was made in Moscow which received almost no news coverage in the United States. On that day Russian astronomer Felix Zigel of the Moscow Aviation Institute made public the Russian answer to the Tunguska riddle. Zigel described the mammoth Siberian explosion as having been caused by an "extraterrestrial probe"—or, in other words, a UFO. By allowing this public statement to be issued, the Kremlin confirmed what I told you last month.

My friends, the Russians are tackling the exploration of space as the kind of spiritual challenge that Toynbee described long ago as the key to human progress. Meanwhile the forces of Bolshevism which halted Russia's early researches into space travel, have now ruined America's space program. The evil forces set in motion so long ago by our Unseen Rulers are now leading to

self destruction. Meanwhile Russia herself is throwing off Bolshevism, and a new era is dawning in Russia and eastern Europe.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—RUSSIA'S HOT PURSUIT OF HER BOLSHEVIK ENEMIES Topic #2—AMERICA'S PANIC REARMAMENT LEADING TO NATIONAL SUICIDE Topic #3—THE PUBLIC SIGNS OF WAR TO COME.

Topic #1—Increasingly these days I am asked the same question over and over again, and that is: "If the Russians are after the Bolsheviks, why should they kill so many of the rest of us? After all, we haven't done them any harm; in fact, they are getting everything they want, so why go to war?" My friends, I've tried to explain these things over the past several months, and yet I do understand the confusion it is causing among some people. Many have not been aware of the vast international power wielded by the Bolsheviks who disguise themselves in many ways. Those who do know about this Satanic power have the opposite problem. They are tempted to think that the Bolsheviks are all-powerful and therefore that Russia could not have freed herself from the Bolshevik grip. But the simple fact is, my friends, that things do change. In spite of the enormous power of the Bolsheviks, they have been overthrown in Russia. As I said in detail last month, this did not take place in a sudden overnight coup d'etat. It was accomplished over a period of six decades of tireless struggle by the self-styled "spiritual Communists" who now run the Kremlin.

The "spiritual Communists", unlike the Bolsheviks, are a native religious sect, a Christian sect, which began in Russia over two centuries ago. Today, they are abandoning Communism in everything but name, but in their religion they remain perhaps the toughest and most tightly knit group on earth. Having learned the hard way, they view Bolshevism as a totally Satanic system without any redeeming features; and after 60 years of struggle that dwarfs anything experienced in the West, they regard the Bolsheviks themselves as less than human. Today they regard the United States as hopelessly infected with the disease of Bolshevism, and therefore they intend to destroy the United States as they would a rabid dog.

I have mentioned this rabid dog viewpoint of the Kremlin before, but there is another way in which they view their holy war against the Bolsheviks that is rooted in nothing less than international law. It is the doctrine of hot pursuit. The hot pursuit concept can be illustrated by thinking of a police chase of fugitives. Suppose, for example, that a police car sets out in pursuit of a getaway car driven by thugs who have just robbed a store and murdered the owner. Even if the getaway car should race across the city line into another jurisdiction, it is accepted practice in general for the police car to continue the chase regardless of where it leads. The reason is that the police are in hot pursuit of the fugitives for a crime committed within their jurisdiction. Today the rulers of Russia see themselves as the police and the Bolsheviks as the murdering thugs who are fleeing from justice. In the wake of the Bolshevik Revolution of 1917, the Bolsheviks robbed Russia of her riches and murdered the owners by the millions. Now, after a struggle of six decades, the "spiritual Communists" have turned the tables on the Bolshevik outlaws, who are leaving Russia in a growing

torrent. They are seeking sanctuary mainly in the United States, where they are joining with the Bolshevik elements already here in a new Bolshevik revolution.

The Bolsheviks plan to throw America and the West into nuclear war against Russia, so Russia's rulers are fighting fire with fire. Soon, their hot pursuit of the Bolsheviks will rain nuclear devastation on our heads. The Russian rulers are aware of the argument that we non-Bolsheviks of America have done Russia no harm and therefore should not suffer with the Bolsheviks; but, my friends, I must report to you that this argument, reasonable though it sounds on the surface, draws nothing but scorn within the Kremlin. No harm? they say. Then why, they ask, are we giving unquestioning sanctuary to the floods of Bolsheviks now leaving Russia? And for that matter, they add, how can a people who won't lift a finger to save their own land, America, be counted as friends by anyone else? No, they conclude, you Americans are refusing to recognize what is taking place before your very eyes. It is a takeover by the Bolsheviks, and soon you will wish you were dead. By comparison, they say, Russia's nuclear attack on the Bolsheviks among you will be merciful.

The Kremlin is carefully keeping track of the new Bolshevik revolution now under way in the United States. It's more sophisticated now than it was 60 years ago in Russia, but the Russians know what to watch for, and the progress of this secret and quiet revolution is one of the indicators that are being used by Russian intelligence to gauge the time left to prepare for war.

A key factor in the American Bolshevik revolution is the economic turmoil now building up. Central to all of this is the collapse of the United States dollar. Over five years ago I described in detail the whole plan to collapse the dollar deliberately. That was the subject of my 1973 book, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, published by George Braziller, 1 Park Ave., New York, N.Y. 10016. And gold! If today's gold prices measured not in the United States dollars but in hard currencies such as the German D-mark, the true value of gold would be accurately reflected; but earlier this month I was in Europe and saw for myself just how far the collapse of the dollar has already gone. I've been to Europe innumerable times over the years but this time I had a new experience. Many shopkeepers will not accept American dollars, whereas they used to be eagerly accepted; and where dollars are accepted, they will buy very little. The so-called almighty dollar is almighty no more. And so, my friends, the dollar is losing its international role. It is becoming a garrison dollar, a currency which will still buy a few things here but will soon be almost useless outside the United States. Already the federal government is preparing for a reverse split of the dollar, just as was done in the recent past in France. In this way, all old dollars will be forced out of hiding.

The process of our economic imprisonment is advancing rapidly, and most Americans are still blissfully unaware of it. The so-called voluntary "Wage and Price Guidelines" announced by Jimmy Carter five days ago will be replaced by mandatory controls in preparation for war. By the end of this year 1978, I am informed that all non-corporate Americans will be virtually blocked from transferring funds abroad. Part of it will be done in the name of protecting our economy and safeguarding our national security. But one of the real purposes is to serve the Bolshevik revolution by closing and bolting the prison gates around America through your pocketbook.

As the Russian rulers watch, they see the Bolshevik plan progressing right on track. Soon, economic turbulence will be joined by political turmoil, and a little later on there will be shortages, hunger, rioting, terrorism; and as America descends into the hell of Bolshevism, there will be cannibalism in America. Even now our own Secret Rulers have reactivated the weather-control grids around America which I first revealed last May in Audioletter No. 34. From September 2 4 through October 19 they were shut down for reasons related to the autumn equinox; but on October 20, just nine days ago, they were turned on again, and they are once again being used to modify our weather. As a result, strange weather can be expected periodically from now on through this winter. Through every avenue imaginable the Bolsheviks are marshaling their forces to attack, undermine, and if possible, destroy Russia. And to borrow the words used by Alexander Solzhenitsyn in his speech at Harvard last June, "The fight for our planet, physical and spiritual—a fight of cosmic proportions—is not a vague matter of the future; it has already started."

Two months ago I warned about the sinister developments that were being set in motion within the Roman Catholic Church. I said that the Bolsheviks want to use the Church as a weapon in their war against Russia by maneuvering the Church into an anti-Russian stance under the guise of anti-Communism. By doing so, they expect to enlist seven hundred million Roman Catholics, one-sixth of the human race, into their own battle-to-the-death with Russia. When I recorded Audioletter No. 37 two months ago, Albino Cardinal Luciani of Venice had just become Pope John Paul I. He quickly became known as the Smiling Pope, yet he left the scene after barely a month's time. As I said last month, the Bolshevik game-plan was going to be tried again with another new pope, and that is happening now.

The new pope was elected earlier this month, on October 16. Instantly, his image as an anti-Communist was seized upon by the American news media; and even the name he has taken, Pope John Paul II, signifies a second try in the Bolshevik game-plan I revealed in August. Pope John Paul II is the first non-Italian pope in 455 years—Karol Cardinal Wojtyla of Poland. During World War II, Wojtyla was a member of the Polish underground which fought against the Russian and German occupation forces. For 30 years as a church official, he has challenged and struggled against Poland's Russian-dominated regimes; and just last month on Sunday, September 17, he played a key role in firing the opening gun of the Roman Catholic Church against Russia. On that day a pastoral letter spearheaded by Cardinals Wyszynski and Wojtyla and signed by all Bishops was read in Catholic services throughout Poland. Poland is the most heavily Roman Catholic of all countries in the Russian orbit with over 14,000 churches and an estimated 85 to 90% of the population Roman Catholic. What's more, the Poles have a natural hatred for Russia as Big Brother, so it caused no small concern in both Warsaw and Moscow when the pastoral letter was read to Catholic congregations throughout Poland a month ago. The letter, whose contents reached practically the entire population of Poland, blasted government censorship as "paralyzing the cultural and religious life of the nation."

My friends, the image of the new pope is that of one who stands up to the Russians; but the way in which this image is to be used is another matter, and I think it is essential that both Catholics and non-Catholics alike know what is going on behind the scenes, for at this very moment the Church is becoming both tool and target of the forces of Bolshevism. If what they are

doing is not stopped, the Catholic Church will soon be destroyed.

What I am about to reveal, my friends, gives me no pleasure at all. I myself was born a Roman Catholic, I was raised a Catholic, I even studied for the priesthood. For me personally though, there still were unanswered questions. It was only later, in the bush in Africa, that I truly found our Lord Jesus Christ; but I speak as one who knows what it is to be a Catholic, and my purpose is to help and to build up—not to attack or tear down anything that is good and right. Even if the things I am about to reveal should lead to scandal, I must agree with the words of the wise priest who recently counseled me: "It is better that scandal should come than for the truth to be suppressed." If the truth does remain suppressed, my friends, the days are numbered for the organized Roman Catholic Church, and there will be repercussions throughout all of Christendom.

Two months ago one of the briefest papal conclaves in history ended in a surprise election. Cardinal Luciani of Venice became Pope John Paul I. His election had been masterminded without his knowledge by a Bolshevik faction within the Vatican. It was thought that because he was a complete outsider to the Vatican power structure, he would be the ideal puppet pope, easily misled and maneuvered. Within weeks, while the world was still getting acquainted with this man called the Smiling Pope, the Wyszynski/Wojtyla pastoral letter was issued in Poland. But Pope John Paul I was turning out to be a disastrous choice by the Bolshevik manipulators. They were failing in their efforts to have him pose a flinty challenge to Russia under the guise of anti-Communism. Instead, he was preoccupied with people and how the Church might best serve them, including the people of Russia.

My friends, the stakes are high and the time is short, and the consequences for Pope John Paul I and for Catholics everywhere were tragic. He had been elected to an office he had neither expected nor wanted, and his reaction had been strangely prophetic. As reported by NEWSWEEK for October 9, 1978, Pope John Paul I had been stunned at his election; and he had said to the other Cardinals, "What you have done to me, may God forgive you." It was almost an echo of the words of our Lord Jesus Christ nearly 2000 years ago. As He hung dying on the cross, He said: "Father, forgive them; for they know not what they do."

I must now reveal that during the night of Thursday, September 28, 1978, Pope John Paul I left the Vatican, alive. He did not die in his sleep that night, as reported by Vatican sources. He lived for three more weeks, incognito, away from the Vatican, before finally being shot in the back of his neck by person or persons unknown. On October 4 the funeral for Pope John Paul I was attended by tens of thousands of mourners, and witnessed by television viewers in 31 countries. The body that lay in state was not that of Pope John Paul I, who was still alive. But as everyone knows who has ever lost a loved one, a lifeless body never looks the same as a living person had looked; and so, thanks to the mortician's art, no one questioned that the remains on view were those of Pope John Paul I. After that, even if he himself had walked into a church somewhere and announced: "I am the Pope", he would not have been believed. After all, people had seen the funeral on television, and they had read about it all in the newspapers. Pope John Paul I was still alive on October 16, the day that his successor, Pope John Paul II, was elected. Since there cannot be two popes at the same time, this raises a thorny question: Was the current pope legally elected? In any case, the man known briefly as the Smiling Pope was put to death the evening of October 19, 1978—three days after his successor was named. Shortly thereafter, his body was cremated

and the ashes disposed of.

My friends, nothing will ever be seen again of the late Pope John Paul I, and no evidence has come to light that would enable his assassins to be identified. Nevertheless, not all of the evidence of his tragic fate has been destroyed. I refer to the body that now occupies the sarcophagus of Pope John Paul I in St. Peter's Basilica. The body is not that of the Pope John Paul I. It should be exhumed—not only for an autopsy but for scientific identification procedures under independent supervision. If this is done, it will reveal the terrible fraud that now threatens the very soul of the church. If it is not done, the Bolsheviks will have won already in their grasping to manipulate every Catholic on earth for war. In that event, the Church will be used in the cause of Bolshevik warfare against a Russia that is becoming a Christian nation once again.

Topic #2—My friends, during the past two and a half years a drastic shift has been taking place in the relationship between the Soviet Union and the United States. In a pale and carefully-controlled way, this shift has been reflected in the public deterioration of so-called detente; but behind the scenes the real shift has been far more profound. Politically the secret alliance of nearly 60 years standing between our own Unseen Rulers and the rulers of Russia has been terminated unilaterally by the Russians. This astonishing turn of events was not foreseen by America's real rulers. As I first mentioned in Audioletter No. 28 last November 1977 and as I discussed in detail last month, it has to do with a fundamental change in the power structure of the Kremlin. And now as we are on the threshold of Nuclear War One, our Unseen Rulers are no longer confronting the carefully programmed war they had been planning on, but a genuine free-for-all. For the first time in the 20th century, a major war is coming that will not be controlled on both sides by our Unseen Rulers.

As these changes have been taking place in the political sphere, unexpected and revolutionary changes have also been taking place in the military equation. Our Unseen Rulers have been pursuing secret military projects unknown to the public for nearly two decades, but they have made gross miscalculations in their secret master military strategy. That strategy came to ruin one year ago last month in the secret Space Battle of the Harvest Moon, which I reported that month in Audioletter No. 26. So now, the United States is feverishly rearming for war. Our Unseen Rulers are trying to fight off their own rising panic as they see disaster looming closer and closer. War is now so close that they are beginning to shed some of the cloak of secrecy surrounding formerly super-secret weapons programs. When I first revealed them long ago, I was generally not believed; but secrecy always exacts a toll of increased time to carry out a project and they no longer have any time to spare. And so just this month, the public has been allowed to get just a glimpse of secret work in two areas of critical importance. One is that of Underwater missiles; the other is that of Beam-weapons, especially the awesome Charged Particle Beam.

In Audioletter No. 13 for June 1976, I revealed the beginning of Russia's total military double-cross of their former secret partners who then controlled America—the four Rockefeller brothers. Based on very solid information from my own confidential sources, I reported that a nuclear weapon was resting in the waters of Seal Harbor on Mt. Desert Island, Maine. It had been planted there by the Russians where it would be able to vaporize the summer homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller. As I say these words, Nelson Rockefeller is trying to sell his Seal

Harbor home, which has been owned by the Rockefeller family for two generations. Likewise, many wealthy Rockefeller associates in the area seem to have lost their enthusiasm for the beauty of Mt. Desert Island. Like Nelson Rockefeller, they're trying to sell their property in the area and bail out. But my report of June 197 6 about the Seal Harbor bomb led to far more than the present unsettled real estate conditions there. It proved to high intelligence that the Dr. Beter Audioletter could be trusted to tell the truth; and from that point onward, I began receiving large amounts of intelligence information that is not entrusted to any other public information channel.

Only the following month, July 1976, I revealed in Audioletter No. 14 that a new missile crisis was under way. It was the Underwater Missile Crisis of 1976—a far more dangerous affair than the Cuban missile crisis of 1962. The Russian Navy was planting short-range underwater-launched nuclear missiles at strategic locations within our own territorial waters. They were preparing for a nuclear Pearl Harbor-type surprise attack based on naval strategy. This intended first strike was to be totally different in nature from the ICBM first strikes we hear about all the time. Unlike an ICBM attack, the Russian underwater missiles would provide no warning at all because they were planted only miles from their targets and inside our radar defenses.

At the beginning of August 1976, I recorded Audioletter No. 15 on an urgent basis. The Russian Navy was working fast and nothing at all was being done to stop it. There was only one hope that the hands of America's military would be untied in time to avert imminent disaster. That slim hope lay in making the situation a public issue and bringing the United States government under sufficient public pressure to bring about appropriate action. So in Audioletter No. 15, I spelled out the locations of 64 Russian underwater-launched missiles and hydrogen bombs in navigational coordinates. They had been planted in the territorial waters not only of the United States but of 24 other countries world-wide. Very soon, Russia would have been in a position to erase all naval power on earth opposing that of the Soviet Union. At the push of a button, launch commands would have flashed world-wide by satellite and within moments coastal target areas all over the world would have begun vanishing in nuclear fireballs. My listeners responded by showering the Pentagon with tapes, telegrams, letters, and telephone calls. This unexpected and overwhelming public pressure did the job, temporarily, and by the end of August 197 6 the United States Navy had removed all of the missiles and bombs in our waters. Likewise, those around Great Britain had been pulled out by the Royal Navy.

In Audioletter No. 16, I reviewed the tense events that had been taking place. These included my meeting at the Pentagon that month on September 16, 1976, with General George S. Brown, then Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. By that time many of my critics who did not have my information sources were ridiculing my exposure of the Russian underwater missile crisis. Some tried to say that there would be no reason for the Russians to do such a thing since they already have ICBMs. In doing so, they glossed over the paramount strategic value of surprise, which would be produced by the zero warning time of the Russian underwater missiles. But most of my critics simply waved it all aside by saying such a thing is not feasible. They tried to say there's no such thing as Underwater Missiles so my claims about a secret crisis could not be true.

But meanwhile I met with General Brown, then top military officer in the United States, for well over an hour in his

office, because by then the Russians were far along in planting a second round of these so called impossible missiles in our waters. Just as before, crucial information about them was being blocked from reaching General Brown through normal channels. So, as I explained in Audioletter No. 16 that month, General Brown had invited me to confer with him as soon as I alerted him about my new information. Of course if my information in Audioletter No. 15 had not proven correct, General Brown would have had no reason to meet with me. Through the end of September 197 6 General Brown continued to direct American activities to stave off the Russian underwater missile threat; but, as I reported in Audioletter No. 17, the treasonous Red Friday Agreement signed on October 1, 1976 by then President Gerald Ford ended all that. Soon thereafter General Brown was cut down. He was humiliated over nation-wide television over trumped up criticisms of his conduct, when his only real crime was doing his duty. He was shown that he would have no chance of helping himself or America by going public in any way, as I discussed in Audioletter No. 17 and in Audioletter No. 23 for April 1977. Concerning what I told you then about the neutralization of General Brown, consider the words attributed to General Brown by the ATLANTA JOURNAL this past August 3, 1978. With regard to the usefulness of quitting in protest over a policy decision, General Brown was quoted as saying: "I was perfectly prepared to do it, but I had to ask myself, 'What good would it do?' It would not reverse a decision. No, it would be like a pebble on the beach—they'd get another Chairman tomorrow."

After General Brown was neutralized, our Unseen Rulers tried in vain to reinstate their secret alliance and therefore a controlled war with the Soviet Union. As part of their insane effort in this direction, they allowed the Russian Navy to resume planting their Underwater Missiles without harassment; and as I reported to you nearly two years ago in Audioletter No. 20, this policy was based partly on the existence of a secret fleet of American undersea missiles. Unlike the small short-range Russian missiles the American missiles were mammoth offensive ballistic missiles. They were planted in the Atlantic and Pacific in the secret "Operation Desk Top" under CIA control. In their undersea resting places, as I explained in Audioletter No. 20, they were invulnerable to attack. They were also the largest, most powerful nuclear missiles on earth, dwarfing our conventional ICBMs; and their purpose was blackmail to make sure Russia followed the script during Nuclear War One. But I also revealed then that the CIA's Undersea Super Missiles were springing leaks one by one and being ruined. The following month, in fact, nuclear debris from one of these leaking missiles off Florida, Atlantic Missile No. 8, poisoned large numbers of whales in the area. More than 120 of them beached themselves to die near Jacksonville, Fla., in only a few days time. To this very day, many self-proclaimed instant experts among my critics have kept telling their followers that undersea missiles like these are impossible; and while they always cry for documentation, they have totally ignored the documentation I presented in Audioletter No. 20. Mr. Tony Hodges, a prominent Honolulu environmentalist, had unearthed information about the definite feasibility of undersea missile systems from experts. In December 1975 he published a warning document on the situation from which I quoted in Audioletter No. 20. It seems that expert testimony is not enough to convince most people of the truth. What it takes is to see it on television or in the newspapers.

Well, my friends, it has finally begun to happen. Eleven days ago on October 18, CBS television news carried a report about Pentagon studies now under way on Underwater Missile Systems. The next day Radio Australia went further and disclosed that:

"Pentagon generals have shown President Carter an outline of a scheme to submerge huge diesel-driven craft off the American coast to create a nuclear missile system less vulnerable to the increasingly accurate Soviet warheads." But, my friends, the undersea diesel launcher concept is just a cover story for the real undersea missile crash program now in progress. Six months ago in Audioletter No. 33 I revealed that "Operation Desk Top" had been reactivated. As I explained then, a fresh fleet of CIA Undersea Missiles was to be planted beginning off America's Atlantic coast under the cover of drilling for oil. At that time the Baltimore Canyon area, where the drilling is taking place, was being touted as an oil bonanza for the United States. Today it's six months later and news reports have been telling for months now about one dry hole after another. If they were really looking for oil, the whole thing would be seen as a fiasco by now; but instead the work goes on, day and night, at site after site. And soon the oil companies will line up to bid for additional leases in the area. I can now reveal that as of now, seven new CIA undersea Super Missiles are in place off our Atlantic coast; and the Russians know exactly where each one is, because hovering overhead there are presently five (5) Cosmospheres on patrol armed with Charged Particle Beam-weapons which can destroy the missiles as soon as they are launched.

As unnerving as the race in underwater missiles may be, it now takes a back seat to the race in Beam-weapons. This involves not only high power Lasers but the even more devastating Particle Beam-weapons. Last September 1977 I reported Russia's first operational use of Particle Beam-weapons in space. On September 20, 1977, the Russians blasted an American Spy Satellite into a huge fireball in space as it passed over the Petrozavodsk Observatory in northern Russia. And barely a week later, on September 27, 1977, the secret American Moon Base in Copernicus Crater was silenced by Russia's neutron-beam attack from earth orbit. America had just lost the Battle of the Harvest Moon. Immediately America was forced to stop short in her secret Beam-weapons race with Russia, for suddenly our Unseen Rulers were teetering on the edge of war itself—and Russia suddenly was calling the shots. Just as happened in the matter of the Underwater Missile Systems, many people were soon ridiculing the idea of operational Russian Particle Beam-weapons. Such a thing, they said, was far in the future, if not impossible. But what I made public then was true, my friends; and now, after one short year, there has been a complete change in the public attitude of top American defense experts. The reason is that in the kamikaze do-or-die strategy of our Unseen Rulers against Russia, beam-weapons are now being tackled in a crash program; and only by letting it become visible in a controlled way, can maximum use be made of our technical resources and manpower. Most members of the general public probably have heard very little about the sudden new emphasis on beam-weapons in the United States, but in technical circles, which is perhaps where it matters most, it is now very widely known.

Earlier this month on October 2, AVIATION WEEK AND SPACE TECHNOLOGY magazine, an aerospace industry publication, began a series of articles about America's sudden new plunge into beam weapons. One article quotes a Pentagon official as saying: "Beam weapons are no longer in the 'gee whiz Buck Rogers death ray' category, and senior (Carter) Administration members no longer give it the back of their hand like they once did." Based on the assessment of what AVIATION WEEK refers to as a top level United States official, the article continues in the words: "The general attitude in the past year has changed from one of skepticism over the possibility of fielding particle beam weapons to one of speculation that beam weapons may be possible within a reasonable

time." At another point in the article, AVIATION WEEK relates the belief of United States Air Force officials that a space-based anti-satellite neutro-beam system could be operational "within a couple of years. It would be much sooner than you might believe." In other words, my friends, when I told you about America's defeat in the Battle of the Harvest Moon one year ago, the official line was that such weapons were virtually impossible. But now, America's panic rearmament is under way, so now we are told these weapons are just around the corner. Nevertheless we are supposed to perish the thought that Russia already has these weapons deployed; because once we realize that, we will all know that our Bolshevik rulers are leading us into national suicide. All of our ICBMs and bombers will be of little use against a Russia defended with Particle Beam-weapons. In his editorial of October 2 earlier this month, AVIATION WEEK editor Robert Hotz, a highly-informed American, said: "Beam weapons offer the promise of reducing strategic nuclear weapons to a negligible factor in the future. If successfully deployed, beam weapons can end the long reign of nuclear terror introduced by the ballistic missile and its thermonuclear warhead."

My friends, the reign of nuclear terror spoken of by Hotz has already ended for Russia. As I reported last year, the Russian rulers signaled this fact on September 27, 1977, the very day that the Battle of the Harvest Moon ended in victory for Russia. That day Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko denounced the United States in a speech at the United Nations. In addition, I now quote the exact words I said in Audioletter No. 26: "Gromyko added that the Soviet Union is now ready to halt underground nuclear tests for a while, even if others do not. The reason for this statement, which surprised everyone, is that the Particle Beam has now superseded other nuclear weapons as the front line of Soviet armaments." To quote one further line from the Hotz editorial: "If the Soviets achieve this capability first, it will give them enormous crucial leverage in imposing their political will on the rest of the world."

My friends, the Russians have achieved the Particle Beam capability first; and as I explained last month, they are preparing now to dominate the rest of the world with it. Russia's rulers have no intention of permitting our Unseen Rulers to save themselves by means of panic rearmament, for Russia is monitoring not only the political and economic progress of the Bolshevik revolution here, she is also keeping a close watch on America's war preparations. Russia's sheer momentum is so great that time is on Russia's side right now, and the military gap between East and West is growing wider every day. But as America's rearmament progresses, there will come a point when that gap will stop widening and begin to narrow. From that time onward, time will no longer be on Russia's side, so Russia will wait no longer. When Russia's advantage is at a maximum, war will come. Meanwhile Russia's rulers are using the time remaining in efforts to neutralize as much of the world as possible before the war, as I explained last month.

The real reason for Russia's determination to wage nuclear war on America, my friends, is the Bolshevik control that is now seizing our land at all levels. The only way to prevent war would be our own swift action to throw out the Bolsheviks and remove the threat they pose to Russia. Rearmament cannot save America, it cannot prevent war, and it cannot give us victory in war. It can only guarantee that America will endure the wrath of sabotage, geophysical warfare, nuclear weapons, particle beam-weapons, invasion and occupation. So by panic rearmament, the Bolsheviks are bringing on national suicide for the United States of America.

Topic #3—On the night of the Harvest Moon last year, Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko delivered a sudden late-night message to Jimmy Carter at the White House. Government spokesmen in the major media portrayed the message as a breakthrough in the SALT II negotiations; but as I revealed three days later, Gromyko's real message was an ultimatum. The Battle of the Harvest Moon had just taken place in space and in a stunning upset Russia had won. Ever since then the SALT talks have been a mask hiding the true face of Soviet/American relations. Time and again we, the public, have been told of encouraging progress on SALT. Time and again we have been assured that a SALT accord was "95% complete." And time and again this has been followed by reports of new snags, and the euphoria has evaporated. The cycle has been repeated over and over; and today, 13 months after the alleged SALT breakthrough, it is being done again. Early this month there was "official optimism." Now there is "caution", and even the alleged new snags are always over the same stale old issues—the Backfire Bomber, and so on. But this month there was a change!

One year ago this month I reported that Russia was pressuring the United States to surrender through secret provisions of a SALT II treaty to disarm America, but now we are committed to re-arming in secret. Even if SALT II does come eventually, it will be purely cosmetic for propaganda on both sides; and this month Chief American Arms Negotiator Paul C. Warnke resigned. His specialty in arms matters has always been a dismantling of American military might, so he no longer fits the changed climate for war. Meanwhile war preparations are quietly speeding up on all fronts. Effective the first of this month, the length of basic training has been shortened throughout the Armed Forces, also this month the biggest mobilization-readiness tests since World War II got underway for Reserves in the National Guard. The exercise is code-named "Nifty Nugget" and runs from October 10 through November 8. By stretching it out this way, maximum use is being made of routine week-end drill periods, thereby avoiding widespread public attention to such a major exercise.

On the international scene too, the urgency is becoming apparent. The three countries whose real estate is critical to the American first-strike plan—namely Norway, Iran, and China—are increasingly in the news. As I explained in detail two months ago, American Subcraft—i.e. Submersible Aircraft—are to attack Russia's four Cosmodromes from Norway and Iran. From China's Sinkiang Province, Russia's two Cosmosphere installations in Siberia are to be attacked. But since late June, Russian intelligence ships have been stopping in northern Norwegian waters, scouting out the Subcraft staging areas; and in August a large Russian Spy Plane crashed on a northern Norwegian island, further heightening the tension there. Iran, for her part, was devastated by a huge earthquake last month brought about by Russian geophysical warfare, as I explained last month. Iran now wants to cancel purchases of 70 F-14 Fighter Bombers, 140 F-16 Fighters, 31 F-4 Phantom Jets, and 1000 air-to-ground missiles. But what was praised most by Moscow Radio was Iran's reported decision to back out of buying the so-called AWACS Airborne Spy System. It was to have been used along the border with Russia to monitor Russian military activities. As for China, the tug of war between East and West continues on the surface; but, as I reported last month, Russia and China have already reached an agreement in principle for a secret alliance. And six days ago, on October 23, the Sino-Japanese Peace Treaty went into effect, and Russian geophysical warfare will force Japan to sign up with Russia soon. The great New Asian Axis—Tokyo, Peking, and Moscow—which I warned about five years ago in my book THE

CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, is coming into being.

This month four American Spy Bases in Turkey were re-opened for one year, the arms embargo against Turkey has been lifted, and on October 23 so was the arms embargo against Pakistan. The United States is now considering arms aid to Somalia, and behind the scenes American official behavior toward Rhodesia and South Africa is changing. It seems our Unseen Rulers want all the allies they can salvage for the coming war.

My friends, as we are confronted today by the evil forces of Bolshevism in our midst and the threat of war, we should recall these words: "We have no spiritual glow, no fervor, no fire against evil. We stand facing war today with the impassivity of a person who stands motionless before the flood, simply because he did not wish the flood." These are the words of journalist and lecturer Frederic Snyder which were spoken on November 30, 1941, just one week before Pearl Harbor; and today, my friends, all of America is a Pearl Harbor.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #40

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is November 30, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No. 40.

On November 24, 1978, the day after Thanksgiving, the Washington Post here in Washington, D.C. published a full-page memorial to the late Congressman Leo J. Ryan of California. A sketch of Ryan in tones of gray took up the entire page, and against that background a brief eulogy was printed in bold type. It began, "In Memoriam, to our good friend Leo J. Ryan, Congressman from California. We will miss him. He saw hope that right would prevail." The timing of this memorial page was ironic. Congressman Ryan had been killed in Guyana nearly one week earlier, and his funeral had taken place two days earlier. But Congressman Ryan had been deliberately sacrificed in order to launch a covert military operation in Guyana; and as it turned out, the Washington Post memorial to Ryan was printed immediately after the successful completion of this military operation. In a display of courage that is practically unknown today in the United States Congress, Ryan had gone to Guyana knowing that it might be dangerous. But what he did not know was that he had been lured into making a trip whose tragic outcome was planned well ahead of time. Congressman Ryan and those who died with him at Port Kaituma Airport were casualties in the secret war that is leading to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. And so were the hundreds of other American civilians who died in the so-called 'mass suicide' at Jonestown, Guyana.

For more than two years now the United States and Russia have been embroiled in secret hostilities in preparation for Nuclear War One. It began in earnest during the summer of 197 6 when the still secret Underwater Missile Crisis erupted. Then it expanded into wholesale nuclear sabotage of the United States with weapons now planted at literally thousands of locations nation-wide. These range from mammoth hydrogen bombs ready to destroy our largest dams and reservoirs down to tiny nuclear devices called 'micronukes' by the Russians. For some time now the Russians have been detonating micronukes in a steady drum beat of

explosions all over America. In September 1977 the secret war took a decisive new turn. In the still secret Battle of the Harvest Moon in space, America's Secret Rulers lost their supposed ace in the hole for the coming war. In a shocking upset, Russia knocked out America's secret Moon beam-weapons Base in Copernicus Crater, and since that time Russia has seized the dominant position militarily in space.

In past Audioletters I have kept my listeners abreast of these developments, and for the past year I have also been calling attention to the drastic changes taking place in the leadership of both Russia and the United States. In Russia, the original ruling faction after 1917, the atheistic Bolsheviks, have been overthrown after a progressive struggle for six decades. The Kremlin is now under the absolute control of a tough band of native Russians, a Christian sect who consider the Bolsheviks to be evil incarnate. As a result, the Bolsheviks are being expelled from Russia and they are flocking mostly to the United States. They are joining the many Bolsheviks already in powerful positions here in a sophisticated new Bolshevik revolution! In the process, they are gradually pre-empting much of the power that was once exercised by their Secret Allies, the third generation Rockefeller brothers. As Bolshevik power becomes greater and greater in the United States, the Satanic fruits of that power are becoming increasingly visible.

Seven months ago in April 1978, the lives of over one hundred unsuspecting civilians were deliberately put in great danger for the sake of an intelligence mission. This was the case of Korean Airlines Flight 902 which invaded super-sensitive Russian air space and was shot down. As I explained in detail that month in Audioletter No. 33, there was nothing accidental about the Korean airliner episode, and the threat of death to all the innocent passengers was the key ingredient in the episode. It would have been far easier for the Russian fighters to blow the Boeing 707 out of the air in a ball of flame than to force it down with only a few casualties, as was done.

Today the Bolshevik grip on America is even greater than it was last April, and human life is growing cheaper by the day. This time it was not a hundred but nearly a thousand civilian lives, and this time they did die because nothing was left to chance. The gruesome tragedy at Jonestown, Guyana is only a pale shadow of what lies ahead for the entire United States if the cancer of Bolshevism is not stopped. Those who are seized by the Bolshevik way of thinking are schizophrenic and Satanic and unable to tell right from wrong. When these tendencies are allowed to go unchecked and the Bolsheviks acquire power, the consequences for society as a whole are tragic. Both murderous and suicidal actions take place on a scale beyond comprehension. It happened 60 years ago in Russia as the Bolsheviks took over there; and now, as the Bolsheviks are taking over, it is beginning to happen here too in the United States of America.

My three topics for this month are:

Topic #1—THE MILITARY PURPOSE OF THE JONESTOWN TRAGEDY

Topic #2—THE BATTLE OF GUYANA, THANKSGIVING DAY, 197 8

Topic #3—THE OPENING SCENES OF NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Topic #1—It is now nearly two weeks since the November 18 slaughter of Congressman Ryan and four other Americans at the Port Kaituma Airport, Guyana. During most of that time, the State Department has been under heavy fire from the friends and

staff of the late Congressman, and with good reason. Over a period of a year and more, the State Department received bushels of mail from American citizens concerned about friends and relatives at Jonestown. Congressman Ryan, too, kept urging an investigation, but the State Department never did carry out an investigation worthy of the name. It was only after Congressman Ryan received what amounted to a whitewash report on Jonestown that he made his ill-fated decision to go see for himself. Congressman Ryan, my friends, was the victim of deliberate entrapment, for reasons which I will explain shortly. Careful analysis of his psychological profile had revealed that he could be provoked into going to Jonestown by denying him hard information through normal channels. Intelligence operatives within the State Department made sure that any reports to Ryan about Jonestown would not meet with his satisfaction. Right now State Department spokesmen are trying to act dumb about their role in the grizzly events of recent days. They wave their hands and try to look foolish as they explain why they somehow failed to spot the dangers at Jonestown; but the Jonestown disaster was actually spawned by a military situation in Guyana which I first made public over four years ago. And then, as now, the only response of the Government was cover-up.

As my older listeners all know, I am referring to the Russian nuclear missile base in Guyana. Beginning in June 1974, I revealed the presence of the Guyana missile base on radio programs all across America; and in October 1974 I repeated this warning in my very first talking tape, Audio Book No. 1 entitled: "HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF DURING THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THIRD WORLD WAR." The following words are a direct quote from that first tape of more than four years ago: "According to my very reliable intelligence sources on this matter, the Republic of Guyana (next to Venezuela in South America) has already been turned into another Cuba with Atomic Missiles aimed at the Gatun Locks of the Panama Canal and at our cities here in the United States. Of course our government, which dances to the tune called by the Dynasty, refuses even to investigate seriously my charges on this score." (End of quotation from Audio Book No. 1) Since then I've repeated my warnings about these Russian missiles in Guyana in my Audioletters, as you well know; but when I first made these charges on radio, many of you sent letters and telegrams to the State Department, mostly by way of your Congressmen and the Pentagon. You demanded to know if my charges were true, and for your effort you got gobbledygook and denials. And many of you sent me these letters saying that you did not believe the Government. Well, my friends, you were right.

The developments which were destined to culminate in tragedy at Jonestown began some 13 years ago in 1965. Guyana was a newly independent country, the former British colony of British Guiana. At that time the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance was in full swing, and the long range joint plans for a controlled Nuclear War were moving right along. Both sides were looking ahead toward an eventual double-cross, but that still lay far in the future at that time. As I've explained in past Audioletters, the deliberate strengthening of Russia at America's expense was part of their joint plan for WORLD GOVERNMENT and conquest. The Cuban Missile Crisis of 1962 threw a temporary monkey wrench into the program when President John F. Kennedy intervened personally and stopped the nuclear arming of Cuba; and for doing that, he lost his life in Dallas barely a year later. His successor, Lyndon Johnson, made sure that he followed the script more carefully. In the wake of the Cuban crisis, Russia needed a new forward base in the Caribbean area for strategic purposes until the heat was off in Cuba. To accommodate Russia, Guyana was selected for this purpose; and David Rockefeller saw to it that a Marxist named

Forbes Burnham became Prime Minister. In return, the Chase Manhattan Bank became fiscal agent for Guyana, giving Rockefeller access to the gold produced in Guyana; and as a key factor in all this, then President Lyndon Johnson in 1965 turned over the formerly American Air Base, Atkinson Field, to Guyana. America's right to retain control over the Base for several more decades was simply thrown away without excuse. Atkinson Field, which was renamed Temehri Airfield, is south of Georgetown, the capital city. This is the airfield to which American helicopters carried bodies to be airlifted to America after the Jonestown disaster this month. When Johnson gave the Temehri Airfield to Marxist Guyana, he handed Russia a very large plum indeed. The Temehri Airfield is the largest in all of Latin America, larger even than New York's largest airport, the John F. Kennedy Airport; and its location makes it ideal for ferrying Cuban troops and supplies to Africa. As a result, Johnson's action on behalf of the Rockefellers robbed the United States of an important logistic connection to Africa while opening the door for Cuban troops. Our troubles years later with the Cuban troops in Angola and elsewhere in Africa are partly the result.

For a number of years, Russian military activity in Guyana was heavily concentrated around the vicinity of the Temehri Airfield. In fact, when I first reported the Russian missiles in Guyana in 1974, they were emplaced in sites that ringed the Airfield. Within the past two years, however, the missiles were pulled out from these locations and moved to a separate missile complex west of Georgetown. In this new complex, the missiles were deployed at sites scattered over an area some 30 miles across. In the approximate center was a Command and Control installation commanded by Russian personnel. After this missile base relocation was completed, the missile complex was centered at a point about 70 miles northwest of Temehri Airfield; and roughly another 70 miles to the northwest lay the Peoples Temple Commune at Jonestown, an Israeli-type kibbutz. So the missile base ended up about midway between the Jonestown commune and Temehri Airfield. It was no accident, my friends, that the Peoples Temple kibbutz was located so close to the missile base. But the origins of the Peoples Temple in the 1950s had nothing to do with government intrigue. It was not until about 1970 that certain elements of the United States Intelligence community began to infiltrate and subvert the Peoples Temple. As I have explained in the past, it's always been standard practice by the Rockefeller brothers to support not only the faction in power but also spies and opponents to that faction. In this way they are always in a position, at least in theory, to cut down anyone who tries to break free of their control. In the case of Guyana, the Rockefellers wanted to have such a tool in Guyana as a check on Forbes Burnham, the Prime Minister, whom they had put in power with their money. Certain elements within the United States Intelligence community under general coordination by the CIA were given the task of finding ways of accomplishing this.

In the course of evaluating various options, it was concluded that the Peoples Temple would prove ideal. The psychological profile of the leader, Jim Jones, indicated that he could be converted into a powerful tool of our Unseen Rulers. Contrary to reports in the controlled major media, Jim Jones was born a Jew, and he already exhibited tendencies toward kibbutz-style organization that could be channeled into useful directions. This would be brought about through a combination of both conscious and unconscious factors. At the conscious level, money and powerful political support would be channeled in his direction; at the unconscious level, the technique of psychological programming, which I described in some of my early Audioletters, would be employed. Gradually, Jim Jones would lose

control of his own personality and become what our Unseen Rulers wanted him to be. The process would inevitably create tremendous internal conflicts and turn Jim Jones into a troubled and dangerous man—and that my friends, was what was done.

By 1973 changes in Jones' behavior began to be noticed by his friends and followers. His conversion into a semiconscious agent of death and intrigue was underway in earnest. That same year the mushrooming funds of the Peoples Temple were used to launch the agricultural kibbutz at Jonestown, Guyana, though only a few people went there at that time. Guyana is a rigid Marxist police state, and no one could have launched a new enterprise like the Commune without its approval by Forbes Burnham; but David Rockefeller agents made sure that Burnham received all the assurances he needed that the Jones compound would fit neatly into the Marxist environment of Guyana. And at the same time, Forbes Burnham had begun double-crossing David Rockefeller, exactly as feared. He was playing ball politically but he was hiding much of Guyana's gold production in caves in the mountains. David Rockefeller found this out some time later, but by then the much bigger problem was developing of a double-cross by Russia so Burnham was left untouched in order to make way for bigger things.

When I began warning radio listeners all across America about the Guyana missiles during the summer of 1974, the Rockefeller brothers were still in bed with the Kremlin. There were already ominous signs that something was happening in Russia which they did not understand; but they simply could not imagine that their old Kremlin allies, the Bolsheviks, were being overthrown. And so my public warnings about Guyana missiles were denied and ridiculed by Government spokesmen, who were lying. A carefully programmed Nuclear War was being planned for the late 1970s and they did not want the plan to be spoiled by public awareness; but two years later Russia's all-out military double-cross of America began with the Underwater Missile Crisis of 1976. Most of you know about that crisis, which the Government kept silent about, but which I detailed in Audioletters 14 through 16. Our Unseen Rulers were badly shaken by that surprise and initially tried to reinstate their secret alliance with the Kremlin rulers. After all, they had succeeded in doing so once before after President Kennedy broke the rules and made an issue of the Cuban missiles; but meanwhile they also began setting in motion contingency plans to gear up for a possible real war.

The Guyana missile base was one of the major targets of this revised planning. When this planning began more than two years ago, the Space Battle of the Harvest Moon still lay a year in the future. It seemed inconceivable that America could lose its secret beam-weapons base which was soon to be operational on the moon; and so long as they had this Moon Base to depend on, our Unseen Rulers thought they could not lose. But in light of the Underwater Missile double-cross, they wanted to be able to pull as many of Russia's military teeth as possible. In this way, their destruction of Russia would be even more complete than originally planned.

The planners of Operation Guyana were given a difficult problem to solve. The objective was to wipe out the Russian missile base in Guyana thereby removing the threat it posed to the Panama Canal and southern American cities; but this was to be a pre-war operation carried out covertly and with complete surprise. It had to be covert, because neither the United States nor Russia could afford to have it known that the base ever existed; and the surprise had to be complete, because with even the briefest warning the base could be reinforced and defended by

Cuban troops. From these requirements it was concluded that a commando-style raid would be necessary, something like the Israeli raid at Entebbe Airport in Uganda in July 1976. Any other kind of attack would have required that our leaders do what President Kennedy did in 1962, and that is: Tell the American people what was afoot and ask for our support. And at all cost, the one thing our Unseen Rulers were determined not to do was to tell you and me anything. The problem then arose—how to get the joint attacking forces into Guyana in a force large enough and fast enough to do the job. Wiping out a major missile base like that in Guyana after all is no small task and it takes experience. It was concluded that somehow some very sudden, massive, compelling excuse would have to be provided in order to enable the secret joint military forces to enter Guyana temporarily. The excuse, whatever it was, would have to be so visible as to tie Russia's hands so that Russia could not retaliate in Guyana without giving away what she had been up to there; and the excuse, whatever it was, would have to appear non-military yet require military expertise. Furthermore, some provision would have to be made for all casualties in the missile-base attack to be removed from Guyana after the raid, otherwise their presence in Guyana could have been made the basis of an international incident trumped up around some different story unrelated to the secret missile base. For example, the government of Guyana, following Russian dictates, might have publicly displayed the bodies of the joint military forces killed in the attack and said they were killed in an attempted coup d'etat against Forbes Burnham. It was a very big order, but the Jonestown kibbutz proved to be the answer. All that was necessary was to arrange for many hundreds of American citizens to die suddenly in Guyana and under conditions guaranteeing instant massive publicity.

The sheer enormity of the tragedy would require military involvement, and the location of Jonestown was made to order. Helicopters commuting between the Temehri Airfield and Jonestown would naturally fly over the missile complex—whose details were known in spite of expert camouflage. This meant that joint special armed forces could be set down near the perimeters of the missile base and later recovered, along with casualties, with relative ease. And as the reporters at the Temehri Airfield watched helicopters leaving to the northwest and return from the same direction, they were led to assume that all were going to and from Jonestown 150 miles away. They had no way of knowing that many of the flights were to and from the Russian missile base, which lay in the same direction but only half as far away.

When it was decided to use mass deaths at Jonestown as a cover for the missile-base attack, Jonestown was functioning only as an outpost of the Peoples Temple. There were not enough people there to provide a sufficiently major incident to serve the intended purpose, and so through both direct and indirect means Jim Jones was persuaded to go to the Guyana kibbutz himself, taking as many of his flock as would follow him. That turned out to be about 25 to 30%, and by following him they automatically identified themselves as the group most highly dependent upon Jones personally. They were also most susceptible to the combined influences of exhaustion, intimidation, and isolation from outside help—in other words, right for brainwashing. And ever since the days of the Korean war, it's been known conclusively that brainwashing techniques can force many people to do all kinds of things. Even hardened American GI's in Korea fell victim to brainwashing in surprising numbers because they did not understand what they were up against. But of course the Jonestown victims were anything but hardened soldiers.

In August 1977 Jim Jones left for Guyana with his large sacrificial flock. That same month, United Nations Ambassador Andrew Young carried a message to Prime Minister Forbes Burnham of Guyana. He said that under certain conditions the United States and the World Bank would increase its aid to Guyana—that is, line Burnham's pockets by a factor of ten times more than previous levels. And so the key disaster of Jonestown was set in motion in a day shortly before the Battle of the Harvest Moon last year.

To trigger the whole tragedy in the glare of publicity, the interest of late Congressman Leo J. Ryan was developed and programmed; and as the time approached for Congressman Ryan to make his anticipated trip to Guyana, other activities were set in motion on the diplomatic and military stage. It was essential that Russia's attention be diverted away from Guyana until too late to take action to protect the missile base. Russia's prize in the Western Hemisphere, of course, is Cuba; and so in the final days before the Battle of Guyana on Thanksgiving Day 1978, the trumped up MiG-23 crisis—remember that?—was used to divert Russian attention to Cuba. Only too late did the Kremlin discover that the real target was not Cuba but Guyana.

Topic #2—Close aides of the late Congressman Leo Ryan have reported publicly that his ill-fated decision to go to Guyana was triggered by a State Department report to him that he found unsatisfactory. As I have mentioned already, this reaction of Ryan's had been predicted and, in fact, deliberately encouraged. With elections coming up, Congressman Ryan decided to schedule the trip after the election during the Congressional recess. This was a natural decision, and had also been anticipated by the planners behind the scenes. And as the time approached for his trip, the false issue of the Cuban MiG-23 crisis erupted. The Carter Administration had learned nearly one year ago that the Russians were going to send the MiG-23s to Cuba and decided that it would be the perfect pretext for a fake crisis. The MiG-23, my friends, can carry certain types of nuclear weapons as claimed; but even in this role it is a tactical weapon best suited for support of ground or naval forces. The MiG-23 in and of itself does not threaten America in the same way that the 1962 Cuban missiles did; and so when the United States began playing up the MiG-23s, it was very obvious to the Kremlin that this was a deliberate effort to stir up public tension over Cuba. The question was: Exactly what was the United States up to? Would the Carter Administration be so crazy as to invade Cuba? Such a thing sounded irrational, but America's Unseen Rulers are behaving more and more irrationally. Partly this is deliberate and is intended to keep the chess players in the Kremlin off balance, but it is also partly a result of the increasing degree of control over America by those Satanic schizophrenics, the Bolsheviks.

Cuba is, after all, very important to Russia, for Russia is looking ahead to world domination after Nuclear War I; and for that, Cuba is Russia's main beachhead in the Western Hemisphere. Even more urgently, Cuba is the unadmitted home of Russia's Caribbean Submarine Fleet. This fleet has repeatedly moved into attack positions in the Gulf of Mexico over the past two years and more during periods of tension. And as if that were not enough, there are concentrations of nuclear weapons in at least four land locations in Cuba. One is near the north coast roughly 10 miles inland southeast of Cardenas. This location is 150 miles due south of Cape Sable, Florida. A second site is about 150 miles to the east-southeast of that and about 10 miles inland from the north coast. A hundred twenty-five miles farther to the southeast is a third concentration 15 miles northeast of Marti,

well inland. And the fourth nuclear site is near the eastern tip of Cuba, 28 miles north-northwest of the United States Naval Base at Guantanamo Bay. With all this at stake, American publicity over the MiG-23s caused worry in the Kremlin. And in early November the tension increased when the United States began sending SR-71 reconnaissance flights over Cuba—shades of 1962. In response, massive formations from the Atlantic, Pacific, and Caribbean Submarine Fleets of the Russian Navy began fanning out along America's east, west, and gulf coasts on November 6. They did not deploy into attack formations but their sheer numbers signaled a clear warning to Washington. At this very moment they are still on station, many with neutron weaponry. Then during the week immediately preceding the tragedies in Guyana the MiG-23 pseudo crisis built to a climax. Beginning on Tuesday, November 14, a huge combined American and British Naval Task Force began heading toward Cuba. By midweek, Cuban defense forces were on full alert, and on Thursday November 16 a group of twelve United States Senators in Moscow—supposedly to discuss the SALT talks—met with Russia's Kosygin. There they pressed the alleged issue of the Cuban MiG-23s, and Kosygin flew into a rage. He shouted, "I thought you were here to discuss Peace!" According to James Reston's New York Times article of November 26, 1978, one Senator, John Glenn of Ohio, reportedly tried to defuse the MiG-23 argument, calling it a "false issue." As a former test pilot and America's first astronaut in orbit, Senator Glenn knew what he was talking about, but Kosygin's anger over the other comments about the MiGs provided the United States Intelligence community with valuable proof that the decoy action toward Cuba was working. The next day, November 17, Russia publicly admitted sending MiG-23s to Cuba, calling them strictly defensive weapons. The same day an editorial in the Washington Post typified the crescendo of media attention to the Cuban MiG-23s. It was titled: "A New Cuban Missile Crisis?"

The very next day, Saturday November 18, Congressman Leo Ryan, three newsmen, and a woman seeking to escape from Jonestown were slaughtered at the Port Kaituma Airport. At least a dozen other people were also wounded, but there was no effort to destroy the airplane filled with terrified escapees from Jonestown. Instead, many witnesses were left alive, and a smaller plane managed to take off right after the airport massacre and report the attack in the capital, Georgetown. Immediately world attention was focused on Guyana, and meanwhile the mass murder at Jonestown—wrongly called a mass suicide—was underway. At this point, the elaborate decoy action toward Cuba was no longer needed, so the Pentagon announced that a routine naval exercise was in progress which would approach no closer to Cuba than 50 miles. Cuban defense forces relaxed, but the real action was only beginning in Guyana. The methodical executions of Congressman Ryan and three prominent newsmen had guaranteed that Jonestown would shortly be in the glare of publicity. Having guaranteed this publicity, Jim Jones then ordered the mass executions at the Jonestown kibbutz.

The complete details of the Jonestown disaster may never be known publicly. I can tell you though that of those who died there, very few willingly and deliberately took their own lives—and that is what suicide is. Many were tricked, not realizing that the death rites were real. Many more resisted, but they were weak, helpless, and confronted with armed execution squads. So by various means, several hundred people were poisoned with potassium cyanide. However there were many others who did try to escape and who resisted more effectively. Many of these people were herded off into the jungle and shot without mercy. Finally, when the mass murder was completed, the executioners performed their final task of stage-managing the

horrible death scene. In order to achieve the surprise needed in attacking the Russian missile base, it was critically important that the first reports from Jonestown described the scene as a mass suicide. Only in this way could its actual military significance be hidden long enough to fool the Russians. So all of the bodies that were free of gunshot wounds were carefully arranged in neat rows and other groupings, suggesting at first sight that everyone died willingly and deliberately. This was the scene that greeted Guyanese troops late the following day, Sunday November 19. It was more than 2 4 hours after the kibbutz victims died and the executioners, including the real Jim Jones, were long gone. I will return to the matter of Jones himself later.

The Guyanese troops were afraid of possible disease but counted the bodies as accurately as possible. The total they reported was 409 Sunday night. The initial impression of a mass suicide was seized upon by the controlled major media of the United States. Without waiting for an investigation, the media drummed away at the suicide image of Jonestown as if it were a proven fact. After a few days a few people did begin to raise questions, but by then the initial image of suicide had served its purpose of opening Guyana's doors to the United States. For example, on Tuesday November 21, Jim Jones' surviving son Steven said in a Georgetown press conference, "There's no way it could have been mass suicide." And the same day, according to the Washington Star, a Guyanese source pointed out a serious medical discrepancy in the Jonestown kibbutz death scene. He said, "If you die of cyanide, which seems to have been the poison, your body goes into spasm and contortion death, but at Jonestown everyone looked relaxed." The reason for this discrepancy, my friends, was that by the time the Guyanese troops arrived, all of the bodies had been rearranged, as I have stated. They were also placed face down for the most part. This was so that the widely publicized news photos would not ruin the desired impression of calm by letting us see the victims' final expressions of agony.

To continue the nightmare charade to fool the Russians, the United States at first publicly urged Guyana to collect and bury the hundreds of bodies. As arranged, Guyana replied in effect that it was America's problem and that America should take the bodies back to the United States. To facilitate this huge and hideous task, Guyana obligingly agreed to waive the usual Guyanese law that requires any body to be autopsied before removal from the country. With this arrangement, the United States achieved the carte blanche military access to Guyana that was needed. Russian intelligence realized what was afoot by early Monday, November 20, but it was already too late to stop it. Russia could hardly announce to the world: "We have a secret nuclear missile base in Guyana and the United States is getting ready to destroy it." That would have rallied world opinion behind America; and although Russian Cosmospheres quickly converged over Guyana, they too were useless in the covert conditions of battle there. Their Charged Particle Beam Weapons could have made short work of the commando-style forces, but in the process they would have wiped out the Russian base itself. The Guyana missiles have become only a minor factor in Russia's military power since the Battle of the Harvest Moon last year. They were not valuable enough to Russia to declare open war on their account. And so under these conditions, Russia was powerless to act once the Jonestown tragedy had been staged.

As Thanksgiving Day approached, huge American transports, helicopters, troops, and medical teams swarmed into Guyana. In a remote corner of the huge Temehri Airfield a command post was established for the twin operations at Jonestown and at the

Russian missile base. As some of the troops began the nauseating task of cleaning up the Jonestown kibbutz, other joint attack forces were taking up positions around the missile base in preparations for the surprise raid. Meanwhile, day after day the death count reported at Jonestown remained unchanged at 409. Then on Thanksgiving Day itself, the Battle of Guyana took place. Crack military forces experienced in jungle and surprise warfare moved in on the Russian complex, striking all the dispersed sites simultaneously. Like the Entebbe raid, the battle itself did not last long. It had to be over quickly to be successful. First the small crews on site near each missile were overwhelmed, and then killed. The missiles themselves were quickly disabled. Next the military forces converged on the Missile Command and Control Center, where a bloody pitched battle took place. When the smoke cleared, every single person manning the missile base had been killed, including the Russian commanders.

When the battle was over, American helicopters from Temehri Airfield began landing within the ruined missile complex and flying out the wounded. Then the remaining attackers were left with two more jobs before they could retire from the area. First, they were under strict orders to leave no bodies of the attacking forces on Guyanese soil, and so the entire area was scoured until every single member of the attacking force had been accounted for. Their bodies, like those of the victims at Jonestown, were sealed in Vietnam-type body bags and collected in clearings where helicopters could land to pick them up. Finally, the combined forces were under orders to remove the nuclear warheads from the missiles and take them back to Georgetown for airlift to the United States. Specially trained members of the attacking force had set to work on this task immediately after the initial attacks on the missile crews. By early Friday, November 24, all the warheads had been removed. They, too, were placed in body bags, one per bag, with some jungle foliage stuffed in to give the bag a reasonable appearance. Of course, none of this was apparent to the reporters at Temehri Airfield, whose access to the American Command Post there was carefully controlled. When wounded members of the joint forces were flown back to the Airfield after the Battle of Guyana on Thanksgiving afternoon, they were kept out of sight of the reporters. Otherwise when reporters occasionally saw body bags being moved from place to place they naturally assumed that all contained victims from Jonestown. They had no way of knowing that some contained slain Commandoes and that others contained Russian nuclear warheads. The continual cargo of death from the Jonestown kibbutz made the perfect cover for the aftermath of the Battle of Guyana.

Some reporters have been puzzled at the choice of Dover Air Force Base in Delaware for the Guyana airlift. Most of the Jonestown victims were from California, and there is a mortuary facility similar to the Dover facility at Oakland Air Force Base in California. Dover was chosen, my friends, to facilitate transfer of the Russian nuclear warheads to the nearby Aberdeen Proving Ground and Arsenal. This was done by means of shuttle flights from Dover to Phillips Air Force Base.

Originally the Guyanese count of 409 had been accepted as firm by United States officials in Guyana. That had raised questions as to where the rest of the one thousand or so residents reported to be in Jonestown had gone. Finally, on Thanksgiving Day, with the body clean-up operation well under way, a military spokesman told reporters, "The evaluation that we have made is simply that there were not many more people in Jonestown at the time of the suicide." But even as he spoke, the Battle of Guyana was raging at the Russian missile base. By midday on Friday, the day after

Thanksgiving, 485 body bags had already arrived at the Temehri Airfield. The 'bodies' of warheads from the Russian missile base were destined to raise the total far beyond the total of 409 bodies originally counted by the Guyanese at the kibbutz. It was a bad mistake, the kind of thing that happens in the heat of battle. Something had to be done, and fast. So, on that Friday after Thanksgiving, a breathless and nervous Pentagon spokesman at the Temehri Airfield made a stunning announcement over CBS television: "The original count of persons found dead at the Jonestown site has been found to be seriously in error. It now appears there may be as many as 780 bodies, total, found at the site. They were found simply buried under other bodies. There were larger adults that were grouped together, and under their bodies were found the bodies of smaller adults and children." Badgered by incredulous reporters, the Government embellished the cover story later on. The Washington Star quoted the same spokesman as saying Friday night: "Near the center of the pile of bodies near the assembly hall they were three deep in some areas. They were in layers with blankets between them." This story was so unbelievable that within two days the United States Government dismissed its own story about the blankets as a "rumor." Still the basic idea of bodies on top of bodies had to be maintained, so on Saturday November 25 another Air Force spokesman tried to make it all sound plausible in the following words: "From what I observed, the people when they committed suicide would line up in nice neat little circles, children in front of them, and as they died they folded into the interior of the circle."

The Guyana cover-up is world-wide in its dimensions. In Guyana, Deputy Prime Minister Reid made the first public announcement to the Guyanese people about Jonestown on Friday afternoon, November 24, in Parliament. Then he refused to answer questions, and rushed out to cries of "Shame. Shame" and "Cover-up" from Parliament members. And here in the United States on Thanksgiving Day, FBI Director William Webster said that the: "FBI Disaster Squad has positively identified the body of James Warren Jones through fingerprint identification records." But, my friends, they fingerprinted a look-alike. Jones himself was at that very moment making good his escape from Guyana.

All of the preparations for Jones to make his escape had been made well in advance. An ocean-going boat well stocked with supplies and money was waiting for him near the river town of Bartica, 35 miles southwest of Georgetown. In order to make his way to Bartica from Jonestown, Jones had a Safe Conduct Pass. In the early morning of Thanksgiving Day as the Battle of Guyana was beginning, Jones headed down stream toward Georgetown. Shortly after noon Guyana time his boat left the mouth of the Essequibo River into the Atlantic Ocean. From there Jones followed a complicated itinerary which was designed to prevent his being followed; but in spite of that, my friends, he was followed. From Guyana Jones headed due east for about 330 miles and then turned south, landing near Ramere, French Guiana, about 5:30 A.M. local time November 27. From there he traveled by land to the capital, Cayenne, and took an airplane across the Atlantic Ocean to Freetown, Sierra Leone, in West Africa. From Freetown he headed north along the coast to Guinea-Bissau Airport, arriving at approximately 7:00 P.M. local time November 28. There, less than two hours later, he boarded a DC-3 and took off. His route took him eastward to Tambacounda, Senegal; from there onward into Mali with stops at Segou, Mopti, and Gao; then onward to Agadez, Niger, and Largeau, Chad. From there his plane continued to Atbara, Sudan, and then a short final hop to Port Sudan where he arrived shortly after 4:00 o'clock this morning, November 30, local time. When he arrived at Port Sudan, Jones found a

Turboprop Executive Transport waiting for him, owned and operated by Israeli Intelligence. Within 20 minutes the plane took off with Jones and headed up the middle of the Red Sea toward the Gulf of Aqaba. At 6:30 A.M. local time this morning, November 30, Jones' plane landed briefly at Elath, the back door to Israel; then on to a private airport outside of Jerusalem, arriving at 7:20 A.M. local time. From there he headed to a nearby location for an intelligence debriefing.

After being transformed gradually into a conscious agent of the Intelligence Community over the past half dozen years, Jones has taken part in a joint operation by American and Israeli Intelligence in Guyana. The Israelis had contributed valuable expertise and even key lieutenants for Jones in showing how the Jonestown kibbutz could be set up and used for the intended purposes. One has only to look at an encyclopedia to see that Jonestown was, in fact, a kibbutz. For example, the World Book Encyclopedia under the topic "ISRAEL" says: "In a collective community called a kibbutz, the farmers share all the property and combine their labor. The village administration provides all their needs. The adults eat together in a dining hall, but married couples and single persons have private sleeping quarters. All children are raised together in a separate home. Parents visit their children for an hour or two before supper."

My friends, the word "Communism", which has been domesticated here in America, means living in a commune. There is no purer form of commune than the Israeli kibbutz. When a commune is run by persons with Satanic, schizophrenic characteristics like those of Jim Jones, murderous and suicidal behavior are forced upon the people, as happened at Jonestown. And when this example is expanded to include an entire nation, one has a nation in the grip of Bolshevism. It is happening now to America, and we ourselves are being led and forced into national suicide against our will.

Topic #3—Many Americans today tend to think of World War II as having started on December 7, 1941. That was the day when open warfare came to America at Pearl Harbor. But World War II really began over two years before Pearl Harbor on September 1, 1939. On that day Hitler's troops marched into Poland unleashing a tide of events that swept Germany and Japan crashing into ruins. So from that day onward it made no sense to talk about preventing World War II. The question became instead: How to end the war. In the same way, my friends, it no longer makes any sense to speak of preventing Nuclear War One, because it has already begun. It began secretly on Thanksgiving Day, November 23, 1978, with the Battle of Guyana. And while America's nation-wide Pearl Harbor still lies in the future, all evidence indicates that this time we do not have two years to wait! As this secret war continues prior to open, all-out war, we must now brace ourselves for Russian retaliation against the United States. By destroying their missile base in Guyana, America and Israel wiped out an overseas Russian military installation and killed Russian personnel; and they did so in a way that made any public protest by Russia impossible. In the past, Russia has often retaliated in kind whenever injured, and may well do so again this time. If so, geophysical warfare could well be the ideal tool, destroying a military installation seemingly by natural disaster.

In the Battle of the Harvest Moon 14 months ago, America lost; and the very rules of war were altered. Russia then tried to force America to surrender through SALT II disarmament, but our Unseen Rulers instead stepped up preparations for a suicidal nuclear war. Now, in Guyana, the opening scenes of nuclear war have already given a preview for the entire war. By the

standards of those who planned it, the Battle of Guyana was a brilliant success—and yet, at what cost! Many times more American lives were deliberately sacrificed than were lost by the enemy in the battle itself. In the same way, the American first-strike strategy which I detailed three months ago will cause American deaths to dwarf those inflicted on Russia.

The Battle of Guyana was an exercise in futility, a mere scratch on the arm for Russia. It was planned before the Battle of the Harvest Moon, which rendered this month's battle in Guyana obsolete before it happened. Perhaps the lessons for all of us were best summarized in the ironic sign that hung over Jim Jones' throne in the grizzly silence at Jonestown: "THOSE WHO DO NOT REMEMBER THE PAST ARE CONDEMNED TO REPEAT IT."

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #41

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is Dec. 26, 1978, and this is my Audioletter No 41.

Yesterday my family and I were among the millions of Christians world-wide who were celebrating the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ. And yet, Christmas itself may soon become a thing of the past in America because even as I say these words the silent Bolshevik take-over of America is showing itself in drastic changes in church worship in many areas. In every possible way Jesus Christ is being removed from our minds, and ideas foreign to Christianity are being substituted in His place. At this rate it will not be long before Christmas itself is outlawed by the Bolsheviks, just as they did in Russia six decades ago. Meanwhile the Bolsheviks in our midst are using the Christmas season to divert our attention from their Satanic intrigues, just as they have done in the past.

Economic manipulations are being set in motion to lead to accelerating STAGFLATION here in America—that is, inflation combined with depression. Political maneuvering both here and abroad is setting the stage for BOLSHEVIK DICTATORSHIP—and soon NUCLEAR WAR ONE! Militarily the Bolsheviks are pressing forward with feverish preparations to fight a war with Russia that will kill millions of us. For their part, the Bolsheviks also refuse to face reality. For them, America is fast becoming their last pasture to roam around in, and it is their last stand. They believe they must win here in order to wreak revenge not only on Russia, which is expelling their kind, but also a Russia which has become a Christian nation once again.

My three topics for this month are:

Topic #1—THE ECONOMIC COUNTDOWN TOWARD NUCLEAR WAR ONE; Topic #2—SPIRITUAL WARFARE AND THE COLLAPSE OF TRUST; Topic #3—BOLSHEVIK MANEUVERING TO BUY TIME TO REARM.

Topic #1—A week ago, on December 19, a million-dollar discrepancy in United States gold reserves made headlines. The New York Assay Office of the United States Mint of the United States Treasury is unable to account for at least 5,200 troy ounces of gold, and some say a lot more may be missing. The question is: How much more?

My friends, nearly 3-1/2 years ago in July 1975 I recorded Audioletter No. 2. At that time I gave just one documented example of how big the discrepancies really are. That example consisted of the January 20, 1965 gold shipment from Fort Knox to the New York Assay Office. The shipment came to more than 1-3/4 million ounces of gold, yet it was not shown on the official Treasury listing of Fort Knox shipments. My friend Mr. Edward Durell forced the United States Mint to admit this shipment by confronting them with photographic evidence; and yet subsequent Treasury listings continue to omit that shipment, as well as others. The simple truth is that the United States is gold poor. The official Treasury and Federal Reserve documents that list a huge United States gold hoard are totally false, as I have explained in detail in the past. The dollar has no backing—and it is dying!

My friends, on November 1, 1978, Jimmy Carter announced the Administration's plan supposedly to support the dollar. As part of this plan, it was announced that the United States Treasury would increase the size of the monthly gold auctions from America's alleged gold hoard. Beginning with this month's auction on December 19, the amount of the monthly auction was increased to 1.5 million ounces. The problem is that there is no way for the Treasury to keep up this charade to fool the public for long. When the auctions began last April at 300,000 ounces per month, the United States had only around six (6) million ounces available, mostly obtained from the International Monetary Fund and the Exchange Stabilization Fund. And even this small gold supply is not all in the form known as good delivery gold. The scheduled January auction will include melted-down foreign coins as one-third of the total amount to be auctioned off. Can you imagine? But some excuse has to be found to suspend the Treasury gold auctions before the small gold supply is used up. The flap over a few thousand missing ounces of gold at the New York Assay Office could prove ideal for this purpose, or it could be that action will be taken in February by the Treasury to stop all gold sales because they have not stopped the decline in the value of the dollar here and abroad. Whatever the excuse, be warned!

In the past I have explained in detail how the theft of America's gold was tied into the larger plan to deliberately destroy the United States dollar. And nearly three years ago in Audioletter No. 9 1 described how the gold manipulations were used in March 1973 to force Europe to pay World War II reparations of $45-billion dollars to the Rockefellers, the Rothschilds, and their military partners. At this moment David Rockefeller and company is in the process of extorting a second pay-off of $45-billion dollars from the Central Banks of West Germany, Switzerland, and Japan; but this time it is blackmail pure and simple. And while it is being done under the guise of the so-called Dollar Support Plan of the Carter administration, it is actually helping to hurry along the final collapse of the United States dollar.

The alleged Dollar Support Program announced on November 1 includes, as its most prominent feature, a guarantee arrangement aggregating $30-billion dollars by the United States Government alone. This is exactly the same arrangement as that suggested in speeches by David Rockefeller. Under this arrangement the Central Banks of West Germany, Switzerland, and Japan each agree to support the dollar by exchanging their hard currencies for dollars. In turn, the Central Banks can use these unwanted dollars to purchase United States Treasury obligations bearing high interest rates; but, in addition—and this has not been made

public before—each Central Bank is responsible itself for another $5-billion dollars in support. The total currency credit package, therefore, adds up to a total of $45-billion dollars. My friends, this has all been made to appear as a scheme to prop up the dollar, but it's actually nothing more than a means by which the Rockefeller multi-national corporations can unload unwanted dollars and receive in their place hard currencies. When the $45-billion dollars in so-called support has been used up, as will soon be, the dollar will be adrift again—even worse off than before. This plan is a bitter pill for Europe and Japan to swallow, but they are willing to pay the price for David Rockefeller not to rock the boat when the new European Monetary System goes into operation on January 1, 1979.

As I revealed nearly six years ago in my book, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, there are five (5) Rockefeller-controlled multi-national corporations which all by themselves can swamp the European monetary system. The companies are: GENERAL MOTORS, FORD, IBM, UNILEVER, and ROYAL DUTCH SHELL. Their combined assets exceed those of the governments of Western Europe.

Here is how the so-called Dollar Support Plan really works: First, a Rockefeller-controlled multi-national (for example, IBM) dumps S10-million dollars in West Germany and demands the equivalent in Deutschemarks, a hard currency. The Central Bank complies, buying the dollars and giving IBM the D-marks; but the Central Bank doesn't want dollars either, and so the Bank turns around and buys United States Treasury obligations which bear high interest rates. This increases the national debt—and we American taxpayers pay the interest. So the Rockefeller multi-nationals get all the benefit, while you and I pay the price!

To make these Treasury obligations attractive to the foreign Central Banks, interest rates in the United States are continuing to rise. This is making a sick Stock Market even sicker and leading to a collapse in the real estate market by making homes impossible for most people to finance. That in turn is producing a downturn in construction with an increase in unemployment that will have a domino effect throughout our economy. So, prices are accelerating while business is headed toward stagnation and depression. The result: STAGFLATION, as I warned in my book nearly six years ago. The long-range plan is right on track. And so the gimmick sold to the public as the Carter Administration Dollar Support Plan is merely nothing more than a blackmail payoff, and it is designed to help bring on a major depression in America.

But the Dollar Support Plan is only half of the plan to produce a depression with inflation. As I have mentioned, this plan is having a strong impact on one of the two critical sectors needed to trigger a depression—namely, CONSTRUCTION. The other critical sector, my friends, is that of AUTOMOBILES; and there, too, ominous developments are under way. In Audioletter No. 5 for October 1975 I referred briefly to the wise German economist whose information was misused in order to bring on the Great Depression of the 1930's. I studied under this man and we became good friends. He was the one who taught me to look beyond effects—to causes; and he explained in detail how the two critical sectors of Automobiles and Construction were manipulated to bring on the depression. Today the same scheme that worked then is being brought into play again.

Last month on November 7, General Motors gave the first signal of impending trouble in Automobiles. On that day, General Motors announced a cut by one-half in the dividend rate on GM stock. It

was GM's way of saying, Hard Times Ahead; and the Stock Market shivered and went into a slump. At that time there was no apparent reason for the GM dividend cut, since automobile sales this year have been good. But, my friends, those who control General Motors know what lies ahead because cars run on petroleum energy; and as part of the chain of events leading to NUCLEAR WAR ONE, manipulated oil shortages are on the way.

Throughout the 20th century oil has been a dominant factor in economics, politics, and war. As I have detailed on past occasions, World Wars I and II were both fought over oil. In World War I it was Saudi Arabian and Russian oil, and Christian Russia was all but consumed in the flames of Bolshevik revolution. In World War II it was Saudi Arabian oil again, and this time the back of the British Empire was broken. It was also about Chinese oil whose attempted development by the Japanese led finally to atomic fireballs over Hiroshima and Nagasaki.

Today, NUCLEAR WAR ONE is fast approaching between Russia and the United States. This time it is different, in one respect—this time it is to be a grudge match. On one side are the Christian sect who have taken over the Kremlin after a struggle of six decades; on the other side are their overthrown deadly enemies, the atheistic Bolsheviks who are rapidly seizing total control over America. But even in this situation, energy continues to play a major role. To the Russians, control of nearby sources of energy is a prime consideration influencing their diplomatic and military strategy. To the Bolsheviks, oil is a tool of intrigue and economic conquest as well as a trigger for war.

To understand the real significance of the OPEC oil price increase announced on December 17, it must be viewed in this light of Bolshevik intrigue because, my friends, what has just taken place is not what it appears to be. Saudi Arabia has now been lured into a trap; she is to be both scapegoat and victim in the economic chaos and warfare our rulers are now bringing down upon us all. The giant oil companies of the Rockefeller cartel will use the OPEC oil price increase as an excuse to reap tremendous windfall profits. As the American economy falters, public bitterness against Saudi Arabia will be whipped up. At the same time Saudi Arabia will be blamed for destroying the Camp David accords between Egypt and Israel. Increasingly we will be told that the United States must disengage and disconnect from Saudi Arabia. Events will deteriorate in the Middle East, with Saudi Arabia being made to appear even more sinister. Finally it is all to culminate in the American-Israeli limited nuclear strike against Saudi Arabia's oil fields. It's all part of the elaborate American strategy for a nuclear first strike against Russia, which I revealed in detail four months ago. So for both economic and military reasons, our rulers were determined to bring about a substantial increase in OPEC oil prices. To accomplish this, they have applied a triple squeeze on the OPEC countries.

The first element of this triple squeeze is the declining value of the United States dollar. Once America's rulers began to actively debase the dollar, the dollar in effect was on strike against the OPEC countries. OPEC oil was being paid for in cheaper and cheaper dollars causing the real income of the OPEC countries to decline steadily. In addition, the value of dollars already held by OPEC countries has been evaporating before their very eyes. Yet, in spite of all of this, OPEC oil prices were kept frozen for the past two years and it was Saudi Arabia that prevented any price increase from taking place.

The second arm of the triple squeeze on OPEC lay within OPEC itself. Agitation to raise prices was led by Venezuela which came under Rockefeller control long before World War II. At the same time, the CIA agents within the OPEC structure made sure that OPEC would continue to base oil prices on the dollar. Our rulers wanted to have a visible connection between oil prices and the value of the dollar for propaganda purposes. What OPEC will finally be forced to do, my friends, will be to abandon the dollar within the next six months and begin pricing oil in terms of a basket of foreign hard currencies. But for now, our rulers have forced OPEC into continuing to price oil in terms of shriveling dollars. So now, the predominantly Arab OPEC countries have been trapped into appearing to be the cause of the dollar's decline, inflation, and the coming depression here in America.

The third and final arm of the triple squeeze against OPEC involved the actual triggering of the price increase. Some way had to be found to under-cut the leverage and influence within OPEC of Saudi Arabia long enough to force a substantial price increase. This was accomplished by means of the recent rioting against the Shah of Iran accompanied by drastic cutbacks in Iran's oil production.

The recent trickery involving Iran has been very successful in fooling almost everyone; and yet, what has just been done is one of the oldest tricks there is. To illustrate that, let me take you back for a moment to the spring of 1962. At that time tremendous riots were taking place in Greece, they were being labeled as Communist-inspired in the press, and likewise secret CIA reports were saying that a virtual Communist take-over of Greece was well under way by means of these riots. Ex-President Harry Truman, though long out of office, was still very actively interested in the policies of the American government. Also, Truman had always worried about Greece due to its strategic position on NATO's southern flank. Through the Marshall Plan and other means he had done all he could to keep Greece strong and pro-Western. When President Truman read all the stories and CIA reports about Communist rioting in the streets of Athens, he became very worried. But Truman was always suspicious of the CIA, feeling that they were feeding him half truths. He considered Greece to be too important to depend on the probably slanted assessment by the CIA, and concluded that totally independent intelligence was needed on Greece. And so President Truman contacted his close personal friend, Robert Kennedy, who was then Attorney General. One of the things on which Truman and Kennedy saw eye to eye was their distrust of the CIA. Both were convinced that the CIA was actually serving a different master—and of course they were right. After conferring with Truman, Robert Kennedy contacted George Docking, the former Governor of Kansas, who had become a key Director of the United States Export-Import Bank. In turn, Docking contacted me and asked me to set up the Intelligence Mission to learn the true situation in Greece. At that time I was Legal Counsel to the Export-Import Bank, but my true function was very often the gathering and analysis of intelligence under the imposing cover of the Export-Import Bank. And while we were at it, President Truman wanted us to deliver a personal message to the Greek leaders. They were laying plans to erect a statue to Truman for his great help in keeping Greece in the Western camp after the war. He appreciated the thought, but he had made clear in rather salty language he did not want any statues.

As a cover for the Intelligence Mission to Greece, we concocted an Exim Bank (Export-Import Bank) Mission to Austria, Greece, Turkey, Lebanon, and Spain. The story was that we were

checking up on various projects where Exim Bank loans were involved. On April 18, 1962, the Exim Bank travel group, which included Governor Docking and myself, left Washington. After visiting all five countries, we finally arrived back here in Washington on May 1. The official report on the trip ended up at 46 typewritten pages. Tucked in, almost lost among all the words, was only one page about Greece. That single page contained only one statement of true significance, and it had nothing to do with the rioting which actually prompted the trip. This statement was: "Mr. Zelatas was particularly concerned about the steady decline in the gold reserves held by the United States." Mr. Zelatas was an official of the Central Bank of Greece, and his actual words were a lot more emphatic. He said to me that if he did not protect the gold reserves of Greece, "My people would hang me."

But the real information sought on the trip had been the matter of the Greek riots and their origin. That information was contained only in a secret report which I delivered personally to Robert Kennedy. What I had done in Greece had actually been very simple in spite of the elaborate cover we had to use for the Mission. I went out and mingled with the crowds of demonstrators. Posing as a business man from Lebanon, I asked what the rioting was all about; was it Communist inspired? The answers were all the same. "Nonsense" they said. "The government itself is putting out the story that it's Communist inspired. You see, that way America would give them more money than to Turkey." The information which I obtained in this way turned out to be much more accurate than that given Truman by the CIA. As we all know, Greece did not go Communist; and today few Americans even remember the Greek riots of 1962.

In the same way the riots in Iran have been orchestrated so as to create the image of a threat to accomplish a given purpose. That purpose was to provide an excuse for a drastic cutback in Iranian oil production that would help trigger an increase in OPEC oil prices. CIA-directed funds were channeled into support for the rioting in Iran, but this fact was camouflaged by CIA reports beforehand that foresaw no threat to the Shah. The famous November 11 memo of Jimmy Carter which criticized the CIA for failing to foresee the rioting in Iran was only part of the cover tactics to allay suspicion.

In the weeks before the OPEC oil meeting, the crisis atmosphere surrounding Iran was assisted by certain American multi-national corporations. They began evacuating personnel from Iran, and this was played up very big on television. We saw people flooding into airports at Athens, Tel Aviv, Rome, Paris—getting out in a hurry from Iran. At the same time remarks by Jimmy Carter added to fears that the Shah was doomed. On November 30 he said, "We do not have any intention of interfering in the internal affairs of Iran, and we do not approve any other nation interfering in the internal affairs of Iran." And in further statements on December 1, December 6, December 7, and December 12, Carter continued to contribute to the crisis in Iran by refusing to publicly back the Shah. Thus the United States appeared to be deserting him, and the crisis continued to build in Iran. Meanwhile the oil flow from Iran was cut to a trickle. The other members of OPEC were put under an enormous and expensive strain in an effort to take up the slack. For weeks before the OPEC meeting in Abu Dhabi, this was the situation. The result was to pull the rug out from under Saudi Arabia. On December 17, just nine days ago, an OPEC oil price increase of 14.5% was announced to occur in four stages during 1979. As planned, everyone was shocked at such a large increase, but the following day Sheik Yamani, Saudi Arabia's oil minister,

said on the BBC World Service, "With the situation in Iran, the price of crude went up sharply, and we were not able to argue so much inside OPEC against an increase like this." For now, the turbulence in Iran has served its immediate purpose of triggering a large OPEC oil price increase; but the pressure, my friends, will be kept on Iran to keep OPEC in line. The recent artificial turbulence in Iran has been a preview of things to come. We have now been provided with a careful demonstration of how vulnerable Iran could be, and how vital her oil supplies are to us and the world; and when the time is ripe, we will be reminded of these things for war propaganda purposes.

In Audioletter No. 37 four months ago I detailed the secret American first-strike strategy to initiate all-out nuclear war with Russia. Under the plan, the Camp David accords between Egypt and Israel are to be shattered in a way that will lead to the nuclear destruction of Saudi Arabia's oil fields. Already the 'Hate Saudi Arabia' campaign is building up in America's controlled major media. As for Sadat, he has placed his hopes on President Carter, but in Audioletter No. 38 I revealed that Carter had suddenly contracted leukemia and cancer in the left side of the head. I must now reveal that the cancer has begun spreading to other areas of his body. This is the truth behind the recent cover stories about his hemorrhoid problem; and on Saturday December 23, Carter secretly returned to Washington from his Christmas trip to Plains, Georgia. He was here for cobalt treatments at the Bethesda Naval Hospital. My friends, in Audioletter No. 38 I explained how Jimmy Carter's involuntary departure from the scene is intended to help ignite war in the Middle East. Now, those events are drawing closer by the day.

Topic #2—Nearly two months ago, in late October, Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko paid a three-day visit to France. On October 28 Gromyko held a press conference at the impressive new Soviet Embassy in Paris. Symbolically, the Embassy is located next door to the former headquarters of NATO, from which France withdrew years ago. In his press conference Gromyko said that his visit had "confirmed the privileged relations" between France and Russia; and he added: "I want to stress the word 'privileged'." My friends, what Gromyko was talking about was the unique position of trust that now exists between France and Russia. It all began long ago when General Charles De Gaulle, as President of France, began to see the handwriting on the wall. On one hand the United States was becoming increasingly devious and untrustworthy in its dealings with other countries. On the other hand, De Gaulle learned that something was taking place in the ruling circles of Russia, something that was gradually making Russia worthy of at least cautious cooperation. De Gaulle was determined that France should be strong and independent, so in a very cautious way he began to develop the relations between France and Russia as a counterbalance to the powerful influence of the United States. Gradually the process expanded to the mutual benefit of France and Russia. Meanwhile, American policies in both diplomacy and defense continued to deteriorate. As the United States became bogged down in the quagmire of Vietnam, it became obvious that we were not even fighting the war in a rational military fashion. The French, for their part, had learned their Indo-China lesson at Dien Bien Phu in 1954. For this and other reasons, De Gaulle concluded that the United States had become unreliable as a military partner. France, he decided, must go it alone, so in the 60's De Gaulle pulled France out of NATO. The NATO headquarters building in France was closed, and NATO moved its headquarters to Brussels, Belgium, where it remains today. In taking this action, De Gaulle repudiated American leadership in the defense of Europe. He also signaled a truly independent attitude in foreign policy and

defense. The door was open to increased dialogue and cooperation with Russia. Since that time the ties between France and Russia have grown steadily. There has been a historic affection between France and Russia that dates back to the time of the czars, and today it is being restored again through cooperation in all kinds of areas.

Nearly a year ago in Audioletter No. 32 I revealed the Franco-Russian intrigues in Canada. For the French, it is intended to lead to French domination of Canada; for Russia, it is expediting preparations for the invasion of the United States. But there are other areas of cooperation between France and Russia which are much more visible yet generally not recognized for what they are. For example, the French are contributing heavily to the instrumentation carried to Venus by the Russian Venera series of space probes. In the realm of military technology, France is participating with Russia in ongoing testing of charged particle beams in space. And last spring when France carried out neutron bomb tests in the Pacific, Russia raised not a word of protest. By contrast, the American neutron bomb is the target of intense Russian propaganda. Yet all of this does not mean that France has become a secret satellite of Russia; quite the contrary. France is continuing to pursue a foreign policy rooted in her own interests, and as a result French actions sometimes cause Russia great irritation. And Russia, for her part, is not above applying intense pressure on France whenever it is necessary. But even in areas where there is not agreement between France and Russia, there is an atmosphere of basic understanding. The situation was summarized in the article distributed by the Soviet Embassy in Paris before Gromyko arrived there in late October. It was titled: "MOSCOW-PARIS, AN AXIS OF DETENTE." It praised relations between France and Russia as a model of peaceful coexistence between states with different systems, and it noted that their differences "will continue to predetermine a certain non-coincidence in the positions of the USSR and France in foreign policy, but the things which unite them are more important."

My friends, the unique factor tending to unite France and Russia today is TRUST. Wherever there are specific commitments between the two, there is trust that neither side will double-cross the other. It is this atmosphere of trust that is missing between Russia's rulers of today and the rulers of America. As Gromyko said in a toast in France, "France practices a policy of detente without zigzags." By implication, he was saying that others, especially America, cannot be trusted. And so when Gromyko called the relations between France and Russia "privileged", he was talking about a matter of trust; and the benefits of that trust can hardly be overstated.

In Audioletter No. 36 last July, I mentioned southern France as one of the areas that should be spared in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. I can now reveal that Russia's campaign of nuclear sabotage has now been extended to Europe. It is by no means as extensive as that which has been carried out in America, which I first began to make public in Audioletter No. 23 for April 1977; but as of now, almost every country in both eastern and western Europe has now been mined with Russian cobalt bombs in key major cities. Russia's intention is to use these bombs as blackmail. She wants to force Western Europe to stay out of the coming war, and she wants to fend off the revolutions in Eastern Europe which the Roman Catholic Church, dominated increasingly by Bolsheviks, is trying to bring about. Of all the countries of Europe, only one has so far been completely spared of all sabotage by the Russians—that country is France. In all of the other countries

Bolshevik influence is great enough that Russia does not feel able to trust them completely; but where France is concerned, the element of trust is more powerful than nuclear weapons.

My friends, lack of trust is the real reason for America's coming catastrophe in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. There was a time when the United States of America was respected and honored for keeping its word with other countries, but that time has long gone. The atheistic Bolsheviks, who are seizing control of America, favor intrigue over honor and deception over truth. As the nationalist Chinese on Taiwan have just found out, years of solemn promises and guarantees by the United States no longer mean anything at all. The only way NUCLEAR WAR ONE could be prevented, my friends, would be for the Satanic Bolsheviks to be thrown out of their positions of power here in America. Russia today is controlled by Christians; and if America were once again controlled by Christians, trust could be established. But the Christian revolution which has been taking place in the ruling circles of Russia is not being repeated here in the United States. Instead, the atheistic Bolsheviks are using the guise of Christianity itself in order to attack Russia.

Four months ago in Audioletter No. 37 I revealed that Bolshevik influences within the Vatican were preparing to throw the Roman Catholic Church into the Bolshevik war against Russia. Two months later I explained how Pope John Paul I had run afoul of this game plan, and what had happened to him as a result. I also pointed out the tangible evidence which was available to prove my charges of deceit and fraud within the Vatican. And now, the real Pope John Paul II has also fallen by the wayside, contrary to appearances.

As I explained in Audioletter No. 39, Karol Cardinal Wojtyla of Poland was elected pope because the Bolsheviks wanted to make use of his anti-Communist image in their war against Russia; but as Pope John Paul II, he also had a flaw which the Bolsheviks could not tolerate. From the moment he became pope, Wojtyla made it clear that he intended to shake up the Vatican bureaucracy known as the CURIA. Initially, he did not re-confirm any top officials of the Curia. He merely asked Cardinal Villot of France to stay on as Secretary of State "until other decisions have been made." Through these actions and other statements, Pope John Paul II made it clear that he was planning to completely restructure the Curia. Any such restructuring, my friends, would have dealt a serious blow to Bolshevik power within the Vatican, for it is through the Curia that the Bolsheviks now exercise their Vatican control; and their key agent, Giovanni Cardinal Benelli, is one of those who would have been replaced in a Curia reshuffle. But the Bolsheviks had known that Cardinal Wojtyla, as pope, would try to change the Curia. As Archbishop of Krakow, he had often spoken in favor of such restructuring; so when he became pope, they were already preparing to make sure he did not carry out his plans. When Cardinal Wojtyla was named pope on October 16, 1978, it was only his anti-Communist image that the Bolsheviks wanted. Wojtyla himself was a strong-minded man, not the type that usually makes a good puppet; and so, even before his election, Wojtyla's unacknowledged replacement was being prepared.

For the first few weeks of Pope John Paul II's reign, he was kept busy with public appearances. On October 27 he began his shake-up of the Curia by firing a veteran Cardinal, Cardinal Felici, as President of an important Vatican council. But his heavy schedule of public activities tied his hands for moving rapidly on the promised reforms. Then in mid November the Pope virtually dropped out of sight for a time, but on November 21 the

Vatican released an announcement that was as brief as it was stunning. As of that date, Pope John Paul II was said to have confirmed in their posts all of the top Curia officials who had served the previous two popes, without explanation. We were told in effect that Pope John Paul II had undone his own plans for Vatican reform.

My friends, here is what actually happened. During the period in mid November when Pope John Paul II was seen very little, his poisoning was in process. Beginning November 18 this took the form of a very powerful air-borne poison based on plutonium and zirconium, a variant of the poison that produces Legionnaires' Disease. The Pope's condition deteriorated rapidly, and he died at approximately 4:00 P.M. Rome time on November 20, 1978. Shortly thereafter his body was secretly removed from the Vatican, being taken first to an interim location about 45 miles northwest of Rome. By 8:00 P.M. Rome time the following evening, November 21, his body had been cremated. It was earlier that same day that the Vatican issued the terse announcement saying the entire Curia had been re-confirmed by the Pope. Since that time an actor has been playing the part of Pope John Paul II. This man is neither Polish nor Christian. Those in Europe who have more opportunities than we in America to see the Pope should observe him closely. Pay close attention to the voice, the mannerisms, the closeness of the photography; compare the pictures of the dead Pope and this actor, and the exact nature of his public utterances. These days the 'actor Pope' is the most visible pope in history, made so by the controlled major media; and his pronouncements are moving the Roman Catholic Church closer and closer to open confrontation against Russia.

My friends, in Audioletter No. 39 I explained how the Satanic fraud surrounding the death of Pope John Paul I could be proven. Now the fraud has taken the life of another Pope, and 700,000,000 Catholics are gradually being called to arms in the cause of Bolshevik warfare against reviving Christianity in Russia!

Topic #3—Last month I devoted Audioletter No. 40 to a detailed explanation of the gruesome events which had just taken place in the Republic of Guyana. As I explained then, the Jonestown tragedy was a mass murder, not a mass suicide. It was staged in order to provide access to Guyana for a military operation—a commando raid to wipe out a secret Russian missile base. The base was the same one about which I had begun warning over four years ago in the summer of 1974. It was basically an American operation, but with heavy participation by the Israelis because of their unparalleled experience in such operations. And when I recorded Audioletter No. 40 last month, I was able to report that Jim Jones had not died at Jonestown but had escaped. The body identified by the FBI as that of Jones was that of a look-alike, a double. Jim Jones had followed an elaborate escape route which ended up in Israel on November 30, the same day I recorded Audioletter No. 40. Jim Jones was alive, my friends, but he was not well. It is time now to finish the nightmare story of Jim Jones .

When Jones arrived in Israel he was suffering from cancer—in his head, in his left lung, in his stomach, and in his colon. After an intelligence debriefing near Jerusalem, he began receiving cobalt treatments for the cancer in his head. The treatments began on December 4, but they did not last long. The following day Jones was told that it would be necessary to transfer him to another location where more comprehensive treatment could be given for his advanced cancer. So shortly after 5:00 P.M. Israeli time, Jones boarded a small airplane with a doctor and three other men. The plane headed northwest toward

Turkey, and then inland along the border between Turkey and Syria. At about 35 miles east of the town of Jerablus on the Euphrates River, the plane crossed briefly to the Syrian side of the border. At that point the door of the plane was thrown open and three men grabbed Jones. In his weak condition and caught by surprise, he was thrown out of the plane with almost no struggle.

Meanwhile Dr. Lawrence Schacht was making his way to Israel, unaware of the fate that had befallen Jones. Unlike Jones, Schacht had been an Israeli agent from the beginning, and now he was returning home; but just as with Jones, the FBI has been used to give false reports that Schacht died at Jonestown. It was Schacht who prepared the cyanide poison mixtures which were administered, some orally, some by injection, to the Jonestown victims. The cover stories about Schacht in the controlled major media of the United States have generally given him an idealistic image, but a Jonestown survivor who worked with Schacht in the Jonestown Medical Department paints a far different picture. She has been quoted as saying: "He was a sadist, he liked to see people in pain. He didn't do anything to relieve pain." On the day when Jim Jones was thrown out of an airplane over Syria, Dr. Schacht was making his way to Paramaribo, the capital of Surinam. Just before noon Washington time December 9, he left Paramaribo by jet across the Atlantic, taking with him a large amount of gold. His route took him to Conakry, Guinea; Bamako, Mali; and across the corner of Egypt near Wadi Haifa, Sudan, on the way to the Red Sea. At approximately 3:00 A.M. Israeli time December 11, Dr. Schacht arrived at Jerusalem. Dr. Schacht was afflicted with cancer in his head and throat; and, like Jones, had been promised the best in treatment for it upon arrival in Israel. But Schacht was given only a brief examination near Jerusalem and then told that he would have to be moved to another location for better treatment. There was no need for a long debriefing of Schacht, since Jones had already told everything there was to tell; and so barely an hour after his arrival in Jerusalem, Schacht was in the air again in a small plane with four other men. Three and a half hours later Dr. Lawrence Schacht met his end, as Jones had done six days earlier—falling from the skies to a lonely spot along the Turkish-Syrian border.

My friends, it's hard for most of us even to imagine such diabolical and cold-blooded activities as these; but sadism and disregard for human life were the hallmarks of the Jonestown mass murder, and in the end those who sell their souls and their country for gold always pay the price!

As I mentioned last month, Operation Guyana was successful in wiping out the Russian missile base there, yet this will have very little impact now on Russia's ability to pulverize America in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. What it did accomplish was to buy a little time for our rulers for the coming war and to help throw the Russians off balance. Our rulers are also now trying to buy more time to put off NUCLEAR WAR ONE by a few months by establishing full diplomatic relations with Red China. In their feverish attempts to re-arm the United States in preparation for war, they are willing to do almost anything that will buy a little more time. Crash military programs are secretly under way, but even crash programs take time to bear fruit. The ruling circles in Red China are well aware that our own rulers cannot do without Red China as an ally against Russia, and so three months ago on September 19 they applied pressure tactics to force full recognition by the United States. On that date, as I revealed that month in Audioletter No. 38, a secret agreement in principle for a secret alliance was signed between Russia and China. But the Chinese leadership is far from united, unlike that of Russia; and while the Hua faction wants to side with Russia, the rival

faction headed by Deng Hsiao-ping wants to go with America for a while. China can dictate tremendous concessions by the United States—but can dictate nothing to Russia. And so the ink was hardly dry on the Sino-Russian agreement of September 19 when it was used to panic our own rulers. As September 19 followed the sun around the world from China to America, news of the Sino-Russian secret agreement was flashed to Chinese agents here in America by the Deng faction. That same day, September 19, our rulers were confronted with the reality of this agreement and they were told that it could be undone only if two things took place. First, the Deng faction must be assisted in overcoming the faction headed by Chairman Hua; then, to consolidate Deng's power and China's allegiance to the United States, full diplomatic relations must be granted between America and Red China on China's terms.

The major media, while they have not explained all this, have drawn attention to September 19 as the critical day. For example, an article in the Washington Star on December 16 said: "In the fall the talks entered a new phase. On September 19 the Chinese consul in the United States visited Carter in the White House, conferring with him in the Oval Office." The next day the Washington Post said near the end of a long article about the China decision: "By this account, the crucial United States decision was taken September 19, two days after the euphoric end of the Egypt-Israeli summit meeting with Carter at Camp David." Soon the great wall poster battle erupted in Peking. Deng was making a bid to upset the power of Chairman Hua, and he succeeded; and as the war of words died out, Washington prepared feverishly to announce full diplomatic relations with China. That announcement on December 15 was the third major surprise handed to Russia by our rulers in less than a year. The first was the Korean air liner intelligence mission into northern Russia last April; the second was the Battle of Guyana last month, wiping out the secret Russian missile base there; and now Red China. But one has to ask: Where is all this really leading?

On December 15, the day of the Red China announcement, there were only six Russian Cosmospheres on patrol over Red China; but less than two days later, 105 Cosmospheres have taken up their positions there. All Cosmospheres are equipped among other things with exotic lighting equipment for nighttime psychological warfare. The Chinese, robbed of all religion by their godless regime, are prime targets for such tactics. Who is to say how millions of Chinese might react if 100-plus Cosmospheres began haunting the night skies of China, flashing and hovering at low altitudes? In any case, our rulers cannot hope to do more than buy time with China. To achieve that, they are even willing to bleed off some of America's productive capacity in building up China. With whatever time that will buy, they hope to improve their readiness for war by concentrating on secret weapons.

The surprises dealt to Russia during the past year do prove that Russian intelligence, while it is very good, is not perfect. They can be surprised. This fact is not lost on the Kremlin either, and they are preparing some surprises of their own. I mentioned last month that geophysical warfare is high on the list of probable techniques to be used by Russia in retaliation for Guyana, but I can now reveal that the Russian Navy has removed the seven gigaton-range super bombs which had been planted around the Philippines when I recorded Audioletter No. 24. The Philippines, the only Christian nation in Asia, has now come to terms with Russia. This is true even though the United States may continue to use the huge Clark Air Force Base and the Subic Bay Naval Base there.

With the new Russian cosmo-strategic weaponry, these bases are no longer so important. Instead, the Russians are reinforcing their network of cobalt bombs along America's west coast itself. As of my latest report on December 20, there are now 46 bombs planted where they could devastate southern California. Along the California coast eight (8) are above the 36th parallel of latitude, four (4) above the 35th parallel, twelve (12) above the 34th parallel, and ten (10) above the 33rd parallel. There are nine (9) more between the 33rd parallel in California and the north end of the Gulf of California which contains three (3) more bombs above the 31st parallel. Some of these bombs are at sea, the others are generally underground in caves and mine shafts where they can help to trigger a massive earthquake. It remains to be seen how soon these capabilities will be used; but one thing seems clear, the United States has now had three strikes against Russia—the Korean air liner incident, Operation Guyana, and now Red China. Any hope for trust on the part of Russia is gone; and now, it is Russia's turn at bat.

On the evening of December 17, just over a week ago, the CBS television program "60 Minutes" devoted its lead story to the particle beam-weapons race. The program pointed out the potentially decisive importance of particle beams, and the fact that Russia is far ahead in this field. Within minutes my telephone began ringing. Fifteen months ago when I first revealed Russia's operational status in particle beam-weapons, they were being ridiculed, so at that time many people paid little attention to what I revealed; but now, callers were saying: "Do you see what's on television? You were right!"

My friends, I warned long ago about the false wisdom called "Wait and see." Now those who have chosen that course have waited; and now they are beginning to see. If we keep waiting, my friends, we will get to see it all—and we will all believe on the day that television programs are interrupted by a surprise announcement that NUCLEAR WAR ONE HAS COME!

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #42

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is Jan. 31, 1979, and this is my Audio Letter No. 42. Eight days ago Jimmy Carter delivered what is sure to be his only "State of the Union" message to Congress and the Nation, and in some ways his speech truly reflected the desperate state of our Union. In a feeble effort to call forth echoes of John F. Kennedy and F.D.R., Carter spoke of a "new foundation" as the theme of his wandering Administration. This phrase, taken from the old Bolshevik anthem, "The Communist Internationale", is a fitting title for a government that is now far gone in a quiet Bolshevik revolution. Last June he said Russia must choose between "confrontation and cooperation"; but, since then, America's military plight has gotten steadily worse. And in his "State of the Union" speech, Carter said "...it is a myth that we must choose between confrontation and capitulation"; and, just for good measure, he repeated the same lie his Administration has been giving out now for sixteen months ever since the Battle of the Harvest Moon, and that is: "...nearly all issues of SALT II have been resolved." And while he was at it, Carter also said, "I am grateful that in the past year—as in the year before—no

American has died in combat anywhere in the world." Yet only two months ago, the Jonestown mass murder and the Battle of Guyana took place to wipe out the secret Russian missile base there, and there were American soldiers who did die there—their coffins are still at Dover, Delaware, unclaimed.

As he spoke, Carter was heavily medicated for pain, his cancer still getting worse despite frequent cobalt treatments for his so-called hemorrhoid problem. Meanwhile, the cancer in his head which I first reported four months ago in Audio Letter No. 38, is not being treated and is growing rapidly. It now engulfs an area about 3-1/2 by 4 inches inside his left temple and around the left eye. By March the effects should be publicly visible in his unusual behavior. Soon the 25th Amendment to the United States Constitution will come into play again when Carter dies, resigns, or is removed for incapacity. But the man who had hoped to benefit again from his own 25th Amendment, Nelson Rockefeller, has just passed from the scene forever.

My three topics this month are: Topic #1—THE DECLINE OF THE HOUSE OF ROCKEFELLER Topic #2—THE BOLSHEVIK PLOT FOR A POPE'S REVOLUTION Topic #3—UFOs, IFOs, AND RUSSIA'S MASTER SECRET WEAPON.

Topic #1—As war clouds were gathering over Europe and Asia in the 1930's, four men in America were gathering the reins of world-wide power. These men were the third generation heirs to the most powerful dynasty the world has ever known, THE ROCKEFELLER DYNASTY. They were the four Rockefeller brothers—John D. Ill, Nelson, Laurance, and David. There was also another brother, Winthrop, as well as a sister Abby; but Winthrop cared little about world power and intrigue, and so long ago he was cast aside by the other four brothers. Winthrop went his own way, and eventually spent two terms as Governor of Arkansas before dying in 1973. Meanwhile the other four brothers were taking the very fate of Western civilization into their very own hands. As I have detailed on many past occasions, they played key roles in bringing on World War II and using it to expand their empire. In speeches during the war their father, John D. Rockefeller, Jr., described the carnage as a great crusade. In glowing terms he painted it all as well worth the suffering, death, and tragedy for millions upon millions. The Rockefellers believe in the old Chinese proverb that "Opportunities arise out of crises"; but as I reminded you last month, World War II was really fought over oil, and as a wise old friend of mine once said: "Oil is thicker than blood so long as it is the other fellow's blood."

As the moans of World War II slowly died away, the four brothers surveyed the vistas of world domination that seemingly lay before them. World War II had shattered their most important rival in oil and world power, the British Empire. At the same time, the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance had emerged stronger than ever—an indispensable key to their future plans; and best of all, the oil treasure house of Saudi Arabia now lay firmly in the Rockefeller grasp. Using their unprecedented profits from Saudi Arabian oil, the Rockefeller cartel was soon to outstrip all financial rivals world-wide. For three decades following World War II, the world-wide power of the Rockefeller cartel expanded without letup under the hands of the four brothers. Politically, economically, and militarily they appeared to have the Midas touch. Their plans—unknown and unsuspected by the general public—usually went off without a hitch, and right on schedule. Through deliberate no-win wars and fabricated American setbacks in foreign relations, the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance made steady progress toward their joint take-over of the

entire world. At the same time, beginning in 1961, the Brothers set in motion their Machiavellian two-pronged strategy for an eventual wartime double-cross of their Soviet allies. In this way, the Brothers were planning to finally pick up all the marbles for themselves. Their goal was nothing less than to rule all of the Planet Earth through a One-World Government.

With the dawn of the 1970s, the four Rockefeller brothers were embarking on the final decade of their plan to seize control of the world. They were determined that the goal be reached within their own lifetimes. Secret joint plans with their Soviet allies were right on track for a carefully programmed thermonuclear war in the late 1970s. The war, NUCLEAR WAR ONE, was being programmed to involve the United States as the prime battleground; so to get ready for the war, the Brothers were rapidly transferring as much of America's real wealth, including our gold and our technological know-how, into their own coffers overseas. America was being turned into a hollow shell—impressive on the surface but ripe for a shocking defeat by the Soviet Union. And yet, in a secret final twist, America's Moon Program was setting the military stage for Russia's destruction as the climax of the coming war. There appeared to be nothing to stop the four brothers; but then, within the past several years, things began to go wrong. They began making mistakes, and slowly but surely events began slipping loose from their former iron grip. Three and one-half years ago in Audio Letter No. 2 I pointed out some of the early symptoms of this slippage in Rockefeller control. Barely a year later in the summer of 1976, their carefully drawn plans began to be torn apart. Suddenly the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance of nearly 60 years was being terminated unilaterally by the Kremlin. The still secret underwater missile crisis of 1976 was under way, as I reported in Audio Letters Nos. 14 through 16. As my older listeners know, this crisis led to my meeting for more than an hour with the late General George S. Brown, then Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. The meeting took place on September 16, 1976, in General Brown's office at the Pentagon. In Audio Letter No. 16 I reported that meeting to my listeners. Thanks to the brave leadership of General Brown, the United States had been spared a surprise nuclear attack, and now there was a golden opportunity to completely stop America's march toward nuclear war. But the four brothers simply could not believe that their secret alliance with their Bolshevik allies in the Kremlin was gone for good. In the autumn of 1976 they did not yet understand that the Bolsheviks themselves had lost control of the Kremlin—that would not become clear for another year. And so they began trying desperately to appease the Kremlin in an effort to restore the alliance. An early victim of this insane effort was none other than General Brown. Within weeks of my meeting with him, he was cut down by the controlled major media and passed rapidly into obscurity. In Audio Letter No. 23 I detailed just how much General Brown had sacrificed for his loyal service to America. And for those who have heard what I warned about then, I can only point out that General Brown did not actively serve out his term as Chairman of the Joint Chiefs—nor did he live long.

Then came the worst miscalculation by the four Rockefeller brothers and their intimates—it led to disaster in space in September 1977. As I described that month in Audio Letter No. 26, the Russians succeeded in wiping out the Rockefeller ace in the hole for the coming nuclear war. In the Battle of the Harvest Moon, September 27, 1977, the crew of the secret American beam-weapons base in Copernicus Crater were killed by a Russian neutron particle beam-weapon. It was fired at the moon from earth orbit by Cosmos 954, a manned Cosmos Interceptor Killer

Satellite. Four months later, Cosmos 954 made an emergency landing in northern Canada. It was described in the news as a nuclear satellite crash.

The Battle of the Harvest Moon was only the beginning of a complete revolution in the military equation between Russia and America, because during the final months of 1977, Russia began deploying all three legs of her still secret space triad of military weapons. The first leg of the space triad are the manned Cosmos Interceptors—that is, Killer Satellites. During the six months following the Battle of the Harvest Moon they began methodically destroying America's fleet of spy satellites over Russia. That led in April 1978 to the Korean airliner intelligence mission over northern Russia, as I detailed in Audio Letter No. 33.

Immediately after the Battle of the Harvest Moon, the Russian manned space program suddenly sprang to life. Suddenly the Russians began launching one batch of cosmonauts after another into orbit, setting new records and accomplishing new feats of all kinds. Meanwhile, without publicity, Russia's first manned landing on the moon took place. The landing was made on October 16, 1977 on the back side in Jules Verne Crater; and by late the following month, as I reported in Audio Letter No. 28, Russian charged particle beam-weapons were already operational on the near side of the moon. These Russian moon bases can blast any visible spot on earth in less than two (2) seconds, and they constitute the second leg of the Russian space triad.

On December 2, 1977, the third leg of Russia's space triad announced its presence to our surprised leaders. On that day tremendous air quakes—loud blasts in the atmosphere—began rolling in from the sea along America's east coast. In Audio Letter No. 29 I described the amazing Russian Hovering Platforms responsible for these blasts. Like the other two legs of the Russian space triad, these Hovering Platforms—called Cosmospheres by the Russians—are armed with charged particle beam-weapons. All of these secret weapons were unleashed operationally with blinding speed by Russia just over a year ago. They ruined the original Rockefeller plan for a carefully programmed NUCLEAR WAR ONE to end with the surprise destruction of Russia, and they drastically altered the military balance between East and West.

As a result, the leadership of the four Rockefeller brothers in their world-wide power structure began to be seriously challenged over a year ago. They had made mistakes and their judgment was no longer accepted so easily by their most powerful associates and allies. At the same time, something had to be done, and quickly, to respond to the altered situation. For these and other reasons, Rockefeller power has increasingly been turning toward support for a sophisticated new Bolshevik revolution here in America. This began more than a year ago. In February 1978 I reported that Rockefeller doors world-wide were about to be thrown open to Red China in the fight against Russia. Today we hear all about America playing the so-called "China card"; but, as I told you six months ago, China is actually playing the America card. China's goal is a restored alliance with Russia on the best possible terms, later on.

More than a year ago the four Rockefeller brothers began using these and other stopgap measures trying to save their dynasty from utter ruin; but they have been trying to swim against the current of history. Last June I pointed out the historical fact that all true dynasties have a natural life span of approximately 100 years. By that standard the end of the Rockefeller dynasty

is inevitably at hand. The very next month, July 1978, the lights began going out in the House of Rockefeller. The oldest of the four brothers, John D. Ill, met his fate allegedly in an automobile accident—and a bizarre accident to say the least—near his estate in Pocantico Hills, New York. That month I reviewed the true legacy of John D. Rockefeller III. Now, hardly six months later, the second oldest of the four brothers has abruptly left the scene. The true legacy of Nelson Rockefeller remains as I reviewed it more than 3-1/2 years ago in Audio Letter No. 1; but just five days ago, on the evening of January 26, 1979, he died.

My friends, in life Nelson Rockefeller craved publicity, yet his death is shrouded in obscurity and unanswered questions. Normally it is customary for the body of an important public personality, such as a Senator or Vice-President, to lie in state so that the public can pay their last respects. This service was offered to Nelson Rockefeller's family here in Washington by the U.S. Senate leaders, and was rejected—so there was no lying in state, no formal viewing at all. Instead, he was accorded a hasty cremation, an unusual step in the case of the Rockefellers, and a strictly private memorial service. Originally it was announced by Rockefeller aides that the cremation would take place Monday morning, January 29, the day before yesterday. This was to be followed by the memorial service at 11:00 A.M. Meanwhile, reports about the circumstances of Rockefeller's death have been contradictory and strange, raising one question after another. In response, Rockefeller spokesmen have kept changing their story from one day to the next; and as the questions multiplied, the cremation was hurried up. It was performed a day ahead of time, on Sunday morning. Later that day, a family spokesman announced the cremation to reporters, but he at first refused to identify the crematorium that was used and gave no explanation for the rush involved. There had been no change in the plans for the memorial service, which was still scheduled for the next day.

My friends, the strange circumstances surrounding the death of Nelson Rockefeller are not just a morbid puzzle—they have to do with the fate of the United States and of Western civilization! He was one of the most powerful men on earth and, by his own choice, a public figure. Like the mass deaths in Guyana two months ago, Nelson Rockefeller's death will affect your life and mine. Just as happened with Guyana, a smoke screen of maneuvers, changing stories, and confusion are being used to hide the truth about his death; but just as with Guyana, I believe you have a right to know the truth.

At first the mass media chanted in unison that Rockefeller died of a heart attack while working at his desk on the 56th floor of Rockefeller Center. The time of death was said to be 10:15 P.M., Friday evening January 26, 1979. By the next day, however, a conflicting story emerged. It was said that he had died not at Rockefeller Center but at a town house located at 13 West 54th Street. According to the New York Times for Sunday January 28, "Neighbors and passersby reported that when the ambulance arrived a woman in an evening dress emerged from 13 West 54th Street and accompanied the attendants as they carried Mr. Rockefeller to the vehicle." By Saturday afternoon the official story changed to the town house address. The Washington Post said on Sunday January 28, "Rockefeller collapsed in his first-floor office in a town house at 13 West 54th Street at about 10:15 P.M. Friday, and apparently died instantly, family spokesman Hugh Morrow reported. It was initially reported by Morrow that Rockefeller had suffered his heart attack in his 56th floor office at 30 Rockefeller Plaza." The Post then quotes

Morrow as saying, "Actually the death occurred in Mr. Rockefeller's private office. The error was entirely mine."

But now there were new questions. People wondered: Who was the mystery woman in the evening dress? Family spokesman Morrow said he did not know of any woman being present at the time of Rockefeller's death, according to the Sunday New York Times; instead, he said that the emergency number 911 had been called "by an unidentified woman neighbor." Reportedly the only call for an ambulance was made by means of the 911 emergency number, and even more serious questions boiled up in this connection. For one thing, this number is for use by the general public in police and fire emergencies; and as New Yorkers know, it is rarely answered promptly—and yet there has been no report of so much as a call for a private ambulance. And still spokesman Morrow said by Saturday afternoon that a body guard and a chauffeur had been with Rockefeller at the time of death.

Even worse was the question of the delay before the call was placed. Rockefeller spokesmen kept saying that Rockefeller had died at 10:15 P.M., even after they changed their story about where he died, but Police records showed that the 911 call was not placed until over an hour later, at 11:16 P.M. During the missing hour, Rockefeller aides worked feverishly, making arrangements to prevent any autopsy from taking place. By the next day, Sunday January 28, Rockefeller spokesman Morrow delivered his third version of the story to the press. According to the New York Times for the following day, he said, "that the death actually had occurred at about 11:15 P.M., and that the two people present when Mr. Rockefeller was stricken at the town house were Andrew Hoffman, a security aide, and Megan Ruth Marshack, a 31-year old staff assistant on Mr. Rockefeller's recent art projects. Miss Marshack, who resides a few doors away at 25 W. 54th Street, placed the call to police within a minute after Mr. Rockefeller was stricken, Mr. Morrow said yesterday. On Saturday Mr. Morrow had said he did not know of any woman being present." Even the age of 31 given for Miss Marshack by Morrow later turned out to be wrong; but with this newly revised story another Rockefeller spokesman said Sunday, according to the New York Times the next day that "There was no discrepancy in the hour, it was simply a case of people under pressure making a mistake." And also according to the New York Times, Spokesman Morrow also told reporters that Miss Marshack arrived at the town house for work around 9:00 P.M. Friday evening "wearing a long black evening gown."

But most important of all is the question of the cause of death; and by the time spokesman Morrow gave his third version of events to reporters on Sunday January 28, the rush, rush cremation of Nelson Rockefeller had already taken place. The chance that an autopsy might allow the truth to leak out had been eliminated. Here, too, confusion reigned supreme in the public announcements. For example, the New York Daily News for Sunday January 28 reported that it had learned from a member of the family, "that Rockefeller had been complaining of chest pains for the last week or so, but no one, it was reported, thought the pains were significant and little attention was paid to them." Yet elsewhere in the flood of Rockefeller items in the same newspaper there are the words of Dr. Kenneth Ryland, Rockefeller's personal physician for forty years. He is quoted as saying, "I examined him last Wednesday, and he was in excellent shape. I was shocked, completely shocked."

As in the case of the strange death of Nelson's brother John D. Ill last July in an alleged automobile accident, we may never know the full details about Nelson Rockefeller's death. Even now

the young female aide who was with John D. Ill at the time of his sudden death, is still in seclusion. She is in a hospital in Westchester County, New York, under heavy guard; and now Rockefeller spokesmen are trying to hide the truth about Nelson's death. As a result, their statements reported in the press media are a study in confusion.

But, my friends, there was no confusion about what was to take place late that Friday evening, January 26, 1979. As is always done in intelligence circles, the psychological profile of Nelson Rockefeller had been studied. It would show that it was often his custom after dinner with his family on Fridays to leave to go to his private five-story town house at 13 West 54th Street for whatever purpose. It would also show that on these occasions his regular large contingent of armed guards would be off duty. On that Friday evening he made his usual trip to the town house. There he became preoccupied with doing what he had gone there to do. The moment came when his guard was completely down, and at that precise moment a shot was fired. The bullet tore into Rockefeller's head with professional accuracy. After the shooting, his 25-year old female aide apparently collapsed in a semi-state of shock. At last report she is said by Rockefeller spokesmen to be in seclusion and unavailable for comment.

As I say these words, the Rockefeller cover-up efforts are continuing, but new questions and glaring inconsistencies keep arising. For example, Rockefeller spokesman Hugh Morrow said for nearly two days that he did not know of any woman being present when Rockefeller died; but just yesterday the New York Times said that, "The Associated Press yesterday reported that at 4:00 A.M. Saturday, less than five hours after Mr. Rockefeller died, one of its reporters, recalling that Miss Marshack had worked as a radio AP news reporter in Washington before being hired by Mr. Rockefeller, had called her seeking a radio report on his death. She declined to make the radio tape, the Associated Press said, but told the reporter that Mr. Morrow was with her in her apartment and might speak to him later." When asked about this by the Associated Press, Morrow reportedly replied that "Whatever Megan said at 4:00 A.M., I'm not going to comment on it. I've been through this thing over and over again, and I'm tired of it. "

The two remaining brothers, Laurance and David, believe they cannot afford to let the truth be generally known about Nelson's death. It would raise too many questions at this critical time. The greatest protection for their power has always been the false halo of philanthropy. That tranquil image would be shaken to its foundations by public knowledge that Nelson Rockefeller was murdered. And so because of the ugly head wound, his body was cremated with dispatch and his death attributed publicly to a heart attack.

The once mighty four-man unit comprised by the four Rockefeller brothers is now very badly crippled. David and Laurance will need desperately to have someone join their inner family circle as a replacement for Nelson Rockefeller; and as it happens, the man most likely to don Nelson's cloak of power is already conveniently at hand. In fact, he was with Rockefeller only hours before his death. He is the man most responsible for America's disastrous intelligence gap, as I discussed at the Pentagon over two years ago with the late General George S. Brown. Several years ago a former CIA officer described this man to me as "a little Hitler waiting in the wings"; and now after 25 years as Nelson Rockefeller's political protege, he now has a chance to become a member of the inner family circle of the Rockefeller family—and if he does, which is likely, he will be

the man who will have gained the most from the murder of Nelson Rockefeller. His name: HENRY KISSINGER.

Topic #2—Here in the United States the death of Nelson Rockefeller stole some of the headlines from another major event, which is drawing to a close. On Friday afternoon, January 26, just a few hours before Rockefeller was killed, the man who parades as Pope John Paul II arrived in Mexico. Today, after five tumultuous days there, he is returning to Rome.

It was five months ago in Audio Letter No. 37 that I first alerted my listeners to the drastic changes that were afoot in the Roman Catholic Church. Pope John Paul I had been elected just the previous day; but as I explained then, Bolshevik influences within the Vatican were preparing to throw the Church into their fight against Russia, which has wrestled free of Bolshevik control, and Pope John Paul I, soon known as the smiling pope, vanished from the scene barely a month later. In Audio Letter No. 39 I explained how he had run afoul of the Bolshevik game plan, and what had happened to him as a result. And last month I revealed that his successor, the real Pope John Paul II, has also been eliminated. In his place there is now an actor, a man who is neither Polish nor Christian, who is doing the bidding of his Bolshevik masters. He bears a close resemblance to the man he replaced, but there are visual clues to look for. Close-up photographs of this actor should be compared carefully with those taken in October 1978 immediately after Cardinal Wojtyla was named Pope. As identification experts know, a person's ears are almost like fingerprints in their uniqueness, and you will discover that the ears along with other detailed features are not the same now as they were at first.

Since making public the tragic destruction from within that is taking place in the Catholic Church, I have received heartbreaking letters from Catholic priests everywhere. They have confided in me about their torment because of the Bolshevik control, which is spreading like cancer throughout the Catholic Church. From my own past experience, I share their deep sadness. To report the machinations of Bolshevism in the Church is painful for me; but, my friends, the central and dominant issue facing men of good will today is that of the Satanic forces rampant on Planet Earth. In this vein, some Catholic priests have revealed their fear to me that to remain in their priestly positions would jeopardize their faith itself.

Last month I pointed out how important publicity is for the actor pope in the anti-Russian game plan of the Bolsheviks. Describing this game plan, I said: "These days the actor pope is the most visible pope in history, made so by the controlled major media"; and early this month, on January 6, the New York Times echoed this very theme in an article titled "JOHN PAUL'S WINNING WAYS." The second sentence read: "He has become the most highly visible pope in modern history, sallying forth from the remoteness of the Vatican every few days and charming the crowds, from school children to old people and from nuns to soccer players." Ironically the same article adds later on that: "He plays to different crowds with the skills of the former actor that he is."

My friends, the actor pope is being used as a Pied Piper. Strictly as a tactic, he is singing a tune of progressive conservatism that is music to the ears to untold millions of Catholics, yet his two major themes, "Religious Freedom" and "Human Rights", are actually centered on Man, not God. With this clever counterfeit of the real message of Jesus Christ, deadly politics is being disguised as religion; and the Catholic world,

entranced by the tune of the actor pope, is already being led down the path toward the Bolshevik slaughterhouse of WAR against Russia.

It was 14 months ago, in Audio Letter No. 28, that I was first able to reveal the revolutionary change that has taken place in the Kremlin. The atheistic Bolsheviks, who all but destroyed Christian Russia 60 years ago, have been overthrown after a struggle of six decades. In their place are the self-styled "Spiritual Communists", an old and extremely tough Christian sect of native Russians; and as I revealed in Audio Letter No. 36, these new rulers of the Kremlin are actually in a process of discarding Communism in everything but name. Instead, their basic political viewpoint today is that of a strong Russian nationalism, as I discussed in Audio Letter No. 28; so, in a descriptive sense, they would be more accurately called Spiritual Nationalists.

The overthrown atheistic Bolsheviks are in a frenzy to cut down Christian Russia again before the last vestiges of Bolshevik influence can be expelled. They know that their time is short if Russia's holy war to wipe out Bolshevism is successful. The Bolsheviks know that the heart of Russia is spiritual, and so they are trying to rip out the heart of Russia by means of a spiritual attack. Already the actor pope is working feverishly on overtures to the Eastern Orthodox Churches hoping to reunite them with the Roman Church after 15 centuries of separation; and the real target in all of this is the Russian Orthodox Church. Before the Bolshevik Revolution of 1917, the Russian Orthodox Church was infiltrated by the Bolsheviks. Today Bolshevik influence is fast being weeded out in Russia; but if the plans of the Bolsheviks in the Vatican succeed, it will be restored as a weapon against Russia. All of this is tied to the secret American first-strike strategy, which I exposed in detail in Audio Letter No. 37; and the just-ended visit to Mexico by the actor pope is part of an elaborate strategy to throw eastern Europe into bloody revolution against Russia.

On January 24, just hours before the actor pope left for Santo Domingo and Mexico, Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko had a two-hour audience with him. Vatican officials said they could not recall such a long, intensive audience between a pope and a statesman. No statement was issued about what was discussed, but I can reveal that the actor pope pretended to show his concern for Catholics in Russia. Gromyko, however, argued in effect that the Pope not rock the boat in eastern Europe, saying that the moves under way by the Church will destroy Christianity, not help it. Then the actor pope left for Latin America. At his elbow throughout the trip was Giovanni Cardinal Benelli, a close friend of Henry Kissinger. As I revealed last month, Benelli is the key Bolshevik agent in the Vatican, and he went along to write the script for the actor pope to follow.

The papal trip to Mexico was a tremendous publicity stunt and a prelude to the confrontation with Russia. The heavy news coverage surrounding the trip served to build a much broader public awareness of the actor pope's image as an anti-Communist. At the same time the visit to Mexico was a preview of the Pope's scheduled trip to Poland next May; and, as such, it was well calculated to send nervous shivers up the spines of government officials in Warsaw and Moscow. In Mexico, as in Poland, the government does not officially condone the Catholic Church; instead, for historical reasons, the Mexican Constitution imposes stringent limitations on church activity and power. Yet in Mexico, just as in Poland, the population is about 90% Catholic; and so when the Pope decided to go to Mexico, the Mexican

government had no practical choice but to allow him to come. Furthermore, Mexican law forbids churchmen to preach in public or even to wear a clerical garb in public; but these restrictions were clearly unenforceable for the Pope. To limit his visibility that way would have invited riots and mayhem, and the government knew it.

For Mexico, the only practical thing to do was to wink at the law and give the Pope free rein during his visit; but for Poland, the situation is not so simple. The public intention of the actor pope is to visit Poland for the 900th anniversary of the martyrdom of Saint Stanislaus. To most Americans, having little idea who Saint Stanislaus was, this probably sounds remote, irrelevant, and therefore somewhat tame; but to the Poles, the symbolism and emotional tensions involved are enormous.

The actor pope is the look-alike of the late Karol Cardinal Wojtyla of Poland. Before becoming Pope last October, Wojtyla was the Archbishop of Krakow. Nine hundred years ago, Saint Stanislaus was also the Archbishop of Krakow. Wojtyla was widely known among Polish Catholics as a man who stood up to the government even back in the brutal days of Stalinism; and 900 years ago Saint Stanislaus repeatedly spoke out in defiance of the king. He even excommunicated the king for cruelty to his subjects. Nine hundred years ago this May Saint Stanislaus was sought out by the king and killed for his defiance; and this May, the actor pope is scheduled to appear in Krakow to climax observances on the date of the anniversary of the martyrdom.

Since this past September, the Vatican has been engaging in tactics designed to steadily build up tensions in Poland; and since Christmas Day the rise in tensions have been focused around Saint Stanislaus Day, because in messages to Polish churches just before Christmas, the actor pope urged that the Saint Stanislaus observances begin Christmas Day and continue until May. The Warsaw government is trying to figure out how to keep the lid on in the face of the feverish tensions that will apparently exist by May; but the final key to the Bolshevik plan is a stratagem, which even the actor pope himself does not suspect. If all goes according to plan, he will arrive in Krakow after first filling the streets with crowds that will dwarf those seen in Mexico. There in Krakow during the observances of the martyrdom of Saint Stanislaus, the actor pope himself is to be assassinated! The Bolshevik conspirators will arrange to make it appear that the Russian dominated Warsaw regime is at fault, and agitators will whip up the crowds. It will provide the classic triggering incident for revolt, and the Pope's revolution will be on. It will erupt in Krakow, and spread like wildfire throughout Poland; and if the Bolshevik plans are a complete success, the Pope's revolution will spill over into Hungary, 67% Catholic, and to other Catholic strongholds of eastern Europe.

The Bolsheviks believe that by lighting the fires of revolution at Russia's front door, they will be able to continue to keep the Kremlin off balance; and if Russia has her hands full trying to put down the Pope's revolution, they reason, Russia will be in no position to go to war. Like America's shotgun diplomatic marriage to Red China, they expect the coming revolution to buy more time for their panic rearmament for NUCLEAR WAR ONE. But, my friends, the Bolsheviks are wrong, dead wrong. If they do succeed in their plans to stain eastern Europe with a sea of Catholic blood, it would not stave off Russia. Instead, it will be the last straw for the Kremlin. As Russia's rulers see things getting out of hand, they will realize that their advantage over the West, all things considered, has stopped increasing at that point. Seeing that further delay is no longer

on their side, they will wait no longer. The remaining moves on their pre-war chess board will simply be abandoned. Contrary to Bolshevik expectations, the Russians will not try to put down the Pope's revolution before going to war. Instead, they will shift quickly to a full war footing. Their first priority will be TO DESTROY THE UNITED STATES and other pockets of Bolshevism world-wide, using their space triad with devastating effect. Only after the war will they try to pick up the pieces in eastern Europe.

Topic #3—One year ago last month loud air blasts at sea began shaking homes and frightening thousands along America's east coast. For a while government spokesmen tried to just ignore them; but the booms, now known as AIR QUAKES, would not go away. Next they were ridiculed in the controlled major media, but that tactic quickly changed too because too many people were hearing them to accept it all as a big joke. Finally, after these air quakes had been going on for several months, the government tried to explain it all away by blaming the whole thing on freak weather conditions. Alleged experts were trotted out to impress the public with the mumbo jumbo about unusually cold air layers. Waving their arms about these weird weather conditions, some tried to say that the booms were due to military aircraft, perhaps a hundred miles out to sea. Others managed to keep a straight face as they told us that the booms were caused by the Concorde supersonic transport. Somehow, they said, the shock waves from the plane were striking America's east coast more than an hour ahead of the plane itself, and with incredible force. Explanations like these were ridiculous on their face; yet many Americans, eager to be pacified, accepted these insults to their intelligence at face value. Most of the vast number of air quakes taking place nation-wide were kept out of the press, and people calmed down. Even many of my listeners tried not to believe the truth about the air quakes, which I made public shortly after they began in Audio Letter No. 29 for December 1977. They were caused by newly operational Russian Cosmospheres firing their Particle Beam-weapons in a defocused mode into the air over the Atlantic Ocean.

When I recorded Audio Letter No. 2 9 there were seven Cosmospheres hovering over the United States, but in the months that followed the numbers of Cosmospheres grew into the hundreds world-wide. Now that the media lid is on the air quakes, a government-sponsored study of them by the Miter Corporation has been quietly released. The report, released early last month, lists 594 air quakes between December 1977 and the following June. By June, of course, those alleged 'freak cold air layers' of last winter had to be long gone. The study does its best to blame the booms on aircraft noises anyway, but 181 air quakes were impossible to link, even artificially, to any acceptable excuse, so the report lamely concludes that they must be of some natural origin—it wouldn't do, after all, to admit the real cause.

The Cosmospheres, my friends, are Russia's version of the HOVERING WEAPONS PLATFORMS about which the late General Thomas Power tried in vain to give a warning 14 years ago. General Power, former head of Air Force Research and Development and then of the Strategic Air Command, knew what he was talking about. In Audio Letter No. 32 last March I reviewed in detail the efforts of General Power to warn the American people; but as with many others who have tried to alert us over the years, his efforts were suppressed and ignored.

As the numbers of Cosmospheres have multiplied world-wide during the past year, UFO sightings have likewise been

mushrooming. As in the past, some UFO sightings today are just that—Unidentified Flying Objects; but nowadays it would be more appropriate in many cases to call the sighted objects IFOs—that is, Identified Flying Objects, because they are not unknown space visitors but identifiable as Russian Cosmospheres. In some cases though, combined sightings are taking place which involve both Cosmospheres and true UFOs.

In the past, UFOs have always been attracted by aircraft, rockets, and spacecraft, especially when these are new or experimental. The Cosmospheres are no exception to this rule. Wherever Cosmospheres are congregated nowadays over military targets, UFOs occasionally show up and dart around among the Cosmospheres. The best known case of this type so far happened recently in New Zealand. Late last month on the evening of December 30, an Australian television news crew made headlines world-wide by filming what they called UFOs from an airplane over New Zealand. The film, some seven minutes long, was purchased by the BBC and by the CBS TV network. On January 2 CBS showed less than 50 seconds of the film which showed a glowing spherical object, and most of the objects sighted that evening by the camera crew and other observers were described as spheres of light. However, as the film clip was shown, a sound track was played. The Australian newsman described a different object. He said it looked like "a flying saucer." Walter Cronkite did not say whether or not the sound track had been recorded simultaneously with the film clip that was being shown. In any case, the spherical object in the film was a Russian Cosmosphere, but the attempts to discredit the film are an echo of the ridiculous government stories about the air quakes last year. On the evening of January 25, just six days ago, Walter Cronkite of CBS News reminded viewers of the New Zealand UFOs; then he went on: "Well, the New Zealand Air Force reported today that freak atmospheric conditions, not visitors from outer space, were responsible. Investigators said one definite cause was an unusually bright Venus rising in the eastern sky."

My friends, the recent flurries of so-called UFO sightings over Australia and New Zealand are actually due to Cosmospheres—and with good reason. Lately we are hearing a great deal about plans for America's so-called MX mobile missile; but, in fact American mobile missiles are already being scattered like popcorn world-wide. Our Bolshevik rulers are hoping to outflank Russia with sheer numbers of missile sites if nothing else. The missiles involved are based on our standard Minuteman. As a solid fuel rocket, it is well suited for mobile basing—in fact, this was designed into some versions of the Minuteman in the first place; and now New Zealand is host to two American mobile missile bases. One is not far from Hamilton on the North Island, the other is near Alexandra on the South Island. They are concealed in mountainous areas. Likewise, a very large missile complex is in the Northern Territory of Australia—it straddles the Robinson River and spreads out over an 18 by 22-mile area. In that area there is no one to watch what goes on but alligators and aborigines.

The Russians are keeping close tabs on all American missile bases, new and old, by means of their Cosmospheres. As I have explained in the past, their Particle Beam-weapons can blast our missiles at the moment of launch; but our Bolshevik rulers believe they have devised a way to disable the Cosmospheres just long enough to get the missiles safely launched against Russia. Scientific intelligence analysts in the United States understand that the Cosmospheres hover by floating in the earth's electrostatic field. They also presume that the Russians use the same techniques we would in order to aim their Particle

Beam-weapons—that is, a combination of infrared detection and radar. They reason that if the Cosmospheres can be disturbed from their hovering positions and if their sensing systems can be blinded, their Particle Beam-weapons will do no good. Even if they fire they will be aimed wild and will miss our rockets as they are launched. The solution they have devised is called a Cobalt Ionization Bomb. Unlike a normal cobalt bomb, such a device is not designed to create a tremendous blast; its primary purpose instead is to create tremendous quantities of totally ionized cobalt—that is, the cobalt atoms are stripped of all their electrons, leaving bare nuclei. The plan is to detonate these at various locations in the upper fringes of the atmosphere, as high as possible, but below the hovering altitude of the Cosmospheres. The result will be an enormous storm of electrons, spreading horizontally in the earth's magnetic field to pass underneath the Cosmospheres. This, they believe, will briefly disrupt the electrostatic field around each Cosmosphere and also the infrared and radar systems used to watch the missiles below; and while the Cosmospheres are briefly incapacitated in this way, our rulers plan to launch our ICBMs right past them. Meanwhile, ground-based high-power lasers will be used in an effort to shoot down the Cosmospheres. But, my friends, our masters are falling victim to the very intelligence gap which they themselves brought about years ago, because the Russians well understand the importance of surprise, including technological surprise. And so while they have allowed their space triad to become known in intelligence circles because of its deployment, they still have a master secret weapon in reserve for the war itself. This weapon is a system to protect the Achilles' heel of their beam-weapons—the ability to aim them accurately. It is called "Psychoenergetic Range Finding", or PRF. PRF does not rely on conventional radiations like infrared or radar—instead, it's based upon detection of the actual atomic signature of the target, and normal jamming techniques have no effect on PRF. So when the American cobalt ionization bombs explode, the Cosmospheres will be able to aim right through the electron storms to blast our missiles. And so, my friends, day by day the atheistic Bolsheviks are leading the Anglo-Saxon West into the caldron of thermonuclear war! Already we can sense the impending doom in our nostrils, yet still we refuse to do anything to stop it. If we allow Western civilization to be dissolved, will the survivors dare to say, "May God forgive us?"

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #43

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is Feb. 28, 1979, and this is my Audio Letter(R) No. 43.

All across the United States millions of Americans are growing weary of a long, harsh winter. Over large areas of the country winter storms this year have been abnormal and unpredictable. Time and again America's industrial heartland in the Midwest has been paralyzed by unusually heavy snowstorms. Powerful rainstorms have battered California, which supplies a major share of America's food supply. The major population corridors of the Northeast have endured storm after storm, taxing energy supplies and human patience. In the Southwest and elsewhere storms have caused losses of electrical power on an unprecedented scale, and even here in Washington, D.C., the biggest snowstorm in over 50

years has just taken place. For days, the nation's capital was brought to a standstill by two feet of snow, and we are still digging out. And strange weather patterns have struck also in Europe this winter.

Four weeks ago on January 31, NATO ground forces gathered in Germany for their first winter maneuvers in six years. When they began, conditions appeared ideal, the ground was frozen solid to the depth of five inches, making a nice firm footing for NATO tanks and other vehicles. There was also a convenient amount of snow on the ground, a little less than a foot. This was enough to make the war games seem realistic without actually making things difficult. The NATO teams were divided up into mock invaders, called the "Orange Force"; and defenders, called the "Blue Force." At one minute after midnight January 31 the Orange Force began its make-believe invasion. It was right on schedule without the element of surprise that would exist in a real invasion. Even so, the attacking Orange Force soon outflanked the Blue defenders, and for the next two days the Orange Force, representing the Warsaw Pact, rode southward across the West German landscape. Meanwhile the so-called Blue Force, representing NATO defenders, were getting set to counterattack. On the morning of February 2, the third day of the make-believe war, the Blue Force was almost ready to go; but then, the unexpected happened. Suddenly the weather changed, strong warm winds blew up out of nowhere, and soon these were joined by rain. Within hours the ideal maneuvering conditions vanished—the snow melted, swelling streams and causing local flooding; and the frost melted, causing the whole area to turn into a mud bog. Tanks churned and groaned as they sank into the mire. Meanwhile NATO's alleged new wonder weapon against enemy tanks, the A-10 Close-support Aircraft, turned out to be absolutely useless. They were grounded by dense fog. Flooding caused a rush evacuation of a Field Hospital, and for three days NATO troops, tanks, and artillery sat stalled in a so-called "Administrative Hold." Finally, NATO Commander General Alexander Haig flew over the scene by helicopter and then called off the whole thing. And so the NATO exercise, which had been named "CERTAIN SENTINEL" ended on a very uncertain note. Meanwhile, 200 miles away in Czechoslovakia, Warsaw Pact maneuvers were under way too; and when the weather changed, they went on as if nothing had happened. It's almost as if the weather itself had turned against the United States and the NATO alliance. And, my friend, it has!

Over a year ago in Audio Letter No. 29, I revealed that Russia had begun the operational deployment of Hovering Weapons Platforms. These remarkable machines, which the Russians call Cosmospheres, are armed with Charged Particle Beam-weapons. When I recorded Audio Letter No. 29, seven Cosmospheres were on station over the continental United States, and they were causing the famous 'air blasts' now called AIR QUAKES. These were the by-product of weather modification experiments using their Beam-weapons in a defocused mode. Fourteen years ago the late General Thomas Power, former Commander of the United States Strategic Air Command, gave a public warning in advance about these hovering military craft. In Audio Letter No. 32 I reviewed General Power's efforts to warn America before it was too late, but he was ignored and Russia developed these machines, while America did not. And today they are on station over our missile bases, major dams, and cities, ready to pulverize targets on command. They are also manipulating the weather over the United States, and a squadron of Cosmospheres used the weather to turn NATO's so-called "CERTAIN SENTINEL" maneuvers into a farce. The purpose was a bloodless object lesson to the Western European members of NATO. The Kremlin is trying by every possible means

to persuade Western Europe to stay out of the coming thermonuclear war between Russia and America, while most Americans still are blissfully unaware of the reason for much of this winter's unusual weather. All they know is that they are tired of winter and looking forward to the first signs of spring. And yet, my friends, if the "new Bolsheviks" who now control the American government have their way, the season of real trial and hardship is only beginning, NOT ending. Their intrigues are accelerating toward a climax, and as winter melts away the world is heating up with the danger of WAR.

Six months ago in Audio Letter No. 37, I revealed in detail the top secret plans of America's rulers to initiate nuclear war with Russia. For the first time in American history it is now the master strategy of the United States to strike first in a major war, and in this same Audio Letter I outlined the steps which were being planned to lead up to full scale war with Russia. The strategy of the "new Bolsheviks" to launch an American nuclear first strike against Russia is already far advanced, and moving fast. Many elements of the top-secret plan which I revealed last August have already become highly visible. First, the Camp David summit of last September 1978 set the plan in motion. The plan I had revealed was followed to the letter, and the so-called surprise "Peace" accords were signed with big smiles by Carter, Begin, and Sadat on nation-wide television. Likewise, the Bolshevik plan to throw the Roman Catholic Church into their own fight against Russia has been moving along right on track. Pope John Paul I, elected only the day before I recorded Audio Letter No. 37, quickly left the scene, and today the anti-Russian policies of the Vatican are becoming more visible by the day. More recently the crucial importance of Iran and China in the first-strike plan has caused them both to dominate the news. As planned six months ago, Iran has been made a source of concern to the American public; and China, whose western province of Sinkiang is essential to the American first-strike strategy, forced the United States into full diplomatic recognition over two months ago. Now we are moving rapidly toward the stage of 'oil shortages' and 'gas rationing' as the crisis atmosphere intensifies prior to war. And exactly according to plan, Saudi Arabia is being painted more and more as a threat to peace by politicians and the controlled major media.

My friends, springtime is always a time of unrest and possible war. It is the easiest time of the year to trigger violence; and as spring approaches, preparations are under way jointly by the United States and Israeli governments to trigger an incident that will cause war to erupt in the Middle East. The nuclear destruction of Saudi Arabia's oil fields is intended to follow soon afterward. In Eastern Europe too, the coming of spring is accompanied by great danger this year. Last month I revealed the Bolshevik plan for the "Pope's Revolution" to erupt in Krakow, Poland, this May. The key to the plan is to be the visit to Poland in May by the 'actor Pope', the man who calls himself Pope John Paul II; and just six days ago it was revealed that the Pope now plans to be in Poland May 13 through the 15th. For the reasons I revealed last month, my friends, it will be the beginning of the end for the West if the "Pope's Revolution" does take place. That means the next two months or so could well determine the future course of human history. If that history is written according to the Satanic Bolshevik plan, it will be written in our blood, and it will be a story of thermonuclear catastrophe, unparalleled destruction, tragedy, suffering, torment—all on a scale that is beyond human comprehension. And yet, my friends, I must remind you once again of something I pointed out in my very first talking tape recorded over four years ago in October 1974. That was Audio Book No. 1 titled:

"HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE COMING DEPRESSION AND THIRD WORLD WAR." The information I make public from my own intelligence concerns the plans of men. These human plans are not unchangeable. The men who make these plans like to play God, but they are not gods. Their plans do change, their timetables do slip, they do make mistakes, and the unexpected does happen. During the past several weeks, my friends, the unexpected HAS happened, dramatic events are taking place hidden from the public, which will inevitably have profound effects on the course of events both here and world-wide.

My three topics for this month are:

Topic #1—THE MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE OF DR. HENRY KISSINGER

Topic #2—THE PLUNDERING OF THE ROCKEFELLER FAMILY EMPIRE

Topic #3—OUR LAST CHANCE TO SAVE WESTERN CIVILIZATION.

Topic #1—Last month on the evening of January 26 the life of Nelson Rockefeller suddenly came to an end. Five days later when I recorded Audio Letter No. 42, I was able to report that he had been murdered by a single expert shot to the head. Immediately Rockefeller aides and spokesmen were put to work in a feverish effort to cover up what had happened. For the reasons I mentioned last month, Nelson's surviving brothers, David and Laurance, felt that it would be too dangerous to have the public know he had been murdered. It would have raised too many questions, and so Rockefeller spokesmen spouted one set of lies after another for public consumption. Meanwhile, Nelson Rockefeller's body was cremated quickly to make sure that the multiplying public questions about his death did not lead to an autopsy. By the time I recorded Audio Letter No. 42 on January 31, key Rockefeller family spokesman, Hugh Morrow, had run through three versions of the circumstances surrounding Rockefeller's death and each new version demolished what he had already said. About a week later, the third version began falling apart. News reports quoting unnamed sources within the Rockefeller family said that the person who had called the New York emergency number 911 for an ambulance was not Megan Marshack. Miss Marshack, Rockefeller's young aide, had been with him in his townhouse at the time of death; but the 911 call, it was now said, had been made by Miss Ponchitta Pierce. Miss Pierce, a New York television personality, was said to be a friend and neighbor of Marshack. On Saturday night February 10, Ponchitta Pierce put an end to several days of questions and rumors by releasing a statement through her attorney; but her statement triggered new questions as it ruined all previous statements by Rockefeller spokesmen about Rockefeller's death.

In her statement, Ponchitta Pierce said that Megan Marshack had called her between 10:50 and 11:00 P.M. on that evening of January 26. That ruined the official story of Rockefeller spokesmen to the effect that Rockefeller had suffered his "heart attack" at 11:15 P.M., and it revived the early questions to the effect: Why all the delays between Rockefeller's alleged heart attack and a call for help? The Pierce statement added to the mystery in another way too. She said that she got to Rockefeller's townhouse about 11:15 P.M., called the 911 emergency number to request an ambulance, and then left quickly to go back to her own apartment. The natural question is: Why would anyone flee from the scene of a heart attack? Especially since contrary to some reports Ponchitta Pierce had known Nelson Rockefeller for more than 10 years! Why didn't she stay to help?... unless he was obviously beyond help.

On the same day that Ponchitta Pierce released her statement to the press, the New York Post quoted Steven Rockefeller, Nelson Rockefeller's second eldest son, as calling for clarification of the whole situation; and two days later his son, Steven, Jr., Nelson Rockefeller's 18-year old grandson, reportedly said, "We just want the truth. The issue is simply whether he could be alive now. Had he been a more practical man, thorough in his bodyguard protection, maybe this would not have happened." These words of Nelson Rockefeller's grandson Steven, Jr. were dangerously close to the mark. Last month I explained how Nelson Rockefeller had been caught in a weak moment with "his guard down" and with his normal large contingent of bodyguards off duty. Two days later, February 14, his father Steven made a complete turnabout: he joined with his brother Rodman and sisters, Ann and Mary, in a joint statement aimed at cutting off the controversy. The statement said in part: "Since we are convinced that nothing could be done to save Father, and that all the people who tried to help acted responsibly, we feel that it is wrong for us to take part in a continued debate over the details. Consequently, we do not intend to make any further public comment."

But the circumstances surrounding the death of Nelson Rockefeller have an important bearing on the future of the United States, not just the future of the Rockefeller family; so the questions about those circumstances will not go away just by wishing it so. As a footnote to what I made public last month, I can now reveal the reason for the long delay between Rockefeller's shooting and the 11:16 P.M. call for an ambulance. Rockefeller did not die at 11:15 P.M., nor even at 10:15 P.M., as stated in the earliest news reports. The death actually took place between 9:30 and 10:00 P.M. After Megan Marshack recovered from her semi-state of shock following the shooting, she placed a call which still has not been made public. As a result of this call, a doctor quickly arrived who was prepared to handle the situation. The single gunshot wound in Rockefeller's forehead stopped bleeding in less than an hour. The doctor then filled the bullet hole with Calamine Lotion, which hardened. After cleaning off all the blood, the doctor's job was done. It would now be possible to remove the body by ambulance without the true cause of death being apparent at a glance to casual bystanders. The doctor's make-shift work on the scene did fool bystanders, but if you will look on page 39 of LOOK magazine for March 5, 1979, you will discover that the job was not quite perfect. The photo at the bottom of the page is of Nelson Rockefeller's body as it was being carried out of his townhouse on a stretcher. The picture is grainy and shows little detail; even so, look closely. One to two inches above the bridge of the nose and slightly toward the left eyebrow you will see a roughly circular dark area. That, my friends, is the hastily disguised bullet hole. The Calamine Lotion did not completely hide the discoloration and was not smoothed to perfection.

Last month I alerted my listeners to the fact that the man who stood to gain the most from Nelson Rockefeller's death was his protege of 25 years, HENRY KISSINGER; and Kissinger wasted no time in pushing ahead with his bid to fill Nelson Rockefeller's shoes in the inner family circle of the Rockefeller empire. His campaign was already well under way on Friday February 2, 1979. On that day a memorial service for Nelson Rockefeller at the Riverside Church in New York was attended by well over 2000 people from 71 nations. Eulogies were delivered by a daughter, Ann Rockefeller-Roberts; by a son, Rodman C. Rockefeller; and by brother David Rockefeller, and by Henry Kissinger. It was Kissinger whose eulogy received all the attention from the controlled major media—and no wonder. The huge audience was

hushed as Henry Kissinger made his way to the pulpit. Then, seemingly with tears in his eyes, Kissinger began to speak of Nelson Rockefeller. As his choking voice echoed through the great sanctuary of the Riverside Church, Kissinger referred to Rockefeller as: friend, inspiration, teacher, and "my older brother." Kissinger's eulogy was a masterpiece and brought tears to the eyes of many. The final passage was about sitting with Nelson Rockefeller "on the veranda overlooking his beloved Hudson River in the setting sun." And as the last words of the eulogy, Kissinger claimed that Rockefeller would occasionally say: "Never forget that the most profound force in the world is Love."

With those final words echoing through the church, the man who had plotted the death of Nelson Rockefeller turned and slowly left the pulpit. What Kissinger did not suspect was that he had just said his final words in public. The following evening, Saturday, February 3rd, Kissinger was reportedly in Seattle with the stated intention of seeing China's Deng Hsiao-ping. In fact, the Washington Post two days later reported that Kissinger saw Deng in Seattle on Sunday morning, February 4; but the Post was wrong about that. At about the same time that the Washington Post said Kissinger was in Seattle, he was actually at Dulles Airport outside Washington, D.C. Just past noon at 12:30 P.M. Washington Time, February 4, Kissinger took off for London on the British Airways Concorde. Less than 11 hours later, Kissinger arrived at Chaumont in the Loire Valley, France, where it was the morning of February 5th. From there Kissinger flew nearly 200 miles west to Blois, France, in time to breakfast there. By late that evening of February 5, Henry Kissinger and his wife Nancy were in London. At approximately 11:00 P.M. London Time, they took off for the United States in a private jet; and as they did so, they were subject to continuous surveillance. A network of 2 6 Russian cosmospheres were on station at that time above the air lanes between America's east coast and Europe. At 7:12 P.M. Eastern Standard Time, February 5, all contact with the jet carrying Henry and Nancy Kissinger was abruptly lost. The jet did not arrive at its destination, and Henry and Nancy Kissinger are nowhere to be found. Kissinger aides claim that he is "on vacation", meanwhile articles keep being printed about Kissinger which keep his name before the public, but he himself has dropped out of sight.

On February 15, I stated publicly that Kissinger was missing on the Ray Briem Talk Show over Radio Station KABC, Los Angeles; and on February 17, I appeared on the Bob Snyder Talk Show over Radio Station WINQ, Tampa, Fla. On that program I not only reported that Kissinger was missing but stated that he had been so since February 5. I also gave Kissinger's itinerary immediately preceding his disappearance—that is, Washington to London, to France, to London again—and then missing.

Now there is already an attempt to head off public awareness that Kissinger is missing. His aides are now giving out a cover story, which has already found its way into print. In the New York Daily News for February 26, just two days ago, the "People" section contained an item titled: "K Soothes Sorrow in Europe." It began: "Where is Henry Kissinger hiding?" Saying that an unnamed Washington commentator suggested he was missing, the article says: "Well, forget it all. The fact is Henry and his wife Nancy left town shortly after the death of his close friend, Nelson Rockefeller, for a vacation from the news hounds. Henry left New York February 4, went to England, then France, back to London, and is now in Mexico." As I mentioned before, Kissinger left Washington on February 4, not New York; and his plane did not land in Mexico or anywhere else after leaving London on February 5. But the New York Daily News article says Kissinger

is expected back next month; and just for good measure, a Kissinger aide is quoted as saying: "He is alive and well, and may show up anywhere in the world because he is welcome anywhere."

My friends, I can only say that it will be a miracle if the real Henry Kissinger is ever seen again; and speaking as a lawyer, I can tell you that only the real Henry Kissinger could bring legal action against me for what I have told you concerning his criminal activities against the life of Nelson Rockefeller. Henry Kissinger has vanished from the scene just as he was on the threshold of the ultimate grab for power that was his dream. But Kissinger conspired with others to bring about far more than the mere death of Nelson Rockefeller; and the startling events he helped to set in motion have continued despite his own mysterious disappearance.

Topic #2—On February 7, two days after the disappearance of the Kissinger jet over the North Atlantic, Megan Marshack emerged out of hiding. She was seen briefly in New York and was photographed wearing a raccoon coat. That was the last time she was seen in public. That night she and David Rockefeller boarded one of David Rockefeller's private jets and took off for London. Arriving in London the morning of February 8, local time, they headed for separate destinations. She went to a location in the western end of London, while he had business in the Seven Oaks section of South London. Early the following morning David Rockefeller received an urgent message to go to Megan's location in the west end of London. There had been some trouble. Arriving there he saw for himself. Megan Ruth Marshack, the only known witness to the actual murder of Nelson Rockefeller, was dead. She had died as Rockefeller had, with a single bullet in the forehead. Megan Marshack was far less well known in England than she had become here in America, but the psychological profile of David Rockefeller would show that his reaction in this new crisis would be much the same as it had been when his brother had been murdered. David Rockefeller would insist upon overseeing arrangements to make sure that the public did not learn that Megan Marshack had been shot to death. And so, he stayed on the scene just long enough to become a target himself. Within a few hours the body of Megan Marshack was on its way to a morgue in northeast London without identification of any kind. But then, David Rockefeller died in the same way—a single bullet to the head. Early that afternoon, February 9, David Rockefeller's body was placed aboard the private jet that had brought him and Megan Marshack to London the previous day. The jet took off for the United States. Just as the Kissinger jet had done four days earlier, it was running a gauntlet of surveillance by Russian Cosmospheres; and apparently the Russians did not know that David Rockefeller was already dead as his jet streaked westward across the North Atlantic. At a point within 100 miles of the last known location of the Kissinger jet, all contact was abruptly lost with the jet carrying David Rockefeller's body; and the jet never arrived at its destination.

On Sunday morning, February 11, Ponchitta Pierce was seen on her television program by viewers of New York's Channel 4, WNBC; but the program was on tape as usual. Ponchitta Pierce herself was nowhere to be found. The previous evening she had released her statement to the press about her actions on the evening of Nelson Rockefeller's death, and had raised all sorts of new questions in the process—and since that time Ponchitta Pierce has been missing. Meanwhile, her television program is going on each week just as usual. She is said to have already taped programs until some time in May. When questioned, her office has been saying lately that she is "on vacation." The same thing is

now being said of Megan Marshack at her office—"on vacation."

On the evening of February 13, the body of Hugh Morrow, the long-time Rockefeller family spokesman, was discovered. Following the death of Nelson Rockefeller, it was Morrow who was given the heaviest responsibility for carrying out the cover-up campaign. Now the death of Morrow himself is the subject of cover-up efforts. Morrow died of a bullet between the eyes on February 13 and that is the real reason why we are hearing no new pronouncements from him these days, but his office claims that he is "on vacation." Early Saturday morning February 17, the third generation of the Rockefeller dynasty came to an end. Laurance Rockefeller died in the same manner as Pope John Paul I did last October—of a bullet to the nape of the neck, and the next morning both Laurance Rockefeller and Hugh Morrow were cremated.

In my appearance of February 15 on the Ray Briem radio show in Los Angeles I mentioned all of these missing persons, except for Laurance Rockefeller who was still alive then. Two days later on the Bob Snyder show in Tampa, Florida, I listed them all and stated how long each had been missing. And according to the New York Post for February 15, 1979, it was claimed that Rockefeller security aides, Andy Hoffman and William Keogh as well as chauffeur Lonnie Wilcher, cannot be found.

My friends, according to high intelligence, what has just taken place is nothing less than a bloody coup d'etat involving the real rulers of America; and those responsible are none other than those former allies of the Rockefellers—the "new Bolsheviks."

Now, the plundering of the Rockefeller family fortune is beginning without the Rockefeller fourth generation suspecting a thing. After all, as I have always made clear in the past, the fourth generation Rockefellers were not party to the machinations of the four brothers. As a result they are not aware of the true implications of the recent upheavals that have wiped out the third-generation brothers, and they are being duped into public silence about these chilling events in the mistaken belief that silence is in their own best interest. The fact is that their silence is playing into the hands of those who want to loot the Rockefellers of their wealth, and it is also serving the interest of those who are working feverishly to throw the United States into the fires of DICTATORSHIP and WAR—the "new Bolsheviks."

During the recent past the four Rockefeller brothers made one final great mistake that has now cost them their lives. That mistake was brought on by panic over a year and a half ago. In a stunning upset on September 27, 1977, the United States was defeated by Russia in the most decisive battle of the 20th Century. It was the still secret BATTLE OF THE HARVEST MOON in space—history's first true Space Battle. In a single blow the Russians had undone the Machiavellian Rockefeller two-prong strategy for world domination, and now it was Russia that was suddenly calling the shots. The Rockefeller brothers knew they were in deep, deep trouble. In a state of near panic, the four Rockefeller brothers began casting about for a way to stave off Russia, and that is when they made their final fatal mistake. Certain of their advisers reminded them that the

Rockefeller-Soviet alliance was not really with Russia itself but with the BOLSHEVIKS in Russia. The new Russian regime had already begun weeding out and expelling the old Bolsheviks from Russia. The advisers argued that since they were the real allies of the Rockefellers and since they knew Russia, the old Bolsheviks should be welcomed to America and placed rapidly in positions of power. In their panicky need to do something fast,

the Rockefeller brothers accepted this line of reasoning. but in doing so they were forgetting the true nature of their alliance with the Bolsheviks.

When I recorded Audio Letter No. 7 in December 1975, over three years ago, the long-standing secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance was still functioning. In that Audio Letter I explained the nature of the alliance—it was an alliance between CORPORATE SOCIALISTS on one hand (the Rockefellers) and the STATE SOCIALISTS on the other (the rulers of the Soviet Union). As I explained in Audio Letter No. 7, Corporate Socialism and State Socialism are two sides of the same coin—both are systems for amassing great wealth and power into the hands of only a few people, so an alliance between the rulers of two separate countries having these two systems is natural. But what the Rockefellers forgot—their fatal mistake—is that Corporate Socialism and State Socialism cannot co-exist in the same society. Corporate Socialism has as its goal giant monopolies that are completely exempt from governmental regulation; State Socialism seeks the exact opposite—that is, total governmental control and regulation of everything and everyone. To bring them together under the same roof is to guarantee a head-on collision between the two; and that, my friends, is what is beginning to happen now.

It was in Audio Letter No. 29 for December 1977 that I was first able to reveal that a new Bolshevik Revolution was getting under way here in the United States, with the aid of the Rockefeller brothers! By the time I recorded Audio Letter No. 38 last September, the handwriting was already on the wall for the four Rockefeller brothers. Already the oldest of the brothers, John D. Ill, had suddenly vanished from the scene; and in Audio Letter No. 38 I pointed out that: "Increasingly, it is not the Rockefeller brothers who are using the Bolsheviks, but the other way around. Soon the remaining three Rockefeller brothers will fade from the scene, but that will not undo the cancer of Bolshevism with which they have infected the West." (End of quotation from Audio Letter No. 38.)

The kingpin among the "new Bolsheviks" in America was to be HENRY KISSINGER. He was Nelson Rockefeller's protege for 25 years, but he played both sides of every street! With his easy access to the plans, the personnel, the resources of the Rockefeller empire, Kissinger was the most important single person among the "new Bolshevik" faction in America. Kissinger truly believed that he could replace Nelson Rockefeller and some day become PRESIDENT OF THE WORLD.

My friends, the known witness to Nelson Rockefeller's death, Megan Marshack, as well as others close to that case, have vanished from the scene. The entire pattern of events, except for Kissinger's disappearance, is typical of Bolshevik purges, which always include measures to cover their tracks. The "new Bolsheviks" are now in control of America through their grip on the United States government, but it still remains for them to spread and consolidate their power base. And to this end, they will perpetuate the fiction as long as possible that David Rockefeller, Laurance Rockefeller, and Henry and Nancy Kissinger are still alive. In this way, actions can be taken in the name of these other people that would not be possible if they were known to be dead. Surviving members of the Rockefeller family have been led to believe that their own security, even their physical security, depends upon their maintaining silence about the events of recent days; but the truth is that their silence is being used against them. Unlike the late four brothers, the fourth generation Rockefellers do not wield great influence over

the far-flung Rockefeller cartel of banks, multinational corporations, Foundations, etc. They are largely at the mercy of managers of all these assets. By their silence they are leaving many of these managers with the power to plunder the collapsing Rockefeller empire of its riches. To preserve their power governmentally and otherwise, it is crucial right now that the Bolsheviks suppress any news of the disappearances I have told you about. Therefore, "doubles" or look-alikes may begin to appear on the scene for these people. What is amazing, especially in the case of Kissinger, is that they have been able to stifle public questions for so long in his absence. But the Bolsheviks know that "doubles" fool only the public. An intimate friend of David Rockefeller, for example, would not be deceived for long in a face-to-face meeting; and so "doubles" would be used only as a last resort.

My friends, with the four Rockefeller brothers out of the picture, and with Henry Kissinger gone, a new ad hoc gang of four has emerged who are now in control of the United States government. These four are:

ZBIGNIEW BRZEZINSKI, Jimmy Carter's National Security Adviser. In 1973 Brzezinski did the leg work for David Rockefeller in organizing the Tri-Lateral Commission. Like the late Henry Kissinger, he is foreign born.

W. MICHAEL BLUMENTHAL, Secretary of the Treasury, Tri-Lateral Commission member, and foreign born. As a former head of Bendix Corporation, Blumenthal has important ties to the Rockefeller corporate aristocracy. This is particularly true in the area of arms and defense, which is the real topic of his present trip to Red China.

HAROLD BROWN, Secretary of Defense, Tri-Lateral Commission member; and

JAMES SCHLESINGER, Secretary of Energy. Schlesinger is not an official member of the Tri-Lateral Commission but he is of like mind with the others. His approach is: Control from the top, and heavy governmental regulation of everything. Schlesinger formerly headed the Atomic Energy Commission, the CIA, and the Department of Defense.

One common thread that runs through the background of all these men is their preoccupation with matters of warfare, weaponry, and international maneuvering. In every possible way they are all trying to hurry along the Bolshevik strategy for a NUCLEAR FIRST STRIKE AGAINST RUSSIA. My friends, all of them are very dangerous men; but the new gang of four cannot truly replace the four Rockefeller brothers. For the first time ever these men no longer have anyone to give them instructions and pave their way. They are trying to carry out the very detailed plans which have already been set in motion, but they are doing it without the same power base which the four Rockefeller brothers had at their disposal; and so the question is: CAN THEY BE STOPPED?

Topic #3—Over 100 years ago the United States of America began falling under the spell of Rockefeller power. Slowly at first, but then faster and faster John D. Rockefeller, Sr. moved to the head of the line of America's robber barons. As the 19th Century was on the wane, the Rockefellers were forming alliances with other powerful groups, not only here in America but overseas. Through their influence on America's leaders, they began turning the United States away from the virtues extolled by George Washington and toward the vicious ways of Machiavelli.

Mora than 80 years ago the Spanish-American War broke out as a shadow of things to come. The war was brought about by the United States, not Spain, yet most Americans were lured into supporting America's acts of shame. America began to trade national honor for prestige as a world power. In this way the stage was being set for the 20th Century. It was to be the century of OIL POLITICS, of war after war—each worse than the one before—and ever expanding Rockefeller power. In all of this the United States of America was to be no more than a springboard in the Rockefeller plan to finally control the whole world. And so, as Rockefeller power became ever more complete in America, our country's behavior became increasingly foreign to our own traditions and values. As a nation, we began to court our enemies while punishing our friends. The Land of Opportunity gradually was twisted into the Land of Regulations, and the original American concept that all men are equal in the sight of the law was gradually warped into the idea that all human beings have to be the same in all respects. Our value as individuals began fading from our own minds so that we might be molded more perfectly into a society of perfect slaves.

Down through the years millions of Americans have been alert enough to feel at least vaguely that something was wrong, but the real source and reason for all these disturbing trends was always kept hidden and so there was no one to challenge or hinder the master program of Rockefeller conquest. In recent years America's drift toward nuclear war has also been more and more apparent; but here, too, Americans sat paralyzed as the Rockefeller planners dragged us closer and closer to the fire. For decades now, most Americans have fallen into one of two groups. By far the larger group has consisted of that great "Silent Majority", so called. They have been silent about Rockefeller power and intrigue because they did not know about it. The other main group, much smaller, has consisted of those who did know about Rockefeller power and felt it was too great to be challenged. Down through the years only scattered individuals have both known the truth and dared to actively oppose what was happening to America; and those few, my friends, have always been easy to isolate and neutralize in various ways. But now, for the first time in a century, the situation has changed.

Almost over night the centralized control of the world-wide power of the Rockefeller Empire has been shattered. The four Rockefeller brothers of the third generation are no more, and there is no one who can really fill their shoes. But the new gang of four—BRZEZINSKI, BROWN, BLUMENTHAL, and SCHLESINGER—are eager to set themselves up as our undisputed RULERS. Left to themselves they will lead America into thermonuclear national suicide. But their dreams of replacing the four Rockefeller brothers are insane. What will they do, my friends, when it becomes known in the corridors of power world-wide that David Rockefeller is no more?

Who will hold the intimate, private dinner gatherings with the Powerful here and abroad by which David Rockefeller kept everyone on the same track?

Who will take his place, giving word from 'on high' on big policy shifts?

Who will keep the TRI-LATERAL COMMISSION, the COUNCIL ON FOREIGN RELATIONS (CFR) , the COUNCIL OF THE AMERICAS humming along in unison as he did?

Who will coordinate the actions of the top 200 industrial corporations and banks of the world as he did?

Who will guide the policies of the Business Council or of the Business Round-Table as David Rockefeller did?

Who will take his place in assigning tasks to his former private detective agency—the CIA?

Who will decide the global issues that he did? And force unified action to implement those decisions—Brzezinski? Blumenthal? Brown? Schlesinger?

It is in the nature of people to form their own opinions about things if they are not forced to accept and implement certain policies. And so think of the free-for-all that will soon start developing behind the scenes on all sides! Within the industrial community, for example, honest differences of opinion will start cropping up as to how to handle new situations as they arise. Without David Rockefeller to act as arbitrator, these differences will not just go away. Industrial leaders will begin to break up into factions built around different policies, but no faction will be able to impose its will on all the others as David Rockefeller did. And so, inevitably, that phenomenon which John D. Rockefeller, Sr. denounced as a "sin" will begin to rear its battered head. It's called COMPETITION. If we can avoid a suicidal disaster in NUCLEAR WAR I, the same thing will also begin happening in all other areas of life—in banking, in business, in politics, even in religion. A new freedom of independent thought may yet be reborn—IF war can be prevented between Russia and the United States.

Soon the inevitable internal conflict here in the United States will be getting under way. On one side there are the Corporate Socialists of the now headless Rockefeller cartel; on the other side there are the Bolshevik State Socialists who are now in control of the United States government. Right now the Rockefeller Corporate Socialist Empire is still more powerful than the United States government. If they wake up in time, they could put a stop to the Bolshevik plan which is now directed AT THEM; and if the people also awaken, then the inevitable re-birth of competitive enterprise could lead gradually to a new era of freedom and prosperity in the West. By breaking their silence about recent events, the fourth generation Rockefellers could help bring about this turn of events.

As the conflict builds up between the Corporate Socialists and the Bolsheviks, Jimmy Carter will be caught in the middle. Already he is racked by leukemia and by cancer in his head, in his intestines, and now in his lungs and bladder. If he does not die first, watch for him to flee from the presidency under these pressures. When that happens, my friends, you will be faced with a choice which you cannot avoid. Carter's hasty departure from the presidency will be the first public sign that the rout of the Bolsheviks is beginning here in America. At that point you must decide to do one of two things—to act, or not to act! If you decide to act to help save America from the Bolshevik nightmare, you will be choosing FREEDOM, LIFE, and the SURVIVAL OF CHRISTIANITY. But if you decide to step back and do nothing, you will be casting your vote for BOLSHEVIK CONTROL over America; and if you do that, you will be choosing SLAVERY, DEATH, and the SATANIC HELL of Bolshevism.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #44

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is March 29, 1979, and this is my Audio Letter No. 44. It has now been 15 months since I first revealed in Audio Letter No. 2 9 that a new Bolshevik revolution was getting under way here in the United States. Last month I revealed that a Bolshevik coup d'etat had just taken place, bloody and vicious, yet out of the public limelight. All four of the third generation Rockefeller brothers are now dead, as are others who were close to them. Now, America is being dragged along toward revolution, dictatorship, and war by the ad hoc gang of four—BRZEZINSKI, BLUMENTHAL, BROWN, and SCHLESINGER. It was Schlesinger who said in the fall of 1975: "Some years from now someone will raise the question, 'Why weren't we warned?' and I wanted to be able to say, 'Indeed you were'." Now Schlesinger himself is working fast to help bring on the very disasters he warned us about. Can you imagine?

Seven months ago in Audio Letter No. 37 I spelled out the secret new strategy for an American nuclear first strike against Russia; and as I say these words, more and more parts of that plan are falling rapidly into place. At the same time, the Bolsheviks are trying to schedule coming events to bring on full-scale revolution here as their first priority; then, with a stunned America in their iron grip, they intend to move us quickly into NUCLEAR WAR with RUSSIA. Already the plan I revealed last August for the Camp David summit to lead to an Egyptian-Israeli 'Peace Treaty' has been accomplished. At the same time, Bolshevik control within the Vatican has brought about the drastic shift of the Roman Catholic Church to a strongly anti-Russian stance. Two popes—John Paul I and the real John Paul II—were murdered last fall by the Bolsheviks in the process, as I detailed in Audio Letters Nos. 39 and 41. The crucial importance of Red China and Iran in the plan I revealed last August has also caused both of them to undergo dramatic developments during the past six months.

My friends, we are now at the crossroads. It is do or die for the Satanic Bolsheviks who will never turn back from their suicidal plans. It is also do or die for the survivors of the four Rockefeller brothers—the rest of the Rockefeller family—who are in mortal danger from the Bolsheviks. And, my friends, it is DO or DIE for us, for Christianity in the West, and for Western civilization itself! Many people today are now saying, "What can I do?" After you have heard this recording, you have my suggestion as to what you can do; and I urge you to act quickly, because there is no time to be wasted!

My three topics this month are: Topic #1—THE HOAX RE-APPEARANCE OF DR. HENRY KISSINGER;

Topic #2—THE IMPENDING COLLAPSE OF THE CHASE-MANHATTAN BANK; and

Topic #3—THE EGYPTIAN-ISRAELI TREATY FOR NUCLEAR WAR.

Topic #1—Two months ago on the evening of January 26, the life of Nelson Rockefeller ended abruptly. As I revealed five days later in my Audio Letter No. 42, he was murdered—shot once in the head. Last month I reported that Rockefeller's murder had been only the beginning of a pattern of events. The pattern is that of the Bolshevik purge—that is, a bloody, yet secret, coup d'etat. In the space of only a few weeks, the secret rulership of the United States changed hands. The coup began on January 2 6

when, as the Bolsheviks put it, Nelson Rockefeller was liquidated; and by February 17, the coup d'etat had been achieved because by that date both David and Laurance Rockefeller had also been executed. Meanwhile, the purge had also eliminated several persons who knew too much about Nelson Rockefeller's murder. These included: Megan Marshack, Ponchitta Pierce, and Rockefeller family spokesman Hugh Morrow. But there was one disappearance last month that was not according to the Bolshevik game-plan.

As I reported in Audio Letter No. 43, Dr. Henry Kissinger was to be the key man in the new Bolshevik power-group. Kissinger had conspired with others for Nelson Rockefeller's murder and was positioning himself to pick up the reins of Rockefeller power; but on February 5 the private jet carrying Henry and Nancy Kissinger with their five body guards from London to the United States disappeared over the North Atlantic. I can now reveal that the Kissinger jet suffered a mid-air explosion. The crippled airplane crashed into the sea at the navigational coordinates 54 degrees, 40 minutes, 57 seconds North; 26 degrees, 40 minutes, zero seconds West. No one escaped from the plane, the remnants of which sank in approximately 8,000 feet of water. The exact fate of the Kissinger jet was not immediately known last month but it did soon become obvious that Kissinger was gone for good. As a result, the Bolsheviks here in America were thrown into turmoil. The plans Kissinger had helped set in motion to dispose of the Rockefellers were carried forward. Meanwhile, the ad hoc gang of four emerged as the guiding force of the secret new Bolshevik revolution here in America. These four men have only a small fraction of the power formerly wielded by the four Rockefeller brothers—but they are very dangerous men indeed! These men are: National Security chief ZBIGNIEW BRZEZINSKI, Treasury Secretary W. MICHAEL BLUMENTHAL, Defense Secretary HAROLD BROWN, and Energy Secretary JAMES SCHLESINGER. Together they are working feverishly toward a complete take-over of America's industry, banking, agriculture, EVERYTHING; and beyond that their goal is NUCLEAR WAR with Russia—an act of national suicide for the rest of us!

As of now, the Bolshevik coup d'etat—that is, the change in ruling circles—has already been accomplished. What still lies ahead is the full-fledged open revolution to transform American society as a whole into a Bolshevik HELL. Using the excuse of a deliberate war-crisis in the Middle East and resulting oil shortages, the Bolsheviks plan to start closing down American freedoms in a declared 'National Emergency.' From there the Bolshevik grip around our necks will steadily tighten, gradually choking and strangling us into total submission. As the last gasp of free air is squeezed from our lungs, the blackness of BOLSHEVIK DICTATORSHIP will gather itself around us. Then, those who have been content to 'Wait and See' will realize too late that IT CAN HAPPEN HERE.

In Audio Letter No. 14 I described some of the valuable lessons the four Rockefeller brothers had learned from their clandestine support of Adolf Hitler. One of these lessons was that a revolution is best carried out with, and not against, the full power of a nation's government; and that lesson is not lost on the Bolsheviks here in America—the former allies of the Rockefeller brothers. Using the excuse of crisis conditions, they will use their governmental authority for revolutionary purposes:

Businesses large and small will be nationalized as the Bolsheviks take over America's means of production;

The banks will be closed, cutting off access of millions of

people to their life savings;

Both corporate and private farms, ranches, orchards, and vineyards will be taken away from their owners nation-wide and collectivized;

Engineers of all types will be put to work wherever the government puts them in all-out preparation for war—and the prelude to this is already visible in the job market of today;

People without special skills will be herded like cattle from one location to another for agricultural or other tasks; and

Millions who are troublesome for various reasons will be sent to Concentration Camps—of which 13 already exist in America in various states of condition.

These things, my friends, are what the Bolsheviks—including the new ad hoc gang of four—have in mind for us very soon. All they have to do is to hold on to their present power until the coming Middle East crisis unties their hands. Until then they cannot unleash the DICTATORIAL EMERGENCY POWERS they want—and so they are vulnerable. While they are waiting for their hour to come, they know they must not let the American public realize anything about the Bolshevik coup d'etat that has taken place.

Last month I revealed intelligence that the disappearances of Henry and Nancy Kissinger, David and Laurance Rockefeller, and others were all connected to the Bolshevik coup d'etat, so the Bolsheviks dare not let you know that any of these people have dropped out of sight. That is why I said last month: "Doubles or look-alikes may begin to appear on the scene for these people. What is amazing, especially in the case of Kissinger, is that they have been able to stifle public questions for so long in his absence."

During the past month or so the Bolsheviks have been orchestrating a careful campaign using the major media to deceive the American public and, sure enough, doubles are being used as part of this deception campaign. Falsified stories are being planted in the news media, both with and without the knowledge of those who publish the stories. One day it may be just a sentence or two in a Society column alleging that Henry Kissinger showed up at a social gathering, without saying where or when. A day or two later a different newspaper may print a story alleging that Megan Marshack is looking for a new job here in Washington. The picture that accompanies the story is one of the same old file photos we have been seeing for two months. Several times, however, a "double" has been used. Then, an item appears about Ponchitta Pierce with a supposedly new photo, but you are not told that the person in the photo is only a "lookalike." The real Ponchitta Pierce is dead, of a bullet in the head. And then, of course, once in a while there has to be a low-key item in the news about David Rockefeller. In his case, a very good "double" has been on the job since late February, and he appears occasionally in photos. One example of this took place on February 27 when the David Rockefeller "double" spoke before the Staten Island Chamber of Commerce. He had never spoken there before and so his audience never suspected that this man was not David Rockefeller. The next day the New York Times ran a brief news item about the talk, complete with a small photograph of the David Rockefeller "double" at the lectern.

But of all the disappearances I revealed last month, by far the most dangerous to the Bolsheviks is that of Dr. Henry Kissinger. For many years Kissinger was highly visible to the

American public. Any time a major new development takes place in international relations, Americans expect to see Kissinger giving his comments on television. His name is a household word and his distinctive face and guttural voice are recognized instantly by millions. These factors would have made Kissinger a great asset to his fellow Bolsheviks if he had lived, but now these very same factors are presenting the Bolsheviks with a difficult problem. Of all the missing persons, it is Kissinger whose prolonged absence from public view would be noticed first by Americans; and yet, he is also very difficult to imitate successfully enough to pass the test of prolonged television interviews with close-up shots. And so up to now the use of the "double" is only a secondary factor in the Bolshevik cover-up of Kissinger's disappearance.

In recent weeks, a well-tanned "double" for Kissinger was dispatched to Acapulco, Mexico, to lend credence to the cover-story that he was vacationing there. He has also shown up elsewhere mingling with people who do not know him well, and even speaking to such groups of people. This is the man who was seen momentarily on television three days ago in connection with the signing of the Egyptian-Israeli treaty in Washington. As the television cameras gave us a brief, instant look at this man hugging Egypt's President Sadat, we were told, "That's Henry Kissinger." In ways like this, the Kissinger "double" is playing an important role now. But the big problem facing the Bolsheviks is the television interview problem, and so far they have not been able to produce a "double" who is capable of completely solving that problem. So instead they have recently concocted a different kind of hoax using the little known technical tools of television itself. In a moment I will describe in detail how a television hoax has just been perpetrated by the Bolsheviks. The purpose of this hoax is to trick you into believing that Henry Kissinger, after disappearing for over a month, has miraculously reappeared. They will stop at nothing to make you believe this, my friends, because in order to believe that Kissinger is alive you must disbelieve what I told you last month about his permanent disappearance on February 5. That means you will also disbelieve what I told you about the other secret deaths and disappearances last month; and that means, in turn, that you will refuse to believe that a Bolshevik coup d'etat has taken place here in America. And so, my friends, you are faced with a clear choice upon which YOUR FREEDOM and YOUR LIFE depend. One choice is to keep your mind open to what I have told you—that Kissinger is dead—and decide whether the fast-growing crisis atmosphere makes sense in that light. Your only other choice is to believe what the Bolsheviks want you to believe—that is, that Kissinger is alive because "I saw him on television." Your decision about what you believe in this situation is so important that I cannot stress it enough; so before I describe the Kissinger television hoax itself, I believe it is essential that I give you some background for what is going on now.

There is nothing new about "doubles", hoaxes, and trickery by those who control the mass media. Many people think that a "double" is an exotic, rare occurrence, but actually "doubles" are relatively easy to find for those who specialize in that field. For example, in Hollywood, California, there is an agency called "Celebrity Look-Alikes, Inc." run by Ron Smith. The agency provides look-alikes for all kinds of public figures for entertainment purposes. They have over 400 look-alikes, including one for Kissinger; and not one, but two look-alikes for Jimmy Carter. One Carter look-alike is named Ed Beheler from Waco, Texas; the other named Walter Hannon is from Los Angeles. Both look so much like Carter that most people can't tell the difference. Not long ago Bob Hope illustrated this fact when he

wrote to Ed Beheler: "Dear Ed—Thanks for bringing the Jimmy Carter look and your talent to NBC for the 'All Star Comedy Tribute to Vaudeville' special. May I say your presence was somewhat unnerving. After your appearance on the set, three of the pages left immediately to pay their back taxes."

But "doubles" and other hoaxes are not always so entertaining. Since medieval times "doubles" have been used as an instrument of intrigue. History is replete with the exploits of impostors who have taken the place of the rich and the powerful, and often they have been remarkably successful. If all of this is new to you, I urge you to do your own library research. For example, one of the latest books on the whole area of hoaxes was published in 1977 by Reader's Digest—it's called "The Pleasures of Deception" by Norman Moss. Chapter 4 of the book deals with a topic that is specially relevant here—that is, hoaxes perpetrated by means of the mass media. It begins: "With the creation of the mass media, a whole new area of deception was opened up. This provided the means of fooling the whole public at the same time in the same way. Anything told through the mass media carries credibility; it is more solid than rumor, more respectable than gossip, more believable than hearsay." A few lines further on the author points out that people tend to just swallow what they read, saying "The newspapers say so and so." He might have added, "I saw it on television." The psychological key to all this is explained in the words: "This authority stems partly from the fact that the media, and particularly the news media, deal with public issues that are beyond the experience of most of its audience." In other words, if we don't know any better, we just believe what we are told. Still you may say, "Surely the great major media of the United States are not used for really serious distortions. It just couldn't happen here." Well, my friends, it began happening here over 80 years ago.

I've pointed out on several past occasions that America began selling her soul at the time of the build-up to the Spanish-American War. Spain was dragged into war by the United States, and American public opinion eagerly welcomed the war. The Hearst newspaper chain deliberately whipped up American passions to the point where the cries of "Remember the Maine" led America into a national crime against Spain. Later on, the gross distortions and outright lies by the Hearst media came out publicly; but by then the damage was done, and the American public did not cry out in anger over the trickery nor insist that we make amends to Spain. Instead, we were too puffed up over being suddenly a world power. With that, we began to blind ourselves to the dangers of media lies. It has gotten worse and worse, and we have become more and more blind. The major media have fallen ever more completely under centralized control, and have become increasingly powerful and ruthless. In June 1972, a national scandal called "Watergate" began, and from start to finish it was orchestrated by the controlled major media. The media script to destroy first Vice-President Spiro Agnew and then President Richard Nixon was incredibly detailed. For example, beginning early in 1973 I was able to reveal on radio Talk Shows all over America that the face of Spiro Agnew was scheduled to appear on the covers of Time and Newsweek for the week of August 13, 1973. That was to be the signal for Agnew to be cut down fast by scandal. Everything went off exactly as planned. Agnew did appear on the covers of Time and Newsweek right on schedule, and less than three months later he left office under the cloud of scandal. I revealed more about the Watergate scandal in the past, and there is no time to review all of that again now. The point is this: the controlled major media of the United States have proved themselves to be powerful enough to bring on a war, or to end a presidency; and now they are under the control of the

International Bolsheviks—the most diabolical, crafty, and ruthless people ever to stalk the earth. Regardless of the other details, their schemes always have one key ingredient in common—that is to instill trust in their intended victims until the moment of vicious attack. And that, my friends, is what they are trying to do to you now by means of their television hoax about Henry Kissinger's seeming reappearance.

The Kissinger television hoax began early this month, March 1979. My Audio Letter No. 43 had been recorded on February 28 and began reaching subscribers the first few days of this month. Within days the Bolsheviks began their counterattack in an effort to discredit what I had revealed about Kissinger's disappearance. As a preliminary step, an interview of Kissinger was shown on the NBC "Today Show" of March 9. Jimmy Carter was then in the midst of his trip to Egypt and Israel, and the topic of the NBC interview with Kissinger was the Middle East; and yet, Kissinger made no reference to the Carter trip then under way. Instead he spoke in generalities that were months out of date. Many viewers all over the United States recognized the interview segment as having been shown before by NBC, and many stations received complaining telephone calls about it; but the "Today Show" episode was only a stopgap measure. The master hoax took place just four days ago on the NBC television interview program "Meet the Press."

My friends, the history of "Meet the Press" is like the story of America's entire network of major media news sources in miniature. "Meet the Press" was started as a radio show here in Washington in the late 40's by my friend of 30 years, Martha Roundtree. As a highly intelligent woman and a real patriot, Martha Roundtree ran "Meet the Press" in such a way that it truly informed Americans with all sides of an issue. But in the late 50's she was pressured into selling "Meet the Press", which quickly lost its former award-winning quality. Meanwhile, she found herself systematically blackballed from introducing any fresh news programs anywhere in the broadcast media. Just as happened to me a decade later, Martha Roundtree was discriminated against and locked out; and just as I am doing now, she has for some time been informing Americans as best she can by other means. For those who would like to know more, you may write to her at:

Leadership Foundation, Box 1720, Washington, D.C., zip 20013.

Her current project is called "Proposition One - The Great Awakening", and it is a program to restore the moral and spiritual values to our nation. You can receive a free brochure about it if you will enclose a stamped self-addressed business envelope with your letter.

Returning to "Meet the Press", control recently passed to NBC itself. Unlike individual radio and TV stations, the networks are completely unregulated by the FCC. Now "Meet the Press" has joined other network programming as a vehicle of propaganda, answerable to no one. This past Sunday, March 25, NBC fed a "Meet the Press" program to affiliated stations nation-wide featuring Henry Kissinger as the guest; and, my friends, that was the real Henry Kissinger answering questions; but in exactly the same way, the real Clark Gable was also seen on television recently in "Gone with the Wind." Both men looked alive on television, but in actuality both men are dead. But, my friends, the "Meet the Press" program of last Sunday was much more than a mere re-run of an old tape—it was carefully doctored so that Kissinger appeared to be answering new and up-to-date questions. When you hear how it was done, I believe you will understand why there were so many strange things about that program, and you

will also see that NBC went to a great deal of trouble to produce an artificial and falsified edition of "Meet the Press" last Sunday. It had only one purpose and that was to deceive you.

Under his million-dollar a year contract with NBC, Kissinger was periodically taping interviews to be kept on hand for instant use whenever they might prove useful. All of Kissinger's answers that you saw and heard last Sunday were taped over two months ago on Saturday, January 20, 1979; but that session was not shown the next day on "Meet the Press." Instead, the guest that day was Leonard Woodcock, newly designated Ambassador to Red China. The footage you saw last Sunday of the panelists on "Meet the Press" was taped early that same morning, March 25. Each of the four panelists asked questions which were designed to fit Kissinger's answers of two months ago. In addition, several scenes were shot using a look-alike to be used at commercial breaks and at the end. In these brief scenes the panel were seen on the left of your screen facing the alleged Kissinger on the right; and as you may have noticed, the Kissinger stand-in sat as still as a zombi in those scenes without saying a word. Finally, computerized video tape editing techniques were used to splice together the new questions, Kissinger's old answers, and the 'break' scenes. The net result was "Meet the Press" for March 25, 1979—a TV hoax by NBC.

The March 25 "Meet the Press" hoax preceded by only one day the signing of the so-called Egyptian-Israeli Peace Treaty here in Washington. The treaty is the end product of a process begun by Kissinger's own famous shuttle diplomacy, so the treaty should have been a prominent topic among the questions; and yet, the fact is that not one single question was asked about the treaty. No one asked Kissinger the obvious question: "What do you think of the treaty?" Instead, the illusion of an up-to-date program was conveyed by means of clever wording of questions by the two NBC representatives—Bill Monroe and Richard Valeriani. In each case a passing reference to the treaty was made in the course of asking about something else, such as the perennial West Bank problem; and during the entire program, Kissinger himself used the word "treaty" only in two brief sentences. These were edited into the beginning of the program for maximum psychological effect, but they said only what Kissinger began saying over six months ago that we will be better off with a treaty than without one. The two NBC representatives dominated the program asking 12 out of the total of 21 questions, and except for the deceptive references to a "treaty", the entire program was strangely out of date. For example, one question about the Middle East had to do with the prospects after Begin leaves office. With Begin here in Washington in triumph for the treaty signing, such a question was ridiculous; but two months ago when Kissinger was taped, rumors were widespread that Begin might resign shortly. Likewise one question about Nicaragua, of all things, was of current interest two months ago; but today? Even the questions about Iran were two months behind the times. There was not one word about the so-called Khomeini government of today. Instead, the questions and Kissinger's answers revolved around the fall of the Shah and who was to blame for it. When Kissinger was taped on January 20, those questions were right up-to-date because the Shah had just left Iran only four days earlier on January 16. But who is talking about the Shah today?

My friends, what is most revealing about last Sunday's "Meet the Press" hoax is what was not asked. Kissinger played a key role in opening America's doors to Red China, yet there was not a word about the visit here by Deng Hsiao-ping last month. There was a flash-back question about Kissinger's role years ago in regard to Vietnam, Cambodia, and Chile; yet China's just

completed border war with Vietnam was not even mentioned. We have heard stories for weeks that Kissinger was vacationing in Mexico last month, yet Kissinger was asked nothing to shed light on the hostile reception Jimmy Carter received there last month. And strangest of all, there was not a word to acknowledge Kissinger's alleged 'terrible grief' over the death of Nelson Rockefeller.

In the dream world of last Sunday's "Meet the Press" hoax, it was as if none of these things had ever happened—and that is only natural, my friends, because when Kissinger was taped on January 20, they had not happened yet. Kissinger did not even have the impressive tan he was supposed to have gotten in Mexico; instead, he appeared pale and unusually nervous. The nervousness, my friends, was due to the fact that on January 20 Kissinger knew that his own conspiratorial activities would lead to the murder of Nelson Rockefeller only six days later.

My friends, the "Meet the Press" hoax was an act of desperation by the Bolsheviks. They want desperately for you to swallow it whole, to say "Of course Kissinger is alive. I saw him on television." If you do that, you will be your own worst enemy in the Bolshevik game-plan. They cannot keep up this charade for very long, but they are only playing for time—and not much time at that! Timetables have slipped before, but the Bolshevik target date to start shutting down our freedoms is the middle of May, only six weeks from now; and after the Bolshevik death grip is around our throats, they could not care less if we then realize that we have been tricked, because then it will be too late.

Topic #2—For hundreds of years doubles, look-alikes, and impostors have been recurring facts of life throughout modern civilization. Where the rich and the powerful and the ruling classes are involved, the pattern is always the same. Quoting once again from the book I cited earlier, THE PLEASURES OF DECEPTION: "A monarch or heir to the throne dies but in circumstances which leave the possibility of doubting that he really did die, at least to those who want to doubt it, and claimants come forward."

When one considers the enormous empire which the late four Rockefeller brothers presided over, the attractions for impostors are overwhelming and there is no need to resort to confidential information to recognize this much. For example, you might look over the book titled THE ROCKEFELLERS by Peter Collier and David Horowitz published in 1976 by Holt, Reinhart and Winston. It reveals such a major role in history and such family wealth that anyone who could get control of it all would put themselves in a very powerful position. The plunderers would gain not only the wealth and assets but the power that goes with controlling the dynasty's fortune. If the heads of the dynasty were to vanish from the scene without this becoming widely known, the way would be opened for doubles and impostors to enter the picture. The whole empire could be taken over without eliminating anyone except the very closest associates of those who had secretly disappeared.

Last month I revealed that the Rockefeller family empire has now been placed in exactly this vulnerable condition. All four of the third generation Rockefeller brothers have been killed in a Bolshevik coup d'etat behind the scenes, and the deaths of the last two—David on February 9 and Laurance on February 17—are being kept secret. Even the surviving members of the Rockefeller family who know about it, the widows and the members of the fourth generation, are keeping quiet about it. As I mentioned

last month, they have been led to believe wrongly that silence is in their own best interest. And so the plundering of the Rockefeller family fortune is now underway in earnest. On one hand the Bolshevik purge of those who were closest to the four brothers is continuing. The most conspicuous case of this lately was the murder of Dr. John Knowles, president of the Rockefeller Foundation, early this month on March 6. He was shot in the head. At the same time, doubles for David Rockefeller are now playing an important role in the Bolshevik plundering of the Rockefeller family fortune. Ironically the most vulnerable part of the whole Rockefeller financial complex is its heart, the mammoth Chase-Manhattan Bank.

For many years the late David Rockefeller was preoccupied with manipulating the world-wide tentacles of the Rockefeller cartel. One day he would be somewhere in the United States presiding over a meeting to coordinate the actions of huge multinational corporations; next, it might be a rush trip by private jet to the Middle East to patch up some problem there. For example, when David Rockefeller got word that his brother Nelson was dead on January 26, he was in Oman pressuring the Bank of Oman to stop buying gold. Had he not returned here for that emergency, his next stop might have been Singapore or Tokyo. On and on it went, always on the move. The world was David Rockefeller's oyster and he all but ignored the pearl at the center, his own Chase-Manhattan Bank. His constant travels made David Rockefeller a stranger in his own bank in recent years, he was so seldom there; and thereby without realizing it he developed a fatal weakness in his pattern of behavior. Like his brother Nelson, David Rockefeller had been subjected to psychological profile studies without his knowledge; and as with Nelson, David's weakness was discovered. He was not minding the store—that is, the Chase Manhattan Bank.

As I mentioned last month, the closest associates of David Rockefeller would not be fooled for long in an intimate meeting with a "double"; but those close associates, my friends, are scattered world-wide, they are not found at Chase-Manhattan Bank. And so the David Rockefeller doubles are using the Bank itself as the "open sesame" to plunder the Rockefeller family riches. Obeying instructions, they are ordering the transfer of tremendous sums of money out of Chase-Manhattan Bank and into Bolshevik coffers here and abroad. Meanwhile they are keeping up the image of the late David Rockefeller by darting around on quick trips here and there. In this, they are being assisted by Bolshevik agents within the fabric of the Rockefeller network of banks, businesses, and publications. By means of the David Rockefeller doubles and other actions, the Bolsheviks are working like a swarm of termites eating away the assets of Chase-Manhattan Bank from within. Other banks, here and abroad too, are being affected by this process. Already Columbia University in New York has begun dumping millions of dollars worth of bank stocks including that of Chase-Manhattan. And in a portent of things to come, a subsidiary of Chase-Manhattan Bank has just filed for bankruptcy. When Chase-Manhattan itself collapses, it will have staggering consequences for the banking system of the entire world.

Last month I revealed the beginning of the plundering of the Rockefeller family fortune. At that time the Rockefeller fourth generation members did not know what was afoot. Now they do know but are at a loss of what to do about it. The four third-generation brothers always kept tight control over the Rockefeller empire. As a result, the fourth generation Rockefellers were always left in the dark about what the Brothers were up to and without any control over their own assets. But I

believe now is the time to remind the fourth generation members of the Rockefeller family and also the third generation widows of the one time when they did exert their collective muscle and make it stick. I am referring to the June 1974 conclave of 84 members of the Rockefeller family. The top item on the agenda for that conclave was to answer the question: "What shall we do about Dr. Beter?" The four brothers—John D. Ill, Nelson, Laurance and David—argued that I should be "taken care of" before I could become well-enough known to be dangerous to their plans. Two months earlier I had testified before Congress about the missing gold at Fort Knox. The Brothers had easily prevented Congress from investigating my charges, but now I was going public with the story. The Brothers did not admit that my charges were true in the conclave, only that they were dangerous; and they urged that I be silenced quickly by whatever means. But my friends, the fourth generation said "No." The Brothers were told in no uncertain terms that the fourth generation would have no part in such a plan. As a result, the Brothers decided instead simply to ignore me, to force me off the Radio Talk Shows on which I had been appearing and to let me say whatever I wanted since I would be denied an audience.

My friends, over the past several years I have been asked countless times, "Why are you alive?" My basic answer is that I trust in the Lord Jesus Christ to protect me, and He has done so. But one of the concrete examples of that protection was the action taken nearly five years ago by the fourth generation Rockefellers. So if you have ever wondered why I have always made such a sharp distinction between the four Rockefeller brothers and the rest of the family, now you know. In all likelihood, they saved my life. Now I would like to repay them if only they will listen. If they will meet once again in conclave, they will discover that there are concrete steps by which they can retake control of what remains of the Rockefeller empire for the good of all Americans. As I explained last month, the interests of the surviving members of the Rockefeller family are now identical with those of all patriotic Americans; and so if they will seize this brief opportunity now, they can not only save what remains of their own assets but, more importantly, help save America.

My friends, the Rockefeller survivors have a golden opportunity now to redeem themselves and the family name. By acting now they can truly become the benefactors of society which their forebearers only pretended to be. But I must add this final observation as well: if the Rockefellers do not take courage and act as I have said, history shows clearly what their fate will be. Whenever the heads of a dynasty are overthrown or killed, those responsible always seek out and kill all survivors to make sure the dynasty can never rise again. That is what the Bolsheviks have in store for the entire Rockefeller family IF THEY DO NOT NOW ACT to prevent it!

Topic #3—Three days ago on March 26, 1979, the Washington air was filled with the promises of 'Peace, Peace' that always pave the way for war. Shortly before noon that day, Egypt's President Sadat and Israel's Prime Minister Begin joined Jimmy Carter on the lawn of the White House. In a dramatic open-air ceremony, the Egyptian-Israeli Peace Treaty was signed. Then Sadat and Begin each spoke in glowing terms about achieving, after 30 years of hostility, peace between Egypt and Israel. Even Mrs. Sadat and Mrs. Begin had their turn, side by side at the microphones. Echoing the feelings of wives and mothers everywhere, Mrs. Sadat spoke of the blessings of no longer having to look forward to more war, suffering, and death. And in a display of pure joy, she abruptly leaned over and embraced Mrs. Begin. But that same

afternoon, with the ink barely dry on the so-called "Peace Treaty", the Carter administration quietly signed two separate agreements with Israel. In one agreement the United States has now given Israel an unconditional guarantee that it will receive all the oil it needs for the next 15 years. This agreement means that Israel will be completely unaffected by the coming destruction of Middle Eastern oil fields, and it is to remain in force no matter how severe the rationing will become here in America. The other agreement or Memorandum of Understanding pledges the United States to go to war against Egypt should the treaty break down. Egypt was not warned in advance about this second American-Israeli agreement and has reacted as if she had been betrayed, which she was! Meanwhile Israel's Prime Minister Begin has been gloating over this agreement in public, calling it "A beautiful document, well written, and what it contains is very important."

My friends, what we are seeing now is the culmination of the late Henry Kissinger's "shuttle diplomacy" of three and four years ago. In Audio Letter No. 6 for November 1975, I explained what the SINAI ACCORD was all about. It consisted of a pair of treaties—one between the United States and Israel, the other between the United States and Egypt—and the purpose of the Sinai Accord was to lay the groundwork for a Middle East war that would involve the United States. As I said then, the Middle East war plan was to involve a limited nuclear strike against Arab OPEC oil wells jointly by the United States and Israel.

Since I first revealed this basic plan over three years ago, events have caused it to be delayed and revised several times but now it is moving along fast as part of the Bolsheviks' game-plan. They want to use the coming Middle East crisis to shut down America in a Bolshevik revolution before going to war against Russia; and right now cadres of Bolsheviks are pouring into the United States, most all of them experienced in revolution tactics and strategy. Shortly before the Bolshevik revolution of 1917, the ruling circles of the United States sent more than 1,500 of these people to Russia to foment revolution. Now they are returning to do the same thing here in the United States.

Beginning with the strange death of John D. Rockefeller III eight months ago, control of America began shifting rapidly to these Satanic Bolsheviks; and last August 1978 in Audio Letter No. 37, I was able to reveal their master strategy to build up to a nuclear first strike against Russia. It's a prescription for up to 350-million people to die world-wide, all to no avail. But it's "do or die" for the Bolsheviks. They would rather have all of us die than to give up their own dreams of total WORLD DOMINATION, and the key to this catastrophic plan lies in igniting the long-delayed Middle East war.

We have already been given a sample of what lies ahead for us in the Jonestown, Guyana tragedy. Four months ago I devoted Audio Letter No. 40 in its entirety to the military operation that took place there and the role played in that operation by the mass murder. As I revealed then, Israeli Commandoes were the key to the success of the operation. It wiped out the secret Russian Missile Base I began warning about over four years ago. My friends, the joint American-Israeli operation in Guyana was only a dress rehearsal for the coming joint American-Israeli limited nuclear strike against Saudi Arabian oil fields. In Audio Letter No. 37 I explained how the plan was to begin with the supposedly surprise success in the Camp David talks last September. The goal was to be an eventual treaty between Egypt and Israel set up in such a way as to drag in the United States, and now this situation is a fact, and the "Hate Saudi Arabia"

campaign is also far advanced—right on track, as I reviewed it in Audio Letter No. 41. Soon a major manufactured incident in the Middle East will scuttle the Peace Treaty. The ensuing nuclear destruction of Saudi Arabia's oil fields will give the rulers of both Israel and the United States what they want. Freed of any concern about her own oil supplies, Israel will be free to destroy the engine of Arab economic power—oil revenues; and the resultant cut-off of oil supplies will give our Bolshevik rulers here in America the excuse to shut down our freedoms under the guise of a NATIONAL EMERGENCY. Quickly then they plan to bring us all under total regimentation as America gradually shifts onto a full war footing.

My friends, the time left to us is very short, and yet there is one last chance left IF WE WILL TAKE IT. The rulers of Russia today are Christians. Right now the 'actor Pope' who masquerades as the dead Pope John Paul II is preparing to create trouble in Poland. By contrast, Russia has just invited over 200 Polish priests into Russia to begin opening monasteries, schools, and churches there. Two years ago I began asking: "Where are the churches in this hour of need?" !! I urge now that American church leaders at all levels and from all denominations band together for a "Pilgrimage for Peace" to Moscow. Pastors and other church leaders who want life and freedom for America, instead of death and destruction, can do this for our Lord Jesus Christ. Therefore, I urge you to call my business number here in Washington, D.C.—Area Code 202-659-3999.

Give me your name, address, telephone number, and what your church position is so that you can be contacted later. My friends, it's up to YOU to make sure Christian leaders and church leaders all over America hear this message in time to respond by April 30, 1979.

When I record Audio Letter No. 45 next month, God willing, I plan to tell you whether or not American church leaders have responded in great enough numbers to rise to this occasion. If that takes place, and a massive pilgrimage of church leaders can be formed to visit the Kremlin leaders, perhaps they can be convinced that the Bolsheviks have not infiltrated all of our churches. And if that is true, perhaps we can turn aside the BOLSHEVIK WAR PLAN; but if church leaders here do not respond, Russia's leaders will continue to believe as they do now. They are convinced that what happened to the Russian Orthodox Church 60 years ago has now happened to the churches here in America; and if that is true, then God help us all.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #45

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is April 27, 1979, and this is my Audio Letter #45.

This evening the last in a 10-part special series of reports called "Second to None?" was shown on ABC's World News Tonight program. For two entire weeks the series has drummed away night after night about America's military weakness compared to Russia. Full-page newspaper ads have urged viewers to watch the series; so have various newspaper articles. And the series itself has carried so much impact that it has made an indelible impression

on millions of Americans. Most of all, the nine-minute installment on April 17 describing the outbreak of nuclear war between Russia and America left many viewers badly shaken. The frightening picture painted in the ABC news series is accurate as far as it goes, but it also would have been accurate three to four years ago. We were not shown these things then, so the question is: WHY NOW? One reason that has been given is that we might be about to sign the SALT II treaty with Russia, and that we ought to look before we leap. But if that were the real reason, a series like this should have been shown more than 18 months ago; because that is when SALT I expired and the air was full of promises of a new SALT treaty then.

My friends, the people who put together the ABC documentary series did a very good job indeed; but the reason our Bolshevik rulers want it to be shown now is to help add to the atmosphere of war tensions. They also want to make sure that SALT II, if it is signed, will generate a storm of controversy and be defeated in the Senate. If that happens, it will be like closing the door to peace and telling the world that war with Russia is inevitable. In more and more ways the atmosphere of mounting crisis and the threat of war is being stoked up by the Bolsheviks here in America. The low drum beat of BRING BACK THE DRAFT keeps coming back over and over, a little louder each time. The specter of gas rationing keeps haunting the news as the artificial crisis in the Middle East heats up. For example, former Defense Secretary Melvin Laird now says the government should institute gas rationing just to make the crisis seem more real to people. Can you imagine?

My friends, I realize that today, as in the past, many people are skeptical about what I have to reveal. After all, these things are probably contrary to what they have heard from friends, family, teachers, and the news media. They do not have my intelligence sources; and if I were to reveal these sources, they would dry up. But I believe that my duty is simply to reveal the truth—not cover it up just because it may be hard to accept.

This month events have been moving very fast in startling ways. Four days ago I said over the Ed Busch Show on WFAA, Dallas, Texas, that the take-over here in the United States has already taken place. The people you will see on your television screens are not the people you think they are! Now I can say more.

My three topics this month are:

Topic #1—THE DOMESTIC GUYANA AT THREE MILE ISLAND

Topic #2—THE SECRET INTELLIGENCE WAR OF "DOUBLES"

Topic #3—LAST CALL FOR A "PILGRIMAGE FOR PEACE"

Topic #1—As dawn was breaking over Pennsylvania 30 days ago on March 28, it looked like the beginning of just another ordinary day. It was a Wednesday and there were jobs to go to, schools to attend, errands to run. The streets of Harrisburg, the capital city, were coming to life as people began their day's activities. East of the city the rich farm lands of the Pennsylvania Dutch country were coming to life with the bloom of spring. For generations the Pennsylvania Dutch have been famous for their life close to God and far from modern technology; but on that Wednesday morning of March 28, 1979, the Pennsylvania Dutch were completing their first year with a landmark of modern technology almost on their doorstep. It was the THREE MILE ISLAND NUCLEAR

POWER PLANT located in the Susquehanna River southeast of Harrisburg.

In the first rays of morning light the distinctive outlines of the nuclear plant gave no hint of the danger within it. The plant appeared quiet and peaceful; in fact, quieter than normal. Two of the four giant cooling towers 37 stories high had stopped belching steam. That meant one of the two nuclear reactors on the Island had been shut down for some reason; and, in fact, some residents near the power plant had been awakened in the pre-dawn hours by a thundering roar of escaping steam. But no one seemed to be really worried. A few minutes before 7:00 AM someone close to the plant might have detected the first clear signal that something ominous was happening. An emergency siren began to wail telling workers to abandon immediately certain critical areas of the power plant. Several workers made a dash for their cars in an attempt to escape. Two cars raced out of the power plant site across the bridge to freedom—then the gate was closed to make sure no one else could leave! A few minutes later at 7:02 AM officials of Metropolitan Edison called the Dauphin County Civil Defense authorities. A site emergency had just been declared at the nuclear powerplant. By this time, Three Mile Island Plant No. 2 had already been in a state of growing crisis for more than three hours; and for nearly an hour the computer designed to monitor conditions inside the reactor had been printing question marks instead of numbers. The reactor was overheating so badly that the computer system could no longer measure the temperatures.

It had all begun shortly after 3:00 AM when trouble developed in a key water pump. Soon the pump failed, halting the flow of water to the steam-driven power turbine. Automatic devices immediately shut down the turbine in a situation known as a "turbine trip." Superheated steam at enormous pressures was diverted from the turbine and vented to the outside, producing the thunderous roar that wakened nearby residents. At the same time, other automatic devices were shutting down the nuclear reactor itself in a so-called "scram"—that is, a rapid emergency shutdown. Normally when a nuclear reactor is started up or shut down, it is done gradually. This allows temperatures throughout the reactor to rise or fall gently, avoiding thermal stresses that might do damage. It also allows the start-up or shutdown process to be monitored carefully at every step to make sure nothing unexpected happens. But on that Wednesday morning of March 28 there was no time for all that. With the pump failure and "turbine trip", the nuclear reactor was left producing enormous quantities of heat that had no place to go. So the automatic control system "scrammed" the reactor. Within seconds, all the reactor's control rods were dropped into the core to make the fission chain reaction die away. But even with the rods in place, the hot reactor was still generating heat, at a slower rate. So to cool it down, the automatic control system turned on three big standby pumps—two were meant to flood the reactor core with cooling water, while the third had a related safety purpose. The three pumps roared to life, but nothing happened. There was no water for them to pump, because before the episode began someone had turned off the valves ahead of the pumps. It was far more than a mere breach of regulations! Shutting those valves was an act that could not have been more expertly calculated to bring on a potential catastrophe. All three valves were closed, thereby defeating the redundancy which was built into the backup systems for safety purposes. It was an unthinkable thing to do! It threatened a power plant worth nearly one billion dollars with possible destruction. It threatened untold thousands of lives; and if done by an employee, it even threatened the life of whoever closed the valves. It was, in short, a kamikaze act of

sabotage!! But perhaps because it was so unthinkable, it worked.

A number of workers have stated that they noticed the valves closed and tagged in the days just before March 28; and everyone who worked in the vicinity of the valves knew very well how critical they were. So the tendency was to assume that there must be some good reason why they had been closed. After all, they even had tags to show that they were closed. It was an obvious and serious violation of safety procedures, but it seemed unthinkable that this could be unauthorized and deliberate. And so the valves remained closed, and no one did anything to correct the situation. In this way, the stage was set for Wednesday, March 28, 1979. As the reactor was "scrammed", the backup pumps screamed in vain, trying to draw water through valves that were closed. No fresh water went to the reactor to cool it, pressures built up in the reactor, and a safety valve popped open. Superheated radioactive water began flashing out of the reactor into the huge concrete containment dome, and the water level started dropping in the reactor itself. Then the valve stuck open, instead of closing as it was supposed to do. Radioactive water kept right on gushing out of the reactor. Strangely, it was more than two hours before the Control Room button was pushed to stop radioactive water from escaping.

My friends, all this was going on while neighbors of Three Mile Island were drifting back to sleep. They had been awakened by the brief roar of vented steam when the turbine tripped, but then all had quieted down again. All seemed peaceful and normal again around the nuclear power plant; but inside the Control Room of Three Mile Island No. 2, claxons were blaring, alarms were ringing, and trouble lights were flashing. The reactor was fast losing water and heating up rapidly. Soon the last-ditch emergency cooling system automatically turned on; but within a few minutes one of the emergency pumps was shut off by person or persons unknown for unexplained reasons. Six minutes later the same was done to the other emergency cooling pump—once again redundant emergency systems had been thwarted by human intervention! Soon there was a radioactive pool of water on the floor of the huge containment dome where it had spilled out of the reactor. Sump pumps began sucking the water out of there into a nearby auxiliary building which is not equipped to seal in radioactive materials. From there radioactive materials soon began to filter outside to be carried downwind.

Strangely enough, while pumps critical to safety were being turned off right and left, the one pump that should have been turned off, the sump pump, was left running! As a result, it was guaranteed that radiation from the reactor would find its way outside to contaminate the countryside. Within 20 minutes after the episode began, someone discovered that all the water to the reactor had been cut off, and took corrective action. Cooling water began rushing into the reactor, and for a while the situation was under control. But within an hour, the unthinkable happened again! All four water pumps were quietly turned off again, and the reactor started heating up fast. Soon the monitoring computer began printing question marks, thousands of small cylinders of uranium fuel in the reactor began coming apart at the seams with heat, highly radioactive uranium and fission products bubbled out of the reactor with the still-escaping water.

At 7:02 AM the first call was placed to Civil Defense. By 7:20 AM Metropolitan Edison had to call Civil Defense officials again. Radiation levels in the containment dome were skyrocketing, and now the Three Mile Island situation had been upgraded to a general emergency. Yet, to the public at large,

there still was no word that anything was wrong at Three Mile Island. Thousands of commuters in Harrisburg drove to work without a hint on their car radios that anything unusual was taking place. Mothers hurried to get their children packed off to school on time, farmers in the neighboring countryside set about their daily chores without giving the nuclear plant a second thought. Meanwhile traces of radioactive uranium and fission products from the crippled reactor were already wafting downwind and beginning to contaminate the Pennsylvania landscape for miles around.

It was not until 9:06 AM, more than five hours after the episode began, that any public notice of the emergency was given. It was a brief report over the Associated Press news wire marked "Urgent" to the effect that a general emergency was underway at Three Mile Island. From then on, Three Mile Island became like a domestic Guyana story—and in more ways than one! Like Guyana, it captured the headlines for a week and more; like Guyana, it seemed unthinkable—and yet there it was right before our eyes. Just as with Guyana, news stories about the events at Three Mile Island were marked by confusion; and in Pennsylvania as in Guyana, large numbers of innocent American civilians were the victims. In Guyana they were poisoned by means of potassium cyanide; in Pennsylvania thousands have been poisoned by varying amounts of radioactive uranium and its fission products, such as xenon and krypton gases.

Right now doctors in the vicinity of Three Mile Island are reporting many patients who are now exhibiting symptoms such as nausea, headaches, diarrhea, nervousness, insomnia, and eye trouble. Many doctors are not aware of it, but these are among the classic symptoms of low-level radiation poisoning. The Government is telling a half truth in saying that the contamination from Three Mile Island should not lead to an increase in cancer. The reason is that the particular elements released in the nuclear accident do not cause cancer but other disorders. The word cancer, for that matter, has been turned into a medical scare word that hides more than it reveals. "Cancer" is a Latin word meaning "crab." It is used to describe a certain kind of growth or tumor that grows with tentacles in various directions, giving it a crab-like appearance. What makes cancer so frightening is that it grows fast, consuming healthy tissue as it goes; so any tumor that grows rapidly is labeled as cancer, while tumors that remain stable or grow very slowly are usually called "benign."

In the 1920's Dr. Otto Warburg earned the Nobel Prize for determining exactly what cancer really is. He was able to prove that the malady called cancer is just a condition of blocked cell oxidation. Today, more than 50 years later, we hear year in and year out about new ideas about what cancer might be. Meanwhile Warburg's conclusive findings of long ago are ignored. Billions of dollars and millions of lives have been wasted over the years in efforts to figure out how to kill cancer when it occurs. The reality, my friends, is that cancer is itself the conversion of normal tissue into a kind of living death. True elimination of cancer can only be achieved not by agents of death, but by restoring life.

In the area surrounding Three Mile Island though, cancer is not the problem. Uranium and its derivatives can produce a fungus that leads to lumps and tumors which often are misdiagnosed as cancer. If the fungus enters the bloodstream, it produces a disease known as cystic fibrosis. With this disease, the entire body undergoes weakening and gradual degeneration. It often strikes children, and is usually considered fatal. The

best protection against these disorders produced by radiation as well as against cancer and other diseases is to make sure your body cells are provided with the things they need to stay healthy. A key to this lies in four key minerals which need to be in proper balance in your body at all times. The therapeutic value of these minerals was established by Dr. Wilhelm Schussler of Basel, Switzerland a century ago and has been confirmed in countless ways since then. In order of importance, these four are: potassium, calcium, magnesium, and sodium. It is best to obtain these four minerals in as non-toxic a form as possible. Ordinary table salt, for example, is sodium chloride—an inorganic poison to the cell. It has to be de-toxified by the liver and companion organs of the body before assimilation. Likewise, many forms of potassium are toxic, even though potassium is vital to good health. So it is important to get these minerals in an organic form—such as citrate, gluconate, or oyster shells. In the United States proper supplements like these are especially important because most American food is badly demineralized, and this is most true of potassium, the most vital mineral of all.

The episode at Three Mile Island blanketed hundreds of square miles and possibly a million people with low-level radiation; but the miracle is that it was not much worse than it was, for most of the radioactive materials released during the episode are still confined to the power plant site itself. The huge concrete containment dome around the reactor became so radioactive inside that no one could enter it without dying almost instantly; and the reactor itself was damaged so badly that today, 30 days later, the shutdown of the reactor is just reaching its final stages. The damage and contamination at Three Mile Island Plant No. 2 are so extreme that there are serious doubts as to whether it can ever be cleaned up and used again. Already there have been suggestions by some that it should be encased in a tomb of concrete and abandoned.

My friend, that is an echo of the suggestion I made about the United States Bullion Depository at Fort Knox 3-1/2 years ago in Audio Letter No. 5. The Depository had been contaminated by a leaking radioactive CIA superpoison secretly stored there, and it remains contaminated to this day. Three Mile Island has proven that there are great potential hazards from nuclear power plants, but those proven hazards lie in the area of vulnerability to sabotage that can produce terrible consequences. The available evidence strongly indicates that the emergency at Three Mile Island was not an accident—it was a criminal act. Its effect is to help speed up the plan to shut down American freedoms by means of energy shortages, economic disruptions, and government controls.

Five months ago in Audio Letter No. 40, I revealed in detail how hundreds of American civilians had been deliberately sacrificed by the American government in Guyana, and why. I warned then that the gruesome tragedy at Jonestown, Guyana, is only a pale shadow of what lies ahead for the entire United States if the cancer of Bolshevism is not stopped. And now, a domestic Guyana has taken place at Three Mile Island. A completely unnatural sequence of events took place causing a nuclear crisis to take place which had never even been analyzed in official studies.

Those responsible—the Bolsheviks among us—were hoping to achieve a full-fledged disaster at Three Mile Island with massive releases of radiation. This would have killed many people outright, sickened many more, and required a mass evacuation of several counties in the Harrisburg area. That would have

accomplished two things. For one thing, it would have increased the general air of crisis, of emergency, and of a need for decisive federal action; but, more importantly, it would have turned all nuclear power plants into objects of fear and hate by the American public. This would have justified an immediate shutdown of all 70 nuclear power plants across the United States. In one blow America would have lost 13% of its electric power. The virtual rationing of electricity by various means would have followed quickly as one means of tightening governmental control over American life. But the Three Mile Island episode never quite reached the level of catastrophe except in terms of damage to the power plant itself, and so the Bolshevik plan for now is to settle for half a loaf.

Three Mile Island Plant No. 2 was built by a company named Babcock & Wilcox, which has also built eight other nuclear plants, including the No. 1 plant on Three Mile Island; so the plan now is to blame that company in various ways and to shut down those eight plants, as was ordered today by the Nuclear Regulatory Commission. In the areas affected, the cutbacks in electric power will have the disruptive effects planned by the Bolsheviks. The Bolshevik scheme to rob America of part of its electric power by shutting down the nuclear plants is elaborate. In recent months, controversy over nuclear power has been stirred up to unprecedented levels, and in mid March two actions were taken to set the stage for Three Mile Island. First, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission abruptly shut down five plants in the northeast, ostensibly over earthquake worries; then the movie, "The China Syndrome", was released—and, my friends, there is more to come. By means of Bolshevik coup d'etat and revolution an international group who were once more powerful than the Rockefellers are making a new bid for power here in America. But the outcome in the turbulent events now going on behind the scenes is impossible to predict, because there is now a clandestine war going on involving not one but several major intelligence agencies. The prize: CONTROL OF AMERICA!!

Topic #2—Long before the American Revolution for Independence, a famous principle was formulated in Europe. It was:

"GIVE ME THE POWER TO ISSUE A NATION'S MONEY, AND I CARE NOT WHO WRITES THE LAWS."

The man who originated this dictum used it to launch a family dynasty of unprecedented wealth and power. His name: MAYER AMSCHEL ROTHSCHILD (pronounced as Rothsheeld). The power of the Rothschilds, or Rothschilds (pronounced with long "i") as many people call them, grew fast in Britain and Europe. By the time of the American Revolution, the financial affairs especially of Britain and France were in the Rothschild pocket. The taxation schemes which brought on the Revolution actually originated not with King George but in the House of Rothschild. After the Revolution, Rothschild agents were on hand to try to return America to Rothschild control. One of the most powerful of these was Alexander Hamilton, but his maneuverings were ended by the famous duel with Aaron Burr. America managed to steer clear of Rothschild control until the Civil War provided a new opportunity. In Audio Letter No. 2 6 I mentioned how Russia, then the greatest Christian nation on earth, came to America's rescue in 1863. Britain and France were preparing to dismantle the United States, but Russia prevented it. For that and other reasons, the Rothschilds thereafter marked Russia for utter destruction. At the same time the Rothschilds were determined to take over America and decided to do it by promoting powerful groups already within our country. The era of America's robber barons was spawned and with it a new superdynasty—the

ROCKEFELLERS. By 1917 Rockefeller power in America had become so great that they were strong partners with their former mentors, the Rothschilds. The Bolshevik cancer to destroy Russia was a Rothschild creation, but it was the Rockefeller interests who actually injected that cancer into Russia.

As the 20th Century progressed, the power of the aging Rothschild dynasty finally was eclipsed by that of the upstart Rockefellers. Where Rothschild power had begun with the control of money, Rockefeller power was rooted in the control of ENERGY; and with Saudi Arabia in their grasp after World War II, the Rockefellers soon began to out-distance all rival power groups world-wide, including the Rothschilds. But, my friends, the Rothschild interests bided their time. They waited for the Rockefellers to start making mistakes, and not long ago it began happening.

In Audio Letters No. 38 and elsewhere, I have described how the atheistic Bolsheviks who used to run Russia have recently been overthrown. This final overthrow is the culmination of six decades of determined effort by a tough, tightly-knit band of Russian Christians. When the final phase of undisguised overthrow began two to three years ago, it was the Rothschilds—not the Rockefellers—who learned about it first. For 60 years the Rockefellers had been secret allies of the old Bolsheviks in Russia. But the Rockefellers were sadly mistaken in their belief that they actually controlled the Bolsheviks. Instead, it was always the Rothschilds who secretly controlled the Bolsheviks in Russia—and who now control them here in the United States. In the past, the interests of the Rockefellers and Rothschilds always coincided well enough that this distinction did not really matter; but after the Battle of the Harvest Moon, which I made public in Audio Letter No. 26, everything changed.

Recently I explained the fatal mistake which the four Rockefeller brothers made in their panic following the Battle of the Harvest Moon. That mistake was to open America's doors to the old-line Bolsheviks, who are being expelled from Russia now. It was a suicidal act for the Rockefellers because their own Corporate Socialist empire could not hope to coexist with those Satanic State Socialists—the Bolsheviks. But the Rockefellers accepted the recommendations of certain advisers to do so—and those advisers, my friends, were Rothschild agents! During the past several months a Bolshevik coup d'etat has taken the lives of all four of the Rockefeller brothers, as I have made public in my tapes. The Rothschild interests of today are making a desperate bid to regain their former status as the world's No. 1 power group, and they are doing it through their own forces of Bolshevism.

Last month I tried to warn the remaining members of the Rockefeller family that they must join forces and act now to stop what is happening. If they do take action as I said last month, they could help save not only themselves but all of us here in America; but if they do not act, and quickly, they will suffer the historic fate of all overthrown dynastic families—they will all be tracked down and killed by their Bolshevik enemies. So far, I'm sorry to report, the Rockefeller survivors remain fragmented and neutralized, persuaded wrongly that they do not have enough power to act; and now, my friends, another prominent member of the Rockefeller family has been killed—murdered near Paris, France; but a double has already been substituted.

My friends, if the Bolshevik coup d'etat and coming full-scale revolution are successful, our land faces a future of agony and

despair. Christians will have to hide their Bibles and hope for some day long in the future when it will be safe to read them once again. When the Bolshevik revolution swept across Russia six decades ago, that was the way it was. Our Lord Jesus Christ is a thorn in the side for the atheistic Bolsheviks, and their hatred for Him will be expressed in merciless persecution of His followers. No doubt about that!

There are those who say today, "America is too big, no one could take over our whole country"; but, my friends, the continental United States has only four (4) Time Zones. Sixty-two years ago smaller numbers of Bolshevik revolutionaries, using cruder techniques than today, succeeded in taking control of Russia—and Russia spreads almost half way round the world, with eleven (11) Time Zones! The Bolsheviks, doing the bidding of the Rothschilds, are working fast; and yet in recent days the situation has become much more complicated than before. The struggle for control of America has now mushroomed into a secret intelligence war, involving not one but several major intelligence agencies of the world. Where it is all leading is by no means clear right now. All I can do at this point is to report the facts to you and urge you to keep your eyes open. At the present time, for example, the Bolsheviks are planning to ignite a Middle East crisis around mid May. The Pope's revolution was also planned for May when I first made the plan public in Audio Letter No. 42, but that has now been pushed back to June. But these and other plans have been thrown into question by recent eruption of intelligence warfare by means of "doubles", look-alikes, and impostors.

For example, earlier this month on April 11, Vice-President Walter Mondale reportedly left Washington on a trip to Iceland, Scandinavia, and the Netherlands; but, my friends, the man and woman on Air Force II were not Mondale and his wife but actually "doubles." The real Walter and Joan Mondale had been spirited away. The following day Jimmy, Rosalyn, and Amy Carter, the real ones, left the White House for a 10-day Easter vacation in Georgia. The first 8 days were to be spent offshore in seclusion at Sapelo Island. Carter was looking more haggard by the day, racked by leukemia and multiple cancers. His visible loss of weight lately had prompted cover stories about his alleged success at dieting. He was fast losing the ability to work at all, and news stories said he was going to Georgia to seek solitude. And so for a week and a half surrounding Easter, the President and Vice-President of the United States were out of public view. A few low-key reports appeared in the papers about the alleged activities of Mondale on his trip. Otherwise all was quiet here in Washington. The real purpose of the trip by Mondale's Bolshevik "double" was to try to obtain oil for Israel, but in this the Mondale "double" failed because very recently Russia's Marshal Dmitry Ustinov—the man now in charge in the Kremlin—had visited Norway personally, and Norway has now come to terms with Russia.

The weekend after Easter things happened fast, completely unseen by the public. On Friday night, April 20, the real Walter Mondale was being held incommunicado by Bolshevik captors in New Richmond in western Wisconsin. Sometime between 9:30 and 10:00 PM local time, Vice-President Walter Mondale was executed! Mondale had been one of Nelson Rockefeller's closest political allies and had been prominent among the mourners at Rockefeller's memorial service at Riverside Church in early February. Now he had died on a Friday evening, as Rockefeller had, at almost the same local time and from the same cause—a bullet in the forehead. Barely an hour later, Mondale's body was dumped into Lake Superior at a point about 12 miles southeast of Taconite

Harbor, Minnesota. Meanwhile Air Force II was already on its way westward across the Atlantic with a Mondale "double" aboard. Mondale had been scheduled to return on Sunday, according to public announcements, but his plane was returning a day early for security reasons—but it did no good. Air Force II, a duplicate of Air Force I flown by the President, was a specially outfitted military Boeing 707 known as a VC 137-C. Its remains all except for the left wing are now lying under thousands of feet of water in the North Atlantic. The navigational coordinates are 57 - 30 - 35 North, 26 - 38 - 20 West. That's about 150 miles north of where the Kissinger jet crashed in February. The left wing of Air Force II is lying on the ocean floor about 13 miles to the east of the rest of the plane. The flight crew were unable to radio details, but a blast close to the fuselage tore off practically the entire left wing in flight. The wing fluttered away like a leaf while the rest of the plane spiraled downward 7 miles into the sea. At present Mondale's office claims that he returned Sunday April 22 at 1:00 PM, but the next person you see in the news as Mondale will be his second "double", recruited to fill in for the first "double" who died in a North Atlantic crash of Air Force II. A replacement for Air Force II will no doubt appear as soon as one can be outfitted.

On Saturday April 21, Jimmy Carter flew secretly from Georgia to Camp David unaware that Mondale was dead. After lunch he went to Bethesda Naval Hospital for a checkup on his cancer and then to the White House briefly. It was not until roughly 8:00 PM that night that the real Jimmy Carter returned to Plains. There about 10:30 PM Jimmy Carter, President of the United States, was shot between the eyes, but incredibly he retained some signs of life. He was rushed from Plains to Andrews Air Force Base outside of Washington, arriving shortly after midnight. By 2:00 AM Sunday April 22, he was in surgery at Bethesda Naval Hospital; but it was hopeless, just as it was in 1963 when President Kennedy was shot in the head. With Rosalyn Carter in shock, the body of the late President of the United States was disposed of quickly. That evening the real Rosalyn Carter was at the White House under heavy sedation, but shortly after midnight she, too, was executed with a bullet between the eyes.

During the past several days Jimmy Carter No. 2 (that is, Carter's "double") has been seen repeatedly in public—and what a change! Jimmy Carter No. 2 looks and acts 10 years younger than the real Carter did. Listen now to the tired, halting voice of the old Carter as he read a prepared statement just 17 days ago on April 10 (sound track follows):

"We have already begun to hear a good deal of talk from the oil companies about so-called 'plow backs'; but what this talk covers up is that this proposal, as it will be presented with the Windfall Profits Tax, already provides six billion dollars in increased revenue."

Now compare that with the more shrill voice—forceful, vigorous, and confident—of Carter No. 2 just two days ago on April 25 (sound track follows):

"The bottom line is, that if there is an effort to cheat on the SALT agreement including the limits on modernizing ICBMs, we will detect it."

My friends, the flat, awkward speaking style of the old Carter is gone. In its place is a new style of delivery which imitates the old Carter but has better phrasing and more lively inflection of the voice. The eyes which were becoming glazed with pain and sedative are now gone, and in their place are eyes that are

piercing and alert. Gone is the old Carter under siege. In his place is a man who is talking about storming the country by entering every Democratic Presidential Primary in the nation, but he is making do with only a weak imitation of that most famous of all Carter campaign assets—the face-splitting Carter grin. The change in appearance and behavior are so striking that something had to be done to focus peoples' attention in a way that would explain it all away—in other words, distraction. And so the new Jimmy Carter, the "double", is receiving great publicity over the fact that he parts his hair on the left; the old Carter, of course, parted it on the right. So now anyone who looks at him and thinks, "Carter sure looks different these days", will also think, "I guess it's the hair that does it."

My friends, strange things are going on and you should prepare yourself for big surprises in the days ahead. Besides the clandestine services of the United States and the Rothschild interests, there are at least three other factions secretly busy here now. These are the Intelligence Agencies of Russia, Great Britain, and Israel. Within the past two months, Britain has secretly come to terms with Russia, and the Russian underwater missiles around Britain have been removed; and the "doubles" for Jimmy and Rosalyn Carter have been at the Russian Embassy here in Washington a great deal this past week, avoiding the White House as much as possible.

One thing, my friends, is certain: whatever these things mean, the Russians are taking it all very seriously. Since last Sunday, April 22, there have been 24 Russian Cosmospheres deployed over the Washington metropolitan area. Something important is afoot, and however it turns out, the Russians intend to be ready.

Topic #3—One week ago today, April 20, was Lenin's birthday. In the past it has always been a day that demanded a properly reverent attitude on the part of all Russians; but things are changing in Russia today. Brezhnev No. 2—the "double" who replaced the real Brezhnev after his death in January 1978—is used today to convey Russian policy positions to the world, and this year Brezhnev No. 2 was conspicuous by his absence from Lenin Day celebrations. Instead, he went to a hockey match and one which had little significance to Russia, whose team was not one of those playing. It was a graphic way of saying in effect: Lenin doesn't live here any more. Meanwhile other members of the Russian leadership were giving signals about what does matter in Russia today. The hockey game attended by Brezhnev No. 2 was taking place on Good Friday, as reckoned in Russia. At the time, a Congressional delegation from the United States was in Moscow meeting with leaders including Prime Minister Kosygin and Foreign Minister Gromyko. In James Reston's NEW YORK TIMES article of April 24, 1979, some surprising behavior by the Russian leaders is mentioned: "Paradoxically they arranged with the Congressmen on Easter weekend to go into the old Christian church at Syzran and watch, if not take part, in the ceremony of the Resurrection." More than a week earlier the Easter season had begun in Moscow in a way that stunned many outside observers. On the evenings of April 13 and 14 the Moscow Conservatory, the most important concert hall in Moscow, was packed with capacity crowds. They were there to hear something not heard in Russia since the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917—they were there to hear Handel's MESSIAH. And in the capital city of the land our leaders want us to hate, the Moscow Conservatory thundered with those triumphant words of the Hallelujah Chorus: "THE LORD SHALL REIGN FOR EVER AND EVER."

In an interview by the British Broadcasting Corporation on

February 3, exiled Russian author Alexander Solzhenitsyn said he wants to return to Russia. He says there is a rejuvenation of society going on there now—and no wonder! During the Easter season just past the Russians have been celebrating not only the Resurrection of our Lord Jesus Christ, they have also been celebrating the resurrection of Christianity itself in Russia.

My friends, it's a fact that Russia is no longer ruled by Satanic Bolsheviks, but by native Russian Christians. Yet it is also a fact that the Kremlin today is in command of the most powerful military machine the world has ever known. Russian underwater missiles are poised within our own territorial waters, ready for launch in a devastating nuclear strike at a moment's notice. Russian submarines armed partly with neutron weapons now patrol continuously along our East, West, and Gulf coasts. Russian charged Particle Beam-weapons are on the Moon, in earth orbit, and on floating Electrogravitic Platforms over our country. Our major dams and many other targets have been sabotaged with hydrogen bombs which are already in place ready for detonation upon satellite command.

If the kamikaze war plans of our Bolshevik rulers are not stopped, there's no question what the outcome will be. All of America will be turned into a funeral pyre, and the American dream will end in a nightmare. Looking at all this, ever so often someone asks me: "If the rulers of Russia today are Christians, why would they want to hurt us; much less, kill us?" My friends, to begin with, their actions have already proven that they do not have a desire to destroy us at all. Over a year and a half ago Russia defeated the United States in the still secret Space Battle of the Harvest Moon. Ever since then Russia has been increasingly in a position to destroy America at will—but the Russians have not done it in spite of continuing treachery by America's Satanic rulers.

As I detailed last September in Audio Letter No. 38, the rulers of Russia do plan to wipe BOLSHEVISM off the face of the earth. Even so, it's now clear that if they find a way to do it without resorting to full-scale war, they will try to do it; but the problem is that our own rulers who are now the Bolsheviks are making war increasingly unavoidable. First, the Bolsheviks want to bring us all under their own TOTAL DICTATORSHIP. Then they will be able to mold America into a much more efficient war machine than it is now; and under the conditions of Bolshevik dictatorship, you and I will be powerless to stop it. Russia's rulers will then be faced with only two possible choices. One choice will be to allow Russia's people, who have suffered beyond belief at the hands of the Bolsheviks, to suffer again when the American nuclear first strike is launched. The only other choice will be to put America out of action. In that case, untold millions of American Christians will be killed; but the attitude of Russia's rulers is that if we allow the Bolsheviks to carry things that far, we will have only ourselves to blame!

Last month I proposed that a "Pilgrimage for Peace" to Moscow be formed by American Christian leaders. It's purpose would be to begin building bridges of trust between the peoples of Russia and America as the only real foundation for peace and friendship. I appealed to Christian leaders of all denominations and at all levels to respond in great numbers by April 30. That way there was a chance Russia's rulers could be proven wrong in their conviction that America's churches are infiltrated by Bolshevism. Now, my friends, it is time to report the results. In all of the United States there have been only a tiny handful of independent-minded pastors and church officials who have responded. There is no chance that such a tiny group would

convince the Kremlin of anything; and so I am forced now to repeat the question I asked in Audio Letter No. 21, and that is: WHERE, OH WHERE ARE THE CHURCHES TODAY?

But there is still a ray of hope, my friends. My call for a "Pilgrimage for Peace" last month was directed only to church leaders, who for the most part have not responded. Yet there has been a spontaneous outpouring of interest from lovers of our Lord Jesus Christ in all other walks of life; therefore, I am hereby expanding my proposal for a PILGRIMAGE FOR PEACE. The name Christian originally meant "Christ one"—that is, anyone who loved and followed the Lord Jesus Christ. Now I am appealing to all Christ ones in all walks of life:

Would you be willing to join me in a "Pilgrimage for Peace" to Russia?

Do you want Russia's Christian rulers of today to understand that there is still a backbone of decency, honesty, and truth in America? ?

Would you be willing to spend some of your time and money on a pilgrimage to Russia if it might prevent thermonuclear war???

My friends, if you could participate in a Pilgrimage for Peace in any way, please contact me BY THE END OF MAY 1979. If you could go yourself, or if you could help sponsor someone else to go, please let me know. To streamline things as much as possible, please do not call but—

WRITE to me (Dr. Peter Beter) here at:

1629 K Street, N.W.

Washington, D.C. zip 20006 WRITE the word "Pilgrimage" in the lower left corner of the envelope.

Please give your name, address, telephone number, occupation, and whether you are available to go yourself or to sponsor someone else.

It remains to be seen whether Russia's rulers will approve such a visit, but I believe that depends mostly on you. If they see that the people of America truly want peace, and trust, and friendship, I believe their response will be favorable; but if they are not convinced that we are serious, there will be no Pilgrimage, and the consequences for America and the world will be very grave.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #46

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is May 28, 1979, and this is my Audio Letter No. 46.

In most all of the black nations of Africa, criminals and internal enemies of the state do not last long. People disappear in the dead of night never to be seen or heard from again, and when they disappear their families know they are gone for good. They know better than to say anything about it. The victim is taken to a secret place that is spoken of only in fearful whispers in black Africa—the place is usually known as "The

Pit." The victim is blindfolded and led through the night-time darkness to the edge of the pit. There kerosene is poured over him until he is thoroughly soaked. Then as the victim screams in vain, the torchbearer approaches. Moments later the scene around the pit is illuminated as the kerosene catches fire. Then the victim is pushed over the edge to fall alive, but aflame, into the pit.

In most all of black Africa that's how Law and Order is kept; but that is not the only place where people are rumored to disappear in silence. Lately there have been reports of wholesale disappearances in Argentina. A few days ago, on May 22, the BBC put the number of disappearances at 4,000 since 1976, and a few days before that on May 16 the New York Times ran a story titled "Vanished in Argentina." The article referred to a major story in the Buenos Aires Herald and also quoted from a related newspaper advertisement. Included were the words: "The most capable and most renowned people become used to keeping quiet."

To most Americans, nighttime disappearances in Africa probably don't seem very relevant. We relax and say to ourselves, "Maybe that's Africa, but it's different here. This is America." Argentina may strike a little closer to home since Argentina is a modern, advanced nation. Even so, most of us are likely to comfort ourselves that this is America, not Argentina; it's different here, we think. Well, my friends, it is different here. In Africa the natives may talk only in whispers about disappearances and "The Pit", but whispers travel fast. Everyone knows about "The Pit." In Argentina, too, the people at least know disappearances are going on because so far the press has been left free to publish reports about them. But it is here in the United States that the most momentous disappearances are now taking place. It began four months ago with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller. Now important and famous people are disappearing. Nelson Rockefeller's murder has been followed by convulsions in the rulership of America, and yet there is no hint to the public about what is taking place. The Rockefeller murder in January signaled the beginning of an all-out Bolshevik coup d'etat here in America. A secret Bolshevik purge of the Rockefellers was under way, bloody but hidden from public view. But last month I revealed that a secret Intelligence war between "doubles" had erupted for control of the United States Government. When I recorded Audio Letter No. 45 last month, the situation was confusing and my information was still fragmentary, but I told you what I could—and now I can tell you more.

The war of "doubles" involves not only the Bolsheviks but the clandestine services of Russia, Great Britain and Israel; but the basic battle lines are being drawn between Russia and the Bolsheviks. As of now, the Russians appear to be gradually gaining the upper hand, thanks to their use of an astonishing new Intelligence weapon. There is irony in what the Russians are now doing in the war of "doubles." They are raising the ghost of none other than Nelson Rockefeller—and in a way that he would have appreciated.

My three topics this month are: Topic #1—NELSON ROCKEFELLER'S REVENGE FROM THE GRAVE Topic #2—THE COSMOSPHERE SHUTTLES TO PREVENT NUCLEAR WAR Topic #3—THE MODERN REBIRTH OF THE "HOLY ALLIANCE"

Topic #1—In the summer of 1976 a missile crisis erupted between Russia and the United States which to this day has never been made public officially. As all my older listeners know, I am referring to the underwater missile crisis of 1976. The Russian

Navy was planting small, short-range, underwater-launched nuclear missiles within the territorial waters of the United States. They were doing the same thing in selected other locations world-wide. They were preparing for a surprise nuclear first strike against the United States involving not ICBMs but a naval strategy. By this means they were hoping to bring America to her knees with one swift blow; but if that failed, they were prepared for all-out war. It was a desperate gamble by the Kremlin, far more dangerous than the Cuban Missile Crisis of 1962. In a military double-cross the Kremlin was terminating unilaterally the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance of nearly six decades. But nuclear war did not erupt then, thanks primarily to the brave actions of just one man. That man was the late General George S. Brown, then Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. It was he who persuaded then President Gerald Ford to give the order overruling Henry Kissinger to remove the Russian missiles from America's waters.

In Audio Letter No. 16 that September I revealed the loyal, brave actions of General Brown in preventing nuclear war. Those actions included my own lengthy meeting with him at the Pentagon on September 16, 1976. For doing his duty, General Brown very soon encountered reprisals against him. It began in October 1976, soon after my meeting with him. The major media began cutting him down, and he was even forced to apologize on national television for some alleged remarks that were six months old. Up until then, General Brown had been famous for his outspoken, forthright behavior; but after that he quickly faded into obscurity. He did not actively serve out his term as Chairman of the Joint Chiefs, and reportedly died of cancer soon after retiring. In Audio Letters Nos. 17 and 23 I revealed how the fate of General Brown was tied directly to a drastic reversal in America's fortunes, but until now I have never revealed what finally happened to General Brown. Now, at last, I can tell you. I'll return to the matter of General Brown after telling you some other things which you need to know first.

The neutralization of General Brown was part of an effort by the late four Rockefeller brothers to reinstate their former secret alliance with the Soviet Union. The Brothers simply could not believe at first that the alliance was gone for good. It was not until mid 1977 that they received evidence convincing them that their old allies in Russia, the atheistic Bolsheviks, were being overthrown. Up until then the Brothers were still trying to glue things back together.

In this regard, a little-known practice of the late Nelson Rockefeller is now acquiring crucial importance. Of the four brothers, Nelson in particular always lived in fear of being assassinated. Like a moth drawn to a flame, he craved the limelight and yet feared it at the same time. Most of all, he was always worried that someone close to him, someone he himself had placed in power, would some day double-cross him. And as I revealed in Audio Letter No. 43, his fears were well founded. For Nelson Rockefeller the lust for power was rivaled by only one other emotion—revenge. He never forgot a grudge. For example, three decades ago a young California Congressman named Richard Nixon marked himself for Rockefeller's hatred. Nixon went after an intimate associate of Rockefeller named Alger Hiss, charging treasonous activity by Hiss. Finally Hiss wound up behind bars—not for treason but for perjury in connection with treason. Rockefeller was enraged and vowed to "do-in" Nixon one day. Later when Rockefeller created the 25th Amendment to the United States Constitution, he kept Nixon in mind. The 25th Amendment was the means by which Rockefeller intended to become President without being elected. The stage was set for a scandal called

WATERGATE, and Nixon was maneuvered into the Oval Office so that it would be he who was ruined by WATERGATE. As planned, Nixon left the presidency in disgrace, and Hiss left prison as a sympathetic figure in the major media.

In the same way, Nelson Rockefeller wanted to make sure that if he should ever be murdered he would have his revenge, even from the grave. And so over the years he made a habit of keeping a complete list of all the people placed in important positions by his brothers and himself. Periodically he provided copies of the latest list to certain elements within Russia's Intelligence community. His political testament contained instructions that were very simple: "If anybody ever killed me, use the list; find out who did it. I don't care if you have to get rid of everybody on the list, just do it." In doing this, the one thing he never anticipated was that the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance itself would come apart. Even so the Rockefeller "Hit Lists" are now coming into their own in a way that he could never have anticipated, because the Bolsheviks who carried out the coup d'etat against the Rockefellers are also the enemies of the new ruling faction in Russia. So Russia, for her own reasons, is now using Nelson Rockefeller's "Hit List" in the secret Intelligence war now going on. They know exactly whom to go after here in America and have known for years, and they have been preparing for years to be in a position to use the list if that turned out to be the best way to proceed. Here, my friends, is where the new Russian Intelligence weapon enters the picture.

What I am about to reveal I am revealing primarily for history. I know even before I reveal it that some of my listeners will desert me after they hear it, saying "It just cannot be"; but, my friends, I also know that the events in the days ahead will be impossible to understand without knowing this secret. So I do not ask that you believe it simply because I say it. What I do ask—and I ask it for your own good—is that you keep an open mind. Listen and hear what I must now reveal, then watch events themselves.

My friends, since World War II and before, scientists the world over have been probing for the basic secrets of life itself; and in this field as in others, progress has been much faster than the public has been led to believe. Today it's common knowledge that heredity is governed by something called genes, yet barely a generation ago this relationship was only beginning to be suspected. When it was suggested in 1944 by a theoretical physicist, Erwin Schrodinger, it was a novel idea. Beyond that no one was too certain what genes were aside from huge molecules or clusters of molecules. Some thought they were molecular chunks of protein, some thought they were something else. When Schrodinger's ideas about genes were published, World War II was still raging and basic scientific research was on a back burner; and yet, barely a half a dozen years later, researchers were zeroing in on a building block of life even more basic than genes. The solution was found to this revolutionary puzzle in April 1953 at Cambridge University in England. Scientists James Watson, Francis Crick, and Maurice Wilkins were later to share the Nobel Prize for solving the puzzle. They had discovered the molecular structure of DNA, the famous "double helix." In 1968 Watson published a book titled "THE DOUBLE HELIX", published by Athenaeum, New York, N.Y. To understand the overwhelming importance of the double helix discovery in 1953, one need go no further than these few words on the jacket of the book:

"DNA is the molecule of heredity, and to know its structure and method of reproduction enables science to know how genetic

directions are written and transmitted, how the forms of life are ordered from one generation to the next."

In other words, to understand DNA is to begin to understand life itself.

It has now been over a quarter century since the crucial discovery of the DNA double helix, and since then research in molecular biology has not been standing still but speeding up. In some cases research has gone in directions which are deliberately sheltered from publicity because of the fear of public reaction. Not so long ago, for example, universities doing research into artificial microbes found their neighbors in an ugly mood when they found out about it. Test tube babies are now a reality, and that began not long ago in England where the mystery of DNA was first unraveled. Then, of course, there are clones—that is, creatures which are reproduced by artificial means and which are exact duplicates of an original. Clones of all kinds of animals have been produced successfully in the laboratory, but that is not what bothers people. In the recent past it has been claimed that human clones are also possible and that some may already be in existence. These last claims about human clones have been ridiculed, denied, and suppressed by all kinds of officials—the reason is that the idea of duplicate human beings impinges upon a super-secret realm of Intelligence activities by both Russia and the United States. True clones are not involved, but something that bears a superficial resemblance to cloning is going on; and the last thing the powers-that-be want is for you and the public to have any hint about what is afoot.

In Russia as well as in the West, research has been under way for many years in biological synthesis—that is, artificial life forms; and according to high intelligence, a stunning break-through took place in Russia some years ago. The Russians refer to this break-through as a "providential discovery", something they learned almost by accident. They discovered the key to creating what are known as "organic robotoids." An organic robotoid is an artificial robot-like creature, it looks and acts exactly like a human being and yet it is not human. A robotoid is alive in the biological sense but it is an artificial life form. Robotoids respond to conventional routine medical tests in the same way as humans do; they eat, they drink, they breathe, they bleed if cut; and they can be killed. Robotoids can also think, but they think only in the sense that a computer thinks. Like any other computer, the brain of a robotoid has to be programmed for each assignment it is given; but unlike many electronic computers, the biological computer brain of a robotoid possesses an enormous memory. As a result, robotoids can be programmed to communicate and think in such complex patterns that they act human.

Organic robotoids are remarkable creatures, but they have many drawbacks. They don't grow or reproduce but must be manufactured one by one in the desired form. They also have a very limited life span, measured in months or even weeks, depending upon how they are utilized. This is due to the fact that their metabolism, while it resembles that of humans, is very inefficient. A robotoid can be manufactured on very short notice, a matter of hours; but after a few weeks or months it suddenly begins to degenerate physically and mentally. When that takes place, the robotoid has to be removed from service and disposed of. To extend its useful life as much as possible, a robotoid is customarily cooled down to slow its metabolism between assignments. Organic robotoids are extremely expensive, troublesome creatures to produce and utilize; and robotoid

capabilities do not exceed those of human beings. All they can really do is simulate human beings; but, my friends, for Intelligence purposes that's all they have to do!

To produce an organic robotoid it is necessary to have a pattern to go by. The pattern required is that of genetic coding taken from a few cells from the body of a human being. In this respect the Russian technique sounds like cloning, but the technique itself is totally unrelated to genuine cloning. A robotoid is produced within a matter of hours, and it simulates the human donor at his current age. Like any man-made copy of anything, a robotoid is never a perfect copy of the human that is to be simulated; there's always small discrepancies in appearance and behavior, but these are seldom great enough to arouse any suspicion.

When the initial Russian break-through in robotoids took place years ago, the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance was still functioning. The Christian group who now rule Russia were already secretly more powerful than the Bolsheviks, but the final overthrow had not yet taken place. When the robotoid break-through took place, they moved quickly to minimize the amount of information obtained about it while those Bolsheviks still retained positions of power. They also tried to prevent information about it from leaking through Intelligence channels to the CIA, nevertheless partial information did reach the CIA and the late four Rockefeller brothers. By early 1975 the Russians were known to have successfully created at least one organic robotoid in the laboratory. Meanwhile the CIA was coordinating a feverish research effort aimed at accomplishing the same feat. Up to now, robotoid technology in the United States is far behind that of Russia. The American capability in robotoids is not even close to being operational, whereas the Russians are deploying them right now.

But there has been at least one attempt to create an organic robotoid for public use in the United States, and I am referring to the final fate of the late General George S. Brown. In April 1977 I revealed how much General Brown had sacrificed by that time as the price of doing his duty for America, but not long after that General Brown paid the supreme price for his actions. It is only now that I am free at last to reveal it.

On July 10, 1977, General Brown was taken to CIA headquarters near Washington, D.C., in Virginia. There he was taken to one of the many secret rooms designed into the CIA building by Nelson Rockefeller. The room was a laboratory, and the attempt was made to create a robotoid replacement for General Brown. The techniques employed were far more crude than those used in the Russian process since the CIA process required General Brown to be on the scene. The attempt ended in complete failure. A crude facsimile of General Brown was generated but it refused to come to life. Even so, General Brown could not be allowed to live because now he knew too much; and so on the evening of July 10, 1977, General George S. Brown, the last great patriot in the United States Government, was MURDERED.

A normal human "double" was found for General Brown since a robotoid attempt had failed. This was the man who testified in the role of General Brown at the Congressional hearings on the Panama Canal Treaty, September 27, 1977! At his side throughout, briefing and prompting him, was the Secretary of Defense, Harold Brown. Occasionally the "double" would be flustered by a question and looked down at the table in front of him until the Defense Secretary whispered something in his ear. Then he would look up again, say what he had been told, and so on. Once the

Panama Canal hearings were out of the way, the "double" for the late General Brown was seen as little as possible in public. Soon there were stories that he had contracted cancer. Then the Air Force Chief of Staff, General David Jones, began acting as Chairman of the Joint Chiefs months before the end of General Brown's tour of duty. In June 1978 we were told that General Brown was retiring, and last December 5, 1978, we were told that he had died of cancer. At that point the General Brown "double" collected his pay and headed for Frankfurt, West Germany, where he landed on December 11, 1978, at 3:30 AM local time. It is a standing rule that "doubles" for important people never live long, and so at about 7:30 that evening General Brown's "double" was shot to death in the back of the neck.

Last month I revealed that an Intelligence war of "doubles" had erupted in the United States. President Carter, Vice-President Mondale, and their wives had fallen victim to this war of "doubles" as their Easter breaks away from Washington were ending. Now I'm sorry to report that Amy Carter, Billy Carter, Lillian Carter, and Hugh Carter all died soon after Jimmy and Rosalyn did. All of them, including Amy, have been replaced by "doubles"; but instead of the Bolshevik "doubles" who had been waiting in the wings, those we are seeing are Russian organic robotoids. The voice of the Jimmy Carter "double" which was reproduced last month in Audio Letter No. 45 is the voice of a robotoid. That robotoid was the one who was dazzling everyone with his vigorous new image. Only a few months ago Carter had been limping around with what we were told were severe hemorrhoids; but now, out of the blue, here was a Carter who was a powerhouse—hiking, fishing, and jogging ten miles a day, he also looked and sounded younger than before—that was the first robotoid "double" for Carter which I referred to last month as Carter No. 2. By the time I recorded Audio Letter No. 45, there was also another Carter robotoid making the rounds—this one, Jimmy Carter No. 3, was the one that attended the Holocaust observances in the Capitol building here in Washington. By contrast with Carter No. 2, No. 3 looks noticeably older and more haggard. As I mentioned earlier, robotoids are very good copies but they are not perfect, no two look exactly alike.

Last month I mentioned that the "doubles" for Jimmy and Rosalyn Carter were spending a great deal of time at the Russian Embassy here in Washington instead of at the White House. Now I can tell you why. Robotoids are programmed at the Embassy for each assignment. Between assignments they simply rest there in a state of reduced metabolism.

When the Bolshevik coup d'etat against the Rockefellers began four months ago, the Kremlin rulership already knew that Bolshevik "doubles" would soon be on the scene, and they knew that if the Bolsheviks were allowed to complete their take-over of the United States, Russia would soon suffer. The Bolshevik plans for nuclear war against Russia are a blueprint for suicide for America—but they have not been abandoned. Up until now the Russians had been keeping the robotoid capability under wraps, and there was a real question whether they would ever be used; but the Bolshevik coup d'etat convinced them the time had come to deploy the robotoids. Now they are using Nelson Rockefeller's "Hit List", and using their robotoids the Russians have already altered the course of world events in dramatic ways.

Topic #2—As recently as two months ago the Bolsheviks here in America had big plans for this, the month of May. By now they were planning for tensions in the Middle East to be at the breaking point with events building fast toward war. There was to be a atmosphere of crisis over our own supplies of Middle East

oil; and with that as an excuse, they were planning to begin the process of closing down American freedoms. The Bolshevik "ad hoc gang of four"—BRZEZINSKI, BLUMENTHAL, BROWN, and

SCHLESINGER—were expecting their power to start growing fast in this atmosphere of crisis. Meanwhile the big oil companies of the now headless Rockefeller cartel have been playing right into the hands of the Bolsheviks. Overnight they have trumped up a gasoline shortage that does not exist, and they are lying about their costs and pushing up prices out of sheer greed. They are creating an artificial crisis atmosphere to set the stage for events to come.

Until a few weeks ago the tensions in the Middle East were building up as planned; Egypt was calling Saudi Arabia names, saying Saudi Arabia had paid the other Arabs to isolate Egypt; Israel was continuing its hard line toward the Palestinians; there was talk of a growing rift between Saudi Arabia and the United States—and all the while gas lines were growing longer here in the United States. But in recent weeks something has happened. The news in the United States has been full of trivia for the most part as if world events were in suspended animation. The reason is that while events have been taking place with blinding speed, they have been behind the scenes!

The Intelligence war now going on is intense, and the situation is changing daily. Bolshevik strategies have been badly jolted by the Russians using their robotoids, and as a result the Bolsheviks are not sure what propaganda line to feed to the public right now. A major shock to the Bolsheviks in recent days has been their loss of the "ad hoc gang of four." First, I can now report that Brzezinski was with the Bolshevik "double" for the late Vice-President Mondale last month on April 20. They were aboard Air Force II which crashed in the North Atlantic, as I reported last month. Then on May 13 the other three were eliminated—Blumenthal, Brown, and Schlesinger. All four were promptly replaced with Russian robotoids, as has been done with the Carters and the Mondales. A number of other top officials have also been removed and replaced by Russian robotoids. Last month Secretary of State Cyrus Vance was replaced; and on the 1st of May, May Day, the American Association of Newspaper Editors were treated to speeches supposedly by Vance and Brzezinski. In the past, Vance and Brzezinski have always been noted for being at loggerheads on every issue; but this time, as they spoke of the need for a new diplomacy by America, it was as if they were both thinking with the same mind. Many observers were surprised but no one suspected the truth.

As there begin to be more and more Russian robotoids in key positions of the United States Government, there will be more and more surprises. One key public personality I would urge you to watch very carefully now is Walter Cronkite in his television broadcast on CBS Evening News. During this month of May he left on what was said to be a vacation. Today, May 28, he resumed broadcasting. If you are accustomed to watching the Cronkite news program, I suggest that you watch carefully now, look for a change in the slant given the news—it will be subtle, but it will be there. If you are serious about it, you might tape the shows every evening for a week, then play them all back one after another sometime the following week-end. That way you can compress a week into two hours or so not counting commercials, and better tell what the drift is. Otherwise the most important single personality to watch is the one labeled "Jimmy Carter." Periodically there will be small changes in his appearance and behavior as one robotoid wears out and is replaced by another; and by listening to the Carter robotoid, you can get some hints

about what the Kremlin is up to.

The invasion of the Russian robotoids goes far beyond the mere removal of troublesome people from official positions. Robotoids assume the identity and authority of those whom they replace. As a result they can carry out official acts, give orders, and sign agreements. A prime example is to take place next month in Vienna, Austria, on June 15. To the world it will appear that the United States in the person of President Carter will be signing the SALT II Treaty with Russia in the person of President Brezhnev; but the signatories will actually be a robotoid that looks like Carter and a human double who looks like Brezhnev. Over a year ago in Audio Letter No. 33 I reported the January 1978 death of the real Brezhnev and his replacement with Brezhnev No. 2. So the SALT II Treaty will actually involve Russia signing with itself through puppet personalities!

For over a year and a half following the Battle of the Harvest Moon in September 1977, the United States stalled off SALT II, but now it is the era of Russian robotoids, and now SALT II is about to be signed. In recent weeks Russian robotoids masquerading as American officials have been busy not only here in the United States but abroad as well. They have been used to carry out diplomatic shuttle negotiations in the Middle East. The Russians are trying to keep the lid on there so the Bolshevik first-strike plan which I revealed in Audio Letter No. 37 cannot be carried out. The shuttles have been taking place by means of a small fleet of second generation Cosmospheres. These are a more advanced version of the Floating Electrogravitic Weapon Platforms which first appeared operationally over the United States in December 1977. The new second generation Cosmospheres are designed specifically as high-speed transports. Unlike the first generation machines, they do not use rocket thrusters to move horizontally; instead, the electromagnetic fields around the earth are tapped for that purpose. They normally climb to a height of 100 miles or more above the earth to get beyond the bulk of the earth's atmosphere, then they travel to any desired destination typically at around 9,000 miles per hour. That is about half the speed of a satellite in orbit, so passengers feel somewhat lighter than normal but not weightless. When the occasion calls for it though, the Cosmosphere transports can go even faster. To make a trip from Washington, D.C. to some far distant part of the globe, the passenger first travels to Bangor International Airport in Maine; from there another plane takes him to a Cosmosphere landing site in east central Quebec Province, Canada. This site, which was first mentioned in Audio Letter No. 31, is on the north edge of Manicouagan Lake. If the destination is in Russia, be it Moscow or Novosibirsk, the Cosmosphere can land usually within a few tens of miles of the final destination. For other destinations, however, secluded landing sites like the one in Quebec are used to maintain secrecy.

The earliest Russian robotoid to appear on the American scene was one simulating the late David Rockefeller. That robotoid replaced a Bolshevik "double" for Rockefeller by early March. On April 25 this robotoid (David Rockefeller No. 2) left the Russian Embassy in Washington and headed for Jerusalem. The following day he met with high Israeli officials, pressuring them to back off from the plan to destroy Saudi Arabia's oil fields. The Israelis were astonished. The plan had been in gestation for over four years and was a joint plan between Israel and America. Now here was one of David Rockefeller's "doubles" telling them that Russia knows about the plan and does not plan to let it succeed. The Israelis resisted. Rockefeller No. 2 left Jerusalem for Moscow where he met with John Paisley shortly after

noon. Paisley is the former high CIA official whose body was supposed to have been found October 1, 1978 floating in Chesapeake Bay. He has been described in various news reports as a "mole" within the CIA—a foreign agent. That he was, an extremely important one. It was Paisley who provided Russia with the orbital data on America's Spy Satellites. With that data Russia's fleet of manned killer satellites, the Cosmos Interceptors, finished destroying America's Spy Satellites in orbit over a year ago. Since his disappearance last fall, Paisley has been living near Leningrad, following a vacation at Odessa on the Black Sea. Rockefeller No. 2 briefed Intelligence officials in Moscow about his discussions with the Israelis. Paisley had been brought there because it was anticipated that his services would shortly be needed. This was confirmed by the report of the robotoid. It was decided that Paisley should go to Jerusalem the following day, April 27, but accompanied by an agent of the KGB since the Russians did not entirely trust Paisley. The Rockefeller robotoid was to return to Jerusalem that day also and put in an appearance along with Paisley. In addition it was decided that Jimmy Carter No. 2 should visit Jerusalem in a quick secret trip by Cosmosphere Transport. David Rockefeller No. 2 was then dispatched to Washington with instructions for Jimmy Carter No. 2. By the evening of April 26, Carter No. 2 was at the Israeli Intelligence Station outside Jerusalem. At the same time Carter No. 3 was keeping up appearances here. Rockefeller No. 2 was seen at the World Trade Center in New York but left that night for Moscow and then Jerusalem. While Jimmy Carter No. 3 was appearing at the Holocaust ceremony in Washington, Carter No. 2 was in Moscow having already been to Jerusalem; meanwhile Paisley and Rockefeller No. 2 were in Jerusalem. Paisley's testimony was being used to convince the Israelis of the extent to which America's military security has been breached. Carter No. 2 likewise was there to prove that Bolshevik support for the Middle East war plan was being removed as a factor in Washington. Late on the 27th of April Rockefeller No. 2 began encountering questions and problems which he was not programmed to handle; so obeying standing instructions for such an event, he departed for Moscow for further programming. On the 28th he went to the Russian Embassy in Washington. That night he returned to Jerusalem. For further impact on the Israelis, the Carter No. 3 robotoid had been dispatched to Jerusalem along with Rosalyn No. 2. Paisley had remained in Jerusalem all three days. Meanwhile here in the United States Carter No. 2 and another new robotoid, Rosalyn No. 3, were on duty. On April 29 Paisley left for Leningrad and the robotoids left for Washington—the first robotoid shuttle to the Middle East was ended after five days, in total secrecy.

As April was ended and May was getting under way, the main focus of activity by the Russian robotoids was here in Washington. On April 30 a Carter robotoid surprised everyone with an uncharacteristic response to critical statements by Senator Ted Kennedy. He said, "That is just a lot of baloney." "That just wasn't like Carter", people said. The next day the Brzezinski and Vance robotoids had their turn to surprise everyone. That was the day they abandoned their usual fisticuffs in favor of sweetly humming the same tune to newspaper editors. "Just not like those two to behave that way", said some puzzled observers. Two days later on May 3 it was suddenly announced that a top official of the State Department, Leslie Gelb, was resigning. Two days after that on May 5 another important resignation was announced, and this one had a short fuse. Only a few days earlier on April 26 Air Force Secretary John Stetson had said some important things in public. Without divulging any secrets he almost let the cat out of the bag about America's

recent military reverses. Speaking of our ability to verify the proposed new SALT II Treaty he said in effect that he wasn't worried about that. To him the real story was something far different, far different—that is, the possibility of secret development and sudden deployment of new weapons by Russia. That, my friends, is exactly what Russia has been doing now for nearly three years—Underwater Missiles, Charged Particle Beam-weapons, Killer Satellites, Cosmospheres, and the Moon bases; and now Organic Robotoids! All were developed secretly and then deployed suddenly, and not one of them is touched upon in the SALT II Treaty. Speaking as he did, Stetson was not long for the Pentagon. His resignation was announced May 5 and was effective on May 18, ten days ago. His resignation was an echo in some ways of that of the Undersecretary of Defense, Stanley Resor, in March; and the trend toward transfers of key personnel, shake-ups, and resignations is continuing. Within a few days one of the men in the position to observe Carter most closely will be transferred out and replaced with someone new—that's the President's Naval Attache, the man who carries the so-called "Black Bag" for nuclear war. On May 16 it was reported that seven aides to National Security Chief Brzezinski are quitting—and so it goes.

On May 7 Pravda praised the United States for having finally become sober-minded about SALT II. Two days later it was announced that the United States had reached an agreement in principle with Russia for a SALT II Treaty; but in still another strange twist that raised many eyebrows, the announcement was not made by "President Carter", instead it was made by "Secretaries Brown and Vance"—but then one robotoid is as good as another. Carter robotoids began lobbying on Capitol Hill immediately for the Treaty, one robotoid at a time, of course; but shortly the emphasis began shifting again to the Middle East.

On May 13 Paisley arrived in Iran from Russia. After checking with Intelligence agents in Tehran and Abadan, he returned to Moscow before the day was out. News reports on May 16 said that Defense Secretary Harold Brown was going to Brussels to drum up support for SALT II among our NATO allies; but a Harold Brown robotoid was in Moscow on May 13 and 14 and arrived in Tehran on the 15th. The next day he went to Jerusalem, where he joined Paisley and the No. 2 Jimmy and Rosalyn Carter robotoids. Thus began the second Middle East Cosmosphere shuttle involving robotoids. After intensive meetings with Israeli leaders, Paisley left for Leningrad; the rest of the group went to Riyadh, Saudi Arabia, where they were joined by David Rockefeller No. 2. After giving assurances of support to Saudi leaders, they went next to Tehran to analyze the situation there. Meanwhile things were turbulent in the Middle East—the Cabinet of Lebanon resigned, President Sadat suddenly announced that Egypt is ready to pursue friendship with Russia, and gold prices started rising fast thanks to heavy buying from the Middle East. The next day, May 17, the shuttle group were back in Riyadh, then back to Jerusalem, then to Cairo all in the same day. Suddenly on that day, May 17, Israeli Defense Minister Weizman withdrew from the West Bank Negotiating Commission. Foreign Minister Moshe Dayan did likewise. Both were angry with the continuing Begin hard line denying the possibility of Palestinian statehood. The next day Begin suddenly adopted a more conciliatory line, offering to meet with Jordan's King Hussein and saying: "We recognize the Arab nation." Can you imagine? On May 18 the shuttle broke up, ending with brief trips by Harold Brown No. 2 to Damascus and Tehran. For the moment the lid seemed to be on the pressure cooker; but two days later Iran blasted the United States for the Senate resolution condemning the executions there. The United States was told to delay sending the new Ambassador; and Senator

Jacob Javits of New York, sponsor of the resolution, was denounced as a criminal. Javits was promptly put under 24-hour police guard. At the same time it was announced that Secretary of State Vance was to leave right away on a two-week trip overseas. Reportedly Vance was to be going first to London and several other points, but the real destination of the current Vance robotoid No. 3 was Tehran.

As I explained last summer in Audio Letter No. 37, Iran is an indispensable key to the Bolshevik plan for a nuclear first strike against Russia. The Bolsheviks, as they see their power slipping, are making a feverish attempt to go ahead with the first-strike plan. The Vance robotoid was sent to Iran to gather information and to seek ways to foil the first-strike plan. He arrived early May 22 in Tehran, but less than 36 hours later the Vance robotoid was killed—shot in the head. It was less than 36 hours later that another Vance robotoid arrived in Tehran, Cyrus Vance No. 4, but that one lasted only a few hours before being gunned down on the morning of May 25. The Russians are now very worried about the situation in Iran; they are also concerned that the pressures and inducements they have brought to bear in the case of Israel and her neighbors still may not prevent double-cross and war there. That is true even though both Sadat and Begin have secretly been eliminated during the past month and replaced with robotoid "doubles."

My friends, besides the Middle East there is one other imminent trouble spot for Russia right now, and that's Poland. In Audio Letter No. 42 I revealed the Bolshevik plans for a Pope's Revolution to erupt during the actor Pope's visit to Poland. Originally the visit was scheduled for this month, May, but was delayed until next month instead; and very early this month the actor Pope, the Bolshevik "double" for the late Pope John Paul II, was eliminated along with his Bolshevik boss, Cardinal Benelli. Both have been replaced by "doubles" from Russia, but the evidence is not yet clear as to whether these "doubles" are human or robotoid. Having accomplished this Vatican coup d'etat, the Russian and Polish leaders believe they will be able to prevent the assassination of the Pope from taking place next month. That is why early this month Poland suddenly reversed her earlier plans to levy stiff charges against journalists who entered Poland to cover the Pope's visit. It is a calculated risk, but the Russians feel that the publicity surrounding the Pope will be beneficial if the Bolshevik assassination plan can be thwarted.

Topic #3—For centuries Russia has endured war after war, and invasion after invasion. Every time the Russians have somehow endured the worst and somehow come back again, stronger than ever; but each time the hatred of war has sunk deeper into the Russian soul. Over 150 years ago Czar Alexander I of Russia proposed that a community of the Christian nations of the world be formed. There was to be no question of victors or vanquished in the wars just ended; instead, it was to be an alliance of trust and friendship with all parties pledging to deal with one another according to Christian principles. It was to be not a military alliance but a new kind of alliance designed to remove the causes of warfare throughout Christendom. It was to be as Alexander I named it: a HOLY ALLIANCE. The treaty creating the Holy Alliance was signed in Paris on September 26, 1815, and for a while there were signs that it might actually work. Most of the nations of a war-torn Europe were eager to join the Alliance, designed as it was for the prevention of war. Alexander was hoping to see the Holy Alliance unite all of Europe, the British Isles, and America—not so much politically as in spirit. The beliefs and policies of Alexander I were derived from the

influence of a Christian sect in Russia, the same one that now has taken control of Russia. Prior to their recent resurgence the days of Alexander I had been their heyday. But those days were also the heyday of mushrooming Rothschild power in Britain and Europe; and while Alexander I wanted to unite the Christian nations to prevent war, the Rothschilds wanted the exact opposite. Their objective was to divide nations, one against the other, and to become richer and richer by financing armaments and warfare. Through diplomatic maneuvering and economic pressures the Rothschilds succeeded in dismantling the Holy Alliance.

The events taking place around us today are far different in detail from those of a century and a half ago, but they are cut from the same historical cloth. Increasingly the main protagonists in the Western arena are the same as they were then—on one side are the atheistic Bolsheviks and the Rothschild sponsors who destroyed the Holy Alliance long ago, and on the other side is the Russian Christian sect which greatly influenced Czar Alexander I and which now rules Russia. For many people it is still hard to shake the image of Russia that was true in the days of Stalin; and in Russia as elsewhere, things do not change over night—but they are changing and for the better.

For example, consider the matter of taking Bibles into Russia. I quote now from an article titled "WE PRAISE GOD" published last month, April 1979, in the record of the American Bible Society:

"The trip was less than 3,000 miles, but it took 65 years. As the heavily laden lorry lumbered from the loading dock at the Bible printing plant of the German Bible Societies in Stuttgart, the first leg of the journey began. Actual driving time was only six days and would have been faster had the roads been in better condition; however it was close to Christmas and Moscow was already well into winter. But the last time such a large shipment of Bibles had reached Moscow with the full approval of the government was 66 years ago in 1913. In October 1978 the Soviet government granted an Import Permit to the All Union Council of Evangelical Christians, Baptists, in the Soviet Union for 25,000 Russian Bibles and 5,000 concordances. As soon as the order was received the United Bible Societies in Stuttgart stopped all other production so that the presses could be devoted exclusively to the printing of these Russian Scriptures. By early December they were ready and on their way by truck through the German Democratic Republic and Poland, and into Russia. The Bibles cleared customs on January 22, 1979, and before the end of the month more than 60% of them had been distributed to churches. They are already in the hands of Christians in places as far apart as Kiev in the Ukraine and Novosibirsk on the northern edge of Siberia, as well as in Moscow and throughout the Baltic area."

My friends, throughout the old Christian areas of Russia the words of Jesus Christ are being heard once again, churches long in disuse are being refurbished often at government expense and re-opened, and the most hopeful sign is that in Russia it is the young who are most eager to hear and learn about our LORD JESUS CHRIST. Whether the Russians will succeed in their grand design for a modern Holy Alliance remains to be seen. Perhaps it all depends upon whether we, the Christians of the world, will continue to allow ourselves to be divided and pitted against each other—or whether we will at last unite in trust and brotherhood.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #47

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is June 28, 1979, and this is my Audio Letter No. 47.

The final Friday in May, last month, was a sunny spring day in Chicago. It was a perfect day to fly, and O'Hare Airport was busy as usual. Inside the terminal complex, thousands of air travelers were rushing to and from their flights. Nearby the runways were alive—airplanes were taking off and landing in a steady stream, one right after another. It was just another day at the world's busiest airport.

Shortly before 3:00 o'clock that Friday afternoon two hundred and fifty-eight passengers boarded American Airlines Flight No. 191. It was a DC-10 Jumbo Jet bound for Los Angeles. With its crew of 13, there were 271 people aboard when the doors were closed. Then the DC-10 was rolled away from the terminal and taxied out toward the runway. There Flight 191 took its place at the end of a line of jets waiting to take off.

Meanwhile, a passenger waiting in the terminal for a different flight was passing the time by taking snapshots. Reportedly, the man with the camera was a pilot himself. Most fliers simply enjoy watching airplanes, and apparently he was no exception.

Just after 3:00 P.M. the O'Hare Tower cleared Flight 191 for take-off. The big DC-10 moved onto the end of the runway. Three mammoth engines—one on the tail and one under each wing—changed their tune from a whine to a roar. The engines strained like locomotives in their mounts and the jumbo jet began moving down the runway. Half a minute or so later, after rolling a mile and a half, the nose of the DC-10 rotated upward for take-off. Up to that moment everything had been normal and routine; but then, without warning, the world began to end for Flight 191. The engine under the left wing suddenly ripped loose. It lurched forward, then up and over the top of the wing. It smashed down onto the runway, but the suddenly crippled DC-10 continued to climb. The plane reached an altitude of about 600 feet, but by then it had rolled steeply to the left. The wings were vertical instead of level, and the DC-10 began to fall. Moments later the plane disappeared in a giant fireball as it hit the ground.

In the terminal, the man with the camera caught a picture of the Airliner on its side in the air. Moments later he was photographing the fireball, which was partially obscured by Airport buildings. Later the man who took those famous pictures—Michael Laughlin of Ontario, Canada—gave his reactions to UPI. He reportedly said:

"After I had taken all the pictures, I just stood there stunned, wondering to myself, 'Did this really happen? Did I really take these pictures? Did that plane really crash?' I thought, 'There has to be some other explanation for this crazy airplane turning over and for all that fire.' I just couldn't believe it. I just stood there shaking."

My friends, reality is always hard to accept whenever it is unpleasant. Our minds play tricks and tell us it just cannot be. Like the man who photographed the crashing DC-10, we don't want to believe our own eyes and ears. Instead of accepting the truth as it is when it disturbs us, we try to deny its existence. Right now this is happening to some listeners to the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER.

Last month I made public one of the most carefully guarded of all Intelligence secrets—that is, the existence of ORGANIC ROBOTOIDS. As I explained last month, they are now the key fact of life in understanding current world events. Without knowing this very important secret, you will have no hope of understanding present and coming events. Even so, some of my listeners are not waiting for events to speak for themselves. Instead, they are shakily telling themselves, "There just has to be some other explanation for the strange things in today's news . "

These people, my friends, are turning away from the AUDIO LETTER. They want only to have their ears tickled with the words they like to hear. They want only to hear the words they have heard before over and over again, year in and year out: Runaway government, taxes, dishonest politicians, the Russian threat, and so on. With these things they can feel dissatisfied yet content—reassured that nothing really ever changes. But as I said last month, I knew very well that this would happen before I ever said a word about the "robotoids." I knew that there would be a falling away by some who have followed the AUDIO LETTER up to now.

But there is only one way that the AUDIO LETTER can serve those who do choose to listen—that way is to continue to reveal the truth exactly as it is. If I were to withhold crucial information whenever it is frightening or unfamiliar, perhaps I could avoid losing any listeners; but then the AUDIO LETTER would end up serving no one—no one, that is, but the enemies of our Lord Jesus Christ.

When our Lord walked the earth 2000 years ago, He said: "You shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free." He gave the Good News that a new day was dawning for those ready to accept it. He began awakening His followers from their slumber; and those who were benefitting from the oppressive status quo of that day began to feel threatened. Soon Jesus made it clear that He was not talking about politics or military conquest but something deeper than that. Many of His followers fell away in disappointment. But the ruling circles felt even more threatened. Their real control over the people was through their beliefs, and Jesus was opening their eyes with the truth; so they had Him crucified, and the people cheered.

My friends, the French have a saying that: "The more things change, the more they stay the same." Our modern world is radically different in some ways from the Mediterranean world of 2000 years ago. Yet today, as then, there are those who want to keep you ignorant and asleep so that they can control and use you. The Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER is interfering with these plans simply by revealing the truth from behind the scenes; and because the influence of the AUDIO LETTER is growing faster and faster, a "hate campaign" is now under way in an effort to destroy it.

Right now, some people are turning away; but others are awakening from their slumber. Like Rip van Winkle, they are beginning to open their eyes after living for years in a dream world of the past. They are beginning to ask questions and to see for themselves what is really taking place in our world. After years of sitting glued to the television sets, more and more Americans are beginning to talk to one another again. People are gathering in groups to listen to the AUDIO LETTER and then arguing about it. Concerned listeners are making countless copies of my AUDIO LETTERS to give to friends and relatives. In New York City and elsewhere unauthorized copies are being sold by

illegal scalping operations for $10 and more; and these homemade and scalped copies of my AUDIO LETTERS are themselves being listened to in groups, and further re-copied.

The majority of those who are benefitting from the AUDIO LETTER nowadays are doing so without contributing to its support. Free and scalped copies after all do nothing to help sustain the AUDIO LETTER, which is expensive and difficult to produce. Nevertheless, the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER is having an impact that is growing wider every day.

Now that the four Rockefeller brothers have all left the scene, as I have revealed in recent months, even the major media are beginning to take notice of the AUDIO LETTER. This past Easter Sunday morning, April 15, 1979, it was a syndicated feature article in the Sunday Magazine of the Washington Post. A month later on May 17, it was an article on page B2 of the New York Times. And earlier this month on June 11, I was contacted by a producer for the CBS television program "60 Minutes" about the "Guyana story." Because of the growing impact of the AUDIO LETTER, those who benefit by keeping you asleep and ignorant feel increasingly threatened by it. And so a "hate campaign" has now erupted in an effort to destroy the AUDIO LETTER.

All kinds of techniques are being used in this "hate campaign." Articles are being printed in certain publications that stoop to outright libel in an effort to defame my personal reputation. Damaging rumors of all kinds are being circulated. Whisper campaigns are being stirred up with ridiculous stories about my family. Now I'm told they are even picking on my little five-year-old daughter Petra, saying somehow that Petra has a Russian name. Petra, my friends, is simply the female form of the Greek word meaning "rock." It is also the name of an ancient, beautiful, and historical crossroads town in Jordan.

The hate campaigners are all waving the flag in an effort to dispute the patriotism of the AUDIO LETTER. But their arguments are based on deceit and fraud—not truth. Christ ones do not do such things.

What is most significant is the timing of this hate campaign. All of the groups now attacking the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER have one identifying characteristic in common. In every case, they have spent years in pointing accusing fingers at the Rothschilds. This has led many people with some knowledge of past history to accept the leadership of these organizations; and yet, years of finger pointing by these groups has had no effect at all on the Rothschilds. The only people really affected are the duped ones—the followers of these groups and publications. Until very recently the Rothschilds have actually been in a state of eclipse by the Rockefellers; but since the Bolshevik coup d'etat secretly terminated Rockefeller power early this year, the situation has changed.

In the past two or three months, I have focused attention on the Rothschilds and their bid for renewed power; and as if on signal, the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER is now under attack supposedly by anti-Rothschild groups. False opposition, my friends, is a trick even older than Machiavelli. The hate campaign now under way will do its damage but it will not stop the AUDIO LETTER. My employer is our Lord Jesus Christ, and my AUDIO LETTER series will not end until it is time to end. This month I am beginning the fifth year of my AUDIO LETTER.

It has been another year of surprises and dramatic events. It was only one year ago next month that the oldest of the four

Rockefeller brothers, John D. Ill, died abruptly in an alleged auto accident. And it was only five months ago that the all-out Bolshevik coup d'etat against the Rockefellers began with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller. Today the Bolsheviks themselves are in retreat, thanks to the Russian "organic robotoids." So the years to come will hold even more surprises for us all.

My topics this month are:

Topic #1—THE SCIENTIFIC BACKGROUND OF THE RUSSIAN ROBOTOIDS. Topic #2—THE RUSSIAN STRATEGY TO DISMANTLE BOLSHEVIK POWER, and Topic #3—THE SHIFTING CURRENTS BETWEEN WAR AND PEACE.

Topic #1—In the spring of 1973 my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR" was published by George Braziller, New York, New York. In the book I revealed in detail how forces were being set in motion deliberately to destroy the United States dollar. I named a lot of names, and I explained the role being played by various individuals and multinational corporations. Of all the individuals I named in the book, the most important was that of the late David Rockefeller. He was the kingpin in the plan to destroy our dollar and our economy, as I showed in the book; but when he was asked for his public comment about my book, he said: "Interesting science fiction." But as events have proven, my book was anything but science fiction. I was a lone voice in 1973 because I was revealing things that were not publicly known. Instead, until I went public with them, these things had been known only to a handful of the most powerful in America and abroad. For that reason, many people found what I revealed then hard to believe; yet today the things I warned about have already come true or are happening now behind the scenes.

When I wrote my book in 1973, Americans had yet to experience an embargo of foreign oil. The dollar was still thought of as almighty, and my warnings that it would soon shrivel sounded preposterous to many Americans. But today, who in his right mind would speak of the so-called "almighty dollar"? As for gold, Americans could not even own it legally in 1973 except under special circumstances. Very few Americans even thought about gold in 1973, so the plans I exposed in my book for gold prices to shoot up past $200 an ounce sounded ridiculous to many; but today, who among us is unaware of the daily news reports about astronomical gold prices? In 1973 I spoke of stagnation with inflation, of shortages, of financial distress in municipal governments, and on and on. At that time these things sounded too far off to many of my readers—it sounded like science fiction. But today, just look around you, my friends. Look at the gas lines, the truckers' strike, the defaults and near defaults by major cities, the prices that change almost daily in your grocery stores. Today everyone talks about these things, they are just facts of life; but when I warned about them six years ago, I was ridiculed for saying they would happen because I was out of step with the crowd.

The same thing is happening now in the wake of my revelations last month about the Russian "organic robotoids." The conventional wisdom, of course, is that there just cannot be such things; or at least if they are possible, they must lie far in the future, not now. But, my friends, the conventional wisdom is wrong, dead wrong. They are not only possible but they are real, and they are walking among us right now. To those who are ignorant of the scientific advances that have taken place in the past 20 to 30 years, they sound incredible; but within a small select group of scientists both in and out of government, here and abroad, the existence of Robotoids is known, and certain of those who know and understand about them are faithful listeners

to the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER. As I mentioned in my introductory comments, those who seek to control us want to keep us all in a horse-and-buggy mentality. That way we remain unaware of the forces we are confronting and therefore more vulnerable.

Ever since World War II began four decades ago, we Americans have been living with a shroud of secrecy in the military and scientific fields. As a result, most Americans today are actually living in the past without knowing it. But in my AUDIO LETTERS I'm trying to bring you up to date with reality. For the past four years I've been letting you in on developments which have taken decades to materialize in secret. Learning about all these things over such a short time span is like having the world itself change almost overnight. So it is little wonder that some of my listeners are getting a case of "future shock" from my AUDIO LETTERS. By the way, the term "future shock" is taken from the famous book titled "FUTURE SHOCK" by Alvin Toffler. The book was published nearly 10 years ago, in 1970, by Random House. Toffler defines future shock as "the shattering stress and disorientation that we induce in individuals by subjecting them to too much change in too short a time." In his book Toffler called attention to the fact that numerous rapid and drastic new developments are taking place today without people quite knowing how to cope with it all. Among these developments Toffler discussed the revolutionary advances in biology and genetics. Quoting leading scientists in the field, he gave examples of astonishing things which are either possible now or will be soon. All of these are fascinating to read about and many are frightening as well. In particular, several items point directly toward organic robotoids, although the book does not say so. As I explained last month, an organic robotoid is an artificial robot-like creature. It is a kind of biological machine with a biological computer brain. With this in mind, consider the words of Arne Tiselius, a biochemist and Nobel Prize winner. As quoted in "FUTURE SHOCK" nearly a decade ago, he said: "It is quite obvious that computers so far are just bad imitations of our brains. Once we learn more about how the brain acts, I would be surprised if we could not construct a sort of biological computer. Such a computer might have electronic components modeled after biological components in the real brain, and at some distant point in the future it is conceivable that biological elements themselves might be parts of the machine."

Dr. Tiselius was on the right track with these words of 10 years ago, but he was too conservative. At that time, the Russians were already on the threshold of their key breakthrough which I referred to last month. That breakthrough had to do with the biological computer brain which is the key to a successful robotoid. In a few moments I'll tell you more about that.

In other places, too, one can find many bits and pieces of information that point straight toward robotoids, but you will not often find this information on television or in the newspapers. Instead, it crops up here and there in specialized publications directed at particular audiences. An example of this is the book "THE DYNAMICS OF CHANGE" published in 1967 by Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. The book is copyrighted by Kaiser Aluminum & Chemical Corporation, having first published all the material in six issues of Kaiser Aluminum News .

The revolution in biology and genetics is only a very small part of the subject matter in the book. Even so, listen to just a few brief quotes. Under the heading GENETIC MANIPULATION: "The ability to control the formation of new beings may be one of the most basic developments of the future. Recent discoveries about

the nucleonic acids, the basic building blocks of life, have led to the belief that man may some day be able to treat genes in such a way that desired characteristics can be realized..." Under the heading DIRECT EDUCATION OF BRAIN CELLS: "Experiments indicate that certain chemicals in the brain will, when implanted in another brain, transfer knowledge..." Under the heading MAN-MACHINE SYMBIOSIS: "...Computers exist which can learn, remember, see, seek goals, reason, walk, sing on key, talk, be irritable, play games, grasp, adapt to an environment, and even design improvements in themselves..." My friends, remember, these things were published for public consumption, and a dozen years ago! Further, under the same heading: "...man-like computers may one day contain plasma circulating through a viscera-like envelope, allowing them to be self-healing." Finally, under the heading HUMAN ROBOTS: "...An electronic circuit that imitates two neurons, the cells of the human brain, has been built, and has enabled a robot to deal with some unexpected situations, but the neuron structure was bulky. The brain has billions of neurons, meaning an incredible miniaturization job will be necessary before truly human robots are developed."

Since those words were written, of course, incredible things have been done in miniaturizing electronic computers. For example, a mere dozen years ago there was no such thing as an electronic hand calculator. Within a few years they were on the market but at a cost of hundreds of dollars. Today, just a few scant years further on, they are all over the place—tiny, inexpensive, and able to do things only bulky computers could do a decade ago. But these things only hint very vaguely at the scientific strides that have made Organic Robotoids a reality.

The man-made biological machine known as a Robotoid is remarkable from head to foot; but the most astonishing thing about them is their ability to simulate human beings—not just in appearance but in behavior. In other words, the most crucial and most amazing thing about a Russian Organic Robotoid is its biological computer brain. The developments that were destined to lead to Russia's breakthrough in robotoid brain research began 32 years ago, in 1947. In that year a Hungarian-born physicist, Dr. Dennis Gabor, conceived of a way to make three-dimensional photographs called "holograms." It was a revolutionary scientific discovery, and it was destined to lead to the Nobel Prize for Dr. Gabor. He did not receive the Prize until 24 years later, in 1971. By then, holograms were a reality in numerous laboratories world-wide; and yet most members of the general public still had not heard of holography. And even today, more than three decades after Dr. Gabor's original discovery, holography is still unfamiliar to the public as a whole. In 1947 Dr. Gabor's theory pointed the way toward holography, but at that time holograms could not actually be made. What was needed in order to make them was something called "monochromatic light"—that is, light of just one wave length. No one knew how to create that kind of light in 1947, but in 1960 the situation suddenly changed—that was the year the laser was invented. When lasers are discussed in public, attention is usually focused on just one of their amazing characteristics—that's the ability of a laser to produce a narrow, intense beam of light. The beam can travel great distances without spreading out and diffusing. Lasers pointed the way toward energy-beam weapons, among other things; and as I revealed long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 26, this is what secretly spawned America's crash program to get to the moon in 1961. But the reason laser beams behave the way they do is that the light they produce is monochromatic, so they are made to order for generating holograms. Like lasers, holography has led to developments that were totally unexpected, and one of

these was the Russian breakthrough in biological computer brains some years ago. When you hear how they work, you'll understand why robotoids act so much like the human beings they replace.

A hologram is a very unusual kind of photograph. To make one, the film is exposed using a laser and a set of mirrors and lenses; and to make the holograph image on the film visible later on, laser light must again be used. When you look at a hologram, it is as if you were looking through a window at the real object. You can move back and forth, up and down, and see it from different angles in three-dimensional detail. By contrast, of course, a conventional photograph is flat and looks the same from all angles. Holograms are also different in another way. If you tear a normal photograph into several pieces, you ruin it. Each piece contains only a disconnected fraction of the total, but not so with a hologram. If you cut up a holographic film into several pieces, each piece still contains almost the entire image. There is some loss of detail but basically it's all there. It's this fact that led years ago to the Russian breakthrough in biological computer brains for their robotoids.

For quite some time, scientists in the Intelligence Community world-wide, studying the human brain, have known one very important fact. That fact is that a portion of a human brain can be removed through accident or surgery and yet the person still retains most of his original memory, so in this respect the memory in a human brain is like a hologram. Nowadays the relationship between holography and human memory is beginning to be understood in the West. For example, Dr. Karl Pribram, a neuropsychologist at Stanford University, wrote about it recently in the magazine "PSYCHOLOGY TODAY." As he pointed out, the implications of holography are enormous, both for brain research and for computers; but this relationship was first recognized not in America but in a research laboratory at Russia's Siberian Science City, Novosibirsk.

The reason the Russians have scooped the West in many recent scientific discoveries is not that they are supermen while we are mental midgets, instead it has to do with the way they organize their efforts in science and technology. This organization is totally different from that in the West, and it's turning out to be far more efficient. For one thing, when it comes to research, communications in Russia are far superior to those in the West. There are more than 5,000 research centers and laboratories in Russia doing research and development of all kinds, and they are all linked together by vigorous communications—not only within each scientific field, but between different fields. There's also a fundamental difference in what is discussed in Russian technical literature, as compared with the West. In the West, a scientist usually publishes a technical paper only to report a success of some kind. If he carries out a research project that fails, he generally publishes nothing about it; but in Russia, many failures and problems are discussed very openly in the technical literature. As a result, many areas of research meet a very different fate in Russia than in the West. Here in America an elaborate and expensive scientific project may come very close to success but fall through because of a key missing ingredient. When that happens, very little is published about it; but in Russia, the researchers describe their problems and failures; and among the thousands of other scientists nation-wide, one might have the answer. So the Russian system, which is built around cooperation, often produces success; but the Western system, especially in America, is built around jealousy and it often leads to failure. It's happened many times, my friends, and it happened several years ago in robotoid brain development.

Last month I revealed that the Russians can manufacture organic robotoids, which are almost exact carbon copies of real human beings. This is done by a process that simulates the genetic coding of the person to be copied. It sounds a little like cloning, but it's not. A clone of a human would itself be a human, but an organic robotoid is NOT human. It's an artificial life form, like an animal in some ways but like a computerized machine in others. Every Russian robotoid has what is called a "holographic brain." This brain duplicates essentially the entire memory of a person being copied. The key to doing this is a new technique called an "ultrasonic cerebral hologram." Using high-frequency sound waves, which are inaudible, a complete three-dimensional picture is made of a person's brain. This is a painless, non-destructive process; and under the proper conditions it can be done without the person even being aware of it.

Last month I revealed that the Russians are using Nelson Rockefeller's "Hit List" to weed out Bolsheviks here in America, and for roughly three years they have been preparing for this day. They have been secretly making cerebral holograms of the people on the list at every opportunity. This has been done to every person on Rockefeller's list who has visited Russia or Eastern Europe in the past three years.

When an organic robotoid is made to simulate, for example, our late President Jimmy Carter, two major factors are involved. One is the genetic coding required to simulate Carter's appearance, voice, fingerprints, and so on. The other is a holographic image of Carter's brain. This image is a complete record of the neuron patterns which existed in Carter's brain at the moment the hologram was made. Therefore it contains all of the memory and knowledge Carter had up to that moment. When a Carter robotoid is made, the biological computer in its head is caused to form according to the holographic record of Carter's brain. However, certain portions of the robotoid computer are caused to deviate from the holographic record. The end result is a biological computer which has to be programmed but which contains essentially all of Carter's memory, involuntary mannerisms, and the like. As a result, a Carter robotoid will automatically do certain kinds of things without the need for specific programming. For example, a Carter robotoid will seem to recognize old friends. That's because the computer memory of the robotoid reproduces Carter's memory of that friend. The holographic process puts it there automatically without the Russian programmers even having to know it's there.

Organic robotoids are such amazing creatures that they are still a subject of questioning and debate. This is true even among the Russian scientists who made them a reality. For example, robotoids seem to have no true instinct for self-preservation. In this regard they act like machines, simply doing as they are told to do. By contrast, both humans and animals generally have the instinct for self-preservation. Robotoids can be programmed for self-preservation, but they are equally willing (if "willing" is the word) to perform suicide missions, exploratory one-way trips into space. I've only one example of this: if a space mission looks too dangerous to risk the life of an experienced cosmonaut, a robotoid can now be used. The robotoid copy of the cosmonaut is already trained the moment it's made, thanks to its holographic memory.

Organic robotoids look and act so much like human beings that it's hard for us to get used to the idea that they are not human; but the Russians decided several months ago that the stakes are too high not to employ them, and so the silent Russian invasion

of America by robotoids is now well under way.

Topic #2—The Russian strategy is to work from the top down in dismantling Bolshevik power here in the United States. In this respect they are doing the same thing in principle as they did in overthrowing Bolshevik power in Russia. Within Russia itself the overthrow process made use of human "doubles." These "doubles" were Christians with a level of dedication that is almost unthinkable in the West. They underwent plastic surgery at the expense of a life-long change in their appearance, they spent years in detailed study of the persons they were to replace; and then once they had replaced powerful people, they saw to it that other members of their Christian sect acquired positions of power. Over the years untold numbers of these Christian "doubles" in powerful positions were eventually found out. When that happened, they were purged by the Bolsheviks; but when they died they took with them the knowledge of the identities of other Christians whom they had placed in power. And so with every Christian they killed, the Bolsheviks were gradually sealing their own fate. They never caught on to the master take-over plan of the native Russian Christians until it was too late.

Today the Russians are putting that experience to use again in their robotoid strategy to take control of America. Bolshevik power is always centralized, so the Russians are starting with the head of the Bolshevik serpent. From there they intend to work outward gradually to the many tentacles of Bolshevik power. As of now, the White House and Cabinet are under complete control by Russia. According to my latest Intelligence report only one member of the Carter Cabinet is still alive. All of the rest, including the "ad hoc gang of four", have been replaced by Russian robotoids. Likewise, the United States now has a Supreme Court made up of nine (9) Russian robotoids, and now Russia is focusing on the main members of the United States Senate who are opposing SALT II.

When Carter robotoid No. 3 was in Vienna earlier this month for the SALT II summit, he acted like a puppy dog around Leonid Brezhnev No. 2; and Brezhnev 2, the human double for the late real Brezhnev, likewise treated the alleged Carter like a puppy. Whenever he tired of talking or became hungry, Brezhnev 2 simply got up and walked off, and the grinning replica of the late Jimmy Carter would follow obediently at his heels. Finally on June 18 the Carter robotoid set the world on its ear by kissing and hugging Brezhnev 2 after the SALT II signing ceremony.

While the process of takeover is under way, the Russians will not render the robotoids vulnerable to neutralization by the Bolsheviks. For that reason, the robotoids which have already replaced certain Senators are continuing to pretend that they oppose SALT II. To do otherwise would attract attention prematurely. But the really bitter opposition to SALT II is coming from people who don't know what is going on.

My friends, the Russians are now speaking from strength. They are not bluffing. A few days ago on June 25 Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko went out of his way to demonstrate this fact. It is a very rare occurrence for Gromyko to give a news conference, and even more rare for him to speak in English. But on the 25th he gave a two-hour News Conference in Moscow; and to make sure he got his point across in no uncertain terms, he spoke in English. He declared that there must be no changes whatsoever in the SALT II treaty, and he said: "I tell you frankly it is impossible to resume negotiations. It would be the end of negotiations, the end, no matter what amendments would be made." Then after a moment's pause, he added firmly: "Fantastic

situation." My friends, the ratification of SALT II could be the litmus test that will decide between PEACE and WAR for America and Russia.

Twenty-one months ago, on September 27, 1977, America lost the decisive "Battle of the Harvest Moon" in space to Russia. That evening, as I reported that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 26, Gromyko delivered a SALT II ultimatum to the White House. Meanwhile excited news reports said there had been a breakthrough in SALT II. That was a lie, as I told you at the time, and events since then have proven that it was a lie. Now Russia's ultimatum for SALT II is being repeated—and for the last time. When SALT II is ratified, secret provisions of the treaty will begin America's surrender by means of unilateral disarmament. The Russians are presently trying to achieve this ratification by replacing as few Senators as possible with robotoids. This approach is an act of mercy by the Kremlin, which could now robotize the entire Senate if it wished, and at will. This means there remains a slim chance that the Bolsheviks will somehow find a way to upset SALT II; but if they do, it will be as Gromyko put it, "the end." It will be the end of SALT II, it will also be the end of any remaining Russian restraint or mercy toward their Bolshevik enemies; and if the Russians should finally conclude that their plans for peace are hopeless, it will really be the end, because then they will do as Gromyko threatened at the White House 21 months ago; that is, they will give America the war which our former rulers tried so hard to bring about.

My friends, the top priority of the new Christian rulers of Russia is to prevent Nuclear War I if possible. That's why the decision was made early this year, 1979, to deploy the robotoids. If they had not done that, Saudi Arabia oil fields would have vanished in nuclear fireballs last month. The plan for an Israeli pre-emptive strike against Saudi Arabia, which I first made public late in 1975, would have been carried out. But as I reported last month, two top secret Middle East shuttles were carried out to stop the plan (one shuttle was in late April, the other during mid May)—the shuttles involved robotoid replacements for top American officials—and so far Saudi Arabia has been saved.

If the Israeli strike against Saudi Arabia had been carried out, this would have provided the desired excuse for the contrived gasoline lines we are now seeing. For months they have been diverting petroleum products to other countries at a handsome profit instead of building up normal supplies here. By now they were expecting the Saudi Arabia strike to be an accomplished fact. Under those conditions we Americans would have simply accepted gasoline shortages, and the shortages would have been worsening fast—on the way to a declaration of a "National Emergency." By the autumn of this year the Bolshevik plan for an American nuclear first strike against Russia would have been carried out. So the plan which I outlined in AUDIO LETTER No. 37 last August would now be in full swing; but by stopping the Saudi Arabia strike, at least for the time being, the Russians have so far kept the peace.

Right now Israel is frustrated and is taking it out on southern Lebanon. Yesterday Israel violated her agreement with the United States and used F-15s to attack alleged Palestinian bases there; but the Russian robotoid replacement for Secretary of State Cyrus Vance ordered the State Department to issue an immediate and very stern written protest to Israel. The Russians have also put the big oil companies of the now headless Rockefeller cartel in a very embarrassing spot. Without a Saudi Arabia disaster to point to, they have no excuse to give for the

gasoline shortages now taking place. But at the same time they cannot instantly increase supplies because they started turning down their own oil spigots months ago, so they have outsmarted themselves, my friends. Americans are growing more angry by the day because almost everyone can tell that it's all a big swindle. On all sides there is beginning to be a growing chorus of "Nationalize the oil companies."

The Russians are using the robotoids in an attempt to stop the Bolshevik war schemes, and they are doing so even though they know there's a risk to themselves in what they are doing. Bolsheviks have infiltrated into positions of power throughout American society, so rooting them out is a gigantic challenge. This is especially true in the military. A quarter century ago the late Senator Joseph McCarthy made a genuine and brave attempt to stop this infiltration, but America's Bolsheviks succeeded in cutting him down, using tactics far worse than those of which he was accused; so today there are Bolsheviks at every level and in every branch of the United States military. Using their robotoids the Russians may be able to ferret them out within 18 months to two years, but during that time Bolshevism will remain a very dangerous force here in America.

The Bolsheviks may well keep on trying to find a way to surprise and destroy Russia; so if Russia's rulers of today shared the Bolsheviks' fascination with war, they would not bother to use the robotoids. Instead they would just stir up a confrontation between Russia and America and then unleash their "space triad." Since late 1977, as I've reported in my tapes, there have been seven (7) Russian Particle Beam-weapons bases on the near side of the moon. These could start pounding American strategic targets worldwide into dust without producing radioactive fallout. If the United States attempted to counterattack with ICBMs, they would be blasted during launch by the Cosmospheres now floating overhead; and the 37 Cosmos Interceptors now in orbit would continue to deny America a military toehold in space. These satellites are manned and armed with Charged Particle Beam-weapons. They finished destroying America's spy satellites over a year ago, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 33. But at the very least, such a war would kill tens of millions of people, mostly in the United States; and if things got out of hand, a full-fledged thermonuclear war could kill hundreds of millions. My friends, the rulers of Russia today are Christians and to them nuclear war is insanity if it can be avoided, and so they are using their robotoids.

Earlier this month on June 16, Leonid Brezhnev No. 2 summed up Russia's attitude at the SALT II summit in Vienna. He said: "God will not forgive us if we fail." Many people were shocked to hear those words but I reported the explanation long ago in my AUDIO LETTERS, such as No. 38. Russia's leaders are out to save their own souls.

Topic #3—My friends, we are now living through a critical and confusing period. Most of our neighbors are asleep, unaware that their destinies are hanging in the balance; and for those of us who are awake, it is a difficult and lonely time. I don't think anyone could express it any better than Dr. Harry Schultz. In the late June 1979 issue of his famous International Investment Advisory Letter, he mentions that his readers often cannot understand or believe his investment advice because he has always been ahead of his time, and here's how he expresses it: "To gain universal appeal you must be too late, not too early; to be popular you must predict and write what even the general public have already perceived to be happening." And how true!

More and more the events we see will be reflecting Russia's gradual take-over of the United States; but at the same time, things which were put into the pipeline by the four Rockefeller brothers before they died will be gradually winding down. Our present manipulated gasoline shortages are a good example. These are things which were set in motion long ago and they have too much momentum to come to a halt overnight. The same is true of Bolshevik schemes which have been gathering steam in the United States now for nearly two years.

As I have explained in the past, the Bolshevik mentality is one in which human life is only a tool of power. Last November 1978 the Guyana tragedy took place—a military operation in which hundreds of civilian lives were sacrificed as a ploy. In AUDIO LETTER No. 40 I described what took place there in detail. Then, in March, there was the Bolshevik sabotage of the Three Mile Island Nuclear Power Plant. In AUDIO LETTER No. 45 I reported what had been done. Its purpose was to help in the Bolshevik shutdown of America, using human lives as a tool of revolution. And only late last month it happened again when an American Airlines DC-10 was sabotaged by explosives by remote control. The result was the tragic, senseless, inhuman inferno of American Airlines Flight 191 in Chicago. But the Chicago DC-10 crash was for nothing because the Russians, using their robotoids, are undoing the Rothschild-Bolshevik shutdown plans for America. This is just one example of the cross currents now going on behind the scenes.

My friends, the United States is now being transformed into a satellite state of the Soviet Union, so the schemes which were set in motion first by the Rockefellers and then by the Bolsheviks will gradually fade away. Already robotoid replacements for top American officials are beginning to subtly speak the Russian line on major issues; and when it comes to SALT II, the Carter robotoids are not even being subtle about it. Every few days Moscow repeats: "We will accept no amendments", and each time an echo comes forth from a Carter robotoid: "We will accept no amendments."

My friends, in AUDIO LETTERS No. 44 and 45 I proposed that the Christ ones of America go on a "Pilgrimage for Peace" to meet with Russia's leaders. The response to my proposal from American Christians has been overwhelming. Only a handful of ministers and church officials have responded. Instead it has been primarily the Christians in all other walks of life. Already enough people have expressed interest to fill up not just one but several Aeroflot Jet Transports. Up to now, my friends, I have had no official reply from the Russian government about my proposal. So far they have not turned us down, but a pilgrimage like this would be a very serious matter. Whatever they decide, we cannot go back to business as usual because, my friends, nothing will ever be the same again!

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #48

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is July 30, 1979, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 48.

In recent weeks we Americans have been reeling from one crisis

to another—the gasoline crisis, the dollar crisis with gold peaking at new record levels, the fall of Nicaragua, the alleged crash to earth of SKYLAB, rumors of a new Russian military command in Cuba, controversy over the SALT II treaty, and above all the Carter crisis—with one shocking and unprecedented development after another. Meanwhile, in the background, there's a continuing drumbeat of lesser mysteries to worry about—chemical plants, refineries, and oil storage depots keep exploding and burning daily all around us; railroad tank cars keep derailing, leaking and exploding here and there—but these things have become so commonplace in the past two years that we hardly even pay attention any more. Instead we wonder, "Why did those 41 sperm whales suddenly beach themselves and die last month on the Oregon coast?" Even the marine biologists in that area leave us with the words: "It may always be a mystery."

But that soon fades from our minds, and instead our attention is diverted by pathetic television re-runs of America's heyday in space a decade ago. As we watch the fuzzy picture of a spaceman as he steps gingerly onto the moon, for a moment it is once again July 20, 1969; and for a brief moment we thrill once again to those famous words of Neil Armstrong: "That's one small step for a man, one giant leap for mankind." For a moment we may forget how different it is today. Our manned Space Station SKYLAB is now officially dead according to NASA, while Russian cosmonauts are setting new records in their Salyut 6 Space Station; and, strangely, the American Space Shuttle just can't seem to get off the ground. "What's happened to NASA?", we may ask ourselves; and "If we could land men on the moon, why can't we solve any of our other problems?" But before we can think of any answers, our attention is diverted again. "Here comes another bombshell from Washington", says the TV, and we forget everything else, absorbed in the latest bewildering event in the Carter crisis.

My friends, news reports about these events always make them seem as if they were separate and unrelated. As a result, they seem to make no sense; and so we do as we are intended to do, we just throw up our hands. The more evil our leaders have become, the more we have decided to just trust them; and the more secretive our Government has become, the more we have lied to ourselves that we knew what was going on. But the events I mentioned a few moments ago are not separate and unrelated. They are all parts of a bigger picture; like pieces of a jigsaw puzzle, each piece makes sense when you know what the total picture is. That is why in my AUDIO LETTER series I keep focusing on the total picture—that is what I said I would do when I inaugurated the AUDIO LETTER series in June 1975. Each month I can only highlight a few of the specific events that are pieces of the puzzle, but each month I try to add more to your own understanding so that you can learn to see the truth for yourself.

For long-time careful listeners of my AUDIO LETTERS, recent events ought not to be any real surprise. For example, consider the fluctuating decline of the United States dollar and the fluctuating rise of gold prices. Lately many former anti-gold figures have jumped onto the gold bandwagon, as if they had always been there. Yet they tell you nothing about why these events are now taking place. My friends, the reasons are those which I made public six years ago in my book, five years ago in Congressional testimony, and then in my AUDIO LETTERS.

Those who expected to benefit most from the death of the dollar began vanishing from the scene early this year of 1979. This began with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller, which I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. The following month I reported

that his brothers David and Laurance were also killed and replaced with "doubles." It is now widely known in international banking circles that the real David Rockefeller is dead. But powerful long-range economic forces were unleashed years ago by the late David Rockefeller and his intimates. The death of the dollar was just one part of an elaborate plan for Dictatorship here in America, followed by a One-World Government. Another element of the plan was to be a Middle East war with the nuclear destruction of Arab OPEC oil wells. Over 3-1/2 years ago I made the plan public in AUDIO LETTER No. 6, and in later tapes—for example, Nos. 28, 37, and 41—I have kept my listeners informed about the status of this plan; and in AUDIO LETTER No. 41 last December 1978, I called attention to the "Hate Saudi Arabia" campaign which was building up here in America. The nuclear doom of Saudi Arabia was being planned for the spring, and the American people were being conditioned to accept it. In AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I had revealed the secret American plan by which the Middle East disaster was to lead to war with Russia. In March came the Egyptian-Israeli "Peace Treaty" which was designed to set the stage not for peace, but for war; but in late April 1979 events behind the scenes altered completely the direction of events. In AUDIO LETTER No. 4 6 two months ago, I revealed how Russia stopped the secret nuclear war plan in its tracks, especially after the death of David Rockefeller. Meanwhile, only the tip of the iceberg of all this showed up here in America. Most Americans only knew that there was a gasoline shortage with long lines; what we were not told was that the so-called shortage was artificial. It had been timed to coincide with the Saudi Arabian disaster, which did not happen due to Russia's intervention. Now the oil companies are covering their tracks, releasing more gasoline; and most Americans still have no idea what the gas lines were really all about.

And then there are those whales which beached themselves last month in Oregon. It was almost a re-run of the beaching of some 120 whales in Florida nearly 2-1/2 years ago. In AUDIO LETTER No. 20 for January 1977 I had revealed that some huge secret American underwater missiles had been planted in the Atlantic Ocean off our east coast. These enormous missiles had begun rupturing and leaking plutonium from their warheads into the Ocean. Early the following month the whales began beaching themselves near Jacksonville, Florida. The stories then were the same as we heard recently in Oregon. Somehow, we were told, the Florida whales must have gotten disoriented; but as I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 21, their breathing had been disrupted by a fungus in their lungs, and the fungus was the product of the plutonium from one of the leaking missiles I had revealed. This time, in Oregon, the whale-beaching was once again caused by plutonium-induced fungus in the lungs; but the source this time was not a leaking underwater missile, instead a different weapon of secret warfare mentioned in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 20 and 21 is involved. Recently Russia resumed radiochemical warfare against the United States. Large remote-control canisters have been dropped at sea at intervals along our Pacific, Atlantic, and Gulf coasts. These are spewing radiochemical warfare agents into our air on command whenever wind conditions are favorable. Most of the canisters used plutonium as one of their active ingredients. These renewed attacks so far are at a low, non-lethal level; their purpose is not to kill but to promote low-grade ailments and to sap our strength and national will. But the whales that beached themselves on the Oregon coast last month, June 16, had high concentrations of plutonium in their lungs along with the other canister products. Apparently they surfaced very close to a canister off the Oregon coast. They breathe the air just as you and I do, and at that close range the canister gave them a dose that destroyed their ability to breathe; and so like the

whales in Florida 2-1/2 years ago, they beached themselves to die.

In other ways, too, the United States is gradually being rendered incapable of going to war against Russia. In World War II the Western allies brought Germany's war machine to a crawl by bombing chemical plants and disrupting rail transportation. Likewise, today American chemical, petroleum, and rail targets are being destroyed in a war of attrition by Russian sabotage. Russia's new rulers are taking no chances, my friends. Of all people, they know there is always the danger of being surprised and upset in their plans; and so, even while they are trying to prevent nuclear war, they are still preparing to win such a war if it does take place. This even includes continuing preparations for a possible invasion of the United States from Canada and Mexico. I first revealed these activities sixteen months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 32, and this is the explanation for the news reports just a few days ago about a major new Russian Army command structure in Cuba. Cuba is serving as a staging center for the steady flow of troops and arms into Mexico's Yucatan Peninsula. This is going on secretly but with the knowledge and cooperation of the Mexican Government. Early this year President Carter paid a visit to Mexico and was greeted with official contempt and hostility. Now you know why. Mexico, like Quebec Province in Canada, has already made her peace with Russia. Russia's preparations are already far-advanced to enable her to survive and win all-out war; and yet, as I have revealed over the past several months, Russia's new rulers are using every means at their disposal to prevent nuclear war. They are doing nothing less than taking control of the United States, working from the top down.

Today I want to call your attention to major current events which are proving what I have been telling you all along. Because the AUDIO LETTER stands alone, you must use your own judgment in evaluating what I reveal, instead of depending on what anyone else says. The AUDIO LETTER, my friends, is not for the many but for the few with ears to hear.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—THE FINAL CHAPTER IN THE GREAT SKYLAB COVER-UP

Topic #2—THE SECRET WAR OF THE WALKING DEAD

Topic #3—HOW AMERICA WILL RE-LEARN THE FEAR OF GOD.

Topic #1—On a midsummer day ten years ago this month, an estimated half billion people world-wide sat transfixed before television sets. We were watching a television image that was fuzzy, flickering, in black and white, and yet it was awesome because we were watching the impossible take place before our very eyes. We were watching two American astronauts, Neil Armstrong and Buzz Aldrin, the first two men on the moon. That day, July 20, 1969, was a great day to be an American. The impossible promise of an assassinated President, John F. Kennedy, had come true. On May 25, 1961, he had told us that America would put a man on the moon before the decade was out, so when Neil Armstrong stepped onto the moon's surface and called it "a giant leap", he was right. In barely eight years we had leapfrogged past Russia to be first on the moon.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 2 6 I explained why it was so important to beat Russia to the moon. It was all sold to us as a sort of Space Age Olympics, a peaceful sporting race to gather moon rocks; but it was actually a military crash program, ten times bigger than the Manhattan Project in World War II, and its real purpose was to establish a secret base on the moon. From there,

revolutionary new Beam-weapons would become the key to ruling the earth. At the time of the Kennedy announcement in 1961, the United States was far behind Russia in space, but NASA planners had figured out a way to jump past Russia in order to get to the moon first.

The Russians were firmly committed to what is called the Earth-Orbital Approach to moon flight. Under this approach, missions to the moon would be assembled and launched from earth orbit with the aid of Space Stations. This technique has always been recognized as the surest and safest route to the moon. Even our own late great Wernher Von Braun had advocated the earth-orbital approach for more than a decade. The earth-orbital technique is like building a firm foundation before building the rest of the house. It's the right thing to do, but it takes time. NASA planners were given the task of beating Russia to the moon, and they soon concluded that we were too far behind Russia to catch up by the earth-orbital method. There was only one way we could beat the Russians—it was bold, but it was also very risky. It would be like building a house with almost no foundation for the sake of speed. It was called the Lunar-Orbital moon mission. Under this plan, the first priority was to get men on the moon fast and start laying the groundwork for a moon base; then with the moon in American hands, we could drop back and fortify our Space Logistics system. Its keystone was to be a Space Station known as SKYLAB. And that's how Project Apollo was conceived, with its predecessors Project Mercury and Project Gemini. NASA was gambling in several ways at once, but the gamble paid off—America did beat Russia to the moon.

In December 1972 the Moon Program was supposedly cut off prematurely with Apollo 17; but in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 6 I explained that the flights did not really stop; instead the Moon Program was simply taken out of public limelight. Moon-launch missions were shifted from the highly visible Cape Kennedy to the island of Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean. On May 14, 1973, less than five months after the Apollo 17 Moon Mission, SKYLAB was launched. From then on the secretly continuing American Moon Program began benefitting from earth-orbital techniques. By late 1977, plans called for the American military base in Copernicus Crater to be armed and operational. The base was to be armed with Beam-weapons which can blast any visible spot on earth within two seconds. The weapons were to include eventually both Lasers and Particle Beams.

In the United States itself, Particle Beam research had been sent down blind alleys as a decoy, but in other locations world-wide Particle Beam-weapons were being developed. It was an elaborate plan—and it almost worked. But on the night of the Harvest Moon, September 27, 1977, it all ended in catastrophe. Already the Soviet Union had begun orbiting operational killer satellites called Cosmos Interceptors. These are manned and armed with Particle Beam-weapons. Two were in orbit by late September 1977, and one was armed with a deadly Neutron Beam. This was used to bombard the Copernicus Base, killing all of the astronauts there, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 26. Only two days later, the Russian manned space program suddenly came to life. The Salyut 6 Space Station was launched into orbit, then cosmonaut crews began visiting Salyut 6 in a steady stream, which continues to this day. Even now, the latest Salyut 6 cosmonauts have been in orbit more than 150 days. This far exceeds any record ever set by the United States.

All of this is in stark contrast to the fate of our own Space Station, SKYLAB. Earlier this month on July 11, NASA pretended

that SKYLAB had unavoidably crashed from orbit, but SKYLAB actually came to an abrupt end 21 months ago, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 27. On October 18, 1977, a tremendous fireball flashed across the southwestern United States. The sky was lit up over a track nearly a thousand miles long. It was seen by thousands across at least five (5) States—Texas, Oklahoma, Louisiana, Arkansas and Missouri. Witnesses included pilots, military observers, and even the McDonald Observatory in far southwest Texas. It produced headlines all over the United States. People were asking, "What in the world was that?" That, my friends, was SKYLAB. As I said that month, it was blasted out of space by a Russian Cosmos Interceptor. The destruction of SKYLAB was part of Russia's program to terminate America's secret military control of space.

Later that month, the SKYLAB cover-up by NASA got under way. SKYLAB was said to be sinking from orbit sooner than expected, but at first NASA pretended that SKYLAB could probably be saved by the Space Shuttle. There was never any chance, my friends, that SKYLAB could be saved because it was already gone. From time to time the SKYLAB cover-up story was revived, each time with more pessimism. Finally, last December 1978, NASA announced, with deep regret of course, that all plans to rescue SKYLAB were being abandoned. Those pesky sunspots were just bringing it down too fast to reach it in time with the Space Shuttle. From then on, speculation mounted: Where would SKYLAB crash—India? China? The Andes? Russia? Downtown Chicago? NASA spokesmen kept insisting that they had no idea. Even on the alleged final orbit this month, July 11, NASA pretended to be taken by surprise. They pretended to be trying to bring it down in the South Atlantic, but it over-shot, they said. Then there were several minutes of dramatic silence from SKYLAB Control in Houston. Then came the initial announcement of SKYLAB's official fate—"Purely by chance", they said, "SKYLAB had apparently crashed into the Indian Ocean." They pretended that it was a surprise, but 17 months ago, my friends, I alerted you to the Indian Ocean as being on NASA's mind for cover-up purposes. The Indian Ocean provides no witnesses to dispute NASA's claim of a SKYLAB re-entry there. Nevertheless, NASA finally decided it would be much safer to provide something for people to see than to say it just disappeared without a trace; and sure enough, the initial NASA announcement about the Indian Ocean was followed by reports of sparkles in the sky over southwest Australia. NASA then said apologetically that a few portions of SKYLAB had apparently made it past the Ocean, re-entering over western Australia. But strangely enough, the Australian Government said not a word.

My friends, this final chapter of the SKYLAB cover-up involved another military secret, which I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. There's a large secret American missile base in the Northern Territory of Australia. The base is controlled by the Military, not NASA; but SKYLAB was part of a secret military program and so NASA received some military help in the SKYLAB cover-up.

On July 8, only three days before SKYLAB's fictional crash to earth, a world-wide military exercise called "GLOBAL SHIELD 79" began. It received very little publicity here in the United States, and yet it was the biggest exercise in over 20 years by the Strategic Air Command. NASA scheduled the fictional end of SKYLAB to take place during this exercise. On July 10 two Minuteman III missiles were launched into the Pacific from Vandenberg Air Force Base in California, but that same day another missile was also launched under cover of the world-wide exercise. It was launched from the missile base in Australia in coordination with NASA. The missile was unarmed, and so the

Russian Cosmospheres overhead observed the launch without interfering. It was launched shortly past noon Eastern Daylight Time, which was the middle of the night in Australia. The missile headed northeast over Indonesia and the South Pacific, into orbit. Nearly 24 hours later the orbital package was following a path that would soon bring it over Australia once again. A small retro-rocket was fired, and re-entry took place over southwest Australia. It was timed for maximum effect—nighttime in Australia and midday in the United States. The orbital package, consisting of ceramic fragments of a special design, created a nice fireworks display in the night sky. The very next day reports in the United States said that Australians were finding pieces of purported SKYLAB debris lying all around; and in the most famous case, an alleged 17-year-old beer keg delivery man swung into action like a professional. Traveling by chartered Learjet, commercial airplane and limousine, he raced to San Francisco. Carrying a few nondescript black lumps, he beat the deadline for the $10,000 SKYLAB prize offered by the San Francisco EXAMINER. Those lumps, my friends, were merely chunks of volcanic rock consisting mostly of iron and carbon; but predictably, NASA said a few days later that they were probably from SKYLAB, and the prize was awarded. Can you imagine?

My friends, NASA has now closed the book on SKYLAB. It's just yesterday's news now, something we are supposed to forget about; but if we do forget it, we would deserve whatever may happen to us because the SKYLAB cover-up was elaborate, and its purpose was to keep the truth from us. There are still very powerful forces in America who want to drag us all into war with Russia; but the message of SKYLAB is that if we let that happen, we will be committing suicide for ourselves, for our children, and for the United States of America!

Topic #2—Two months ago I revealed that a revolutionary new Intelligence weapon was being introduced by Russia. I refer to their "Organic Robotoids." These are man-made robot-like living creatures, perhaps best described as computerized animals. They're designed to simulate human beings almost perfectly in appearance and behavior, and yet they are not human. Robotoids are so far removed from the knowledge and experience of most people that they are very difficult for many people to believe, but now more and more major surprises are filling the news—that is, they are surprises if you do not know about Russia's robotoids. For example, consider the Middle East and the alleged gasoline shortage. Nearly four years ago on October 12, 1975, I wrote an article on the Op-Ed page of the Washington Star. It was titled: "WHO'S TO BLAME FOR INFLATION? It's Time to be Fair to OPEC." The comments I made then are still true today. For example, we hear constantly about the increasing price of oil, but, quote: "You must remember that products from the oil-consuming countries to the oil-producing countries are costing more each day" and, quote: "...thus oil price rises appear to be limited, while the products of the industrialized countries are unlimited, open-ended. Is this fair?" When I wrote those words in 1975 I was out of step with the crowd. For the next 3-1/2 years we were told increasingly that OPEC, especially Saudi Arabia, was our economic enemy, but suddenly in the past two months everything has changed. The "Hate Saudi Arabia" chant in the major media has abruptly stopped, at least for the moment. Instead, stories are appearing about renewed trust between the United States and Saudi Arabia; and as if by magic, the contrived gasoline lines are disappearing with promises of more gas on the way. It's all the result of the Russian robotoid shuttles to the Middle East, my friends, which I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 46. Russia stopped the War Plan and robbed the big oil companies of their excuse for shortages.

Now, consider the SALT II treaty. There's a relationship, my friends, between SALT II and, of all things, the SKYLAB debacle. There is nothing at all in the major media news about this relationship; but as my older listeners know, SALT II and SKYLAB are just tips of the same iceberg, and it's an iceberg that is already sinking our "Ship of State." Earlier I reviewed how the real story of SKYLAB's fate began on September 27, 1977. That was the day America lost the secret "Space Battle of the Harvest Moon" to Russia. Three weeks later a Russian Cosmos Interceptor blasted SKYLAB out of existence. The real story of the present SALT II treaty also began on September 27, 1977. That day Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko delivered a speech at the United Nations. By the time Gromyko spoke, it was already clear that Russia was winning the Space Battle so he spoke very harshly about American stalling on SALT II. He delivered what amounted to a veiled ultimatum, then he left for Washington for a highly unusual nighttime meeting at the White House with the real Jimmy Carter and Secretary of State Cyrus Vance. Breathless reporters told the nation there had been a breakthrough in SALT II; but when I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 26 three days later, I revealed what had really happened. The stories about a SALT breakthrough were lies, cover-stories to allay public concern. That's what my listeners heard in AUDIO LETTER No. 26, and for the following year and a half SALT II went nowhere; but early this year drastic changes in America's rulership began taking place. For the past six months the AUDIO LETTER has been focusing on these changes as they have taken place; and they have led, among other things, to a turn-around on SALT II.

The changes began on January 26, 1979, with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller. That was the opening shot of a secret Bolshevik coup d'etat against America's real rulers. As I have explained in previous tapes, the atheistic Bolsheviks no longer rule Russia. They have been overthrown by a tough band of native Christians. Today Christianity is being re-born in Russia—but here, in the United States, the Bolsheviks want to create a new Bolshevik revolution. They want to seize control of America and then to strike back at their bitter enemies, the Christ-ones who now run the Kremlin. For several months the Bolshevik coup d'etat was moving fast, important people were being purged and replaced by "doubles" beginning with David and Laurance Rockefeller and their intimates; and the week-end after Easter 1979 the Bolshevik purge claimed the lives of President Carter, Vice-President Mondale, and their families. But as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 45, the Russians then began to intervene. A secret war of "doubles" broke out, and by late April the White House was already under Russia's control. In AUDIO LETTER No. 46 I was able to let my listeners in on the key to Russia's success. They are using "robotoids" to replace and simulate powerful people. The United States is secretly becoming a Russian satellite state, and the American turn-around on SALT II came fast. On May 9, 1979, the robotoid replacements for Defense Secretary Brown and Secretary of State Vance made the initial announcement: an agreement in principle had been achieved on SALT II, and with lightning speed the treaty itself was signed in Vienna barely five weeks later. My friends, Russia signed with herself through Carter robotoid No. 3 and Brezhnev No. 2, the human "double" for the late real Brezhnev.

At first the new SALT II treaty brought howls from Capitol Hill. We heard over and over that it was in serious trouble, but last month I reported the true situation. SALT II's most bitter opponents in the Senate are people who are playing ball with the Bolsheviks here in America. Russia is replacing them with robotoids, and the earlier hard line against SALT II is slowly

evaporating. The shift is subtle so far, but it is clearly visible. For example, the late Senator Barry Goldwater worried constantly in public about verification, but on July 23 robotoid Goldwater said, quote: "I would not be too exercised over it now." An even more bitter SALT II opponent was the late Senator Henry Jackson. Jackson always played up the Russian threat, but on July 23 he accused robotoid Defense Secretary Harold Brown of exaggerating that threat. He called it "scare tactics to sell SALT II." Even our outgoing Ambassador to the Soviet Union Malcolm Toon is no more. Toon was publicly very suspicious of SALT II, but now a Toon robotoid has abruptly started campaigning in favor of SALT II—and he won't explain the change.

Robotoids, my friends, are a very powerful weapon; but as I pointed out in AUDIO LETTER No. 46, they are also very troublesome. They do not live long, especially under conditions of constant exposure and stress. They must also be programmed, and yet they are also somewhat unpredictable. Last month I described the process by which the holographic brain of a robotoid reproduces the memory of a person being duplicated. Other parts of the brain are altered so that the robotoid ends up as a robot-like being that obeys instructions. But the memory includes involuntary responses which sometimes produce unwanted behavior. This is turning out to be a severe problem in the case of the Jimmy Carter robotoids, because the real Carter had mental instabilities which are reproduced partially in the robotoids. The first signs of erratic behavior by the Carter robotoids came in public comments about Senator Kennedy. The real Jimmy Carter had a strong personal dislike for Kennedy and on several occasions Carter robotoids have simply blurted out these reactions in very raw form. To a degree, this type of thing is a danger with all robotoids—they do not possess truly human judgment. They appear to have it under certain conditions, but this is the result of programming for those situations. The problems of instability and short life cause robotoids to be best suited for interim purposes. For long-term purposes, human agents are still the best. For that reason, don't be surprised to see more and more new faces in high positions. Some of the new faces will themselves be robotoids, but some will be human beings.

The Carter crisis of recent days demonstrates two things at once: one is the extent of secret Russian control that now exists in Washington; the other is the difficulty the Russians themselves are having with their robotoids. On July 1, Carter robotoid No. 4 returned to Washington from South Korea following the "Economic Summit" in Tokyo. The scheduled Carter holiday in Hawaii was canceled, and the next day a Carter Energy speech was scheduled for the evening of July 5. Then the Carter robotoid family disappeared to Camp David. Jimmy Carter robotoid No. 4 was burning out, and was disposed of. Robotoid No. 5 was next in line and had already been tried out several times; but on the 4th of July, the day before the scheduled speech, Carter robotoid No. 5 went berserk. It was disposed of, leaving only robotoid No. 6 on deck. Each new robotoid is given exposure on a small scale first, to test its wings so to speak—for example, our alleged President goes fishing with a few friends or visits a farm family. But this had not yet been done with robotoid No. 6 on July 4, so that left the Russians no choice. The speech was canceled without explanation. The Jody Powell robotoid refused to answer reporters' questions. The press was stunned, Capitol Hill was shocked and dismayed, and Carter's own staff (those who are still human) were caught by surprise. The following evening, July 5, the White House "Energy group" held a meeting. Afterward the Washington Star quoted a key Administration official as saying that, quote: "There was incredible disarray." Meanwhile

Carter's political advisers supposedly were summoned to Camp David. By Friday evening July 6, Carter robotoid No. 6 was programmed and ready for initial controlled exposure. Thus began the so-called "Domestic summit" at Camp David. Puzzled observers said they could not figure out what Carter hoped to accomplish with all this. The people invited to Camp David after all were people whose views were already known to Carter. Almost without exception, a number of the participants as they left scratched their heads in puzzlement. "Carter", they said, "had talked little. He simply sat taking notes and nodding most of the time."

My friends, two things were going on at Camp David: one was the controlled exposure I mentioned earlier for Carter robotoid No. 6; but in addition, key individuals among the visitors were robotized—that is, the real person arrived, but a robotoid departed!! The individuals who were robotized at Camp David had been identified from Nelson Rockefeller's "Hit List", which I discussed two months ago. Others were invited and left untouched as a smoke screen. All those on the List who arrived at Camp David are now dead—in their place are robotoids carrying on in their places like programmed zombies. The people themselves are dead, and the robotoids are not conscious of being alive; and so the "Secret War of the Walking Dead" goes on.

On July 11, SKYLAB Day according to NASA, the Camp David "Domestic summit" ended abruptly. Carter robotoid No. 6 had started behaving erratically, Wall Street was rife with rumors that Carter had suffered a nervous breakdown, robotoid No. 7 was brought onto the scene, and the next day robotoid No. 6 was eliminated. Once again Carter was said to be at work on his Energy speech. On Friday the 13th of July, journalists who met with robotoid No. 7 described Carter as, quote: "a thoroughly chastened leader"; others called him a deeply troubled and worried man. Nevertheless, the next day Carter robotoid No. 7 was sent forth to try his wings. Like a dead El Cid strapped to a horse, the 7th robotoid copy of the late President Carter sallied forth. We were told that the President of the United States visited private homes near Pittsburgh, Pa. and Martinsburg, West Virginia. Afterward, the Russian Robotoid Command in Novosibirsk must have sighed with relief. One of the hosts told UPI, quote: "I feel better about him now. He's acting more like a president now." That Saturday evening July 14, Carter robotoid No. 7 arrived on the White House lawn by helicopter at roughly 6:30 P.M., but the Russians were taking no chances. An Associated Press dispatch that evening described another unexplained strange turn of events, quote: "Members of the Press corps who normally are allowed on the lawn to see and photograph the arrival, were barred from doing so on Saturday. White House Press officials gave no reason for the change except to say they saw no reason for the coverage." The following evening, Sunday July 15, Carter robotoid No. 7 successfully delivered the long-delayed Energy speech; but, as it turned out, Energy was only part of his subject. In that regard, the Russian program to nationalize the big oil companies was set in motion. That is what the so-called "ENERGY SECURITY CORPORATION" is actually all about; and to cut down all bureaucratic obstacles to Russia's "Energy plans" here, the "ENERGY MOBILIZATION BOARD" is to be created.

But the speech had a much broader thrust, dealing with the crisis of the American spirit. Some commentators have joked about the speech as, quote: "Carter's Sunday night sermon"; but as I will point out briefly in Topic #3, we would be wise not to laugh because, my friends, the words of the Carter robotoid No. 7 came straight from the Kremlin, and the Kremlin is not joking.

Even the speech itself was not without its mystery. The following day an article in the New York Times pointed out, quote: "Another extraordinary development was that the White House had no advance text of the speech, the President's ten days of deliberations notwithstanding. It was the first time in the memory of veteran reporters that no prepared text was released."

Even so, the speech gave the impression momentarily that things were finally back to normal, but that impression was shattered less than 48 hours later. Shortly after 4:00 P.M. July 17, the Jody Powell robotoid issued another brief surprise announcement to reporters. Something unprecedented had happened—the entire Carter Cabinet and all senior members of the White House staff had offered their resignations. Once again the Washington establishment was shaken to its foundations. But if the resignations were a shock here, they were a lightning bolt overseas, because in other countries the resignation of an entire Cabinet means just one thing—it means the Government has fallen. For the next few days news reports world-wide were filled with worried reactions. On all sides we were hearing words like Dismay, Bewilderment, Disbelief. Senators and others described Carter as acting erratically. One said publicly, quote: "We are worried about him having some kind of breakdown"; another said, quote: "I think the President is nuts."

Soon a Jimmy Carter robotoid may well flee the White House. That will leave 1980 as "The Year of the Dark Horse", because as of now, every major potential presidential candidate has been replaced with a robotoid! Two months ago when I first made public my intelligence on the Russian robotoids, I gave a warning. I knew many people would find them unbelievable, but I also cautioned that, quote: "Events in the days ahead will be impossible to understand without knowing this secret." And now, my friends, those events are already taking place.

Topic #3—There was a time in America not long ago when the fear of God was a meaningful phrase. To be a God-fearing man or woman was seen as a good thing; such a person could be trusted and relied upon. But today in America, the fear of God is generally thought of as an outmoded concept. If we think of our Lord Jesus Christ at all, it's as a baby in a manger, or as the Healer, or as the Feeder of five thousand. We forget that He also drove the moneychangers out of God's house with whips. We have reduced God to a convenience in our minds, even a servant. We think we can summon Him anytime we need help, but forget about Him otherwise.

Those are the attitudes in America today which arouse contempt and even anger in the new Kremlin. In AUDIO LETTER No. 38 I told my listeners about the struggle of six decades that led to the overthrow of the atheistic Bolsheviks in Russia. Russia's new rulers are Christians, and they endured incredible sacrifices. Now they are continuing their holy war against Bolshevism here in America by means of robotoids. We in America have not lifted a finger to save the soul of our own land from the hell of Bolshevism, so now the Russians are doing it. The Russians waited until the last possible moment to see if we American Christians would try to save our own country, but we are as blind today as Russia was six decades ago. So now, my friends, we have forfeited the chance to save America from Bolshevism ourselves. Now the Russians are doing it in their own way. The only alternative was to permit the outbreak of nuclear war. Rather than permit that, they are seizing control of the United States.

Last month in Vienna, Leonid Brezhnev No. 2 startled the world by saying, quote: "God will not forgive us if we fail." Those, my friends, are words that signify the fear of God; and now that

the Russians have begun taking over America, they consider it their duty to teach us the fear of God as well.

In his July 15 speech, Carter robotoid No. 7 said, quote: "In a nation that was proud of hard work, strong families, close-knit communities, and our faith in God, many of us now tend to worship self-indulgence and consumption. Human identity is no longer defined by what one does, but by what one owns; but we have discovered that owning things and consuming things does not satisfy our longing for meaning. We have learned that piling up material goods cannot fill the emptiness of lives which have no confidence and purpose." Those words, my friends, came straight from the Kremlin. That's why the official daily newspaper Pravda quoted the Carter speech without comment.

The people who are becoming our new rulers are beginning to tell us what lies ahead for us. The things which cause us to take our Lord Jesus Christ for granted will be allowed to fall away from us. Already the props are being pulled out from under the artificial United States economy. Soon there will be economic collapse, hardship, regimentation; and the only way up will be through hard work, patience, and spiritual strength. In the hard times that lie ahead, my friends, there will be many who will say the Russians have no right to let us plunge into such troubles, but the fact is that we have forfeited the right to choose our own future. If the Russians had not intervened, thermonuclear war would now be virtually upon us, so now the Russians are going to do it their way because our way was leading to total disaster.

What is beginning to happen now is what I told my listeners a year ago in AUDIO LETTER Nos. 35 and 36. We are witnessing the end of a way of life, our own way of life. In AUDIO LETTER No. 36 I said, quote: "The selfish and self-destructive license of today will be stamped out, but it will give way to real human freedom rooted in eternal spiritual values." That's what Carter robotoid No. 7 was talking about on July 15, my friends, and that is what the Kremlin intends for us as they lay plans to teach us anew the fear of God.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #49

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is August 27, 1979, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 49. As I say these words, the slow, lazy days of summer 1979 are drawing to a close. Most of us are sorry to see them go. For many people summer is a time to ignore the outside world as much as possible. It's time to relax, to bask in the sun, to pretend that today will blend into tomorrow without change or trouble. Television news programs in these later days of August have been filled with items that reinforce this mood. Even the alleged President has seemingly found time to lay aside the tedium of doing his job, and for a week or more we were assured by television reports that the Carter robotoid family were enjoying a tranquil steamboat ride down the Mississippi River. To all appearances, this robotoid President has had nothing to do except jog around the boat deck, shake hands with well-wishers, and give the same Energy speech over and over. If he can take life that easy, we think, why shouldn't we relax too? But, my friends, at this very

moment the world is in ferment as never before.

If you depend on television news and newspaper headlines as most people do, the world may seem to be just rolling along just like Old Man River; but if you want to have some hint of what is really taking place today, you should listen to the short-wave radio. Get into the habit of listening to the BBC World Service, to Radio Moscow World Service, to Radio Australia, to Radio South Africa, even Radio Canada right next door to us. It often contains important reports which you will never hear through our domestic major media. You might even tune in the Voice of America once in a while—there, too, you may hear things you will never hear in our domestic news media, and without commercials. But, my friends, you should listen to these with a certain amount of charity for they all have their own biases. There is not enough time in this entire tape even to list all the important areas of ferment in our world; but for a moment let me just skim the surface for you, then ask yourself whether the slick major media image of our country and the world is real or artificial.

Not long ago the Boat People from Vietnam were filling our headlines. Vietnam was expelling large numbers of its people—most all of them were Chinese, not Vietnamese. Vietnam has become a client state of Russia, and is preparing for possible all-out war with China. Of all countries, Vietnam knows the dangers of internal strife at this time, and so all those who refuse to cooperate with the present regime are being rounded up and expelled in one way or another. Vietnam is in a hurry because already tensions are building again along the border with China.

The Boat People now constitute a refugee problem of staggering proportions. Hundreds of thousands of people are crammed into refugee camps. Even so, the recent actions of Vietnam should be placed in proper perspective. In 35 years of continuous war in Indochina, the mass expulsion of political undesirables is a new phenomenon. In the past, the actions of the former Pol Pot regime in Cambodia, now known as Kampuchea, would have been more typical. When the Chinese-backed Pol Pot regime took control of Cambodia several years ago, a reign of terror began. It was alleged that more than a million Cambodians were murdered by their own government. Most of them were members of the middle class, regardless of their ethnic background. In that way the Pol Pot regime broke the back of any possible resistance. If the present regime in Vietnam were carrying on according to these traditional methods, there would be no Boat People—instead, there would be only mass graves throughout Vietnam. There would be no television pictures of pathetic refugees crammed into boats, and there would be no controversy over Vietnam's actions; because, at most, all we would hear would be a few passing rumors—then, all would be quiet again.

The shift in Vietnam's behavior, my friends, is the result of Russian pressure. Since the end of the Vietnam war, all remaining Chinese influence in Vietnam has been rooted out. Vietnam is now purely a Russian client state; and like Russia herself, Vietnam is getting rid of internal enemies by expelling them. As for the bloody Pol Pot regime in Cambodia, that was recently overthrown by the Vietnamese invasion.

The ferment in Indo-China is visible elsewhere too. Recently the United States has started speeding up arms shipments to Thailand, but the United States Government is now coming under Russia's control, so for all intents and purposes, Thailand's fate is already sealed. Soon it, too, will enter the Russian orbit.

Russia's continuing encirclement of China is moving right along. Early in 1978, my friends, I alerted you to watch for America's doors to start opening wide to Red China. Within a few months the news was filled with comments that we had decided to play the so-called "China card." It was all a panicky attempt by America's real rulers to buy time against Russia. During the final months of 1977, Russia had wrestled the military control of space away from the United States. This had altered completely the East-West balance of power; but due to the death of the real Leonid Brezhnev on January 7, 1978, our Rulers thought they had a chance. They expected the Kremlin to be divided by infighting to decide Brezhnev's successor. They thought they could keep the Kremlin off balance for two to three years. Using that time, they would rush ahead with secret weapons programs on a crash basis. And so America tried to play the "China card." Before the year of 1978 was out, the Carter Administration announced that the United States was establishing diplomatic relations with China, but it was an act of pure desperation. The late four Rockefeller brothers had badly underestimated the tightly knit band of Christians who now rule Russia. Since March 1978, Marshal Dmitry Ustinov has been the top man in the Kremlin. At the proper time he will step down in favor of a younger man, but for now the Kremlin power structure is stable and effective.

Current events in Asia demonstrate an important fact. America's attempt to play the so-called "China card" was a failure. It's no longer fashionable even to speak in those terms. China's invasion of Vietnam early this year of 1979 showed up the United States as a paper tiger in Asia. By contrast, Russia's profile there is becoming taller and taller. As I revealed long ago, China was actually playing the "America card" to get the best deal possible with Russia. Next month, formal talks will begin in Moscow between China and Russia toward improving relations between the two.

Six years ago in my book I warned about the forces leading to a vast new Asian Axis. Today this axis built around Russia, China, and Japan is coming together, but Russia is making sure there's no doubt in anyone's mind about who will be its leader. Even on the eve of major talks between Russia and China, Russia does not hesitate to point fingers at China. For example, look at Afghanistan on Russia's southern border which is now a Russian client state. Civil war has been underway there for nine months. Early this month a four-hour pitched battle took place right in the capital city of Kabul. Afghan Radio has charged that trained guerrillas, anti-revolutionaries, have entered Afghanistan from neighboring Iran and Pakistan; and Russia charges that some of these intruders were trained in China.

In ways like this, my friends, Russia is putting pressure not only on China but also on Pakistan and Iran. This is part of Russia's preoccupation with bordering states, which I have explained in the past. Afghanistan and Iran both border on Russia, and Russia wants secure borders. Pakistan is a land bridge from Afghanistan to the Arabian Sea. Russia has historically wanted a land corridor in this area for access to the Indian Ocean. In other ways too, Pakistan is being given good reason to think over her attitude toward Russia.

Lately Pakistan's relations with the United States have taken a turn for the worse. Earlier this month, on August 11, the New York Times made public some stunning policy planning within the State Department. Pakistan is very close to creating its own atomic bomb, but the Times revealed that the United States intends to stop Pakistan one way or another. One of the options

under specific consideration has brought a stinging protest by Pakistan—and no wonder. That option is: covert operations. That, my friends, is exactly the option used by the United States in Guyana last November. In the case of Pakistan, those operations would involve sabotage of her atomic installations. Here at home, of course, sabotage is supposed to be inconceivable.

All across the world, the ferment increasingly has the flavor of dramatic change. For example, less than a decade ago the United States supported Pakistan in the war with India; and for five years now India has had the atomic bomb—but now, the United States reportedly wants to stop Pakistan from getting it. But things have changed, my friends. The Rockefellers a decade ago were at the peak of their power. India was slated for conquest in a plan which later ousted Indira Gandhi from power. But as I have revealed in recent tapes, the four Rockefeller brothers are no more. Their old allies who overthrew them, the atheistic Bolsheviks, have also been stopped in their tracks. It is now Russia who controls most all of the top echelons of the United States Government; and as Pakistan ponders a changed America, Indira Gandhi is staging a comeback in India.

In the past year the biggest change of all has gone unannounced in our daily news. The end of a dynasty has taken place, the Rockefeller dynasty. It began a year ago last month with the eldest of the four brothers, John D. III. In AUDIO LETTER No. 36 I revealed how his death would cause Rockefeller efforts in Africa and Asia to start unraveling, and today the headless Rockefeller cartel is losing fast in southern Africa. The initiative is shifting back to Britain, which has established a special secret relationship with Russia. As for Asia, I have already pointed out the collapse of America's so-called "China card" strategy, notwithstanding the present visit to China of the robotoid Mondale.

Turning to the Persian Gulf, we keep hearing about United States plans for a large contingency force. This force, known as the "Quick Reaction Corps", would rush to the Gulf to protect our oil lifeline in time of crisis; but throughout the Gulf region itself, this plan has raised cries of protest. It's an offshoot of the plan I made public a year ago to set up an American first strike against Russia; but even without knowing that, it's obvious to everyone that the force would mean trouble. Kuwait has already served notice in public that the United States must not deploy these forces in the Gulf. If we do, Kuwait will destroy her own oil wells.

At this time last year the Shah of Iran was still in power, but the upheaval in Iran which was tied to the secret American war plan ended his rule earlier this year. The revolution in Iran was also designed to break the access by British Petroleum to Iranian oil. That has left practically the whole pie to the Rockefeller big oil cartel; but increasingly the Khomeini regime has turned out to be an awkward puppet for big oil. Now Iran is becoming destabilized by internal strife among Kurds, Arabs, and leftist Iranians; and lately there have been huge demonstrations in Iran favoring the Palestine Liberation Organization. The Iranian demonstrations have also been against Israel and the United States, as if the two were one. Meanwhile Israeli artillery continues to pound southern Lebanon almost daily, and yet there's been an obvious shift in America's Middle East policy. Several weeks ago Israeli Foreign Minister Dayan said publicly that a shift had taken place recently. There were official denials but now the Andrew Young affair has created a bombshell for United States policy in the Middle East, and here

at home smoldering tensions between Blacks and Jews have been fanned into open flames.

And so it goes, my friends. Wherever you look you will see the ferment of change. One way to look at this is to tell yourself that all these things are unrelated just as they are presented in the news. Viewed in that way, world events are impossible to understand or even remember. That's the attitude that says: There's no cause for human events, they just happen. But, my friends, there is a cause for everything we see. The sun does not rise every day by accident—there's a reason for it; and the world is not stirring with the winds of change by accident—there's a reason for it. This month, as always, I want to focus your attention on the reasons behind current events. Knowing these, you can better understand the individual events in the news for yourself. Maybe you can't always affect these events directly, but it's always better to be aware than to be taken by surprise; and for those who are not aware, there will be many surprises in these days of radical changes.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—RUSSIA'S TRANSFORMATION OF AMERICA'S MIDDLE EAST POLICY

Topic #2—THE DOMESTIC FALLOUT OF THE ANDREW YOUNG AFFAIR

Topic #3—RUSSIA'S TWO-FRONT WAR AGAINST ROTHSCHILD WORLD POWER.

Topic #1—One summer night in 1974 I was in the studios of a New York City radio station. The station was WMCA, the program was the famous LONG JOHN NEBEL SHOW. For quite some time the late Long John Nebel had been having me on his program as a guest once a month for about six hours. But that night I was asked a question about the Middle East. In my answer I said among other things that the troubles there began with the Palestinians and the Israelis, and they will end with the Palestinians and Israelis. Now many Zionist listeners were shocked to hear these words. For them, the Palestinians did not exist; and since that night I have never again been allowed to appear on WMCA or any other New York radio station. The then owner of WMCA is now the head of the VOICE OF AMERICA. Can you imagine?

It has now been five years since I said those forbidden words about the Palestinians. Today, as then, the Zionists here and in Israel bristle with hostility at the very word "Palestinian"; and for most of those five years, American policy toward the Palestinians has echoed that of Zionists and of Israel.

Four years ago, in 1975, Israel was secretly guaranteed that this policy would continue by the late Secretary of State Henry Kissinger. This policy was never passed on by Congress. As recently as last March 26, 1979, American policy was still to exclude the Palestinians. On that day the so-called "Egyptian-Israeli Peace Treaty" was signed in Washington. It did not amend this 1975 policy in any way, and so it continued to lock out the Palestinians.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 44 I explained how this secret policy was intended to lead very quickly not to peace but to war in the Middle East. That in turn was to lead to an American nuclear first strike against Russia. The secret American plan, which I made public one year ago this month in AUDIO LETTER No. 37, was moving fast, but since that time dramatic changes have been taking place in America's foreign policy. This includes our foreign policy in general and our Middle East policy in particular. The changes began last April 1979 behind the scenes. At that time the changes were not yet visible to the public, but that month I reported to my listeners that a secret war of

"doubles" had broken out in Washington. The Intelligence Agencies of Russia, Britain, and Israel were struggling for control of the United States Government. Our own CIA was in disarray. The CIA had always been David Rockefeller's private detective agency, but by then David Rockefeller was dead, replaced by a "double." Rockefeller power in America had been shattered. In AUDIO LETTER No. 45 I reported that Russia was gaining the upper hand in the war of "doubles." The following month I was able to reveal why they were winning. I also reported that two supersecret diplomatic shuttles to the Middle East had taken place. The shuttles involved what appeared to be top American officials, but it was actually a Russian operation to stop the Middle East war plan. And that was only the first step in Russia's plan to revolutionize United States policy in the Middle East.

Many of my listeners seem to have ignored the detailed report I gave on these shuttles in AUDIO LETTER No. 46. For one thing, there was no hint about these developments in the major media news at that time; and if anything, the Middle East appeared to be on the back burner. But I think the significance of the shuttles may have been overlooked by many people for another reason. AUDIO LETTER No. 46 was the tape in which I first revealed Russia's secret weapon—that is, "Organic Robotoids." These artificial, living, robot-like creatures are shocking and mind-boggling. Their mere existence is a hard fact to absorb; so when I described their use in the shuttles later in the tape, it may have sounded minor by comparison. My friends, the events of recent days regarding the Middle East are the direct result of those shuttles! They initiated a radical shift in America's Middle East policy because that policy is now being established by the Kremlin. I would urge you to go back and listen again to what you heard in AUDIO LETTER No. 46, especially regarding the Middle East shuttles, then the events of recent days should be much easier for you to understand.

On June 18, 1979, the SALT II signing took place in Vienna, Austria. America's turnabout in favor of SALT II is another aspect of Russia's take-over here. I have discussed that in recent tapes; but on the same day as the SALT II signing, another important meeting took place in Vienna. The robotoid replacement for Secretary of State Cyrus Vance met with Austria's Chancellor, Bruno Kreisky. Kreisky is a Jew; but like many Jews, he has no sympathy with the political force known as Zionism. In the recent past, he has made scalding attacks on the ruling circles in Israel. In public statements about this, Kreisky has used words such as "paranoid", "a police state", to describe the Israeli government. The tough band of Christians who now rule Russia agree completely. Like Kreisky, the Russians have often made public statements blasting Zionism. In Topic #3 I'll say more about the controversy over Zionism because this controversy is now moving onto center stage in a struggle over the future of all mankind.

In the Kreisky meeting with the Vance robotoid, the diplomatic status of the Palestinians was discussed. Ten days earlier, United States Ambassador to Austria, Milton Wolf, had already had a meeting with the representative of the PLO. Kreisky said he intended to invite Arafat, the PLO leader, for a formal visit to Vienna. In that way, Kreisky would be initiating a quasi-official recognition of the PLO as a political force. On July 8 Arafat arrived in Vienna, creating headlines in Europe. Meanwhile, there had already been three meetings in Austria between United States Ambassador Wolf and a PLO representative. On July 31 a Jimmy Carter robotoid began setting the stage for the Andrew Young affair. In an interview, robotoid Carter

compared the Palestinian problem to the Civil Rights movement in the United States. For days Israeli leaders were boiling, and their sympathizers in this country denounced the Carter remarks. On August 5, Israeli Foreign Minister Dayan complained publicly that in the past two months or so, quote: "There has been a shift in United States policy." That shift, my friends, began with the secret robotoid shuttles, which I revealed three months ago. On August 13, special Middle East Envoy, Robert Strauss, or rather a Strauss robotoid, spoke before the American Bar Association in Dallas. He said the United States is committed to the security of Israel but also, quote: "the legitimate rights of the Palestinian people." The same day, the Andrew Young affair began. NEWSWEEK magazine broke the story that Young, as Ambassador to the United Nations, had met with the UN observer of the PLO, Zehdi Terzi. The next day the Israeli government loudly protested Young's action. The day after that, August 15, he resigned.

Last month I alerted you to watch for more changing faces in positions of power here in the United States. The departure of Andrew Young is part of this "changing of the guard", but it's also much more. For one thing, the Young affair has highlighted the fact that America's Middle East policy is changing, and it did so in a way that cast the Palestinians in a far more favorable light than in the past. Equally important to Russia, Israel has been lured into giving itself a black eye. In the past, Israel could always claim that the PLO was making peace impossible, but now the PLO is concentrating on a diplomatic drive for a peaceful accommodation with Israel. Israel's response has been to try to sabotage this process. World-wide the reaction has been to start questioning whether Israel really wants peace. For example, on August 17, the BBC carried an interview with Antony McDermott of the Financial Times of London. He was asked his opinion of the Israeli objective in bringing about the Young resignation. He replied in part, quote: "I would speculate that if the PLO were through some miracle to come out and say 'We accept the existence of Israel', it would be extremely embarrassing to Mr. Begin because he's constantly comparing them to the Nazis." Russia had foreseen that Israel would try to stop the United States policy shift. The Andrew Young affair has caused Israel to injure herself by these efforts.

World opinion toward Israel is changing; but for Israel, the worst setback of all may be right here in the United States because the domestic fallout, my friends, of the Andrew Young affair is not at all what Israel had in mind.

Topic #2—When Israel was proclaimed a separate nation in 1947 by the United Nations, the United States was the first great power to give it diplomatic recognition. Ever since that time, there has been a special relationship between the governments of the two countries. An essential ingredient in maintaining this relationship has been domestic support within the United States. For more than three decades American public opinion has been generally pro-Israel, but the Andrew Young affair is causing Israel to be seen in a different light by many Americans. For one thing, questions are now being raised about Israeli Intelligence activity in the United States. In the past this has never been a public issue, but that is changing because of the way in which the Young affair broke wide open.

On August 16, the day after he resigned, Young held a news conference at the United Nations. In the words of the BBC that evening, Young blamed Israel for the events which led to his resignation. That same day, the Atlanta Constitution reported

that Israeli Intelligence agents had spied on Young's meeting with PLO representative Terzi. The newspaper said that this enabled Israel to challenge Young's original statement that the meeting had been inadvertent. Israel's United Nations Ambassador Blum immediately denied the report; but when Young was asked about it, he said that he assumed he was being bugged but he did not care. Since then reports have continued to multiply about Israeli spying in the Young episode.

Israeli denials have just led to increasingly detailed reports about the spying, and in the process broader questions are being asked about Israeli spying here in the United States. All this is very worrisome to the government of Israel because they have, my friends, left a trail. The fact is that the Mossad, Israel's Intelligence Agency, is very active in the United States, but this is in violation of a secret agreement under which the Mossad is forbidden from this activity. In return, our own CIA is forbidden from the clandestine activities in Israel. Strangely enough, I can report that the CIA has adhered to the agreement, but both did work together in the Jonestown, Guyana tragedy, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTER 40. Israel is fearful of having Mossad activities here exposed as a cause celebre. Technically, the hundreds of Mossad agents in the United States could be rounded up and expelled. If this was done with great fanfare, the impact on Israel's image here in America could be devastating. World opinion would also veer away from Israel, so the Zionists are doing everything in their power not to have an investigation. What they want most is for the controversy to just go away. At the same time, they're trying to put the best possible face on Israeli Intelligence. For example, on August 21 an article appeared in the Washington Star entitled: "Discreet Mossad called World's Best." The article is built mainly around the statements not by Israelis but by former American Intelligence officials. The impression conveyed is that the mighty Mossad easily could spy on anyone it wants to, but we are also to believe they just wouldn't do such a thing as spy on the Young-Terzi meeting. So far though the questions about Israeli spying in the Young affair are refusing to go away. On August 23 the Washington Star carried a story in which an unnamed United States source is quoted as saying: "The Israelis have staked out the Arabs around the United Nations with bugs, taps, and surveillances. Young walked right into it." The article says considerably more about the Young episode, then it expands into the subject of Israeli spying here in general. For example, quote: "According to one source, New York City is the center of Israeli spying in the United States and has been for years." Another quote: "On one occasion United States officials learned that an Israeli wire tap operation was using a local synagogue as a cover." And a final quote: "Each year in New York, moreover, there are numerous cases in which Israeli agents have been identified posing as FBI agents, complete with seemingly authentic credentials."

By any standards, my friends, words like these in a major American newspaper signal a change from the past. Controversy over Intelligence activities could become a major fallout against Israel from the Young affair, but there is another domestic fallout which is even more important and that is the rupturing of political and other ties between the Blacks and the Jews. These tensions are very real, my friends, and have been building since the mid-sixties; but they have only now burst into the open for all to see. The catalyst, of course, was the Young affair. Up until now, practically the only Americans who were aware of these tensions were the Blacks and Jews themselves, but the strongest feelings in this rift are felt by the Blacks. They are the ones who feel they have been wronged, so I think the easiest way to describe the situation is in the words of Blacks themselves.

On August 16 Young himself blamed Israel for making his resignation necessary. The same day it was disclosed that United States Ambassador to Austria, Milton Wolf, had met three times with PLO representatives; but Wolf, who is Jewish, was not being reprimanded, much less forced to resign! For Blacks, that news added insult to injury. It got still worse the next day, August 17. It was announced that the United States had made a surprise proposal regarding the Security Council resolution on Palestinian Rights. The United States had asked Israel to support an American-sponsored resolution to that effect, but without success. With that news, Andy Young looked like nothing more than the fall guy for a new American policy. Blacks wondered: "Why Andy? Why a Black?" The same day, Young made comments on the NBC "Today Show" which were repeated on the BBC World Service. Young was asked about latent anti-Semitism in the Black community, and said, quote:

"I think there may be a resentment of a certain kind of arrogance that was played up, especially in the New York press; and there was a kind of arrogance of Jewish power, headlines saying: 'Jews demand Young's ouster.' I think that's caused the reaction by the Black community, which is a natural reaction, but in no way does that constitute anti-Semitism."

The following day, August 18, an article in the New York Daily News illustrated the growing reaction of Black America. The article was by Black columnist Earl Caldwell. It was titled: "Finally Played the Game, and Lost." Referring to the day after Young's resignation, Caldwell wrote, quote:

"On Thursday, the afternoon was filled with the fallout. The clamor for his resignation had come primarily from the Jewish community. That is fact. And now the backlash that Andrew Young had warned the Israeli Ambassador about was rising. Downstairs on the steps of the Mission the Rev. Jesse Jackson was saying that Andrew Young was the fall guy, and that it was not the Klan that brought the Bakke case, that it was not the Klan that deals with Southern Africa, and that it was not the Klan that brought the pressure to fire Andrew Young; it was our former allies. And the backlash was building." (End of quote from the Earl Caldwell column.)

The rift between Blacks and Jews is continuing to grow, my friends. Already a group of Black ministers of the Southern Christian Leadership Conference has held a meeting with Palestinians, and they have announced their support for Palestinian rights. And during the past several days, a series of very powerful commentaries about the situation were carried over the American Forces Radio and TV Service. The commentator was James Rowe of the Mutual Black Network. Unlike most other programs on the American Forces Radio, the Rowe commentaries are followed by a disclaimer originating with the Mutual Black Network; but they are being beamed straight to our troops here and overseas. And, of course, our Armed Forces of today have a very high proportion of Blacks, here and abroad.

The Rowe commentaries on the Young affair are instructive for two reasons. For one thing, they illustrate the growing backlash by many Blacks against Israel, but also Rowe reminds his listeners of some historical background facts which must be taken into account. Most Americans, Black or otherwise, do not remember this background, or at least do not think about it. In his commentary four days ago, August 23, Rowe began, quote:

"It's time the United States stopped placating the Israelis and

got down to the serious business of negotiating Peace in the Middle East. Every time something offends Israel, the Jewish American population rises up. They expect Black Americans to support them, despite the refusal of Jewish groups to support some of our most recent concerns. The Jewish groups left us when it came to reverse discrimination. Despite that, what is more important is RIGHT and WRONG. It is wrong that we support an ethnic group when they are mistaken, and Israel is mistaken in the treatment of the Palestinians. We cannot continue to pay for Hitler's mistakes. Israel cannot be permitted to perpetrate upon another group of people what the Germans tried to do to them in World War II. If Israel has a right to exist, then so does the State of Palestine. The goal now should be: How do we achieve that?"

Further on, Rowe said:

"The United States Ambassador to Austria was not asked to resign although he had several meetings with the PLO representatives. So why did Andrew Young have to resign? Why did the first black United States Ambassador have to become the fall guy in a plan to appease Jerusalem and the Jewish lobby here? It is extremely complicated and much greater than concerns for oil from the region."

The next day, August 24, James Rowe had more to say about the Young resignation, and he included some history in very concise terms. Here's an excerpt from his commentary; quote:

"We cannot let ourselves go on the defensive every time the Jewish American lobby criticizes Blacks as anti-Semitic because we don't agree with them. Anybody that doesn't agree with Israel's hard line stand is considered anti-Semitic in Jerusalem. If anyone is to be charged with responsibility for the current crisis in the Middle East, it should be Great Britain. And if anyone is to be charged with the protracted conflict in that region of the world, it is to be Israel. Britain had control over the land that made up Jordan and Palestine under a League of Nations' mandate. The British wanted to end their colonialism there, and permitted Zionists to move in uncontrolled, and left the Palestinians to the Jordanians. The Palestinians were left without a home because London did not follow through on the United Nations' recommendation of creating two separate states—one for the Israelis and one for the Palestinians. It appears Israel wants the Palestinians completely removed from the scene. Now comes the Andrew Young card. How does the United States support the human rights of the Palestinians without offending our long-time and hard-line friends in the Zionist movement? The United States is faced with supporting the human rights of the Palestinians—but to the offense of Jews. Perhaps Andy Young was the test of how offended Israel would be if America decided to give in to demands from the Palestine Liberation Organization." (End of quotation from the Rowe commentary of August 24.)

My friends, there was nothing accidental about the Young affair. To those who do not know about Russia's secret take-over here in Washington, it all looks like a big mistake; but in reality Israel's mighty Mossad has just been out-foxed by Russia's KGB. The Russians, through the robotoids in the White House, control most all the top positions in the United States Government. They brought about the Young-Terzi meeting of July 26, and in doing so they knew it would be monitored by Israeli Intelligence. The Russians succeeded in planning and guiding events in a way beneficial to Russia.

In AUDIO LETTER 46, I mentioned that Prime Minister Begin of Israel had been replaced with a robotoid, as had Sadat of Egypt. Wholesale robotizing is not taking place in those countries. By using their Begin robotoid, Russia was able to make sure that Israel's policy would be to make an issue of Young's PLO contact. This action has caused the backlash reactions against Israel which I have already discussed. It has also enhanced the image of the Palestinians internationally. In addition, the Young flap provides an excuse for the United States to back into a more favorable treatment of the Palestinian cause. But, my friends, there will be other manipulated events to distract you from the Andrew Young affair, all created by friends of Israel still in our United States State Department.

The Russian target in the Andrew Young affair appears at first glance to be all the Jews in both Israel and the United States, but that is not the case. The true target in these Kremlin maneuvers is the political force called ZIONISM. Many Jews are not Zionists, and there are also Zionists who are not Jews; but Zionism masquerades as a movement that speaks for all Jews. For reasons I will discuss in Topic #3, the Christ-ones who rule Russia today intend to utterly break Zionism as a force in the world. A major part of this is to be the dismantling of Zionist power here in America. To that end, the Andrew Young affair was engineered to uncork the political pressures between Jews and Blacks. On the surface, this appears to mean all Jews; but the commentaries I quoted by James Rowe suggest that already the focus is narrowing. Black leaders are looking around carefully; and as they look at the Zionists, they are doing so with frowns and narrowed eyes .

Topic #3—It has now been nearly two years since I first made public the overthrow of the Bolsheviks in Russia; and as my older listeners know, this is the outcome of six decades of struggle by a tightly knit band of native Russian Christians. Now they are out to destroy Bolshevism world-wide. The Kremlin's campaign to wipe out Bolshevism is still a secret officially; but as important as Bolshevism is, the Kremlin rulers regard it as just one major tentacle of a giant serpent; and if they keep their anti-Bolshevism secret, they make no bones about their opposition to what they see as another tentacle. That tentacle is ZIONISM.

The origins of modern-day Zionism trace back to the late 19th Century, but the first major milestone toward the creation of a Jewish state happened in 1917. Great Britain was looking for all the friends she could find in what was then called "The Great War." That year the United States was drawn into that war with the deliberate help of President Woodrow Wilson. But that same year, Russia was removed from the war against Germany by the Bolshevik Revolution. So the Allies were still under great pressure; and in order to enlist the growing power of the Zionist movement on the side of Britain, the famous Balfour Declaration was announced. Lord Balfour announced that Britain would look with favor on the creation of a national home for the Jewish people in Palestine. Most Americans were too preoccupied with news of the war to think long about the Balfour Declaration in Britain; but soon after the war ended, a major protest was published against the plans of the Zionists. On March 5, 1919, readers of the New York Times saw a long PETITION on page 7 with the headline: "PROTEST TO PRESIDENT WILSON AGAINST ZIONIST STATE." Nowadays if we saw a headline like that, most of us would probably pay little attention. We would assume that it was the work of the Arabs and turn the page; but that 1919 protest was presented and signed exclusively by Jews. And these were not some small splinter group of malcontents, they were a galaxy of Jewish stars in American politics, education, law, business,

medicine, journalism, banking, as well as prominent rabbis; people like Congressman Julius Kahn of California who headed the list; Henry Morganthau, Sr., ex-Ambassador to Turkey; Simon Wolf, former consul to Egypt; Max Senior, former president of the National Conference of Jewish Charities; Professor Morris Jastrow of the University of Pennsylvania; Adolph Ochs, publisher of the New York Times; Lessing Rosenthal, Chicago attorney; Dr. Julius Rosenstein, surgeon at Mount Zion Hospital in San Francisco; L. H. Kampner, mayor of Galveston, Texas; I. W. Hellman, president of the Union Trust Company in San Francisco; and many others.

The PETITION begins, quote:

"As a future form of government for Palestine will undoubtedly be considered by the approaching Peace Conference, we, the undersigned citizens of the United States, unite in this statement setting forth our objections to the organization of a Jewish State in Palestine as proposed by the Zionist societies in this country and Europe."

The petitioners felt that they were, quote: "voicing the opinion of the majority of American Jews." To back that up, they pointed out, quote:

"The American Zionists represent, according to the most recent statistics available, only a small proportion of the Jews living in this country, about 150,000 out of 3-1/2 million."

As their source, they cited the 1918 edition of the "American Jewish Yearbook" in Philadelphia.

The PETITION goes on to sound not only a protest but a series of warnings. The signers did sympathize with the concept of, quote: "A refuge in Palestine or elsewhere." They felt that this would be a good thing purely as a haven for Jews living under oppression; but they were bitterly opposed to the Zionist demands for, quote: "Reorganization of the Jews as a national unit to whom now or in the future territorial sovereignty in Palestine shall be committed."

The Jews who published that PETITION against a Zionist State 60 years ago turned out to be prophets. Like most prophets, their warnings went unheeded; but for more than three decades events in the Middle East have been acting out their warnings in flesh, blood, and tragedy.

I can do no more than highlight a few points from the anti-Zionist PETITION, which is long and detailed, but history demands that we be aware of the efforts of the anti-Zionist Jews to turn aside tragedy, deep tragedy. They pointed out that the Zionists were demanding, quote:

"A home not merely for Jews living in countries in which they are oppressed, but for Jews universally. No Jew, wherever he may live, can consider himself free from the implications of such a grant."

From a practical standpoint, my friends, they pointed out that tiny Palestine could not hold all the Jews then living in the world. The 6 to 10 million in Russia and Romania alone would have produced hopeless overcrowding; but beyond that, they objected to what they termed "political segregation." They felt it was both undemocratic and dangerous to Jews themselves the world over. They worried, quote:

"All Jews repudiate every suspicion of a double allegiance; but

to our minds, it is necessari logic be eliminated from, the for the Jews in Palestine."

ly implied in, and cannot by any establishment of a sovereign state

They added that, quote:

"As a rule, those who favor such a restoration advocate it not for themselves but for others. Those who act thus and yet insist on their patriotic attachment to the countries of which they are citizens are self-deceived in their profession of Zionism."

They were worried that Jews themselves would be torn internally by pressures for double allegiance, and they were concerned that this would play into the hands of those who considered Jews, quote:

"Aliens in every land, incapable of true patriotism, and prompted only by sinister and self-seeking motives."

Quoting Sir George Adam Smith, an authority of that day on Palestine, they also foresaw the bloodshed to come, quote:

"It is not true that Palestine is the national home of the Jewish people and of no other people. It is not correct to call its non-Jewish inhabitants Arabs, or to say that they have left no image of their spirit and made no history except in the great mosque; nor can we evade the fact that Christian communities have been as long in the possession of their portion of this land as ever the Jews were."

The PETITION also says, quote:

"The claims to various sections of this undefined territory would unquestionably evoke bitter controversies. To subject the Jews to the possible recurrence of such bitter and sanguinary conflict, which would be inevitable, would be a crime."

Finally, they concluded with the words:

"We do not wish to see Palestine, either now or at any time in the future, organized as a Jewish State."

But, my friends, the Zionists were successful in thwarting this appeal by prominent American Jews. Israel became a nation in 1947, and the predicted bloodshed began immediately. Israeli terrorism by Menachem Begin and others caused Palestinian blood to run red in the streets. Palestinians became refugees in their own land, and the borders of Israel began expanding. Soon there was nothing left of what had been called Palestine.

The Middle East war plan, which the Russians halted in May 1979, involved the Zionists in alliance with the Bolsheviks. The Russians are determined to end the threat of nuclear war; and after 30 years of Israeli history, they have concluded the same thing about Zionism as about Bolshevism. They are convinced that there will be no peace in the world for Jew, Moslem, or Christian so long as Zionism exists. So they are now in a two-front war to destroy both Zionism and Bolshevism.

Long ago Russia's new rulers discovered that Zionism and Bolshevism had common origins. These origins involved the ROTHSCHILDS, but others are involved also, so they are now following the trail of Satanic power towards its origins using their secret weapons—the robotoids. Right now they are striking at the tentacles of world power, like ZIONISM and BOLSHEVISM; but when the time is ripe, they are hoping to strike at the very head

of world Satanic power.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #50

Hello, my friends. This is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is Sept. 30, 1979, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 50.

Forty years ago this month World War II began. On September 1, 1939, the German war machine of Adolf Hitler began the blitzkrieg against Poland. Soon all Europe was aflame with war. The flames soon spread to engulf the United States, Japan, and much of Asia. In the nearly six years that it lasted, World War II took an estimated 35-million lives. About half of those killed were civilians—men, women, and children; but whether they were in uniform or not, very few of those who suffered and died had any real idea WHY.

The forces that led to World War II were set in motion in secrecy, then the war itself intensified the secrecy on all sides—secrecy in diplomacy, secrecy in planning military campaigns, secrecy in developing new weapons; and, my friends, it was a secret weapon that finally ended the war in the Pacific.

On August 6, 1945, the first atomic bomb was dropped in war. It was dropped by a nation which thought of itself as a Christian nation, the United States of America; and the city which was chosen to be the first victim, had one of the largest Christian communities in Japan—Hiroshima. One might have asked: Why are the Christians of America killing the Christians of Hiroshima with the world's first nuclear attack? But of all the questions which have been asked about Hiroshima during the past 34 years, that question has been asked the least, if at all. Everyone knows this was war. Hiroshima was considered a major military target; and so Christians or no Christians, Hiroshima was attacked.

Today I'm often asked: "If Russia's new rulers of today really are Christians, why are they willing to kill people? And why are they willing to do things which may cause even Christians to be killed?" The answer today is the same as it was in World War II—THIS IS WAR. But today, after four decades of increasing secrecy, war itself is secret. Not only do we not know the reasons for war, we do not even know certain kinds of warfare are taking place! The most important military and political developments today are parts of a secret war in which the United States is now the prime battleground. The battle is between the new Christian rulers of Russia and their bitter enemies. These enemies are the overthrown Bolsheviks and their close relatives, the Zionists. The Kremlin of today is trying above all to prevent their enemies from igniting nuclear war.

Last spring, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 45 and 46, the Russians began seizing control of the United States Government. Key officials from President Jimmy Carter on down have been replaced by doubles, and these doubles are not human beings in spite of their appearance and behavior. They are artificial, robot-like living beings called "Organic Robotoids." When I first revealed these things, I braced myself. I knew that many of my listeners would be unable to absorb them; but my

reason for doing it was the one I stated then: Without knowing about the robotoids, events would become impossible to understand. Since that time, robotoids in key positions of power have been causing many surprises in the news these days. The strangest surprises of all have been caused by the Jimmy Carter robotoids. In AUDIO LETTER No. 48 two months ago, I detailed the major instability problems the Russians are having with their Carter robotoids. The holographic computer brains of the robotoids include instabilities which were present in the real Carter brain in a way that exaggerates those instabilities. As a result, every so often a Carter robotoid does something so unpredictable that it is dangerous to the Russians. An example was the famous so-called "killer-rabbit incident" of a few weeks ago. A Carter robotoid told the press in all seriousness that he and his family had been attacked by a swamp rabbit while fishing. Can you imagine?

The Russians want to rid themselves of the nerve-racking problem of the unstable Carter robotoids. Earlier this month, on September 15, an attempt was made to do just that. The alleged President Carter was entered in a foot race, of all things, in the Catoctin Mountains near Camp David. It was a strenuous six-mile course which included much uphill running. Carter robotoid No. 14 was programmed to run at maximum speed and not to let up for any reason. The Russian strategy was simple: Runners who over-exert themselves and who do not stop and rest when danger signs appear can do themselves serious harm. Sudden overheating, dehydration, and heart failure can take place abruptly in extreme cases. Robotoids, as I have explained in past tapes, embody a crude facsimile of human metabolism, their hearts are relatively weak, and they live for only a few weeks or months, depending on the stress problems. They have no self-preservation instinct, so Carter robotoid No. 14 was programmed to run like the wind. It was expected that suddenly without warning he would suffer complete heart failure, collapse, and die on the spot. If the robotoid died before aid could reach him, everyone would just accept it as a tragic accident, and the Russians would be rid of the problem of unstable Carter robotoids. But the day of the race dawned cooler than it had been expected by the planners. Carter robotoid No. 14 did collapse, but did not expire instantly. His face turned a deathly greenish-gray, and he was moaning and incoherent; and yet when the Secret Service men picked him up, his legs kept running as programmed. Finally an ambulance arrived, but Carter robotoid No. 14 did not use it. Instead the robotoid was bundled off in a car to Camp David, and there robotoid No. 14 finally died—too late, and out of public view.

The purpose of the race had been to eliminate the Carter robotoid problem in a way that would leave no questions—that is, sudden death on the spot. But there would have been a storm of questions if Carter's alleged death had been announced after help arrived and took him away. So after the race, Carter robotoid No. 15 showed up to reassure everyone. He looked nothing at all like the deathly figure who had collapsed just a short while earlier in the race. He looked like a new man, and in a sense he was. The contrast between the dying robotoid No. 14 and the fresh robotoid No. 15 is something you can see for yourself. Just get a copy of Sports Illustrated magazine for September 24, 1979. On pages 16 and 17 you will see the pictures of robotoid No. 14—stricken, stumbling, mouth agape. Then look at the fresh, smiling picture of robotoid No. 15 handing out trophies on page 19 only a short while later, and then ask yourself: Is this the same man?

My friends, the robotoids are one example of what you need to

know to understand the secret war now going on; but there are other things you need to know too, because the war between Russia and her Bolshevik and Zionist enemies has many facets, and it is very ancient.

My three topics for today are: Topic #1—RUNAWAY INFLATION AND THE COLLAPSING AMERICAN ECONOMY Topic #2—THE CUBAN CRISIS TO DESTROY SALT II Topic #3—THE 1000-YEAR WAR BETWEEN RUSSIA AND THE KHAZARS

Topic #1—To most Americans the most worrisome headlines these days are probably those about our weakening economy. By comparison, most other major news events may seem remote and less important to us. SALT II, troops in Cuba, and arguments between Blacks and Jews may disturb us, but they hardly seem to touch most of us personally. The economy is another matter. We all have to keep food on the table, clothing on our backs, and a roof over our heads, and it's becoming harder by the day to do these things. Hardly a day seems to pass without some new item of bad news about the economy. One day the Federal Reserve System announces that it's raising its own interest rates to member banks to an all-time record level, another day leading banks raise their interest rates to their best customers to levels which also set new records. With each increase, young couples wanting to buy their own homes find it more and more impossible to do so. For them the American dream of a home of their own is fading into a fantasy. They are watching helpless as their fondest hopes explode in the tornado of rising consumer prices and runaway interest rates. But somehow, my friends, it turns out to be only the average working man and woman who are being priced out of borrowing the money they need.

By contrast, business loans are increasing fast, instead of dropping off. Many business men are borrowing all they can get regardless of interest rates. They are pouring their dollars into plants and equipment, building up inventories, and in some cases speculating in foreign currencies and gold. And so while you and I are being squeezed out, big business is borrowing dollars like they are going out of style, because, my friends, the dollar is going out of style. They are expecting to repay their loans later on with dollars that are almost worthless.

Meanwhile, the bad economic news goes on. One day we're told that unemployment is up—not good, we think, especially if we happen to be among the unemployed. But at least this ought to start bringing down inflation, according to most all the experts. For years they have always told us that, but NO, inflation keeps speeding up too. We know it is every time we buy groceries.

Next we hear that productivity is dropping off in the United States. According to government figures released last month, productivity was plunging at the fastest rate in five years by last spring. That means that America's economy is becoming less and less efficient and more and more service oriented. If that is so, we wonder: How can we compete in world markets?

Then someone mentions that what is happening to the United States' economy is called STAGFLATION. Our economy is stagnating, and yet inflation is heating up. Again we scratch our heads. This is something new to us in America. In the past we have had recessions and we have had inflation, but not together! Now we have both at once, and where is it all leading? One clue to where it is leading is contained in other figures released by the Labor Department last month. Last spring hourly compensation measured in dollars was rising, people were receiving increases in pay at a rate of about 8% a year in

dollars; but inflation is now outrunning these pay increases. As a result, real compensation in terms of what you can buy with your money dropped 5% during the spring quarter; so our pay checks may look bigger and bigger, but on the average they're able to buy less and less.

The sliding value of the dollar at the grocery store is reflected also on the international monetary scene. Overseas, holders of dollars are unloading them as fast as they can before they can shrink to nothing. Dollars are being traded for hard currencies like the West German Deutschemark. The shift is massive. A few days ago on September 20 there was an effective devaluation of the dollar against the mark by about 2%. Dollars are also being traded so fast for gold that the trading has been called "frenzied." That is why the price of gold in United States dollars is soaring to incredible levels. Just two days ago it passed $400 an ounce for the first time in history.

My friends, our growing economic woes are the fruits of deliberate planning by very powerful men. I made much of this plan public nearly seven years ago in my book, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, published by George Braziller, New York, New York. Now that the things I have described there are happening, my book is out of print. But at that time most of my readers simply could not believe that these things could really happen; and so even though I identified many of the people responsible, nothing at all was done to stop the plan. A year later in the spring of 1974, I revealed in Congressional testimony that most of America's alleged gold hoard was gone. It was a key ingredient in the plan to destroy the United States economy on the way to Dictatorship. I stood ready to back up my charges with evidence and witnesses, but Congress did nothing. So I went public with my charges. Public pressure finally led to the so-called Gold Inspection Visit to Ft. Knox by Congressmen and newsmen in September 1974. It was a fraud, and touched off many questions and suspicions in the foreign press; but here at home the fraud worked, and people calmed down about Ft. Knox. Nothing lasting was done, and the plan for America's economic collapse continued.

The fall of 1974 I began recording talking tapes. My very first tape, AUDIO BOOK No. 1, was recorded 5 years ago next month. That tape included information which my listeners could use as a starting point in their own personal planning for the events to come. I did not give financial advice as such, but I did describe the kind of things which historically have been useful under adverse economic conditions. Today many of those conditions are developing all around us. Early in 1975 I recorded a second tape, AUDIO BOOK No. 2 about the Ft. Knox gold scandal. In that tape I gave more details about the secret disappearance of America's former gold hoard. I also gave more details about the economic and political upheavals which were being planned for America's future.

In those tapes I gave the best information then available to me, but I made the mistake of revealing an approximate time table for coming events as they were then being planned. I stated clearly that these were purely the plans and schedules of men. My hope in revealing those plans was that by doing so I could contribute in some small way to delaying or even stopping them. My intentions in making public the secret time tables—which were plans, not prophecies—were sadly misunderstood by some. I have actually been condemned by some people because World War III did not take place on schedule. Can you imagine? Even so, the confidential sources who gave me that information which I revealed four and five years ago knew what they were talking

about.

For example, in those early tapes I revealed the plans of the late David Rockefeller and his intimates for gold to reach S2,000 an ounce. At that time it sounded ridiculous to many people. Even $200 an ounce sounded like too high a price for gold to reach more than temporarily, but today gold has already established a new record of at least $400 an ounce. The old conventional wisdom is in the wastebasket. The so-called "gold bugs" of only a few years ago have turned out to be too conservative. Whether gold will still reach $2,000 an ounce as originally planned remains to be seen. After all, the real David Rockefeller has been dead now for seven months, since February 1979. Even so, the basic economic forces which he and his collaborators unleashed now have tremendous momentum. The total collapse of the United States dollar, and with it our economy, is now only a matter of time.

There is a historical precedent for what is happening to us, my friends. It happened in Germany in the early 1920's. It was a case of super-inflation leading to disintegration of the economy. The seeds of disaster were planted in July 1914 at the outbreak of World War I. The German government did not want to provoke opposition to the war by imposing heavy taxes, so instead the redeemability of the mark in gold was suspended. Then the government began borrowing to finance the war without any limit on the amount of money that could be printed.

In the same way, the process of divorcing the dollar from its gold backing began during World War II. In 1945 the gold backing was reduced from 42% to 25%. Then in March 1968, Congress quietly removed the last remaining gold backing of 25%. That meant the printing presses were free to roll. Finally on August 15, 1971, President Nixon finished the job of untying the dollar from gold. He slammed the international gold window, saying that the United States would no longer redeem dollars with gold in international dealings. What he did not say was that most all of America's alleged gold hoard was gone by then.

The German government's action in cutting the mark loose from gold in 1914 triggered the accumulation of currency during the war. After the war ended, people began spending their stored up marks, and inflation took off. And in the same way, after Nixon closed the gold window in the United States, the prices for international commodities began to zoom upward and gold followed suit. As the German inflation accelerated, the German Central Bank tried to support the mark in the international exchange markets. Every time the mark would start sliding relative to other currencies, the Reichsbank would buy marks using their own reserves of foreign currencies.

It's the same today, my friends. Whenever the dollar starts tumbling, we hear that the Federal Reserve, our privately-owned central bank, is supporting the dollar. Sometimes the key word used is that the Federal Reserve Bank is "intervening" on behalf of the dollar. Either way it means that the Fed is throwing away hard foreign currencies to buy up sick dollars on foreign markets—in other words, throwing good money after bad. The Reichsbank also tried to support the mark by giving gold for marks, not at home but in the international money markets.

The parallel to this today is the series of "gold auctions" by the United States Treasury. The Treasury keeps these auctions as small as possible, because there is no huge gold hoard left to back up the dollar. Instead there's a secret scramble going on continuously to scrape together gold from various sources to

auction off. The gold is sold, in the words of the GSA invitations to bid, "as is." There are no guarantees, and the gold offered is highly impure instead of what is called "good delivery gold." Even so, buyers gladly exchange their shriveling dollars for the Treasury gold scraps.

For a while the German inflation gave the appearance of stimulating business, but this was because no one wanted to hold on to marks that were losing their value. Instead the money was spent, traded for goods of all kinds which would not lose their value, but this was a self-defeating process. As people became more anxious to get rid of marks, they became less eager to accept them. As a result, prices climbed ever more steeply. Organized workers in unions managed to win pay raises but not fast enough to keep up. Unorganized workers and those on fixed incomes were left behind altogether. Wages in marks rose, but real wages began to drop. This is the very thing which is now happening here in the United States. Germans who earned a living by legitimate work of all kinds began to slip downward in their standard of living. The point was reached where speculation in gold and commodities was the only way to keep up with inflation.

There are obvious parallels today. In recent years investors have increasingly shifted their attentions to the Commodity Exchanges, while the stock market wanders in the doldrums. As for gold, who doesn't know about gold these days?

The German inflation reached the point where it fed on itself. It was no longer a question of basic economics—it was a question of confidence. People lost all confidence in the mark, and from that point on the presses literally could not print marks fast enough. By the middle of 1923, men were paid as often as three times a day. Their wives would meet them and hurry off to spend the money before it could depreciate still further. The point was reached where doing business in this way became impossible. Men would not work for money that was worthless before they could spend it. Farmers would not trade food for paper that would buy nothing, businesses started closing, food riots erupted, the German economy started falling apart at the seams.

The German super-inflation was eventually stopped in the same way that is always used when the currency collapses. A new currency is introduced to replace the old one. In Germany it was called the Rentenmark, and it was backed up by pledges that restored confidence. Here in the United States our replacement currency has already been printed for initial distribution when the time comes. We will trade many old dollars for each new dollar, but even the new dollar will not be backed by gold because we have almost no gold for that purpose. Instead it will be a garrison dollar—usable only within the United States, unacceptable in other countries.

In AUDIO BOOK No. 1 five years ago I explained that those who were putting these forces in motion were declaring war on us, the American people. The four Rockefeller brothers were hoping to end up as our absolute Dictators, on the way to conquering the whole world. Now, the Bolsheviks here in America are trying to take advantage of the economic forces which they helped the Rockefellers set in motion. The Rockefellers were aiming for a complete Corporate Socialism take-over, whereas the Bolsheviks want a new Bolshevik revolution and a brutal State Socialism take-over. The Russians meanwhile are using their robotoids in key positions in an effort to thwart the Bolshevik design here in America. The Russians did not create the forces leading to our economic collapse, but neither are they trying to stop them. Instead they are attempting to guide the process of economic

collapse here in such a way that it will backfire on the Bolsheviks.

Seven years ago, five years ago, even three years ago we the American people might have acted to undo the forces leading to collapse. We could have demanded that our gold be brought back to Ft. Knox, that those who took it be punished, and that the dollar be "good as gold" once again; but we as a people did nothing at all! It was far easier to accept official lies than the unofficial truth. So now, our land has become an economic battleground in a war between the Russian Christians and their ancient enemies. It remains to be seen who will win that war, but either way millions of Americans are going to lose and to suffer.

Topic #2—Late last month, on the evening of August 30, another of our never-ending crises began. News wires crackled with ominous words from the Idaho home of Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman, Frank Church. He was quoted as saying that American Intelligence had confirmed the presence of Russian combat troops in Cuba; and breaking with his past behavior, he surprised everyone. He demanded the immediate withdrawal of all Russian combat troops from Cuba.

What's going on, my friends, is another skirmish, a major one, between the Bolsheviks and the Christian rulers of Russia. The Bolsheviks in our government here in America are following a strategy now which has important similarities to their Guyana strategy of last November 1978. There's not enough time for me to review all the details of what happened then. For those details you may want to refresh your memory by listening again to AUDIO LETTER No. 40; but for now, let me just remind you that last November the Bolsheviks used tensions over Cuba as a part of a larger strategy. The same thing is happening again now, but this time there's an important difference. Using their robotoids, the Russians are succeeding so far in staying one step ahead of the Bolsheviks. Last time the real target was not Cuba but the secret Russian missile base in Guyana. This time the primary target again is not Cuba but the SALT II Treaty. And yet, just as before, the Russians do not dare lower their guard around Cuba or anywhere else because the Bolsheviks here will lash out wherever they can find an opening anywhere in the world.

Last time the artificial Bolshevik crisis over Cuba was built around MiG-23s. This time it is Russian ground combat troops. Three thousand Russian troops could no more attack the United States from Cuba today than the MiG-23s could have attacked last year. What's more, the Bolsheviks here are using old information about Russian troops now, just as they used old information about MiG-23s last year. The alleged spy satellite pictures of Russian troops in Cuba were not obtained last month as claimed. Regardless of what robotoid Carter says tomorrow night on television, the pictures are actually almost two years old, obtained in late 1977.

Two years ago this month, on Sept. 27, 1977, the United States lost the most decisive battle of the 20th Century to Russia. It was history's first space battle, the Battle of the Harvest Moon. I reported it that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 26, but it has never been reported to the public officially. Following that battle the United States and Russia were on the brink of war. The Russians were pressuring our own rulers behind the scenes to abandon their plans for conquest by nuclear war. America's step-by-step surrender by unilateral disarmament under SALT II was demanded by the Russians.

Meanwhile Russia's newly operational Cosmos Interceptors had begun systematically destroying America's space fleet of Spy Satellites. The Cosmos Interceptors, which are manned and armed with Particle Beam-weapons were seeking out and blasting our Spy Satellites one by one. The United States has no defense against the Cosmos Interceptors, but the process of eliminating all our Spy Satellites was a gradual one, taking several months to complete. By April 1978 they were all gone, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 33. But in the meantime the CIA turned on all of our Spy Satellites. The idea was to gather as much information as possible world-wide before they were destroyed. Normally they are only turned on selectively in order to extend their operating life; but with Russian Cosmos Interceptors blasting them into fireballs one after another, that no longer mattered.

One of the things picked up by the satellites in their dying days late 1977 was Russian maneuvers in Cuba. The maneuvers were taking place in brigade strength, which was puzzling. The Russian Army normally does not use the brigade as a unit of organization. It only made sense later on when it was learned that Soviet troops, mostly from Asia, were being infiltrated into Canada and Mexico. This is in preparation for possible invasion of the United States across our northern and southern borders, as I reported long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 32. The troops are entering Canada through the Province of Quebec as part of an arrangement, a secret arrangement, between Russia and France. In Mexico, they are entering through the Yucatan Peninsula. French influence is also great in Mexico, although this is less well known here in the United States. Cuba is the key way station for the troops, whether headed for Canada or Mexico.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 32 I explained the manner in which the Russian troops are remaining dispersed and therefore undetected in Canada and Mexico; but when and if the order to invade the United States is given, they are to form up quickly into organized fighting forces. In planning this strategy, the Russian generals concluded that the optimum organizational unit would be the brigade, and so when the troops arrive in Cuba they are trained in brigade-size maneuvers. Then they disband and are injected into Quebec and the Yucatan Peninsula. So the Bolsheviks here in the Government in charging that there is a brigade of Russian troops in Cuba are telling such a small fragment of the truth that it amounts to a lie. They dare not tell the whole truth because that would open up questions about our non-existent Spy Satellites. Even so, the Bolsheviks have calculated cleverly. The Russians have no way in which they can defend themselves by explaining what is really going on because no one would understand. So it is once again a battle of maneuver and intrigue.

My friends, when the SALT II Treaty was signed in Vienna three months ago, I alerted you to be on the lookout for certain things. At that time there was great publicity that SALT II was in trouble in the Senate; but as I told you then in AUDIO LETTER No. 47, the Russians were replacing key Bolshevik agents in the Senate with their own robotoids. As a result, I was able to tell you to watch for opposition to SALT II to gradually fade away, and through the rest of the summer that is exactly what was happening. SALT II prospects were getting better by the day. Even so I also cautioned in AUDIO LETTER No. 47 that, quote: "There remains a slim chance that the Bolsheviks will somehow find a way to upset SALT II"; and also, quote: "The ratification of SALT II could be the litmus test that will decide between Peace or War for America and Russia."

These are the stakes in the struggle now over Russian troops in Cuba. It began in mid July. Bolshevik sources began feeding carefully fabricated tips about Russian troops in Cuba to Florida Senator Richard Stone. Stone then brought it up during the SALT II hearings by the Senate Foreign Relations Committee. During testimony by the Secretary of Defense, robotoid Harold Brown, Stone unexpectedly asked about a Soviet Combat Brigade in Cuba. Robotoid Brown had not yet been programmed for that question and was puzzled; but robotoid Senator Frank Church, the Chairman of the Committee, jumped into the discussion. Between them, the two Russian robotoids Brown and Church defused the issue temporarily. Robotoid Brown authorized robotoid Church to issue a comforting statement to the Press. It denied that Cuba harbored a Russian military presence other than advisers. But now, the Russians knew what the Bolsheviks were going to use for their manufactured anti-SALT II crisis. They knew they could not stop the Bolsheviks from somehow breaking it into the open, so they played for time. Every additional day made the SALT II Treaty just a little more secure. Meanwhile, using their robotoids in key positions, the Russians stayed alert for the next Bolshevik move.

In mid August the Russian KGB learned about the ploy being cooked up by the Bolsheviks within the CIA. The robotoid replacement for CIA Director Stansfield Turner had learned about the intended use of the two-year-old satellite pictures of Russian troops in Cuba. The Russians braced themselves. They also programmed the Frank Church robotoid to take the initiative on Cuba the moment he was told anything about alleged recent satellite pictures of Cuba. On August 30 the Church robotoid was among those who were informed about the supposedly new satellite pictures. As programmed, he swung into action immediately. In Idaho for the Labor Day recess, the Church robotoid summoned reporters for a news conference. There he made the announcement and hard-line statements which launched the present crisis. By taking such a hard-line position, the Church robotoid surprised everyone. Fellow Senators raised their eyebrows in astonishment and so did many members of the Press, but it was a clever and unexpected move by the Russians because in this way the Russians took the ball away from the Bolsheviks. Senator Stone, who had started the whole thing, was left no room to be more hawkish than Church; and since Church is the Chairman of the Committee while Stone is only a member, everyone promptly forgot about Stone. Now when the conditions are ripe, robotoid Church will be in command of the situation. Having been the hardest of the hard-liners, he will have credibility if he later announces: "I am satisfied. The Cuban situation is now resolved, so let us proceed with SALT II." That is the outcome which the Russians are striving for. Meanwhile the Russians are using their robotoids in the Senate to delay a vote on SALT II. This is a move to save the Treaty which would be defeated if a vote were taken right now.

Meanwhile, very dangerous and intricate maneuverings are continuing on both sides. The Russians are still having difficulties with their robotoids and are having to introduce them more slowly than planned. At the same time, the Bolsheviks are beginning to regroup and regain some strength. As a result, the risk of nuclear war is beginning to rise again. The danger is still far less than it was at this time last year, but it is growing. In fact, as of this moment a military war of nerves is secretly in progress between Russia and the United States.

Three nights ago the National Security Council held one meeting after another in this war of nerves. The meetings began the evening of September 27, the second anniversary of the Battle of the Harvest Moon, and they continued long through the night.

Russian robotoids in the Council were working overtime to keep the lid on the situation.

Meanwhile, my friends, there are presently about 500 Russian submarines in positions for possible attack around the United States. About 200 are lined up along our east coast while 150 are stationed along the west coast, and roughly the same number along our Gulf coast. Of course the Russians do not have to depend on their submarines if they ever decide to actually attack. For three years now, Russian short-range underwater-launch missiles have been planted within our own territorial waters, and for more than two years Russian hydrogen bombs have been planted at their targets throughout the United States. These range from tiny micro-nukes to giant dam busters. Finally, the Russians also have their space triad of weapons, for which we have no equivalent. One leg of their space triad consists of the Cosmos Interceptors, which I referred to earlier. Another leg is on the moon where Russian Particle Beam-weapons have been stationed for nearly two years; and the third leg is their fleet of Cosmospheres, which are floating high above our cities and military sites. But as of now, the Russians do not wish to attack.

Their actual goal is the opposite—it is called "deterrence." They are using their submarine deployment to send a message to the Bolsheviks here in America. In particular, the Russian subs are deployed with special emphasis on the southeastern United States, reflecting their concern for Cuba. That emphasis consists of missile submarines known to be armed with neutron warheads. Neutron weapons, my friends, are the most usable of all nuclear weapons because they produce essentially no fallout. So, by deploying them, the Russians are warning the Bolsheviks: If you strike, so will we.

Topic #3—Over the past two years or so I have discussed the struggle within Russia between the Christians and the Bolsheviks since 1917. Current events cannot be understood without knowing about the past six decades of struggle for control of the Kremlin. But that struggle in turn is part of an even bigger historical picture. What we are seeing today, my friends, is the climax of a war of more than a thousand years between the two most bitter enemies on earth. It is the war between RUSSIA and the KHAZARS.

The kingdom of the Khazars vanished from the map of the world many centuries ago. Today many people have never even heard of it, yet in its day the Khazar kingdom was a very major power indeed, holding sway over a large empire of subjugated peoples. It had to be reckoned with by the two neighboring superpowers of that day. To the south and west of Khazaria the Byzantine Empire was in full flower with its Eastern Orthodox Christian civilization. To the southeast, the Khazar kingdom bordered on the expanding Moslem Empire of the Arab Caliphs. The Khazars influenced the histories of both of these other empires but, far more importantly, the Khazar kingdom occupied what was later to become a southern portion of Russia between the Black and Caspian Seas. As a result, the historical destinies of the Russians and the Khazars became intertwined in ways which have persisted down to the present day.

In case you have never heard of the Khazars, I think I should mention where you can look to learn more about them. Three years ago in 1976 a book about the Khazars was published by the British writer Arthur Koestler. The book is titled "THE 13TH TRIBE - THE KHAZAR EMPIRE AND ITS HERITAGE." The American publisher is Random House, New York, N.Y.

History records that the Khazars were derived from a mixture of Mongols, Turks, and Finns. As early as the 3rd Century A.D., they were identifiable in constant warfare in the areas of Persia and Armenia. Later, in the 5th Century, the Khazars were among the devastating hordes of Attila the Hun. Around 550 A.D., the nomadic Khazars began settling themselves in the area around the northern Caucasus between the Black and Caspian Seas. The Khazar capital of Itil was established at the mouth of the Volga River where it emptied into the Caspian, in order to control the river traffic. The Khazars then exacted a toll of 10% on any and all cargo which passed Itil on the river. Those who refused were attacked and slaughtered.

With their kingdom firmly established in the Caucasus, the Khazars gradually began to create an empire of subjugated peoples. More and more Slavonic tribes, who were peaceful compared to the Khazars, were attacked and conquered. They became parts of the Khazar Empire, required to pay tribute continually to the Khazar kingdom. Tribute by conquered peoples has always been a feature of empires, of course, but not in the fashion of the Khazars. The so-called great empires of the world always gave something in return for the tribute they exacted. Rome, for example, made citizens of those they conquered; and in return for the taxes they levied, they brought civilization, order, and protection against attack from would-be invaders. But not so in the Khazar Empire. The peoples who were subject to the Khazars received only one thing in return for their payments of tribute, and that was a shaky promise: the Khazars would refrain from further attacks and pillage so long as the tributes were paid. The subjects of the Khazar Empire, therefore, were nothing more than the victims of a giant protection racket. The Khazar overlords were therefore resented universally and bitterly throughout their domain, but they were also feared because of the merciless way in which they dealt with anyone who stood up to them. And so the Khazar Empire expanded until it occupied large areas of what is now Russia and southeastern Europe. By the 8th Century, the Khazar Empire extended northward to Kiev and westward to include the Magyars, the ancestors of modern Hungary.

In about 740 A.D., a stunning event took place. The Khazars had been under continual pressure from their Byzantine and Moslem neighbors to adopt either Christianity or Islam; but the Khazar ruler, called the Kagan, had heard of a third religion called JUDAISM. Apparently for political reasons of independence, the Kagan announced that the Khazars were adopting Judaism as their religion. Overnight an entirely new group of people, the warlike Khazars, suddenly proclaimed themselves Jews—adoptive Jews. The Khazar kingdom began to be described as the "kingdom of the Jews" by historians of that day. Succeeding Khazar rulers took Jewish names, and during the late 9th Century the Khazar kingdom became a haven for Jews from other lands.

Meanwhile the brutal Khazar domination over other peoples continued unchanged. But then a new factor appeared on the scene. During the 8th Century they came coursing down the great rivers—the Dnieper, the Don, the Volga. They were the eastern branch of the Vikings. They were known as the Varangians, or as the Rus. Like other Vikings, the Rus were bold adventurers and fierce fighters; but when they tangled with the Khazars, the Rus often ended up paying tribute like everyone else.

In the year 8 62 a Rus leader named Rurik founded the city of Novgorod, and the RUSSIAN NATION was born. The Rus Vikings settled among the Slavonic tribes under Khazar domination, and the struggle between Vikings and Khazars changed in character.

It became a struggle by the emerging nation of Russia for independence from Khazar oppression.

Over a century after the founding of Russia's first city, another momentous event took place. Russia's leader, Prince Vladimir of Kiev, accepted baptism as a Christian in the year 989. He actively promoted Christianity in Russia, and his memory is revered by Russians today as "Saint Vladimir"; and so a thousand years ago Russia's tradition as a Christian nation began.

Vladimir's conversion also brought Russia into alliance with Byzantium. The Byzantine rulers had always feared the Khazars, and the Russians were still struggling to free themselves. And so in the year 1016, combined Russian and Byzantine forces attacked the Khazar kingdom. The Khazar Empire was shattered, and the kingdom of the Khazars itself fell into decline. Eventually most of the Khazar Jews migrated to other areas. Many of them wound up in eastern Europe, where they mingled and intermarried with other Jews. Like the Semitic Jews some 1000 years earlier, the Khazar Jews became dispersed. The kingdom of the Khazars was no more.

As they moved and lived among the Jewish people, the Khazar Jews passed on a distinct heritage from generation to generation. One element of the Khazar Jew heritage is a militant form of ZIONISM. In the view of Khazar Jews, the land occupied by ancient Israel is to be retaken—not by miracle but by armed force. This is what is meant by Zionism today, and this is the force that created the nation which calls itself Israel today. The other major ingredient of the Khazar Jew heritage is hatred for Christianity, and for the Russian people as the champions of the Christian faith. Christianity is viewed as the force which caused the ancient so-called kingdom of the Jews, the Khazar kingdom, to collapse. Having once dominated much of what is present-day Russia, the Khazar Jews still want to reestablish that domination—and for a millennium they have been trying continually to do just that.

In 1917 the Khazar Jews passed a major milestone toward the creation of their own state in Palestine as I mentioned last month. That same year they also created the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia. There followed a Christian holocaust, the likes of which the world has never seen. The Khazar Jews were once again in control of Russia after more than 900 years, and they set about the task of destroying Christianity by destroying Christians—over 100-million of them, and at the same time over 20-million religious Jews also died at the hands of the Khazar Jews. This, my friends, is what the Russian Christians were up against in their 60-year struggle to overthrow the atheistic Bolsheviks; but they finally succeeded in their overthrow program, and now the 10 0 0-year-old war between the Russian Christians and the Khazar Jews is reaching a climax. At stake is not only the future of Russia and of Christianity, but also of the Jewish people as a whole.

Last month on August 19, 1979, Rabbi Joel Teitelbaum died in New York. He died in the morning, and was buried the same afternoon. Very short notice, and yet some 100,000 Jewish men arrived in time for the funeral. It is hard to imagine how many more hundreds of thousands could not arrive on such short notice. A month later, on September 18, his followers placed a memorial tribute by way of a paid advertisement in the New York Times, and clearly it spoke for many Jews. Among other things it said, quote: "He was the undisputed leader of all Jews everywhere who had not been infected by Zionism"; and also, quote: "With a

courage all too rare in our time, he called the Zionist state 'a work of Satan, a sacrilege, and a blasphemy.' The shedding of blood for the sake of the Zionist state was abhorrent to him."

These words, my friends, were spoken by Orthodox Jews mourning for their fallen leader. And the new Christian rulers of Russia would agree for they, too, regard the Zionist state of Israel as a counterfeit, a cruel and dangerous hoax for Christian and Jew alike. The Khazar state called the "Kingdom of the Jews" a thousand years ago was a parasite, living on the tribute from conquered peoples. Likewise today, Israel depends for its survival on a never-ending flow of support from outside. Left unchecked, the Russians believe that the Khazar Jews will destroy Christianity by means of Zionism, and Russia through Bolshevism; so Russia's Christian rulers are on the offensive against their enemies of a thousand years, the Khazars.

We Americans who call ourselves Christians have not cared enough to open our eyes to try to save our own country, or to defend our faith. So now our land has become the battleground of the Christian Russians and their deadly enemies—the Bolsheviks and the Zionists. And like it or not, my friends, we are caught up in this all-out war.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #51

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is Oct. 27, 1979, and this is my AUDIO LETTER No. 51.

The autumn of 1929 was a time of restless anticipation. On all sides the air was stirring with the winds of change, radical change. In the United States the Prohibition Era was in full swing. Countless thousands of illegal speak-easies sprouted up all over America. Millions of Americans determined to enjoy the high times filled the speak-easies. One dance craze after another swept the nation, and yet it was all just a little unreal. Now and then people wondered: "Where is all this leading?" At the same time, Americans were increasingly worried about crime. Prohibition had brought with it a crime wave unprecedented in America. It was the era of the famous gangsters—the Capones and the Dillingers. On one hand people were afraid, yet they were also fascinated, and gangster movies would soon be packing the theaters. It was also a time of turbulence on the international scene. In the Far East, tensions over Manchuria were building among China, Russia, and Japan. Soon China would be fighting, first with Russia, then with Japan; but even as these and other tensions were rising, disarmament was in the air. The great powers were discussing naval limitations, and there was talk of convening a great conference for general disarmament.

Developments like these were setting the stage for war to come; but to most Americans they did not seem to matter much. It was more exciting to watch the multiplying exploits in aviation of that day. In 1927 Charles Lindbergh had flown the Atlantic in the first non-stop flight from New York to Paris. Later he and other aviators of this and other countries were outdoing themselves with new accomplishments. An era was beginning which would see flights spreading across continents, spanning oceans,

and girdling the globe. It was a time of thrills with both tragedy and triumph. Aviation had caught the imagination of the public, and yet very few had enough imagination to foresee how aviation would soon revolutionize the world.

But in that autumn of 50 years ago all eyes were turning to watch just one thing above all others—it was the New York stock market. For years the stock market had been booming upward. It had been so strong for so long that it seemed like a sure thing, but now for some reason the stock market was beginning to shudder slightly. Prices reached a peak in September 1929, then they began to shiver and shudder erratically. Some stocks continued to climb, others dropped; trading volume began to increase as more and more shares changed hands. Meanwhile the market as a whole began to drop. The market was suffering from chills and fever, shivering slowly downward. Then came Black Thursday, October 24. Stocks were sold off in an avalanche as panicky traders tried to beat each other to the punch in getting out. The tumult on the floor of the New York Stock Exchange grew so loud that worried crowds collected outside in Wall Street. By noon there were beginning to be news bulletins. Well-known speculators committed suicide. Meanwhile a visitor had arrived from England just at the right moment to stand in the galleries and watch the frenzy. His name: Winston Churchill. It was not until well into that evening that the ticker tape finally caught up with the chaos. All around the country, investors and speculators waited and watched. For many, the numbers on the tape spelled RUIN. As people began to recover from the shock, there were all kinds of official reassurances. The public was assured that the market and the economy still were sound and strong. It was said that there had been simply a shaking out of weak spots.

The one thing no one told the public was the TRUTH. The truth was that the worst was yet to come. It came five days later, on Black Tuesday, October 29, 1929. As soon as the New York Stock Exchange opened it was flooded with orders to sell. More than 16-million shares were sold, a record that stood for 40 years. In the process, the Dow Jones averages dropped nearly 12% in a single day. Near the close there was a sudden rally because those who secretly had triggered the crash were snapping up bargains, but the day ended as the worst in history for the New York stock market.

That terrible day, Black Tuesday, was not the end but only the beginning of the Wall Street disaster. It took nearly three more years, until the summer of 1932, for the stock market crash to run its course. When it finally reached bottom, stock prices were down to 17 cents on the dollar and the United States was in the depths of the Great Depression—a depression exported to the rest of the world.

As America was dragged downward into depression, most Americans became preoccupied with the hard work of simply surviving. Concerns over Asian battles half a world away were eclipsed by concern over how to earn a loaf of bread. Arguments over disarmament were lost on multitudes who were standing in soup lines, and the stirrings of Nazi power in Germany seemed far less threatening than the real enemies—hunger and unemployment. The stage was being set for radical change in the United States Government and for war, and an economic disaster—the crash and depression—was an indispensable part of the plan. It prepared us to accept the changes wanted by the powerful, and at the same time it kept us so preoccupied that we could hardly raise our eyes and see what was coming.

This month, October 1979, is the 50th anniversary of Black October 1929. Today we are assured that it is all different, that it just can't happen here again; and yet once again the autumn air is stirring with the winds of change. In the Far East, tensions and hostilities are breaking out as they did 50 years ago. Russia, China, and Japan are fencing and maneuvering with one another in complex ways on the way to a great new ASIAN AXIS. In southeast Asia, Thailand is becoming more involved in a new Indo-China war, seemingly siding with China. American military equipment and advisors are pouring into Thailand as they did into Vietnam two decades ago. Meanwhile Russia's client state, Vietnam, is putting pressure on Thailand through Cambodia; and in northeast Asia, news from South Korea is suddenly in the headlines. Only yesterday, October 26, President Park was assassinated by the Korean CIA, which is a puppet of the American CIA.

Fifty years ago America was fascinated with the dawning of the Air Age. Today it is Space that appeals to that same spirit of adventure; but unlike the situation then, America today is locked out of space by Russia. And so while America's space program slowly runs down, the American appetite for space exploits is being satisfied by Hollywood instead of NASA. But through it all, it is the economy which is attracting more and more attention these days. In the autumn of 1929 it was the stock market which people were watching nervously. Everyone knew that speculation was rampant. The Federal Reserve Board had started tightening the screws, raising interest rates and cutting down credit. No one quite knew what to expect.

Today it is not just the stock market but the DOLLAR itself which is crashing. After the 1929 crash, the dollar was worth 200 cents. After this crash, the dollar will be worth two (2) cents. In recent months the price of gold has been climbing faster and faster, as the 1929 stock market did just before the crash. Once again the privately-owned Federal Reserve System is tightening the screws. Once again one of the targets is said to be speculation—not in stocks this time but in gold and commodities, and once again America's investment community is developing a case of the jitters.

The crash of 1929 was followed by economic depression, disarmament, and war. Today the DOLLAR is crashing on the way to STAGFLATION—that is, inflation and depression at the same time. Meanwhile the issue of strategic nuclear disarmament by way of SALT II is on its way through Congress; and all the while, my friends, a SECRET WAR is already in progress. Up to now most of the battles have been hidden from the public, but in recent days there have been new developments. As a result, the secret war may soon surface in very spectacular ways. When that happens, most people still will not know the reasons for what they see; but the events themselves will make headlines the world over.

My three special topics this month are: Topic #1—THE CRASH OF THE UNITED STATES DOLLAR; Topic #2—THE RUSSIAN PROGRAM TO SELL SALT II; and Topic #3—THE SURPRISE BOLSHEVIK DEPLOYMENT OF SYNTHETIC AUTOMATONS

Topic #1—Throughout the decade of the 1920's, stock prices in the United States were surging upward. It was the era of the great bull market. It was a time of prosperity for most Americans with business booming right along with the stock market. Even the year of 1923 saw nothing worse than a pause in America's bull market. That was the year in which another economy—that of Germany—totally collapsed, as I described last

month. Germany's economy disintegrated in a tornado of super-inflation, wild speculation, and currency collapse; and the same people who brought about the German depression then are bringing about the second great American depression today.

After 1923 the great American bull market went charging upward again. As in every market, there were occasional brief pauses and dips, but the overall trend was up and up. It became obvious that all one had to do to become rich was to buy into the great bull market. More and more people did just that, and the market surged ahead stronger and stronger. At the same time, the market became fertile ground for speculators who make their money from jumping in and out as prices bob up and down. Credit was plentiful so there were fast fortunes to be made by buying and selling stocks on borrowed money, and it seemed as if a speculator could hardly lose because the market as a whole was heading ever upward. It became a process that fed upon itself. The higher the market, the easier the credit for still further stock purchases. Fueled by credit, the great bull market rocketed higher and higher, faster and faster.

By the late 1920's the stock market had become a towering giant, resting upon a huge foundation of credit. To take away that credit would be to undo the market; to take it away suddenly would be to trigger a stock market crash—and this, my friends, was exactly what the privately-owned Federal Reserve System did.

Beginning early in 1928 the Federal Reserve Board began a process of tightening up on credit. It was a process which was little noticed by the public as a whole, but gradually it began to slow down the engines of business. At the same time, the Federal Reserve Board made occasional timid comments about speculation in the stock market; but for the moment they allowed the runaway market to keep climbing ever higher on its own momentum. Then came the summer of 1929. A few telltale statistics began to show up in the news, showing that America's economy had begun to turn downward. Most people paid no attention, or else they did not understand; but in the investment world there began to be frowns of uncertainty. At the same time, the Federal Reserve suddenly became more vocal about speculation. They made it clear they intended to crack down on the use of credit for that purpose; and as part of their supposed crackdown on speculation, they abruptly raised the discount rate by a full percentage point.

Listen now to a pair of headlines: "DISCOUNT RATE RAISED ONE PERCENTAGE POINT", and "UNITED STATES MONEY PLAN CALLED REACTION TO SPECULATION." These headlines, my friends, might have come from the summer of 192 9—but they did not. They appeared earlier this month on the 7th and 8th of October respectively in the Washington Post and the New York Times. This time the target is not merely the stock market, as in 1929, but the DOLLAR itself, as I detailed in my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR" six years ago. Rising interest rates and other more important measures are being used now to throttle credit.

In 1929, the Federal Reserve pretended to be suddenly worried about the stock market speculation, which they had fostered. Today, the Federal Reserve is pretending to be attacking speculation in commodities and gold. In 1929, they pretended to be worried about the economy, and then acted dumb as they destroyed it. Today, they are saying they are worried about inflation and our weakening dollar; but now, as then, they are only pretending to be confused as they systematically make the situation worse. As the summer of 192 9 faded into autumn, the stock market began to develop the jitters. The worst part of it

was that no one was quite sure what to expect.

To quote another pair of headlines: "WALL STREET IS FINDING THE FED'S POLICY MORE DIFFICULT TO READ", and "SPECULATORS THREATENED 'BUYING BUBBLE' MAY BURST." It sounds like the autumn of 1929, but again I am quoting headlines for this month, October 1979. They appeared respectively in the Washington Star of October 15 and the Washington Post of October 11. Of course sometimes headlines are more dramatic than the articles, but listen to just a few quotes from the Star article about the Fed's policy this month. The article says that the new policy, quote: "threw bond markets into chaos last week with prices dropping by record amounts." Another quote: "A lot of the bond traders wished they had chosen another line of work this past week as red ink flowed through Wall Street. Bond prices dropped more on Tuesday than on any previous day, and estimates of total losses by underwriters ranged up to 100-million dollars." The article is peppered with phrases like: "fears the Fed would cause a new credit crunch ... municipals joined the slaughter ... corporate prices plummeted ...the bottom fell out of the municipal market." As for the Post article about the so-called "buying bubble" in commodities, consider the words, quote: "Prices could fall or at least flatten out, and speculators could fail. Even banks are threatened and some could go under, warns John Heimann, the Comptroller of the Currency, who is in charge of bank regulation."

As the jitters grew worse in the early autumn of 1929, the great bull market lost its momentum. At last it was ripe for the kill! Federal Reserve actions had rendered it vulnerable. Now other manipulators who were part of the plan went into action. On certain days the manipulators suddenly dumped large amounts of stock onto the market. Edgy speculators responded by dumping their stocks too to get out fast and cut their losses. The process would thereby feed on itself each time, once it was started; but after each downward break in prices, the market would again settle down temporarily. Each time financial spokesmen would assure the public there was nothing to worry about. Each pause was only a breather before the next plunge—but no one told the people the truth. Instead, without fail, stocks were said to be a bargain because the market had become stable at last. Then the manipulators would trigger another plunge, and it would all happen again.

Today we tend to look back at Black Tuesday, October 29, 1929, as marking the onset of the Great Stock Market Crash. That is because we now have the benefit of hindsight. We now know that it turned out to be the worst single day of trading in New York Stock Exchange history—but the fact is that the stock market had begun its three-year-long crash nearly a month earlier. October had seen a number of increasingly bad days, but there had also been some days of recovery. Everyone now knows that the handwriting was on the wall, but at the time only a few people could bring themselves to see it. Most people wanted to believe that this was only a temporary break in the market and that it would soon head upward again. Most simply could not imagine that they were watching the beginning of America's greatest depression; but while the majority were blind, there were a small minority who were not. A select few knew that something fundamentally different was happening. Some of those who knew what to expect were the plotters themselves. The others who could tell what was coming were people who understood how the manipulators operated. Everyone else—that is, everyone who assumed normal market forces were at work—was lost.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 19 nearly three years ago I revealed very

important information given me by my friend Mr. Norman Dodd. The information had to do with the major tax-exempt foundations in America. Twenty-five years ago he was Director of Research for the Reece Committee of Congress, which investigated the foundations; and he remains an expert on the subject to this day. But in 192 9 Mr. Dodd was a banker at one of New York's most prestigious banks. In a New York speech in 1956, he described a remarkable development which he witnessed in early October 1929. He said, quote: "I was impressed when Mr. Henry Morganthau, Sr., a retired banker and former ambassador, called on the bank in person and directed it to dispose of every security then held in his trusts, and to re-invest the proceeds in bonds of the United States Government. Gratuitously he added that he wished these trusts to remain so invested until he directed otherwise—a step which he said he did not contemplate taking for at least 15 years . "

Before that same month of October 192 9 ended, the market crash took place. It ushered in the Great Depression, which spanned a dozen years until America entered World War II. It also spawned the "New Deal" and big government here in America. In light of all this, Mr. Dodd says: "Mr. Morganthau's action, which contrasted so sharply with that of the bank, assumed great significance. To me it seemed he knew what he was doing, and why. He did not appear to be following a hunch nor the advice of others. The impression he gave was one of confidence in his own judgment. It was this impression which convinced me there was a basis for that judgment—that what he knew, others could know."

A few weeks after Morganthau took this action, Wall Street began to shake with violent tremors. Each tremor was worse than the one before. On Black Thursday, October 24, brokers, traders, and bankers began to see the chasm of collapse opening at their feet. Speculators began taking their own lives. Then came a selling panic on Monday, October 28, followed by that blackest day of all, Black Tuesday. Stocks plummeted in trading so heavy it set a record, than rallied briefly at the end. A headline in the New York Times read: "STOCK TRADING SETS RECORD AS MARKET DIVES, THEN RALLIES." The article begins with the words: "Panic selling by many small investors swamped the New York Stock Exchange yesterday, following two days of sharp drops in stock prices." And, quote: "Buying by cash-rich pension funds and other large investors looking for bargains in the pandemonium brought prices up from the huge declines that they had seen during the course of the day." Another quote: "The break was described by dealers as one of the worst in memory; and as one trader put it, 'I don't think we've reached bottom'." And, quote: "Yesterday's uniqueness was evident from the moment brokers started arriving at their offices. Phones were ringing incessantly with investors wanting to sell stock. Top executives at some of the smaller brokerage firms found themselves pressed into service to handle the onslaught." My friends, these words might have described Black Tuesday 1929; but they actually are taken from the New York Times of October 11, 1979—this month.

I am continually asked questions these days which boil down to two things: "What should I do?" and "When should I do it?" But, my friends, I cannot give you that kind of advice. No two persons live exactly the same way, and what might be right for one might be wrong or impossible for another. Instead I am trying to put you into a position of being able to understand for yourself what is going on, like Henry Morganthau, Sr. 50 years ago. Then it is up to you to exercise your own judgment in deciding what to do. For six years now, beginning with my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR", I've been revealing information about the total plan to destroy the United States

dollar. It is this that underlies all the other economic turbulence we are seeing today in America.

When President Nixon closed the international gold window in August 1971, it rendered the dollar inconvertible. This led to an acceleration of the inflation throughout the industrialized world. The rise in prices of international commodities, including oil, led to a rise in gold prices. Meanwhile, confidence in the dollar has been slipping steadily.

In the past I have explained how all this could be stopped IF the United States really had the gold claimed by the Government, but the United States gold figures are a fraud. We are actually "gold poor"; and even the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), now a private corporation, cannot help when the dollar collapses, along with the banks. So for years, my friends, the Federal Reserve Board and the United States Treasury have been deceiving the people with propaganda and gold charades. For months the Treasury has been scraping together scraps of junk gold to auction off as a bluff, mainly to fool the public; but this month the Treasury announced that the regular auctions are over; instead, there may be only erratic auctions on very short notice. The first of these is now scheduled for November 1, 1979, but Swiss gold dealers now believe that this change is only a first step toward phasing out the auctions completely. If this is so, this is exactly what I alerted my listeners to watch for in AUDIO LETTER No. 41.

Meanwhile, my friends, it is now increasingly every country for itself monetarily. Only four days ago on October 23, Britain removed currency controls on her citizens and granted the right of gold ownership. The next day the BBC reported that gold sales by Russia are now over. The day after that Switzerland, which has supported the dollar for the past three years, announced a shift back to her traditional monetary policies designed to restrain inflation there. Increasingly the United States is losing its anchors as the economic storm builds. As a nation, we have forfeited all our chances to prevent economic disaster; so now, my friends, it's only a matter of time.

Topic #2—At this time last month the artificial crisis over Russian troops in Cuba was in the news. On all sides there was speculation about what the United States would do; but as it turned out, it was all building up to an anticlimax. Last month I revealed the Russian strategy to defuse the crisis, and that plan has stayed right on track. The whole flap over Cuba began as a Bolshevik ploy here to stir up opposition to the SALT II treaty.

The struggle now over SALT II is part of a secret war in which the United States is the prime battleground. On one side in this secret war are the atheistic Bolsheviks, the former rulers of the Soviet Union. They have been overthrown; and as they are expelled from Russia they are flocking here to the United States of America. On the other side in the secret war are those who overthrew the Bolsheviks in Russia. They are Russia's new rulers, the tough band of native Russian Christians who fought for 60 years to take over the Kremlin. Bolshevik power has been building fast in the United States for several years. They want to seize total control here and use America's military power to destroy Russia by plunging the world into nuclear war. To prevent that, the Russians are pushing their own levers of power here to move America toward disarmament. SALT II is to be only the beginning, but it is also a crucial test of power between the Russians and their Bolshevik enemies here in America.

The recent flap over Russian troops in Cuba began as a Bolshevik maneuver, but last month I described how the Senator Church robotoid strategy had enabled Russia to take the initiative away from the Bolsheviks. The organic robotoid replacement for the late Senator Frank Church was programmed to act even more hawkish about Cuba than the Bolsheviks. In that way, the Church robotoid became the one voice in the Senate that would count most. As everyone cooled off about Cuba, the Church robotoid would be programmed to gradually act more satisfied, and in the process it would get SALT II moving ahead once again. But the key to the Russian plan was timing.

An important ingredient in the Russian campaign to sell SALT II is their understanding of American psychology. Often we read or hear comments that those fellows in the Kremlin just do not understand how Americans think; but nothing, my friends, could be further from the truth. In Moscow the "Institute on the U.S.A. and Canada" does nothing else but study our ways and our psychology. They have been at it for 20 years, and they do their job very well indeed. One of the most important facts about our American psychology was used expertly in defusing the Cuba crisis. This is the fact that the American public as a whole has a short memory. Given a little time, we can be counted on to forget about anything no matter what it is. To choose a vivid example of this, just ask yourself when was the last time you thought about the Guyana tragedy of last November. Congressman Ryan, the slaughtered newsmen, and the hundreds of helpless men, women, and children murdered at Jonestown are as dead today as they were then; but today, who thinks about it? Russia lost her secret missile base in Guyana, about which I had been warning publicly for over four years. A joint American-Israeli commando raid wiped it out, and the Bolsheviks got away with killing hundreds of Americans as a publicity stunt which was used to gain military access to Guyana. They got away with it because we, the American people, quickly lost interest in having our questions answered.

And so in the recent Cuban non-crisis, the Russians knew exactly what to do. First they programmed the Senator Church robotoid to grab the ball about Cuba. They made him make stern statements that those Russian troops would have to go, otherwise no SALT II treaty. Then the robotized Carter Administration spent a full month pretending not to know quite what to do. Gradually the Bolshevik-inspired fever over Cuba cooled off—anything that could drag on that long could hardly be a real crisis, and besides the World Series was just around the corner. The whole Cuba flap gradually began to get boring. Finally the first evening of this month, Monday October 1, Jimmy Carter robotoid No. 17 grinned out at America on television. Our robotoid President praised Russia for new assurances he had supposedly received, quote: "from the highest levels of the Soviet government." The so-called assurances amounted to a declaration that Russia was not about to change a thing in Cuba. Then robotoid Carter announced a few muscle-flexing exercises to make everyone feel good. A small new military unit would be set up in south Florida to watch the Caribbean more closely. We would step up surveillance of Cuba, and sometime soon some Marines would be sent to visit our naval base at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba. On Capitol Hill, reaction to the speech was feeble—with one exception. The exception was robotoid Senator Frank Church. Before the speech, the Church robotoid had been holding up the SALT II treaty. Afterwards, he announced that he was sufficiently encouraged to allow consideration of SALT II to get under way in his Foreign Relations Committee; but to keep up appearances, he pretended not to be completely satisfied yet.

During the remainder of this month of October, SALT II has been gathering steam. In mid October the process called "marking up the treaty"—that is, considering amendments and changes—got going. All along, the Bolshevik plan has been to kill the treaty by adding amendments unsatisfactory to Russia; but already several killer amendments have been defeated in Committee. Robotoid Church, along with several other robotoids on the Foreign Relations Committee, is doing his job. As programmed, he is so far succeeding in moving SALT II right along. Meanwhile the Cuban non-crisis is gradually fizzling out.

Four days after Carter's speech on Cuba, an American SR-71 reconnaissance plane reportedly went sight-seeing over Cuba; and on October 17, more than two weeks after the Carter robotoid speech, the Marines finally showed up at Guantanamo Bay. Originally the mock amphibious assault was scheduled to take place as dawn was breaking; but since the whole thing was for domestic consumption here at home anyway, the time was changed to 8:30 A.M. By then the sun was up nice and bright. As explained in an Associated Press dispatch the previous day, quote: "In addition to providing better light for TV cameras, officials said the change would keep Marines from getting hurt while boarding the boats in the dark." And so it was, my friends, that on the television news that evening, we got to watch the United States Marines scamper ashore at Guantanamo Bay.

As of now, the Bolsheviks are trying frantically to devise some new stratagem to upset SALT II. And, as I will discuss in Topic #3, they may yet succeed in doing so; but at this moment, the Russian campaign to sell SALT II is gathering momentum. Only two days ago, on October 25, the Russians dropped another important weight into the balance. The Senate Majority Leader, robotoid Senator Robert Byrd, announced he will vote for SALT II. The late Senator Byrd himself, from my home state of West Virginia, visited Russia this past June. The organic robotoid who returned in his place has been working ever since for the passage of SALT II.

The Russian program to pass SALT II also includes much more than their robotoid maneuvers in Congress. The ratification of SALT II is becoming a thread which runs through the entire fabric of American defense and foreign policy. No matter where you stand you will find arguments in the news today designed to appeal to you. The greatest single worry which most Americans have about SALT II is that it will weaken us militarily; and as I mentioned earlier, that is exactly its purpose. Russia's rulers want to do this in order to prevent nuclear war if possible, but the Guyana episode last year proved conclusively that most Americans prefer comfortable lies over the uncomfortable truth! Time is precious, because the Bolsheviks here in the United States are working day and night to try to bring about war, NUCLEAR WAR. And so, instead of trying to explain everything to a public that does not care about the truth, the Russians are telling us what we want to hear. They are convinced that the alternative would be the death of hundreds of millions in nuclear fireballs; and given the choice, they believe human lives count more than words. As Brezhnev No. 2 of Russia said last June at the SALT II signing in Vienna, "God will not forgive us if we fail." So every possible argument is now being used to sell SALT II. We are being told SALT II will make us safer by making it harder for Russia to hide what it is doing militarily.

Meanwhile, all kinds of new military toys are being publicized widely on the American side. The leader is the MX missile. If it is ever built, the MX will not be fully operational for ten years, but its impact in making people feel stronger is here

already. Likewise there is talk of an ABM defensive missile to protect the MX installations, and maneuverable missile warheads for our missiles to evade any future Russian ABMs.

Another variation, though, is that we are too weak to do without SALT II. This theme is basically true, thanks to Russia's secret space triad of weapons. As I've detailed in the past, these are: the manned Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellites, the manned bases on the moon, and the manned electrogravitic platforms called Cosmospheres floating high over our heads and in other land and sea areas of the earth. These super weapons were developed in secret by Russia and deployed suddenly during the closing months of 1977. The United States has no equivalent space triad and is at a great military disadvantage as a result. But most people today are living in the distant past, scientifically; and so the fact that we are too weak to do without SALT II is explained in more understandable ways. For example, someone points out that America's highly publicized quick-reaction force still exists only on paper. We do not have enough air lift or sea lift capabilities to actually make it work. No wonder it took the Marines 16 days to get to Guantanamo Bay after robotoid Carter's speech.

And then to make things worse, none other than robotoid Henry Kissinger throws cold water on NATO. In a Brussels speech last month on September 1, robotoid Kissinger said, quote: "Our European allies should not keep asking us to multiply strategic assurances that we cannot possibly mean." In this and other ways, the Russians are shaking Europe's confidence in the United States; and in the process they have set up what may be the most powerful selling point of all for SALT II, because now the ratification of SALT II is increasingly seen as a test of leadership for America. On one hand, Europe wants nothing to do with any more wars; on the other hand, the strange behavior of the secretly robotized Carter Administration is destroying confidence. NATO leaders are beginning to say: If Carter can't get a SALT II treaty, what good can he do? This move may be the cleverest maneuver yet by Russia. Should the Senate somehow fail to ratify SALT II, it could spell the end of the NATO alliance. War might then be inevitable, but America would stand alone. If SALT II is ratified, NATO may continue; but the desired disarming of America will also be under way.

My friends, in the AUDIO LETTER for this past June 1979 I explained that the ratification of SALT II could well be the key issue that will decide between PEACE and WAR for America and Russia; and early this month on October 3, a headline in the Washington Star said, "UNITED STATES-SOVIET RELATIONS BACK IN HOLDING PATTERN." The article itself said, quote: "The whole relationship is hung up on whether the Senate ratifies the Strategic Arms Limitations treaty." And an Administration official was quoted as saying, "It's an unstructured relationship because there's nothing but SALT on the table." SALT II is of supreme importance to Russia's rulers. It will be only a beginning; but without that beginning, nothing else can follow. Already pro-SALT members of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee are talking about SALT III. On October 15 the robotoid replacement for the late Senator Jacob Javits of New York said, quote: "We want reductions."

By the same token, my friends, the Bolsheviks want desperately to defeat SALT II and stop the process. They don't want reductions; they want WAR. Of all people, Russia's new rulers never forget that surprises are always possible in any human activity. They also know from long and bitter experience that the Bolsheviks have an uncanny talent for springing surprises.

In fact, another of these surprises has just taken place, as I will discuss in Topic #3. And so by every possible means, the Russians are working to dismantle America's ability to wage war. They already have crushing military superiority over the West; but where the Bolsheviks are involved, that is not enough. So long as the Bolsheviks are left with as much as a box of matches, there is always a chance that they will find a way to burn the house down.

We sometimes forget that as of now, there is no SALT treaty of any kind. SALT I expired over two years ago on October 3, 1977; but once SALT II is in force, it will provide Russia with an important new tool. It remains to be seen exactly how Russia will use SALT II, but the effect will be to begin putting handcuffs on the Bolshevik war planners here in America.

Topic #3—Five months ago I reported that Russia had begun deploying an astonishing new Intelligence weapon. These are the "organic robotoids"—artificial robot-like living creatures that simulate human beings. By introducing the robotoids, the Russians were able to make a shambles of the Bolshevik plans then in progress. Preparations were moving fast for a new Bolshevik revolution here in the United States, but the Russian robotoids stopped it cold. Even more importantly, the joint Bolshevik and Zionist Middle East war plan was thwarted, at least for the time being. This prevented the Bolsheviks from going ahead with the rest of their plan for an American nuclear first strike against Russia.

Since that time, the Russians have been pressing forward with their robotoid take-over of the United States. Within weeks, the year-and-a-half SALT II stalemate vanished and the treaty was signed in Vienna; and for months now, major surprises have been peppering the news which are the direct result of Russia's robotoid invasion. I alerted you to watch for these in AUDIO LETTER No. 4 6, and have commented on them as they have taken place. In Topic #2 I pointed out the continuation of the Senator Church robotoid strategy to undo the Cuba crisis and save SALT II, and this month there continued to be important new developments in Russia's robotoid take-over here.

A very important case has to do with America's new relations with Red China. In 1978, the Carter Administration was in a state of panic over Russia's newly deployed crushing military power in space. The so-called China-card policy was the result. America suddenly dumped Taiwan and recognized Red China last December, but the Russians are working fast to unravel the ties between the United States and China. Russia is determined to re-establish her own working relationship with China. This month talks are continuing between Russian and Chinese officials in Moscow with this goal in view. And suddenly, just this month, a Federal District Judge has ruled that it is illegal for President Carter to breach the treaty with Taiwan. Instead, he says, Congress must be consulted. Only last June the same judge had refused to rule in the case; but since then Russia's robotoid take-over here has changed things, and so out of the blue has come the surprise thunderbolt of this ruling. It could hardly be better calculated to shake Chinese confidence in the United States, and it comes at the very moment when Red Chinese negotiators are staring across the table at their Russian counterparts in Moscow.

In every possible way, the Russians are trying to make use of their robotoid advantage while they can, because there is a lesson which runs throughout military history and the Russians know it well. That lesson is that when one side in a conflict

develops a new weapon, similar weapon. So a is used quickly.

the other new weapon

side will soon counter it with a can decide a conflict only if it

In AUDIO LETTERS 46 and 47 I reported that robotoid technology in the United States is far behind that of Russia, but now the Bolshevik and Zionist enemies of Russia have achieved their own surprise. The Rothschild interests, which control both movements, have for many years been deeply involved in biological research of all kinds. They have not succeeded in learning the secrets of the Russian robotoids, but they have achieved success with something similar. They are called "synthetic automatons" or simply "synthetics." A Rothschild synthetic is similar to a Russian robotoid in certain ways. Each is an artificial life form designed to simulate a human being, but synthetics also differ from robotoids in important ways. For one thing, they are generated by radically different techniques. Both utilize genetic samples from actual humans as their starting point, but beyond that everything is different.

The Russian process is a close relative of recombinant DNA techniques involving bacteria. The details of the process are shrouded in great secrecy, but it enables robotoids to be generated from scratch very rapidly. The Rothschild process, by contrast, does not start from scratch. Instead, certain tissues extracted from cattle are the starting point. The synthetic is then generated in a process that changes the genetic make-up in order to simulate a person being copied. It is the outgrowth of a discovery made 20 years ago in France. The experiment involved two species of ducks called khaki Campbells and white Pekins. The landmark duck experiment of 1959 was reported in a book titled "THE BIOLOGICAL TIME BOMB" by Gordon Rettray Taylor. It was published in 1968 by the New American Library, New York, N.Y. Taylor described the experiment in the words, quote: "They had extracted DNA from the cells of the khaki Campbells and had injected it into the white Pekins, thinking that just possibly the offspring of the latter might show some character derived from khaki Campbells. To their astonishment, the actual ducks they injected began to change. Their white feathers darkened, and their necks began to take on the peculiar curve which is a mark of the khaki Campbell." Beginning with that clue of two decades ago, the Rothschild synthetic process has been developed in secret; and now, my friends, synthetics are beginning to appear on the scene.

Earlier this month on October 9, Carter robotoid No. 18 was scheduled to hold a news conference. Three days earlier, Brezhnev No. 2 had made his proposals in East Berlin for military reductions in Europe. Robotoid No. 18 had been programmed to react positively to the proposals, but instead our alleged President said, quote: "I think it's an effort designed to disarm the willingness or eagerness of our allies adequately to defend themselves." The Russians were dumfounded. This was a fresh robotoid, surely the recurring instability problem could not be showing up this fast! After the news conference, he was bundled off for examination and testing, and that produced the second surprise. It was not robotoid No. 18 at all, but a synthetic. The synthetic was then transported to Novosibirsk for further study. There robotoid scientists were able to establish an important and unpleasant fact: the source of the genetic material used in generating the synthetic had been robotoid No. 18; and whereas the Russian robotoids vary somewhat from one to another, the synthetic was virtually identical in appearance to the missing robotoid No. 18. But an important favorable fact was also discovered—the synthetics are inferior mentally to the robotoids. It is not yet clear how fast the Bolsheviks will be

able to deploy their synthetics, but the guerilla war between the Rothschild synthetics and the Russian robotoids is already beginning.

The Carter synthetic on October 9 was a shock to the Russians, and yet they have known for months that the synthetics would soon appear. For that reason, the Russians are beginning to re-emphasize their other weapons in their battle against the Bolsheviks here in America. As of now, they are beginning to use geophysical warfare again as part of their overall campaign to whittle away at the danger of nuclear war. On October 16, Chairman Hua of China was in France, trying to buy Mirage Fighters among other things; but the Russians sent a clear message to both France and China that they should forget the whole idea. That day a Russian geophysical warfare weapon was set off in an undersea trench in the Mediterranean off Nice, France. It produced a sudden ebb tide, followed by a tidal wave that smashed 36 miles of the French Riviera. It was a new experience for the French, but not for Chairman Hua. The Russians used geophysical warfare to give him a message a year ago, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 38.

But for us Americans, it is now coming closer to home. In AUDIO LETTER No. 41 I reported the planting of 46 bombs underground for earthquake generation in California. During the past few months, the Russians have been setting off preliminary quakes with gradually rising strength. On August 6 the strongest quake in 68 years—5.9 on the Richter scale—shook San Francisco, and this month on October 15 a Richter 6.4 quake was set off in southern California. The Russians are becoming convinced that their robotoids will not be enough to stop the Bolsheviks. As I have reported in recent months, they have been slowed by troubles with the robotoids, and now they are faced with the added problem of the Rothschild synthetics. And so rather than let the Bolsheviks regroup and launch nuclear war, the Russians are turning once again to geophysical warfare, including weather warfare. The west coast is a prime target because of the heavy concentrations of aerospace and military activity there. The Kremlin is debating whether the time has come after all to unleash the great man-made catastrophe on America's west coast.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #52

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is November 30, 1979, and this is my AUDIO LETTER #52.

Where will you be, my friends, if nuclear fireballs begin erupting soon over the United States of America? If war comes, will you be among the majority of Americans who will be caught by surprise? Or will you be among the few who will have escaped from target areas in time?

I pray that war will not come, but at this very moment the world is teetering dangerously close to thermonuclear catastrophe; and if it happens, air raid sirens and radio alerts will come too late. It will be like Hiroshima just after dawn on August 6, 1945. Radio Hiroshima began to broadcast an air raid alert, but never finished! It was cut short by the unearthly

flash of a second dawn as a man made sun rose over the city. These are the true stakes, my friends, in the present crisis over American hostages in Iran. The hostages are only helpless pawns in a deadly chess game behind the scenes.

For more than two years now, a world-wide secret war has been under way. The secret war is between the new rulers of Russia and the overthrown rulers of Russia—the Bolsheviks now here in America. Last month I reported that, quote: "The secret war may soon surface in very spectacular ways. When that happens, most people still will not know the reasons for what they see; but the events themselves will make headlines the world over." Eight days after I recorded those words in AUDIO LETTER No. 51, the present crisis in Iran suddenly began. The American Embassy in Tehran was overrun, supposedly by Iranian students, and more than 60 hostages were taken. Today, more than three weeks later, some 50 Americans are still being held hostage. Day by day the crisis has deepened. On both sides there has been confusion, and one contradiction after another. Iran, like the United States, is speaking with several voices in the crisis because Iran, like the United States, is a battleground in this secret war.

The real reason for the Iran crisis is one that I warned about 15 months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The Bolsheviks here in America have created a plan to launch an American nuclear first strike against Russia. The plan has been updated and revised continuously since I first revealed it in AUDIO LETTER No. 37, but the underlying military strategy has not changed at all and Iran is an indispensable key to that strategy. The Bolsheviks intend for the Iran crisis to cause American and other troops to pour into Iran. As a pretext, we will be told that it has become necessary for America to seize Iran's oil fields and facilities to keep Iranian oil flowing; but the real purpose will be to get ready fast for a sneak attack on Russia. This is the real meaning of the Iran crisis, and yet the crisis so far is not going according to Bolshevik plan. For the past six months the Russians have been seizing control of certain key positions of power here in the United States. Up to now, Russia's new rulers have relatively few agents here compared to the vast number of their Bolshevik enemies; but the Russians are working from the top down for maximum leverage. They were unable to prevent the Iran crisis, but they are using their new power here to alter its course. Up to now, the Russians have been able to keep their Bolshevik enemies here in America off balance in the Iran crisis.

Two months ago in the crisis over Russian troops in Cuba, they were content to make the whole affair just fizzle out; but this time the chess players in the Kremlin are shooting for checkmate. They are having to calculate their moves very quickly, but they are calculating carefully because their goal is to wreck the Bolshevik war plan built around Iran. Right now, my friends, the world is staggering along like a blindfolded man only inches away from the unseen chasm of nuclear war. If the Russian maneuvering is successful, we will be pulled a step toward safety; but one wrong move and the Bolsheviks here in America will push us over the edge.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—STRATEGIC IRAN AND THE ISLAMIC KHOMEINI REVOLUTION Topic #2—THE BOLSHEVIK IRAN STRATEGY FOR THERMONUCLEAR WAR, and Topic #3—AMERICAN HOSTAGES AND THE BATTLE OF TEHRAN. Topic #1—The Iran crisis was triggered by an event here in the

United States late last month. On October 22 the deposed Shah of Iran arrived in New York City, ostensibly for medical treatment. As a result, tempers boiled over fast in Iran and in less than two weeks the United States Embassy in Tehran was attacked and seized. To understand the headlines of today about Iran, you need to know why and how the Shah was deposed. You deserve to know some key facts about the Khomeini government which the news media are not telling you. Also, there are certain things about the religion of Islam itself which you must know, because otherwise you'll be unable to interpret what you see happening in the Iran crisis.

Only a short two months ago we Americans were preoccupied with a different crisis. We were worried, not about American hostages in Iran, but about reports of a Russian Combat Brigade in Cuba. And a year ago this month there was a fake alarm over Russian MiG-23 Fighters in Cuba. Yet during the days of the Shah, Iran amounted to a super Cuba against Russia. Iran is 15 times the size of Cuba with three times the population, and the Shah was turning it into an armed camp as an American puppet. The Iranian Army was being whipped into a large modern fighting force. The very latest in America's supersonic fighters, the F-14, was being shipped to Iran in great numbers complete with the advanced Phoenix missile; and the Iranian Navy was growing steadily. American-made warships were being shipped to Iran with equipment even more sophisticated than that supplied to the United States Navy.

Over the years we have heard often about the 60,000 to 70,000 Russians in Cuba; but how often have we heard our robotoid President say in a press conference, as he did just two nights ago, quote: "I think one of the points that should be made is that a year ago we had 70,000 Americans in Iran, 70,000!"

Iran was becoming a great engine of war fueled by Iranian oil, and at the controls sat the Shah of Iran, a puppet of the Rockefeller cartel. But the strength of the Shah was also his weakness. His secret police force, the SAVAK, was hated and dreaded universally by Iranians. As many as 60,000 Iranians may have died at the hands of the SAVAK, many of them under torture; and meanwhile at the urging of his then masters, the Rockefellers, the Shah was trying to remake Iran in the Western mold. Some Iranians welcomed these changes, but others only resented them. To them, Western influences, especially from America, meant support for the Shah's reign of terror. This turned everything Western into a symbol of hate and fear; and, most of all, millions felt that the Shah was turning Iran away from her ancient roots as an Islamic society.

Islam was founded 1400 years ago by the prophet Mohammed. Moslems believe that God communicated directly to Mohammed through the angel Gabriel, and that Mohammed wrote those words down. The collection of these writings is known as the Koran. The religion based on the Koran is called Islam; and its adherents, Moslems. Islam is a major force in the world, especially in the Middle East, Africa, and southern Asia. There are as many Moslems in the world as there are Roman Catholics—around 700,000,000; and yet most of us in the West have no understanding at all of Islam. Instead, we are in the habit of looking at the Moslem world through Western eyes, and that always leaves us bewildered. Our ignorance of Islam is so great that not so long ago Moslems were typically called Mohammedans by Western Christians; and since we Christians worship Christ, it is often assumed that the people we wrongly call Mohammedans worship Mohammed; but nothing could be more offensive to a Moslem. The basic tenet of Islam is that there is

no god but Allah, and Mohammed is His prophet. Allah is the Moslem name for God. Mohammed's memory is loved and revered but he is not worshipped. The Koran, the Holy Book of Islam, is not a book of laws nor is Mohammed thought of as a law giver, like Moses. Instead, the Koran is an eloquent appeal to mankind, and especially to the Arabs to obey the law of God. Over and over the Koran states that the law of God has already been revealed to the Jews and to the Christians. In fact, in one passage the Koran tells the pious Moslem if he has any doubt, to consult those to whom the Scriptures have been revealed previously. Even so, it is a great mistake to expect Moslems to think in terms that are familiar to us. For one thing, we in the West tend to separate religion from other areas of life—such as business, law, and diplomacy. To a devout Moslem, this is unthinkable for in Islam, religion is life itself.

In the present crisis over Iran, several very important points of Moslem law and diplomacy are involved. The Moslem approach in these matters is not the same as in the West. Instead, they have been derived down through the centuries from the Koran, from examples set by the Prophet himself, and from other sources. Once you become aware of these things, I think the Iran crisis may begin to take on a different appearance in important ways.

I am about to give you several important quotations from a highly authoritative book on these matters. It is titled "LAW IN THE MIDDLE EAST", Volume I, by Majid Khadduri and Herbert J. Liebesny. It was published in 1955 by the Middle East Institute here in Washington, D.C. First, in the West we generally think in terms of separation of church and state, but, quote:

"Islam, in contrast to Christianity, combined both the religious and civil authority in the hands of the head of the state."

Before Islam was founded, the Arab world was a scene of continual fighting, intertribal warfare, with raids for robbery or vendettas; but, quote:

"Islam abolished all wars except the jihad—that is, the holy war. "

It had to be, quote:

"War that would spread the belief in Allah and make His Word supreme over the world."

No other kind of war was legally permitted. In addition, the jihad, quote:

"had to be conducted according to certain specific rules in order to be just. The violation of these rules deprived the jihad of its religious sanction, and entailed punishment by Allah or the imam whether in this world or the next."

The first of these rules is that, quote:

"The jihad was a required duty of the whole Moslem community, binding the Moslems en masse rather than individually."

The second rule is that, quote:

"The jihad may be regarded as a doctrine of permanent war."

But thirdly, quote:

"The jihad, though a doctrine of permanent war, did not necessarily mean continuous fighting. The objective of the jihad was not fighting per se but the conversion of unbelievers to Islam. If means other than fighting were used, such as propaganda or persuasion, then the jihad duty was fulfilled. The essence of the doctrine was that the Moslems could not relax their effort to convert the unbelievers."

And, finally, quote:

"The validity of the jihad depended on the observance of certain rules. The imam had to declare the jihad, to invite the unbelievers to adopt Islam before fighting began, and to agree to negotiations if they were requested by the enemy before actual fighting had taken place."

Beyond these general rules, there is one more point of Islamic law which bears directly on the present Iran crisis. It has to do with the treatment of hostages, quote:

"The system of taking human hostages to insure the sanctity of treaties was followed by the Moslems. If the treaty were violated, however, the Moslems did not kill the hostages. If the Moslems started the war, the hostages were sent back home; but if the war was started by the other party, then the hostages were kept. "

In other words, my friends, under Moslem law, the worst that can legally be done to hostages is to keep them indefinitely. Their position as hostages cannot justify their being killed.

The hostages in Tehran, my friends, are there in connection with a jihad led by Ayatollah Khomeini. He has publicly proclaimed that Iran is embarked on a holy war against America, "the great Satan." He has called upon all Moslems everywhere to join in the struggle, and yet the Ayatollah is being manipulated by forces which he may not understand.

When the Shah was in power, he was building up Iran for war purposes which had nothing to do with a jihad; and as he Westernized his country, he also terrorized it. As a result, many pockets of discontent and opposition developed against the Shah. One of the most forceful of these was Ayatollah Khomeini. Ayatollah Khomeini was an implacable foe of the Shah for many years before we began hearing about him here in the United States. The Ayatollah had good reason to know the character of the Shah's regime. Years ago the agents of the Shah tortured and murdered one of the sons of the Ayatollah, and a generation ago the present Shah's father executed Ayatollah Khomeini's father; and so even when he was driven into exile, the Ayatollah did not cease in his efforts against the Shah's regime. From his places of exile he continued to appeal to his followers in Iran. He exhorted them to turn away from the Shah and turn back to Islam. And in accordance with the Shiite Moslem beliefs, he extolled martyrdom in service to God as something to be desired. He told his followers to oppose the Shah without fear, accepting martyrdom as a reward if it should come. The Ayatollah spent 14 long years in exile, most of them without seriously threatening the Shah's regime; and yet, early this year of 1979, Ayatollah Khomeini returned in triumph to Tehran. In less than a year's time a revolution had suddenly crystallized around him.

The sudden rise in the Ayatollah's political fortunes took place for reasons he could never have suspected. It all began two years ago this month in November 1977. In mid month the Shah of Iran made a sudden rush, rush trip here to Washington, D.C.,

but news about the Shah's mysterious trip was practically lost in the headlines about another unexpected rush trip. It was the week of the trip to Jerusalem by Egypt's President Sadat. The two trips were closely related, as I revealed that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 28.

Two months earlier Russia had begun the rapid deployment of a secret arsenal of space weapons, her new space triad. The controlled Carter Administration was reeling from the shock, but in November 1977 the sudden trips by Sadat and the Shah were the shaky beginnings of America's shift to a first-strike strategy. When the Shah discovered just how crucial Iran was becoming militarily, he decided to demand better reimbursement by the Rockefeller cartel for services rendered.

A consortium of 14 oil companies marketed Iran's oil under contract, and it was contract-renewal time. The Shah said he was willing to renew, but only on more favorable terms. Hearing that and other demands, the late David Rockefeller began thinking his Shah was expendable and this new situation might offer an opportunity to get rid of British Petroleum as an unwanted partner. Originally the Iranian oil fields had been controlled by Britain, but in 1953 the Rockefellers had acquired major concessions in Iran as the price of restoring the pliable Shah to his throne. By 1977 BP was down to only a 40% share in Iran's oil, while the Rockefeller cartel controlled 49%; but as usual, David Rockefeller wanted the whole pie. British Petroleum was an arch rival to be knocked out if possible, and so Rockefeller gave an assignment to what was then still his private detective agency, the CIA. They were to figure out how to get rid of the Shah in such a way that it would also knock out BP; but the CIA was also ordered to make sure that any plan they developed could also be used militarily. The CIA planners concluded that the only way to get rid of British Petroleum in Iran would be to disband the consortium of oil companies—in other words, the Shah should be removed in favor of someone who would nationalize the Iranian oil industry. For decades the Rockefellers had made a specialty of re-establishing their own effective control over nationalized industries, as I have indicated in AUDIO LETTER No. 40 about Guyana and other tapes. As for the military factor, surprise had become the No. 1 consideration. In view of Russia's newly deployed space triad, most of the Shah's expensive weapons were no longer of much use. They could still be used in regional conflicts, but that was no longer of interest. Nothing mattered any more except the ability to mount a surprise attack on Russia from Iran, and that would have to be done using secret weapons instead of the Shah's impressive-looking conventional weapons. So it was concluded that there was no military reason not to overthrow the Shah; and, in fact, overthrowing the Shah held out the possibility of greater military surprise against Russia. To do this, the new regime would have to be one that did not want to continue the Shah's military programs. That would cause a dramatic collapse of Iran as a highly visible military threat to Russia, but it was also essential that whoever followed the Shah be less efficient organizationally than the Shah. This would allow covert activities to continue in Iran without the new regime being aware of it.

The CIA then carried out a search for a candidate individual, or group, to replace the Shah. They were not looking for a puppet this time, instead the concept was to find someone having certain characteristics who could be maneuvered without their knowledge into serving the intended purposes. The search ended by identifying Ayatollah Khomeini. He fit the profile of desired characteristics: he was violently anti-Shah, his position as a religious leader provided an ideal base for political power, yet

his group was weak organizationally and lacked administrative experience. Even the Ayatollah's fascination with martyrdom looked ideal to the war planners because the government of Ayatollah Khomeini is to be sacrificed to a military purpose. It is Guyana all over again, but on a grand scale. One year ago this month, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 40, the deliberate mass human sacrifice at Jonestown had a military purpose. It was to achieve surprise and the destruction of the secret Russian missile base about which I had warned publicly for over four years.

This time, human sacrifice in Iran is intended to lead to the destruction of Russia herself. And so after a dozen years in obscurity, the cause of Ayatollah Khomeini suddenly started picking up steam. In countless ways the CIA began multiplying Khomeini's impact in Iran. Cassette tapes of the Ayatollah's fiery speeches flooded the country; photos of the Ayatollah began to multiply, becoming a rallying point for opposition to the Shah; and covert CIA agents began organizing the pro-Khomeini opposition to the Shah into a potent political force. And in the process, the powerful Bolsheviks here in America were able to put some of their own agents close to the inner circles of Ayatollah Khomeini.

In August 1978 I alerted my listeners that the rioting in Iran was a serious threat to the Shah's regime. Four months later in AUDIO LETTER No. 41, I reported that none other than the Shah's former supporters, the Rockefeller cartel, were causing his troubles. By early the following month, January 1979, the Shah's regime was visibly falling apart. The Deputy to General Alexander Haig (the NATO Commander) was then sent to Iran on orders from Washington. There he met with top Iranian military leaders. Following orders, the NATO Deputy Commander, Major General Robert E. Huyser, talked Iran's Military out of staging a coup d'etat. Washington's unstated purpose in ordering General Huyser to Iran was to clear the way for Ayatollah Khomeini.

The old Hegelian principle of thesis, antithesis, and synthesis was at work: Step 1—Remove the powerful Shah; Step 2—Replace him with an interim straw man, the unpopular Bakhtiar government; and Step 3—Allow this weak straw man to be knocked down by Ayatollah Khomeini. But the Rockefeller cartel was afraid the Iranian Military would substitute their own Step 3. The Military wanted to set up a stable, moderate, pro-West regime. The CIA first-strike planners wanted anything but stability in Iran, and so the Iranian military leaders were talked out of staging a coup. Later on they were tried for treason and executed by the Khomeini government.

On January 16, 1979, the Shah fled from Iran. Barely two weeks later, on January 31, the Ayatollah made his triumphal return to Tehran. The unseen, unsuspected CIA support for the Islamic Khomeini revolution had done its job. That is what CIA Director Stansfield Turner meant in a statement he made only four days later on February 4. On the ABC television news program "Issues and Answers", Turner said, quote: "I would suggest even Ayatollah Khomeini didn't realize how well his force was moving along."

Even so, an event took place only one week after the Ayatollah's return which might still have ended the Khomeini revolution. When the "old man" and some aides came out the door of the Khomeini headquarters on February 7, 1979, an assassin was waiting. He shot the old man in the chest with an arsenic-coated high-powered bullet. All efforts to save him were useless, and that night the old man died. For several hours the British news

agency REUTERS carried bulletins that the Ayatollah had been reported killed, but there were no such bulletins by American news agencies because the Rockefeller cartel here knew that Ayatollah Khomeini was not dead. The old man who was shot to death in Tehran last February 197 9 was a "double." He was a devoted Shiite follower of his beloved Ayatollah Khomeini. He knew, like everyone else in the Khomeini inner circle, that efforts would be made to assassinate the Ayatollah; but as a devout Shiite Moslem, the "double" welcomed the prospect of martyrdom as a sacred privilege, and so he willingly gave his life to insure the success of the Islamic Khomeini revolution. And as we all know, the revolution did succeed, but the cruel fact is that it was secretly helped along by Satanic forces who plan to undo it all. They plan to martyr the entire Khomeini government as they set off thermonuclear war.

Topic #2—The present crisis in Iran is the outgrowth of the CIA plan set in motion two years ago by David Rockefeller. But the four Rockefeller brothers did not live to see their war plans carried out; instead the remains of Rockefeller power are being carved up today by two bitter enemies on the world stage. They are the joint heirs of the situation created in Iran by the CIA, and now they are both struggling for control in the Iran crisis.

As the Shah of Iran was being overthrown in the early days of 1979, the Rockefellers were being overthrown here in America. Just 10 days after the Shah fled from Iran, Nelson Rockefeller was murdered in New York City. It was the beginning of a Bolshevik coup d'etat against the Rockefellers. The Bolshevik purge here in the United States continued out of the public eye.

By late February 197 9 the new Khomeini regime was taking hold in Iran, and at the same time the Bolsheviks were taking control here in America. When these changes were taking place, there were headlines about Iran but no hint of the Bolshevik coup here in the United States. As they picked up the reins of Rockefeller power and CIA planning, the Bolsheviks were in a hurry.

The Bolsheviks are being expelled from their former positions of power in Russia, and they want to get even. They were trying to trigger a Middle East war by mid May 1979 on the way to a nuclear first strike against Russia; and, at the same time, they were planning to throw the world's 700,000,000 Roman Catholics into their war against Russia. The Bolsheviks were planning to set off what was to be known as the "Pope's Revolution" in eastern Europe. I gave the details of the plan in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. The key to the plan was to be the papal visit to Poland on the 900th anniversary of the martyrdom of St. Stanislaus.

For a while the Bolshevik war plans were moving fast, but around Easter 1979 the Russians began intervening here in the United States. They began deploying their "organic robotoids", as I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 46. Using them in the Middle East shuttles I described that month, the Russians prevented a Middle East war in May. Likewise they were able to spoil the Bolshevik plan for a Pope's Revolution. In early May the Russians began eliminating Bolshevik influence in the Vatican, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 46, and the Pope's visit to Poland was re-scheduled for June. By then the emotion surrounding St. Stanislaus Day had cooled off and there was no trouble.

Ever since that time the United States has been a battleground in a secret war between the Russians and the Bolsheviks here. Over the months I have been keeping you informed about these developments. The Bolsheviks here are still trying to find a way

to throw America's military power at Russia in a knockout punch. Russia's new Christian rulers are countering by a campaign to disarm the United States, starting with the SALT II treaty. As of now, both sides—the Russians and their Bolshevik enemies—exert great power here in the United States. Russian power here is based on their agents, both human and robotoid, in top positions of power; but the Bolsheviks began infiltrating our land 30 years ago. Today they are in every nook and cranny of America, especially the military. So the Bolshevik strategy now is to find ways to circumvent Russia's control at the top.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 4 6 I revealed how Russia prevented a Middle East war in May by means of secret Middle East shuttles, but I also revealed that their shuttles involving Iran were meeting with complete failure. Unknown to Ayatollah Khomeini, Iran was and still is swarming with Bolshevik-Zionist agents, and they have been able to keep Russia virtually locked out of Iran up to now. Even so just over two months ago Russia did succeed in establishing a way to monitor what goes on around the Ayatollah. Doing this had become a top priority for Russia. Russian Intelligence agents had uncovered evidence that the Bolsheviks here in America were once again moving fast toward war. Once again the Bolsheviks were working toward a nuclear first strike against Russia; and just as before, Iran was to be used somehow as the key to the plan. But the Russians did not know exactly how Iran was to be used until late September, two months ago. By the time Russian Intelligence had pieced it all together, there was no time to be lost.

The joint Bolshevik-Zionist war plan called for a sequence of events to begin on November 20; and once it began, the chain reaction toward war was designed to be very hard to stop. As of late September 1979 the new Bolshevik war plan consisted of six major steps:

Step #1 was to be a series of incidents beginning in Saudi Arabia during the annual pilgrimage to Mecca. The incidents were being designed by the Bolshevik-Zionists to inflame Moslem rage against the United States and Israel.

Step #2 was to be the American Embassy take-over in Tehran. Bolshevik-Zionist agents in Iran had been feeding the resentment of the Iranian militants against the Embassy; and under the cover of generalized rioting against the United States in Moslem countries, the Embassy take-over was to be staged in Tehran. At the same time, the plan was for Saudi Arabia to be growling with rage at Israel over the incidents. This would have brought the "Hate Saudi Arabia" campaign of a year ago out of the closet again in the Zionist media of the United States. This was to lead to

Step #3—the long-planned, limited nuclear strike against Saudi Arabia's oil fields by Israel. This would have been like throwing gasoline into the fire storm of Moslem passions. Seven hundred million Moslems would have united in the spirit of the jihad (the holy war), and against this backdrop the Bolshevik-Zionist plan was to carry out

Step #4—the slaughter of the hostages in Tehran. In Topic #1 I explained how any such slaughter is forbidden by Islamic law; but we Americans, knowing nothing about Islam, would have automatically blamed the Khomeini government; and with American bodies coming home from Iran, like they did one year ago from Guyana, we would have cried out for revenge.

In Step #5 the Bolsheviks here in America were planning to bring

about a sudden, no-notice mass deployment of American troops and equipment to Iran. The Bolsheviks have figured out how to do it without approval from the top where it would be vetoed by Russian agents here in America. Once the troop deployment was under way, the Bolsheviks believe it would be impossible for Russia to stop without herself triggering nuclear war; and under the cover of deployment, first-strike preparations would be rushed ahead by the Bolsheviks.

Step #6 was to be the actual nuclear attack on Russia. This, too, is to occur without approval from top levels of the United States Government.

The military strategy of the "attack plan" is still basically as it was when I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The main difference now is that China's western provinces are not available to the Bolsheviks in power in the United States, so Russia's Cosmosphere installations in Central Siberia are targeted by the United States missiles in northern Australia, which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. As I also explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, American war-planners believe incorrectly that they can succeed in getting the missiles launched.

It was not until late September that the Russians were able to piece together their Intelligence and deduce this total plan. By then the destabilization incidents in Saudi Arabia were less than two months away on the Bolshevik War-Timetable, and it was clear that some of the forces in the Bolshevik plan had already been set in motion irrevocably. Iranian militants in Tehran were already being inflamed against the United States Embassy, and the provocations in Saudi Arabia were tied directly to the Moslem calendar.

The situation was like a nightmare replay of the artificial "troops in Cuba crisis" of two months ago. Forces had been set in motion which the Russians could not hope to stop altogether. The Russians could see only one way to block the fast-moving Bolshevik war plan. That was to do as they had done two months ago in the Cuba flap—that is, to pre-empt parts of the Bolshevik plan—and that, my friends, is what they are doing now in the Iran crisis .

Meanwhile their Bolshevik-Zionist enemies are trying to revise their own plans and still set off nuclear war. In the secret war between the Russians and the Bolsheviks, Tehran is now the decisive battleground.

Topic #3—In the Battle of Tehran, the Russians are trying to make a shambles of the sequence of events planned by the Bolsheviks. The Bolshevik plan is to destroy Saudi Arabia's oil fields, whereas Russia is doing everything possible to prevent that. On the other hand, Iran's oil fields are to be used by the Bolsheviks as a pretext for flooding American and other troops into Iran in the preparation for the first strike. To prevent that, Russia plans to disable Iran's oil fields with air strikes of her own if it becomes necessary.

The initial step in Russia's pre-emptive strategy was to bring the overthrown Shah of Iran to New York City last month on October 22. To do this, the Russians used their robotoid doubles for the late David Rockefeller, Henry Kissinger, and others whom I have identified in other tapes. The Shah was lured here with hints that he might be restored a second time to the Peacock Throne, but only his medical treatment was mentioned to the public as a cover. As expected, the Shah's arrival here caused the passion stoked up by Bolshevik-Zionist agents in Tehran to

explode prematurely. Iranian militants there had been led to expect the United States and Israel to do something foul toward Islam in general, and Iran in particular. Reacting to the Shah's arrival here, they took over the American Embassy and took hostages on November 4. This was more than two weeks before the triggering incidents planned by the Bolsheviks for November 20, and there was no way for those incidents to be speeded up by the Bolsheviks because they were tied directly to the Moslem calendar; but immediately, as if on signal, Bolshevik-Zionist agents whipped up flames of hatred against Iranian students here in the United States. On November 6, two days after the take-over, Prime Minister Mehdi Bazargan resigned. This resulted from a secret meeting one day before the Embassy take-over between Bazargan and robotoid Zbigniew Brzezinski. It was a Russian maneuver to peel away one layer of confusion in the crisis. It thrust the Ayatollah squarely into the public eye as the only voice that really mattered in Iran, but behind the scenes that voice is being influenced by other voices. For the next several days, all was confusion over Iran.

Meanwhile the Bolsheviks here in America began testing their ability to launch military operations without presidential approval. On Thursday November 8, there was an alert for the Strategic Air Command and for paratroops of the 82nd Airborne. The next day, November 9, there was a dry run for a nuclear war. At NORAD headquarters near Colorado Springs, Colorado, a computer was fed false data indicating a missile attack on the United States. For test purposes, the false data said only a few missiles were on the way, but the result was a nuclear-war alert to every Command Center of the United States military. All of our missile bases were placed on Preliminary Alert to be ready to launch if so ordered; and just for good measure, several Jet Fighters were scrambled into the air. For six minutes the NORAD computer was preparing for a nuclear war. The computer thought it was a real attack, but there was no notice to the President, to the Secretary of Defense, or even to the Joint Chiefs of Staff—much less, air raid sirens. Then, the test was terminated. The Bolsheviks were satisfied; it had been a complete success—but it was not overlooked by the Russians!

Three days later a similar test took place involving troops. In the pre-dawn hours of November 12, certain Paratroop and other units were suddenly mobilized without previous warning. Within hours they were converging for exercises at Fort Hood, Texas. Some 2,700 soldiers were involved, drawn from the groups which the Bolsheviks here intend to deploy to Iran. Like the NORAD war test, the Fort Hood exercise was actually set in motion without top-level approval, and once again the Bolsheviks were completely satisfied. In addition American troops have already been deployed secretly to forward positions in the Middle East. For example, over 2,000 American troops have recently landed on the Omani island of Masira in the Arabian Sea.

On November 11, my friends, the war of words began heating up. That day Ayatollah Khomeini stirred Iran with a fiery speech. To the ears of Shiite Moslems it was a speech of dedication, but to Western ears it may seem to be an echo of the Guyana suicide rehearsals of Jim Jones. The Ayatollah said, quote: "We are a nation of 35-million, and many of these people are looking forward to martyrdom. We will move with the 35-million. After they have all been martyred, then they can do what they want with Iran."

The next day robotoid Jimmy Carter announced a reverse oil embargo against Iran. The Bolshevik plan to send troops to Iran is built around creating a public impression that Iranian oil is

essential to us, Bolshevik ploy, to buy any more

which of course it was announced oil from Iran.

it is not. So to undercut that that the United States refuses

The same day, November 12, Russian Cosmospheres were reacting to the Bolshevik triggering of exercises at Fort Hood. Russian Cosmospheres were on patrol over Spain in potential American airlift routes across the Mediterranean. That day the pilot of a Caravel Jet Liner in Spain saw four Cosmospheres at close range. Thinking they were UFOs, he promptly landed at the next available airport.

Two days later economic war broke out between the United States and Iran. Iran announced that it was about to withdraw its deposits from United States banks; but within hours robotoid Carter declared a National Emergency, activating presidential emergency powers. Under that alleged authority he froze Iran's assets here, and ostensibly abroad, amounting to some 8-billion dollars or more. The freezing of Iran's assets will lead to a collapse of the dollar abroad. That will lead in turn to inflation and depression here in the United States. In 1929 America exported its depression to the rest of the world, but this time it will be imported from the collapsing dollar market overseas.

On November 14 Russia also set off an earthquake in northeastern Iran measuring 6.7 on the Richter scale. This was an attempt to distract the Khomeini government with internal problems.

The next major development confounded both the Russians and the Bolsheviks. On November 16 the Khomeini government threatened to stop accepting dollars for oil. This was in retaliation for the order freezing Iranian funds here. For a few days the media were mum about Iran, and gold prices went nowhere. Having detected no particular reaction to their threat, the Iranians decided to abandon their threat, for the moment, about not accepting dollars. It was the lull before the storm. The Iranian militants released three hostages on November 19, and 10 more on November 20; but as for the rest, the Ayatollah said, quote: "Spying has been proven by evidence."

November 20, my friends, was the fateful day in the original Bolshevik plan. It was the beginning of year 1400 in the Moslem calendar. It was the beginning of the Month of Maharam of mourning for martyrs for the Shiite Moslems of Iran; and it marked the start of the annual Moslem pilgrimage to Mecca, Saudi Arabia. In early October Russia had alerted the Saudis through discreet channels in Kuwait to expect trouble during this year's pilgrimage. As a result the Saudis deployed 17,000 Security men in Mecca, Medina, and Jeddi. The Russians also warned the Saudis that the incidents, whatever their nature, will be coupled with evidence of American and Israeli involvement. The Saudis were warned that this was a trap designed to lure Saudi Arabia into a threatening stance toward Israel. The very survival of Saudi Arabia would depend upon the Saudis turning the other cheek, discounting these rumors, and managing the news.

On November 2 0 large bands of armed men stormed two of Saudi Arabia's great mosques. One was the Grand Mosque in the holy city of Mecca. Three times the size of Yankee Stadium, the Grand Mosque houses within it the Kaba, the holiest shrine of Islam, the holy of holies. The other mosque which was attacked was the Prophets Mosque in Medina. As soon as the incidents began, Saudi Arabia broke communications with the outside world. Crack Saudi Security forces put down the Medina incident quickly, but it took

days of bloody fighting to retake the Grand Mosque. Even now, a few of the attackers are reported to be still holding out in the catacombs under the mosque. Through it all the Saudis were the model of restraint. It was the first attack on the Grand Mosque in a thousand years, yet the Saudis waved it all aside as if it had been a minor incident. They said the attackers were, quote: "renegades operating outside the Moslem religion", but bit their lips rather than say more. Meanwhile the Russians made sure the focus stayed on Iran, not Saudi Arabia.

The evening of November 20, robotoid Carter suddenly hinted broadly at possible military action against Iran. At the same time, the aircraft carrier Kitty Hawk and companion ships were ordered into the Indian Ocean. There, over the horizon, they will reinforce the carrier Midway and associated ships already there.

Ayatollah Khomeini was given supposed evidence about the Mosque take-overs in Saudi Arabia, and denounced them as American and Israeli inspired. Anti-American Moslem riots erupted in several countries. The American Embassy in Islamabad, Pakistan was sacked and burned, and a Marine guard was killed. The Mosque attacks in Saudi Arabia had inflamed much of the Moslem world—except for Saudi Arabia itself.

The war of words continues between Iran and the United States. On November 22 the Ayatollah called it a conflict, quote: "between Islam and the heathens", or in other words, a jihad. On November 26 robotoid Carter declared the United States will discuss nothing at the United Nations except the hostages, and Ayatollah Khomeini said Iran's 20-million youth should take up 20-million rifles and prepare to fight. The next day the Ayatollah announced that the hostages will be tried. Meanwhile the insurgents at the Embassy said that the Embassy is now wired with explosives. The White House announced a pull-out of non-essential State Department personnel from eleven Moslem countries, and that day a Richter 7.3 earthquake provided new distractions for the Khomeini regime.

The Battle of Tehran between the Russians and their Bolshevik-Zionist enemies is building toward a climax. The Russians are convinced that the hostages are already doomed to die by their Bolshevik-Zionist captors who control the situation in the Embassy and who are not true Moslems. Because of this, the Russians are prepared to take military action in Iran to block any successful Bolshevik-Zionist military actions there.

The stage is now set for war, leading to nuclear war; but, my friends, we should reflect for a moment on how it all began. In recent weeks we have heard continually about "diplomatic immunity." We are hearing that it is a terrible crime that the United States Embassy has been captured; and yet the Rockefeller cartel captured their entire country. Is that not a crime too? In an AUDIO LETTER several years ago I stated that the real shah of Iran was Richard Helms, then Ambassador to Iran. Having been formerly Director of the CIA, Helms was operating under the cloak of diplomatic immunity in Iran. He was in league with the forces that were holding all of Iran hostage and torturing and killing thousands of Iranians.

My friends, what we need today is not immunity but accountability of everyone. We need to be rid of intrigue and maneuver—whether by Bolsheviks, Zionists, Russians, or anyone else. We need a return to fair play and a restoration of honesty and trust. We need to sweep out the cobwebs of secrecy and to light up the darkness of our world with the searchlight of truth.

In Iran we have seen a revolution take place—the revolution of Ayatollah Khomeini. Unseen forces are attempting to exploit the revolution for their own purposes, and yet it is also a very real revolution. It is an Islamic revolution of an Islamic people yearning to return to their roots.

The roots of the United States of America, my friends, are Christian; but like Iran under the Shah, we too have been led far away from our roots, and what we need to do is to return to these roots in a Christian way—a way of Light and Truth. Through secrecy, intrigue, and double-cross we Americans have long since become hostages in our own land; but as our Lord Jesus Christ said so long ago, "...you shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free." (JOHN 8:32)

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #53

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is January 21, 1980, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 53.

It has now been seven weeks since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 52 on the last day of November, 1979. I want to thank each and every one of you for your patience during this unavoidable delay.

The headlines in recent weeks have been filled with one shock after another. For example, the alleged former Shah of Iran has made sudden surprise moves—first to Texas, then to Panama. The world has been jolted by a radical change in the behavior of Russia, starting with massive intervention in Afghanistan. And even more startling, the United States is answering Russia with z revival of the Cold War. Meanwhile the gold skyrocket is seemingly streaking higher and higher in panic buying, and hanging over it all is the dark cloud of the expanding Iran crisis. In a matter of weeks the international climate has undergone a dramatic change. The blue skies of peace and prosperity are fading away. Suddenly the atmosphere is filled with the smell of approaching war, and the events in the headlines are only a pale shadow of what is taking place behind the scenes. Since I spoke with you in AUDIO LETTER No. 52, I have been receiving an avalanche of urgent Intelligence reports. Drastic secret developments have been taking place world-wide which have turned the international scene upside down. The most important of these have taken place right here in the United States, and in Russia. Now at last I am in a position to bring you up to date on what has happened.

My friends, during the weeks just passed, the prospects for world peace have been shattered. Here in the United States powerful forces who are bent on war are fast gaining the upper hand. And in Russia the "peace faction" in the Kremlin has been toppled from power. It began as a family squabble among the secret new Christian rulers of Russia, and it ended in tragedy for some. The result has been a return to power by the hard-liners among the secret sect that now rules Russia. The rise to power by the Christian "peace faction" in Russia was a miracle, but it was a miracle that was short-lived. It is now over, and now the world is once again moving down the path to THERMONUCLEAR WAR. The hard-liners now running the Kremlin are members of the same religious group as the "peace faction." The

hard-liners and the "peace faction" disagree on only one major point. The "peace faction", who are known as the "White Doves," believe nuclear war must be prevented if it is humanly possible. By contrast, the hard-liners believe nuclear war is inevitable; so, my friends, their guiding military strategy is not to prevent nuclear war indefinitely but to WIN it when it comes.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—WAR TENSIONS AND THE LATE SHAH OF IRAN

Topic #2—THE SURPRISE TAKE-OVER BY THE KREMLIN "HARD-LINERS"

Topic #3—THE NUCLEAR STRIKE OPERATIONS NOW IN PROGRESS

Topic #1—Four nights ago on Thursday, January 17, millions of Americans tuned in the ABC television program "20/20." The program that night presented a heavily-edited interview by the British television personality David Frost. The person interviewed was said to be the former Shah of Iran. The individual we saw on the David Frost interview looked, sounded, and acted very much like the Shah, but he looked much healthier than the sickly-looking Shah in New York two months ago. This was true even though news reports had been saying the Shah's condition was deteriorating. Almost every time he answered a question the face became expressionless, and the eyes froze into a glassy stare. He spoke slowly, haltingly, as if groping around in a fuzzy memory to find the answers. And time after time he just gave up and said simply, "I don't remember that."

Later that same evening ABC presented its nightly special on the Iran crisis. The program began with some follow-up discussion of the David Frost interview program. Dr. Joseph Sisco, former Under-Secretary of State, was among those asked for his reactions to the interview. Sisco appeared to be shaken by what he had seen. He said the Shah he knew had always been able to discuss the intricacies of geopolitics, not only as they affect the Persian Gulf but world-wide. By contrast, the man he saw on the David Frost interview was, quote: "Uncertain in his speech; a completely different man from the one I knew."

My friends, Dr. Sisco could not have been more right. The individual interviewed by David Frost in Panama was not the Shah at all. In fact, he was not even a human being. It was a kind of living robot, known as a "synthetic automaton", or more briefly, a "Synthetic." I first revealed last October 1979 in AUDIO LETTER No. 51 that Synthetics were beginning to appear on the scene. They are being deployed as a tool of intrigue by the warlike Bolsheviks here in the United States. They are the Bolshevik answer to another type of biological robot which the Russians began deploying earlier in 1979. The Russian type is known as an "Organic Robotoid", and I first made them public in AUDIO LETTER No. 46 last May. Both the Russian "Robotoids" and the Bolshevik "Synthetics" are remarkable creatures. They are manufactured by radically different technologies; but they have one thing in common—they are both artificial life-forms which live and breathe but have to be programmed like computers, and they are the products of three decades of spectacular scientific discoveries out of public view. I have given a little of the scientific background in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 47 and 51, but Robotoids and Synthetics remain perhaps the most secret of all Intelligence weapons.

In my previous tapes about these biological robots, I have mentioned that their most critical feature is their biological computer brain. In that regard, the Russian Robotoids are far

superior to the Bolshevik Synthetics. That's because of their holographic brain, which I described in detail in AUDIO LETTER No. 47. In AUDIO LETTER No. 51 I mentioned the low brain quality of the Synthetics; and if you were watching the alleged Shah of Iran in the David Frost interview the other night, you saw a perfect example with your own eyes. Synthetics easily pass for human beings, but they act dull-witted compared to the humans which they simulate. When David Frost interviewed the Synthetic "double" for the former Shah, he no doubt thought he was talking with the real thing; but by that time the real Shah had been dead for well over a month. He died in the early morning hours of Sunday, December 2, 1979.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 last November I explained why the Shah had been brought to New York City in the first place. He did undergo medical treatment, but that could have been done elsewhere. The once mighty Shah arrived in New York as a mere pawn in a deadly world-wide game of chess. For more than two years a secret war has been in progress between the new rulers of Russia and the overthrown former rulers of Russia, the Bolsheviks. Having been expelled from Russia by the tens of thousands, the old Bolsheviks have been flocking mainly here to the United States. They are in a rage to strike back at Russia, and they plan to do it using America's military power.

Over the past two years and more a sophisticated new Bolshevik revolution has been under way without fanfare here in the United States. I have kept my listeners informed about this situation in past AUDIO LETTERS.

The Bolsheviks are in a do-or-die frenzy to throw America's military might at Russia; and in AUDIO LETTER No. 37 for August 1978, I revealed how they plan to do it. The Bolshevik war plan is based on an American nuclear first strike against Russia; and the chain of events to lead up to the first strike was to begin with a crisis over Iran. That is what I made public nearly a year and a half ago, and that is what is going on now right before our very eyes. My friends, we are on the road to NUCLEAR WAR ONE!

In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 I explained the purpose for which the former Shah of Iran was lured to New York City in late October. This was a Russian ploy carried out using their own Robotoid replacements for certain powerful Americans. They had discovered that the Bolsheviks here in America were setting in motion the dreaded Iran crisis. It was already too late for the Russians to prevent the crisis from erupting, so instead they maneuvered the Shah here in a pre-emptive strategy to change the course of the crisis. I gave the details of all this in AUDIO LETTER No. 52, so I won't repeat it again here. The Russian maneuvers involving the former Shah of Iran were set in motion while the Kremlin "peace faction", the White Doves, were still calling the shots. They succeeded in their plan to make the former Shah the center of the Iran crisis, contrary to the Bolshevik plans; and later, when the time was ripe, they were planning to use their control over the Shah to make the crisis fizzle out. But, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 52, the Russians had their hands full in trying to sort out the Iran crisis. The Shah's trip to New York City was arranged on short notice. Having accomplished that much, the Russians put the Shah "on ice" during November 197 9 while they concentrated on other pressing aspects of the crisis. As December 1979 began, Russian agents here in the United States were preparing for new moves involving the Shah. For over five weeks the Shah had been holding court and receiving medical treatment at the New York hospital, Cornell Medical Center, in New York City. His suite on the 17th floor was walled off by a

special barricade of bullet-proof glass. Everything having to do with the Shah was subject to intensive security precautions. Unknown to the Shah himself, he was the key to Russia's plan to unravel the Iranian crisis without war; so the one thing the Russians could not afford was to have something happen to the Shah at that time.

By the time I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 52 on November 30, 1979, plans were being laid to move the Shah. The Russians had begun to penetrate the Bolshevik strangle hold on Iran and were establishing a dialogue with the Khomeini government. The time had come to remove the Shah from the hospital. The advance preparations at the hospital were subtle—but not subtle enough. They were detected by Bolshevik agents within the hospital, and they were successful in learning the details of the plan to move the Shah before it took place. Shortly after 4:00 A.M. on the morning of December 2, 1979, the Shah left his hospital room in a wheel chair. He was accompanied by armed guards, including FBI agents brandishing submachine guns. They entered an elevator on the 17th floor of the hospital and went down to the subbasement. From there the Shah and his guards traveled along an underground tunnel to the Payson House staff residence on East 71st Street. There the Shah's party entered a parking garage. The Shah was wheeled up to a blue-green FBI van. The Shah was helped out of his wheel chair and into the van. As soon as the Shah was inside, the doors of the van were shut and the van started moving. As it did so, three FBI cars joined up as an escort. The four-vehicle motorcade drove carefully toward the exit of the parking garage. As they did so, one of the Shah's guards in the van pulled out a powerful gun equipped with a silencer. He and the other guards in the Shah's van turned out to be Bolshevik Synthetics. By the time the Shah's van reached the exit of the parking garage the Shah's body lay slumped on the floor inside. Like his former patron Nelson Rockefeller, the Shah had died of a single bullet to the forehead. The other Synthetics in the front of the van did exactly as programmed. They drove on as if nothing had happened. FBI agents in the other cars detected no hint that anything was wrong. The motorcade drove the rest of the way to La Guardia Airport without incident. Only when the van was opened at the Airport was it discovered what had taken place.

News reports that day and the next were filled with headlines about the Shah's mysterious move to Texas. On television we were shown an Air Force DC-9 taking off in the darkness at La Guardia. We were told that the Shah was aboard, but he was not! His body was kept in a remote location at New York's La Guardia Airport until around 6:00 P.M. that evening, after which it was flown to a southern state for disposal. When the DC-9 was shown landing at the Air Base in Texas, we were told again it was the Shah's plane. Normally Lackland Air Force Base is unrestricted, but the Air Base was suddenly closed after the plane landed. There was confusion. Initially, Air Force officials at the Base said there would be a Press Conference that afternoon, but soon they reversed themselves. They not only canceled the Press Conference but told all reporters to leave the Base immediately or be forcibly ejected. The public relations plans which had been made ahead of time just fell apart. Instead a cover-up was hastily set in motion on orders from certain Russian agents in the Pentagon.

In the days that followed, all was mystery concerning the Shah. He was said to be in certain hospital quarters at Lackland; but as days passed and no one saw the Shah, questions began to multiply. Had it been suspected that the Shah was already dead, the Bolshevik agents holding the American hostages

in Tehran might have killed the hostages, and that could have led very quickly to nuclear war. Meanwhile the Bolsheviks here in America were preparing to take control of the Shah controversy.

The Bolshevik Synthetics are programmed by a technique completely different from that used by the Russians with their Robotoids. It is not as good, but it also does not require a cerebral hologram. Bolshevik agents in New York had been able to obtain the genetic samples needed, and on Saturday December 15 there was a new surprise regarding the Shah. He was said to have left Texas that morning for a small island off Panama. Then the invisible Shah seemingly reappeared in the form of a Synthetic, and since that time the Shah's image has been utilized by the Bolsheviks. As I told you earlier, it was a Synthetic that was seen in the David Frost television interview four nights ago. What happened to the late Shah of Iran is only part of a much larger pattern of recent days.

The Bolshevik deployment of Synthetics began in earnest three months ago, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 51. As a by-product of this, bizarre cattle mutilations are once again taking place in North America. A few years ago there was a rash of these incidents in the western United States. At that time the earliest large-scale experiments were under way with Synthetics. Now, after a lull, the Synthetics are being deployed operationally, and the cattle mutilations have resumed. Right now, however, they are taking place primarily in Canada to minimize attention to them here in the United States. My friends, the cattle mutilations are nothing more than a modern twist on cattle rustling. The Synthetic process uses certain glands and tissues of cattle as raw material, as I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 51. To obtain these raw materials, the cattle involved have to be destroyed in a very wasteful manner; so the Bolshevik agents who are manufacturing Synthetics do not use their own cattle, instead they let others suffer the losses involved in slaughtered herds. The cattle mutilations may turn into an epidemic that is too big to ignore, because during the past three months the Bolshevik circles have started deploying Synthetics in great numbers.

A covert war of biological robots is now raging world-wide between the Russians and their old Bolshevik enemies. The Russians got a head start by deploying their Robotoids first, last spring; but they knew their advantage would not last long, and they tried to use it fast to nail down approval of the SALT II treaty. Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko summed it up last June 25, 1979. In an unprecedented two-hour news conference in Moscow he paused at one point and said simply, "Fantastic situation."

My friends, the dangers we face now are fantastic, but so was aerial warfare until World War I, the atomic bomb until World War II, and moon flight until Project Apollo. The Bolsheviks in our midst are obsessed with their schemes for revolution and war, rule or ruin. Using their Synthetics, they are fast regaining the power they were losing at the hands of Russia's Robotoids. Unlike the Russians, the Bolsheviks have an entrenched power base here in the United States; and so the Russians are now losing the invisible war of the biological robots. With every day that their power increases, the Bolsheviks here in America redouble their frenzy to seize still more power.

To advance their revolution here, the Bolsheviks are gradually shutting down America. Tremors are shaking our economic system, and the United States dollar is awaiting the moment of collapse. In April 1974 I gave a warning in Congressional testimony about

plans which were being laid for a gold skyrocket. I testified that the plan called for gold to streak upward past $2,000 per ounce, and I described how this was tied to the secret theft of America's monetary gold supply by international forces. I later offered to present evidence and witnesses under oath, but Congress was not interested. Then I went public with my warnings. But lies and maneuvers by the United States Treasury Department were swallowed like honey by most Americans, so nothing lasting was done to stop the plan for our economic destruction. Now, the gold skyrocket is a matter of daily headlines. Since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 52 less than two months ago, the price of gold has more than doubled. Gold auctions by the gold-poor United States Treasury have stopped, as I alerted you they would in December of 1978, AUDIO LETTER No. 41. Thousands of people are lining up to turn in their gold and silver, thinking they are receiving good dollars in exchange. But that's because the dollar is still being propped up artificially. When the time is ripe in Bolshevik plans, the props will be pulled out and the dollar will crash. The dollar is on the road to repudiation, which will make it worthless; and many of the wealthy abroad now believe that the United States does not have the gold it claims to have. The very few who do know about the plan to repudiate the dollar are not selling their gold and silver. They are holding on to it, and even buying more.

As the Bolsheviks press ahead in taking control of the United States, they are also working overtime to get ready for war. They want to destroy Russia, and they want you and me to do their dirty work. They already know that NUCLEAR WAR ONE will kill three out of every four Americans, but that does not worry them. Using their positions of privilege and power here in America, they believe they will survive, so they can't wait to throw the United States into nuclear war against Russia.

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 52 last November 30, the official line we were hearing daily was that Moslem students were holding our hostages in Tehran. Those stories were lies, and I told you so. The situation in the Embassy is controlled by Bolshevik agents. They are not true Moslems at all, and are beyond the control of Ayatollah Khomeini. Now more than a month later, you're hearing a distorted echo of what I told you then. It is now being admitted that Ayatollah Khomeini does not control those who are holding our hostages, but you are being fed only half truths designed to rally your support for war. Thirteen days ago on January 8, 1980, a Synthetic "double" for our late President Carter said, quote: "The most powerful single political entity in Iran consists of the international terrorists, or the kidnappers who are holding our hostages"—but their Bolshevik ties are not mentioned! Instead, you are being given the impression that they may be Russian inspired in some manner. Two months ago all Iranians were being lumped together, and the Bolsheviks were whipping up Americans into hating them all; but now we are suddenly hearing about the threat to Iran from Russia. We are being prepared for war with declarations that we may have to defend Iran militarily.

The Bolshevik military strategy remains as I described it nearly a year and a half ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. I will now repeat, word for word, the warning I gave you then:

"The American public will demand that it is time for the United States to stand up to Russia; and with full public support, American troops and weapons will pour into Iran. From that point onward, the outbreak of NUCLEAR WAR ONE will be all but impossible for the public to follow by way of the so-called

news. "

Topic #2—For nearly two years beginning early in 1978, Russia's policies were controlled by the "peace faction" in the Kremlin, the "White Doves." Meanwhile their Bolshevik enemies here in the United States have continued their relentless drive for war. As a result, the policies of the Kremlin "peace faction" have now been abandoned. Recent events in both the United States and Russia have brought about this change. My friends, you will not be able to understand events in the days to come if you do not understand the recent Kremlin take-over by the Hard-Liners; and to understand that, you need to remember the background of events which have led up to this point during the past several years.

I first began discussing the new rulers of Russia in AUDIO LETTER No. 28 for November 1977. Later on I revealed much more about them in AUDIO LETTER No. 38, which was a special issue dealing entirely with Russia. Russia's new rulers struggled for six decades to overthrow the Bolsheviks, and through this long and bitter struggle the secret Kremlin Christians came to know the disease of Bolshevism more intimately than anyone else on earth. As I revealed also in AUDIO LETTER No. 38, they are embarked on what they consider a holy war to wipe out Bolshevism from the face of the earth. So long as it still survives anywhere in the world, they are convinced that both Russia and Christianity itself will be in mortal danger. Even so, there have always been two factions within the secret sect of Kremlin Christians on the issue of nuclear war. They all agree that nuclear war would be horrendous, but they disagree on whether it can be avoided. The minority faction, the White Doves, believe it is possible to avoid nuclear war; but the majority, the Hard-Liners, believe otherwise. They are convinced that no matter how many times nuclear war may be delayed, their Bolshevik enemies will eventually bring it about; and so they insist that the only realistic thing to do is to make sure Russia will win the war when it comes with as few casualties as possible.

The secret Kremlin Christians first began to outweigh the Bolsheviks in power when Joseph Stalin died in 1953. From that time until early 1978 the Hard-Liners were in power, and they were anxious to speed the day when Russia would break free not only from the Bolsheviks in Russia but also from the Rockefeller Cartel. In the summer of 1976 Russia began preparing for a limited nuclear Pearl Harbor attack against the United States, Great Britain, and other countries. It was the Underwater Missile Crisis of 1976, which I revealed in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 through 16. It was a desperate situation, as my long-time listeners will recall; and yet the strategy of Admiral Gorshkov, the head of the Russian Navy, was one of limited war. If his naval strategy had worked, the initial attack on strategic coastal targets would have made further warfare useless. As I outlined in AUDIO LETTER No. 18, the world's ICBM's and other nuclear weapons would never have been used. But the limited public exposure of the underwater missile crisis through my AUDIO LETTERS had its consequences in the Kremlin. The Russians lost the critical element of surprise, and so the White Doves argued that the result of the Hard-Liners' gamble could easily have been not limited war but total war. They insisted that Russia must never again try to deliberately trigger nuclear war. From then on, the influence of the White Doves grew steadily, but the Hard-Liners headed by the original Leonid Brezhnev stayed in the driver's seat until the end of 1977. It was the Hard-Liners who presided over Russia's lightning-fast deployment of her secret new "Space Triad" of weapons during late 1977. I reported the deployment as it took place in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 2 6 through 29.

All three legs of the Space Triad are built around Particle Beam Weapons. Up to now, Russia is still the only nation to deploy Particle Beams as operational weapons. The first leg of Russia's Space Triad are the Cosmos Interceptors. These are manned killer satellites armed with Particle Beams. I first reported that they were operational in September 1977. They began destroying America's fleet of Spy Satellites. An especially equipped Cosmos Interceptor, Cosmos 954, fought history's first true space battle—the Battle of the Harvest Moon, September 27, 1977. Firing a special Neutron Particle Beam, Cosmos 954 knocked out America's secret military base on the moon.

The Russians then quickly deployed their own military bases on the moon, and these constitute the second leg of the Space Triad. Today Russian Particle Beam Weapons are located in seven (7) places on the near side of the moon. They can strike any visible spot on earth less than two (2) seconds after pulling the trigger; and they can deliver a blast of devastating force, as proven in the test firing of November 19, 1977, which I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 9 the following month.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 29 I also reported the beginning of Russia's deployment of the third leg of her Space Triad. These are the Cosmospheres—electrogravitic weapon platforms which can hover over any spot on earth. They can operate in altitudes from ground level to about 800 miles, and are armed with Charged Particle Beams. The first few Cosmospheres to be deployed over the United States were used in an effort at intimidation. In late December 1977 they began firing their Beam Weapons into the atmosphere off the east coast in a defocused mode. The results were the mysterious giant air booms which came rumbling in from the Atlantic Ocean to rattle and shake thousands of homes. Government and other spokesmen put out all kinds of stories to try to explain away the booms. One of the favorites was based on the Concorde supersonic transport. Somehow, we were told, the shock waves must be racing far ahead of the plane and causing the booms. Can you imagine? As I told you at the time, explanations like that were just ridiculous cover stories and lies; and recently a scientific study at Cornell University headed by Professor A. R. George proved exactly what I told you two years ago—that is, a freak shock wave racing ahead of the Concorde could not have produced those bone-rattling booms. But two years ago, the stories served their purpose. People swallowed them and calmed down.

With the deployment of the secret Russian Space Triad during the closing days of 1977, the Russians were acting more aggressive by the day, but the No. 1 Hard-Liner in the Kremlin then was Leonid Brezhnev and his health was failing. He died on January 7, 1978, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 33. I also revealed that the new No. 1 man in the Kremlin was then Marshal Dmitry Ustinov, the Defense Minister. Ustinov was the leader of the White Doves, the "peace faction", and from then on the Kremlin concentrated on preventing nuclear war by using SALT II to begin disarming their Bolshevik enemies here in America. After they deployed the Robotoids last spring, they almost succeeded with SALT II; but during the past few months they have been dealt one reversal after another by the Bolsheviks, and with the Synthetics now entering the picture, heated debate broke out in the Kremlin early last October between the White Doves and the Hard-Liners. Then tragedy struck in late October 1979. Suddenly the men who had been ruling Russia since early 1978 began dying of poison. These included Marshal Ustinov; Leonid Brezhnev No. 2, the ceremonial "double" for the late real Brezhnev; Chief of Staff Nikolai Ogarkov; and a number of others. Since then they

have all been replaced by Robotoids. The men who died were members of the "peace faction." They had accepted the fact that their mandate to govern was at an end. The new ruling group in Russia today are the Hard-Liners, and their leader is Admiral Sergei Gorshkov.

Topic #3—The final legacy of the White Doves was their plan to use the Shah of Iran to unravel the Iranian crisis. The new Hard-Liners followed through with that plan out of reverence for their fallen friends; but when the Bolsheviks assassinated the Shah on December 2, they were ready to shift very quickly to more aggressive policies. The pace of events since then has been speeding up fast.

On December 12 NATO Foreign Ministers meeting in Brussels agreed to the new American plan for nuclear missiles to be aimed at Russia. Immediately the Kremlin totally withdrew all offers for negotiating arms control agreements in Europe. The Russians declared that NATO had destroyed the basis for negotiations. The Russians had also learned that the Bolsheviks in the United States were preparing to seize the Iranian oil fields, using the American hostages as an excuse. Russia prepared to move into Afghanistan. On December 27, 1979, a pro-Russian coup in Kabul brought the new regime of Babrak Karmal to power, and within days tens of thousands of Russian troops were pouring into Afghanistan. It was a classic case of chess-playing by Russia's rulers. When an expert chess player makes a move, he always does so in anticipation of other moves to come. He evaluates the moves which his opponent will be forced to make in retaliation and has already planned how he will respond to those. Whenever possible he tries to provoke moves by his opponent which will work to his own advantage. And so it was in Afghanistan.

First the Bolsheviks were deliberately provoking Russia by means of large-scale insurgent operations in Afghanistan. These were supported by at least 18 separate rebel bases in neighboring Pakistan and involved Bolshevik CIA operatives and Chinese agents there. Afghan insurgents had already taken control of two-thirds of the country, and operations were also under way to stir up Moslem unrest in the whole region. Since Russia has 40-million Moslems of her own, these actions were bound to draw a response from Russia. The Bolsheviks here in America were fostering these operations in order to lure Russia into aggressive-looking behavior near Iran. Their plan, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 37 is, quote: "Incidents and clashes will condition the American public to the increasingly aggressive behavior of Russia." But, my friends, the Russians know that is the Bolshevik war plan so they have looked one step beyond the Bolsheviks, and they are letting the Bolsheviks of America walk right into a military trap.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I explained the plan for an American nuclear first strike against Russia. Its basic objective is to destroy the ground bases in Russia for her awesome Space Triad. There are six targets in this plan—four are rocket bases called Cosmodromes, the other two are the Cosmosphere installations in south central Siberia. The plan calls for the targets to be attacked by American secret weapons, which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The four Cosmodromes are to be attacked from bases in northern Norway and the Caspian Sea coast of Iran. Hybrid machines called "Submersible Aircraft" or "Subcraft" are to be used. As for the Cosmosphere installations in Central Siberia, the original plan was to use Sinkiang Province in western China as the base. In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 I stated that Sinkiang Province is not available; but early this month, on January 4, a Synthetic "double" for Defense Secretary Harold

Brown went to China to try to change that. The Bolsheviks want to use Sinkiang Province to launch high speed pilotless aircraft called RPV's into Russia.

After Russia took action in Afghanistan, the Bolsheviks here in the United States began whipping up war fever quickly. On January 4 the Carter Synthetic then in the White House spoke on television about American retaliation for Russia's intrusion into Afghanistan. Calling Russia's rulers a, quote: "atheistic government", the Carter Synthetic fired a series of broadsides. Invoking the old Bolshevik weapon of hunger, he embargoed 17-million tons of grain from going to Russia. To dramatize the crisis in a universal way, he threatened to pull the United States out of the Summer Olympics in Moscow; and to further kill hopes for peace, he suspended consideration of SALT II.

In the days that followed, we began hearing more and more about the alleged threat to Iran from Russia, and within the past week or so the message suddenly started getting through to people. Everywhere I go I hear people talking about the threat of war, and THE THREAT IS REAL, my friends. Several days ago the military preparations for conflict shifted into high gear. Many Reservists are being called up all over the United States without a word about it in the news.

On January 12 the Kremlin issued a statement in the name of Leonid Brezhnev denouncing the Carter Administration. It spoke of the United States as having become, quote: "an absolutely unreliable partner in international ties." It said the United States was, quote: "sending to the shores of Iran a naval armada armed with atomic weapons and including a considerable part of the United States Carrier force." And, quote: "If there were no Afghanistan, certain circles in the United States and NATO would surely have found another pretext to aggravate the situation in the world."

As the supposed Brezhnev statement was issued, two American Carrier Task forces were in the Arabian Sea near Iran built around the Midway and the Kitty Hawk. Two days later a third powerful Carrier group arrived. It includes America's newest and biggest Carrier, the nuclear-powered Nimitz, as well as the nuclear-powered Cruisers California and Texas.

On January 17 the Russian Navy began deploying fast toward the Indian Ocean. A late model Kara-class Cruiser and four other ships were spotted sailing south through the Japan Sea that morning. By the following day, January 18, there were over 180 Russian Submarines on the way and still more were being ordered to join them; and at the same time Submarines were swarming into position around the United States armed with Neutron Missiles. Meanwhile a State Department spokesman helped heat up the crisis atmosphere. He said, quote: "Our commitment to Iran's territorial integrity stands, despite their violation of International Law represented by their continued holding of our people." The same evening, just last Friday, some television news programs tossed in items to say any conflict over Iran could quickly lead to nuclear war. And as these events were unfolding, Russian Cosmospheres were forming up over the crisis area. By early Friday evening there were 144 Cosmospheres on alert hovering over the Arabian Sea and adjacent land areas from Saudi Arabia to southern India. Last Saturday, January 19, robotoid Ambassador Thomas Watson returned to Moscow after weeks of absence. When he arrived at the airport he said, quote: "There is no doubt but what we are in a very serious situation"; and as he spoke of hopes for good will and effort on both sides, echoes of Pearl Harbor were in the making.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 34 I described how Japan was lured into making an attack on Pearl Harbor. First, Japanese anger at the United States had been stirred up by a variety of boycott techniques. Then, our fleet at Pearl Harbor was held out as an enticing target. Most of our Pacific fleet were conveniently bottled up in the harbor and they sat peacefully at anchor unable to respond quickly in an emergency, but our three Aircraft Carriers had been pulled away to safety because they were indispensable to the plans for counterattack against Japan.

Today it is four decades later and we live in a new era of weaponry, so now it is the Aircraft Carriers themselves which have been demoted to the status of bait in a war trap. As of my latest report yesterday evening, all three American Aircraft Carriers near Iran are sitting at anchor. All are near the entrance to the Persian Gulf along the coast of Oman. The Midway and Kitty Hawk are resting at opposite ends of the Island of Masira; and the big prize, the Nimitz, is about twenty-five miles southeast of the capital, Muscat.

American statements have been designed to fuel Russian suspicions of an American military strike into Iran. This is intended to draw Russia's Navy into the region in order to counter the United States military build-up there; and by ordering the Carriers to sit at anchor, the Bolsheviks in the United States military establishment hope to provoke the Russians into an attack but it is all a gigantic diversionary action. The purpose is to distract the Russians from the real preparations for a nuclear first strike against Russia. These preparations are the ones I warned about in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. When American military sources detected Russia's massive naval deployment beginning January 17, it indicated that the plan was working. By the following day the Bolsheviks were sure. The Russian Navy was converging toward the Arabian Sea with breakneck speed.

At that point the real action got under way in the Caspian Sea and off northern Norway. The Subcraft with Israeli pilots were on their way. They were traveling under water on the first legs of their attack missions. By late Saturday night, two nights ago, the number of Russian naval vessels in the Arabian Sea was approaching 400. The majority of these were Submarines of all types; and as anticipated, the Russian fleet was fanning out into a band stretching from Saudi Arabia to India. The Russians were sealing off the southern portion of the Arabian Sea. As a result, American naval forces in the area, including the three Aircraft Carriers, are trapped. They are bottled up and hopelessly outnumbered, but all of this was exactly as expected by the American Bolsheviks; and so late Saturday night, Washington time, a coded signal was flashed to the Subcraft to continue as planned. By that time, the northern contingent of Subcraft were in the White Sea. The southern contingent had reached the north end of the Caspian Sea. It was already daylight Sunday morning, the 20th, for the Subcraft contingents. Their orders were to wait out the day under water, out of sight; then, after nightfall they were to continue their steady approach to get close to their targets. The Subcraft were maintaining strict radio silence. They were also deep enough under water to be invisible from the air to either the eye or radar, yet they were also hugging the shorelines in water too shallow for Russian sonar to pick them up, and their infrared signatures were negligible as the result of extensive development. In short, by the standards of Western technology, they were undetectable; but in AUDIO LETTER No. 42 I revealed Russia's master secret weapon. It is called "Psychoenergetic Range Finding" or PRF. It is

unlike sonar and atomic signature which PRF can be

similar techniques. PRF tunes into of a target, and there is no method jammed.

the actual known by

By deploying their Navy to the Arabian Sea, the Russians are pretending to be fooled by the Bolshevik distraction with the Aircraft Carriers. In this way they encouraged the Bolsheviks to launch the Subcraft toward their targets. They waited until the Subcraft were far away from their bases and out of sight of the Bolsheviks, who are directing the American first-strike operation; but the whole time they were being tracked by Cosmospheres overhead using PRF, and shortly after 1:00 A.M. yesterday morning Eastern Standard Time the Cosmospheres began firing their Charged Particle Beam Weapons. There were 10 Subcraft in the White Sea. Each disappeared in a blinding blue-white water spout of steam, smoke, and fire. In the north end of the Caspian there were 19 Subcraft—they, too, met the same fate.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 33 for April 1978 I revealed that the United States no longer has Spy Satellites which can spy on Russia. By that time, Russia had already destroyed them all, using their Cosmos Interceptors; and so the Bolshevik war-planners here in America were unable to observe the destruction of the Subcraft. The Subcraft had also been instructed to maintain strict radio silence, ironically to escape detection. So their total silence now has aroused no suspicions on the part of the Bolsheviks.

At this moment the Russian Navy is still deployed in the Arabian Sea as before. They are still pretending to be misled by the Bolshevik ploy with the Aircraft Carriers, because the Subcraft contingents were only half of the first-strike plan I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The other half is to involve the RPV's in Sinkiang Province, China. When synthetic Defense Secretary Harold Brown went to China earlier this month, agreement was reached to allow American RPV's into Sinkiang Province. They are on their way there now, and are due to be set up for attack at the earliest possible moment.

The Bolsheviks here in America believe their Subcraft are now waiting at their final checkpoints for the order to attack the Cosmodromes. They intend to give that order as soon as the RPV's are in place in Sinkiang Province. But the Russians intend to ruin the plan. Presently stationed along Russia's border with Sinkiang Province are four special Russian Commando detachments. They are an elite corps, highly trained and armed with battlefield nuclear weapons. They are there to attack and destroy the RPV's upon arrival before they can be fired. As a back-up, there are also 18 Cosmospheres overhead, but those will not be used unless it becomes absolutely necessary. The Russians are saving their most powerful weapons for the big war to come for maximum surprise. Right now they regard what they are doing as an operation to begin pulling the fangs of the Bolshevik dragon. They used Cosmospheres to destroy the Subcraft because their enemies were unable to observe it and learn anything; but there will be witnesses, even if they say nothing publicly, in Sinkiang Province.

The coming operation against Sinkiang Province is essential to the Russians, and so the operation is under the command of a top member of the new ruling group of Kremlin Hard-Liners. He is Victor Paputin, an engineer and formerly second in command of Russia's National Police. Early this month on January 3, the day before the Harold Brown synthetic left for China, Pravda carried an announcement about Paputin. It reported his "untimely death",

but this was only a cover story to explain his sudden absence from Moscow. He was actually on his way to the Chinese border to be one step ahead of the Bolshevik first-strike plan.

My friends, the decade of the 80's is starting off as a decade of mortal danger; but if the tempo of events continues at this rate, the danger will not last very far into the decade. One way or another it will all be over, soon.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #54

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter in Washington. Today is February 24, 1980, and this is my AUDIO LETTER No. 54.

Some day a few years from now the survivors of NUCLEAR WAR ONE will start asking questions. They will look at the smoky remains of a devastated world and ask: "How could this have happened? And why was it not prevented?"

Perhaps you are one of those unhappy survivors. This message will have been heard first early in 1980 by my listeners, but maybe you are not a 1980 listener. Maybe you found this tape in an attic in 1985 or in a basement in 1990, and perhaps you are playing it now out of curiosity with no idea of what I have to say.

My friend, if you are listening to this message some day after NUCLEAR WAR ONE, I am speaking especially to you; because unlike my listeners in 1980, you who are listening in 1985 or 1990 have the benefit of hindsight, a sense of history. You know that NUCLEAR WAR ONE really did take place. You know that it was more destructive than all the previous wars in history combined; and you also know something which I, speaking in early 1980, do not know. If you are a survivor of NUCLEAR WAR ONE as you listen to this tape, you know who won the war. Did Russia's new rulers achieve their goal of total victory? Or did America's new ruling circles, the Bolsheviks, succeed in their goal of nuclear stalemate with 350-million dead world-wide? As a survivor of the war, you will know the answer to that question, but you will still be asking all those questions about Why and How it happened in the first place.

My purpose in this message is to give you some of the answers, and in the process I'm also giving a warning to the few who are already willing to listen today in 1980.

It has now been seven years since I first began going public with my confidential information about economic, political, and military plans. It all began with my nonfiction book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, published in 1973 by George Braziller in New York. In the book I showed how powerful people and organizations were planning to deliberately destroy the United States economy on the way to war. I described how inflation had been set in motion by divorcing the United States dollar from its gold backing, and I explained how this was intended to benefit the powerful few at the expense of all the rest of us. Today I am sorry to say it's all happening before our very eyes. To the planners of it all, it is a giant game of numbers on a computer; but for all the rest of us, it's a tragic

human story repeated millions of times over. No one has to be told anymore that something is wrong—we can all feel it in the air. But our leaders are not telling us the truth, and so the people are destroyed for lack of knowledge.

I receive countless letters these days which express it all far better than I can. I'm about to read part of a letter I received recently from a wife and mother in my home state of West Virginia. It may sound familiar to you. I now quote:

"In my short 29 years of life, the changes in economy seem so drastic as well as swift. My father, a foreman at a local oil refinery, now deceased, made $500 a month. We ate very well, and I was supplied with new school clothes come fall and spring of each year, plus comforts of many toys children long for. We weren't rich but middle class and comfortable.

Now, my husband and I make $1500. We do not own a new car, we do not have credit cards, no charge accounts. Our one asset, our home, is quickly becoming smaller as our three children grow into adolescence. We live from one payday to the next, and have had to ask for our parents' help in more than one crisis. I can hardly believe this is possible. In 1970 I had my first car and remember paying 27 to 2 9 cents per gallon. I constantly worry about my boys and how they will survive their grown-up years. My oldest son will be at the age for the draft in five short years, and I fear for his life."

End of quotation from my listener's letter.

My friends, things like these are the bottom line in what our own Rulers here in America are doing to us. There's nothing accidental in all of this. If it were accidental, I would not have had the information to warn about it starting seven years ago, and our troubles now are only a pale shadow of things to come! The letter that I just read for you describes the beginning of the end of a way of life, the American way; and this month, February 1980, it has been symbolized by the beginning of the end of another tradition—the Olympic Games.

Six weeks ago in early January, the puppetized Carter Administration began agitating for a boycott of the Summer 1980 Olympics in Moscow. Supposedly the Olympic boycott would be to punish Russia for moving into Afghanistan two months ago, but in fact the Olympic boycott is only part of a much broader boycott campaign designed to goad Russia into war; and the very Olympic movement itself is now threatened as the first casualty of this United States campaign. The stated target of the anti-Olympic campaign by the White House is the Moscow Olympiad next summer, but already the maneuvering for war has whipped up gray clouds over the Winter Olympics at Lake Placid, New York.

For the past two weeks Lake Placid has been the scene of Winter Olympiad No. 13, and bad luck has seemingly cast its shadow right from the start. First, on February 9 the United States soured the atmosphere at the opening session of the International Olympic Committee in Lake Placid. The Committee was shocked and outraged by the speech delivered that evening by the United States Secretary of State. His only official function at the session was an honorary one to declare the opening of the session; but he did not bother to do that nor did he waste one word on matters like good sportsmanship, brotherhood, or anything else that the Olympics were supposed to stand for. Instead, the entire speech was a tirade against Russia, demanding that the summer games be taken away from Moscow.

The next day, February 10, an Aeroflot jet airliner carrying 122 Russian athletes bound for Lake Placid landed at Kennedy Airport in New York—but the plane was denied ground service and had to fly on to Dulles Airport outside Washington! From here the Russian athletes had to make their way back north to Lake Placid by bus, and when they arrived they were given a taste of the latest in American Olympic hospitality. The Russians were herded into lodgings without adequate heat and with only one toilet for 18 rooms.

As the games got underway in Lake Placid, they did so in the shadow of an Olympic ultimatum to Russia by the United States. If Russia did not pull out of Afghanistan by February 20, then the United States would pull out of the Moscow Olympics. The deadline passed without a Russian withdrawal from Afghanistan, and the Olympic movement appears to be on its way to destruction.

War talk is now swirling all around us. Like a giant whirlpool it is spreading wider and wider, sucking in everything around it. The overthrown Bolsheviks from Russia who now control America will use anything and everything to achieve their goals. They care about nothing at all but war, revolution, and catching us all in their swirling hell of Satanic power. As always, innocent victims are the key to Bolshevik designs. Today these innocent victims are countless Olympic athletes whose dreams of glory are drowning in the vortex of Bolshevik intrigue. Tomorrow, the Bolsheviks intend for the victims to be you and me by the millions; and it will not be just our dreams which are snuffed out but our very lives, because human sacrifice on a grand scale is always a hallmark of Bolshevik schemes for power.

Earlier this month our situation was summed up accurately by an anti-draft speaker to students at Berkeley, Calif. He said, quote: "We all live in Guyana now."

The Bolsheviks here in America are shutting down our land as they prepare for nuclear war and Bolshevik dictatorship. The threat to revoke passports of athletes who want to go to the Moscow Olympics is only the beginning. Most Americans still do not understand what is happening, but the trap is already closing around us all.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—THE SECRET AMERICAN DEFEAT OF JANUARY 198 0 Topic #2—WEATHER MODIFICATION AS A WEAPON OF RETALIATION Topic #3—RUSSIA'S ACCELERATING PREPARATIONS TO SURVIVE NUCLEAR WAR

Topic #1—Four days ago on February 20 the United States Olympic ultimatum against Russia expired. That day Pravda and the official Soviet news agency Tass said that the Politburo member Mikhail Suslov had given a speech at a town on the Volga River. The speech was actually a collective response by the Kremlin to American actions. The answer to the expiration of the Olympic ultimatum was, quote: "The Soviet people will not be intimidated." Then, America was described as using Afghanistan as a pretext for blackmail and threats. And in answer to that, Suslov said, quote: "The American government's actions will inflict damage mainly to the United States itself."

The Russians plan to make these words come true, my friends. They plan to let the United States walk into one military trap after another. Each time they plan to let the Bolsheviks here in America believe they are springing a surprise, but each time the Russians intend to be one step ahead. Each time the Bolshevik

dragon shows a fang, the Russians intend to pull it; and so as Suslov put it a few days ago, the American government's actions will inflict damage mainly to the United States itself.

The new Russian master strategy was already at work when I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 53 last month. At that time I revealed that the Bolsheviks had already set in motion the August 1978 plan for a nuclear first strike against Russia. The secret planners of the American operation fully expected that the operation could lead to NUCLEAR WAR ONE before the end of January—but last month I reported that the secret American nuclear strike operation against Russia was already in deep trouble.

First, the Israeli-piloted American Submersible Aircraft in the White Sea and Caspian Sea were blasted out of existence on January 20. I was able to report that to you last month and so I won't describe it all again now. The important thing to recall is that the Russians had lured the American Subcraft into a trap, where they were destroyed; and their destruction took place under conditions which prevented the Bolsheviks here from learning about it immediately. As a result, other parts of the American nuclear strike plan were still going ahead.

When I recorded my AUDIO LETTER last month on January 21, I reported that American RPV's were being rushed to Sinkiang Province, Red China. An RPV is a remote-control airplane; and those which were on their way to China last month were very special. They were relatively small and hard to spot, very fast, and able to outmaneuver any known antiaircraft missile. Like the Subcraft, the RPV's were essential to the attack plan which I first revealed in August 1978.

When I revealed the attack plan I also explained how desperate America's Ruling Circles were to gain access to China's Sinkiang Province. This was the geographic key to the plan for using American RPV's to attack Russia's Cosmosphere installations in Siberia, but it took nearly a year and a half before China finally agreed to the plan.

The breakthrough came during the urgent trip to China early last month by the United States Secretary of Defense. Right away we started hearing rumors in the news about a military alliance with Red China. Part of the price of the deal was for the United States to afford Red China "most favored nation" trade status immediately; and so as his trip to China ended, the White House suddenly started leaning on Congress to act fast. By January 20, China was given a guarantee that it would be passed; and four days later our rubber-stamp House and Senate approved "most favored nation" status for Red China by overwhelming margins. The Bolshevik war planners here in the United States did not wait for the actual vote; they were in a hurry.

On January 21 the RPV's were on their way to China, as I reported last month. I can now report that they arrived in Sinkiang Province the same day I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 53, January 21. There were 14 RPV's—seven were to be launched at Semipalatinsk where Russia's Cosmospheres and Particle Beam weapons are assembled. The other seven were to be launched at Novosibirsk, where the operational Cosmosphere base is located; and each RPV carried a multimegaton hydrogen bomb with a cobalt jacket. In nuclear bombs lingo, they were extremely dirty bombs, designed to blanket the target area with a deadly radiation for decades. But last month I reported that four separate Russian Commando groups were poised on the border waiting for the RPV's. When they did arrive on January 21, the Russians waited only long

enough to make sure all the RPV's were in place. Then around midnight that night, the Russians began moving in. Just in case, there were also 45 Cosmospheres hovering over the area, but they were not needed. The Russian Commandos achieved a complete surprise, and it was all over in a matter of minutes. The RPV's were all blown up and the camp was overrun.

In November 1978 a secret Russian missile base in Guyana, about which I had been warning publicly for four years, was destroyed. Joint American and Israeli Commando forces took the base by storm and killed every single Russian on the base, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 40. But last month the Russians evened the score. Russian Commandos wiped out the secret American RPV base in Sinkiang Province, China, and not one member of the joint American and Israeli forces at the base was spared.

As the Chinese dawn broke over the smoldering ruins of the American RPV base, January 23 was working its way around the globe. That evening the latest replica for the late President Jimmy Carter was scheduled to be on television. It was to be a tough speech, setting the stage for war itself to erupt within days, but the Bolshevik military planners here in America were in a state of upheaval. The RPV operation in China had turned into a disaster, so it was obvious that the Russians were now on the alert. The decision was made to freeze all other parts of the nuclear first-strike operation to assess the situation. Coded signals were flashed to the nonexistent Subcraft in the White and Caspian Seas to continue "holding" at their final check points.

At the same time, another Subcraft operation was getting under way in the Black Sea. Twenty-nine (29) Subcraft were involved, and all were ordered to stop in their tracks and await further orders. The Black Sea Subcraft operation was not a part of the original plan which I revealed a year and a half ago, but during that time Russia's Particle Beam weapons program has caused additional targets to be added to the Bolshevik first-strike plan. Three of the most important new targets are at Kharkov, Voronezh, and Kazan, as I will explain in Topic #3. The first two were to be attacked from the Black Sea; the third target, Kazan, was to be approached from the Caspian by Subcraft, using the huge Volga River.

When the Black Sea Subcraft were ordered to halt on January 23, many were still close to their bases in northern Turkey. Eleven Subcraft were arranged along Russia's Crimean seacoast, but the rest were still in Turkish waters. That presented the Russians with a slight dilemma. As I reported last month, the Russians prefer not to use their most important weapons right now where they can be observed in action; but it soon became clear to the Russians that the Bolsheviks were getting cold feet and would shortly order the Subcraft back to their bases. Soon after night fell across the Black Sea on January 23, the Russian High Command gave the order to attack the Subcraft. There were 92 Cosmospheres hovering over the Black Sea at that time. Each Subcraft was being tracked continuously by at least three Cosmospheres using their Psychoenergetic Range-Finding equipment—that is, PRF. When the attack order was given, selected Cosmospheres started firing their Charged Particle Beam weapons downward into the Sea far below them. Each Subcraft was resting motionless a short distance underwater, not nearly deep enough to avoid destruction; and so each Subcraft erupted briefly into a brilliant cloud of steam and debris. Then the Sea was dark once again. Chance observers ashore and on ships saw nothing more than a brief intense light on a distant horizon—a spark that disappeared as quickly as it had appeared. But to the Bolshevik war planners here in America, those brief sparks on the

horizon spelled disaster. They meant that all those nuclear-armed Subcraft in the Black Sea would not be available for a second try later on—and the Bolsheviks then guessed correctly that the same was true of the Subcraft in the White and Caspian Seas .

The destruction of the Subcraft in the Black Sea took place just after 4:00 P.M. Eastern Standard Time January 23, 1980. A few short hours later the so-called Carter Doctrine was proclaimed in the "State of the Union" speech on television. For public consumption, the United States was still talking tough, threatening to use military force in the Persian Gulf; but later that same evening, January 23, it was the Russians who were doing the really tough talking out of the public eye.

Soviet Ambassador Anatoly Dobrynin suddenly arrived at the State Department for an unexpected late night meeting. There he met for an hour and a half with a top-level representative of the Bolsheviks. Dobrynin is famous for the beaming smile he always wears, but he stopped smiling as soon as the meeting began. Speaking with icy precision, he confirmed that Russia had destroyed the American Subcraft and RPV's. He also called attention to an unpublicized disaster earlier that day near northern Greece in the Aegean Sea.

A hush-hush "oil rig", so-called, had been at work under Norwegian and American control, using German and Dutch workers; but that day the rig had suddenly gone up in flames, killing everyone aboard. Dobrynin explained that Russia had known what the rig was up to and did not approve. It was preparing to plant nuclear missiles on the ocean floor to be aimed at the heart of Russia. The Russians had waited until the missiles were aboard the platform ready for planting—then a trio of Cosmospheres overhead had destroyed platform, missiles, and the crew all at once.

Finally, Dobrynin added something which was intended to drive home the hopelessness of the Bolshevik war plans. He revealed that Russia knew that there was one more element in the overall first-strike plan which was still under way. A tiny force of four more Subcraft were moving into the Baltic Sea armed with cobalt bombs. They were a suicide force and they were all heading for a single target—Moscow. They were to approach Russia's Baltic Sea coast under water until they arrived at widely separated points near Kaliningrad, Riga, and Leningrad. Then when the order came, the plan was for them to surface and make the transition to flight configuration. From there, their mission called for them to take off, arming their cobalt bombs for detonation on impact. Flying their super-quiet Subcraft at tree-top height, their mission called for them to get as close as possible to Moscow before being shot down. As each suicide Subcraft crashed in flames, the cobalt bomb it was carrying would detonate automatically. The Bolshevik war planners here in the United States did not expect that any of them would actually reach Moscow, but they were confident that they would get close enough to do the job.

The ground-level detonation of four cobalt bombs would send an enormous cloud of deadly radioactive fallout drifting eastward, and the Bolsheviks here were sure that Moscow, the nerve center of Russia, would not survive. By administering a giant dose of radioactive poison, the Bolsheviks were planning to turn Moscow into a giant Jonestown of silent death. Dobrynin described it all during the meeting. Then he revealed that Russia was tracking all four suicide Subcraft. He proved it by giving their locations; then he said: "I am instructed to inform you that you

are now invited to attempt to save these four machines from destruction if you can. You may try to hide them or protect them in any way you choose—you will discover that you cannot. Promptly at 1:00 PM Eastern Standard Time tomorrow, twelve hours from now, they will all cease to exist."

The next day, January 24, the Russians made good their threat. One suicide Subcraft was near the Russian Baltic coast itself close to Kaliningrad; another was well to the west near the border between East Germany and Poland, where it strikes the coast; the third was far to the north, 30 miles west-northwest of Pori, Finland; and the fourth was clear outside the Baltic, about 70 miles north-northwest of Bergen, Norway—but all four were blasted simultaneously by the Cosmospheres hovering in the sky above them.

The destruction of the suicide Subcraft with their cobalt bombs marked the end of the abortive first-strike operation last month. It was a total defeat for the United States, while Russia did not receive so much as a scratch on the arm; and its ramifications are still spreading. For example, the debacle in Sinkiang Province was a major shock to China. It has revived the arguments within Chinese ruling circles that the United States is a paper tiger, and the Chinese military commanders who were involved in the Sinkiang affair are in deep trouble. In recent days, reports have begun reaching the West about a major reshuffle in the Chinese military. Russia plans to unseat all of the Bolshevik leaders of China.

Meanwhile, my friends, only a few hours ago, I received confirmed evidence about an urgent new development in Iran. The doctors at Tehran Hospital have announced within the past 12 hours that Ayatollah Khomeini will see no visitors until further notice, including religious and political leaders. The doctors say he has been over-taxed; but the real reason, my friends, is that within the past 48 hours Ayatollah Khomeini was assassinated and replaced by a double. It was the fourth attempt on his life, and this time it succeeded. He was shot above the left eye.

Topic #2—A few nights ago on February 21, the CBS Evening News presented a sensational report. The report claimed that Israel had carried out its first atomic bomb test last fall. CBS alleged that the bomb had been exploded over the South Atlantic last September 22, 1979. It was also stated that nearby South Africa had assisted the Israelis in making the atomic test. It all sounded like a neat answer to the famous mystery of the giant double flash in that area several months ago.

The mystery began last October 25, 1979. On that date the United States released a statement through the State Department. The statement began by saying the United States had obtained, quote: "An indication suggesting the possibility that a low-yield nuclear explosion occurred on September 22." Those are very uncertain words, but the rest of the statement was even more vague. For example: The location of the supposed explosion was narrowed down to, quote: "an area of the Indian Ocean and South Atlantic including portions of the Antarctic Continent and the southern part of Africa." That's an area of several million square miles. In addition, the United States Government admitted having no corroborating evidence about whatever had happened, and the announcement ended in the doubtful words: "We are continuing to assess whether such an event took place."

Many people were very disturbed by the fuzziness of the announcement. It was apparent that something spectacular had taken place near South Africa, possibly an atomic blast; but the

United States was or even if it had could this be?"

not sure what it really happened.

was, or where it had happened, Some people wondered, "How

We are constantly told that the United States can watch the world with Early Warning and Spy Satellites. We are led to believe that no one could fire a missile at us even from a submarine at sea without being caught in the act by our satellites. To make matters worse, reporters soon found out that the satellite which picked up the mysterious double flash was not an Early Warning or Spy Satellite. It is an aging relic launched a decade ago called a Vela Satellite. It is the die-hard last survivor of a series of monitoring satellites for the Atmospheric Test Ban Treaty, and it was little more than luck that it happened to spot the mysterious double flash last fall. Had the double flash taken place out of range of the Vela, it would have gone completely undetected by the United States, because the United States no longer has any Spy or Early Warning Satellites continuously orbiting the earth. Russia finished shooting them down nearly two years ago, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 33 for April 1978.

Ever since the United States announcement about the double flash late last October, the mystery about what happened has refused to go away. A panel of scientific consultants were convened by the White House early last November, but they have ended up with no conclusion. Then came the CBS report a few nights ago describing the alleged atom bomb test by Israel in the South Pacific.

My friends, Israel does have the bomb, but the CBS story about a test was a lie. By the very next evening, February 22, CBS was already backing away from its Israeli A-bomb story. The truth is that there was a giant double flash in the South Atlantic last fall, but beyond that point you have been hearing nothing but lies and inaccurate guesses about the double flash mystery. The lies began with the Government announcement of October 25, which gave a falsified date and time for the incident, and since then the confusion has just kept on growing.

My friends, I am now in a position to give you my report on the mystery of the so-called South African double flash. What happened there is something which you need to know about as a matter of survival. The brilliant flashes detected by the Vela Satellite were produced by an experimental test, but what was tested was not an atomic bomb. The test was carried out not by Israel or South Africa but by Russia, and what Russia learned from that test has just been put to use against the United States. The incredible series of storms which have recently devastated southern California and Arizona were not natural but man made!

The original State Department announcement of October 25 did not describe what the Vela Satellite had seen. It simply said that it appeared to be an atomic test, but within a day or two word leaked out that it was a pair of blinding flashes one right after the other. The first one was powerful, but the second was many times more powerful. For months now debate has been raging over whether this was the result of a nuclear explosion.

The light produced by a nuclear blast behaves in a way that is similar to what the satellite detected last fall—that is, there is a bright flash, followed moments later by a second much brighter flash. So why the big mystery? Just this: Visible light is not the only radiation from an atomic blast. A nuclear explosion sends out floods of deadly gamma rays, X-rays, and

neutrons. The Vela Satellite is equipped to pick up all those things if they are present—but they were not present. There was a giant double flash of light only—no X-rays, no gamma rays, no neutrons; and afterward, no radioactive fallout could be found anywhere in the world. Acoustic sensors on earth confirmed that some kind of giant explosion had taken place, but the question remained: What kind of explosion?

My friends, last month I reminded you of the giant air booms of two years ago off America's east coast. For many weeks thousands of people from South Carolina to Connecticut and elsewhere were being frightened out of their wits by the booms. Public officials dreamed up all kinds of ridiculous cover stories to try to explain them away. Since that time the official cover stories about the booms have been proven to be nonsense by Cornell University scientists and others; but to our Rulers, the only thing that matters is that people forgot about the booms after a while. The real reason for those air booms two years ago was what I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 9 for December 1977. They were being produced by several newly deployed Russian hovering space platforms. These platforms called Cosmospheres constitute the third leg of Russia's secret Space Triad, and they were creating those giant air booms by defocused firing of their charged Particle Beam weapons into the atmosphere.

In later AUDIO LETTERS I reported much more about the Cosmospheres, including their use in weather modification. But the Cosmospheres all by themselves have never been as effective in weather modification as desired by Russia. Russian scientists have been hard at work to devise more powerful techniques of weather warfare as a contingency weapon; and now they have succeeded in developing a newer and more powerful system for weather modification. Russia's newly operational weather-war system involves two legs of their Space Triad working together. One leg consists of the Cosmospheres; the other leg is the Moon with its network of giant Particle Beam weapons.

When I first reported on Russia's new Cosmospheres in AUDIO LETTER No. 29, I also reported on the first operational test of the Russian Moon Bases. The Particle Beam weapons on the moon are at least 100 times more powerful than those aboard the hovering Cosmospheres. When fired at the earth, they can produce instant destruction over a wide area, so for their first test firing they chose a target area where they thought the effects would go unnoticed by everyone else; but their choice turned out to be a tragic one. In AUDIO LETTER No. 29 I described that test firing from the moon at the earth.

(At this point Dr. Beter stopped speaking and the recording engineer is heard.)

-k -k -k -k -k -k -k

The following is the "EMERGENCY TRANSCRIPT" (unrecorded final portion of AUDIO LETTER No. 54) received by mail a few days later—starting with an explanatory note:

Note: "On February 24, 1980, Dr. Beter attempted to record his AUDIO LETTER No. 54. He was not feeling well due to extreme overwork, but tried anyway. He was concerned about the need for his listeners to be informed as quickly as possible about some urgent new information about weather modification underway in the United States, as well as other matters.

Dr. Beter finished Side 1, but the recording session was halted partway through Side 2 when he suddenly became visibly

weak and ill. It turned out that Dr. Beter was suffering a severe heart attack.

To avoid further delay for his listeners, Dr. Beter requested that the unrecorded final portion of his message be released for now in printed form. This is a costly and abnormal procedure for us, and we trust you will understand that we have worked as quickly as possible to get this transcript to you.

We know that many of you will be concerned with Dr. Beter's well-being and will want word of his progress, but we ask you to help us by resisting the desire to call. Bulletins about Dr. Beter's progress will be sent periodically to all active subscribers. You are invited to write any messages of encouragement to Dr. Beter at his office address:

Dr. Peter Beter, 1629 K Street NW, Washington, D.C. 20006

Interested non-subscribers may receive any bulletin about Dr. Beter when it is released by sending a stamped, self-addressed envelope for that purpose to Dr. Beter's office.

During the past seven years, Dr. Beter has been giving his life for us Americans. Now, Dr. Beter and his family need our support. Let us all pray for Dr. Beter's total recovery, and his ability to continue his mission to benefit us all!"

-k -k -k -k -k -k -k

(Dr. Beter's Topic #2 is now continued—with the last line he recorded being repeated.)

In AUDIO LETTER No. 29, I described that test firing from the moon at the earth. There was a huge cyclone in the Bay of Bengal, southeast of India. It was a giant storm, many hundreds of miles across—the perfect cover for a test firing. Or so the Russians thought. But they made a small miscalculation as they chose their aiming point at the earth. They knew that the particle beam would be deflected by the earth's electromagnetic field, and tried to correct for it. But there was a small error in that correction—and as a result, the particle beam blasted the sea too close to the Indian coastline.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 29, I quoted the words of an eyewitness who saw the results. She was a British relief worker, who told the BBC: "There were TWO enormous BLINDING FLASHES, and the whole sky lighted up as though on fire. Then this vast tidal wave—about 30 miles in length along the coast and 18 feet high—just bore down upon them."

My friends, the giant double flash which I reported over two years ago in connection with the Indian cyclone disaster had the same source as the giant double flash last fall in the South Atlantic. Both were caused by Russian Particle Beam weapons, fired from the moon.

When a target on earth is to be fired at from the moon, a pair of beam weapons are fired in sequence—first one, then the other. That is what I reported to you in AUDIO LETTER No. 29, over two years ago. The first blast is largely dissipated in the atmosphere. In the process, it creates an ionized condition called a confinement channel through the air. Moments later, the second beam is fired at the same spot, and it follows the confinement channel right down to the earth's surface. The target on the earth's surface—even if it is the sea itself—explodes violently. And so a lunar particle beam attack

creates a double flash. The first flash is somewhat diffused, since it takes place mainly in the air; but the second flash is more concentrated and intense. This, my friends, is what our tired old Vela Satellite accidentally picked up last fall in the South Atlantic.

When the Government here made the first announcement about it on October 25, 1979, they lied about both its date and time. The official story is that the double flash took place at 3:00 AM, in the early morning hours of September 22, 1979. But it actually took place on October 22—just three days before the October 25 announcement about it. October 22 was the same day that the former Shah of Iran arrived in New York City. On one hand the Russians were maneuvering the Shah in hopes of undoing the Bolshevik Iran Crisis strategy, as I have reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 52 and 53. But at the same time, the Russians were also gearing up for hostilities in case their maneuvers with the Shah should fall apart.

As a matter of interest, I can also report to you that the double flash took place around 3:00 PM in the afternoon—not 3:00 AM as claimed officially. The United States Government falsified the time and date as a trap for the unwary—and many have fallen into that trap. The CBS fairy tale of February 21 about an Israeli A-bomb test is only one example.

At the time of the initial public reports about the double flash last October, the Russian experiment in the South Atlantic was still in progress. It had begun on October 22, when two lunar particle beams were aimed at a location in the South Atlantic. The desired bull's-eye was at the navigational coordinates 35 degrees South, 26 degrees West. This point is on a parallel with the lower tip of South Africa, but is slightly closer to South America than to Africa.

Two of the Russian particle beam weapons on the moon zeroed in and prepared to fire. Meanwhile, a quadrangle of Cosmospheres were ranged around the target area. The four Cosmospheres were deployed at the corners of a square 800 miles on one side, centered on the bull's-eye at sea. They were hovering at an altitude of 100 miles. It was expected that the moon bases would achieve much better accuracy this time than they had two years ago. But just to be safe, the Cosmospheres were deployed well away from the target.

Then the two moon weapons fired at the earth. Firing from a quarter-million miles away in space, the beams missed the center of the 800-mile target square by only a little over ten (10) miles. The resulting double flash was centered at roughly 34 degrees, 54 minutes South; 26 degrees, 10 minutes West.

Tremendous quantities of sea water in the target zone flashed instantly into superheated steam. The hot water vapor and surrounding hot air started rising fast toward the stratosphere. Cooler air started racing into the target zone to fill the vacuum. The inward-rushing winds began to swirl due to the earth's rotation, and the barometric pressure began dropping in the target zone. Within minutes, the atmosphere above the target zone was a spiraling chimney of tumbling, rising air and water vapor. The world's first totally man-made storm cell was being born over the South Atlantic.

The powerful beams fired from the moon had started the process. Then it was up to the quadrangle of Cosmospheres to keep it going. The vast quantities of water vapor sent skyward by the blasts began condensing rapidly in the cool upper air.

Normally, this would have led quickly to localized rain showers. As a result, most of the water would have rained right back into the sea, not far from the target area. But the four Cosmospheres were there to prevent that.

Right after the moon shots that produced the giant double flash, the Cosmospheres went to work. Each began firing a powerful electron beam into the target zone, in a de-focused mode. The electrons mingled into the rising torrents of water vapor, giving a negative charge to the water droplets as they formed. This caused the tiny droplets to repel each other, so that they could not condense into rain. So the water vapor was forced to stay aloft instead of raining back down into the sea.

The Cosmospheres remained on station for several more days in order to complete the experiment. They were able to confirm that the artificial storm clouds remained stable, drifting eastward with the winds. They also monitored the target zone itself, to learn how fast conditions would return to normal. Then they finally dispersed, in early November 1979. The artificial storm cell was left to dissipate gradually of its own accord, and as a result it attracted no attention.

Early last month on January 4, 1980, the United States announced what amounts to a new Cold War. A whole series of embargoes and restrictions against Russia were initiated. The most important of these was the embargo of 17-million metric tons of grain ordered by Russia.

The grain embargo, my friends, is an effort by the Bolsheviks here to hit the Russians right where they live. Four days after it was announced, the grain embargo was described by a White House spokesman as the most punitive of all steps against Russia; and ever since then, the Bolsheviks here have been twisting arms world-wide to force other countries to do the same.

Early this month on February 6, the Russians summed up their view of all this. Throughout the Soviet press that day, there were stories that the Carter Administration wants to starve the Russian people; and since the Bolsheviks always use starvation as a tool of power, this was no idle comment by Russia.

The very next day, there began to be reports of strange developments in the weather of the southwestern United States. For example, northern New Mexico experienced a heavy snowstorm combined with thunder and lightning. But it was the following week, on February 13, that the real weather news began. Unprecedented rainstorms began pounding southern California and Arizona.

Day after day they came, one incredible storm right after another. Dams filled, and then began overflowing. Levees broke. Houses washed into canyons. Caskets floated away from cemeteries. Mudslides caught several victims and buried them alive. Bridges washed out. Entire communities became flooded and marooned. Phoenix endured a flood so vast that another like it would not be expected for 500 years. And: in the vital agricultural areas of southern California, damage was mounting fast.

On February 19, the seventh day of the rains, a CBS Evening News report said: "It's like an organized assault—one storm after another." And an organized assault is exactly what it was, my friends. Centered at a point 576 miles west of San Diego, a quadrangle of Russian Cosmospheres were in operation. Based on the results of their "double flash" experiment last fall, the

Russians have refined their technique; and each time the Moon Bases fire at the earth, they are becoming more accurate. So the quadrangle west of San Diego was only about 100 miles on a side, and the Cosmospheres were at the decreased altitude of 40 miles.

Using the technique tested last October in the South Atlantic, the Russians were creating the storm cells, one after another; and this time, they did not just let the cells drift away to dissipate. Instead, they were drawn precisely to the areas to be attacked in southern California and Arizona. Then the storms were triggered by additional Cosmospheres hovering over those areas.

Eighty-five (85) miles above Yuma, Arizona, there was a pair of Cosmospheres. Nearly 100 miles to the north, another cosmosphere duo was hovering over the vicinity of Blythe, California. Both locations are on the Colorado River, bordering California's crucial Imperial Valley agricultural area. These cosmosphere duos used their beam weapons to load the atmosphere with protons, which are positively charged. This attracted the artificial storm cells with their negatively charged clouds. That is why the storms pounded exactly the same areas—time after time after time; and it was also the proton clouds that triggered the actual storms. They neutralized the electrons in the storm clouds, the water condensed into rain, and the devastating storms were the result.

Finally, after nine (9) days and over half a billion dollars in damage, the Russians called a halt on the storms for the moment. But this, my friends, is only a sample of what may lie ahead for food-producing areas throughout the United States!

While the western weather disaster was filling the headlines, the Russians were also testing out their weather-control system in less dramatic ways all over the United States. A total of five more cosmosphere quadrangles at sea and fifteen more cosmosphere duos over land were involved. The Russians are determined to retaliate in kind for the Bolshevik starvation campaign against Russia. If the American Bolsheviks keep to this food boycott against Russia, then American food shortages will be making headlines by this time next year!

In the meantime, you still have a chance to stock up on storable foods—and, my friends, I would waste no time in doing just that.

RUSSIA'S ACCELERATING PREPARATIONS TO SURVIVE NUCLEAR WAR

Topic #3—It has now been more than a year-and-a-half since I first revealed America's shift to a first-strike military strategy. Many of my listeners were shocked when I made this public. "Never", they said. "The United States would never strike first in a nuclear war!"

But how fast times change. A few days ago, on February 21, Defense Department spokesman Thomas Ross gave a briefing to reporters. He said that if Russia should go beyond Afghanistan, it could lead to a nuclear confrontation. And he added that in that event, "...the United States might shoot first."

Our Bolshevik rulers are determined to bring about nuclear war against Russia, no matter how suicidal it may be. But to do that, they have to have the support of you and me—the American people; and to keep our support, the Bolsheviks here are hiding the truth of our military situation from us. They build up our anger at Russia, and then tell us how "backward" Russia is. They

are conditioning us to believe that we will have to fight Russia, and egging us on with lies that we can win.

Those stories we always hear about Russia's backwardness may comfort us now, but they will not help us when war comes. The difference between Russia and the United States is one of emphasis, not ability. We Americans have been living in luxury, with all the comforts—but we are living in a fragile glass tower. By contrast, the Russian way of life is modest; but they are living in a powerful fortress. Soon, the earth will tremble with the blows of NUCLEAR WAR ONE—and it will not be the fortress, but the glass tower that shatters and falls in ruins.

We Americans may look down our noses at Russian consumer technology and feel smug. Yet when it comes to military technology, the Russians have dealt the West many surprises over the years.

For example, one day nearly 20 years ago, NATO and other observers were in Moscow to watch an aerial display on Aviation Day. Various Russian airplanes roared over, and the NATO observers tried to spot any new details they could detect—but they got more than they had bargained for. Suddenly a big, sleek airplane thundered over which was totally unknown in the West. It had swept-back wings and two enormous engines on the tail. It was obviously a bomber, and it was also obvious that it was supersonic! The stunned NATO observers watched with mouths agape. The shock deepened as the first mystery plane was followed by nine more exactly like it. Here was a highly-advanced warplane—it was in quantity production, and it was a complete surprise to NATO. When they recovered from the shock, NATO aviation officials assigned the code-name Blinder to the plane.

If you are not a military specialist, you have probably never even heard of the Blinder, much less the jarring surprise it gave to the West. But the supersonic Blinder of two decades ago was produced by Russia's Tupolev Design Bureau—and you have heard a great deal about a more recent Tupolev supersonic bomber. It's called the Backfire.

Now, the Tupolev aircraft team in Russia is once again involved in a major military surprise. In Topic #1, I described the unsuccessful attempt last month to mount a nuclear first strike against Russia. The cities of Voronezh, Kharkov, and Kazan were targeted because of the Tupolev plants located there. They are the temporary bases for an airborne

anti-ballistic-missile or ABM system, which is about to become operational. The system is to be a last-ditch backup for the Cosmospheres which are hovering over our country. The Cosmospheres are supposed to blast our ICBM's at the moment of launch; but in case a few should get through, the Russians plan to blast them during re-entry over Russia.

The new Russian ABM system uses charged Particle Beam weapons carried by Tu-144 supersonic transports. At a glance, the Tu-144 looks similar to the Anglo-French Concorde. But the Tu-144 is bigger, considerably faster, and radically different in some very important ways. Among other things, Russian civil transports are always designed with the option for military conversion built in, and the Tu-144 is no exception.

In June 1978, the Tu-144's were suddenly removed from service by the Soviet airline Aeroflot, without explanation. Western commentators crowed that they had turned out to be too expensive to fly; but they were actually returned to the Tupolev plants for

military conversion, to be outfitted with charged Particle Beams. This process is now nearing completion.

Late last month, the Tu-144 flying ABM system passed a major hurdle. It was tested against a missile, with complete success. But the Russians encoded the data from the target missile, making it impossible for the United States to learn any details. Western analysts were able to tell that something happened to the missile in mid-flight, but nothing more.

And so, my friends, we are heading for the "moment of truth." The Russians are speeding up their preparations to survive the kamikaze war plans of the Bolsheviks now here in America. But for America, the countdown is under way toward the Day of Chastisement.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #55

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is June 28, 1980, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 55. As most of you know I am resuming the AUDIO LETTER today after a silence of four months. My feelings at this moment are hard for me to express; but for all of you who have stood by me when it mattered most, I want to say a few personal words, because without your loyal support I might never have returned to this microphone.

Just before I entered my recording studio last February 24, I began to feel slightly ill. At first there was only mild discomfort, but somehow I knew that it was something serious. I tried my best to record AUDIO LETTER No. 54 while I was still able to do it. I got about two-thirds of the way through the recording session before I was overcome by a massive heart attack. I didn't want to let you down, but I simply could not finish. On the way to the hospital I knew that I would not be speaking to you again soon, so I gave instructions for the release of the unrecorded final portion of AUDIO LETTER No. 54 in printed form.

During the time since my heart attack last February, my associates have released three progress reports to keep you informed. I won't go over all of that again now, but it was a dark and difficult time for a while—not only for me, but also for my associates and especially my wife and three children.

I entered those hospital doors on the brink of death, and I truly believed that I had failed in my mission. During at least the first week of my stay in Intensive Care, I felt no will to live. At one point I was even told by my doctors that I had gone through death's door, yet had somehow come back again. The doctors were prepared for the worst, but yet something of a miracle began to unfold. From all over the United States, and then Canada, and then around the world, I began receiving messages of cheer and encouragement—countless beautiful cards with equally beautiful personal wishes written on them, telegrams telling me of prayer meetings on my behalf, inspirational and religious books and pamphlets of all kinds, letters and books with suggestions to improve my health. There were flowers, there were gifts, there were religious relics—on and on until it grew into an avalanche. For weeks I was not well enough even to look

at all these things, but I could not believe my ears as I was told what was taking place.

I had entered the hospital spent and exhausted, convinced that all of my work had been in vain; but several weeks later when I left the hospital to go home, it was with renewed hope and determination to carry on. And in that spirit I have been regaining my strength against all the odds; so it is that I speak to you once again today. That, my friends, is what you did for me. I will never forget all of you who stood by me in my hour of need, and I promise you that I will always do everything in my power never to let you down.

It was five years ago this month, in June 1975, that I began recording my AUDIO LETTER Intelligence Reports. It was a shaky beginning, because I was recovering from my first heart attack; and yet little more than a year later I found myself at the Pentagon because of the AUDIO LETTER. I had been invited there by the late General George S. Brown, then Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. My conference with America's top military officer was about the secret nuclear crisis then under way.

Of all the information media in the United States, only the AUDIO LETTER had made the crisis public. In AUDIO LETTER No. 16 I told my listeners about the crisis conference with General Brown. General Brown was doing his duty by taking urgent actions to prevent imminent nuclear war; and yet, America's controlled major media said not a word! Even after Pentagon spokesmen confirmed my meeting with General Brown to newspaper reporters, there was almost no publicity.

From that point onward, America's fortunes have gone down hill steadily. Having staved off nuclear disaster for the moment, General Brown found himself deserted and alone. Within weeks after our crisis meeting, General Brown began to be cut down by bad publicity. He was quickly neutralized by America's enemies within. He did not even serve out his tour of duty, except in name, and soon we were told of his untimely death. In AUDIO LETTERS 17, 21, 23, and 46 I revealed the facts about the downfall of General Brown. While America slept, our last great patriot in government was whittled down, taken away, and finally murdered!

Four years ago the prospect of imminent nuclear war sounded unbelievable to most Americans. Something called "detente" was still in effect, or so we were told. But public knowledge is always years behind the truth; so today, war fever is all around us .

This month I'm beginning anew with my AUDIO LETTER series. Once again I am doing so on the heels of a heart attack, just as I did five years ago; but this time there is a difference. Five years ago very few Americans would listen seriously to warnings about secret plans for nuclear war. Today it's a different world. We're all hearing about false nuclear alerts, worries over Russia's military power, and so on. Most of us are waking up far too late. We have waited too late to avoid many great disasters because they have already been set in motion; but if enough people wake up soon, there may still be hope that our planet will survive. That is the goal to which I dedicate my AUDIO LETTER series from this day forward.

As I launch year No. 6 of my AUDIO LETTER, I will try to serve you better than ever before. For that purpose, I am now introducing the first change in format of my reports in five years. As you know, my standard practice is to present some

introductory remarks followed by three major topics, and I will continue to do this; but from now on, I will also add a brief final section called the LAST MINUTE SUMMARY. My new Last Minute Summary will help me do several things better than before. For example, I sometimes receive urgent information at the very last minute before recording an AUDIO LETTER. Whenever this happens from now on, you will hear about it in my Last Minute Summary. I will also try to highlight major points from the topics I have discussed. By doing these things, I want to make my AUDIO LETTER even more up-to-date and more useful to you than ever before.

My friends, during the past several months the drums of approaching war have been beating louder and louder, and day by day more Americans are falling into step in the war march. For the first time in a generation, the word "Patriotism" is being revived in America; and after years of being trampled into the dust, the American flag is suddenly being waved high for all to see. The Pied Pipers of war are using the symbols of America to lure us into national suicide. They are not trying to revive true patriotism—which is based on loyalty and love for our country. Instead, our so-called leaders are selling us a cheap substitute, "tough guy patriotism", based on hatred.

Today a patriot is anyone who hates Iran, anyone who hates Russia, anyone who is ready for war. And those who have trampled on our flag for so long are holding it high today for a reason! They know that the American spirit is not dead, even though it has been stifled for so long. They know that even today Americans by the millions will still rally around the flag, and so the Pied Pipers are using the Stars and Stripes as their banner to lead us all to WAR.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—THE PUBLIC SIGNS OF NUCLEAR WAR FEVER

Topic #2—MULTIPLYING DISASTERS IN THE EXPANDING SECRET WAR

Topic #3—BATTLE TO THE DEATH IN THE KREMLIN.

Topic #1—During the past four months I have had to be silent about the growing dangers of nuclear war, but the visible signs of approaching war have been speaking for themselves. For example, there's the Draft Registration issue. Last March when this Bolshevik Administration first brought it up, tens of thousands of draft age demonstrators took to the streets. So the Bolsheviks, who now control our government, put it on the back burner to cool off. They waited until summer when students would be home from college, scattered and unable to organize. Then they acted fast. This month it became law, as did another war measure—the Standby Gas Rationing plan. Measures like these are helping to raise the pitch of war fever by one small degree after another; but to the Bolsheviks here who are responsible for these measures, something else is even more important. Draft Registration and Gas Rationing plans are designed most of all to control you and me.

To the Bolsheviks who now infest America, war, even nuclear war, is only a means to an end. The end is their own Bolshevik DICTATORSHIP over us all; and they are so consumed with their frenzy for control that they no longer care very much whether the United States wins or loses the war. Either way, they now believe that they will somehow end up with the remains of America within their grasp. And so we are plunging down the road to nuclear suicide.

Another sign of this is the series of nuclear false alarms. In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 last November 1979 I called your attention

to the first of these false nuclear war alerts, and early this month, on June 3 and June 6, there were two more false alerts. As I told you last November, the Bolsheviks here are actually carrying out deliberate tests by means of these false nuclear alerts.

The American Strategic Military forces were designed for the purpose of retaliation against a surprise attack; but now, those who control our military strategy are planning for America to strike first. And so Bolshevik agents are now testing ways to falsify all of the early-warning signals of a Russian nuclear attack. Once they have perfected their false-alarm techniques, they will be ready to set off nuclear war at any moment. By fooling our entire early-warning system, they will set off massive retaliation by our ICBMs, missile submarines, and bombers. The crews of missile bunkers, submarines, and bombers will do their duty, believing America has been attacked, but in reality we ourselves will be firing the opening shots of all-out war.

America's early-warning network involves a number of complex systems. As a result, several different kinds of falsified data will have to be fed into the computers in order to simulate an all-out attack. Each of the false alerts has been testing a different part of this plan. For that reason, more false alerts may still take place, but all three nuclear false alarms have had one thing in common. The first line of defense in our Early Warning system is supposed to be our fleet of early warning satellites over Russia. We are told that they keep a continuous watch for the launching of ICBMs; and sure enough, all three nuclear false alarms have started with incorrect satellite signals about Russian ICBMs.

My friends, the satellite signals are the easiest part of the Bolshevik plans to falsify a Russian nuclear attack. As I revealed over two years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 33, the United States no longer has any early warning satellites over Russia. They have long since been blasted out of space by Russia's fleet of Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellites. Since that time, all of the alleged early-warning satellite signals monitored daily by NORAD have been artificial. But it is an easy matter to change those signals to make them say that Russian missiles are on the way.

It has now been nearly two years since I first reported America's shift to a first-strike nuclear strategy; but the first official admission of this drastic change took place only four months ago on February 21. On that day Pentagon spokesman Thomas Ross said that America might, quote: "shoot first" in a nuclear war. But to this day, most Americans still believe that America's military posture is a defensive one, and so we cannot comprehend what we see in the news of mounting nuclear war fever. It is all around us, my friends, and yet we cannot understand because we are not told the truth by our leaders.

Day by day we are hearing about nuclear weapons designed for offensive use, but we are conditioned to see only self-defense in all these things, which leaves us unable to see what is really happening. One of the new weapons systems we keep hearing the most about is the so-called MX Mobile Missile. As with everything else, we are told that it is strictly a defensive weapon. It is said that our existing stationary ICBMs might be knocked out by Russia's incoming missiles, so the new MX Missiles will have to keep moving around to make them harder to hit. But the stories we are hearing about the MX program are a mixture of half truths and lies.

The whole MX controversy is just a smoke screen to hide America's real mobile missile program. We are told that the giant MX Missile system cannot be ready for another half decade, but the fact is that mobile ICBMs are already being deployed here in the United States. Their deployment began over six months ago in late 1979. America's real mobile missile is not the MX, and it is not a defensive weapon. It is intended for use in a nuclear first strike against Russia, and it is called the "Minuteman TX"—the traveling Minuteman!

Nearly a year and a half ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, I revealed America's deployment of one type of mobile missile world-wide. The missiles I talked about then are deployed secretly, not only in the United States but in Australia, New Zealand, and elsewhere. But those missiles are only mobile in a limited sense. They can be set up quickly at unprepared sites, and moved from one site to another from time to time. But America's new mobile missile, the Minuteman TX, is another matter. It's designed to be moved constantly until almost the moment of launch. The public stories about the alleged MX program serve several purposes. For one thing they are helping to condition us to the growing prospect of NUCLEAR WAR. Even more importantly, the MX is being used as an excuse for funding, which is actually going into the secret TX project! The latest example of this funding trickery took place only a few weeks ago in early June. The Senate Armed Services Committee of the United States approved over 1.5-billion dollars for the MX program. In addition, funding was also authorized for deploying 100 more Minuteman missiles. They look like separate measures, but they are actually both related to the secret Minuteman TX mobile missile project.

The publicity surrounding our supposed MX missile program also serves one other very important purpose. That purpose is to keep the Traveling Minuteman project a secret, even from most of those who are working on it. Any large modern weapons program involves many thousands of people, and the Minuteman TX program is no exception. There are engineers, technicians, manufacturing personnel, managers, secretaries, and so on. But the vast majority of these people are led to believe that they are working on the MX program. All kinds of projects which are actually meant for the Traveling Minuteman are carried out under the false heading "MX." In some cases other known missile programs are also used as a cover for work on the Traveling Minuteman.

What makes this technique successful is the fact that all of the work on the program is subdivided into many separate tasks. For example, one engineering design group may be given the job of designing a mobile launch tower. They're told that the design is part of the MX program with operational deployment years away, but they are also given the explanation that a few are needed now for developmental purposes. And so they design the launcher, build a few, and deliver them after doing any necessary testing and redesign to make it work properly. Next the launcher design is broken up into several chunks by a secret working group within the Minuteman TX project. The various portions of the launcher are then contracted out for production by several different manufacturing concerns. Each individual chunk is unrecognizable, so they have no idea that they are making parts for a secret weapon. And so only a tiny handful of people fully understand what's going on. They are the people who coordinate the whole thing and bring it all together.

The supersecret Minuteman TX program is being carried on almost in the open, but the constant publicity about the supposed

MX makes it all unrecognizable to us. And whenever necessary, the publicity about the MX cover project is adjusted to maintain the secret. It's a highly sophisticated technique, and if you've heard AUDIO LETTER No. 2 6 it may ring a bell with you. The cover-up technique for the Minuteman TX is very much like what was done in America's Moon program.

"Project Apollo" was a military program from start to finish, but we never realized that because it was flooded with publicity that made us believe otherwise. Today the clever publicity about a decoy program called MX is being masterminded by a man who is uniquely qualified for the task. He is the same man who orchestrated the great publicity that hid the real secrets of our Moon program. His name was once a household word, but he was far more important than we were ever told. He was often called "The Voice of the Astronauts." His name: Colonel John "Shorty" Powers. Early this year on January 19, 1980, there were news reports that Powers had been found dead in his Phoenix home but that, my friends, was only a cover story to explain his sudden disappearance. He has been tapped in order to coordinate all the MX coverup stories which we are now hearing. Powers lived alone, and it was little sacrifice for him to go underground for his new secret job.

America's deployment of Minuteman TX mobile missiles is secret, and yet it is going on right under our noses. If you live in certain parts of the country you have a good chance to see for yourself a Minuteman TX railroad shuttle car. You may even have seen one already without knowing what it was. Let me describe it so that you will know what to look for.

A TX railroad car is somewhat like a boxcar but wider and much taller than most boxcars. Also, a TX car does not have a flat roof like a boxcar. Instead, a TX car looks a little like a long, slender barn on wheels. The roof has sloping sides several feet high with a narrow flat strip along the top. This unusual shape provides the necessary space for the long slender ICBM resting on supports inside. The design of the TX railroad car illustrates the rush-rush nature of the whole Minuteman TX program. It was borrowed in large part from an existing design for a special railroad car used by certain aerospace companies; but most TX cars are not even built from scratch. Instead, flatcars used for carrying truck-trailers are being commandeered. The flatcar is given extra reinforcement if necessary to handle the weight of the missile and launcher. Then the odd-looking TX transporter shell is built on and painted a nondescript brown. The resulting railroad car is a strange combination of old and new. The shell on top may be smooth, fresh, and clean but the base it is built on is likely to have old paint, rust, and the scars of years on the rails.

In certain parts of the country, TX cars can be spotted fairly often in the midst of normal freight trains. First, empty TX cars can be spotted in the areas where they are built—such as Chicago and St. Louis. The missiles are built in Washington State, California, and Colorado so the TX cars can be spotted in those areas. The special mobile launchers are built in Texas near Dallas and TX cars can be seen in that region. The final mating of the missiles and their launch-control systems takes place under direct military supervision. This is done in a vast underground complex in the southwest corner of Ft. Hood, Texas. From there the Minuteman TX missile cars head north for operational deployment.

The deployment is being coordinated from Minot Air Force Base, North Dakota. The Minuteman TX Traveling Missile is being

deployed along existing railroad tracks in our northern tier of states. The tracks have recently been removed from normal freight-hauling service. This has created outcries from farmers left with no means to get their crops to the market. They are among the first victims of the secret Minuteman TX Traveling Missile project. When the missiles are fully deployed, they will be in every northernmost state from Washington to Wisconsin.

Every Minuteman TX missile now deployed is being shuttled back and forth over a long stretch of railroad track. It rides in its mobile-launch car covered against the weather and sightseers. A locomotive moves it up and down the track according to instructions called "stochastic programming." These instructions tell a locomotive to speed up, slow down, stop, back up, stop, go forward again in an unpredictable fashion. The idea is to make the missile and its mobile launcher a very difficult target. Right now, Russian Cosmospheres are hovering on guard over every TX missile. These platforms (which America decided not to develop in the 1960's) carry Beam weapons which could blast the missiles; but as I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, American military planners are hoping to stun the Cosmospheres briefly as war begins. And so, they are neglecting the Cosmospheres in planning their nuclear first strike with TX missiles.

When the Bolsheviks, who now dominate America, decide to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE, here's how they presently plan to do it. First they will use their tested methods to swamp NORAD with false warning data of a Russian attack. America's entire strategic retaliatory forces will respond by attacking Russia. But even faster, our secretly deployed Minuteman TX missiles will go to war. In the opening moments of the NORAD war alert, a special attack order will be flashed across the Minuteman TX system. Within 30 seconds the locomotive pulling each missile car will brake to a stop. As it does so, explosive bolts will blast the cover off the launch car, exposing the missile inside. At the same time, powerful hydraulic pumps will be started. As soon as the missile car comes to rest, safety locks will release the missile erector. Within 15 seconds, ear-shattering pumps will raise the Minuteman TX ICBM to firing position. Moments later, the launch car will be engulfed in rocket exhaust as the missile streaks off toward Russia.

Unlike the United States, Russia does still have early-warning satellites. The American missile attack will be detected, and within minutes Russian missiles will be on their way. The early phases of the NORAD war alert will be like the false alarms which have already taken place; but about 10 minutes into the alert, the false alarm phase will be over. That is when our ballistic missile radars along the Arctic Circle will first detect the approaching swarms of Russian ICBMs. By means of false-alarm trickery and goading Russia into a missile attack, the Bolsheviks here believe they will at last achieve their goal—ALL-OUT THERMONUCLEAR WAR.

Topic #2—Recently a former United States Secretary of Labor, William Usery, paid a visit to Japan. In more and more fields the United States can no longer compete with Japan in international markets. I warned that this was coming in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR. Usery went to Japan to see for himself why this is happening. But Usery was not prepared for the shock he encountered. He visited all kinds of big manufacturing plants in Japan, and everywhere he went he saw assembly lines made up of robots. What we think of as Science Fiction here in the United States is everyday reality in modern Japan. For example, one of the plants visited by Usery assembles Datsun automobiles. After his walk through it, the Washington

Post quoted him as saying: "It was downright scary. We walked for great distances down those aisles and we didn't see anybody."

My friends, we in America are living in the past. Our stores may be filled with pretty packages, but the other advanced nations of the world are passing us by. That is one of the things which I have been trying to make you aware of for years through my AUDIO LETTER reports, and now a special report is about to be presented to the White House which confirms part of what I told you.

To illustrate this, let me remind you of the many disastrous reversals in America's fortunes which have taken place secretly in recent years. I have made many of them public through my AUDIO LETTER. We have been defeated in space; we have slipped into a hopeless military predicament. As I have made clear in the past, it is our own leaders who have done this to us!

For example, nearly 20 years ago our leaders ignored the urgent warnings of the head of the Strategic Air Command. He was the late General Thomas Power. General Power was worried about a threat on the technical horizon of electrogravitic levitating weapons platforms. He wanted the United States to develop these hovering platforms so that we would not be caught by surprise. But as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 32, our leaders paid no attention. They thought they knew better. They had other plans!

But our leaders were making a grave mistake. It was only one of many great miscalculations during the past 20 years. They were underestimating the potentials for technical surprise because for the most part America's leaders, in and out of government, are not trained in science or engineering. Just as General Power had feared, Russia did develop the floating weapons platforms. They are called Cosmospheres, and their deployment over our heads began in late 1977, as I first reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 29. They announced their presence for a while by creating tremendous air booms along America's east coast and elsewhere. This they did by means of defocused blasts from their Charged Particle Beam weapons; and like the Cosmospheres themselves, Russia's operational Particle Beam weapons came as another surprise to our Rulers.

The report which is about to go to the White House says not a word about these life and death secrets, but the report does describe the scientific backwardness of America's leaders. In Great Britain, France, Germany, Japan, and especially in Russia, the report points out that things are very different. In those countries the leadership, quote: "has a high level of scientific and technical literacy."

By contrast, the report describes the progressive splintering of American society into two groups. One group is the minority who are trained and work in science and engineering. The other group includes the great majority of us. We are being left uneducated about most of the ever changing realities of modern technology. The report being prepared for the White House is accurate enough as far as it goes; but what it leaves out is even more important than what it says, because the division of American society into two camps—one technically trained and one not, is no accident! The old axiom "Divide and Conquer" is still true as ever. On one hand the scientific and engineering community itself is manipulated constantly without being aware of it. The secret Minuteman TX Missile project is a typical example. But for the rest of us the situation is even more confusing, so the few who are in a position to pull all the strings have us at their mercy.

Earlier this month an outstanding authority on Constitutional law passed away, Professor Fred Rodell of Yale University. In a book titled "WOE UNTO LAWYERS", he wrote some words which are a perfect description of our situation today. He said, quote:

"For every age there is a group of bright boys, learned in their trade and jealous of their learning, who blend technical competence with plain and fancy hocus-pocus to make themselves masters of their fellow men."

In some ways the problems we face today are not new at all. Earlier this month this fact was illustrated by a series of biographical dramas on the Public Broadcasting Service. They dealt with the life of a British writer who became Prime Minister, Benjamin Disraeli. Disraeli spent his life struggling against the things he considered unfair within the British government, and in a novel he once wrote, quote: "The world is governed by very different personages to what is imagined by those who are not behind the scenes." That was true a century ago, and it is true today. But in other ways, today is different from the past. The difference is that incredible technologies which were unthinkable in Disraeli's time are now changing our world. Throughout history there has always been unseen skirmishes, undeclared battles, and unofficial wars; but today these have reached levels never imagined in the past. Even as we see the multiplying public signs of war to come, secret warfare is growing more intense by the day.

During the four months of my absence from this microphone, there have been too many of these events to discuss in detail; but I have already given you the background for all these events in past AUDIO LETTERS. So what I will try to do now is simply to remind you of what you already know to understand recent headlines. A bird's-eye view of the past several months will make one thing all too clear. The secret war between the United States and Russia is becoming more and more violent. The Satanic Bolsheviks who have been overthrown and expelled by Russia are tightening their stranglehold on our own country, and the secret Christian sect who took over the Kremlin are pressing ahead in a war of attrition. With one hand they are still keeping the lid on all-out war, but with the other hand they are chipping away at America's ability to make war.

In the final printed portion of AUDIO LETTER No. 54 last February, I gave a warning to expect bad weather in the United States. I described how Russia had begun a campaign of weather modification to reduce crops in the United States. This is in direct retaliation for the Carter grain embargo, which the Russians regard as starvation politics.

As March began, a killer snowstorm blanketed the southeast and many crops were damaged. A month later killer rainstorms struck New Orleans, much as they had done in February in California; but meanwhile the grain-bearing bread basket of the Great Plains was becoming parched and dry. By the end of April it was already guaranteed that grain yields in large areas will be reduced this year. As the spring continued, severe weather turned into a record-setting epidemic nation-wide. Every single day from May 9 to June 7, tornadoes or other severe and destructive weather struck somewhere in the United States. During the final two weeks of that period, the National Weather Service reported 964 cases of violent weather. On May 29 the United States tried to launch a new weather satellite to watch the fireworks, but the satellite called NOAA-B never reached its intended orbit.

Earlier this month America's unprecedented weather took a new turn. There was a strange split in the jet stream. Cool northern states grew even colder, and warm southern states boiled over with heat. On June 16 there was even frost in Michigan and Wisconsin, while the South sweltered. A few days later on June 20 the so-called Carter Administration gave the first hint that Russia's weather war is really hurting. For the first time there were hints of possibly lifting the Russian grain embargo, but the next day the Bolsheviks changed their minds again. They said the grain embargo will continue, so as of now there is no prospect of an improvement in America's weather. Instead it may well grow worse, and the food shortages I warned about last February are in the making.

In AUDIO LETTERS 53 and 54 I reported the details of secret warfare involving Iran. Starting in late January the Bolsheviks here in America tried to carry out a surprise nuclear attack against Russia. The plan they were following was the one I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 37, with some additions. As I reported, the Russians used their Cosmospheres to completely ruin the American attack plan. Nuclear war hysteria had been building fast here in America, but with our secret defeat the war chant stopped abruptly. Our defeat in January was kept out of view and completely secret.

But the Bolsheviks here tried again to set off nuclear war just three months later, in April. Once again the American war plan met with total failure, but this time our Rulers could not hide it completely. The April 25 raid into Iran—supposedly to rescue our hostages—became a disaster that filled the headlines. The American Commandoes who were sent into Iran tried their best to follow orders and do their duty; but unknown to them, those who had planned the raid did not intend for it to succeed! They were supposed to reach Tehran, but discover too late that they were too small a force to do the job. As soon as the Commandoes ran into big trouble, that was to be used as an excuse for American Navy jets to strafe Tehran; and with American passion stirred up, the Iran crisis was to escalate with additional military moves. But for more than a year now, Russian Intelligence has been informed about even the most secret plans in Washington; and so the Russians were ready.

They unraveled the latest Bolshevik war plan in two ways. First the huge armada of Cosmospheres were floating overhead on April 25 as the American helicopter force entered Iran. Using their weather modification capabilities, the Cosmospheres intensified dust storms in the area. They also utilized microwave brain-scrambling radiation to cause nausea, disorientation, and fatigue among the helicopter crews. The Russian brain-scrambler is the same technology which I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 20. The Russians were hoping to cause the mission to be given up as hopeless without casualties, but the American Commando force reached its first check point, regrouped, and prepared to continue. So the Cosmospheres turned up their brain-scrambling transmitters to full power. One helicopter took off but veered off crazily, and sliced into a C-130 Troop Transport airplane. Two others prepared to take off. But Cosmospheres overhead fired low-power bursts from their Particle Beams, rotor blades flew off, and the helicopters went nowhere. At that point it was obvious that it was all over. The raid was aborted, and all energy shifted to efforts to explain away the disaster to the public. Soon the charred bodies of slain Commandoes were flown home to Dover Air Force Base, Delaware. It was the second time in less than two years for Dover to receive bodies from a secret Commando raid by the United States! The first time they had paid the price for a successful

operation in Guyana, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 40; but this time they died in total defeat.

The Bolsheviks here might still have stoked up a military crisis over Iran, but the Russians made a chess move to prevent that. On April 28 the individual known to the public as Cyrus Vance resigned as Secretary of State in protest. This checkmated the Bolsheviks by making a public issue of any plans to pursue additional military moves.

Another headline story in the secret war was the explosion of Mount St. Helens in Washington State on May 18. This was followed by a second eruption on May 25, and another major blast this month on June 13. At the same time there has been a sharp increase in the number of strong earthquakes along the west coast, especially in California. The first awesome cataclysm on May 18 took Government scientists by surprise. They did not expect anything so violent to happen without plenty of warning; but when the mountain blew its top, even the unfortunate Government geologist on the scene detected no warning signs. He had only enough time to grab his radio and shout "Vancouver, Vancouver. This is it." Then the radio went silent as the blast wave reached him. Up until the awful surprise of May 18, Government spokesmen were playing down Mount St. Helens. "No reason to expect much", they kept saying; but now, after the fact, they are changing their tune. Now they say that other volcanic mountains of the Cascade Range also look dangerous.

There are just too many earthquakes going on, among other things. At least a dozen mountains in the Pacific northwest now look suspicious by some accounts, especially Mt. Rainier, Mt. Baker, Mt. Hood, and most of all Mt. Shasta in northern California. Mt. Shasta is especially worrisome because it overlooks a major agricultural center—California's Central Valley. But it is also worrisome for other reasons. My friends, what we are seeing are the beginnings of a geophysical disaster along America's west coast. Powerful natural forces are involved, but they are being guided and speeded up by deliberate means. I am talking about geophysical warfare.

The stage has been set for the events now under way for over three years. I first reported the presence of Russian nuclear mines in major western dams in AUDIO LETTER No. 23, and one of the dams I named then was the one on Mt. Shasta. The following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 24 I reported on Russia's preparations for geophysical warfare. It involved triggering awesome forces around the Pacific rim, known as the Ring of Fire. America's west coast, which is strategic both militarily and agriculturally, will be devastated.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 24 I listed the locations of seven (7) undersea hydrogen bombs on the ocean floor west of Washington, Oregon, and California. I can now reveal that these were detonated one by one in early March. Their tidal wave potential was avoided by firing them individually. Instead they were used to trigger flows of volcanic magma toward the Cascade Mountain Range.

What nature was already doing slowly, started speeding up. By mid May Mount St. Helens was approaching the eruption point, but left to itself the mountain might have released the tremendous pressures inside slowly in one moderate eruption after another. So the Russians made use of the Cosmospheres to make sure that it exploded all at once with awesome power. Just after 8:30 A.M. on that Sunday of May 18, a squadron of Cosmospheres started firing at the north peak of the mountain. They fired their Particle

Beams in short pauses, one after another in succession. The result was a series of machine-gun-like explosions and flashes around the summit of Mount St. Helens. The mountain started vibrating, cracks opened up, the pressure could be contained no longer, and the mountain exploded. The Particle Beam flashes would have been spectacular if seen close up, but almost everyone close enough to see them died in the overwhelming blast that followed. The same technique was used again to release the second blast on May 25, but that eruption was not as violent, and a few people who saw the flashes lived to tell about it. On May 26 UPI carried a news item giving the reactions of two witnesses. One said that the volcano, quote: "Rocked out all of a sudden. We were awake in a hurry, then the flashes woke us all the way up. The thunder that went with it would rattle your bones. It was like a million little explosions, then a big crash."

My friends, it remains to be seen just how far the geophysical warfare now under way will go; but I can only remind you of the warning I gave last October 1979 in AUDIO LETTER No. 51. The exact words I used then were: "The Kremlin is debating whether the time has come after all to unleash the great man-made catastrophe on America's west coast."

Topic #3—This topic will be very brief because it's based on information which is very sketchy up to now, but it could turn out to be very important so I want to alert you now without further delay.

The world-wide struggle today is between two ancient and bitter enemies. Both want to control Russia and thereby to determine the fate of the world. One faction is that of the atheistic Bolsheviks who seized control of Russia in 1917. The other faction is a secret native Christian sect in Russia who worked for six decades to overthrow the Bolsheviks. For years now the new rulers in the Kremlin have been expelling their old enemies, the old Bolsheviks, from Russia. And the Bolsheviks from Russia have been flooding mostly here to the United States, and right under our very noses they are taking away our freedoms in a sophisticated new Bolshevik revolution!

I have discussed all this before, especially in AUDIO LETTERS 28, 29, and 38. We are seeing the climax of a larger war of a thousand years. It's the war between the Russians and the Khazars, which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 50 last fall.

In the spring of '79 I revealed that a secret Intelligence war of "doubles" had broken out in Washington. The Bolsheviks here had upset America's former rulers, the four Rockefeller Brothers, and were preparing for war. The Russians responded by intervening directly within our own government. The Bolsheviks were replacing key American leaders with doubles, and the Russians were replacing those with their own doubles. I revealed the war of doubles in AUDIO LETTER No. 45. The following month I revealed that Russia was deploying a secret weapon in the war of doubles. They were not human doubles, but genetic replicas of the people they were replacing. These are biological robots of a type known as "Organic Robotoids." They look and act human, but they are not human. Instead, they are advanced products of genetic engineering.

Less than six months later, in AUDIO LETTER No. 51, I revealed that the Bolsheviks here in America were counterattacking with their own type of biological robots. These are called Synthetic Automatons.

When I first revealed what I did about man-made genetic

replicas of human beings, I braced myself against ridicule; and I have been condemned in countless letters telling me that man cannot create new forms of life. Genetic engineering was not in the news a year ago, but less than two weeks ago the UNITED STATES SUPREME COURT handed down a landmark decision. They have proclaimed that new forms of life created by man can be patented—and, my friends, there will be a rush to the patent office. At this very moment there are over 100 patents pending for man-made life forms! If Professor Frankenstein were alive today he, too, could patent his monster.

The Russians and the Bolsheviks are locked in a continual tug of war using their genetic replicas. When the White House is occupied by Bolshevik synthetics, American policy reflects the Bolshevik line; but whenever the Russians manage to replace synthetics with their own robotoids, White House policy is made in Moscow. The result is a never ending series of policy reversals, which are mystifying many editorial writers.

A famous example was the United States vote against Israel at the United Nations last March. It was defended for two days, and then suddenly disavowed. The anti-Israel vote was ordered by Russian robotoids, but two days later the Bolsheviks eliminated them and used their own synthetics to disavow the vote.

For many months now this hidden tug of war has been rocking the United States Government, but now there is a chance that the same thing will soon be happening in the Russian Government as well, because during the past two months the Bolsheviks here in America have succeeded in penetrating the Kremlin with synthetics. Several top leaders of the Politburo were recently killed and replaced with Bolshevik synthetics. One of these was the Kremlin's strong man, Admiral Gorshkov. The Bolsheviks are using their synthetics in a new bid to retake control of Russia, but the ruling group in the Kremlin understand what they are up against and they are fighting back. A few weeks ago the Bolsheviks were on the verge of gaining the upper hand, now though they have lost their initial advantage of surprise. In addition, the Bolsheviks are apparently having difficulties with the synthetics which they send into the Kremlin. Several synthetics have disobeyed their Bolshevik programming.

Right now the situation is far from clear, but one thing is certain. An unseen battle to the death is under way now in the Kremlin, and the outcome will affect everyone on the face of the earth!

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

It is time now to give you my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've tried to give you a bird's-eye view of events over the past several months. The bottom line is that the drums of approaching nuclear war are beating louder and louder. Even more urgently, secret warfare is already under way, and it is becoming more and more violent.

The explosion of Mount St. Helens last month was brought about by geophysical warfare. Likewise, the severe weather patterns in the United States over the past several months have been produced by weather warfare. The Russians are doing this in retaliation for the giant grain embargo by the Carter Administration. The Russian weather war against the United States is intended to reduce our crops. In the Southwest, brutal heat is baking crops and killing cattle; and in the northern Great Plains grain is dying in a five-state region of severe drought. Russia's enemies here are not you and me but the Bolsheviks, who are now in

control of our Government. The Bolsheviks here are also the deadly enemies of you and me.

In 1917 Christian Russia was dragged down into the hell of Bolshevism through the dark tunnel of war. Now the Bolsheviks are being expelled from Russia, so they are trying to do it all over again here in America. They are determined to throw America's nuclear arsenal at Russia, win or lose, because either way the Bolsheviks expect to pick up the pieces here in complete Bolshevik dictatorship.

My friends, these are dangerous times indeed, but we must not lose heart. If you are ever tempted to throw up your hands and say, "I can't do anything", just think this over. All the weapons of war, all the propaganda, and all the controls of government have just one purpose. That purpose is to control you. If you give up and just close your eyes, you are giving them the very thing they want most. But as long as you keep your eyes open, see the truth as best you can and hold on to it, you are defeating them. Our Lord Jesus Christ said it long ago: "You shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free."

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #56

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is July 30, 1980, and this is my AUDIO LETTER No. 56.

Yesterday an "Emergency Session" of the United Nations General Assembly came to an end. It was treated as a non-event by the controlled major media of the United States, and many Americans have paid little attention—but it was only the seventh Emergency Session in the 35-year history of the United Nations!

My friends, the stakes involve NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The Bolsheviks who now control the United States Government are determined to bring about nuclear war with Russia, one way or another; but their most preferred path to war lies through the Middle East. I first gave details about this nearly five years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 6. Since then there have been continual revisions and up-dates of the planning for war by way of the Middle East. I have kept my listeners abreast of these developments in later AUDIO LETTERS, especially Nos. 22, 28, 37, and 46.

Ever since late 1977 the Middle East war plan has grown to include Iran as a central factor, because the main military strategy of the controlled United States Government is now a "first-strike" strategy; and Iran, nestled against Russia's underbelly, is a tempting base for attack against Russia. But the preferred initial focus of the Middle East war would not be Iran, but Israel.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 50 I reviewed the common roots of the Zionists who control Israel and the Bolsheviks who now control America. They always work together, hand in glove, because they are derived from the same source. That ancient source was the mis-named "Kingdom of the Jews", the Khazar Kingdom, which existed a thousand years ago in what is now southern Russia. The Bolsheviks and Zionists are identical in their goals and

tactics—except for one thing. The Zionist dream is for eventual world domination from Jerusalem, whereas the Bolsheviks want to control their former homeland of Russia and rule the world from there. But the Bolsheviks have largely lost the power they gained in Russia in 1917, and they are now using the United States as their main power base.

The Bolshevik-controlled United States is virtually the lone sponsor of Israel. In return, Israel performs many favors for America's rulers, especially in military and covert spy matters.

The United Nations Emergency Session which just ended amounted to a referendum by the world against Israel. For years the Begin Government of Israel has been pressing ahead in a relentless program of acts designed to inflame the anger of Israel's Arab neighbors. While protesting loudly that she only wants to be left alone in peace, Israel has been systematically doing the things that can only lead to war—and it is a war which can very quickly engulf the entire world. That is why a majority of the members of the United Nations were worried enough to petition for an Emergency Session; and after the six-day debate was over, 112 nations lined up together against Israel. They declared Israel's settlements in the occupied Arab territories illegal, and demanded that Israel start pulling out before November 15 of this year. Their common position was summed up by Guinea's United Nations ambassador in the words: "The process of war must come to an end." Israel's ambassador at the United Nations tried to paint the whole debate as a meaningless gesture, even though the United Nations created Israel in the first place. And following the Zionist lead, the Bolshevik-dominated major media here in America treated it as a non-event!

The fact is, my friends, that Israel actions are fast bringing the Middle East to the threshold of war. War fever is rising, and it is being reflected by the thermometer of war, the price of gold. Last January 21, 1980, gold traded at an all-time high of $875 per ounce; and as I revealed that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 53, a secret nuclear first-strike operation was then being attempted against Russia. It failed, and gold prices dropped off for several months. But now war danger is rising again.

The Bolsheviks here are becoming increasingly desperate in their war plans against Russia. If we as a people are ever going to act to save ourselves from final ruin, NOW is the time we must begin. The stakes are: life and death, peace or war; but the key to our own effective action is not military. It lies with the thermometer of war, GOLD.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—IAN FLEMING AND THE FT. KNOX GOLD SCANDAL

Topic #2—NARROWING OPTIONS IN THE BOLSHEVIK PLAN FOR NUCLEAR WAR Topic #3—STEP ONE IN WHAT YOU CAN DO.

Topic #1—Not many years ago millions were fascinated by the fictional exploits of an imaginary British spy. His name was James Bond, and he was the creation of the late British author Ian Fleming. It was Fleming more than anyone else who created the image of the modern "super spy." All the Fleming spy stories had two major characteristics in common that made them stand out. For one thing, every story was about a world-shaking situation which was kept secret from the public. The other common ingredient was always a dazzling display of secret high technologies of every description—things unknown to the public. These two unique features of his stories eventually catapulted Ian Fleming into world-wide fame. He was the undisputed leader

in his field. As always happens many others tried to copy him, and spy stories were all around us in the late 60's. But he always remained one of a kind. Try as they might, none of his imitators could ever match his work. It was as though he had a secret advantage, a secret weapon of his own—and, my friends, he did!

In writing his stories, Ian Fleming was drawing upon his own secret weapon. That weapon was knowledge. Fleming had been a high-ranking officer of Britain's crack Intelligence agency called MI-5. It was the British who practically invented and perfected the modern concept of Intelligence, and to this day British Intelligence remains the equal of any in the world.

When Fleming left Her Majesty's Secret Service to become a writer, he was severely limited in what he could publish. He was bound by the restrictions of the British "Official Secrets Act." Under that Act, Fleming would have been liable for punishment for revealing any official secret without authorization. And so Ian Fleming, the former British Intelligence officer, became what is known as a "fictionalizer"—that is, he started with factual knowledge but rearranged and modified it in order to create startling stories of fiction. He was always extremely careful about how he did this. He always knew that he was skirting the fringes of the Official Secrets Act. He could not afford to make a mistake, because it would have meant prison for him and possible forfeiture of pension rights; and so he always altered every situation, every secret technology, and every personality enough to avoid revealing actual secrets. It was a long and meticulous process both to protect himself and to make each final story readable. For that reason Fleming completed a new James Bond novel only about once a year. If it had all been imagination, as many people believe, he would have been capable of producing a new book every few months, making himself far richer. But because his stories were all rooted in fact, secret fact, he did not dare speed up and run the risk of making a mistake.

Ian Fleming had two purposes in writing his famous series of spy novels. One purpose, of course, was to earn a very comfortable living; but beyond that he was also trying to subtly open the eyes of the reading public by the medium of fiction. Because of the Official Secrets Act he could not publish the facts that he knew as fact without modification, so he did what he felt was the next best thing, and that was to use his stories to open our minds to at least think in terms which were otherwise hidden from us. Fleming truly believed that this was something which somehow had to be done, because knowing what he knew he was not an optimistic man.

More than three decades ago he could see that the public was beginning to be left behind by secret new weapons, new technologies, and new techniques to enslave us all. A public awakening was the only hope he could see to prevent eventual disaster, and so beginning in the early 50's Fleming started writing exciting fiction in order to hint at secret facts. His plan was "Fictionalize to open eyes." By the early 60's the one-man campaign of Ian Fleming was starting to gather steam. His fictional hero James Bond started gaining popularity in ever-wider circles; and even though his exploits were understood to be fiction, people were beginning to think of possibilities which they had never seen before. James Bond movies were in the works. After years of gradual growth, the power of Ian Fleming's fiction was about to explode into a world-wide craze. Countless millions were on the verge of being encouraged to think unthinkable thoughts about what goes on in secret. Simply by

encouraging people to think new thoughts for themselves, Ian Fleming was endangering secret plans of very powerful men—and he almost got away with it because they were slow to realize what he was doing. But just as the James Bond craze was beginning, Ian Fleming's plan was brought to an end. Sixteen years ago next month, on August 12, 1964, Ian Fleming died an untimely death at age 56.

By making us think, Ian Fleming had posed a real danger to secret long-range plans of a powerful few. And even after he was removed from the scene, his fictional efforts to awaken us could not be stopped overnight. The momentum of public interest was just too great because he had caught the imagination of millions upon millions. The James Bond craze could not be stopped, and so the other choice was to control it. Experts in propaganda and public deception studied the problem and quickly hit on the solution. Fleming's plan had been "Fictionalize to open eyes." He wanted to make us see possibilities which were being hidden from us otherwise; but with him out of the way, the new plan became: "Fictionalize to close eyes." It was a plan to make secrets more secure than ever by making the truth unbelievable to us, and this technique of blinding us through fiction has been a major factor on the American scene now for 15 years.

A perfect example of all of this took place with a book Fleming published 21 years ago in 1959. It was titled "GOLD FINGER." The starting point for the book was knowledge about certain secrets. Fleming knew that there was a long-range plan to create monetary chaos for private gain and power. He also knew that a central feature of the plan was to be the secret disappearance of America's monetary gold hoard at Fort Knox, and he knew that the kingpin of this international plot was a man with legendary greed for gold. His name: DAVID ROCKEFELLER. It was a plan that was totally unsuspected by the public. It was still the Eisenhower era, the heyday of the so-called "almighty dollar." The dollar was good as gold, because it was backed by the world's largest monetary gold hoard. Fort Knox was thought to be impregnable; and in those days, my friends, no one dared speak ill of the Four Rockefeller Brothers.

Ian Fleming decided to write a book that would begin to alert people to what was afoot. He could not tell the whole story, nor tell it as fact because of the Official Secrets Act; but by fictionalizing he was able to cause people to think of possibilities which would never have occurred to them otherwise.

For example, in the 50's it was a rare American who considered even the possibility of monetary turmoil. The dollar was good as gold, and that was that. Why even think about gold? Individual citizens could not own it except in jewelry. Wasn't all the rest of it thought to be sealed up in Fort Knox? Everyone knew no one could get in there, and so we didn't even think about it. But in his book GOLD FINGER, Fleming brought several key thoughts to our minds. He devised a fictional scheme to show that Fort Knox might not be impregnable after all. He raised the question: "What would happen to the dollar and other currencies if the Fort Knox gold were no longer available?" And he proposed the unthinkable thought that someone, if they were rich enough and greedy enough, might want to get their hands on America's gold.

The actual GOLD FINGER story, of course, was fiction; but the basic points which I have just mentioned were fact. GOLD FINGER was published in 1959; and barely two years later in 1961, the hemorrhaging of America's monetary gold supply began. Agents of David Rockefeller within the United States Government provided a cloak of authority called the "London Gold Pool Agreement"; and

then for seven years until 1968, big Army trucks loaded with gold bullion rolled out of Fort Knox constantly—and all without a word to the public!

Some of the gold shipments during those seven years were recorded on a list kept by the United States Mint. Almost without exception the shipments listed went to the New York Assay Office, where they disappeared without any further accounting. As you may recall, the New York Assay Office was the focus of a scandal in December 1978 involving missing gold. Over 5,000 ounces had simply disappeared; but that, my friends, was a very small tip of a very large iceberg, and so the controversy over the missing millions in gold at the New York Assay Office was quickly smoothed over and covered up. They could not afford to allow any real investigation which might let the public know the truth. According to the official list of shipments I mentioned earlier, a large fraction of America's monetary gold went to the New York Assay Office in the 60's. There it disappeared, never to be seen again.

But, my friends, the real situation was even worse. Long ago my sources gave me hard evidence of many large gold shipments from Fort Knox which were not even listed. Five years ago this month in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 I revealed a specific example of this. It was a shipment on January 20, 1965, in which four (4) tractor-trailers loaded up at Fort Knox and then headed for railroad tracks across the river at Jeffersonville, Indiana. My sources provided me with details, including photographs, of the operation. But the shipment was one of many which did not show on any official Government list of shipments.

In June 1975, Mr. Edward Durell and my other associates were able to confront officials of the United States Mint with this example of missing shipments, and for once the confrontation took place under circumstances in which the Mint was under great pressure to respond. In the most specific terms the Bureau of the Mint was asked what was shipped out of Fort Knox in the four tractor-trailers on January 20, 1965. The written answer dated June 19, 1975 came from the then Director of the United States Mint, Mrs. Mary Brooks. She confirmed that this unlisted shipment amounted to more than one and three-quarter (1-3/4) million ounces of gold—and, my friends, it was not junk gold melted down from old coins which were confiscated from Americans in 1934. The shipment was part of America's true monetary gold, good delivery gold which is .995 fine or better. After this admission in writing about an enormous secret shipment of gold out of Fort Knox, one would have thought that there would be fireworks, but not so!

My friend Mr. Durell showered the appropriate officials throughout the Government with this evidence of massive fraud at Fort Knox, and he notified the major media and all of the appropriate leaders in Congress about this evidence. For reasons which I will explain later in this message, I believe it's time to call attention to one of these people. He is Senator William Proxmire of Wisconsin, Chairman of the Senate Banking Committee.

Proxmire loves to parade as a great defender of our financial interests in Washington. He's famous for his so-called "Golden Fleece Award." Proxmire searches through the Federal Budget with a fine-tooth comb, and he's always able to find some project or contract which rightly or wrongly will look ridiculous to the public. He then trots it out, announces how much it costs, and with a great flourish gives it his Golden Fleece Award. By this and other means Proxmire is a master at maintaining his image as a protector of the American economy.

But if ever a situation deserved the Proxmire Golden Fleece Award, it is the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. The petty examples usually chosen by Proxmire fleece the American public out of perhaps hundreds of thousands or a few million dollars. It makes good publicity for Proxmire, but it's insignificant. By contrast, the Fort Knox Gold Scandal is fleecing every one of us out of the shirt on our back. It has undermined the dollar itself, which is on its way to destruction. It has set off ever-worsening inflation even while our economy is stagnating. The Gold Scandal is fleecing us all, but what has Senator William Proxmire done about that??

Let me tell you what he has, and has not, done. For more than five years Proxmire has been among the top American leaders who have been kept informed about major developments and evidence in the Gold Scandal. He has been given the evidence I mentioned earlier about the missing shipment from Fort Knox, as well as other evidence of major discrepancies; but up to now, Proxmire has kept his lips sealed about discrepancies about America's gold supply—with one exception. That exception took place in December 1978. Word had leaked out about the 5,000-or so missing ounces of gold at the New York Assay Office worth over $3,000,000 at today's prices. As Chairman of the Senate Banking Committee, Proxmire immediately jumped on the story. Frowning in disapproval, he proclaimed that this would have to be looked into. Hearing those words from the champion of the Golden Fleece Award, the public relaxed and quickly forgot about it. And almost as quickly, Senator William Proxmire made sure he forgot about it too. To this day, no real investigation has ever taken place over the missing gold at the New York Assay Office.

Proxmire's failure to follow up that $3,000,000 gold discrepancy was bad enough, but it's nothing compared to his apparent disinterest in investigating the truth about the Fort Knox Gold Scandal. The case of the missing Fort Knox shipment is a case in point. At today's prices, that one shipment alone was worth more than one billion dollars ($1,000,000,000)—not a mere million but 1000 times a million! And that, in truth, was only one example. There were many unreported shipments like that. That is why the Treasury figures, which show a huge remaining American gold hoard, are a fraud—a total fraud. And that's why the United States could auction off only a small amount of junk gold over a period of time and then had to stop. And that's why the United States dollar is no longer "as good as gold"; instead, it's fast becoming worth less than the paper it's printed on.

Senator William Proxmire, like many others trusted by the American public, has been given massive evidence about all of this; but his actions so far have helped only those who have taken our own gold in order to fleece us of everything we own. Later in this message I will have more to say about Senator William Proxmire and the Fort Knox Gold Scandal.

But for now I want to finish the story of Ian Fleming's aborted efforts to alert the public about things like these. As I already explained, his principle was "Fictionalize to open eyes"; but after his untimely death in 1964 his stories were seized upon and warped, especially in movies, for the opposite purpose. The new purpose became "Fictionalize to CLOSE eyes." Nothing could be done to alter and neutralize Fleming's books once they had been published, so instead attention was drawn away from the books to the James Bond movies; and as the movies were in preparation, disinformation agents were planted on the scene to guide the process. As a result, the James Bond who emerged on film was a very different character from the one in Fleming's

novels. The basic story lines remained the same, but in many subtle ways the psychology was radically changed. The movies retained the adventure, fast action, dazzling secret technologies, and bold plots which Fleming had pioneered; but by clever use of satirical humor, every James Bond movie ended up by laughing at itself. Secret weapons were exaggerated or twisted so as to make them entertaining but also ridiculous; and by filling the movies with strange characters and never-ending gimmicks, viewers were distracted from the underlying warnings of the basic plot.

The GOLD FINGER story was a perfect example of all this. Fleming's original novel called attention to something which most readers would never have thought about otherwise. That was the potential relationship between Fort Knox gold and international monetary chaos, and through his fictional plot he also planted the idea that the legendary Fort Knox bullion depository might not be invulnerable after all. But these lessons were rarely, if ever, realized by those who saw only the movie; instead, the typical viewer walked out of the movie laughing. It was obvious that what he had seen could happen only in fiction, and from that point onward he was programmed to react with disbelief if he should ever hear of tampering with Fort Knox gold. Such a thing could only be fiction—it was just too ridiculous ever to really happen.

This is the attitude I encountered more than seven years ago when I began giving public warnings about deliberate plans for economic chaos. I myself was first alerted to the Fort Knox Gold Scandal by none other than British Intelligence in London after completing a secret mission for Queen Elizabeth in Zaire; and in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, I outlined the overall plan, including the unseen role of America's gold. I had one major advantage which Ian Fleming did not have. The United States does not yet have an Official Secrets Act like that of Britain, and so I was not forced to fictionalize. Instead I was able to give the real plans and real names of those responsible for things to come.

The prototype for Ian Fleming's GOLD FINGER of two decades ago was none other than David Rockefeller, and in my book I showed in detail how he played his kingpin role in the plan to destroy our economy. I described how this was leading to a collapsing dollar, skyrocketing gold prices, a stagnating economy, spiraling financial problems for State and local governments, urban unrest, and eventually NUCLEAR WAR. But when David Rockefeller himself was interviewed about my book, even he resorted to the technique "Fictionalize to close eyes." His comment about THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR was: "Interesting science fiction."

But, my friends, the truth is always stranger than fiction. Today it is fiction that we believe, and fact that we don't believe. Most people still believe the fiction that David Rockefeller himself is still alive, but he actually died in a secret coup d'etat nearly a year and a half ago, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 43. What we see today is no longer David Rockefeller but only his image. My friends, the truth is the truth, no matter what we choose to believe; and what the late David Rockefeller dismissed as "Interesting science fiction" seven years ago is coming true today. Yesterday we would not believe. Today we are suffering. Tomorrow it will be too late—if we do not act NOW.

Topic #2—For more than two years now the United States government under the Bolsheviks has been dragging Americans down the path toward national suicide in Nuclear War. America's

controlling military strategy today is a kamikaze plan which I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 35 for June 1978. If there should be all-out war between the United States and Russia, the United States will be at a hopeless military disadvantage.

The Russians completely destroyed the rough military balance between East and West during the closing months of 1977. During those months, as I reported in AUDIO LETTERS No.'s 26 through 29, the Russians deployed their new secret Space Triad of manned strategic weapons. And since that time the Russians have had men in Space constantly on a routine basis.

Meanwhile, the United States can do nothing but sit and watch. Our famous Space Shuttle, already two years behind schedule, just keeps sitting on the ground instead of flying into space; and the biggest American space spectacular in the past three years was the alleged "Crash of SKYLAB", one year ago this month.

But, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 48, even that episode was a hoax. SKYLAB had actually been shot down twenty-one months earlier, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 27.

For more than two years we have been at Russia's mercy militarily. If the Kremlin were the real source of nuclear war fever today, the United States would already lie in smoking ruins. But it hasn't happened, and the reason it hasn't happened is something I've been reporting to you now for two and a half years. Those who formerly controlled the Kremlin, the atheistic Bolsheviks, control it no more. They have been overthrown and expelled by a secret sect of native Russian Christians.

The expelled Bolsheviks from Russia have been flocking in droves mainly here to the United States for a new start. And so, unsuspected by most Americans, the true relationship between the United States and Russia has been turned upside down. The Bolsheviks, who used to rule Russia, now rule the United States; and now that they are here they are still as vicious and warlike as they ever were in Russia.

If America were ruled today by reasonable and honest men, concerned for the welfare of all the people, they would take an objective look at our relations with Russia. On one hand they would see the military fact that Russia now has the means to level our country a dozen times over in a matter of minutes. But, on the other hand, reasonable men would also take stock of the fact that Russia has not unleashed that awesome capability.

Instead, the Russians have, so far, confined themselves to a piecemeal war of attrition against our own war-making capacity. Looking at all this, reasonable men would at least consider the possibility that Russia prefers peace to war.

And so our leaders, if they were reasonable and prudent, would at least open up meaningful talks with the leaders of Russia. They would at least make an honest effort to find out if war with Russia might be avoided without loss of honor.

But my friends, the Bolsheviks are now in control of America's policies and they are not reasonable men. They are obsessed with the Satanic frenzy for power. Their Creed is rule or ruin. They seek only their own personal gain, no matter what the cost may be to everyone else. They want to start over with a new and complete Bolshevik dictatorship here in America and from there work on outward in a new bid for World control. But Russia, controlled by the new breed in the Kremlin, stands in their way.

The Bolsheviks now entrenched here in America know that they cannot hope to destroy Russia with America's inferior military power. This is especially true because Russia's rulers, unlike our own, have provided extensive civil defense preparations to protect their people. But the Bolsheviks will be satisfied if they can only wound Russia grievously enough to badly disrupt Russia internally. The Bolsheviks here believe that they will accomplish their purpose if they can kill as many as 20,000,000 Russians in nuclear war. They are convinced that nuclear casualties that large will be enough to preoccupy the Russians with their own internal problems for many years. And that will leave the Bolsheviks here relatively free to make a fresh start with the smoking remains of the United States. They will be free to impose their own Bolshevik dictatorship on the haunted minority of Americans who will survive Nuclear War I.

In order to achieve their goal of killing 20,000,000 Russians, the Bolsheviks here will have to accept a nuclear war that will kill at least 160,000,000 Americans. To you and me a plan like that is insane. But to the Bolsheviks, those odds are very acceptable because, my friends, in Bolshevik calculations you and I don't count. We are expendable. The only losses which do matter to them are their own and the Bolsheviks believe that their own casualties in Nuclear War I will be very small, because they plan to choose the moment for war themselves by triggering a surprise American nuclear first strike against Russia; and because they will know when war is about to start they will be able to protect themselves. They plan to use their positions of governmental power to hide in government war bunkers throughout the United States .

When Nuclear War I erupts, the Bolsheviks here intend to be the main occupants of the 96 secret underground cities of the Federal Relocation Arc. They will pull down the "Temple" on our heads, while they themselves hide in safety.

There is now a dangerous and destructive war of cat and mouse going on between Russia's new rulers and the Bolsheviks here. Each side knows what the other is up to and their strategies against one another are in a constant state of flux. The Russians, for their part, know that the Bolsheviks want to throw America's nuclear might at Russia in a surprise attack. And as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 53 last January, the hardliners in the Kremlin are now in the driver's seat. Unlike the white dove faction who lost influence last October 1979, the hard-liners are convinced that nuclear war is inevitable, and so they are preparing the Russian people for war with America. But at the same time, they're using secret warfare to chip away and reduce America's economic and military strength. For example, Russian sabotage is taking a steadily rising toll of railroad tank cars, chemical plants, refineries, and other military targets. Have you ever asked yourself why all these so-called derailments involving chemical tank cars? If it were mere chance, it would often involve box cars, or coal cars, or flat cars, or automobile carriers, or maybe refrigerated cars full of milk. But no, to judge by all the supposed rail accidents, you would think that the trains are hauling nothing but toxic chemicals these days. And then there is Russia's expanding campaign of geophysical warfare. One aspect of this involves earthquakes and volcanoes like Mt. St. Helens, as I discussed last month.

Another aspect of geophysical warfare is weather warfare, which is now going on with a vengeance in the United States. One reason I tried so hard to record AUDIO LETTER No. 54 last February before I was overcome by my heart attack was to give a warning about weather warfare and food shortages to come. And

this summer, the weather has gone crazy all over the United States. The Northern Plains are in the grip of a drought worse than anything since the Dust Bowl of the 30's. The nationwide heat wave has taken over a thousand lives and is killing cattle, broiling chickens alive, and wiping out crops. And next, my friends, we must brace ourselves for hurricanes unlike anything ever seen in America.

Slowly but surely, the Bolsheviks here are being hemmed in by the Russians. For the past six months, the Russians have been gradually pulling the fangs of the Bolshevik dragon. As a result, the Bolsheviks here are gradually putting more and more of their eggs into fewer and fewer baskets. With their backs to the wall, the Bolsheviks here are concentrating on actions that go for the head of Russia. Their attitude is pure offense, even at the expense of neglecting anything of a defensive nature. For example, the Caribbean is now up for grabs. The United States is paying no attention. Instead the Bolsheviks here are trying to stir up problems for Russia around her own periphery. The Bolsheviks can't find a rope big enough to tie down the Russian Bear. So instead, they're trying to use a million little threads; and by means of their invasion of the Kremlin itself with genetic replicas, which I reported last month, the Bolsheviks are trying to unbalance the Kremlin.

I can now report that during April and May the Bolsheviks came very close to toppling the new leadership in the Kremlin. Within the past several weeks, Russia's new rulers have staged a strong comeback, but the battle is still raging; and all the Bolsheviks really want is a moment of weakness in the Kremlin, because very soon now they will have enough Minuteman TX traveling missiles deployed to make possible a first strike against Russia—thus triggering Nuclear War I.

My friends, some people have asked me why I revealed what I did last month about America's secret mobile missile—the Minuteman TX. The answer is that it is time for us, the American people, to wage preventive warfare. Ours must be a war of knowledge and truth—a war to prevent war. We need to stop the secret spiral of warfare by both the Russians and the Bolsheviks here, because you and I are the ones who are caught in the middle.

Topic #3—Centuries ago the founder of the powerful Rothschild dynasty proclaimed a principle which became famous. He said: "Give me the power to issue a nation's money, and I care not who writes the laws." Since that time the manipulation of money and its relationship to gold reserves has been a determining factor in world affairs. It has fueled ever widening struggles for world power. That's why Henry Ford, Sr. long ago said, and I quote: "War will not be abolished until its roots are cut, and one of its main roots is a false money system and the high priests thereof. The youth who can solve the money question would do more for the world than all the professional soldiers in history."

My friends, in my book seven years ago, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, I revealed the basic plan to bring on inflation miseries which we are all beginning to suffer today. They are leading toward economic catastrophe, unemployment, dictatorship, and nuclear war. But they are all rooted in economics and the control of money, and the deepest root of all is the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. So if you truly care about your country and want to help save it for yourself and for your children, the Fort Knox Gold Scandal is the place to begin.

In my mail lately I have noticed a dramatic rise in the number of people asking me: "What can I do?", and I believe that I know the reason. Years ago the warnings I gave about coming economic hardship and nuclear war sounded too remote to worry about; but now the economic problems are pinching all of us worse and worse by the day, and now the bright skies of yesteryear are giving way to the gathering storm clouds of nuclear war. Up until now I have generally resisted giving specific answers to the question of what we can do. There were many signs that people were asking without really wanting to do anything, and it simply is not enough to just stand up once, shout, and sit down again to watch the world go by, or to meet, eat, and retreat.

If you are really serious about wanting to do something, you have to be willing to stick with it, because America's enemies, both within and without, have learned how they can almost always defeat us. All they have to do is to close their mouths and wait. They just bide their time while we fuss a while then fall silent and forget about it. Then they go on their own way as if nothing had ever happened.

The only way to get results is to hang on like a bulldog. You have to keep at it in spite of one disappointment after another until something breaks loose. You cannot let them wear you out—instead you have to wear them out. A perfect example of this is provided by the efforts of my friend Mr. Edward Durell concerning the Fort Knox Gold Scandal.

Six years ago Mr. Durell started in much the same way as you could start now. He first learned about my charges concerning the denudement of America's gold at Fort Knox by reading about them in a newspaper. He had been concerned about the gold backing of the dollar for many years, but my charges were new to him. He decided to find out for himself whether my charges held water, so he began a very informal, almost casual way. He inquired of one or two officials, including his Congressman, whether there was anything to the story, and it was their responses that caused him to start digging deeper and still deeper seeking the truth—not because those initial responses confirmed what I had charged, far from it. Instead Mr. Durell discovered that he was unable to receive a meaningful, conclusive answer at all about it.

Most Americans today would have just given up at that point. The easy thing to do is to shrug your shoulders and say, "Well, I tried. I guess they won't tell me any more." But not Mr. Durell. He's a man who demands answers, and he refuses to be satisfied until he gets them. What's more, he knows what too many of us have forgotten—that under the Constitution it is our right, it is our duty to seek the redress of grievances; and so for every unsatisfactory answer he received, Mr. Durell responded by asking more questions of more people. He kept careful track of his correspondence including telephone calls, letters, telegrams, and personal meetings. He did not just swallow the replies he got but he analyzed them. With each official reply he asked himself: "Did this answer my question? If not, why not? Did they contradict what they have told me in earlier correspondence? If so, why? Does the story I get from Official A agree with the story given me by Official B? If not, which is correct?" By confronting people with their own official answers, or with their silence when they refused to answer, he began driving chinks into the armor; and because of his determined persistence, he long ago began catching them in mistakes—serious mistakes.

For six years now he has kept it up, and now through his own

efforts Mr. Durell has compiled his own file of extremely damaging evidence about Fort Knox. By these methods Mr. Durell long ago became an authority in his own right about the Fort Knox Gold Scandal, and he did it simply by refusing to give up. He has contacted numerous members of Congress, officials of the Departments of Treasury and Justice, and many others up to and including two Presidents—Ford and the alleged Carter. For his efforts he has received everything from stony silence to outright provable lies. He has worked long and hard for six years; and now if there were an honest, public investigation into the Fort Knox affair, his files might well lead to the imprisonment of some of the most powerful men in America!

The Watergate scandal was child's play compared with the covered-up Fort Knox Gold Scandal.

This brings me to the reason for my directing your attention to Senator William Proxmire, as I did in Topic #1. He's Chairman of the powerful Senate Banking Committee, and in that capacity he holds a position of prime responsibility and public trust to carry out an honest, thorough, and public investigation of the Fort Knox Gold Scandal. And so, my friends, I would strongly suggest that the starting point be the evidence about the huge missing shipment of gold from Fort Knox on January 20, 1965.

For five years now Senator Proxmire has ignored the evidence given him about that shipment, which was omitted from official Treasury records. At today's gold prices, this shipment would have been worth more than a billion dollars ($1,000,000,000)—one thousand million dollars! But more importantly, that missing shipment was only one of many which took place from Fort Knox according to my confidential information. It was only one episode in the overall program to make America gold poor; and so the missing gold shipment of January 20, 1965 points at the very heart of the causes for our crumbling economy today. But to this day, Senator William Proxmire has not lifted a finger to launch a Fort Knox investigation. I want to make it clear, however, that I have no evidence that Proxmire himself is involved in the illegal gold removals from Fort Knox, but I can prove that he has consistently ignored large amounts of strong evidence of catastrophic fraud surrounding Fort Knox. He's made a name for himself by handing out Golden Fleece Awards for petty matters—but he has ignored the Gold Scandal, which is fleecing the entire American people!

Up to now, Senator Proxmire has been seriously derelict in his duty to investigate publicly and honestly the Fort Knox Gold Scandal. But what matters most now is not Proxmire but the SCANDAL itself. IT MUST BE EXPOSED if America is to be saved. It's that simple, my friends; and so I'm about to give you "Step One" in my answer to those of you who have been asking me, "What can I do?" I emphasize that this is only the first step. If you choose to take it, my friends, then many more steps can follow; but I must also give you this clear warning: If you will not take this first step, nothing else can follow!! In the name of freedom, we must be heard. We must begin a concerted campaign to open up an honest, public investigation of the Fort Knox Gold Scandal, and we should all join together in directing our energies at Senator William Proxmire. It is his Committee which has the prime responsibility to carry out the necessary public investigation.

Our goal is not to attack Proxmire but to bring about the investigation of Fort Knox. To do that, Proxmire will have to have public support—just as General Brown depended upon public support in the Underwater Missile Crisis four years ago. And so

regardless of his inaction up to now, we must let Senator Proxmire know that he will have our support for a Fort Knox investigation. It is not his head that we want—it is the TRUTH about Fort Knox. Let us "open up" Fort Knox!

You may send letters, Mailgrams or telegrams to:

Senator William Proxmire

Senate Office Bldg., Wash., D.C.

If you want your message to be read and to have an impact, you must do three things:

1. Make it legible. If your handwriting is good, a handwritten letter is fine; otherwise it's better to type.

2. Keep it short. If you write a long rambling letter it will just go into the trash basket.

3. Be specific. Tell Senator Proxmire clearly, in your own words, what you want from him.

If I were writing a letter to Senator Proxmire about this, I would say something like the following:

"Dear Senator Proxmire. I'm writing to request your urgent attention to a vital matter that falls within your jurisdiction as Chairman of the Senate Banking Committee. I'm speaking of the allegations of Dr. Beter about massive fraud involving the United States gold supplies at Fort Knox.

Looking at our crumbling economy I'm inclined to believe Dr. Beter's charges that America has secretly become gold poor. Our economic problems today are exactly those which Dr. Beter has warned about for years, and yet I have never seen any effort by your Committee to prove him wrong.

I would like to believe your reputation as a defender of the public financial interest in Washington, so I hope that you will launch a full, complete public investigation of the alleged Fort Knox Gold Scandal without delay. If you will do so, I assure you of my strong personal support.

As a starting point, let me suggest a piece of evidence which Dr. Beter says you were provided some five years ago. This was the written admission by the then Director of the United States Mint that a giant gold shipment from Fort Knox took place on January 20, 19 65, even though the shipment was not shown on official Treasury listings.

I anxiously await your reply. I am keeping a copy of this message, and plan to show it, with your reply, to everyone I know. "

What I have just suggested is just to get you started. By all means express your own thoughts in your own way as much as possible; but whatever you do, be sure to keep a file for your correspondence about this. When you get his reply, don't be discouraged or surprised if it turns out to be an attack on my credibility, or lip service, or even silence. Just keep in mind that the Director of the United States Mint contradicted other Treasury documents about the missing shipment. That discrepancy has never been resolved, so don't let yourself be put off easily.

If you receive a reply from Senator Proxmire, you may want to show both your letter and his to your friends. And to give them

more background about it all, let them listen to AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975. That tape contains a great deal about Fort Knox and it's a good starting point. Beyond that, you may wish to follow up with more letters, always keeping a copy for your file. And in the months to come if I learn that people are taking this first step—and it's only a first step—I plan to have more to say. But now it's up to you, my friends.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

It is time to give you my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've tried to call your attention to several things. One is the fact that the danger of all-out war is coming closer and closer to the surface. Once again the Middle East is heating up as the possible fuse to set off nuclear war. War tensions are being excited primarily by the deliberate actions of Israel. The situation has become so critical that for only the 7th time in history an "Emergency Session" of the United Nations has just been held to discuss it.

Meanwhile the Bolsheviks here in the United States Government are being hemmed in more and more by the secret Russian warfare of attrition. Secret military projects are still under way here in America, but the economic and industrial base that supports it all is being whittled away.

A few days ago Mount St. Helens, the most spectacular example yet of Russian geophysical warfare, erupted again; and as usual, it came as a surprise to all the authorities. Only the day before, Washington State had started allowing tourists closer to the volcano because of its seeming stability. And the Russian weather war against America which I revealed last February is continuing, and Russia's geophysical warfare against America is still expanding.

Just two days ago two Russian cobalt bombs which had been planted in deep caverns in the Midwest were detonated. One was a short distance west of Cincinnati, Ohio; the other was under the northwest corner of the huge Fort Knox Military Reservation in Kentucky. The result was a strong earthquake called "extremely rare" by the United States Geological Survey. It registered 5.8 on the Richter scale, and shook 12 states from Wisconsin to South Carolina. It may have been rare before the era of geophysical warfare, my friends, but now anything can happen!

My friends, many people have been asking me the question, "What can I do?" I have given you "Step One" of my answer, which deals with the Fort Knox Gold Scandal. It is something we can do—if we will. Our goal must be to get back the monetary gold reserves which have been stolen from us, to restore strength and confidence to the dollar, and to revive honor and trust in a newly reborn United States Government—because only in that way can we hope to remove the causes of war which are now so imminent.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #57

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is August 31, 1980, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 57.

On an August morning 35 years ago, the world we live in suddenly was changed forever. The day was August 6, 1945. It began shortly after dawn that summer morning in southwest Japan. Japanese defense forces detected a single American bomber approaching at high altitude. It was heading for the City of Hiroshima. Sirens began to wail and Radio Hiroshima told residents to take cover. The American bomber, a B-29, was droning along six miles high, out of reach of Japanese Fighters and flak. It flew directly over the city, and on out of sight. A few minutes later it reappeared, flying back over Hiroshima in the opposite direction. Then it was gone. As the "All clear" signal sounded in Hiroshima, it seemed like just another false alarm like other false alarms before it.

There were many people in Hiroshima who believed that a real attack would never come to that city. There were all kinds of rumors that America would spare Hiroshima for one reason or another. Among other things, there was a large Christian community in Hiroshima. Even the mayor of Hiroshima was a Christian. There were those who were convinced that America was being merciful to Hiroshima for that reason; but less than an hour after the first "All clear" signal on that sunny August morning, Radio Hiroshima started to broadcast another air raid alert. Three more American B-29s were passing over the city; but before the announcer could finish his words, he and 80,000 of his listeners ceased to exist! They were consumed by a man-made sun in the middle of the city which boiled upward into a giant mushroom cloud. Afterward the United States War Department called it a "cosmic bomb."

Outside the zone of total destruction, Hiroshima was transformed instantly into a nightmare beyond imagination. The streets were filled with pathetic victims, whom the Japanese refer to as the "walking dead." These were people who had been scorched, irradiated, and dismembered beyond hope but who would take hours, days, or weeks to die. Men, women, and children staggered around in agony without comprehension of what had happened to them. Many had sockets without eyes, and bones without flesh in the aftermath of the unearthly heat wave from the bomb. Countless others had been poisoned by radiation from the blast or the fallout afterward. Within three months 50,000 more people died in Hiroshima.

Three days later it all happened again—at Nagasaki. Like Hiroshima, Nagasaki had led a charmed life free from American air attack; and as in Hiroshima, there were those in Nagasaki who had thought this was an act of mercy by the United States because Nagasaki was not only a Christian center but the very place where Christianity had got its start in Japan. But all the illusions evaporated in a nuclear fireball on August 9, 1945.

Today America is haunted by the quarter-million ghosts of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. Thirty-five years ago our country became the first in history to use atomic warfare, and today it is fast becoming our turn. Our Satanic leaders are trying to make us forget the human hell of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. Instead, they're trying to make nuclear war more thinkable to us. They want to close our eyes to the reality of nuclear war, because that is the only way in which they can trick us into accepting it.

The legacy of America's war against Japan in World War II is also returning to haunt us in another way. The Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor was brought about deliberately in order to get America into the war; and now the Bolsheviks here are turning all

of America into a nuclear Pearl Harbor—and for the same purpose. Today we are all on the front lines!

In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I revealed the plan by which the Bolsheviks here intend to provoke a Russian nuclear attack. It involves a deliberate false alert and the use of our secretly deployed Minuteman TX Mobile Missile. If the Bolsheviks here succeed in carrying out the plan, the United States as we now know it will cease to exist. Pearl Harbor USA will die in a thousand Hiroshimas, but the Satanic Bolsheviks here who now control our government will use our sacrifice for their own personal benefit.

My friends, these are the things that lie ahead for us unless we, the people, take action to prevent it! Under our CONSTITUTION, this is both our right and our duty.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—AMERICA'S NUCLEAR FIRST-STRIKE PLANS IN THE NEWS Topic #2—HURRICANE ALLEN AND RUSSIA'S EXPANDING WEATHER WARFARE Topic #3—"STEP TWO" IN WHAT YOU CAN DO.

Topic #1—Thirty-five years ago this month the age of nuclear warfare exploded into history at Hiroshima and Nagasaki. It was unleashed by the United States in a deliberate display of sheer mass destruction and stark terror. What America did to those two Japanese cities became the basis of America's entire doctrine of nuclear strategy. The basic concept was that America would never shoot first in a nuclear war. Instead we would hold the specter of Hiroshima and Nagasaki over the head of any would-be attacker. America's nuclear arsenal was aimed at Russian cities. Any Russian attack on the United States would have caused cities all across Russia to vanish quickly in nuclear fireballs. Knowing that, supposedly the Russians would never attack us. But early this month, on August 5, a drastic change in America's nuclear war strategy was made public. For the very first time ever the United States is officially adopting what is called a "counter force nuclear strategy." It has been made official by a document called "PRESIDENTIAL DIRECTIVE 59." The Directive states that America's prime nuclear targets will no longer be Russian cities. Instead the prime targets will now be Russia's military forces and political leadership.

This change in America's nuclear doctrine is so radical that it is provoking widespread controversy, especially overseas. Spokesmen here are trying to give it a sugar-coating so that we, the people, will swallow it easily. The official excuse for the new strategy is that it is intended to limit and deter nuclear war, and yet the same Directive demands preparations to fight a prolonged nuclear war—not just hours, but weeks or months. So what does all this really mean?

My friends, to see the answer you don't have to be a military expert. All you have to do is to use plain old common sense. For example, listen to some words from a Letter to the Editor published in the New York Times just a few days ago on August 24. Referring to the new American plan to attack Russian military installations, the writer says, quote:

"Does that mean that while they destroy us in the cities, our Commanders in their shelters would then destroy their military installations? Unless this is a charade to substantiate the production of more missiles, it must mean that the United States is preparing to start a nuclear war with a first strike."

It is signed: Kenneth Boss, Brooklyn.

Those few words of simple logic contain more truth than you will ever hear in the official excuses from Washington. Over two years ago, in AUDIO LETTER No. 36 for July 1978, I first revealed America's secret shift to a first-strike strategy. At the time not many people would believe me, but now we are drawing closer and closer to nuclear war itself, day by day, and as we do so the first-strike strategy of the United States is coming to the surface.

Last February 21, 1980, there was the statement of Defense Department spokesman Thomas Ross. He shocked reporters by saying that America "might shoot first" in a nuclear war—and now there is Presidential Directive 59! By proclaiming America's shift to a counterforce strategy, it further confirms the secret intentions to launch a nuclear first strike at Russia. And, my friends, there is more.

The drastic changes in America's military posture during the past few years have coincided with a hidden change in leadership of our country. The Satanic Bolsheviks who have been overthrown and expelled from Russia have seized control of America's government. Now they are dragging us down the road toward a war which will be nuclear suicide for you and me! But as I explained last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 56, our Bolshevik rulers do not expect to suffer and die like the rest of us. Instead, they plan to take full advantage of their first-strike plan for their own benefit. Last month I said, quote:

"Because they will know when war is about to start, they will be able to protect themselves. They plan to use their positions of governmental power to hide in government war bunkers throughout the United States."

Less than two weeks after I recorded those words in AUDIO LETTER No. 56, "PRESIDENTIAL DIRECTIVE 58" was leaked to the press on August 11. In the words of the New York Times the following day, quote:

"President Carter has ordered more effective procedures for protecting civilian and military leaders in event of nuclear war, including plans for the rapid evacuation of key government personnel from Washington to air-borne and underground command posts."

My friends, the Directive is concerned with maintaining what is called the "continuity of government"—their government only. You and I and our children are left to fend for ourselves.

Last month I explained that the Bolsheviks here are possessed by only one all-consuming goal. That goal is to mount a nuclear offense against Russia that will set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE. They don't care how badly the United States is beaten so long as they can wound Russia with at least 20-million dead. With that attitude, matters of a defensive nature are of no interest to the Bolsheviks here. Likewise tactical weapons which cannot be used to attack Russia are being given very little attention. A creeping paralysis is slowly crippling America's Armed Forces, and our secret Bolshevik rulers could not care less. Examples of this are all around us.

For example, consider the plight of the Air Force's premier fighter group at Langley Air Force Base, Virginia. It's the First Tactical Fighter Wing with a tradition of leadership that stretches back to the first World War. They fly America's

hottest new Air Force Fighter, the F-15, and their motto is "Readiness is our Profession"; but earlier this summer on June 7, the First Tactical Fighter Wing failed an Air Force readiness test. Of the 66 F-15s on hand, barely one-third were in condition to be put to use for missions. There simply are not enough spare parts or skilled maintenance personnel to go around! And elsewhere the picture is no brighter; for example, we often hear about America's supposed increased commitment to NATO, but readiness of the United States Air Force in Europe mirrors the situation I just mentioned at Langley. Funding to pay for flight operations and maintenance has been reduced—not increased. Instead, the Bolsheviks here are siphoning off every dollar to focus on secret preparations in their first-strike plan. Meanwhile Air Force units in Europe are hampered by inadequate spare parts, fewer flight operations, and declining proficiency of pilots as a result.

The story is much the same among the other Services. There has been heavy publicity over the past year or two about the problems of the Army, including the lack of spare parts and skilled maintenance. But the Navy is also in the same fix, especially in certain areas of naval aviation. The declining readiness of our non-strategic forces is a direct result of our Bolshevik rulers' preoccupation with nuclear-war preparations. Another sign of this is the never-ending rash of brush fires around Russia's perimeter.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 53 last January, I described how Russia's intervention in Afghanistan was triggered by extensive CIA activity in that country, and to this day large amounts of aid are being funneled to the rebels in Afghanistan by the CIA by way of Pakistan and China. As a result, Russia's involvement there has been extended far longer than intended, distracting Russia's leaders and siphoning off resources.

In southeast Asia the United States is pouring arms into Thailand, which is stiffening its stance against Russia's client state, Vietnam. Red China is receiving secret shipments of nuclear weapons from America, and just this month Russia's western flank has been shaken by the crisis over major strikes in Poland. As of now the Polish regime seems to have succeeded in defusing the bomb of possible revolution to the surprise of CIA-supported Labor Unions. They were hoping to provoke Russian intervention, making Poland a second Afghanistan, but Russia's new rulers have outmaneuvered the old Bolsheviks here. These are some of the many threads which the Bolsheviks are trying to use to tie down the Russian bear. They want to keep the Kremlin off balance and preoccupied while they prepare to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE .

In AUDIO LETTER No. 55, I described a major program in the latest Bolshevik plans for an American nuclear first strike, the "Minuteman TX Missile." The Minuteman TX, also known as the Traveling Minuteman, is America's real mobile ICBM. Behind the smoke screen of controversy over the so-called MX Mobile Missile, Minuteman TX Missiles are already being deployed. The Bolsheviks here intend to use them in connection with an elaborate false nuclear alert to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE. And they are in a hurry, they can't wait ten years to build all those so-called MX launching bases out West. Instead, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 55, the Minuteman TX system is being assembled fast. It borrows heavily from existing hardware of all kinds, and it's being deployed along existing railroad tracks in our northern states.

Barely two weeks after I gave the details in AUDIO LETTER No.

55, you may have noticed other hints about it in the news. During NBC Nightly News on television for July 14, 1980, there was a brief segment in which retired General John Singlaub made some remarks. He took issue with the MX Missile scheme which we keep hearing about. Instead, he said that the United States could regain superiority over Russia quickly, within two or three years; and what he proposed in place of the MX was what he termed a Quick-Fix Mobile ICBM which would not need the elaborate MX bases out West. General Singlaub's words that evening would have fit the Minuteman TX except for one thing. The TX is not two or three years away—it is being deployed right now!

The Bolshevik maneuvers to throw America into nuclear war are complex and constantly changing, and yet there is one ingredient that continues to figure in every plan. That ingredient is Iran. I first made public the crucial importance of Iran for an American first strike at Russia two years ago this month in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The particular strategy of attack which I outlined in that tape has already been attempted this past January 1980, and it ended in failure. But Iran continues to offer very tempting geographic advantages for any attack against Russia, and so one way or another Iran has so far been included in every Bolshevik first-strike plan against Russia that has been devised.

The Bolsheviks here know very well that they are working against tremendous odds militarily. For nearly three years since late 1977, Russia has been in complete control of the military uses of space, and Russia's Cosmostrategic umbrella is designed to make nuclear war difficult to start and impossible to win for any enemy. But our Bolshevik leaders here are determined to have their nuclear war, one way or another; and because their plan is a suicide plan for the United States as a whole, they don't care very much how they do it. So they are embarked on a series of plans, one after another, to set off a nuclear first strike against Russia. They intend to just keep it up until something works. But the Russians are just as determined to thwart each war plan as it is attempted, because in this way they are gradually pulling the fangs of the Bolshevik dragon. Even so, the Kremlin leaders are convinced that at some point the Bolsheviks will succeed in setting off nuclear war.

Our Rulers here have been operating on roughly a three-month cycle in their first-strike planning—that is, every three months or so they set a new plan in motion. Each plan is different from the one before, but they all have the same final objective. That objective is an American nuclear first strike followed by all-out war with Russia.

The first attempt at an American first strike took place late last January 1980, as I reported in AUDIO LETTERS 53 and 54. That attempt was based on an up-dated version of the plan which I made public two years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. There was no public hint about what was afoot other than a rapid build-up of nuclear war talk in the news. Russia succeeded in totally shattering the attack, inflicting severe losses on the United States in the process; and here in the United States the nuclear war talk suddenly went away.

Next came the so-called "Hostage Rescue Mission" into Iran in late April. I discussed that in AUDIO LETTER No. 55, so we'll not repeat it here. It was another total defeat for the United States, and that time it could not be hidden completely.

The third Bolshevik war plan was to begin with a supposed coup and assassination attempt on Ayatollah Khomeini in late July,

last month. The real Ayatollah Khomeini was already assassinated long ago, last February 1980, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 54, but that didn't matter for the purposes of the Bolshevik war plan. Part of the plan called for intense fighting at the United States Embassy in Tehran, supposedly in a new hostage rescue attempt; but the game plan called for that to fail in a way that would have aroused American passions and set the stage for military action.

In the July plan, Russian Intelligence agents were able to stop it before it even started. On July 7, Russia sent a warning to certain members of the Iranian government about the plan for a coup. Three days later on July 10 Iranian authorities announced that they had foiled a major coup attempt. For several weeks thereafter, the aftermath of the attempted coup was a story that grew larger and larger in Iran. Before it ran its course, over 600 people were implicated, including several high military officers. All kinds of details were published and broadcast about alleged financing and control from the United States, and some of the plans involving our hostages were exposed. United States Bolshevik agents on the scene wanted to make sure that all of this made no impression on us here in the United States, and so they arranged a diversionary action.

On July 10 the first announcement was made in Iran about the halted plot for a coup, but most Americans paid far more attention to another announcement which was made only a few hours later. We were told that one of the hostages, Richard Queen, was about to be released. We were told that this was a humanitarian gesture due to his illness, but that was not the reason for the timing of Queen's release! He had been ill for some time. The exact timing of his surprise release was a CIA ploy—it was solely to draw our attention away from the other major developments going on inside Iran.

The fourth Bolshevik war plan was scheduled for this October 1980, but that plan, too, may have been ruined before it could start. Two weeks ago columnist Jack Anderson tried to publish a series of articles about the October plan. The White House reacted with the usual angry denials, and many major newspapers refused to carry the columns he had written about it. In effect, he was censored by our Bolshevik government! But, my friends, Jack Anderson was basically right in what he wrote. Plans are being laid for an American invasion of Iran beginning on a limited scale. Jack Anderson's only major mistake is his speculation that politics lies behind the attack plan. The real motivation is much bigger than that—not politics, but nuclear war.

Through every avenue possible, our leaders here are drumming up American support for their war preparations. To do that they are tapping our pride and "can-do" spirit by raising false hopes about our military power. And a perfect example of this is the publicity which began suddenly about 10 days ago concerning our so-called "Stealth Plane." We're told that it's a new type airplane that is virtually invisible to Russian radar, and so it would be able to sneak undetected into Russia in order to attack targets there. The Government announcement on August 20 about our so-called Stealthcraft has led to confused reactions by many people. On one hand people are encouraged to hear that we have such a remarkable secret weapon to defend ourselves against Russia, but at the same time many people are wondering: If it's so secret, why is the Government suddenly talking about it??

My friends, the Government is releasing information about the Stealthcraft because they know it no longer matters. They found

out early this year that it is of no use against Russia. The public statements about the Stealthcraft have mentioned the fact that it has an unusual shape with rounded surfaces that can help evade radar, but they have not mentioned that the unusual shape has another purpose. That purpose is to enable the craft to perform properly when it is traveling under water instead of in the air. The Stealthcraft, my friends, is also known by another name. It is a "Submersible Aircraft", also known as a "Subcraft." The Government has just announced that it has been tested secretly for the past two years, but I made it public two years ago this month in AUDIO LETTER No. 37 because I believe you had a right to know. In AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I described how Subcraft were to be used in America's first strike against Russia, triggering nuclear war. And last January 1980 in AUDIO LETTER No. 53 I described what happened when our leaders here tried to carry out that plan. The Subcraft can evade radar, infrared detection, and other conventional means of sensing, but they are sitting ducks for Russia's master secret weapon, which I revealed long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. That weapon is "Psychoenergetic Range Finding" or PRF, which cannot be evaded or jammed by any known technique. Last January the squadrons of American Subcraft with Israeli pilots which tried to attack Russia were tracked by PRF. Russian Cosmospheres armed with charged Particle Beam weapons positioned themselves overhead; and when the order came for the Cosmospheres to begin firing, the Subcraft all disappeared in blinding columns of fire and steam. And so the Bolsheviks here know better than to try to use Subcraft, or Stealthcraft if you prefer, against Russia again. They are useless. As a result, they now have only one real value left, and that is propaganda value against you and me. They want us to believe the lie that we are militarily superior to Russia. They are determined to drag us all over the cliff of nuclear suicide. My friends, we are all on the front lines of NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Topic #2—When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 56 last month, I referred to Russia's expanding campaign of Weather Warfare against the United States. I first revealed that this was beginning last February 1980 in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. As I explained then, Russia's Weather Warfare is in retaliation for America's giant grain embargo against Russia. The embargo and other boycott techniques used lately by the United States against Russia have been imposed by the Satanic Bolsheviks who now control America's policies.

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 54 last February, I gave details of a major Russian breakthrough in weather control. It's a technique by which major storm systems can be created artificially at sea, then the storms can be guided to specific target areas, and the technique enables rain to be either withheld or released in torrents at will. I gave details about this new Russian weather control technique in the final portion of AUDIO LETTER No. 54. That is the portion which had to be released as an Emergency Transcript because of my heart attack. I was convinced that it was an urgent matter for you to know about this new threat of weather control; and sure enough, during the six months since then, Russia has used this new technique to make drastic changes in our weather. But to judge from my mail, some of my listeners do not seem to have read the Transcript carefully. That may have been due to their own immediate worry over my serious illness at that time; I don't know. In any case, I believe a few moments of review are in order, because Weather Warfare is leading toward food shortages as well as other problems, and you cannot protect yourself unless you understand why America's weather is going crazy.

I cannot repeat everything I tried to tell you last February, but let me just remind you of some important points. One is that the first test of Russia's new artificial storm technique took place last October 22, 1979 over the South Atlantic. It began with a mammoth double flash, which was spotted by accident by an old American Vela satellite. When word began to leak out about it, the Bolsheviks here in the Government launched a disinformation campaign to confuse everyone. They began by announcing the false date of September 22, and for a while they stirred up falsified accounts that it had been a South African or Israeli A-bomb test. Meanwhile, White House and other special study groups were created supposedly to try to figure it out. Last month, in mid July, the conclusions of the White House group, the Defense Intelligence Agency, and the Naval Research Laboratory were made public, and they all disagree. Some say it had to be a nuclear blast; others, that it could not have been—and the public remains in the dark. But in the Emergency Transcript portion of AUDIO LETTER No. 54 last February, I told you what the double flash really was. It was created by a twin Particle Beam blast from Russian weapons on the Moon. It was exactly the same double flash phenomenon that I first reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 9 for December 1977. The result was what I reported to you last February. To use the same words that I used then, quote:

"Tremendous quantities of sea water in the target zone flashed instantly into superheated steam. The hot water vapor and surrounding hot air started rising fast toward the stratosphere. Cooler air started racing into the target zone to fill the vacuum. The inward rushing winds began to swirl due to the earth's rotation, and the barometric pressure began dropping in the target zone. Within minutes the atmosphere above the target zone was a spiraling chimney of tumbling, rising air and water vapor. The world's first totally man-made storm cell was being born over the South Atlantic."

I then continued with details about the methods used by the groups of Cosmospheres in order to control the storm cell from that point onward. I described how electron beams are used in order to keep the water vapor airborne instead of forming into rain .

This basic technique has been used in order to interfere with natural cloud production this summer in the United States. The result has been an extended drought and killer heat wave over much of our country. And now the food shortages which I tried to warn you about six months ago are beginning to cast their shadow. America's spring wheat and corn crops have suffered major reductions, and other crops have suffered too. The effects are already beginning to show up in higher prices at your supermarket. And now, the specter of water shortage is growing worse by the day in some areas.

But the most dramatic Russian Weather War attack so far began just a few days after I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 56 last month, and it made use of the very techniques I detailed last February, scaled up and intensified. When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 56 on July 30, I referred to Russia's expanding Weather Warfare, and I gave a warning that, quote: "Next, my friends, we must brace ourselves for hurricanes unlike anything ever seen before in America."

As I said those words, Russian weather-control weapons were at work in the Atlantic Ocean east of the Caribbean. Taking advantage of favorable conditions, they were setting off tropical storm "Allen", the first of the season. Four days later, August

3, it began creeping into the news. It had just grown into "Hurricane Allen" and was growing fast. That night it pounded across the Island of Barbados with 125-mile winds. Then it changed course just in time for the center to miss Saint Lucia. Even so eight people lay dead as it pounded off into the Caribbean. By August 5, Hurricane Allen was making headlines as the "Hurricane of the Century."

As it made its way across the open waters of the Caribbean, it was already packing 160-mile winds, and still growing. By the next day it was rated a "Category 5" hurricane, the worst there is. Peak winds were 170 miles per hour; and Puerto Rico, 250 miles away, was receiving gusts up to 70 miles per hour. Hurricane Allen was a killer hurricane, rated the most dangerous ever to strike the eastern Caribbean; but for the first several days most forecasters in the United States were confident that there was no threat to our own coast line. It looked like it was heading for southern Mexico or Central America—but, in fact, Russian Cosmospheres were steering the storm. They were shooting for the narrow gap between Mexico's Yucatan Peninsula and Cuba's west coast.

Up to that point, the hurricane's path through the Caribbean was chosen for the least contact possible with land, for two reasons. For one thing, the Russians wanted to minimize the number of unintended victims and damage, but even more they wanted to conserve maximum force in the hurricane for the ultimate target—our own Gulf coast! This is why Hurricane Allen kept mystifying weather forecasters with its unexpected twists and turns. The only place in the Caribbean where Hurricane Allen swerved toward major land masses was in the vicinity of southeastern Cuba. The hurricane's eye had been heading straight for Jamaica, but at the last minute it turned and went between Jamaica and southwest Haiti. It pounded our naval base at Guantanamo Bay in southeast Cuba, and then moved further out to sea again. It bruised the tip of Mexico's Yucatan Peninsula but avoided populated areas .

Then it entered the Gulf of Mexico. Building up again, the "Hurricane of the Century" headed for the south Texas coast. The killer storm, with nearly 100 dead in its wake, headed straight for Brownsville. But the Russians were not interested in Brownsville, and they halted the storm while the center was still more than 90 miles off shore. Once again America's weather forecasters watched with mouths agape as another prediction fell apart. Hurricane Allen ignored Brownsville and started northward. Up to this point the Russian attack-plan using Hurricane Allen was right on track; but from this point onward, it started falling apart.

The Russians were hoping to strike three targets along the Gulf coast with the same hurricane. The intended targets were the Houston/Galveston area, then New Orleans, and finally Mobile, Alabama. This was to be done by keeping the eye of the hurricane at sea. The Cosmospheres were to guide the hurricane along the coast of the Houston area, then inward toward land to do as much damage as possible. Then they were instructed to pull the hurricane back out to sea to rebuild it before it could collapse over land. With its power rebuilt, the plan was to move on to New Orleans, repeat the process, and so on.

But Hurricane Allen was by far the largest storm system which the Russian weather warriors have attempted to control; and when they turned the storm northward at Brownsville, they started miscalculating. They were trying to make Hurricane Allen go against very powerful natural forces, and they tried to do it too

fast. Cosmospheres over the Gulf of Mexico generated proton clouds in the atmosphere at three points. These points were south of Houston, and south and east of the Louisiana coast. As I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 54, proton clouds are used to steer a storm system, but this time the Russians made a bad miscalculation in spacing their proton clouds. The storm did start northward toward Houston as planned and on the way did some damage to Corpus Christi, Texas, but the greatest effect of the proton clouds was not as planned. They badly disrupted the circulation of winds around the hurricane. As a result, the whole storm rapidly fell apart.

Thanks to the Russian miscalculation, the killer "Hurricane of the Century", Hurricane Allen, ended in anticlimax. But, my friends, the Russian weather warriors have learned from this mistake, just as they have learned from past mistakes. Artificial storms—rainstorms, hurricanes, or blizzards—are now a powerful weapon in Russia's arsenal, and the kamikaze war plans of our own Bolshevik rulers are causing these weather weapons to be used against you and me.

Topic #3—Last month I reported to you that more and more people are asking me, "What can I do?" I responded by giving you "Step One" of my answer. As I told you then, it is only the very first step. Many more will have to follow if there is to be any hope for our country. The old adage is still true that "the journey of a thousand miles begins with a single step"; and, my friends, we have a very long way to go.

I said last month that I would have more to say about what we can do—on one condition. That condition depended on YOU. I said that I would tell you more if, and only if, I received evidence that many of you are taking action; and I'm glad to report that up to now many of you are responding wholeheartedly in this campaign to try to save our land. For that reason I'm about to tell you what we can and we MUST DO next; because I emphasize again, we will accomplish absolutely nothing unless we stick with it. We have to embark on a campaign in which we refuse to be defeated, and it has to be a campaign that grows bigger and stronger—day by day, week by week. Numbers count; every single one of you counts! You count, and so do your neighbors and friends. The stakes are nothing less than FREEDOM and SURVIVAL itself.

I cannot in good conscience raise any false hopes about what we are doing. We have already waited far too long for there to be any guarantee of success; but if we do not act, we will guarantee failure! Knowing that there is action which you can take, you cannot avoid making a decision about what to do about it. If you just put it off, or can't make up your mind, that is a decision not to act; and if you decide not to act, then you are casting your vote against America.

If you do not act, you are voting for economic disaster, for Satanic Bolshevik DICTATORSHIP, and for America's destruction in NUCLEAR WAR ONE; because those are the things which are almost upon us unless we, THE PEOPLE, do our CONSTITUTIONAL DUTY to stop it. But if you are joining those who are taking action, then you are casting your vote for America. By demanding the truth about our nation's gold reserves, you are voting for economic survival, for freedom, and for prevention of nuclear war.

I believe that the time has come for all of us to do what is right simply because it is right.

Last month I explained that our campaign to SAVE AMERICA must

begin with our economy. Specifically, we must begin by bringing about a truthful accounting of what has happened to our country's monetary gold reserves, because the most basic of all our economic woes is our collapsing dollar; and it is collapsing because, contrary to official Treasury statements, our gold is gone!! Only a few small dregs of highly impure gold are left. It's like the so-called "Gold Medallions" which went on sale by the United States Government on July 15. These medallions are much lower in gold content than the advertising leads one to believe; and to make matters even worse, many of the medallions were botched during the alloying process. As a result, there is less gold near the rim than there is in the center of the medallion. Even the natives in the bush in Africa know that if the money is corrupt, the government is corrupt.

If we want to survive economically, politically, and militarily, we must clean out the corruption in our land, and the starting point to do that is to GET BACK OUR GOLD RESERVES and so return to an honest dollar.

Last month in "Step One" about what you can do, I urged each one of you to write to Senator William Proxmire of Wisconsin. I suggested that you urge him to open up a full public investigation of the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. As a starting point, I referred to the giant secret shipment of gold which left Fort Knox on January 20, 19 65—the very day Lyndon Johnson was inaugurated President!! Many of you have sent me copies of the letters you have sent to Senator Proxmire since hearing my tape last month, so I'm now going to outline my suggestions for "Step Two" in what you can do.

We must continue to concentrate on Senator Proxmire, but we need to do other things too. If you have not yet taken "Step One" which I outlined last month, PLEASE DO IT NOW! Join with the rest of us in this campaign. We cannot stand still, my friends—either we go forward OR we fall backward and fail.

"Step Two" in what you can do can be divided into three parts. Each one is something which is well within your power to do, and each one is important.

First, I want to give you access to more information which you can use as your ammunition in this battle;

Second, I want to suggest that you use this information in follow-up correspondence with Senator Proxmire;

Third, I want to point out how you can use the same information to start spreading the word to other people you know.

Let me begin with the matter of additional information about our gold reserves. This is printed material which you can use both to educate yourself and to alert your friends. First, my friend Mr. Edward Durell has published two (2) pamphlets which I would recommend as a starting point. One is titled: "52 UNANSWERED QUESTIONS REGARDING THE ALLEGED GOLD RESERVES OF THE UNITED STATES."

The other is the transcript of a speech by Mr. Durell titled: "HOW THE UNITED STATES LOST ITS GOLD RESERVES."

Both pamphlets give many facts, figures, names, and dates. Mr. Durell has agreed to make available a supply of these two pamphlets for distribution, without charge, from my national headquarters here in Washington. Anyone in the United States may obtain these two pamphlets by sending a large self-addressed

envelope, bearing proper postage, to my office. Be sure to send a business-size No. 10 envelope (not something smaller), and apply 28 cents postage. It will also speed things up if you will mark your envelope with the word "PAMPHLETS" in the lower left corner. Send it to me, Dr. Beter,

Suite 5092, 1629 K St. NW, Washington, DC 20006

My listeners outside the United States may receive the pair of pamphlets by sending your name and address plus $2.00 to cover Air Mail postage and handling.

There is also another place where you may now obtain additional information, and that is from a Congressman—DR. RON PAUL of Texas. On July 30, 1980, the day I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 56, Congressman Paul rose to speak in Congress. His purpose was to introduce a bill designated:

HR 7 874, THE MONETARY FREEDOM ACT.

The bill contains eight separate titles, but the first is the most important of all. Here is how Congressman Paul explained it before the House of Representatives, and I now quote:

"Title I requires the Secretary of the Treasury to perform a full assay, inventory, and audit of the gold reserves of the United States. This thorough study is to be completed within six (6) months of the passage of the bill, and double-checked by the General Accounting Office. The results of the study are to be sent to Congress so that the representatives of the people will learn, for the first time in almost thirty years, the true status of our gold reserves. The Congress will, in turn, release the information to the American people.

Although present law requires an annual inventory of our gold reserves, the law is not being complied with, and only a small portion of the reserves are audited each year. As any businessman knows, that is no way to conduct an inventory, and this Bill would correct that deficiency. Such a complete audit, inventory, and assay would lay to rest the persistent rumors that gold is missing from our national stockpile, and that the gold we have is of inferior quality."

(End of quotation from Congressman Paul's remarks.)

My friends, by introducing "The Monetary Freedom Act", Congressman Dr. Ron Paul has displayed courage that is rare indeed in Congress today. I strongly suggest that you write to Congressman Paul and request a copy of his bill, HR 7874; and while you are at it, be sure to express your appreciation and support for his efforts. The address is:

Representative Ron Paul

House Office Bldg., Washington, D.C.

It will cost you only a few minutes time and a few cents in postage to obtain your copies of "The Monetary Freedom Act" and Mr. Durell's pamphlets; and for that small price you will be rewarded with information that is powerful ammunition for you to use.

The next question is: "How do you use it?" The answer is that knowledge like this will be useful to you again and again. But for now, I suggest that you make use of these materials in two ways: One is for follow-up in your correspondence with Senator Proxmire, the other is in spreading the word among your friends

and neighbors.

In your follow-up with Senator Proxmire, it's time to write him again now whether or not he answered you last month. If he has answered you, by all means express your appreciation and take account of whatever he said. But as I warned you last month, beware of attempts to just brush you off, which are standard practice here in Washington today!

Up to now, not one of the many people who have reported writing to Proxmire has reported receiving a reply from him. If that is the case with you, let him know that ignoring you will not make you go away. In any case, I suggest that you call Senator Proxmire's attention to the Bill just introduced in the House of Representatives by Congressman Paul. You might ask him why it takes a junior Congressman to ask for the truth about our gold reserves instead of Proxmire—the champion of the "Golden Fleece Award." Urge him to contact his counterpart in the House, Congressman Henry Reuss, Chairman of the House Banking Committee. Both Proxmire and Reuss are from Wisconsin, so why should they not talk to one another?

Urge Senator Proxmire to take the lead in a Joint Congressional Investigation. Once you have written your follow-up letter to Senator Proxmire, I urge you to start sharing all this with your friends and neighbors. They're not likely to hear one word about it in the news, so I suggest that you begin by showing them Congressman Paul's "Monetary Freedom Act." Call their attention to what he said about the gold inventory LAW not being complied with for nearly 30 years regarding our gold reserves. Once they realize that this is a matter which has been put before Congress, they're likely to be more receptive to learning more about our plight. Of course you will find that many people will just close their eyes; but for those who are interested, show them what is at stake in the Gold Scandal—that is, our ECONOMIC SURVIVAL! And if you can, ask them to write to Senator Proxmire too. They don't have to be convinced that our gold is gone. All that matters is that they agree that we, the people, have a right to know, to learn the truth.

My friends, I have suggested guidelines for three things you can do as parts of "Step Two" in "WHAT YOU CAN DO": (1) Arm yourself with more information, (2) Follow up with Senator Proxmire, (3) Start spreading the word to others. It may sound like a lot, listening to it all at once, but just take it at one step at a time, at your own pace. Just do one thing at a time, BUT KEEP AT IT! That's what matters.

Ultimately our goal is very simple: Either the gold is there—OR—it is not there, and so the Fort Knox Bullion Depository will have to be opened up once again. It must be an honest inspection, unlike the carefully staged peep show of September 1974. It must include the crucial CENTRAL CORE VAULT, whose existence was never mentioned to the September 1974 visitors. That presents a problem, my friends, because the Central Core Vault is contaminated with Plutonium 239, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 5; but somehow it must be done because if it is not done, we will continue down the path to THERMONUCLEAR WAR!

It is now time to give you my "Last Minute Summary." Suffice it to say that we are drawing closer and closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. All-out war between the United States and Russia will be set off by the United States by means of a first strike. The closer we come to war itself, the closer these things are coming to the surface in the News! Only this month this was reflected

in two major policy announcements by the United States. One is America's unprecedented shift to a "counter-force nuclear strategy" against Russia—a first-strike nuclear posture. And along with that policy is its twin brother calling for better protection of certain governmental leaders in case of war. Our Bolshevik rulers are preparing to protect themselves while they sacrifice us on the altar of Satanic power.

I've tried to urge you to see for yourselves where we are heading, to stop and think of the true consequences of following our leaders into war, and to offer you some alternatives—some things that you can do yourself in an effort to turn the tide before disaster strikes. There's no guarantee of success if we do act, my friends; but if we do NOT act, there is a guarantee that OUR COUNTRY WILL DIE SOON in NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #58

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is September 30, 1980, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 58.

The fall of 1980 is turning out to be a season of re-runs. Television shows which were stale the first time around are being shown again, thanks to the actors' strike in Hollywood. And the worst acts of all are those of our so-called Presidential Candidates.

Administrations come and go, my friends, but the more they legislate, the more the country goes to the dogs. Millions of Americans are out of work, but inflation refuses to quit. Interest rates are heading up again, so say "Good-bye" to that new home. Our auto industry is on the ropes, our cities are decaying, our armed forces are falling apart, and at the center of it all our dollar is shrinking out of existence. The dollar is no longer "good as gold" because our gold is gone; and as long as it stays gone, all the campaign promises in the world cannot save the United States economy. The forces who stole our gold are bringing down America's economy, and now they are using our own gold to bring down war around our heads.

My friends, it's time to lift our eyes from idle campaign promises to cast our vote for America before it is too late. It's time for us, the American people, to use the gold weapon ourselves. It's time for us to vote for the TRUTH by bringing about a public investigation of the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL because only in that way can we hope to save our economy from utter ruin, and only in that way can we seize a weapon big enough to stop those who are dragging us all into the insanity of NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—AMERICAN GOLD AND THE IRAQ-IRAN WAR

Topic #2—RUSSIA'S FIRST STRIKE AGAINST A TITAN-2 MISSILE

Topic #3—"STEP THREE" IN WHAT YOU CAN DO.

Topic #1—The world we live in today, my friends, seems more and more like a roller coaster. Only a short month ago we were hearing about the worldwide oil glut. There were predictions

that it could easily take one or two years for the oil surplus to fade away, but rosy projections like those always seem to set the stage for trouble. This month of September got off to a bad start as the dollar fell to the lowest level in five years on Money Markets world-wide. Something ominous was in the wind. You and I were not told about it, but a new crisis was brewing between Iran and Iraq.

On September 9 Great Britain shut down its Embassy in Tehran, saying it was becoming too dangerous. Iraq and Iran were squabbling over their border, and the dispute was heating up. Iraqi troops invaded northwestern Iran seizing some 90 square miles of Iranian territory. Then on September 17 after the fact, Iraq tore up the 1975 Border Treaty with Iran. Next the air war erupted between the two countries. On September 22 Iraq and Iran bombed each other's air fields, and the very next day two OPEC nations, Iraq and Iran, began destroying each other's oil installations. The headline in the Washington Post for September 24, 1980 said it all: "IRAN BOMBS BAGHDAD. FULL SCALE WAR ERUPTS."

The present fighting between Iraq and Iran was started by Iraq. For many years we've heard about the status of Iraq as a Russian client state; and with the war now under way, we are always reminded of this by the controlled major media of the United States. But what is not reported to you and me, my friends, is Russia's reaction to Iraq's latest actions. The Russians have sent very blunt warnings to Iraq that they are not pleased, and have shut off arms shipments to Iraq. The Russians are saying basically: "We gave you arms to defend yourself against Israel—not to invade Iran."

During roughly the past year and a half little noticed changes have been taking place in Iraq. Those changes have been orchestrated in parallel with those in neighboring Iran. Iraq's new strong man, Saddam Hussein, came to power in a bloody coup d'etat. At the time all eyes were on Iran instead, but now thousands of Iranian military personnel from the Shah's former regime are now in Iraq. They are fighting on the side of Iraq, hoping to regain power in Iran by military means.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 last November 1979, I described how and why agents of the Rockefeller cartel brought to ruin the late Shah of Iran. The Islamic revolution of Ayatollah Khomeini was secretly helped along as a maneuver to oust the Shah. The Ayatollah was ushered into power by forces which he did not understand; but as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 52, those forces plan to undo it all. What I told you then was, quote: "They plan to martyr the entire Khomeini government as they set off thermonuclear war." The real Ayatollah Khomeini himself was assassinated last February 1980, as I reported that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 54, but he was replaced with a "double" to maintain the image of the Ayatollah as an enemy—someone for the Americans to hate.

Now by way of Iraq, pressure is being put on Iran. The ultimate goal is to make the present government of Iran disintegrate in chaos, but you can expect many twists and turns along the way.

Like Iran, Iraq is only being used as a part of a larger plan. There may well be double-crosses within double-crosses. Almost anything can happen, but watch for efforts to lure Russia into the Persian Gulf, just as she was lured into Afghanistan.

The main forces which have brought about the Iraqi attack on

Iran are not those of the United States government itself. Instead, the situation in Iraq right now is dominated by the old Rockefeller oil interests. These are headed and tightly coordinated by John J. McCloy and his associates.

Since the spring of 1979 I have reported that the Rockefeller cartel as a whole is now headless and beginning to crumble, but that is not yet true of the oil companies within the cartel. They still intend to complete their long-range plan to recapture undisputed domination over Iran, and they are working closely with their private Israeli counterparts here and abroad to accomplish this. Their destruction of the Shah's regime was only the first half of their plan. The second half is to get rid of the interim government now in Iran, the so-called Khomeini regime. They want to destabilize the situation in Iran and take advantage of the chaos that follows. When the smoke clears, "Big Oil" plans again to own Iran lock, stock, and barrel; and at the same time the Bolshevik secret government here plans to take advantage of the same events to bring us closer to nuclear war.

Ever since 1914, war after war has been fought over oil. Governments have been destroyed, others created, and still others subverted; and whenever there is war for oil, gold is always the trigger. Gold is such an important weapon of war that in early 1968 the Joint Chiefs of Staff became very alarmed over the depletion of America's gold supply. They visited their then President Lyndon Johnson in the White House. In an angry confrontation they demanded that Johnson not reduce the gold stock still remaining because it was needed for purposes of war.

The Rockefeller interests, now under the control of John J. McCloy and associates, arranged earlier this year for eight billion dollars ($8,000,000,000)—that's eight thousand million dollars—in gold to be paid to the leader of Iraq, Saddam Hussein. A very special private underground warehouse in Zurich was used in this transfer of gold. This gold was an outright bribe. It was to persuade Iraq to attack Iran. Eight billion dollars, my friends, is a lot of money, but it was a cheap price for the Rockefeller oil cartel, and for two reasons:

First, the gold which was used to bribe Iraq to start the war was part of the gold which was stolen from you and me! The bulk of the gold taken from America's stockpiles was flown to Europe on multinational corporate jets. So, my friends, that $8-billion in gold did not cost the oil companies anything except some jet fuel, but it cost you and me part of our monetary gold, and it has been used to start a war for which you and I will pay even more .

Eight billion dollars in gold was a cheap price for the oil companies for another reason too. If their plans are successful, the Rockefeller oil group will get back complete control over Iran's oil and other natural resources, and they won't have to pay those untold billions in oil royalties to their new Iranian lackeys.

As I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 52, the time came when the oil companies could no longer control their former puppet, the Shah—so out he went. They could also not control for long the real Ayatollah Khomeini—so he was killed. But if their war on Iran by way of Iraq succeeds in its ultimate purpose, the Rockefeller oil companies will once again constitute the Iranian state.

The oil interests under John J. McCloy are playing ball with the invisible Bolshevik government here in the United States.

For the moment, they both want the same thing in Iran—that is, instability and turmoil—so they are working hand in glove to create an explosion in the Persian Gulf. But the oil companies could end up finding that even they have been used by the Bolshevik secret government here in the United States; because if the Bolsheviks have their way, all-out war will come before the oil cartel can consolidate their gains in Iran.

Last month I revealed that the Bolsheviks here are following roughly a three-month cycle in triggering new war plans. The coming month of October 1980 is another critical month in that timetable; and sure enough, right on schedule, the Iraq-Iran war is boiling over. The United States Naval Fleet in the Indian Ocean is now being bolstered by units from our Mediterranean Fleet. At the same time, the United States is trying to get Australia, France (which is very reticent), and Great Britain to join in with their navies as well. At the same time, our Bolshevik Administration is sending four AWACS airborne battle control airplanes to Saudi Arabia. Cargo planes and several hundred support personnel are also on the way. The public excuse is that this is to keep open the critical Strait of Hormuz to keep the oil tankers moving; but, my friends, it may well lead instead to an oil cut-off, and that will produce not only higher oil prices but also a "national emergency" here in the United States as we shift step by step onto a war footing.

Topic #2—Three years ago today on September 30, 1977, I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 26. In that tape I reported that the most decisive battle of the 20th Century had just taken place in space. It was the "BATTLE OF THE HARVEST MOON", September 27, 1977. It was history's first true battle in space, and in a stunning upset the United States was defeated by the Soviet Union. From that day onward, Russia began evicting the United States from the military use of space. The true military balance between East and West was turned upside down. Since that time the United States has been dealing from weakness on the world stage. But our secret Bolshevik government is unwilling to abandon its secret plans for world domination; and so out of weakness America has shifted to a first-strike nuclear strategy against Russia. Lately this dramatic shift in America's military posture has started coming to the surface in the news. For example, last month "Presidential Directives" 58 and 59 were made public. One Directive, No. 59, officially commits the United States to a first-strike nuclear posture known as "Counterforce Targeting" of our missiles. The other Directive, No. 58, is to step up preparations for our Leaders to hide in safe war bunkers just before they set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE. And what about you and me and our children? We are supposed to just wait patiently until the air raid sirens start blaring all around us.

Our shift to a first-strike nuclear posture actually began over two years ago in secret. I first reported this change in AUDIO LETTER No. 36 for July 1978; and the following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I gave details of the secret first-strike plans then being prepared. In AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I reported that America's secret plans for a first strike were producing a response in kind by the Kremlin. The Russians had learned about the plans of our own secret government for a first strike and so they were planning to turn the tables. By allowing the United States to start the process, the Russians were planning to obtain an excuse for their own first strike against us, but I can now report that the Russian first-strike strategy has changed in very important ways. My friends, it is already under way!

On both sides the strategic plans for NUCLEAR WAR ONE are in a constant state of flux; and as it happens, the changes on both

sides during the past two years can be illustrated with a single weapon. That weapon is America's giant Titan-2 Missile. The Titan-2 is an old missile. It began to be deployed some 18 years ago in 1962. It is a liquid fuel rocket unlike our newer Minutemen which use solid fuel. It is a maintenance headache, and we do not have a large number of them, my friends. Only 54 were deployed originally.

But the Titan-2 has one advantage which has become very important to our Bolshevik secret government. That advantage is sheer size. It has a pay load capability, called throw-weight by the military, which is many times larger than that of a Minuteman. That gives the Titan-2 a special value for modification to new missions which were not originally planned.

Some two years ago one of these major modification programs was carried out on Titan-2 Missiles. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 37, they have been modified for fractional orbital bombardment. Normally American missiles are aimed over the North Pole at Russia, but that is no longer the case with the Titan-2s. When war begins, the Titans will be launched in many different directions, and they will not follow the normal ballistic trajectory of a standard ICBM; instead, they will accelerate all the way to orbital speed. They will then race around the globe toward Russia. They will approach Russia from all directions, not just from the north; and they will arrive at twice the speed of other missiles. As they approach their targets, the warheads will retrofire out of orbit. From there they will rain destruction on their Russian targets—at least that is the plan.

American military planners believe that they can succeed in getting at least a few of the Titan-2s launched in spite of Russia's Cosmospheres on patrol overhead. They also believe that the short flight time of the Titans will keep them safe from Russia's manned-killer satellites, the Cosmos Interceptors.

Finally, the secret planners here believe that the Russians will find terminal defense impossible. The Titan warheads will simply arrive from too many directions for effective anti-missile defense, but last February 1980 I reported that Russia does plan to have an effective last-ditch defense to shoot down any incoming ICBMs. The Russians began work on it in June 1978, two months before I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 37. It is a "Flying Anti-Ballistic Missile System." It is made up of Charged Particle Beam Weapons carried by Russia's supersonic transport, the TU-144. The TU-144s were suddenly removed from service without explanation in June 1978, and now I can report to you that the TU-144 Flying Anti-Missile System is fully operational in Russia.

Meanwhile America's fleet of Titan-2s is beginning to dwindle. On August 24, 1978, an accident, supposedly, crippled a freshly modified Titan-2 at Rock, Kansas. It made headlines with a massive leak which sent poisonous reddish-brown fumes towering into the sky. The huge missile was ruined. Scratch one—53 left.

Now, my friends, the Titan-2s are being modified again. This time only the warhead is involved. They are still programmed for fractional orbital bombardment, which requires use of a smaller warhead than normal, but now compact new generation warheads are being installed on the Titan-2s. Each packs a 24-megaton wallop—that's over 1000 times more powerful than the Hiroshima A-bomb! But the most deadly feature of the new Titan-2 warheads is their cobalt jacket. The Titan-2 warhead is a doomsday weapon designed to create vast amounts of deadly radiation over wide

areas for a generation.

The Bolsheviks here are well aware of Russia's vast Civil Defense setup. They know that unlike the United States, Russia's rulers have tried to insure that as many Russians as possible will survive a nuclear attack; but the Bolsheviks here plan to make those preparations useless. Even if the Russians stay underground for a year, or two years, or five years, eventually they will have to come out of their shelters; and if they do so after an American cobalt bomb attack, they will still die. And so one way or another, the Russians intend to make doubly sure that no Titan-2 succeeds in bombarding Russia.

For nearly three years I have reported that Russia's levitating weapons platforms, the Cosmospheres, can blast our missiles in their silos; and this month on September 19 that is exactly what was done! The target was a Titan-2 in its silo near Damascus, Arkansas. The Russians were sending a message to our Bolshevik secret government. Their war of attrition against America's war-making capability is now being stepped up. The Russians are now embarking on their own new version of a first strike—one target at a time. Russian Intelligence learned several months ago about the plan to retrofit the Titan-2s with cobalt doomsday warheads. The decision was made to destroy one of these retro-fitted missiles in its silo at the first favorable opportunity.

The Titans are notorious for their leaks during maintenance. It was decided that the first major leak of a retro-fitted Titan-2 would be used as a cover for the Russian strike. On Thursday September 18 the Russians got the chance that they were waiting for. Around 6:45 that evening a retro-fitted Titan-2 with a cobalt doomsday warhead was being worked on in its silo near Damascus, Arkansas. Suddenly, we are told, an accident took place which has no parallel since the Titan-2s became operational 18 years ago. Supposedly a wrench was dropped, knocking a hole in the side of the missile. In any case, the Russians had the leak they wanted to provide a cover for what they were about to do.

For more than eight hours Air Force personnel worked steadily but without great urgency to try to fix the leak. Meanwhile the silo door remained closed to avoid attracting attention. The main worry at the time was not an explosion but toxicity of the fumes. As Air Force Secretary Hans Mark testified to Congress on September 24, quote: "The technical experts did not expect any explosion at all." As one crew after another entered and left the Titan-2 silo in protective suits, a Russian Cosmosphere was floating high above in the stratosphere. They waited until after most of the nearby residents had been warned and evacuated. Then at 3:01 A.M. the Cosmosphere crew received the order to open fire. Their Charged Particle Beam weapon had for hours been aimed and ready, locked onto the center of the huge silo door. The door, made of concrete and steel and weighing 740 tons, was designed to withstand a near-miss of a 10-megaton H-bomb; but it was no match for the Charged Particle Beam. In a fraction of a second the Beam blew a hole through the silo door. As the door buckled and twisted, the Beam created a tremendous shock wave inside the silo. The fragile outer shell of the missile instantly was crushed like an egg shell. The fuel and oxidizer tanks ruptured in a thousand places, and the propellants ran together. As long as they are kept apart the fuel and oxidizer of the Titan-2 offer very little danger of explosion; but they are of a type called hypergolic propellants—that is, the moment they contact each other they ignite—and that is what happened in the missile silo. Huge amounts mixed instantly as the missile

crumpled inward. The result was a tremendous explosion. It threw the already ruined silo door all over the countryside, and the mighty Titan-2 launched its doomsday warhead not into Russia but into the Arkansas pasture a few hundred feet away.

And so, my friends, there were really two explosions at the Titan-2 missile silo. First was the explosion of part of the atoms of the silo door itself when it was hit by the Particle Beam, and that in turn triggered the second explosion—that of the missile itself in the silo. Several eye witnesses described this double blast in various ways; but the clearest description was given by two injured Air Force personnel—Sergeants Michael Hansen and Archie James. Their statements in a September 21 news conference were reported the next day in the New York Times. The Times said, quote:

"The two men said that they were about 100 feet from the missile silo when the first of two explosions occurred. They agreed that there had been one smaller explosion first, which knocked them to the ground, before a much larger explosion with monstrous force."

After the explosion, the Air Force mystified everyone with its nervousness about the warhead. After all, everyone knows an ICBM carries a nuclear warhead, so why not admit it? Now, my friends, you know why. They were desperately afraid that there might be a 'slip of the tongue' by someone about the new doomsday cobalt warhead of the Titan-2, and so strict orders were given to say nothing at all about it. For our Titan-2 Missile Fleet the score is now: scratch two, 52 to go. The Russians are hoping to bring about a shutdown of the Titan Missile force by means of public outcry if possible; but if not, they intend to make sure in other ways that not one is ever launched at Russia. The Titan-2 with its new 24-megaton cobalt warhead is a first-strike weapon of our Secret Government.

But the Russians too, are making use of cobalt bombs in their first-strike strategy against the United States. The Russian cobalt bombs are a totally different design—not for use in the atmosphere but under ground and under water to generate earthquakes.

Two months ago on July 28 an earthquake took place in the Midwest that shook 12 states. Geologists in that area were mystified, saying that it seemed like an impossible earthquake. There are no known faults in the area where it was centered not far from Fort Knox, Kentucky, but in AUDIO LETTER No. 56 I reported how Russia brought about that seemingly impossible earthquake using two underground cobalt bombs.

Last month this Bolshevik Administration announced that Russia's leadership is now a No. 1 target in its first-strike posture, and Russia is responding in kind, my friends. The real headquarters of America's secret government is not here in Washington, D.C., but in New York City, and now feverish preparations are under way to create an impossible earthquake in New York City as part of Russia's new first-strike campaign against the United States!

Topic #3—When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 57 last month, I mentioned that I had not yet received any reports of replies by Senator Proxmire to your letters; but since that time many of you have let me know that he has answered you, and many of you have sent me copies of the letters that he sent you.

My friends, in my two previous tapes I cautioned you to beware of any attempts to just brush you off. If you have never written

to anyone in Congress before, you may have felt that you got a very responsive reply from Senator Proxmire. If so, I suggest that you stop the tape at this point and restart it with your letter from Senator Proxmire in hand. Please follow along word for word. I'm about to read to you what you are likely to have received. If your letter differs from what I am about to read, by all means please send me a copy.

First: The date at the top is likely to be August 27, September 4, or September 9. Other dates are also possible, but large batches were sent out on those dates.

"Dear (so and so): Thanks so much for your recent letter concerning the allegations initiated by Dr. Peter Beter concerning massive gold thefts from the United States Treasury at Fort Knox, especially an unrecorded shipment which occurred in 1965. While this precious metal is no longer needed to back up our currency, I can certainly appreciate your concern in this issue.

Similar concerns were expressed in 1974 at which time former Treasury Secretary Simon invited all members of Congress to participate in a personal inspection of the reserves held at Fort Knox. Several members joined in the tour at that time. In addition at the request of the Congress, the General Accounting Office and the Treasury also completed an audit of the gold reserves. The General Accounting Office is an investigative arm of the Congress as you may know, and participates in the yearly audits of the Treasury's gold reserves.

As to the situation which took place in 1965 concerning the missing shipment of gold, I am asking the Treasury's Inspector General to give me a complete report. Once I have this information, I will be in a better position to determine whether any future action is warranted.

I appreciate your interest in this important matter.

Sincerely, William Proxmire, Chairman."

The signature, which looks for all the world like a personal signature, is "Bill Proxmire." It looks pretty good, doesn't it? The tone is friendly, and it looks like a personal letter and that is what you are supposed to believe it is; but, of course, if your letter coincided with the one I just read, you know now that it was not a personal letter. It's just one of many identical letters churned out like popcorn by a

computer-controlled typewriter. Even the signature, which looks so real, is made by a special signature-duplicating machine. If you have a neighbor who also received a letter, put one on top of the other and hold them up to the light and you will find that the computerized typing is identical; and you will also discover that the signatures are identical, unlike real signatures. They may be in slightly different positions on the two letters, but by moving them around you will be able to make the two signatures coincide.

My friends, the computerized letter is used by Senators and Congressmen today for several reasons. For one thing, of course, it saves work. For another, it makes constituents feel good thinking they have received a personal reply, but most of all it helps Senators and Congressmen avoid involving themselves in many issues. When you receive a personal letter from a busy Senator or Congressman you may wonder, "Am I the only one who wrote about this?" Most people, if they think that, will just give up; and so the computerized letter is designed to encourage you to feel

isolated. Notice that the letter I just read you from Senator Proxmire sounds as if he is answering you alone. He avoids mentioning that many others have written to him about the same thing, but you should know that in Congress every letter is considered to represent at least 500 people.

Now I invite you to look more closely at the actual content of Senator Proxmire's computerized letter to you. It's filled with red flags.

First, in paragraph 1 is his statement that gold is no longer needed to back up the dollar. That is red flag No. 1. It goes against common sense, history, and daily news about gold prices and the dollar. Senator Proxmire is parroting the old Rockefeller line which was used years ago to calm us, to deceive us, while they phased gold out of Fort Knox and into their own pockets.

The second paragraph is worded to convey the impression that all this has been looked into and found to be untrue. But read it carefully, my friends. You will discover more red flags.

For example: He mentions the so-called "tour" of the Fort Knox Bullion Depository in 1974, but a tour is not an "inventory", and not one of the visitors to Fort Knox in September 1974 was a specialist in gold. What is more, the visitors were not even told about, much less shown, the actual gold vault itself! This is a huge maximum security vault which occupies the central portion of the Depository building and extends well below ground. Instead, the visitors were allowed to enter only one small jail-cell-like compartment to look at some reddish-tinted alleged gold bars. In AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975 I gave details about all this. The Fort Knox tour of 1974 cited by Senator Proxmire was just a peep show amounting to a total fraud.

Then he refers to the so-called "audit" of our gold reserves by the General Accounting Office and the Treasury. Another red flag, my friends, because an audit is not a physical inventory or count of the gold itself. An audit is only an examination of the books; and from the very beginning my charge has been that those books are fraudulent and therefore useless. And to make matters worse, the Audit Committee consisted of 13 Treasury personnel with only two (2) GAO personnel tagging along to make it look good. I described that entire episode in detail in my AUDIO BOOK talking tape entitled "THE FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL... AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU" of March 1975.

Paragraph 3 of the Proxmire computer letter is a tradition in Congress today. It's called "Pass the buck." But he does not even pass it to an objective agency! For example, he could have referred it to the General Accounting Office; at least the GAO is an arm of Congress itself, as Proxmire himself mentions. But NO, you wrote to Proxmire about the Treasury's failure to account for a gold shipment worth over $8-billion today. And whom does he ask to look into it?—why the Treasury itself!

Actually the only thing resembling concrete action mentioned in the letter is Proxmire's request for a report from the Treasury's Inspector General. So it seems appropriate to take a few minutes to tell you about Proxmire's previous experience with the Treasury Inspector General. The occasion was the scandal that erupted in December 1978 over missing gold at the New York Assay Office. As you may recall, there were news reports at the time that some 5,200 ounces of gold could not be accounted for. The story was brought to light only because of the determined efforts of a dedicated group of employees at the New York Assay Office.

These employees known as the "Whistle Blowers" tried for years to seek redress for corrupt practices there among the top management. They contacted various officials within the Treasury, the Justice Department, Congress (including Senator Proxmire), and the press. For their efforts, some of them received severe retribution through their jobs, demotions, and so on; but against all odds they succeeded in bringing to light the matter of the missing gold. Then, as now, Proxmire turned to the Treasury itself for a report on the possible misbehavior of a Treasury operation—the New York Assay Office; and on December 19, 1978, Deputy Secretary of the Treasury Robert Carswell wrote to Senator Proxmire and said, quote:

"I must now inform you that there have been significant irregularities in Accounting and Management procedures in the New York Assay Office that appear to go back a number of years."

Carswell added, quote:

"The full truth may never be known because of the inadequate records kept over the years."

In other words, my friends, the records at the New York Assay Office were unreliable, just like the records at Fort Knox.

In his letter to Proxmire, Carswell also mentioned that the Treasury's new Inspector General had been assigned to the Assay Office case. The office of Inspector General was a new office, created only three months earlier; and according to the Carswell letter to Proxmire, the first investigation handed to the Treasury Inspector General was that of the New York Assay Office. And so the Treasury's Inspector General began his career in that post with a case of missing gold.

Now, according to his computer letter to you, Proxmire has asked him to look into another case of missing gold—the 1965 missing shipment from Fort Knox. The Treasury Inspector General took charge of a group of agents detailed from the Secret Service, which is another branch of the Treasury! Then he directed a so-called investigation of the missing gold at the New York Assay Office which, by his own words, quote "consisted of interviews" plus a review of security and procedures. No sworn testimony, just interviews; and oddly enough no one confessed to any criminal activity or theft. So on May 11, 1979, the Treasury Inspector General closed the files on his "investigation" of the New York Assay Office.

He wrote a memorandum that day to Deputy Treasury Secretary Carswell summarizing the results of this great investigation. With one exception (a man who had already been sent to jail), he said, quote: "No evidence has been developed that any personnel were involved in the theft of gold and silver from the New York Assay Office." That one exception is not discussed, but you might find it revealing. It was an employee who was caught trying to carry a bar of gold out the door inside a rolled-up newspaper. The reason he was caught, my friends, was that the gold bar slipped out of the newspaper and fell on the floor.

The so-called investigation of the Treasury Inspector General also succeeded in deciding that less gold was missing than originally reported. What we heard in news reports was 5,200 ounces; but by the time the Treasury Inspector General got through, he had whittled that down to a mere 4,100 ounces. He also forwarded the sanitized Treasury report on itself to the Justice Department for their determination. Not surprisingly, the Justice Department wrote back that, quoting the Inspector

General's memorandum again:

"There is no evidence in the present record that any employee of the New York Assay Office personally benefitted from the practices described in the report."

And the Justice Department is said to have declined prosecution due to, quote "the absence of any motive of personal gain relating to the settlement procedures."

There was never another peep out of Senator William Proxmire about the strange goings-on at the New York Assay Office. Apparently he was well satisfied by the self-serving Treasury investigation of itself, so much so that now he is passing the buck to exactly the same office of the Treasury in the matter of the 1965 missing shipment of gold from Fort Knox.

My friends, I never told you that what we are trying to do would be easy. I do believe that it can be done if we will stick with it no matter what; but now you have a small taste of what we are up against. In the case of the missing gold at the New York Assay Office, Senator Proxmire acted as if he just did not want to know, so he relied on the Treasury to investigate itself through its office of Inspector General. Now in the case of the missing gold shipment from Fort Knox, his initial response reflected in his computer letters to you was the same.

My friends, from what I have said so far you may be thinking that I'm about to say, "Forget Senator Proxmire. We have to try something else." But that is not what I'm saying at all. There is more to the story, and a glimmer of hope that Senator Proxmire can be persuaded to take meaningful action; but I do believe that you must have a realistic understanding of the situation if we are to succeed. To that end, I think a few words are in order about Senator Proxmire's public background.

E. William Proxmire got his start in politics long ago after he married into the Rockefeller family. He ran as a Democrat for Governor of Wisconsin in 1952, '54, and '56 and lost each time. But his big chance came in a Special Senatorial Election on August 27, 1957. It was Proxmire, my friends, who filled the Senate vacancy of the late Senator Joseph McCarthy. Proxmire was re-elected in 1958 and has been in the Senate ever since.

Throughout his Senate career, Proxmire has been deeply involved in the most powerful committees of Congress dealing with banking, currency, housing—in other words, our economy. Whatever has happened during those years, Proxmire was there.

In 1961 the so-called "London Gold Pool Agreement" was set up. It was an informal agreement that was never authorized by Congress—I repeat, NEVER AUTHORIZED BY CONGRESS; and under that agreement, our gold started flowing out of the United States in a hemorrhage that lasted nearly 7 years. One courageous Congressman, Frank Chelf of Kentucky, spoke repeatedly on the floor of Congress about what was happening to our gold. In AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975, I read to you his sworn statement about the secret shipments of gold out of Fort Knox during those years. But throughout the halls of Congress the warning words of Congressman Frank Chelf were totally ignored, and Senator William Proxmire was among those who were there—but paid no attention! And so we should not be surprised if we encounter resistance by Senator Proxmire to leading a public investigation of our gold reserves.

Long ago he became entangled with the special interests of the

Rockefeller group, who in turn spirited away our gold; and Proxmire was there, in Congress, when our gold was taken, so he could be accused of malfeasance for neglecting to take any action up to now to protect our gold. Under the circumstances, Proxmire may well look upon a public investigation of our missing gold as a "can of worms" for him. But, my friends, we do not want Proxmire's hide, WE WANT HIS HELP. He is in the best possible position to do it—if he will; and there is an inkling that perhaps he can be persuaded to take action.

On September 5 my friend Mr. Edward Durell wrote to Senator Proxmire urging him to take up the investigation of our nation's gold supplies. Mr. Durell has done this many times before, and has been met with a stone wall!! But this time, this time, Mr. Durell wrote in the wake of your barrage of letters; and on September 11 Proxmire sent this reply, and I now quote:

"Dear Mr. Durell: I have your letter regarding an unreported shipment of gold which occurred at Fort Knox in 1965 and the possibility that there may have been similar unreported incidents. While, as you know, the United States is no longer on the Gold Standard, I can appreciate your concern in this issue. I have already asked the Treasury Department's Inspector General to look into the matter and give me a complete report. In view of your correspondence, however, I am also asking the Justice Department and the General Accounting Office to also investigate the situation you outline. The General Accounting Office is an investigative arm of the United States Congress. Once I have this information I will be in a better position to determine whether any future action is warranted.

Sincerely, William Proxmire, Chairman"

My friends, this is still a long way short of agreeing to what we have requested—that is, a PUBLIC INVESTIGATION by Proxmire's Committee—but it is a step in the right direction, so it's up to us to redouble our efforts.

We have to make it clear that there are many of us, that we are not going to go away, that we will not be satisfied with anything less than a public investigation by his Committee, and that he will have our complete support. To do that, I urge that you again contact Senator Proxmire and get everyone else to do so that you possibly can. And if you are willing to spend a few dollars, I urge you to use a MAILGRAM this time for greater impact. All you have to do is to call Western Union and they will charge it to your telephone bill. A long message is not necessary, but I suggest that you tell Senator Proxmire you want action—not just comforting form letters. Tell him that you want a public, Congressional investigation of our gold supplies by his Committee, which has jurisdiction—not more cover-ups by the Executive Branch; and repeat your pledge of firm support if he will open the investigation which you request.

I also have a second suggestion this month which I think would mean more to you after I tell you the following:

The secret gold shipment from Fort Knox on January 20, 1965, took place the very day Lyndon Johnson was inaugurated President, as I reported last month; and I can now reveal, my friends, that this shipment did not end up at the New York Assay Office. It wound up, instead, in a ranch in Mexico owned jointly by President and Mrs. Johnson!! And President Johnson arranged for the Treasury Department to give Mrs. Johnson a Special License to deal in gold bullion as a private citizen. Yet, at that time, you and I could

not even own gold except in jewelry.

The Fort Knox Gold Scandal of today was predictable long ago for those with eyes to see. The famous prophet of the 1929 Stock Market Crash, Roger Ward Babson, gave a clear warning of things to come while the Fort Knox Bullion Depository was still being built. There was an article about his warnings in the Literary Digest for August 29, 1936. The article described Babson's objections in the words, quote:

"By dumping most of America's gold hoard into a steel and concrete strong box in the mountain fortress at Fort Knox, Kentucky, Uncle Sam is putting too many of his eggs in one basket."

Two very relevant questions posed by Babson were also mentioned:

(1) Is not the United States as liable to have internal revolution as to be attacked by foreign nations? And

(2) Are not gold and commodities much safer distributed among millions of people than stored in Russian fashion under the control of politicians?

The article quoted Babson as he thundered, quote:

"To secure control of nearly one-half the world's total gold supply requires only securing control of the White House. The key to these great vaults is hanging on the wall of the President's private office."

With those prophetic words of 44 years ago in mind, I now offer you my second suggestion for this month: We need to use every avenue available to begin to make others aware that there is a question about our gold reserves, and so I suggest that you write a brief letter to the Editor to every newspaper, large and small, in your area. Don't try to say a lot, just open up the thought that we ought to think about our gold reserves as we prepare to elect a president. Here is a sample of what I mean, to get you started:

"LETTER TO THE EDITOR: All the presidential candidates this year are talking about our troubled economy in the old conventional terms, but conventional economic cures don't seem to be working. Could it be that the illness is not conventional??

Congressional legislation HR-7874 is now pending to look into persistent rumors that our monetary gold to back up the dollar is depleted or gone. If so, no wonder the dollar is shrinking and gold prices mushrooming. When we go to the polls maybe we ought to keep in mind that whoever we vote for will have the keys to all our gold—that is, if there is any left."

You may succeed in getting only one letter published, or none at all; but all of us working together have to think of ourselves as scattering seed. A lot of our letters to editors, just like seed, will fall on barren land; but if even one letter does get published, it can begin to alert thousands of newspaper readers. So please do it now, my friends. There is no time to be wasted.

Now it's time to give you my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've tried to show you a little more clearly the connection between gold and war. Our own gold, which has been stolen from us, is being used to drag you and me into war! So we must seize the gold weapon ourselves and turn it around. By

breaking open the GOLD SCANDAL, we must wage preventive war—a WAR OF TRUTH—in order to prevent a war of missiles, bombs, particle beam weapons, and clashing armies.

What happened to the Titan-2 Missile which exploded in its silo earlier this month serves to illustrate the stakes in our preventive war. The secret Bolshevik government of the United States has transformed the Titan-2 into a first-strike doomsday weapon against Russia; but the Titan-2 at Damascus, Arkansas, was itself the victim of a Russian first strike! For the first time the Russians have now demonstrated the ability of their Cosmospheres to destroy our ICBMs in their silos. Day by day we come closer and closer to the outbreak of all-out thermonuclear war!

The Secret Rulers of the United States and the rulers of Russia are both embarked on their own separate and very different first-strike strategies. The Bolsheviks here want to achieve a first strike against Russia that will set off all-out war. The Russians, on the other hand, want to achieve the opposite. They want to make all-out war impossible by destroying America's ability to fight. And so, my friends, the Bolsheviks here keep struggling to prepare for a single massive blow at Russia, even though America will be destroyed. And to prevent the massive American first strike, the Russians are conducting a campaign of localized first strikes. One day a Mount St. Helens explodes, another day a Titan Missile explodes, and on another day soon a major city may seem to explode in a seemingly impossible earthquake.

No matter who wins the first-strike tug of war, the Russians or the Bolsheviks here, America loses. And, my friends, you and I are America, so it is up to you and me to defend our great land and ourselves. No one else is going to do it for us, but our forefathers left us a CONSTITUTION which grants us the freedom, the power, and the responsibility to do the job; and if our Lord Jesus Christ wills it, we will succeed.

Two months ago I began giving you my answers to the question many of you had started asking me: "What can I do?" Many of the things we need to do require little money but time, dedication, and perseverance. Even so we must not deceive ourselves. Freedom does not always come for "free." The challenge we face today is no less than what our forefathers faced 200 years ago; so if we want to prevail in this struggle, we can do no less than they did. As they expressed it in concluding the Declaration of Independence:

"...with a firm reliance on the Protection of Divine Providence, we mutually pledge to each other our Lives, our Fortunes, and our sacred Honor."

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #59

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is October 31, 1980, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 59.

Earlier this month millions of baseball fans were preoccupied with the World Series. The World Series is always great fun with

plenty of excitement and suspense right to the end; and even if your team loses, it's not so bad. There's always next year.

Now you and I are caught up in a "world series" of a different sort. Ours is a series of battles to determine what sort of world we will leave to our children, and there will be no rematch next year! If we strike out now, the game is over, so we need to keep swinging until we finally hit that home run we need in order to win.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—THE IRAN HOSTAGE RELEASE PLAN FOR WAR

Topic #2—SENATOR WILLIAM PROXMIRE AND "ACTION STEP 4"

Topic #3—"ACTION STEP 5" ON A NEW BATTLE FRONT.

Topic #1—During this month of October 1980 three issues have dominated the news here in the United States. One has been the continuing war between Iraq and Iran. That has been overshadowed in turn by sudden new rumors about a possible release of our hostages in Iran. And the third issue, riding the waves of other events, has been the up-coming election. These three on-going news stories are all related, and in turn they all reflect a fierce struggle behind the scenes among three (3) different power groups.

One group is that of the Satanic Bolsheviks who now control the United States government. Another group is that of the Rockefeller Oil Cartel now under the control of John J. McCloy. And the third power center is in the Soviet Union whose rulers today are in a battle to the death against the Satanic Bolsheviks. The primary actors right now are the Bolsheviks and the McCloy Oil Group. It is they who have done most of the maneuvering in the Iraq-Iran war, in the hostage release rumors, and in the election build-up. But in all three areas, Russian agents have been joining the fray too. Wherever possible they are trying to interfere with Bolshevik plans even if that helps Big Oil temporarily.

For most Americans, the rumors about a possible hostage release have become a central issue in recent days. It seems to have sprung from the Iraq-Iran war and talk of trading spare parts to Iran for the hostages. And the prospects for a hostage release are also being watched for their effect on our national election. And so after nearly one year, the Iran hostages are again on center stage. And now as then, my friends, the real stakes in the Iran hostage issue involve the danger of thermonuclear war.

Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 58 I explained how the Iraq-Iran war was triggered. It involved a huge bribe to Iraq engineered by the Rockefeller Oil Cartel, and it was paid in gold—$8,000,000,000 worth of gold! This was part of the very gold which was stolen years ago from the United States Treasury Depositories. The goal of Big Oil is the one I explained last month. They want to finish what they started by their overthrow of the late Shah of Iran. They want to retake control over Iran with its oil riches on new and more profitable terms, and to do that they want to topple the so-called Khomeini regime one way or another. The war with Iraq is supposed to begin that process, but Iran is not the only arena in which the crumbling Rockefeller Cartel is trying to reassert itself.

It's happening also right here in the United States. All of the old faces from the heyday of Rockefeller power under the Nixon Administration are clustered together right now under the

Republican banner. The ghost of Nelson Rockefeller is grasping for the White House once again. Meanwhile the Bolsheviks who have seized control of the United States government have no intention of letting go, and the easiest way for them to retain control is simply to keep the same faces on the scene. And so the Bolsheviks here are doing everything they can to prevent a change in the White House.

Last month I reported that the Rockefeller Big Oil Group had worked hand in glove with this Bolshevik government in the Iraq-Iran war. But here at home, the two are rivals. Last month I said that Big Oil was only setting itself up for double-cross by the Bolsheviks; and sure enough, this month the Bolshevik double-cross began to materialize in the form of a sudden new hostage release plan. By means of this one ploy, the Bolsheviks in the United States Government were hoping to pull the rug out from under the Rockefeller Oil Group, both in the Persian Gulf and in the election here.

On October 6 the Republican campaign announced the formation of a Special Advisory group. The group was said to be for the purpose of watching for and planning against a so-called "October surprise." It was feared that something was about to happen to upset the apple cart just before the election. The very next day, October 7, their fears began to be realized. An independent presidential candidate, Barry Commoner, announced that he had received a hostage release proposal from Iran. It was turned over to the State Department, and there began to be flurries of excitement. On October 9 the hostage story warmed up some more. That day State Department spokesmen stated that they were in contact with the hostages. Referring to the top ranking hostage, Bruce Langdon, the spokesmen said, quote: "We are in contact on a regular basis."

The next item to build anticipation over the hostages came from Norway. Norway, like Iran, is in the front lines of the Bolshevik planning for a nuclear first strike at Russia. I reported that long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 37; and on October 10 a newspaper in Oslo, Norway helped to move along this latest Bolshevik ploy. The Norwegian newspaper quoted former Iranian Foreign Minister Ghotbzadeh as saying that Iran should release the hostages immediately. In the United States the excitement built up another notch.

For the next week or so the Iran hostage release rumors were allowed to simmer for a while. Then on October 17 Iran's Prime Minister Rajai provided the next excuse for heightened rumors. He appeared before the United Nations Security Council where he bitterly attacked the United States for helping Iraq in the war, but that was downplayed in the news compared to other remarks Rajai made in a news conference a day later. Under pressure of the war with Iraq, Iran seemingly was looking for a way out of the hostage crisis.

The rush of rumors turned into a torrent after that, and on Wednesday October 22 NBC Nightly News carried a sensational report. It was said that there had been a "breakthrough" in the negotiation over the hostages. Supposedly the Iranian Parliament was almost certain to set conditions for the hostage release during debate on Sunday, October 26, and that could be followed by the actual release of the hostages as early as the next day.

Up to that point the Bolshevik planners had everything going their way. By their calculations, the release of hostages on that schedule would have guaranteed re-election of this Bolshevik Administration, because the entire week preceding the election

would have been filled with news of the hostages. There would have been the drama of the release itself, then for days stories of some of the hostages coming home, others going to intermediate stopovers for medical treatment. Stories of reunions, interviews of former hostages and their families, special news reports to rehash it all. And, my friends, if it had all gone as planned there would have been euphoria here on election day 1980. Millions of formerly undecided voters would have been caught up in the emotion of the moment, and the Bolsheviks were certain that they would pull the lever marked "Jimmy Carter" in the voting booth. It did not matter that cynicism would set in later over the timing of the release. By then, the election would have been over and the deed would have been done. That was the Bolshevik plan of the United States Government, but once again Russian agents are trying to intervene in an effort to unravel these Bolshevik plans.

From the very beginning the hostage situation in Iran has been under Bolshevik control, as I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 52. But the Bolsheviks do not exercise complete control over Iran, because the Russians have also succeeded in establishing an important level of influence in Iran nearly a year ago. In the present situation, Bolshevik agents in Iran tried to stampede the Iranian Parliament into the quick action they wanted. But Russian agents succeeded in at least slowing down the stampede, and the Bolshevik timing was delayed. So now even if the release of the hostages does take place in one form or another, the effect on our election is less predictable. A last minute release could even have a backlash effect on voters due to cynicism, and so the election is now up for grabs. It could easily go contrary to Bolshevik wishes. If it does, that will be a setback for the Bolsheviks, mainly in terms of delay. They will be forced to re-establish control over any new administration. That will cost the Bolsheviks a little bit of valuable time in their frenzy to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE, and that is exactly why the Russians want a change of administration simply to slow down the Bolsheviks.

But I mentioned earlier that the hostage release ploy of the Bolsheviks was set in motion for two (2) purposes. One was to undermine the grab for the White House by the Rockefeller Big Oil Group under the name of Ronald Reagan. That purpose depended strongly on timing, and so has probably been ruined; but the other purpose of a hostage release at this time is still on track. It is part of the latest Bolshevik scenario to lead up to a nuclear first strike against Russia.

The first step in this latest war plan was to set off the Iraq-Iran war, as I mentioned last month. The Rockefeller Big Oil Group did this, thinking they were starting the downfall of the Khomeini regime; but the Bolsheviks here used it for another purpose instead. Basically the Bolshevik United States Government is saying to Iran: "Release the hostages and we will give you military help against Iraq", which is backed by Big Oil; and to get ready, a sizeable Amphibious Attack Force of United States Marines is on the way. The Force includes a helicopter carrier, landing craft, and some 1,800 Marines. It passed through the Suez Canal very quietly on October 27 heading for the Persian Gulf. The tactics keep changing but the strategy is always the same.

Lately our fears have been stoked up over Russian designs on the Middle East and Persian Gulf. First Russia was given a black eye by its past ties with Iraq when Iraq invaded Iran. Now we are hearing about Russian overtures to Iran by supplying certain war needs. And in the midst of it all is the hostage release

ploy. The Bolsheviks here are trying to set the stage for a massive American military return to Iran. If the plan succeeds, it will be as I described it long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 37, and I quote:

"The American public will demand that it is time to stand up to Russia, and with full public support American troops and weapons will pour into Iran. From that point onward the outbreak of NUCLEAR WAR ONE will be all but impossible for the public to follow by way of the so-called news."

(End of my quotation from AUDIO LETTER No. 37.)

The Russians know what is afoot and they are trying to ruin the plan. In this case, that means trying to spoil the hostage release negotiations altogether. Up to now Russian agents in Iran have succeeded in spoiling the timing of a hostage release, and they are still at work as I say these words on October 31, hoping to prevent the hostages from being released at this time. If they succeed, it will be the fourth time during 1980 that nuclear war has been averted. Even so, the Bolsheviks who have taken over our government never rest.

By the time you hear this, the election will be past and the matter of the hostages may have been decided, but the Bolsheviks already have another serious crisis building up in Poland. For two years now the Bolsheviks have been trying to create an explosion in Poland. The first plan was the one for a Pope's Revolution, as it would have been known. I described that plan in detail in AUDIO LETTER No. 42; but just as in the present hostage release ploy, timing was critical to the Pope's Revolution plan; and the Russians were able to spoil the plan by changing the timing of the Pope's visit to Poland. But now the Bolsheviks have a new weapon of destruction in Poland. It is the so-called "Independent Trade Union" movement. It has been given the old Bolshevik name "Solidarity", but its real purpose is not solidarity but division, turmoil, and revolution.

Two months ago the new rulers in the Kremlin defused the confrontations then brewing by approving major concessions to the strikers. Now many of the Polish workers want to take a breather to consolidate their gains, but the Bolsheviks did not create the new Labor movement for that purpose. Instead there are new and bigger demands, spreading agitation, and threats of a new major strike. So now Poland's borders with Russia, East Germany, and Czechoslovakia are slowly being sealed off. Large concentrations of Russian troops are now poised along the border in Russia and East Germany. The Polish workers, having been used as pawns, may soon lose everything; but those who have used them, the Bolsheviks, may well get everything they want—revolution, strife, and bloodshed. If that happens, my friends, it may be the last straw for the leaders in the Kremlin.

Last month I reported that Russia had begun making feverish preparations to be able to decimate New York City by means of geophysical warfare. I can now report that these preparations also extend in more limited form northward into New England. There is a little known but major fault that runs along the east coast, partly offshore, partly on land, and Russian cobalt bombs for earthquake generation have now been planted in eight (8) areas along this fault in the Northeast. These locations respectively are: south of Providence, Rhode Island; south of Norwich, Connecticut; several near Hartford, Connecticut; near New Haven, Connecticut; south of Springfield, Massachusetts; and near Northampton and New Bedford, Massachusetts. But it is still New York City that is now subject to the greatest devastation by

far. The reason, as I explained last month, is that New York is the headquarters city of the Bolsheviks here in America. Right now the Bolsheviks are trying to see to it that Russia has her hands full due to revolution in Poland; but if that happens, the Bolsheviks here will also have their hands full. They may well find themselves picking through the smoking rubble of that ruined headquarters city because, my friends, at last report there are now 85 earthquake-producing cobalt bombs buried beneath the waters around New York City.

Topic #2—For several months now I have been offering you my step by step answers to the question, "What can I do?" I began doing this because more and more of you were asking me to do it. You had started telling me that you were no longer satisfied just to watch and listen as our crises multiply; instead the time has come for action—now or never.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 56 last July I said that what we must do is to wage PREVENTIVE war. Ours is a war of truth to head off nuclear war. Our strategy is to take away the gold weapon which our enemies within are using against us; and by revealing the truth about the theft of America's gold supplies, the gold weapon will become our very own. This is the only way, my friends, we can seize a weapon big enough to halt our betrayal into national suicide.

The first battle front in our preventive war is our campaign directed at Senator William Proxmire, and we must continue what we have started along those lines. But up to now Senator Proxmire has been conspicuous by his failure to take meaningful action, so this month we are about to open up a second front in our preventive war. It lies totally outside Proxmire's control yet could also increase the pressure for him to act. I will go into all that in Topic #3, but for now I want to concentrate on our direct campaign with Senator Proxmire.

For more than two months now many of you have been showering Senator Proxmire with letters. As I have suggested, you have demanded that he open up a full, public investigation of America's gold reserves. Ultimately there will have to be a complete physical inventory of our gold, if there is any left. My friends, in any campaign like this, every effort is always made to make you feel isolated; but if you think you are alone in your concern about our missing gold, think again. To give you an example of what I mean, I have an important letter to read to you. It was written to Senator Proxmire early this month on October 2. The writer is a very astute businessman in Proxmire's home state of Wisconsin. What's more, he's a man who knows Proxmire socially; but wait until you hear what he thinks about the situation. He sent a copy of his letter to my dear friend Mr. Edward Durell. He gave permission to make it public if desired, and Mr. Durell provided me with a copy. I will now read it to you:

"Dear Bill,

Mr. Edward Durell, a close friend of mine, has sent me a copy of his letter to you of September 5, 1980. The crux of the letter asks that you demand an inventory of the nation's gold reserves. I have written to you on this subject myself more than once. The reluctance of the Treasury Department to provide a sensible answer to this basic and simple question appears to indicate that the present real value of the Treasury's gold reserve might represent the ultimate 'Golden Fleece.'

The inventory practices which the Treasury is currently using would not be accepted by any public accounting firm nor by any

corporate management I know of. It is elementary that the nation know what its gold reserve is; and the fact that no action is taken to take a physical inventory, as would be required by generally accepted accounting standards, makes the United States Gold Reserve an open question around the world. I have personally heard this question raised by financial people in both London and Zurich, and of course many times in the United States.

As Chairman of the Senate Banking Committee, this is certainly one of your responsibilities. It seems strange that you do not take a determined action on this question which is so much more important than the many other incidents of waste which you have pursued with vigor.

Sincerely, "

and there follows the signature of the writer.

My friends, the letter I've just read to you represents the thinking of more and more highly informed business and financial people, so don't let anyone bluff you into thinking otherwise.

Now let me return to your own letter-writing campaign. By now you should have received at least one reply from Senator Proxmire. Some of you have received two replies by now. The first wave of letters to Proxmire in August produced a computerized form letter, which I quoted last month. Proxmire began sending that letter to people in late August. In the letter Proxmire passed the buck to the Treasury itself. Supposedly he asked the Treasury's Inspector General for a report about a specific missing shipment of gold. This was the mystery shipment of January 20, 19 65 from Fort Knox. It was a shipment worth more than a billion dollars—1000 million dollars—at today's prices; and it was admitted in writing five years ago by Mrs. Mary Brooks, then Director of the United States Mint. Yet it was listed nowhere on the official Treasury listing of shipments from Fort Knox.

Now the time has come to ask a new question, my friends, and that is: "Whatever happened to that promised report by the Treasury Inspector General?" After all, you've been writing to Senator Proxmire since mid August. I hope that you've been keeping a file of all your correspondence to and from Senator Proxmire, because now it's time to write your most important letter yet to Senator Proxmire; and if you can refer back to the date of your first letter, it will increase the impact of this letter. If you have not been keeping a file as I urged you to do, then just do the best you can on this letter; but please do start now to keep a file in a folder or in a manila envelope. As time goes on, this will become more and more important.

By the way, if you have not written before but want to write this time, by all means please do so. Make whatever changes you need to in the model letter I'm about to suggest, to fit your own situation, and send your letter to:

Senator William Proxmire

Senate Office Bldg., Washington, D.C.

Now here's what I suggest as a starting point for your newest letter to Senator Proxmire:

"Dear Senator Proxmire, For several months now I've been writing to you to urge that you open a full, public investigation of America's gold supplies. I first wrote you about this urgent matter on (date so and so) . In reply you promised as a first step to obtain a report about

one matter from the Treasury Inspector General. This matter was the missing gold shipment on January 20, 1965 from Fort Knox.

I have also written you more recently on this over-all subject, but up to now your replies continue to say that you have requested a report, not that you have received one; so I now ask:

'Have you received the report you said you requested from the Treasury Inspector General over two months ago? If so, then I request that I be furnished a copy promptly. But if not, then why not after so long a time? If it takes over two months for the Treasury to figure out what happened to a billion dollars worth of gold, then something is very wrong. And something is also very wrong if you are content to accept silence about so vital a matter.'

Once again, I urge you to open up a full, public investigation into the condition of America's gold supplies without further delay. And more and more of my friends and neighbors are beginning to agree—that is the message of the additional signatures at the end of this letter."

After signing your letter, then get everyone else you can to add their signature below yours, just signatures of anyone who agrees that your question deserves an answer. Even if only two or three friends will add their signatures below yours, it will help. Every name counts. Use your influence. Before, Proxmire was receiving letters; now he will begin to see petitions, petitions, and more petitions. And, my friends, so will other certain very important people!

After you have collected all the signatures you can, please make a generous supply of photo copies before mailing the original to Proxmire, because copies of this latest letter to Senator Proxmire will be a weapon you can begin using for other purposes, and we will use them right away as we open up the second front in our Preventive War to SAVE AMERICA.

Topic #3—As you probably know, America's currency is not issued by the Treasury but by the "Federal Reserve System." If you look at a dollar bill you will see the words: "Federal Reserve Note." In banking terms, a Note is an I.O.U.—a promise to pay something; and it's the Federal Reserve System, not the United States Government itself, that issues these I.O.U.s which we use as currency. They're printed by the United States Government Mint for the Federal Reserve System for a small fee. In effect, the United States Mint, a branch of the Treasury Department, serves as a mere print shop for the Federal Reserve System.

Many people assume that the Federal Reserve System is a Government agency, which IT IS NOT. It is purely a privately-owned Central Banking System! What I've just said is essential to understand. It's the key to our opening up the Second Front in our Preventive War to Save America. So before I go on, I want to say a few more words about the purely private nature of the so-called "Federal Reserve System." I realize that for some of you what I will say will be review. You've already studied the Federal Reserve System yourself and know that it is a private corporation, but my mail indicates that many of my newer listeners are not aware of this.

It's not surprising that so many people believe the Federal Reserve System to be a Government agency. From its very beginning in 1913, the Federal Reserve has always presented a false governmental image. To begin with, its creation in 1913 required an act of Congress; but that was not because Congress

was authorizing a new Government agency. Instead, it was because Congress was abdicating its CONSTITUTIONAL duty to create and issue the nation's money! In effect, Congress gave a Federal Corporate Charter to the new privately-owned Central Banking System. In turn, that system was given the name "Federal Reserve System."

There were many Americans in those days who were bitterly opposed to the creation of a private Central Bank. They believed that the creation and control of our money should be left in the hands of the Government—not a private corporation. Others believed that private control of our money would not be so bad if it were dispersed. What these critics opposed was concentrating our money control in just one bank.

To silence these critics, the architects of the new private Central Bank for America did two (2) things. The first had to do with the Board of Directors of the System as a whole, which they call a "Board of Governors" because it sounds better. They agree to allow the Chairman of the Board to be a presidential appointee; and just for good measure, they agree to let the appointment be subject to confirmation by Congress. The other maneuver by the Federal Reserve architects of 1913 was to abandon the idea of a single Central Bank. Instead they created a system of 12 banks scattered across the United States. That gave the image of a diffusion of control over America's money; but actually that, too, was only for show purposes to silence the critics. All of the real action in the Federal Reserve System takes place within the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. The other 11 Regional banks just follow the lead of the New York Bank. They have power but rarely use it, and so in effect the Federal Reserve Bank of New York is the real Central Bank of the United States .

The governmental cloak that seems to surround the Federal Reserve System is actually very thin, but it's enough to mislead most people, because they do not look close enough. For example, people often assume that the word "Federal" is a sign that the Federal Reserve System is a government agency; but as Abraham Lincoln once said in a famous court case: "A flower does not become a rose just because I call it a rose." And the Federal Reserve System is not a government agency just because of its name. If you will look around you, you will see many private companies that use the word "Federal" in their names. For example, there is even an air freight company called "Federal Express", but of course Federal Express is not a government agency. It's a private company, with private stockholders.

The real criterion as to whether an entity is public or private is that of ownership; and by that criterion the 12 Federal Reserve Banks are totally and unmistakably private corporations. They issue stock like any other private corporation; and, my friends, the United States Government does not own one penny's worth of Federal Reserve stock. Even the buildings which house the Federal Reserve Banks and the land which they occupy are privately owned. They pay local real estate taxes thereon. That is even true of the building here in Washington where the Federal Reserve Board of Governors meet. Employees are not governed by Civil Service rules like the Government employees. The President of the United States rubber-stamps each new Federal Reserve Board Chairman as if he were a public official; but the minute he is confirmed, the Chairman of the Federal Reserve Board passes through private doors, and behind those doors the private Federal Reserve System does exactly as it pleases, issuing or withholding money and credit at will.

Federal Reserve stock is issued only to banks, which in turn are controlled by other powerful private interests. Banks which own this stock are called "Member Banks." Your own bank may be a member. If it is, your bank has paid money into the Federal Reserve in two forms. One form is ownership of Federal Reserve stock. This bears interest in the form of dividends of only 6%. But also, your bank is required to turn over a certain percentage of its own deposits to the Federal Reserve Bank in your district. Those deposits, called "Reserve deposits", bear no interest to your bank. Even so, Member Banks of the Federal Reserve System do receive certain services and advantages from membership, but they are also burdened and restricted in important ways. As a result, more and more banks have been withdrawing as members of the Federal Reserve System. Smaller banks especially have been pulling out for a breath of fresh air. Like any monopoly threatened with competition, the Federal Reserve money monopoly panicked. The "Fed" generally ignores Congress except when faced with trouble.

When trouble does flare up, the "Fed" always runs to Congress for help. Most of all, they count upon a favorable hearing from the Banking Committees of the Senate and House; and the Wisconsin twins—Senator William Proxmire and Congressman Henry Reuss—never fail to oblige. And so earlier this year, Congress passed a new law to rescue the Federal Reserve—a sort of a Union shop for banks. It requires even non-member banks to place interest-free deposits with the Federal Reserve System. What is more, it creates a bureaucratic nightmare for all small banks. As usual, the little guy is being squeezed out in favor of big money. The alleged excuse for this new Act is that it's needed to promote financial soundness of our nation's banking system. The argument is very simple. Supposedly, the new law is to help guarantee the safety of the underlying assets of your bank. Your bank is now forced to place a fraction of its assets in the Regional Federal Reserve Bank. Your bank cannot use those funds, and so we are told it cannot lose them.

But now, my friends, consider this. The Federal Reserve Banks are themselves claiming to have assets they do not have—gold assets. So your bank stands to lose everything that it deposits in the Federal Reserve Bank. And, of course, if your bank loses everything, so do you! You have the option of either making or not making deposits to your bank, but your banker no longer has any such option. He is forced to be a depositor to the Federal Reserve Bank in your region, and the Federal Reserve Bank does not have part of the assets it claims to have; because, my friends, the monetary gold hoard of the United States is not owned by the United States Treasury. Instead, title to the gold has belonged to the Federal Reserve System since 1934. The Treasury is only the custodian while the Federal Reserve Banks are the title owners, and they are now owners of gold that is long gone. They are claiming assets that do not exist.

Every Saturday the New York Times publishes the abbreviated, unaudited financial statement of the Federal Reserve System. Almost all of the assets boil down to nothing but paper, with one major exception. That is the item titled "Gold Stock." The current value listed is slightly over $11,000,000,000—that is 11,000 million dollars, but that is at the meaningless official price of gold, a little over $40 per ounce. The real value at current market prices is closer to $200,000,000,000. That is the Federal Reserve "Gold Stock" so called. It is by far the biggest asset of the Federal Reserve Banks on paper. The quantity held by each bank varies, but all 12 Regional Banks own portions of that Gold Stock.

My friends, America's monetary gold hoard is often referred to as the Treasury's gold, but that is not correct. The Federal Reserve Banks have title to the gold through their Gold Stock. The Treasury only acts as a depository or custodian for the gold. For example: The famous United States Bullion Depository at Fort Knox is really just a giant safety deposit box. The owner of the gold is the depositor, the Federal Reserve System.

For my listeners in business, financial and banking circles, I feel I should drive this point home in one more way. You can see what I am saying if you will simply compare the Balance Sheets of the Treasury and the Federal Reserve System. First look at the Federal Reserve Balance Sheet. On the Asset side you will see the Gold Stock item, formerly called "Gold Certificates." To be concrete, for example, on October 22, 1980, the Gold Stock value was listed as $11,165,000,000. Now look at the Treasury Balance Sheet for that day. You will find the same figure, but on the Liability side. So the Federal Reserve is a creditor with regard to the gold, and the Treasury is a debtor—that is, the Federal Reserve is the depositor of the gold while the Treasury is only the custodian.

My friends, I realize that all this may be rather involved, but also it is vitally important because the facts I have been discussing provide the basis for our second avenue of action to try to SAVE AMERICA. I want to make these details available to you so that you can refer back to them from time to time; but let me recap the basic points to remember:

First, and very important. The Federal Reserve System is a private Central Banking System. It is not an agency of the United States Government.

Second: The owner of America's monetary gold hoard since 1934 has been the Federal Reserve System; and the gold, carried as "Gold Stock", is by far the largest asset claimed by the Federal Reserve Banks.

Third: The United States Treasury does not own this alleged monetary gold. Instead, the Treasury acts only as a custodian for the Federal Reserve gold.

My friends, the soundness of America's entire banking system is now tied directly to the Federal Reserve System, and the Federal Reserve is counting assets that it does not have—gold assets. The gold has been spirited away from Fort Knox and other Treasury Bullion depositories.

It is in your financial interest to make sure that your bank deposits are safe. It is in the interest of your banker to make sure that his deposits with the "Fed" are safe; and all other things being equal, it's in the interest of the "Fed" to make sure that its giant gold deposits with the Treasury are safe and sound.

So I am now ready to suggest what we can start doing through the banking system itself. To begin with, please go to your bank to obtain some information. The information you need concerns the Federal Reserve Bank which serves your region. There are 12 Federal Reserve Banks located respectively in: New York, Boston, Philadelphia, Richmond, Atlanta, Cleveland, Chicago, Minneapolis, St. Louis, Kansas City, Dallas, and San Francisco. Find out which one of these is the one which banks in your Region deal with, and find out its address. In addition, find out the name of the President of that Federal Reserve Bank and the names of

every one on the Board of Directors.

My friends, you will no doubt have to speak to a bank officer to obtain all this information, and that's good. Speak to the highest officer you can in your bank, because when you ask for all those details about the Federal Reserve Bank in your Region you're likely to raise some eyebrows. Hardly anyone ever comes in with a question like this. If he asks why you want the information, tell him you intend to write some letters and will be glad to give him a copy. Make it clear though that you are not writing the Federal Reserve to complain about your own bank. You should have no difficulty in getting the address of your Regional Federal Reserve Bank and the names of its President and Directors. In the unlikely event, my friends, that you do encounter any resistance, just keep in mind that you have a legal right to this information. As a depositor, you are a creditor of your bank, which in turn is a creditor of the Federal Reserve Bank; and both you and your bank have the right to seek assurances that your money is safe.

Once you have this information, what you should do next depends on where you are. If your banking Region is served by any Federal Reserve Bank except the NEW YORK Federal Reserve Bank, then it is time to write some more letters. But the New York Federal Reserve Bank is a special case. If that is the one which serves your Region, do not write any letters at this time. WRITE NO LETTERS TO THE NEW YORK FEDERAL RESERVE BANK—just hold on to the information you have obtained about its address and Directors.

Now here is what to do if your Region is served by any of the other eleven (11) Federal Reserve Banks which I listed earlier. I urge you to write a letter to the President of the Federal Reserve Bank and also to each of its Directors. I realize this is a lot of work, my friends, but nothing less than our survival is at stake. We cannot cut corners. Every letter should be typed or written separately in order to have a personal impact, but it's all right to use the same wording to the President and each of the Directors.

To get you started, here's the outline of what I suggest you write. As in the past, feel free to modify the wording to fit your own concerns and your own way of expressing things. That will help to personalize and vary the letters they will be receiving. Other listeners, after all, will be writing to them too; but whatever you do be sure to refer to Senator Proxmire, as you will hear in a moment. Address each letter to:

President, or Director

Federal Reserve Bank (of whatever city) at the Federal Reserve Bank address.

"Dear (so and so):

I am writing to you because of my declining confidence in the banking system of the United States. I am one of a growing number of people with similar concerns. As a key official in the banking life of our nation, my hope is that you will take action to help restore confidence before it is too late.

To illustrate my growing concerns, I'm enclosing a photo copy of a letter which I sent recently to Senator William Proxmire. As Chairman of the Senate Banking Committee, Senator Proxmire should be able to reassure the public about banking matters, but my correspondence with Senator Proxmire for several months has had the opposite effect. Instead of reassuring me, Senator

Proxmire's replies to serious questions are alarming me; and as I discuss this with all my friends and neighbors, they too are becoming more and more worried.

Since Senator Proxmire is only managing to reduce confidence in our banks by his behavior, I believe that I should turn to you for help. If elected representatives will not do their duty, perhaps responsible banking officials will.

My basic concern is one which I believe you, as a Federal Reserve official, should share. I believe that the United States Treasury has been negligent or even worse in acting as custodian of the Federal Reserve gold. Like many other people, I am convinced that it is time for a physical inventory of the gold stocks in Federal Depositories. There may be little or no gold left at all. If the Treasury has defaulted on its obligation to protect the Federal Reserve gold, we are in deep trouble indeed as a nation; and the Federal Reserve System is counting assets listed as gold stocks which do not exist.

As a concerned citizen and bank depositor, I appeal to you for help. I respectfully urge you to use your authority to press for a physical inventory of the Federal Reserve gold in Treasury vaults. There is no other way to stop the spreading doubts about America's entire banking system."

(End of letter, followed of course by your signature.)

My friends, now you know why I suggested that you make a supply of good photo copies of your next letter to Senator Proxmire. You will want to enclose a photo copy of your Proxmire letter with each letter to a Federal Reserve President and Director. By doing this, my friends, we can accomplish two things at once. For one thing, Federal Reserve System officials all across America may become a little perturbed at Senator Proxmire. They will not be pleased to hear that Proxmire is alarming you and others by his behavior. If even one Federal Reserve official should write a note of displeasure to Proxmire, it will have its impact.

But aside from Proxmire himself, we are beginning to open up a whole new avenue of action through the banks. For one thing, action could take place through the Federal Reserve System itself to inventory the gold because, as I explained earlier, 11 of the 12 banks were originally intended for show, but they do have power. The New York Federal Reserve Bank is now tightly controlled by the Bolsheviks who want to destroy America, but the other 11 Banks are another matter. Their Directors are indoctrinated basically to follow the lead of New York. For the most part they are not given the inside track about the most secret plans, and so they could decide to flex their muscles in ways contrary to the wishes of the New York Bank. Specifically, they could decide that a gold inventory is a good idea, and they could help make it happen, my friends.

At still another level, be sure to give your banker copies of your latest letter to Proxmire and to the Regional Federal Reserve President and Directors; because your banker, like you, has a tremendous stake in all of this. And even the American Bankers Association should press the Federal Reserve System to look into this question. They should demand that the 12 Regional Bank Presidents raise this question with the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System here in Washington.

My friends, I realize that all this is hard to digest at one hearing, so I urge you to listen to it over and over again if you

need to until it all begins to sink in; because this is only the beginning of our battle on a powerful new Second Front, and the key to it all is the private corporation known as the "Federal Reserve System."

Now it's time to give you my last minute summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've tried to alert you to some of the latest battle fronts which are involved in the secret war now raging. During this month of October 1980 there have been all kinds of rumors that our hostages in Iran may soon be released. In Topic #1, I reported to you how this came about, and why. It was set in motion partly for reasons related to our national election four days from now. But even more importantly, the release of our hostages right now is intended to be one step on the path to nuclear war. The Russians know this and want to avoid becoming the targets of a Bolshevik-triggered American first strike, and so Russian agents in Iran are trying hard to stop the preparations for a release of our hostages at this time. But even if this crisis should fizzle out, others are being set in motion to take its place. One of these is already on the horizon in Poland. If full scale revolution should erupt there, the Russians are prepared to retaliate by means of geophysical warfare.

The true capital city of the Bolsheviks—New York City—may very well suffer a massive earthquake. According to my last minute reports, other geophysical warfare preparations are also continuing. In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I described how Russian geophysical warfare techniques triggered the explosion of Mount St. Helens last May. The final step in the process involved a squadron of Cosmospheres firing their Charged Particle Beam weapons from overhead. And as of October 26, squadrons of four (4) Cosmospheres each were on station over several volcanic mountains of the Northwest. These are: Mount St. Helens, Mount Adams, Glacier Peak, and Mount Rainier. There is also a single Cosmosphere, purely for observation, stationed high above Mount Hood.

My friends, the warring factions of the Bolsheviks, Big Oil, and the Russians are bringing us closer and closer to open all-out war. They are attacking and counterattacking on many fronts; and if you want to stop our downward slide into catastrophe, we too must take action on many fronts.

The TRUTH is a powerful weapon, and we must use it in every way we can. Month by month I am trying to bring avenues for action to your attention; and because more and more of you are taking action, I believe there is a glimmer of hope for America. Last month, for example, many of you did succeed in getting LETTERS TO THE EDITOR published. Even the Washington Star published one of them and gave it the headline "WHERE IS OUR GOLD?"

What we are trying to do together, my friends, can be learned in only one way and that is by doing it. I know it is not easy, but so far I believe you are doing a magnificent job, and I thank you.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #60

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is November 30, 1980, and this is my AUDIO LETTER No. 60.

Four days ago the New York Daily News published an interesting article about a coming motion picture. It's called "The Formula", and deals with an international oil conspiracy. And even before seeing the picture, Mobil Oil is reported to be acting very nervous. Supposedly, Mobil is threatening to sue the movie maker, MGM, if Mobil is mentioned in any way. Somehow the whole situation seems to symbolize our situation today. The movie is about oil companies hiding the truth, and at least one real life oil company would apparently like to hide the movie.

"Big Oil" always operates behind a wall of secrecy, deception, and stealth; and in the election just passed, Big Oil has succeeded for the moment in its grab for the White House. And so a temporary change of style is brewing in American politics. The Bolsheviks who have been in power favor active propaganda to mislead us. By contrast, Big Oil generally prefers to tell us nothing at all. So, as the so-called Reagan Administration takes over, we will tend to have a "Say nothing" government for a while. But whether our government is controlled behind the scenes by Big Oil or by the Bolsheviks, you and I lose because they all operate "in the dark" where they cannot be watched. We are living in an age of stealth, and it is leading toward disaster for us all.

My three topics this month are:

Topic #1—THE GREAT ELECTION SURPRISE OF 1980

Topic #2—THE PLANNED COLLAPSE OF AMERICA'S BANKING SYSTEM

Topic #3—THE NEW AGE OF WARFARE BY STEALTH.

Topic #1—For weeks now Washington has been buzzing about the great election surprise of 1980. Right up to the last minute all the Opinion Polls were saying the same thing—"Too close to call." But when the television networks began their election night coverage, they told a radically different story. Fifteen minutes after the polls closed on the East Coast, NBC declared the entity Ronald Reagan the winner. On the West Coast, polls were still open but voters began drifting away. Even more shocking, the alleged President Carter himself conceded defeat less than two hours later. West Coast polls still had an hour to go at that point, but many remaining voters just gave up. By then, it was fast becoming clear that voting machines nation-wide had registered a landslide in the name of Ronald Reagan. It was an unprecedented state of affairs. The Republican landslide apparently was enormous, and yet we are told it was a complete surprise. On all sides, political analysts are still rubbing their eyes in disbelief. They're trying out all kinds of excuses to explain why the polls were wrong. "Maybe the pocketbook issue did it", they say; or "Maybe all those undecided voters before the election were really closet Conservatives"; or then again, "Maybe it was just a plain old protest vote"; or, "Would you believe it was Billy Carter maybe?"

My friends, last month I reported that there was one issue that could help defeat the present Bolshevik Administration. That was the breakdown of the hostage release ploy just before the election, and it may be that many voters were affected in that way that I mentioned last month. But the apparently surprise landslide was brought about by entirely different means.

My friends, it was not the Opinion Polls that were wrong this time. It was the tally of votes on Election Day. To bring home

what I am about to tell you, I would like to tell you a personal story. It's a story of my own race for the governorship of my home state of West Virginia 12 years ago.

The idea that I run for Governor came from a political leader in West Virginia. I was then in my sixth year as Legal Counsel to the United States Export-Import Bank here in Washington. I had been appointed to that position in 1961 by President Kennedy, and apparently there were those who remembered my efforts in helping Kennedy win in West Virginia in 1960. In any case, I decided to accept the suggestion. On May 1, 1967, I resigned from the Export-Import Bank and returned to my native State of West Virginia. For the next year I carried out an exhausting grass-roots campaign throughout the state. My wife Lilly and I went everywhere and spoke to everyone, or so it seemed. There was not a county we missed and there was hardly a hand that I had not pressed, and from every indication my campaign was going very well. Then one night two weeks before the election, the telephone rang. When I picked up the telephone, a voice said, "This is (so and so)." I asked what I could do for him, and he replied: "Well, you'd like to have your votes counted, wouldn't you?" Still half asleep I said, "Of course. What are you talking about?" His answer was: "Well, you know politics is a business. You'd like to have your votes counted, wouldn't you?" By that time I was wide awake. I replied that there were plenty of county officials and precinct workers to take care of the vote counting. Then I asked him what he was driving at. He said, "Well, in those precincts which have machines you have to make sure your votes are counted. Don't you understand? This is just how it's done. If you want your votes counted, it'll cost you $250,000." I was flabbergasted and said I would not pay a cent; I didn't do things like that. At that point the caller said, "Well, it looks like we can't do any business then", and hung up. After putting the telephone down I just sat there astonished. My wife Lilly said, "What was that?" and I told her: "We just lost the election."

My friends, in the counties and precincts where old-fashioned paper ballots were used, I did receive votes; but without exception in every location where voting machines were used, I received no votes. Not one single vote!

That seemed incredible to me at the time, but I had no evidence—nothing but a telephone call which I could not prove. Then about two weeks after the election I received a phone call from a Baptist minister. He was asking to meet me because something important had come to his attention, so the next day I met the minister in a town near Beckley, West Virginia. He had another man with him. The good minister told me that the man with him had asked him (the minister) to forgive him for something he had done to me. The minister had replied that it was not up to him to forgive the man, but up to Mr. Beter. So I asked the minister's friend what it was that he had done to me, and he said: "Mr. Beter, I fixed the voting machines against you." Then he blurted out the whole thing.

He said that he was known as a repair man for these machines, but he explained that when he went to the factory school in another state, he was also taught other things. He was taught how to adjust the machinery to record whatever is wanted. For example, voters who pulled the lever for me thought that they were voting for me; but inside the machine, the machine was adjusted to transfer the vote to another pre-selected candidate. I could hardly believe my ears. Over a year of grass-rooting the state down the drain!! And all because of a specialized slot machine known as a Voting Machine. I asked him why he did such a

thing. He answered, "For the money, Mr. Beter. I really need the money." Then he added that he was not the only one, that there were others all over the country doing the same thing. Then he broke down and cried. He said he wanted me to know and to decide if I wanted to forgive him. Really I felt no revenge, only sorrow for him; and I knew what poverty could do to a person. By this time all three of us were in tears. I placed my hand on his shoulder and said that I did forgive him.

Later I went to the Frauds section of the United States Department of Justice here in Washington. They told me that a Governor's race was merely a local matter so the federal government could not investigate. I also looked into other avenues for possible redress, through the courts; but throughout the United States there have been many cases taken to court over election rigging, and in the end the courts always do nothing. So ended my governorship race in West Virginia in 1968.

I learned the hard way that politics has become a "business." In every presidential election since voting machines have been used, there have been charges of voting fraud in certain states. Sometimes more votes are counted than there are registered voters. There are people nicknamed "The Lever Brothers" in West Virginia who go around and pull the levers before the actual voting begins. There are others who tamper with the machines in their warehouses before they are delivered to the polling places, and there are corrupt officials who know all these things but keep their mouth shut for fear or for money.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 1 I reviewed some of the background of voting machines. My friends, this is very important. Voting machines are not regulated in any way. They were developed from slot machines, and they were controlled at first by organized crime. But then long ago, they were absorbed into the hands of the Rockefeller Cartel, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 1. And in the secret struggle over the election, which I reported last month, voting machines were the decisive secret weapon. For the moment they have carried the day for the Rockefeller Oil Cartel.

As the voting began on November 4, 1980, the entity President Carter was in Plains, Georgia to vote. Reporters on the scene said later that he almost broke down and cried as he spoke to townspeople, because the outcome was already known before the voting began. That is also the reason for the unprecedented concession an hour before West Coast polls closed. Word had reached the White House only the day before about what was going to happen. There was massive "fixing" of voting machines in nine states—New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Florida, Ohio, Illinois, Michigan, Texas, and California. The machines were also "fixed" but on a less complete scale in Indiana and Missouri. In addition, there was selective "fixing" of machines in key districts of more than 20 other states. It was all over before it started.

The Opinion Polls beforehand were actually far more accurate than the voting tallies on Election Day. Opinion Polls can be "fixed" too, but in this case they were not. All the Polls found a general apathy about the candidates, dissatisfaction with all of them; and that apathy was reflected by the low turn-out on Election Day. In spite of good weather nation-wide, the turn-out was the lowest in 30 years. That spells apathy, my friends, and apathy does not create landslides. Instead, apathy about candidates leads to a "flip the coin" attitude: Heads, it is candidate "A"; Tails, it's candidate "B". Both candidates, or in this case both major candidates, just about split the vote; so apathy leads to a very close race, just as the Polls predicted;

but thanks to fixable voting machines, a landslide was created out of thin air. Last month I reported some of the factors pointing to a last minute election surprise. As I explained then, it's a mild setback for the Bolsheviks here. Right now Big Oil is preparing to run the country with a free hand. The figurehead called Reagan is being programmed to behave like a new Eisenhower, delegating everything to agents of Big Oil. But the Bolsheviks here are working fast. They're in a hurry to seize control of the so-called Reagan Team themselves. Once that happens, the so-called Reagan era may end abruptly. The Reagan image is tailored to fit the Corporate Socialist plans of Big Oil, so the Bolsheviks will prefer a new face, a new figurehead to program their own way; and so some day sooner than you think we Americans may be in for a shock. We will be told that the entity President Reagan has met with an unfortunate accident, or a sudden fatal illness. Then we will be seeing a new face, saying new things. The face will seem to be that of George Bush speaking from Washington, but his words will come straight from Bolshevik headquarters in New York City—and that, my friends, will be the last and greatest surprise in the stolen election of 1980 .

Topic #2—Last month I gave you suggestions for an awful lot to do. I offered you not one, but two major steps in our ACTION plan to SAVE AMERICA. "Action Step #4", you will recall, involves another letter to Senator William Proxmire, and it's the most important so far in spite of the election results because this Proxmire letter is an important weapon as we open up the Second Front in our battle. In "Action Step #5" I outlined how we can do this. We're going to the very heart of America's banking system, the privately-owned FEDERAL RESERVE SYSTEM.

This month, my friends, I want to give you a breather. It's vitally important that you follow through on the things I suggested last month, so I want to make sure that you have enough time to do all those things. The letters which I have urged you to write to the Federal Reserve System are more important than you can imagine, so in spite of the holidays, I ask you: "Please, write those letters as soon as possible." Nothing less than our survival as a nation is at stake.

Let me mention one footnote to my suggestions of last month. If you should have any trouble getting the names of the Federal Reserve officials from your bank, don't give up. You can call the Federal Reserve Bank in your region and ask for the Library. Ask the Librarian for the names of the President, the officers, and all the Directors. Several listeners have already done this and got the names without any difficulty. Beyond this I would make no new suggestions for what you can do this month, but I do want to take a few moments to remind you where we are heading IF we do not act.

We are once again watching interest rates explode like bombs on the American economy, and on all sides we're hearing about the disastrous effects which are coming in automobiles, construction, and business in general. Already it appears that Chrysler might go under; and when financial analysts mention this, they say in the same breath a forbidden word—DEPRESSION. But, my friends, interest rates are not the only way in which America's major banks are leading us into a depression with inflation.

America's banking system itself is becoming shakier by the day. The seeds of trouble have been there for many years now. They are all related to the grand design to destroy our money and our economy. It's the same grand design which involved the theft of America's monetary gold supply, but the process began speeding

up nearly two years ago in early 1979. That was when the Bolsheviks here staged their hidden coup d'etat against the Rockefellers. In AUDIO LETTER No. 44 for March 1979, I gave my listeners an early warning about this process. I explained how the stage was being set for a collapse of America's entire banking system, and I revealed that the failure of the giant Chase Manhattan Bank may well trigger it all. For various reasons many people considered my warning about the banks just too incredible to believe at that time. But just like the coming nuclear war, the coming bank collapse is now coming closer to the surface; and as it does so, danger signals are inevitably showing up here and there.

For example, Fortune magazine recently said, and I quote: "There can be no doubt that banking is entering a period of crisis. In one way or another the industry's troubles could lead to the passing of many banks, perhaps including some of the biggest and most prestigious." And four months ago, at the end of July 1980, the Christian Science Monitor carried two "Page 1" reports about the situation. They focused attention on the disastrous new Act which I told you about last month, the so-called "Monetary Control Act of 1980." It pointed out that the Act has drastically reduced the ratio of insurance reserves to savings. There is now only about a penny to back up every dollar you have in a bank or Savings & Loan savings account. The collapse of just a few large banks could wipe out the whole Savings Insurance system; and if that happens, my friends, collapsing confidence will bring down America's entire banking system. The second special article in the Monitor contained a hint at something even more basic. It said, quote: "The sleeper monetary provisions of the Act continue to nag at gold and precious metals-oriented Conservatives. They see the danger that the 'Fed' and Administration facing a possible bank crash at some point might throw the doors open to hyper inflation of the United States economy."

My friends, those are exactly the stakes I was warning you about last month. There is no gold to back up the Federal Reserve I.O.U.s which we use as money. The Federal Reserve System is claiming assets which do not exist. Those who have conspired to destroy our money have planned all along to bring on a bank crash. They want the banks to collapse when the time is ripe, but they don't want you to know what is happening. They dare not let you know the truth about our missing gold, and so certain key Treasury and Federal Reserve officials are meeting right now to plan a counterattack against our "Preventive War of Truth." As always, their plan is to use the big lie; and as you know, they were liars from the beginning, and they are liars now. It is a lie, my friends, that the Treasury today holds 270,000,000 ounces of Federal Reserve gold in its vaults. That's what Treasury and Federal Reserve books show, but those books are a complete fraud, a lie; and more and more people are having doubts about it. But there's an old psychological trick that is about to be used on us all. That trick is: If people start to suspect a lie, make the lie even bigger. Most people are taken completely off guard by this technique. If a lie becomes big enough, people think it has to be the truth. No one, we think, would have enough nerve to tell a lie that big.

So here is the trick that is now being planned. Right now our gold reserves are officially valued at the old official price of $42.22 per ounce. That's the price reflected in the gold stock listings by the Treasury and Federal Reserve balance sheets which I discussed last month. But watch for the nonexistent gold reserves to be revalued at current market prices. In terms of dollars, our fictitious gold reserves will suddenly look 15 or 20

times bigger. The plan is also to capitalize on talk in Congress about returning to the Gold Standard. First, the controlled major media will publicize talk about the Gold Standard idea; then will come the spectacular gold re-valuation publicity stunt. Finally, any return to a true Gold Standard will quietly be squashed, because we don't really have all that gold. Instead, they are trying to devise some trick which will require only a token amount of gold. What that will be has not yet been decided, but the net result will be powerful propaganda to impress people to believe the big lie about America's alleged giant gold hoard.

My friends, many people would rather put their head in the sand about our missing gold. They would rather not know the awful truth. That is exactly why the big lie will work with so many people. But that is like having cancer and not wanting to be told about it, because the United States dollar has terminal cancer and it will die soon if the truth about our missing gold remains hidden.

Sometimes my enemies argue that the truth about our missing gold should not be revealed. According to their argument, exposure of the truth about our missing gold will itself bring down our economy; but, my friends, that argument says that a lie is better than the truth. And it is wrong, dead wrong; and here's why: If the scandal of America's missing gold breaks into the open, it can well set the stage for international action to prevent disaster. There could be an immediate international monetary conference to resolve the crisis. The hidden power of the Bolsheviks here who are bent on disaster would be broken by the gold scandal; so the conference could put an end to the disastrous system of floating currencies now in effect. Instead, they could establish a new system of fixed yet flexible rates of exchange which would be stable. At the same time, the conference should fix interest rates on an international basis. That would tend to stop the world-wide interest rate war now going on to attract hot money from one country to another.

With the pressure off interest rates, inflation could be controlled and industry could revive. Inflation is international in scope; and because the gold scandal here is international in scope, it could be investigated on an international basis. There would be a real chance of tracking down our gold and tracking down the people who have done this to us.

Meanwhile there could be a kind of Marshall Plan in reverse to save the United States dollar. To tide us over the crisis, foreign Central Banks could lend us some gold for international transactions. "Why should they bother to do that?" you ask. Very simple. Our trading partners have hundreds of billions of dollars in their hands. If the dollar goes, so do their own economies. So it is in their own self interest to take international action to save the dollar.

But, my friends, all that can happen only—and I repeat only—if the gold scandal breaks before the coming bank crash, because that is the only way to set our monetary affairs free of the grasp of the Bolsheviks here. If they can keep the gold scandal under cover for just a little longer, they will get their way. They will win; and, my friends, you and I will lose everything.

Topic #3—Several months ago there were big headlines about a supposed new American secret weapon. It's called the "Stealthplane." The weapon which is actually involved is a specialized hybrid machine called a "Subcraft." It's the same

weapon that I made public two years earlier in AUDIO LETTER No. 37; and early this year, January 1980, the Bolsheviks here tried to use it against Russia. The result was a disaster, as I reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 53 and 54. So now the spectacular sounding Stealthplane has become just a publicity tool to make nuclear war sound less suicidal.

To judge by all the recent publicity, one would think that stealth is a radical new concept in warfare; but stealth, trickery, deception, and surprise have been the prime ingredients in military strategy since ancient times. And today, my friends, we live in an age of stealth—stealth in politics, stealth in economics, and above all stealth in weaponry in warfare. During the past six years or so I have made public many secret developments in weapons and warfare. I revealed the secrets of both Russia and the United States because I believe you need to know, and knowledge is power.

A secret war is raging right now, and already you and I are suffering the consequences; and if it is not stopped, it will soon explode into all-out thermonuclear war. There's only one way to stop the deadly cycle of war now under way. That way is to put an end to stealth and trickery, and replace it with the TRUTH—the truth about America's gold scandal, the truth about stealing of elections with unregulated voting machines, and the truth about a whole new age of secret weapons which are unknown to the public. The new age of stealth in warfare is everywhere today. It makes up a complete spectrum from deep beneath the sea to outer space.

To begin with, consider Submarines. From the very beginning submarines have always been weapons of stealth. Their outstanding advantage has always been their ability to escape detection. The modern age of nuclear submarines was inaugurated by the United States in 1954; and it was America that conceived a ballistic missile submarine, first launched in 1959. Today our leaders still reassure us that American submarines remain second to none. They have to admit that Russia has several times more "subs" than we do, but they gloss over that with stories that Russian subs are noisy, or leaky, or their crews are not very smart. So, in effect, they tell us, "Don't worry. We can handle a submarine war with Russia." There was a time when quality was in our favor, but that time is long gone. Today the United States is losing badly in the secret war to control the world's oceans .

New generations of Russian submarines are entering a new era of their own. For example, there are the new Oscar Class Cruise Missile Submarines. These can launch Cruise Missiles to attack our Aircraft Carriers and other surface ships. They can do this while still submerged, far beyond the horizon. And there are the new Alpha Class Attack Submarines which are without parallel in the world. Submariners always say that a submarine's worst enemy is another submarine, and Russia's new Alpha Subs are the worst enemy yet to our subs. Unlike the United States, Russia has mastered the use of titanium for submarine construction. And unlike America, Russia has big supplies of titanium for use in all kinds of new technologies—and Russia no longer sells titanium to the United States. So the new Alpha Subs have double hulls of titanium, and they are now the deepest diving, fastest operational submarines on earth. It's speed has been estimated in the West at 45 knots; but, my friends, it is actually well over 60 knots! In most situations it can actually outrun America's best torpedo, the Mark 48; and it can dive almost a mile deep to escape attack and slip away under complex ocean currents.

But the biggest shock so far in Russia's submarine program took place earlier this fall of 1980. It's a submarine launched from a shipyard near Archangel on the White Sea. When Western Intelligence officials got their first look at it they could hardly believe their eyes. Traditionally submarines have been known as boats rather than ships because of their relative smallness, but not this submarine. It's a giant, a ballistic missile submarine about the size of an American World War II Aircraft Carrier. Western Intelligence officials are mystified as to why it is so large, but I can reveal the reason to you right now. The giant new Russian submarine, code named "Typhoon", is another "first." It's the world's first ballistic missile submarine with a re-load capability. It can empty all 20 of its ballistic missile tubes at a target in war, then it can re-load the tubes with 20 more missiles carried aboard. So, if need be, Russia's Typhoon Sub can mount two nuclear attacks. Like the Alpha Subs, Russia's awesome new Typhoon has a titanium hull. It's not as fast as the sleek Alpha Sub but very fast even so, and it can dive extremely deep.

Meanwhile, what does the United States have to answer all that? The answer is America's new Trident Missile Sub. It carries 24 missiles, compared to the Typhoon's 40. It's slower and cannot dive nearly as deep with its non-titanium hull, and it's also three years behind schedule and still slipping—and there are several reasons for that, some of which have been mentioned in the news lately. But one major reason for our crumbling Trident Submarine program is not in the news—it's the widespread use of narcotics among Trident shipyard workers! Many workers are not involved, but many are; and as a result, there is a tremendous turnover in personnel. Another result is defective welds and mistakes in critical piping. When the mistakes are found they have to be done over, sometimes more than once. And, my friends, absolutely nothing is being done about it.

The other side of the coin in undersea warfare is Anti-Submarine Warfare, or ASW. Lately we have heard brave stories that there have recently been ASW breakthroughs by the United States. These are based on extremely complex computerized sonar-listening networks; but as I first revealed some time ago, all new Russian submarines produce artificial noises in normal operation. That's why the new Alpha Subs are thought to be so noisy—the noise is deliberate. When war comes, the noise-makers called "Cavitators" will be retracted. The American sonar nets will listen in vain for the familiar noises. Instead, Alpha Subs and others will swim at high speed toward America whisper quiet; and as they do so, the Russian subs will strike as submarines always strike, by stealth.

The true condition of America's Antisubmarine Warfare was summed up in the New York Times last month on October 5. A senior American naval officer was quoted as saying: "To find a submarine you need to know where to look. Otherwise you'll have to use a large share of your antisubmarine resources just to find and kill one submarine, and in wartime that is not practical. You're better off waiting for him to attack." He explained that then we could more easily detect the sub; but he added that a ballistic missile sub could fire its missiles before being caught, quote: "so it probably doesn't matter."

My friends, it would still be a standoff in submarines if Russia had the same problem we do in finding subs; but they don't. Five years ago in 1975 the head of the Russian Navy announced a breakthrough in ASW, and it was not a bluff. He was talking about Psychoenergetic Range Finding, or PRF. I first

reported on Russia's PRF in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. It was the key to Russia's destruction of American Subcraft early this year, and Russian manned space satellites use PRF to keep track continuously on all United States submarines. When war comes, the positions of our own submarines will be relayed to Russian Attack Submarines. This will be done by means of the world-wide Submarine Communication System, which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 16. Russian Attack Submarines, including the new Alphas, will be vectored in toward our own Ballistic Missile Subs. Our own subs, older and slower, will be caught by surprise and unable to escape. And without warning, Russian nuclear torpedoes will destroy our Ballistic Missile Submarines.

When I mentioned Russia's world-wide Submarine Communication System in AUDIO LETTER No. 16, a crisis was under way. It was the Underwater Missile Crisis of 1976. At that time the Russian Navy was planting underwater missiles within our own territorial waters, and they were using submarines to do it. The missiles involved were small, short-range missiles with nuclear warheads. Once planted, these missiles can be launched from their own underwater resting places by satellite command, and they were planted very close to their coastal targets. The result would be zero warning time for an underwater missile attack. The missiles were planted in bays and coves along America's shoreline by a special type of submarine. This was the Missile-planting Mini-Sub which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 16. I mentioned in that tape that, quote: "These special submarines are very difficult for our undersea sonar detection nets to pick up because the hull is treated in such a way that it absorbs sonar signals instead of reflecting them."

Four years later we hear an echo of this concept in the so-called Stealthplane. For aircraft, the treatment is to absorb radar instead of sonar, but otherwise it's the same idea. Russia was planting underwater missiles along our shores by stealth, and our own leaders were responding with equal secrecy instead of warning you. When I made these things public over four years ago, certain newsletter writers and others went into a frenzy. For whatever reason they did their best to tell their readers not to listen about the missiles. They tried to say that waterproof missiles lurking under water are impossible. Likewise they pooh-poohed the very idea of sonar-absorbing submarines.

But today we are four years closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and the closer catastrophe looms over us, the more it casts its shadow. The New York Times article of last month which I mentioned earlier is a good example. It mentioned, quote: "Soviet subs are usually coated with a material that absorbs sonar impulses." And as for the underwater missiles, listen to some words from a recent letter "To the Editor." It was published on September 25, 1980 in the Washington Star. The writer is Captain John E. Draim, formerly program manager of the Navy's project "Hydra." He says, quote: "We can easily waterproof missiles such as MX, and launch them from a vertical floating position. The United States Navy's project Hydra demonstrated this launch technique with test missiles of ICBM size in the early 1960's." And a further quote: "A Hydra-type missile can also be floated up from a submerged submarine to the surface and launched from there, the technique used for Soviet SLBMs."

In light of these words recently published, what I first reported in the summer of 197 6 becomes almost routine. The things I reported then were well known to be feasible in Intelligence circles; but out of the sheer ignorance, if nothing else, certain Newsletters and organizations wanted people to ignore my warnings. Fortunately large numbers of my listeners

did not ignore those warnings. They applied heavy pressure to the Joint Chiefs of Staff as I suggested, and action was taken for a while to defuse the crisis.

In the letter "To the Editor" I just quoted by Captain Draim, the reference to ICBM-size missiles is interesting, because a few months after I reported on Russia's underwater missiles, I learned about our own.

America's underwater missiles are radically different from those of Russia. I first revealed them in AUDIO LETTER No. 20 for January 1977. Unlike the Russian missiles which are small, America's underwater missiles are huge. They are giant waterproofed ICBMs deployed on the ocean floor, but they share one thing in common with those of Russia. America's secret fleet of underwater missiles were deployed by stealth. It was done in a supersecret operation known as "Operation Desk Top", and in the spring of 1978 Operation Desk Top was reactivated off America's east coast. America's secret government told you nothing about these hush-hush preparations for war; instead, they said they were drilling for oil! The Baltimore Canyon area of the Continental Shelf was publicized as if it were an underwater Alaska, full of oil. But before the alleged oil drilling even began, I told my listeners not to expect any oil bonanza because they were planting missiles, not searching for oil. And sure enough, after the missiles were planted, we were told it was all a big flop—no oil of importance had been found.

These are some of the things going on under the seas of the world; but if we look up instead of down, the pace of stealth warfare is no less frantic. For example, we've heard recently about the so-called stealth technique for evading radar. America's Cruise Missile is actually a stealth weapon intended to sneak into Russia underneath radar. But ever since radar was invented by the British in World War II, counter measures against it have been of interest. It started with the dropping of metallic chaff into the air by attacking bombers. That blinded the crude radar of those days. Then the radars were improved to see through the chaff, so next came Electronic Countermeasures, or ECM. ECM gadgets create radar waves of their own in such a way as to cancel out radar reflections off the plane. Using ECM, a 10-foot missile can be made to look like a small bird on radar, and that was accomplished long ago by the mid 60's. Now we are suddenly hearing about radar-absorbent coatings and rounded surfaces. Rounded surfaces tend to diffuse radar waves instead of bouncing them back to the radar antenna. That makes an aircraft hard to detect until it gets very close.

My friends, those techniques can be applied to some extent to airplanes, but they are made to order for another type of machine in the air above us. Rounded surfaces diffuse radar, and the ultimate in a rounded surface is a sphere. As a result, Russia's electrogravitic weapons platforms, the Cosmospheres, are natural stealth weapons. I first revealed Russia's deployment of Cosmospheres in late 1977 in AUDIO LETTER No. 29. The first few were used in an attempt at intimidation by Russia. They created giant rumbling air booms along our east coast and elsewhere; but later as more Cosmospheres were deployed, they shifted to a stealth-mode of operation.

Normally, Cosmospheres on patrol overhead hover at an altitude of around 100 miles. At that height they are invisible to all normal radar, but on several occasions the Russians have wanted the Cosmospheres to show up on American radar. It's one way to send a message in a crisis; and so in tense conditions, the Cosmospheres are sometimes ordered to descend to low altitudes.

Low, for a Cosmosphere, usually means from 5 to 7 miles up. As they descend, they come closer and closer to ground-based radar. As a result, they gradually become visible on radar as they near the ground. If the Cosmospheres are ordered to descend rapidly, the effect on radar is very dramatic. One minute our radar shows nothing; the next minute, blips appear all over the screen. The Cosmosphere blips seem to materialize out of nowhere. I first reported low-altitude threats by Cosmospheres as long ago as AUDIO LETTERS 30 and 32, and they have happened again several times since then.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 46 I also reported that Russia has a smaller fleet of second generation Cosmospheres. These can hover like all Cosmospheres, but their greatest advantage is speed. They are stripped of weapons and operate as high-speed transports just above the atmosphere. If need be, they can accelerate all the way to orbital speed; and operating far above the earth as they do, they are invisible to radar.

At least twice in the past year the Russians have made use of their high-speed Cosmospheres for satellite snatching. The first occasion was almost a year ago, on December 11, 1979. It was an American satellite called "Satcora 3" made by RCA. It had been in orbit for five days without trouble, but suddenly it just disappeared from radar screens and stopped communicating. That was the last we ever heard from Satcom 3. A Russian high-speed Cosmosphere had cruised up and matched orbits with it. Then the Cosmosphere cargo bay was opened and Satcom 3 was pulled inside. When the door was closed, it cut off the signal of Satcom 3; and as it was gobbled up by the radar-invisible Cosmosphere, Satcom 3 seemed to disappear. Last May 9, 1980, it happened again. That time it was a Japanese satellite, called Agami 2. Like Satcom 3, it just seemed to disappear without a trace. Russia was sending a message to Japan not to play too cozy with America's secret war build-up.

When it comes to stealth in space, the Russians are old hands. About three months ago, on September 1, 1980, a fascinating letter was printed in the Cleveland Plain Dealer. It was written by A. L. Jones, the director of the Sohio Radio Satellite Tracking Station from 1958 to 1964. He said, quote: "The technology for making aircraft invisible to radar detection is neither new nor is it proprietary with the United States Military. In mid summer of 1962, the Soviet Union made a public announcement that it was launching a Cosmos Earth-orbiting Satellite which would be invisible to radar detection. The satellite was successfully launched, and it carried on board a radio transmitter which could be used to confirm that it was in orbit." He mentions that NORAD requested radio-tracking data from the Sohio Station; and continues, quote: "Normally radio tracking data is not needed by NORAD unless radar and optical methods prove ineffective. Apparently this was the case. After approximately two months, the radio transmitter in the satellite ceased to operate, and the space vehicle became invisible to all methods of tracking."

My friends, for more than three years now, Russia has controlled the military use of space. Russia now has many satellites, including manned satellites which are not even being tracked in the West. For this and other reasons, America's military plight has become untenable, and yet the Bolsheviks here are still bent on nuclear war against Russia! They believe they will survive, as I explained in AUDIO LETTERS 56 and 57, but they don't care how many of the rest of us suffer and die. One way or another they are determined to set off an American nuclear first strike against Russia.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 last June I revealed one of the keystones of Bolshevik nuclear war planning. It is America's secret mobile missile, the Minuteman TX, the traveling Minuteman. TX Missiles are already deployed along existing railroad tracks in our northern states. Meanwhile the elaborate publicity cover-up for the Minuteman TX program is continuing. This includes controversy over the alleged MX Missile, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 55. And now it also includes stories about a possible speed-up of the mobile missile program. On November 18 the New York Times reported that this could include, and I quote: "making some Minuteman Missiles mobile." As usual, the news is far behind the facts.

I can report that the initial deployment of Minuteman TX Missiles is now virtually completed. Now a second phase is under way. In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I described the special mobile-launch car that carries each Minuteman TX. Now one by one each TX car is being joined by a second car. On the outside it looks just like the TX car, but the missile inside is totally different. The missile in the second car is an Anti-Cosmosphere Missile, or ACM; and it is armed with a cobalt ionization bomb, which I first described in AUDIO LETTER No. 42.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I described the launch sequence that is being planned for the TX Missiles, but now something extra will also be taking place. When the order comes to launch the TX Missiles, the ACM will go into action first. Without waiting to slow down, the cover will be blasted off the ACM railroad car. That will expose the ACM Missile itself resting on its launcher. The ACM is far smaller than the Minuteman, and its launcher is angled upward slightly, so the moment the cover flies off, the ACM will be launched. When the ACM takes off, it will accelerate with 100 times the force of gravity. Less than one (1) second after launch, the ACM will be traveling more than 1000 miles per hour; and because it takes off almost horizontally, it will be an impossible target for the Cosmosphere overhead to aim at. Less than 10 seconds after launch, the Cobalt Ionization Bomb will explode in the upper atmosphere. That is supposed to disable the Cosmospheres briefly, as I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. And with the Cosmospheres neutralized, the Minuteman TX Missiles themselves will be launched at Russia—at least that is the plan of the Bolsheviks here.

But Cosmosphere crews have already been given orders intended to nullify the plan. When the ACM is launched, they will not even try to shoot at it. Instead, they will start firing their Charged Particle Beam weapons at the Minuteman TX railroad car. They will have about 10 seconds to destroy it before the Cobalt Ionization Bombs explode, and that should be more than enough time to vaporize every TX and its locomotive. But by that time the kamikaze nuclear first strike against Russia may be impossible to stop; and if it is, the consequences for America will be total destruction. Stealth and secrecy will end in complete disaster.

My friends, I have nothing more to add at this time as a "Last Minute Summary." I hope to record my next AUDIO LETTER, No. 61, around mid January 1981. Until then, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. I wish you all a Merry Christmas and a happy, holy New Year.

Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #61

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is January 20, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 61.

It's been about a month and a half now since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 60 at the end of November. Beginning with this issue No. 61, I plan to record my AUDIO LETTER on a slightly more flexible schedule. I still plan to record a message roughly once a month, but from now on I want to tie my schedule more to events and less to the calendar. After all, the AUDIO LETTER is recording history in the making. Sometimes the end of the month arrives just as a major story is breaking, either in public or behind closed doors. From now on when that happens, I may well delay for a few days to give you a more complete story. On other occasions it may work the other way, speeding up my AUDIO LETTER schedule. All of this will have no effect on your subscription. You will receive all the issues you paid for no matter when they are released; so I hope that with a more flexible schedule I will be able to serve you better than ever before because, my friends, events are building toward a climax.

Since I spoke with you last, the world was shocked, saddened, and angered by a seemingly senseless murder in New York City. The victim was the former Beatle and rock star John Lennon. Lennon was fond of saying that a rock star can say things without being killed for it; and after five years out of the public eye, Lennon was going back to work—not because he needed the money but because he had things to say. But the things he had to say this time, my friends, would have caused trouble for those who are maneuvering us into nuclear war; and so a former fan of his was turned into a psychologically-programmed assassin. This was done using the techniques I made public over five years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 5. And on the eve of his return to public life, John Lennon was silenced.

My friends, lawless forces are destroying our way of life. They have spawned a soaring crime rate about which many of you have written to me asking questions. If you want to understand how these lawless forces affect you personally, there's a new book I would like to recommend to you. The author is a highly respected business consultant, Mr. Fred Muller. His book is titled: "America's Coming Nightmare Inflation, Economic Collapse, and Crime Revolution." The price is $10.00 postpaid, and you can order it directly from:

Fred Muller

P.O. Box 11909, Columbia, SC 29211.

If we sit idly by and let it happen, these forces of lawlessness will sweep away everything that is dear to us. They are destroying our money and our economy, robbing us of our hard-won assets. They are making many fear for their own lives when they walk the streets; they are perverting our laws, and corrupting our lawmakers; and they are working night and day to betray us into the insanity of nuclear war.

But there is something we can do. Last July 1980 I began answering your questions about what you can do; and because so many of you have responded with action, I will continue to tell you more. We are making progress; and if we do not lose heart, I am convinced that we are going to win.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE LEGAL SABOTAGE OF THE REAGAN TRANSITION

Topic #2—THE FORFEITED OPPORTUNITY OF SENATOR WILLIAM PROXMIRE

Topic #3—THE GOLDEN SWINDLE OF THE FEDERAL RESERVE BANKS

Topic #1—Two months ago America was buzzing over the great surprise landslide in the name of Ronald Reagan. There were all kinds of upbeat promises to "hit the ground running." But the transition to a new Administration has actually done just the opposite. First, the early choices for several Cabinet positions fell apart. People who had appeared interested suddenly just backed out. Meanwhile the job of filling lower echelon positions became even worse. Instead of "hitting the ground running", the Transition Team was wading through a swamp. Weeks ago the Transition Team exhausted its Government money and had to start asking their corporate friends for donations to stay in business. Puzzled reporters and columnists have been scratching their heads over it all. Veteran Washington watchers can tell something is wrong. They can sniff it in the air. And for public consumption, the so-called "Reagan Team" has tried to blame it all on the "Ethics in Government Act" of 1978. But, my friends, that is not the real problem. Something much more far-reaching is involved. The fact is that the new Administration has been virtually locked out by the Bolsheviks in bureaucratic power here.

The symptoms of this unprecedented situation are growing on all sides. For example, a few days ago on January 12, the New York Times carried an article with the headline: "CAMPAIGN AIDES FOR REAGAN FEAR THEY ARE LEFT OUT." The article said, quote: "The Reagan transition aides now expect to have only about 50 upper-level officials chosen by the time Mr. Reagan is sworn in on January 20" and this is in connection with, quote "filling of the 400 jobs considered essential for the control of the bureaucracy." In other words, my friends, Reagan aides were saying that the bureaucracy would still be beyond their control as of today. And one more very significant quote: "To the Reagan transition staff the current process of filling the hundreds of jobs below the level of Cabinet officer is perhaps more important than the filling of the Cabinet positions. The lower level aides, they said, will be the ones actually carrying out Mr. Reagan's policies."

My friends, the power struggle for control of the United States Government is continuing. I outlined that struggle in AUDIO LETTER No. 59 last October, and in AUDIO LETTER No. 60 I explained how the Election surprise came about. But as I mentioned then, that was only a mild setback for the Bolsheviks entrenched in powerful positions here in Washington.

The real problem which is confronting the alleged Reagan forces is not in the news. It is a Supreme Court decision which was quietly engineered by the Bolsheviks here on March 31, 1980. For the lawyers among my audience, the case is that of Branti vs. Finkel. The citation is: 445 U.S. 507 (1980).

The case itself was unspectacular at first glance. A newly appointed Public Defender in the New York County tried to dismiss two assistants who were leftovers or holdovers from the other political party; but the assistants filed suit to keep their jobs. The Supreme Court upheld them in the Branti decision last March; and in the process, the Court made new law by declaring that the same principle applies at all government levels, including federal. That general principle is that governmental employees cannot be dismissed simply because of their political affiliation.

The ramifications of this decision are stunning, my friends. They were spelled out very well in the dissenting opinions under the names of Justices Powell, Rehnquist, and Stewart. The dissenting opinions are of many pages long and naturally are filled with numerous detailed citations and arguments. But let me read a few quotations to you which speak for themselves, quote:

"The Court today continues the evisceration of patronage practices. "

And, quote:

"With scarcely a glance at almost 200 years of American political tradition, the Court further limits the relevance of political affiliation to the selection and retention of public employees. Many public positions previously filled on the basis of membership in national parties now must be staffed in accordance with a Constitutionalized Civil Service Standard that will affect the employment practices of federal, state, and local governments."

And, quote:

"Today's decision is an exercise of judicial law-making."

My friends, almost since the founding of our Republic, America's political system has depended upon patronage. Without patronage, your vote means nothing at all. This fact is brought out in the dissenting opinion of the Supreme Court itself in the words, quote:

"Elected officials depend upon appointees who hold similar views to carry out their policies and administer their programs. Patronage, the right to select key personnel and to reward a party faithful, serves the public interest by facilitating the implementation of policies endorsed by the electorate."

Thanks to the Supreme Court Branti decision, the new Administration is having to take office with a bureaucracy that is beyond its control. The Bolsheviks entrenched in key positions nation-wide at all levels of government are immune to wholesale firing. Instead, they have to be pried loose one by one based on non-political arguments. Likewise, new appointees cannot be brought in just because they are Republicans. The result is a quagmire, a government out of control. The Corporate Socialists have for the moment succeeded in seizing the White House under the banner of Ronald Reagan, but it is still the Bolsheviks who control the Government.

One result will be the opposite of the plans we are hearing for a "hiring freeze." There will actually be duplicate hiring under various disguises in order to get around the entrenched Bolsheviks. That will lead to a mushrooming, inefficient government, and more government spending, more bureaucracy—not less. And so, thanks to the little-known Branti decision of the Supreme Court, the Bolsheviks here still have a stranglehold on the United States government. The new Administration will try everything to whittle away at their power; but the Bolsheviks have no intention of letting themselves be whittled very far. Before that can happen, they plan to cut short the new Administration under the name of Ronald Reagan.

THE FORFEITED OPPORTUNITY OF SENATOR WILLIAM PROXMIRE

Topic #2—For nearly six months now many of you have been joining me in a preventive war of Truth. Ours is a war to turn aside the plans for economic collapse, dictatorship, and thermonuclear war. To do that, we are seizing the chief weapon of our enemies and turning it against them. That weapon is the GOLD weapon. Those who have cornered our gold and our money are using it to destroy our way of life; but their giant GOLD weapon is also their Achilles' heel, because they have broken laws and they have made mistakes. They have left a trail. You and I are following that trail to track them down; and if we will keep at it and not lose heart, I firmly believe that we are going to win.

As you know, we began our action campaign last summer with Senator William Proxmire. At that time he was Chairman of the powerful Senate Banking Committee. He will no longer be Chairman in the new Congress because of the change from Democrat to Republican control of the Senate; but Proxmire will remain on the Committee and he will continue to exercise a great deal of power, so I want to bring you up to date on our efforts with him.

If you will recall, there were basically two things which we were asking of Senator Proxmire. Our main request was that he launch a public, honest investigation into the true status of America's alleged gold supplies. We specifically asked him not to just accept the self-serving words of the Treasury Department. The time is long over due for proof, not words, so we wanted Senator Proxmire to press for an impartial, independent, complete physical inventory. Either America's gold is there, or it is not there; so I urged you to challenge Senator Proxmire to prove Dr. Beter wrong. But we did not expect Senator Proxmire to do all that out of a clear blue sky. Any investigation as large as that must have a starting point; and so as a preliminary step, we gave him that starting point. We asked him to look into one very specific matter first. That was the matter of the missing gold shipment from Fort Knox of January 20, 19 65, the very day Lyndon Johnson was inaugurated! Any truthful, independent inquiry about that one shipment alone would raise questions that are far broader in scope, and those questions would have led into the complete investigation we are asking for.

But what has the champion of the "Golden Fleece Award" done up to now? First, consider the matter of the missing gold shipment which I discussed in AUDIO LETTER No. 56. Proxmire has yet to launch an independent investigation of any kind. Instead he started off by doing what we asked him not to do. He asked for a report by the Treasury's own Inspector General. Then he wasted months of precious time in sending computerized brush-off letters in reply to your letters. Following standard procedure in Washington today, he gave you nothing but lip service. He kept promising you that as soon as he received the Treasury report, he would decide what to do next.

My friends, even when Proxmire did receive the worthless Treasury report, he just sat on it. He was hoping that he could stall you until you lost interest and went away. Proxmire never made the promised report available until you insisted that he do so around early December. The report of the Treasury's Inspector General carries a hand-stamped date of September 30, 1980. It adds nothing new about the missing shipment; instead it just expands on a 5-year-old letter of Mrs. Mary Brooks, then Director of the United States Mint. I first made that letter public in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975.

The Brooks letter of 1975 served only to multiply the questions about the missing Fort Knox gold shipment. And the 1980 report by the Treasury's Inspector General only muddied the

waters still further. No wonder Senator Proxmire tried to sit on the report for two months, because it is an unsatisfactory report. As such it calls for Proxmire to do his duty to dig deeper—and digging deeper is the one thing Proxmire seems determined not to do.

The missing gold shipment of January 20, 1965 is only one thread in the giant web of scandal surrounding our missing gold, and Proxmire has stubbornly refused even to take a glance at the giant scandal as a whole. To show you what I mean, let me remind you of a letter to Proxmire which I quoted in AUDIO LETTER No. 59 last October. It was written by an acquaintance of Proxmire in Proxmire's home state of Wisconsin. As an astute business man, he asked Proxmire some very penetrating questions. This man has kept my good friend, Mr. Edward Durell, informed about his correspondence with Proxmire. As a result, I can give you the sequel to what I reported to you in October. It is very revealing.

To begin with, Proxmire never friend which I read to you. Afte wrote again. He made it abundant answer. And answer Proxmire did.

answered the letter from his

r a few weeks, Proxmire's friend

ly clear that he expected an

Proxmire's letter dated December 3, 1980 begins with the words, quote:

"I have no record of having received your earlier letter concerning a physical inventory of the nation's gold reserves. I have received a great deal of mail regarding this issue, so I do apologize for the oversight."

By the way, some of you have asked me how many people are joining in our campaign, so now you have Proxmire's own words, not just mine, that you have a lot of company. You are making yourself heard.

But Proxmire spends the rest of the letter giving nothing but excuses for refusing to do his duty. It is little more than a rehash of things you have already heard, including factual errors. The letter was so bad that his friend wrote again and picked it apart almost line by line. But for you and me, there's no point in wasting any more time on Proxmire right now.

My friends, we gave Senator Proxmire the benefit of the doubt. He has responded by forfeiting the opportunity to take the lead which could have been his. Under British common law he would be considered a traitor, so for now we will just go away and leave him alone. But Proxmire will remain a powerful member of the Senate Banking Committee. We may have occasion to deal with him again; but if we do, my friends, it will be on very different terms.

Topic #3—Just after Christmas last month a big article about Fort Knox began appearing in newspapers nation-wide. Alert listeners all over the United States have sent me copies. The publicity counterattack against our "preventive war of TRUTH" has now begun.

The article had three basic points to get across. Two of these were familiar from countless gold propaganda in the past. One of these old familiar points was a rehash of the old myth about the impregnability of Fort Knox. The officer in charge of the Bullion Depository, George B. Wright, was photographed at attention outside the locked gates, and there were quotes from him like: "This is the most secure facility you will find

anywhere. We are continually improving our security system" and "We have tanks and personnel carriers standing by."

A second familiar point of the long article was the standard personal attack on me. My 1974 charges about our missing gold are mentioned, but those are dismissed with a yawn, as quote: "Beter's farfetched claim."

But the third propaganda trick in the article was new. In AUDIO LETTER No. 60 four weeks earlier I had reported, quote:

"Watch for the non-existent gold reserves to be revalued at current market prices. In terms of dollars, our fictitious gold reserves will suddenly look 15 or 20 times bigger."

The Fort Knox newspaper article started the ball rolling. It never mentioned the old official gold price of $42.22 per ounce which is reflected in Treasury balance sheets. Instead, it hammers away at the great increase in market prices of gold, and so our psychological conditioning has now begun. We are being mentally set up for the gold revaluation publicity stunt to come.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 59 I discussed the way in which America's gold reserves are listed on Treasury and Federal Reserve balance sheets. I did that in order to call your attention to a little known but crucial fact. Our gold is often referred to loosely in the press as the "Treasury's gold" or the "government's gold", but that is not correct. The gold actually belongs to the Federal Reserve System. The Treasury only serves as a physical custodian for the Federal Reserve gold, and the Treasury and the Federal Reserve balance sheets confirm that this is the situation. If this sounds like a strange arrangement, you're right. It is. But it was set up that way for a reason.

Treasury custody of Federal Reserve gold created a situation of mixed responsibility, and it enabled those lines of responsibility to be blurred wherever convenient. This made it easier for those who stole our gold to hide what they had done. Even so they have broken laws and they have left a trail. The legal evidence is mounting that points to the Treasury Department and the Federal Reserve Board of Governors here in Washington as co-conspirators. The legal principle involved is that of a pledge, misapplied in a wrongful and fraudulent manner. And, my friends, you and I are not the only victims! By and large the Presidents and Directors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks have also been victimized. They have been placed in positions of enormous liability by the actions of the Board here in Washington, and the evidence so far indicates that they do not realize what has been done to them.

What I want to do now is to outline the legal case that is taking shape. Laws have been broken, and some very powerful men are destined for prison! I know that I have many lawyers among my listeners, and it is as a lawyer that I speak to you now; but I will also try to make my comments as clear as possible for everyone. We are being forced to try our case first in the "court of public opinion", and I will conclude this topic with a new suggestion for action for you and for the Regional Federal Reserve Banks.

On December 3, 1974, then Secretary of the Treasury William Simon testified before a Subcommittee of the House Banking Committee. The Congressmen were asking about various details of the Treasury's announced plans to start holding "gold auctions." The auctions were to begin a few weeks later in January 1975. In the course of the questioning, then Congressman John Conlan in

Arizona asked:

"Is the government gold owned by the Federal Reserve or is it owned by the Treasury but the Federal Reserve has a mortgage-like interest on that gold?"

Simon's answer included the words, and I quote:

"It is sort of a pledge."

When Simon said those two words "sort of" he almost let the cat out of the bag. Fortunately for him, Simon's slip of the tongue went unnoticed at the time; and Government witnesses before Congress always have a special privilege. It goes under the euphemism "correcting for the record"—that is, a Government witness can revise his oral testimony before it is printed by the Government Printing Office. So the officially-published version of Simon's testimony was sanitized in several places. Among other things, it omits those two incriminating words "sort of" which Simon said. According to the officially published version, Simon said to Congressman Conlan, quote:

"Legally, I want to check with my attorney. Yes, it is the same. I thought it was. It is a pledge."

Later in the same testimony Conlan asked Simon how the decision is taken to sell gold. In his replies Simon said he took the decision to the President; but he also claimed, quote:

"I have the authority to do that."

Now, my friends, please notice something very important. The then Secretary of the Treasury, William Simon, was questioned about sales of Federal Reserve gold, and yet he never once made any mention of obtaining Federal Reserve permission to do so! Instead he asserted that the Treasury itself can sell the gold without asking anyone else, not even the President. The only legal basis held out for this is the claim that the gold is "a pledge."

My friends, please bear with me now. There is an essential legal point here which has to be made. Those who need to know about it most urgently are the Officers and Directors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks, but I will need your help to bring this about. As I am about to explain, the wool has been pulled over their eyes as well as ours.

When I use the word "conspiracy", I'm doing so in the strict legal sense.

A CONSPIRACY is the term which refers to any situation in which two or more individuals join together to plan and execute a crime; and that is exactly what the Federal Reserve Board, not the Banks, and the Treasury have done.

The key to it all is the legal concept of a pledge. For nearly 20 years now, the United States Treasury has been using a pretended authority to sell Federal Reserve gold at will. That pretended authority is based upon a claim which has been made to sound plausible but is totally false. That claim is the Treasury's assertion that the Federal Reserve gold is a pledge; or, as Simon really said, "sort of a pledge." That is why Simon's testimony of 1974, which I just quoted, was sanitized so carefully.

To show you what has been done, first I should define what a

pledge is in law. First I will describe it in legal terminology because this is a legal battleground. The Officers and Directors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks will have to take legal steps if they are to save themselves. But I also want to make sure everyone understands what is involved, so I will try my best to give you examples of what I am talking about.

Legally, a PLEDGE is defined as a bailment or transfer of personal property as a security for some debt or obligation. It is redeemable on certain terms; but if the Debtor defaults on the contract, the Creditor can sell the property which the Debtor has turned over to him. In this situation, the debtor is called a pledgor because he is pledging to pay or repay something. The creditor is called the pledgee. He holds on to physical possession of the pledgor's property until the pledge is satisfied.

For a contract of pledge of property to exist, three elements must be present:

(1) The pledgor must turn over possession of the property to the pledgee;

(2) Title to the property—that is, actual ownership—is retained by the pledgor;

(3) and this is essential: There must be a lien of some sort against the property involved for payment of a debt or performance of an obligation, and that debt or obligation must be due the pledgee by the pledgor or some other person.

For my fellow attorneys, just a reminder that a contract of pledge is one form of hypothecation. Hypothecation, of course, is the contractual power of a creditor over the property of a debtor to cause the property to be sold to satisfy the debt. "Pledge" applies specifically when the property of the debtor is physically handed over to the creditor.

Now let me come down to earth and give you an everyday example. Suppose you needed some money and decided to pawn your gold watch. You go to the pawnshop and physically turn over your gold watch to the pawnbroker. In return, the pawnbroker gives you two things: He hands you some money as a loan, and he also hands you a receipt for your watch. Your pawn receipt gives you the legal right for some period of time to go back in and redeem your watch. That is, if you want your watch back, you give the pawnbroker the receipt plus the money you borrowed plus some interest.

My friends, a pawn transaction like this is a contract of pledge. You are the debtor because he has loaned you money. He keeps your watch in his possession as security for your loan. During the redemption period you have the right to get your watch back if you pay the loan; but if you do not repay the loan by a certain deadline, you default on your loan. The pawnbroker may then sell your watch.

Now then, my friends, the United States Treasury claims that a similar arrangement applies to the Federal Reserve gold. The property at issue is America's entire monetary gold hoard instead of a gold watch; but they claim that the same principle applies, that the gold is "a pledge." In effect, the Treasury thereby claims to be in the position of a giant pawnbroker. By referring to the gold as "a pledge", the Treasury has claimed in effect that the Federal Reserve System pawned the gold. Can you imagine? Beyond that, the Treasury is behaving as if the Federal Reserve System had defaulted in some way. The Treasury has disposed of most all of the Federal Reserve gold, just like a

pawnbroker; and this has been done without even notifying 11 of the 12 Regional Federal Reserve Banks! The Federal Reserve Board of Governors right here in Washington knew about it, so did certain people at the New York bank, but they have left the other 11 Regional Banks in the dark.

My friends, the United States Treasury pretends to have the authority to sell off the Federal Reserve gold at will. That is what William Simon, who parades today as the darling of the Conservatives, said as Treasury Secretary in 1974. This pretended authority to get rid of our gold is based on the Treasury's contention that it is "a pledge." But is it? Or was it ever really a pledge? The Treasury's claim does not make it so all by itself. That famous quotation of Abraham Lincoln applies just as well now as it did in AUDIO LETTER No. 59: "A flower does not become a rose just because I call it a rose."

I will now point out some facts which prove that the Treasury's possession of the Federal Reserve gold was never on the basis of a pledge.

The Treasury's pretended authority to sell the gold is completely fraudulent, and there has been collusion between the Treasury and the Federal Reserve Board here in Washington. As a result, 11 of the 12 Regional Federal Reserve Banks have been swindled. They are claiming assets—gold assets—in the mistaken belief that those assets still exist.

To trace the true status of the Federal Reserve gold, we need to go back to the beginning—in 1933 and 1934. On March 4, 1933, Franklin D. Roosevelt was inaugurated President for his first term. The very next evening just before midnight he declared a "National Emergency." He proclaimed a week-long Bank Holiday, closing all banks and placing an embargo on gold payments. Then the Treasury Secretary, William H. Woodin, made a public statement to quiet the fears of the people. He said, quote:

"It is ridiculous and misleading to say that we have gone off the Gold Standard any more than we have gone off the Currency Standard. We are definitely on the Gold Standard. Gold merely cannot be obtained for several days."

But they always lie, my friends. The Treasury Secretary said it would be just a few days, but IT WAS 42 YEARS before Americans would regain the right to own gold, because only four (4) days after he spoke, on March 9, 1933, the "National Banking Emergency Act" was rushed into law. Under that Act, American citizens were forced to turn in all of their gold. It was collected by the Federal Reserve System at the old bargain price of S20.67 per ounce.

Despite those soothing words of the Treasury Secretary only days before, America was off the Gold Standard. The Act also authorized the Treasury Secretary to instruct the Federal Reserve to deliver its gold into possession of the Treasury. The Treasury Secretary did issue those instructions on January 17, 1934, but the 1933 Law did not take title of the gold away from the Federal Reserve. It only required that it be physically held by the Treasury for safekeeping. Finally, the "Gold Reserve Act" of 1934 was passed on January 30 of that year. Section 2-A of the Act says, quote:

"Upon the approval of this Act, all right, title, and interest in every claim of the Federal Reserve Board of every Federal Reserve Bank and of every Federal Reserve Agent in and to any and all gold coin and gold bullion shall pass to and are hereby

vested in the United States."

My friends, that sounds ironclad, doesn't it? It sounds as if the Treasury took over ownership of the gold from the Federal Reserve, but the fact is that it was only a pretended transfer.

On January 24, 1934, six (6) days before the Act was passed, one brave Congressman tried to expose the entire ruse. He was a bitter enemy of the Federal Reserve System, and on the floor of Congress he gave a speech that revealed exactly what was afoot. Describing the provisions of the Act for the gold transfer, then Congressman Louis T. McFadden said, quote:

"It provides that the United States Government shall give the Federal Reserve Board and the Federal Reserve Banks new Gold Certificates to the full value of the loot. The Gold Certificates will give the Federal Reserve Board and the Federal Reserve Banks legal title to the gold, and the United States Treasury will be nothing more than its physical custodian. The Secretary of the Treasury will give the Federal Reserve Banks gold for their new Gold Certificates whenever they ask for it. It is a fraudulent transfer."

The situation McFadden described is exactly what happened. The Federal Reserve System owns the gold through its Gold Certificates, the Treasury only acts as physical custodian; and this arrangement has, in legal terms, been confirmed, ratified, and condoned by the Federal Reserve and Treasury balance sheets for 46 years. It is the fact, no matter what the words of the 1934 Act may seem to say; and law, my friends, deals with the questions of fact, not just assertions.

Now let me return to the present-day claim of the Treasury that it holds the Federal Reserve gold as "a pledge." That claim is in direct contradiction to the Treasury's own balance sheets. As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 59, the Treasury is a debtor with regard to the gold, while the Federal Reserve is the creditor; but if it were a pledge, as claimed by the Treasury, the reverse would be true. The Treasury is trying to turn day into night, and night into day, simply by calling it "a pledge."

That raises two questions, my friends.

(1) What pretended authority was the basis of Simon's 1974 claim that the gold is "sort of a pledge"?

(2) How could the Treasury get away with this fraud?

The answer to the first question is a June 30, 1961 Act of Congress, the "Old Series Currency Adjustment Act." The citation is: 31 USC 912. The Treasury misled Congress in 1961 with the excuse that it was to enable the retirement of a variety of old obsolete currencies including certain Gold Certificates used as currencies, but nowhere did the Act define the term "Gold Certificates." The real but unstated purpose of the Act was to provide a pretended authority to dispose of Federal Reserve gold. In fact, gold began leaving the country under the "London Gold Pool Agreement" only three (3) months later. By virtue of that Act, the Treasury pretends that the gold became what Simon called "sort of a pledge." The Treasury claims a right that it does not legally have to convert the gold to its own use and give the Federal Reserve System nothing but paper money or bookkeeping credits in exchange. In this way, the Federal Reserve Banks have been swindled out of their gold bullion.

That brings me to the second question. That is: How could the Treasury get away with it? The answer involves collusion by the

Federal Reserve Board of Governors here in Washington.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 59 I suggested that you write to the President and Directors of the Federal Reserve Bank in your Region. I suggested that you urge them to press for an independent, reliable, physical inventory of the Federal Reserve gold in Treasury vaults. Based on the replies of which you have sent me copies, a very significant pattern has emerged. I do not include the New York bank in what I am about to say, but the responding Chairmen and Presidents of the other 11 Regional Banks have said basically two things:

No. 1—Not one single Chairman or President of a Regional Federal Reserve Bank says he has ever seen the gold or had it inventoried. Instead to a man, they are all relying totally on the assurances of the Treasury and their own Federal Reserve Board here in Washington.

No. 2—Not one single reply reflects a correct understanding of his own enormous legal liability involving the gold. Every indication is that they were never properly informed that they were taking on this responsibility.

My friends, I know this sounds astonishing, but the correspondence demonstrating these two points is just too overwhelming to ignore. Let me just read you a few quotes to show you what I mean.

From the Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta, President William F. Ford wrote, quote:

"As you may know, I have no jurisdiction over the stock of gold at Fort Knox. However I have discussed the issues that you raise with my colleagues at the Federal Reserve Board in Washington."

From the Federal Reserve Bank of Boston, President Frank E. Morris wrote, quote:

"I have never had reason to doubt that the gold stock and shipments have been properly accounted for."

From the Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas City, President Roger Guffey wrote, quote:

"I did not perform a physical count of all assets of the Bank at the time I became president, nor have I conducted a physical inventory of the nation's gold stock held by the United States Treasury Department.

As I am sure you are aware, the nation's gold reserves are no longer held by the Federal Reserve System but rather the title and custody is held by the United States Treasury as a result of the 'Gold Reserve Act of 1934.'"

From the Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia, Chairman John W. Eckman wrote, quote:

"While the 12 Reserve Banks and their Directors have a degree of local autonomy, the questions you and Mr. Durell ask and the actions you request are more logically in the province of the Board of Governors."

From the Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas, President Ernest T. Baughman wrote to my good friend, Mr. Edward Durell, quote:

"With respect to the gold which underlies the Gold Certificates

held by the Federal Reserve Banks, I have made no effort to eyeball that gold. I am prepared with no reservations whatever to accept the representations of those government officials responsible for the gold that they do in fact have it."

And from the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond, President Robert P. Black wrote, quote:

"I would like to emphasize as strongly as I know how that neither the Federal Reserve System nor the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond has custody or control of the gold stock of the United States."

Then he quotes the gold legislation of 1933 and 1934 which I discussed for you earlier, and he concludes on that basis that, quote:

"It seems clear to me that this legislation removes from the Federal Reserve System any responsibility for the custody and control of the gold stock of the United States."

My friends, it is little wonder that the Chairmen and Presidents of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks are so dangerously misinformed. Their own legal responsibility for the gold is based not on custody but on ownership. And as I have already established in detail for you, that ownership is not open to dispute. It is reflected in the Gold Certificates owned by the Federal Reserve Banks, but here is the shocker: The 12 Regional Banks do not have those Certificates, even though they are shown on their respective balance sheets as "Gold Certificate Accounts."

Where did all those certificates go? Here is the answer. I quote now from a letter dated January 9, 1981 to my good friend Mr. Durell. It was written by Robert P. Black, President of the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond, quote:

"I am unable to send you a copy of the certificate you requested. The 'Gold Certificate Account' shown on the balance sheets of the Federal Reserve Banks is managed by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System in Washington, D.C. Amounts in this account are allocated to the 12 Federal Reserve Banks by the Board of Governors."

My friends, I speak again now as a lawyer. In any conspiracy to commit a crime, the circle of conspirators is always kept as small as possible. The fewer the people involved, the less the risk of exposure, and that is exactly the pattern that is emerging now.

By every evidence up to now, the officers and directors of 11 of the 12 Regional Federal Reserve Banks are not party to the gold conspiracy. They are dangerously misinformed, but they appear to be acting in good faith. It is they who will be faced with enormous fines, prison terms, and ruined lives when the Scandal breaks; and yet they appear to be blissfully unaware of their great danger. And that, my friends, is the second telltale sign in all great conspiracies—the conspirators always make sure that there will be someone else handy to take the blame!

For example, when the CIA, on orders, assassinated President John F. Kennedy, they made sure a "patsy" named Lee Harvey Oswald was on hand; and they also made sure he was silenced before he could raise too many doubts. Likewise, the conspirators within the Treasury and the Federal Reserve Board of Governors have made sure that they, too, will have their scapegoats. Those

scapegoats are to be the officers and directors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks. Ignorance of the law is no excuse; so when the Gold Scandal breaks, as it will, they will be bundled off to prison to satisfy the rage of the American public—that is, my friends, unless they take action now to save themselves.

During the past six weeks or so they have been put on legal notice for the first time ever about the missing Federal Reserve gold—so they can break free of the web of intrigue if they will. They can do this by taking the initiative to bring about an independent, conclusive, physical inventory of the gold. By doing that, they can free themselves of any taint of suspicion; but if they choose not to act, my friends, they will only be sealing their own fate because they are now on legal notice. And if they choose inaction, they will make themselves accessories after the fact in the biggest scandal in American history—the GOLD SCANDAL. The choice is up to them!

My friends, it's up to us—you and me—to alert the Federal Reserve Bank officials to these things, and so I will be sending a copy of this tape to the President of each Federal Reserve Bank by Registered Mail. I need for you to back me up with your letters.

I am about to read you a sample letter to get you started. Please, write a letter like this to the President of the Federal Reserve Bank in your Region. I told you how to get the address in AUDIO LETTER No. 59.

Send the original to the President of the Federal Reserve Bank, and send a copy to each one of the other Directors. A photo copy will do; and as always, be sure to keep a copy for your own file.

Now here's the sample letter I suggest. Feel free to use your own words, but please do not cut corners. WE MUST HAVE ACTION—AND SOON, because time is fast running out:

"Dear Mr. (so and so):

I am writing to you again because of my continuing deep concern over the loss of our gold reserves. Thank you for your earlier reply; but I am concerned that you do not appear to be aware of certain extremely large legal responsibilities on your part. In a recent cassette tape, Dr. Beter has given a legal discussion of these responsibilities on your part. Dr. Beter speaks as a lawyer and a former Counsel to the United States Export-Import Bank, the largest governmental bank in the Western world. Therefore I do not believe that you can safely afford to ignore his legal briefing of your responsibilities regarding the gold.

Dr. Beter has notified his listeners that he is sending a copy of this cassette tape—AUDIO LETTER No. 61—to you by Registered Mail. It will take you and the other Directors of your bank just one hour to hear what he has to say. I cannot urge you strongly enough to do just that.

After you hear Dr. Beter's tape, I believe you will agree with me that you should take steps to protect your own personal interests. To that end, I urge you to demand immediate action by the Federal Reserve Board of Governors to arrange an independent, conclusive, physical inventory of the gold in Treasury vaults. As you will hear Dr. Beter explain, you do have the authority to bring this about.

Please insist that the committee which oversees the inventory

include the President or another Director from each one of the Regional Reserve Banks. You dare not delegate this duty to anyone else, including even the Federal Reserve Board of Governors. Your own personal vital interests are at stake!

If you will do this, it can only have one of two possible outcomes, both good. One possibility is that the inventory will prove that all the gold is there, and Dr. Beter is wrong. That would lay to rest seven years of unanswered questions which have undermined confidence in America's banking system.

The only other possibility would be to prove that much, if not all, of the gold is missing. In that case, you will be taking the first step toward correcting the real causes of our crumbling economy, and you will have removed yourself from any taint of suspicion.

Either the gold is there—OR—it is not there. Dr. Beter is not afraid to learn the truth. Are you?"

—Followed by your signature.

My friends, once again I'm asking you to go to work. Please get your letter and copies off to the Federal Reserve Bank in your Region right away. As I said before, I hold out no hope for the New York bank, but the other 11 Regional Banks appear to be a real ray of hope; and if they will do their duty and use their latent powers, they can save themselves while doing a great service to America.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it is time for just a few final words as my "Last Minute Summary."

Today, January 20, 1981, is Inauguration Day. To all outward appearances, a new Administration has begun; but thanks to the obscure, recent Branti decision of the Supreme Court, the change is only on the surface. The real battle to control the United States Government continues unabated.

My friends, these things cannot be allowed to continue. It is up to you and me to do our Constitutional duty to save our land.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #62

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is February 28, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 62. Last month I mentioned that I plan to record my AUDIO LETTER on a slightly more flexible schedule. In preparing the first topic of my report to you this month, I have taken advantage of this increased flexibility.

For several months now I've been compiling information about a major new story, and just within the past few days I've been able to confirm some key final details about it. So thanks to waiting a few extra days, I'm now able to give you a much more complete report about it. The story, my friends, is that of the space shuttle COLUMBIA now being prepared for launch at Cape Canaveral.

This month I am also able to report some encouraging progress with certain Directors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks. It is only a beginning but, my friends, I am convinced we are going to win.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE SECRET MILITARY MISSION OF THE SPACE SHUTTLE COLUMBIA

Topic #2—THE NEW FERMENT OF GROWING WAR TENSIONS Topic #3—GOLD SWINDLES BY THE MODERN DAY MONEYCHANGERS

Topic #1—One day just over three months ago America's Manned Space Program suddenly started showing signs of life. The day was November 24, 1980, and that was the day when the space shuttle Columbia was rolled out into public at the Kennedy Space Center in Florida. It was the first public appearance by the shuttle in almost two years. The shuttle arrived at Cape Canaveral two years ago next month, March 1979. From then until last November 1980 the shuttle Columbia remained in hiding in a metal cocoon called the "Orbiter Processing Facility", but on November 24 suddenly the cocoon opened up and out rolled the space shuttle.

The space shuttle Columbia made only a short trip that day. It was towed about 300 yards to the nearby Vehicle Assembly Building, where it disappeared once again, but we were told that this was only the beginning of a much longer journey. For the first time in nearly six years the United States was committing itself in public to a manned mission into space. The roll-out of the Columbia on November 24 took many people by surprise.

America's Space Shuttle Program is a full three years behind schedule. Ever since late 1977 we've heard about nothing but problems, delays, and more problems with the space shuttle. Last November 19, 1980, a former director of the Apollo Moon Program seemed to summarize it all in disgust. Dr. George Low said in a speech in Chicago, quote:

"Today I wonder whether we could start another Apollo, much less accomplish it."

But only five days after Dr. Low said those words, the surprise roll-out of the shuttle Columbia took place. For three years the Space Shuttle Program was seemingly placed on hold, yet now the countdown is under way, and there is an air of urgency about it. Corners are being cut, safety precautions are being shortchanged, unheard of risks are being taken; and when reporters ask why these things are being done, they receive only double talk instead of answers.

The space shuttle is the most complex American spacecraft ever built. There are more things to go wrong than ever before, and the entire future of America's Manned Space Program depends on the shuttle. In fact, within a few years we are told that the shuttle will be launching practically all American satellites.

As far as space is concerned, America has put all of its eggs in one basket—the Space Shuttle. With so much at stake, my friends, the old NASA would have proceeded step by step with great care. In the old days each problem had to be solved before moving on to the next phase of a space program; and as a final test, every new American manned spacecraft made its first trip or two into space without astronauts aboard. That was simply to make sure that there would be no unexpected problems before having astronauts risk their lives. But, my friends, that was

the old NASA. Those who are calling the shots in America's Space Program today are a different breed. Our Space Program has become just one more tool of the Bolsheviks here, and they are interested in only one thing—getting ready for thermonuclear war—and so a wartime rush mentality is dominating the shuttle launch preparations right now at Cape Canaveral. This is to be the shuttle's very first trip into space—and yet it will be a manned mission! We're told that the shuttle is designed to make at least 100 trips into space and back, and yet NASA says it cannot spare one or two preliminary shuttle launches in order to check it out. NASA refuses even to consider beginning with a manned suborbital launch like the early manned Mercury shots in 1961. Instead, the very first launch of the shuttle Columbia is to take it all the way into orbit.

My friends, this plan is filled with glaring examples of haste. There seems to be no regard for the safety of the astronauts who will fly it. For example, consider the radically new rocket engines of the space shuttle. There are three main engines called SSMEs by NASA. These engines have never flown into space before; in fact, they had never even been fired altogether until just eight days ago. On that day, February 20, the three engines were fired for only 20 seconds on the pad at Cape Canaveral. NASA did not run the risk of running them longer even though these engines are supposed to be reusable launch after launch. Instead, based on a mere twenty-second test, NASA will have two astronauts risk their lives on the engines; and in the actual launch into space, the engines will not run for just 20 seconds—they must operate for nine minutes! NASA is now gambling that the three fresh engines on Columbia will last long enough to get into orbit. But the shuttle engines are only one example of NASA's unexplained haste because if Columbia does reach orbit, the next question is: Can it return? My friends, the answer is: NASA does not know.

By now you have probably heard or read about the radically new Thermal Protection System of the space shuttle. All of our previous spacecraft had heat shields which carried away heat by burning away during re-entry; therefore they could only be used once. But the shuttle is supposed to be re-usable over and over, so it requires a different kind of heat shield. It is a lightweight ceramic, broken up into more than 30,000 small pieces called "tiles."

For at least two years now we have been hearing stories about problems with the tiles. It began when the shuttle Columbia arrived at Cape Canaveral in March 197 9 on the back of a jumbo jet. Many tiles had been lost or damaged during the flight and the Columbia looked like it had smallpox. Soon after that we started hearing about tiles being tested, removed, replaced, re-tested, and so on. Part of the controversy over the tiles is real. There are legitimate arguments among many space engineers whether the tiles will succeed or fail. Those questions will finally be answered one way or another only when and if the shuttle Columbia drops out of orbit to return to earth. But for the Bolsheviks who now control America's Space Program, the arguments over the tiles are only a tool.

The tile controversy made a perfect cover story to explain away the 3-year grounding of the space shuttle. The real reason is that America has been virtually locked out of military space missions since late 1977. As recently as August 1977 it had looked as if the United States would soon be eclipsing Russia with new space exploits. That month the first free-flight tests of the space shuttle took place. A shuttle was carried aloft aboard a jumbo jet, then cut loose and guided to earth by

astronauts. The test went perfectly. The era of the space shuttle was about to dawn, or so it seemed.

Meanwhile Russia's space program seemed completely silent, but everything turned upside-down the following month, September 1977. Russia began deploying her secretly-developed Charged Particle Beam weapon in space, and on September 27, 1977, history's first true space battle took place, the BATTLE OF THE HARVEST MOON. I reported it that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 26. In a stunning upset, Russia smashed America's secret military control of space.

Two days later, Russia's Manned Space Program suddenly came to life. Russia launched the Salyut-6 Space Station on September 29, 1977; and from that day to this, there has been a steady stream of Russian cosmonauts into space and back. Even cosmonauts from seven (7) other countries have been whisked into space by Russian rockets. There have even been cosmonauts in orbit from Cuba and Vietnam. Meanwhile, American astronauts have been able to do nothing but grind their teeth and watch.

The Bolsheviks here, my friends, have been waiting and watching for a moment of weakness among their enemies—the secret new rulers of Russia. The Bolsheviks want to regain their former positions of power in Russia; but for years now, Russia's new rulers have been expelling the Bolsheviks, who have flocked mostly here to the United States. When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 55 last June 1980, I reported that a moment of weakness was developing in the Kremlin. Bolshevik forces had succeeded in penetrating the Kremlin. They were wreaking havoc among Russia's top leadership. At the same time, Russia's expulsion of Bolsheviks slowed to a trickle. Immigration from Russia was at its lowest level in years during the second half of 1980. So the decision was made last July to go ahead with a space shuttle mission.

For the first time in three years there appeared to be a chance of slipping through Russia's space blockade. Even so any American attempt to launch a manned military mission into space will be very risky. It dare not be attempted until a mission is ready that is worth the risk. The Bolsheviks are now ready with that mission. It is the secret pay load now in the cargo bay of the space shuttle Columbia. It was developed in association with the supersecret "National Reconnaissance Office" whose very existence is regarded as secret in Government circles.

When Russia began her surprise space offensive in September 1977, she did so by destroying an American Spy Satellite on September 20. A week later, America's secret Moon Base was put out of action, which freed Russia's hands to pour into space. In the months that followed, Russia gradually knocked out all of our Spy and Early Warning satellites, one by one. When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 33 seven months later, I reported that Russia had finished the job. Since that time, April 1978, America has had no Spy satellites on continuous duty over Russia. Several spy satellites have been launched since then but each one has been knocked out quickly. Not one has lasted for as long as one week! But these brief spy satellite missions have alerted the Bolsheviks here to one thing—that is, there are major changes taking place among the potential wartime targets in Russia. Some known targets from the past are becoming less important, while other new targets have been detected.

Last June in AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I outlined the secret plan for an American nuclear first strike against Russia. That plan relies on missiles, including America's secret mobile missile,

the Minuteman TX, and it cannot succeed without up-to-date information on the targets in Russia.

As I will outline in Topic #2, the Bolsheviks here are once again doing all they can to get set for nuclear war, so they are desperate for new, up-to-date reconnaissance data from Russia. In other words, they must have an operational spy satellite which can survive in orbit for a while, and the Bolsheviks here now believe they have developed that kind of satellite. Eventually they know that Russia's orbital fleet of manned Cosmos Interceptors will succeed in destroying it; but before they can do so, military planners here believe the satellite will be able to radio back enough information to work with. And so, my friends, the first flight of America's space shuttle, the Columbia, is to be a secret military mission. It's purpose is to prepare for war. That is why there is such a frantic effort to rush to launch with unproven hardware, and that is why the very first mission will be manned, instead of an unmanned test shot. It has to be manned because of the secret cargo it is carrying in its huge cargo bay.

When the shuttle reaches orbit, if it reaches orbit, astronauts will be required to deploy the military satellite inside. The satellite is basically a spy satellite, but it is also much more. In order to do its job, it is designed to fend off Russian space weapons for as long as possible. As a result, it will be nothing less than a robot battle station in space. In space terminology, it is a "hardened satellite" able to withstand an attack without being easily destroyed. It is also equipped with active defenses, meaning it can shoot back.

Right now the components of the satellite are crammed into the cargo bay of the shuttle Columbia. They were already there when the Columbia was rolled out last November. Once in orbit, the job of the astronauts, John Young and Robert Crippen, will be to assemble it and get it operating, and fast.

Once it is assembled and floating in space, the satellite will look like a giant rotating tin can perhaps 30 feet long and 20 feet in diameter; but on closer inspection it would seem to be made more like a wooden barrel except that the barrel staves are all made of a whitish metal, tungsten. Several of these metal sections can be retracted on automatic command, making the satellite look like a shiny barrel with a few staves missing. Inside the outermost tungsten barrel is another smaller barrel; and inside that is a still smaller barrel. Finally, at the very center is the heart of the satellite itself. The tungsten barrels are separated from one another by a foot or more of space. There is also considerable space between the innermost barrel and the core satellite. The tungsten barrels constitute the passive defense of the satellite. If a Charged Particle Beam blast strikes the outermost barrel, it will vaporize a spot on the barrel; but in the process it will absorb energy and diffuse the beam. In theory, that will greatly reduce the damage done to the second barrel and do no damage at all to the innermost barrel. Tungsten has the highest melting point of any metal, so this system of particle beam shields is expected to last through a number of battles.

The three-layer tungsten shield system is also instrumented. When a blast strikes it, the blast pattern will be sensed as an initial indication of where the attack is coming from. A computer in the core satellite will then activate a secret new target acquisition system called LADAR, meaning laser direction and ranging. The movable barrel stave sections of the rotating tungsten shields will be opened up. LADAR will peek out through

the openings as they rotate past in ultra-fast scanning.

In the black void of space, LADAR is expected to be much more efficient than radar, picking up the Russian attacker quickly; and the moment it does, the American robot battle station will open fire. When it does so, it will pose a major threat even to a Russian Cosmos Interceptor because, my friends, the American satellite will be armed with a giant carbon dioxide gas dynamic laser. It is a more compact version of the laser which has been successfully tested aboard a modified KC-135 jet tanker. It produces intense infrared radiation with a power of over one megawatt—that is 1,000,000 watts. What can a one megawatt laser do? Let me give you an idea. An industrial 10,000-watt laser can slice through a one-inch thick steel plate in a matter of seconds. The satellite laser is 100 times that powerful. It is not as powerful as a Russian Charged Particle Beam, but it is powerful enough to cripple or destroy a Russian attacker—that is, my friends, if the space shuttle Columbia makes it into orbit and if Young and Crippen succeed in deploying the satellite. But will they?

In the past I have given many details about the clever deceptions which have surrounded our Space Program. But, my friends, the deceptions of the past were child's play compared to what we are about to witness, because the Bolsheviks here must get their robot battle station into orbit without letting you know about it; and whether they succeed or fail, they must try to maintain the appearance of success. As I mentioned earlier, everything is riding on the space shuttle, so I will now describe the plan for the coming flight of the Columbia. I will describe what you will see if the plan works, and I will also describe what will really be taking place, which is far different.

According to the latest schedule, the Columbia is intended to lift off on a sunny morning in mid April 1981. Millions will watch on television as Young and Crippen roar upward into the sky and into orbit. Then the scene will shift to the standard coverage of Young and Crippen in their cockpit, and for a little over two days the coverage will continue off and on. There will be cockpit scenes, scenes in Mission Control, and so on; and there will be some seemingly unexpected problems, nothing serious but just enough to add a touch of spice to it all. It will look for all the world like the real thing. Television viewers will have no suspicion that they are only watching excerpts from numerous simulations of the flight. In its cover-up of the SKYLAB fiasco, NASA learned well the techniques of deception.

Meanwhile there will be no television coverage at all of the real flight except for the initial lift-off. Instead, when Young and Crippen reach orbit, they will go to work fast. They will depressurize the cabin, open the cargo hatch, and move the robot spy satellite components away from the Columbia. They will also remove a Gemini-type two-man space capsule from the Columbia cargo bay. After moving these things several hundred yards away from the Columbia, the two astronauts will close the cargo bay by remote control. They will maneuver down underneath the Columbia for a quick visual inspection of the condition of the thermal tiles; but the urgency of setting up the robot satellite will leave no time for any attempt to repair any tiles. If the astronauts were to do that, they would lose precious time both in setting up the satellite and in making good their own escape in the Gemini capsule. This, my friends, is why NASA has refused to include a tile repair kit on the first shuttle mission. As NASA administrator Robert Frosch said in a recent news conference, quote:

"I felt in the end that it would be likely to increase risk, perhaps not risk with regard to the tile system but risk with regard to the safety of the whole flight."

After the briefest of inspections, the astronauts will turn over control of the Columbia to NASA Houston with the words: "Okay for retrofire." Then they will float away from the Columbia and set to work quickly on assembling the robot spy satellite. It is expected that they will complete the job within three to four orbits. As soon as the robot satellite is assembled and operating, Young and Crippen will board their Gemini-type space capsule. If all goes according to plan, they will drop out of orbit and splash down in the Pacific Ocean. It will only be the evening of the same day they took off, but on television the falsified NASA coverage will still be showing tapes of Young and Crippen in the simulated cockpit of the Columbia. Young and Crippen are planned to be picked up at sea after their secret splashdown. From there they are to be transported to Edwards Air Force Base in California to await further events.

Meanwhile about 12 hours after the launch from Cape Canaveral, Houston will send a retrofire signal to the unmanned Columbia. The shuttle's engines will fire. Somewhere over the Indian Ocean the space shuttle will enter the atmosphere. It will be the first complete test of the shuttle's thermal tiles. If they work, Columbia will survive re-entry. Then at lower altitude, piloting of the Columbia will be taken over by remote control. If all goes well, the Columbia will touch down in the great sandy desert of western Australia.

If all goes according to plan, all these things will take place during the first day of the supposed 54-hour mission of Young and Crippen. Then for the final act of the charade, we will be told on television that the Columbia is re-entering over the Pacific Ocean; and finally, lo and behold the space shuttle will glide into view. Everyone will watch in fascination as the shuttle dips lower and lower over Edwards Air Force Base, California. Finally it will touch down on the dry lake bed and gradually brake to a stop, and out will climb Young and Crippen. Everyone will assume that they are climbing out of the Columbia; but, my friends, they will actually be climbing out of a different shuttle named the ENTERPRISE. It was the Enterprise which we saw in those landing tests in August 1977, and it will again be the Enterprise which we will see making another landing soon. It will be retouched to look like it came from space, but it will be a fraud.

My friends, that is the plan as it now stands, but there may well be some big surprises. The Bolsheviks here have devised a robot battle station to spy on Russia and defend itself against Russian space weapons, but it is designed primarily with Cosmos Interceptors in mind. And while American designers have been devising ways to counter the Cosmos Interceptors, Russian technology has also been advancing.

The secret military mission of the space shuttle Columbia is a desperate gamble. If it succeeds, it will bring the world much closer to thermonuclear war. If it fails, we may well be witnessing America's final manned mission into Space.

Topic #2—In AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 59 last October I reported that the Bolsheviks here were trying to set up a new strategy to bring on NUCLEAR WAR ONE. They had been foiled repeatedly in their attempts to trigger a war by means of our hostages in Iran, so they were devising a new plan which was to be set in motion after

releasing the hostages. When voting machines registered a surprise landslide in the name of Ronald Reagan last November, it set a deadline for arranging a hostage release. That deadline was Inauguration Day, January 20, last month. Otherwise the Bolsheviks were in danger of losing control of the Iran crisis which they themselves had created, and so at the very last minute our hostages were released last month.

Contrary to the original plans of the Bolsheviks here and in Iran, our hostages came home alive; but now new maneuvers are under way to bring on war. Bolshevik agents are stirring up Poland in never ending strikes and turmoil. Having failed in their Pope's Revolution plan of two years ago, they're trying to make Poland explode in a different way.

Meanwhile, to keep Russia's new rulers off balance, another crisis has been created in our own hemisphere—El Salvador. CIA operatives are stirring up both sides in the civil war there in order to have something to blame on Cuba. As always, the Russians are reacting strongly to the implied new American threats against Cuba, so El Salvador is serving its purpose as a tool to stoke up tensions between Russia and the United States.

The El Salvador crisis contains echoes of "Operation Guyana" two years ago. Now, as then, Russia is being encouraged to worry about Cuba as a diversionary tactic; and just as happened in Guyana, human lives are being sacrificed purely to attract attention.

Public attention was first riveted on Guyana by the Port Kaituma Airport massacre, and not long ago public attention was focused on El Salvador by the murder of four religious workers. All this is to help catch Russia off guard later on when the arena of conflict shifts once again to the Persian Gulf area.

Once again secret plans are being laid to create conflict between Israel and Saudi Arabia. For that purpose the United States has just announced that it will sell offensive armaments for Saudi Arabia's F-15 Fighter Bombers, and at the same time there are planted reports that the Saudis favor a jihad (a Moslem holy war) to retake Jerusalem. Right now all of this is going on quietly. It is not highlighted in our controlled major media. But the preparations are under way now for a Persian Gulf explosion later this year of 1981.

When that takes place, the plan is to focus all eyes once again on Iran. At a critical moment the shaky Iranian government will be brought down. Suddenly that will leave Russian forces on the north and American forces on the south, with a vacuum in between; and almost over night the stage will be set for a nuclear confrontation.

As a preliminary step, the plan is also to declare a "National Economic Emergency" here in the United States. That will trigger the emergency powers of the President; and while we will be told that it is all to fight inflation, it will actually be to prepare for nuclear war!

My friends, if all this is to be stopped, we must go to the source of the Satanic power. That power is MONEY POWER, wrongly used. It is the power of the modern day moneychangers in our land, so it is to them that I now direct your attention.

Topic #3—When our Lord Jesus Christ walked the earth nearly 2000 years ago, He did many miraculous things. He healed the sick, He fed the hungry, He loved the unloved. In short, He went about

doing good. Most of the time our Lord astonished everyone with His patience. When He taught He found that people did not pay attention, and so He had to teach them the same lesson over and over again, and yet He never once grew angry with anyone who was seeking to learn. Even so, He also told His disciples, "Do you think that I have come to bring peace? No, not peace, but a sword." He explained that there must be a division between those who are for God and those who are against God. And as gentle as He was with the weak, He displayed a fiery anger with those who were swollen up with arrogant power; and one time the anger of our Lord Jesus Christ exploded into violence. That one occasion, my friends, was when He confronted the moneychangers in the temple.

The temple moneychangers possessed a money monopoly. Everyone who came to worship presented offerings to the priests; and to buy something to offer, they had to use a special temple money, so called. The temple money was not really money at all. It was only a kind of scrip with no intrinsic value. But everyone who came to worship, from the richest to the poorest, had to turn in good coins of gold, silver, and copper to buy the scrip. That was the only way that they could buy a sheep, or a ram, or a dove to offer to the priest. The moneychangers really performed no useful function at all; but thanks to their money monopoly, they extracted tremendous profits from everyone else. When Jesus saw all this, He became enraged. The moneychangers were so corrupt that they were standing in the way of worship itself in order to make money, so Jesus wasted no time trying to reason with them. Instead, He seized a whip and went after them. He drove away the moneychangers, He knocked over their counting tables; and seizing their bags of money obtained by a form of theft, He ripped them open and spilled them out.

My friends, today it is you and I who are at the mercy of the moneychangers. We, too, have been forced to give up real money made of silver and gold. Instead, we are forced by the Federal Reserve money monopoly to deal in Federal Reserve IOUs—nothing but paper scrip! And in return, the arrogant moneychangers of today, the Bolsheviks, are trying to take everything from us. They are eating up our savings by creating inflation through interest rates, which create no new wealth. They are using their money power to betray us into nuclear war, and they are even trying to destroy the Christian faith itself by constantly working to pervert our religious practices. Like the moneychangers of old, haters of our Lord Jesus Christ are once again sitting in the temple.

Almost from the moment our Republic was founded, the moneychangers started trying to seize control of America's money. First the idea was called the "Bank of the United States." Such a bank did exist for a while with a charter granted by Congress, but on July 10, 1832, President Andrew Jackson put a stop to the central bank idea for a while. Congress had passed the bill to give a new 20-year charter to a "Bank of the United States." Jackson vetoed the bill with the words:

"Every monopoly and all exclusive privileges are granted at the expense of the public, which ought to receive a fair equivalent."

In other words, Jackson was insisting that the public be treated fairly.

But, my friends, the moneychangers never give up. In 1913 they finally got what they wanted. It is called the FEDERAL RESERVE SYSTEM. Nowadays few people know the story of how the Federal Reserve System came into existence. Suffice it to say

that it took only a few of the international bankers to do it, without great fanfare. One man more than any other was the father of the Federal Reserve in its present form. As the proceedings of the Academy of Political Science of Columbia University put it, quote:

"The Federal Reserve Act will be associated in history with the name of Paul M. Warburg."

In order for Warburg and his associates to quietly get this legislation past Congress, he had to overcome one objection. That major objection was to the creation of only one central bank, which would obviously be a monopoly. Warburg got around that by conceiving the 12-bank Federal Reserve System; but when a Senator asked him how he would maintain control of 12 banks instead of the single bank he favored, Warburg answered, quote:

"It is a little bit complicated, which objection, however, can be overcome in an administrative way."

In other words, my friends, he could short-circuit the 12-bank system and do what he wanted a central bank to do by administrative techniques. And that is what has been done in the situation over our missing gold.

The real central bank is the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, and the administrative arm of that central bank is actually the "Board of Governors" here in Washington. The New York Bank, the Board of Governors, and agents within the United States Treasury Department all work hand in glove. It is they who constitute the modern day moneychangers in our land.

In all of this, the other 11 Regional Federal Reserve Banks just go along for the ride. They do possess latent powers of their own, but thanks to Warburg's "administrative techniques" they're always indoctrinated not to exercise those powers. Instead, the 11 Regional Banks outside New York are treated like children by the moneychangers in New York and Washington. They are given big buildings, fancy offices, impressive stationery, fat salaries, numerous advisors, and impressive titles; but they are always told in effect, "Leave all the thinking to us big boys." Year in and year out the Regional Federal Reserve Banks, all except New York, are kept in the dark, so last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 61 I tried to light a candle in that darkness.

All of the Federal Reserve Banks share in the responsibility for safeguarding our gold. The Presidents and Directors of all the Banks are now on legal notice concerning those responsibilities, so from now on they will have no excuse. Either they are for us OR they are against us—they must make a choice. They do hold power, and those who hold power must be held accountable with the consequences of its exercise.

The question we have posed is very simple and very basic: EITHER AMERICA'S GOLD IS THERE or IT IS NOT THERE. We want an indisputable physical inventory to find out once and for all, so we have appealed to the Regional Federal Reserve Banks to wake up, to flex their muscles for once, and to bring about an inventory.

My friends, I want to thank all of you who followed through on what I asked you to do last month, and I want to let you know the results so far.

Up to now the Federal Reserve System is continuing to maintain its false outer appearance of unruffled unity; but behind that

facade, little cracks are beginning to open up. It's true, many of the Regional Bank Directors have so far been unable to open their minds to the truth, but there are some important exceptions. One high official of one Regional Federal Reserve Bank is being very cooperative up to now. Very quietly he is providing us with important information. He has not yet gone so far as to demand an inventory, but he is responding with an open mind. At one other Regional Bank a high official has signaled to us that he is seriously concerned, but up to now he is still sitting on the fence. Beyond that, I have also received reliable reports that scattered around the country a number of Regional Federal Reserve Directors are troubled. Until last month they had never been given one hint of their own legal responsibilities regarding the gold.

My friends, all this is at least an encouraging start, but it is clear that they are going to take more convincing. We should not be surprised at that nor discouraged by it. Many of these men have been associated with the Federal Reserve System for many years. Human nature being what it is, they naturally find it hard to accept the fact that the wool has been pulled over their eyes. Typically, these are highly educated men, they are not stupid. They will have to swallow their pride in many cases if they are to see how thoroughly they have been fooled and used.

Over the past six or seven years I've made public many facts which these men should consider for their own good, but rather than go back over any of those again, I want to report three new ones. The discrepancies surrounding our gold supplies just go on and on, my friends.

First, let me refer to the Treasury Inspector General's report to Senator William Proxmire dated last September 30, 1980. This so-called report came about because of your letters to Senator Proxmire. The subject was the missing gold shipment from Fort Knox of January 20, 1965, which I have discussed in past AUDIO LETTERS. The shipment amounted to over one and three-quarter MILLION ounces of gold worth around a billion dollars at today's prices, yet it was omitted from official Treasury shipment listings.

Recently this feeble excuse for a report has been cited by the Federal Reserve Board of Governors. For example on February 2, 1981, Theodore E. Allison, secretary of the Board of Governors, wrote to the president of the Philadelphia Bank, Mr. Edward G. Boehne. Boehne had written to the Board of Governors in response to your inquiries; and with their letter of reply, the Board enclosed the Treasury Inspector General's report! My friends, I have mentioned before that this report is totally unsatisfactory. It is a fraud and a farce, yet now the moneychangers of the Board of Governors are falling back on that report as one way to calm down the Regional Banks. So I think it is appropriate to give you just one example of the glaring errors sprinkled throughout the report. I also want to do this because some of you have asked me to say more about it.

If you have a copy of the Treasury Inspector General's report, please look on page 2. The third paragraph refers to the missing shipment of January 20, 1965. It says very impressively, quote:

"This shipment was receipted for on Treasury Department Form TUS-12b—Receipt for Forwarding Depository, Voucher No. 65-1—on January 22, 1965, by John P. Bath, an employee of the New York Assay Office."

Sounds cut and dried, doesn't it? Sorry, my friends, it so

happens that the New York Assay Office had no permanent employee named John P. Bath on January 22, 1965; so if the Receipt quoted by the Treasury Inspector General exists at all, it means absolutely nothing. It is fraudulent! That is the kind of report which Senator William Proxmire was so eager and happy to settle for, and that is the kind of report which the Federal Reserve Board of Governors now uses to soothe the Regional Banks. If the Regional Federal Reserve Banks want to swallow that, then shame on them.

Now let me give you a second example—another major discrepancy in the records of the Treasury Department and the Federal Reserve Board of Governors. I have spoken before about the so-called "London Gold Pool" which operated between 1961 and 1968. This is the official cloak of authority which was used during that period to explain the hemorrhage of gold out of Fort Knox. According to official Treasury records, some 219.5 MILLION ounces of gold left Fort Knox. Of that amount, supposedly a little over 9-million ounces went to the New York Federal Reserve Bank. The other 210-million ounces were supposedly destined for the London Gold Pool. But now let me give you the conflicting statements of former Treasury Secretary William Simon. On May 4, 1976, he wrote to then Congressman John Conlan of Arizona. Conlan had requested some better answers from Simon than he had given previously to questions about our missing gold. Simon spent over two months constructing a reply to Conlan's February 26, 1976 letter. Simon sent Conlan a two-page letter plus an eight-page memorandum trying to refute the charges. At one point in the memorandum Simon says, quote:

"The statement which alleges that the shipments of gold to London for the London Gold Pool arrangement were used as a cover for secret losses of United States gold simply isn't true."

And yet, just four sentences later, Simon says, quote:

"When the arrangement was terminated by the Washington agreement of March 1968, the United States had made net sales to the Pool during its period of operation totaling 45.2-million ounces."

Now let's compare two numbers side by side, my friends. First is Simon's number. As Secretary of the Treasury he said that the United States sent only about 45-million ounces of gold net to the London Gold Pool, but Treasury records give a different number. At least 210-million ounces disappeared from Fort Knox alone during that period. If only 45-million ounces went to the Gold Pool, as Simon said in writing, what happened to all the rest? Two hundred ten million (210-million) minus 45-million leaves 165-million ounces of gold from Fort Knox unaccounted for! Yet, I repeat, the only excuse ever given for the Fort Knox gold hemorrhage was the London Gold Pool. My friends, that unaccounted-for gold is Federal Reserve gold belonging to the American people. As I detailed last month, the Federal Reserve title to the gold is beyond legal dispute. Every Officer and every Director of every Regional Federal Reserve Bank shares a legal responsibility if that gold is missing, and if they do not investigate. The incredible discrepancy I have just revealed is in black and white in Treasury statements. Do the Regional Banks dare to close their eyes to it? If so, God help us all.

Now let me report just one more mystery to you about our gold. This one did not take place years ago, but just this month—February 1981. Last month our hostages were finally released from Iran. Most of the last-minute settlements involved banking matters. Most of all, Iran demanded that 1.6-million

ounces of gold be returned. According to all the news reports, the return of Iran's gold was arranged by cable transactions between the Federal Reserve System and the Bank of England. Supposedly, Iran's 1.6-million ounces of gold was safe and sound at the New York Federal Reserve Bank. By a system of banking credits, this amount of gold was reportedly credited to Britain's gold stock here in America, then the Bank of England turned over an equivalent amount of gold into Iran's custody in London. We were told that no gold actually left America in this transaction. But, my friends, that is a lie. Simply put, Britain's bankers do not trust us. The Bank of England secretly demanded that Iran's 1.6-million ounces of good delivery gold be physically sent to London; and so on February 7, just three weeks ago, there was a secret gold shipment to London by air. It came to about 1.6-million ounces, but it did not come from the New York Federal Reserve Bank! It was not Iran's gold. Instead, the shipment was made from the New York Assay Office. Dregs of junk gold from Fort Knox were scraped together, then it was rushed to London in secret.

My friends, this raises a very serious question. If Iran's gold still existed at the New York Bank, why was that not sent to London? Why was the New York Assay Office given a panic refining job to scrape together the gold? In any case, the gold that went to London was not Iranian gold—it was Federal Reserve gold, part of the small amount still left in this country. It was taken from the dregs of junk gold removed from Fort Knox for auctions in the recent past. As I reported more than five years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 5, any gold left in Fort Knox is radioactive. It has been contaminated by plutonium super poison stored in the Gold Vault by the CIA in the late 60's. Recently a leading Swiss bank refused to take delivery of Fort Knox gold purchased at a gold auction. Their tests proved that the gold was indeed radioactive; so the Bank of England should test the gold which they just received very carefully.

The secret gold shipment of February 7 further depleted what little is left of the Federal Reserve gold. It took place with the knowledge and collusion of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors and the New York Bank; but once again, the other 11 Regional Banks have been taken for a ride. It may well be that they do not even know about this latest disappearance of their gold. If not, they have once again been used by the moneychangers who control them.

My friends, there are mountains of evidence that our gold reserves are not as claimed, but will the Regional Federal Reserve Bankers wake up in time? Will they take action to save both themselves and our country? If they do not act, what lies ahead may well be foreshadowed in these words written to a commercial banker by one of my listeners: "More and more of my friends and people I know are withdrawing all their funds held in banks, then dealing in cash, silver, gold, and barter systems for their transactions. Banks and bankers, through not serving the true interests of the people, are losing any useful place in society."

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it is time for my "Last Minute Summary."

As I say these words, the space shuttle COLUMBIA is being readied for a desperate secret military mission. Once again powerful forces here in the United States are bent on war, NUCLEAR WAR. Our own money has been taken away from us in order to finance preparations for warfare that will destroy us.

The evil which is being planned for us all has one root. That root is a Satanic and perverted MONEY POWER. If we are serious about saving our land, we must pull up that root. We must do as our Lord Jesus Christ Himself did long ago. We must drive out the moneychangers, and restore honor and honesty to our land.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #63

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is April 1, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 63.

For two days now, news here in the United States has been dominated by the presidential assassination attempt Monday afternoon. The entity Ronald Reagan emerged from the Hilton Hotel waving and smiling at the press and bystanders. Then half a dozen or more shots rang out in rapid fire. The President, reportedly hit once, was thrown into his limousine, which sped off. Also hit were a Secret Service agent, a Washington policeman, and White House Press Secretary James Brady with a bullet through the brain. It all happened at 2:25 P.M. EST, March 30, 1981.

By the time people were coming home from work and tuning in to the continuing news coverage, it was already beginning to look cut and dried. A lone assassin, we were quickly assured, an oddball of some kind. Certainly no hint of a conspiracy; but, my friends, it is always the early reports that contain the truth.

In the early moments after an episode like this, the unseen censorship of our controlled news media does not function so effectively. It is only after the story is told and retold that the untidy gems of truth are weeded out. In those early moments there were a number of puzzles which went unexplained and unmentioned later on. The most significant of these was a report on NBC television by NBC reporter Judy Woodruff. She was a close eyewitness, and said, quote:

"I was probably one-car length and a half away from the President's limousine when the shots were fired. People immediately hit the ground, and I noticed there were some shots fired from an overhanging, from a sidewalk that was above where the President's car was."

Then she continued with other comments.

My friends, those words of NBC's Judy Woodruff can only mean that there were at least two gunmen.

By now every American must have seen the televised assassination attempt for himself over and over again, and the arrested suspect was not the one described by Judy Woodruff. He was not the one firing from an overhanging structure or sidewalk above the President's car. Instead, he was on a street level close to the TV cameras and reporters. Just eight seconds after she spoke the words I just quoted, Judy Woodruff was cut off in the middle of her report, and since that moment there has been no more talk about the assassin firing from above the President—that is, not by the reporters.

There have been related comments by several different medical spokesmen interviewed on television. They spoke of a downward shot which just grazed the President's chest but was deflected into his body when it struck a rib; and last night NBC Nightly News even showed a diagram to this effect; but no one is daring to ask the logical question: "How could a bullet fired by the suspect we saw have struck the President from above?"

You saw it all for yourself, my friends. The President was not bending over when he was hit, but standing straight. The only thing that does explain the bullet from above is what Judy Woodruff reported just once on NBC television.

I'm sorry to say that the warnings which I made public in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 60 and 61 are starting to be fulfilled already. The Bolsheviks here apparently failed this time to cut short the new Administration. But this is only a reprieve, my friends. They are obsessed with the determination to retake total control of the United States Government.

Meanwhile, the Bolsheviks here are continuing to flex their muscles in other ways. In particular, they are hard at work to condition our minds to become more belligerent toward Russia, even though we will be committing mass suicide.

The next major step in this plan is a four-part mini-series to begin Sunday April 5 on ABC television. The series titled "MASADA" was filmed in Israel at a cost of $20, 000, 000. It' s a story of more than 900 Jews who rebelled against ancient Rome and held out for years against impossible odds. Then, faced with the inevitable Roman victory, the Jews of Masada supposedly committed mass suicide rather than be captured.

Ancient Masada, my friends, was the model for the Guyana kibbutz of Jim Jones. At Jonestown just as at Masada, more than 900 men, women, and children were supposed to have committed mass suicide rather than surrender to the imagined enemies of Jim Jones—but it was actually mass murder, not mass suicide. As I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 40, Guyana is intended by the Bolsheviks to be the model for the United States. They want us to develop a Masada complex, because they want us to commit mass suicide in a war we know we cannot win—all to benefit the Bolsheviks alone.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—FIRST-STRIKE PLANNING BY AMERICA AND RUSSIA Topic #2—THE ECONOMIC ROAD TO DICTATORSHIP IN AMERICA Topic #3—YOUR DECISION TO FLEE OR TO FIGHT.

Topic #1—As I say these words, a great tragedy is unfolding slowly in Poland. Less than a year ago a new workers' union called "Solidarity" started gaining power in Poland. It appeared to hold out the promise of a better life for Poles. Instead, the Solidarity union has consistently moved Poland to the brink of crisis after crisis. Each crisis has been more dangerous than the one before it. Now, Poland is moving closer to confrontation with Russia which it cannot possibly win.

What Solidarity is doing in Poland is to taunt the Russian Bear. The moment one crisis is averted, another is set in motion in a relentless campaign of labor turmoil. By its actions, Solidarity is telling Russia, "If you do not intervene militarily, we will take Poland away from you. After Poland, we will break off Hungary, Czechoslovakia, and even East Germany,

and then turn them all into enemies on your doorstep.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 59 last October I gave a warning that this was the true purpose of the Solidarity union in Poland. Solidarity did not spring up spontaneously from the working masses of Poland itself. Instead, it is financed and controlled by the Bolsheviks here in the United States and abroad. The secret purpose of Solidarity is not to serve Poland's workers but to use them. Poland is being forged into another Guyana to be sacrificed on the altar of Satanic Bolshevik power. Already Poland's economy is faltering due to the recurring strikes and turmoil. Food shortages, a favorite Bolshevik weapon, are growing steadily worse; and now the prospect of military intervention is looming ever closer.

Twenty-five years ago Hungary erupted in revolution, and Polish workers rioted. Russia wasted no time in putting down those outbursts by force, yet the United States Government did nothing at all except to wring its hands for public consumption because in those days the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance was in full swing.

The contrast between then and now could hardly be more dramatic, my friends. It is hard to say which nation's behavior has changed more—that of Russia or of America. By comparison to a quarter century ago, Russia has moved towards patience and tolerance. First, in full compliance with the Helsinki Accord, Polish workers were allowed to form their own union independent of government control—in the old Bolshevik days that would have been unheard of in itself. Then, nearly a year of turmoil and crisis has been allowed to pass without military action by Russia. Instead there have been government concessions and even a change of government in Poland, all to defuse labor crises. From any objective viewpoint, all of this adds up to far more tolerant behavior by Russia than 25 years ago.

And yet, what is America's response compared to 1956? The answer is that the United States is now reacting to a lesser provocation with greater belligerence!

In recent days the United States has issued public warnings to Russia which are so blunt as to make Russia lose face if she does not act. Like the Polish Solidarity union itself, the United States is goading and taunting the Russian Bear. So Russia has moved toward moderation, while America has moved toward belligerence.

The public itself is now beginning to see for itself the collapse of the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance, which began coming apart in 1976—five years ago. The split began with the still secret underwater missile crisis in the summer of that year. The four Rockefeller Brothers tried desperately to patch things up, but Russia finished severing the alliance in September 1977. Russia began the massive deployment of a whole new generation of manned space weapons—her unique Space Triad; and, in the process, America's secret military control of space was broken.

All of this was tied directly to drastic changes taking place within the ruling circles of Russia. I have detailed all of this in the course of many past AUDIO LETTER reports. Today it is no longer Russia, but the United States which is dying from the cancer of Bolshevism. The old Bolsheviks, who used to control Russia, have been overthrown and expelled from Russia by the hundreds of thousands, and now they are replacing the Rockefeller cartel as the most powerful faction in America.

Meanwhile, having overthrown the Satanic Bolsheviks, Russia's secret new Christian rulers are struggling to revive the spiritual roots of Russia. Step by step they are reopening churches, welcoming legal shipments of Bibles into Russia, and allowing religious broadcasts into Russia without jamming so long as they are non-political. But eradicating the deep scars of 60 years of Bolshevism is a long and complex task. It requires a complete overhaul of the economic and cultural life of a vast nation.

The overthrown Bolsheviks have no intention of letting the secret new Kremlin rulers finish the job. Instead, they are obsessed with a frenzy to bring Russia to her knees once again. In order to do that the Bolsheviks are using their new active power base here in the United States. Step by step they are maneuvering America toward an all-out war against Russia. In the summer of 1978 I reported that America was secretly shifting to a first-strike nuclear strategy. That is the only way by which the lopsided military superiority of Russia can be offset to some degree. At that time, Russia too was making preparations to be able to mount a first strike if need be; but for about two years now the Russian first-strike planning has been on a back burner. Instead the Russian Kremlin shifted its emphasis to intervention directly within the United States government. Russia's decision to do this followed the assassination of Nelson Rockefeller in late January 1979. The Bolsheviks here were launching an all-out coup d'etat at the highest levels of power in America. They were moving fast with plans for a Middle East war to erupt that same spring. That, in turn, was to lead to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. To prevent that, the Kremlin engaged the Bolsheviks in a no-holds-barred Intelligence war, a war of "doubles" here in Washington.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 46 I revealed Russia's secret weapon in the war of doubles, her "robotoids." These entities look and act human, but they are not human—they are simply man-made products of highly advanced genetic engineering. When I made public what I did about the robotoids, I was met by widespread disbelief. Genetic engineering was not in the news then and did not start making headlines until at least a year later; and so many of my listeners simply closed their minds, declared that such a thing was impossible, and turned away. But lately I'm being asked more and more about this very subject, these genetic replicas of human beings. With all the publicity in recent months about genetic engineering, it is hardly any wonder.

What sounded impossible and taboo less than two years ago is now being hinted at in the daily news. For example, the New York Times carried a big article just one week ago, on March 24, about so-called "gene machines." In the light of what I first reported in May 1979, some words from the article are worth quoting because all this has a direct bearing on a historical turning point which has just taken place. The Times' article begins with the words, quote:

"Some day there will probably be a library containing all the genetic information needed to create a complete human being. This idea, alarming to some, enticing to others, is no longer entirely a flight of science fantasy. New techniques and automated machines are enormously increasing scientists' ability to spell out the message of heredity in living cells, to put together their own artificial messages in the universal genetic code, and to analyze in complete detail the proteins on which all life depends. New instruments promise to compress into days or hours painstaking research that used to occupy weeks, months, or years . "

My friends, there was nothing at all like this in the news two years ago. These words were published only last week in the New York Times; but if you will compare those words with what I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 46, I believe it will speak for itself. And always keep in mind what you already know yourself: Whatever is made public is always many years behind the latest secret developments.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 51 I revealed that the Bolsheviks also had begun deploying genetic replicas called "synthetics." A new kind of guerilla war began at that point, unsuspected by the public, pitting Russian robotoids against Bolshevik synthetics. To the many who are asking about the latest in this unseen tug of war, my comments are unchanged from AUDIO LETTER No. 55. The situation continues to change daily, both here and in Russia, so I can only urge you to keep this in mind as you see events unfold. You will continue to see instances of strange behavior by high public officials along with flip-flops and U-turns in policy, both domestic and foreign. These are the inevitable byproducts of the continuing secret war of genetic doubles.

Another result of this secret war is even more serious. It has to do with the historical turning point which we have just passed. A few minutes ago I mentioned that the Kremlin's contingency planning for a nuclear first strike was put on the shelf about two years ago, but now I must report to you that those plans are no longer on the shelf. They are being revived and updated for use in the highest priority.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 last June I reported that the Bolsheviks were making an all-out attack to retake control of the Kremlin. They were using every weapon at their disposal, including synthetics. For a while the Bolsheviks were on the verge of success. Russia's new ruling group were wounded badly, and many were killed. It all took place without any notice to the public. But without explanation, Russia's expulsion of Bolsheviks slowed to a trickle in mid 1980, and that is how it remained throughout the second half of 1980.

As of now, Russia's new rulers appear to have beaten back the Bolshevik onslaught on the Kremlin. Two months ago, in mid January, Russia abruptly resumed the wholesale expulsion of Bolsheviks. But the battle still is not over, there is still turmoil in the Kremlin, and earlier this month the Bolshevik tide out of Russia was cut back once again. Russia's new rulers have just had a very close call.

In the meantime, new war preparations have been rushing ahead here in the United States. A whole new grand strategy to bring on nuclear war is now being set in motion. Many details of this vast new plan still remain to be worked out, and also the Bolsheviks are having to work around the limited power now exercised by the crumbling Rockefeller cartel. Even so, the broad outlines of the new war strategy are already clearly defined. The new Bolshevik road to NUCLEAR WAR ONE consists of five parallel tracks. They are moving down all five tracks at once, advancing on five fronts.

These five tracks are:

Track 1—Keep the Russians off balance by means of internal turmoil,

Track 2—Get the American people ready for war,

Track 3—A limited but crucial American military return to space, Track 4—Continued expansion of offensive weaponry for a nuclear

war, and

Track 5—The creation of unprecedented multiple crises in the world.

I have already told you a little about Track 1 of the plan—that is, fomenting internal problems in Russia.

As for Track 2, I mentioned a little about the psychological programming of America for war in my introduction. Our preparation for war, economically and politically, deserves further comment, and I will do just that in my second topic.

Track 3 of the Bolshevik war path revolves around the Space Shuttle Program. In AUDIO LETTER No. 62 I revealed the secret military mission of the shuttle Columbia, scheduled for launch early this month. Its purpose is to place a laser-armed, hardened spy satellite in orbit. If it succeeds, it will be the first time in three years that the United States has had a spy satellite on duty for any length of time. Russia has destroyed all the others. I also revealed in my last report that the space shuttle spectacular scheduled to begin shortly will actually involve two shuttles, not just one. I can now report that the plan is to carry out four (4) military missions like this. This can be done even if a shuttle is lost on every mission because, my friends, there are five (5) space shuttles already in existence. Only two of these have ever been seen in public—the Enterprise in 1977, and the Columbia now at Cape Canaveral. The other three are being kept out of sight.

Under Track 4 of the war plan, offensive weapons of all kinds are being readied—some secret, some not. At one extreme are the secret weapons. One of these is the secretly deployed American mobile ICBM, the Minuteman TX which I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 55. Another is the fleet of 52 remaining Titan-2 Missiles armed with giant cobalt doomsday warheads, as I reported last September. At the opposite extreme are the publicly-known strategic weapons. They, too, are being readied, no matter how obsolete they have become. For example, last month on February 8 the Strategic Air Command carried out its largest air operation since World War II. SAC threw everything it had into the exercise. Hundreds of weary old B-52s groaned into the air along with assorted FB-llls and tankers. When war comes, the Bolsheviks know that very few will get through to their targets, and none will return. But they will be thrown into the conflict anyway, just for nuisance value. The Bolshevik attitude is: Every little bit helps.

All these things are important, my friends; but Track 5 of the plan may be the most important of all. That is the part of the plan calling for multiple crises. It is through these crises that the Bolsheviks expect to achieve what they have been denied up to now—a foolproof trigger for a Nuclear War One. They plan to confront the Russians with so many potential avenues to war that the Russians cannot cover them all. Because of this plan, the whole world will soon be seething with strife and turmoil. We will no longer see merely one crisis after another—instead, it will be two, three, four, five major crises in the world all at the same time.

Even now it is beginning to happen. Right now there are simultaneous crises in El Salvador and in Poland—one threatens Russia's client state Cuba, while the other threatens Russia itself. And in the months to come there will be more, involving the Middle East, the Persian Gulf, Red China, and Australia.

All five tracks in the emerging Bolshevik war path converge

about mid 1982. By then they expect to have America on a war footing, as I will explain further in my second topic. All four space shuttle missions are planned to be completed by then. The offensive weapons now in the works will be ready, and by then the world will be in a caldron of crises made to order for setting off nuclear war suddenly and without warning. Just as crises in the Balkans triggered World War I, a world in crisis will trigger NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Russian Intelligence has already informed the Kremlin about the new grand plan of the Bolsheviks here. Russia's rulers have considered that information in the light of their own deadly struggle to retain control of Russia's government during the past year, and they have come to a decision: The time has come for Russia to resume preparations for their own first strike against the United States!

In January 1980 I revealed that the hardliners were once again in control in the Kremlin. They believe nuclear war is inevitable, that the Bolsheviks will keep trying until they bring it about. In their view, the only realistic approach is to prepare to win the inevitable conflict with minimum casualties to Russia. In addition, their planning is aimed at minimizing casualties and irreversible environmental damage to planet Earth.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 38 I described what the Russian rulers call their "cosmic perspective." They are looking ahead to the day when planet Earth itself will be the headquarters of the Interplanetary Russian Empire.

If the Bolsheviks here succeed in striking first, the earth will be poisoned with deadly radiation and radioactive fallout world-wide; yet the Bolsheviks themselves will largely escape the fate which they will bring down upon the rest of us, because by picking the moment for war they will be able to hide safe and sound in expensive Government war bunkers!

But Russia's rulers have no intention of letting that happen. They now intend to strike first. They plan to destroy American missiles in their silos and thereby prevent their old-style nuclear warheads from contaminating the earth. Instead, the Russians intend to fight the entire war with their new-age weapons which produce no fallout. There will be geophysical warfare, shattered reservoirs and dams, neutron bombs, and particle beam blasts from Cosmospheres overhead and from the moon! In short order the United States as we know it will be no more.

But our agony will be for us alone—there will be no fallout to plague the rest of the world. Within the United States, rural areas and small towns without military or other federal installations will be spared. If the Russians follow through on this plan, rural areas will be relatively safe in the initial attack. Even so, the fate that now awaits our nation beggars description. We have allowed the Satanic Bolsheviks to live among us, to warp our ideals, and to corrupt our nation. We have not resisted their intrigues to get us into war; so, now, plans are being made by Russia to exterminate the Bolsheviks here—and when that happens, my friends, tens of millions of us will also die with them.

Topic #2—Last week on March 26 a new presidential council was created by a presidential Executive Order. It's called the PRESIDENT'S COUNCIL ON INTEGRITY AND EFFICIENCY. The Council will have 23 members. This will include officials from the Office of Management and Budget (OMB), the FBI, the Justice

Department, the General Accounting Office of Congress, and representatives of certain Cabinet Secretaries. It will also include 16 Inspectors General assigned to various government departments.

The post of Inspector General is itself a new one. It was created by Congress in 1978. It was the Treasury Inspector General who sent a useless report concerning Fort Knox to Senator William Proxmire last September 30, 1980. I have discussed that report for you in previous AUDIO LETTERS recently. It gave the superficial impression of an investigation to protect the public interest, but its only real function was to help keep the lid on the covered-up GOLD SCANDAL.

Likewise we are told that the new Council on Integrity and Efficiency is being created to root out waste, fraud, and inefficiency in government. We're supposed to believe that it will be the Government's way of keeping watch on itself; but, my friends, this is nothing more than sugar-coating for dictatorship. It is taken straight from the pages of the secret new Constitution for America which I first made public in 1975. We are witnessing the creation of what the secret new Constitution calls "the Watchkeeping Service." The so-called Watchkeeping Service would be headed by an official designated the "Watchkeeper." The Watchkeeper, my friends, corresponds to the Chairman of the new Council on Integrity and Efficiency, Edwin Harper.

The secret new Constitution specifies, quote:

"With the assistance of an appropriate staff, the Watchkeeper shall gather and organize information concerning the adequacy, competence, and integrity of governmental agencies and their personnel. "

Further on, the new Constitution adds that to carry out the purposes of the Watchkeeping Service, quote:

"Personnel may be appointed, investigations made, witnesses examined, post audits made, and information required."

If you are one of those who demanded a copy of the Treasury Inspector General's report to Senator Proxmire, the words I just read from the secret new Constitution should sound very relevant. These things are exactly what the so-called Inspector Generals pretend to do; and in describing the new Council on Integrity and Efficiency, White House spokesmen said that the Council will have the job of developing, quote:

"A corps of well-trained and highly skilled auditors and investigators."

My friends, I first made public the secret new Constitution for America in my AUDIO BOOK talking tape No. 4 in July 1975. Shortly after that I also released a pamphlet containing the entire text of the secret new Constitution. That is what I was reading from a few moments ago. As I detailed in my special AUDIO BOOK tape, it is an elaborate prescription for Corporate Socialist Dictatorship here in America.

When I first made the secret new Constitution public in 1975, the late Nelson Rockefeller, then as Vice-President, was hoping to bring it into being all at once. At the same time, he expected to make himself President of the new disguised dictatorship for nine years. And, if Sara Jane Moore had not missed when she shot at then President Gerald Ford, Rockefeller

might have succeeded; but by the grace of God it did not turn out that way.

So instead, Nelson's late brother John D. Rockefeller III spearheaded an alternate plan. In full-page ads all across America, a "Manifesto of Change" was published. It proclaimed a so-called "Bicentennial Era" from 1976 to 1989. It was said that it took 13 years from the beginning of the American Revolution to the final emergence of America's new government 200 years ago; and so they said they would give themselves that long again, if need be, to once again revolutionize America's government.

Most people have long since forgotten all about the Bicentennial and its obscure declarations of change to come; but step by step, gradually, the Secret Constitution is already being implemented all around us. It was set in motion by the Corporate Socialist Rockefeller cartel, and ever since the November 1980 election, the crumbling Rockefeller machine has been trying to push it ahead. Even the loud cries of governmental deregulation are not what they appear to be. They are actually intended to pave the way for the so-called "corporate authorities" spelled out in the secret new Constitution. These would enable "big business" to function free of government restraint and yet exercise life-and-death power over all small businessmen.

It was all set in motion by the four Rockefeller Brothers in their heyday, but two years ago the Brothers were secretly removed by the Bolsheviks, and now the Bolsheviks themselves are turning part of these corporate socialist plans against the Rockefeller cartel. An example was the Supreme Court Branti decision which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 61. Because of that decision, the new Administration here in Washington has already started reappointing some of the Inspectors General who were Carter holdovers, so it is a very mixed bag right now.

The regrouped Rockefeller forces under John J. McCloy are slowly gaining power; but as I reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 60 and 61 for November and January, the Bolsheviks intend to cut short the so-called Reagan Administration. Two days ago outside the Washington Hilton Hotel here, it almost happened already. As it turned out, the Reagan Administration was not halted that time, but there will be some slowdown in the plans of the Rockefeller cartel. Meanwhile the Bolsheviks here will redouble their efforts to retake total control of the United States Government.

Meanwhile, the United States is being shut down to get ready for war. Money is being diverted from all kinds of programs with the excuse that they are wasteful and inflationary. But the funds are being dumped instead into the most wasteful and inflationary use of all—massive funding for unproductive weapons to fight a needless and hopeless war! In spite of all the political rhetoric about fighting inflation, it will grow steadily worse. One cosmetic measure after another will be announced but they will not work, my friends, because they are not supposed to work.

Finally the time will be ripe for dramatic action. The President will announce to the nation that the situation is desperate. He will say that the time has come for tough action, and millions of Americans will agree; and with that, he will declare a NATIONAL ECONOMIC EMERGENCY. It will be like August 1971 all over again. President Nixon declared an "Economic Emergency" supposedly to fight inflation. There were dramatic actions for cosmetic effect, including Wage and Price Controls; but the most important action was hardly noticed. Nixon closed

the GOLD window for international settlements. It was actually a secret declaration of war against the dollar, disguised to look like the opposite. It set off the stagflation era with inflation far worse than what had gone before.

Once again we will be told that a National Economic Emergency is being declared in order to fight inflation; and, just as before, there will be dramatic measures for psychological impact; but in the end, the result will again be just to make matters worse.

As of now, the plans are being laid to declare the National Economic Emergency toward the end of this year 1981. The most dramatic part of the plan has to do with the $100.00 bill. In that connection, our psychological programming for things to come is already beginning by way of the so-called "news." Right now we are hearing more and more about the old theory that the money supply is the key to inflation. Those who subscribe to this money supply theory are called "monetarists."

Monetarist theory no longer holds water, as I explained eight years ago in my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR." In this age of multinational corporations, other forces are far more important than the money supply, but the new Administration is packed with monetarists. They are hinting that if only we could restrain the money supply, inflation would dampen down.

In a seemingly unrelated vein, lately we are hearing a great deal about the tons of cash being used by organized crime. A recent story on the CBS television program "60 Minutes" was an example of this. The story dealt with the oceans of $100.00 bills flowing through Miami banks these days. There are so many that they are not counted, they are weighed. The program showed $100.00 bills being bundled and stacked for storage and shipment to other banks by the Federal Reserve branch bank in Miami. The point of the program was that much of this money was drug money. Banks are taking in enormous amounts of cash, mostly in $100.00 bills, in areas where organized crime is heavy. Yet in other areas, cash is scarce. If you don't believe that, just go to your bank and try to withdraw $1000 or $2000 in cash, if you have that much in an account. In many areas you will be refused; the bank will tell you that you will have to wait until the cash will become available.

In this and other ways, my friends, the $100.00 bill will gradually be turned into a straw man to be knocked down in the coming Economic Emergency. When the Economic Emergency is declared, the presidential Executive Order will declare the $100.00 bill illegal tender. Everyone holding $100.00 bills will be given a short time to redeem them. The redemption period currently planned will be three (3) days. After that, the $100.00 bill will be repudiated by the United States. If you are still holding any after that, you will simply be out of luck.

To redeem your $100.00 bills, you will be required to go to your own bank, one where you have an account. No bank will be required to redeem bills for non-depositors unless you will sign an affidavit that you have no accounts in any other bank. When you turn in your $100.00 bills at the bank, you'll be required by presidential Executive Order to give your name, address, and Social Security number. If you turn in more than a certain small amount, perhaps $500.00, you will also be required to sign an affidavit stating where you got them. Up to that same small amount, the bank will redeem your $100.00 bills in cash of smaller denominations. Any amount beyond that will be redeemed only as a deposit to your account at any one time.

All of this will come as a complete shock to the American people. The only advance notice of the $100.00 bill repudiation will go to foreign central banks. A mere 24 hours before the Emergency declaration, they will be informed about it. The vast quantities of $100.00 bills abroad will be subject to the same brief redemption period as here in the United States.

America's repudiation of the $100 bill will be portrayed as a tough attack on inflation and on crime as well. The disclosure provisions will be said to be designed to reveal holders of concealed wealth, including criminals. More importantly, the elimination of the $100.00 bill will supposedly help bring the money supply under control—and with it, inflation!

Hundred-dollar bills now constitute about one-third of the total dollar value of all United States currency in circulation here and abroad. Under the plan, many will be redeemed as bank deposits—that is, bookkeeping entries. Those can be watched and controlled far more easily than cash. We will even be told that the supposed anti-crime angle will have an anti-inflation bonus. Criminals holding large hoards of $100.00 bills may decide never to turn them in and thereby reveal themselves, and that will result in an actual drop in the money supply. The monetarists will assure us that this will be like poking a pin into the swollen balloon of inflation. The presidential Executive Order declaring the emergency will also proclaim a "Bank Holiday" of several days. This will be for the purpose of preparing the banks for the redemption rush to follow. When the banks reopen, the actual redemption period to turn in your $100.00 bills will begin.

The emergency proclamation will also close the nation's Stock Markets for a similar period. Two excuses will be given for this. One is that the Administration will want Wall Street to absorb the news in an orderly manner without any chance of panic. The other excuse will be that large amounts of crime-related $100 bills are being laundered through the Stock Exchange. The cutoff of those cash transactions will come as a shock to Wall Street.

As a psychological ploy, it will be a master stroke. It will seem to say that America has finally gotten serious about its inflation. The dollar will temporarily become stronger abroad, and the price of gold will plummet. Speculators with inside information will sell gold short ahead of time; then, after the price drops, they will buy up the gold again. The psychological shock of the $100.00 bill ploy will soon wear off, and then gold prices will head upward again on the crest of new crises.

For all its dramatic impact, the repudiation of the $100 bill will have no lasting effect on inflation. It will be defended by the monetarists as justified by their money supply theories, but it will actually attack nothing but the symptoms of inflation.

If inflation is really to be cured, it must be by going to its CAUSES, and that cannot be done without tackling the scandal of America's missing gold reserves.

Even so, the elimination of the $100.00 bill will have a lasting effect in another way. It will begin to condition Americans to the idea that there is nothing sacred about the currency we are accustomed to using. Only a little further down the road, the process will be completed by replacing our shriveling dollars with a new currency. But even that will be only a way station on the way to the final destination of a cashless society.

The final dream of the money monopoly masters is to reduce everything to credit entries processed by computers. If they can achieve that, then they will achieve total control over the money supply; and they believe they will also achieve total control over you and me. At long last we will all be their slaves.

The declaration of Economic Emergency will also have another purpose. It will secretly activate the Emergency powers of the President for wartime measures. America will start moving more quickly onto a war footing. The bureaucracy of wartime controls will start cranking up, all in the name of "fighting inflation"; and having been terrorized by the Government into turning in our $100.00 bills, as we did our gold in 1933, we Americans will start developing a wartime mentality. It will take place at a subconscious level. Most of us will be unable to define why we somehow feel uneasy; but without being told a word, Americans will feel the ghostly pre-war echoes of the 1930's. The $100.00 bill episode will also leave many of us feeling helpless to resist the seemingly almighty Government. The message will be burned into our minds: Obey or else. We will be on the road to War, and we will also be on the road to Dictatorship here in America!

YOUR DECISION TO FLEE OR TO FIGHT

Topic #3—My friends, these are the things which are now being planned for us. It is real, it is happening. If you still don't believe it, just think again about those moments outside the Washington Hilton Hotel two days ago. Assassination politics and suicidal war preparations have got to stop. We have arrived at this point along an economic road; so to stop it we, too, must fight back with economic weapons.

The one economic weapon which is big enough to do the job is the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. That is what I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 56 last summer when I first began giving you my answers to the question: "What can I do?" Lately a few of my listeners seem to be losing sight of this, so I think I should say it again: If we want to do something about our headlong rush into disaster, the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL is the way to do it. If we just get bored and walk away from it, my friends, it's all over! We will have forfeited America's last chance.

Perhaps there are some among you who are growing weary of our "Preventive War of Truth." That is why I was so reluctant ever to begin the process of giving you my answers to the question: "What can I do?" When I began doing this in AUDIO LETTER No. 56 last summer, I emphasized as strongly as I could that we will have to stick with it if we want to win; but in our speeded up world today, scandals are like water poured over sand—they make a big splash for a moment, but they hardly sink in before they are gone.

Many people get bored, they are forgetful, they lose interest quickly; and because all this is so true, our enemies always know they can get away with anything. All they have to do is wait a little while and we will oblige them by forgetting about it, whatever it was. If there are some who feel this way, it would be best for them to turn back now and go no further. Better to flee the coming catastrophe now, before it happens, than to end up later as a pathetic refugee from a devastated America. To those who feel they must make that choice, I can only say: Go, and may God be with you.

But large numbers of you are still saying in your letters:

"What is the next step? What is the next action we can take?" To all of you I say: "May we now redouble our 'Preventive War of Truth.'"

It's time for us to draw our second wind, because the longer we persist without giving up, the more dismayed our enemies will become.

In Topic #2 I discussed the creation of the President's new Council on Integrity and Efficiency. I also revealed its unadmitted source—the secret new Constitution for Dictatorship in America. But like other recent Presidents, the current occupant of the Oval Office is an actor, doing as he is programmed to do. In the past, other Presidents have later expressed deep regrets for taking actions which they did not understand at the time:

Woodrow Wilson publicly regretted signing the bill creating the Federal Reserve System.

Harry Truman regretted his creation of the CIA, as he said in public shortly after the assassination of President Kennedy in Dallas .

And at the end of his presidency, Dwight Eisenhower gave a warning against the military industrial complex which had dominated his public life.

So there could be a ray of hope in connection with the new Council on Integrity and Efficiency. Just after signing the Executive Order to create it, the entity President Reagan said, quote:

"We are going to follow every lead, root out every incompetent, and prosecute every crook we find who is cheating the people of this nation."

My friends, if the President really meant those words, then we should take him up on it. If he did not mean them, then we should call his bluff, because the only thing more dangerous than a declared enemy is a false friend. Either way, you have a right to petition the President for redress of grievances.

So, my friends, here's what I suggest.

The President promised to, quote: "...prosecute every crook we find who is cheating the people of this nation." And we, the people, have been cheated out of practically our entire monetary GOLD supply. A hundred years ago thousands of hard-working prospectors scraped together that gold, one or two hard ounces at a time; but a few manicured international bankers and their bureaucrats were able to "mine" all that gold out of Treasury depositories without even soiling their hands!

The President also promised, quote: "We are going to follow every lead..." If he means those words, then he should be eager to do what neither Senator Proxmire nor the Federal Reserve Banks have been willing to do up to now. He should be anxious to follow the many leads which have already come to light over our stolen GOLD.

My friends, we should bombard the White House with MAILGRAMS—not letters, not post cards, but Mailgrams—the more the better from you, your friends, your neighbors, your relatives. It will cost you some money to send Mailgrams, but the stakes are enormous. This is one of those moments when half-measures or penny-pinching will cost us dearly, very dearly!

WE MUST HAVE IMPACT.

To send your Mailgram, simply call Western Union and say that you want to send a MAILGRAM to President Reagan, then dictate your message. Here is a sample to get you started:

"Dear President Reagan:

When you created your new Council on Integrity and Efficiency recently, you made some comments which I heartily applaud. You promised to follow every lead in rooting out those who are cheating the people of this nation. I would like to believe that you truly meant those words, and so would all my friends and neighbors. Therefore I want to call your urgent attention to some very glaring leads which need to be followed. They point toward disastrous cheating of the American public by certain individuals in government. I am referring to the mounting evidence that large amounts of America's alleged gold stockpiles have been illegally disposed of.

In a cassette tape commentary last month, Dr. Beter made public two Treasury documents which contradict each other. Both documents pertain to the London Gold Pool shipments of the 1960's but there is a discrepancy of 165-million ounces between them. At current prices that is over eighty-billion dollars, far more than the budget cuts you are now proposing. If any lead deserves to be followed, surely this one does. You can do that easily, Mr. President, since Dr. Beter's Washington office is located close to the White House. Dr. Beter has promised to keep his listeners informed of your response, and I will inform everyone else I know in turn."

End of Mailgram, followed by your name and address.

My friends, time is growing shorter and shorter. We must know who is FOR us, the people of America; and who is AGAINST us. Senator Proxmire has shown that he is not for us; the Presidents and Directors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks are gradually doing the same thing by not acting; so now it is the President's turn. Let us pray that his response will be different, but either way we will know.

Now it's time to give you my "Last Minute Summary." Two days ago an attempt was made to cut short the new Administration under the name of Ronald Reagan but the attempt failed, giving us a reprieve from an immediate return to total Bolshevik control of the Government. Even so, America is being shut down for war. A "Declaration of Economic Emergency" is being planned for late this year that will include repudiation of the $100.00 bill. At the same time the machinery of Dictatorship is slowly taking shape all around us. And now, plans are once again being laid—not only here but also in Russia—for a first strike in all-out nuclear war!

My friends, there is only one way to stop all this—that is to expose those responsible before America is put to the sword. The Sword of our Lord Jesus Christ is the TRUTH; and if we will only use this weapon of the Truth, we will find that it is more powerful than all the other weapons conceived by man.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #64

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is April 27, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER No. 64.

"T minus 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4...We've gone for main engine start. We have main engine start." (Engine noise takes over for some two seconds) "...liftoff of America's first Space Shuttle, and the Shuttle has cleared the tower." (Then again the roaring noise on the AUDIO LETTER tape.)

And that's how it all began, my friends, just two weeks ago—Sunday, April 12, 1981. After years of delay, America's first attempt to launch a space shuttle into orbit had finally begun.

In days gone by, the voice of "Mission Control" has always been a familiar hallmark of American manned flights into space. In the early days, beginning with "PROJECT MERCURY", the voice was that of Col. John (Shorty) Powers. Later, during the "APOLLO" program there were other voices; but regardless of who it was, that familiar voice of "Mission Control" would always stay with us throughout each space flight—that is, until this time. This time the voice of Mission Control, up until the moment of launch, was that of NASA spokesman Hugh Harris. The last words Harris spoke as the voice of Mission Control were the words you just heard: "The Shuttle has cleared the tower."

Television cameras followed the Shuttle as it climbed higher and higher on a column of steam and smoke. For another 30 seconds or so, we were allowed to hear the slowly fading roar of the Shuttle's rocket engines. Then the sounds from Mission Control abruptly changed. Exactly 45 seconds after lift-off, "live" audio from Mission Control was terminated. In its place NASA began feeding the radio and television networks an elaborate tape recording, which had been prepared far ahead of time by NASA. The change-over from "live" audio to the NASA tape recording sounded like this: (First, loud roaring for 10 seconds, abruptly fading, then into a steadily increasing-in-loudness humming-roaring for some 10 seconds.) "4-34...?" "Roger." (More of the roaring sound.)

Just 45 seconds after lift-off, the falsified NASA coverage of the flight of the "Columbia" began. We were still able to see the Columbia by way of long-distance television cameras for another minute and a half, but the sounds we were hearing were no longer "live." They were the sounds of the special NASA tape recording. For the first minute or so of the tape recording, we heard nothing but the sound effects simulating conversation between the Shuttle and NASA-Houston. Then, for the first time, we heard the anonymous new voice of Mission Control. It was no longer the familiar live voice of Hugh Harris, but the recorded voice of someone else. For added realism, the new voice was interrupted in turn by the recorded voice of the alleged capsule communicator Daniel Brandenstein. It sounded like this: (first a high-pitched screech followed by) "One minute 45 seconds, coming up on go-go-go." "Columbia, you're negative seats." "That call-up says that, Columbia, the altitude is too high for ejection seat use."

By that point the shuttle Columbia was more than 20 miles high, and climbing fast. Everything was going according to plan so far, so the things we were hearing on the tape recording corresponded to what we were seeing. We could still see the Shuttle on our TV sets, but it had dwindled to nothing more than

three bright spots dancing in the distant sky.

The last thing that you and I were able to see and verify for ourselves about the Shuttle was the separation of those two giant solid-rocket boosters. A little over two minutes after liftoff, we were able to watch the boosters, two burning bright spots, break off to each side. That left only the single tiny flame of the Shuttle itself, gradually fading into invisibility. Several seconds later the NASA tape recording caught up with what we had already seen, and said the boosters had separated. Moments later the tiny bright dot of the Shuttle faded from our screens. It was too far away for the television cameras to follow any longer. We had had our last look at the real space shuttle Columbia!

In AUDIO LETTER No. 62 two months ago, I gave an advance alert about the secret military mission of the space shuttle Columbia. At that time I made public what the mission was really all about. I was also able to reveal what to expect in the falsified NASA coverage of the mission.

The falsified coverage was designed to accomplish two purposes. First, to completely hide the military nature of the mission; and second, to make sure the mission looked like a total success, no matter what might happen in secret. As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 62, the Bolsheviks here in the federal government are depending heavily on the Space Shuttle Program to get ready for a nuclear war against Russia.

The falsified NASA coverage of the mission of the space shuttle Columbia was carried out exactly according to plan. I revealed this plan two months ago. There were the standard brief cockpit scenes made by techniques which I will describe later. Just to make it look good, it was spiced up by telling us that a few non-critical tiles had fallen off. Otherwise we were told over and over how perfectly the Columbia was performing.

Four days ago on April 23, a news conference about the flight was held in Houston, Texas, by the alleged two astronauts, John Young and Robert Crippen. The entity called John Young summed up the flight in words that were more meaningful than most people suspected. Referring to the falsified flight which we followed on television, he called it, quote: "...even better than normal." And so it was, my friends. The Bolsheviks who now control NASA bent over backwards to paint the image of an abnormally perfect shuttle flight. Meanwhile the actual Shuttle mission, which was carried out in secret, did not go according to plan. After the Shuttle disappeared from our television screens, the flight continued for barely four more minutes before disaster struck. The Columbia never even reached earth orbit!

My friends, I believe you have both the right and the need to know what happened to the space shuttle Columbia two weeks ago. I believe you deserve to know, in detail, how and why the truth was hidden from you. The stakes involve nothing less than the very survival of our land and our way of life.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE ADVANCE PREPARATIONS FOR THE SPACE SHUTTLE MISSION Topic #2—THE ABORTED FLIGHT OF THE SPACE SHUTTLE "COLUMBIA" Topic #3—THE NASA COVERUP OF THE "COLUMBIA" DISASTER.

Topic #1—There is an old saying that "Seeing is believing." For that reason, television has become the No. 1 tool of deception in America today. Through television we are made to see things we do not understand so that we will believe things that are not

true. If television were used honestly and constructively, television could be a great force for good. Instead, it's used continually to hoax, deceive, and mislead us. Video-taping makes events which took place weeks or months ago look as if they were taking place "live" right before our eyes. Computer editing enables scenes to be spliced together to create completely artificial images that look real. Special effects of all kinds enable these television hoaxes to be very convincing indeed.

Two years ago I described one major television hoax in detail in AUDIO LETTER No. 44. That hoax involved no less than the NBC television news program "Meet the Press." Now we have been treated to another great television hoax, and this one was the granddaddy of them all. In terms of sheer deception, this was the "Meet the Press" hoax, "Guyana", and SKYLAB all rolled into one. This was the hoax coverage of the first flight of the space shuttle Columbia.

To begin with, we were led to believe that until two weeks ago no space shuttle had ever left the earth's atmosphere and gone into space. We were also led to believe that the very first space flight by a shuttle had to be an orbital flight, instead of something less extreme. To make matters still worse, NASA swore up and down that this very first flight, pushing the Shuttle to its limits, just had to have men aboard. At one point even John Young himself was quoted to this effect very widely in the controlled major media. For example, two months ago on February 15, the New York Times carried a big article about the Shuttle. Quoting from the article: "Mr. Young said, to have conducted an unmanned orbital flight of the Shuttle first would have added perhaps $500,000,000 to project costs, and meant another year's delay." Statements like that were cooked up purely to explain away the many things that did not add up about the announced plans for the Columbia's flight. Many people believe these explanations, but they were just a litany of lies.

For example, time after time during the television coverage of the alleged flight this month, John Young's earlier statement was totally contradicted. Authoritative spokesmen pointed out over and over that the astronauts control the Shuttle by telling computers aboard the Shuttle what they want. The computers then do all the actual activation and control of the Shuttle—and, in an emergency, the Shuttle can fly itself into orbit, re-enter, and even land itself without help from the pilots. So much for all those lies NASA told us about an unmanned first flight being impossible.

The real reason astronauts were aboard the first orbital flight was the one I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 62. It was a military mission, and the astronauts had to be aboard to carry it out. NASA told us that the flight this month was only a test flight with the cargo bay practically empty. But the cargo bay of the Columbia was not empty. It carried a laser-armed Spy Satellite equipped with special shields to protect it against Russian space weapons. "But wait a minute", you say. "They showed us live pictures from space and you could see that the bay was empty." No, my friends, not "live" pictures but video tapes. The pictures with the doors closed were taken inside a training mock-up of the shuttle that is carried inside a specially modified Boeing 747. The pictures with the doors open were taken on the ground inside a darkened hangar. Then these scenes were combined by video tape editing techniques with video tapes of the earth taken from orbit years ago. The final product was what you saw on television. It was not what it appeared to be, but "seeing is believing."

My friends, the next time you see a replay of those scenes with the Shuttle doors open, supposedly in space, there is a telltale clue to look for. Look at the shadows visible inside the open cargo bay. Shadows in space tend to be sharp and harsh because there is no air to soften and diffuse them. The shadows we saw in the video tapes on television were softer because they were not made in space. Also, look at the angle of the shadows. The earth is shown floating straight overhead, and it is all in daylight. Look at the slant of the shadows inside the open cargo bay, then ask yourself: "Where is the light coming from to make shadows like that?"

The impossible shadows which we saw in the Shuttle bay video tapes are just one small example of the many discrepancies in the NASA hoax. More to the point, NASA has pretended that the Columbia flight this month was the very first shuttle flight into space. We are supposed to believe that the only previous shuttle operations were a few gliding tests launched from mid air by another modified 747. Nothing could be more ridiculous or more untrue.

There is one very obvious question about the Space Shuttle Program which NASA has always managed to side step. Somehow no one ever quite dares to ask it. The question is: Why wasn't the space shuttle "Enterprise" the first to be sent into orbit? After all, the Enterprise made its public debut nearly four years ago in the summer of 1977.

To all outward appearances, the Enterprise looks almost identical to its sister ship, the Columbia. The differences between the two are so subtle that you would never notice them unless you knew exactly what to look for. The engines of the Enterprise look just like the engines of the Columbia. The Enterprise is also covered with the same system of thermal tiles as the Columbia, so again, the question is: Why wasn't the Enterprise sent into orbit long ago? Why did NASA wait three years and more to launch the Columbia instead? The answer, my friends, is that the Enterprise was designed to be a training ship for shuttle astronauts. It is not meant for orbital flight. Instead, it is specially equipped to make shorter, suborbital flights into space. In effect, it can do everything short of going into earth orbit. It can climb to orbital altitudes as high as 125 miles before dropping back to earth. This enables astronauts to practice working in weightlessness for up to five and one-half minutes at a time. It also allows astronauts to practice landing the shuttle, slowing down from speeds of around 5,000 miles per hour.

The Enterprise is exactly like its sister ships in the crew compartment and cockpit. What makes the Enterprise radically different is the cargo bay area. The Enterprise cannot carry cargo because the bay area is taken up by rocket fuel tanks. The tanks of the Enterprise can hold well over 100,000 pounds of rocket fuel when fully loaded. To make a suborbital hop into space, the Enterprise is perched on top of a modified Boeing 747 known as the "Launch Aircraft." Inside the 747 there are technicians with instruments and support equipment for the shuttle. The shuttle Enterprise is loaded with rocket fuel, and then the 747 takes off. At an altitude of around 40,000 feet, the shuttle is launched. The launch techniques are derived from the old days of the X-15 Research Airplane and others before it. The Enterprise is released from its mounts, rises up, and then falls back behind the 747. As soon as it is clear of the 747, the Enterprise starts its rocket engines and zooms upward at a steep angle. After a minute or so the rockets shut off, and the Enterprise is left to coast upward to its peak altitude and then

drop back toward earth. From the moment the engines shut off until the shuttle begins re-entering the atmosphere five or six minutes later, the astronauts inside are weightless.

Astronauts Young and Crippen made more than half a dozen training flights like this aboard the Enterprise before they lifted off aboard the Columbia at Cape Canaveral. That is why they were so ready to go all the way into orbit. They had already done everything else that was necessary to work their way up to it. Of course, other training was necessary to work their way up to those suborbital flights aboard the Enterprise. For one thing, they spent many hours in the detailed replica of the shuttle which is housed inside a modified Boeing 747. The "Flying Mock-Up", as it is called, is a simulator designed to acquaint astronauts with shuttle operation as realistically as possible. One of its advantages is that it can even provide periods of weightlessness of up to about 45 seconds. The 747 pilot does this by flying a precise arc through the air called a "parabolic trajectory." It's an old technique developed a quarter century ago to help astronauts get accustomed to weightlessness .

All of these things and more were originally conceived and developed for purely technical reasons, but they are being kept secret from you because the Bolsheviks who now control NASA have turned them into tools of deception against you and me. Lately, publicity about the Space Shuttle Program has been focused on three geographic locations. One is the launch site for orbital missions, Cape Canaveral, Florida. Another is Edwards Air Force Base, California. The third is that old stand-by, the NASA Manned Space Flight Center in Houston, Texas.

As always, we are being distracted from paying serious attention to the one area that is most important of all. It is the missing link, the true nerve center of the entire Space Shuttle Program. My friends, I'm talking about the White Sands Missile Range in southern New Mexico.

Most people today rarely give a second thought to White Sands. Few people remember that White Sands is where America's Space Program got its start after World War II. Captured German V-2 rockets were taken to White Sands to be studied and test fired. After the V-2s, there were American rockets, the Navy's Viking series, and others. They were launched, rocketed upward into the fringes of space, and came back to earth—all within the boundaries of the vast White Sands Missile Range. One time a missile got out of control, veered south, and almost destroyed a small Mexican town when it crashed to earth; but that incident was a dramatic exception to the normal situation. Most of the time, no one outside White Sands even knew when rockets were launched. Recently the public has been made aware of the vast wide-open spaces that constitute Edwards Air Force Base in California. For comparison, White Sands is so huge that it would hold nearly 100 Edwards Air Force Bases!

White Sands, my friends, is the training base for space shuttle pilots; and since late 1977 it has also become much more. It is the geographic key to the secret military missions which are now the central focus of the Space Shuttle Program. The Shuttle Program today is being managed in a way that is far different from the original plans. In August 1977 we were shown early gliding tests of the training shuttle Enterprise. The plan of NASA was to drum up public support for the Shuttle Program, just as they had done a decade earlier in the Moon Program.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 2 6 I detailed how the Apollo Program, the

biggest military program in American history, was disguised as a peaceful scientific venture. In the same way, the original plan was to bathe the military Shuttle Program in the glare of deceptive publicity. In the process we would have learned about the suborbital space capability of the Enterprise. Even the crucial White Sands would have received more publicity.

What changed it all was the secret "Battle of the Harvest Moon" in space September 27, 1977. This secret space battle, which I made public that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 26, took place barely one month after the first gliding tests of the space shuttle Enterprise. Russia's military take-over of space was under way!

Only the next month, October 1977, a newly operational Russian Cosmos Interceptor shot down SKYLAB. SKYLAB, along with its crew of five American astronauts secretly aboard, died in a giant fireball over the United States. I reported on SKYLAB's fate that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 27, and also revealed that NASA was initiating a prolonged cover-up of what had happened. NASA wanted everyone to forget about that mysterious headline-making fireball, so they pretended that SKYLAB was still in orbit but sinking unexpectedly. NASA used stories about the space shuttle as part of their SKYLAB cover-up. They pretended that perhaps the shuttle would come along in time to save SKYLAB. As I reported then, that was a double lie by NASA. First, SKYLAB could never be saved because it had already been destroyed. Second, the United States was in no position at that time to launch the shuttle or anything else of a military nature into space. Russia was deploying her secret new Space Triad of advanced manned space weapons.

America's previous military control of space had been totally shattered by Russia. Our military base on the moon had been put out of action in the "Battle of the Harvest Moon." Russian Cosmos Interceptors had started sweeping the skies clear of American Spy Satellites, and Russian hovering electrogravitic weapons platforms, the Cosmospheres, were making headlines by creating enormous air booms along the East Coast and elsewhere. All of these things took place just as America's Space Shuttle Program was getting off the ground.

The result was a complete reorganization of the Shuttle Program. The old plans to bathe it in continuous publicity were thrown out. The Bolsheviks here, who have replaced the Rockefeller cartel in many areas of power, cast a net of secrecy over all these new military plans. We were never told about many of the capabilities of the training shuttle Enterprise, and we were never told about the many things which are going on at White Sands in the military Shuttle Program. By keeping these things secret from us, the Bolsheviks here have placed themselves in a powerful position to deceive us.

We have never been told about the modified NASA 747 which carries a complete replica of the crew quarters and cargo bay of a shuttle. Therefore we are unaware that this airplane, originally intended for training, has become a Bolshevik tool of deception against us. When we saw video tapes of astronauts in the simulated Shuttle cockpit, we naturally thought it was the real thing. Seeing a notebook float in mid air for a few seconds next to the astronauts, we were supposed to think: "They are weightless because they are in orbit." We were given no clue that these moments of weightlessness had taken place months earlier in a 747 flying a controlled arc through the air. Likewise, we were shown one or two episodes of the astronauts moving around the cabin, obviously weightless for up to three or

four minutes. What we were not told is that these scenes had been video-taped months earlier during suborbital space hops by the training shuttle Enterprise.

Many of my listeners have called or written with the same observation about the first of these episodes shown the day of the launch. We heard the alleged "live" conversation of Young and Crippen, and yet, in the television picture, they were not moving their lips. They had merely posed for the camera during a suborbital flight months earlier, and they recorded the sound track we heard only days before the launch.

While NASA may have fooled you and me about the Space Shuttle, they did not fool the new rulers of Russia. They learned last fall what the flight of the Columbia was really all about; and, my friends, when the Columbia was launched two weeks ago, the Russians were ready and waiting!

Topic #2—A month before the shuttle "Columbia" blasted off from Cape Canaveral, the two astronauts who were to ride in it held a news conference in Houston. The day was March 9, 1981. Astronaut Robert Crippen caught the attention of the reporters when he said:

"I think the odds, with the way we've designed the mission right now, are that we will probably come home early."

Then he added, quote:

"As far as John and I are concerned, if we get up and get down, it's a success."

Those words of astronaut Crippen about a short mission were more accurate than most people realized.

The real mission plan, which I had already made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 62, was for a short mission. The astronauts were supposed to get into orbit and deploy the military satellite from the Columbia's cargo bay very quickly, then they were to return to Earth—not aboard the Shuttle but in a special re-entry capsule. Two days later they were supposed to land the disguised shuttle "Enterprise" at Edwards Air Force Base as the final act in the falsified drama staged for our benefit.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 62 I described the military purpose of the mission in detail. For the first time in three years the Pentagon was hoping to get a Spy Satellite into orbit that could not be shot down immediately by Russia. I also outlined important features of the flight plan which had been conceived for the Columbia. Now I want to give you more details about that and tell you how it turned out because, my friends, the Bolsheviks here in the Government are now planning to try it again with a second shuttle flight presently scheduled for the fall of this year 1981.

Knowing what happened this time, I believe you will be far better prepared to see through it all next time. If you can think back to American space launches of the past, you may have noticed something very unusual about the launch of the Columbia. In the past, manned space launches from Cape Canaveral have always been made toward the southeast, toward the equator, but not this time. The Columbia was launched to the northeast, away from the equator. The reason for this, my friends, was the secret space reconnaissance mission of the Columbia.

In its public news releases, NASA told everyone that Columbia

was launched into a 44-degree orbit—that is, it would never go further north or south than 44 degrees above and below the equator. But the actual orbit chosen for the Columbia was a 69-degree orbit. A 69-degree orbit was chosen because it would take the Columbia, and the Spy Satellite inside it, all the way north to the Arctic Circle and beyond. That is the kind of orbit that is necessary if a spy satellite is to fly reconnaissance over Russia.

The northeast launch of the Columbia was done in order to enable the Spy Satellite to start gathering data over Russia only minutes after the Columbia reached orbit. These days time is of the essence in any attempt to spy on Russia. Every American spy satellite launched at Russia during the past three years has been blinded or shot down before gathering much data.

The secret flight plan for the Columbia was completely different from what NASA claimed in public. The plan called for Columbia to be launched on an initial northeast course in the general direction of Bermuda, then roughly 2-1/2 minutes after launch, Columbia was to begin an unorthodox course change—a wide sweeping turn into the north. This unprecedented curving launch was intended as an evasive maneuver. Planners of the Columbia mission believed this would enable Columbia to sneak past any Russian Cosmospheres that might be waiting overhead. Still accelerating on its curving course, the Columbia was supposed to pass about 100 miles east of Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. Roughly 200 miles east of Washington, D.C., the Shuttle's main engines were to cut off. After coasting in silence for a few seconds, the fuel tank was scheduled to cut loose as the Columbia passed 100 miles east of New Jersey. For the next two minutes the Shuttle and its fuel tank were to be coasting onward past the east tip of Long Island, over Boston, and onward toward Maine. During that time the Shuttle was supposed to maneuver away from the fuel tank, using small maneuvering jets. Finally, just as the Columbia passed over New Brunswick, Canada, the flight plan called for the orbital maneuvering engines to be fired. Somewhere over the Labrador Sea, flying upside-down, the Columbia was scheduled to reach earth orbit. As soon as it did so, the flight plan called for astronauts Young and Crippen to go to work fast. In less than 10 minutes time they were supposed to open up the cargo bay doors and turn on the sensors of the Spy Satellite resting inside. As they did these things, the Columbia was to be racing over the south tip of Greenland, out over the middle of the Denmark Strait between Greenland and Iceland, above the Arctic Circle, and then dipping back southward toward northern Norway, Finland, and Russia. According to the flight plan, the Columbia was scheduled to cross the Russian border just south of the strategic Kola Peninsula. The time: a mere 22 minutes, 42 seconds, after lift-off from Cape Canaveral. At that moment initial reconnaissance over Russia was to be under way. The Spy Satellite inside the cargo bay, even though not yet deployed, would have had a perfect view downward through the open doors of the upside-down Shuttle.

The Columbia was intended to fly over a course across Russia that began just west of the strategic White Sea in extreme northwestern Russia. From there the planned course of the Columbia was to take it southeastward over some 2500 miles of strategic Russian territory. During the first minute alone, the Satellite was expected to see parts of the highly sensitive Kola Peninsula, the White Sea, including the super secret submarine yards at Archangel and the Plesetsk Cosmodrome. The Shuttle was also to pass near Kazan, one of the bases of Russia's flying ABM system. This system, as I revealed a year ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 54, uses charged particle beams carried by supersonic TU-144

transports.

Toward the end of the first pass over Russia the Spy Satellite was expected to gather data on two more of Russia's four Cosmodromes—those of Baikonur and Tyura-Tam. In between, numerous other war targets were also to come under scrutiny. The Spy Satellite in the Columbia's cargo bay was expected to see all that during its very first pass over Russian territory. It would all take only 8-1/2 minutes! Then the Columbia would have crossed the border with Afghanistan, heading toward India. Barely 10 minutes later, the Spy Satellite was to be radioing its data down to the American receivers at Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean.

That was the plan, my friends. The Bolshevik military planners here were confident that their Spy Satellite would get at least this planned first look at Russia. They were sure that Columbia's curving launch and the short time involved would prevent Russia from thwarting the mission. Columbia took off from Cape Canaveral at 7:00 A.M. Eastern Time, that Sunday morning. By 7:23 Columbia was expected to be over Russia already. By 7:31 Columbia was expected to be leaving Russian skies, and by 7:45 that Sunday morning the military planners expected to have their first reconnaissance data from Russia.

The plan sounded plausible, my friends, but the Bolsheviks here are falling victim to the very Intelligence gap which they themselves created in America years ago. Russian Intelligence agents were able to learn the general outlines of the Columbia mission plan some six months ago. Fully one month before the public roll-out of the Columbia at Cape Canaveral last November, the Russian Space Command was studying the problem. There was no question about one thing: The Columbia's mission could not be allowed to succeed. Given even a shred of up-to-date reconnaissance data, the Bolsheviks in America are determined to set off nuclear war. Even so, there was a question about the best way to spoil the Shuttle mission. Several possibilities were considered, including sabotage or simply blasting the Columbia out of the sky. All were rejected because they shared one weakness. Each alternative would halt one shuttle mission, but it would not stop the Shuttle Program as a whole, and Russia's goal is to completely shut down the Space Shuttle Program.

At last they hit upon the solution. What was needed was a Space Age version of the famous U-2 incident of two decades ago. In the waning days of the Eisenhower Administration, Russia had publicly accused the United States of invading its air space with spy flights. That was before the era of Spy Satellites, and invading other countries' air space was a serious charge in the eyes of the world. American spokesmen tried to defuse the growing furor while carefully avoiding a definitive denial of the charges; but the Russians kept it up. Finally President Eisenhower became so exasperated that he flatly denied, in public, that America was flying spy planes over Russia. That was exactly what the Russians were waiting for. The Russians promptly did what American Intelligence specialists thought they could not do—they shot down a high-flying U-2 on a flight over Russia. The name of the CIA pilot, the late Francis Gary Powers, filled the headlines world-wide overnight. The Russians had made a liar of the President of the United States! A summit had been scheduled between President Eisenhower and Nikita Khrushchev, but the Russians icily called it off.

The Russian Space Command proposed to the Kremlin that the shuttle Columbia be made the focus of a similar incident. All

that was necessary was that the Columbia be made to crash land in Russia reasonably intact. Having protested continuously about the military nature of the Shuttle Program, Russia would be able to stun the world by proving it. They would put the crashed Shuttle on public display together with its nuclear-powered, laser-firing Spy Satellite. The Kremlin liked the plan, and agreed to it. To further emphasize the parallels with the 1960 U-2 incident, Russia has recently proposed a summit with the United States. The plan was to withdraw the summit proposal in protest after shooting down the Columbia.

The Russian Space Command went to work several months ago to get ready. They were faced with a tall order to bring down the Columbia on Russian territory without totally destroying it. As recently as a year ago it would have been an impossible task, but now Russia has a new space tool to do the job. It is a third version of the Russian levitating weapons platform, the Cosmosphere. They are called "Super Heavies" by the Russian Space Command.

The Russian Super Heavy Cosmospheres are still considered experimental. Even so, the Russians have already built seven of them. They are mammoth machines, the largest flying machines ever built. In terms of volume, they are even bigger than the biggest zeppelins of the 1930's. They can carry a pay load of more than 50 tons, far more than our own space shuttle; and they are equipped with powerful electromagnetic propulsion which can take the Cosmosphere all the way to orbital speed. In short, my friends, the jumbo Cosmosphere is Russia's space shuttle. It is still experimental, but it is operating already.

In order to carry out their attack on the space shuttle Columbia, Russia's entire fleet of seven jumbo Cosmospheres were made ready. Five were outfitted with special grappling equipment to enable them to seize a very large object in space. The other two were outfitted with neutron particle beam weapons. These weapons are the same type as were used in the "Battle of the Harvest Moon" in September 1977.

At 7:00 A.M. Sunday morning, April 12, the rocket engines of the space shuttle Columbia roared to life. Moments later the giant solid boosters were fired, and the Columbia took off fast. As it climbed, it rolled around and started leaning into its flight path toward space. As we watched on our television sets, it rapidly dwindled off into the northeast. We watched as the solid boosters separated and peeled away to each side. Moments later the Columbia vanished from the screen.

The television scene shifted to the alleged Mission Control in Houston. It was the old familiar scene with rows of Mission Controllers intent on their consoles. Up in front the NASA computer-controlled map started tracing the alleged course of the Columbia. According to the map, Columbia was heading out over the Atlantic toward Bermuda; but at that moment, free of the solid boosters, Columbia was already starting its long sweeping curve to the north. One-hundred-fifty miles east of Charleston, South Carolina, Russia's fleet of 7 jumbo Cosmospheres were hovering high over the ocean. As the space shuttle approached on its elaborate curving path, the Cosmospheres started speeding up to intercept it. The Shuttle was already flying upside-down with the huge fuel tank on top. The two Cosmospheres armed with neutron beams closed in on the Columbia from below and slightly behind, where they could not be seen by Young and Crippen. The other five jumbo Cosmospheres with their grappling equipment flew in formation above and well behind the fuel tank to be out of the line of fire. The Cosmospheres paced the Shuttle until it

reached a predetermined altitude and speed.

Then the armed Cosmospheres opened up with their neutron beams. Firing at point-blank range, each Cosmosphere fired just two bursts from its beam weapon. The first salvo flooded the cockpit area and an area near the engines in the rear. Young and Crippen died instantly, the neutron radiation having totally disrupted all activity of their nervous systems, brains, eyes, and hearts. At the same time the Shuttle's engines shut down. A fraction of a second later, the second salvo flooded neutron radiation into the nose and an area beneath the cargo bay. These shots were calculated to derange and shut down the Columbia's flight computers—that is, all the computers except one. The Russians wanted the backup computer to take over and do its job—that is, make an emergency automatic re-entry and crash landing in Russia. They anticipated that it would do so because the backup computer is heavily shielded against radiation. The shielding is a material more efficient than lead. It is gold! The Russians expected that the "Gold Computer", as it is known in certain circles, would take over after the engines shut down. Sure enough, within 10 seconds after the engines shut down, the fuel tank, still a third full, was automatically cast loose. The Gold Computer was now flying the Shuttle. The five jumbo Cosmospheres with grappling equipment fastened onto the fuel tank. Then, using their powerful electromagnetic propulsion, they veered away with the tank. From its northeasterly course, the tank was swerved around over the North Atlantic in a great arc until it was heading southeast instead. The Cosmospheres then accelerated to orbital speed and cast the fuel tank loose.

Three years ago the first Cosmospheres had sent a message by way of enormous air booms along America's East Coast. Now Russia's newest Cosmospheres were using the Shuttle fuel tank to send a chilling new message to America's Bolshevik war planners.

Meanwhile the armed Cosmospheres followed the Columbia itself. Having had its engines shut down prematurely, the Columbia was well below orbital speed. Instead it was following a ballistic path, just like an ICBM, into the heart of Russia. It looked as though the Russian plan was going to work, but then the unexpected happened!

One of Columbia's deranged computers apparently started working again. The brief shut-down had thrown it out of synchronization with the Gold Computer, so the two computers apparently did not communicate with one another. As the Columbia passed over the border of Russia, it was flying right-side-up instead of upside-down under control of the Gold Computer. But the other computer opened up the cargo bay doors right on schedule. As the Shuttle began to re-enter over Russia, hot air flooded the cargo bay. Heat sensors in the Spy Satellite detected the heat build-up, which was programmed into the Satellite's computer as a sign of "attack damage." Finally, the temperature built up to a critical point, activating a self-destruct circuit in the Satellite. The Spy Satellite exploded, blowing the Columbia apart.

The Russians had hoped for a crash landing in recognizable form. Instead, the Columbia ended up in wreckage strewn along a line some 85 miles long in central Russia southeast of the City of Kazan. As it turned out, neither the Bolsheviks here nor the Russians got what they wanted. The Bolsheviks did not get their reconnaissance data, and the Russians did not get a recognizable space shuttle to show the world. That leaves the stage set for another "try" by both sides later this year.

Topic #3—Sunday, April 12, 1981, was the 20th anniversary of the first manned flight into space. It was the anniversary of the first orbital flight by a Russian cosmonaut, Yuri Gagarin. It was also a day of total disarray among the Bolshevik masters of America's Space Shuttle Program.

Less than eight minutes after launch that Sunday morning they knew something had happened to the Columbia. You and I were still hearing the sound effects of a seemingly successful flight, courtesy of the NASA tape recording from Houston. But the military controllers at White Sands, who were following the real flight, were hearing nothing at all. Columbia had suddenly gone totally silent.

At 7:45 A.M. the news got worse. Columbia had failed to arrive over the Indian Ocean on schedule.

Before the morning was out, there was still more bad news. NORAD was tracking the fuel tank of the Shuttle. It was not supposed to be in orbit at all—but there it was, in an orbit that looked impossible.

That evening, Sunday April 12, the Shuttle's fuel tank re-entered over the Gulf of Mexico just south of Louisiana. The tank had ruptured but there was still a sizeable amount of liquid hydrogen and oxygen inside. When the tank re-entered it heated up and set off an enormous explosion, creating a giant cloud at the fringes of space. Gold plating, which is used extensively in the shuttle fuel tank because of its heat transfer properties, was vaporized and scattered through the cloud. The result was the same as when gold is added in tiny quantities to stained window glass—a brilliant pinkish-red color. The giant pink cloud, with chunks of the ruined fuel tank flashing in the sun, created headlines as it passed to the northeast over Louisiana and Mississippi. Meanwhile, Government spokesmen tried to pooh-pooh it all as, quote "a natural phenomenon."

The Bolsheviks here still are not quite sure what happened to the Columbia, but they do know that as far as Space is concerned, the Shuttle Program is their only hope. They have three more orbital shuttles hidden away at White Sands, and they intend to launch them all no matter what the odds may be, so the NASA cover-up of the Columbia disaster went right on according to plan.

Two years ago I first revealed the existence of man-made genetic replicas of human beings. I was widely disbelieved and condemned at the time, just as I knew I would be. But they do exist, and once again they have been pressed into service before our eyes.

Tuesday morning, April 14, genetic replicas called "Synthetics" of the late astronauts John Young and Robert Crippen were readied at White Sands. They were programmed to take a computerized ride on the training shuttle "Enterprise." The Young and Crippen entities boarded the Enterprise, which was mounted on top of the launch 747. After rocket fuel was loaded for the shuttle, the 747 took off and headed west, avoiding commercial air traffic. The launch 747 headed out over the Pacific until it was several hundred miles west of Los Angeles. Then it turned back toward the east toward the California coast. On television we were told that the non-existent Columbia was re-entering from orbit. Meanwhile the "Enterprise", re-labeled "Columbia", cut loose from the 747 and fired its rockets. It sped up to a speed of nearly 6,000 miles per hour, then we watched it as it made that dramatic race in from the sea to a

precise computer landing at Edwards Air Force Base. It was all timed to agree as closely as possible with the official NASA timetable.

Even so, a technical mistake was made that morning and as a result we were told that the Shuttle would land six minutes early. My friends, in space flight, six minutes might as well be a year. Six minutes in orbit corresponds to nearly a 2,000 mile error in the location of the Shuttle, but on TV nobody bothered to question it. They all just smiled and said, "Isn't it a lovely day to watch the Shuttle."

After the dramatic Shuttle landing, former astronaut Gene Cernan expressed surprise on ABC television. He said the Shuttle simply did not look scorched enough for a ship that had re-entered from orbit. Likewise, when the synthetics called Young and Crippen emerged, they did not act like men who had been weightless for two days. Instead they bounded down the access steps and pranced around with restless energy, but no one questioned it. After all, we had seen the Shuttle landing for ourselves; and as that old saying goes, "Seeing is believing."

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary.

My friends, the score in America's Space Shuttle Program is now "One down and three to go." Three more shuttles like the Columbia are waiting their turn in the desert at White Sands. Each will have the name "Columbia" painted on its side. The real Columbia is now dead, along with its crew; but thanks to these mechanical clones, the Columbia will live again in the public eye.

I have given you as many details as time will allow about the Columbia disaster and its cover-up by NASA. The point of it all is not whether Russia is ahead or America is ahead in the Space race. The point is that we are being deceived. We are being given a false sense of security and a false sense of confidence. We are being led like sheep to slaughter into nuclear war and Bolshevik dictatorship.

If we choose to believe their lies, then they will succeed, they will destroy our way of life, and enslave the few of us who survive their war. OR, we can learn to do as our Lord Jesus Christ taught us to do long ago. We can learn to look for the truth, cherish the truth, and believe the Truth. If we do that, my friends, then we will always be free.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #65

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is June 6, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 65.

Wednesday afternoon May 13 was a beautiful sunny afternoon in Rome. At the Vatican thousands of people were gathered in St. Peter's Square. They were waiting for the regular Wednesday afternoon audience by the man known to the world as Pope John Paul II. Right on time he made his appearance. As usual, he was standing in a special jeep-like vehicle, waving to the crowd as the vehicle drove slowly around the Square. Inside the walls of

the Vatican that afternoon it was a scene of peace and cheer. It was as if the insane rush of a troubled world had been locked outside for a few precious moments. Filled with a sea of smiling faces, St. Peter's Square seemed immune from the presence of evil. Suddenly the illusion was shattered. There was the sound of gun fire, and the man known as the Pope crumpled and fell. As the crowd looked on in disbelief, the papal vehicle sped up and rushed out of St. Peter's Square. In a matter of moments the scene of tranquility had been transformed into one of tragedy. Gone were all the smiles; and in their place, tears. For days afterward people the world over were asking just one question: "Why would anyone shoot the Pope?"

My friends, the answer to that question will never be revealed by the controlled major media. The Vatican has become just one more battleground in the secret war now raging world-wide. The stakes involve the fate of over 700,000,000 Roman Catholics—one-sixth of the human race.

The man accused of the shooting reportedly said right away that he had acted alone. As an excuse he said he was protesting against the turmoil in Afghanistan and El Salvador. Then there were reports, especially here in the United States, that perhaps he was tied in with the Palestinians in some way. One story followed another in rapid succession. Meanwhile the Italian police quickly found many clues that the would-be assassin Mehmet Agca could not have acted alone. All the evidence pointed clearly to a conspiracy. In Europe conspiracies are known and recognized to be a fact of life and so they are not pooh-poohed when they are discovered, but here in America it is different. We're treated like gullible children and taught that the legal word "conspiracy" is a No-No. We must never think that greedy, powerful men would ever work together to carry out their plans.

My friends, there's a very good reason why we are never allowed to think seriously about conspiracies. The reason is that a very small elite number of people are trying to control all the rest of us. There are an awful lot of us, and only a few of them. The only way they can corral us and herd us around like sheep is to keep us ignorant of what they are doing. Keeping you ignorant is the very essence of their power. That, my friends, is why plots and conspiracies of all kinds are kept secret, and that's why the biggest conspiracy of all is the conspiracy of SILENCE. It's a conspiracy to keep you and me in the dark so that the forces of darkness can continue unhampered. The one thing they fear most is the TRUTH, known and understood by the people, because the Truth is the Sword of our Lord Jesus Christ.

My friends, I live to know the truth, to understand the truth, and to speak the truth. I want to do my part so that the truth will continue to have a life of its own throughout our universe. I believe there is nothing more important than to look for the truth, and keep an open mind to receive it, because without the Truth people perish.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE POPE, THE PRESIDENT, AND ASSASSINATION POLITICS Topic #2—THE AFTERMATH OF THE SHUTTLE "COLUMBIA" DISASTER Topic #3—MOUNTING WORLD CRISES AND "ACCIDENTAL" NUCLEAR WAR.

Topic #1—In August 1978 the Cardinals of the Roman Catholic Church were called into conclave at the Vatican. Pope Paul VI had died earlier that month, and the Cardinals faced the task of choosing his successor—a new pope. From all around the world the Cardinals converged on Rome for the papal conclave. As they

did so, the news was filled with speculation about the presumed leading candidates for the papacy. Many were convinced that the conclave would be a long one; instead, it turned out to be one of the shortest papal conclaves in history. Voting by the Cardinals began on August 2 6, 1978, and that very same day there was white smoke from the Vatican. The Catholic Church had a new pope.

Vatican watchers were astonished at the speed of the papal election. They were even more astonished by the identity of the new pope. He was not one of the acknowledged front runners but a complete outsider to the Vatican power structure. The little known Cardinal Luciani of Venice had become pope—Pope John Paul I. The following day, August 27, 1978, I recorded my AUDIO LETTER No. 37. In that report I gave a warning about the true significance of the stunning surprise at the Vatican.

The atheistic Bolsheviks, who have lost their former power in Russia, will stop at nothing in their frenzy to regain that power. To that end, the Bolsheviks were launching a ruthless campaign to seize control of a tremendous weapon, the Roman Catholic Church. The Bolshevik goal was, and still is, to turn some 700,000,000 Catholics actively anti-Russian.

For the next few weeks there was no visible hint about the secret conspiracy which I had reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. Instead, Pope John Paul I quickly endeared himself to millions as the "smiling Pope." Then came the shock of September 28, 1978. After a mere 33 days we were told that Pope John Paul I had died, suddenly and unexpectedly, and the man who succeeded him 2-1/2 weeks later was another surprise. He was the first non-Italian pope in 455 years and the first Slavic pope ever. He was from bitterly anti-Soviet Poland, and his reputation was that of a man who stands up to the Soviets. On October 16, 1978, the former Cardinal Wojtyla of Poland became known as Pope John Paul II.

The Bolshevik intrigues and maneuvering in the Vatican continued right on track. By late 1978 more and more of the pronouncements issued in the name of Pope John Paul II were anti-Soviet in tone. The public signs of rapid change in the Vatican were dramatic. Meanwhile behind closed doors, the forces at work were far more sinister and revolutionary than most people could ever imagine. I reported on these developments in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 39, 41, and 42.

The Vatican, my friends, had become the setting for assassination politics in the spiritual warfare between East and West. It had begun with the surprise election of Cardinal Luciani as Pope John Paul I in August 1978. He had been thrust into the papacy by forces of which he was not even aware—Bolshevik forces. They intended to use him for transitional purposes to begin the anti-Soviet transformation of the Church, but he had turned out to be hard to manipulate into saying and doing what the Bolsheviks wanted, so the Bolshevik agents in the Vatican cut short the interim papacy of Pope John Paul I by assassinating him.

When the next pope was selected, the Bolsheviks made certain that his image was made to order for their purposes. When Cardinal Wojtyla of Poland became Pope John Paul II, it was only his image that the Bolsheviks wanted. The man himself was strong-minded and independent. He also had plans for restructuring the Vatican in ways that the Bolsheviks could not afford. To make sure that Pope John Paul II never carried out those plans, the Bolsheviks once again resorted to assassination. The preparations had been made far ahead of time, and they were carried out without a hitch. In mid November 1978, Pope John

Paul II, the most visible pope in history, virtually dropped out of sight for a while. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 41, he was being poisoned, and on November 20, 1978, he succumbed.

Immediately he was replaced by a "Bolshevik look-alike", an actor; and the very next day the Vatican announced that the Pope had re-appointed all of the top officials in the Vatican hierarchy known as the Curia. The Vatican restructuring, which had been planned by the late real Pope John Paul II, was snuffed out. The Bolshevik actor-Pope then proceeded to make maximum use of the anti-Russian image of the man he had replaced. Doing exactly as he was told, he was stoking up bitter feelings toward Russia in heavily Catholic Eastern Europe; and most of all these bitter feelings were being encouraged in Poland, the most heavily Catholic of all.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 42 I was able to make public where all this was intended to lead. The Bolsheviks were trying to make Poland explode against Russia in an uprising to be known as the "Pope's Revolution." It was to be triggered during a papal visit to Poland in May 1979. The actor-Pope himself was to provide the spark for revolution in a way which he himself was not being told. At a critical emotional moment during his coming trip to Poland, the actor-Pope was to be assassinated.

When I made the details of the plan public in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, the momentum toward a Pope's Revolution was building fast; but if there is one thing the Russians do not intend to allow, it is a Bolshevik revolution in Poland. Having learned of the "Pope's Revolution" plan, the Kremlin directed Poland's leaders to take all possible steps to minimize the risk. Poland even announced that foreign journalists entering Poland to cover the Pope's visit would have to pay very high fees for the privilege. Meanwhile Russian Intelligence operatives went to work to undo the plan altogether.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 46 I reported that Russia had finally succeeded in stopping the "Pope's Revolution" plot. In early May 1979 the Bolshevik actor-Pope was eliminated and replaced by a Russian actor, another "double." Immediately the Vatican announced that it would agree to a one-month delay in the papal visit to Poland, as requested by the Polish government. In that way, a crucial emotional stimulus for revolution was eliminated.

As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, the original timing of the papal visit for St. Stanislaus Day had been essential to the plot. With the threat of revolution averted, Poland then dropped its earlier demands for high fees by visiting journalists. A month later the Russian actor-Pope known to the world as Pope John Paul II visited Poland without mishap.

The Bolshevik plan for a "Pope's Revolution" in Poland two years ago was thwarted by the Russians, but the Bolsheviks never give up in their agitation for revolution and war. Soon they were at work on Poland through another avenue, the so-called "Solidarity" labor movement, and at the same time the Bolsheviks have never given up on their dream of seizing control of the Roman Catholic Church.

For the past two years the Catholic Church has been moving quietly in the opposite direction to that desired by the Bolsheviks. The man known as Pope John Paul II has initiated overtures toward eventual reunification of the Roman Catholic and Eastern Orthodox churches. If that were to happen in the present circumstances, it would be an unmitigated disaster for the Bolsheviks. Catholics in the West and Russian Orthodox believers

in the East would consider themselves "spiritual brothers" instead of enemies. Worse yet for the Bolsheviks, a papal visit to Russia has been in the works very quietly in the Vatican. The Bolsheviks are determined to prevent that from happening; and, as usual, the Bolsheviks turned to one of their favorite political techniques—assassination. Early last month the Russian actor-Pope celebrated a special mass for new Swiss Guards. As if in a premonition, he warned them that they might be faced with giving their lives in their role as his protectors. A scant week later, inside the walls of the Vatican, he was cut down by the bullets of a professional killer. This time he survived; but as I said before, my friends, the Bolsheviks never give up.

My friends, we are once again plunging into an era of assassination politics. For Americans, the shooting in the Vatican on May 13 created a sense of deja vu. We had seen it all before as recently as six weeks earlier right here in our own land. It all looked horribly familiar—and no wonder. The Satanic forces responsible for the shooting of the actor-Pope are the same ones who were behind the shooting of the President. These dark forces, as I have said many times, are the Bolsheviks. Having lost control of Russia, they now have a stranglehold on America's government instead.

When news of the Pope's shooting reached Washington, reporters asked for reactions from the White House. The resulting national television news reports that evening were very strange. We were shown only a "still photograph" of the President with the alleged quote: "I will pray for him." By contrast, we were then shown the Vice-President talking with reporters on the White House lawn about the tragedy in Rome. We saw and heard seemingly heartfelt words of anguish at such brutal and senseless violence. It was the Vice-President, not the President, whom we saw expressing the feelings most Americans wanted to hear.

This is just one example, my friends, of a subtle but important pattern in our news these days. A sophisticated program of psychological conditioning is now under way directed at you and me. It is a disarming soft-sell, but it is also using powerful subliminal techniques to insure success. It's a program to build up the George Bush image in our minds while letting the Ronald Reagan image slowly recede. We're being prepared to accept it easily when the so-called Reagan era comes to an abrupt end soon!

What's happening now is a preliminary phase in the plan which I first reported just after the election last November 1980. In AUDIO LETTER No. 60 I gave a warning that we would soon be told that the President had met with, quote: "an unfortunate accident, or a sudden fatal illness." Then we would see a change in the policies of the White House built around the image of George Bush.

Just over two months ago on March 30 this plan of the Bolsheviks here almost succeeded on the first attempt. Outside the Washington Hilton Hotel the entity President Reagan was led into an ambush, about which I will have more to say in a few moments. It was intended to cut down the President on the spot, just as several others were cut down. The assassination attempt did not succeed in that goal, but it was a partial success even so, because from that day onward the image of George Bush has been shining brighter and brighter in the public eye.

First, the period of hospital confinement of the President was exploited. It was an opportunity to show off a restrained, statesmanlike image on the part of the Vice-President. This

image-building began immediately during the first hours after the shooting. First, the entity known as General Alexander Haig rushed into the White House briefing room and seized the podium. His voice quivering with intensity, he announced, "I am in charge here." It was a virtuoso performance, an act calculated perfectly to create headlines, furrowed brows, and a source of jokes for comedians. Stories of a power tug of war between Haig and Bush automatically focused attention on the Vice-President in a favorable light. In contrast to the Haig outburst, the Bush entity acted humble and deferential. News reports said Bush refused even to sit in the President's seat in Cabinet meetings. The Bush image grew as a model of judgment and restraint. As the President recovered, public opinion polls were taken to judge what effect the shooting had on people. They found a dramatic rise in people's favorable rating of the President; but for the Vice-President the improvement was astronomical—from 31% to 69% favorable in just a few weeks, according to NBC.

As I say these words, the subtle image-making is continuing. On Memorial Day almost two weeks ago it was not the President we saw in news reports laying a wreath at the Tomb of the Unknown, but the Vice-President. And that same evening the entity Bush popped up again. Millions tuned into a Bob Hope Special that evening, and the closing act was none other than the Vice-President. It was prime time exposure of the supposedly non-political kind that is most valuable of all in politics. Those who are building the image of George Bush before us by way of news guidelines are setting us up for things to come.

What happened last March 30 outside the Washington Hilton was a warning, and we should not ignore it. It all began that day when the entity President Reagan emerged from the special VIP exit of the Hilton. The VIP exit is around the corner from the rest of the hotel. The hotel itself is many stories high, but the VIP entrance is set into a stone wall only about 15 feet high. At the top of the wall is a handrail with a walkway and trees behind it. In other words, the VIP exit from the Hilton comes out under a small park-like area. The exit itself is unmarked except for a concrete canopy extending out to the curving driveway. A good photograph of the scene appeared on page 30 of People magazine for April 13, 1981.

My friends, the whole idea behind the Hilton's VIP entrance is to provide security for important visitors. The natural and prudent thing from the security standpoint would have been to park the presidential limousine directly opposite the door at the end of the short canopy. That way there would have been only a few short steps from the door to the limousine. And that is how things are done by highly trained security forces. But, my friends, everything was done differently on March 30. Someone had arranged for the President to walk into a classic ambush.

The limousine was not parked at the curb next to the VIP exit. Instead, it was parked at least 20 feet farther away to the left as the presidential party walked outside. The car was parked opposite a rounded corner in the stone wall, which curves away from the street. Back around that corner waiting to see the President stood the press and various onlookers, including allegedly John Hinckley, Jr.; and just behind and above them there were the numerous windows and balconies of the hotel itself. I have been informed by certain professionals whose business is the protection of VIPs that the pattern in all this is unmistakable. The President walked into the perfect setup for assassination—a cross fire. As he approached the limousine, the President became an easy target from two directions at once—one direction was the sidewalk above the overhanging canopy of the

VIP exit, the other direction was from behind and above the press and onlookers, which included John Hinckley.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I quoted an early NBC television news report by Judy Woodruff. She had been with the presidential party inside the hotel and had walked out the exit. She had not rounded the corner to the area where Hinckley and the cameras were waiting, so she could not have seen Hinckley. That's clear both from her own eyewitness account on NBC and from replays of the video tapes; yet she said, quote: "I noticed there were some shots fired from an overhanging, from a sidewalk that was above where the President's car was." If you will look at the photograph in People magazine, which I mentioned earlier, you'll see very clearly the area that Judy Woodruff was describing. It's not the area where Hinckley was.

As for Hinckley himself, we are supposed to believe he did it all by himself. Always it's a "lone assassin", always he's portrayed as "a nut", and always there's a note left behind conveniently by the otherwise nutty assailant to avoid loose ends. We are also supposed to believe that Hinckley squeezed off six (6) shots in only two (2) seconds and hit four (4) targets in that time. We're not supposed to think about the fact that every time a pistol is fired, even a small caliber pistol, it kicks. It deflects upward, spoiling the aim briefly.

If that were not enough, we're supposed to forget about the bystander who jumped on Hinckley as soon as he started firing. Alfred Antonucci, a carpenter's union official from Cleveland, had arrived too late for the President's speech, so he waited outside for a glimpse of the President. He was standing right next to Hinckley. On April 13 Antonucci was interviewed on ABC's "Good Morning, America" by David Hartman. Hartman mentioned the alleged six shots by Hinckley, and Antonucci said, quote: "Well, let me say this. He fired the first shot; and whether it was the second, the split second of the second, I was on top of him to break the aim." Then on May 1 the New York Daily News published an interview of Antonucci. Antonucci is quoted as saying, quote: "I hit him on the back of the neck as hard as I could; and his gun, which he held with two hands aimed right at Reagan, came down. He kept shooting with one hand. I was told later by high authorities that four of the six shots hit the sidewalk."

My friends, we saw for ourselves on television the scuffle to subdue Hinckley as soon as he started shooting. Mr. Antonucci's story fits perfectly with what we saw ourselves, but we're supposed to ignore what we saw and just believe the official story that Hinckley fired six very accurate shots. Now, suppose we do a little simple counting. On TV we saw four (4) men wounded—that's at least four bullets. Four (4) bullets also hit the sidewalk, thanks to Mr. Antonucci; that brings the total to at least eight, and from other reports at least two more bullets hit the limousine. That's a total of at least 10 bullets that we know of. Hinckley's revolver, my friends, was only a six-shooter.

Those who plotted the assassination attempt on March 30 are pulling all kinds of strings to cover up the truth. A perfect example of this was Time magazine for April 13, 1981. The lies began with the cover itself. It's a painting, not a photograph, depicting the moment of the President's wounding. It shows the President viewed across the roof of the limousine—left arm raised, grimacing in pain. It is accurate except for one thing. You will see what is wrong with the Time cover if you will compare it with the photograph I mentioned in People magazine. On the cover of Time the stone wall is drawn as if it were a tall

building. There's no hint of the overhanging sidewalk from which NBC's Judy Woodruff said shots were fired.

My friends, we're living today in an "Alice in Wonderland" world. We're supposed to believe three impossible things before breakfast, if that is what the controlled major media report to us. Only those who are determined to search for the truth will be able to see it in the days ahead.

Topic #2—On Tuesday evening April 28 millions of Americans tuned in their TV sets to watch the entity President Reagan address Congress. The speech was to build support for the Administration's Budget, but most people were interested for a different reason. It was the first speech by the President since the assassination attempt nearly a month earlier. Many people were too absorbed in the dramatic re-appearance of a wounded president to pay much attention to anything else. No one cared very much that the space shuttle "Columbia" supposedly arrived back in Florida that day, nor did many people give a second thought to the fact that it was a full week overdue. After all, as far as the public was concerned, the Columbia was a great success. We had seen it for ourselves on television.

Based on one space shuttle flight, we are being told on all sides that we are once again on top in space. We are told that now we are five, ten years ahead of those poor dumb Russians. It would be nice if all those things were true, but unfortunately they are not true. In AUDIO LETTER No. 62 I was able to make public ahead of time the real mission of the Columbia, which was Military! I described the plan for us to see the Columbia lift off from Florida, but to see a different shuttle, the "Enterprise", land two days later in California.

Meanwhile the Columbia was to have carried out a secret military mission unseen by you. The deception built into the original flight plan was bad enough; but as it turned out, the flight of the Columbia ended very quickly in DISASTER; and you and I were supposed to believe otherwise. The secret disaster of the space shuttle Columbia and the television hoax which we were shown to hide it were events of great importance. That is why I devoted my entire AUDIO LETTER No. 64 to giving you the details. The space shuttle "Columbia" is no more!

The shuttle which we saw landing at Edwards Air Force Base in California was the training shuttle "Enterprise." It had simply been relabeled with the name "Columbia" on its side. When the shuttle landed in California on April 14 we were initially told that it would be flown to Florida just a few days later; but as the days went by, the shuttle just stayed there. NASA cooked up one excuse after another to explain away the delays to the public.

Meanwhile, frantic meetings were going on involving key joint military and NASA personnel. Things had not gone according to plan, and they were not sure what to do. One faction insisted that NASA should go ahead according to the original plan. That plan called for a switch in shuttles between California and Florida. On Day One a modified "747" would take off from Edwards Air Force Base, California, with the shuttle "Enterprise" riding piggyback. News cameras would be on hand to record the take-off. The Enterprise would then be flown to its home base at White Sands, New Mexico. Meanwhile the public would be told that the "747" with the shuttle had made an over-night stopover. Then on Day Two another modified "747" carrying a different shuttle would take off from White Sands and fly to Florida. Once again reporters would be on hand to watch the landing at Cape

Canaveral. The new shuttle, of course, would have the name "Columbia" on the side just as the Enterprise does. In that way the training shuttle Enterprise was to be returned to home base and a fresh orbital-rated shuttle sent to Florida. The switch would be made without the public suspecting a thing.

In meetings behind closed doors about the situation, others protested that it would be foolish to go ahead as originally planned without more information. It was obvious that somehow the Russians had destroyed the Columbia, but the question was: "How?" The military shuttle planning group agreed that they needed the answer to that question, otherwise there would be no way to devise countermeasures to give the next shuttle flight a better chance. Finally it was agreed all around that the first urgent need was to buy time, so NASA spokesmen were told to give the press a series of stalling stories about the post-flight shuttle procedures in California. Meanwhile every available avenue of Intelligence world-wide was pressed to come up with an answer to that crucial question: "What happened to the space shuttle Columbia?"

Day by day we saw brief news reports about the post-flight checkout of the space shuttle at Edwards Air Force Base. The shuttle was lifted onto the back of the "747" but the take-off kept being pushed back one day after another. The military shuttle planning group was drawing a blank from their Intelligence sweep about the Columbia. The shuttle stayed on the ground in California a week longer than originally planned, and still no answer came about the Columbia. NASA ran out of excuses for further stalling without raising unwelcome questions. The secret shuttle planning team was still in no position to prepare for a second orbital mission, and yet appearances have to be maintained.

The United States Government is crowing loudly about the supposed stunning success of the shuttle because it is the only hope left for America in space. The space shuttle is the only program other than Defense which has been given increased funding by the so-called Reagan Adminstration.

Before the shuttle Enterprise left California aboard its "747", the shuttle planning group had to make a decision: Should they, or should they not, make the planned switch between shuttles at White Sands. There are three more orbital-rated shuttles at White Sands, and a specific mission has been planned for each one. One of the planners summed up the dilemma in the words, and I quote:

"How can we send an orbital bird to the Cape? STS-2, 3, and 4 may require major modifications in order to get past the Russians. We won't know what those modifications are until we get the missing feed-back on STS-1. I say send the Enterprise. We can keep it sub-orbital by faking an abort—shut down one engine before press-to-MECO and let Enterprise return to Kennedy. That will keep Enterprise out of danger from Ivan. It will also keep the ball rolling while giving us more time to set up a successful orbital shot."

Someone else asked:

"What about the public relations impact? One thing we don't need is to abort a mission this early in the program."

The reply was:

"Would you rather lose another orbital bird to Ivan? Besides,

if we do it right, we could end up with even more public support. You know what I mean—the idea that the shuttle is safe even if something does go wrong, and so on."

There was a long silence, followed by more discussion, but finally the suggestion was adopted. On Monday April 27 the "747" bearing the shuttle Enterprise took off from Edwards Air Force Base, California. The following day we saw the same shuttle, the training shuttle Enterprise, landing in Florida. There was no switch.

The secret shuttle planners are still feeling their way. The plan could be changed, but as of now it will be the training shuttle Enterprise that rolls out to the launch pad at Cape Canaveral later this summer. It will look just like the Columbia did before its April launch, mated to a giant fuel tank and huge solid-rocket boosters.

NASA is presently shooting for the very early launch date of September 30, 1981. According to the present plan the launch is to proceed smoothly for the first few minutes. Unlike the Columbia, the Enterprise will not veer north toward the kind of orbit forbidden by Russia. Then, one engine will shut down prematurely. It will be earlier in the flight than the point at which contact with Columbia was lost last April. Then, as we are still watching on television, the Enterprise will return for its alleged "emergency" landing at Kennedy. By now the Enterprise has made so many computerized landings that NASA has confidence that the landing will be made safely.

There will be an uproar about the aborted space flight, but it will not last long. Aided by the controlled major media, NASA will convince most Americans that the safe outcome of the supposed "emergency" is what counts. It will be said that this just proves how reliable the shuttle really is. By staging an aborted shuttle mission this fall of 1981, the joint military and NASA shuttle team will be buying time. They will not he expected to launch another mission until early 1982. By then they are hoping to have learned what they must do to get past the Russians into space.

Topic #3—When news of the presidential assassination attempt here in Washington flashed around the world last March 30, it triggered an old concern in many minds. America was caught in a vulnerable moment. Would some other country try to take advantage in some way? Most of all, would Russia decide to invade Poland? At that time headlines were telling us that an invasion might be imminent. As it turned out then, our worries were unfounded. Russia had made no move toward Poland; instead, they were in the process of cooling down the latest "Solidarity" labor crisis. Likewise other nations around the world generally acted with restraint following news of the shooting—that is, all the world's nations except one. The lone exception was Israel.

The timing could not have been more precise, my friends, if it had been planned in advance. As the first shocking bulletins of the shooting flashed across America, Israeli war planes were starting their engines. As White House spokesmen were gathering to brief the press, Israeli fighter bombers were gathering over Lebanon.

Through the afternoon and evening we Americans huddled around our television sets for the latest word from George Washington University Hospital. Meanwhile Lebanese villagers were huddling in basements and bombed-out shelters as Israeli missiles and bombs exploded all around them. On the BBC World Service and

other short-wave radio news reports around the world, the sudden new Israeli raids on Lebanon that day were big news. Not so here in America. News of the presidential shooting and its aftermath drowned out everything else. It was not until Syrian troops began making moves in response to the Israeli raids that Lebanon began to enter our consciousness here. Day by day the Israelis and Syrians lashed out at one another more and more, directly and through surrogates in Lebanon.

On April 28 Israeli jets shot down two Syrian helicopters over Lebanon. It was big news overseas. Here in the United States though it was overshadowed by the presidential speech to Congress that evening. It was not until the following day, April 29, that the Lebanon crisis received top billing in America's controlled major media. The Syrians had moved Russian SAM-6 anti-aircraft missiles into the Bekaa valley of Lebanon. This was Syria's answer to Israel's downing of two of her helicopters the day before over Zahle. Thus the Middle East missile crisis was born.

Another mounting crisis is the growing feud between the United States and Japan. Lately it seems as if Washington can't do anything right towards the Japanese. On the morning of April 10, 1981, the first attempt to launch the space shuttle "Columbia" took place at Cape Canaveral. It ended in failure due to a computer problem, but it was the top story that day here in America. It all but drowned out the news story that was No. 1 that day in Japan.

The previous day, an American submarine had sunk a small Japanese freighter, supposedly by ramming it. Then the submarine had left the scene without making any attempt to rescue survivors. Worse yet, the United States had not even admitted the incident to Japanese authorities until 36 hours later. In the weeks that have passed since the incident took place, the episode has raised more and more questions in Japanese minds. The United States Navy issued a report about it which differs drastically from the testimony of the 13 Japanese survivors. The Navy report even puts the location of the collision 3-1/2 miles away from where it actually happened. The Japanese want to know WHY.

To this and many other puzzling questions about the incident, the Japanese are demanding answers, but they are not getting those answers. The supposedly accidental sinking of the Japanese freighter was only the opening gun in the Washington-Tokyo feud. Since then Japan has been rocked by one shock after another at the hands of the United States. American naval vessels have sailed through Japanese fishing fleets, cutting fishing nets to ribbons. Suddenly there are revelations that American ships with nuclear weapons aboard have been using Japanese ports regularly in secret. Secretary of State Haig canceled a visit to Japan. Even the visit of Prime Minister Suzuki to Washington recently backfired on him. He agreed to language in a joint communique that led to accusations in Japan that Suzuki was making a secret military alliance with the United States. The irony of it all is that Suzuki's troubles are due to the fact that he is resisting any such military alliance.

The Bolsheviks here in America want Japan to re-arm, to become the policeman of the Western Pacific. Suzuki's predecessor, Prime Minister Ohira, was ready to go along with America's Bolsheviks despite stern warnings from Russia not to. Then Ohira died suddenly a year ago, and Suzuki replaced him. Suzuki does not want to re-arm Japan, and so America's Bolsheviks want him out of office. Japan has endured all kinds of shocks in recent months, but they all have one common denominator. They all have

involved loss of face for Japan as a whole and especially for Prime Minister Suzuki.

In Asia, loss of face is a very serious matter. By using it as a political weapon, America's Bolsheviks believe they can bring down the Suzuki government. Whoever follows Suzuki will have to talk "peace" for domestic consumption, but he will have to prepare for war if he is to get along with Washington.

Elsewhere in Asia, Red China and Vietnam have supposedly recently engaged in very heavy border fighting with many casualties. Meanwhile the so-called Reagan Administration is preparing to declare openly that it will sell America's most sophisticated weapons to Red China. The United States Government, my friends, has gone insane from the cancer of Bolshevism, and is leading America from folly to greater folly.

In Europe, too, there is turmoil at the hands of Bolshevik agents. The government of Italy has just been brought down in a tremendous scandal involving a massive conspiracy of many of the country's leading citizens. In West Germany, Chancellor Helmut Schmidt is under fire from forces who want to undo the balance he has struck between East and West. And in France the Bolsheviks won a tremendous victory in the election last month. Until now, France has enjoyed a special relationship with Russia as well as with the West. The relationship has been one of trust built up laboriously beginning with the late President Charles de Gaulle; but the new French president, Mitterrand, is working as fast as possible to change that. Mitterrand will try to bring France into the anti-Russian camp, headed by the Bolsheviks here in America.

My friends, crises large and small are multiplying all around us, and by and large they are not accidental. They are part of the deliberate war build-up strategy of the Bolsheviks here, which I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 63. By turning the world into a caldron of crises, they are setting the stage for NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The whole world is becoming like the uneasy Balkans just before World War I.

World War I was set off seemingly by accident by the assassination of Archduke Ferdinand of Austria by a terrorist. Today, we are once again in the era of terrorism, assassination, and turmoil. Like World War I, NUCLEAR WAR ONE will erupt suddenly from an unexpected spark, seemingly by accident. But World War I was brought about deliberately, my friends, and the same will be true of NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

All of this is not lost on the new rulers of Russia. Russia's rulers are convinced that it is only a matter of time until all-out war breaks out between the United States and Russia, so the Russians are continuing to whittle away at America's ability to damage Russia.

When the space shuttle "Columbia" took off on its ill-fated flight last April 12, a fleet of special airplanes were aloft to help track it. The United States was depending heavily on its fleet of advanced range instrumentation aircraft. These are flying radar and communication stations known as "Droop Snoots" for their huge bulbous nose. This special airplane is a modified military Boeing 707 designated EC-135N. When they are not involved in space shots, the EC-135N's also have many other uses, including the tracking of Russian satellites. There are only a few EC-135N's, so they are all important. When the space shuttle "Columbia" took off last April, there were only eight of them.

The Space Shuttle Program is an indispensable key to the current war plans of the Bolsheviks here, and the EC-135N's are crucial to the Shuttle Program. On May 6, 1981, an EC-135N nicknamed the "Boss Hog" took off from its base at Wright-Patterson Air Force Base, Ohio. It headed east on what was to be a routine training flight. As the modified "707" flew eastward, it was heading for an unexpected rendezvous. Hovering high over the rolling hills of western Maryland, a lone Cosmosphere was waiting for the Boss Hog. At 10:51 A.M. Eastern Time the pilot of the jet radioed the words "Flight level 290" to flight controllers on the ground. The plane was at 29,000 feet. Moments later the Cosmosphere fired its Charged Particle Beam weapon downward at the jet plane passing miles below it. The beam blasted a hole through the top of the fuselage and another out through the bottom. Explosive decompression emptied the cabin of its air. The blast also set off a secondary explosion of some kind, turning the jet into a ball of flames. At the same time control cables through the tail were destroyed, and the jet turned violently nose down. Instead of gliding to a crash many miles away, the ruined airplane dropped like a rock, almost straight down. Radar traffic controllers were startled to see the plane disappear suddenly from their screens. It was all over before they even knew anything had happened. On the ground, eye witnesses heard a boom-boom-boom, and moments later a giant ball of fire came screaming downward out of the clouds. For 10 more minutes small pieces of debris from the plane kept settling earthward for miles around.

In any air disaster as violent as this one, the investigation usually extends over a period of months—but not this time, my friends. On Friday May 29, just over three weeks after the crash, the Air Force quietly announced that its investigation was already over. They knew what had blown their radar plane out of the air, but they also declared that for the time being the results will not be made public.

While the Air Force was still reeling from the crash of the EC-135N, it became the Navy's turn. Once again Russia's target was a highly sophisticated electronic warfare jet. The plane involved was an EA-6B Prowler based on the nuclear supercarrier USS Nimitz.

On the night of Tuesday May 26, the Nimitz was engaged in night-landing exercises just off the East Coast. Carrier landings are always dangerous, and night landings especially so; but the EA-6B has a special advantage. It is equipped with an Automatic Carrier Landing System to permit safe landings even in conditions of zero visibility. Partly as a result, the Prowlers are known as some of the safest of all carrier aircraft; but on that night of May 2 6 one of Russia's new Jumbo Cosmospheres was hovering high above the Nimitz. It was one of the two which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 64 armed with a Neutron Particle Beam. As an EA-6B approached the Nimitz to land, the Cosmosphere waited. At a critical moment of the final approach, the Cosmosphere fired. The invisible neutron beam instantly killed the crew of three and temporarily deranged the airplane's electronic systems. Being suddenly without guidance, the jet veered to the right and crashed into a deck full of airplanes. The toll: 14 dead, 48 injured, and 20 aircraft destroyed or damaged. It was the Navy's worst flight-deck disaster since 1953 .

Day by day, my friends, the stakes are steadily increasing. The closer we get to all-out war, the more incidents like this we will see; yet, somehow, we seem oblivious to the real cause. Our leaders are telling us that we have to act "tough" to keep the

peace. Meanwhile our supposedly "tough" actions are leading to the exact opposite of peace—NUCLEAR WAR ONE!

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary.

My friends, these days we hear constantly about something called National Security. What does that mean to you? Can there be any such thing as National Security without National Survival? If not, then our national security hangs by a thread, because our national survival is in dire jeopardy. Our leaders keep telling us that the threat to our security is Russia. Then, while we are not looking, they turn right around and taunt the Russian Bear. I have a last minute report to pass on to you in this very vein.

As you know, the supercarrier Nimitz entered port only very briefly after the fiery crash of the EA-6B. It entered port on May 28 and left again just two days later, May 30. The official story was that it was heading for the Caribbean for continued exercises .

I must now report to you that the Nimitz was ordered to the north, not to the south. In a drastic departure from normal procedure, an American carrier group has been ordered into the Norwegian and Barents Seas, right on the doorstep of Russia. This deployment is expected to be brief, but it is very dangerous. It is an insane act of bravado by the Bolsheviks here, like walking up to a bully and knocking the chip off his shoulder. Probably the Nimitz will get away with it, this time; but one of these days we will cross that invisible line in the dust—and the world will be at war!

My friends, what is called National Security today is a lie. The more we spend on national security, the less secure we become. True security can be built only on the foundation of mutual trust and mutual respect, and those things in turn can be built only on the TRUTH. Those who secretly control America's destiny today cannot stand the truth. They are the enemies of our Lord Jesus Christ, and as He said long ago: They were liars from the beginning.

We must seek the Truth, cherish the Truth, and pass on the Truth to others. Only in that way can we break free of the Satanic power that now grips America.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #66

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is July 11, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 66.

A few days ago on June 29, 1981, the Supreme Court ruled in effect that the United States is now in a state of war. That is the real meaning of the Court's 7 to 2 decision in the case of former CIA agent Philip Agee. The Court declared that the Government can revoke the passport of a person who discloses secrets about American spying overseas. The decision was bottomed on the Government's right to restrict public speech or press stories about the movement of American troops or sailing

dates of American ships.

My friends, this governmental power to restrict free speech has always applied only during wartime, so a state of war has now been officially recognized—not by our sleeping Congress but by the Supreme Court of the United States. And what kind of war is it? It's a secret war, my friends. The Agee decision hands important new powers to the United States Government to help in closing down America for the nuclear holocaust to come. By the time this secret war erupts into the open, America will already be on a complete war footing!

The secret war which has just been quietly acknowledged by the Supreme Court has been raging now for five years. It began in the summer of 1976 with a crisis which to this day has never yet been made public officially, the Underwater Missile Crisis. Since then, the secret war has expanded into pre-war nuclear sabotage of the United States, secret space warfare, an Intelligence warfare involving techniques which sound unbelievable to many people. Many skirmishes in the secret war have been kept out of the news. Others have been impossible to hide completely, so instead they have been explained away in various ways by Government spokesmen and the "kept" media. But these things, my friends, are becoming harder and harder to hide because we are inching closer and closer to the brink of all-out war; and as we do so, the incidents are becoming more frequent, more violent, and causing more casualties.

In my AUDIO LETTER reports to you over the years I have detailed many of these developments as they have happened. I believe you have a right to know because it's your life and your country that is at stake. For that reason I must now reveal the greatest tragedy yet in the secret war.

My friends, the greatest naval disaster since World War II has now befallen the United States. As yet there's no hint of this disaster in the news. Part of the reason is that the Pentagon is not yet totally sure what happened. In addition, a frantic effort is under way to construct a believable cover story which will save the Pentagon officials from mass dismissals and disgrace. Their secret war games caused the disaster.

Whenever the cover story is decided upon and released, the plan is to pretend that the disaster has freshly happened at that time. That will be a lie. The final act in this twin naval catastrophe took place, ironically, on American Independence Day, July 4, 1981. Not one, but two, United States naval vessels have been destroyed in the secret catastrophe. I will not give the names of these naval vessels right now out of respect for the next of kin of their crews. It's only right to let the next of kin be notified before the names of the vessels are made public. For the same reason, I will not divulge the types of vessels involved at this time; but I can tell you that two different types of naval combatants were involved in the double tragedy.

The remains of the two American naval vessels are resting on the bottom of the Norwegian Sea between Iceland and Norway. The navigational coordinates of the larger ship are: 68 degrees, 56 minutes, 2 4 seconds North 1 degree, 6 minutes, 40 seconds East.

The smaller vessel is to the east of that in two pieces, one piece about 30 miles away, the other some 40 miles beyond that. My friends, I cannot say how long the Pentagon will keep quiet about this tragedy. One thing is for sure, though. They will keep quiet for as long as they can.

Only a few months ago on April 9, an American submarine sank a Japanese tanker, supposedly by ramming it. And what did the United States Government do? The submarine departed without any effort to save the survivors as the ship sank. Then the United States Government did not even report the incident to Japan for a day and a half. It was only because the Japanese knew themselves about the sinking that the United States admitted it. Even then, the Navy issued a report about the incident that is full of holes. But this time, my friends, both vessels which have been sunk are United States vessels, so there is no telling how long the silence will last.

We are now on a timetable for NUCLEAR WAR ONE that is aiming for mid-1982, about one year from now. Whether that timetable will be speeded up or slowed down by events, I cannot predict; but I will continue for as long as I can to let you know what you need to know in order to understand our headlong rush toward war.

My three special topics this month are:

Topic #1—THE ISRAELI PRACTICE RAID FOR NUCLEAR ARMAGEDDON

Topic #2—AMERICA'S "LAUNCH ON WARNING" PLAN" FOR NUCLEAR SUICIDE

Topic #3—WHAT YOU CAN DO DURING AMERICA'S FINAL DAYS.

Topic #1—To the north and west of the Persian Gulf there lies a land whose ancient origins are lost in the mists of time. It's the land between the rivers Tigris and Euphrates, the cradle of civilization. Tradition has it that the Garden of Eden was in this area, and in fact the Book of Genesis even mentions the Euphrates as one of its boundaries. Later we're told that the tower of Babel was located in the same area, spawning the ancient historical City of Babylon. Elsewhere in that same area, the famous City of Ninevah also rose and flourished, becoming the center of the Assyrian empire. All those things took place long before the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ, but centuries after His coming the glory of the land between the rivers rose again. Those were the days of the Muslim Saracen empire of the caliphs. By around 800 A.D. the empire of Caliph Haroun al Raschid was huge. It encompassed all of Arabia, Persia, Egypt, Syria, North Africa, and parts of what is now southern Russia.

The home of the Saracen empire was that same rich land between the Tigris and Euphrates, and the jewel at its very center was a magnificent city. The capital city of the ancient caliphs was built from scratch for that purpose starting in 762 A.D., and what a city it was. By all accounts, the court of the caliphs was the most magnificent the world has ever seen. The palace was so huge that more than 80,000 servants lived and worked within it. Gold, silver, and precious stones were turned into ornaments of unparalleled beauty by craftsmen educated in the highly advanced science of the day. In the Hall of Audience there stood a famous tree of gold, and on the branches of the tree, says tradition, there were perched birds of gold and silver studded with precious stones. The birds were music boxes and they fluttered their mechanical wings as they poured forth intricate songs. Outside the palace, the city was arranged in expanding circles with a system of three walls at the outer boundary. The city quickly became a world center of commerce, science, literature, and art. The city, my friends, was ancient Baghdad, the city of "The Thousand and One Arabian Nights."

The splendor of old Baghdad made it a tempting prize for other less civilized peoples who heard of it. It was not long before ancient Baghdad became a focal point of warfare, involving especially the Mongols and Turks. Rapacious greed destroyed much of the beauty which had once been the hallmark of Baghdad.

Constant warfare took its toll, and over the centuries the Saracen empire decayed in culture and power. The ancient irrigation systems were destroyed, and what was once a Garden of Eden began to turn into a wasteland. In 1516 Baghdad fell permanently to the Turks, and the once magnificent Saracen empire faded into the sands of a man-made desert.

The Baghdad of today is a far cry from that fabled city of old. Modern Baghdad, Iraq, lies on the east bank of the Tigris across the river from the ruins of the ancient city. Even so, the Baghdad of today does have certain things in common with the Baghdad of old. Modern Baghdad is struggling once again to become a city of science, culture, and power; and like the ancient city, modern Baghdad is faced with a powerful enemy who wants to destroy it.

Last month on Sunday June 7 an aerial strike force of 14 warplanes started their jet engines in the country that calls itself Israel. Eight of them were American F-16s loaded with one-ton bombs. The other six were American F-15s, air superiority fighters to fly along and protect the F-16s from any possible defenders. After the planes took off, they refueled from an aerial tanker for the long war flight they were about to make.

For days beforehand, the Israeli planes had been flying training exercises designed to look like the early part of the real raid. As a result, when the war raid was launched on that Sunday last month, it looked at first like just another drill. To maintain the surprise, the Israeli strike force thundered eastward over Jordan at high altitude, mimicking Jordanian Air Force procedures. Next, the Israeli fighter bombers raced into and across northwest Saudi Arabia. Following secret orders from the Pentagon, the American-manned AWACS radar plane patrolling over Saudi Arabia did not report the Israeli intrusion into Saudi air space. Thanks to this pre-planned cooperation by the United States, the fate of the Israeli target in Baghdad was sealed.

The Israeli F-15s and 16s streaked across the Syrian desert of Iraq on the deck below Iraqi radar. As they neared Baghdad, they appeared to rise from nowhere out of the Iraqi countryside as they climbed to begin the attack. At 6:30 P.M. Baghdad time, a hail of one-ton bombs began raining down on the Iraqi nuclear reactor which was under construction. Within a matter of minutes the reactor facility lay in smoking ruins.

The Israeli bombing raid into Iraq was a momentous event, the kind of thing we expect to hear about immediately through our electronic news media. Instead, the world remained ignorant of the raid for another full day. Iraq imposed a news blackout about it at first for military reasons. The raid had come without warning or provocation, and the Iraqis were not sure what else Israel might be about to do. The United States Government knew about the raid beforehand; but true to form these days, the United States said nothing to the world about what it knew. It was left to Israel itself to publicly announce the raid, which it did in triumphant glowing terms.

Around the world the reaction was revulsion, shock, and condemnation—and no wonder. For one thing, Israel is trying to justify its act of war in arrogantly self-righteous terms. Israel complains that Iraq was building a reactor—but wants everyone to forget her own nuclear capability which is already operational! Israel has always refused to sign the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty, which Iraq has signed. The Iraqi nuclear facility has been inspected regularly by the

International Atomic Energy Agency during its construction phase when any violations would be hard to hide; but Israel, which has never once submitted to international inspection, bombed the plant anyway.

Beyond these matters of international law and simple justice, Israel has also opened Pandora's box in more ways than one. For one thing, Israel has broken an unwritten taboo against attacks of any kind against nuclear facilities. Now the nuclear power plants of the world have been made fair game! Military, paramilitary, or terrorist attacks on nuclear power plants will no longer be unthinkable, thanks to the Israeli raid into Iraq; and, my friends, this includes the 72 nuclear power plants now operating right here in the United States! By secretly going along with the Israeli raid, the United States Pentagon is sowing the seeds of nuclear terrorism in our own land.

Most important of all, the Israeli raid on Iraq's nuclear plant was a dry run for a far more important raid. I'm referring to the coming Israeli limited nuclear attack on Saudi Arabia's oil fields. The nuclear destruction of Saudi Arabia's oil fields is far from a new idea, as my older listeners already know. I first reported that this was in the works nearly six years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 6. At that time the plan revolved around the so-called "Sinai accord" involving Egypt, Israel, and the United States. Two hundred or so Americans were in the Sinai under that agreement, and they were intended to become the focus of an incident to set off war in the area. The actual attack on Saudi oil fields was to be carried out using Cobra helicopter gunships with special air-to-ground atomic missiles.

As I detailed at the time, the plan was part of the ongoing joint plan between the long-time Rulers of the United States and the Soviet Union for world domination. As originally conceived, the plan called for a nuclear capping of Saudi oil fields sometime in 1976. It was not carried out at that time because the secret alliance between the United States and Russia started coming apart in 1976. The old Rockefeller allies in Russia, the Bolsheviks, were being quietly overthrown there. In their place a new ruling group were taking over. Russia's new rulers hate the Bolsheviks and have been expelling them from Russia in great numbers; and because America's then Secret Rulers, the Rockefellers, had supported Bolshevik rule in Russia from 1917, Russia's new rulers were taking defensive actions. The result was the still secret Underwater Missile Crisis which I reported in the summer of 1976. The collapse of the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance during 1976 and 1977 brought a reprieve for Saudi Arabia. Now America's Bolshevik government has carried over the plan to destroy Saudi oil fields. The plan has been continuously updated and revised for maximum strategic value in the new international situation. I've given reports periodically in my AUDIO LETTERS about the evolving status of this war plan.

For three years now the secret plan for Saudi Arabia's nuclear doom has been integrated into a new master strategy for a nuclear war. Behind closed doors, America's Bolshevik military planners have secretly shifted to a first-strike nuclear strategy against Russia. When the Saudi oil fields are capped off in the Israeli nuclear raid, it is intended to set in motion a chain of events. Those events are to culminate in NUCLEAR WAR ONE with America striking first at Russia.

I first reported the broad outlines of this radical new war plan in AUDIO LETTER No. 37 for August 1978. I reported that the first step was to be a supposedly surprise agreement between Israel and Egypt the following month at Camp David. The Camp

David hoax went off without a hitch, and the following spring the Egyptian-Israeli treaty was signed in Washington. It was called a "peace" treaty, but its real purpose was to set the stage for war!

My friends, the so-called Egyptian-Israeli peace treaty is just a new, more elaborate version of the Sinai accord of six years ago. The Sinai accord was held together by American technicians in the Sinai. Likewise, now the Egyptian-Israeli treaty is leading toward a primarily American military force in the Sinai Peninsula due to start April 1982.

Now, as then, the purpose is to provide a pretext to drag the United States directly into a Middle East war. From there the conflict is to spread into all-out war! In order to carry out the coming limited nuclear attack on Saudi Arabia, world opinion must be prepared in advance as much as possible. The idea of actually using nuclear weapons must be made less unthinkable to us, and Israel must be provided some excuse for calling Saudi Arabia a deadly threat. In both of these areas, rapid progress is now being made!

To make an atomic raid more thinkable when it takes place, Israel has been using the old technique of "gradualism." For years Israeli war planes have been striking into Lebanon. For a while there were feeble protests from Washington, for public consumption, that Israel might be misusing her American weapons. Israel replied that she was attacking a vital threat, the PLO, and just kept it up. After a while the novelty wore off and most of us began to just accept it.

Next, the Israelis raised the threshold of psychological pain a notch higher. In clear and direct violation of agreements with the Pentagon, Israeli aircraft started dropping cluster bombs on Lebanon. Lebanese villagers—men, women, and children—were maimed, dismembered, and killed. When we first heard about it, it sounded inexcusable to many, but after a short while we forgot about our outrage and went on to other things.

Once again the United States Government was careful to do nothing. We had learned to accept something a little worse than before in warfare. Step by step the Israeli violations of international law and of agreements with the United States have become bolder and bolder. Each time the United States Government has given lip service to law, morality, and a momentary concern of the American public; but each time Israel has been given the green light again with hardly a pause.

It was only a matter of weeks ago that the Israeli Air Force shot down two Syrian helicopters over Lebanon using American-made aircraft. The result was a new crisis over Syrian antiaircraft missiles. With that crisis still unresolved, Israel has now destroyed a nuclear reactor in Iraq, and all the while the United States Government continues to let Israel have its own way because, my friends, Israel is doing exactly what the Bolshevik military planners here want done!

Having accepted Israel's destruction of a nuclear reactor, it's only a short step beyond to accept the use of battlefield nuclear weapons.

That still leaves the matter of setting up Saudi Arabia as a credible threat to Israel. The United States is taking care of that problem while pretending to do the Saudis a favor. Early next year Saudi Arabia is to start taking delivery of a fleet of F-15 Fighters equivalent in many ways to those of Israel. On top

of that, the sale of five AWACS radar surveillance planes to Saudi Arabia is being considered. The secret purpose of these arms deals with Saudi Arabia is the exact opposite of what is claimed. The United States claims that it wants to improve Saudi Arabia's national security, presumably against Russia; but, my friends, the real purpose is to give Israel the excuse it needs for a pre-emptive attack on Saudi Arabia.

The model for Israel's attack to come against Saudi Arabia was the attack last month against Iraq. Israel claimed that the Iraqi reactor was going to be used some day against Israel. On that basis, Israel described its pre-emptive surprise attack on Iraq as a defensive action. It was even said that Israel had saved lives by carrying out the surgical attack before the facility was completed.

Much the same things will be said and done when the time comes for Israel to attack the Saudi oil fields. The Israelis will act more and more frightened that a Saudi Arabia armed with modern F-15s will some day use them against Israel. As proof, they will quote out of context past Saudi calls for a Muslim jihad to gain control of Jerusalem; and to justify the pre-emptive nature of the raid, the Israelis will insist that they were forced to strike before or shortly after delivery of the AWACS radar planes. As in the case of the Iraqi nuclear plant, Israel will characterize the Saudi raid as having been designed to spare as many lives as possible. The raid will not strike at heavy population centers but at the oil fields. In this way the Israelis will say that they have eliminated the financial basis of the alleged threat to Israel.

My friends, when I first began reporting on the plan to cap off Saudi Arabia's oil wells in an Israeli nuclear raid, many people found it unthinkable. That was five and six years ago. Something called "detente" was still the official line. Nuclear war between the United States and Russia sounded too farfetched at that time for most people to even pay attention. And as for Israel bombing Saudi oil fields, even the Saudis themselves could not believe it when they were informed of the plan.

How quickly times change! People no longer scoff at the idea that nuclear war is approaching between Russia and America. And now, even the Israeli plan to bomb the Saudi oil fields is finally beginning to surface. Last month on June 12, only five days after the Israeli raid into Iraq, the New York Daily News carried an article about "Israel's oil weapon." The article begins:

"Israel has an oil weapon too, one just as powerful as the threat of an embargo by Saudi Arabia or any other Arab state. Israel can bomb the wells."

Further on, an aide to Israeli Prime Minister Begin is quoted as saying:

"The Saudis can cut off oil to the West, and so can we."

When Israel decides to bomb the Saudi wells, it will do so in the same way as it bombed the Iraqi nuclear plant. Israel will use its newest and best American jet fighter bombers against Saudi Arabia, just as it did against Iraq. The raid will be launched with absolutely no advance warning, just as was done against Iraq; and just as happened to Iraq, the Israelis will make maximum use of deception in the raid itself.

For some two years now, the Israeli Air Force has been

carrying out mock air raids on northwestern Saudi Arabia. Every so often Israeli F-15 fighter bombers swoop in unexpectedly across the Saudi border from the Gulf of Aqaba. As often as not, they carry out a simulated attack on the Saudi Air Base at Tabuk. The frustrated Saudis are falling into a trap by reacting exactly as expected. They are crying out for their own F-15s so that Israel will be unable to continue these brazen overflights. What the Saudis have so far refused to accept is that this is all a ruse, a deceptive trick.

One day in 1982, perhaps sooner, Israel plans to launch the real raid. At first, it will look like just another of those mock attacks on the Saudi Air Base; but when the Israeli jets pass over the Base, they will not turn back as in the past! Instead, they will thunder overhead in a straight line toward the Persian Gulf. Disappearing into the undefended interior of Saudi Arabia, they will disperse to elude further detection. As in the case of last month's raid into Iraq, the American-manned AWACS plane will conveniently fail to locate the Israeli attackers in time. Within two hours, nuclear fireballs will cap off the Saudi oil wells. The world will be in a state of shock, the industrial heart of Europe and Japan will be crippled; but this will be only the beginning.

Bolshevik America will finally be able to put its gasoline rationing plan into operation. The country will be put on a wartime basis, our youth will be drafted, and our country will be made to accept this first open act of nuclear warfare since World War II.

Israel has paved the way for all this with its destruction of the Iraqi nuclear reactor. With its attack on the ancient Garden of Eden, Israel has begun leading the world into "the valley of the shadow of death."

Topic #2—During the past several months I've been trying to call attention to a major new trend in current world events. The world is splintering, splitting up into factions which are all squabbling with one another. The whole world is becoming like the Balkans before World War I, a caldron of crises, seething and bubbling hotter and hotter. We are beginning to see not just one crisis at a time but several crises all at once. In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I gave a warning to watch for this trend to speed up. Our world is being divided and Balkanized deliberately by the Bolsheviks who now control the United States Government.

In 1914 World War I erupted suddenly, seemingly by accident, out of the unstable ferment of crises in the Balkans. Likewise NUCLEAR WAR ONE is intended to erupt soon out of the spreading chaos of world-wide crises. My friends, World War I was not accidental; it was only made to appear that way. Likewise NUCLEAR WAR ONE will not be accidental, but we are being conditioned to think it is accidental when it happens.

Most Americans today when we think about global war think about World War II, not World War I. We tend to think about the repeated appeasement of Hitler during the 30's by Britain and France; and we recall that it all ended in the most destructive war in history, World War II. The so-called Reagan Administration is taking advantage of these costly historical memories by saying in effect "No more appeasement." Hearing that, millions of Americans cheer in agreement. Meanwhile, under the guise of non-appeasement, the United States is actually pursuing a policy of confrontation. We are told with a Hollywood smile that we must act "tough" to keep the peace. Then we go beyond that, acting not just tough but belligerent in ways

designed to move us toward war.

Long ago President Teddy Roosevelt said, "Walk softly but carry a big stick." Instead, the alleged Reagan Administration is swaggering like a bully with nothing but a chip on its shoulder. The Reagan-style government rhetoric is slanted toward our memories of World War II. As a result, most Americans are prevented from thinking about the more important lessons of World War I .

But the Balkanization of our world today is not lost on everyone. There are beginning to be worried Establishment voices talking about it. An example was a recent article in that old Establishment publication Foreign Affairs. In this article the author expressed worry over the United States' attitude these days of not even talking to the Russians. It says this leaves us, quote: "...in a situation where the risk of war is higher because of the danger of miscalculation by each side. You could stumble into war almost like 1914. The Reagan Administration model is Munich. I think that's wrong. The correct model is 1914." My friends, that's exactly what I reported several months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 63 except for one thing. The environment for miscalculation is not accidental, but deliberate. It's an old Bolshevik axiom that "In chaos there's opportunity."

Others, too, are breaking with past behavior to express unprecedented concern. For example: Harvard economist John Kenneth Galbraith spoke recently in commencement ceremonies at Johns Hopkins University. As reported in the Washington Star for May 30, 1981, Galbraith lashed out at, quote:

"Those who say that we have to accept the risk of nuclear war to protect our democratic system."

Galbraith said that to do that is to risk destruction of that very system. He pointed out that the highly sophisticated and deeply integrated modern economic system cannot survive the shock of a nuclear exchange.

Another example of those now worrying in public is New York Times columnist James Reston. In his column date-lined June 23, 1981, Reston discussed what he called the Administration's misconduct of foreign policy. He pointed out that American government officials seem to be going in all directions at once yet all in the general direction of confrontation with Russia; and he says, quote: "The troubling thing about all of this is that nobody really knows what it means." He expresses puzzlement over the Administration's public confirmation of Intelligence arrangements with Red China which can only serve to provoke Russia. Finally he concludes, quote:

"This is becoming a danger to the Administration; and if it keeps on goading the Soviet Bear, even a threat to the peace."

My friends, why have these and so many other voices trusted by the public been so silent until so late in the game? Where were they five and six years ago? When my AUDIO LETTER reports were documenting the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance and its collapse, why did they speak only of detente? The answer in some cases, my friends, is that half a decade ago America's ruling circles were still in bed with the Soviet Union. The Rockefeller cartel thought it controlled Russia through the Bolshevik rulers of Russia. Today everything has changed. The Bolsheviks have been overthrown at the highest levels of power in Russia. Flocking here to the United States for a new start, the Bolsheviks in turn have wrestled power away from the Rockefeller

cartel.

In the so-called national election last November 1980, the crumbling Rockefeller oil cartel made a desperate bid to retake control of the United States Government. In AUDIO LETTER No. 59 last October I reported that the cartel had re-grouped under the direction of John J. McCloy. Using the figurehead known as Ronald Reagan, Big Oil tried to oust the Bolsheviks. They wanted to get America back onto the track of their own Corporate Socialist Dictatorship. The McCloy-dominated forces of Big Oil did succeed in their great surprise landslide in the election itself, but the actual transfer of governmental power was another matter.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 61 last January I reported that the obscure Branti decision of the Supreme Court would stand in the way. Sure enough, to this day large numbers of critical government positions are still unfilled or staffed by Bolshevik holdovers. The McCloy group are getting their way in some areas but not in foreign policy. America's foreign policy is still under total Bolshevik control. These are the facts, my friends, behind the unusual expressions of alarm by those normally silent Establishment voices. I have been told confidentially by extremely well informed sources that the so-called Reagan Administration has jumped the tracks. It's out of their control; and now, none other than John J. McCloy himself has been quoted publicly in exactly these same terms.

Earlier I quoted from James Reston's New York Times column of June 23. The most significant statement in the entire column was the following, and I quote:

"John J. McCloy, former head of the World Bank and former United States High Commissioner in Berlin, was down here this week saying what he thought as usual about the conduct of American foreign policy. Mr. Mc Cloy thinks that an administration whose success he favors has gone off the track."

McCloy and his fellow members of the Rockefeller Establishment have no love for the independent-minded Russians who now control the Kremlin; but unlike the Bolsheviks here, they do think it is to our advantage to at least keep talking.

Recently a faithful listener of mine who is concerned about the need for arms control wrote an influential American industrialist who is also a former ambassador to Russia. He wrote back that it would be dangerous and unwise to simply trust the Russians in whatever they say except, quote:

"If what is to be trusted is carefully written out and agreed upon mutually, then I think one can trust them to observe the agreement."

I might mention that this agrees with my own personal experience during my years with the United States Export-Import Bank. The Russians and their Warsaw Pact partners are always hard bargainers. They do not regard you as sincere or to be taken seriously unless you will bargain hard and long; but once an agreement is reached, they always observe it scrupulously. The problem is, to bargain with the Russians you have to know what you want. If you want to genuinely control nuclear arms, you will have to bargain toward that objective; and genuine arms control is the last thing that would occur to America's present Bolshevik-dominated government.

On June 22 the President's nominee to head the "Arms Control

and Disarmament Agency" practically said as much. In Senate testimony, Eugene V. Rostow said, quote:

"It may be that a brilliant light will strike our officials, but I don't know anyone who knows what it is yet that we want to negotiate about."

In the same testimony Rostow also said that the United States will not be ready to start strategic weapons talks with Russia until March 1982. He lumped in not only the SALT talks but also the issue of nuclear missiles in Europe. On June 29, 1981, the entity President Brezhnev said, quote:

"We are ready to sit down at the negotiating table on that issue even tomorrow, if you like; but talks have not begun yet because of the United States' attitude."

The Russians have also said that they would halt deployment of their European theater nuclear weapons during the talks if America would do the same. However, this is not a pre-condition to talks, contrary to some reports in the United States.

When Eugene Rostow mentioned that the United States needs nine (9) more months to get ready for arms negotiations, it was a slip of the tongue. Later he had to recant about it to the astonished Senators on the Foreign Relations Committee, saying he would not delay SALT negotiations. The nine-month preparation time stated by Rostow has nothing to do with any coming arms control initiatives. After all, Rostow himself said no one even has any arms control ideas to talk about. Instead, Rostow was referring accidentally to the nuclear war preparations now under way.

Bolshevik military planners here now expect that by March 1982 essential nuclear first-strike preparations will be completed in the United States. At that point, with the weapons already in place, we can pretend to talk; but as we talk, we will also be setting in motion the events which are to lead to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The nine-month interval mentioned by Eugene Rostow is based primarily on two military programs. One is the Space Shuttle Program, the other is America's secret mobile missile program which is going on under the cover of the bogus "MX" project. I reported on the basic outlines of both of these programs in the past, so I will simply update those reports now.

First, about the Space Shuttle Program. Last month I reported that NASA plans to intentionally abort the upcoming shuttle launch in September. The shuttle presently at Cape Canaveral is not the "Columbia", which was destroyed in the unsuccessful mission last April. I gave the details about that and the television hoax to hide the disaster in AUDIO LETTER No. 64. The shuttle which we will see lifting off from Cape Canaveral this fall will be the training shuttle "Enterprise" although, of course, it has been re-labeled Columbia. The Enterprise is the same shuttle that we saw landing in California after the real Columbia had already been destroyed. The flight this fall is intended to keep up appearances while the secret military shuttle team figure out how to get past the Russians into orbit. One way or another they believe that a successful shuttle flight will be able to provide essential reconnaissance over Russia by the spring of 1982.

The other major factor is the Minuteman TX Mobile Missile deployment. I first reported on this secret program just over a year ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 55. In AUDIO LETTER No. 60 last November, I gave an important update concerning the Anti-Cosmosphere Missiles which are being deployed along with TX

missiles. I can now report that these Anti-Cosmosphere Missiles, or ACMs, are becoming an essential key to the Bolshevik war plan. It is by means of the ACMs that the Bolsheviks plan to set off what will seem to be "accidental" nuclear war.

To review for a moment, my friends, the Minuteman TX is a completely secret mobile missile program. For public consumption, the Pentagon is pretending to be concentrating on something called the MX. The MX, we're told, will be big and powerful, each carrying 10 nuclear warheads; and to hide it from the Russians, we're told that it will be mobile.

Over the years, one basing scheme after another has been talked about for the MX. About six weeks ago, on May 27, Henry Bradsher of the Washington Star listed some of the MX basing systems that have been proposed, quote:

"...orbital basing; shallow underwater submarine basing; floating missiles in the ocean; attaching them to the ocean bottom; mounting them on in land waterway barges and on ocean-going ships; aerial launching from special seaplanes, special land-based planes, new short-airfield planes, new vertical takeoff planes and dirigibles; putting thousands of smaller missiles in fixed silos; moving only the warhead and guidance systems among multiple missile fuel bodies."

My friends, work is going on to develop a larger ICBM under the MX program, but that work is being used as a decoy and to provide a funding channel for America's real mobile missile, the Minuteman TX. The Pentagon wants to make sure that everyone focuses their attention on the MX decoy program. The best way to get people's attention, you know, is to make them angry, so that's what the Pentagon has done. The Air Force is pretending to fight tooth and nail for a patently ridiculous basing system—the infamous race tracks in Utah and Nevada; and sure enough, people are up in arms over the MX—farmers, ranchers, environmentalists, anti-nuclear activists—you name it. The MX decoy system is drawing all the fire like the lightning rod it is meant to be.

Thanks to the orchestrated MX controversy our real mobile missile, the Minuteman TX, is being completely overlooked. Unlike the giant MX, the TX is relatively small. It's being deployed in the one way which should be most obvious of all. It is the one way never mentioned in connection with the MX because the Pentagon does not want us to think of it. The Minuteman TX missiles are being deployed on America's railroads! They're moved around constantly, often right under our very noses. In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I gave a description of the unique railroad cars which house the TX missiles. Months later some of my listeners began sending me photographs of them, and several months ago I released a special bulletin containing these photographs.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 60 I described the ACM missiles which are beginning to accompany the TX missiles as they are shuttled around. The ACM is basically like an ABM missile, built to take off with blinding speed. Each is armed with a cobalt ionization bomb. When they explode at the upper fringes of the atmosphere, the Bolsheviks here believe they will interfere temporarily with any Russian Cosmospheres hovering overhead. Before the Cosmospheres can recover, the TX missiles will be launched at Russia in a nuclear first strike. In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I explained that the nerve-racking false nuclear alerts by NORAD were actually deliberate tests by Bolshevik agents. They want to make sure that they can bring about a supposedly accidental first

strike against Russia that cannot be countermanded in Washington.

Early this year of 1981 the Bolsheviks here concluded that the best way to do this is to shift the United States onto a "launch on warning" stance. Up until recently the United States Nuclear Forces have required a positive order from the President before launching a nuclear attack. In theory that's still true, but in practice it's being changed quietly. Our Strategic Forces are being re-programmed to launch an all-out attack on Russia under either of two conditions.

The basic instruction is to await a positive command from Washington, but a super secret new instruction tells Nuclear Forces they need not wait for a positive launch order under one extraordinary condition. This extraordinary condition is defined as, quote:

"Widespread loss of C-3 connectivity due to EMP."

EMP stands for "Electromagnetic Pulse", a phenomenon associated with nuclear blasts at the fringes of the atmosphere or near space. In the early 1960's it was discovered by nuclear testing that EMP can overload and disable all kinds of electrical equipment, even power lines. It is known that today EMP would virtually wipe out the command, control, and communication system of the United States called C-3 by the Pentagon. The Bolshevik military planners here are turning this vulnerability to their own advantage. Through the appropriate avenues they are arguing: "Suppose the Soviet Union preceded an attack on the United States by using EMP to wipe out our communications. They could set off a single H-bomb 250 miles over Omaha, Nebraska. All of our communications from Maine to California, plus parts of Canada and Mexico, would be fried by EMP. Afterward the President would have no way to get word to our ICBM crews, bomber crews, or submarines to retaliate. The Russians could hit us", say the Bolsheviks, "and we would not hit back."

Using this argument as an excuse, Bolshevik military planners here are disseminating new secret orders to our Nuclear Forces. These orders say that should there be an EMP episode that cuts off communications, that is to be taken as proof in itself, per se, that we are under nuclear attack!

Under the new "Launch on Warning" posture of our Armed Forces, they will not wait for any further orders. Obeying the secret new standing orders, all of our ICBMs, bombers, and missile submarines will launch all-out retaliation on Russia—that is, they will believe they are retaliating; but what they will actually be doing is mounting a nuclear first strike against Russia.

When the Bolsheviks here are ready for it to happen, they will launch the Anti-Cosmosphere Missiles which now accompany the mobile Minuteman TX missiles. The ACMs will race to the fringes of space over America and explode their cobalt ionization bombs. When that happens, it will do more than just interfere with the Cosmospheres—it will also create a violent EMP episode. All communications to centralized authority will be cut off, and our Nuclear Forces will believe it is due to a Russian attack. There will be no time and no way to double-check, and so United States Forces will attack Russia. The Bolsheviks here will have set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE, and they will make it look as if it all happened by accident!

WHAT YOU CAN DO DURING AMERICA'S FINAL DAYS.

Topic #3—One year ago this month I began responding to a question I was being asked at that time by many people. The question was, "What can I do?" I did so reluctantly for the reasons I gave at the time, and yet I also did so hopefully. I felt that if that many people really wanted to take action, there might really be a chance. I explained why, in my opinion, there was only one weapon that could possibly save America from our headlong plunge toward nuclear war. That weapon is the Truth. In particular, it is the truth about the covered-up Fort Knox Gold Scandal that could stop our internal enemies in their tracks. I started giving suggestions month by month for what YOU could do. We began with Senator William Proxmire, then Chairman of the Senate Banking Committee. Later on we directed our efforts and attention to the privately owned Federal Reserve System, which holds legal title to America's missing gold. Finally we gave the entity President Reagan the chance to do his duty to look into the matter.

I believe the time has come to give you an honest accounting of where we stand. My friends, we have given every possible opportunity to those who have the appropriate authority and responsibility to investigate honestly. And what have they done? Has a single official of the United States Government, or of the Federal Reserve Corporation, or of Congress taken the people's side? NO. Without exception they have all come down on the side of keeping the lid on the facts about our missing gold. Without exception they're saying in effect that they don't care about the destruction of our hard-earned dollars and our economy. They don't care that you cannot make ends meet. They do not care that America's economic collapse is paving the way for dictatorship and war. They care only about keeping themselves on what they believe will be the winning side, and they have proven by their actions that they believe those who stole our gold will be the winning side. Senator William Proxmire, aided by the so-called Inspector General of the Treasury Department, steadfastly refused to investigate. The Federal Reserve Corporation has also closed ranks to keep out the light of truth. For a while a few months ago, certain high officials of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks were being surprisingly cooperative. Now all that has been put to a stop. Several officials have resigned. All the rest have gone silent as stone.

On June 22, 1981, my friend Mr. Edward Durell sent a certified letter to every single Federal Reserve System Director in the United States. In that letter he warned each Director of his or her individual legal responsibility relative to the nation's missing gold reserves. Based on various legal precedents, each one is legally liable if any of the gold is missing, and yet not a single one has dared to break through the wall of silence which has now been imposed.

And then, there's the President! The entity known as Ronald Reagan gives beautiful lip service to the idea that any governmental abuses should be rooted out. So three months ago I invited you to send Mailgrams to him, urging him or his representatives to look into the Gold Scandal. For starters, we urged him to investigate the discrepancy of 165,000,000 ounces between different statements of the Treasury itself on our gold supplies. My friends, I have never heard one peep out of the White House in reply. And, so far as I know, no one who sent a Mailgram even had it acknowledged.

My friends, there can be no more appeals to authority except to the authority of our Lord Jesus Christ, Who is above all. Time is running out. By this time next year NUCLEAR WAR ONE could be upon us, so I urge those of you who still want to take

action to do it right where you are. Use your files of correspondence to share what you have learned with others if they are interested. Let the power of the Truth do its work in spite of the corruption in high places, and let your own knowledge of the truth about current events help you decide wisely in taking care of your own family needs.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. My friends, time is fast running out for the United States of America. Timetables can never be firm, but the Bolsheviks here are now shooting for around mid-1982 to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE. Even now a great naval disaster has befallen the United States because of their maneuverings.

My friends, a Day of Judgment is coming soon for America. Americans by the millions are going along with the Satanic ideas of the Bolsheviks here. We are filling up a cup of wrath for ourselves, and soon we will drink it.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #67

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is August 25, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 67.

Twenty years ago on August 14, 1961, the world was shocked by the news from the divided city of Berlin. For years East Germans had been flocking to the West by crossing from East to West Berlin. That flood was about to be stopped. A wall was being built to divide the two halves of the city. We watched in utter disbelief as the Berlin Wall was built 20 years ago; but, my friends, we learned very little.

Today new walls are being built to contain a people, but the people are asleep and do not see the walls. Once again an entire people are being divided—not by physical walls but by unseen divisions among their leaders. The country, my friends, is the United States, and the people are you and me.

The most important walls of any dictatorship are not those built with hands but those of the mind and heart. When walls are built that rob a people of information, they become vulnerable; and when walls of hatred shut out the ability to think, a people cease to be free. Slowly but surely free channels of information in America are being snuffed out in important places.

This month on August 7 the Washington Star newspaper died after 128 years of publication. In past AUDIO LETTERS I have frequently quoted the Star for just one reason. It was a far better newspaper than the Washington Post. It was more objective, better written, and in many cases simply more honest. Now Washington, D.C., supposedly the capital of the Western world, is left with only one newspaper; and that one is, at times, the handmaiden of the Government, living on Government handouts and CIA connections. The Post was not always that way, but today that's all that is left in Washington—in effect, the people have been frozen out.

With quietness and stealth, the United States Government is taking on the overtones of two opposing forces at once—Fascism and Bolshevism. The United States Government is torn within by a gigantic power struggle. Which group will win is impossible to predict at this time, but both power factions have one thing in common—they both want to build the walls of dictatorship around you and me.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE UNEXPECTED REBIRTH OF AN AMERICAN GOLD STANDARD Topic #2—THE EMERGENCE OF THE JEWISH QUESTION IN AMERICA Topic #3—THE LIBYAN DOGFIGHT AND HIDDEN NAVAL WAR GAMES.

Topic #1—The entity President Reagan is fond of saying in speeches, quote: "I was a Democrat longer than I have been a Republican." Likewise, his past heroes of the White House Oval Office are more often Democrat than Republican. And the hero we hear about most often of all from our actor president is Franklin D. Roosevelt. From the beginning, the so-called Reagan Administration has been modeled along lines pioneered by FDR in the 1930's. Like FDR, the present administration tried to hit the ground running with big changes in federal policies. Now, as then, the Executive Branch of the Government is claiming a public mandate to flatten Congressional opposition like a steam roller; and even though they look different today, the real issues now are once again the same as they were in the 1930's. Those issues are: the crumbling economy, approaching war, and the political future of the United States.

On the domestic level, 1981 is trembling with the hollow echoes of 1933, and yet there is also one major difference today. In 1933 there was just one major power behind the throne, so to speak, dominating the United States Government. Today, in 1981, there are two powerful factions who are challenging each other for governmental control. An enormous power struggle is going on behind closed doors which has afflicted the United States Government with schizophrenia. Policy-making has turned into a series of skirmishes between these two power groups. As a result, the Government zigs and zags, this way and that. Top officials, such as the Secretaries of State and Defense, are always in a public tug of war. It all reflects the great power struggle behind closed doors.

On one side are the Corporate Socialists of the Rockefeller Cartel. Back in the days of FDR five decades ago this was mainly an oil cartel. From there it grew and diversified into a world-wide Corporate Socialist empire made up of multinational corporations .

On the other side of the current power struggle in America are the State Socialists, the Bolsheviks. Like the Rockefeller Cartel, the Bolsheviks have "collectivism" as their ultimate goal—that is, both groups want to concentrate all wealth and power in a few hands—namely, their own. But the Bolsheviks want to do it in a different way.

The Corporate Socialists of the Rockefeller Cartel want their own giant corporations to be the real masters of society. By contrast, the Bolshevik State Socialists want the Government to be all-powerful. Through the Government, the Bolsheviks want to control the means of production directly through nationalized industries.

For decades, from 1917 until very recently, these two collectivist forces had their own separate power bases.

Rockefeller Corporate Socialism held sway in America, while the State Socialist Bolsheviks controlled the Soviet Union. The two sides came in contact only on an international basis, and under those conditions they operated as secret allies. But over the past five years everything has changed. In 1976 the Bolsheviks were finally pried loose from control of the Kremlin by a determined band of native Russians. Their achievement was the result of six decades of tireless struggle, but it came as a shock both to the Bolsheviks in Russia and to the Rockefeller forces here. The Kremlin's new masters want no part of the international intrigues formerly carried out in tandem with the United States. They also want no part of the Bolsheviks. The Bolsheviks are being run out of Russia, so they are trying to use the United States as their new power base. This situation has brought the Bolsheviks into direct competition with the Rockefeller Cartel for power over the United States—and the world!

In late 1977 I reported that a quiet new Bolshevik revolution was getting under way here in America with the help of the Rockefeller Cartel. It was a desperate attempt by these two groups, formerly international allies, to join forces on the domestic level. At that time both the Rockefellers and the overthrown Bolsheviks from Russia were preoccupied with staving off Russia's new rulers. It was a classic case of that old famous principle: "The enemy of my enemy is my friend."

What the Rockefeller Cartel has learned instead is that sometimes my enemy's enemy is also my enemy. In early 197 9 the Bolsheviks here launched an all-out drive to seize total control away from the Rockefellers. They did not quite succeed, as I detailed in past AUDIO LETTERS, but the Rockefeller Cartel was grievously wounded. For more than two years now the behavior of the United States has reflected one basic fact—that is: no one is clearly, decisively in charge. Instead, the struggle continues.

In February 1979 I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 43 that, quote:

"Soon the inevitable internal conflict here in the United States will be getting under way. On one side there are the Corporate Socialists of the now headless Rockefeller Cartel. On the other, there are the Bolshevik State Socialists."

My friends, it is this very internal conflict which is now showing itself daily in the behavior of the so-called Reagan Administration.

I can now reveal that the Rockefeller Cartel, which was almost out for the count two years ago, has made a surprising come-back in strength. As of now, the Bolsheviks here continue to dominate America's foreign policy through their effective control of our military forces. But in the economic and political arenas, it is the Rockefeller Cartel that now seems to have the edge. My friends, they intend to use that edge in some stunning stratagems intended to rebuild their own power. The power struggle here is starting to turn into a race against time. The Rockefeller group lacks the power to simply finish off the Bolsheviks, and the reverse is also true, so each faction is gearing up to make the maximum use of its own areas of strength. In this Topic and Topic #2, I will describe an economic and political one-two punch being prepared by the Rockefeller interests. If these things can be done fast enough, the Corporate Socialists believe they can blast the Bolsheviks here right out of the water; but as I will describe in Topic #3, the Bolsheviks here have no intention of

giving the Cartel that much time. Before they can be stopped, the Bolsheviks intend to reach their own goal—NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

The economic surprise which I am about to make public will come as a shock to most Americans, and yet it has already been foreshadowed by plans which I have previously reported on two occasions:

First, there was the plan for a gold revaluation publicity stunt which I reported last November 1980 in AUDIO LETTER No. 60. America's alleged gold reserves are listed on Treasury and Federal Reserve balance sheets at the old official price of $42.22 per ounce. As you and I know, they do not in fact have a great deal of the gold which is listed. Those balance sheets are fraudulent. But the plan which I reported last November was for our non-existent gold reserves to be revalued at current market prices. On paper, that would make our gold supplies look ten times bigger in dollar terms at current prices. The whole idea of the plan was to reinforce the false perception that America has a huge gold hoard. A few weeks later the gold revaluation gimmick started to surface. For the first time in many years a major article about the Fort Knox Bullion Depository was published. Through syndication it was published all across the United States as well as many other countries. As I reviewed in AUDIO LETTER No. 61, the article referred throughout only to the market price of the gold. The old official price was totally ignored.

The next element in the plan for an economic shock is the one which I first reported last April in AUDIO LETTER No. 63. That item had to do not with gold but with our currency itself. I am referring to the plan to do away with the $100 bill.

When I first reported on the plan to eliminate the $100 bill, I received heavy mail about it. People were stunned. But I can report to you that the plan is still on track; in fact, since I first made the plan public in AUDIO LETTER No. 63, at least one bill has been introduced in Congress to do as I described. In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I also invited you to send Mailgrams to the entity President Reagan about our missing gold. Specifically, I urged you to challenge him to look into the discrepancy of 165-million ounces in the Treasury's own figures. Recently I mentioned that I had never heard a single word directly out of the White House in response, and that's still true. However I have now received copies of the letter which a number of you received. I thank you for sending them, and I feel I should take a moment to comment about them.

In every case that I have seen, the response to your Mailgram consisted of a letter from the Treasury Department. The letter begins, quote: "On behalf of President Reagan, thank you for your letter concerning an audit of the United States gold stock." The letter then describes a so-called Gold Audit which is alleged to have been under way since 1975 on the installment plan. Enclosed with the letter is a copy of the latest report on this alleged gold audit.

My first comment is that this letter and enclosure in no way answered the question you posed in your Mailgrams. That question had to do with a glaring discrepancy of 165-million ounces of gold between two Treasury documents. Nowhere does the Treasury letter even refer to that discrepancy, much less attempt to explain it. So Fact No. 1 is: Neither the President nor the Treasury Department gave you the courtesy of an answer to your question. Instead they tried to distract you by talking about something else. That something else, of course, is the alleged

continuing audit of the gold. Too much could be said about that to go into details here. It's enough to say that the so-called recurring 10-year audit is a totally fraudulent arrangement using a different set of college students each summer for a few weeks time moving the same stock of junk gold in Cell No. 33 back and forth each summer. It is intended to perpetuate the bogus audit which was carried out just after the so-called "Gold Inspection Tour" of Fort Knox in 1974. If you want to know more details, I refer you to my AUDIO BOOK talking tape recorded in March 1975. Its title is: "THE FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU . "

The point I want to make is that the alleged Reagan Administration is only pretending to look for real cures to our economic problems. They are not listening to you, and they will not give a forum to anyone intending to reveal the truth about our gold supplies. Instead, the gold revaluation and $100 bill elimination are to be parts of an economic power play. My friends, our would-be modern day FDR, the entity President Reagan, is planning to stun the world soon. He will do it by putting America back on to what will appear to be the gold standard.

Late last year Congress passed a law requiring that a federal commission be created to study the role of gold in our monetary system. But federal commissions are never set up in an uncontrolled or open-ended fashion. No surprises are ever wanted or allowed from a federal commission. Instead, the Government first decides what conclusions it wants to hear from the commission, then the commission is set up in such a way as to guarantee that the commission will recommend whatever is desired.

That is what has been done with the "Federal Gold Commission." Congress decreed last year that it be set up in time to produce its report by October 7 of this year; but after the new Administration took office last January, the Treasury Department kept putting off creation of the Gold Commission.

It did not come into being until June 22, and the first meeting of the Federal Gold Commission was not held until just last month on July 16. It was held behind closed doors with no public observers, no witnesses to testify, and with no minutes kept. As with all federal commissions that matter, the Federal Gold Commission is a "closed shop." It consists of four (4) Congressmen, three (3) Senators, three (3) members of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors in Washington, two (2) White House advisers, and four (4) nominally public members. The Chairman is none other than the Treasury Secretary himself; and to shepherd the group in the desired direction, the Executive Director for the study is another insider, Dr. Anna Schwartz.

The small contingent of four so-called "public" members of the Gold Commission were hand-picked for their known views about gold. Anyone who might have made real waves was carefully excluded from consideration. My friend Mr. Edward Durell is a prominent example of this. Mr. Durell offered to serve on the Federal Gold Commission entirely at his own expense. He would have brought with him massive documentation and more than a decade of intensive activity in the realm of our gold reserve. He would have brought true expertise about gold to the Federal Gold Commission. His appointment to the Commission was highly recommended to the alleged Reagan Administration by business leaders and even a few Congressmen, but he was firmly rejected because he knows too much!

Now that the hand-picked Federal Gold Commission is safely in

being, it's supposed to make up quickly for lost time. Congress may be asked to extend the deadline to January 1, 1982, but even that would leave little time for making any serious study of America's monetary future. Fortunately for the Gold Commission members, its conclusions have already been preordained. Even Congressman Ron Paul, a member of the Commission, is to be used with or without his knowledge to achieve these ends.

Whenever the Federal Gold Commission issues its report, its recommendations are to set the stage for dramatic action by the President. Sometime in early 1982 two things will be done at the same time. One will be to abolish the old official price of gold, $42.22 per ounce, and let the gold price "float." The other part of the announcement will be that Congress will be asked to restore gold backing for the dollar. It will be a 20% gold backing, as currently planned, based on the market price of gold. In effect, the dollar and gold will "float" together in international markets; but for domestic purposes, it will be claimed that this is a new gold standard which will restore stability to the dollar. For the first time since 1968 there will be a governor or a brake on the supply of dollars.

My friends, this will be only a pseudo gold standard, not a real one. You and I will not be able to walk into a bank and exchange a dollar bill for gold. Likewise, the international gold window which President Nixon closed 10 years ago this month will not be reopened. The effects of the Reagan pseudo gold standard will only be temporary, lasting only a year or two, and even that assumes that there is no war in the meantime, and yet it will be a master stroke. For a while it will alter the perception of the dollar. It will appear to be a powerful attack on inflation here in America. That perception will be reinforced by the elimination of the $100 bill on a separate occasion. Even though it will not be a true gold standard, its effect through the market place will be dramatic.

In relation to the currencies of Europe and Japan, it will seem to make the dollar much more valuable to be bought and held, but don't be fooled! For a while it will seem that the heyday of the so-called almighty dollar has returned once again. My friends, this will be an illusion, because the enormous damage done by inflation over the past 10 years will not be undone. It will only be arrested temporarily.

For the average working man and woman it may provide at most a temporary breather, no more than that. But for the Corporate Socialists of the Rockefeller Cartel who are engineering it, the pseudo gold standard will be a bonanza. Huge United States multinational corporations have issued hundreds of millions of dollars of debt instruments in Europe in recent years. They did this when the dollar was weak, with the debt payable in Swiss francs, West German marks, and other currencies which were strong then. But now, as these debts come due, the dollar is being made strong again. This maneuver will allow those debts to be repaid in Europe or elsewhere in currencies which are artificially cheap. In this and other ways it all translates into enormous profits for the Rockefeller multinational corporations.

At the same time, the privately owned and controlled Federal Reserve Corporation has been creating record-high interest rates in this country. That is creating vast opportunities here for the Corporate Socialists in two ways:

First, effect steel,

Federal Reserve policies on American industry and automobiles, and housing

are creating a depressionary business. Basic industries like are being forced to lay off

workers; bankruptcies are spreading; real estate, including farm land, is lost by owners no longer able to pay their debts; and businesses large and small are becoming vulnerable to takeover. It's a time ripe for mergers as the giants swallow up their smaller rivals—merge or die.

Besides creating this vulnerability to takeover, Federal Reserve policies are also pulling in the money to big member banks to take advantage of the situation. So-called "hot money" from other countries is flowing into the United States in order to take advantage of the high interest rates here. That money in turn is recycled through the big banks to finance mergers and take-overs by the favored few giants. All of this will be reinforced by the so-called gold standard now being hatched by the Corporate Socialists.

At the same time, the Bolshevik influence within the Federal Reserve and other critical financial areas has been reduced in recent months. The Rockefeller Cartel is calling most of the shots at the present time in the economic realm. This is reflected in recent subtle shifts by the Federal Reserve Corporation with regard to struggling banks. The Bolsheviks here want to bring down the giant banks which have long been a major source of Rockefeller power. But now the Federal Reserve Corporation is positioning itself to bail out any big banks endangered by defaults on giant loans to foreign nations. And a few days ago the "Fed" also announced that it will provide relatively low-interest loans to Savings & Loans that are in trouble.

The economic landscape is changing constantly, thanks to the in-fighting between the State Socialist Bolsheviks and the Corporate Socialist Rockefeller Cartel. There will continue to be surprises which neither I nor anyone else can predict, but as of now it is still the Rockefeller Cartel that is primarily getting its way on the economic front in America. Even governmental policies are favoring the Cartel as far as economics is concerned.

Through the economic route, the Corporate Socialists are working fast to gather power away from the Government and into their own hands domestically. They are working feverishly to make a reality of many parts of the secret new Constitution for America which I first made public in 1975. Under their secret new Constitution, all industry would be controlled by the so-called authorities made up of the giants of industry. Governmental regulation would be done away with, just as the alleged Reagan Administration is trying to do right now. Small businesses would exist only at the pleasure of the big, subject to licenses limiting their activity. In short, the real economic power of the country would lie in the hands of the Corporate Socialists by mergers and other means. That is what is taking place right now.

My friends, many of the maneuvers now being attempted by the Rockefeller Cartel are derived from plans conceived long ago, but they are being executed today in an environment which was not foreseen. Today, the Corporate Socialists of the Rockefeller Cartel are in a battle to the death against the Bolsheviks here. The Rockefeller group are trying to gather economic power to gigantic proportions here very quickly. If they do succeed in their drive for unchallenged economic power here in America, that will be the first big punch against the Bolsheviks by the Cartel. It will lead directly into their second blow at the Bolsheviks, which will be in the political arena.

Economic power translates into political clout; and if the Rockefeller group have their way, their political blow-to-come against the Bolsheviks here will be decisive. As I will describe in Topic #2, it is a Sunday punch designed to completely smash Bolshevik power here. If the Corporate Socialists are successful, America will be torn by internal convulsions far worse than the Civil War; but if they do not succeed, the Bolsheviks believe no one can stop their own plans for domination of America, and eventually the world.

Topic #2—Last month on Friday, July 17, White House news reporters readied themselves for an announcement. The United States had decided to lift its brief embargo on delivery of F-16 Jet Fighter Bombers to the country which calls itself Israel. Reporters were tipped off that a formal presidential announcement could be expected shortly.

The F-16 embargo had been imposed less than six weeks earlier in the wake of Israel's destruction of Iraq's nuclear reactor. The embargo had been so brief as to have no real effect on Israel; but as I detailed last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 66, it was not intended to have any real meaning. Like every other American protest against Israel in the past 33 years, the brief F-16 embargo was only for public consumption. It was a cosmetic move purely for the sake of appearances. By July 17 the fickle mind of the American public had moved on to other things, just as it always does. And so the F-16s were about to be released to Israel.

The expected announcement never came that day, instead there was a new shock from the Middle East. The Israeli Air Force launched all-out bombing raids on civilian targets throughout southern Lebanon. The big bridge over the Litani River was attacked, causing heavy damage and killing many people. The oil pipeline from Saudi Arabia, which all of Lebanon depended upon for gasoline and other fuels, was attacked and blown up. As reported by the BBC, but not on American television, Israeli jets bombed every single major town throughout southern Lebanon; and Beirut, poor Beirut—wave after wave of Israeli war planes thundered over that city, which used to be the peaceful pearl of the Middle East. American-made jets with Star of David insignia rained a holocaust of devastation on heavily populated civilian communities. The pilots, many with United States and Israeli dual citizenship, were practicing genocide on the defenseless Lebanese civilians. As the smoke cleared and the moans of anguish faded away, the dimensions of Lebanon's agony horrified the world. In that one raid some 300 Lebanese were killed, 800 more injured, and thousands left homeless. Over a two-week period some 450 died in southern Lebanon. During that same period six Israelis were killed in alleged PLO raids.

The White House, which today is a divided house, behaved as if it had been caught off base. Then the embargo on jets to Israel was extended again. The United States pretended to be upset, and Israel pretended to be hurt.

Meanwhile there were words of alarm from an unaccustomed direction. Voices who are normally raised in support of Israel were beginning to say in effect: What's going on here? An example was an article in the New York Times for July 23, 1981. It described, quote:

"Widespread distress among American Jews over the increased fighting in the Middle East, including the Israeli bombing of Beirut."

According to the article, one influential Jewish leader condemned the raid as, quote:

"Utterly without redeeming social or strategic value and in absolute violation of community standards."

Another reportedly worried that actions like these represent a danger to Jews themselves. Others appear bewildered, not sure what to think. One rabbi reportedly summed it up in the words, quote:

"I still don't think we have all the facts about why Israel did what it did."

My friends, those words are not far from the truth. The fact is that most Americans, including most American Jews, are not being given the facts. The fact is that today an interlocked military junta is controlling the military actions of both the United States and Israel!

America's military policies today are not in the best interests of most Americans. In exactly the same way, Israel's military policies are not in the best interests of most Jews.

More than six decades ago a galaxy of prominent patriotic American Jews tried to prevent the creation of a Zionist state in Palestine. The Zionist plan to set up a new nation to be named "Israel" was, in their view, a cruel and tragic hoax.

For one thing, in those days Zionism as a political movement encompassed fewer than five per cent (5%) of American Jews; and yet the small Zionist minority were claiming to speak for all Jews. Beyond that, the anti-Zionist Jews declared that the promises of the Zionists were not only false promises but prescriptions for tragedy.

Israel, said the Zionists, would be the national home for the Jews, a place of ingathering, of safety, and of rest. In reply, the anti-Zionist Jews showed that the so-called nation of Israel could never live up to Zionist claims. They showed that the nation to be named "Israel" could never serve as home to more than a small minority of the Jews of the world, and they predicted that the only real accomplishment of Zionist Israel would be never-ending conflict, ever-expanding bloodshed, and tragedy after tragedy.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 49 two years ago, I called attention to the prophetic warnings of the anti-Zionist American Jews. Today, two generations later, very few Americans, Jew or otherwise, are even aware of those warnings; but it is those warnings, not the rosy promises of the Zionists, which are coming true before our eyes .

As a place of ingathering for the Jews, the nation which calls itself Israel has been a hopeless failure. Today, 33 years after its founding, the entire population of Jews in Israel remains less than that of New York City alone.

From 1969 to 1979 it's reported that more than 500,000 Jews have left Israel for the United States, and today over 2,500 a month are leaving for the United States. In a nation of only a few million, that is a hemorrhage of catastrophic proportions.

And where are all the Zionist promises of a national home where Jews can live in tranquil security? During the past 33 years, has any other nation on earth been in conflict with its

neighbors more consistently and constantly than Israel? Despite these and other facts, the Zionist image of Israel is the one which has been successfully planted in many minds. Even in major media news reports these days it is often acknowledged that the Israeli Lobby in Washington is a formidable force.

Today, that power is built upon several foundations. There are four major groupings in the United States which can always be counted upon to support Israel in any situation:

(1) One group, of course, are the outright Zionists in America. They always echo the Israeli line, be it right or wrong.

(2) Then there are the Political Conservatives. Even when they may be privately irritated by specific Israeli actions, they remain supportive. They believe that, come what may, Israel is America's bastion against Russia in the Middle East. An American Jewish businessman known for his support of Israel, Mr. Meyer Berger, expressed it this way on the ABC television news program "Nightline" for July 22, quote: "We believe that Israel is an inevitable partner of the United States. It's America's unsinkable carrier in the Middle East."

(3) The third group, a very large group, is that of the Fundamentalist Christians. They have been persuaded that this is the real Israel, the reborn Israel of the Bible. This impression is one which has been fostered deliberately by the Zionists from the very beginning. The Khazar roots of modern Israel, which I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 50, are generally unknown to many Fundamentalist Christians.

(4) Finally, there are politicians in important swing states. Wherever there is a rough balance between Democrats and Republicans, they tend to cancel each other out. That leaves the Zionist minority with the power to swing votes either way. Through money and political organization, they make sure that the politicians who win elections are beholden to them. These four major groups form the acknowledged support for Israel—the Zionists, the Conservatives, the Fundamentalist Christians, and beholden politicians.

(5) But there is one other group, and it is the most important group of all. That group consists of what the professionals refer to as the "Little Jews." The small minority of self-proclaimed "Big Jews"—that is, the active Zionist leadership here—work on the emotions of all the rest. They do their best to keep all Jews scared, and therefore herded together defensively. The so-called "Big Jews" talk incessantly about the holocaust, making sure that fears and doubts never die. By means of emotionalism, the small Zionist minority have been able to persuade most Jews that Israel is somehow their cause.

It is the Jews of America themselves who most of all are the unwitting victims of Zionism. It is they who are becoming uneasy as they watch Israel throwing off all restraints in warfare. And, my friends, it is they, the broad mass of Jews in America, who will soon begin to suffer for the actions of the Zionists.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 50 I discussed in detail the relationship between the two political forces known as Zionism and Bolshevism. Both were forged into living entities in the crucible of World War I. Both have common roots which claim to be Jewish but are not; and today both of these political forces use the community of all Jews as a cover for their own activities. The Bolsheviks, with headquarters now in America, work hand in glove with their Zionist brothers who control Israel. Their joint goal is

absolute domination of the entire world.

In Topic #1 I discussed the deadly competition now underway here in the United States between the Bolsheviks and the Rockefeller Cartel. Against all odds, the Rockefeller group is succeeding in regaining total control in many economic areas; and the economic power which I discussed in Topic #1 is intended to translate quickly into political power. If the Rockefeller interests have their way, America is on the road to Fascism. Their pattern for America is that of Hitler's Germany. That is their alternative which they are now pitting against the drive toward Marxist dictatorship here by the Bolsheviks.

In my very first AUDIO LETTER report of June 1975, I described how Adolf Hitler was brought to power in Germany. It was done through the power of giant industries secretly controlled by the Rockefeller combine. The governmental structure set up by Hitler was Fascism, in which big industry was a privileged partner of government. Today the Corporate Socialists are working feverishly to repeat that pattern, only more so, right here in the United States! This time they intend for their corporate empire to be so powerful as to be beyond control by the government; and through their own agents within government, they plan to have their own way against the Bolsheviks.

Already the so-called Reagan Administration is beginning to show its Fascist colors in domestic affairs. Anti-trust laws have effectively been shelved. Instead, the United States Attorney General has given a clear green light for all-out corporate mergers and acquisitions. Meanwhile the Administration is rapidly building the walls to contain us all within the prison which America is to become!! Under the guise of immigration control, more and more detention centers are opening up. Likewise the issue of prison overcrowding has been made into an overnight excuse for an enormous prison-building program. When the time comes, they will all be ready for their intended use as CONCENTRATION CAMPS!

The Rockefeller Corporate Socialists here are looking forward to rounding up and silencing their opposition. In doing that they believe they will ultimately be helped by the Bolsheviks and Zionists themselves. The Rockefellers have always made a practice of studying the psychological profiles of their enemies; and in studying the Bolshevik/Zionist mentality, they have found an Achilles' heel—a fatal weakness. That weakness, my friends, lies in the exercise of power itself. Whenever they have a free rein, the Bolsheviks and Zionists always go too far. Many years ago one of these people confided to a very close friend of mine, quote:

"We're becoming extremely powerful, so powerful that it is a danger to us. The more power we acquire, the closer we come to the surface. We have left a trail; and as we come closer to the surface, the danger is that some day someone will start following that trail. And yet we cannot stop; we will continue to gather more power, coming ever closer to the surface until we destroy ourselves with our power."

The Rockefeller group believe that it is starting to happen now. In Israel the Zionists are casting off all restraints in warfare, creating revulsion world-wide in the process.

And here in America the Bolsheviks are riding higher and higher. On all sides the self-proclaimed "Big Jews" are beginning to flaunt their power instead of using it surreptitiously. In the news media, in entertainment, in

education, in government, on all sides it is beginning to happen. In all positions of power here in America, Jews are becoming conspicuous by their numbers. Up to now, this is still a phenomenon which millions of Americans are telling themselves they do not see. We never hesitate to count up the other ethnic groups we see in powerful positions—be they Japanese-Americans, Chicanos, Blacks, or whatever; but many Americans are made to feel vaguely anti-Semitic if they dare to count up Jews in the same way. Millions of others do see it but talk about it only in their parlors or country clubs.

But among the Jews themselves, a few muffled alarms are beginning to sound here and there. A few are beginning to sense the danger of an anti-Jew backlash from the mushrooming visibility of Jews in powerful places. For example, the late Washington Star of May 28 published an article by a top official of the American Jewish Congress. Its title was: "UNEASY EYE ON THE ANTI-SEMITIC FRINGE." As one basis of his worry, he pointed out that Jews, quote:

"...hold public office in numbers disproportionate to their percentage in the population."

My friends, what it comes down to is this: The Bolshevik/Zionist elements here in America have acquired so much power that they are starting to go too far. They are beginning to surface in spite of themselves, and the Rockefeller Cartel intends to use this mistake to destroy them. The present Administration will be forced to turn increasingly Fascist on the domestic front; and as the echoes of Adolf Hitler grow louder and louder, there will be a rebirth of what used to be called "The Jewish Question."

It all brings back memories of a day in Detroit, 1943, my friends. I was in charge of sending and receiving cryptographic messages for the late Colonel Charles King, a protege of General "Hap" Arnold.

One day a family of Jewish friends of mine invited me to their home. It was a Jewish holiday, and I was to share their holiday dinner with them. They were a family of refugees from Germany and I was fascinated to hear about their experiences. Finally I asked: "Why did the German government go after the Jews?" The man looked at me and then looked down at his plate as he answered. There was pain in his voice as he said quietly:

"I was only a Little Jew, in business. I was a good Jew. Lots of us were, but it was the 'Big Jews' who got us in all this trouble. They just went too far."

"What do you mean 'They went too far'?" I asked; and he said:

"They had taken over all the reins of power in Germany. There was nothing they did not control. So now the good apples have to suffer with the bad." Then he added: "You know, it is several years now since I came to America. In all that time you are the first person who ever asked me why the German government went after the Jews. So, now you know why."

Topic #3—A few days ago, on August 17, reporters were called together for an announcement by Secretary of State Alexander Haig. He announced that the United States was lifting its embargo on all war planes for that country called Israel. It was a green light for 14 F-16s and 2 F-15s to be sent to Israel without further delay. It was only one month to the day after the Israeli bombing of Beirut.

Lebanon is still reeling from that disaster. In percentage terms, 300 dead in tiny Lebanon is equivalent to 24,000 dead in the United States. Had a disaster claimed that many lives here in a short month ago, it would still be the only thing that mattered to countless Americans. But it happened in Lebanon, not America; and so it created hardly a ripple when the United States told Israel, in effect: "Here are some more planes so you can do it again."

In releasing the war planes, the United States did not even express an opinion about whether Israel's use of the planes is proper. In answer to a reporter's question, Haig said that the causes of the embargo had been adequately resolved. But those empty words can never raise the dead in Lebanon nor silence the sobs of those who mourn for them.

The release of the war planes to Israel this month is just a continuation of the pattern I discussed last month. The interlocked military juntas of the United States and Israel are in a hurry. They have a hammer lock on military affairs, and they are using it to the hilt. They are pressing forward toward their goal of thermonuclear war between the United States and Russia as fast as they can. If they can succeed soon enough, they will cut short the stratagems of the Rockefeller Cartel which I described in Topics #1 and #2.

Events themselves are showing how great is the rush to prepare for war. On August 17 the American war planes were released to Israel. The very next day, late on August 18, United States time, American war planes were making new headlines. A pair of Libyan SU-22 jets were lured into a brief dogfight with American F-14s. The SU-22s are primarily ground-support aircraft. They are no match for air superiority Fighters like the F-14. The dogfight was over almost as soon as it began. Both Libyan jets were shot down, crashing into the sea in the Gulf of Sidra.

The United States has trumpeted loudly about the success of this air combat. Supposedly it is to tell the world that we mean business; but in many capitals from Europe to the Persian Gulf the message is being read in other ways. In Europe many leaders are nervously saying that Uncle Sam is behaving like a trigger-happy cowboy. And six oil-exporting nations of the Persian Gulf are saying that this proves that America has no intention of dealing fairly with the Arabs.

By shooting down Libyan jets in an artificial confrontation, the United States is also shooting down any new peace prospects for the Middle East. Beyond that, my friends, the Libyan dogfight episode was also staged for more obscure purposes of military deception. Right now stories about the Libyan dogfight are being constantly rehashed to keep our attention on the Mediterranean. Meanwhile, the real action is taking place elsewhere. Even the stories you have heard about the dogfight itself are part of a gigantic naval "shell game." The pilots who shot down the Libyan jets are not the ones identified publicly by the Pentagon; and, my friends, the planes which shot down the Libyan jets did not come from the USS Nimitz!

While all eyes are on the Mediterranean, the real naval action is taking place to the north and west. On July 14 the largest Allied naval war games since World War II got under way. These exercises involve 13 nations, 120,000 troops, 250 ships, and more than 1,000 aircraft. This tremendous exercise called "OCEAN VENTURE 81" is to continue until the end of October. It will include air assaults, anti-submarine warfare, bombing raids, even

mock battles between aircraft carrier battle groups. Most important of all, many of these war games will intrude into areas traditionally considered to be in Russia's sphere of operation! These massive exercises, my friends, will include not only the North Atlantic but the Baltic and Norwegian Seas.

The naval war games now underway in the Atlantic are built around America's new belligerent strategy against Russia. That strategy was spelled out in an interview by the Chicago Sun Times two months ago on Sunday, June 21. The person interviewed was the Secretary of the Navy, John Lehman, Jr. Lehman spelled out America's increasing dependence upon aircraft carriers. To make use of those carriers, the article describes the Lehman naval strategy as, quote: "an offensive one." Lehman says that our Navy should be able and ready to bottle up the Russian Navy in such places as, quote: "the Sea of Japan, Barents Sea, and other coastal waters." Lehman also gives prominent attention to (quoting the article again): "protecting NATO's northern flank in the Norwegian Sea."

My friends, those are the areas into which the massive Allied exercises are scheduled to intrude! It is a radical departure from past American naval policy. In the words of John Paul Jones, it is deliberately sailing "in harm's way." This is exactly the belligerent new American naval policy which I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 65, two months ago.

My friends, the Bolsheviks here are working faster and faster on more and more fronts to prepare for war. Two weeks ago it was announced that America would start assembling its neutron bombs. That announcement is far behind the reality because they have been in production secretly for many months! The only real purpose of the neutron bomb announcement was political. It's just another way for the Administration to show off the chip on its shoulder. Like shooting down a pair of Libyan jets, it's a way of saying: "We are ready and eager for war." Most Americans would disagree if we were told the truth; but we are not told the truth, and so we continue down the path to war.

Now the way is being paved to bring back the Draft. Draft registration is already in effect, and now it is being given teeth by publicizing federal prosecution of those who do not register. Beyond that, the Government is dusting off the old Bolshevik gimmick of posting public "SIGN UP" notices. The idea is to create resentment among those who have registered against those who have not. The net result—get neighbors to spy on neighbors.

Meanwhile we are being told that the manpower problem is the worst one facing the military. At the same time we are seeing falsified public opinion polls which say that more and more Americans now favor the Draft. Under a Declaration of a National Emergency, it will soon return. It remains to be seen who will win the hidden struggle between the Rockefeller Cartel and the Bolsheviks here. Only one thing is clear: regardless of which one wins, my friends, you and I lose!

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've tried to alert you to the hidden power struggle for control of the United States. On one side are the Corporate Socialists of the Rockefeller Cartel—the Fascists. They are trying to gather power away from the Government by economic means. Then, using that power, they intend to use the old "Jewish Question", so called, to throw a political knockout punch

at their Bolshevik rivals.

On the other side, the State Socialist Bolsheviks are using their control of America's military as their key weapon. They have already declared war against Russia, and now they are trying to drag America into that war, a thermonuclear war! They are trying to do it too fast to be stopped by the maneuverings of the Rockefeller Cartel.

Caught in the middle is the double-minded Reagan Administration. The White House is a house divided against itself—first pulled this way, then that way by the conflicting forces behind closed doors. Neither the Fascists nor the Bolsheviks in our country can save you—only YOU can save yourself with the help of our Lord Jesus Christ. He taught us long ago that a house divided against itself cannot stand. The collapse, when it comes, will be awesome indeed.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #68

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is September 30, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 68.

One day last month an awkward-looking machine in deep space listened patiently for radio signals from Earth. The machine had left the earth some four years earlier, and it will never return. But the machine, a space robot, felt no loneliness. It was doing the job it had been built to do. After plunging along through the vast reaches of deep space, it was heading for a dramatic rendezvous. Finally, the space robot detected the radio signals it had been waiting for. As the signals came crackling through space from earth, they were very faint. They had taken nearly an hour and a half to arrive due to the astronomical distance involved. Even so, the space robot recognized the radio commands and obeyed them. It awakened, flexed its mechanical arms and opened its television eyes, and it radioed back to Earth that it was ready for its awesome rendezvous in space.

In Pasadena, California, the Jet Propulsion Laboratory announced to reporters that all was well. VOYAGER II was operating perfectly as it approached that spectacular planet of rings, Saturn. And equally important, VOYAGER II was right on course. It had been racing through space for four years, and was nearly a billion miles away. That's over ten times the distance from Earth to the Sun, and yet VOYAGER II was only three seconds off schedule after its four-year journey.

As the VOYAGER II space robot approached Saturn, it started speeding up. On August 25 VOYAGER II came within 63,000 miles of Saturn itself. That's only about one-fourth the distance from the earth to the Moon. As it did so, it was traveling three times as fast as the alleged Space Shuttle in orbit. Then VOYAGER II raced outward again, passing through the mysterious rings as it went.

For days as VOYAGER II approached Saturn, flew past it, and then left Saturn behind, we got to see full-color pictures of what it saw. Once again scientists and non-scientists alike wanted to know: might there be other life out there? The

roiling, angry atmosphere of Saturn itself appeared to say, "No life here." At least no life that you and I can imagine.

Then we saw pictures of the moons of Saturn. Scientists were puzzled and amazed by the surprises they saw. Each moon is different from the others, and yet as far as the question of "life" is concerned, it seems that they are all the same—cold, frozen worlds and fragments of worlds, worlds covered with craters like the scars of a celestial smallpox; broken worlds having one impossible giant crater on one side and covered with shatter lines everywhere else.

As far as "life" is concerned, Saturn turned out to be another Jupiter. Even if some of the building blocks of life are present here and there, no independent life seems to have gotten started there. Up to now, man's search of the Solar System seems to have turned up the same answer everywhere concerning "life." Mars looks as if it may have held life long ago; but if so, apparently something destroyed it. Venus is a rich planet in many ways; but due to its heat and other factors, the richness of Venus apparently does not include native life. As for Mercury, the innermost planet, the prospects look even more dim. Mercury is so close to the sun that it is believed there could be rivers of lead on the sunward side.

As I say these words, VOYAGER II is once again plunging through the trackless void of deep space. Next stop, Uranus—five years from now. If VOYAGER II survives that solitary journey, it may teach us still more.

But we don't need to wait that long to start drawing conclusions about our own space ship, Earth. My friends, our beautiful planet Earth is unique in our solar system. It's just the right size to hold the atmosphere we need to breathe and to retain the water we need to drink, and it's just the right distance from the sun. Much farther away, and our planet would become too cold; much closer, and it would become too hot. As it is, everything we need for life is present in a God-given balance. The other planets of our solar system are fascinating, spectacular, and perhaps even useful to man some day; but there is no other planet so useful, so beautiful, and so spectacular as the blue planet, planet Earth.

Today, men obsessed by greed and lust for power are threatening to destroy what God created for you and me here on earth. They are playing games of war with biological and chemical weapons, nuclear weapons, and genetic engineering. They are contaminating our world with hazardous wastes to satisfy their own selfish desires. The present-day pilots of spaceship Earth are flying us all on a collision course with catastrophe. If they are not stopped, we have already seen our future through the robot eyes of VOYAGER II. The good Earth, our God-given home, will end up as a dead and broken world.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE REAGAN-BEGIN AXIS AND EXPANDING WORLD CRISES Topic #2—DELIBERATE DELAYS IN THE SPACE SHUTTLE LAUNCH Topic #3—THE REAGAN BUDGET AND CORRUPT ECONOMIC PLANS.

Topic #1—Earlier this month, on September 10, a two-day summit meeting between the United States and Israel ended here in Washington. Afterward, the entities Reagan and Begin gushed with words of mutual praise. It was as if the recent Israeli air warfare on Iraq and Lebanon had never happened. There was not a whisper to suggest that Washington was asking Israel to show any

restraint in the future. Instead, there were glowing words about a major new enlargement of the strategic relationship between the United States and Israel!

Officially, this new military relationship will focus on three major areas:

One area of collaboration will be the stockpiling of American war materiel in Israel. Supposedly this will include everything from medical supplies to tanks and other weapons for the so-called Rapid Deployment Force. The stockpiling of American weapons in Israel is being presented to the public as if it were a new development, but the fact is that this has been going on in secret for years. I first reported about this in my AUDIO LETTERS as long as six years ago in the autumn of 1975. In AUDIO LETTER No. 6, especially, I reported the stockpiling of American weapons, including battlefield nuclear weapons, in Israel. They were there as part of the long-range preparations for the coming limited nuclear strike by Israel against the Saudi Arabian oil fields. Today, six years later, those plans are coming closer and closer to being carried out.

The second major area of American and Israeli cooperation announced this month involves joint strategic planning and sharing of Intelligence. Here again, the public is being told that this will be something new, while in reality it is already established practice. When Israel destroyed the Iraqi nuclear plant last June with American F-16s, it was only part of a larger joint strategy. Likewise, the Reagan Administration plan to sell AWACS radar planes to Saudi Arabia has the secret approval of Israel. It is intended to help give Israel the pretext, the excuse it needs, for attacking the Saudi oil fields. I have reported in detail about these joint strategic plans by Israel and the United States in recent tapes. Likewise, I've reported in the past about other aspects of this ongoing joint military planning.

My friends, there is nothing new about it at all. The Reagan-Begin team also proclaimed the initiation of a third major area of military cooperation. We're told that the military forces of the United States and Israel will start holding joint exercises and war games. As with the rest of the package deal, we're supposed to believe that this is something new; but the fact is that far more than practice exercises have been carried out already by Israel and the United States—not mere exercises but actual joint military operations have taken place several times in recent years.

Up to now, all these joint military operations have been covert; all have been totally hidden from public view except one. That one exception was "OPERATION GUYANA" in November 1978. That case was unique because a headline-making event was used as a cover for the secret military operation itself. We were not allowed to hear any news reports about the secret American-Israeli Commando raid into Guyana that month. Our Government had never admitted that there was a Russian missile base there, and so we were not told about it when that base was destroyed; but we did see the stomach-turning event which was staged first in order to make the Commando raid possible—the Jonestown massacre!

A few days ago the only American trial in connection with the Guyana tragedy ended in mistrial. Larry Layton, a former member of the Jim Jones cult, had been seized upon as a scapegoat; but Layton was no more than a bit player on the Guyana stage, and his trial ended with a hopelessly deadlocked jury.

Meanwhile, the real culprits at Jonestown have gone scot-free because the real criminals, my friends, are the members of the secret joint military junta of the United States and Israel.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 67 last month, I called attention to this joint military junta and its growing power, and now the outcome of the Reagan-Begin meeting this month has given public confirmation of this junta's existence. The broad strategic relationship between the United States and Israel is not new as claimed.

What is new is that the joint Bolshevik-Zionist junta is increasingly going public. As their power grows, they are flaunting that power more and more. It is just one more symptom of the Bolshevik-Zionist mentality I discussed last month. Once they acquire power, these people always go too far. The Reagan-Begin Axis is at the very center of an expanding whirlpool of world crises. World trouble spots are continuing to multiply. The Bolshevik strategy to prepare the world for war, which I revealed last spring in AUDIO LETTER No. 63, is having its effect. Slowly but surely the whole world is being sucked up into the swirling vortex of tension and conflict; and at the very center, the Reagan-Begin Axis is stirring the pot faster and faster. The growing storm of world conflict right now is centered in the Middle East. In the eye of the storm sits Israel. Moving outward from Israel in any direction there is growing turmoil.

First, look to the north at Lebanon. After Begin left Washington this month, the Israelis wasted no time in once again heating up their running battle with the PLO. On September 17, a scant week after the Reagan-Begin meeting, there were two large bomb explosions in northern and southern Lebanon. As usual, PLO guerrillas were supposed to be the targets; but also, as usual, those who were actually killed by the Israeli blasts were mostly civilians, including many women and children. Those two bombings killed over 40 people and injured over 100.

Their intended purpose was to provoke retaliatory raids against Israel by the PLO so that the Israeli government can shout about their enemy being the PLO menace; but the PLO has not yet obliged the Israelis by striking back. The Israelis are in a hurry to whip up new war tensions, so there have been more Israeli bombings in Lebanon in recent days, and they will continue. The Israelis intend to goad the PLO however long it takes to provoke a counterattack. Then, when that happens, the resulting Israeli casualties will be big news in Israel and America. Prime Minister Begin will be seen speaking self-righteously of the unacceptable threat that continues to come from the PLO, and he will make sure to mention Saudi Arabia as the real culprit for bank-rolling the PLO. In this way, my friends, Israeli terrorism in Lebanon is actually being aimed at Saudi Arabia!

Lately the Israeli government has been talking about a permanent solution to the alleged problem of PLO raids against Israel. It started two months ago after an alleged PLO attack killed and injured several Israelis. Begin announced that Israel was going to put a stop to these raids, quote: "once and for all." A few days later the Israeli Air Force horrified the world by its all-out bombing of Beirut and all of southern Lebanon. Now the Israelis are goading the PLO into striking again; and if they do, the Israeli government will say, in effect, that hitting guerilla bases in Lebanon will never provide the permanent solution desired. Instead, Begin's accusing finger will point

more and more at Saudi Arabia. My friends, it's all part of the build-up to the planned limited nuclear strike by Israel on the Saudi oil fields.

Meanwhile the Reagan end of the Reagan-Begin Axis is hard at work on the planned AWACS radar plane sale to Saudi Arabia. That's intended to be just one more nail in Saudi Arabia's coffin by making Saudi Arabia look like a direct threat to Israel. As it stands right now, there's a chance that the AWACS sale will not be approved by Congress. This is a result of the hidden power struggle now dividing the United States Government. But even if AWACS does not go through, the Reagan-Begin team have an ace in the hole. Britain has already promised to fill the breach if the AWACS deal falls through. If not AWACS, then the Saudis can buy a similar British plane called "Nimrod"; and for purposes of giving Israel a pretext for attack, Nimrod will serve very well indeed.

In addition to Saudi Arabia, Syria is being drawn into the web of Israeli war plans by way of Lebanon. We Americans often forget that Syria, unlike Israel, has a legal right to be in Lebanon. The Lebanese government invited Syria into Lebanon to put a halt to fighting between the rightists and leftists of Lebanon itself. The Syrians are there as the main body of an Arab peace-keeping force; and, my friends, the Syrians have not been asked to leave. By contrast, Israel possesses no legal right whatsoever to conduct military operations of any kind in Lebanon—but to those who rule Israel, might makes right. Lebanon is weak and Israel is strong, so the Israelis consider it their right to attack real or imagined enemies at will in Lebanon.

Late last April, Israeli jets shot down two Syrian helicopters. The Syrians, who, I repeat, are in Lebanon legally, responded by bringing anti-aircraft missiles into that area of Lebanon. The Israelis, who had no right to be there in the first place, immediately cried "foul." A crisis erupted over the Syrian SAM missiles.

For over three months now, the crisis over the Syrian missiles has been dormant. Israel has been busying itself in other ways. It has destroyed the Iraqi nuclear plant and carried out genocide raids against the residents of Beirut. In the meantime, the Syrian anti-aircraft missiles have not injured Israel. But now the Israelis are ready to stoke up trouble with Syria again, and so just in the past few days the entity Begin has abruptly revived the Syrian missile issue. He is saying that they must be removed without delay. Otherwise, says Begin, Israel will not be responsible for the consequences. Can you imagine?

If Syria can somehow be drawn into the vortex of Middle East war tensions, it will help bring NUCLEAR WAR ONE one step closer. Syria is a client state of Russia with the closest ties to Russia of any Arab state. The Syrian SAM missiles in Lebanon are Russian-made. Should the Begin government engineer a military confrontation with Syria, Russia could not ignore it.

And then there is Egypt. The entity known as President Sadat is being programmed now to self-destruct. In recent weeks he has suddenly shed the modern image which had been cultivated for Western eyes. Instead, now there is Sadat's crackdown on all opposition. It is his crackdown on religious opposition that has made most of the headlines, but there is more involved too; for example: special security police are now being planted on the university campuses of Egypt to squash any student protests against Sadat. For the moment, these tactics may appear to make

Sadat's grip on his country more secure, but the longer-term effect will be the opposite. Like the late Shah of Iran, the entity Sadat will be undone by all these repressive tactics. It is only a matter of time before "assassination politics" puts an end to the Sadat era in Egypt.

The end of Sadat, or the entity known as Sadat, will also spell the end of the Camp David peace accords, so called. Other Arab leaders, including influential leaders in Egypt itself, are against the Camp David approach. The events now taking place in Egypt are setting the stage for collapse of the so-called Egyptian-Israeli Peace Treaty. As I detailed long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 44, that was always the intention of those in the United States and Israel who brought about the treaty. As a former CIA operative revealed to me in this connection, quote:

"To have a war, you first have to have a peace treaty. Then break the treaty, and presto—WAR."

Already the contrived era of good feeling between Israel and Egypt is beginning to suffer. Earlier this month on September 12 Egypt canceled a scheduled visit to Egypt by Israeli military officers. The reason: Israel's Defense Minister had said in public that Sadat will not be around long!

Under the terms of the Egyptian-Israeli treaty, Israel is scheduled to complete its withdrawal from the Sinai next April 1982. In the process, two large Israeli Air Bases in the Sinai will also pass into Egyptian hands—that is, if the treaty provisions are carried out. The demise of Sadat, or even a weakening of the present Egyptian government, may provide Israel with sufficient pretext not to withdraw. At the same time, plans are also being laid again to trigger a major incident in the Sinai. This was part of the plan I first made public six years ago, and it's once again part of the plan now.

Lebanon, Syria, Iraq, Saudi Arabia, Egypt—all these nearby Arab neighbors of Israel are in the front lines of the Reagan-Begin war maneuvering, but the whirlpool expands outward from there. When Israeli battlefield atomic weapons cap off Saudi Arabia's oil fields, it will send shock waves through the industrialized world. It will cripple the industrial heart of Europe, it will provide the excuse for gas rationing here in the United States as our country secretly shifts onto a war footing, and it will increase the strategic importance of oil-rich Iran just across the Persian Gulf.

Under the so-called Khomeini regime, Iran is producing far less oil than its capacity. With Saudi Arabia gone, substandard production from Iran will seem intolerable to the world. On top of that, the Reagan Administration will remind us of Iran's geographic location. Nestled along the strategic underbelly of Russia, we will be told that Iran is in danger. But to the Bolshevik military junta in America, Iran's real attraction is offensive in nature. Because of its location, Iran is an ideal base from which to attack Russia.

It's no accident, my friends, that Iran is now heading down the road to civil war! For the past several months, top members of the Moslem ruling circles in Iran have been the targets of assassination, including several major bombing incidents.

The process now under way in Iran is the one I warned about two years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 52. In that report I detailed how the Khomeini government came to power in the first place. It was helped along by forces of which it was not even

aware—Bolshevik forces. In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 I stated that, quote: "They plan to martyr the entire Khomeini government as they set off thermonuclear war." And that's what's going on now, my friends. The first to be martyred was the real Ayatollah Khomeini himself in February 1980. I reported his death and replacement by a "double" in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. Now, the rest of his regime is being cut down for purposes of war.

Elsewhere around the world, the war plans of the Bolshevik-Zionist military junta are also moving forward. On the surface, many of these other world tensions have no apparent connection with the ferment in the Middle East and Persian Gulf; but behind closed doors, there are connections! What links them all together is the MASTER PLAN which is to bring nuclear war out of a world in crisis.

A prominent example of this is Poland. A few weeks ago the so-called Solidarity Labor Union celebrated its first anniversary in Poland. Last year I reported that Solidarity had been created by the Bolsheviks for the purpose of bringing on war. As I explained then, Solidarity's true purpose is not to serve the workers of Poland but to use them. The whole purpose of Solidarity is to create as much trouble as possible for Russia including, if possible, revolution.

During the year that has passed, Solidarity has behaved exactly as I told you it would act. Solidarity never rests for a moment to consolidate its gains. Instead, the moment one set of demands are satisfied by the Polish government, new and even greater demands are put forth by Solidarity. The workers who form the backbone of Solidarity's power have not been given a moment to taste the fruits of success. Instead, there have only been strikes, protests, more strikes, strife and turmoil. As a result, the vulnerable economy of Poland has been thrown into a tailspin; and now, having helped to create Poland's worsening economic problems, Solidarity's leaders are demanding greater power to control the economy.

To see how extreme Solidarity has been in its behavior over the past year, just compare it with the labor unions in the West. We are used to unions that bargain, make contracts, and then abide by them for some agreed period. No union in America, for example, would even dream of demanding a new contract with greater demands every few weeks. But that, my friends, is exactly what Solidarity has been doing in Poland.

In recent AUDIO LETTER reports, I've mentioned that the Bolsheviks and Zionists are shooting for war to break out around mid-1982. Events in the Middle East are being pushed along on that timetable, and so are those in Poland. By next summer at the latest the Bolsheviks are convinced that Russia will have to act against Solidarity. The resulting bloodshed will be just one more spark to help ignite NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

All around the world the Bolshevik caldron of crises is bubbling hotter and hotter. United States rhetoric against Castro's Cuba is heating up once again. El Salvador is simmering with new turmoil, and half a world away tensions are growing between Pakistan and India. The Reagan Administration is promising F-16s to Pakistan. In lightning response, Russia has already delivered superfast MiG-25s to India; and one day, my friends, India will stun the world by inviting Russian soldiers into India!

The objective of the Reagan-Begin Axis is to stir up the whole world for war; and, my friends, they are succeeding.

Topic #2—According to the schedule announced by NASA several months ago, today was supposed to be the launch day for America's second space shuttle flight. But once again the space shuttle has suddenly started encountering new delays.

The first delay was announced several weeks ago when the shuttle was rolled out to the launch pad at Cape Canaveral, Florida. The roll-out took place on August 31, five days behind schedule. NASA spokesmen said that the launch date was being moved back from September 30 to October 9. "No big deal", they said, "just a few minor bugs to be worked out." For the next few weeks, occasional news reports from the Kennedy Space Center continued to assure us that all was well with the shuttle.

Then came September 22, and suddenly everything changed. We were told that just past midnight the previous night an accident had occurred on the launch pad. Supposedly the mishap took place while the control rockets in the nose of the space shuttle were being fueled up. NASA spokesmen said that nitrogen tetroxide oxidizer was spilled on the outside of the shuttle, affecting several hundred of the critical thermal tiles. Those life-and-death tiles, my friends, are stuck to the shuttle with glue, and it was said that 60 or 70 of them fell off after the leak took place. In addition, perhaps 250 more tiles would have to be removed to check them for damage.

Suddenly the October 9 launch date went out the window. As of now, NASA says that the launch will probably take place in late October or early November. But, my friends, don't hold your breath waiting for that. These last-minute delays of the second space shuttle launch are the result of important divisions within the Space Shuttle Program. If those divisions and arguments are not resolved soon, there will be still more delays.

To understand what is happening right now at Cape Canaveral, it's necessary to remember what has happened up to now with the space shuttle. To begin with, it's essential to understand that the space shuttle is a military program wearing a civilian disguise. All kinds of potentially fascinating and valuable scientific space missions have been scrapped by NASA. Everything is being cut to the bone except the Space Shuttle Program. Right now, NASA is trying to cancel a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity to intercept and study Halley's comet in 1986; but at the same time NASA is also talking about building a fifth space shuttle just to have a spare on hand. The reason the space shuttle is so crucial is that it is America's only hope for regaining military use of space.

Up until four years ago this month the United States had a secret military stranglehold on space; but in September 1977 the Soviet Union began a surprise offensive in space to change all that, and change it they did! The decisive turning point came on September 27, 1977. On that day the secret American military Moon Base in Copernicus Crater was put out of action. That was the outcome of history's first true space battle, the "Battle of the Harvest Moon." It was a battle of beam weapons and it took place in secret, and yet it was the most decisive battle of the 20th Century because from that moment on, my friends, Russia began seizing total control of the military use of space!

When those secret events took place four years ago, the Space Shuttle Program froze in its tracks. The hard-liners then in control of the Kremlin had slammed shut the military door to space. Soon we started hearing excuse after excuse for delays in the space shuttle. Especially, there were all those stories

about problems with the thermal tiles of the shuttle. Years passed, and the shuttle stayed grounded. Meanwhile America's military capability in space withered. In October 1977 SKYLAB was shot down by a Russian Cosmos Interceptor. SKYLAB had been a vital way station in America's secretly continuing Moon Program. By destroying it, Russia made sure that America's eviction from the moon was permanent.

Meanwhile, the Russians themselves began landing on the moon without public fanfare. For nearly four years now, Russian beam weapons have been stationed on the moon, pointed at the Earth!

When the Russians shot down SKYLAB, they did so over the United States. The result was a giant fireball breaking up into pieces. It was seen in half a dozen states from Texas to Missouri. NASA waited a week or so for headlines about the mysterious fireball to die down, then it began a long drawn out cover-up of the SKYLAB debacle. NASA pretended that SKYLAB was unexpectedly sinking from orbit, and just for good measure they also pretended that the space shuttle might be able to save SKYLAB. It all sounded good to an unsuspecting public; but the shuttle stayed grounded, and at last NASA pretended that SKYLAB had crashed half a world away over the Indian Ocean.

In addition to SKYLAB, the United States lost its space reconnaissance capabilities to Russian Cosmos Interceptors. By the spring of 1978, the United States no longer had any spy or early-warning satellites gathering information over Russia! From time to time since then, spy satellites have been launched by the United States. Some of these have succeeded in gathering Intelligence briefly over other areas of the world; but as soon as they pass over the Soviet Union, they are always destroyed. As a result, the United States no longer has up-to-date reconnaissance data on the Soviet Union!

Without reconnaissance data, my friends, all the weapons in the world are next to useless. America's military planners know well enough where Russia's cities are and where critical military installations were four years ago; but without fresh reconnaissance, they have no way of knowing about new targets which might now be more important. On top of that, Russia is now deploying anti-missile defenses based on beam weapons. Without fresh reconnaissance data, there would be little hope of getting American missiles through those defenses; and so over the past four years reconnaissance has become the No. 1 strategic problem of the United States. There are plenty of other problems too, because we have nothing equivalent to Russia's Space Triad of weapons. But without reconnaissance, even the weapons we do have are of little use.

The Bolshevik military planners here are determined to launch a nuclear first strike against Russia, come what may! I have reported many details about that in the past, and will not go into it again right now; but with that in mind, they have been doing everything they can think of to solve the critical reconnaissance problem.

One of their earliest and most desperate ideas was one which took place in April 1978. I reported the details in AUDIO LETTER No. 33. The American CIA, working closely with its counterpart the Korean CIA, arranged for a civilian airliner to be used for Intelligence gathering. That was the case of Korean Airlines flight 902. You may recall it took off from Europe for the United States, but flew into northern Russia instead. It was secretly equipped with special photographic and electronic Intelligence gear, and flew into some of the most sensitive

airspace in all of Russia. In effect, the unsuspecting passengers were used as hostages to discourage the Russians from shooting it down right away. Eventually Russian Fighters did bring it down, but only after considerable Intelligence had been obtained and transmitted.

The Korean air liner ploy was successful as a stopgap trick, but reconnaissance data can hardly be obtained that way as a routine practice, and so for the past three years we've been hearing more and more about reconnaissance aircraft. Supposedly these were made almost obsolete for most strategic purposes by spy satellites, but now they are once again in the news because we don't have spy satellites on continuous duty any more.

One reconnaissance airplane we hear more and more about these days is the SR-71 Blackbird. The latest SR-71 incident took place on August 2 6 when North Korea supposedly tried to shoot one down. And then there is that famous predecessor of the SR-71, the U-2. It was a U-2 that was flown by the late Francis Gary Powers when he was shot down over Russia 21 years ago. You might think that the U-2 was ready for the history books in this age of alleged spy satellites, but No. Now the U-2 is back, all dressed up and modernized with the new designation TR-1, and its job now, as always, is reconnaissance.

If we still had all those reconnaissance satellites in the sky, reconnaissance aircraft would be less important. Naturally the Bolsheviks here try not to let you suspect the truth about our missing satellites, but every now and then there are hints about the truth in the news. For example, only yesterday the Defense Department released a new 99-page propaganda booklet titled "SOVIET MILITARY POWER." It purports to give the public previously top secret information about the military build-up in Russia, and yet the booklet contains only sketches—no satellite photos. Why? Because the Defense Department does not have any up-to-date satellite photos of Russia. Our spy satellites are long gone.

Up to now the secret Bolshevik military planners here have been making do with inferior methods of reconnaissance. But before they set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE, they want better reconnaissance data on Russia. They have only one tool that offers any hope of doing the job, and that is the space shuttle.

We've been told by NASA that there are to be four initial test flights of the space shuttle "Columbia." After those are completed, perhaps as early as September 1982, the shuttle will be declared operational. But the fact is, my friends, that these first four flights are being used for secret military purposes. The stakes are so high that the secret military shuttle planning team is prepared to lose a shuttle on each flight if need be. Before the "Columbia" lifted off from Cape Canaveral last April, three more identical orbiters were already in existence. They are hidden away in a remote hangar at White Sands Missile Range in New Mexico.

The primary goal of the secret military shuttle flights is the one I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 62. They are trying to use the space shuttle to orbit a sophisticated new spy satellite to fly over Russia. It's an armored laser-firing satellite designed to survive attacks by Russian space weapons long enough to radio back reconnaissance data. After that, the Bolsheviks here will be ready to set off the American nuclear first strike against Russia.

In order to carry out reconnaissance over Russia, a spy

satellite has to fly far to the north. That kind of orbit is far different from that which is publicly claimed for the space shuttle. As a result, a shuttle returning to Earth after deploying a spy satellite is unable to land at the advertised time and place. Instead, the shuttle we see taking off from Florida is scheduled to land out of our sight at a secret location in western Australia—that is, if it survives the flight. Meanwhile, a different shuttle, the training shuttle "Enterprise", is shown on TV landing right on schedule at Edwards Air Force Base.

When the "Columbia" blasted off from Florida last April, it was attacked and destroyed by Russian space weapons, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 64. But the training shuttle "Enterprise", re-labeled "Columbia", thrilled the public by racing in from the sea and landing in California. The covered exit vehicle was wheeled up, and it was made to appear that astronauts Young and Crippen walked out. The public perception was maintained that the mission had been a success, but it was actually a catastrophe even worse than the Bolsheviks here had thought possible.

The military shuttle planners were thrown into disarray over what to do next. In AUDIO LETTER No. 65 three months ago I described their disagreements and what they finally decided to do. After delaying for a week or so, they sent the training shuttle "Enterprise" to Florida in order to buy some time. It is the "Enterprise", a training shuttle not intended for orbital flight, that is now on the pad at the Kennedy Space Center.

When the secret military shuttle team sent the "Enterprise" to Florida, they were planning to use it in an intentionally aborted launch—that is, their plan has been to launch the "Enterprise", then let one of its engines shut down early. That would lead to a return of the "Enterprise" to Cape Canaveral only minutes after its take off. By staging this show, the shuttle planners were expecting to keep the program alive in the public eye. Meanwhile they would use the time to make modifications to the next shuttle mission plan to give it a better chance of success.

As it stands now, the shuttle "Enterprise" is still programmed for an artificial abort shortly after take off. But the arguments among the shuttle planners, which I reported last June, have multiplied during the summer. Several members of the group are getting very cold feet over the deliberate abort plan. They're saying: "Suppose something we don't plan causes real damage to the Enterprise. Suppose Ivan decides to blow it out of the sky even though it is still in camera range. We have to have the Enterprise for the public return segment after each mission. What if we lose it?"

Other shuttle planners are expressing a completely different worry. This second group is not worried about the Russians shooting down the "Enterprise" because it will pose no threat to Russia. What they are worried about is the public relations impact of an aborted take off. It has even been suggested that a full orbital launch of the "Enterprise" ought to be considered. The "Enterprise" could not do anything once it got into orbit because the cargo bay is occupied by special fuel tanks, but the viewing public would never know that, thanks to the simulation films which could be broadcast; and as for re-entry, the "Enterprise" is covered with the same system of thermal tiles as the standard shuttles. The first group says that that plan is not good because those tiles still have never been proven in full-fledged re-entry from orbit. The "Columbia" was supposed to do that last April but it never got that far. The "Enterprise"

might get past the Russians only to disintegrate on re-entry; and that, say the worriers, would be impossible to hide. It would stop the program.

Out of all those arguments and others like them, only one consensus has emerged. The only purpose of sending the "Enterprise" to Florida was to buy time. Meanwhile one of the three secret shuttles at White Sands is now being modified for the next mission. All NASA cares about doing now is to continue to buy time with the "Enterprise" for a while longer. Then somehow it will have to be returned to White Sands and the new shuttle will have to be brought to the Cape. And so, for the moment at least, the "Enterprise" is being used to buy time through launch delays instead of an aborted launch.

For three years stories about the thermal tiles of the shuttle were used as an excuse for the prolonged grounding of the "Columbia." Now, NASA is trying once again to buy time; and once again an alleged problem with the thermal tiles is being used to explain away delay. We're told that there was a rocket fuel leak in the dead of night, and so the tiles came off. Only when NASA is sure what to do next will the latest tile fiasco quietly go away.

Topic #3—Two days ago the week began with bad news from the Stock Exchanges of the world. Investors abroad were convinced that stocks on Wall Street were about to take a plunge and they were trying to get out ahead of that. When the Markets opened later in New York, at first they did drop fast. But the Stock Market manipulators here are not quite ready yet for a full-fledged Stock Market crash, so the New York Markets abruptly turned around and headed up. By the end of the trading day, the manipulators had driven the market up to an over-all gain for the day. A world-wide Stock Market panic was postponed on Monday. Even so, the experience has given public proof of the instability of the stock market today.

Two years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 51 I gave a detailed warning of the parallels between the stock market today and that of 1929. The stock market has been crashing downward in slow motion in terms of real value for years now, and soon the stock market roller coaster will jump the tracks and down it will go!

One of the strong similarities between today and 1929 is the role being played by the private Federal Reserve Corporation. Now, as then, the Federal Reserve is deliberately ruining the economy through contraction of money and credit. The excuse given is the alleged fight against inflation. We're told that interest rates have to be high because inflation is high, but there is a glaring discrepancy in that explanation for current Federal Reserve policies. According to official Government figures, the inflation rate is now around 10%. Based on all past experience, that would mean interest rates should also be around 10%—about equal to inflation; but instead, the "Fed" has pushed interest rates up to a 20% range, double the official inflation rate! The fact is, my friends, that Government figures on real inflation are lies, and so are the Federal Reserve's excuses for legalized usury.

Last month I described the real purpose of current Federal Reserve policies. Business here is being deliberately weakened and made ripe for take-over. The only businesses which are not being hurt are those of the Rockefeller Cartel, which are interlocked with the Federal Reserve Corporation. The Corporate Fascists here are waging economic war to gain power against the State Bolsheviks in the Government, so don't look for any relief.

Federal Reserve Chairman Paul Volcker testified before Congress late last month that astronomical interest rates will continue for years. Most small businesses cannot possibly earn the 20% profit and more that is required to pay such exorbitant interest, and so they will simply die. Meanwhile, Rockefeller Cartel agents within the divided United States Government are pressing ahead fast with another facet of their plan.

Last month I gave an alert to watch for an alleged new gold standard to be proposed soon by the so-called Reagan Administration. Sure enough, within the past few weeks, talk of a gold standard has started mushrooming all around us. Suddenly "Letters to the Editor" are being published on this topic which would have been ignored a few years ago. Even the entity Vice-President Bush is talking about returning to a gold standard. And Business Week has just published a cover story in its September 21 edition entitled, quote: "A Return To The Gold Standard—Why Reagan might try it, How it would be done, How it might work."

So far the bogus gold standard plan is right on track. As I detailed last month, it would not be a real gold standard at all. It's only a gimmick to influence public perceptions about the dollar and to silence new questions about our missing gold. It's being designed to look good, but it's just another corrupt and cruel trick.

My friends, corruption has become the only way our leaders know. The long-suffering American people always give the benefit of the doubt to every new president, and it's always in vain. The same is true of Congress today—the more they legislate, the more the country "goes to the dogs"; but while they are in office we try to tell ourselves that surely they must be doing some things in our interest. Years later, after it is too late, of course, sometimes we learn a little bit of the truth. A book comes out documenting the large number of bribes taken by a former president, or a former Congressman is indicted for Income Tax evasion; but we always tell ourselves: "Surely it is different this time." We want to believe in our leaders; and so we rationalize away the lies, the double dealing, and the corruption we see for as long as possible. Our leaders know this is how we think, and they use it against us.

The entity President Reagan says we must put our economic house in order. Based on that excuse, domestic programs of all kinds are being cut down with a meat ax regardless of merit. Spending on warfare leaves nothing for welfare, and yet most foreign aid is going on untouched! The only exception to that is aid to truly needy countries in the Third World. They have no usefulness to the urgent plans for nuclear war, and so they are finding themselves "out in the cold"; but foreign aid to help prepare for war goes right on without letup.

Most sacrosanct of all foreign aid programs are the annual billions in aid to Israel. Over the past 33 years the United States has given over 100-billion dollars ($100,000,000,000) in aid to Israel. Those very same dollars—our tax money—come right back to Capitol Hill and American multinational corporations. American tax dollars flow like water through Israeli hands into Congressional wallets, giving the Israeli Lobby its clout! American foreign aid dollars to Israel are also used to buy American-made weapons of war. Those weapons will one day drag you and me into America's final war—NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

If our leaders were serious about straightening out our economy, there are many things they could do. To begin with,

they should start telling the truth for a change, instead of heaping lies on more lies. Instead of a falsified gold standard, the scandal over our missing gold should be exposed! As I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 60, this could be done in connection with an international economic conference in a way that would save the world's economy.

The Administration's meat ax approach to domestic programs should also be scrapped. Yes, my friends, many domestic programs are controversial—some of them deserve to be; but let's put first things first.

Before we take a meat ax to domestic aid, why don't we start with foreign aid—alias Congressional aid. At least a dollar spent in domestic programs keeps circulating within our own economy; but those squandered on foreign aid do our economy, as a whole, no good.

And as for Congress, if a meat ax should be wielded anywhere, that is where! More and more we're hearing about employees of all kinds of companies accepting wage cuts to help save their companies. Meanwhile our spend-thrift Congress has just voted itself the right to line its pockets even more than in the past! I say:

Chop all federal salaries in half, starting with Congress. We cannot afford to let them fiddle any more while our economy burns.

It's time, my friends, to hold their feet to the fire.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've tried to sound a warning that time is growing short—economically, politically, and militarily. Men of ill will and corrupt minds are piloting our world on a collision course with disaster.

As Americans await the next space shuttle launch, a greater countdown is underway for spaceship Earth. One day in January 1986, the Voyager II spacecraft is scheduled to be approaching the giant mystery planet Uranus. Voyager will be preparing to send a bonanza of pictures and scientific data to Earth. But by then, will anyone be listening to Voyager here on Earth? The answer can be Yes, my friends, if the truth of our Lord Jesus Christ becomes the guiding light for our troubled world. We must learn to build, instead of destroy; we must learn peace, instead of war, through universal neutrality and noble competition, instead of conquest and intrigue. If we do not learn these things, there may be only silence on Earth by that winter of 1986. Nine years after its launch from the blue pearl of planet Earth, Voyager II could be radioing signals to a deaf, gray tomb of a world. That will leave Voyager itself carrying the final sounds of Earth on a platinum record as it drifts alone forever outward to the stars.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #69

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is November 8, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 69.

A few days ago on the morning of November 4, the eyes of the world were on Cape Canaveral, Florida. An American space shuttle sat poised for launch on Pad 39-A, the home of America's moon flights a decade ago. According to NASA, the shuttle was scheduled for launch at 7:30 that morning. What we were watching, my friends, was another NASA publicity hoax. NASA had no intention of actually launching the shuttle that day.

The shuttle now at Cape Canaveral is not the "Columbia" as claimed—it is the training shuttle "Enterprise", as I reported last June in AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 65. It is there for only one reason: to help NASA buy time. It was the Enterprise, not the Columbia, that we saw making that dramatic landing in California last April. Most Americans are unaware that the Columbia was destroyed in space after it took off from Cape Canaveral.

NASA is continuing to buy time while secret modifications of the next space shuttle are underway at White Sands, New Mexico, and so right now we're seeing hoaxes like the aborted countdown on November 4. As I mentioned a moment ago, NASA had no intention of allowing an actual launch earlier this week. What they did want was an exciting countdown to sustain public interest and explain away the next delay.

The key to the NASA publicity show was the master countdown computer called the "Automatic Sequencer." It was deliberately programmed to delay the countdown at T minus 9 minutes and then to stop it completely just 31 seconds before launch. With those arrangements made, NASA forged ahead with its pretended launch preparations. For several days ahead of time, NASA spokesmen solemnly said that the weather would have to be almost perfect at launch time. The reason, we were told over and over, was that the shuttle might have to abort its take-off and glide back to land at Cape Canaveral. That is exactly the plan which I made public last June in AUDIO LETTER No. 65.

The military shuttle planners are still actively considering a deliberately aborted launch soon, and they want to prepare us in case they carry it out. But on November 4 the launch preparations were only make-believe, and so NASA pressed ahead with the countdown with only lip service to the worsening weather. The countdown went without a hitch to the "T minus 9 minutes" mark and then stopped for a final planned "Hold." We were told that this was the decision point when Launch Control would either go ahead or "scrub." Newsmen craned their necks at the worsening clouds and shook their heads. It began to rain on spectators 10 miles from the launch pad; then the rain reached the VIP stand, twice as close to the shuttle; next, rain started pelting TV reporters at their forward outposts, closest of all to the launch pad. Surely, they said, NASA would have to scrub the launch; but to NASA Launch Control, only the countdown itself mattered that day. They knew there could be no launch because the countdown computer had been programmed to prevent it, and so the announcement from NASA surprised many. The decision was to go ahead for a launch. The final 9 minutes of the countdown were used to help lay the foundation for things to come.

First, the countdown computer refused to resume the count at T minus 9 minutes. Shortly NASA announced that it was merely a computer programming problem. Moments later the count began. Everything went smoothly until T minus 31 seconds. Then the count stopped again. Once again, said NASA, it was a programming goof. The shuttle itself was fine, we were told, but the

computer had not been given the right instructions.

By that point, my friends, it was a critical point in the count, so close to launch. The shuttle fuel tanks had been sealed up, ready to go; the shuttle had been cut loose from its ground links and was trembling with power, ready to go. All kinds of things had to be shut down, cooled off, reset, and recycled for another try.

For the next two hours or so television reports concentrated on how crucial computers are to the shuttle. They ended up making one basic point, and that is: even if the shuttle itself is in perfect condition, a mistake in programming its computers can cause the unexpected to happen. This, my friends, is NASA's way of getting us ready to accept it if they do carry out a so-called "Return-to-landing-site abort." They will say afterward that it was all caused by a computer programming problem. They will emphasize that the shuttle itself performed perfectly, and so the shuttle project should not be interfered with. Finally when they are ready for the third shuttle launch, they will assure us that the computer problems have all been solved. This, my friends, was the true purpose of the November 4 shuttle countdown hoax. They have now paved the way for an aborted take-off soon if they choose to carry out the plan I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 65.

Having accomplished that much, the NASA launch team finally scrubbed the November 4 launch with a different excuse. We're being told that the hydraulic power units, called APUs, need an oil and filter change; and with that story, NASA is once again buying more time. Using one excuse after another, NASA has succeeded so far in slipping the next shuttle launch, time after time, without arousing public suspicion. It's now almost seven months since the first shuttle launch on April 12, 1981. Even so, these delays cannot continue indefinitely. The countdown for the space shuttle program is only part of a far greater countdown—the countdown toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE!

Earlier this year of 1981 I revealed that the American Bolsheviks here are trying to follow a definite timetable in their war plans. That timetable calls for the war sequence to begin around mid-1982. A chain of events will begin that is to culminate finally in NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

My friends, up to now they are still on that timetable. Mid-1982 is less than a year away now, and so regardless of the low chances of success, the military space shuttle team will have to try a launch soon. Whatever they try will be a desperate gamble in light of Russia's overwhelming military power in space. But time is slipping away for the space shuttle. The choice is gradually becoming: either use it or lose it.

The State Socialists here, the American Bolsheviks who now control America's military policies, are in a frenzy to throw America's nuclear arsenal at Russia. During recent weeks this military frenzy has been manifesting itself in many ways. These range from the so-called Reagan Administration decision on the MX missile and B-l Bomber to shocking statements about "limited nuclear war." At the same time, America's economy is being dragged down into an inflationary depression to set the stage for DICTATORSHIP! And most ominous of all, my friends, a specific act has taken place since my last AUDIO LETTER report that has lit one of the fuses for war!

In a number of recent tapes I've discussed the similarity between the multiplying crises of today and those that led up to

World War I. Those crises set the stage, but a specific incident acted as the trigger that led to war. That event, my friends, was the unexpected assassination of a key political figure. It happened in 1914, and now in 1981 it has happened again.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE SADAT ASSASSINATION FOR NUCLEAR WAR ONE

Topic #2—THE REAGAN ADMINISTRATION PROGRAM TO POLANDIZE AMERICA

Topic #3—THE MX DECISION AND AMERICA'S FIRST-STRIKE POSTURE.

Topic #1—Assassination politics can be counted on always to strike without warning. One fateful day it struck in a capital city not far from the Mediterranean Sea. The day began without a hint of what was about to happen. The Mediterranean sun was bright and warm, the sort of day that is perfect for picnics and parades. An unusual leader was scheduled to be seen in public appearances on that fateful day. He was a strong-minded man, not universally admired but certainly an attention-getter. For his public appearances that day he was all decked out with a full complement of medals to enhance his image.

He was a controversial man, and his policies were stirring up heated debate. He had staked out a course in foreign policy that set him apart from others in his region. There were many who did not like his ideas. Throughout the region in which this unusual man lived, deep divisions were threatening to explode into violence. The central problem had to do with a disenfranchised minority who were scattered through parts of the several nations. This minority group were the victims of great power maneuvering that had changed the map a generation earlier. They had been left without the national identity they craved, and scattered through parts of several nations.

For decades the people of this disenfranchised minority had been struggling to regain their rights, and slowly but surely they were growing more powerful. These facts weighed heavily in the mind of the controversial leader on that bright, sunny day. He was convinced that the course which he was promoting was the right one. He was involved in negotiations that could lead to a form of regional autonomy for the disenfranchised minority. They would be given this autonomy within the nations where they lived. His public appearances on that sunny day were intended to underscore his determination to continue down his chosen course. It was only a matter of time, he thought, until his own diplomatic ideas brought lasting peace to his troubled region and honor to himself.

That was this man's dream, my friends, but the dream ended abruptly as a nightmare. In the warmth of the bright Mediterranean sun, the chilling shock of assassination politics suddenly intervened. There was a hail of gunfire; and this man who had staked out such an independent course lay dead.

The assassination was followed immediately by questions piled on more questions. "How big was the conspiracy?" The answer at first appeared to be only a handful, perhaps four or five men. Later there were hints that it might have been much bigger than that. "What about the suspicious behavior of the neighboring government toward the assassinated leader?" The evidence was conflicting about that. And, "Why had effective protection been so completely lacking for such an important leader?" To this day, my friends, that question remains a mystery.

It is often said that history repeats itself; and so it does, my friends, if only we can learn to see it.

I have just described not just one historical event, but two. One of these events was the assassination of the entity known as President Anwar Sadat of Egypt last month on October 6. The other event, which fits exactly the same description, was an assassination which took place 67 years ago. I am referring to the assassination of Archduke Franz Ferdinand of Austria on June 28, 1914. The assassination last month took place in the Egyptian capital city of Cairo, some 100 miles south of the Mediterranean coast. The victim was the entity President Sadat. Over the past half decade Sadat had become highly controversial and isolated in the Arab world. The reason for this was his involvement with Israel by way of the so-called Camp David Accords.

The great problem in the Middle East today is, of course, that of the Palestinians. They are the disenfranchised minority of today, victims of the great power map-making which created Israel a generation ago. The Palestinians, largely dispossessed from their former homeland, are today scattered like orphans throughout several nations; but they have never lost their determination to regain their rights and their national identity, and slowly but surely they are growing more powerful. Most Arab leaders today support these Palestinian aspirations in undiluted form, but four years ago Sadat broke ranks with his Arab brothers by his unilateral overtures toward Israel. From that time onward Sadat became identified with a sort of halfway solution to the Palestinian problem. That solution is called "autonomy."

These days we hear frequently about so-called autonomy talks between Egypt and Israel. To you and me thousands of miles away from the scene, the concept of Regional Autonomy for the Palestinians may sound pretty good, but to the Palestinians themselves it is no solution at all. They see it as nothing more than a way to lock them into their present homeless status for all time; and, my friends, they are exactly right about that. After all, the Palestinians themselves are not even party to the so-called autonomy talks which are to decide their fate. So this was the situation last month on October 6:

The Middle East, seething with unresolved tensions from great power map-making of a generation earlier; a disenfranchised minority struggling to re-establish their national identity; and a single unorthodox leader seeking a halfway solution based on so-called Regional Autonomy for the minority.

It sounds like a situation unique to our age; but, my friends, it is not unique. In important ways it is almost a carbon copy of the situation that exploded into World War I.

In 1914 the hot spot of the world was not the Middle East, but the Balkan Peninsula. The disenfranchised minority of that day were not the Palestinians but the grouping of peoples known collectively as the Yugoslavs. Yugoslavia as we know it today did not exist in 1914. Instead, the map of the region was a patchwork of names like Serbia, Bosnia, and Herzegovina. Scattered throughout the region were the interrelated Yugoslav peoples. They had been robbed of their power and identity a generation earlier, and they wanted it back.

For several years before the outbreak of World War I, these tensions led repeatedly to outbreaks of fighting in the Balkans. Into this dangerous situation stepped Archduke Franz Ferdinand, heir to the throne of Austria of the Austro-Hungarian empire. He was afraid the Balkan situation could lead to a breakup of his empire, and so he proposed a halfway solution to pacify the

Yugoslavs while preserving the status quo. His plan for this disenfranchised minority was called "Regional Autonomy." It was virtually a prototype for the so-called autonomy plan we hear about today for the Palestinians. The Yugoslavs were no more pleased with the so-called autonomy idea in 1914 than the Palestinians are today in 1981. It was a situation made to order to set the stage for assassination. That was true in 1914, and it was true again in 1981, barely a month ago.

The two assassinations differed in detail, but in overall pattern they were much the same. Archduke Ferdinand appeared in an open car wearing the medals and trappings of royalty. Sadat appeared at a parade dressed in the medals and trappings of the military. Both were shot to death without the assassins being interfered with by security personnel until too late. Both were killed in capital cities near the Mediterranean—Archduke Ferdinand in the provincial capital of Sarajevo, Bosnia; Sadat, in Cairo, Egypt. Both assassinations were followed immediately by suspicions directed against a neighboring state. In the case of Sadat, the suspicions were aimed at neighboring Libya; in the case of Archduke Ferdinand, it was Serbia that drew accusations; and those accusations, my friends, initiated a process that led directly to World War I.

If all these things were not enough, there is one other crucial similarity today with the situation in 1914. On the eve of World War I there were two great power blocs opposing one another in Europe. One was called the Triple Entente, consisting of Britain, France, and czarist Russia; the other was the Triple Alliance, made up of Germany, Austria-Hungary, and Italy. These two great power blocs were something new and dangerous in continental politics. They were permanent alliances instead of the temporary special purpose alliances of the past. They were the legacy of balance-of-power politics from the era of Bismarck and Disraeli. The two blocs were so evenly matched that it was thought that they would keep the peace, but they both shared a common weak spot. That weak spot was the Balkan Peninsula. In themselves, the Balkans were minor players on the world stage; but there were treaties between the Balkan mini-states and the great powers. It was through those ties that the great powers were pulled into what became World War I.

Today, my friends, we live once again in an era when two great power blocs have been facing each other for decades. One is centered on Russia, and the other on the United States, together with their allies. For example: in Europe itself, NATO stands eyeball to eyeball with the Warsaw Pact year in, year out. Today it is far worse than in 1914. It is more complicated, and secret alliances are now being forged. And just as 1914 had its weak spot in the Balkans, the 1981 weak spot is the Middle East together with the Persian Gulf.

In 1914 the assassination of Archduke Franz Ferdinand came as a shock to the world. It was the trigger that started a chain of events that culminated in World War I. Austria-Hungary accused Serbia of complicity in the assassination and issued a harsh ultimatum. Little Serbia responded by appealing to Russia for protection, and Russia agreed to provide it. Austria-Hungary declared war on Serbia; Russia started mobilizing. Austria-Hungary appealed to its ally Germany, which promptly declared war on Russia. Germany asked Russia's ally France to stay out of it, but the French were evasive. Germany then declared war on France, and prepared to march through Belgium to attack France. Britain gave a warning to Germany not to violate Belgium's neutrality. The Germans started marching anyway. Britain declared war on Germany. The situation kept on

snowballing like this until all of Europe was aflame with war. It was a war from which there could emerge no winners except for unseen powerful forces behind the scenes, but those forces had succeeded in setting off the unwinnable war for their own selfish ends—and they started it all with a surprise assassination!

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 68 on September 30, I gave a warning that the entity Sadat was being set up for assassination. The State Socialists (or American Bolsheviks) here are trying to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE by means of techniques similar to those which led to World War I 67 years ago, and the time had come at last to use Sadat to help further the plan for war.

Contrary to appearances, the late President Anwar Sadat did not initiate negotiations with Israel four years ago on his own initiative. Instead, he had been turned into an involuntary puppet of the United States and Israel! I first revealed what had been done to Sadat four years ago this month in AUDIO LETTER No. 28.

Up until the spring of 1977, Anwar Sadat had always rejected the idea of direct negotiations with Israel. In April of that year, Sadat visited Washington for talks with the then President Carter. When reporters asked whether he would consider direct negotiations with Israel, Sadat again dismissed the idea as too drastic. Yet a little more than six months later Sadat electrified the world with his sudden peace initiative and visit to Israel. In AUDIO LETTER No. 28 I reported what had happened to Sadat to so radically change his thinking. Sadat had been subjected to the psychological programming techniques which are secretly in use by the United States and other Intelligence agencies. He was programmed with an irresistible compulsion to go against all of his past thinking and deal directly with Israel. The bottom line was what I reported four years ago. To repeat what I reported then, quote:

"The Sadat peace initiative to Israel is supposed to be, unknown to Sadat himself, the first step toward war."

Last month the Sadat image was put to its final use by the secret joint military junta of the United States Pentagon and Israel. The assassination in Cairo ended the Sadat era and, at the same time, it started the countdown toward collapse of the Egyptian-Israeli Peace Treaty on the way to war! Within hours of the assassination, Israeli leaders began expressing doubts whether the peace will survive without Sadat; and they said that this could cause a re-appraisal of the plan for Israel to complete its withdrawal from the Sinai on schedule next spring.

When Archduke Franz Ferdinand was assassinated in June of 1914, it led very quickly to the outbreak of war. The war was getting underway by early August, a scant six weeks after the assassination. Today the same unseen forces and their principals are at work, but the situation is more complicated. As a result it would be a mistake to expect the same timetables to apply, but the hollow echoes of 1914 are growing louder and louder in the Middle East today.

For the moment, the complex maneuvers of the American Bolshevik-Zionist junta of the United States and Israel are shifting to other areas than Egypt. On one hand we are hearing more and more about Libya. We're gradually being conditioned to the idea that the Libyan strong man, Khadafy, is a madman who might do just about anything. This, my friends, is just another ingredient which is being prepared to be thrown into the American Bolshevik-Zionist war caldron. When the right moment arrives,

Khadafy can be programmed to do something seemingly insane to help bring on war.

As long ago as 1974, I reported over radio station WMCA in New York that Libya is under the United States CIA control. Khadafy and his henchmen had been brought to the United States and trained by the CIA to carry out a coup d'etat. Khadafy then went back, carried out the coup, and installed himself as Libya's new leader. He also installed the CIA as his indispensable helper. These, my friends, are the facts behind the shocking recent reports of American involvement in Libya.

But more important than Libya is Saudi Arabia. When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 68 on September 30, it seemed that the crucial AWACS deal with Saudi Arabia was in trouble; but I reported that Israel secretly wanted the AWACS deal to be approved. This is part of the plan to set up Saudi Arabia to look like a credible threat to Israel. That will give Israel the excuse it needs to carry out a limited nuclear strike on the Saudi oil fields.

My friends, the decisive turning point in the AWACS debate was the assassination of Anwar Sadat. From that day onward, undecided United States Senators started coming down in favor of the AWACS deal. Some key Senators even changed from being against it to being for it, and said the Sadat assassination had changed their minds. On October 28 the AWACS sale to Saudi Arabia was approved by the United States Senate. It was the "point of no return" for the Middle East! The peace overtures of the late Anwar Sadat have served their intended purpose. These peace overtures have started the world down the road to thermonuclear war!

Topic #2—Two days ago there was a new flood of bad economic news out of Washington. Official unemployment figures jumped from 7-1/2% to 8% in October, just one month's time. The deep slumps in housing and autos are getting deeper, and the Reagan promise of a balanced federal budget by 1984 has now been officially abandoned. At the same time, Government figures show that more and more people are going deeper and deeper into debt. Even as the economy slows down, galloping inflation is continuing to make it harder to make ends meet.

Meanwhile, the privately-owned Federal Reserve Corporation is maintaining the high interest rates that are strangling the economy. It has been only a few short weeks since America's recession was first admitted at all by the President. The entity President Reagan startled reporters by saying the country is in a mild recession. Then other Government spokesmen softened the blow, calling it a "flat period." Now these casual-sounding early admissions are being replaced by reports that grow worse by the day. America's economy is turning sour too fast for reassuring smiles and empty phrases to hide it any longer.

If you want to understand what is really happening to the United States economy, you must keep your eyes on the basics. There are two critical sectors of the economy which are the keys to bringing about prosperity or depression. Those sectors are: Automobiles and Housing. Both are in deep trouble now; and as they go down, they are pulling down our whole economy with them.

The techniques which were used to bring on the Great Depression of the 1930's are once again being used now. Six years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 5 I talked briefly about the wise German professor who taught me finance, banking, and economics. In the 1920's this man had been consulted by the Rockefeller

interests, who claimed that they wanted to know how to deflate inflation; but once he had shown them how it could be done, they misused his information to create the Great Depression instead!

This German economist confided many things to me, and one was: how economies are manipulated. He showed me how the key sectors of Housing and Automobiles can be used to bring down a whole economy; and three years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 41 I gave an early warning that this process was being set in motion. As I reported then, General Motors betrayed its advance knowledge of the plan for a new American depression on November 7, 1978. On that day, GM slashed its dividend rates in half on GM stock. GM's action three years ago took the Stock Market by surprise because auto sales had been good; but since that time interest rates have climbed into the "loan shark" range, and both automobiles and housing have hit upon hard times. A few days ago it was announced that auto sales in the United States have slumped to their lowest level in 23 years.

The last time things were this bad we were in the severe recession of 1957 to 1958. But, my friends, you haven't seen anything yet!

Housing is no better off. Incredible interest rates combined with unchecked inflation in basic prices have cut housing sales of all kinds to a trickle. When you hear those monthly statistics about deepening unemployment, my friends, keep in mind that they are only a symptom of what is happening.

General unemployment is following down the same path that is being taken in housing and autos. In many metropolitan areas, unemployment in construction trades has already reached 20% and is still increasing. Likewise, lay-offs are steadily increasing the unemployment rate in autos. Lost jobs in those two sectors mean other businesses will slow down too. And so general unemployment can do nothing but get worse as things stand right now. Millions of American working people are growing nervous as they see what is happening. Many are especially worried because they sense a fundamental shift taking place in the Government's attitude toward Labor.

Several weeks ago these worries were expressed in the so-called "Solidarity Day Rally" of a quarter million people right here in Washington. This time the Rally was peaceful; but I must report that forces are now at work that are threatening to erupt in violent riots, both here in Washington and in other major cities soon. One catalyst for these riots is likely to be the abrupt cancellation of benefits for the needy. The problem is not so much what is being done as the way it is being done. Instead of phasing out these programs in a way that would give a period of adjustment, they are just being lopped off. Many people are being made to feel that they are being cast onto the trash heap. Resentment and desperation are building. At the same time, shortages are coming in America. These shortages will come to include food, sooner than most of us imagine.

One of the favorite political weapons of the Bolsheviks has always been hunger, because it is so powerful. They used it long ago in Russia. They are using it today in Poland, and they will use it tomorrow right here in the United States! Widespread hunger can be brought about in America even if there is no lack of agricultural production.

In that respect, the situation has changed dramatically during the past year because, my friends, the Soviet Union has called off its program of weather modification to reduce our crops. If

you will recall, the Bolshevik-dominated former Carter Administration declared a grain embargo against Russia in January of 1980. The following month I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 54 that the Kremlin was retaliating by means of massive modification of America's weather. For the next four months I was not able to give monthly updates on the situation because I was recovering from a near-fatal heart attack; but by the time I resumed my AUDIO LETTER series in June 1980, the weather had become big news here in America. Vast growing areas of the United States were in the grip of a scorching drought that was both unexpected and very severe. The Russians made sure that they got their point across to our peanut farmer president then in office. For the first time on record the Deep South peanut crop failed in 1980. It was destroyed by the weather.

The United States grain embargo against Russia had been a Bolshevik attempt to use the-hunger weapon on an international scale, but it backfired. The Russians tightened their belts a notch but suffered little. Instead, it was the United States that was on the brink of an era of hunger due to crop failure, and it would have taken place in ways that could have caused real trouble for our own Unseen Rulers. They want to impose hunger on you and me but only on their own timetable as a way to control us. And so six months ago the grain embargo against Russia was ended. As a result, America's weather returned to normal during the summer of 1981 just passed. The drought-stricken areas of a year ago have in many cases received drenching rains to restore their productivity. As I said earlier, the immediate threat of hunger in America is no longer due to crop failure caused by Russian weather modification. Instead, when hunger strikes, it may well be brought about by a sudden disruption of our food distribution system.

Today we live in an age of agribusiness with production of most of our food stuffs concentrated in a few prime areas. The greatest concentration of all is in California, which produces from 40% to 50% of many of our fruits and vegetables. Other agricultural states specialize in other parts of our food supply—grains, meats, etc. What ties the whole country together so that we all have food to eat is transportation. There is a motto that says "America's needs move by truck." Nowhere is that more true than it is for our food supply. Supermarkets nation-wide carry only about a 3-day supply of food on their shelves. They have to be re-stocked continuously by a steady stream of trucks.

Trucks, my friends, depend upon petroleum supplies in order to keep moving. Once the Saudi oil fields are capped off by the Israeli nuclear strike, there will be a sudden cutoff of much of our oil. If the plan is carried out successfully, it will mean gas rationing and restricted movement for us all. It will also mean serious disruptions in food distribution.

A while ago I mentioned the recent Washington rally under the name "Solidarity Day." In a way, that was an ironic name to choose. It makes one think of the so-called Solidarity Labor Union in Poland. In Poland the Solidarity Union is a tool of the American Bolsheviks who are trying to destroy the economy for purposes of revolution and war. Here in America, the American Bolsheviks are also trying to destroy the economy—and for similar reasons. But here, they are trying to do it through the Government itself. As America's economy continues to deteriorate, the battle continues in the secret power struggle to control the United States Government.

The two factions in this power struggle are the State

Bolsheviks and the Corporate Fascists, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 67. Lately this struggle is surfacing in public skirmishes. The latest example is the flap over the White House "guerilla campaign" against Secretary of State Alexander Haig. Meanwhile the destruction of our economy is continuing. Our country is being Polandized—that is, America is being weakened economically to set the stage for war, just as is being done to Poland.

America's economic destruction is being orchestrated by the money managers of the Federal Reserve Corporation and Treasury Department. But to maintain the pretense of trying to help our economy, the plan for a bogus new gold standard for our currency or Treasury Bonds is still moving ahead quietly. I can report that the Federal Gold Commission has now had its life quietly extended by Congress until March 31, 1982. The Gold Standard ploy is intended to look good, but it is a sham. How can an alleged Gold Standard mean anything if the alleged gold reserves do not exist? After all, when President Nixon closed the gold window in 1971, it was because America's gold reserves had been secretly depleted! Nixon's Treasury Secretary at the time was John Connally, and he has now gone public with strong opposition to the Gold Standard idea—and his reason is simple. Last month the New York Times for October 19 quoted Connally as saying:

"We don't have the gold."

Wherever you look, there are nothing but questions about the true status of America's gold supplies. For example: three years ago the major media for once created a sensation about the New York Assay Office. They reported, correctly, that some 5,000 ounces of gold were missing—gone without a trace! Well, my friends, the major media ought to go back and check again with their sources. For the fiscal year ended September 30, 1981, there is still more gold missing at the New York Assay Office! Supposedly there was a tightening of security and procedures there after the scandal three years ago—at least that's what the Treasury Department told the public. But for this past year alone, another 3,163 ounces of gold have vanished.

Yes, my friends, America is being Polandized. Just as Poland is the victim of deliberate economic turmoil, so are we. The objective in Poland is to bring on social upheaval, bloodshed, and the prelude to war. And that is also the objective right here in the United States. When unemployment and hunger riots materialize, they will trigger the secret military "OPERATION GARDEN PLOT" which I first reported in the summer of 1975. It is all part of the plan for a National Emergency to come on the way to NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Topic #3—Early last month on October 2, the entity President Reagan announced his long-awaited decision on the MX Missile Program. For the past several years we've been hearing about the MX and all kinds of possible mobile basing for it. We've been told that the MX will have to be mobile in order to survive a Russian nuclear attack.

Having heard this for years, a lot of people were shocked when they heard the Reagan decision on the MX. He declared that the famous MX race track system out West will not be built after all. Instead, they will simply be used to replace aging Titan missiles when deployment begins in 1986. At least that is the announced plan for the first 36 MX missiles. The President said, in effect, that he doesn't yet know what to do with the rest of the MXs that will be built. That is so even though the Reagan Administration plans to build only a hundred of them—half as

many as previously planned.

Many people who closely follow defense matters were stunned by the announcement. "Whatever happened to the mobile missile idea", they wondered. My friends, the answer is still what I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 55 in June 1980. America's real mobile missile is not the MX at all but a smaller, completely secret missile. It's called the "Minuteman TX", and it is being deployed now on America's railroads! Each TX missile is transported in a special car with a barn-like peaked roof.

A number of my listeners have seen and photographed Minuteman TX missile cars since I described them in my June 1980 report. About six months ago I released a special bulletin which presents two of these photographs. In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I explained that the publicity surrounding the so-called MX program was only a cover for the secret TX mobile missile program. Recently I reported that the TX missile deployment is scheduled to be completed by next spring, around six months from now. Now that the program is nearing completion, the MX mobile missile cover story has just about run its course. That's why the Reagan Administration is now dropping its pretenses that the MX will be mobile.

Controversy will continue to swirl around the MX program, but the idea of a mobile missile is now changing in official public statements. Now that the Minuteman TX system is becoming an accomplished fact, we are beginning to hear trial balloons to get us used to the idea. For example, Senator John Glenn appeared on the CBS television program "Face the Nation" last month on October 18. Senator Glenn said that the Department of Defense ought to deploy a smaller mobile missile than the MX. He proposed putting them in trailers on the nation's roads, traveling all around the country. The system he described was almost identical to the secret TX, the traveling Minuteman, which I made public 17 months ago. There was only one important difference in what Senator Glenn described. He carefully avoided talking about railroads but instead talked about truck trailers. If he had mentioned railroads, he would have "let the cat out of the bag" because railroads are how the secret TX missiles are actually deployed.

The deep secrecy surrounding the Minuteman TX program springs from the fact that it is not a defensive weapon. America's secret military planners plan to use it in a nuclear first strike against Russia. On top of that, the TX missiles in our midst are placing all of us on the front lines for a nuclear attack. Today we are all in the trenches!

Up to now the major media have maintained a news blackout on my charges to this effect, but one magazine has now had the courage to publish my charges together with TX missile car photographs. The magazine is called COMBAT READY. My charges are published in an article titled: "IS THE MX A SHOOT-FIRST WEAPON?" It is in the January 1982 issue which just went on sale nation-wide.

I first reported that America was secretly shifting to a first-strike nuclear policy against Russia in the summer of 1978. At the time, many people found that idea unbelievable; but now, as war itself draws closer, the first-strike posture of the United States is becoming more and more obvious.

Soon after the Reagan MX decision was announced last month, its first-strike implications were spelled out in the New York Times by Herbert Scoville, Jr. Scoville, a former Deputy

Director of the CIA, wrote an article which begins with the words, quote:

"President Reagan's decision on the MX missile signals that the United States is now firmly and publicly embarked on a first-strike strategic nuclear policy. This is a prescription for a nuclear disaster—a disaster unparalleled in the history of mankind."

Scoville points out that the MX as advertised makes sense only as a first-strike weapon. For one thing, the MX is alleged to be an anti-ICBM weapon, but the only way the MX could destroy Russian ICBMs sitting on the ground would be if the Russians had not fired them yet. In other words, we would have to shoot first. Scoville points out that the "shoot first" idea becomes even more necessary in light of the decision to put them in old Titan silos. The Defense Department itself says that Russia's largest missiles, quote: "are capable of destroying any known fixed target with high probability." In other words, the Titan silos cannot be hardened enough to protect them from Russian missiles, so the only way the MX could be used would be to shoot first.

If all Americans were aware of authoritative statements of alarm like this one, perhaps disaster could be averted; but most people these days never hear such warnings. If we are lucky and alert, we may see it once in a newspaper; but it is soon washed away by the never ending flood of lies from Washington. Most of us remain oblivious to the danger, and so we raise not a word in protest as our leaders sell us down the river to disaster!

Even so, the secret first-strike preparations of the United States are not entirely without opposition. The plan is known within the walls of the Kremlin, and Russia's leaders are at work on several fronts. For one thing, they are continuing the campaign of attrition against America's war-making capacity which they started several years ago. One day a railroad train derails and several chemical tank cars, bound for a defense plant, explode. Another day an unexplained explosion wipes a small weapons laboratory off the face of the earth. Next, a rash of military plane crashes takes place. The pattern keeps changing constantly so that it cannot be identified, but it is there and it has its effect!

What the Kremlin hopes for most in its campaign of attrition is that America's war plans will somehow be deterred altogether. That is their hope, but it is not what they actually expect. Of all people on earth, Russia's present-day leaders know the Bolshevik mind. So long as the Bolsheviks here continue to determine American military policy, the Russians are convinced that war is inevitable; and so with their ongoing campaign of attrition, they are trying to limit the damage that can be done to Russia.

From time to time the Russians carry out something spectacular in their double campaign of deterrence and attrition. As I say these words, an incident has just ended that had deterrence as its main purpose. I'm referring to the celebrated case of the Soviet submarine which ran aground in supersensitive restricted Swedish waters.

Three weeks ago Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger became the first American Defense Secretary ever to visit Sweden. He spent four days there. The Bolsheviks here want to entangle Sweden and all of the North countries in their war plans. The Russians are equally determined to prevent that, so it was decided that Sweden should be encouraged to think twice before involving themselves

militarily with the United States.

Two submarines were dispatched to the Swedish coast. Both were instructed to use their sonar-defeating equipment to penetrate the Swedish coastal defense zone. Next, one was to play "cat and mouse" with Swedish anti-submarine forces; the other one was to let itself be discovered deliberately, deep inside one of Sweden's most sensitive naval zones. This is how the case of Soviet Submarine 137 came about.

It has been portrayed as an embarrassment for Russia, but it was really the opposite. The Russian Sub Commander maneuvered his boat so deeply into tricky, heavily defended waters as to make it painfully obvious that it was no accident. Then, in a demonstration of the wry Russian sense of humor, he carefully nudged his boat onto some rocks and just waited to be discovered. After a while, the "sub" was discovered—not by the Swedish Navy but by a fishing boat! At the purely professional military level, it would be hard to imagine anything more embarrassing for the Swedish Navy, or more sobering. Just to make sure though, the other Russian "sub" started through its paces as soon as Sub 137 had been found on the rocks. The second "sub", deep within Swedish territorial waters, de-activated its sonar-defeating equipment and then prowled around as noisily as possible until a Swedish Anti-submarine Warfare Task Group arrived. The Swedes were all set to start dropping depth charges on the seemingly trapped "sub." Then the sonar-defeating equipment was turned on again and the "sub" simply vanished.

Taken all together, the total experience was a downright scary one for the Swedish Navy. The Russians allowed the Swedes to save face in the public eye; but it was the Swedes, not the Russians, who heaved a sigh of relief when Soviet Submarine 137 returned to international waters two days ago. The Russians are hoping the Swedes will not involve themselves in America's suicidal first-strike posture; but, my friends, they will!

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my LAST MINUTE SUMMARY. As I say these words, an American space shuttle is once again being prepared for launch. We're told that it is the shuttle "Columbia", but that shuttle was destroyed by Russia last April. Instead, it is the training shuttle "Enterprise", relabeled Columbia, that now sits on the pad at Cape Canaveral.

According to my latest information, NASA still plans to carry out an aborted mission of some type. It may be an aborted take-off as I first reported last June, or it may be an abbreviated orbital mission; but in any event, the lives of the astronauts are in very grave danger!

Whatever NASA does, it will be a desperate gamble. They are trying to keep up public appearances so that their military space shuttle plans will not be halted; but Russian Cosmospheres are once again on patrol along the Cape Canaveral launch corridor. This shuttle is carrying no military payload, so perhaps they may not interfere—PERHAPS. No matter what happens when the space shuttle takes off, one thing is certain: the Government will not tell you and me the truth about it. The space shuttle could be a tool for peace, but our Leaders are trying to use it instead to prepare for war—nuclear war!

Like the Sadat assassination, the MX missile decision, and America's worsening economy, the Space Shuttle Program is launching us into disaster!

What we lack most of all these days is the truth. Our Rulers have built their power on lies. So long as we accept those lies, we remain within their power to use and destroy us. They walk in darkness, and they try to keep us in the dark. The only way to break free, the ONLY WAY, is to SEEK AND CHERISH THE "TRUTH." The light of the Truth takes away the power of darkness and lies. The Truth is the Sword of our Lord Jesus Christ, and with it mankind can yet be free and live in peace. The choice, my friends, is up to you and me.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #70

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is December 27, 1981, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 70.

Two days ago my family and I joined millions of other Christians world-wide in celebrating the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ. It was a day of family togetherness, of worship, and of joy. That's how it is for those to whom our Lord Jesus Christ is the whole reason for Christmas; and yet, in our modern world, the holiday called "Christmas" means different things to different people. To some it's just an excuse to give and receive gifts without any deeper meaning. To others, the Christmas season is mainly a chance to make money from the bonanza of gift buying. And, yes, there are some among us to whom Christmas is a sad time—parents who cannot afford any gifts for their children, children who have no parents, lonely shut-ins to whom no one brings a word of Christmas cheer. All of us know about these things. They are the facts of life.

Christmas, like the rest of life, is largely what we make of it; and, my friends, in our modern world there are evil forces who have learned to use the holiday season to do us harm. It has happened before, many times. Those who bear us ill will know they can always count on us to be preoccupied and vulnerable during the holiday season.

This began to be used against us as long ago as 1913. That year the United States Congress ostensibly passed the legislation creating the FEDERAL RESERVE SYSTEM. There was intense opposition to this unconstitutional privately-owned central banking system, but no matter. Those who wanted it simply waited until just before Christmas. Most Congressmen had gone home, including most of the opponents to the plan within Congress. The public at large neither knew nor cared about obscure financial legislation at that moment. Everyone was too busy thinking about Santa Claus, parties, and Christmas dinner to come. And so as its Christmas gift to America in 1913, a small group of men—less than a legal quorum in Congress—slipped through the Federal Reserve Act! Ever since that time the United States economy has suffered continuously from that Christmastime act of betrayal.

In military affairs, too, the Christmas holiday season is always a dangerous time. That is when we are most likely to have our guard down, vulnerable to surprise attack. On December 6, 1941, thousands of American Servicemen attended pre-Christmas parties in and around Honolulu, Hawaii. Everything was peaceful, and life was good. There were no military alerts and all was

calm. After all, it was almost Christmas. But the following morning, Sunday morning December 7, 1941, more than 2000 of those Servicemen lost their lives. From that day onward the name "Pearl Harbor" has been seared forever into the mind of every American.

Yes, my friends, that's how it's been time after time in the past, and that's how it's been once again during the holiday season of 1981. We are especially vulnerable this time because our usual holiday preoccupation has been compounded by mounting economic worries. During this holiday season, my friends, not one but three major crises have been set in motion. All three are helping to bring the world one step closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE CHRISTMAS CRISES FOR NUCLEAR WAR ONE Topic #2—THE AMERICAN SPACE SHUTTLE FAILURE NO. 2 Topic #3—A NEW SCANDAL OVER AMERICA'S DISAPPEARING GOLD.

Topic #1—During the holiday season of 1981 from around Thanksgiving until now, three major crises have besieged us. First, there were all those stories about the alleged Libyan "hit men" bent on assassinating top leaders of the United States Government; Second, there was the military crackdown in Poland; and Third, as soon as world eyes were riveted on Poland, came Israel's illegal annexation of the Syrian Golan Heights.

On the surface these three crises may appear to be unrelated; but they are all closely related, my friends, and they are not what they appear to be. Each is a consequence of the complex secret war plan of the joint military junta of the United States and Israel!

Ever since early spring of this year 1981 I've been reporting on this war plan. It's the brain child of the American Bolsheviks and their Zionist cohorts in Israel. Briefly stated, the plan is to engulf the world in a swirling caldron of crises so widespread that it will be impossible to prevent nuclear war.

The conflicts are intended to gradually escalate until the time is ripe. Then an American nuclear first strike will be launched against Russia. Nuclear war will break out in such a way that it will appear to be accidental. America's nuclear forces will not realize that they are firing the first shots of nuclear war. Instead, they will be given false information that will trigger all-out retaliation against a non-existent Russian attack! I have given many details about all this in earlier AUDIO LETTER reports.

The prelude to all-out nuclear war is planned to include war in the Middle East. In the joint war plan of the American Bolsheviks and the Israeli military planners, the Middle East war is the responsibility of Israel. In AUDIO LETTER No. 68 I called attention to the way in which this is making Israel the eye of a growing hurricane of violence.

The storm of crises is continuing to grow outward. Close to Israel, the top priority is to do everything possible to destroy the Camp David Peace Accords, so called. That's why the entity known as President Sadat of Egypt was assassinated on October 6. Likewise the Camp David Accords were the real target in the Golan Heights annexation. I'll come back to that later on.

Moving farther out from Israel, the whirlpool of trouble has

now engulfed Libya to the west and Poland to the north. Soon we'll see new flare-ups of major trouble to the east of Israel in Iran, and to the south of Israel in Saudi Arabia.

LIBYA—CRISIS NO. 1

The first of the three Christmas crises to erupt was the one over Libya. Actually the first trial balloons about possible Libyan assassination teams were floated in early November; but it was not until around Thanksgiving, the beginning of the holiday season in America, that Libya suddenly became the lead story in American news reports. By early December we were being told that a group of three to six "hit men" were thought to be in the United States. It was claimed that they were gunning for the President and several other top Government officials. We were told that the threat was expected to be greatest up until Christmas, and there was a big display of increased security for possible targets.

Up to now, the alleged Libyan assassination threat has not been carried out; but, my friends, that does not mean that the Libyan crisis is over. In my last AUDIO LETTER No. 69 I reported that Libya's Colonel Khadafy could be programmed to behave like a madman. That's exactly what is being done right now. You'll be hearing more about the Libyan crisis in the days to come. When you do, be sure to keep your eye on the ball. Supposedly Khadafy wants revenge against the United States. He wants revenge for the two Libyan jets which were shot down last August, supposedly by jets from the supercarrier U.S.S. Nimitz.

My friends, the controlled major media are delivering a clever dose of psychological conditioning to us all. What they seem to be telling us is: Watch out for a possible assassination of top American officials; but at the subconscious level, they are slipping in other major ideas. One idea is: Watch out for Libyan revenge of some kind for the Nimitz episode of last August. With revenge as the excuse, Libya's Khadafy can be programmed to do almost anything and whatever it is, it will be big and it will help push us closer to nuclear war.

As I say these words, Libya has been pushed into the background in most American minds. The Libyan crisis has not run its course, but it has been upstaged by a seemingly greater crisis—the military crackdown in Poland.

POLAND—CRISIS NO. 2

For three years now the old Bolsheviks from Russia, who now control America's military policies, have been trying to trigger revolution in Poland. They first attempted to do this by subverting the Roman Catholic Church. In AUDIO LETTER No. 37 in August 1978 I gave a warning that there would shortly be turmoil in the Vatican. An attempt was about to be made to turn the Catholic Church strongly anti-Russian in its policies. Barely a month later the newly elected pope, John Paul I, died unexpectedly. He had been murdered, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 39. His replacement, who became known as Pope John Paul II, was the first non-Italian pope in 455 years, and he came from troubled Poland. The Bolsheviks within the Vatican who engineered his election wanted only his potentially anti-Russian image, not the man himself; and so he, too, was done away with by poisoning and replaced by a "double" on November 21, 1978. The new "actor pope" then began issuing a steady stream of stiff statements against alleged Russian repression of Poland.

In January 197 9 I reported that the plan of the American

Bolsheviks to use their power in the Vatican was moving fast. That month in AUDIO LETTER No. 42 I gave the details of the Bolshevik plan to set off what would be known as the "Pope's Revolution" in Poland. The key to that plan was to be a visit by the actor pope to Poland the following May. The highly emotional 900th anniversary of St. Stanislaus' martyrdom was to be used as the perfect occasion to set off revolution. The Russian and Polish authorities were able to head off the Pope's Revolution plan almost at the last minute. Russian Intelligence was able to replace the Bolshevik actor pope with their own "double." Immediately the Vatican agreed to a one-month postponement in the papal trip. That eliminated the emotionally-charged atmosphere of the original date, and the trip went off without a hitch.

Having had their Vatican intrigues foiled for the moment, the Bolshevik planners here in America started down a different route. Their agents within Poland started agitation for an independent labor union to be known as SOLIDARITY. In the old days when the Bolsheviks themselves controlled both Russia and Poland, an independent labor union would have been unthinkable; but things have changed and are still changing in Russia and in Poland. Solidarity was granted a charter by the Polish government in August 1980. The Bolsheviks here in America had hoped that the demand for a union charter would, in itself, lead to confrontation with the Polish government. When that did not happen, Solidarity then began a relentless drive of demands, strikes, and more demands without letup.

Well over a year ago I gave a warning that Solidarity had only one purpose; and that purpose, contrary to claims, was not to serve the Solidarity rank and file but to use them. Solidarity was created for the purpose of making conditions steadily worse in Poland until an unavoidable confrontation was created with the government. This month it finally happened.

On December 12 the Solidarity ruling council called for a nation-wide referendum by January 15. It was to decide, in effect, whether the present government of Poland would be allowed to continue at all; and the head of Solidarity, Lech Walesa, was quoted as saying: "I now favor confrontation with the government." In effect, Solidarity had dared the government to either clamp down or cease to exist. Barely 24 hours later martial law was declared in Poland.

Here in the United States news reports and official statements are making the Polish situation look as bad as possible even though it's actually easing right now.

Overemphasis/Dramatization—Poland-Lebanon Comparison

In important ways, my friends, the present situation in Poland reminds me of what happened in Lebanon back in 1958. As you may recall, there was a flare-up of trouble at that time which appeared to threaten the pro-Western government there. President Eisenhower ended up sending in the United States Marines at the height of the crisis. The 1958 Lebanon crisis was big news here in America. News reports here conveyed the impression of a major crisis with widespread violence and the very fate of Lebanon hanging in the balance. Martial law was declared in Lebanon, just as it was two weeks ago in Poland; and just like Poland today, Lebanon in 1958 was under a dusk-to-dawn curfew.

Based on the major media news reports here, most Americans were led to believe that the 1958 Lebanon crisis was a virtual reign of terror; but, my friends, that impression was far from the truth. It was the result of deliberate overdramatization by

the media. Yes, there was a crisis of sorts, that much was true, but the grain of truth was all but lost among the scare tactics and the reports by the controlled major media here in the United States. I think it's worth taking a few moments to describe what really happened in Lebanon in 1958 and how a false picture of it all was painted by the American media because today the same kind of overdramatization is taking place in the reports about Poland; and if we Americans fall for it, we will be dragged one step closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

My own involvement in the 1958 Lebanon crisis began shortly before any fighting had broken out. I was in private legal practice here in Washington at the time but I had become involved in Intelligence work many years before. From time to time I was called upon to undertake Intelligence activities, making use of my civilian status as a cover.

The Lebanon crisis was one of those times. I was contacted by an operative of the CIA and told that an imminent crisis was brewing in Lebanon. I was given a briefing on the situation to the extent that the operative had been able to piece it together. There were indications that a full-fledged civil war was a possibility. The United States Government wanted to prevent that partly because of the very major investments in Lebanon by American business and banking interests. The operative had approached me because I knew Lebanon. I had been there before.

My mission was to go there and find some way to defuse the crisis. By the time I arrived there, tensions were building between the two opposing Lebanese factions. The basic disagreement between them had to do with Egypt's then President Nasser. Nasser wanted the Arab world to unify and throw off all vestiges of Western colonialism. To do that he had turned east for help, to Russia. Nasser's appeals to his Arab brothers were very powerful. In Lebanon this led to conflict between a pro-Nasser faction and an anti-Nasser group who preferred the status quo. It was a conflict between minorities. Most of the people of Lebanon were not actively involved on either side. Even so it did carry the seeds of real trouble if allowed to get out of hand.

The conflict consisted mostly of kidnappings, both real and rumored; sabotaging of roads with oil and nails; and threats and counterthreats arising out of old family feuds. There were also a few scattered snipers, and some rumors of torture but those were never proven to have taken place. No pitched battles took place. The real problem was a growing atmosphere of fear and distrust.

Lebanon has never maintained a standing army of any significance. For that reason, Lebanon's then President Chamoun appealed to the United States for help in keeping order in Lebanon. President Eisenhower responded by sending in the Marines.

Since I was already in Lebanon by then, I went down to the beach to watch the landing. The landing by the Marines was totally without opposition and entirely peaceful. In fact, as Marines waded ashore they were greeted on the beach by young peddlers hawking Coca-Cola; but for the public consumption back home here in America, scenes like that were edited out from television and photographic news coverage. Instead, the situation was dramatized. United States news agency photographers and TV crews got groups of Marines to pose in dramatic menacing gestures. They pointed their guns at imaginary enemies, and in some cases even fired them to please the media

crews. Civilians stood around on the beach watching it all after being shooed away from camera range. Some took out cameras to take snapshots of the goings-on but were brusquely told that their cameras would be confiscated if they took any pictures.

I was staying at the AUB Club, and one evening after that I was having dinner. As I was enjoying my kibbeh I became aware of an unusual conversation between two men at the next table. One was a reporter for the Associated Press, the other was his editor—that is, his boss. The reporter had written a story about the situation in Lebanon, and the AP editor was telling him how he wanted it changed. He went through it line by line from start to finish. As I eavesdropped I could tell that the reporter's original story had been accurate and truthful. For example, he reported that the only menace which the Marines had encountered so far was diarrhea until they learned not to drink the water. He also described how the Marines were spending a lot of their time on the beach sunbathing, reading novels, and eyeing the beautiful girls in bikinis. And, my friends, that's how it really was. I saw it for myself. But the editor was not happy with that truthful news story. Instead, he was instructing the reporter on how to rewrite it to give a different version by using dramatic words. He struck out words, he deleted sentences, he changed words, inserted phrases, rewrote paragraphs. By the time he was finished, the editor had twisted the reporter's story into one that painted a picture of violence, torture, and a warlike atmosphere that did not exist.

Having seen and heard these media distortions in progress, I went on about my business. In the end, the Lebanon crisis was resolved very simply by dollar diplomacy. By disbursing $15-million dollars among the leaders of the so-called warring factions, the United States Government snuffed out the conflict. As one factional leader told me after the settlement agreement had been reached, quote: "For another $15-million dollars I would start another war."

When I got back home from Lebanon I was astonished to learn that my relatives and friends had been worried sick about me. They didn't know the details of my trip but they knew I had gone to Lebanon for some reason and they had feared for my life. When I read the newspaper clippings which they had saved for me, I could see why. The media had indeed painted a totally false picture of the Lebanon situation. The American major media had deliberately distorted their reports, even telling outright lies in order to overdramatize.

My friends, the same thing is going on right now in the reports here in America on the Polish situation. The controlled major media, working hand in glove with our Bolshevik government, are seizing like vultures on every scrap of negative news—every ugly rumor that they can dredge up, every unconfirmed statement, speculation, and outright lies by the Bolsheviks here—all this in order to create the impression here in America of an extreme crisis and inhumane oppression in Poland. The American Bolsheviks are trying to goad Russia into invading Poland. Meanwhile they are so frustrated that they are trying to convince us that we ought to consider martial law as the same thing as a Russian invasion. Can you imagine?

Tough talk by the Reagan entity is making matters worse and scaring non-Bolshevik government officials here in Washington; and night after night on the news we hear a drumbeat of Poland, Russia, Poland, Russia, Poland, Russia. We're being brainwashed for war, my friends; and as in all brainwashing, facts do not matter. It is only the impact that counts and the perception!

All of this is not to say that the situation in Poland is not grave or that there is no crisis there. Of course there is a crisis. When the so-called Solidarity union was created in Poland over a year ago, I reported that its entire purpose was to bring on a crisis like this; and the Bolsheviks here who helped to create Solidarity in Poland are using the crisis to help further set the stage for thermonuclear war against Russia.

The present situation in Poland seems to have been stopped short of outright revolution for the moment; but a revolution is essential in order to bring on Russian intervention which, in turn, will be one of the pretexts for war to come. And so the Bolsheviks here are once again at work within the Vatican, and now control it! If the American Bolsheviks get their way, a new version of the Pope's Revolution plan is on the horizon in Poland. Already the Pope and Poland are linked daily in the news .

GOLAN HEIGHTS ANNEXATION—CRISIS NO. 3

The news of martial law in Poland reached the West early Sunday December 13. The very next day the Begin government in Israel launched the third Christmas crisis. On that day the Israeli government announced its surprise decision to annex the Golan Heights.

The Golan Heights lie along the northeast corner of Israel's border with Syria, and are Syrian territory. They've been occupied by Israeli troops ever since the 1967 war and more recently by Israeli civilian settlements, but under every rule of international law the Golan Heights area belongs to Syria. As always, the Begin government defended its actions in arrogantly self-righteous terms as it made a mockery of the rule of law!

World-wide the reaction was universal condemnation of Israel, and within Israel itself there was also bitter criticism.

Then on December 18 the United States announced that it was suspending (quote) "indefinitely" the allegedly new strategic cooperation agreement with Israel. In response Israel canceled altogether the new agreement with America. By mutual agreement behind closed doors, the United States and Israel are striking an arm's-length pose in public. This is to free Israel's hands to act without restraint later on.

Earlier this week former Israeli Prime Minister Rabin summed it up with the words, quote:

"Annexing the Golan Heights is the beginning of the end of Camp David."

Rabin resigned as Prime Minister on April 7, 1977, because he wanted no part of the war plans then being developed.

The joint war plan of the American Bolsheviks and the Zionists in Israel is still on track, my friends. They are shooting for Middle East war to break out before the end of summer 1982! From there, step by step they plan to make the conflict escalate with other crises continuing to multiply world-wide. It may take many more months after that, but they are confident that they will reach their final goal—thermonuclear war by the United States against Russia. That, my friends, is what the Christmas crises of this holiday season are really all about.

Topic #2—When I recorded AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 69 early last month

on November 8, America was waiting for the second space shuttle mission to be launched. NASA was telling the public that a mission of 5-1/2 days was planned; but I reported that the real plan was for an abbreviated flight. One possibility still being considered was the aborted take-off plan which I had first revealed five months earlier in AUDIO LETTER No. 65; but in my LAST MINUTE comments last month I reported that another plan had also surfaced consisting of an abbreviated orbital mission. Four days later just after 10:00 A.M. November 12 the second space shuttle launch took place from Cape Canaveral, Florida, and that afternoon just seven hours after launch it was announced that the flight was going to be cut short. The secret plan for an abbreviated mission was under way. As an excuse NASA pretended that a faulty fuel cell was responsible.

My friends, the abbreviated space shuttle mission of last month was the legacy of the total disaster which engulfed the first shuttle flight last April. Last April and again last month we saw and heard no part of the real shuttle flight except the Florida take-off. The shuttle Columbia disaster last April was so crushing and the NASA cover-up so elaborate that I devoted my entire AUDIO LETTER No. 64 to that topic. The same theatrical techniques that were used to fool the public last April were used again last month so I'll not go into all of that again, but I do want you to know what the military shuttle team tried to do last month and how it turned out.

Last April we watched the shuttle "Columbia" take off from Florida—but it was a different shuttle called the "Enterprise" which landed in California. The Enterprise had been re-labeled Columbia for purposes of deception.

The Enterprise was a very special shuttle, unlike the Columbia or the three other shuttles which secretly exist. The Enterprise was a training shuttle with its cargo bay filled with rocket fuel tanks. Launched from the top of an airborne 747, the Enterprise was able to make short suborbital flights into space, but due to its fuel tanks it could carry no payload in its cargo bay.

In the wake of the secret space shuttle disaster last April, the military shuttle planners sent the "Enterprise" to Florida, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 65. Originally they were simply trying to buy time. But time is going by fast because the American Bolsheviks are on an accelerated timetable to bring on war! Arguments broke out among the military shuttle planners over the original plan to throw away a launch just to keep up appearances. A scheme was finally cooked up to use the Enterprise itself last month for a military mission.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 69 I reported that a pretended computer problem would be an important factor in the deliberately shortened second shuttle flight. Sure enough, the evening before the launch there was a sudden flurry of activity at Cape Canaveral. Supposedly a data processing module aboard the shuttle—that is, part of its computer system—was misbehaving. We were told that a replacement was flown in, and we saw workmen rushing to install something aboard the shuttle. It was all going on literally at the last minute, just before the large external tanks started being loaded with rocket fuel.

My friends, the last-minute rush at Pad 39-A that evening of November 11 was not to load a computer module as we were told. Instead, special photo reconnaissance equipment was installed in the rear deck of the crew compartment. It was arranged to look out of the two overhead windows. The Enterprise was unable to carry a spy satellite in its cargo bay, as I mentioned earlier,

so instead the Enterprise itself was turned into a spy satellite. The makeshift spy apparatus installed in the crew compartment rear deck was not as good as that of a regular spy satellite, but the military planners here are desperate.

It will soon be four years since Russia finished destroying all of America's spy satellites with her fleet of Killer Satellites. The military shuttle team were hoping to use "surprise" last month in order to get at least a little bit of reconnaissance over Russia. It was hoped that the Russians would consider the Enterprise to be no threat since it could not carry anything in its cargo bay. NASA also did everything it could to convince the Russians that a non-threatening orbit would be used last month. Finally, the launch time was shifted by about 2-1/2 hours on the morning of November 12. That was intended to make it hard for any Russian Cosmos Interceptors to readjust their orbits to attack the Enterprise.

This last item, my friends, reflects a deadly Intelligence error being made by the United States military shuttle planning team. They know about Russia's orbital cosmos interceptors, the Killer Satellites. They also know about the first generation cosmospheres, Russia's Levitating Weapons Platforms. Both were first deployed about four years ago. The American planners know that the space shuttle can outrun the first-generation Cosmospheres, therefore they believe that the orbiting cosmos interceptors are the main threat to the shuttle.

What they do not know so far is that Russia now has a small fleet of semi-experimental second-generation cosmospheres. Last April there were seven in operation. Now there are at least eight. These new cosmospheres called "Super Heavies" or "Jumbos" can outrun and outlift our space shuttle. The Russians gave NASA a very spectacular hint about their existence last April, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 64.

There are some in America's Intelligence community who have correctly interpreted what happened, but the Bolsheviks here who control America's military space program are refusing to believe it. They are explaining away the fragments of Intelligence about the new Russian Jumbo cosmospheres and thereby guaranteeing their own failure.

When the "Enterprise", relabeled Columbia, took off from Florida last month there were no human pilots aboard. It was a suicide mission. The Enterprise followed an evasive, curving launch, just as the Columbia did last April. It headed far to the north toward a near polar orbit. When it passed over Russia the Enterprise was to be upside down with its spy camera staring downward through the crew compartment windows. Five Jumbo cosmospheres were on hand and kept pace with the shuttle as it climbed toward orbit; but when they notified Moscow of the course it was taking, they were told not to fire. Instead the Russian Ballistic Missile Defense Forces were alerted. The Russians know war is coming and they decided to use the approach of the shuttle as a test drill.

Nearly two years ago I reported that Russia was preparing to deploy a new anti-ballistic missile system. It's based on charged particle beam weapons fired from modified supersonic TU-144 Jet Transports. On November 12 a squadron of TU-144s were scrambled to intercept and shoot down the Enterprise. The Jumbo cosmospheres continued pacing the shuttle from a distance as a backup if the TU-144s should fail—but they did not fail. The Enterprise swept downward from the north across the strategic Kola Peninsula. As it crossed over the White Sea the big jets

began firing upward with their beam weapons at the shuttle far above. The third beam blast tore through the midsection of the shuttle and it broke in half just behind the crew compartment and disintegrated.

Here in the United States NASA went ahead with its made-for-television space movies and followed the pre-planned script for a shortened mission. They knew within an hour after launch that the Enterprise had been destroyed. Having learned about Russia's plans last April to create an international incident with a crashed shuttle, they wanted to complete the flight in the world's eyes quickly.

The shuttle landing at Edwards Air Force Base, California, on November 14 was a replay of the show we saw last April. And when I say "replay", my friends, I mean it literally. Those long distance telephoto shots of the shuttle swooping in from the stratosphere were the same ones that we saw last April. NASA merely fed video tapes of the long distance scenes from last April to the networks and added a fresh narrative to them. The only part of the landing that was live last month was the terminal portion which could be seen from the ground. The shuttle we saw land, my friends, was one of the secret new shuttles from White Sands. It had been carried aloft by the launch 747 aircraft, boosted to a modest speed and altitude by a pair of solid fuel booster rockets and then swooped down to delight the crowd.

As of now, NASA claims to be planning the third shuttle flight for March 1982, just three months from now. And, my friends, this time the launch may well take place on schedule or close to it. The embarrassing quandary of what to do with the Enterprise is now over with.

Now a new shuttle, the third we have seen with the name "Columbia" on it, is at Cape Canaveral. Its cargo bay awaits a new secret military pay load. My friends, this shuttle has been modified. It is armed for battle in space, but the Bolshevik military planners here refuse to understand what they are really up against—and so at Cape Canaveral another tragedy is now in the making!

Topic #3—For eight years now the powers that be here in America have kept a blackout on the covered up FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL in our allegedly free press, but outside the United States there is a new upsurge of journalistic interest in what has happened to our gold. Unlike the controlled American major media, some foreign reporters have started asking questions again, and some of them don't like the answers they are getting from the United States Treasury Department.

Earlier this month in its December 15, 1981 issue, a nationally circulated tabloid called The Globe published a cover story about our missing gold. It was titled appropriately "66-BILLION DOLLARS IN GOLD GONE FROM FORT KNOX."

The Globe appears on newsstands and supermarkets and drug stores all over the United States but its editorial control lies outside the American blackout, in Canada. And just two weeks ago on Sunday December 13 an even harder-hitting article was published in England in The Sunday Express of London. It was titled: "UNITED STATES PROBES FORT KNOX ROBBERY." The article, written by correspondent David Markham, begins, quote:

"The American Gold Commission in Washington will this week begin an examination of Treasury documents to decide whether 7000

tons of gold, enough to fill 300 lorries, has been stolen from Fort Knox, the world's biggest and most protected bullion store."

The article then reviews the basic charges which I have made together with my friend Mr. Edward Durell, and it mentions that the Treasury is trying to refute our charges by providing certain documents to the Gold Commission. The article then zeros in on the question of the missing 165-million ounces of Fort Knox gold that I reported on in the spring of this year. If you will recall, I urged all my listeners to send Mailgrams to the entity President Reagan last spring demanding that this be looked into immediately. Based on glaring conflicts among the Treasury's own documents, this staggering amount of gold disappeared without a trace from 1961 to 1971.

Those of you who did as I asked last spring received your own evidence that this Administration, like those before it, is sitting on the Gold Scandal. They're continuing to cover it up, and the replies you received did not answer the question of the missing 165-million ounces of Fort Knox gold.

The London Sunday Express article which I mentioned a moment ago focused in on that awesome amount of missing gold. They asked the Treasury Department to explain it, and now listen to the incredible reply they received. Quoting once again from the article:

"At the Treasury Department in Washington Jerry Nisenson, Deputy Director of Gold Market Activities said: 'We have investigated the claims of Dr. Beter and his supporters and we contend that the gold was not stolen. There is no cover-up. They have misinterpreted our books. The gold was being refined into better quality gold and those ounces just went up the chimney.'"

My friends, if anyone swallows that explanation then I give up. Three hundred (300) truckloads of gold went up the chimney?? If it did, then enough gold dust should have settled out of the air to gold-plate New York City.

The United States Treasury Department is continuing its cover-up of what The London Sunday Express article says, quote: "would amount to the biggest theft in criminal history."

My friends, they are lying, and because they are lying the Fort Knox Gold Scandal refuses to die. One might think that the forces behind the ransacking of Fort Knox might want to lay low for a while under the circumstances; but No. Those who stole the Fort Knox gold have so far been powerful enough to keep it under wraps. They are so arrogant that they believe they can never be stopped, and so they are now compounding the felony with a new Fort Knox-style gold theft! It's going on right now as I say these words. The target this time is the United States Treasury Assay Office in New York City. The New York Assay Office is the Treasury's second largest depository for gold. Having successfully robbed Fort Knox, which is the biggest depository, the New York Assay Office is next in line.

In late October rumors circulated briefly in New York City that the so-called Reagan Administration plans to close the Assay Office. For that reason, the rumors said that the gold there might be moved out and taken to the West Point Depository up the Hudson River from New York. An article about it was published in the New York Daily News for October 27, 1981. Treasury officials immediately denied it all, saying no shipments of gold out of the New York Assay Office were imminent. But as usual, my friends,

they lied.

At 10:00 P.M. Saturday night November 7, 1981, a secret meeting got under way at the New York Assay Office. Those present included: Donna Pope, Director of the Mint; Dr. Alan Goldman, Deputy Director of the Mint; James Edwards, Officer in Charge at the West Point Depository; New York Assay Office employees, and others. The entire group remained at the Assay Office overnight. Then at 5:00 A.M. the following Sunday morning, November 8, they departed. They were accompanying the first secret shipment of gold out of the New York Assay Office 'reportedly' bound for the West Point Depository. The shipment consisted of four (4) truckloads totaling 2.18-million ounces. Shipments have been continuing like this ever since. Every shipment leaves in the dead of night in elaborate secrecy. Everyone at the Assay Office who knows about the shipments has been sworn to secrecy about them. Meanwhile the gold stock there is being depleted rapidly—four (4) tractor-trailer loads at a time. I can report that shipments of four truckloads each left the New York Assay Office on December 10 and December 11. The combined total amounted to 144 skids with 80 bars each, or over 11,500 bars totaling over 4-1/2 million ounces. Additional shipments of four truckloads each were scheduled for December 17 and 20 according to my latest information. There is a mad rush to complete all shipments before the end of the year! New York Assay Office employees who see all this going on are being given the excuse that this is being done, quote "for security reasons"; but that, my friends, is ridiculous.

In spite of the security problems at the Assay Office which I have discussed in the past, security at West Point is vastly inferior. The West Point Depository was never designed for gold bullion safekeeping. It's mainly for the storage of pennies. It's not designed as a fortress like the New York Assay Office. There's no high-security gold vault at West Point. There are no iron gates, no bars, no military guards; and unlike the New York Assay Office which is situated in Lower Manhattan, the West Point Depository is isolated, totally isolated. Anything could go on there and no one would know.

The point is this, my friends: the gold is supposedly being moved secretly to a location without adequate storage facilities and with very low security. In other words, it's being made easy to steal; and, my friends, I have already received preliminary reports that some of this gold has already begun going to places other than the West Point Depository!

Meanwhile, day by day the economic news becomes more gloomy. America's economy, once the strongest in the world, is coming apart at the seams. The United States dollar, once as good as gold, is shriveling before our very eyes. In pretended response our leaders are giving us nothing but theories, rhetoric, political grandstanding, and hypocrisy. They continue to paper over and cover up the root causes of our economic woes.

Up to now the so-called Reagan Administration has been guilty mainly of hiding the past thefts of America's gold, but now they are compounding their guilt. A major new gold theft scandal is brewing at the New York Assay Office. The entity known as Ronald Reagan pretends to be upset over alleged mistreatment of the Polish people and yet he is mistreating his own people in many ways !

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. My friends, the

Christmas crises involving Libya, Poland, and the Israeli annexation of Syria's Golan Heights have nudged us one step closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. War preparations continue apace involving the space shuttle and many other secret developments. Events are speeding up. Under the circumstances, I have some comments to make about the future of my AUDIO LETTER Intelligence report series.

As you know, I initiated my AUDIO LETTER as a monthly report on cassette tape six and a half years ago in June 1975. Almost two years ago, in February 1980, my tape reports were interrupted by a near fatal heart attack. By the grace of God I recovered enough to resume my AUDIO LETTER reports four months later in June 1980. Since that time my health has continued to improve and today I feel that it is essentially back to normal, and yet you have probably noticed that these days I am no longer recording the AUDIO LETTER on a truly monthly basis. This is not because I am physically unable to do it; instead, it's because the events taking place behind closed doors have repeatedly been delayed in coming to fruition. Rather than give you a partial report, I have waited to give you the full story; but now, as we draw closer and closer to war, events are speeding up.

Some of you have asked me to release reports more often. Many of you have also indicated your interest in receiving some type of printed report, and I cannot ignore the fact that due to the current recession more and more people who are interested feel that they can no longer afford a cassette tape. At the same time we, too, are being squeezed by ever-increasing costs in this stagflation era. I have given considerable thought to how to meet these emerging needs and I believe the time has come for a new phase in my AUDIO LETTER Intelligence report program.

In this new phase, my cassette tape reports will continue on a less frequent basis and they will be joined by a completely new printed newsletter which will be more frequent and less expensive. To be more specific, here's what I propose to do:

First—My basic AUDIO LETTER cassette tape reports will continue but on a less frequent basis. My present plan is to record AUDIO LETTER No. 71 next month, January 1982, and then quarterly after that—that is, every three months. When I record each AUDIO LETTER tape I will try to concentrate on broad perspectives and major basic new Intelligence.

Second—For the first time ever I now hope to inaugurate a brief printed newsletter soon, to be known as the "AUDIO LETTER UPDATE." My hope is to issue the printed UPDATE report every two weeks except when I record a tape, and two holidays per year—that is, there will be 20 printed UPDATE issues per year. My printed UPDATE newsletter will be exactly what the name implies—a fast update on fast-breaking events behind closed doors.

Most of the basic background you need in order to understand coming events has already been presented in my 70 AUDIO LETTER tapes plus several AUDIO BOOK tapes. With events now speeding up, my printed UPDATE newsletter will refer you back to this information which is already available; and on that basis it will bring you up to date on the latest developments.

Subscription prices for the new printed UPDATE newsletter will come to less than $10.00 for three months at this time in the United States and Canada. There will also be greatly reduced prices for multiple copies of any issue. Many of you have told me that you want this so that you can help spread the truth to

others more quickly.

You'll be able to subscribe in any one of three ways:

(1) You can subscribe to my AUDIO LETTER tape alone if you wish, receiving it quarterly after No. 71;

(2) Or you may subscribe to the reduced-cost printed UPDATE newsletter only, receiving it every two weeks with six (6) exceptions throughout the year;

(3) Or you may subscribe to both, which I recommend if you can afford it. Incidentally, the combined price of both subscriptions—tape plus printed UPDATE newsletter—will be about the same as the tape alone in the past.

For those who have paid-up subscriptions to my AUDIO LETTER beyond No. 71, naturally we will make equitable arrangements to accommodate you.

My friends, our business office will be in touch with you about the details concerning your subscription after I record AUDIO LETTER No. 71 next month, but for now I wanted you to know my thinking and give you a chance to respond. After a great deal of thought and consultation with my associates, I believe that this new step may be necessary. In this way I believe I can serve your needs as you have expressed them to me. Also, I believe this is a way to help you to keep up with the increasing pace of life-and-death events.

Let me hear any thoughts you may have about this new plan right away by card or letter. I want to know your reactions before I announce my final decision about it next month in AUDIO LETTER No. 71. To make sure I get your messages as quickly as possible, please send your cards and letters to me at our business office in Maryland. The address is:

P.O. Box 276

Savage, Maryland Zip 20763

You may enclose your thoughts to me with renewal or other orders, but please be sure to use a separate piece of paper.

My friends, events are speeding up, and those events are leading toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE, but my hope and prayer is that in the coming year you and I can work together to help give the Truth of our Lord Jesus Christ a chance in our troubled world. If we will do that, then we will all be doing our part to help make 1982 a happy, holy, and peaceful New Year.

Until the next time, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #71

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is January 29, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 71.

On the afternoon of Wednesday January 13 there was a rare blizzard here in Washington, D.C. Government offices and businesses closed up early to allow workers to head home. As commuters fought their way through the worsening snowstorm, the

nation's capital turned into one giant traffic jam. The worst jams of all were on the bridges that led across the Potomac River to the nearby suburbs in Virginia. Motorists inched across the snow-swept bridges in bumper-to-bumper traffic.

Only a few hundred feet above the jam-packed bridges, jet airliners were climbing into the swirling snowstorm. The planes were taking off from National Airport nestled next to the River just south of the heart of Washington. Following required procedures, the jets were twisting and turning to stay over the Potomac River as they climbed.

Suddenly drivers on the twin 14th Street bridges, closest of all to the Airport, looked up in horror. A blue, green, and white jet liner came screaming down out of the blizzard. There was a deafening roar; a smashing of metal that shook the bridge; a giant splash that shattered the smooth ice on the Potomac; then for a shocked moment, silence; then pandemonium as people poured out of their stalled cars. On the bridge there was a grizzly scene of wrecked cars. A 50-foot span of the bridge railing was gone, and in the river below the shattered remains of the jet liner were fast sinking out of sight. Soon special news bulletins were flashing across the country. An Air Florida Boeing 737, Flight 90 to Tampa, Florida, had crashed on take-off from Washington's National Airport!

In the immediate aftermath of the tragedy, news reports focused on the heart-rending human interest aspects of the crash. Time after time we have seen television scenes of the make-shift rescue efforts. Few will soon forget those numbing scenes of a precious few survivors being fished out of the icy Potomac River. Millions were inspired by the heroism of a bystander who risked his own life by swimming out to rescue a drowning woman. And, my friends, our Lord Jesus Christ Himself will reward the greatest hero of all that day. He was the crash survivor who time after time passed the rescue ring to others and then perished himself. He was the man to whom the entity President Reagan referred the following day in a New York City speech. Speaking as he was in the true Bolshevik-Zionist capital of the United States, our alleged president misquoted our Lord Jesus Christ in the words "Greater glory has no man." Surely the man who gave his life that others might live deserves a better epitaph than a politician's preoccupation with glory. What our Lord Jesus Christ really said was: "Greater love hath no man than this, that a man lay down his life for his friends." That is what our Lord Himself did nearly 2000 years ago, and that is what the man in the water did after the crash of the Air Florida Flight 90.

My friends, the very human tragedy of the crash of Flight 90 is important all by itself; but if we are to have any hope of avoiding even greater tragedies that are looming ahead, we must look beyond the human-interest stories. We need the answers to some important questions such as: Why was there a plane crash at all that day? Why that plane? And what made it crash?

We are being led to believe that we are being given answers to those questions; but the true answers, my friends, are far different from what you have heard up to now!

The crash of Air Florida Flight 90 was a terrible tragedy, but it was also more than that. It was also intended as a warning to certain powerful circles here in the United States, and as such it was not an isolated incident but part of a much larger pattern now taking shape.

For some five years now a secret war has been underway between

the present rulers of Russia and those of the United States. The secret war has waxed and waned, and now it's heating up once again. In the ongoing secret war it is now Russia that is taking the offensive. Having put out the fuse on the Poland time bomb at least for the moment, the Kremlin is now counterattacking against their Bolshevik enemies here. Russia's secret new rulers are trying to send a message to the Bolsheviks, who have seized power here in America. The message is: WAR DOES NOT PAY. The Russians are delivering this warning message in many ways which are totally unsuspected by most of the public.

My friends, the Russians are once again unleashing geophysical warfare against the United States and against some of our allies. One aspect of this geophysical onslaught is weather warfare. The crash of Air Florida Flight 90 was brought about in the midst of largely manmade severe weather. The Russians are also firing warning shots across America's bow by means of another geophysical warfare weapon—artificial earthquakes. The Russians are also readying themselves for attack on another front—the economy of America and the West. This month, January 1982, the Kremlin has scored a stunning economic coup. Before the year is out the entire economy of the United States will be vulnerable to a total collapse at Russia's hands!

In this AUDIO LETTER I want to give you the details about the new Russian offensive now underway. Also, I plan to resume reporting each month by means of the AUDIO LETTER tape series. Based on the response of my comments in AUDIO LETTER No. 70 last month, I believe this is the best way I can serve you after all at this time. I will say more about that in my "Last Minute Summary."

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE "SIBERIAN EXPRESS" AND RENEWED RUSSIAN GEOPHYSICAL WARFARE

Topic #2—RUSSIA'S SECRET ECONOMIC COUP IN DOLLAR ASSETS Topic #3—THE SHIFTING ALLIANCES FOR NUCLEAR WAR ONE

Topic #1—In his famous Liberty or Death speech of March 1775, Patrick Henry said some words that have taken on new meaning in our modern age. He said, quote:

"Gentlemen may cry, peace, peace; but there is no peace. The war is actually begun! The next gale that sweeps from the north will bring to our ears the clash of resounding arms!"

Today, voices in Washington talk of keeping the peace; but today, even more than in Patrick Henry's day, the cries of "peace" are a sham. A secret war is underway, and this month unprecedented gales have swept in from the north as part of that secret war.

For the United States as a whole, January 1982 has been the most severe in history. Records for low temperatures have been broken by wide margins in countless places from the Canadian border to Florida. There has been blizzard piled on blizzard to paralyze even the northern states who are accustomed to snow, and in vast areas of the southern United States there have been historically unprecedented blasts of sub-zero arctic air. Snowstorms, sleetstorms, freezing rain, bitter cold—that has been the story for the eastern two-thirds of the United States this January.

Meanwhile, the west coast has primarily faced a different problem—spells of incredible rainstorms causing giant mud slides and many deaths. And caught in between, the Rocky Mountain

states have had their own unique problems. There have been violent windstorms with winds in some areas more powerful than most hurricanes. Only a few days ago winds reached an awesome 140 miles per hour in northern Colorado.

The National Weather Service of the United States has come up with a popular nickname for the repeated invasions of arctic air this winter. They are calling it the "Siberian Express", and with good reason. Northern Siberia in the Soviet Union is one of the coldest regions on the face of the earth. That is exactly where the supercooled air has been coming from to spill all across North America; and, my friends, it has been directed here by weather modification techniques!

Russia's basic weapons for massive weather modification are still as I reported nearly two years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. The Russians used two legs of their secret space triad of manned strategic weapons. One leg is their fleet of Cosmospheres which levitate in the Earth's electromagnetic field. Using their beam weapons they are able to guide storm systems by altering the electrical charges in the upper atmosphere. And to set off certain types of storms, the Russians use another leg of their secret space triad—that is, their complex of Moon bases. The enormously powerful particle beam weapons on the moon can be fired into the ocean to set off storms. Squadrons of Cosmospheres then take advantage of natural weather forces to build up and guide these artificial storms. I described the process in detail in AUDIO LETTER No. 54 so will not repeat it again now.

As I revealed at that time, the Russians began using these new weather war techniques against the United States that month, February 1980. The Kremlin was counterattacking against the Carter Administration grain embargo against Russia. The Bolsheviks here were trying to use their old favorite weapon, hunger, against the Russia they used to control. Russia's new rulers responded with weather control designed to reduce our crops; and in February 1980 that took the form of incredible rainstorms lashing agricultural areas of southern California and Arizona. The Carter Administration grain embargo continued through the summer of 1980, and so did Russian weather modification.

Much to the surprise of long-range weather forecasters here, the summer of 1980 set records for drought and blistering heat. Crops died for lack of rain and excessive heat; thousands of cattle died for the same reasons. In the Southwest millions of chickens fried on their feet under the blistering heat wave; water shortages started multiplying nation-wide; and to drive the point home to our then peanut farmer president, the peanut crop failed—something previously unheard of.

The Bolsheviks here still continued the grain embargo through the end of 1980. There was about to be a change of administration, and the new administration was expected to end the embargo; but just to make sure, the Russians kept up the pressure. In January 1981, just one year ago, a strange cold wave hit the United States. As the late Washington Star reported on January 13, 1981, quote: "Siberian cold spread a record freeze across the Southeast today, dipping deep into Florida where citrus and vegetable growers fought to save their crops against the worst winter onslaught of the century." That day it was announced that 25% of Florida's citrus crops had been killed by the freeze. The freeze had also killed up to half of America's supply of certain vegetables. If that news report of a year ago has a familiar ring to it, my friends, it certainly ought to.

The strange river of arctic air that froze America's east coast and damaged Florida's crops one year ago this month was a product of Russian weather modification. It was a limited taste of what could be done. It was a warning to America's rulers that they were courting disaster with their campaign of hunger against Russia. Three months later the grain embargo against Russia was lifted. In response, Russian weather war against America was terminated; and last summer, the summer of 1981, returned to normal in terms of weather.

That is how it stood until mid-December. Then came martial law in Poland; and by then the American Bolsheviks, who did not initially control the so-called Reagan Administration, had regained power here in Washington. Right away the entity President Reagan started talking about sanctions against Russia, just as his predecessor had done over Afghanistan; and once again the new administration started saying that a new grain embargo should be considered against Russia. This time, said the President, steps should be taken to make the embargo airtight. That was enough for Russia's new rulers. They know about the efforts by the Reagan-Begin Axis to bring on war, and they are convinced that the time to talk is growing very short. They are convinced that war is inevitable between Russia and Russia's recently expelled masters, the Bolsheviks, who are now here in America. So in late December the Politburo agreed that the time had come to take the offensive against the United States.

The Russian weather offensive began with a rainstorm attack against the west coast. Using the techniques I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 54, Cosmospheres were deployed partly offshore and partly inland. Those offshore, deployed in quadrangles of four Cosmospheres each, used defocused electron beams to set up negatively-charged vapor clouds. Inland, some distance from the coast, duos of two Cosmospheres each loaded the atmosphere with positively-charged protons from defocused beam weapons. This resulted in the movement of vast quantities of water to target areas for release as rain. The rainstorm attack formation was set up to bring varying amounts of rainfall to most of the west coast, especially California; but the area chosen as the primary target was a 200-mile stretch centered on San Francisco. Their reason for selecting San Francisco is very simple. Russia's new ruling group regard the United States as degenerate, and the most degenerate of all west coast cities in their view is San Francisco. For several days beginning on January 5, the region around San Francisco was drenched by unrelenting torrents of rain. It continued until San Francisco was isolated, cut off by flood waters; and in the Santa Cruz area south of San Francisco half a mountain side collapsed carrying with it houses, cars and more than 20 victims. By the weekend the rainstorm attack was tapering off.

The next weather attack was brewing in the form of a vast wave of arctic air—the first Siberian Express was on the way. The technique used for the Siberian Express is a new variation on the Cosmosphere techniques of AUDIO LETTER No. 54. The Russians have now learned how to take a huge air mass from one place in the world and transport it to another area of the planet:

First, the Russians deployed a large number of Cosmospheres, 17 squadrons in all, over northeastern Siberia. The area covered ranged from about 105 to 170 degrees East Longitude, and Latitudes from 65 degrees northward to the Arctic Ocean. These Cosmospheres used defocused electron beams over a period of days to give a strong negative charge to the whole frigid air mass. The Siberian air temperature ranged from 60 to 70 degrees below zero.

Next, a series of Cosmosphere squadrons were deployed at intervals of roughly 1000 miles across the North Pacific toward America. These Cosmosphere squadrons, like beads on a necklace, followed a line from a point north of Japan to the vicinity of Eureka, northern California. The Cosmospheres in this transpacific line formed the tracks for the Siberian Express air mass to follow. Hovering at the fringes of space, they pumped out vast quantities of positive protons to attract the Siberian air mass toward America. The negatively-charged Siberian air was attracted eastward and also higher than normal where it moved relatively unaffected by lower atmosphere weather patterns.

On weather maps the Siberian air masses are drawn as if they are flowing down horizontally from Canada, but the Siberian air actually arrives by a different route. It is pulled in over northwestern North America above the other weather; then from the Continental Divide eastward, Cosmospheres pull it down to flood the land with supercold air. In other words, it spills all over North America primarily from above, not by the normal horizontal path. The Siberian air reaches here so fast by this manmade route that it does not warm up as much as it would otherwise. The result: bone-chilling weather that has many weathermen scratching their heads. And as a by-product of this technique, violent windstorms are created around the edges of the downward-spilling Siberian air. These are especially intense along the Rocky Mountains.

The first Siberian Express cold wave was timed carefully. Earlier I mentioned the January 13, 1981 reports of a freeze that destroyed part of Florida's crops. This year the news on January 13, one year later to the day, a killer freeze had once again just hit Florida, only this time it was far worse. Last January damage amounted to some $230-million, but this time as much as 84% of the Florida citrus and vegetable crops froze for losses of over a billion dollars.

The news of Florida's staggering crop losses came on Wednesday January 13. That same afternoon an Air Florida Boeing 737 tried to take off from National Airport here in Washington. It was the ill-fated Flight 90 bound for Tampa, Florida. Flight 90 and many others were delayed that afternoon because of the snowstorm. The main runway, which runs north and south, was closed for over an hour while the snow was cleaned off. Meanwhile Flight 90 and other planes boarded their passengers and waited at the terminal. As they waited, ground crews sprayed a kind of antifreeze solution on the planes. A surviving passenger of Flight 90, himself a pilot, was quoted two days later in the Washington Post in the words: "They were de-icing the aircraft continuously." Finally word came from the control tower that the runway was ready. Jet liners started pulling away from the terminal, lining up to taxi out to the runway. It was still snowing but reportedly it was a cold dry snow, much less likely to cause icing than sleet or freezing rain. Later one of the pilots of another plane said he thought he had seen ice on the Air Florida jet. Other pilots, though, said they had seen no ice at all on it.

As Flight 90 waited its turn, 18 other airplanes took off without any apparent difficulty—one was a 737 like the Air Florida jet belonging to another air line. Unlike Flight 90, it was carrying a full load of passengers. It took off without incident, but the Air Florida jet was destined to be less fortunate! Unknown to the other passengers there were five important military personnel aboard. They were members of a Special Laser Warfare Task Force assigned to the home of the

so-called Rapid Deployment Force in Florida. That is the military force, my friends, which is undergoing highly secret preparations for the coming Middle East war. Having engaged in meetings at the Pentagon, the men were returning to their home base in Florida.

At last the Air Florida 737 took its position at the end of the runway. As it did so, it was being tracked by a Russian Cosmosphere hovering high above the Airport in the midst of storm clouds; it was armed with a neutron beam weapon. At 3:59 PM the jet started its take-off roll down the runway. The Cosmosphere waited until the jet was about half way down the runway and moving over 100 miles per hour. Then the invisible neutron beam was fired down through the snow at the cockpit of the jet liner. In AUDIO LETTER 64 I described the effects which are produced by an intense blast of neutron radiation. It disrupts all electrical activity. That includes the electrical activity of the human body including the brain, the eyes, the nervous system, and the heart. When the beam was fired at the Air Florida jet, it was expected that the pilot and copilot would be instantly rendered unconscious or killed. That would have left the jet still accelerating, perhaps drifting off the runway, and finally leaving the boundaries of the small airport to plunge into the river. It would have been a very strange crash and one very hard for Government officials here to explain away to the public—but the Russians miscalculated. Individuals vary considerably in their resistance to neutron radiation effects, and apparently someone in the cockpit retained some shred of consciousness.

I cannot tell you what went on in the cockpit, but I can tell you what the plane did. The jet continued down the runway instead of drifting off. There was also an effort to apply the brakes, yet the engines kept going full blast. The plane started shuddering, but the brakes could not prevent the plane from continuing to accelerate slowly. The plane reached full take-off speed as it ran out of runway and rotated upward into a climb. At that point it's believed that whoever was at the controls may have finally blacked out. The plane was pointing upward far too steeply and started mushing through the air instead of climbing normally. No pilot or copilot would have let that continue, and yet it was never corrected. Equally startling, the landing gear was never pulled up. Normally the gear is lifted immediately after take-off to help streamline the plane. That would be even more urgent if a pilot were having troubles with ice, as has been alleged, or if a crash landing were imminent. But when the Air Florida jet dropped out of the snowy sky that afternoon, it was still nose up and gear down, and from brake release to impact there was never a Mayday call from Flight 90.

Five days later a Russian Cosmosphere triggered another spectacular plane crash to continue driving home the warning to our leaders. The pride of the Air Force, the aerial demonstration team called "The Thunderbirds", were practicing near Indian Springs Air Force Base, Nevada. They were practicing a maneuver known as "Line Abreast Loop" in which the four T-38 jets swoop down in a steep dive and then pull up close to the ground. It is not considered the most difficult of the Thunderbirds' maneuvers but it does call for close coordination. The leader concentrates on getting the loop just right, the other three concentrate on following the leader precisely. That afternoon over the Nevada desert a Cosmosphere was waiting. As the four jets screamed earthward, the Cosmosphere waited until they neared the ground. Then the neutron beam was fired at the cockpit of the lead plane, incapacitating the pilot. The lead plane plowed into the desert and the other three, following the leader, did the same.

Meanwhile by that time the nation was in the grip of the second Siberian Express supercold wave. And, my friends, Russia's geophysical warfare campaign includes other things besides the weather.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 59, 15 months ago, I reported that Russian earthquake-generating cobalt bombs had been planted in the Northeast. They are concentrated most heavily around New York City; but as I reported then, also extend northeast into New England. Since that time additional earthquake generators have been planted, and this month they have been used twice. On the morning of January 9 an earthquake measured at 5.9 on the Richter scale was set off in eastern Canada near Maine. It was the worst New England earthquake in 127 years. Nine days later, a second earthquake was set off, this time in New Hampshire.

If there should be another earthquake soon in the Northeast, don't be surprised if it is even closer to New York City. The Russians are on the offensive, and our war-crazy Rulers are refusing to heed these warnings.

Topic #2—This year of 1982 has started out with bad news on the economic front. Inflation is said to have slackened off slightly; but as every householder knows, it has not gone away by any means. Only a short decade ago President Nixon declared a "National Emergency" when official inflation rates reached only 7 to 8%. If anyone had told you then that 10% inflation was on the way, you probably would not have believed it; yet today we are supposed to be "relieved" when inflation drops to that level.

As bad as inflation is, another worry is pushing it into the background in the minds of millions of Americans. The No. 1 worry now is that of losing one's job—and no wonder. Early this month it was announced that unemployment, as officially calculated, reached 8.9% in December. Among blue-collar workers who actually produce the nation's goods, it is even worse. More than one out of eight is out of work. Unemployment is worst of all in the auto industry. Officially, nearly 22% of all auto workers ended December without a job.

The auto industry, my friends, is not just in a recession; it's in a depression. The same is true of housing and construction. And as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 69, these two sectors are the keys to throwing America's entire economy into a DEPRESSION. We are descending deeper and deeper into the mire of economic stagflation—that is, high inflation with high unemployment.

There's nothing accidental about it, my friends. It's being orchestrated by powerful forces who are bent on seizing more power, and the plans were laid long ago! That's why I was able to give details in advance about our present woes eight years ago in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR. For example, American business today is being strangled by a credit crunch, the so-called tight money policy of the privately-owned Federal Reserve Corporation. The tight money and high interest rates, we are told, are the bitter medicine we must take in order to cure inflation. As a result, small and medium-size industries which welcomed inflation just a few short years ago are now in distress because of it. The situation now is the one I tried to warn against eight years ago. On page 83 of my book I expressed it this way, and I quote:

"...in the early stages of stagflation, those industries in debt are able to pay off their indebtedness with cheap dollars.

But, in the later stages, these same industries are apt to experience a scarcity of capital..."

The White House and Capitol Hill are well aware that millions of us are hurting badly from the worsening economic conditions; and so to make political hay, they are all pointing fingers at one another and proclaiming themselves to be our champions. Meanwhile, what have they done concretely to deal with the situation? Why, of course, they are helping themselves!

Only a few days ago the Internal Revenue Service announced a tremendous new windfall tax break for members of Congress. The new rules, which were ordered by Congress, virtually exempt Congressmen and Senators from paying any federal income tax. While the rest of us struggle to make ends meet, Congress has once again made sure that its members do not share our plight. Workers who have given up big chunks of their pay lately in order to save their companies must still pay up to Uncle Sam—but not your Senator or Congressman! I suggest you remember that the next time you see any member of Congress crying crocodile tears about your economic woes.

And what about the Federal Reserve Board which is responsible for setting the high interest rates that are choking our economy? Might the nation's private central banking system relent a bit in view of the frightening upsurge in unemployment?

Federal Reserve Chairman Paul Volcker answered that earlier this week in a speech in Las Vegas. Speaking to a convention of Home Builders, Volcker said in effect that the interest rate crunch is doing what it is supposed to do. Therefore, said Volcker, the Federal Reserve has no intention of lowering interest rates and loosening up money. But then why should anyone expect anything else from Paul Volcker? As I detailed in my book eight years ago, Volcker was one of the prime architects of the long-range plan to ruin the dollar; and I revealed more about Volcker's role about the coming depression and war in my very first talking tape in 1974. In that tape I mentioned Volcker's role as one of the prime conspirators who helped spirit away America's gold.

On all sides, my friends, there is corruption, double dealing, lies, conflicts of interest, and criminality in high places.

Last month I reported that a new phase of the Gold Scandal is underway. It involves the movement of gold from the New York Assay Office to the insecure West Point Depository. The so-called Reagan Administration is preparing to close down the New York Assay Office and is giving excuses for it that make no sense whatsoever. One such excuse is to improve security, but the security at West Point is even worse than that of the New York Assay Office. Another excuse for moving the gold is said to be to save money, but hundreds of thousands of dollars are being squandered at West Point because of the gold transfer. The only real result of the gold transfer will be to make it easier to steal!

As I reported last month, one of the principals involved in implementing the plan to shut down the Assay Office was Dr. Alan Goldman. Goldman has been with the Bureau of the Mint since 1970, and has been its Deputy Director for some time. The Director, Donna Pope, is a political appointee with little more than figurehead status; therefore it's Goldman who has really been running the Bureau of the Mint—that is, until a few weeks ago.

There has been a very odd new development. Having helped to set the events in motion for a shutdown of the New York Assay Office, Goldman resigned from his top job at the Mint on December 22. Reportedly he has accepted a position in private industry. So, what's odd about that? Just this: the New York Assay Office is the only Government-owned facility for refining precious metals in the country. After it is shut down, the Reagan Administration plan is to contract out the refining of gold and other precious metals to a private industrial concern. It will be a bonanza for whoever receives the Government refining contract; and Dr. Goldman, who just left the Mint for private industry, just happens to be an expert in precious metals refining.

The strange circumstances surrounding the plan to close down the New York Assay Office are raising many questions, and those questions multiply in light of major concerns over the shutdown plan from another source.

That source, my friends is the United States Navy. Up to now the Assay Office has played a critical role in the Navy's silver reclamation program. The Navy has an ongoing requirement for silver reclamation from many tons of materials each year. These materials include worn-out batteries, photographic supplies, and many components of classified systems. The Navy sends these things to the Assay Office in New York which extracts the silver and returns it to the Navy. In addition, the silver reclamation program of the Navy generates large amounts of precious metals by-products. These by-products include not only gold but rare metals like platinum and iridium, which are much more valuable than gold. The New York Assay Office does not return these precious metals by-products to the Navy. Instead they're returned to the Government's strategic stockpile of critical materials or to the Treasury. Either way these precious by-products remain in Government hands. The plan to close down the Assay Office has the Navy up in arms.

Transferring the silver reclamation program into the hands of private industry will mean that the Government will lose control of those precious metals by-products! The Navy is convinced that the refining contractor will be in a position to pocket large amounts of the by-products. It will be a tremendous windfall profit for the refining contractor and could even compromise national security. The so-called Reagan Administration claims to consider national security its top priority yet proposes to damage it by the New York Assay Office shutdown. Yes, a precious metals by-products profit windfall awaits the private refining contractor. And, my friends, Dr. Alan Goldman, who has just joined private industry, was the United States Mint's top specialist in the area of extracting precious metals by-products.

Besides the Goldman affair, other developments are raising still more questions about the sudden movement of gold to the isolated West Point Depository. One of these developments is the change which is taking place in the recommendation expected soon from the United States Gold Commission.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 67 I detailed the plan which then existed for the Gold Commission to propose a new pseudo Gold Standard for America, but in recent weeks that plan has been changed. Instead the Administration wants the Commission to recommend only that a new gold coin be minted for its psychological value. The earlier pseudo Gold Standard plan would have required that some gold be on hand, but now the United States Government suddenly needs to be free to sell gold secretly through intermediaries on the free market. The reason is a stunning economic coup by Russia.

United States Intelligence operatives first picked up hints that something big was in the works early last fall. As the information developed, the decision was made to move the New York Assay Office gold to West Point; and earlier this month on January 11 the dreaded Russian economic coup began to take place. What took place that day was a secret financial transaction in Geneva, Switzerland—the first of many which cannot be reversed! A deal was struck which will progressively give the Russian government a decisive economic edge over the United States. It will give the Soviet Union devastating leverage over the United States Treasury Department in particular and thus over the economic fate of this country in general!

When the series of transactions which began this month have been completed, it will give the Kremlin effective control over America's economic structure. The Russians will be in a position to use this unique power in any way they choose. They can use it to disrupt the economic maneuvers of the great and powerful forces here, if desired. They can also use it to destroy the investments and assets of every person having a bank account or fund denominated in dollars, or they can threaten America's rulers with economic blackmail if America's secret war preparations are not stopped. Once the transactions now underway are completed, those capabilities will be in Russia's hands!

The transaction of January 11 was a huge gold sale by Russia to certain other interests. First, Russia had placed billions of dollars worth of gold in escrow under control of three Geneva banks. Then the buyers of the gold paid for it in billions of dollars worth of United States Treasury securities—that is, title to these Treasury instruments of liability was transferred to the Soviet Union. The sale is to be only the first of many because the gold buyers control vast quantities of Treasury securities—that is, billions of dollars worth of Treasury Bills, Notes, and Bonds. These securities bear interest and mature at specified dates. At the maturity date the holder has the right to turn them in and receive full payment of the principal from the Treasury Department, but usually that does not happen. Most big holders of Treasury securities roll them over at the maturity date—that is, the holder exchanges the old note or bond for a new one and continues collecting interest. But now billions upon billions of dollars worth of these United States Treasury securities are beginning to move into the hands of the Russian government; and once they hold a large enough hoard of these Treasury instruments, the Russians can choose not to roll them over. They can present them to the Treasury Department and say, "Pay up."

Intelligence circles here in the United States were notified immediately after consummation of the first deal on January 11. In response certain Government officials here are trying to undo the agreement by attempting to reduce the market price of gold. To that end, gold from what little is left of America's decimated stockpile is being secretly sold on the open market through devious channels; but so far this tactic has had little effect on the gold markets.

In any case, my friends, the agreement has been struck between Russia and certain Persian Gulf Arabs, and both parties have already resolved that they will follow through even if the market price of gold drops to zero, because this financial transaction is a rare one in the history of the world. It is based primarily on moral grounds. Both parties believe that the United States has become hopelessly degenerate. In their eyes, America is Babylon; and until 'Babylon' falls, the world will never know

peace.

As I say these words, the clammy atmosphere of panicky fear is taking hold in certain financial circles here. The sum total of all outstanding Treasury obligations—that is, the national debt—now stands at one trillion dollars! The Soviet Union has now begun acquiring control of a portion of that debt. Top Treasury officials are beginning to see the specter of calamity looming ahead. Some day Russia may, in effect, walk into the United States Treasury as if it were a bank and withdraw her deposits. The strain thus produced could induce other large holders of Treasury securities to do the same out of fear of weakness in the Treasury's position. It could all snowball into the great-granddaddy of all bank runs, an international run on the Treasury of the United States! The Treasury could not possibly pay off the trillion-dollar national debt and so the Treasury would collapse—and with it would go the entire economy of the United States, and finally of the entire Western world.

Topic #3—Three days ago, on January 26, the entity President Reagan gave his first "State of the Union" speech. That same day an all-day meeting took place in Geneva, Switzerland, between the two top diplomats of America and Russia. Secretary of State Alexander Haig and Russia's Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko met far longer than expected that day, nearly eight hours in all.

The reasons given publicly for the meeting were intentionally vague; supposedly there was no particular agenda for the meeting—nothing specific to negotiate, no clear-cut goals to be accomplished. In fact, the main comments the two sides made to reporters beforehand were about what they intended not to discuss. Haig said he would not talk about any resumption of the SALT talks; Gromyko said he would not talk about Poland; and at the end of the day, even the single announced outcome of the discussions was negative. We were told that any effort to set up an East-West summit between Reagan and Brezhnev was being put on a back burner.

That's how the meeting between Haig and Gromyko looked on the surface, but behind closed doors what went on that day was far different. The meeting took place only 15 days after Russia concluded her momentous secret financial transaction, and it was symbolic that both Russia's financial coup and the Haig-Gromyko meeting took place in the same city, Geneva.

The meeting of Haig and Gromyko reflects a startling new turning point in international relations. To understand what happened, it is essential to realize that the struggle for world power today is more complex than it appears on the surface. Daily news reports make it appear that it is basically a struggle between two antagonists—the United States and Russia. Everyone else gets classified as an American ally, or as a Russian satellite, or as part of the non-aligned Third World so called. That concept is simple and easy for just about everyone to understand. It's the old us vs. them idea. Unfortunately it happens to be wrong.

The fact is that today the struggle for world power is not two-sided, but three-sided. There are three great power factions at work in the world today, each one jostling and maneuvering against the other two. I have devoted many past reports to giving you details about these three power factions and their relationships to one another, but let me just remind you once again who they are.

POWER FACTION NO. 1 is the Rockefeller cartel, which embraces Big

Oil, Big Banking, and large chunks of Big Business. Until about three years ago the Rockefeller cartel reigned supreme here in the United States. American government policies were Rockefeller policies, and American wars were Rockefeller wars.

POWER FACTION NO. 2 is the international Bolshevik and Zionist axis. As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER Nos. 49 and 50, Bolshevism and Zionism are closely related and owe their existence partly to Rockefeller help long ago. After Bolshevism was imposed on Russia in 1917, a secret alliance was forged between the Bolsheviks in Russia and the Rockefeller cartel here. For six decades these two factions orchestrated the actions of the Soviet Union and the United States for mutual benefit. By pretending to be enemies, they established a giant pincers movement that was gobbling up the world; but

POWER FACTION NO. 3 has completely changed that picture during the past few years. This third faction is the tightly-knit band of native Russians who have overthrown the Bolsheviks at the top in Russia. Russia's new rulers are a tough sect of Christians who are working from the top down to gradually weed out all the Bolsheviks in Russia. It's a Herculean task, but they are more patient than we in the West. They worked for six decades to seize control of the Kremlin and they know better than to become hasty or impatient now. During recent years the new Kremlin has been expelling the hated Bolsheviks from Russia.

Here in America the Rockefellers made the fatal mistake of welcoming the Bolsheviks from Russia. The Bolsheviks can never share power with anyone, and some three years ago they launched a coup d'etat against the Rockefellers. The coup began with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller, which was quickly disguised and covered up. Then Russian Intelligence intervened here in Washington to prevent the Bolsheviks from achieving total success.

Since that time there have been these three factions struggling for power. Here in America the Rockefeller cartel is fighting a guerilla war against the Bolsheviks for control over our country. The Bolsheviks with their Zionist partners in Israel are feverishly trying to get America into nuclear war against Russia. And in Russia, the secret new rulers are continuing to root out Bolshevism; and as they do so, Christianity is beginning to revive in Russia. It's a long process, but it's happening. At the same time the Kremlin is preparing for what they regard as the inevitable war even as they try to prevent it. So these are the three power factions now at work.

Here in America the Bolsheviks, transplanted here after their expulsion from Russia, bent on war against Russia. Also here in America the Rockefeller cartel, who no longer want war for the reasons I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 67. They are preoccupied with regaining control over America. And the third faction, Russia's new rulers, do not want war for moral reasons.

My friends, the meeting of Haig and Gromyko this week was actually a tough bargaining session between the Russians and the Rockefeller faction here. For entirely different reasons, they presently find themselves with some interests in common! Both are now deadly enemies of the Bolsheviks here—the Rockefellers on a domestic basis, the Russians on an international basis. And for totally different reasons, both the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians want to prevent the war which the Bolsheviks are trying to set off.

During recent months secret meetings have taken place between the representatives of the Rockefeller cartel and Russia's ruling group. Those meetings led up to the Haig-Gromyko meeting this week. My friends, a quid pro quo is now in the works between the Russians and the Rockefeller cartel. It will be aimed at their mutual enemy, the Bolsheviks.

Meanwhile, the Bolsheviks here are continuing to line up support for the big war they intend to ignite soon. At the same time the Russians are equally busy trying to dissuade other countries from getting involved. These cross currents are producing some surprising line-ups for war.

Here is how it stands as of now, but keep in mind that further changes are bound to happen:

On the side of the United States, Red China is the Bolsheviks' greatest prize up to now. Due to sheer numbers, Red China can tie down 50 Russian Divisions. Chinese geography is also crucial, especially Sinkiang Province, for American bases to attack Russia. Other major allies as of now are Great Britain, Australia, and New Zealand. New Zealand, by the way, is far more important than one might expect. The Bolsheviks here are also lining up the North Countries—Norway, Denmark, and Sweden. Of these, Norway is both the most important and most deeply committed to the war plan. The United States can also count on certain Latin American countries, and now also English-speaking Canada. This last represents a major change over the past three years.

On Russia's side, the Warsaw Pact is still solid except Poland. Vietnam and North Korea also remain under Russia's control, as does Cuba. In addition, Russia can expect crucial help from India, Mexico, and French-speaking Quebec Province, Canada. Where Russia has made the most dramatic progress is in convincing nominal allies of the United States to turn neutral at the secret level. Countries in this category include Japan, France, Spain, the Netherlands, and even Belgium where NATO headquarters is located. But the biggest target of all in this neutral category is West Germany. The Russians are holding out a firm promise to Bonn if the West Germans will simply "sit out" any war to come. The promise, my friends, is the reunification of Germany. That promise was the secret reason behind the recent historic meeting of the leaders of the two Germanies, Schmidt and Honecker.

Yes, my friends, the alliances are shifting as we draw closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. Some of these alliances are beginning to work against the Bolsheviks here; but as the Bolsheviks see the tide beginning to turn against them, they are only redoubling their frenzy for war. As a result, this new year of 1982 will be dangerous, and it may well also be decisive for the future of the world.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it is time for my "Last Minute Summary." As you know, last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 70 I offered to make a major change in the format of my Intelligence Report program. The revised arrangement would have involved less frequent tape reports with a new printed newsletter every two weeks. Since my only purpose in making such a change would be to serve you better, I asked for your reactions to the plan. Based on the response to AUDIO LETTER No. 70, my friends, my decision is not to proceed with the new printed newsletter idea. Instead, what I do plan to do is to resume making a tape every month, as I did

before my heart attack two years ago. I want to thank all of you who responded with your reactions, as I requested last month. I know a few of you will be disappointed with the way it turned out, but I will do my very best to serve you even better than in the past. After all, serving you is what the AUDIO LETTER is all about.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #72

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is February 28, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 72.

On the final Sunday evening of last month, January 31, millions of Americans tuned in their TV sets to watch a special movie on NBC. It was a major production shown in two installments on successive nights. The movie was titled "WORLD WAR III." Viewers were drawn into a snow-swept world of rugged terrain supposedly in Alaska. At a lonely outpost of the Distant Early Warning radar network an unidentified blip appeared on the radar screen. As it did so one crew member, supposedly a Soviet spy, calmly killed all the others, preventing an alert signal to NORAD. The blip turned out to be a Russian transport which dropped a team of Arctic Commandoes onto the frozen Alaska wilderness.

As the plot unfolded, it turned out that the Russian Commandoes were there to sabotage the Alaska oil pipe line. They had been sent to Alaska by Kremlin hardliners who thought that they could use the sabotage threat to undo an American grain embargo against Russia. Instead, the plan failed, leading finally to simultaneous orders by both sides for a nuclear first strike. During those two evenings of an imaginary build-up to World War III, a surprisingly realistic atmosphere was created. There were many technical inaccuracies but they hardly mattered. What did matter was the emotional impact of the movie, and on that level it was very effective.

Here in the United States there is a growing fascination with violence, bloodshed, and war. More and more of our entertainment is built around themes of hostility and destruction. This trend is visible in sports, in music, in literature, in motion pictures, and in television. It seems as if we have been too well off for too long in terms of material things. We have a restless craving for change.

My friends, what seems to be happening now in America was expressed long ago by the Spanish writer and philosopher Don Miguel de Unamuno. During the latter part of the 19th Century Unamuno kept a secret and mostly spiritual diary at his workroom in Salamanca, Spain. His last full entry was made in January 1902. Seventy years later the diary was discovered and published, first in Spain and later in an English translation here in America by the Princeton University Press. The Unamuno diary, titled "The Tragic Sense of Life in Men and Nations", seems as relevant today as if it were freshly written. Unamuno wrote, and I quote:

"Men seek peace, they say, but do they really? They are also said to seek liberty. Not at all. They look for peace in time

of war, and for war in time of peace. They seek liberty under tyranny, and tyranny when they are free."

My friends, these few words of the Spanish philosopher Unamuno seem to describe America today. There has not been a war on American soil, except for Pearl Harbor, in the memory of any living American; and we have possessed freedom for so long that we take it for granted, so now we are blindly following leaders who are betraying us into the ultimate in both WAR and TYRANNY.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—NUCLEAR WAR FEVER AND EXPANDING SECRET WARFARE Topic #2—THE THIRD SPACE SHUTTLE CHALLENGE TO RUSSIA Topic #3—THE SHORTENING TIMETABLE FOR NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Topic #1—Day by day the pitch of war fever is rising steadily here in the United States. Every night on the television news turmoil in Central America is the leading topic.

In El Salvador a government that continuously violates the human rights of its own people is being propped up by the so-called Reagan Adminstration. The El Salvador situation contains the seeds of another Vietnam in spite of White House lies to the contrary. Like the ill-fated South Vietnam, El Salvador is riddled with corruption throughout the government and military. In both cases this situation resulted from CIA tampering with each country's power structure.

Two decades ago America started wading into the Vietnam quagmire by way of secret groups of advisers, so called, unknown to the American public; and today the same thing is under way in El Salvador. We're told that there are only a handful of noncombatant advisers there. That, my friends, is a lie! As of now, there are already more than 300 Green Berets in El Salvador, with more on the way.

We're also hearing sharp words from the White House directed at Nicaragua. Over five years ago I gave a warning about Russia's rapid progress in gaining influence there, but at that time America's rulers were trying to save their crumbling secret alliance with the Kremlin so they said not a word to the public about Nicaragua. Today the secret alliance is long gone, so today we are hearing, years late, about Nicaragua.

Overseas, too, the clouds of approaching war are growing darker and darker. In the Middle East, Israel is threatening a major invasion of Lebanon which could not fail to lead to war with Syria. The American Bolshevik-Zionist war whirlpool is continuing to spread outward from its source, Israel.

Two months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 70 I gave an alert to watch for new turmoil in Iran to erupt shortly. Now Iran is back in the news, right on schedule. There have been new bombings in Tehran, a reminder of the prospects for civil war there. At the same time we're hearing reports that the alleged Ayatollah Khomeini is ill and may die soon. Once again, that is a lie as part of the grand plan to manipulate us into war. The real Ayatollah Khomeini was killed and replaced with a "double" two years ago this month, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. When the American Bolshevik war planners here in the United States are ready to play their Iran card in the war build-up, we'll be told that Khomeini has died. United States-connected Bolshevik agents in Iran are poised and ready to stir up civil war there.

As the situation worsens, we'll be told that Russia is preparing to turn Iran into another Afghanistan. Already chief United States arms negotiator, Eugene V. Rostow, is making statements to help pave the way for all this. Lately he has been quoted to the effect that Russia can be expected to "test us" (quote) over Iran. Once again America's Bolshevik military planners are preparing to use Iran as one key to their elaborate nuclear first-strike plan against Russia. Their military strategy is an updated version of the plan I detailed 3-1/2 years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 37.

The determination of the American Bolsheviks here to go to war against Russia is becoming evident in other ways, too.

One arena is that of the supposed nuclear arms reduction talks in Geneva. As a grandstand play, the entity President Reagan has proposed the so-called "zero option" to eliminate all nuclear weapons in Europe. It sounds good, but it has no substance. In the actual negotiations to figure out how to carry out this plan, the United States has made no practical proposals at all.

In response, the Russians have made two counterproposals during recent weeks. One would begin by freezing nuclear weapons in Europe. That starting point may not be ideal, my friends, but at least it's clear-cut and possible to do. Washington's response was to ridicule the idea. The other Russian proposal was made just a few days ago; it's for both sides to completely halt all manufacture and testing of all nuclear weapons as a starting point for general disarmament. For the moment the White House seems to have been taken off guard. Soon though you can count on the fact that this idea, too, will be rejected with some excuse by the United States because, my friends, nuclear disarmament is the last thing our American Bolshevik rulers here want.

Instead, the Government is now publicizing its intentions to prosecute youngsters who fail to register for the draft! The entity Reagan is talking out of both sides of his mouth about the draft. He keeps telling us that there is no intention to actually bring back the draft, but on the other hand we're now told that anyone who fails to sign up for the draft may be bundled off to federal prison.

At the same time, Civil Defense has become a hot new topic of promotion by the so-called Reagan Administration. The agency which is spearheading this drive is relatively new, having been lifted straight from the pages of the secret new Constitution for America. It's called the "Federal Emergency Management Agency", or FEMA. FEMA is doing its best to lull us to sleep about the dangers of nuclear war. The Agency says, for example, that, quote:

"The United States could survive nuclear attack and go on to recovery within a relatively few years."

FEMA is planting articles in newspapers nation-wide to drive home this comforting lie. These planted articles try to tell us that all we would have to do is to evacuate our cities, learn a little survival training, and fix up some simple fallout shelters and we'll all do just fine.

My friends, these articles planted by an agency of the federal government are the worst kind of lies. Just one H-bomb exploding on one major city would overwhelm all the hospitals of America with grizzly casualties! But our leaders want you to believe otherwise so that you will follow them into a suicidal war.

Recently George Kennan wrote an article which expressed very well the state of mind of those who now control America's military policies. Back in the days of the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance, Kennan was one of the proponents of the policy of containment of Russia. Now the situation has changed radically, and in the New York Review of Books for January 21, 1982, Kennan wrote an article titled "ON NUCLEAR WAR." Kennan said, quote:

"There is no issue at stake in our political relations with the Soviet Union—no hope, no fear, nothing to which we aspire, nothing we would like to avoid which could conceivably be worth a nuclear war."

And further on he added, quote:

"This entire preoccupation with nuclear war is a form of illness. It is morbid in the extreme. There is no hope in it—only horror. It can be understood only as some form of subconscious despair on the part of its devotees, some sort of death wish, a readiness to commit suicide for fear of death."

My friends, Kennan could not be more accurate in describing the state of mind of those who now control America's military plans—the American Bolsheviks here. Ever since Russia's military take-over of space in late 1977, military planning here in America has taken on a kamikaze mentality. It's the concept of 'victory through suicide.' I gave details about this new suicidal streak in our military planning in the summer of 1978 in AUDIO LETTER No. 35. It is this hopelessness that led to America's shift to a first-strike nuclear strategy against Russia, which I first reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 36 and 37. The American Bolsheviks, who now hold the reins of America's military, are Satanic and schizophrenic in their thinking. They're opposed to everything that our Lord Jesus Christ stands for—Truth, Hope, and Love. They live by lies and deception, and they are afflicted by utter hopelessness and self-hatred. They do indeed have a death wish, and they want to take the rest of us with them.

As war fever is building for public consumption, the secret war is continuing to escalate. Last month I reported on Russia's renewed geophysical warfare involving especially weather modification and artificial earthquakes. These things are intended to reduce America's ability to go to war. Canada, too, is being drawn into the American Bolshevik war camp, and recently parts of Canada have suffered such extreme blizzard conditions that a "National Emergency" was declared. I also reported on two incidents in which Russian Cosmospheres triggered plane crashes last month. I can now add something very important to that report.

The rash of strange plane era Flight 90 on January 13 involved from the Kremlin. They were in of secret warfare!

shes that began with Air Florida

more than just a general warning direct response to a specific act

For over four years now Russian electrogravitic weapons platforms called Cosmospheres have been hovering high over the United States. They first announced their presence by creating giant air booms along the East Coast and elsewhere. Since that time their numbers have multiplied, and they patrol continuously over all kinds of American strategic target areas!

When war comes, the American Bolsheviks here plan to shoot

down as many Cosmospheres as possible using high-power lasers. I reported this at least three years ago in my AUDIO LETTER reports. Until recently, however, it's been very hard to detect Cosmospheres floating overhead. They're invisible to normal radar except at very close range, but now one of the crash weapons projects here in the United States has made it easier to detect Cosmospheres and to aim lasers at them. The new technique called "Computer-Enhanced Infrared" is an extremely sensitive means of detecting the heat radiation given off by Cosmospheres. It's known by the acronym CEIR (pronounced seer).

On the evening of January 12, 1982, a complete operational test was carried out against a Cosmosphere which was patrolling high over central New Jersey. CEIR was used to aim a ground-based high-power laser at the Cosmosphere, then the laser was fired. A section of the Cosmosphere erupted into blue-green flames. As the flames started to spread, the crew accelerated the Cosmosphere toward the coast. All Cosmosphere crews are under strict orders to make certain that their craft never fall into non-Russian hands, and they were making for the sea. The stricken Cosmosphere, trailing blue-green flames, was seen over a large area of eastern Pennsylvania and central New Jersey. It had been hovering at an altitude of more than 40 miles, but it came down fast. It's semirigid shell started crumpling. It passed over Atlantic City at low altitude and plunged into the water just a few miles off shore. Many witnesses watched as the remains of the Cosmosphere burned, floating on the surface of the water for nearly 10 minutes. The whole incident created a sensation in the local region, but official Government spokesmen have treated it all as a non-event!

This very first downing of a Cosmosphere created shock waves in the Kremlin. It was decided very quickly that a clear message should be sent to the Pentagon that they would pay dearly if the incident should be repeated. The Russians knew that a laser had shot down their Cosmosphere, so the very next day an Air Florida flight with laser warfare specialists aboard was caused to crash here in Washington.

Then came a string of crashes and near-crashes—all of them supposedly unexplainable. All four Air Force Thunderbird demonstration jets were made to crash, as I explained last month. A Boeing 737 in California dropped far below its flight path, seemingly without cause, and narrowly missed disaster as it clipped some power lines. And strangest of all, a Japan Air Lines DC-8 crashed into Tokyo Bay during the final moments of its landing approach. It was a perfect flying day, clear and sunny. The DC-8 was only 1000 yards from touchdown, flying in a gentle glide. There were no mechanical problems. Suddenly the pilot acted as if he were dazed. Reportedly he reached over and reversed thrust on two of the four jet engines. The big jet nosed downward; it smashed into light stanchions marking the approach path and crashed into the shallow water. Later, in the hospital, the pilot said he had blacked out. The co-pilot reportedly said he, too, suddenly felt woozy, but fought it and remained conscious.

My friends, there's not time to go into the full details of all of these incidents. It's enough to say that in every case, including the Japanese crash, the targets were chosen to convey a crystal clear warning to certain people. In every case that I have mentioned, a Russian Cosmosphere used a neutron beam weapon to bring about these strange results. As I've explained before, neutron beams disrupt electronic instruments and also the mental and nervous systems of people. The Russians are saying to the American Bolshevik Pentagon in effect: "If you shoot down any

more Cosmospheres, there will be no place to hide."

The secret war is growing more and more intense as we get closer to the outbreak of all-out war! At the same time the alignments of powers great and small are continuing to shift and settle into place.

Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 71 I reviewed in some detail the three main Power Factions in the world today and the relationships among them. One faction is that of the Rockefeller cartel—the multinational complex of Big Oil, Big Banking, and Big Business. Another faction is the Bolshevik-Zionist Axis with headquarters shared between the United States (especially New York City) and Israel. The third faction is that of the new rulers of Russia who have expelled most of the Bolsheviks formerly in power there.

Last month I reported that a new operational relationship is in the works between Russia's new rulers and the Rockefeller cartel. I can now report that as of now the emerging quid pro quo falls far short of the secret alliance that used to exist. Instead, it's basically an agreement not to damage one another as a matter of deliberate policy. The prime objective is to free both of them (the Russians and the Rockefeller cartel) to deal with their mutual enemy, the American Bolsheviks who have infiltrated key policy-making government positions here in Washington. The main area in which the Rockefeller cartel can be helpful to the Russians is in the economic sphere. The American Bolshevik dominated foreign policy in the United States is a policy of economic starvation against Russia and her satellites. The Rockefeller cartel is in the position to partially blunt these policies by cooperating with Russia in East-West trade.

American Bolshevik economic warfare against the Soviet bloc is most apparent right now in the plight of Poland. The American Bolsheviks here finally succeeded in using the Solidarity Labor Union to push Poland into martial law. Now martial law itself is being used as an excuse to make the Polish people suffer even more at America's hands. A thinly-disguised food embargo is in place by the United States against Poland. Even chicken feed is being held back in order to create disaster for Poland's own chicken farms. Everything possible is being done to drive the Polish people to such desperation that open revolt will erupt.

The collapse of Poland poses a military threat to Russia and is an economic drain as well. Russia's new rulers are working with an unwieldy centralized economy left behind by the expelled Bolsheviks. It cannot be changed overnight so the Russians are vulnerable to economic warfare. In order to avoid economic disaster, the Russians are pushing hard for new ways to raise hard Western currency. Last month I reported on one of these Russian moves—a major coup in United States Treasury securities; but for the long term the Russians want to establish more stable and mutually beneficial economic ties with the West.

The centerpiece of Russia's economic drive now is the Siberian gas pipe line for Western Europe. It's a 25-billion dollar project, the biggest ever between the Soviet Union and the West. It will be completed in 1984. The Bolsheviks here are trying to completely stop the gas pipe line project, but the Rockefeller oil and business cartel is trying to help the pipe line project go ahead. Earlier this month, on February 17, the United States Chamber of Commerce, a long-time Rockefeller public relations organ, went public about the pipe line. It called the Reagan embargo against pipe line equipment a strategy of economic warfare against Russia. Just last week the "Joint Economic

Committee" of Congress endorsed the pipe line project; and in Europe, American multinational oil companies are lining up in support of the gas pipe line—all of them, that is, except one, Mobil Oil. Unlike the other members of the Rockefeller Big Oil cartel, Mobil Oil in West Germany has been publicly opposing the gas pipe line.

To the Russians the gas pipe line is a matter of economic survival; and with all-out war on the horizon, the Kremlin has no patience with those who say one thing and do another. The Russians regard Mobil's position against the pipe line as a double cross, in effect siding with the Bolsheviks here in America. Russia's rulers decided to give Mobil Oil strong reasons to rethink their position, and fast!

On Thursday, February 11, the Russian container ship Mekhanik Tarasov departed from a port in Quebec, Canada, bound for Leningrad. It headed northeast up the St. Lawrence River, then out through the Gulf of St. Lawrence into the Atlantic. After skirting the south coast of Newfoundland, the Tarasov set course east by northeast. It's course was chosen to take it very close to the world's largest semisubmersible oil rig, passing it on the south. The rig was the "Ocean Ranger" operated by Mobil Oil. It was supposedly unsinkable, like the Titanic. The Tarasov, like many other Russian merchant ships, possessed a military capability that was not admitted. As it neared the giant oil rig in a mounting storm, it launched a homing torpedo with a low-yield nuclear warhead toward the rig. Just before 1:00 A.M. Monday morning February 15 the torpedo reached its target, one of the giant underwater pontoons. Nuclear explosions under water are far more confined than those in air, and this one was hidden by the hurricane-force winds and pounding waves. A hole was blasted in the pontoon, and the Ocean Ranger started settling toward that side. The crew gave a trouble call by radio; half an hour later they reported that they were manning the lifeboats. But the Japanese-built Ocean Ranger was designed to be the world's most unsinkable oil rig! A corner of the upper platform dipped into the water and than stopped. The rig stayed afloat, listing at a crazy angle. The roughnecks stopped boarding the lifeboats, hoping the boats would not be needed after all. Then a Cosmosphere hovering high above the rig took aim at the corner of the rig which had dipped into the water. A powerful blast from its charged particle beam weapon blew a hole in the partially-submerged corner. Immediately the Ocean Ranger heeled over and sank. It went down so fast that it was too late for lifeboats to be launched successfully, and all hands were lost.

The freighter Tarasov continued on course after sinking the oil rig. The Russians expected that the freighter would be long gone before anyone figured out what had happened—but they miscalculated! At around 2:00 P.M. that same afternoon, Monday February 15, an American Attack Submarine was closing in on the Tarasov. The "sub" fired a single torpedo at the Tarasov, hitting it broadside. Water surged in through a giant hole below the waterline, and the freighter started sinking. Like the crew of the Cosmosphere that was shot down over New Jersey last month, the crew of the Tarasov had strict orders to protect the secrets of their ship, and so the Russian captain refused assistance from a nearby Danish freighter as his ship sank with its secrets.

Apparently, my friends, Mobil Oil got the message. Just two days after the sinking of the Ocean Ranger, Mobil Oil shut down the other two oil rigs which had been nearby and towed them ashore.

But our leaders still have not gotten the message. They are

still leading us straight into NUCLEAR WAR ONE!

Topic #2—Early this month on February 5, the entity Vice-President Bush made himself conspicuous by a trip to Cape Canaveral, Florida. He was photographed with astronauts inside the European-built orbital science laboratory called "SPACE LAB." According to official schedules, SPACE LAB will be put in orbit by space shuttle in late 1983, about a year and a half from now. Meanwhile, Bush announced that space shuttle flight No. 3 is now scheduled for March 22, 1982. Supposedly it's to last for a full week.

For public consumption, NASA spokesmen are continuing to pretend that the shuttle is merely carrying out a leisurely series of test flights. We are told that the Space Shuttle Program is basically a peaceful civilian program in spite of the all-military crews flying the shuttle. But the peaceful image of the Space Shuttle Program is a total lie. The fact is that the space shuttle flights now under way are part of a crash program by the United States to regain a military toe hold in space.

The United States has been virtually locked out of the military use of space by Russia since late 1977, as I have reported in detail in the past. Russia's domination of space for the past four years and more has been highlighted by numerous manned space flights. These have even included cosmonauts from nine other countries besides Russia. Meanwhile the United States went more than five years without admitting to any manned space flight attempts. The Russian long-duration space spectaculars in earth orbit have been sufficient to build Russia's prestige in the public eye; but as I've reported in the past, the Soviet Space Program involves far more than is being revealed publicly.

Ever since mid-October 1977, the Moon has been a Russian outpost. There are seven (7) manned long-range particle beam installations on the near side, and at least one base on the far side. In the past I've reported that regular missions are flown to and from the Moon in order to resupply the bases and rotate crews, and slowly but surely the Kremlin is inching its way toward breaking the news about its control of the Moon. Don't expect them to tell you everything, but they are beginning to drop hints about it. An example appears in the Russian publication circulated in the United States called "Soviet Life" for this month, February 1982. On page 33 of the magazine there is a brief one-page feature on Space. Planted near the beginning of the article are the words, quote:

"Today spaceships shuttle between the Earth and the Moon with greater frequency than did the first voyages to the New World."

At the top of the page there's a nighttime photo of a moonship ready to blast off from a Russian Cosmodrome. Below is a picture of the Earth as seen from space, and in between is a statement in bold type designed to give another hint about their moon flights. It says, quote:

"From a distance of 70,000 kilometers above the Earth, the planet looks peaceful and even defenseless. The common goal is to protect our blue and green home."

My friends, satellites are not used at altitudes of 70,000 kilometers. The highest orbit that is generally useful for earth satellites is the geosynchronous orbit for stationary satellites over the equator. Seventy-thousand kilometers is almost twice that far from the Earth. The only time when a spacecraft reaches that far from the Earth is when it is on its way to or from the

Moon or another planet.

Russia's interest in space also extends far beyond military factors. In AUDIO LETTER No. 38 I described the plans of Russia's new rulers for the colonization of our solar system. Those plans are moving ahead steadily; in fact, at this very moment not one but two Russian spacecraft are approaching the planet Venus! They are said to be unmanned; but, my friends, they are manned spacecraft.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 38 I reported that the Russians had settled on Venus, not Mars, as the first target beyond the Moon for experimental colonization. They first started landing unmanned craft on Venus some seven (7) years ago, and they've learned some key facts not yet known in the West. Four years ago the Russians began a series of increasingly long-durationed manned orbital space flights, which were widely publicized. These were gradually extended to six months and more to learn how well crews would stand up to interplanetary space travel. Early last fall these long-duration orbital flights were completed. The Russians had learned everything they needed to know. Last October 30 and November 4, 1981, two Russian spaceships blasted off for Venus. Both ships are manned by Russian cosmonauts, and both are preparing to land on Venus as I say these words.

My friends, the comparison between the space programs of the United States and Russia today is a study in tragic ironies. We Americans are being told that the space shuttle is primarily a civilian-oriented project, but it is actually military. We're being told that it is the world's first reusable spacecraft, but a shuttle is actually being lost on every flight. We're being told that the space shuttle has put us years ahead of Russia, but we have actually slipped years behind. We're often told that our Rulers want only peaceful activities in space, but they are shutting down almost the entire civilian scientific space program. Funding is continuing for one or two peaceful projects which are too visible to cancel without an uproar, such as the space telescope. But follow-on projects to explore our solar system are being lopped off and discarded because they contribute nothing to our leaders' plans for war!

We're told constantly that the Russians have nothing but war and conquest on their minds; but it is the Russians, not we Americans, who at this moment have two teams of spacemen preparing to land on Venus. They're going there for reasons which have nothing to do with war. The Russians are exploring the solar system simply because it is there. Russia's new rulers believe that it is man's destiny to move into space. The urge to explore that motivated their Viking ancestors of old is alive and well today in the Russian Space Program.

My friends, I believe that same spirit is still strong also among the American people today. Why else would our leaders have to keep selling the Space Program to us as a great adventure? But the Bolsheviks here who now control America's Space Program do not care about adventure or exploring the unknown or inspiring the human spirit. They care only about power, control, intrigue, revolution, and war; and their plans for war are shaping America's Space Shuttle Program.

Twelve days ago, on February 16, the space shuttle was moved out to the launch pad at Cape Canaveral, five days ahead of schedule. This will be America's third space shuttle launch, and it is also the third shuttle that is being used. The first shuttle, the real "Columbia", was destroyed last April, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 64. It was replaced by the training

shuttle "Enterprise" which landed at Edwards Air Force Base and was taken to Florida. The Enterprise flight last November was a stopgap measure while a third shuttle could be extensively modified.

The new shuttle now at Cape Canaveral is one of the three secret shuttles from White Sands that I mentioned in AUDIO LETTER No. 63 last spring. It has undergone extensive modification since the first space shuttle disaster ten months ago in April, 1981. It still looks the same as the original Columbia, at least from a distance, but this shuttle is actually far, far different.

The shuttle now on the pad, my friends, is armed to the teeth! The basic mission of this third shuttle is the same as that of the first shuttle nearly a year ago. One year ago today in AUDIO LETTER No. 62 I described in detail what the space shuttle was supposed to do. Its payload was a heavily armored laser-firing robot battle station designed for space reconnaissance over Russia. Russian space weapons finished destroying all of America's Spy Satellites nearly four years ago. That means America's war planners will be shooting almost blind at Russia if they start a war without somehow acquiring new reconnaissance data. The space shuttle is trying to solve that problem by getting the new hardened satellite into orbit. That is what the space shuttle flights right now are all about—attempts at reconnaissance.

After each shuttle takes off from Florida it follows a long, swooping, curved launch into the north in order to fly over Russia. The American Bolshevik military planners here believe that if they can once get their new super-spy satellite into orbit, it will do the job. They are confident that it can survive any attacks by Russian space weapons long enough to radio back a large amount of reconnaissance data; and once they have that, the Pentagon will be ready to take America to war.

Last spring the "Columbia" was destroyed before the Spy Satellite could be deployed. Likewise the makeshift "Enterprise" mission in November was a failure, but the military shuttle planners believe it will be a different story with their shuttle No. 3 now preparing for launch.

In the cargo bay of this shuttle there is a new robot reconnaissance battle station like the one I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 62. There is also an additional laser mounted in the forward end of the cargo bay just behind the crew compartment. It is a hydrogen fluoride gas dynamic laser mounted vertically, aimed upward. It is equipped with a swiveling head consisting of mirrors that can aim the beam around a wide range of angles. The hydrogen fluoride laser in the cargo bay is intended mainly to protect the shuttle while it climbs toward orbit.

As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 64 last spring, the "Columbia" came under fire shortly before it reached orbit. Intelligence analysts here eventually obtained enough information about what happened to decide on installing the cargo bay laser.

As the shuttle climbs, the air will grow thinner and thinner, dwindling to almost nothing long before the rocket engines shut off. At the earliest possible moment, the modified cargo bay doors, which have no hinges on this shuttle, will be blown off by special explosive devices. As the cargo bay doors flutter away from the shuttle, it will leave the upper half of the bay wide open. The cargo bay laser will be ready to fire from that moment onward. It's equipped with the same system called CEIR that I described in Topic #1. Since a laser equipped this way

successfully shot down a Cosmosphere last month, the shuttle planners believe the shuttle will reach orbit safely. Once in orbit, planners here believe that the main threat to the shuttle will be Russia's orbiting Cosmos Interceptors. These manned killer satellites are responsible for sweeping the skies clear of American Spy Satellites. In order to deal with that threat, there have been truly radical modifications to the shuttle.

Whenever the space shuttle is discussed, it's always emphasized that shuttle astronauts can work in their shirt sleeves—no need for space suits because riding in the shuttle is almost like riding in an air liner. Not so this time, my friends.

When Col. Jack Lousma and Col. C. Gordon Fullerton lift off in this shuttle, they will be in spacesuits. What's more, they will be depending on their spacesuits because their crew cabin will not be pressurized. The whole lower front portion of their ship below the flight deck has been turned into a weapons bay. As soon as the shuttle reaches orbit, the nose will open up to the vacuum of space. The nose will fold downward and back somewhat like certain cargo aircraft whose noses fold upward to load and unload. As soon as the nose opens up, a complex laser system will emerge. The system has five tubular sections aimed up, down, to each side, and straight ahead. Each laser tube has a swiveling mirror-head for beam aiming, like that of the cargo bay laser I mentioned earlier. Once deployed, the Nose Laser System will be able to fire in almost any direction. The only exception is a narrow corridor to the rear of the shuttle.

The Nose Laser System is described as a nuclear-pumped helium plasma laser with five resonators. The nuclear power pack can fire any one of the five laser tubes at a time. It's not as powerful as the cargo bay laser; but unlike the cargo bay laser, the Nose Laser System can operate for a long time on an intermittent basis, and the shuttle planners believe it will be powerful enough to disable the manned Russian killer satellites. Under the protection of the Nose Laser System, Lousma and Fullerton are to deploy the robot Spy Satellite. As soon as it is deployed, they are to return to Earth in a small Gemini-type re-entry capsule. This part of the plan is the same as I revealed a year ago for the first shuttle flight. Meanwhile, the shuttle will remain in orbit.

The Nose Laser System is programmed to keep right on zapping any Russian Cosmos Interceptors that come within range. It will continue doing so until it is destroyed or the nuclear laser runs down, which could be a very long time. It will constitute a very dangerous nuisance in space, and the Russians will have little choice but to destroy it. The American Bolsheviks here hope the Russians will lose a lot of spaceships and men before they succeed in doing so.

If the military shuttle planners are right in their calculations, the third space shuttle mission could turn into a battle royal in space. If they are wrong, they presently plan to try again one more time.

As of now, the fourth space shuttle mission is scheduled for the Fourth of July. After that, no matter what happens with the space shuttle, they are now planning to go ahead anyway in setting off NUCLEAR WAR ONE because my friends, the American Bolsheviks here have scored an Intelligence coup against Russia.

Topic #3—For nearly a year now I've been reporting on the grand strategy of the American Bolsheviks and their Zionist partners to

set off nuclear war. Their basic plan is an updated version of the one that was successful in setting off World War I. The prelude to that war involved ever widening, uncontrollable crises in the Balkans. Likewise today the whole world is being Balkanized by means of Bolshevik-Zionist intrigues.

Last year I began warning that we would soon be seeing more and more simultaneous crises in the world as the fever for war rises. Today these simultaneous crises are now upon us, right on schedule.

El Salvador and the rest of Central America are aflame with internal upheaval. Poland is under martial law, while America tries to transform Poland's troubles into a complete bloody disaster. In the Middle East not one but several time bombs are almost ready to go off since spring is coming. These are the things I was talking about in my advance reports last year.

The Reagan-Begin Axis of Bolsheviks and Zionists intend to manipulate these crises—and more to come—to pave the way for war. Suddenly certain crises will combine to trigger a chain of events leading to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The joint military junta of the United States Pentagon and Israel are working on a fast timetable for all of this. As I've reported in past tapes, they are aiming for mid-summer 1982, this year, for the final war sequence to begin.

This will involve regional conflicts in the Middle East and elsewhere which gradually escalate to engulf the superpowers. The whole thing is being set up to make nuclear war appear unavoidable. At last all-out nuclear war itself will break out between the United States and Russia. It will be made to appear accidental; but as I have detailed in the past, my friends, NUCLEAR WAR ONE will actually begin with an American nuclear first strike against Russia!

Up to now, the secret war planners here have been expecting that it would take many months for the final war build-up to run its course. For example, a Mideast war might be triggered this summer of 1982, but it could take until the spring of 1983 for the resulting nuclear war to erupt. That has been their thinking until very recently, but a drastic change is now taking place in the secret war planning under way here in America.

The timetable for NUCLEAR WAR ONE has now been speeded up by many months. My friends, as of now the new target date for an American nuclear surprise attack on Russia is mid-September 1982! That is little more than six months from now. The reason for this drastic shortening of the war timetable is a major Intelligence coup which has been scored by the American Bolsheviks here.

Two high-ranking Soviet generals have recently been spirited out of Russia and brought here to Washington. These two men are Bolsheviks whom Russia's new non-Bolshevik rulers failed to detect and weed out. In Intelligence parlance, they remained as moles in Russia's military apparatus. Now they have been brought to America, and they bring with them a wealth of data about Russia's current military posture! Thanks to these two former Bolshevik Soviet generals, the secret war planners here now have enough information to plan a nuclear strike against Russia. If they can refine that information from data from space shuttle flights Nos. 3 and 4, so much the better; but if neither of the next two shuttle flights is successful, the war planners intend to wait no longer. They want to make use of the Intelligence obtained from the two Soviet generals while it is still fresh,

and so the secret war planners here have now set a deadline for themselves of mid-September 1982 to attack Russia!

As it stands now, my friends, NUCLEAR WAR ONE could erupt at any time after space shuttle flight No. 4 this summer and well before the end of September.

My friends, I am telling you these things not to panic you but for the opposite reason. I want you to be able to understand events for yourselves so that you can take action to protect yourselves and your families. I cannot emphasize strongly enough that what I am reporting to you are the plans of MEN. If you see certain things happening, you will know that these war plans are succeeding and that war is imminent; if you do not see certain parts of the plan happening in the news, then you will know that the war plans may have hit a snag of some kind. In that regard I also want to let you know about the biggest of all possible snags that may soon trip up the American Bolsheviks here.

For some time now I've been reporting on the hidden struggle for power that is dividing the United States Government. On one side are the American Bolsheviks whose chief Government operative today is Secretary of Defense Caspar Weinberger. On the other side is the Rockefeller cartel whose chief Governmental spokesman is Secretary of State Alexander Haig. Weinberger and Haig are constantly at each other's throats in the news. This is only a pale shadow of their intrigues behind closed doors! Caught in the middle is the puppet entity President Reagan.

Our puppet president was installed by the Rockefeller cartel but has been largely under Bolshevik control ever since the assassination attempt last March. Like a marionette, he dances according to whatever strings are being pulled at the moment by either side. As of now, America's military is dominated by the Bolsheviks here, but that was not always so.

The Rockefeller cartel has been regaining power and is now preparing to try to regain control over the military here. As long ago as 1963, Rockefeller insiders set up a contingency plan for an eventual military coup d'etat against a puppetized president. I revealed the existence of the plan five years ago this month in AUDIO LETTER No. 21.

Early stages of the plan were actually set in motion against then President Carter, but events later that year caused the plan to be aborted. Now the plan for a Rockefeller cartel-backed military coup is being set in motion again, and this time it is a crash program intended to be carried out within a matter of months. As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 67, the Rockefeller cartel cannot afford to let their Bolshevik enemies here succeed in setting off nuclear war, therefore the military coup d'etat must take place before the American Bolshevik surprise attack against Russia. If possible the coup will be carried out before the fourth space shuttle flight this summer because war will be possible any time after that.

The man who is in charge of the military coup preparations is a four-star Army General. That is unusual because coups are usually carried out by lower-rank officers; but this time the circumstances are very unusual too. The General in charge of the coup to come, my friends, is General Alexander Haig, presently Secretary of State. He is looking forward to the day when he can really say, quote: "I am in charge here."

Lately Haig has been on major TV programs almost daily. He has also been traveling almost continuously to help pave the way

for the coup d'etat to be accepted abroad. Most importantly the Russians were informed of the impending coup during the Haig-Gromyko talks last month. Part of the new quid pro quo between the Rockefeller cartel and the Kremlin has to do with the coup being planned here. The Rockefeller group were afraid that the Kremlin would interpret a military coup as a sign that an attack on Russia would follow quickly. Haig has assured the Russians that this will be an anti-Bolshevik coup and that the Bolshevik war plans will be terminated. Gromyko was very dubious in his talks with Haig. He expressed fears that the whole plan will backfire and cause the American Bolsheviks in the Pentagon to push the button, but Haig finally extracted an agreement that the Russians will not interfere with the coup nor use the opportunity to attack the United States. What is brewing now, my friends, is really a countercoup.

Three years ago the Rockefeller cartel lost its power over the United States Government in a Bolshevik coup d'etat. I detailed those events at the time, but otherwise it was generally hidden from public view. Now the Rockefeller cartel is trying to take back the power they lost three years ago.

If the military take-over does take place it, too, is likely to be largely hidden in its details from public view. Only one event in the plan is likely to be visible to all. That event, my friends, will be the sudden death of the entity known as President Ronald Reagan. If that happens by the end of summer 1982, no matter what the official story may be, you will know that the military coup d'etat has taken place.

On the other hand, should something happen to Secretary of State Haig by that time, it could well mean that the Bolsheviks have foiled the coup.

It is all a race against time, my friends, and the stakes in this race involve nothing less than the very survival of our United States!

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've had no choice but to dwell on the subject of approaching war, NUCLEAR WAR. Nuclear war fever is conditioning us for war, and hostilities are escalating in the secret war already under way.

While two manned Russian spacecraft are approaching Venus, America's Space Program has dwindled to a last-ditch military stab at space. The war timetable is being speeded up with nothing in sight but a military coup d'etat to stop it.

The situation we face today, my friends, reminds me of a course in "Military Justice" which 1 took in Law School in 1950. It was taught by an Army General. He started the first class with a statement that is still ringing in my ears today. He said:

"If you remember nothing else from this course, make no mistake about one thing: The United States of America was born in war, and the United States will die in war."

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #73

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is March 31, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 73.

For the past several days two news stories have been competing for top billing here in the United States. One is the conflict in El Salvador surrounding national elections, which were held on Sunday, three days ago. The other is the third space shuttle mission, which ended yesterday.

On the face of it, these two headline events would seem to have little in common. The brutal civil war in the jungles of Central America seems part of a different world from that of America's newest space ship, but the fact is that these two news stories are related to one another. El Salvador and the space shuttle are both involved in the complex program leading up to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. El Salvador is just one hot spot in the growing caldron of deliberate world crises to bring on war, and the space shuttle is being used for secret military preparations for war itself.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 72 last month I reported that the war timetable of America's Bolshevik planners is being speeded up. If their plans succeed, the time left before the outbreak of all-out nuclear war is measured in months; and so far, my friends, their plans are succeeding.

All around the world the flames of crisis are continuing to spread. In Central America the initial crisis in El Salvador has now expanded to include Nicaragua, Honduras, and Guatemala. On the day after space shuttle No. 3 took off this month, a military coup took place in Guatemala—and we haven't seen anything yet. Soon we will be hearing of new threats to our life line through the Panama Canal. And the Carter Administration's giveaway of the Canal does not become final for nearly 20 more years. As of now the Canal remains a potential new Pearl Harbor for us.

Overseas, other crises are also continuing to simmer and spread. In Iran the plans for a new explosion of turmoil are right on track. New developments in the Iran-Iraq war are paving the way for this. Another factor, as I have previously reported, is to be the revelation that Ayatollah Khomeini is dead. Early this month there were harbingers of things to come in the news, especially overseas. For example, on March 6 the BBC quoted a London Times article questioning whether Khomeini is still alive. The article expressed suspicions that fake pictures are now being used showing a "double" for Khomeini.

Another simmering crisis is the contrived flap between the United States and Libya. For the moment it's on the back burner, but the Libya crisis is one of the time bombs which the Bolsheviks here can use to help set off the big war to come. In that regard, there were two major developments this month which went almost unnoticed in the news, and they are synchronized perfectly with the over-all war timetable that I made public last month.

First, on March 3 Libya's Colonel Qaddafi (Khadafy) drew a line in the dust against the United States. In Tripoli, the Libyan capital, Qaddafi delivered a fiery speech to listeners gathered for a rally. He reminded them of the Nimitz episode last August when two Libyan jets were shot down, and he said, quote:

"If America enters the Gulf of Sidra, war in the full sense of the word will begin between us and them—war with planes, navies, missiles, everything."

Within two weeks the United States promised, in effect, that it will soon walk across Qaddafi's line in the dust. On March 16 Navy Secretary John Lehman declared that the United States will conduct naval exercises again within the Gulf of Sidra and we will do so within the next six months. Lehman's statement was a virtual promise of war to come. It was reported that day by the BBC, but went unnoticed here in America!

Crises within the Soviet bloc are also continuing. The war in Afghanistan continues to drag on, thanks to ongoing heavy involvement by the CIA. Poland, too, is an explosion waiting to happen. Martial law has removed the spark for that explosion by jailing the leaders of Solidarity. Solidarity was the main tool of the American Bolsheviks in trying to set off a revolt in Poland, but soon the Bolshevik war planners here expect to provide a new spark for revolt in Poland. Last fall the Bolsheviks here re-established the covert influence within the Vatican which they held briefly three years ago. Now the Bolsheviks here are trying to revive their old plan called the Pope's Revolution to occur in Poland.

I gave the details of the original plan in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. It was built around a planned papal visit to Poland on a highly emotional occasion, the 900th anniversary of the martyrdom of St. Stanislaus. The original "Pope's Revolution" plan was foiled by changing the date of the pope's visit, but now a new papal visit to Poland may be in the works. The occasion is the 600th anniversary of the Black Madonna, the most revered shrine in Poland. The anniversary takes place this summer, my friends, less than six months from now.

In addition to the existing crises, new crises are also being stirred up—with more to come. These will be developing in both East and West. Right now a major new crisis is building up between two NATO members, Greece and Turkey. The new government of Greece wants to extricate itself from the war maneuverings of the Bolshevik-controlled United States and NATO. Washington is responding with military blackmail. Turkey's harsh military dictatorship has designs on sea and land controlled by Greece—and the United States is egging them on!

Bulgaria and Romania, Soviet bloc neighbors of Greece and Turkey, are also targeted for turmoil soon. American Bolshevik agents are hard at work there to create a serious dispute between these two Warsaw Pact members. If they succeed, it will be just one more Poland-style headache for Russia's new anti-Bolshevik rulers.

The American Bolsheviks here are pressing ahead fast in their efforts to bring on NUCLEAR WAR ONE. In this they are joined by their Zionist partners in Israel. In AUDIO LETTER No. 67 I described the joint military junta which today controls the actions of both the United States and Israel. The Reagan-Begin axis is moving the world steadily closer to nuclear war. Neither government is making the slightest effort to act in the true best interests of its own citizens! This situation is a secret in both countries. It's as much a mystery to most Israelis as it is to most Americans.

In both countries there is growing alarm over the locked step toward war. Here in America this is taking the form of mounting

demands for a nuclear weapons freeze. In Israel the Begin government is facing repeated "no confidence" votes over its repressive policies toward Palestinians, but both governments are bent on war and they expect to bring it about before they can be stopped.

The present Begin government repression in the occupied Arab territories have been calculated with care. They are intended specifically to shatter the shaky Middle East peace. For one thing, Israeli repression of Palestinians within their jurisdiction is intended to stir up PLO activity in southern Lebanon. In addition, Israel's suspension of political rights for Arabs in the occupied territories is a violation of the Camp David accords. Instead of negotiating increased autonomy for the Arabs, the Begin government is taking away what little autonomy they already had. These things are intended to produce a chain reaction of events—that is: PLO raids on Israel, an Israeli invasion of Lebanon, war between Israel and Syria creating a proxy battle between America and Russia, disintegrating peace ties between Israel and Egypt, an incident in the Sinai involving America's buffer troops there, ensnarement of Saudi Arabia in the collapsing peace—on and on, wider and wider, 'seemingly' out of control.

All these artificial crises are leading fast toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and when it comes, the Bolsheviks here plan to be ready. For the first time the space shuttle has been successful in its secret military mission. Even more importantly, their most ambitious crash-weapons project is now bearing fruit. My friends, the United States has developed a new superweapon, as revolutionary as the atom bomb was four decades ago!

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE NEW PHANTOM WAR PLANES OF THE UNITED STATES

Topic #2—"PROJECT Z"—THE THREE-PHASE STRATEGY FOR NUCLEAR WAR

ONE

Topic #3—THE FIRST MILITARY SUCCESS OF THE SPACE SHUTTLE

Topic #1—On December 6, 1941, President Franklin D. Roosevelt authorized the spending of funds to begin a supersecret weapons project. Its goal: to develop a giant bomb so powerful that it would make all lesser weapons obsolete overnight. It was the beginning of what was later called the "Manhattan Project." The project was intended to develop a bomb to fight a war that did not yet exist, but the very next day, December 7, 1941, Pearl Harbor took care of that. Just one day after the A-bomb project began, America was at war—right on schedule.

The Manhattan Project to develop the atomic bomb was the largest, most complex, and most costly military project in history up to that time, and yet it was conducted in total secrecy. The money spent on the atom bomb project dwarfed all other weapons programs, yet it was spent without the knowledge of Congress! Entire new laboratories were built, thousands of people were involved, and yet fewer than 100 persons knew what the Manhattan Project was all about. The Manhattan Project was to develop a superweapon, something straight from the pages of Science Fiction. If most people had been asked they would have said that an atomic bomb was impossible; but in matters like this, public opinion counts for nothing at all. A small handful of scientists knew that it could be done. They did the seemingly impossible, and they did it in well under four years! The A-bomb project went from a standing start in December 1941 to the attack on Hiroshima in August 1945.

My friends, I can now report for the first time that a new program like the Manhattan Project has been underway here in the United States. Like the atomic bomb 40 years ago, the new weapon sounds like something straight from the pages of Science Fiction. Like the Manhattan Project, the new project has been carried out in utmost secrecy. Vast amounts of money have been spent on it without the slightest hint to the public or Congress; and just as happened with the atomic bomb, the new weapon is intended to make its debut in war itself—and not before.

I first began reporting that crash weapons projects were being started here in the United States four years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 33. These projects were started in response to Russia's surprise military take-over of space in late 1977. From time to time since then I have reported on the progress of a number of these secret programs to prepare for war.

In "Operation Desk Top", ICBMs have been planted in supposedly invulnerable locations on the ocean floor. In the secret "Minuteman TX" mobile missile program a large number of small ICBMs are now shuttling around the United States in special railroad cars. Meanwhile the phony MX missile controversy has been used as a cover for this secret project. Then there is the high-power Laser Program which has led to a number of laser weapons. And, of course, there is the Space Shuttle program—a desperate attempt to regain a military toe hold in space.

While we are shown entertaining space movies on TV by NASA, we are never shown what is really happening on each flight, never. I have given many details about these secret weapons programs in past AUDIO LETTER reports. Now I have obtained urgent information about a crash military program which is shrouded in the deepest secrecy of all. It is an Air Force project involving technology which is as revolutionary today as the atomic bomb was forty years ago. This secret superweapon project is the basis for an entire new nuclear war strategy of the American Bolshevik war planners. It is a renegade program totally unknown both to the public and to Congress. Even within the military this weapons program is known only within very limited circles. You, my friends, will understand the reasons for this extreme secrecy when you hear how it is to be used in the coming war. I will reveal this master war strategy, code named "PROJECT Z", in Topic #2.

Ever since the summer of 1980 there have been vague reports in the news about what is called the Stealth Bomber Program. We're told that ways are being developed to make a bomber undetectable by radar. We're also led to believe that a Stealth Plane will not be operational until 1991. The fact is, my friends, that these are only cover stories to hide a far more radical weapons program, and it will be operational not in far-off 1991 BUT THIS YEAR 1982!

The Stealth program is structured very much like the Minuteman TX program which I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 55. In the case of the Minuteman TX, public attention was focused on the alleged MX missile; and, in fact, work is underway to develop a missile called MX, but all of that was set up primarily as a cover for the secret Minuteman TX program. It provided a way to camouflage research, development, and manufacturing of the TX. Now that the TX mobile missile system is virtually deployed on our railroads, the MX is gradually fading from the scene. The furious debate over all those ridiculous MX race tracks out West is gone, having served its purpose of distraction. And now there is talk of cutting out funding for the MX in the 1983 Budget. Can you imagine?

It's all very much the same with the Stealth Program. Various companies and laboratories are experimenting with ways to foil radar. These experiments include special aerodynamic shapes, coatings, electronic countermeasures, and so on; but all of this is important mainly as a cover and a funding channel for the really secret work. One product of the covert Stealth projects was called a "Submersible Aircraft", or "Subcraft" for short. I first described Subcraft in AUDIO LETTER No. 37, August 1978, when they were beginning flight tests. In January 1980 there was an attempt to actually use them against Russia—with disastrous results. The first public leaks about the Stealth Program took place six months later in the summer of 1980. Up to that time nothing better than the unsuccessful Subcraft had been produced, but now the situation has changed. The biggest gamble of all in the Stealth Program has involved a scientific leap forward as dramatic as the atomic bomb, and IT IS SUCCEEDING.

What I am about to reveal may sound impossible to some people. If so, just stop and think about the things that would have seemed impossible 40 years ago which we take for granted today: jet airplanes, world-wide television, men on the Moon, local weather forecasts with satellite pictures of planet Earth, lasers, photocopy machines, frozen food, and computers.

Think what a giant leap in technology was taken in the Manhattan Project to develop the atomic bomb 40 years ago. For example, there were no computers in those days. Even the most advanced scientific calculations had to be done by hand with some help from slide rules, adding machines, and mathematical tables. By contrast, today you can go to a store and buy a hand calculator that will outperform anything that was available to the A-bomb Project; and a hand calculator like that is a mere toy compared with the powerful high-speed computers that are common today. In other areas, too, the technology of the 1980's is a far cry from that of the 1940's, so just ask yourself: If we could develop the atom bomb using pencils and slide rules, what might we develop today using computers? And if it took less than four years with the primitive tools of the 1940's, why should a crash program today take any longer?

The most secret branch of the Stealth Program, my friends, is developing aircraft that are invisible to more than just radar. They are invisible even to the eye. These invisible Phantom war planes carry special electromagnetic gear. The equipment includes superconducting magnets which are maintained at temperatures close to absolute zero. This cryogenic equipment creates an enormously powerful electromagnetic field around the aircraft. The field is designed according to the principles of Einstein's "unified field theory."

Einstein never completely finished his unified field theory, but it has been studied by numerical techniques using computers. By this brute-force method, enough has been learned to apply unified field theory to the new Phantom war planes.

When the invisibility field is turned on, a Phantom war plane is encased in a sort of electromagnetic bubble. Light that strikes the field from any direction divides, passes around the plane, comes together again on the other side, and goes on. The effect is like a boulder in a stream—water flowing towards the boulder divides, goes around it, and then comes together again on the other side.

To understand why this makes the plane invisible, stop and think how you see objects. Suppose you look across the room at a

chair. Light bounces off the chair in a certain pattern, travels through the air and strikes your eyes. Your eyes then recognize the light pattern as a chair. Now suppose someone walks between you and the chair. Light bouncing off the chair is stopped by the person who's in the way so you no longer see the chair, instead you see the person by reflected light.

Now, my friends, consider a new situation. Suppose that the person were encased in a special bubble like that of a Phantom war plane. He steps between you and the chair. The light waves from the chair strike the bubble, flow around him, come together again, and continue to your eyes so you still see the chair. But because of the bubble, no light is reflected back from that person, so you cannot see him—in other words, he is invisible. He is there all right between you and the chair, but because of the way the light behaves around his protective shield you cannot see him. This is basically how the invisibility shield works on a Phantom war plane. The only difference is that the field is not as sharply defined as a bubble. It is strong close to the plane and grows weaker with distance. From a distance the plane is totally invisible when it is air-borne.

A Phantom war plane is invisible to the eye and also to radar. Radar is like light except for wave length, and behaves the same way when it hits the invisibility shield—it just divides, flows past the plane, converges on the other side, and continues onward. It does not bounce back so there is no radar return.

Invisibility is the most striking feature of a Phantom war plane but it is not the most important. The greatest value of the invisibility field is its protection against Beam weapons. A Phantom war plane is totally immune to lasers because a laser beam is just intense light. The invisibility field also gives protection against Russia's charged particle beam. Charged particles are far easier to deflect than light, so the charged particle beam is no match for the light-deflecting shield.

That leaves only neutral beam weapons. Russia's neutron beam would penetrate the invisibility shield, but ways have been found to shield against neutron radiation well enough to make neutron beams ineffective in stopping a Phantom war plane. That's especially true because extremely effective shielding is part of the basic design of a Phantom war plane. Without it the gigantic electromagnetic field, which produces invisibility, would derange electronic instruments as well as the crew if it is manned.

So the net result is this, my friends: The new Phantom war plane of the United States is not detectable by conventional means, and it is believed to be invulnerable to all of Russia's beam weapons. Those beam weapons have been the keys to Russia's military superiority since late 1977, so the Phantom war plane is the ideal weapon to attack Russia.

The Phantom war plane has just one major drawback. In a way it's greatest strength is also its greatest weakness. When the invisibility field is turned on, incoming light waves do not strike the plane; instead, the light flows around the plane, as I have explained. That is what makes the plane invisible to observers at a distance, but at the same time the field prevents light waves from the outside world from reaching the cockpit of the plane. In other words, the pilot cannot see anything outside the invisibility field. He is required to fly blind.

There is only one technique known in the West by which a Phantom war plane can be navigated. It's called "Inertial Guidance", a technique first invented for ICBMs a quarter century

ago. In Inertial Guidance, a computerized system keeps track of all the forces and maneuvers experienced by the vehicle. By adding these up over time, the system calculates where it is without reference to the outside world. For a Phantom war plane, the Inertial Guidance problem is very difficult. The guidance system must operate for as long as several hours while the plane flies to its target. That gives lots of time for errors to build up which would send the plane off course, but the problem has been solved.

New Inertial Guidance technology has been developed using Lasers in place of the old mechanical gyros used on ICBMs, and so the supersecret Phantom war plane project has succeeded in producing a new superweapon! It's as revolutionary today as the atomic bomb was nearly a half century ago. Prototypes are now flying, and a rush production program is already underway. The secret war planners here expect to have an operational fleet ready by this summer of 1982. This is now the pacing item in the short new war timetable which I made public last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 12.

The secret new fleet of Phantom war planes are the key to a complete new Pentagon war plan, which I will reveal in Topic #2. This is why fresh reconnaissance data on Russian targets is so critical to the war planning here. When Phantom war planes take off to attack Russia, they will have to know ahead of time exactly where the target is. Flying blind on Inertial Guidance, they cannot look around and change course to find a target.

For a year now the Space Shuttle has been making a desperate attempt to obtain the needed target information from space. It would be the first new data since Russia destroyed our Spy Satellites four years ago. The first two Shuttle flights were not successful in their secret military mission; but as I revealed last month, the American Bolshevik war planners in the Pentagon have scored an Intelligence coup against Russia, and now Space Shuttle No. 3 has been successful. The war planners here are now obtaining the most crucial target data needed for a Phantom war plane attack against Russia. As a result, a whole new war plan is now being prepared for the coming nuclear war.

America's war strategists are now eager for war because they now believe they can achieve victory over Russia; but, my friends, their concept of victory does not include you and me. The secret war strategists here are preparing to sacrifice America and most of her people on the altar of WORLD DOMINATION!

Topic #2—The radically new Phantom war plane is causing an equally radical revision of the master war strategy of the United States. Elements of several past strategies are now being blended together to create a new grand plan. It is this new grand master strategy which America's war planners are counting on to bring them victory in NUCLEAR WAR ONE, and they plan to use the war plan very soon—by the autumn of this year 1982!

Strategic nuclear war planning here in Washington is now being carried out under the code name "PROJECT Z." The letter "Z" was chosen because it is the final letter in the alphabet. The war planners here are confident that this is the last war plan they will need against Russia. War planning under "PROJECT Z" is so secret that it's not being done at the Pentagon itself; instead, an elite group of war strategists have been assembled at a special war room in downtown Washington. The war room is hidden away in a building which would never be suspected for the purpose. It's practically within the shadow of the White House!

The elite war planners for NUCLEAR WAR ONE constitute a very small group. Their job is to think in terms of the big picture. They have at their finger tips computer terminals with which they can access any information they need from other Government computers. This includes not only Pentagon data banks but also the computer files of other Government agencies.

As I say these words, the "PROJECT Z" war planners have already arrived at the broad outlines for their master war plan. Countless details and refinements still lie ahead, but the basic strategy is already decided! That strategy is what I am about to reveal to you.

The "PROJECT Z" strategy for NUCLEAR WAR ONE is a three-phase plan—that is, the war planners intend for the war to proceed in three distinct phases. These phases are known as:

Phase 1—Initiation Phase 2—Attrition, and Phase 3—Domination.

In past reports I've given many details about the process which is to lead up to the coming war. That process is based on ever-increasing world crises, like those that led up to World War I. We are now seeing that process in full swing all around us. Within six months from now these deliberate crises are supposed to provide the spark to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The "PROJECT Z" war planners are concerned with the military acts from that initial spark onward.

Phase #1 in their plan, the Initiation Phase, will begin with an American surprise attack against Russia. The surprise attack will use the new Phantom war planes. They will be the key to the outcome of the rest of the war.

Some 3-1/2 years ago, in the summer of 1978, I reported that America was shifting to a first-strike nuclear strategy against Russia. In AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I described the prime objective of any such American first strike. It will be to knock out the Earth bases for Russia's space triad of strategic weapons. If that can be done, Russia's overwhelming military power in space will soon wither and die. That will leave the United States and Russia on more equal terms for the rest of the war. When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 37, the plan was to use a combination of Subcraft and unmanned aircraft called RPVs for the initial attack. That plan was actually attempted over two years ago, as I reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 53 and 54. It ended in total failure because Subcraft and RPVs were no match for Russia's Cosmospheres with their beam weapons; but now the new Phantom war planes are almost ready, and the plan is being revived in updated form.

Phantom war planes are intended to be based in at least three countries on Russia's doorstep. These basing areas are: northern Norway; eastern Turkey; and most critical of all, Sinkiang Province in northwestern China. Already high-power lasers are being moved into those areas. They are equipped with the new aiming device called CEIR (pronounced seer), which I described last month. These lasers have the proven ability to shoot down Cosmospheres. They will be used to protect the Phantom war planes from destruction on the ground by Cosmospheres.

The Phantom war planes which will be used are unmanned. They are equipped with robot pilots which can be programmed to fly each plane to a preassigned target. Each will be programmed for a one-way trip. The invisible robot-piloted aircraft will fly

through Russian air space, invulnerable to any beam-weapon attacks. Anti-aircraft missiles fired at them will be unable to hone in on them, and so the "PROJECT Z" planners believe that the robot Phantom planes will reach their targets.

Those targets are Russia's four Cosmodromes for rockets plus several Cosmosphere installations in central Siberia. The invisible robot planes will crash like kamikazes into their targets. Seemingly out of a clear blue sky, all of Russia's Space bases will suddenly vanish in thermonuclear fireballs. In addition to Russia's Space bases, the Phantom war plane assault will also be directed at one other category of prime targets. Those are the bases for Russia's flying Anti-missile System, which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. The System consists of a fleet of TU-144 Supersonic Transports equipped with particle-beam weapons. They are supposed to provide Russia's final line of defense against incoming missile warheads. American Phantom war planes will be programmed to destroy the TU-144 bases.

Phase #1 of the "PROJECT Z" war plan continues on a very tight timetable. If the invisible war plane attack succeeds, a furious counterattack by Russia is guaranteed. "PROJECT Z" calls for the United States to beat Russia to the punch.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 66 last summer 1981, I revealed the plan by which America's entire nuclear arsenal is to be fired at Russia. It will be done by creating a false indication that America is under nuclear attack. The method which will be employed is known as "Electromagnetic Pulse" or EMP. EMP is a phenomenon associated with nuclear blasts at the fringes of space. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 66, our Strategic Forces are being programmed to consider an EMP episode to be positive proof of a Russian attack. Under those circumstances, they are instructed to counterattack against Russia without waiting for any further orders!

In the "PROJECT Z" timetable, the Phantom war plane explosions in Russia will be followed moments later by nuclear detonations over North America. These will be the warheads of American high-speed missiles called ACMs. They will be launched into the sky from various locations around the United States to create a violent EMP episode. Our Strategic Nuclear Forces, obeying orders, will launch what they will believe to be retaliation against Russia.

As the American ACMs are launched into the sky over our heads, still another event is to be underway. Last month I reported that a Russian Cosmosphere had been shot down for the first time—in January over New Jersey. In the same way, high-power lasers located in many places around the United States will be shooting down as many Cosmospheres as possible. By the time our ICBMs are launched a few minutes later, it's expected that many of the threatening Cosmospheres overhead will have been destroyed. They will be unable to blast all of our missiles as they are launched, and many will survive to be on their way to Russia. Thanks to the initial Phantom war plane attack, Russia's flying ABM System will also be out of action. Stripped of all her defenses against missile attack, the Soviet Union will soon be aflame with a sea of nuclear firestorms.

In the "PROJECT Z" war plan, the arrival of American ICBMs on Russian targets marks the end of Phase #1 of the war, the Initiation Phase.

Next comes Phase #2, the Attrition Phase. During Phase #2,

the war planners here envision extreme damage to both the United States and Russia, with the war gradually running down. First there will be a rain of Russian missile warheads on the United States. There will also be missile attacks on certain other targets around the world where American Military Forces are located; but the real destruction will be right here in the United States itself!

The "PROJECT Z" war planners do not expect America, as we know it, to survive a nuclear exchange. Unlike Russia, the United States has no Civil Defense worthy of the name, let alone hardened blast shelters; and because of the need for total surprise in the attack against Russia's Space bases, the ensuing nuclear exchanges will come without warning. Vacationers will be on beaches, businessmen will be making deals, housewives will be in supermarkets, children will be at play. Suddenly air raid sirens may start to blare, as they did on a summer day in Hiroshima 36 years ago, but it will be too late. The America we know and love will die in a thousand Hiroshimas. The war schemers have planned for all that. While you and I and our children vanish from the face of the earth, they intend to be riding out the attack they have caused in Government war bunkers!

Gradually over a period of many months they expect the conflict between Russia and the United States to sputter out. Both sides will be exhausted and ruined, both will lose the capacity to carry the war any further. In Russia, the wounds will be grievous—up to 50-million dead and millions more injured; but in the United States the wounds will be mortal. The "PROJECT Z" war planners have figured it out on their computers. If we are lucky, from 40- to 50-million Americans may survive at the end of NUCLEAR WAR ONE. All the rest will have been killed outright in nuclear attacks or will have died of injuries and disease. NUCLEAR WAR ONE will leave medical care virtually nonexistent in what is left of America.

The American Bolsheviks here intend to ride out the war after setting it off. They will wait until the stalemate point is reached with both sides unable to fight any longer. That will mark the end of Phase #2, the Attrition Phase.

Finally, the "PROJECT Z" war plan will move into the third and final phase. That phase is world domination by the Satanic Bolsheviks who now control the United States Military. In this final phase, the Bolsheviks here in America will be taking advantage of secret preparations which began long ago. In AUDIO LETTER No. 28 I described the two-prong strategy for world domination which the Four Rockefeller Brothers launched in 1961. One side of this twin strategy required the United States to give the impression that it was growing steadily weaker, disarming unilaterally; but that was only for public consumption. The secret side of the strategy involved an actual build-up of armaments, in secret.

When the Bolsheviks here seized power from the Rockefellers, they continued the stockpiling of secret reserves of armaments world-wide. When NUCLEAR WAR ONE sputters out into exhausted stalemate, they plan to bring these secret reserves of military power into the open. Even if the entire populations of the United States and Russia are gone, that will still leave 95% of the world's population alive. With the world's only surviving major military force, they believe world domination will be theirs at last.

Topic #3—Yesterday morning March 30 Space Shuttle Flight #3 officially ended, one day behind schedule. For the first time we

got to see a shuttle landing at the White Sands Missile Range, New Mexico. As I detailed last year in AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 64, White Sands is the true nerve center of the Space Shuttle Program.

This third shuttle flight also chalked up another first, and this one was not visible on television. For the first time, my friends, a space shuttle has succeeded in its secret military mission. By doing so, the shuttle has removed one more barrier to nuclear war. The accelerated war planning now under way here in Washington will be able to proceed even faster, thanks to the Space Shuttle.

The third shuttle mission took place nearly one year after the first flight of April 1981. A comparison between the first and third flights is a study in ironies. Last April, publicity about the first flight was designed to give the impression that it was unnaturally perfect. Meanwhile, the secret military mission—which we did not see—was a disaster. This time on Flight #3, it was the other way around. From start to finish the publicity emanating from NASA gave the impression that the shuttle was plagued with problems. NASA wanted to be able to explain it away if disaster should strike again; but as it turned out, the military mission in space, hidden from our eyes, was a success.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 72 last month I described what that mission was. Space Shuttle #3 was supposed to orbit a special new Spy Satellite, which I described last year in AUDIO LETTER No. 62. It is hardened against attack from Russia's space weapons and armed with a robot-controlled laser that can shoot back. In addition, the shuttle itself was armed with lasers this time, as I detailed last month.

The public image of a troubled, plagued shuttle flight actually got underway several days before launch, thanks to the weather. Drenching rainstorms turned Edwards Air Force Base in California, used for the first two shuttle landings, into a soggy mess. The tight military schedule of the Shuttle Program required that the flight take off on schedule anyway, so for public consumption a 23-car railroad train loaded with equipment was sent from California to New Mexico. Ostensibly, NASA was setting up a spur-of-the-moment landing site at the White Sands Missile Range. This was done so that the central role of White Sands in the Shuttle Program would not be suspected by the public.

Space Shuttle #3 lifted off from Cape Canaveral only an hour behind schedule on Monday morning March 22. Beginning at the moment of lift-off, NASA started laying the basis for a cover-up story should the military mission fail. First we heard the prerecorded voice of Shuttle Commander Jack Lousma saying unexplained white flakes were flying past the windshield. Later, after the shuttle was out of sight, we were told that one of the power packs called an APU was malfunctioning. These initial hints of possible trouble had been prerecorded for broadcast during the launch—for a reason. There was fear that the shuttle might be destroyed by Russian space weapons before reaching orbit. Had that happened, the shuttle managers wanted to be able to initiate a cover-up which would not reveal the military situation; but as it turned out, the preparations which I detailed last month were successful. Shuttle #3 did reach orbit successfully, and a key to success was a radical new maneuver added to the flight plan.

When Space Shuttle #3 took off last week it headed into the

northeast. Long-distance cameras followed it until the two solid rockets separated and fell away. Then, as the shuttle disappeared from sight, it started its long sweeping turn into the north. It was heading toward a near-polar orbit so that it would pass over Russia. This much of the flight plan was the same as in the past, but this time a critical new feature was added.

Less than 30 seconds after the shuttle disappeared from TV cameras, the cargo-bay doors were blasted off. This opened up a field of fire for the defensive laser at the front of the cargo bay, which I discussed in AUDIO LETTER No. 72. Then the shuttle and its giant external tanks started rotating slowly in a space-age version of a barrel roll. In World War II, Fighter pilots made use of the barrel roll to avoid bullets from enemy airplanes. Likewise, the Space Shuttle this month used a barrel roll to protect itself against possible attack from Russian Cosmospheres. By rotating like a corkscrew, the shuttle made it impossible for a Cosmosphere to approach safely from any direction. The barrel-roll maneuver was a very risky one for the shuttle. The shuttle and tank were never designed with such aerobatics in mind, but calculations showed that it should survive a slow roll, and it did.

One of the biggest questions about the barrel-roll stunt was what it would do to the astronauts Lousma and Fullerton. They were required to withstand these dizzying gyrations for about six minutes. At the same time, the shuttle was still accelerating with up to three times the force of gravity; and because of the peculiar design of the shuttle and fuel tank, the gyrations were sickening indeed. Military space doctors knew that at best Lousma and Fullerton would be very sick for some time after reaching orbit. Their wild, crushing, spinning ride would end abruptly in weightlessness. That is a combination guaranteed to derange the equilibrium of even the toughest astronaut. Nothing remotely like it had ever been done in space before. Doctors were worried that even if Lousma and Fullerton survived the mission and returned to earth, there could be permanent damage to their equilibrium.

When Lousma and Fullerton reached orbit, they did indeed become violently ill. That's why we heard those reports about nausea striking both men. NASA wanted to pave the way for a plausible public explanation if they should not appear well when they returned to earth. At the same time, the shuttle planners knew perfectly well why they were sick. That is why NASA spokesmen acted so unconcerned when discussing the space sickness with reporters. When they called it "motion sickness" (quote), they were making an understatement.

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 72 last month, I reported that the plan was for Lousma and Fullerton to begin work immediately upon reaching orbit. Their extensively modified crew compartment was to be depressurized already, with the two men depending upon their space suits. This plan had to be modified slightly when the barrel roll was added to the flight plan.

When the shuttle reached orbit the astronauts were in space suits, but the cabin was still pressurized. They were allowed several minutes to get from the flight deck to the Gemini-type escape capsule stored below. Once inside the escape capsule they depressurized the cabin; then the Nose Laser System deployed automatically to protect the shuttle against any attacks by Russian space weapons. This allowed Lousma and Fullerton to recover from space sickness inside the capsule.

For the next 24 hours or so, getting well was their main task. It was a period of vulnerability of depending on the untried Automatic Laser System for protection. The shuttle planners wanted to have an excuse ready later should the shuttle be attacked and destroyed. So the day after the launch we were shown TV pictures of missing tiles on the nose of the shuttle. According to those pictures, my friends, at least a dozen tiles in the black area were lost. If that had really happened, it would have been cause for great alarm. Later on NASA spokesmen downplayed it, saying the tiles were noncritical. But there is no such thing as a noncritical black tile. The black tiles supposedly lost are to withstand temperatures above 1500 degrees Fahrenheit. Under the tile there is nothing but a piece of felt called a "strain isolation pad." It would not last five seconds in those temperatures, and under the felt is the metal skin of the shuttle. It is made of aluminum, which loses its strength above 350 degrees. If exposed to 1500-degree heat by a few missing black tiles, the shuttle could not possibly avoid severe damage.

The NASA space movies we saw on TV were a prerecorded hoax to provide an excuse if something went wrong, but it did not. The astronauts recovered, went to work, and deployed the new military satellite. Meanwhile NASA spokesmen waved aside the alleged tile problem as minor. It had served its purpose and was no longer needed.

Throughout the rest of the week we heard about one problem after another. Supposedly the cargo-bay doors would not close, the toilet would not work, three out of four communication channels went out, one of the three crucial data display screens in the cockpit failed. None of these stories were true; all were devised to provide a cover story for possible problems with the secret mission, but in the end none of them were needed and so NASA spokesmen just waved them aside as unimportant.

The secret military mission was a success, so the pretended mission which was cooked up for TV was declared a success, too.

Late Friday night March 26, Lousma and Fullerton finished deploying the new Super-Spy Satellite. It had taken longer than planned, but it was done. As I explained last month, they left their shuttle in orbit. They re-entered their Gemini-type escape capsule, fired its retrorockets, and dropped out of orbit to an Indian Ocean splashdown. From there they were flown nonstop to the White Sands Missile Range, New Mexico.

The shuttle managers took advantage of a sandstorm at White Sands to delay the public landing for one extra day while the astronauts recuperated. Then yesterday morning they boarded one of the two remaining secret shuttles at White Sands. The shuttle took off from the north end of the immense White Sands Range, using small solid rockets. Moments before 11:00 A.M. it made its appearance on TV. It swooped in from the north, dropped down over the mountains, and touched down in a cloud of white dust. Finally after a respectable wait, out stepped Lousma and Fullerton, rested and refreshed.

My friends, like every other American I find myself wanting to cheer at the success of Space Shuttle Flight #3. It was achieved against incredible odds, in the face of Russia's overwhelming power in space. Determination, ingenuity, and sheer boldness carried the day. That is how I am tempted to feel—but then I have to recall the ultimate purpose of all this. The military shuttle managers are not doing these things to prevent war, BUT TO PREPARE TO FIGHT ONE! The success of Space Shuttle #3, my

friends, has brought us a giant step closer to thermonuclear war.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've reported on major developments now taking place in our headlong rush into nuclear war. The United States has developed a new secret superweapon, the invisible Phantom war plane. Its invulnerability to beam weapons makes it the centerpiece of a whole new war strategy against Russia. This strategy, code named "PROJECT Z", involves an American surprise attack on Russia followed by all-out war!

Until now the main weakness of the war plan has been the lack of fresh reconnaissance data on Russia, but now that problem is rapidly being solved. Last month I reported a major Intelligence coup against Russia by the war planners here, and now the success of Space Shuttle #3 is adding to the momentum for nuclear war.

My friends, for many years now our Lord Jesus Christ has held back the holocaust that threatens to engulf us. Time after time we have come to the very brink, only to be pulled back and spared once again.

Our Lord "is not willing that any should perish", and He has shown us mercy over and over. But what have we, as a nation, done in response to that mercy? Have we mended our ways? Returned to Him? And revived the values that made America great?

The answer, my friends, is found in the words of the prophet Jeremiah, Chapter 5:

"We have spoken falsely of the LORD, and have said He will do nothing. No evil will come upon us, nor shall we see sword or famine.

Behold, I am bringing upon you a nation from afar, says the LORD. It is an enduring nation, it is an ancient nation, a nation whose language you do not know."

My friends, our Satanic Bolshevik leaders here intend to destroy the ancient, enduring nation of Russia whose language we do not know. But our Lord Jesus Christ sees all, and He alone will repay!

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #74

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is April 30, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 74.

It's now been almost one month since war broke out in the South Atlantic. On the surface it seems that it's only a dispute between Argentina and Great Britain over the barren, wind-swept Falkland Islands and South Georgia Island. In reality, it's far more than that.

The so-called Falklands crisis is just the visible tip of a giant military operation. During this month of April 1982,

fierce naval battles have taken place—not only in the South Atlantic but also in the South Pacific. Up to now most of the hostilities have been kept under wraps by wartime censorship on all sides. But as I say these words, the naval war in the Southern Hemisphere is about to come to the surface.

Beginning today, April 30, a total naval and air blockade of the Falklands by the Royal Navy has begun. At the same time a counterblockade has been declared by Argentina in the same area.

To be effective, a blockade must be imposed over a period of time, but the Royal Navy does not have that much time. Winter is coming on in the South Atlantic, and the British supply lines are overextended. Having come this far, Her Majesty's navy cannot simply drop the blockade and sail away in a few weeks time without drawing blood from Argentina. As a result the British will be forced to undertake military operations very soon no matter how risky they may be.

There is also another reason why the Royal Navy now has no choice but to engage the Argentine forces in combat. That reason, my friends, is that the Royal Navy has already suffered losses in secret combat this month. Up to this moment there will be no way to explain away the damage which has been sustained by the British fleet. Only when publicly admitted fighting erupts will the British dare to admit that they have suffered battle losses. To obtain that cover story, the British have no choice but to sail into combat; but in doing so, they will be risking even heavier losses on top of those already sustained. In short, my friends, Her Majesty's navy has sailed into a trap.

The events now unfolding in the South Atlantic carry strange, ironic echoes of the past. For weeks now we've been hearing countless commentators referring to the British task force as an "armada" (quote). The British of all people ought to be very uneasy with that description. The original Spanish Armada 400 years ago was renowned as a seemingly invincible fighting force, but it came to grief in a naval disaster so complete that it changed the course of history—and it was none other than the English navy that destroyed the Spanish Armada.

The original Spanish Armada put to sea in 1588 during the reign of England's Queen Elizabeth I. The Armada was an invasion fleet carrying thousands of crack fighting men to invade England. They were met by the daring sea dogs of Sir Francis Drake. Drake and his small, fast ships turned the tables on the Spanish Armada by changing the rules of battle. The English fleet was equipped with new longer-range guns, and it stayed upwind and out of reach. From there the English pounded, smashed, and shattered the big ships of the mighty Armada. When it was all over, barely half the Spanish fleet was left to limp back to port. Drake's defeat of the Spanish Armada was a shock to the world. It opened the door for England under Queen Elizabeth I to start its expansion into a truly global empire.

Today, 400 years later, history seems to have come full circle. Queen Elizabeth II is witnessing the dismantling of the world empire whose heyday began under Queen Elizabeth I, and now the cultures of England and of Spain are once again in confrontation. Once again a so-called armada is preparing for invasion, but this time the armada is British, not Spanish. Four hundred years ago Sir Francis Drake was the hero of the day; today, the ghost of Francis Drake is once again on the scene.

The South Atlantic war zone is at the eastern end of the Drake Passage around the southern tip of South America. The defeat of

the Spanish Armada four centuries ago broke the back of Spain's naval supremacy, and now the defeat of the new British armada may well break the back of what remains of the once glorious Royal Navy.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE MILITARY SECRET OF SOUTH GEORGIA ISLAND Topic #2—THE SECRET NAVAL WAR OF THE SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE Topic #3—THE ROCKEFELLER FEAR CAMPAIGN AGAINST NUCLEAR WAR.

Topic #1—When the Falkland Islands crisis began early this month it looked at first like a tempest in a teapot. For a century and a half since 1833, the Islands have been controlled by Great Britain. During that entire time, British sovereignty over the Falklands has been disputed by Argentina. There have been countless threats by Argentina to seize the Islands, which it calls the Malvinas, but the threats have always come to nothing in the past and Britain has never even gotten very worried about them.

The Islands are four times as distant from Argentina as Cuba is from the United States, and they are not much of a prize. After 150 years of occupancy, the Falklands are home to fewer than 2,000 British settlers and a lot of sheep. In short, the remote Falkland Islands hardly look like something to fight over, and yet here we are watching another crisis take place. We are watching as war erupts between Great Britain and Argentina.

The Thatcher government is acting as if it has forgotten all about its usual preoccupation with the Soviet threat at NATO's doorstep. Instead, Britain is throwing almost everything it's

got at Argentina aircraft carriers, cruisers, destroyers,

submarines, assault ships—you name it. Luxury cruise ships have even been commissioned and turned into troop carriers overnight. Wave after wave of additional assault troops have been activated and sent to join the fleet even after it sailed. Ships and submarines have been pulled off station from normal NATO duty and sent to reinforce the task force. The initial 40-ship force has grown steadily over the past several weeks into an armada numbering over 70. Over two-thirds of the entire Royal Navy has already been deployed to the South Atlantic off Argentina.

Watching all this, a lot of people are asking: What's this fight really all about? The most popular answer suggested in the major media is "oil." Vast deposits of oil are known to exist under the continental shelf between Argentina and the Falklands, but that has been known for nearly 10 years. In no way does it explain the timing of the sudden military offensive by Argentina this month, and oil explains even less about the Argentine seizure of South Georgia Island.

South Georgia Island is 800 miles east of the Falklands with no known oil deposits anywhere near it; and compared to South Georgia, the Falklands are an island paradise. South Georgia Island is covered with rugged mountains, treacherous valleys, glaciers, and semi-permanent snow. Most of it is uninhabitable. On top of all that, Argentina has absolutely no legal or historical claim to South Georgia Island. In that respect it stands in sharp contrast to the Falklands.

In the early 1830s the Falklands were occupied for a while by Argentine colonists. In 1833 the British expelled them and took over the Island. For that and other historical reasons, Argentina argues that the Falklands really belong to Argentina, not Britain.

But no such argument is possible for South Georgia Island. It has always been controlled by Britain, never by Argentina or Spain. The Argentine seizure of South Georgia Island looks even more unreasonable from a military point of view. Argentina's leaders are military men and they think in military terms. They were well aware ahead of time that far-off South Georgia Island could not possibly be held for long. By seizing it they were setting themselves up to absorb a military defeat, as the Island was retaken by Britain. So the question is: Why did Argentina's military junta bother with the seemingly worthless South Georgia Island at all?

My friends, the answers to all these questions are military, not political or economic. South Georgia Island possesses an enormous military secret. It's a giant underground installation buried under the mountains at the northwest end of the Island. The real reason for the so-called Falkland crisis is this secret installation, together with two other similar installations which I will describe shortly.

The secret military complexes have been in existence for many years; they are not new. What is new is the accelerated nuclear war timetable of the American Bolshevik war planners here in Washington. For the past two months I've been reporting the details of this new war plan to you as quickly as I can obtain and verify them.

The plan calls for NUCLEAR WAR ONE to erupt by September of this year 1982!! It is this fast-approaching nuclear war threat that caused the so-called Falklands crisis to erupt now.

What is going on now is a coordinated effort to spoil part of the Bolshevik grand strategy for the coming nuclear war. The mutual enemies of the American Bolsheviks here—namely, the Rockefeller cartel—and Russia's new rulers in the Kremlin are behind the present crisis. They are trying to ruin Phase #3 of the "PROJECT Z" war plan which I revealed last month. That phase is to be world domination by the American Bolsheviks after both Russia and the United States have been destroyed in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. As I mentioned last month, the key to this plan is the existence of secret weapons stockpiles in various places around the world.

The American Bolshevik military planners here in America are working with other Bolshevik agents in key military positions of other countries to set off war. Having done that, they intend to ride out the nuclear holocaust they have caused, safe and cozy in Government war bunkers! When the warring nations finally lie smoldering and exhausted, the Bolsheviks will leave the shattered remains of their host countries. They will rendezvous at the secret weapons installations and bring their weapons into the open. They will confront the world with the only remaining fresh, up-to-date, powerful military force on earth; and using that military power, they will become the undisputed rulers of the world—that is, they plan to do all this, and they plan to pave the way for world domination very soon by setting off NUCLEAR WAR ONE in a matter of months. The Rockefeller cartel and Russia's new anti-Bolshevik rulers are working together in a race against time to try to head off the Bolshevik war plan.

Last month I mentioned that the Bolsheviks here are benefitting from war preparations which were started by the Rockefellers long ago. It has only been about three years since the Rockefellers were dislodged as the prime movers of the United States Government by the Bolsheviks. Since that time the United

States Government has been a house divided, torn by internal power struggles between rival Bolshevik and Rockefeller factions. But before that, the United States had been dominated for decades both economically and politically by the Four Rockefeller Brothers.

In 1961 the Brothers launched a new long-range plan for world domination. It was a two-prong strategy, half visible and half secret, which I first described long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 28. It was a plan for the United States to arm to the teeth in secret while appearing to disarm gradually. Without repeating all the details, the basic idea was grandiose yet simple. By deliberately appearing weak, the Rockefeller-controlled United States would maneuver itself into a nuclear war with Russia. Then the secret weapons, including superweapons, would be unleashed to smash Russia and take over the world.

When they set the grand plan in motion in 1961, the Rockefeller Brothers were looking ahead to a nuclear war by the late 1970s. Their military analysts concluded very early that the war being planned would have very different effects on the Northern and Southern Hemispheres. Both superpowers, the United States and the Soviet Union, are located well up in the Northern Hemisphere; so are the other full-fledged nuclear powers—Great Britain, France, Red China, and India. By contrast, the strategic targets for nuclear war in the Southern Hemisphere are relatively few and far between. In other words, it was expected that the coming nuclear war would be essentially a Northern Hemisphere war.

In an all-out nuclear holocaust it is known that serious radioactive fallout will gradually spread to affect even areas not initially hit by war. But there are limits to how far the war clouds can spread. It was discovered long ago that there is very little mixing between the air of the Northern and Southern Hemispheres. In the northern half of our planet, cold air from the North Pole works its way southward towards the equator, then it works its way back to the north as warm air. A mirror image of this process takes up the southern half of the planet. Northern and Southern Hemisphere air meet in the equatorial zone, but very little of the air changes places.

The military conclusion, my friends, is this: the coming nuclear war could ruin large areas of the Northern Hemisphere for generations to come; but if the calculations are right, the Southern Hemisphere could escape virtually unaffected by the war. This was music to the ears of the Four Rockefeller Brothers. A quick look at the globe of the world shows why. The Rockefeller cartel has dominated Latin America ever since World War II. As I discussed in my very first monthly AUDIO LETTER, Nelson Rockefeller solidified the cartel grip on Latin America during the war. He accomplished this as so-called "Coordinator of Hemispheric Defense" for then-President Franklin D. Roosevelt. So that takes care of the South American continent and its natural resources.

Then there is the African continent. There, too, Rockefeller control was already in effect over wide areas of Black Africa, especially south of the equator. All this was thanks to the efforts of John D. Rockefeller III, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 36.

Looking around the globe, the most important remaining land masses from the standpoint of world domination are Australia and New Zealand. Thanks to World War II, both were wide open to the Rockefellers.

The Rockefeller Brothers decided to establish secret military installations in the Southern Hemisphere for use after the coming war. By this means they expected to become the masters of the surviving southern half of planet Earth after the Northern Hemisphere war. Then, as the Northern Hemisphere gradually recovered from the nuclear holocaust, the Rockefeller empire would be able to pick up the pieces. In this way the third generation Rockefeller Brothers expected their family dynasty to inherit the Earth.

In order to control the Southern Hemisphere militarily after the war, some means would have to be available to project military power onto any land mass. For example, revolts against Rockefeller domination would require troops—not a blast from the beam weapons on the Moon. The most critical factor for postwar military domination of the world was found to be a navy. A minimum of two secret naval fleets would be required—one based in the South Atlantic, the other in the South Pacific. Since the reserve naval fleets were to be kept secret until after the Northern Hemisphere nuclear war, they could not be built in existing shipyards. New construction facilities had to be built and they had to be hidden. To hide an entire shipyard is no small task; they take up a lot of space. On top of that, it was essential that the ships remain hidden after they were built. The best way to achieve that was to combine the shipyard and naval base into one over-all secret installation. Finally, the secret naval installation had to be invulnerable to nuclear attack; otherwise if its existence were ever discovered prematurely, the secret navy might be wiped out.

The combined requirements for secrecy, space, and protection against attack were formidable; but one day in 1959, while all these plans were still in the early stages of development, the answer presented itself. During a so-called banking trip to Sweden, David Rockefeller was given a tour of a unique hidden naval port. The port is hollowed out from solid granite cliffs which come right down to the water. The entrance to the port is a gigantic hole in the side of the cliff which can be sealed off with enormous steel doors. Inside this big doorway on the water a huge cavity has been hollowed out to accommodate ships.

The Rockefeller Brothers and their military adviser decided that a bigger, more secret, better protected version of the Swedish hidden port was just what they wanted. A survey of candidate sites was then initiated. The site survey covered coastal areas throughout the Southern Hemisphere. Many areas were rejected very quickly because the topography was wrong. Other areas were rejected because they were too close to the equator. Still others had to be ruled out because there were too many people living nearby, making the desired level of secrecy impossible. Finally, it was essential that the sites chosen for the secret naval installations be totally secure politically.

At last the sites for the secret naval installations were selected. In the South Pacific, extreme southern New Zealand was selected. This is what I was alluding to in AUDIO LETTER No. 71 three months ago when I called attention to New Zealand's extreme importance in the coming war.

In order to obtain the necessary space, the secret New Zealand naval installation had to be divided up into two sites located close together. One is at the extreme southwest tip of South Island where the mountain range known as the Southern Alps comes down virtually to the water's edge. The other part of the installation is built into the northwest tip of Stewart Island,

which is off the tip of South Island. The Stewart Island facility is hollowed out within a rise known as Mt. Anglem.

The New Zealand location met all the requirements. Ever since World War II the government of New Zealand has been tied even closer to the United States than to Great Britain. The location is far from the equator, and the installations are buried deep under mountains, protected from nuclear attack. They are also too deep to be reached by particle-beam attacks, and the New Zealand site is well situated to command the entire South Pacific.

In the South Atlantic an even more perfect site was found. That site, my friends, is South Georgia Island. It is located perfectly for naval domination of the entire South Atlantic. The tall, rugged mountains provided a perfect location for the secret installation at the northwest tip of the 100-mile long island. It is controlled by Great Britain whose government, like that of New Zealand, was willing to cooperate; and South Georgia Island was virtually uninhabited except for a whaling station on the northeast coast. The whaling station was some 50 miles away from the secret new installation which was being built, but Britain took no chances. In 1965 the whaling station was closed down. Since that time there have been no inhabitants on South Georgia Island except for a few dozen alleged Antarctic scientists.

Construction of the secret naval facilities—two in New Zealand, one on South Georgia Island—began in the early 1960's. The techniques were adapted from those used previously to build other large underground facilities, such as the NORAD installation inside Cheyenne Mountain, Colorado; however these techniques were adapted in radically new ways to achieve construction access directly from the sea instead of overland. In this way, the sheltering mountain was left undisturbed in appearance both during and after construction.

The cuts in the mountain side which were necessary to let ships in and out were kept as small as possible and were well camouflaged. Like the Swedish hidden naval port arrangement, the entrances to the secret installations can be sealed up. When sealed, the entrance is virtually impossible to detect unless you know exactly where it is; and unlike most large construction projects, there are no tailings or piles of leftover rock lying around to attract attention. The man-made caverns which house the secret naval installations are enormous, but all the rock and debris was disposed of at sea.

Once the secret naval facilities were built, they had to be outfitted for ship construction and docksite storage. The fake disarmament of the United States during the 1960s contributed greatly to this task. From 1961 to 1968 one man played a pivotal role in this elaborate Rockefeller scheme. He was then-Secretary of Defense Robert McNamara. All through the 60's McNamara presided over the public paring back of America's visible military power. This included the closing down and dismantling of entire shipyards. What we were not told was where all that shipyard equipment went afterwards. Where it went, my friends, was to the new secret installations which were being outfitted in New Zealand and South Georgia Island!

The secret naval installations have been used as duplication facilities to reproduce certain ships and submarines designed and built here in the United States. As Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger told Congress recently, it is cheaper to build two ships at a time. That is especially true if the second ship is an exact duplicate of the first. This has become even more true

in recent years through the use of computerized manufacturing techniques.

The secret naval fleets which have been built at the secret installations are made up of duplicates—exact duplicates of certain other ships and submarines. They are all nuclear powered—nuclear "subs"; nuclear cruisers; nuclear destroyers; and yes, nuclear aircraft carriers, three of them. A secret twin was built for the U.S.S. Nimitz, for the U.S.S. Eisenhower, and for the newly-launched U.S.S. Carl Vincent. All have been financed through the gigantic cost overruns, so called, that we constantly hear about in the Defense Department; and all three carriers have been provided with a full complement of aircraft whose manufacture was financed the same way!

The ships of the secret American Bolshevik naval fleets are all duplicates of other nuclear-powered vessels. Even so, the secret naval ships possess one key difference.

Last month I revealed that the so-called "Stealth Program" has succeeded in developing a kind of electromagnetic invisibility shield. This technique makes an object invisible from a distance by distorting light waves in its vicinity.

A whole new fleet of Phantom war-planes are now going into crash production that use this principle; and, my friends, all of the secret American Bolshevik navy ships have already been outfitted with similar Stealth-field equipment! The Stealth principle is actually easier to apply to ships than to airplanes because there is more room for the powerful equipment that generates the field.

After NUCLEAR WAR ONE, the secret Stealth navy of the American Bolsheviks would be light years ahead of any other navy left on earth. It would be perfect for the intended role of world domination. The Rockefellers set it all in motion long ago, my friends, but three years ago they lost control of the United States Military. Now it's the American Bolsheviks who are in control, and they are bent on war.

These secret naval installations have precipitated what is being called the "Falklands crisis."

Topic #2—In AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 73 last month I described "PROJECT Z", the new Bolshevik three-phase strategy for NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

An elite group of American Bolshevik military planners here are flushing out the plan right now at a secret war-room here in Washington. It's a plan by which the United States will strike the first nuclear blow, followed by all-out thermonuclear war with Russia.

Having set off the holocaust, the Bolsheviks here and in certain other countries plan to rise it out safe in comfortable war bunkers. Finally after NUCLEAR WAR ONE fizzles out in stalemate, they plan to leave behind the ashes of the United States and her allies. Activating Phase #3 of their grand strategy, they plan to unveil their secret weapons, especially their secret naval fleets. With these they plan to conquer and rule what is left of the world. The United States as we know it will be dead and gone; but in the eyes of the Bolsheviks themselves, this outcome will constitute victory.

Up to now the nuclear war timetable which I first revealed two months ago is still on track. They are still shooting for

nuclear war to begin by September of this year 1982! Time is fast running out.

The Bolsheviks here are sprinting as fast as they can toward war; but, my friends, the Bolsheviks are not the only runners in this race. They have two deadly enemies, both of whom are equally determined to trip up the Bolsheviks. One enemy of the Bolsheviks here is the Rockefeller cartel; the other enemy is the new anti-Bolshevik ruling clique in Russia; and now these two mutual enemies of the Bolsheviks are pooling their efforts in certain ways.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 71 three months ago I reported that a limited, new anti-Bolshevik coalition was in the works between the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians. The January 26 meeting between Haig and Gromyko in Geneva, Switzerland, was a turning point in the formation of this coalition. It is now a reality, and is responsible for the so-called "Falkland crisis" now dominating the headlines. It should be emphasized that this new relationship between the Rockefeller cartel and Russia falls far short of a true alliance. They have very major disputes to be settled between them, but for the time being they have called a truce between themselves to deal with their mutual deadly enemy—the Bolsheviks here in America.

The first priority of the Russians and the Rockefellers is to slow down the Bolshevik preparations for imminent nuclear war. If they can do that, time is on the side of the Rockefeller cartel in certain political movements which I discussed last summer in AUDIO LETTER No. 67. A slow-down in the nuclear war timetable will also give more breathing space for additional anti-Bolshevik actions to be implemented.

The joint Rockefeller-Russian planners decided by mid-February that military action against the Bolsheviks was essential very quickly. No other type of action had any hope of taking effect fast enough to prevent nuclear war by the end of this summer.

The exact details of the "PROJECT Z" war plan are not known to either the Rockefellers or the Russians, but the general outlines are known to be as I described last month.

It was decided that military action should be devised that would undermine Phase #3 of the Bolshevik war plan—that is, the Bolshevik-controlled secret naval installations and fleets in the Southern Hemisphere should be attacked and crippled. By working together, the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians were able to devise an attack plan which neither could have carried out alone. The Rockefeller group, who built and originally controlled these bases, provided detailed Intelligence about the best way to attack them. The Russians with their enormous military machine provided the muscle to actually carry out the attack.

It was essential to devise a scheme that would enable both secret fleets in the South Atlantic and South Pacific to be attacked. Survival intact of either fleet would leave the Bolshevik war plan still workable.

Military analysts concluded very quickly that a direct assault on the New Zealand facilities was out of the question. There was no combination of commandos, frogmen, or other military force which could possibly keep an attack secret from the outside world. Any attack on the New Zealand bases would set off the very war which the Rockefellers and Russians want to prevent.

But the situation in the South Atlantic was a different

matter. In a way, the greatest asset of South Georgia Island was also its Achilles' heel. The extreme isolation which protected the secrecy of the South Georgia base also made a covert military assault feasible. The key lay with Argentina and her long-standing claims to the Falkland Islands.

As I mentioned in Topic #1, the Rockefeller cartel has dominated all of Latin America for decades. Cartel operatives were sent to Argentina to work out a deal with the government military junta there. The historic dispute over the Falkland Islands was to be used to provide a ruse, a military cover, to enable the South Georgia base to be attacked. The Argentine generals were not told everything about the situation by any means, but they were told enough to make clear what they were to do.

As an inducement to cooperate, the Argentine leaders were promised handsome rewards. They were guaranteed that after the shooting was over, the Falkland Islands would remain in Argentine hands. This guarantee included the promise of covert military assistance as needed against the Royal Navy. And to bolster the troubled Argentine economy, it was promised that the Rockefeller cartel will help develop the immense offshore oil reserves. With these combined promises of military glory and financial rewards, the Argentine military junta agreed to the plan.

On March 19 Argentina carried out Act #1 in the joint attack plan. A group of Argentine scrap-metal merchants, of all things, landed at the abandoned old whaling station on South Georgia Island. Supposedly they were there to dismantle the old buildings and cart them off to sell. While they were at it they also raised the Argentine flag over the work-site. The British, always nervous about South Georgia Island, promptly reacted as expected. The British Antarctic survey ship "Endurance" put 22 Marines ashore. They drove off the scrap merchants and tore down the Argentine flag.

The incident provided the desired excuse for the Argentine Junta to bring the simmering 150-year-old Falklands dispute to a boil. From time to time in the past, Argentina has claimed that South Georgia is part of the Falklands because it is administered that way by Britain. That argument is very flimsy but it now came in very handy. It was nothing new to hear this from Argentine leaders, so there was no hint of what was really afoot.

During late March, Argentine military forces started assembling for an assault on the Falklands. "Nothing new", thought the British high command. Argentina has carried out threatening maneuvers in the past many times. It was believed that they were about to do it again; but on April 2 Argentine forces did the unexpected. After many past false alarms, this time they actually invaded and seized the Islands. All Argentine public statements emphasized the long-standing historical claims to the Falklands themselves; but just for good measure, the next day a small Argentine force also seized far-off South Georgia Island. The force was so small that it gave the appearance initially that it was just a side show from Argentina's point of view; however, the small contingent of 22 Royal Marines were overpowered and bundled off the Island along with a group of 13 alleged scientists. That was the moment of payoff in the joint Rockefeller-Russian attack plan.

Thanks to the elaborate distraction staged by the Argentine forces, a special commando team got onto the Island undetected. Based on the detailed Rockefeller information about the base, the team moved to a location on the mountain directly above the

cavernous secret base. Special high-speed drilling equipment was set up by the Rockefeller members of the team while the Russian members concentrated on military defense. By late that evening, April 3, the military high command in London finally learned what was really taking place. The secret South Georgia base was under attack by virtually the only means possible. The joint Rockefeller-Russian team were drilling a shaft down through the mountain toward the hollowed out cavern inside. It was only a matter of time until their drill would break through the ceiling of the giant hidden naval base. Once the hole was made, the next step was obvious. The Rockefeller-Russian team would put a weapon of some kind through the hole. The best guess was that it would be a nerve gas.

The shock waves that went through the highest levels of the British government on the evening of April 3 can hardly be described, my friends. The Thatcher government, like the so-called Reagan Administration here in America, is Bolshevik controlled. That's why Margaret Thatcher always says, "Me, too" any time the Reagan Administration says or does anything against Russia. Both governments are party to the secret nuclear war plan in complete betrayal of the people of their respective countries, and on the evening of April 3 they suddenly discovered that their precious war plan was in deep, deep trouble.

Immediately the Thatcher government started assembling a naval armada to sail for the South Atlantic. Haste was the order of the day. The drilling on South Georgia Island was proceeding around the clock. The best estimates were that the drilling would break through into the roof of the naval base in about three weeks, on or about April 24. If help did not reach South Georgia by then, the secret installation might be doomed. The forces stationed at the installation itself were unable to defend themselves under the circumstances. Their mighty naval ships were ships in a bottle. They did not dare open the bottle to sail out to fight because the Russian commandos were armed with tactical and nuclear weapons. To open the blast-proof entrance doors would be suicide.

On April 5, just two days after South Georgia Island was seized, some 40 naval ships began moving out of British ports. The same day Lord Carrington was sacked as Foreign Minister. He was forced to resign, my friends, because he had assisted the Rockefeller attack plan by downplaying the Argentine attack preparations.

That same day, April 5, New Zealand, the home of the other secret naval fleet, broke diplomatic relations with Argentina. The two hidden New Zealand facilities had been placed on "Red Alert." As a precautionary measure, all submarines at the twin base were ordered to sea. Several surface ships were already at sea undergoing "sea trials", but that still left seven (7) major ships inside the hidden twin naval base including one of the nuclear aircraft carriers I mentioned earlier.

On that busy day of April 5, Argentina's Foreign Minister, Costa Mendez, was at the United Nations in New York. He was alarmed by the deployment of such a large part of the Royal Navy. Costa Mendez hurried here to Washington to seek reassurances from certain officials. He got them!

For the next two weeks or so the news was filled with stories about the allegedly slow movement of the British fleet while negotiations went on. That, my friends, was only a cover story. The Royal Navy was actually joining up and moving as rapidly as possible toward South Georgia Island. If the task force arrived

in time to save the secret base, a major battle was likely. The official stories about "slow movement" of the British armada were intended to give a cushion of time for that battle. If need be, the fleet would have several days to retake South Georgia Island, then it could move on to arrive near the Falklands on the announced schedule. In this way the crucial importance of South Georgia Island would be hidden and the big secret preserved.

It was initially expected that advance elements of the British fleet would reach the vicinity of South Georgia Island within two weeks. That would have been soon enough to attack the joint Rockefeller-Russian commando team and stop the drilling before it was completed. But Russian Cosmospheres and submarines made a shambles of the plan.

Key advance elements of the South Georgia attack contingent left Ascension Island early April 14, two days before it was announced officially. Shortly after they did so, they ran into trouble. Russian Cosmospheres and attack submarines closed in on a single ship which was critical to the planned counterassault on South Georgia Island. The Cosmospheres bombarded the bridge and combat information center of the ship with neutron radiation. In moments the ship was without any command, its communications and radar silenced. Then a Russian "sub" closed in and quickly finished off this key British ship with torpedoes. It broke apart with secondary explosions and sank rapidly. So far as is known, there were no survivors.

This unexpected shock in the mid-Atlantic produced two results, both important:

First, it caused a slowdown in the race toward the South Atlantic by the British armada. The task force had to be regrouped into a configuration better suited for an enroute defense, but that cost valuable time. Public announcements from London about the progress of the fleet reflected this slowdown. The timetable for arrival on battle stations near the Falklands started stretching out longer and longer. All this bought extra time for the joint commando team on South Georgia Island. The drilling continued.

The other result of the sinking was equally important. Word was flashed to the South Pacific Stealth navy to prepare for possible action. It was obvious that the Russian Navy was getting involved in the Atlantic, which meant that the Royal Navy could be in big trouble. During the dead of night, early April 15, the seven Stealth ships put to sea from their twin secret bases in southern New Zealand. They deployed to a secret operational headquarters area in the Antipodes Islands, 450 miles southeast of New Zealand. Their electromagnetic shields were operating to provide protection from attack. These shields make it impossible to communicate with the outside world or even to see it, as I explained last month; but once they arrived at the Antipodes, the Stealth ships hooked up to buoys equipped with shielded communication cables to the Island headquarters. The Antipodes headquarters, in turn, was in constant touch with the South Georgia base by way of a transoceanic cable around the tip of South America. The deployment of the available ships of the South Pacific Stealth fleet was exactly what the joint Rockefeller-Russian planners had hoped for. The ships had been flushed out from their essentially invulnerable hiding place in New Zealand!

The British ship's sinking of April 14 was also followed by other events. On April 15 the Argentine Navy started moving out of port. The same day, Alexander Haig arrived again in Buenos Aires. Supposedly he was there as a diplomat, but in reality he

was there as a General, dealing with Generals. Haig is the top Governmental operative of the Rockefeller cartel, as I have revealed in the past. He was making sure that the Argentines did not get cold feet and back down at that critical moment. Four days later, April 19, Haig left for Washington. As he boarded his plane, Haig somberly told reporters, "Time is running out." And so it was, my friends, for the secret South Georgia base.

The very next day, April 20, the drill broke through into the hollowed-out cavern of the naval base. Bolshevik military analysts in London had not expected that it could be completed until at least the following weekend. The British fleet was still out of range.

The weapon which the commando team inserted down through the long hole was a small, compact Russian neutron bomb. When it was detonated inside the confines of the huge artificial cave, the effects were devastating. The intense radiation instantly killed everyone inside the base. Also the heat and blast effects of the bomb are believed to have damaged all the ships inside sufficiently to badly disable them.

Meanwhile, Russian Cosmospheres and submarines were converging on the Stealth ships which were near the Antipodes Islands awaiting orders. From a distance, the ships were invisible to the eye due to their protective shields, which also protect against beam-weapon attack; but they were sitting ducks for the tactics which the Russians employed.

Floating overhead, the Cosmospheres located the seven ships using their Psychoenergetic Range-Finding equipment known as PRF. As I have reported in the past, there is no method known by which PRF can be jammed. The Cosmospheres radioed the exact locations of the ships to the attack submarines. The "subs" were armed with special non-homing, non-nuclear torpedoes designed to explode on impact. More sophisticated torpedoes would have been thrown off course or detonated prematurely by the protective shield of each ship; but these simple torpedoes just cruise right through each invisibility field to strike the ship and explode. Within 15 minutes after the attack began, all seven Bolshevik Stealth ships were on their way to the bottom, and with them went their Bolshevik Commanders and mercenary crews collected from around the world.

The South Pacific action took place just after sunset local time. The time here in Washington was around 2:00 P.M. April 23. That evening Secretary of State Haig was seen briefly in public with the new British Foreign Minister, Francis Pym. Pym was wearing the artificial pseudo-smile which diplomats are taught always to display in public. But not Haig. Haig was grinning from ear to ear, and no wonder. The joint Rockefeller-Russian military operation had been a brilliant success. The secret Bolshevik South Atlantic fleet had been virtually wiped out, bottled up inside South Georgia Island; and the South Pacific fleet, while not totally wiped out, had been badly crippled. By working together, the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians had won the secret naval war of the Southern Hemisphere.

Topic #3—As I say these words, news reports give the impression that war is about to erupt in the South Atlantic, but the real war in the Southern Hemisphere is already over. What we are watching now is the beginning of its bloody aftermath. That aftermath is the battle for the Falkland Islands. They have been promised to Argentina as a reward for her role in the secret war.

At this moment the Bolsheviks here in Washington are pressing

for a public announcement that the United States will side with Britain. As soon as that takes place, military action will heat up fast around the Falklands. Britain has no choice but to fight. She has already suffered casualties which cannot be explained without a public battle; but by fighting, the Bolsheviks in Britain are running the risk of a humiliating and tragic defeat for the Royal Navy.

Meanwhile, the Rockefeller strategists here are now concentrating on a fast-building, anti-nuclear-war campaign. On all sides now we are hearing about the so-called "nuclear freeze movement." There are documentaries, articles, publicity of all kinds to sensitize us to the terrors of nuclear war. In recent months, there have even been referenda popping up on election ballots dealing with the nuclear war issue. Medical doctors are banding together to warn the public about what would happen if there were a nuclear war.

We are being told that all this is just popping up spontaneously. We are now 37 years into the nuclear age and nothing like this has ever gained so much momentum before, yet now we are supposed to believe that millions of Americans have spontaneously gotten the same ideas at the same time. If you believe that, my friends, I give up. Movements like this never, and I mean never, develop without leadership, organization, and money—and plenty of it.

What we are watching is the Rockefeller public relations machine at work. As I've explained in the past, the Rockefeller cartel cannot afford to let a nuclear war take place. If it does, they will lose everything because they are not in a position to control it. Instead, the deadly enemies of the Rockefeller cartel, the Bolsheviks here, will win out if there is a war; and so the Rockefeller faction is now doing everything in its power to prevent a nuclear war.

The present anti-nuclear-war orientation of the Rockefeller cartel creates certain temporary common interests between them and Russia; but as Russia's new rulers know very well, this does not spring from any great moral perspective on the part of the Rockefeller group. It's purely a matter of practical necessity right now for the Rockefellers.

The Russians regard the United States as a house divided, and they are exploiting that division by working in careful ways with the Rockefellers. Their first priority is to rid the world of the deadly Bolshevik menace of all-out, even suicidal, nuclear war; but once that is done, they know that there will be a day of reckoning with the Rockefeller cartel some day.

The Rockefeller group is working toward a definite objective with their new anti-nuclear-war propaganda. That objective is renewed power—and power that moves them closer to their old dream of WORLD GOVERNMENT. The Bolsheviks here have unwittingly provided fertile ground for the powerful new Rockefeller antiwar campaign. Under Bolshevik control, the so-called Reagan Administration has become so hawkish that it's scaring people. The Rockefeller antiwar campaign is designed to capitalize on that latent fear as a tool of power.

These days the smell of war is in the air. The Falklands crisis is helping to make that more intense. The Rockefeller propaganda machine is now paving the way for the argument that surrender of sovereignty is the only way to avoid war. A new super-United Nations of sorts is now in the works to fill the bill. It will have teeth! As presently envisioned, the new

organization will be based in Geneva, Switzerland. The working name, though this may be changed, is the "World Nonproliferation Council." The plan is to bring it into being as the outgrowth of nuclear nonproliferation treaties, but its true purpose will be to use fear—the fear of war—to control us all.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I have reported on the reasons behind the so-called Falkland Islands crisis. The crisis erupted because of secret Bolshevik-controlled naval installations in the Southern Hemisphere. These have been attacked by joint action of the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians in an attempt to slow down the nuclear-war timetable. The attacks were successful, but the results remain to be seen. One result, though, is that the Royal Navy has now been drawn into a trap. Britain's Waterloo at sea may well be at hand.

My friends, two factions are struggling for control over our United States—the Rockefeller cartel and the Bolsheviks. They differ in style but both seek to control us through fear. If we are ever to rise above their trickery, it must be through the power of our Lord Jesus Christ, our only hope. As the Scripture tells us, our Lord "...has not given us the spirit of fear; but of power, of love, and of a sound mind." We must learn to wage peace. As our Lord declared long ago, "Blessed are the peacemakers: for they shall be called sons of God."

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #75

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is May 31, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 75.

Here, in the United States, today is a major holiday, Memorial Day. For most of us it's a day off from our jobs, a day for picnics or to visit friends and relatives. The Memorial Day week-end is famous for traffic jams, highway accidents, and the Indianapolis 500 Auto Race. And Memorial Day is a seasonal turning point, marking the beginning of the traditional summer vacation season. Most of us tend to welcome Memorial Day as the gateway to summer, but Memorial Day also has a more solemn meaning which we sometimes forget. It's the day we have set aside to honor the Servicemen who have died fighting for our country. Memorial Day is a reminder that war has become a stark reality for America time after time, and each time the cost in human lives has been tragic.

As I look ahead to the summer mixed feelings. Like most other to the activities that make the enjoy; but the summer ahead will danger for America.

of 1982 now beginning, it's with Americans, I'm looking forward summer vacation season a time to also be a time of increasing

The timetable for nuclear war which I made public three months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 72 is still in effect, my friends. That timetable calls for NUCLEAR WAR ONE to erupt by mid-September 1982, barely three months from now. The American Bolsheviks who now control the United States Pentagon are not slowing down in

their war preparations. This is true in spite of the fact that part of their war plan has been crippled, as I detailed last month.

The covert warfare that spawned the so-called Falklands crisis has all but ruined the Pentagon plans for final victory in the coming war; but the Bolshevik war-planners here have a suicidal streak in their thinking, and they are bent on war regardless of the consequences.

As I say these words, headlines are growing larger and larger about the Falklands war between Argentina and Britain. Since I spoke to you last month, heavy losses have been reported on both sides. Argentina has lost her only cruiser, the General Belgrano, plus several minor vessels and a number of aircraft. Britain has so far admitted losing five major ships—two destroyers, two frigates, and a container ship full of war materiel. These reports reflect the scale of the present fighting somewhat but they are incomplete and distorted. As in every war, the truth has become the first casualty.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE PENTAGON COUNTDOWN TOWARD NUCLEAR WAR ONE

Topic #2—THE ECONOMIC ATTACK ON THE UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION

Topic #3—BILLY GRAHAM VERSUS THE BOLSHEVIK WAR LOBBY.

Topic #1—In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 two months ago I revealed that an entire new nuclear war strategy against Russia is being developed here in Washington. It is being worked out by an elite military-planning group in extreme secrecy under the code name "PROJECT Z." It's a rush project calling for NUCLEAR WAR ONE itself to begin by September of this year 1982.

Last month I reported that PROJECT Z was continuing to move fast at the secret war-planning room here in downtown Washington. As I stated, the process of flushing out the basic war plan was already under way. Now, my friends, the first complete draft of the total PROJECT Z war plan is ready. The plan is essentially completed with nothing left to do but make minor refinements here and there. And now the existence of this major new United States nuclear war plan is creeping into the news. Just yesterday, May 30, an article about it appeared for the very first time in the New York Times. The article, by Richard Halloran, carries the headline, "PENTAGON DRAWS UP FIRST STRATEGY FOR FIGHTING A LONG NUCLEAR WAR." The article begins, quote:

"Defense Department policymakers in a new five-year defense plan have accepted the premise that nuclear conflict with the Soviet Union could be protracted, and have drawn up their first strategy for fighting such a war."

The article goes on to mention that the plan is laid out in an unpublished document of 125 pages. It's been drafted for approval by Secretary of Defense Caspar Weinberger.

My friends, I've reported many times now that the United States Pentagon is controlled by the Bolsheviks who formerly controlled Russia. I've also identified Weinberger as the highest visible agent of the Bolsheviks here in the United States Government today.

The nuclear war plans of the Bolsheviks here are moving fast; but as I have also reported before, the United States Government today is a house divided. The Bolsheviks are opposed by their bitter rivals, the Rockefeller cartel. Their top visible

operative in the federal government today is Secretary of State Alexander Haig. The often visible feuding between Haig and Weinberger is only a pale shadow of this deadly power struggle behind the scenes. Unlike the Bolsheviks here, the Rockefeller faction do not want nuclear war. In a word, they cannot afford it. They would lose everything, and so the Rockefeller faction here is working feverishly to head off the Bolshevik nuclear war plan.

The new anti-Bolshevik rulers of Russia are also against nuclear war. The anti-Bolshevik, anti-nuclear-war attitudes of the Rockefeller cartel and the Kremlin has led to a limited coalition between them in recent months. The most spectacular result so far from this Rockefeller-Russian coalition is the Falklands war now raging between Argentina and Britain. In AUDIO LETTER No. 74 last month I reported what the Falklands war is all about. It is the visible aftermath to covert warfare which took place during April. The Rockefeller cartel and the Russians joined forces to destroy certain major military installations and weapons reserves. These were key ingredients in the final phase of the PROJECT Z war plan.

The whole operation began at South Georgia Island on April 3. With the help of Argentina a joint Rockefeller-Russian commando team was able to knock out the giant hidden naval base there. The base, built during the 1960s, was originally controlled through the United States Government by the Rockefeller cartel, but the Bolsheviks here acquired control of the bases about three years ago when they seized control of the American Pentagon.

Last month I detailed how the attack on the base was carried out. It was contained within a giant man-made cavern hollowed out inside a mountain near the water. With the camouflaged ship entrances sealed up, the base was bombproof; but the joint Rockefeller-Russian commando team succeeded in attacking the base by drilling a shaft through the mountain. Then a compact Russian neutron bomb was inserted through the shaft and detonated inside the cavernous naval base. The process took several weeks. The Thatcher government, which like the United States Pentagon is Bolshevik controlled, dispatched the Royal Navy. First, it was supposed to dislodge the heavily-armed Rockefeller-Russian military force before it could destroy the naval base; then it was to move on to the Falklands for the publicly-admitted fighting.

The Royal Navy arrived several days too late to save the secret base on South Georgia Island, as I reported last month; but by that time the panicking Thatcher government had already committed some two-thirds of the Royal Navy to the South Atlantic. On top of that, at least one British ship had already been sunk by Russia in connection with the secret South Georgia operation. That left the Thatcher government with no choice but to engage Argentina in battle, otherwise it would have been impossible to explain away Britain's huge deployment to the South Atlantic, much less the heavy losses which had been sustained.

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 74 last month on April 30 the British blockade of the Falklands was just beginning. Later that day the entity President Reagan announced that the United States was actively siding with Britain. The announcement was a victory for the Pentagon war faction. Right away warfare around the Falklands started heating up fast. On May 1 the British launched bombing raids against the airport at Port Stanley, and on May 2 a British submarine torpedoed Argentina's second largest ship, the cruiser General Belgrano. It sank within 24 hours, leaving a death toll of more than 300 Argentine sailors. The sinking of

the Belgrano was expected to demoralize the Argentines, but instead it enraged them. The Belgrano had been sunk at a time when it was not threatening the British forces. The Argentines decided it was time to start playing their ace in the hole against Britain.

Last month I reported that Argentina had been given certain promises in return for making the secret South Georgia operation possible. One of these was the promise of covert military assistance by Russia against Britain. Specifically, it was pledged that the Russians would intervene in parallel with Argentine air and naval operations in ways designed to even the odds. In this way Argentina's military leaders can take full credit for both their own and covert Russian attacks on the British. At the same time, this procedure is designed to keep Russia's role in the fighting obscure.

On May 4 the Argentine Air Force decided to put Russia's promises to the test. A pair of Fighter bombers headed out over the Atlantic to attack the Royal Navy. Acting on reconnaissance data provided by Russian Spy Satellites, they headed straight for the fleet. As the two low-flying Argentine jets appeared on the horizon, they were picked up by British fleet radar. At the same time, a Russian Cosmosphere hovering many miles above the fleet took final aim at one of the ships. The ship was one of Britain's newest, most modern, most sophisticated ships, designed specifically to shield the fleet against air attack. The ship was a Type-42 guided missile destroyer, H.M.S. Sheffield. Long before the two Argentine jets were close enough to attack, the Cosmosphere fired its charged particle beam-weapon downward at the ship. The white-hot beam of subatomic particles blasted through the aluminum superstructure just behind the bridge near the top of the ship. In a split second the beam seared through layers of metal downward into the bowels of the ship. The aluminum of the ship itself was instantly ablaze. The Argentine Fighter pilots witnessed the spectacular explosion and intense white flames from nearly 20 miles away. They promptly turned back toward home, having expended no missiles. Bewildered survivors from the Sheffield later said there had been no warning before the blast.

Argentina's leaders are being coached by Rockefeller cartel operatives in what to say publicly about war developments. They claim that a French-made missile called the Exocet had been used to sink the Sheffield; but to those who know the characteristics of the Exocet missile, the Sheffield disaster remained a mystery.

The Exocet, my friends, is a type of missile known as a sea-skimmer. It's designed to skim along just above the water, striking a ship almost at the water line. File films of the Exocet which have been shown on TV clearly show this behavior. But the Sheffield was blasted close to the very top of the superstructure; in fact, that is said to be the reason for the relatively low casualty toll in the destruction of H.M.S. Sheffield. Had the same blast been aimed low close to the waterline, the ship probably would have heeled over and sunk fast. Had that happened, very few of the crew would have escaped.

On the evening of May 4, Admiral Martin Wemyss, former director of the British naval warfare, was interviewed about the Sheffield disaster on ABC Nightline. Ted Koppel began with the words:

"Admiral Wemyss, how is it that such a modern ship would not have been able to first of all detect and then destroy that

Argentine aircraft?"

Admiral Wemyss answered, quote:

"I think that's an extremely good question, and I cannot give you a straight answer. In my book, this should not have happened."

For the next two weeks talks between Argentina and Britain continued with United Nations Secretary General Perez de Cuellar attempting to mediate.

Meanwhile, the Thatcher government continued to add to the British armada in the South Atlantic. Even the luxury liner Queen Elizabeth II was commandeered and turned into a troop ship. It sailed with some 3200 troops aboard on May 12.

The strategy of the Bolshevik-dominated Thatcher government is very simple, my friends. They know very well they are sending the Royal Navy into a trap, but they believe that by multiplying naval strength in the South Atlantic virtually beyond reason, they will win. They are making the British commitment so huge compared to that of Argentina that a total Argentine rout of the British would look unreasonable. It would enable the question of covert Russian aid to Argentina to be raised openly and credibly, and that could help set off the very nuclear war which they know Russia is trying to avoid.

Following this brute-force strategy, the Thatcher government has continued to pour every available ship into the South Atlantic fray. As of now, over 100 British ships are either in the war zone or heading toward it. That's almost the entire Royal Navy! The attitude is: for every ship the Russians and Argentineans sink, the Thatcher government will just send two more—anything to make sure Britain retakes the Falklands because if that is not accomplished, the Thatcher government will fall and that will be a setback to Bolshevik power in Britain.

On May 19 the last ditch talks at the United Nations finally collapsed. Britain was ready at last to invade. After talks ended that evening, it was announced that the British War Cabinet would meet the following morning. Supposedly the meeting would decide whether to give the go-ahead for invasion—but it was all a ruse to help create an element of surprise against Argentina and against Russia.

The first stage of an elaborate invasion strategy was already going into action. On the evening of May 19 the British invasion fleet was divided up into two groups—one group was 150 miles due east of Port Stanley; the other, 100 miles to the northeast. Shortly before midnight Washington time, both invasion forces started heading toward shore. Russian Cosmospheres and submarines went into action working together. Both British assault groups came under fire. At least two ships critical to the assault were hit and heavily damaged. By 2:00 A.M. Washington time both assault forces aborted their moves toward the Port Stanley area. In response, Russian forces disengaged. The Russians believed they had thwarted the British invasion; but, my friends, they were wrong.

The two large invasion groups threatening Port Stanley the night of May 19 were actually carrying out a diversionary action. British strategists knew that the Russians had the muscle available to stop any invasion. The only chance of success lay in convincing the Russians that they had stopped the invasion, and then somehow sneaking troops ashore. So the two large

invasion forces of May 19 actually were staging a decoy action! Most of the British invasion troops were no longer aboard the troop carrier Canberra or the assault ships. Instead, they had been transferred to other ships which normally are not used for amphibious purposes .

On the morning of May 20 the elaborate British deception continued. Up until the previous day, British statements had been referring to an imminent all-out invasion, but on the morning of May 20 the statements changed abruptly. British Defense Ministry spokesmen suddenly started saying that the British would confine themselves to small hit-and-run raids for a while. The Bolshevik military planners in London wanted to further convince Russia that the invasion had been stopped the previous night. It worked.

Small groups of British ships began moving around the Falklands as if to plant small raiding parties here and there. In the early morning darkness of May 21 one of these small groups of ships moved into the north end of Falkland Sound between the Islands. Contrary to press reports, the troop ship Canberra was not among them, nor was an assault ship. Those ships would have tipped off the Russians monitoring everything from Cosmospheres far above that a major landing was afoot. Instead, the key ship that moved into San Carlos Bay was the hospital ship Uganda. Under cover of darkness the Uganda moved close to shore. British assault troops, crammed like sardines into the Uganda, clambered down the sides of the ship on rope ladders into motor launches. The launches ferried the troops a short distance ashore, one group after another. As soon as they were ashore, the troops had orders to spread out fast. In that way they rendered themselves unsuitable targets for any attack by the Russian Cosmospheres patrolling miles above. Particle beam-weapons are devastating against concentrated targets but very inefficient against personnel scattered over a wide area. By dawn other ships had also disembarked troops in the same manner. By the time daylight revealed what was really going on, it was too late. The British invasion of the Falklands was underway. Once the British got ashore with a sizeable number of troops, Britain's chances of regaining control of the Islands started increasing fast. Covert Russian help for the Argentines is much more feasible at sea and in the air than on land.

In the past 10 days we've heard about a number of devastating air attacks by the Argentines. Up to now the British have admitted losing at least five ships plus several helicopters and Harrier Jump-jets, but slowly the British ground forces have been reinforced and started advancing across East Falkland Island towards Port Stanley. As of today, May 31, British ground forces are said to be closing in on the main Argentine garrison at Port Stanley. The operation is being portrayed in the news here as a relatively easy task, but that is far from true.

British casualties in land battle have been far greater than admitted, and at sea the Royal Navy has taken very heavy losses that are not even hinted at so far in the news. Many ships have been badly damaged; and all—I repeat, ALL—of the original contingent of the Sea Harrier Jump-jets have been put out of action. Both British aircraft carriers, the Hermes and the Invincible, have been rendered incapable of launching jets. The Harriers now operating around the Falklands are a different type from the sharp-nosed, blue-painted Sea Harriers. They are painted in green and brown camouflage. My friends, they are United States Marine Corps Harriers, and they are operating from an American ship!

The things I am revealing here, my friends, are at variance with official stories, but this is the war you never see. Photos of British amphibious exercises taken at Ascension Island were passed off as pictures of the Falklands invasion. British Broadcasting Corporation broadcasting facilities on Ascension Island were taken over weeks ago by British military. Now we hear daily reports from Ascension Island that are claimed to be originating with the task force. Even more than usual, the truth has been the first casualty in the Falklands war.

The Bolshevik military planners here and in the Thatcher government in Britain are trying to find some way to use the Falklands war for their own purposes. Up to now they still are not slowing down in their fast timetable for NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Within a few short weeks there will be a highly visible clue to the status of the Bolshevik nuclear war schedule. I am referring, my friends, to the upcoming fourth space shuttle flight. All the space shuttle flights up to now have been military in nature, as I have detailed in the past. The space shuttle is the Pentagon's only hope to regain a military toe hold in space for the coming war. Now for the first time it is even being admitted that the next shuttle flight will be military.

Shuttle flight #4 is presently scheduled for June 27, less than a month from now. If some excuse is found to delay the flight, it will reflect a slowdown in the nuclear war plans of the Pentagon; but if Shuttle #4 takes off on schedule, it will indicate that the Bolsheviks here are still sticking to their September war-deadline.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 I reported that for the first time the shuttle had been successful in its prime military mission. A hardened laser-armed Super-Spy Satellite was orbited in March to obtain fresh reconnaissance data on Russia. It's the first updating of Russian target data since Russia destroyed America's Spy Satellites some four years ago. Target data from the new satellite has now been integrated into the PROJECT Z nuclear war plan which I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 73.

Now, Space Shuttle #4 is being prepared for a different mission. Under the PROJECT Z war plan, the coming nuclear war will begin with a surprise nuclear attack by American Stealth planes into Russia. They will attempt to knock out all of Russia's space bases—four Cosmodromes for rockets plus Cosmosphere installations in Siberia. If all goes as planned, all of these installations will be blown up with H-bombs simultaneously. As soon as that happens, the rest of America's nuclear arsenal is to be launched at Russia, as I have described before.

But there remains one weak point in the Bolshevik first-strike plan against Russia. As it stands now, the Bolsheviks here will have to assume that the first phase of the attack plan has succeeded as of a given time. The reason is that the United States currently has no means of verifying if the initial Stealth attack has succeeded. When Russia destroyed America's Spy Satellites four years ago she also destroyed our high-flying Early Warning Satellites. That leaves the Bolshevik war planners hare without any way to tell if their bombs have exploded in Russia. Space Shuttle #4 is intended to solve that problem within weeks from now!

The supersecret Department of Defense pay load is a cryogenic infrared Sensor System. It's designed to look down at Russia from geostationary orbit. It will detect the explosions of

American H-bombs in Russia when it happens. The moment that it flashes a signal confirming the explosions to the Pentagon, the rest of the American nuclear first-strike against Russia will be set in motion.

In order to do its job, the Air Force infrared Sensor has to be placed in geostationary orbit. That orbit is over 22,000 miles high over the equator. The shuttle itself cannot go that high; it can only go to low Earth orbit, perhaps 150 miles up. To take the Air Force Sensor System the rest of the way, it has to be mounted on a rocket. The shuttle will carry the whole assembly—Sensor System, rocket, and all—into low Earth orbit. From there the rocket will take the Sensor System out to the desired location far above the equator.

My friends, as of now the countdown toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE is still being continued by the Bolshevik war planners in the Pentagon. The Falklands crisis began as an effort to prevent or delay nuclear war, but it may instead end up helping to set off that very war! If so, America's fourth space shuttle flight could turn out to be America's final manned mission into space.

The Air Force sensor to verify success of America's coming initial attack on Russia will eventually be destroyed by Russian space weapons. Before that can happen, the Bolshevik planners in the Pentagon will try to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

Topic #2—For two months now the Falklands crisis has dominated the news. Likewise, the growing threat of nuclear war and mounting anti-nuclear sentiment have been making headlines; but for millions of Americans, a different crisis seems far more important. It is a long-term crisis which has been with us for many years now. This mounting crisis, my friends, is that of the crumbling United States economy and the United States dollar.

Just this month, May 1982, there has been all sorts of bad news on the economic front. On May 7 the Government announced that unemployment, as officially calculated, had reached 9.4 per cent, the highest level since the Great Depression. And just five days later there was another shock—Braniff Airlines abruptly terminated operations and filed for bankruptcy. It was the first time ever that a United States trunk airline had failed. Braniff, like more and more other businesses, was brought down by a mountain of debt. With interest rates remaining sky high in the midst of a deep recession, more and more companies simply cannot survive. Production cutbacks, layoffs, and bankruptcies are continuing to spread, and more and more people are losing their jobs. This recession is especially cruel because it is an inflationary recession.

We're now living in the STAGFLATION era which I warned about in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR nearly ten years ago. The deliberate plans which were set in motion long ago to destroy the United States dollar are now far advanced.

Since 1970 the combined effects of inflation and taxes have cut the purchasing power of the dollar by 55 per cent. A family of four living on $10,000 in 1970 would need well over $23,000 in 1982 just to stay even, and this historically unprecedented collapse of the dollar is continuing even as people are thrown out of work.

For months now the battle over the federal budget has been dragging on, day in, day out. We're told constantly that the budget is the key to bringing down the incredible interest rates that are killing the economy, and yet somehow it seems that no

one can agree about what the budget should be. One budget proposal after another has come up for consideration only to be voted down. First, there was the Reagan Administration budget which went nowhere. Then all kinds of alternative budgets started being proposed. There have been Republican budgets, Democrat budgets, Conservative budgets, Liberal budgets, compromise budgets; and every single budget proposed so far has been voted down. There is more and more talk that the federal budget process has gone sour, that there is something fundamentally wrong. On May 28 the entity President Reagan denounced the budget process while he was in Santa Barbara, California, to make a speech. He said, quote:

"The United States Government's program for presenting a budget, or arriving at a budget, is about the most irresponsible, Mickey-Mouse arrangement that any governmental body has ever practiced. It's called the 'President's Budget' and yet there is nothing binding about it. It is submitted to the Congress and they don't even have to consider it."

My friends, please note carefully how this criticism by the President was phrased. I suggest you stop your recorder and play it back again because the entity Reagan was not just delivering a standard political tongue-lashing at his political opponents. He was condemning the process itself, and he added, quote:

"I think that some real solid thinking should be given now to a budgeting process that befits the great government of a great nation."

My friends, Reagan's choice of Santa Barbara, California, for this statement was symbolic. It so happens that the so-called "solid thinking" he recommended for a new budgeting process has already been done; and as the President knows very well, that thinking was done in Santa Barbara at a tax-exempt foundation called the "Center for Study of Democratic Institutions." That is where the secret new Constitution for America was written, including detailed new provisions for the budgeting process!

Seven years ago in 1975 I published a pamphlet in which I reviewed the secret new Constitution from a legal perspective. The entire text of the new Constitution is contained in the pamphlet. If you have a copy, you can read about the proposed new budget process for yourself. It's all there in black and white. Important passages to look at include:

ARTICLE IV—THE PLANNING BRANCH, Sections 2, 4, and 7; ARTICLE V—THE PRESIDENCY, Section 1, and

ARTICLE VI-(b)—THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES, Section 8.

What you will discover if you trace through the budget process described in the new Constitution is very significant. When all the legal-sounding mumbo jumbo is stripped away, the whole budget process turns out to be firmly under the thumb of the President.

For example, Reagan complained in Santa Barbara that the "President's Budget", quote:

"...is submitted to the Congress and they don't even have to consider it."

My friends, the secret new Constitution would fix that. ARTICLE VI-(b), Section 8 begins, quote:

"The House shall consider promptly the annual budget."

What's more, the House is given no role in formulating the Budget. If they dare to object to anything, the Budget goes back to the Planning Board, so called, controlled by, you guessed it, the President.

The Reagan blast about the budget process is just the latest of an on-going series of covert moves to pave the way for the new Constitution. What makes this one more significant is that it is tied in with powerful economic forces which are intended to speed up the process.

Through months of contrived haggling, the "kept" Congress has been sensitizing Americans to the budget problem and they have been doing it at a time when uncertainty over the Budget is being blamed for worsening economic woes!

Now along comes the President saying that the solution is to change the whole process.

The growing Budget crisis is also tied in with another major change which the entity President Reagan has been publicly advocating. That change, my friends, is the proposed "Balanced Budget Amendment" to our present UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION.

There is a drive underway right now to call a Constitutional Convention in order to introduce a balanced budget amendment. Already most of the required number of states have ratified the call for such a convention! At the moment, if just three (3) more states ratify it, a Constitutional Convention will be legally required to be called. The excuse for calling a Constitutional Convention would be to introduce the Balanced Budget Amendment. The problem is that once a convention is called, there's no way to keep it from turning into a runaway convention, re-writing the entire CONSTITUTION! In fact, that's exactly how our present UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION was created. The original idea was to simply amend the "Articles of Confederation"; but once the Convention was through, a totally new constitution emerged.

Those who are behind the drive for a new Constitutional Convention now want the same thing to happen again; and if it does, they have their model for a carefully manicured DICTATORSHIP Constitution ready to go!

In the past there have been several other drives like the present one to call a Constitutional Convention. Each has been built around some pet idea of one kind or another, but each time the drive has fizzled out. Enough people have recognized the danger of a runaway Constitutional Convention to prevent its happening. This time, though, the danger is much greater than ever before because this time the excuse for the proposed convention is tied directly to people's pocketbooks.

We're being told by various financial spokesmen on television that high interest rates are responsible for our economic woes, which is a half truth. We are also told that government deficits are responsible for keeping those disastrous interest rates high. Then we are treated to the spectacle of a government seemingly unable to decide on a budget. And, finally, whenever a budget is passed, it will contain the biggest deficits in history—well over one hundred billion dollars.

Against that background, the promise of relief by way of the Balanced Budget Amendment may prove too tempting to resist. If so, the drive to call a Constitutional Convention will succeed, and in the process we Americans will have sold our birthright for

a mess of pottage!

My friends, all of this may sound almost irrelevant right now in view of the specter of possible nuclear war by the end of summer, but never forget that the plans for war are the plans of men, nothing more. Those plans have a way of going awry in many cases; and in the case of those nuclear war plans, feverish attempts are underway to make them go awry.

The Bolshevik war planners who control the Pentagon want nuclear war; but their anti-Bolshevik enemies who now rule Russia don't want war and are trying to prevent it. Likewise, the Rockefeller cartel here in America is in a power struggle against the Bolsheviks in an attempt to stop the war plan.

If the Rockefeller interests do succeed in regaining control of the United States Government, they plan to stop the Bolshevik war countdown. But the Rockefeller group are fighting this battle only for themselves, my friends, not for you or me! It is they who are behind the secret new Constitution and the drive for a Constitutional Convention. If they succeed in beating the Bolsheviks here, they intend to capitalize. With their secret new Constitution they plan to bring us under their domination more completely than ever before.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 72 three months ago I reported that a military coup d'etat was in gestation here in Washington. This is to be a coup by the Rockefeller cartel operatives within the Government against Bolshevik operatives. The man in charge is a four-star General—Alexander Haig.

Up to now the anti-Bolshevik coup has not been accomplished, but it is gaining ground. One major gain for the Rockefeller faction occurred last month while all eyes were on the Falklands crisis. On April 21 it was announced that Admiral Bobby Inman, Deputy Director of the CIA, had "resigned" (quote) effective immediately. Inman was forced out by the Rockefeller faction. He was replaced with lightning speed by John McMann, a career professional with the CIA!

It was the Rockefellers who created the CIA long ago as their own private detective agency, and now they are working fast to re-establish the control which they lost over the CIA three years ago.

The infighting between the Rockefeller and Bolshevik factions within the Government is growing more intense as the war fuse burns shorter and shorter. President Reagan and Secretary Haig are both under tight security. This summer of 1982 will be dangerous for them and for America.

Topic #3—On the evening of May 16 millions of Americans tuned their television sets to NBC to watch the first installment of a special mini-series. It was a lavish portrayal of the travels and adventures of Marco Polo. For the next four nights viewers were treated to a spectacular re-enactment of Marco Polo's experiences as he traveled to China. Interspersed with those scenes of adventure and splendor were brief scenes depicting what happened to Marco Polo after he returned home to Venice. He dared to speak of places he had been and things he had seen that conflicted with the dogma of the day, and so he was tried for heresy.

Today in 1982 we like to think of ourselves as too enlightened to close our minds like the inquisitors of Marco Polo, but the fact is that even today those who challenge preconceived notions

are quickly branded as heretics and the like. There was a perfect example of this on Sunday morning May 16. Ironically it was the same day as the beginning of the Marco Polo series. My friends, I'm referring to the interview of evangelist Dr. Billy Graham on the ABC news program "This Week with David Brinkley."

Dr. Graham had just returned to England from participating in a five-day religious conference in Moscow, Russia, of all places. He was one of more than 400 religious leaders from 80 nations who attended the conference. They were there at the invitation of the Russian Orthodox Church which sponsored the Conference. A large fraction of those who attended were Christian leaders such as Dr. Graham, but there were also many representatives of the world's other great religions. They were not there to convert, to compete, or to condemn one another. Instead it was a rare opportunity for these leaders to form bridges of mutual understanding, something which is all too often neglected in our world.

It was a religious conference the likes of which the world has not seen for more than 80 years. The last time anything like this took place was before 1900. It was held here in America, in Chicago, and it was called "The Parliament of Religions." There were some who feared that historic meeting of the minds and have condemned it ever since. As a result, it has never been repeated here in America; but I submit, my friends, that those fears were groundless. The Parliament of Religions did not destroy Christianity or turn Americans overnight into Buddhists, Moslems, or Hindus. What it did do was to establish bonds of understanding and respect for a while where they had been lacking before. My friends, it is a psychological fact that it is usually hard to hate another person if you get to know him. That is why any government bent on war tries to dehumanize and depersonalize the enemy.

From the turn of the century onward, the United States Government has been controlled by elements who cherish war as an instrument of policy, so we see no more Parliaments of Religion here in America.

By contrast, the government of Russia has undergone a drastic transformation in recent years. Russia's new rulers are Christians, as I have been reporting for nearly five years. After an agonizing struggle of six decades, these tough native Russians have finally gained the upper hand over the Satanic Bolsheviks there. Over three years ago the growing power of the Kremlin Christians started producing startling changes in public. For example, for Easter 1979 Handel's "Messiah" was performed in Russia for the very first time since the Bolshevik Revolution! And several months before that, in January 1979, the first legal shipment of Bibles into Russia since 1917 had taken place. The American Bible Society had asked the Russian government for permission, and it had been granted.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 44 over three years ago I issued an appeal to America's Christian leaders to take a stand for peace before it was too late. What I suggested was a "Pilgrimage for Peace" to Moscow. It's purpose would have been to begin new ties of trust and understanding with the new Christian rulership of Russia. In that way America's churchmen had the opportunity to take the initiative in a concrete way to help head off nuclear catastrophe. The response, as I reported later, was pathetic. To the everlasting shame of America's Christian community, only a tiny handful of Christian leaders expressed any interest at all! The Christian leaders of America by and large refused to hold out the hand of Christian fellowship to their brothers in Russia.

But now, a pilgrimage for peace has been made to Moscow after all. Since America's Christian leaders would not bother to take the initiative, those of Russia did so instead! They invited religious leaders the world over to make a pilgrimage for peace to Moscow, and they called their five-day assembly the, quote:

"Conference of Religious Workers for Saving the Sacred Gift of Life from Nuclear Catastrophe."

When Billy Graham and some other Western Christian leaders arrived in Moscow, they soon discovered that it was not as they had been led to expect. Dr. Graham discovered that there was no attempt to restrict him in his religious messages. He was also allowed more freedom of movement than he had expected. On the Saturday evening before the Conference began, Dr. Graham decided to pay unannounced visits to several Moscow churches. He went to three different Russian Orthodox Churches and was shocked to find that they were filled to capacity with worshippers. As he said later in a news conference, quote:

"You would never get that in Charlotte, North Carolina."

Dr. Graham made a number of statements about his experiences in Moscow which all seem to add up to one thing: there is a lot more Christian worship going on in Russia than he apparently expected and with greater freedom.

When Billy Graham returned to the West he must have felt a little like a religious Marco Polo. He had journeyed to the forbidden East and discovered that it is not populated by gremlins and horrible beasts. Instead he had come away with his heart strangely "warmed" (quote). Perhaps he expected that the folks back home would welcome his unexpected good news. After all, our whole Christian faith is built on Good News—the Gospel of our LORD Jesus Christ. But if that is what Billy Graham expected, he was sadly mistaken.

When he returned to the West, he came back not to people eager to hear more of his good news, but to hostility and condemnation! We're always told that Russia is an atheistic country and beyond redemption, and so by definition Billy Graham's words about even limited religious freedom in Russia constituted heresy. He ran into a buzz saw of critics determined to cut him down for saying a good word about Russia!

It began right away with slanted reports about his statements in the major media. At one point Dr. Graham mentioned that in Russia his comments had been reported accurately in the press. By contrast, reports here in the United States were distorted, and quoted him out of context.

A perfect example of the treatment now being given Dr. Graham was his May 16 interview on ABC's "This Week with David Brinkley." It was called an interview, but inquisition would be a better description. Every suggestion that Christians may be better off in Russia today than in the past was met with hostility. Time after time after time Dr. Graham was interrupted and attacked before he could even finish making his point, and many of the questions in the best tradition of heresy trials were designed to declare Graham guilty before he could even answer!

To take just one example: at one point the ideological writer George F. Will mentioned an incident in which a peace protestor was subdued by Russian police. Then he asked—and this is an exact quote:

"Given that evidence that there is no, and is not about to be, any peace movement in the Soviet Union, wasn't it clear to you from the start that this propaganda festival to which you were going was used simply to encourage a unilateral peace pressure and disarmament pressure in the West?"

My friends, a so-called question like that is the tool of a prosecutor, not an objective reporter. In one breath he claimed that there is no peace movement in Russia as if it were a fact, accused Dr. Graham of knowingly cooperating in Soviet propaganda, implied that all the world religious leaders who attended were stooges, and ignored the world-wide representation at the Conference saying it was all aimed at the West. Accusing questions like that were fired at Dr. Graham throughout the program. The only break in this inquisition came when Dr. Graham was removed from the discussion for a while—then everyone else sat around and ripped him up one side and down the other in his absence, for his 'heresies.'

In spite of the grossly unfair treatment, Rev. Graham made some very telling points. He mentioned that many other American Christian leaders were also at the Moscow Conference and that still others have gone there separately, and he said there are many, quote:

"...that would hold different viewpoints than what is being expressed here today. I'm a little surprised that we don't have some of those people."

Perhaps Dr. Graham's most telling comment came fairly early in the program; perhaps it was partly responsible for the frenzied bitterness of some of the attacks on him later in the program. Rev. Graham said, and I quote:

"Now when people go to China today, for example, they are applauded for going to China. It's wonderful to go to China, but there is not as much religious freedom in China as there is in the Soviet Union."

My friends, Billy Graham was exactly right in that statement. I have reported the same thing in my AUDIO LETTER reports. The favorable image now being given to Red China is purely political and military in its origins. Unfortunately some church-related groups are being used for these political purposes!

What Dr. Graham may not know is the reason for the violent attacks he has endured lately. My friends, he has run afoul of the American Bolshevik nuclear-war lobby here. They want to use you and me to do their dirty work for them against Russia. That is what their nuclear-war plans are all about, and so at all costs they must not let us know that Christianity is reviving today in Russia. Even more, they dare not let the American people know that the true leadership of Russia today is Christian because if we all knew that, my friends, we would never agree to their plans to destroy Christian Russia in a thermonuclear war.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've tried to bring you up to date on the progress of plans to throw America into nuclear war against Russia. The countdown by the Bolshevik war planners who now control the Pentagon is still continuing. Their war plans have been damaged by the Falklands war, but they are trying to turn that conflict to their own ends.

Meanwhile, the countdown for Space Shuttle Flight #4 with its secret military pay load is still on schedule. If the mission succeeds, the danger of nuclear war will increase dramatically.

The summer of 1982, my friends, promises to be a dangerous time for America. As of now, NUCLEAR WAR ONE could be as little as three months away, but the Bolsheviks here have enemies who are trying to stop the war-countdown.

Here in the United States the Rockefeller cartel is continuing its power struggle to take back control of the Government from the Bolsheviks. As part of that struggle, the preparations for a military coup d'etat led by General Alexander Haig are making progress. Likewise, the Russians are continuing to try in their own ways to prevent the war. Unlike the Rockefeller cartel, the Russians are doing this for moral reasons.

This month, May 1982, religious leaders from around the world gathered in a religious conference to take a stand for peace. If the conference had been held, say in Washington, D.C., we would be hearing nothing but praise about it; but it was held instead in Moscow, Russia, and for that reason alone it has been condemned here in the United States. Those who dare to honestly report the favorable surprises they encountered there are being castigated as heretics. The most visible of these is Rev. Billy Graham. For describing what he actually saw and experienced, honestly and without prejudice, he is being crucified on all sides.

My friends, the same thing will happen to you if you dare to speak up about the things you know; but if you do not speak up to your friends, to your neighbors, to your relatives, they may never know why we are heading toward nuclear catastrophe. So I urge you to speak now, and remember the promise of our LORD Jesus Christ. He said:

"Blessed are they who are persecuted for righteousness' sake: for theirs is the kingdom of heaven."

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #76

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is June 30, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 76.

On the afternoon of June 25, just five days ago, reporters were summoned to the White House press room for a sudden major announcement. At around 3:00 P.M. the entity known as President Reagan strode in and walked to the microphone. Then, with an announcement about a minute long, he dropped what seemed to be a bombshell.

For public consumption he began the announcement with words of praise and regret, but his face was the face of an executioner. Then he came to the only words that really mattered (Note: actual voice recorded; reveals tone):

"With great regret I have accepted the resignation of Secretary of State Al Haig."

The impression was given that Haig had resigned voluntarily and that its timing was a great surprise, but that impression was not the truth, my friends. Reagan's very next words were (his voice again):

"I am nominating as his successor, and he has accepted, George Shultz, to replace him."

Haig's ouster had been planned very carefully by insiders close to Reagan. After stunning reporters with the announcement about Haig, the President refused to give any reasons and left without taking questions.

A little later it was announced that Haig himself would make a statement at the State Department. It was scheduled for 4:00 P.M., but Haig was nearly half an hour late. He had learned of his ouster only a few hours earlier, around noon. He had been compelled to compose a letter of resignation and pretend, for public consumption, that he had already given it to Reagan; but his late arrival at the State Department press conference was due to the fact that he was putting last-minute touches on his public statement.

When Haig arrived at the State Department auditorium, he faced an audience of around 1,000 reporters and department employees. As he was greeted by thunderous applause, Haig looked around wide-eyed, as if in a daze. He had been ordered to keep his entire statement to a maximum of five minutes. He had also been warned not to accept questions.

We have been told by the controlled major media that Haig resigned as an abrasive prima donna, incensed that he was not getting his way; but when Haig took the microphone that afternoon at the State Department, his demeanor was far from that of a prima donna—he was instead, a defeated General at the moment of surrender. The peculiar etiquette that governs this type of situation causes words to obscure this fact, but his voice and mannerisms were laden with the unmistakable burden of defeat. He spoke slowly, trying to keep the quaver in his voice under control. His tones were the lifeless tones of resignation that say, "I tried, but I failed."

Haig read the text of his alleged resignation letter to Reagan which he had written hurriedly that afternoon. He began by praising the alleged original foreign policy plans of the Reagan Administration before it was subverted by the Bolsheviks here. At one point he could hardly get the words out (Note: actual voice recorded):

"I believe that we shared a view of America's role in the world as the leader of free men and an inspiration for all."

Then he went on to describe a change of course which has taken place (his voice again):

"In recent months it has become clear to me that the foreign policy on which we embarked together was shifting from that careful course which we laid out. Under these circumstances I feel it necessary to request that you accept my resignation."

My friends, diplomatic language is often so bland that it tends to make momentous statements sound tame and mild to the public. In recent months American foreign policy has indeed been moving away from what could be called a "careful course", just as Haig said.

As I have been reporting, we are on a fast new timetable for nuclear war. Haig was the top Government operative of the faction which has been trying to prevent the coming war; but, my friends, the anti-war faction has lost, and Haig's ouster is the most visible signal that this has happened.

In the aftermath of the Haig bombshell, people have been falling all over themselves trying to explain it; but the more they talk the farther away from the truth they get. The closest anyone in the major media has come to the truth was a statement just 10 minutes after Haig's appearance at the State Department. At about 4:40 P.M. Eastern Time June 25, Sam Donaldson of ABC television News, said, and I quote:

"It may seem strange for people who know General Haig's background; but the hard-liners from the standpoint of the Soviet American relations and the hard-liners when it comes to trying to curb what many people see as excessive violence by Israel in Lebanon, have won on this one."

My friends, Sam Donaldson was right about the hard-liners having defeated Haig, but there's far more to it than that. The so-called resignation of Alexander Haig on June 25 was a disaster for the anti-nuclear-war forces here. It is tied to other events—the end of the Falklands war, the beginning of the Mideast war, and others; and the timing of Haig's demise, which seems to mystify the major media, was dictated by a very specific event. That event, my friends, was the launch of Space Shuttle Mission #4 now in progress.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE COLLAPSE OF THE HAIG ANTI-WAR COUP D'ETAT Topic #2—THE FINAL CRISES TO IGNITE NUCLEAR WAR Topic #3—THE FINAL SPACE SHUTTLE MISSION FOR WAR.

Topic #1—There is a sad lesson of history that has been repeated more times than can be counted, from ancient times right down to the present day. The lesson is that by and large people are incapable of being warned about major calamities to come. It is human nature to think that the future will not be much different from the past. If something has not happened before, we find it hard to believe it can happen at all; and this has never been more true than when an impending calamity is the result of spiritual decay and moral degeneration.

Today we are living under the threat of just such a calamity—ALL-OUT THERMONUCLEAR WAR!

The threat exists for reasons which are fundamentally moral and spiritual in nature; and if the calamity comes, it will have consequences which are impossible to grasp in advance. As a result, for most of us the threat of nuclear war is one which we only half believe. We worry when we hear about new crises and we squirm at the thought of ever-increasing nuclear arsenals. But in the last analysis most of us go right on living our lives as if these things did not exist. Deep down we tell ourselves, "Surely it can't really happen." We tend to think that our situation today is without parallel in human existence—but that is not true.

We are told that in ancient times a man named Noah was warned in advance about an equally incomprehensible calamity. He lived in a generation of people who were filling the land with abominations in total disregard for the Creator and His laws.

Noah was warned that a giant killer flood was coming as a direct result of these spiritual and moral transgressions. Noah began building an ark; and he also began warning all his neighbors, as he had been directed by the Lord.

The building of the ark consumed not just years but decades. All the while Noah continued to warn the people of his land about what was to come, but the people were incapable of being warned. They found the idea of a great flood incomprehensible and unbelievable because it had never happened before; and besides, they were too busy living their own lives, doing as they pleased. So they laughed at Noah and his never-ending warnings—until the day it began to rain! On that day they suddenly knew that the warnings had been true; but it was too late, and they perished.

My friends, the forced resignation of Alexander Haig five days ago may well be the first raindrop of the nuclear storm to come. If so, the time has come and gone for preventing nuclear calamity. Unless something very dramatic takes place to radically change the situation, it is now only a matter of time—and not much time at that!

As of now, the Bolshevik war-planners in the Pentagon are still on track with their plan to set off nuclear war by the middle of September 1982. This is true even though the intended final phase of their war plan has been crippled, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 74 two months ago. And as of this moment I have no information to indicate that they will be stopped.

I realize, my friends, that your decisions about what to do would be far easier if I could flatly tell you exactly what to expect, and when. I cannot do that because this is a power struggle on the world stage, and the outcome is yet to be decided. The best I can do is to keep you informed about the forces involved and how they are doing against one another. As of this hour—and the hour is VERY late—the efforts to prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE appear to be failing.

I know that what I am reporting to you is very grave indeed. If you are to derive any benefit from what I have to report, you must have the assurance that my Intelligence about these matters is reliable.

Sometimes people ask me for documentation of my reports; but in Intelligence, documentation of that type is inherently impossible. Instead, a different criterion is normally used for judging the accuracy and reliability of Intelligence data. That criterion, my friends, is the extent to which advance Intelligence reports are borne out by events. For that reason, in this AUDIO LETTER I will use direct quotes from a number of my past AUDIO LETTER reports over the past year or so.

For those of you who have been listeners for some time, this will serve as a reminder of what you already know but may have forgotten. For my newer listeners I hope this will help to establish the reality of the situation very quickly because, my friends, time is precious.

For some three years now the United States Government has been torn by a bitter power struggle between two opposing factions. One faction consists of agents of the Rockefeller cartel of Big Oil, Big Business, and Big Banking. Until recently the Government was dominated by the cartel. The other faction is that of the American Bolsheviks together with the expelled Bolsheviks from Russia who have flocked here for a new start.

For historical reasons these two power factions, the Rockefeller group and the Bolsheviks, had always worked together until very recently. The Rockefeller empire started its climb to power over a century ago with the aid of the Rothschilds based in England and Europe. Likewise, Bolshevism as a political force was created by the Rothschilds around the turn of the century. When the time was ripe for revolution in Russia, Rothschild-spawned Bolshevism was injected into Russia with Rockefeller help. From then on a secret alliance existed between the Rockefeller interests and the Bolsheviks on a world-wide basis—but in the past few years all that has changed.

A new anti-Bolshevik ruling group has taken over in Russia and has expelled most of the old Bolsheviks there. They have come mainly here, to the United States, in great swarms in recent years. They were welcomed here with open arms by their old Rockefeller allies. They re-enforced the long-time American Bolsheviks who were already here. Then, early in 1979, the Bolsheviks double-crossed their Rockefeller partners and launched an all-out grab for power.

The Bolshevik grab for power over the United States Government began with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller on January 26, 1979. This was followed by months of in-fighting behind the scenes including assassinations, resignations, and disappearances of key people. But true to Bolshevik tradition, it was all carried out in the shadows hidden from the public eye. Then the turmoil escalated still further as the Intelligence agencies of foreign nations entered the fray. By the spring of 1979 a full-scale Intelligence war was raging here in America, especially in Washington. In addition to agents of the Rockefeller cartel and the Bolsheviks, the Intelligence agencies of Russia, Britain, and Israel were involved. All were trying to maneuver the crisis for their own benefit, and all were using their most advanced and most secret Intelligence techniques, including some that would seem at home in the 21st Century!

These events all took place behind closed doors, hidden from the public eye by winners and losers alike in each skirmish. In battles at the pinnacle of power, that is how it is. There is never an appeal to the public, to the police, or to the courts for it is they who control the courts, the police, and our other institutions. At the pinnacle of power there is no appeal to higher authority because in their view there is none. So disputes are settled by the oldest means known to man; namely, by finding out who has the biggest stick. This is why power struggles take place in governments, and that is why wars take place between nations. It is all a struggle for raw power in an arena where no holds are barred.

1979 was a year of strange events, when the so-called Carter Administration appeared to go crazy on several occasions. At one point the entire Carter Cabinet was fired en masse. It sent shock waves around the world until a reconstituted Cabinet was formed. At another point the entity Carter disappeared at Camp David for weeks on end. Meanwhile worried rumors swirled like a storm through Washington circles.

All of these events were the direct result of the hidden turmoil which I had made public in my reports months earlier. But for public consumption, these and other shocks came and went without the truth ever being told officially.

By late 1979 the dust was beginning to settle. The Rockefeller cartel had been grievously wounded, but it was not destroyed or totally unseated from Government influence. The

Bolsheviks here had acquired a dominant position over the United States Government, but their power was complete only in the military area. For reasons I have detailed in many past reports, the Bolsheviks here were and are bent on throwing the United States into nuclear war against Russia. To the

Bolsheviks—aliens in our midst—our entire country is nothing but a giant tool to further their own dreams of world power.

Up until the hidden Bolshevik coup d'etat here three years ago, the Rockefeller cartel too was bent on nuclear war; but now, having lost control of the United States military, they can no longer afford nuclear war. So now they've changed their tune. On all sides Rockefeller spokesmen are speaking out against the threat of nuclear war. The Rockefeller public relations machine is the most sophisticated in the world. Almost overnight it has stirred up public fears into a strong anti-nuclear movement. Within the Government itself, Rockefeller cartel agents have been slowly regaining some of their lost power. As they do so they are trying to chip away at the Bolshevik plans for nuclear war, which is now imminent.

The most important of all Rockefeller cartel operatives in the Government, my friends, was Secretary of State Alexander Haig. Haig owed his presence in the Administration to the fact that the so-called Reagan Administration was initially installed by the Rockefeller cartel. But the Bolsheviks here were determined not to let the Rockefeller group consolidate their gains. On November 30, 1980, just a few weeks after the rigged Reagan landslide, I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 60, quote:

"...but the Bolsheviks here are working fast. They are in a hurry to seize control of the so-called Reagan Team themselves."

And further on, quote:

"...some day sooner than you think, we Americans may be in for a shock. We will be told that the entity President Reagan has met with an unfortunate accident, or a sudden fatal illness."

Four months later, on March 30, 1981, there was a presidential assassination attempt at the Washington Hilton Hotel. For public consumption, all stories quickly converged on the traditional "lone assassin" theory; and just to make that more believable, a psychologically programmed scapegoat was on hand firing random shots—John Hinckley, Jr.

There was ample evidence that Hinckley was not alone and could not have fired the shot that hit the President, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 63. But never mind, seeing is believing even when it is a lie. Hinckley was conveniently wrestled to the sidewalk, gun in hand, right next to television cameras. Just eight days ago a Washington jury shocked the world by finding Hinckley not guilty by reason of insanity.

As it turned out, the shooting did not cause a change of face in the Oval Office. Even so, it did achieve what the Bolsheviks here wanted. It created a period of vulnerability which halted the momentum of the new Rockefeller cartel governmental programs.

Within a matter of weeks the Bolsheviks here were once again in the driver's seat, especially at the Pentagon. Secretary of Defense Caspar Weinberger had come into office with the new administration, but he was a Bolshevik mole in the Rockefeller machine. Ever since the Reagan assassination attempt, Weinberger and Haig have been at each others' throats because they are on opposite sides of the power struggle. Over the past year or so

there have been more and more stories about Haig feuding with other members of the Administration. This was because Haig was the "point man" in the continuing Rockefeller cartel struggle to unseat the Bolsheviks here.

That situation started coming to a head early this year of 1982. When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 72 four months ago on February 28, 1982, I reported on major new developments in the plans of both factions. First I reported that a drastic speed-up was taking place in the American Bolshevik nuclear war plans. I stated that, quote:

"...a drastic change is now taking place in the secret war planning here in America. The timetable for NUCLEAR WAR ONE has now been speeded up by many months. My friends, as of now the new target date for an American nuclear surprise attack on Russia is mid-September 1982!"

I also revealed the reason for the speed-up in war plans. It was the result of a major Intelligence coup against Russia by the American Bolsheviks. Thanks to this Intelligence breakthrough, the Bolshevik war planners here now have critical data which was formerly lacking to enable an attack on Russia.

In that same AUDIO LETTER report No. 72 I also revealed the Rockefeller cartel response to this new turn of events. It was to be a military coup d'etat by military officers loyal to the Rockefeller group. Here is what I reported four months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 72, and once again I quote:

"...the Rockefeller cartel cannot afford to let their Bolshevik enemies here succeed in setting off nuclear war, therefore the military coup d'etat must take place before the American Bolshevik surprise attack against Russia. If possible, the coup will be carried out before the fourth space shuttle flight this summer because war will be possible any time after that."

I also reported that, quoting again:

"The General in charge of the coup to come, my friends, is General Alexander Haig, presently Secretary of State. He's looking forward to the day when he can really say, 'I am in charge here.'"

(End quote from AUDIO LETTER No. 72)

In these days of managed news, major events often take place with little or no notice to the public about what is going on. Even so, when those events are big enough they usually create a visible ripple on the surface that can be seen in public. In my report four months ago I tried my best to prepare you to read the ripples produced by the struggle over a coup d'etat. Here is what I reported then (quoting further from AUDIO LETTER 72):

"If the military take-over does take place it, too, is likely to be largely hidden in its details from public view. Only one event in the plan is likely to be visible to all. That event, my friends, will be the sudden death of the entity known as President Ronald Reagan. If that happens by the end of summer 1982, no matter what the official story may be, you will know that the military coup d'etat has taken place.

On the other hand, should something happen to Secretary of State Haig by that time, it could well mean that the Bolsheviks have foiled the coup. It is all a race against time, my friends, and the stakes in this race involve nothing less than the very

survival of our United States!"

In my reports since then, I have updated the progress of these intrigues by both the Rockefeller cartel and the Bolsheviks here.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 I revealed the over-all war strategy which the Bolshevik war planners here were developing under the code name "PROJECT Z." It is a three-phase plan for protracted nuclear war following the American first strike against Russia. In recent days public hints about this new Pentagon strategy for protracted war have started leaking publicly. Our Bolshevik Defense Secretary, Caspar Weinberger, was even questioned on television about the new protracted war plan 10 days ago. Weinberger was interviewed on the Sunday morning ABC news program "This Week with David Brinkley." Naturally, Weinberger denied it all; but, my friends, he lied.

Meanwhile, the Rockefeller cartel has been working feverishly to try to stave off the nuclear war that will cost them everything. To this end, a limited quid pro quo for anti-war purposes has been forged lately between the cartel and Russia's new anti-Bolshevik rulers. The key Rockefeller operative in this move has been Alexander Haig. He was engaged in three major bargaining sessions with Russian Foreign Minister Gromyko in nine months. The last of these was a two-day marathon in New York City just days before Haig's ouster. Haig's removal has caused secret agreements between Haig and Gromyko to be shot out of mid-air.

One major product of the recent Rockefeller-Soviet relationship was the secret destruction of key

Bolshevik-controlled military forces in late April. These were based in the Southern Hemisphere, which is expected to escape major damage in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The operation led to the Falklands War as its aftermath, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 74. The joint Rockefeller-Soviet operation, which was highly successful, badly crippled the ability of the Bolsheviks to carry out Phase #3 of their new war plan. It was expected that this would slow down the Bolshevik timetable for NUCLEAR WAR ONE; but, my friends, it hasn't happened! If the Bolsheviks cannot have total victory, then they will settle for a smoldering stalemate. They still expect to survive, while their enemies (the Russians and the Rockefeller cartel) are reduced to ashes.

While the Bolsheviks here and in Britain had their hands full with the Falklands War, the military coup d'etat here was also gaining ground. Just last month I reported on a major gain by the Rockefeller group in retaking control of the CIA from the Bolsheviks; but early this month, June 1982, it all began to unravel.

With the approach of Space Shuttle Mission #4, the deadline for the Haig-led coup d'etat was near. Security around the entity Reagan was doubled and re-doubled. When he went to the U.N. to speak on June 17, the New York Daily News described the (quote) "extraordinary precautions" that were enforced. His limousine even jumped the sidewalk, driving up right next to the door.

All this was happening as key Haig operatives in the intended coup d'etat were being eliminated! Out of public view nothing less than a new Bolshevik purge has swept through the United States Government. It was completed just in time from the Bolshevik viewpoint. On Friday June 25 Haig was confronted with the reality of defeat. His anti-war coup d'etat had collapsed just two days before the launch of Space Shuttle #4!

Topic #2—This month of June 1982 has seen the apparent end of one war and the beginning of another. The war between Britain and Argentina for the Falkland Islands ended, at least for now, on June 14. That day the Argentine garrison at Port Stanley surrendered to the British. Meanwhile, a new war was already underway in the Middle East. Israel had launched its long-planned all-out invasion of Lebanon.

The Falkland Islands war had come as a surprise to the master planners of nuclear war to come, the Bolsheviks here. The Falklands fighting and the secret hostilities which preceded it were intended to upset those nuclear war plans, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 74. And so the Bolsheviks, who were fomenting violence world-wide, stamped out the unwanted Falklands war as fast as they could.

The Thatcher Government in Britain, which is Bolshevik controlled, is now left with a legacy of grievous losses which are being covered up. A major key to the Thatcher cover-up of the true extent of British losses is the continued posture of belligerence toward Argentina. It is being said that a sizable British military presence will be maintained in the South Atlantic. This provides a tailor-made excuse for the fact that many British ships, sailors, and soldiers will not be coming home any time soon. The fact that some of them will never return home can be hidden, and the families affected informed piecemeal, a few at a time. In this way the Thatcher Government intends to keep the lid on the situation.

Another ingredient in the Thatcher cover-up plan is the at sea repair ship, STENA INSPECTOR. It was bought from American interests in May and is now being refitted at the Savannah Shipyard Company in Georgia. Soon it will head for the South Atlantic to begin patching up many British vessels which were damaged in the Falklands war. When and if they return to Britain, the true extent of the damage done to the Royal Navy will have been literally covered up.

The final outcome of the Falklands war was a setback for the Rockefeller cartel and their limited partners, the new rulers of Russia. The Rockefeller-Soviet team won Round No. 1 of the South Atlantic fray, which was the covert warfare during April. I gave the details in AUDIO LETTER No. 74; but Round No. 2, the battle for the Falklands themselves, turned out differently. Despite the damage done to the Royal Navy, it was the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians who were outmaneuvered in the Falklands battle.

It was known that the objective of the joint Rockefeller-Russian action in the Southern Hemisphere was to upset Bolshevik nuclear war plans. So the Bolsheviks responded by deliberately over-reacting militarily. Virtually the entire Royal Navy was dispatched to the South Atlantic. A situation was created in which a British recapture of the Falklands could not be stopped without setting off nuclear war itself. Finally, a totally unorthodox landing tactic was used to get British troops ashore, as I detailed last month. The end result was that the Rockefeller-Russian pledge to the Argentine junta was impossible to fulfill, at least for now.

The Bolsheviks are hoping that the resulting turmoil now taking place in the Argentine government will halt Argentina's rapid move toward Russia. In the past, Argentina was always staunchly anti-Soviet, but under Russia's new rulers, a major and growing trade relationship has been building between Russia and Argentina. The majority of Argentina's huge exports of meat and

grain now go to Russia, and last month relations between Argentina and Cuba suddenly started warming up. The Bolsheviks here would like to reverse all this and ultimately deny Argentina's food to Russia. Whether that will happen remains to be seen.

If NUCLEAR WAR ONE does not erupt first, there are likely to be many surprises down the road in Argentina and Latin America; but as I say these words, the final war sequence planned by the Bolsheviks is already getting underway. This is the sequence of brushfire wars and regional crises which are intended to lead directly into NUCLEAR WAR ONE. This intended final sequence of crises began this month on June 5. On that day Israeli tanks began moving across the border into a so-called Christian enclave in southern Lebanon. The following day the world learned that Israel was launching an all-out invasion of Lebanon.

More than a year ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I made public the joint strategy of the Bolsheviks and Zionists to pave the way for nuclear war. It was a complex five-track plan patterned after the build-up to WORLD WAR I with its proliferation of pre-war crises. I now quote from AUDIO LETTER No. 63:

"All five tracks in the Bolshevik war path converge about mid-1982. By then they expect to have America on a war footing. All four Space Shuttle Missions are planned to be completed by then. The offensive weapons now in the works will be ready, and by then the world will be a caldron of crises made to order for setting off nuclear war suddenly and without warning. Just as crises in the Balkans triggered WORLD WAR I, a world in crisis will trigger NUCLEAR WAR ONE."

Mid-1982 has now arrived, my friends, and the Bolshevik maneuvering to drag the world into war is right on schedule. This month on June 13 the Washington Post published a major article titled: "A WORLD SUDDENLY ASSAULTED BY GUNFIRE." It begins, quote:

"By State Department count, three major and eight lesser wars were going on last week in a world that seems suddenly beset by blazing battles."

Yes, my friends, it is sudden, but it is not accidental. The Bolsheviks here are responsible for the fires that are burning world-wide. Their plans laid out more than a year ago are now reaching fruition. As I have detailed in the past, the Bolsheviks now headquartered here in America are allied closely with the militant Zionists in Israel. This situation is as much a mystery to the people of Israel as it is to the people of America. In both countries the average citizen is getting worried. In Israel, as in America, the present government is bent on deliberately raising the level of tension, violence, and nuclear-war danger. In both countries more and more people are becoming alarmed over the growing danger without realizing that it is all deliberate.

The government which now rules Israel came to power in a sudden astonishing change in April 1977. The previous Prime Minister Rabin resigned abruptly. As always in these situations, a suitable excuse was found for public consumption. In Rabin's case, a mini-scandal over insignificant financial matters was fabricated to explain away his departure; but the real reason was what I reported that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 23. Rabin had learned of secret plans for a major Middle East war and wanted no part of it.

Rabin was replaced by a man of very different attitudes. The new Prime Minister was a man who frightened many but had been thought incapable of seizing control of the Israeli government. He was known as an extremist, tracing all the way back to his days as the most wanted of all Israeli terrorists by the British. The idea that he might actually rule Israel some day had been unthinkable to many. Suddenly the new ruler of Israel was a man named Menachem Begin!

Begin is representative of the most extreme faction of the political movement known as "ZIONISM." The Zionists use religious sounding terminology and Biblical words to disguise the true nature of their goals, which are Satanic.

Political Zionism is as different from classical Judaism as night is from day. Like all of the world's great religions, classical Judaism is based on worship of the Almighty, and it does so from its own distinct perspective. Judaism emphasizes the justice of God; Islam His righteousness and power; Christianity His love; Hinduism His spiritual essence; Buddhism, the peace that comes only from God. Justice is the hallmark of true Judaism, but it has nothing at all to do with political Zionism except as a deceptive slogan.

The Jews who have been lured to the land called Israel have gone there by and large believing the promises of a better life, but what they have gotten instead is a government which per capita has become the most violent and warlike on earth. "There is no peace, saith the Lord, for the wicked." And the Begin Government in Israel is as wicked as the Reagan Government here. Modern Israel is no longer a threatened underdog, as it constantly pretends. Instead, Israel has become the world's third most powerful nation militarily after Russia and the United States. Using its runaway military might, the Zionist government of Israel is setting the world on fire. It is doing so with the blessing and support of their American Bolshevik allies!

The agony which is being inflicted on tiny Lebanon, which has never done Israel harm, is beyond description, my friends. Over 10,000 Lebanese civilians have been slaughtered by the Israelis and over 600,000 made homeless. Even the sanitized reports on American television cannot entirely hide the wanton savagery of the Israeli invasion. One report after another shows devastation of entire city blocks on a scale not seen since WORLD WAR II. On all sides the reports describe Israeli shelling and dive-bombing of Beirut, Sidon, and other Lebanese cities with one word—indiscriminate.

My friends, classical Judaism glory of God's creation. Man is God's own image. Would God, the what Israel has done in Lebanon? genocide in the image of God? 0. instead?

regards man as the crowning supposed to have been formed in just God of Judaism, have done Are arrogance, bestiality, and are they in the image of Satan

What the Israelis are doing now in Lebanon is claimed to be in retaliation for provocations by the Palestine Liberation Organization; but the fact is that the present events are part of the long-range plan to bring on nuclear war. In AUDIO LETTER No. 70 last December 1981, I reported that, quote:

"The joint war plan of the American Bolsheviks and the Zionists in Israel is still on track. They are shooting for a Middle East war to break out before the end of summer 1982."

It is now the summer of 1982, and the desired Middle East war is

raging.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 68 I reported the Begin plan was to goad the PLO into violence. Time after time over the past year or so the Israeli Air Force has mounted devastating air raids on Lebanon creating widespread devastation and death. The purpose of these repeated Israeli violations of the cease-fire was to provoke a highly visible counterattack by the PLO. With that as a pretext, the Begin Government intended to justify its planned invasion of Lebanon. But the PLO never did respond in kind to the Israeli goading. Aside from occasional small raids and shelling incidents, nothing was done that was sufficiently dramatic for the intended purpose. Meanwhile, time was running out.

The fast new war timetable required the Middle East war to get underway without further delay, so on June 3 the Begin Government provided its own pretext for war. That day the Israeli ambassador to Great Britain was gunned down by an assassin hired by Israel's own Intelligence agency, the MOSSAD! The Begin Government immediately professed to be outraged, saying this was the last straw. Two days later the Israeli forces, which had already been massed along the Lebanese border, invaded.

The unbridled savagery of the Israeli attack has shocked the world. In effect the nation that calls itself Israel has turned the Palestinians into the new Jews of the world. They have no home, they are dispersed. They, along with the innocent victims of their host country Lebanon, are the victims of genocide—a military holocaust without justice or mercy.

Protests and condemnation of the Israeli behavior in Lebanon are mounting world-wide. Nowhere is the worry greater than within the Jewish community itself. In Israel, popular sentiment against the Begin Government is erupted into widespread demonstrations; and elsewhere around the world many Jews are also speaking out against the Israeli-inflicted holocaust.

But through it all, my friends, the Reagan-Begin axis of the American Bolsheviks and the militant Israeli Zionists continues to function smoothly. In his United Nations speech of June 17 the entity President Reagan condemned (quote) "armed aggression." And to the new Russian pledge not to be the first to use nuclear weapons in war, Reagan demanded, quote: "deeds, not words."

But when it comes to Israel, those criteria are never applied. The Begin Government agrees in words to one cease-fire after another, but in "deeds" it breaks each truce when ready; and Israeli armed aggression has left nearly 20% of the population of Lebanon homeless. The whole world is shocked and outraged, yet all this has not provoked even a slap on the wrist for Israel from Washington.

My friends, the Satanic Begin Government is now in its sixth year in Israel. This month, June, is the sixth month of the year. On the fifth day of the month the Israeli invasion of Lebanon began, and with it abominations of military desolation.

It all brings to mind the visions of the prophet Ezekiel, Chapter 8. The prophet says in the first verse that he was shown visions in the sixth year, in the sixth month, on the fifth day of that month. He was shown abominations spawned in the Holy Land by people who arrogantly said, "The Lord does not see us."

The chapter ends in the words:

"Then He said to me, 'Hast thou seen this, 0 son of man? Is it a light thing to the house of Judah that they commit the abominations which they commit here? For they have filled the land with violence, and have returned to provoke me to anger; and, lo, they put the branch to their nose. Therefore will I also deal in fury: mine eye shall not spare, neither will I have pity: and though they cry in mine ears with a loud voice, yet will I not hear them.'"

Topic #3—Earlier this month on June 18, there was a fascinating announcement from NASA. Two American spacecraft, the most distant man-made objects in the universe, may be on the verge of a major new discovery. These two space probes have been racing through space for ten years and nine years respectively. After all that time they are now nearing the edge of our solar system, whose vastness is almost beyond comprehension; and as they do so, they're preparing to observe a giant mystery object in the skies.

The mystery object, whatever it is, is thought to lie billions of miles beyond the outermost known planet Pluto. It is so far away that it has never been observed by astronomers here on Earth, yet many are sure that there is something out there. Something, whatever it is, keeps disturbing the criss-crossing orbits of little Pluto and giant Neptune. The effect even penetrates inward to the monster planet Uranus. So no one knows what it is or where it is—it may be a tenth planet, it may be a dark star farther away. It could even be that most chilling of all celestial objects, a black hole, with gravity so strong light itself cannot escape. No one has seen it, so no one knows.

But now, after a decade of space travel, two American deep-space probes may be on the verge of giving us the answers. The probes are PIONEER 10 and PIONEER 11, launched in 1972 and 1973 respectively. They are nuclear-powered spacecraft designed to escape from our solar system and coast forever through the void of interstellar space. When they cross the outer boundary of our solar system around 1990, they are expected to be sending back data about what they find. It should be mankind's first taste of interstellar space; that is, if anyone is still listening by then.

Two months ago on April 12, 1982, Aviation Week and Space Technology magazine devoted its editorial space to a statement by Dr. James A. Van Allen. Dr. Van Allen is the space scientist who discovered the radiation belts around the earth that now bear his name—24 years ago. His article is titled "PIONEER'S UNFUNDED REACH FOR THE STARS." He listed an astonishing list of major new discoveries made by the Pioneer probes during the past decade, and he issued an appeal for the program to be saved from imminent destruction.

Dr. Van Allen's article begins with the sad words, quote:

"One of the most incredible features of the fiscal 1983 program of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration is a premature termination of the deep-space missions of Pioneer 10 and Pioneer 11. The annual saving is $3,000,000 or 4/10,000ths of the agency's budget."

My friends, the so-called Reagan Administration decision to cancel the half-completed Pioneer Program is incredible, but it's in character with this Administration's entire approach to space and science in general. Anything that will help the Bolsheviks here prepare to wage war is funded, no matter how much it costs; but everything that merely adds to the peaceful constructive knowledge of mankind is being guillotined, no matter how little

it costs.

For the past year and a half I've been reporting periodically about this developing situation. America's Space Program has been systematically whittled away to leave almost nothing but the Space Shuttle. The Space Shuttle has been spared only because of its critical importance for military purposes. Over the past year or so military control of the Shuttle Program has become more and more blatant. The Bolshevik war planners who now control the United States military will brook no interference with their nuclear war plans.

The overt military take-over of the Shuttle Program began just over a year ago in May 1981 following the hidden disaster of the first shuttle flight. The civilian director of the Shuttle Program, John Yardley, was eased out. Several months later, in October, 1981, he was officially replaced by an Air Force General, James Abrahamson. Since that time the Bolshevik warlords have been expanding and consolidating their control over the shuttle and NASA itself. Reorganization has become the order of the day at NASA with military control becoming more absolute with each change.

In its original concept the Space Shuttle was to be a stepping stone into space for both civilian and military purposes. It was to be a system that would continue to grow and be improved over the years by continued development. But that idea has now gone out the window, thanks to the total take-over of the Shuttle Program by Bolshevik military managers. To them, even the shuttle is only a short-term stepping stone to war. They intend to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE before any further development of the shuttle could bear fruit; and so, under Bolshevik military control, NASA is now turning its back on the traditional mission of advancing the technology of space flight. The entire NASA emphasis is shifting towards using the Space Shuttle "as is" for the short time left before war.

The most stunning result of this radical policy change within NASA was announced about two months ago in April. It involves a man whose name is practically a synonym for America's manned space program. This man has played key roles in the planning and engineering of every single American manned space program. He was a member of the original PROJECT MERCURY team. He was deeply involved in the follow-on PROJECT GEMINI, and a central figure in the PROJECT APOLLO moon program. He directed the design and implementation of the Mission Control Center in Houston, and for the past 10 years he has been Director of the Johnson Space Center.

If you have followed America's manned space program closely over the years you probably know his name as well as I do. I am talking about Dr. Christopher Kraft. The Bolshevik warlords here have decreed that NASA's days of technological development are now at an end, so one day last April Dr. Christopher Kraft was told that his services are no longer needed, and he was fired!

As I say these words, my friends, Space Shuttle Mission #4 is underway. This is the last of the four initial crash military missions to prepare for NUCLEAR WAR ONE. Each of these first four missions has involved two shuttles, not just one, as I first reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 62 and 63. Each time the shuttle we see blasting off from Florida follows a path into space that is different from the one publicly claimed. As a result, it cannot return to Earth at the time and place it is supposed to, therefore the two-man crew of each flight returns to Earth in a small Gemini-like space capsule. Then they board a different

shuttle and rocket into view from a distance to land at the advertised time and place. I've given all the details in the past, so I'll not repeat them now.

In the first three space shuttle launches the launch took place into the northeast. Each time this was the beginning of a long curving launch into the north to a near-polar orbit to pass over Russia, but this time the shuttle took off in a different direction. It took off due east from Cape Canaveral into something called a "minimum inclination orbit." This time it was heading not for the North Pole but toward the equator. The reason for this has to do with the secret Pentagon payload. It is a special sensor system designed to give confirmation of the first phase of the planned American nuclear first strike on Russia! As I reported last month, quote:

"In order to do its job, the Air Force infrared sensor has to be placed in geostationary orbit. That orbit is over 22,000 miles high over the equator."

In television coverage of the launch three days ago, the new flight path was mentioned briefly but not explained. For example, the trans-Atlantic abort site this time was Dakar, Senegal, close to the equator. This is a change from the first three flights in which the trans-Atlantic abort site was Rota, Spain, much farther north. The shuttle itself cannot go high enough to put the Air Force sensor into its final orbit. Instead, the sensor is perched atop a rocket carried in the cargo bay.

For engineering reasons, the rocket had to be loaded into the shuttle while it was standing vertically, not parked horizontally. That's why, for the first time, the shuttle was loaded for this flight after it was ready on the launch pad. NASA spokesmen admitted publicly that this was done, but as always they never tell you the reason.

Last month I reported that an on-schedule launch of Space Shuttle #4 would indicate that the Pentagon nuclear war plans are still on schedule. Sunday morning, June 27, Space Shuttle #4 became the first shuttle ever to take off exactly on schedule. Not a moment's delay was permitted, even though a sudden violent hailstorm the previous day had ruined more than 400 critical heat tiles .

So far this shuttle flight is apparently proceeding as planned. That means, my friends, that the September deadline for NUCLEAR WAR ONE is still in effect as of now.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've been forced to be the bearer of bad news. The anti-nuclear-war coup d'etat planned by General Alexander Haig has collapsed. More surprises are possible, but the time is now very short.

The intended final war sequence has now begun in the Middle East at the hands of Israel; and Space Shuttle Mission #4, the last one needed for nuclear war, is now in progress.

My friends, the danger of nuclear war is now the greatest that it has ever been since the summer of 1976. I cannot tell you for sure whether war will or will not erupt by September because these war plans are the plans of men and they are not infallible. What I can tell you for certain is that these days ahead will be

filled with danger!

The Rockefeller cartel has apparently failed in its game plan to stop the Bolsheviks here. That leaves the arena of conflict to the Bolsheviks here versus the rulers of Russia. Two more deadly enemies are impossible to imagine, my friends. The Bolsheviks here are racing to position themselves for an all-out attack against Russia. Pre-emptive actions by the Kremlin to prevent that attack are virtually guaranteed. The results may well shake the world!

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #77

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is July 28, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 77.

Early this month, on July 6, there was an unusual news report from Russia. That day an Aeroflot Jet Transport had crashed on take-off from Moscow's Sheremetyevo Airport. It was a spectacular flaming crash that killed all 90 persons on board. What was unusual about this news item was that it was made public so quickly. Usually plane crashes in Russia are announced more quietly and often after a delay of hours or even days—but not this time. The Aeroflot flight that crashed on July 6 was an international flight bound for Africa. Some of the passengers were students returning to their homes in Sierra Leone and Senegal. Under the circumstances, Russian authorities had no choice but to release the news without delay. Within hours it was included in news reports around the world.

Within hours after the Moscow tragedy, investigators at the scene discovered that this had been no ordinary plane crash. In the midst of the twisted, smoking wreckage of what had been the Aeroflot plane, conclusive proof of sabotage was found. A report about the sabotage was flashed to KGB headquarters at Dzerzhinsky Square in Moscow. There the report was directed to a special task group assigned to deal with growing acts of internal disruption in the Soviet Union.

A mounting campaign to create internal turmoil in Russia is going on, created by Bolshevik agents there. So far there has been little news about this in the West, but it's a real and deepening problem. Within 36 hours the KGB special task group was able to confirm what had been suspected. The sabotage of the Aeroflot jet had been carried out by one of the Bolshevik disruption groups which have been under surveillance in the Moscow area. These groups, like others all across Russia, are being financed and directed by the Bolsheviks here—now headquartered in the United States.

The KGB notified the Kremlin of the results of its investigation of the Aeroflot sabotage early on July 8, just two days after the crash. Those suspected of having carried out the sabotage were under arrest, but the question remained: how to send a message to the Bolsheviks in the United States to cease and desist from similar acts? It does no good to talk to America's present rulers. Action of some kind was required, and fast. Various possibilities were discussed and rejected for various reasons. Retaliation for the Aeroflot crash had to be

designed to convey a clear message to the American Bolsheviks in terms they understand. The message the Kremlin wanted to send was :

We know what you did to our plane. We have the means to destroy you and the will to use it if necessary.

For the message to be effective, time was of the essence, and so a "target of opportunity" order was given jointly to the KGB and the Russian Space Command. The KGB was ordered to select an American air liner for destruction within 2 4 hours. The criterion for selection was to be a passenger list as similar as possible to that of the sabotaged Aeroflot plane. The Aeroflot plane had carried many foreign passengers and a total of 90 persons had been aboard, therefore the KGB was ordered to select a commercial air liner in the United States with similar characteristics; that is, there must be at least 90 persons aboard and an unusually high proportion of foreign passengers. The Russian Space Command would then have the responsibility of destroying the air liner on take-off, just like the Aeroflot plane.

KGB agents here in the United States had little difficulty in selecting not one but several candidate flights. Thanks to America's cross-connected computerized Air Line Reservation System, the task was relatively easy. The Russian Space Command was then free to choose whichever flight was most convenient to attack. As in the past, it was decided to mount the attack using bad weather as an operational cover.

On the afternoon of July 9 summer rainstorms were moving in patches through southeastern Louisiana. They were the kind of thunderstorms that build up in the heat and humidity of scorching summer afternoons. It was an on-again, off-again rainstorm, locally heavy at times then slacking off to a few sprinkles. At New Orleans International Airport it continued to be business as usual on that rain-swept afternoon. Weather conditions like these were a familiar occurrence, and the airport was equipped to monitor them closely. At around 4:00 P.M. that afternoon airport sensors detected a condition of disorganized air movement called "wind shear." Warnings were broadcast to airplanes in the area so that they could take it into account. Meanwhile, flight operations continued without letup. Rain or no rain the weather was still far better than the minimums required for flight.

As the wind shear warning was broadcast to pilots, a number of planes were preparing to take off. One of these was a Pan American 727, Flight 759 bound for Las Vegas. The pilot heard the wind-shear warning and decided to take appropriate action to guard against it. The faster a plane is moving the less vulnerable it is to shear; so when Pan American Flight 759 headed down the runway, the pilot held the nose down longer than normal. By waiting a few extra moments, he allowed the 727 to pick up extra speed as a margin of safety. Then he lifted the nose and the plane jumped off the runway and started climbing. Other planes, some of them smaller and more vulnerable to wind shear than a 727, took off before and after Pan Am Flight 759. All of them did so without mishap, but Flight 759 was destined to be less fortunate. This was the third day after the sabotaged Aeroflot jet had crashed in Moscow. Pan American Flight 759 had the required load of more than 90 persons; it also satisfied the criterion of an unusually large number of foreign passengers, in excess of 20%; and although Flight 759 was a domestic flight, the plane itself belonged to America's international flight air line, Pan American.

The parallels with the sabotaged Aeroflot flight were judged to be more than adequate; and so as the Pan Am jet rotated upward off the runway, a Russian Cosmosphere was waiting, hovering in the clouds over the airport. A moment after the jet left the runway, it was hit by what witnesses described as a (quote) "bolt of lightning." What they actually saw, my friends, was a surgical blast from a Charged Particle Beam Weapon. It was fired down at the jet by the Russian Cosmosphere hiding in the clouds overhead. It is not surprising that the witnesses mistook this for a lightning bolt. Whenever charged particle beam weapons are discussed in public, they are most often described as producing a sort of man-made lightning bolt; but a charged particle beam only looks like a lightning bolt. What it does is far more destructive than lightning.

The beam blast was aimed very precisely at the air intake mounted in the tail of the 727. The blast blew superheated air and debris into the center engine, ruining it. The fringes of the blast also damaged and interfered with the other two engines mounted nearby.

As the jet lost power, witnesses saw it stop climbing normally and start mushing along through the air. Less than half a mile from the end of the runway the plane clipped a tree as it descended toward a crowded residential area. The doomed jet liner passed right over a woman who later told reporters, "It was spitting and popping like it couldn't get the motor running." Moments later the dying jet liner was crashing, cartwheeling, and exploding through four blocks of Kenner, Louisiana. Stunned residents who had been narrowly missed by the crash looked across the street in horrified disbelief. Where moments before there had been neighbors' houses, there was now a firestorm. A wall of angry flames towered 20 stories into the air. All 145 people aboard the plane had perished along with 8 more on the ground.

My friends, the Aeroflot crash in Moscow and the Pan Am crash three days later in New Orleans were not just tragic accidents. The victims in those tragedies were casualties in the secret war between the United States and Russia. Barring a miracle, all-out war is on the horizon; and if it comes, it will come suddenly, just as destruction came suddenly to a suburb of New Orleans earlier this month.

In recent days top leaders of both the United States and Russia have started speaking openly of war. Both sides are now saying that the United States and the Soviet Union are already at war, which is true; but the secret warfare which has been going on for years now is only a pale shadow of things to come.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE GROWING MOMENTUM TOWARD NUCLEAR WAR ONE Topic #2—AMERICA'S DOMESTIC SHIFT ONTO A WAR FOOTING Topic #3—THE RISING PITCH OF RUSSIAN ANTI-WAR WARNINGS

Topic #1:

Economic/NATO Summits

Early last month from June 4 to June 6 the eighth economic summit took place between the United States and six other leading industrial nations. The summit was hosted by France with the usual pomp and ceremony. The summit was supposed to enable a meeting of minds which would result in a more unified approach to solving the world's economic problems, but the entity known as President Reagan went there with different goals in mind. The

Bolshevik-dominated Reagan Administration is preoccupied with thoughts of war and intrigue—not with building a better world.

Because of this radical difference in viewpoint, Reagan was out of step with the other leaders at the summit from start to finish. It was symbolized at the very beginning when all the leaders were flown to the palace at Versailles in the blue-and-white French helicopters—all, that is, except President Reagan. He refused to ride in a French helicopter, arriving instead in his own Marine Corps chopper. "A matter of security", someone said. The Reagan obsession with security at Versailles verged on paranoia. For example, he took his own supply of drinking water to France aboard Air Force 1. Why? Because he just did not trust French water, even the many kinds of world famous French bottled water. "Just a matter of security", someone said.

The French were offended when they heard about Reagan's boycott of French water, but what really insulted them was the way he behaved toward the exquisite French cuisine at the Versailles Palace. While all the other world leaders were relaxing and enjoying themselves, Reagan was behaving as if someone was out to get him. Reagan has two members of the Secret Service who are assigned as "food tasters", like those for royalty of old. He will eat nothing until they have tasted it first. If the food tasters don't die, he concludes that the food is not poisoned and eats it. When the Reagan food tasters invaded the Versailles Palace kitchens, the chefs were incensed. To question French food is to demean the very glory of the French Republic. As one indignant chef told reporters, "Our own president has no food tasters. He trusts French food."

If the Reagan paranoia displayed at Versailles had been limited to matters of food and drink, it might have been shrugged off as unimportant; but the fact is that during the talks themselves, the United States was even more out of line. Our trading partners said, "Let's work out a way to bring down high interest rates which are killing our economies." The so-called Reagan team replied, "Let's cut off trade credits to Russia in order to kill the Russian economy." The Europeans said, "We're vulnerable to economic catastrophe due to our near total dependence on Middle East and Persian Gulf oil. A war in the region could cripple us overnight. We must protect ourselves by obtaining a second source of energy. Therefore we must help build the Siberian pipe line to bring us natural gas from Russia."

But the Reagan team replied:

"If you build the pipe line, Russia will benefit too, so don't build it."

As the conference broke up, there were reports in the press that the United States had angered the other nations there. Instead of working to solve our own problems, the Reagan Administration was interested only in making problems for Russia.

After the economic summit broke up early last month, the Reagan entourage continued an extended trip through Europe. On June 9 and 10 a summit of NATO leaders was held in Bonn, West Germany. In the final closed session of the summit, the entity Reagan gave a summary statement so warlike that it stunned everyone else into silence.

European diplomats are so worried about what Reagan said that early this month some of them started telling the press about it.

The controlled major media here in America have carefully avoided highlighting this ominous story. But just over two weeks ago, on July 11, a syndicated article about it was published by Newsday. The article begins, and I quote:

"President Reagan stunned allies at the NATO summit by telling them that as far as he is concerned the Soviet Union is at war with the United States, European officials said last week. The statement, which came as the President was summing up his views on the two-day meeting in Bonn, so surprised the other heads of state that they remained silent, and NATO Secretary General Joseph Luns immediately adjourned the session according to these officials who were present at the summit a month ago."

DEEPENING/MULTIPLYING OF CRISES

My friends, for several years now I've been reporting on the secret war that is raging between the United States and the Soviet Union. Up until now the fact that war is already underway between the superpowers has never been admitted by either side. But this is a war that cannot remain secret forever. The momentum is building toward the moment when it will erupt into all-out war, NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and as that moment draws near, my friends, both sides are starting to speak of war in clear terms. At the NATO meeting on June 10, the alleged President Reagan said that the United States and Russia are already at war. Several weeks later a top Russian leader said much the same thing.

On July 13 Pravda published a speech by the entity Marshal Ustinov, the Soviet Defense Minister. As I've explained in the past, anything attributed to Ustinov carries a great deal of authority. Ustinov declared that the United States is orchestrating a trade, credit, and technological war against the Soviet Union. He also gave a blunt warning to Washington that a, quote:

"pre-emptive first-strike use of nuclear weapons could not insure an American victory."

The Ustinov warning reflects the fact that Russia's new leaders know about the Reagan Administration plan to launch nuclear war soon, and they are preparing to defeat the Bolshevik-triggered American first strike if it is carried out.

But the Bolsheviks here are not listening, my friends. As I've detailed in the past, the Bolshevik mentality is Satanic and schizophrenic. Those obsessed by Bolshevik thinking are totally incapable of persuasion by normal reasoning. They see shadows, like Reagan with his water jugs and food tasters in France. They're out of touch with reality as you and I know it, so they're plunging right ahead with their plans for nuclear war.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 nearly 16 months ago, I outlined the 5-track plan of the Bolsheviks here to lead us into nuclear war. As I reported then, all five tracks were designed to start coming together around mid-1982—in other words, NOW. And it is happening!

Track 1 of the American Bolshevik war plan called for stirring up as much internal turmoil as possible in Russia and her satellites. This is intended purely for distraction to keep Soviet authorities off balance. The most dramatic example of the ongoing campaign of internal harassment recently was the July 6 crash of the sabotaged Aeroflot jet in Moscow.

Track 2 of the war plan called for preparing the American

people for war. That part of the war plan has gone much farther

than most people realize. We're becoming conditioned to the idea

that getting ready for nuclear war is the No. 1 priority of the so-called Reagan Administration.

A government which pretends to be bent on saving money is spending record amounts for military projects. At the same time the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) is vigorously publicizing alleged civil defense plans. The fact is that neither the new military projects nor the proposed new civil defense measures are expected to bear fruit for the general welfare of the public. Those things take time, and the Bolsheviks here intend for NUCLEAR WAR ONE to erupt long before that. The only real purpose of these things is to make us think in terms of war with Russia—and to safeguard only the American Bolsheviks in their private war bunkers.

Track 3 of the Bolshevik plan to prepare for war involves space and in particular the SPACE SHUTTLE PROGRAM. In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I reported that a series of four initial missions were planned for military purposes. The story was to be fed to the public that these would be test flights. Elaborate preparations were made ahead of time to provide falsified television coverage of the orbital portion of each flight. This was done by means of advance video taping. Meanwhile, the actual military activities carried out by the shuttle astronauts would not be seen by the public. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 63, the plan called for all four of these crash military space shuttle missions to be completed by mid-1982. That time has now arrived, and Space Shuttle #4 is history, right on time.

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 7 6 last month, the fourth space shuttle mission was in progress. I can now report that its primary mission, which I described last month, was successful. The secret Air Force Cryogenic Sensor System is now in geostationary orbit over the Indian Ocean. It is parked there waiting to do its job about six weeks from now if the present Pentagon schedule is maintained. That job, my friends, will be to confirm success of stage No. 1 of the planned American nuclear first strike against Russia.

I can now report that Space Shuttle #4 also had a secondary mission, which was not successful. It was piggy-backed onto this mission in hopes of gaining additional Intelligence over Russia.

The laser-armed robot Spy Satellite which was launched by the third space shuttle did not last long, my friends. It did survive long enough to provide the basic new target information the Bolsheviks in the Pentagon wanted, and it also picked up some unexpected additional information close to Russia's space bases. Strange installations of some kind are being built in many places in Russia, but Russian Cosmos Interceptors succeeded in destroying the super-spy satellite before it could be reprogrammed to take a closer look at the sites. And so Space Shuttle #4 was given a piggyback mission.

High-power surveillance equipment was mounted in the rear bay of the crew compartment to look out through the windows in the top. The arrangement was very much like what was done in the second shuttle last November 1981.

The shuttle was launched initially into a minimum inclination orbit toward the equator, as I reported last month. That was done to enable the Air Force sensor to be launched with its rocket booster into its high equatorial orbit. Then, to carry out the second mission, a little publicized additional capability

of the space shuttle was used for the first time.

At the insistence of the military, the shuttle was designed with the capability to change its orbital plane by a large amount. Space Shuttle #4 was initially in an orbit that went no farther north than Cape Canaveral. In order to do any spying on Russia, it was necessary to swing much farther north. The shuttle accomplished this by changing its orbit less than 24 hours after launch. From its initial 28-1/2 degree orbit, the shuttle fired its engines to achieve an orbit that took it above 40 degrees north. That was enough to take the shuttle over southern Russia where several of the mysterious new sites are located.

By that point the space shuttle had been converted to nothing more than a giant awkward spy satellite with lasers for self-defense—but it did not work! As soon as the shuttle headed north, it was attacked and destroyed by Russian space weapons, so the Bolshevik war planners here still do not know what the rush-rush new Russian installations are all about.

Even so, the Bolsheviks here consider the secret mission of Space Shuttle #4 to be a great success. Their precious attack-confirmation sensor is now in orbit, pointed at Russia.

The final act in Shuttle Mission #4 was carried out on schedule with great fanfare on July Fourth. The final secret duplicate of the Space Shuttle Columbia swooped in to land at Edwards Air Force Base with the President watching. Afterwards the President gave a speech in which he gave lip service to future support for NASA; but the fact is, my friends, that the Bolsheviks here believe they have no further need for Space research. They believe the secret military shuttle program has done its job and that they are now ready for NUCLEAR WAR ONE. In recognition of this fact, the entity Reagan carried out a military ceremony at Edwards Air Force Base after the shuttle landed. Major General James Abrahamson, who seized control of the shuttle for the military, was promoted to Lieutenant General. Abrahamson had nothing at all to do with developing the space shuttle, but he has guided its secret use in preparing for war, and for that he was told in effect, "Well done."

Track 4 in the elaborate Bolshevik plan to lead us into war called for the introduction of certain new offensive nuclear weaponry. That task is now essentially completed, my friends. The Minuteman TX mobile ICBM missiles, which I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 55, are now deployed; and the Stealth Phantom warplanes, which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 73, are being deployed now around Russia's borders.

Track 5 of the plan called for a sudden mushrooming of simultaneous crises to provide the spark for war. And it is happening, my friends!

The brutal Israeli invasion of Lebanon last month has dragged on with no solution in sight. Every time anyone suggests a way out of the crisis, the Begin government says "No deal" and bombs Beirut again.

And now since July 14 the Persian Gulf war between Iran and Iraq is multiplying the instability in the region. Iran's thrust into Iraq is doing exactly what Israel wants, throwing the Arab OPEC nations into disarray. The Iranian battle cry is "On to Jerusalem"; but up to now Jerusalem could not be more pleased. All this is paving the way for an Israeli limited nuclear strike to destroy Saudi Arabian oil wells—a secret plan which I first

revealed nearly seven (7) years ago and have updated a number of times since then.

Elsewhere around the world the fires are multiplying. Savage new fighting has erupted between Somalia and Ethiopia. The war in Afghanistan is heating up, and in Central America the El Salvador war is now spreading to engulf Honduras and Nicaragua. So-called right-wing commandos from Honduras—trained, outfitted, and supplied by the CIA—are intensifying their attacks on Nicaragua. The United States is using troops and materiel from its Panama Canal base to help Honduras against Nicaragua. This has now placed the Panama Canal in dire jeopardy, just as I warned it would be in my book nine years ago.

During August world crises are being planned to multiply and get rapidly worse. The Pentagon's target date for nuclear war is still MID-SEPTEMBER, my friends, and that is just around the corner!

Topic #2—Last week on July 22 the government of France issued what amounts to a Declaration of Independence against the United States of America. It consisted of a crisp two-paragraph statement issued in Paris. The statement ordered all French companies to honor their contracts to help build the Siberian gas pipe line from Russia to Europe. The French action was taken in angry defiance of the increasingly arrogant dictating to Europe by Washington.

At the seven-nation Economic Summit early last month, the pipe line had been discussed at length. As usual the United States wanted to force Europe to back out of the deal. In exasperation the Europeans explained over and over how vital the pipe line is to them. When the summit ended on June 6 the Europeans were left believing that the United States would respect their position; but, as the French say, it had all been a dialogue of the deaf.

On June 18, less than two weeks after the Economic Summit, the entity President Reagan announced new measures to try to scuttle the pipe line. Last December 1981 he had announced a ban on American companies providing the equipment for the pipe line. On June 18 he expanded the ban internationally. He declared that even foreign companies operating in their home countries were banned from providing pipe-line equipment if they make products under American licenses. It was a move with little or no foundation in International Law. Instead, it was based on sheer intimidation of our allies.

The French announcement of July 22 was Europe's answer. First came the announcement concerning French companies; then, the same day, West German Chancellor Helmut Schmidt was interviewed on American television. He announced that France was not alone in her decision. Schmidt said,

"The pipe line will be built; and the British, the French, the Germans and other Europeans will stick to the agreements which their firms have been making with the Soviets."

On French television Foreign Minister Claude Cheysson revealed that a major rift is taking place between Europe and the United States. Speaking for France he described what is happening as "a progressive divorce." He also said, "We no longer speak the same language." The feelings he expressed are spreading fast throughout the leadership of Western Europe. Even Britain, whose present government is dominated by Bolsheviks in the military sphere, is finding it necessary to side with Europe on the pipe line issue.

My friends, we are now in the final pages of the events I outlined nine years ago in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR. What I made public then were deliberate long-range economic and political plans, and the inevitable consequences of those plans.

The efforts of the Reagan Administration to sabotage the Siberian gas pipe line project are a direct threat to vital European interests. In response, our long-time European allies are banding together to protect themselves. Sooner or later it had to come to this. This is what I meant in my book to the effect that Europe will no longer by cowed by United States blackmail. The breach now taking place between the United States and Europe is giving rise to fears of a major trade war. Those fears are well founded. Quoting from my book starting on page 102 :

"As for America, she will go her own way pushed by the momentum of the New Imperialism. She will enter the tunnel of the Big Trade War with all of its self-protective devices. The free trade idea will have gasped its last breath."

It is happening now, my friends. Just three days ago, for example, an attempt to work out an agreement between Europe and the United States over steel imports collapsed. America's obsolescent steel industry is slowly going belly-up as steel from Europe's more modern, government-subsidized plants floods our market. Reagan's response is to further deepen the rift by slapping taxes or increased duties on imports of European products. Developments like these are the inevitable consequences of forces which were deliberately set in motion long ago, but they are also being manipulated to further the objectives of the American Bolsheviks who now dominate the so-called Reagan Administration. As they lead us down the path to nuclear war, they are also paving the way for their own total domination of America after the war. As I have detailed in past reports, they expect to survive the nuclear devastation which they plan to bring down upon the rest of us.

If the war should get out of control and turn America into a hopeless wasteland, they're prepared to leave afterward and start over in the Southern Hemisphere. But the fact is, my friends, that they think NUCLEAR WAR ONE will be less disastrous than that.

The Bolsheviks here believe that what is left of America after NUCLEAR WAR ONE will still be a prize worth having. They expect 40- to 60-million Americans to survive the war in rural areas and small towns. The major United States cities will be gone, but so will their unmanageable problems such as urban decay and runaway crime! America's vast natural resources will still be here, ready to be exploited. The Bolsheviks intend to position themselves to be our taskmasters. They believe that a new Bolshevized America will rise from the ashes and it will all be theirs to use however they choose.

In all this, my friends, the Bolsheviks here are expecting to repeat what they did to take over Russia 65 years ago. It was the strain and suffering of World War I that finally made Russia vulnerable to a Bolshevik take-over. Now, having lost their control of Russia at the hands of Russia's new anti-Bolshevik rulers, they plan to try again here. World War I gave them Russia, and they believe NUCLEAR WAR ONE will give them America.

To help pave the way for their intended total postwar

dictatorship over America, the Bolsheviks here are deliberately isolating us in the world. I've already described how the Reagan Administration is alienating Europe. Likewise, the White House is also hitting the Japanese where it hurts by banning equipment for joint Japanese and Russian oil projects. These are in the works in Siberia and on Sakhalin Island, and would result in important new energy supplies for Japan.

In Latin America Reagan Administration policy has done enormous damage to America's image. In the Falklands war between Britain and Argentina, American open support for Britain was carried out in ways that angered all of Latin America.

In the Middle East the United States is losing its credibility with the Arabs with its attitude that Israel can do no wrong.

As for Russia and the Soviet bloc, Reagan policies boil down to nothing but fist shaking and goading. America's trade war against Russia is designed to turn the "cold war" into a "hot war." That is where trade wars always lead. In the 1930s the United States used oil embargoes and trade boycotts to goad Japan into war, and the result was Pearl Harbor. And now the United States is using embargoes, boycotts, and sanctions to pave the way for war with Russia.

My friends, in every way the United States is isolating itself. On July 9 the entity Reagan even announced that the United States will not sign the new "Law of the Sea" treaty. That treaty took eight years to negotiate and has been signed by 130 nations. Only four nations so far have said a flat "No" to it—and two of them are America and Israel.

The self-inflicted isolation of America is deliberate, my friends. It's part of the Bolshevik strategy I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 63 to create a sort of Masada complex here in America—that is, turning in and upon itself. The more isolated America becomes, the more we will see ourselves as alone in a world with bitter enemies and no friends!

The Bolsheviks here in America are using the same strategy as their Zionist partners in Israel. The Yorkshire Post in England summed up the Zionist thinking perfectly six months ago in an editorial on January 16, quote:

"The superhawks in the Israeli government want the Israelis to feel unloved, unwanted, and vulnerable by the world because then it can make it easier for the government to argue for more security needs to take precedence over everything else."

That is what is happening in Begin's Israel, my friends, and that is what is happening in Reagan's America. America's isolation abroad is moving along hand in hand with measures to clamp down on Americans domestically. Several things are in the works to hit us in the pocketbook IF the plans for imminent nuclear war should somehow be delayed. The plan to repudiate the S100 bill, which I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 63, is once again being examined. Large amounts of counterfeit $100 bills are now being made in Latin America using American plates formerly used by the CIA in Vietnam. This may be used as the excuse, the cover, to eliminate the $100 bill in a sudden repudiation.

A new WAR POWERS ACT for economic purposes is also moving through Congress very quietly right now. It would authorize the President to impose wage and price controls, declare a bank holiday, close the Stock Markets, or take other measures by

declaring a NATIONAL ECONOMIC EMERGENCY. Under that cover, presidential war powers would also be activated without the public being aware of it!

The prospect of imminent nuclear war is also tied in to economic matters in other ways. Six months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 71 I reported that all the GOLD at the New York Assay Office of the United States Mint was being moved. It was being taken up the Hudson River to the West Point Depository, which was not designed for gold bullion storage. The reason given to employees was that it was for security purposes, even though security at West Point is inferior to that at the Assay Office. Now I can tell you what finally happened to that gold.

The gold has been spirited out of the country in preparation for nuclear war here. It was shipped to Geneva, Switzerland, by way of New Orleans, Louisiana and France. The shipment was met by Swiss Army Guards in France, and from there it went by train and then by truck to an underground depository in Geneva. It was signed for in Geneva on May 12, 1982. The custodian of the gold is a Geneva bank. President Reagan agreed to the entire transfer ahead of time.

My friends, if history is any guide at all, this and other movements of gold are clear signs that war is expected soon by our so-called leaders. For centuries it has been customary for leaders of nations who know that war is imminent to move their gold to Switzerland for safekeeping. Lately not only the West Point gold but other private gold hoards have been leaving America for Switzerland. Likewise in Britain, the Rothschilds have lately been transferring their large gold holdings to Switzerland.

In the case of the West Point gold, there is still one more important fact to report. This gold—gold rightly belonging to you and me, the citizens of America—has been consigned for the use of the government of Israel!

Israel is using it as collateral to finance continuing arms purchases at a staggering pace. Israel is secretly arming itself far beyond anything that could conceivably be needed to fight the Arabs alone, so the question is:

Why are all those weapons now being stockpiled in Israel?

The answer is that Israel's Zionist war lords are expecting to have a bigger foe in the region soon. They are trying to drag Russia into the Middle East fighting on the way to nuclear war!

All in all, the economy of the United States is being bled dry. Insatiable spending on sterile armaments is helping to fuel inflation as our dollars go for guns instead of butter. At the same time, record federal borrowing is also keeping interest rates at business-killing levels.

The result is STAGFLATION—a stagnating economy with continuing inflation. If the plans for nuclear war do not cut it short, we are heading into a deep depression, the likes of which we have never seen before:

A depression with plenty of consumer goods in the stores but great numbers of people without the money to buy them—

Prices will be higher and higher for everything, with people selling their valuables in order to exist—

There will be people moving in with relatives—

Old rooming houses filled by people who can no longer afford anything better—

Families separated as people take any employment available anywhere—

Long lines waiting to apply for government jobs and a little security.

IF nuclear war is somehow prevented or delayed, these are the things that are being brought upon us by the policies known as REAGANOMICS. But as it stands now, my friends, it may all be cut short very soon! America's domestic shift to a war footing is underway now, and the secret Pentagon plans for nuclear war will soon be in their final weeks.

Topic #3—Early this month on July 6 the Israeli government announced that American troops would soon be sent to Lebanon if necessary. Hours later the entity Reagan announced that yes, in principle, he was prepared to send in the Marines as part of a truce agreement. For public consumption, assurances were given that this would be done under certain comforting conditions. Supposedly if the Marines are sent in it will only be temporary to police a truce, not fight, and only if all sides agree to their presence. It all sounds very safe; but to those who know the reality of conditions in Lebanon, the proposal to send in American troops has the ring of sheer insanity. That's about like trying to smother a fire by dousing it with gasoline. It will be a situation made to order for explosive incidents to widen the war.

The following day a letter of warning against sending in the Marines was delivered to Reagan from Soviet President Brezhnev. It was a cryptic warning containing no specific threats. In diplomatic language it simply said, "Don't do it."

These days anti-war warnings from Moscow are becoming increasingly urgent and frequent. On July 7 the Brezhnev warning against sending United States Marines into Lebanon was issued, and only six days later the Ustinov warning against an American nuclear first strike was issued which I described in Topic #1.

Russia's anti-war warnings include not only words but also deeds. Today's Kremlin is run by men who know that words without deeds are useless against the Bolsheviks. That's why I gave a warning last month that Russian pre-emptive measures could be expected to start taking place. Those pre-emptive measures are underway now, my friends, in the form of warning strikes to send a message.

The first of these warning strikes took place late last month on Sunday morning, June 27. Millions of Americans watched the launch of Space Shuttle #4 that morning on television. We watched until the two solid rocket boosters separated and fell away from the shuttle. Moments later a Jumbo Cosmosphere, which was pacing the shuttle from a distance, fired two quick blasts at the falling boosters, which were no longer visible on TV. The Cosmosphere's beam weapon blew a hole in the side of each $18,000,000 booster shell. An Air Force C-130 airplane was tracking the boosters and saw their parachutes open, but when the spent boosters hit the water they just kept right on going. Thanks to the holes which had been blown in their sides, they did not float. Recovery teams watched helplessly as $36,000,000 worth of space hardware sank in several thousand feet of water.

Embarrassed NASA officials have tried to explain away the loss of the two shuttle boosters with the lie that the parachutes did not open. The odds are astronomical against the parachutes failing that way on both boosters, but they have no other excuse that they dare give the public. Meanwhile, the Russian message was clear. Had they cared to, the Russians could have destroyed the shuttle itself on nation-wide television, no less, instead of the boosters.

Next came the Aeroflot crash in Moscow followed by the reprisal on July 9 against the Pan Am jet in New Orleans. Both events were acts of war—the secret war which both sides are beginning to mention in public. The Russian message to the Bolsheviks here was:

"You're not as secure as you think you are."

Six days later the Russians reminded the Bolsheviks here of their combined capabilities in geophysical warfare and widespread sabotage here. In the spring of 1977 I began reporting on a Russian campaign of planting nuclear mines where they can destroy countless dams around the United States. Those devices are still there, my friends, waiting for use at the press of a button in Russia; but the Bolsheviks here believe those weapons are all a big bluff, that today's anti-war Russian leaders will never use them. So on July 15 the Kremlin said "Think again" to the Bolshevik Pentagon. That day northern Colorado was reeling from incredible rainstorms, the product of Russian weather modification. Dams in the area were straining to hold back the onslaught of water. Then a low-yield underwater nuclear mine was detonated at the base of the Lawn Lake Dam. The dam blew open, and the flood waters rampaged down the canyon and through the resort town of Estes Park. Afterwards the government tried to cover its tracks by saying they had been worried about that dam, but the disaster actually came with absolutely no warning because the dam was ruined instantly by the Russian mine.

The very next day there was still another Russian warning shot. This time it was couched in the centuries-old language of naval warfare, updated to the Space Age. When confrontations take place at sea there are times when a warship will fire a shot across the bow of another ship. The shot is aimed to barely miss the ship, whistling past just in front of it. A shot across the bow, my friends, is perhaps the most unmistakable military message on the face of the earth. It means:

"Halt immediately or you will be destroyed."

On July 16 a United Air Lines DC-10 took off from Boston bound for Los Angeles. Among the passengers of the big jet were certain key members of the Bolshevik ruling group here in America. For a while the flight progressed without incident; but as the jet flew westward at 39,000 feet, a Russian Cosmosphere was stationing itself to intercept it. The Cosmosphere hovered several miles off to one side of the jet's flight path and a few hundred feet above it. The charged particle beam weapon of the Cosmosphere was aimed horizontally to fire a shot across the bow of the speeding DC-10. As the jet approached, the Cosmosphere crew charged up the beam weapon for a maximum energy blast in the defocused mode. As I revealed long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 29, this produces a violent air blast like those heard that winter along America's east coast and elsewhere. At precisely the right instant the Cosmosphere fired its shot across the bow of the oncoming DC-10. The tremendous air blast just above the DC-10's altitude created a huge shock wave of downward-racing air. An

instant later the DC-10 flew into it. Passengers later told reporters that they had heard a big bang, then the whole plane shook as it was squashed downward as if by a giant hand. Everyone not wearing a seat belt was thrown to the ceiling, which is a long way on a DC-10. Many people were hurt, several seriously; then the episode was over as quickly as it had started. The jet flew on to Los Angeles without further incident—but to certain individuals on the plane, the air-borne shot across the bow was meant as a clear warning! The Russians were saying,

"Halt now in your war plans or you will be destroyed."

The latest in the series of Russian warning shots took place on July 22. It was aimed squarely at the weapons specialists among the Bolsheviks here. That day the first full-range test flight of the Army's new Pershing-2 missile took place at Cape Canaveral. The Pershing-2 is the nuclear missile which the Reagan Administration wants to place in Europe where it can attack Russia. Europe will be used as a launching pad. A few seconds after the Pershing-2 lifted off from Cape Canaveral it was bathed in neutron radiation from a Russian Cosmosphere high above. As I've explained in the past, neutron radiation totally deranges all kinds of electronic equipment. As a result, the Pershing-2's guidance system went crazy. The climbing missile flopped over on its side, then started cartwheeling through the Florida skies. Seventeen seconds after lift-off, the Range Safety Officer pushed the self-destruct button and the missile blew up. The Russian message to the Bolsheviks here was very plain, my friends. The plans to use missiles to help destroy Russia will not succeed. The attempt to do so will only rain destruction on America itself.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've reported on the growing momentum toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE. All five tracks of the complex plan of the American Bolsheviks to bring on nuclear war are coming together on schedule. Here in the United States a shift onto a war footing is taking place as we are being psychologically conditioned for war to come. The collapse of General Alexander Haig's anti-war coup d'etat last month has left the field of battle to the Bolsheviks here versus the Kremlin, so the Russians are now mounting a campaign of anti-war warnings in both words and deeds. All this is going on as leaders of both sides have started saying in public that America and Russia are already at war.

The warning shots fired across America's bow in recent days are very clear. The question is:

Will the Bolsheviks here heed these warnings and back away from their nuclear war plans?

The answer to that, my friends, is being written in blood in war-torn Lebanon! Tiny Lebanon used to be the Switzerland, the jewel of the Middle East. Beirut was a beautiful, peaceful city, and a center of trade and finance. The mountains were dotted with the famous cedars of Lebanon and with serene, picturesque villages populated by a gentle and friendly people. The valleys of Lebanon, especially the Bekaa Valley, were indescribably lush with fruits and vegetables.

The Zionists in Israel coveted all of it; and so using the PLO as an excuse, they have invaded at last. In order to control Lebanon they must first destroy it, and that is what they are

doing. Each new wave of Israeli bombing leaves more people without homes, more small children maimed, crying, in shock. Israeli-run concentration camps in south Lebanon are full of prisoners with large crosses painted on their backs. Food, water, and medical attention have been denied by the Israelis to many victims of their blitzkrieg, and all the while the United States Government continues to support the Begin war! Can you imagine?

Three days ago the Palestine Liberation Organization Chief, Yassir Arafat, gave a signed document to a group of American Congressmen that implies acceptance of Israel's right to exist. Israel dismissed it instantly as a propaganda ploy and promptly intensified the bombing of Beirut. Likewise, the Bolshevik Reagan Administration waved aside the Arafat statement as, quote: "Ridiculous propaganda."

My friends, if either the United States or Israel seriously wanted to end the bloodshed, any opportunity to negotiate would be considered. The joint Reagan-Begin rejection of the Arafat peace overture can only mean one thing:

The Reagan-Begin Axis does not want peace; they want war!

So the days ahead, my friends, will be very dangerous indeed; and as Thomas Jefferson once said:

"I tremble for my country when I reflect that God is just."

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #78

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is August 27, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 78.

On the first day of this month of August 1982, a heart-rending symbol of the Beirut holocaust appeared in newspapers all across America. It was a wire-service photograph of a nurse in hospital in East Beirut cradling a small seven-week-old baby in her left arm as she fed it from a bottle. From the tip of the tiny nose upward the baby's head was swathed in massive bandages covering eyes and all. The little shoulders were wrapped in still more bandages. Where there should have been a pair of infant arms, there was nothing. The baby's arms had been blown off by an Israeli artillery shell landing near the Green Line separating East and West Beirut.

They say a picture is worth a thousand words, but in this case the picture was worth a thousand sobs. Here was a tiny Lebanese baby, a brand new human life, ruined before it could even get started. The picture was a poignant object lesson about the senseless tragedy of war; at least that is how most people probably reacted when they saw it.

But the reaction of the Begin government in Israel was far different. When the picture was brought to their attention they wasted not a word on trivial matters like simple human compassion, sympathy, or regret. Instead they lodged bitter protests against the wire services and newspapers who had published the photo. There was great concern over the public

relations impact on Israel resulting from that photograph. Demands were made that retractions be printed about the Israeli responsibility for the baby's grievous wounds; but to their credit, wire services here refused to make any retractions. It had been established very firmly that Israeli bombardment had caused the tragedy.

To most of us far from the scene, that picture of a tiny baby horribly maimed for life may appear exceptional. But the fact is that the plight of that child has been repeated countless times in the Israeli rape of Lebanon.

Recently this was illustrated by the observations of a Presbyterian minister affiliated with Princeton Theological Seminary. The minister happened to be in southern Lebanon when the invasion began on June 5 and remained in Lebanon for several weeks into the war. Recently he described what he witnessed in a talk in Ohio.

The minister had seen for himself areas where the Israeli onslaught had caused not hundreds but thousands of deaths, mostly of civilians! He also described the strenuous Israeli efforts to cover up the extent of the carnage and hide it from the outside world. In more than one case Israeli bulldozers have even dug pits, shoveling in piles of bodies and covering them over. But the most nightmarish scene he described was one where a great number of children had been killed and maimed. He had come upon the scene when the cleanup had just begun. He was shown a room piled high with fingers, hands, legs, arms, and other parts of children's bodies.

Here in the United States the sheer enormity of the Israeli atrocities in Lebanon is being censored out. When we hear about disgusted Israeli soldiers leaving the front and returning to Israel to protest the war, we are unable to fully understand why. But elsewhere around the world the news media are less hampered by the strait jacket of Zionist and Bolshevik censorship here in the United States, and what they are reporting is in full agreement with those personal observations by the Presbyterian minister.

For example, on August 8 the BBC reported the observations of an International Red Cross official about the carnage in Beirut. He said that more than 80% of the casualties in Lebanon were civilians, and he insisted that the killing and bombing going on in Beirut was much worse than occurred generally during World War II. Two days later the BBC carried a report about Relief women from Europe and New Zealand working in the Beirut battle zone. They had walked to the Green Line to protest the Israeli siege, which had cut off food, fuel, and water for West Beirut. One said,

"These are the most horrible conditions I've seen in all our relief work around the world."

And, my friends, the Israelis would not even allow the children in West Beirut to leave!

Many of the military actions ordered by the Begin government in Lebanon can only be described as "war crimes." Men who were Zionist terrorists in the 1940s control what has become the world's third most powerful military machine—that of Israel in the 1980s. The result is what we have seen in Lebanon—STATE TERRORISM. This is military power used according to terrorist doctrine.

In normal military doctrine the most successful operations are those which minimize casualties; but in military terrorism the opposite is the case. Every effort is made to multiply casualties for their own sake with no distinction between combatants and civilians. To the terrorist, death is power.

Throughout the siege of Beirut we've seen the Israeli doctrine of military terrorism at work. On August 13 the Washington Post described the bewilderment created among Beirut residents by the merciless Israeli attacks. One was quoted in the words:

"What is the sense of all this killing? What do the Israelis want? Are they crazy? The Palestinians have said that they are ready to go, so why don't they let them? Why do they continue to bomb us like this?"

The answers, my friends, are all found in the doctrine of Military Terrorism practiced by the Begin government. What they want is total control through total fear; and to achieve that, death and suffering is intentionally increased as much as possible. These are the policies of genocide and of true war crimes. The war crimes committed in Lebanon by the militant Israeli Zionists are terrible to contemplate, my friends; but if we do not stop and think about them, we will not take seriously the plans for even greater war crimes to come!

The Reagan-Begin axis of Bolsheviks and Zionists are working fast to commit the ultimate war crime—THERMONUCLEAR WAR. If they succeed, the agony of Lebanon will pale beside that of America!

As I say these words, the hurry-up plan to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE is still on schedule. I first made public this short-cut war timetable six months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 72. In case it should fail or be delayed, longer-term intrigues to bring on nuclear war are also continuing world-wide; but as of this moment, my friends, the United States Pentagon is still counting down toward mid-September to set off a surprise nuclear war.

This will be my last opportunity to report to you before "Z-Day"—the war target date now planned in mid-September.

There is a chance that something dramatic will happen to halt the plan in the days that are left. I have received late word that the anti-war coup d'etat plans which I first reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 72 may not be totally dead after all. The Bolsheviks here did succeed in ousting the key man in that plan, General Alexander Haig, two months ago; but the Bolsheviks here are not certain that they succeeded in weeding out all of Haig's men. If not, then anything could happen in the next two weeks. Even so, action to prevent the war remains a long shot at this late date.

If the Bolsheviks here do succeed in setting off a surprise American nuclear first strike against Russia, I want you to be as prepared as possible. There will be absolutely no official warning to the public ahead of time if the plan is attempted, but there are a few important warning signs to watch for in the news. I want you to know what they are and what they will mean if you see them take place. I'll also reveal the exact schedule for "Z-Day" as now planned. My hope is that by knowing what to look for and when, you'll be able to save yourself if the attack is attempted against Russia.

My three topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE SURPRISE HALT TO THE BEIRUT HOLOCAUST Topic #2—FINAL PENTAGON PLANS FOR SURPRISE NUCLEAR WAR Topic #3—THE RUSSIAN SURPRISE WEAPON FOR NUCLEAR DEFENSE

Topic #1—When the Israeli invasion of Lebanon began 12 weeks ago on June 5, it was called "OPERATION PEACE FOR GALILEE." Israel promised a nervous world that this would be only a limited operation with limited objectives. The Israelis gave their solemn promise that their armed forces would go no deeper than 40 kilometers—that is, 25 miles into Lebanon. Within that limited zone close to Israel the intent was to eliminate all Palestinian fighting forces. Begin justified the operation in the usual sanctimonious terms, telling the world that Israel had been forced into doing it. It was the only way, he said, for Israel to buy peace for its northern provinces.

My friends, from start to finish the so-called "PEACE FOR GALILEE" operation by Israel has been a tangle of lies. The word "peace" was used to give a halo to the most genocidal war yet by Israel, and the Biblical-sounding phrase "Peace for Galilee" was designed to hide the true nature of the campaign as much as possible—from Christians in particular!

When we Christians hear the word "Galilee" we can't help thinking of our Lord Jesus Christ. The very word itself sounds sacred to us so at a subconscious level we are tempted to feel that we dare not condemn what the Israelis are doing—and feelings like these are reinforced by Zionist influence exerted through countless churches here in America!

The counterfeit Jews, the Khazar Jews, who control Israel today, spend vast amounts of money to encourage counterfeit interpretations of the Bible! As a result, countless millions of well-meaning but misled Christians close their eyes to Israel's war crimes, saying: "It's all in prophecy."

The Zionist lies about Israel's operation "PEACE FOR GALILEE" began even with the officially claimed date of the invasion. The agreed date used by the major media is June 6 when some Israeli forces went through a United Nations checkpoint; but the invasion actually began as I pointed out in AUDIO LETTER No. 76 on June 5, not June 6. It is almost as if by changing the date of the invasion the Israelis are trying to avoid the prophet Ezekiel's prophecy of doom. I quoted from that Biblical prophecy in AUDIO LETTER No. 76. The Israelis are fond of what they call "creating new facts", but this is one fact they cannot change.

To set the record straight once and for all, I now quote as an example from the New York Daily News for Sunday, June 6, 1982:

"Israeli tanks moved across the border into a Christian enclave in southern Lebanon yesterday while Israeli warplanes and gun boats pounded suspected Palestinian positions."

The date of the paper, my friends, is June 6. The reference to "yesterday" in the news article means June 5. Invasion of a country is a matter of fact, not words; and that invasion began with tanks crossing the border on June 5, 1982—the same day the official invasion order was signed.

The Begin government began its abominations of military desolation in its sixth year, in the sixth month of the year, on the fifth day of the month. If the Israelis have incurred the wrath of God as spelled out in Ezekiel 8, it cannot be undone by lying about the date of the invasion.

The extent of the Israeli lies about the purpose of the Lebanon invasion is almost beyond belief. But what is even more disturbing is the extent to which those lies have been successfully hidden from most Americans. The whole excuse for invading Lebanon was allegedly to end Palestinian violence against northern Israel. If you believe there's even a shred of truth to that, please listen to the following quotation. It's taken from an article by columnist Anthony Lewis published in the New York Times of June 7, 1982. I now quote:

"For nine months not a single rocket or shell was fired by PLO gunners into Israel. When Israeli planes bombed Lebanon on April 21 for the first time since the truce started, the PLO did not respond. When there was another bombing on May 9, there was a limited response—about 100 rockets that Israel said caused no damage or casualties. Then after the massive Israeli bombing last week, the PLO responded with full-scale barrages. In short, the cease-fire kept the Galilee safe until Israel bombed Lebanon. The argument that aggressive new military action was needed to keep the rockets out turns reality upside-down."

My friends, it all boils down to the fact that the Reagan-Begin axis was determined to set off war in the Middle East. The timing of the war had nothing to do with any alleged provocations by the Palestinians. Instead, it was dictated by the joint plan of the American Bolsheviks and the Israeli Zionists to set off nuclear war very soon. That is why the Israeli forces did not even slow down when they reached their promised limit of 25 miles into Lebanon. The merciless bombardment and siege of Beirut itself had purposes far different from those stated. The presence of PLO headquarters there simply provided a convenient excuse for what was to be the invasion of an Arab capital.

Throughout the Arab world an Israeli invasion of an Arab capital has always been seen as the ultimate taboo. Had that been the outcome of the siege of Beirut, general war in the Middle East was virtually guaranteed and that would have created the ideal cover to explain away the surprise eruption of nuclear war very soon. But, my friends, the Beirut holocaust at the hands of Israel ended in a surprise.

The Begin government had no intention of allowing negotiations for evacuation of the PLO to succeed. They kept turning the military screws tighter and tighter on Beirut while adding more and more demands to be met by the Palestinians.

Each time the PLO confounded the Israelis by accepting demands which they had been expected to reject. As a result, time after time Reagan envoy Philip Habib warned the White House that an agreement was becoming unavoidable. Each time that happened Begin was notified, and the Israeli Air Force started pounding Beirut again! The result, time after time, was exactly what the Israelis wanted—a brief derailment of the talks.

The cycle of talks, near agreement, and disruption by Israeli bombing took up almost the entire first half of this month of August 1982. Foreign newspapers were filled with editorials condemning the bloodbath in Beirut and demanding that the United States rein in Israel. It was put more bluntly by the Morning Star, a British newspaper with Soviet ties. On August 1 the Morning Star declared that the United States on its own could end the siege of Beirut immediately if it cared to do so. But here in Washington the entity President Reagan and his spokesmen just wrung their hands as if they were powerless to do anything. The carnage in Beirut went right on with a continued green light from

Washington.

Meanwhile there were series of increasingly threatening growls about the Beirut holocaust from the Russian Bear. Russia's new rulers are as anti-Zionist as they are anti-Bolshevik, and they make no bones about it. On August 2 the BBC reported that Russia had condemned Israel as a "barbarian committing genocide in Lebanon." On August 3 Moscow Radio charged that the planning for the take-over of Lebanon had been done by the Defense Department in Washington. On August 4 the BBC reported increasingly fierce criticism of Israel and the United States by Russia. The next day Russia called for a United Nations Security Council meeting, and at the meeting the next day described the Israeli aggression as one of insolence and craziness. The exchanges between the Russian and the Israeli delegates were some of the bitterest ever seen at the United Nations!

While all of this was going on in public, the Russians were also flashing warning signs by way of diplomatic channels. The Kremlin was telling the White House to call off the dogs in Beirut, but Washington was not listening.

Finally, the Russians decided "Enough was Enough." In the small hours of Thursday August 12, the entity President Reagan was awakened out of a sound sleep. He was told that Soviet President Brezhnev was waiting to speak to him on the crisis HOT LINE. He was calling from his summer retreat in the Crimea. When Reagan picked up the phone, Brezhnev's message was short and blunt. Reagan listened as the slightly slurred words of an elderly man crackled over the phone in Russian. Then he turned to the interpreter listening on a parallel phone. In effect the message was:

Both you and your Zionist partners are deceiving yourselves. In the end we will not permit a beachhead in Lebanon by your troops. Either you stop the Zionists now or we will fix them ourselves. What's more, we know all about your September war plan. Don't do it.

Reagan, who never makes a decision on his own, could only answer that he would check into it.

As the Reagan-Brezhnev HOT-LINE conversation took place, dawn was breaking over the besieged city of Beirut. It was a dawn that had been shattered by the beginning of the most devastating bombardment yet by the Israelis. Israeli Fighter Bombers were shrieking overhead, diving toward the city, then pulling up as they dropped their bombs. Land and sea-based artillery shells were exploding within the city at a rate of more than one per second!

The reason for the Israeli attack was very simple. A final negotiating session was scheduled for 4:00 o'clock that afternoon by Reagan envoy Habib and top Lebanese officials. Habib had warned the White House that unless something was done, an agreement was a certainty; so to prevent that, the Israelis unleashed everything they had on Beirut.

The raids went on for 10 hours straight, from 6:00 A.M. until shortly after the meeting began, and it almost worked, my friends. Lebanese Prime Minister Chafic Wazzan stormed out of the meeting with Habib in a rage. He declared that negotiations be suspended indefinitely; and afterwards, speaking of Reagan's man Habib, Wazzan said:

"I have told him I cannot carry on, and hold him as well as the

United States responsible for the consequences."

If that had been the end of it, my friends, the Reagan-Begin axis would have achieved exactly what they wanted. With the talks broken off indefinitely the Begin government would have had the excuse it wanted to proceed with its all-out invasion of Beirut.

The reason it did not end there was the Brezhnev-Reagan HOT-LINE call which had taken place that morning. The Russians had threatened to "fix" the Zionists, and suddenly there was evidence that they were preparing to do just that.

Israeli Air Defense radars in Lebanon, on Israeli ships, and in Israel itself abruptly picked up a chilling sight. More than 100 unidentified blips materialized on radars all over the region. The blips were stationary, several miles up. It was a sight most radar operators in the area had never seen before; but when the reports reached Israeli and American Air Defense headquarters, the meaning of the blips was understood instantly. For the first time in several years the Russian Space Command was making a massive show of force using its fleet of Cosmospheres. These electrogravitic weapons platforms normally hover at the fringes of the atmosphere where they are invisible to radar; but on that afternoon of August 12 over 100 of them descended straight down to within radar range over Lebanon and Israel.

Bolshevik military Intelligence analysts here in Washington had to make a decision fast as to whether the Russians were bluffing or meant business. Because of the known anti-war attitude of the present-day Kremlin, Russian shows of force have not always been taken seriously here, but lately the Russians have been doing things to change that.

Last month I reported on a whole series of warning shots which the Russians have fired across America's bow lately. They have been designed to show that the Kremlin is prepared to use its vast military power. When that was added to the Brezhnev HOT LINE call, analysts here got a bad case of sweaty palms. It was decided that the Beirut invasion plan would have to be aborted. Somehow the PLO evacuation negotiations had to be started up again.

Suddenly all the excuses that America can't control Israel went out the window. Instead, evening news reports on August 12 led off by saying that Reagan was cracking down on Israel. There were planted stories that Reagan had called Begin and expressed outrage over the massive air raids that day. All of a sudden, after not lifting a finger for two months to stop the indiscriminate Lebanon massacre, it seemed Reagan had got religion.

The following day the Lebanese government agreed to resume the suspended talks over a PLO withdrawal. Suddenly all the previous obstacles seemed to evaporate. Within days the final agreement was struck. Barely a week later, on August 21, the first actual evacuation of PLO fighters from Beirut got underway, supervised by French troops.

The turnabout by the United States and Israel was so radical and so abrupt that a scapegoat had to be found to explain it away to the public. For that reason everyone started pointing fingers at the Israeli Defense Minister Sharon. There were rumors that he alone was responsible for the insane bombardment of Beirut on August 12. All kinds of stories suddenly surfaced to the effect that Sharon always was kind of insubordinate and dangerous. It was all his fault, we were told; but Sharon said it was the fault

of the Israeli Cabinet.

My friends, the Russian power play saved Beirut from an invasion; but when the American Bolsheviks and Israeli Zionists caved in and gave up on the Beirut invasion plan, it was only a retreat, not a surrender. They are still as bent on nuclear war as ever, and the sooner the better provided they can strike before Russia does.

In the past I've described how the Bolshevik nuclear war planners always make sure they have available not just one but many possible paths to war. Having been thwarted in their Beirut invasion plan, they simply moved on to the next contingency plan. That plan involves the United States Marines, who arrived two days ago in Beirut to supposedly help police the PLO evacuation. The plan is to stoke up a new crisis by creating an incident in which a number of Marines will be killed. In order to set the stage for it, the Israeli MOSSAD has already started creating so-called cease-fire violations which are blamed on the PLO.

Last Sunday on August 22 there were news reports of an Israeli troop bus allegedly attacked by PLO guerrillas. Stories of that type are only to condition us for the planned incident to come against the United States Marines and Lebanese leaders.

My friends, we have been told all sorts of lies that Israel's enemy in its so-called PEACE FOR GALILEE operation was the PLO, but on August 5 Israeli Foreign Minister Shamir revealed that the real enemy was Russia. Speaking to a group of Jewish leaders in New York City Shamir said:

"Lebanon until now was dominated by the PLO and Syria; and behind them the Soviets", and he boasted: "Soviet Russia doesn't play any role now in our area."

But a week later Shamir found out differently when the Russian Cosmosphere threat forced a surprise end to the Beirut holocaust.

Two months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 7 6 I reported that the Israeli invasion of Lebanon was only part of the greater plan for nuclear war against Russia. Now United States Marines have been introduced in Lebanon with a promise by President Reagan that they will be needed no longer than 30 days.

Before those 30 days are up, my friends, the Bolsheviks here intend to set off the surprise American nuclear attack against Russia. The countdown clock for the "PROJECT Z" war plan which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 73 is still ticking away. All preparations are now being targeted for "Z-Day"—the day of the planned nuclear attack itself.

My friends, the exact date chosen by the Pentagon for "Z-Day"

is :

FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 17, 1982!

Topic #2—When World War I broke out 68 years ago, world opinion was far from unanimous about who was right and who was wrong in the conflict. Many people felt that Austria-Hungary had put up long enough with harassment by the Serbs. After Archduke Franz Ferdinand was assassinated by a Serb in Sarajevo on June 28, 1914, Austria-Hungary declared war on Serbia, and many people applauded. Austria-Hungary had been given a blank check by Germany to smash the Serbs. People started having second thoughts when they saw the dispute mushrooming, sucking in nation after nation. Even so, world opinion continued to maintain a

great deal of good will toward Germany and her allies—that is, until the Battle of Louvain (now Leuven), Belgium.

Up until the war, Louvain had been a beautiful, peaceful town, but Louvain had the misfortune to be caught in the middle between the armies of the Kaiser and those of the allies. The Germans won the battle by virtually leveling Louvain. The battle took a gruesome toll among the helpless residents of Louvain. On all sides Louvain lay in ruins—once beautiful buildings had been reduced to piles of rubble. The rubble had become a tomb for countless civilians who had died inside. The debris-choked streets were a mournful scene of the maimed, the bereaved, and the confused.

When news about the fate of Louvain reached the outside world, a wave of revulsion swept around the world. Many who had originally sympathized with the Kaiser's policies were repelled by such extreme military tactics. In terms of public opinion, Louvain was the turning point of World War I. It blackened the image of Germany in a way that could never be undone. My friends, Beirut could well be the counterpart of Louvain for Israel and her powerful backer, the United States.

Today, as in 1914, the country that ostensibly started the war benefitted at first by a large reservoir of good will in the world; but just as Louvain soured public opinion in World War I, Beirut has shocked the world in 1982. The merciless brutality and senseless killings by the Israelis in Lebanon has been symbolized by the siege of Beirut. Israel has been rightly condemned the world over for its actions in Lebanon; and if the full extent of the agony of Lebanon ever becomes generally known, Israel's image will never recover from the shame.

When Austria-Hungary declared war on Serbia in 1914, it set off a chain reaction that snowballed into war among the great powers of that day. Likewise the Israeli invasion of Lebanon to wipe out the PLO has been calculated to help set off a chain reaction leading to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The joint strategy of the American Bolsheviks and the Israeli Zionists is a replay of the maneuvering that set off World War I. I've given details about that in past reports, especially in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 63, 66, and 69. If need be, the Bolsheviks and Zionists—that is, the Reagan-Begin axis—are prepared to keep multiplying crises until America's nuclear first strike succeeds.

In the Middle East the de facto move of PLO headquarters to Syria is setting the stage for a direct confrontation soon between Israel and Syria. That will create the most dangerous proxy battle yet between client states of Russia and the United States. Already Israeli forces are preparing to try to drive out the legally-present Syrians from Lebanon's Bekaa Valley. At the same time, Israeli forces are not withdrawing as the PLO evacuates from West Beirut; instead, they are heading north! Israeli armored units are already on the outskirts of Tripoli, just 20 miles short of Lebanon's northern border.

As for Israel's solemn promises to turn back Lebanon to the Lebanese, nothing could be a more transparent lie. Thanks to the war, the southern third of Lebanon, including the Litani River, has now been absorbed into the so-called "Free Lebanon Zone" controlled by Major Haddad. Haddad is nothing but an Israeli agent, a shabbas goy doing the dirty work of the Begin government. When and if the Israelis formally withdraw from Lebanon, they will still continue to control Haddad's area including Sidon and Tyre.

And now another Israeli puppet, Mr. Bashir Gemayel, has emerged from the war rubble as the President-elect of Lebanon. He is nothing more than another Sadat; and he, too, will meet the same fate as Sadat when Israel is ready!

Looking around the world, my friends, the amount of trouble now being stirred up by the Bolsheviks and Zionists is almost beyond description. For example, Bolshevik agents in Poland are stirring up new trouble to ruin government efforts to relax martial law. That keeps the Warsaw regime on the defensive, unable to appear as anything but a "bad guy."

Or consider Central America and the Caribbean. Panama is now being destabilized, beginning with the recent surprise resignation, so-called, of Panama's president. The plan to create an apparent threat to the Panama Canal is moving right along.

Meanwhile Congress has recently passed a special Tonkin Gulf-type resolution aimed at Cuba. It frees Reagan's hands to take military action against Cuba, just as the Tonkin Gulf Resolution freed President Johnson to widen the war in Vietnam.

And then there is Asia where war between India and Pakistan is targeted for around November 1982!

Middle East intrigues and many more world-wide are in the works as a result of the Bolshevik program to Balkanize the world; but all those intrigues will no longer be necessary if the "PROJECT Z" short-cut war plan succeeds. Very soon they plan to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE as a total surprise—and they intend to make it look like a gigantic accident!

In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 five months ago I outlined the over-all war plan of "PROJECT Z", but as a practical matter the most important thing you need to know now is how the war is being planned to begin. You need to know what warning signs to watch for, and when. For that reason I will now describe in detail how the Pentagon war planners intend to set off the war. Only a few hints of what is about to happen will be visible in public; but if you see them happening, you will know what they mean.

The plan for an American nuclear first strike against Russia has been in gestation for over four years now. I first reported on America's secret shift toward a first-strike nuclear strategy in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 36 and 37. The prime objective of the initial American nuclear strike is still as I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The objective is to knock out all of Russia's complex of Space bases. Those are the logistic life line, the Achilles' heel of the Russian space triad of strategic weapons. If the Bolsheviks here can put Russia's space triad out of action, Russia will no longer be unconquerable in nuclear war; and so the initial attack against Russia's space triad bases is to be followed immediately by an all-out American nuclear attack!

Bolshevik war planners here, the hard-liners, have been putting together the pieces of the military machine needed to do the job for years now. I have reported on these various pieces of the over-all military picture over the course of many past reports. Now all of the factors in the Bolshevik military equation are coming together as they prepare for imminent nuclear war.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 I described the new secret American superweapon that is the key to the attack plan. It is the Phantom warplane, the most radical breakthrough achieved by the

so-called "Stealth Program."

Unmanned Phantom warplanes are being deployed now to their attack bases in northern Norway, eastern Turkey, and Sinkiang Province, China. These bases are protected from Cosmosphere attack by high-power lasers. The lasers are equipped with the new supersensitive aiming device known as CEIR (pronounced seer) for "Computer-Enhanced Infrared." As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 72, a CEIR-equipped laser shot down a Russian Cosmosphere over New Jersey some seven months ago. Its effectiveness is, therefore, a proven fact; but just to make sure the Russians have not developed a defense against these special lasers, another Cosmosphere was blasted out of the sky over the New York City vicinity just three days ago! It created a huge high-speed fireball, described in the New York Times yesterday as a possible asteroid burning up.

When the American Phantom warplanes are launched into Russia on "Z-Day" they will be swarming toward only six primary and about a dozen secondary targets. The six primary targets are the Russian Space bases. Four of these are the rocket bases known as Cosmodromes at Baikonur, Tyura-Tam, Plesetsk, and Kapustin Yar. The other two Space bases are the sprawling Cosmosphere facilities at Semipalatinsk and Novosibirsk.

As for the dozen or so secondary targets, these are the complex of Russian flying ABM bases. The system consists of anti-missile particle beam weapons carried aboard converted TU-144 Supersonic Transports. The Transports were mysteriously removed from service in June 1978 for conversion to anti-missile defense. I reported that this was underway in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. Today the system is fully operational. The Bolshevik war planners here in the United States want to knock them all out, if possible, to make the American follow-up attack more devastating.

Of all these targets, the two which have become most important of all are the two Cosmosphere bases. The new Russian Superheavy Cosmospheres, which I first reported on in AUDIO LETTER No. 64, foreshadow the day when rockets will be obsolete.

If the Cosmosphere bases survive, the Bolshevik war plan is doomed to failure. There is only one satisfactory geographic location from which to launch a strike against the Russian Cosmosphere areas. As long ago as AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I revealed that this key location is Sinkiang Province, China. The Bolsheviks here must have access to Sinkiang Province at all costs. That is why, four months after I revealed this, the so-called Carter Administration unexpectedly dumped Taiwan on December 15, 1978. That day Washington suddenly announced full diplomatic relations with Peking.

With NUCLEAR WAR ONE approaching fast, the Red Chinese once again used their leverage this month against Taiwan. Peking has been pressuring the Reagan Administration to publicly commit itself to cutting off all arms sales to Taiwan. As recently as August 13 Reagan's alleged final offer was a refusal to do that; but then the Red Chinese told Washington that if the United States did not agree, the Chinese would shut down the American Stealth Base in Sinkiang Province. Four days later, on August 17, a joint communique was released in Peking and Washington. It declared that there is only one China, that Taiwan is part of it, and that the United States will gradually discontinue arms sales to Taiwan!

The old Reagan campaign pledge to stand by Taiwan was scrapped in order to prevent a last-minute hitch in the Stealth attack

plan.

According to the Pentagon plan, the unmanned Phantom warplanes will take off from their various bases at carefully predetermined intervals. Their launch times will be adjusted in order to make them all arrive at their targets simultaneously. As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 73, these robot bombers will be flying blind on a one-way trip, like mechanical kamikaze planes. But thanks to their advanced new-type inertial guidance systems they're expected to all arrive right on schedule.

As they fly through Russian air space, they will be invulnerable to detection either visually or by radar. The light-distorted electromagnetic fields, which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 73, will also render Russian beam weapons useless for defense. Anti-aircraft missiles, even those which follow the heat trail of a plane, will also be useless. If any missile or jet fighter got close to a Phantom warplane, its electronics would be hopelessly deranged by the Invisibility Field.

As if all this were not enough, each Phantom warplane will also be following a pre-programmed zig-zag course into Russia. The Bolsheviks here believe that this will make any attempt to fire at the Stealth planes with anti-aircraft guns very ineffective.

All things considered, the "PROJECT Z" war planners are confident that enough Phantom warplanes will reach their targets to do their job. Converging from all directions, the invisible robot warplanes will all arrive at their targets at essentially the same time. Countdown clocks in all the warplanes will be programmed to reach "zero" at the same instant. When they do, a 24-megaton hydrogen bomb will explode aboard each and every Phantom warplane.

The attack is planned for nighttime when the Soviet Union is asleep. Around the space triad bases and TU-144 bases night will turn into day as man-made stars erupt into life. That will be the moment which an American satellite parked high over the Indian Ocean has been watching for. It is the Attack Confirmation Sensor which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 75. This was the mysterious military payload of Space Shuttle #4 placed in geostationary orbit by an auxiliary rocket. When the H-bombs detonate over their targets, the Air Force satellite will detect the flashes of infrared, ultraviolet, and X-radiation. Instantly the satellite will flash a signal confirming the attack to listening stations on Earth. The attack-confirmation signal will confirm that the initial critical surprise attack by Stealth planes has succeeded.

That will be the signal for all the rest of the "PROJECT Z" nuclear war plan to go into motion. But, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 73, "PROJECT Z" is a supersecret war plan, unknown to all but a few top leaders of the Military in America. Therefore the attack-confirmation signal will not be routed through standard existing channels. Instead the Bolshevik war planners here have created a special new Command for the purpose. It's called the Air Force Space Command. It is to begin operations officially on September 1, just in time to get ready for the planned nuclear attack on September 17. The new Space Command is located in Colorado Springs, Colorado. There it will feed special information to NORAD headquarters, also located there.

When the Air Force Space Command receives the attack-confirmation signal from the Indian Ocean satellite, the

follow-up attack will begin:

First a coded signal will be flashed to the Minuteman TX Commanders in our northern tier of states and certain other locations. The Minuteman TX is America's real mobile missile, now full deployed on our railroads, as I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 55. In AUDIO LETTER No. 60 I reported that they are also accompanied by high-speed missiles called ACMs. When the coded signal arrives from the newly created Space Command, the ACMs will zoom upward to the fringes of the atmosphere. There they will detonate special cobalt ionization bombs. The resulting electron storm in the upper atmosphere of the United States is expected to temporarily disable any Cosmospheres on patrol. With the Cosmospheres momentarily deranged, the mobile Minuteman TX missiles will be launched right past them at Russia.

When the American ACMs detonate their bombs high over our own country, it will also create another effect. It is called "Electromagnetic Pulse" or EMP. EMP can knock out communications, fry telephone lines, and cause power blackouts by overloading power transmission lines. In AUDIO LETTER No. 66 I described how the Bolsheviks here plan to use this effect to trigger an all-out American nuclear strike against Russia. They have been programmed to consider an EMP episode to be evidence in itself that America is under nuclear attack! America's entire nuclear triad—missiles, bombers, and submarines—will then launch a supposed retaliatory strike against Russia. There will be no need for a normal White House order to attack!

There has been no official admission that this is in store for us, of course. Even so this re-programming of our nuclear forces is now being hinted at by discussion of a new military doctrine. It's called "Launch Under Attack." Military analysts describe it as "warning by loss of warning." That is exactly the concept I made public over a year ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 66.

My friends, if all goes according to plan, there will be no warning to the American public by Reagan Administration officials. They are counting on surprise to make their nuclear surprise attack on Russia successful. They aren't about to throw that surprise away by telling you about it first, SO IT WILL BE UP TO YOU to watch events for yourself and to make your best judgment based on what you know. I've already mentioned some of the visible signs that the plan is still on track up to now.

There remain two more major signals to watch for in the days ahead. If you see them you will know that the American nuclear first strike against Russia is about to be attempted:

First, watch for news of a major nuclear false alarm sometime during the first half of September. This will mean a full-scale dry run has been carried out involving the brand new Air Force Space Command. By describing the exercise afterward as a "false nuclear alert", the war planners will be setting the stage for an alleged "accidental war."

The final warning will come as the nuclear attack itself is beginning.

My friends, the present Pentagon schedule calls for the preliminary Phantom warplane H-bombs to explode at 3:00 PM E.D.T. Friday, September 17, 1982.

At that time virtually all of Russia will be in darkness. When the Indian Ocean satellite signal arrives confirming the attack,

it will be followed within a minute or so by the EMP episode I described.

If you're watching TV or listening to the radio, there will suddenly be horrendous static and possibly permanent damage to your receiver. There may also be a power blackout. Your telephone may go dead. If those things happen, my friends, don't wait for any air raid sirens. What's happening is that the American follow-up nuclear strike against Russia is being launched. Retaliating missiles from Russia can be expected here soon afterward.

If you are in a prime coastal-target area, the Russian counter-strike will hit your area within minutes. The Russian short-range underwater-launch missiles which were planted along our shores and the Great Lakes in 1976 and 1977 are still there! Their short flight time, unfortunately, will leave at most a few minutes to take cover after the EMP episode.

ICBMs fired from Russia will take approximately 24 minutes to reach targets near the Canadian border; if you live farther south, it will take several more minutes.

But if your area happens to be targeted by a Russian submarine-launch missile, the time could be cut to less than 10 minutes in many cases.

Russia's Moon Bases and Cosmospheres overhead, both armed with their charged particle beam weapons, can still do great damage to major cities and United States military installations, but these cause no fallout.

Topic #3—My friends, if the events I have described take place, it will mean that the Bolshevik war planners in the Pentagon are going ahead with their attack plan. But that does not mean that it will necessarily succeed. As I say these words, there's preliminary Intelligence that the Russians may have a surprise up their sleeve for the Bolsheviks.

This is actually the second attempt by the Bolsheviks here to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE, as my older listeners know. The first attempt in late January 1980 was a disastrous failure. It led indirectly to leaks about the Stealth Program about six months later. Now they are trying again with better weapons, but in the meantime Russian weaponry has also kept on advancing! As a result, there's no way to predict how the Bolshevik-triggered American first strike will turn out.

Last month I reported that the Super-Spy Satellite launched by the third Space Shuttle in March had detected something puzzling in Russia. The puzzle consists of large numbers of small domed installations arranged in rings around strategic Russian targets. There is a ring of these domes around each Cosmodrome and around each Cosmosphere Base in particular, but opinion is divided as to what they are. Some analysts believe they are more or less conventional anti-aircraft batteries with domed enclosures. Others think they are missile batteries. Still others vote for beam weapons of some kind, either lasers or particle beams. The only agreement up to now is that they are defensive weapons of some kind. That is indicated by their arrangement in protective rings around certain strategic targets.

There's one other guess as to what the domes are. It is a minority opinion so far which is not accepted by the top American Bolshevik war planners, but my own information indicates that it is the right guess. Each dome, my friends, contains a weapon

known as a "Rail Gun." Rail guns have been under study for a number of years in both Russia and the United States.

A Rail Gun is a kind of super high-speed cannon. The projectile moves down a track between the pair of long conducting rails. When the gun is fired an incredibly powerful electromagnetic field races down the length of the rails welding them together as it goes. The projectile is forced along ahead of the fast-moving electromagnetic field, leaving the muzzle with incredible velocity. Rail gun muzzle velocities of at least 25,000 feet per second have been achieved. This is faster than the Space Shuttle in Earth orbit!

Here in the United States, Rail Guns are still curiosities. A Rail Gun can only be fired once because the rails weld themselves together, and the projectile has to be non-conducting. It can't be steel or other metal. But to the Russians faced with the Phantom warplane threat, Rail Guns may be the only answer. The Russians have the ability to aim Rail Guns at our Phantom warplanes using Psychoenergetic Range-Finding, which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, and a non-conducting projectile fired at astronomical velocities could penetrate the Stealth plane's Invisibility Field.

The use of Rail Guns to defend against the Phantom warplanes will be a nasty surprise to the Bolsheviks here if they carry out their war plan; but as of now, the war plan is still on track! As a result, time may well be running out for the United States of America as we know it.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. My friends, in this AUDIO LETTER I've tried to prepare you as fully as possible to recognize the signs of imminent nuclear war. The anti-war coup d'etat plan of General Alexander Haig, which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 72, collapsed with his forced resignation in June. Since that time it has been full speed ahead toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

The rush-rush new war timetable, which I also revealed six months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 72, is still on schedule. Target date: September 17, 1982.

Just 12 days ago on August 15 the Los Angeles Times broke a bombshell story about these war plans. The syndicated article revealed that an elaborate secret new protracted nuclear war plan is now ready. In fact, my friends, this plan is already operational!

The article says, quote:

"According to a member of the Administration, the plan would contemplate nuclear warfare for as long as six months."

The plan also draws attention to the present vulnerability of our military command, control, and communications system. The article quotes a Reagan staffer in the words:

"The system might survive 15 minutes of nuclear war."

My friends, this very vulnerability is the key to the Bolshevik plan to set off the war by EMP episode I have described. The fear over all this is so great that three days ago the Pentagon announced extreme measures to try to squelch the debate. Our Bolshevik Defense Secretary, Caspar Weinberger, has

sent out 70 letters to key newspaper editors here and abroad to try to defuse the criticism.

Meanwhile the plan to set off nuclear war soon is still on track.

In the past I have reported that Russia's new anti-Bolshevik rulers regard America as Babylon, wallowing in ill-gotten wealth and degeneracy. If the American Bolsheviks are successful in forcing nuclear war upon the Kremlin, the fall of Babylon may well be at hand. As the angel of Revelation revealed to John the Apostle, the cries may soon ring out around the world:

"Alas, alas, that great city Babylon, that mighty city, for in one hour is thy judgment come."

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #79

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is September 30, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 79.

Throughout the Middle Ages the Christians of Central Europe shared a terrible fear which is all but forgotten today. It was a fear which caused Christian parents to exercise special care over their children at the time of the Jewish holy day of Passover. Their greatest dread was that their child might be kidnapped and never seen again because it was widely believed that the Jews practiced human sacrifice at Passover and that the victims were Christian children. That ancient blood fear of the Jews by Christians largely died out in the centuries following the Renaissance. Today most Christians are shocked to learn that any such belief ever existed.

As for the Jews themselves, there is a rabbinical term that is used to condemn the ancient Christian blood-fear. It is called "blood libel." For generations now, the old issue of blood libel has been essentially a dead one, a thing of the past. No Jew in his right mind would want it otherwise. To revive the issue of blood libel is to resurrect ancient fears, unreasoning passions, and mortal danger to every Jew alive. Yes, most Jews would be better off if they never again heard about the ancient Christian blood-fear of the Jews; but this month none other than the Government of Israel has deliberately revived the so-called "blood libel" issue.

Over the weekend of September 17, Israeli forces introduced so-called Christian militiamen into two Palestinian refugee camps in West Beirut. The result was a massacre of over a thousand Palestinian civilians, including many women, children, and elderly people. Word of the massacre reached the outside world on the evening of Rosh Hashana, the Jewish New Year, September 18. An outraged world blamed the Begin government for allowing such a heinous crime to take place.

The Israeli Government's official reply to the world was a statement issued on Sunday, September 19. It was published two days later as a full-page advertisement in major American newspapers with the headline "BLOOD LIBEL." The statement began with the words, and I quote:

"On the New Year Rosh Hashana a blood libel was leveled against the Jewish State, its government, and the Israeli Defense Forces—otherwise known as the IDF."

The statement then continued with only days later were proven to be Israeli Government statement said

a series of statements which

total lies. The official

the massacre took place, quote:

"in an area where there was no position of the Israeli Army."

Yet the very next day after this statement was published, the Israeli Defense Minister Sharon flatly contradicted it. On September 22 Sharon admitted that the Israelis not only introduced the Militiamen into the camps but also supported them with air-borne flares. The official Israeli Government advertisement also said, quote:

"As soon as the IDF learned of the tragic events, Israeli soldiers put an end to the slaughter."

That, too, was a lie, and numerous reports have already surfaced to show that it was a lie.

The fact is that the Israeli troops had orders to surround and cut off the two Palestinian camps while the Militiamen did the dirty work. From start to finish, top Israeli officials knew exactly what was going on. They had ordered the entire operation, and were kept informed of its progress. By calling the accusations against it "blood libel", the Begin government acknowledged that the Beirut massacre was a subhuman act of bloodthirsty evil; but the transparent lies about it by the Begin government reflect the fact that the charges against it are not libel, they are the TRUTH!

My friends, it's no accident that the Beirut massacre was centered around Friday, September 17. In AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month I reported that September 17 was scheduled to be a day of nuclear massacre. That was the day when the supersecret "PROJECT Z" nuclear war plan was to be set off. If all had gone according to plan, a surprise American nuclear first strike against Russia was scheduled for that day; but by the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ, all did not go according to plan. The "PROJECT Z" nuclear strike plan was finally aborted—for now, that is—around mid-morning September 17. The countdown clock stopped less than five hours short of NUCLEAR WAR ONE!! The final decision to abort the strike ended a week of fierce debate at the top levels of the Reagan-Begin axis of Bolsheviks and Zionists.

Meanwhile another war plan has already been set in motion to replace it. The Beirut massacre which was underway on September 17 is a key ingredient in the new military intrigues now underway, but the massacre was also motivated by sheer insane frenzy. It was the blind frenzy of Satanic and demonic forces who saw their goal of nuclear victory slip away just when it seemed within their grasp.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—THE ABORTED PLAN FOR SURPRISE NUCLEAR WAR

Topic #2—THE BEIRUT MASSACRE FOR WAR TO COME

Topic #3—THE RETURN OF THE "SIBERIA EXPRESS" WEATHER WAR.

Topic #1—When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 78 late last month, I made public the final Pentagon plans for NUCLEAR WAR ONE to erupt

this month, September 1982. The Pentagon war planners were counting down toward Friday, September 17 to set off nuclear war as a complete surprise; but as the final days ticked away this month, major snags began to develop in the rush-rush War Timetable. Finally the decision was made to scrub the planned nuclear first strike against Russia virtually at the last minute!

As I reported last month, the first "H-Bombs" were to be detonated on key Russian targets at 3:00 P.M. Eastern Daylight Time on September 17. The order to scrub the attack went out less than five hours before that—shortly after 10:00 A.M. that morning. When the decision finally came to abort the attack, it was a "judgment" call; and that judgment was far from popular with some members of the elite Bolshevik war-planning team in the Pentagon.

The snags which developed this month were very serious but not serious enough to completely rule out an attempted nuclear strike. As a result, the war-planning group became splintered into acrimonious debate over what to do. No one argued in favor of giving up the basic goal of attacking Russia but there was a sharp division over how best to save the nuclear war plan. Basically the argument boiled down to two alternatives—whether to postpone the nuclear strike, or whether to go ahead as planned.

The hotheads insisted that the surprise nuclear attack against Russia should proceed on schedule on September 17. They argued that in spite of the problems which had cropped up, delay would only give time for even more obstacles to develop. They also pointed out that their Intelligence on Russian targets will gradually grow stale with delay. In effect they said, Now is our best chance.

The more conservative faction among the war planners insisted that the hotheads were not thinking straight. In their view, the hitches which developed this month in the war plan were too serious to go ahead now—better to wait and reschedule the "PROJECT Z" war plan after removing the present obstacles to success.

The debate began to tip in favor of a postponement one week before the September 17 target date. For that reason, other contingency plans were set in motion in the Middle East during that final week; but the nuclear-strike plan remained in effect right down to the wire. In the end, it was an accumulation of many factors which finally caused the plan to be aborted.

The Bolsheviks here started running into trouble in their rush-rush nuclear war plan almost as soon as it started early this year of 1982. I first reported that a short-cut nuclear war strategy was being implemented by the Pentagon seven months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 72. At the same time I also reported that the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians were lining up to try to stop the war plan. To that end they had agreed to start working together against the American Bolsheviks in certain ways. On top of that, a coup d'etat was brewing here in Washington to be led by General Alexander Haig, then Secretary of State. In the seven months since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 72, world headlines repeatedly have been filled with the consequences of this three-way struggle.

First came the Falklands War last April, which was not about sheep and settlers but about secret weapons installations. The secret Pentagon war plan received a severe blow in that skirmish but the Bolsheviks here soon struck back. In June they destroyed

the Haig coup d'etat. At the same time the brutal Israeli invasion of Lebanon was underway right on the timetable which I had made public last year and which Sharon, Defense Minister of Israel, confirmed only this week in the Knesset. And then there was the fourth Space Shuttle which carried the Defense Department payload into orbit to prepare for war.

By mid-summer, leaders of both America and Russia were making statements that the superpowers were already at war. The Russians started firing warning shots across America's bow by way of weather modification, airplane disasters, and more. Finally last month on August 12 the Russians used sheer intimidation to thwart the Israeli plan for an incredibly bloody invasion of Beirut. Suddenly the PLO evacuation talks bore fruit and the evacuation went off without a hitch. It was a serious blow to the joint Bolshevik-Zionist efforts to create an atmosphere of mushrooming crisis as a prelude to nuclear war.

For about two weeks the atmosphere of world crisis appeared to almost evaporate, but the Pentagon war clock was still counting down toward September 17—and the Russians knew it. On September 2 the Soviet Union abruptly disconnected all direct dial telephone service to and from the West. Instead, military operators took over. It was an extension of the telephone cutbacks which had begun months earlier. To the top Pentagon war strategists, the Russian telephone service cutback of September 2 seemed like small potatoes. They had bigger things to worry about—namely, a serious turn of events in Red China.

The previous day, September 1, Communist Party Chairman Hu Yaobang had dropped a bombshell at the Party Congress in Peking. He declared that China should no longer ally itself with the United States against Russia; instead Hu said China should regard both superpowers as equal threats, but at the same time he included some conciliatory language toward Russia—and, my friends, high Russian officials will go to China to begin talks in two weeks time at China's invitation! By disowning the Sino-American alliance, Hu Yaobang made it clear that the secret American Stealth attack-base in China was in jeopardy.

That base, located in Red China's western Sinkiang Province, is essential for the intended attack on Russia's two Cosmosphere bases in Siberia. Last month I reported that this war base was the reason for the joint communique of August 17 by the United States and Red China concerning Taiwan. The communique commits the United States to discontinue arms deliveries to Taiwan at some future date, in violation of Reagan's past pledges! The communique was agreed to in order to head off a threatened shutdown of the Stealth base by the Chinese, but it was not enough to satisfy the Chinese.

On September 6 former President Richard Nixon arrived in Peking, adding further to the troubles of the Pentagon war planners. Nixon has long been a client follower of the Rockefeller cartel, as I detailed in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR nearly 10 years ago.

Nixon went to Peking this month as a Rockefeller envoy and one with far more credibility for the Chinese than anyone the Bolsheviks have. Nixon shocked the Chinese by confirming what Russian sources had already told them—that the Stealth base was about to be used in war. Nixon then counseled them not to shut down the base outright at this time for fear of undesirable reactions by the trigger-happy Pentagon Bolsheviks. Instead, he urged the Chinese to start interfering with operation of the Stealth base by bureaucratic devices. That is one thing the

Chinese are very good at, and they accepted Nixon's advice.

By September 9 the American Stealth base in Sinkiang Province, China was effectively out of action. Critical base personnel were tangled up in Chinese red tape, preventing them from reporting for duty. The Chinese are giving hints to Washington that all this is due to continued dissatisfaction over Taiwan; but the real reason, my friends, is that they want no part of nuclear war with Russia!

The Kremlin received word through Rockefeller channels on September 9 that the Sinkiang Province Stealth base had been effectively neutralized. At that point the Russians could rest assured that even if the Pentagon went through with its nuclear-attack plan, Russia's Cosmospheres would survive. Russia's critical space triad of strategic weapons could no longer be destroyed.

STEPS LEADING UP TO THE DESTRUCTION OF THE SHUTTLE #4-LAUNCHED ATTACK CONFIRMATION SENSOR

The time had come to carry out the most dangerous step in the Kremlin plan to unravel the Pentagon nuclear-war plan. The time had come to destroy the Attack Confirmation Sensor placed in space by the Space Shuttle last June. The Attack Confirmation Sensor was a special satellite placed in geostationary orbit over the Indian Ocean by an auxiliary rocket. As I've reported before, it was a cryogenic satellite—that is, it was maintained at supercold temperatures close to absolute zero. I can now reveal that this was intended to protect the satellite from detection by Russian space weapons.

For several years now American scientific Intelligence analysts have known that the Russians have a new technology for target acquisition. The new Russian technique is not radar nor is it any other conventional means of detecting and tracking targets. The new Russian technique is deadly accurate; reliable; and, unlike radar, impossible to jam. Analysts here some time ago convinced themselves that they had figured out what the new Russian technique is. They believe it is a Russian version of computer-enhanced infrared detection. This has now been developed here in the United States and is called CEIR (pronounced seer).

I first reported on this development in AUDIO LETTER No. 72 shortly after a CEIR-equipped American laser was used to shoot down a Russian Cosmosphere. American analysts are convinced that the Russians are using CEIR and that they had it first; and so when the Air Force Attack Confirmation Sensor was designed, it was given a feature intended to defeat Russian infrared detectors.

All objects warmer than absolute zero emit infrared radiation. The warmer the object is, the more infrared it emits and the easier it is for computer-enhanced infrared sensors to detect it. The only way to hide from CEIR is, therefore, to reduce the temperature as low as possible. That's why the Air Force Attack Confirmation Sensor was a cryogenic satellite. A huge cooling system using liquid helium kept the satellite only a few degrees above absolute zero, reducing infrared emissions to nearly nothing.

The cryogenic design of the Air Force satellite is what gave the Bolshevik war planners here so much confidence that it would succeed. They were sure that the Russians would be unable to find it in time to destroy it before it was used in war. But, my

friends, the Bolsheviks in the Pentagon are wrong about the new Russian target-tracking technique. It is not an infrared technique at all; instead, it's a revolutionary system which detects the atomic vibrations of matter. The Russians call it Psychoenergetic Range Finding, or PRF.

When I first reported on Russia's new PRF technique in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, I reported that the Russians regard it as their master secret weapon. The longer it remains a mystery to the American Bolsheviks, the better it will be for Russia; and so when Space Shuttle #4 launched the Air Force cryogenic sensor last June, the Russians started playing a game.

Instead of destroying the satellite right away, they allowed it to be orbited successfully. The Russians knew that the Attack Confirmation satellite could do them no harm until war itself was about to begin, so they allowed it to stay there untouched for as long as possible. The result was exactly as expected: the long-term survival of the Air Force Sensor has convinced the Bolsheviks here that they were right about Russia using CEIR. The Pentagon has walked into a major Intelligence blunder, and the Russians are encouraging them to keep it up.

Throughout the summer, Rockefeller cartel operatives within the CIA fed updates about the Pentagon war plan to the Russians. Those reports continued to say that the war timetable was remaining unchanged, targeted for mid-September; so the Russian Space Command let the Air Force Sensor alone for the time being.

Meanwhile the Russians began preparing in a totally unsuspected way for the moment when they would destroy the satellite. Those preparations had to do with Russia's International Telephone service:

First, in June the Soviet Union drastically reduced the number of telephone links to the West. They also made clouded threats to reduce service still further at a later date. In order to keep the Intelligence analysts here from guessing what was afoot, the Russians resorted to a little disinformation in the right places. They created falsified leaks that there were unsettled conditions in the Kremlin, a power struggle. The Bolsheviks here, who are always struggling for power, swallowed it hook, line, and sinker.

The next major step was the one I mentioned earlier on September 2. That was the day when Russia suddenly cut off all automatic dialing service to and from the West. The Bolsheviks here were startled but still did not suspect what it really meant. They were too preoccupied with rumblings of trouble in China to worry for long about Russia's telephones.

For the final step the Kremlin waited, hoping that the maneuvers to disrupt the Stealth base in Sinkiang Province would succeed. On September 9 they received the "Mission Accomplished" signal from the Rockefeller cartel. The Sinkiang base was temporarily incapacitated, thanks to Nixon's recommended bureaucratic entanglement by the Chinese.

The next morning, Friday, September 10, there was a sudden total shutdown of most International Telephone service to and from Russia; but in order to send a message to America's Bolshevik war planners, a few selected circuits were kept open. Those included Leningrad, Kiev, Minsk, and Talinn. Their significance lay in the fact that none were targets planned for the initial Stealth attack, which I detailed last month.

The phone lines were cut off at 7:10 A.M. Eastern Daylight Time, or 2:10 P.M. Moscow time. Moments later the Russian Space Command went to work. A Russian Jumbo Cosmosphere was parked in a pseudo-orbit about two miles above the Air Force Attack Confirmation satellite. It had been there for over two months—from the moment the satellite was launched into orbit from Space Shuttle #4. By using its electromagnetic propulsion system at low power, the Cosmosphere had remained on station instead of slowly drifting away as a normal satellite would; and parked as it was above the downward-looking Air Force satellite, the presence of the Cosmosphere was never detected.

Now the time had come! The Cosmosphere aimed its beam weapon and fired. Shortly after 7:10 A.M. Eastern Daylight Time, Friday, September 10, there was bad news for the Bolsheviks here. At the newly operational Air Force Space Command in Colorado Springs there was a sudden loss of signal from their Indian Ocean satellite. At first they could not believe that their critical Attack Confirmation satellite had been attacked. All sorts of things were tried in an effort to re-establish contact with the satellite—all to no avail. The satellite no longer existed!

REACTIONS TO SENSOR DESTRUCTION—DETERMINING FACTORS OF DECISION

As that Friday morning of September 10 wore on, the "PROJECT Z" war planners were convened in crisis conference. The question at hand was: What do we do now?

For a while there was an atmosphere of near panic. Some were sure that a first strike by Russia was sure to follow and that the Pentagon should push the Nuclear Button without delay. Others argued that if that were the Kremlin's intention, it was already too late—Russia's missiles would be on the way. At the opposite extreme someone suggested that the whole "PROJECT Z" war plan be aborted for now and rescheduled later on. Everyone agreed on one thing: without the Attack Confirmation Sensor, any attack on Russia had become far more risky. After launching the Stealth planes from Norway and Turkey, it would just have to be assumed that they had destroyed their targets. With the Attack Confirmation Satellite gone, there would be no way to confirm that, so the all-out follow-up attack by America's nuclear forces might run into a lot more trouble than expected.

At that point someone remarked to the effect: We can still go with the back-up plan—every target in Russia that is attacked by our birds will be obliterated. If International Telephone service to Russian target areas is suddenly cut off at zero hour, we can assume that our birds made it.

There's an old military saying that goes: "There is always someone who didn't get the word." The planner who suggested falling back on the back-up plan based on telephones proved once again how true that saying is. Nearly everyone shouted at him: "The phones to Russia are already shut down!"

My friends, the Russians kept the International phone lines shut down for seven hours that day. They wanted to make sure that if the Pentagon Bolsheviks pushed the Panic Button, they would obtain no Intelligence at all by monitoring telephone circuits. After the first two hours or so of the blackout, Secretary of State George Shultz was accosted by reporters about it. Shultz told them, quote: "It is very significant", but would say no more.

By the time Washingtonians were finishing their lunch that day, a decision had been reached about what to do:

"PROJECT Z" would continue on the original schedule, targeted for the following Friday, September 17. Meanwhile every effort would be made to cut through the Chinese red tape that was restricting use of the critical base in Sinkiang Province. At the same time, it was decided to set other plans in motion too, just in case "PROJECT Z" should finally fall through.

That is how it stood through the week leading up to "Z-Day", September 17. The "PROJECT Z" first-strike plan was in deep trouble, yet it was still on track. It had been decided that if nothing else went wrong, the surprise attack on Russia would still be launched on the 17th, come what may.

The straw that broke the camel's back came at almost the last possible minute on Friday morning, September 17. At about 8:30 A.M. here in Washington a well-known national newspaper reporter was interviewed on the Washington NBC radio station WRC. The reporter, of the Washington Post, called attention to my war warning for that day contained in AUDIO LETTER No. 78. He reportedly outlined the plan briefly for everyone listening in the Washington Metropolitan area, and he added that if the Pentagon did have such a plan, public exposure through my tape had probably reduced the chances that it would be carried out.

My friends, that radio report here in Washington about the war plan on the morning of September 17 was seemingly a small thing, but our Lord Jesus Christ can always use little things to produce big results—and that is what HE did on that morning of "Z-Day"!

Thanks to those of you who had written to editors, Congressmen, and officials of all kinds about the war plan, the Pentagon was becoming edgy. The last thing they wanted was public exposure of their war plan. When they heard the report that morning over radio station WRC, they quite simply panicked. They had no way of knowing just how widely their plan had become known, and so shortly after 10:00 A.M. Washington time, Friday, September 17, 1982, the "PROJECT Z" first strike was called off. With less than five hours to go, the countdown clock for NUCLEAR WAR ONE had finally stopped ticking!

Topic #2—Nearly 2000 years ago our Lord Jesus Christ described some people as the sons of Satan who are liars from the beginning. Their inability to tell the truth is the hallmark of this special category of people who were condemned by our Lord. They never admit their own guilt about anything, but instead always justify themselves, saying they are blameless. But our Lord Jesus Christ declared that it is their kind who have shed the blood of innocent people from the beginning of time.

In my opening remarks for AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month, I mentioned a tragic photograph which appeared in American newspapers on August 1. It showed a nurse in the Beirut hospital feeding a tiny seven-week-old Lebanese baby who had been horribly maimed by the Israeli bombardment. The baby was swathed in bandages from the waist upward, including the entire head except for a small area around the mouth. The baby had lost both arms at the shoulder. There were several different versions of the photo carried by various newspapers and wire services, and in some views the absence of the arms was unmistakable. As I reported last month, the Government of Israel was enraged over the photo. They insisted that they were blameless for the baby's injuries and demanded a retraction. As I reported last month, wire services here refused to make a retraction.

For the moment it appeared that a tiny ray of truth had won

out for a change. But, my friends, the sons of Satan who control the Israeli Government could not let the matter rest. They resorted to their old favorite trick which they refer to as "creating new facts." On September 1 United Press International finally caved in to a solid month of Israeli pressure. On that day UPI published a pair of pictures—on the left was the original UPI version of the hospital photo of the mangled baby, and on the right was a new picture of a bouncing, robust baby without a scratch held up to the camera by a cheerfully smiling nurse. Referring to the original photo and report, the UPI caption reads in part, and I quote:

"Israeli authorities challenged that report and released the photo at right, made August 22, saying it shows the same child after treatment. The infant had not lost both arms but only suffered slight injury to the wrists, the Israelis contended."

The caption concludes with the words:

"UPI regrets the error."

My friends, anyone who saw other published views of that original baby with the arms gone would know that the new picture had to be a fake. The original baby did not even survive until August 22! The new picture, allegedly taken by that day for release by the Israelis, was not even made in Lebanon! The photo shows an Israeli baby held up by an Israeli nurse, photographed in a hospital in Tel Aviv.

The tragedy of that tiny Lebanese baby was multiplied a thousand times over by the Beirut Massacre. As always, the Begin government is waving its blood-spattered hands in gestures of total innocence.

Last month I described the Israeli doctrine of STATE TERRORISM in which suffering and death are increased as much as possible as a tool of power; and in the Beirut Massacre this month, we are once again seeing that doctrine of STATE TERRORISM at work. In Damascus, Syria, PLO leader Yassir Arafat went straight to the heart of the matter in an interview with the French newspaper Liban. He said, and I quote:

"Begin and Sharon are not Jews. The crimes they commit do not conform to Jewish morality or tradition."

My friends, why is it that it takes a member of a different faith, a Moslem, to remind us Christians of something our Lord Jesus Christ said? Our Lord warned us against being taken in by those who are of the synagogue of Satan and the blasphemy of those who say they are Jews, but are not.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 50 nearly three years ago I detailed the origins of the counterfeit Jews, the Khazar Jews. It is they who rule the nation that calls itself Israel under the banner of political Zionism, and it is they who have been expelled by Russia's new rulers and are creating a new Bolshevik revolution right here in America!! The counterfeit Jews are a mortal danger to all real Jews as well as to everyone else on earth.

We have been warned, but we do not heed those warnings; and so our world continues to reel from one crisis to another, each one worse than the one before.

In Topic #1 I explained why Friday, September 10 was a turning point in the joint Bolshevik-Zionist war plans. On that day Russia destroyed the Air Force Attack Confirmation satellite

which was parked over the Indian Ocean. Up until that day the Pentagon Bolsheviks and the Israeli Zionists had spent two weeks or so trying to lull Russia to sleep. Every effort was made to portray an impression of relative calm in the war-torn Lebanon hot spot. Simmering crises elsewhere around the world did not go away but they also failed to escalate as originally planned.

Most important of all was the premature departure of the United States Marines from Beirut on September 10. This was directly related to the Brezhnev-Reagan HOT LINE call which I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month. In that call the entity Reagan was told that a beachhead in Lebanon by the United States troops will not be tolerated. The early departure of the Marines on September 10 was intended to send Moscow a false message to the effect: "All right, we give up. There will be no war." The idea was to try to promote overconfidence on the part of the Kremlin leaders and make them relax.

If the ploy had worked, it would have restored some semblance of the surprise element in the intended nuclear strike. But this attempt at deception by the Bolshevik-Zionist coalition did not work. As it turned out, Russia destroyed the American Attack Confirmation satellite on the very day of the Marine pull-out, September 10. So from that day onward the tactics changed again. The false impression of calm gave way to a fast crescendo of new violence and war tensions.

The new crisis build-up had two purposes: One was to provide a last-minute crisis atmosphere of sorts to help explain away the sudden nuclear war which was still planned for September 17, but by that point so many things had gone wrong with the "PROJECT Z" war plan that its execution was no longer certain. And so the other purpose of the new crisis build-up was to get the older, longer-range war plans in motion once again.

In my report last month I mentioned that the Israeli troops had already moved north to the outskirts of Tripoli. Up to now Tripoli has been spared much of the violence that has torn southern Lebanon, but on Saturday September 11 Israeli MOSSAD agents set off a car bomb, made with over 150 pounds of TNT, in downtown Tripoli. The alliances between Christians and Moslems that have given Tripoli a semblance of peace up to now are under attack.

Two days later, Monday September 13, the focus shifted to the north. A huge NATO amphibious exercise called "OPERATION NORTHERN WEDDING '82" got underway that day off the Danish coast. It involved over 160 naval vessels, 250 combat aircraft, and some 25,000 troops from nine (9) countries. Radio Moscow denounced the exercise as being (quote) "intensely belligerent", which it was. The so-called exercise was designed to seal up the Baltic, and with it much of the Soviet Navy—and by strange coincidence, "OPERATION NORTHERN WEDDING '82" was scheduled to last until Friday, September 17!

The following day, Tuesday September 14, the focus shifted back to Lebanon. In AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month I reported that the Lebanese President-elect, Bashir Gemayel, was an Israeli puppet. I also reported that the Israeli plan was to eliminate him, just as they did Sadat last year when it suited their purposes. On September 14, the plan was carried out. As usual, the Israeli Government pointed fingers at everyone else for what their own MOSSAD agents had done.

Elsewhere there was shock over what was designed to look like a surprise. By the way, even now the charade goes on. Just two

evenings ago on September 28 our Bolshevik-dominated President kept it up in his news conference. Trying to defend recent American policy toward Lebanon, he said:

"Who could have foreseen the assassination of the President-elect of Lebanon?"

Anyhow, on September 14 there were only three days to go until "Z-Day" September 17. The pace started speeding up fast. Within hours after the Gemayel assassination, the pre-positioned Israeli Army began an invasion of West Beirut. The Begin government gave the camouflaged excuse that it was "to prevent a blood bath." And as always they said at first this was only a limited and temporary move, but by September 16 Israel had changed its tune. It was announced that the Israelis intended to occupy the western half of Beirut indefinitely. The Bolshevik allies of the Zionists here in Washington reacted as agreed for public consumption. They complained about the Israeli actions, but did nothing about them.

On Friday September 17 the Israelis completed their military conquest of West Beirut. By that time the Israeli High Command was ordering actions that bordered on insane frenzy. A United States Marine standing guard on top of the United States Embassy building was narrowly missed by an Israeli sniper, and the Soviet Embassy compound was attacked and invaded by Israeli tanks and troops! Under International Law, that was equivalent to invading Russia itself.

During that final week, the Israelis were doing everything possible to produce a sharp reaction from Russia to help explain away the impending eruption of nuclear war, but the Russians refused to take the bait. They did not react sharply to the Beirut invasion because the PLO was now gone and with it the prospect of all-out carnage. As for the invasion of their own Embassy, the Russians essentially turned the other cheek. Instead of a major international incident, the Israeli smashing of Russia's Embassy compound turned into a virtual non-event.

When the "PROJECT Z" nuclear attack plan was finally scrubbed on that Friday of September 17, all the efforts to goad Russia shifted gears. On that very day the Beirut massacre of Palestinian civilians was already in progress. By late the following Saturday evening the world learned that a new Guyana-type massacre had taken place. And, my friends, the purpose of this massacre was much the same as that which took place in Guyana four years ago.

In AUDIO LETTER No. 40 for November 1978 I gave the details about what happened in Guyana. It was mass murder, not mass suicide. It was perpetrated in order to open the door to Guyana for a joint Commando force of Americans and Israelis. Under cover of the Jonestown clean-up operation, a Commando raid was mounted to wipe out a nearby Russian missile base. Likewise, the Beirut massacre this month was perpetrated in order to open the door to Lebanon for troops, which were otherwise forbidden to enter.

Earlier I referred to the Russian ultimatum of August 12 that an American beachhead in Lebanon would not be tolerated. It was this Russian ultimatum that caused the hasty departure of the Marines on September 10 even though the Lebanese government begged them to stay.

When the Pentagon Bolsheviks saw their hurry-up war "PROJECT Z" war plan going down the drain on September 10, they contacted

their Zionist military and Intelligence partners. The Israelis were given the green light to create an overwhelming pretext for return of the American Marines to Lebanon. By the week-end of September 17 the massacre was fully underway. Israeli forces stood guard around the Beirut Sabra and Chatila Palestinian refugee camps while Major Haddad's and other Israeli-controlled militiamen committed mass murder. During the nighttime Israeli flares lit up the sky over the camps to enable the slaughter to go on nonstop. After at least 36 hours, actually more than that, the Israelis decided enough people were dead. Haddad's and other military forces were politely ushered out of the human slaughterhouse and transported out of the vicinity.

On Monday afternoon September 20 the entity President Reagan went on television briefly with a special announcement. He was ordering the Marines back into Lebanon for more dangerous duty and without any pre-assigned time limit—and this time the circumstances are such that they cannot be protested successfully in public by Moscow. If the Russians were to tell the exact truth about what happened, who would believe them? The notion that over a thousand innocent men, women, and children were slaughtered just to bring the Marines back sounds preposterous—and, my friends, that is precisely why it worked.

As I say these words, some 1,200 Marines have just re-entered Beirut, 50% more than before. Another 1,200 are on the way, though this has not yet been publicized. They can be held in reserve, or brought in at will.

Another of the plans I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month is now underway. THAT PLAN CALLS FOR A NUMBER OF OUR MARINES TO BE KILLED IN LEBANON! It will be done by the Israeli MOSSAD and then blamed on Arab extremists. If it works, it will help shove the world down a new road toward eventual nuclear war.

The United States now has a solid beachhead in Lebanon as well as in the Sinai. Russia has one by way of its proxy Syria. Now Russia and the United States are eyeball to eyeball in the Middle East!

Topic #3—There's an old saying to the effect, "Everyone talks about the weather, but no one does anything about it." That may have been true when Mark Twain first said it nearly a century ago, but not any more. For several decades men have been experimenting with all kinds of ways to modify the weather. One of the earliest and best known techniques is that of cloud seeding to generate needed rain. But the science of Weather Modification has long since gone far beyond that.

It's typical of many advanced new technologies that they tend to be first used for military purposes, and are kept secret as long as possible. That is even more true of Weather Modification than it is for most other advanced technologies. The reasons are not technical so much as they are legal in nature. To understand why, one need go no further than the old cloud-seeding methods I mentioned a moment ago.

Suppose a farmer hires a cloud-seeder to bring needed rain to his crops at a critical time in their growing season. The cloud-seeder waits until some promising clouds develop and then flies over them, dropping a fine mist of chemicals. The chemicals help condensation take place in the cloud, and if all goes well the farmer gets his rain. Unfortunately, other farmers farther downwind may be equally desperate for the same rain. By the time the seeded cloud reaches them, perhaps it is rained out. Perhaps no other rain develops soon enough to save their crops.

The result: they may try to seek damages against the farmer who did the cloud seeding, saying that his tampering ruined their chances of receiving rain. That is a small but very common example of the legal problems caused by Weather Modification.

Today the knowledge exists to make massive alterations in the weather either for better or worse. But the scale of potential legal problems has also expanded with this knowledge. Today the legal ramifications of weather control are international and potentially violent. The net result is that the few nations possessing these weather-control capabilities keep it secret.

Over four years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 34 I described secret American weather control installations which were then in operation. These were nuclear-powered electrical grids running along the shores of the continental United States. They were responsible for a number of strange weather phenomena prior to that and for some time afterward; but within a year after I reported on them, they were permanently disabled under mysterious circumstances. Several attempts have been made to restore their operation, but up to now those efforts have never succeeded.

The American weather-control grids were owned and operated by the Rockefeller cartel and were intended primarily as a tool of monopoly. The giant Rockefeller agri-businesses of America are trying to wipe out the small individually-owned farms and take them over. Today they are succeeding at an alarming rate, primarily through financial means; but for a while several years ago they had the weather as an ally as well.

The other main world power in weather control is the Soviet Union. Over the course of a number of past tapes I have described Russia's advancing weather-control techniques. Like the now defunct American weather grids, the Russian techniques make extensive use of atmospheric electrical charges to control weather, but there the similarities end. The Russian techniques are space-based and use two legs of Russia's space triad of strategic weapons. The orbiting Cosmos Interceptors are not involved since they are basically nothing more than military patrol craft, but the monster beam weapons at Russia's five-year-old Moon bases are used to create storms at sea, and the levitating Cosmospheres use their charged particle beams to guide storms to their targets.

It has now been 2-1/2 years since I first detailed the new Russian storm-control techniques in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. The following summer I gave a warning that these techniques were about to be used to create hurricanes like nothing ever seen before. Shortly afterward Hurricane Allen terrorized America's gulf coast. It was one of the biggest, most powerful storms ever to threaten the area. It threaded its way through the Caribbean Islands staying over water, gaining strength. Then it began to sweep northeast along the coast in ways that mystified weathermen. Then very abruptly it just fell apart. The Russian controllers had made a mistake, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 57 .

It is now two years later. The hurricane season is again upon us, and the Russians now have a great deal more experience. Once again the Russians have narrowly beaten back a surprise nuclear attack attempt by the American Bolsheviks; and now the Russians are starting to strike back beginning with the weather.

During the hurricane season so far, our east and gulf coasts have not been troubled by anything significant; instead, it is the western United States which is suffering from hurricane

problems—an unprecedented situation. The situation is new, my friends, because it is man-made.

As I say these words, the remains of Hurricane Olivia are gradually dying out over the northern Great Plains. It has brought incredible rains to the West Coast, unheard-of floods in Utah, and September snows in the Rockies.

But if you think Olivia was bad, Hurricane Paul should be worse. Hurricane Paul is following a northeasterly course from the Pacific that took it past the southern tip of Baja California two days ago. It is being programmed to sweep across America's Great Plains breadbasket from around southwest Texas northeastward.

If the Russian weather controllers achieve a total success, the eye of the decaying storm will follow a track across Oklahoma, Missouri, Illinois, Indiana, Ohio, and onward toward New York City and New England. Hurricane Paul will not remain a hurricane for long over land, of course, but wind is not what the Russians want from this storm—it is rain, horrendous amounts of rain. It is harvest time across vast areas of the Great Plains, the worst possible time for rainstorms. Within a matter of days, the giant rainstorm remains of Hurricane Paul may effectively mow down much of America's promised bumper harvest of grain—and this is only the beginning of what the Russians are preparing to do in retaliation for America's unceasing war intrigues. The Russians intend to whittle away our military preparedness while making it harder and harder for the Bolsheviks here to stay in power. By the time the Reagan one-year extension of grain sales to Russia runs out, we ourselves may well run short of grain!

Very soon the 1982 hurricane season will be behind us, but already the Russians are preparing to give America a very long, hard winter. Even as I speak, the "Siberia Express" weather war is already returning. This year of 1982 began as the coldest winter of the century across much of the United States. There were freezes in Florida, ice storms in Georgia, hurricane-force windstorms along the Rockies, blizzards in the Northeast; and, my friends, it is all coming back again!

In AUDIO LETTER No. 71 last January I described a new Russian weather control technique that was responsible for these strange and extreme storms. Weathermen refer to it as the "Siberia Express", and with good reason. The air that refrigerated much of North America last winter was coming straight from Siberia, transplanted here by Russian weather modification. Last winter the Russian "Siberia Express" technique was applied only for a few weeks, but this time the cool-down is already underway. It began during August, and across much of North America east of the Rockies there were record low temperatures last month. In the dog days of summer, cooler temperatures cause no concern because they just make the hot weather milder; but if the "Siberia Express" weather control continues, North America will cool down farther and faster than normal. What that means, my friends, is a very hard winter.

As usual, Governmental spokesmen here are not telling you the truth. There are vague rumors floating around that we are in for a hard winter, but the explanations are not true. Only two years ago the United States suffered a summer-long killer heat wave and drought, and the experts blame sunspots. Now we've got the opposite problems—drenching rains and abnormally-cool weather, and they try to blame the same sunspots. The fact is, my friends, that the Russians are not just talking about the weather, they are doing something about it. And because of the

unceasing war plans of our own leaders, what the Russians are doing to our weather will be very hard on you and me.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I have reported on the world's near brush with nuclear war this month. As of this moment, the danger of immediate nuclear war is now much reduced and still declining. Instead, longer-range intrigues are now resuming on the part of the Bolshevik-Zionist joint military junta. In response to these and the postponed "PROJECT Z" hurry-up war plan, Russia, too, is now on the offensive beginning with the weather.

In the few moments left in this AUDIO LETTER, I should remark on late word I have received about two items:

One item is that at least one United States Marine has already been killed today in Lebanon. This is not the planned incident which I discussed in Topic #2, but it is a harbinger of things to come .

The other item is a political alert. Last month I mentioned that the Bolsheviks here were worried that they had not succeeded in completely rooting out Haig's coup d'etat machine. I have just received word that an effort is now underway to set off major changes in the Reagan Administration. Among the developments, which may well take place shortly, are the resignations of at least two Reagan Cabinet Secretaries. A scandal is also brewing within the Department of Defense, which is the center of Bolshevik governmental power here; and the White House itself may also be swept up in the turmoil.

My friends, the days ahead will not be easy. A hard winter, a collapse in the economy, and more crises lie ahead. But we should all be thankful for life itself. The enemies of our Lord Jesus Christ were stopped hours short of plunging us into nuclear war. Instead, HE has given us one more chance; and, my friends, we must not waste it.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

Audio Letter #80

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter. Today is November 3, 1982, and this is my AUDIO LETTER(R) #80. Beginning with this AUDIO LETTER I'm making a small shift in my recording schedule from the end of each month to early in the month. This change will help reduce conflicts with holidays and other problems during the course of the year.

For years now a familiar slogan has been used in the advertisements for a popular pain reliever. The slogan was so effective that it helped build annual sales of nearly half a billion dollars. The pain reliever became #1 in America with 37% of the market, and yet for weeks now this famous slogan has been heard no more. The slogan was: "Trust Tylenol. Hospitals do."

Literally over night, just a month ago, Americans by the millions stopped trusting Tylenol. A number of people in Chicago had suddenly died after taking Extra-Strength Tylenol capsules.

By October 1, six were dead and a number of others gravely ill. A few days later the death toll rose to seven. The Tylenol capsules which they had taken had been contaminated with one of the deadliest of all poisons, cyanide. Instantly headlines about the Tylenol massacre pushed all other news stories into the background here in the United States. A nation-wide alert went out for people to stop taking Tylenol capsules until further notice. Everyone was told to look for two suspect batches of Tylenol, identifiable by their serial numbers. The booming Tylenol capsule production line was shut down. The manufacturer launched a Tylenol capsule recall program. Many Tylenol products were withdrawn from drug store shelves, and those that remained were shunned by frightened customers.

Thus began a news story which has remained on everyone's tongue for a solid month. In most cases even the most dramatic news stories begin to loss their impact after a week or so—but not the Tylenol scare. It has been nursed along week after week, piece by agonizing piece like a real-life soap opera.

First there were worries that the poisoning might have been due to some horrible production-line accident; then it was found that the deadly capsules had been poisoned deliberately. After a week or so, new Tylenol poisoning cases came to light in Oroville, California and in Philadelphia. Those stories revived fears of a nation-wide poisoning threat all over again.

By mid-month the search for the Tylenol killer was closing in on the Chicago area itself. For another week or so there were sensational stories day after day about alleged "hot leads" in the case. Gradually they all fizzled out but only after keeping the story alive a while longer. By late in October the Tylenol scare was at last beginning to die down in its impact.

But the Tylenol massacre was made to order to spawn copycat crimes by a few unstable individuals here and there. Those copycat crimes were slow in coming, so the major media were enlisted to help set them off. Time after time television news reports about the Tylenol tragedy digressed into discussions in the "What if...?" category. "What if the poison had been put not in Tylenol but perhaps food or Halloween candy?" said the television voices. Time after time they pointed out how easy it would be to do that and get away with it. And sure enough, suddenly it started happening. Here and there people received eye burns from adulterated eye drops. A man ended up in hospital after poisoning by way of a carton of chocolate milk; and Halloween candy began showing up with poison, needles, and razor blades. What had started as the Tylenol scare a month ago has become an ever-widening fear of adulteration of everything we buy for food or health.

My friends, the Tylenol massacre and all the other fears it has spawned will fade from our minds eventually, but for now it has done its job to perfection. That job was to take our attention away from certain events on the international scene for now and to turn our attention inward instead. This change was desired by the American Bolsheviks because of their failure in September to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE on schedule!

For the moment the Bolsheviks here are responding by turning their energies inward to the domestic scene more intensely than before. As it stands right now, the Bolshevik-dominated Reagan Administration expects to emphasize domestic matters for roughly the coming year. They want to press forward with a quiet new Bolshevik revolution here in America to tighten their control over you and me. At the same time they also want to try to

finish off their deadly rivals for power—the Rockefeller cartel. If the Bolsheviks here can succeed in doing these things, they will be in far better position to try again at nuclear war.

At present, my friends, the tentative plans of the Bolsheviks here call for a new crisis sequence toward nuclear war to begin late in 1983, and culminate in war itself in early 1984! It will take that long for the military preparations for nuclear war to be recycled up to peak readiness. Between now and then, you can expect major crises to erupt overseas which may look like they hold a threat of nuclear war in themselves; but these interim crises over the next year or so will actually have a different purpose. They will not be intended to lead in themselves to nuclear war but to improve America's geostrategic position. If successful, this process will improve the Pentagon's chances when it is time for nuclear war itself.

The process of turning inward by the Bolsheviks here is a temporary one but very important. It must be understood if you are to understand many coming events in our economy and in politics. At the same time, we must also keep our eye on the ball and look beyond the temporary inward emphasis of the next year or so. And it is time for an important update about what the Kremlin is doing in response to all these things.

My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:

Topic #1—AMERICA'S ECONOMIC DECLINE INTO A NEW DARK AGES Topic #2—WAR COUNTDOWN TOWARD THE ISRAELI YEAR OF DOOM Topic #3—CHANGING OF THE GUARD IN THE NEW KREMLIN.

Topic #1:

The Stock Market—1980s/1930s

In recent weeks there's been one seemingly bright spot in the increasingly grim United States economy. With unemployment climbing, bankruptcies spreading, and factories idle, the Stock Market alone has acted cheerful. In August the prospect of dropping interest rates became the excuse for a dramatic upturn in stock prices. Over the past 2-1/2 months we've seen a series of wild swings on Wall Street that seem to defy all logic. Records have been set in trading volume on one day only to be shattered by an even larger record on another day. Several times recently the one-day jump in the Dow Jones average has reached record levels. One of those days was October 8, the same day that it was announced that the official unemployment rate has reached double digits.

With unemployment at levels not seen since the Great Depression, the Stock Market has continued to soar. Three days after the announcement of double-digit unemployment, the Stock Market passed the 1000 mark on the Dow Jones industrial averages.

The situation we are seeing now is described well by an article released by the Associated Press in August. The article begins in the words, and I quote:

"Wall Street, which waited for years for the recession to begin, is starting to act like the economic downturn is just about over. Even as companies report that their profits in the second quarter were lower than last year, the Stock Market has continued a rally that has pushed up the Dow Jones industrial average to its highest levels in three years."

My friends, the article from which I just quoted was published in

August, as I said—but not August of this year! It is dated August 3, 1980, over two years ago. At that time the Stock Market appeared to be saying the same thing it appears to be saying now, that better times are just ahead; but of course better times were not ahead. The Stock Market bubble of two years ago burst after a while, while the economy kept heading downward.

What is going on in the Stock Market right now is just another stunt known in some circles as a "Bear Trap." A bear trap is an episode of gross manipulation of the Stock Market by certain large institutional investors to unload unwanted stocks. I first described how a bear trap works in AUDIO LETTER No. 33 when the bear trap took place in the spring of 1978. Another took place around the late summer of 1980, producing the article from which I quoted earlier; and now in the autumn of 1982 we're watching as another Stock Market bear trap snares its victims.

During September, and especially October, large amounts of unwanted stocks were successfully dumped onto small investors. Instead of setting another new record for a one-day rise in stock prices, the Dow Jones set a more disturbing record a few days ago. On Monday October 25 the Dow dropped more than 36 points, the largest one-day drop since the crash of 1929. The excuse given was that suddenly there are signs that those dropping interest rates just might head up again.

My friends, the fact is that even a thousand (1000) on the Dow is worth only about as much as 400 a decade ago due to inflation, and the wildness of the ups and downs lately are a very ominous sign. They are a symptom of instability in the Market, meaning a small stimulus produces big effects. That is what happened to the Stock Market in 1929, too, just before the big crash.

The United States economy is fundamentally sick, and now it is having chills and fever as reflected by the Stock Market up-and-down jumps. The two engines of our economy, automobiles and construction, are still running at about half speed. In the past I've explained why a sustained depression in these two areas would inevitably spread to engulf our whole economy. And now it is happening!

Unemployment, as measured by the Government's grossly understated statistics, reached 10.1 per cent in September, the highest since the Great Depression. Bankruptcies, too, have now reached a pace unequaled since the Great Depression. Farmers are in a tailspin with projected farm incomes for 1982 down 24% from 1981.

Banking System Situation

And then there are the banks. The Great Depression of the 1930s really began not with the 1929 Stock Market crash but with the collapse of our banking system afterward. Likewise today, it is not the chills and fever of the Stock Market that are the greatest economic danger—it is the dangerous condition of our banks.

When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 44 in March 1979, I reported that the Bolsheviks here in America were going after the banks. The Bolshevik coup d'etat against their former Rockefeller allies had begun two months earlier with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller; and by that March, Bolshevik moles were going to work throughout the Rockefeller banking empire. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 44, they were starting at the top with the giant Chase Manhattan Bank. If the American Bolsheviks can shatter

Rockefeller banking power, the Rockefeller cartel may well be doomed!

My friends, the process which I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 44 is now far advanced. During the first eight months of this year 27 banks failed here in the United States. Many others are teetering on the edge, and on August 23 it was announced that five of America's largest banks are in deep trouble. They are deep in the "red" due to the inability to collect on huge bad loans. The five banks which were in the news that day are all members of the Rockefeller group, and one of them is none other than Chase Manhattan itself.

The problem of bad loans now plaguing the Rockefeller banks is destined to just keep getting worse, not better. The final crushing blow that could bring the Rockefeller banks crashing down is the mountain of bad loans to foreign countries. Years ago when the Rockefeller cartel had no rival in governmental power here, those loans were made without concern. Whenever loans went bad, they always made sure the American taxpayer bailed them out through various governmental devices; but now the situation has changed. The Rockefeller cartel no longer exercises sufficient power over the whole of the United States Government to bail itself out in this way. Instead their enemies, the Bolsheviks here, are increasingly able to block the Rockefeller group.

This new situation was reflected in the World Economic Conference of the World Bank and International Monetary Fund two months ago. At the conference, which was held in Toronto, Canada, the Rockefeller and Bolshevik factions squared off against one another—and, my friends, the Bolsheviks won!

Here is basically what happened: Rockefeller cartel banking operatives both from America and from abroad argued for increased quotas for the International Monetary Fund—that is, they argued that the United States and other developed nations should donate tens of billions of dollars to cover increased international loans. Rockefeller spokesmen presented their arguments in terms of the needs of the Third World nations, but what they were really worried about was the possible consequences to their own banks of bad loans to the Third World. Increased IMF quotas from participating nations could have helped bail them out of trouble. That is what the Rockefeller group tried to do by enlisting the support of the Third World nations themselves. But the American Bolsheviks squashed it!

Speaking in Toronto on September 6, the entity Reagan declared:

"The United States cannot afford to bail out the world."

What he really meant was that America's Bolshevik government was not about to bail out the Rockefeller cartel—and with that, increased IMF quotas were refused.

So now, my friends, the Rockefeller cartel banking interests face an untenable situation. They hold vast amounts of loans to Third World countries, and a lot of it is bunching up and coming due. During 1983 more than half trillion dollars in these loans will be coming due. About 80 per cent of that could end up going unpaid to the banks by financially-troubled nations. That would add up to a combined default of more than four hundred billion dollars ($400,000,000,000). If the big banks should lose even a fraction of that unthinkable amount, it will spell disaster for America's entire banking system! Very quickly the collapse will

engulf the entire international banking system as well.

As major American banks collapse, credit lines to industry will be cut off. Unable to finance continued operations, more and more businesses will close their doors, unemployment will mushroom, and the depression which we already experience will grow far worse. The public will clamor for the Government to do something—and do something it will! There will be reflation of our currency (that is, more inflation in the depths of depression), and sooner or later the entity President Reagan or his successor will declare a NATIONAL ECONOMIC EMERGENCY—shades of FDR and 1933.

There is an ironic parallel between all of this and what happened half a century ago to trigger the Great Depression. In the early 1930s a major New York bank called the "United States Bank of New York", a private bank, teetered on the edge of failure. The bank appealed for help to the Federal Reserve System, which by its charter is supposed to be the lender of last resort; but the Federal Reserve refused to come to its aid. The result, which was predictable, was the failure of the United States Bank. That started a chain reaction due to shared loan arrangements and other factors which linked that bank to many others. When the United States Bank failed, it dragged down others, which dragged down still others. The progressive collapse of much of America's banking system dragged America's whole economy downward into the Great Depression—and all because of the deliberate inaction of the privately-owned Federal Reserve System.

Today the parallel to all this is taking place at the international level. This time it is not just one bank but the whole Rockefeller banking network that is teetering due to bad international loans. So the bankers have appealed for help through the international analog of the Federal Reserve System—that is, the IMF. But at the Toronto Economic Conference the so-called Reagan Administration prevented that aid from being given. As a result, the whole Rockefeller banking network is heading toward almost certain disaster; and because the linkages among banks that existed in the 1930s exist again today, the whole banking system of America and the world is threatened!

The irony, my friends, is just this: In the 1930s it was the Rockefeller interests who helped to bring about the banking system collapse through their effective control of the Federal Reserve System. That was how they acquired effective control of American banking after it was rebuilt, but this time the shoe is on the other foot! This time it is the Rockefeller bankers themselves who want help and who face disaster because it has been denied them.

The United States is leading the world into a new depression even worse than that of the 1930s, but there is a fundamental difference between what happened 50 years ago and what is happening now! That difference has to do with our currency itself.

In the 30's, times were hard but at least our money was still stable and valuable. It was tough to earn a dollar; but if you did, you could buy a lot with it. Today, in the 80's, it's different. The dollar is no longer stable; its value is shrinking before our very eyes. While jobs are vanishing and wages are being restrained, even the dollars we do earn are losing their buying power. The fact is that the United States dollar is being destroyed deliberately. It is this process of ruining our money itself that is leading to all the other chain

reactions that are plunging us into depression. This is what I was talking about in my 1973 book, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR. And the destructive tampering with America's currency is continuing—and even speeding up now!

Pending HR-7283—$100.00 Bill

A year and a half ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 63, I revealed a scheme was being cooked up to do away with our present $100.00 bill. At that time the plan was still in its infancy. Since then it has continued to evolve even though the original target date in late 1981 was not met.

On the first day of last month, October 1982, the stage began to be set for action in Congress. A Pennsylvania Congressman, Richard Schulze, introduced a bill which is tailor-made to Treasury Department specifications. The bill is designated HR-7283, and has the following long-winded title:

TO PROVIDE FOR THE RETIREMENT OF ALL UNITED STATES NOTES OF THE DENOMINATION OF ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($100.00) AND THEIR REPLACEMENT WITH NEW NOTES OF SUCH DENOMINATION.

As the title implies, the present version of the scheme embodies one noticeable difference from that which I reported a year and a half ago. Originally the plan was to suddenly repudiate the $100.00 bill altogether. Now the plan is instead to take away the present hundreds but replace them with new-issue hundreds that look radically different. This refinement in tactics makes the plan look a little different, but it will still accomplish all of the original objectives.

To see how little the plan has really changed in the past year and a half, one need only look at the bill now before Congress, HR-7283.

The original secret plan required that the present $100.00 bill be declared illegal tender. Likewise, subsection (c) of the bill in Congress says, quote:

"Such notes shall cease to be legal tender on a date to be determined by the Secretary."

The original secret plan called for holders of $100.00 bills to be given a brief turn-in period before they became worthless, and now HR-7283 says in subsection (c), quote:

"The Secretary shall provide for a ten-day period during which holders of circulating United States Notes of $100.00 to be retired may exchange such notes for new-issue notes."

A key aspect of the original secret plan was that anyone turning in more than a modest amount of hundreds would become automatic targets of suspicion. Your name, address, and Social Security number were to be taken for investigation; and sure enough, here is what HR-7283 now says in subsection (c), quote:

"In any case in which any one holder exchanges $100.00 notes in the value of $5,000.00 or more, a record of the name, address, and Social Security or federal employee identification number shall be recorded and forwarded to the Department of the Treasury."

Subsection (d) then says that this information will be provided, quote:

"...to federal, state, and local law enforcement agencies for use in criminal investigation or prosecution."

The excuses being given for all of this are still following the secret plan I made public a year and a half ago. In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I reported that the $100.00 bill ploy would be justified as an attack on crime and inflation. When Congressman Schulze introduced the bill on October 1, he followed the Treasury script to the letter. In his remarks printed that day in the CONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Schulze said, quote:

"The purpose of this bill is to aid law enforcement officials in the fight against drug trafficking and other crime. A side benefit would be the reduction in volume of dollars in the underground economy."

But, my friends, the true purposes of the Treasury-inspired $100.00 bill stratagem are far different from those claimed. It is actually a power play aimed partly at you and me and partly at the enemy of the Bolsheviks, the Rockefeller cartel! The excuses of attacking crime and inflation are only a means to an end to close down America.

To help protect yourself and your family in these very difficult times, I have outlined what you can do in my book, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR. It is still good advice today. The main point is that you have most of your assets abroad in hard currencies, not dollars; and also you should consider the Currency Hedge Funds in the Common Market which help you to beat inflation.

My friends, our money system is being corrupted and destroyed. The result is a progressive, irreversible disintegration of our economy of a kind that did not happen in the 30's. We are slipping backward in the direction of the Dark Ages.

Honest, stable money is essential to civilization itself. In primitive cultures there is no money; everything is done by barter. That works only for very simple societies. The standardized medium of exchange known as "money" is essential in order to make transactions more flexible and easy. It opens the way for individuals to specialize more according to their skills. With specialization comes diversity, breakthroughs, and advancement of civilization itself. All that starts coming apart when money becomes a manipulated, unstable, dishonest commodity.

The most dramatic and most ominous sign that a society's money is becoming useless is the reappearance of barter. It means that the society's normal medium of exchange—money—is not working. Today barter systems are spreading like wildfire across America; and as it does, our civilization itself is disintegrating. Our rulers' greed for power is now leading us all toward a new Dark Ages .

Topic #2—For several years now the nuclear strategy of the United States has been a first-strike strategy. Top Pentagon military strategists are preparing actively for nuclear war with Russia, and they intend for America to strike first.

It was not always this way; in fact, America's shift onto a first strike posture is a new development in American history. This is true even though America's leaders have repeatedly gotten America into war deliberately. The difference is that in the past America was always dragged into war by at least appearing to be attacked first. That enabled American public opinion to be rallied behind the desired war against the chosen enemy. This

approach has always been necessary because most Americans would never support a war that they knew to be America's fault.

America's deliberate involvement in falsely defensive wars began as long ago as 1898. On February 15 of that year the American battleship Maine was resting peacefully at anchor in the harbor of Havana, Cuba. Suddenly a giant explosion rocked the ship and it blew apart. Some 260 American fighting men aboard the ship lost their lives. To the cry of "Remember the Maine" America went off to war. Afterward overwhelming evidence was found that the Spaniards had not been responsible for the Maine disaster; instead, American saboteurs had done the deed in order to bring on the desired war. But by the time those facts began to surface quietly, most Americans were not paying attention. We were just too pleased with ourselves for having crushed Spain and become suddenly a global power.

In 1941 America's leaders were spoiling for an even bigger war than America had ever fought before. The reasons had to do with Saudi Arabian oil, first and foremost, as I have detailed in the past. The Rockefeller Standard Oil interests had been locked out of the Persian Gulf by British boycott tactics. To cure that problem, the Rockefeller cartel had helped create a threat to Britain in the form of Adolf Hitler.

By 1940 the threat was doing its job. The Battle of Britain was underway, and Churchill was finally willing to come to terms. If the United States would intervene and stop Hitler, then after the war America could have the Saudi oil.

To carry out the bargain, FDR and his Rockefeller sponsors had to get America into war somehow. But most Americans did not want war; the only way to change our minds about that was to arrange for America to be attacked. The Germans were in no position to do that, but Japan was; and Japan, Germany, and Italy were inseparably linked through the Tripartite Treaty; so if Japan could be lured into attacking the United States, we would also be at war with Germany automatically. As a bonus, this strategy also promised great new gains for the United States in the Pacific itself. The solution, of course, was Pearl Harbor.

When FDR called it a "Day of Infamy", he was right. Roosevelt himself and other top American leaders were guilty of high treason for their role in setting up the Pearl Harbor disaster. I have given many details about this in past AUDIO LETTERS including Nos. 1, 14, 22, and 34. Just in recent months, four decades after the fact, pieces of the story have started to leak out and become more widely known. For example, a book was published recently by the Pulitzer Prize-winning historian John Toland entitled "INFAMY—PEARL HARBOR AND ITS AFTERMATH." In the book he documents the fact that FDR and his top military leaders had plenty of advance warning of the attack, and yet no warning was given to the forces at Pearl Harbor! Why? Because FDR wanted the Japanese attack to succeed. The deliberate sacrifice of more than 2,000 American Servicemen's lives was just the right medicine to cure America's anti-war attitude. To the cries of "Remember Pearl Harbor", we Americans went off to war to win Saudi oil for the Rockefeller oil cartel!

Once again today's rulers of the United States are trying to get America into another big war; but this time they dare not allow the enemy, Russia, to strike first as was done at Pearl Harbor by Japan. America's rulers in 1941 could afford the luxury of throwing away a big chunk of naval power in the Pearl Harbor attack. There was no chance that Japan could go on to actually defeat the United States with its enormous industrial

might, but today it's different.

Today the luxury of time is gone. If the weapons are not ready when war begins, they cannot be built in time to help; and even more importantly, the intended enemy today is far more powerful militarily than the United States! And so today's top Pentagon strategists are first-strike oriented. In any military campaign, he who strikes the first blow always has the advantage. If the first blow is also a surprise, the advantage is tremendous because of all factors of military strategy, surprise is the most important.

Just six weeks ago on September 17 the United States came within hours of actually launching a surprise nuclear first strike against Russia. It was the culmination of a hurry-up war plan about which I first began reporting last February in AUDIO LETTER No. 72. The struggle over this war plan spawned major headlines this year. These included the Falklands War last spring and the sudden forced resignation of Secretary of State Alexander Haig last June. The plan suffered repeated setbacks and yet it stayed on schedule. It was only during the final two weeks or so that the so-called "PROJECT Z" war plan finally fell apart too far to proceed. The critical events which brought this about were a policy change in Red China, Russian military action in space, and limited public exposure at the last minute. I detailed all this a month ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 79.

The war planners here were frustrated this time, my friends, but they came very close to succeeding. Having come that close, they are convinced they will succeed on the next attempt, and so they already have a new war plan underway. Under this new plan, preliminary preparations and crises are scheduled for about the coming year. Then in late 1983 they presently expect to begin a new final-crisis sequence to lead into nuclear war itself in early 1984.

The new war plan was set in motion on September 14, three days before the abortive end of "PROJECT Z." The Israeli plan to murder Lebanese President-elect Bashir Gemayel, which I had made public the previous month, was carried out. That provided the excuse for the Israelis to invade Beirut and quickly arrange for a mass murder of Palestinian civilian refugees. The real pay-off of all this was the return of American Marines to Beirut in the beginning of a new and open-ended deployment in Lebanon.

In AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 78 and 79 I reported that the Marines had been sent there to become the focus of a major incident. This will come about under the joint plan of the Bolshevik-controlled United States Pentagon and the Israeli Mossad. The Mossad is to arrange for a number of our Marines to be killed in an incident that will be blamed on the Arabs! This will be used to inflame American public opinion to help lead us into war, including ultimately nuclear war. It is to be a replay of the strategy used in 1898 with the battleship Maine.

Already our psychological conditioning for this planned incident to come is underway. Just two days ago a car bomb exploded close to a Marine position in the south of Beirut. There were no serious injuries this time because there were not meant to be any, but the atmosphere of danger to our leathernecks is being dramatized. At the same time the Government is starting to talk about sending in more Marines, many more, perhaps up to 5,000; and those who are already in Lebanon are gradually fanning out into more and more dangerous duty areas.

All of this was set in motion in spite of blunt Russian

warnings. This was accomplished by Massacre; but the massacre also had the form of world-wide condemnation

carrying out the a dangerous side of Israel.

Beirut effect

in

Throughout the latter half of September the reaction to the Beirut Massacre was building fast, especially among the public of Israel and America. Within Israel itself, ways were available to maneuver the protests and keep them from getting out of control. But here in the United States it was essential to snuff out the reaction to the massacre very quickly otherwise it could have done real damage to the Bolshevik-Zionist junta that runs the American and Israeli military machine. People were beginning to question America's blind support for Israel's military power.

In order to blot out the Beirut Massacre from American minds, a second massacre was perpetrated barely two weeks later. It was the Tylenol Massacre. The specter of over a thousand rotting bodies in far-off Beirut were quickly forgotten in the scare over those seven deaths in Chicago.

For most Americans, the Tylenol scare just blanked out everything else. It was an evil masterpiece of psychological trickery. Most of us find it hard to identify with what happened in Beirut, but we can certainly identify with a person taking a headache pill. One story had to do with a lot of foreign people in far-off land; the other had to do with what was portrayed as a threat to each of us personally.

As I discussed in my introduction, the Tylenol story stayed on the front page for a solid month, all through October. Now, finally, there is starting to be some renewed emphasis of the Beirut tragedy in the news. We are hearing about eye witnesses to the slaughter who have contradicted Defense Minister Sharon's claim that the Israelis could not see the killing. But now the psychological danger point is passed for the Israelis. It's now "old news" to most people. No matter what comes out now, it will have almost no chance of interfering with the ongoing war plans.

The Reagan Bolsheviks and the Begin Zionists are looking ahead to next year, but in doing so the Israeli cabinet has suddenly noticed something that makes their blood run cold. It is right there on the Hebrew lunar calendar which uses Hebrew letters instead of numbers to designate the year. For the next Jewish New Year, my friends, those letters spell the word "doom." The Begin cabinet is reacting to this discovery as if the finger of God had appeared and written that word "doom" on the wall of the Knesset—and no wonder, because they have blood on their hands.

The present Jewish New Year began with the Beirut Massacre carried out under the authority of the Begin cabinet, but the militant Zionists in Israel are reacting as they always react when confronted with unwelcome facts. They never consider changing their own ways, instead their solution is, in their own words, "to create new facts." And that is how they are trying to erase that word "doom" from their calendar. On October 22 a resolution was passed before the Begin cabinet to change the designation of the next New Year by rearranging the letters.

The American Bolsheviks and their Israeli Zionist allies are starting a lengthy process of recycling their war plans for another try. One factor in this new process is Bolshevik intrigue to try to set off war between India and Pakistan. In AUDIO LETTER No. 78 I reported that this war was targeted for this month, November 1982, if "PROJECT Z" did not succeed first.

The key to war between India and Pakistan is the disputed

territory between them of Kashmir. Kashmir has been held together in relative stability since 1975 by Sheik Mohammad Abdullah, known as the "Lion of Kashmir." But about five months ago Abdullah started having a series of heart attacks. The heart attacks, my friends, were not natural. Finally two months ago on September 8 he succumbed to one of these attacks.

Abdullah's removal from the scene has helped start setting the stage for the Indo-Pakistani war I warned about in August, but the Russians know what is afoot and they are advising India's leader, Indira Gandhi, to defuse the situation. As a result, she invited Pakistan's General Zia to New Delhi for talks on improving relations. Zia arrived there two days ago, met with Mrs. Gandhi, and left a group of diplomats to talk further. Whether all this will prevent the war is an open question, but at least it should help slow down the Bolshevik intrigues.

The process of recycling for another war-try involves many aspects of the total military picture. For one thing the Bolshevik Pentagon war planners hope to rebuild some semblance of their secret weapons reserves. I first reported on their existence and role in the intended nuclear war in AUDIO LETTER No. 73. These were the real reason for the Southern Hemisphere war last spring of which the Falklands War was only the visible part. I can now report that the Bolshevik-controlled secret naval facilities were not destroyed even though they were put out of action. A crash program is now underway to repair the damage, both at South Georgia Island and at the two southern New Zealand sites. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 74, a portion of the Bolshevik Stealth Navy escaped altogether from the hostilities.

Another aspect of the Pentagon's recycling process has to do with America's newly deployed secret Stealth Planes, called "Phantom War Planes." These have yet to be tested in combat but they are believed to be capable of successfully attacking Russia; but due to the sudden change in China's policies in early September, the crucial Sinkiang Province launch area is presently unavailable. Should it still be unavailable a year from now, the Pentagon is determined to have the next best back-up site ready to go. That back-up site, my friends, is none other than Kashmir, the disputed area between India and Pakistan. It is far inferior to Sinkiang Province, China, being nearly twice as far away from Russia's Cosmosphere bases, but it is still better than anything else, so don't be surprised if Pakistan goes ahead and attacks India to seize Kashmir within the next year, talks or no talks.

The Space Shuttle Missions

And then there is the space shuttle. As I've detailed in past tapes, the space shuttle is the indispensable key to the Pentagon's plans to use space for the coming nuclear war. All 4 space shuttle missions up to now have been military missions, described to the public as "test flights." Now space shuttle launch #5 is about to take place, scheduled for November 11, just a few days from now. Now the alleged test schedule has been used up.

In order to preserve appearances, there is no choice but to start following through now with some launches of civilian payloads. That is what space shuttle #5 now on the pad at Cape Canaveral will be doing. For the first time there will be no military payload on this shuttle. For that reason, on this flight we will probably get to see what is actually happening during the mission.

Space shuttle #5 will be a "first" in other ways, too. The first four flights used a skeleton crew of only two astronauts. This time there are four—Allen, Brand, Overmyer, and Lanoir—three of whom are civilians.

But the most important "first" for space shuttle #5 will be one that is totally unsuspected by the public. My friends, this will be the first mission to use just one shuttle from start to finish.

The first four missions used the two-shuttle stratagem which I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 62. Each time we watched a shuttle with the name "Columbia" on the side take off from Florida. Once in orbit, the plan called for the astronauts to carry out their military mission while the public was shown falsified space movies about the flight. Then the two-man crew was to return to Earth, not aboard the shuttle itself but aboard a two-man re-entry capsule. The shuttle itself, if possible, was to return to Earth unmanned, landing by computer-control in western Australia. Finally, back on Earth, the two astronauts boarded a different shuttle with the name "Columbia" on the side. It was boosted to high speed and then glided to Earth for the public to watch. But this time it will be different. This time it is a non-military mission and there are four astronauts, too many to fit into a re-entry capsule. The shuttle which takes off from Florida will have to land in California five days later.

The NASA military shuttle managers believe there will be no trouble from Russia on this flight. It is purely non-military, and this shuttle is unarmed; but there is still one major worry. That worry, my friends, is just this: Will the thermal tiles really work? No one knows because no space shuttle has ever reentered from orbital velocity before. All four of the shuttles we have watched blast off from Florida have been destroyed in space by Russian space weapons before they could return to Earth, so space shuttle #5 will actually make the first test of the tiles. NASA believes that the tiles will hold. If they do, the landing at Edwards Air Force Base on November 16 will look just like the four fake landings we have seen up to now. If the tiles do not work, four astronauts may pay with their lives for the NASA deception up to now. Even so, having falsified four allegedly successful landings, NASA will find a way to explain it away if space shuttle #5 should end in disaster, because a year from now the space shuttle will be needed to start preparing for war once again.

Topic #3—On Wednesday October 27 the man known as President Leonid Brezhnev delivered a speech of major importance in Moscow. The speech came on the heels of a surprise conference of all Warsaw Pact Foreign Ministers convened in Moscow just five days earlier. The importance of the Brezhnev speech was emphasized in every way possible. Brezhnev was flanked on the podium by his five senior colleagues in the Politburo, and his audience of more than 500 consisted of the entire upper crust of the giant Soviet military establishment. Present were all top Defense Ministry officials, all Soviet Marshals, the Commanders of all the Russian military services, all regional Soviet Commanders, the Commanders of Soviet forces abroad, and the top echelon of the Policy Directorate of the Armed Forces.

The Brezhnev speech was directed first and foremost to the Military and to the Russian technological establishment which backs them up, but it was also directed to the entire Soviet public and was broadcast in its entirety over nation-wide television.

In his speech Brezhnev accused the United States of trying to bring about nuclear war. He said that America's leaders have, quote:

"...raised the intensity of their military preparations to an unprecedented level."

And he accused the so-called Reagan Administration of, and I quote again:

"...an aggressive policy which is threatening to push the world into the flames of nuclear war."

My friends, Government and major media spokesmen always try to lead us Americans to discount all accusations like that by Russian leaders, but those harsh words of October 27 in Moscow were not just rhetoric, far from it. Brezhnev was referring to the Pentagon's "PROJECT Z" nuclear strike plan which came within hours of execution just six weeks ago!

Brezhnev even alluded to the superweapon aspect of the present war threat. America's radically new Phantom Warplanes are designed to nullify Russia's ability to stave off an attack with her beam weapons. Brezhnev assessed the situation in the words:

"Competition in military technology has sharply intensified, often acquiring a fundamentally new character."

And he exhorted Russia's technologists to find the solutions to the threat.

The Brezhnev speech was most notable for the change of policy which it revealed. For 18 years now the Brezhnev image has been associated with detente, but in this speech all that was virtually abandoned, devalued. Aside from one brief passing reference, no hope was held out for reviving detente with America's rulers. Instead, the whole thrust of the speech was that the Russian people must prepare militarily for the days ahead. It was not a saber-rattling speech directed at America; it was a call to arms directed to his own people.

My friends, the significance of this major change in stated policy can hardly be overstated. It reflects two very important developments.

One of the developments that led to the Brezhnev speech is the Kremlin's assessment of the inevitability of NUCLEAR WAR ONE. As I have reported on past occasions, Russia's new anti-Bolshevik rulers know their old Bolshevik enemies only too well. Having ousted the Bolsheviks from control of Russia, the new Kremlin now is confronted by a Bolshevik-controlled American military. The Russians are convinced that the Bolsheviks will just keep trying to set off nuclear war until they finally succeed, and "PROJECT Z" was such a close call in September that the Russians are not optimistic that they can stop the next attempt.

The second development that led to the Brezhnev speech of October 27 is that a changing of the guard is underway in the Kremlin. It's not a power struggle in the old Bolshevik sense of intrigue and infighting; instead, it's an orderly succession among a tightly-knit group of men who are convinced that Russia must prepare for action, and they want to take advantage of the lull right now while the Bolsheviks here regroup in the wake of the "PROJECT Z" failure in September.

The Russian people are being prepared for the end of the

Brezhnev era in the very near future. For the very first time ever preparations are underway for a Soviet leader to peacefully and voluntarily retire with honors. It will be just one more step in the new Kremlin's gradual step-by-step program of changing the rules of life in Russia.

In one sense the so-called Brezhnev retirement will only be a ceremonial fiction; the real Brezhnev died of complications from Russian flu on January 7, 1978. I first reported his incapacitation and replacement by a ceremonial "double" in AUDIO LETTER No. 30. Later, in AUDIO LETTER No. 33, I was able to report the date of his death. Since that time several doubles have been employed to maintain the Brezhnev image until the time was ripe for change. That time, my friends, has now arrived.

During the interim since the real Brezhnev's death, a succession of several men have held the reins of top power in Russia. First there was Defense Minister Ustinov, leader of the "White Doves." Then it was the head of the Soviet Navy, Admiral Gorshkov. Next, power was shared among several men, but none of these men could truly fill the shoes of the departed Brezhnev, and the search for more effective leadership has continued. Now, my friends, that search is at an end.

The new ruler of Russia is already taking the reins of power right now. It may be some time yet before his true role becomes publicly visible, but his mark is already being stamped on Russian policies. It was he more than anyone else who was the architect of the startling Brezhnev speech, so called, of October 27. Russia's new top ruler spent 15 years as head of Russia's world-wide Intelligence service, the KGB. When he took charge in 1967 his task was to transform the KGB by rooting out all Bolshevik power over it. His success in doing so helped set the stage for the final overthrow of the Bolsheviks from Kremlin power in 1976 and 1977. Now he has been chosen to become the top leader of the Soviet Union. The name of Russia's new leader is Yuri Andropov. Right now that name may be unfamiliar to you, but I urge you to start watching for it in the news. Directly or indirectly we will be hearing more and more from Andropov from this time forward.

LAST MINUTE SUMMARY

Now it's time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I've tried to give you some perspective on the probable direction of events over the next year or so.

The Bolsheviks here failed to set off their nuclear war plan in September so now they are recycling for another try in a year or so. Meanwhile they are turning inward to tighten their grip on America itself through economic means. At the same time the Russians, too, are taking advantage of this breather for a changing of the guard in the Kremlin. They are preparing for action with a new strong leader at the helm.

Here in America the destruction of our currency is continuing with the $100.00 bill now targeted for special attack. By this economic route the civilization of America itself is being undermined. Over the course of generations we Americans have been lured to worship the so-called "almighty dollar", so we have come under the spell of those who have made the dollar corrupt as a tool of power.

In the economic us about

last analysis, the most basic cause of our deepening crisis is something our Lord Jesus Christ tried to warn long ago. He said we cannot serve two masters, both God

and mammon—either we will love one or we will cling to the other. Today America as a whole is clinging to mammon and forgetting God! If that does not change, my friends, the ages ahead will be dark indeed.

Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.

***********************************

The AUDIO LETTER cassette tape reports were recorded over a period from June, 1975, to November, 1982, by Dr. Peter Beter. Each AUDIO LETTER tape report is approximately one hour in length. The basic schedule of release was once a month, but the exact date of release each month was flexible to accommodate events. There were also two periods during which the AUDIO LETTER reports were suspended temporarily. The first, which extended from May to August 1977, separated AUDIO LETTER issues #24 and #25, and took place due to an action campaign by Dr. Beter with his listeners. The second suspension extended from February to June 1980, and separated issues #54 and #55. It was brought about by a major heart attack which Dr. Beter suffered while in the midst of recording AUDIO LETTER #54.

Dr. Beter terminated his AUDIO LETTER cassette tape report series in November, 1982, after recording AUDIO LETTER #80. Having fought heart-related ailments for years, his health was declining. After conferring with doctors, he decided that the time had come to discontinue recording the tapes.

The Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER series grew out of Dr. Beter's collaboration with supporters who first learned about Dr. Beter by way of radio talk shows in 1974. At that time Dr. Beter was in great demand to appear on talk shows nationwide, which he did in most cases by long-distance telephone hookup from his residence in suburban Washington, D.C. After many years as a highly successful Washington attorney, government official and international legal and financial consultant, Dr. Beter had become famous in 1973 as the author of a best-selling book, The Conspiracy Against the Dollar.

In his talk shows Dr. Beter had a habit of saying things which sounded preposterous at the time, but which were proven correct later on. Early in 1973 he declared that Vice President Spiro Agnew would be swept up in a sudden scandal beginning in late summer that would lead quickly to his resignation. At the time Agnew was flying high, and it sounded like an unlikely turn of events. But it happened, right on schedule. In the spring of 1974, Dr. Beter described a sequence of events by which the Watergate Scandal would make Richard Nixon the first U.S. President in history to resign. At the time, Watergate seemed to be running out of steam, and Nixon appeared to be "toughing it out." Even less believably, Dr. Beter described a secret agreement which he said existed by which then-Vice President Gerald Ford would nominate Nelson Rockefeller to be his new Vice President after Nixon resigned. In the spring of 1974 those things sounded hard to believe indeed. But they took place.

Dr. Beter claimed that events like these, while shocking to the public, were planned far in advance. He said that they were known within certain intelligence and even business circles here in America and abroad. Drawing upon his extensive contacts with these circles, Dr. Beter was making public what the privileged few already knew.

Having begun as skeptical listeners to Dr. Beter's radio appearances, a small group of private citizens became increasingly concerned as they saw Dr. Beter's revelations proven correct, time after time. They decided to investigate further, and finally contacted him. In September, 1974, Audio Books, Inc., was founded by these supporters of Dr. Beter to provide an avenue by which Dr. Beter could make his reports public without censorship or cutoff by those who controlled the radio waves. After several individual AUDIO BOOK(R) tapes, the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER series began in 1975.

About Dr. Beter [Note: born June 21, 1921; died March 14, 1987 (J.V.)]

Dr. Peter Beter (yes, it rhymes) first came to widespread popular attention in 1973, through his best-selling nonfiction book, The Conspiracy Against the Dollar (George Braziller, Inc., N.Y.). It was a gripping tale of international economic intrigue and monetary manipulation, carried out by the coordinated action of multinational corporations grown more powerful than many of their host countries. The objective: to deliberately undermine and ultimately destroy the United States dollar, as a major tool of political and economic conquest under the banner of a "new imperialism." A crescendo of unhappy consequences were to be expected: an accelerating economic "stagflation" (a now-popular word coined years ago by Dr. Beter), deteriorating financial status of municipal and state governments, deepening social unrest, increasing tensions over the Panama Canal, and more. Events during the past decade have followed to an astonishing degree the blueprint which Dr. Beter revealed in his book.

In September 1974 Dr. Beter acquired a new distinction as "the man who opened Fort Knox." The previous April Dr. Beter had charged in congressional testimony that the legendary U.S. Bullion Depository at Fort Knox had been looted of America's monetary gold hoard allegedly stored there. He stood ready to present evidence and witnesses to substantiate his charges. But neither a grand jury nor a congressional inquiry into the matter materialized...so Dr. Beter then took his case directly to the public. Through lectures, radio talk shows, and publication of his charges in a tabloid newspaper (National Tattler), he was able to put such intense pressure on the federal government that a completely unprecedented step was taken in order to still the public outcry. The U.S. Treasury Department arranged a so-called "gold inspection" visit for a few Congressmen and 100 invited newsmen on September 23, 1974. Significantly, however, Dr. Beter himself was not among those invited... nor was any other outside expert on gold. The celebrated Fort Knox visit and the so-called "gold audit" which followed contained many irregularities which the Treasury Department has never explained.

In AUDIO LETTER tapes #14 and #15 (July and August 1976), Dr. Beter made public intelligence he had been given that the Soviet Union was planting short-range underwater missiles in U.S. territorial waters in preparation for a surprise nuclear attack. In issue #15 he listed navigational coordinates for 64 missiles which he said had been planted worldwide so far...urged his listeners to pressure the Joint Chiefs of Staff to take counteractive measures ... and in effect dared the government to prove him wrong. The resulting hue and cry from Dr. Beter's listeners nationwide created shock waves within the U.S. Government which were never reported by the major news media.

In mid-September 1976, Dr. Beter and an associate met for over an hour with General George S. Brown, Chairman of the U.S. Joint Chiefs of Staff, in Gen. Brown's Pentagon office. Only two weeks earlier, a letter over Gen. Brown's signature had been sent to Dr. Beter (with photocopies to concerned citizens nationwide), seeming to say that Dr. Beter's charges about Soviet underwater missiles had been investigated and found untrue. Yet when Dr. Beter then requested a meeting with Gen. Brown to relay to him the locations of a second round of 48 newly-planted missiles, the meeting was granted without delay. The Pentagon confirmed to the press that the meeting had taken place*, but never explained this curious sequence of events.

*See, e.g., Norfolk (Va.) Ledger-Star, Sept. 27, 1976, p. E8, article by G. Bradshaw and J. Kestner. Or see Chicago Tribune, Dec. 4, 1977, Section 2, "Special Report: Undersea Warfare."

Professional credentials: The things made public by Dr. Beter are extraordinary—but so is the professional background which preceded his public visibility. He practiced general law in Washington, D.C., from 1951 to 1961, becoming a member of the U.S. Court of Military Appeals in 1952 and the U.S. Supreme Court in 1964. Many of his cases were against the federal government, all of which he won—including one case in which he caught none other than the U.S. Department of Justice burning records in an attempt to defeat him. The

resulting decision—Farley vs. U.S., 131 C. Cls. 776 (1955), 127 F Supp. 562—made new law.

In 1961 President John F. Kennedy appointed Dr. Beter Counsel to the U.S. Export-Import Bank, the largest government-owned bank in the Western world, where he served until 1967. After leaving the Ex-Im Bank, Dr. Beter became an international financial and legal consultant, as well as one of the chief developers of private international business in the Republic of Zaire. He is a member of the Judicature Society, the Bankers' Club of America, the Royal Commonwealth Society of London, and the United States Naval Institute. He is listed in biographical reference works such as Who's Who in the East, the Blue Book of London, and 2000 Men of Achievement (London).

*******************************

Open Licensing of the "Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER(R)" Tapes

Excerpted from NewsALERT, a publication of Audio Books, Inc.; January 6, 1984 issue.

"Audio Books Inc. hereby grants an open license, without fee, to any and all producers of cassette tapes who may wish to produce and distribute any or all of the 'Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER' tape reports. This applies to individuals who may wish to make and distribute copies; to small commercial tape marketers; and to large cassette marketing organizations. This open license applies whether the tapes are to be distributed free or sold, provided the following conditions and limitations are adhered to:

1. This license applies only to the 'Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER' tape report series. A few other tapes designated 'AUDIO BOOK' tapes and 'SPECIAL TAPES' are also being phased out but will not be licensed.

2. Any 'Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER' tape which is to be reproduced under this open license must be reproduced exactly as is, in its entirety, without any deletions, additions, or combination with any other recorded material on the same tape.

3. Each 'Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER' tape produced under

this open license must bear a statement protecting the registered 'Audio Letter' trademark. This statement may be on the main cassette label, on an auxiliary label, or printed directly on the cassette itself. The statement shall say:

'Audio Letter' is a registered trademark of Audio Books, Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape recording.

Limitation: The rights and fees which are waived under this open license are those of Audio Books Inc. only. We are not empowered to speak for Dr. Beter, who should be contacted directly about any royalty arrangement he may desire before producing tapes under this license. As of this printing, Dr. Beter may be contacted at the following address:

Dr. Peter Beter

P.O. Box 73

Glen Echo, MD 20812"

[Note: Dr. Beter died March 14, 1987, and the address above is no longer valid. All correspondence and donations should be addressed to: Mrs. Peter Beter, c/o Wisconsin Report; P.O. Box Brookfield, WI 53008-0045. (J.V.)]